Skip to main content

Full text of "Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society"

See other formats 


sme 
$ a 


® 


S, 


” 
Ae 


Wha nad eaTecneen Awan einen 
* 
J 


sae 
abe. 


Pes ae 


ae a 
“44 
mae | 
er | 
14 
«aes 


i 


me 
ret 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 


ROYAL 
PIGROSCOPICAL - SOCIETY : 


CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS, 


AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 

Zo@OrE © Gor, -ASSINe 2 @ PAIN asa 

(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), 
MiIiGROSCOPS. ac: 


Edited by 
FRANK CRISP, LLB. B.A,, 


One of the Secretaries of the Society 
and a Vice-President and Treasurer of the Linnean Society of London ; 


WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND 


A. W. BENNETT, M.A., B.Sc., F.L.S., F, JEFFREY BELL, M.A., F.ZS., 
Lecturer on Botany at St. Thomas's Hospital, Professor of Comparative Anatomy in King’s College, 
JOHN MAYALL, Joy., F.Z.8., R. G. HEBB, M.A., M.D. (Cazéaé)., 
AND 


J, ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A., 
Lecturer on Zoology in the School of Medicine, Edinburgh, 


FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY. 


FOUR ol Eig |e Fi Aak 
1888. 


PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY 


WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 
LONDON AND EDINBURGH. 


To need 


-iges. Part 4 4. _-—s AUGUST. eo eatee Be. 
JOURNAL «| 
| OF THE : : 


ROYAL 
- MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY: 


CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS, 


AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


MOO nO CS Aa DD SBOtAwS 
(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), 


MICROSCOPY, Sc. 


Edited by 


FRANK CRISP, LL.B. B.A, 
One of the Secretaries of the Society 
and a Vice-President and Treasurer of the Linnean Society of London; 
WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND 


A. W. BENNETT, I.A., B.Sc., F.L.S., F. JEFFREY BELL, M.A., F.ZS., 
~ Lecturer on Botany at St. Thomas's Hospital, Professor of Comparative Anatomy in KE ing’s College, 


JOHN MAYALL, Joy., F.ZS., R. G. HEBB, M.A., M.D. (Caniad.), 
: - AND 
2 J. ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A., 
é ee Lecturer on Zoology in the School of Medicine, Edinburgh, 
: FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY, 


WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 
LONDON AND EDINBURGH. =. NAT 


Via 


ey 


4 PRINTED BY WM: CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED] ee [STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING cRoss: 


CONTENTS. 


——~ 


TRANSACTIONS oF THE SoorrTy— 


V1I0L—Appirions to THz Knowirpcr or tur Carponirerous Fora- 


mintFeRA. By the Rev. Walter ae F.G:S. os ae Bi 


VILL ‘and TR) seein Sees 


SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES. 
ZOOLOGY. 


A, VERTEBRATA :—Embryology, Histology, and General. 


a. Embryology. 


“Wurtman, C, O.— Kinetic Phenomena of the Bag seks esachrnst sent Feoundution ‘BAG 


Nace, W.—Heman Ovum .. ee 
Esner, ¥. Aa sty ree of Mammats Sk alta ae 


Orr, H.—LZmbryology of Lizard... ANE Oe Ty a Pe Fy Ag oy ee 
Sonwinck—Gastrula of Amphibians .. PE ete ee PROT BT POT 
GortrEe, A.—Development of Petromyzon fluviatilis ae igo bi ap hae toe 
Gurren, F.—Egg-shell of Lepadogaster .. WaT ori 
Corin, G., & E. Berarp—Albuminaid Constituents of White of Egg PE 
LIEBERMANN, L.—Embryochemical Investigations wa hee teh ce eee cit Sara 
8. Histology. 

BoveEkrt, T.—Cell-Studies fe -e ee ee ee oe «e we ee ae oe ee oe 
FieyimnG GN.) on the Gee oi. 6a os ge iba Pan een ee ne aa es EP 
ScHorrLaANnDER, T.—Cell-division .. PENS MESS Mag es Se ea 

Wapever, W.—Karyokinesis and Heredity y oR Sak oases Ge ous sheer Pyare 
Errera, L L.— Cellular Statics oe oe oe ‘ ae ** . 
Micupi, A.—Fusion of Lymphatic Cells into ‘Plasmodia iene inti, eae 


Paneru, 3.—Secreting Cells of Intestinal sb curate gee is i 


Dadar, H.—Spinal Ganglion-cells. .. < ang 

Jakimoviron, J.—Axis-cylinder and Nerve-cells . be 
y. General. 

Biscuit, O.—Growth by Intussusception .. ASE ey Br 

S.urrer, C. P.—Remarkable Case of Mutualism.. hee, : 


B. INVERTEBRATA. 


Crupxor, M. L.—Blood of Invertebrata .. 
Cuun, C.—Pelagic Animals at Great Depths and their Relations to the ‘Surface Fuuna 


SreINeRr—Physiology of Nervous System Pr aA es ere aes eee 
Mollusca. 
a. Cephalopoda. 
Buake, J. F.—Shell-growth in Cephalopoda... .. 12 an ve eg 
Saparier, A.—Spermatozoa of Eledone moschata.. .. e. « Sp es ahie 


B. Pteropoda. 
Kame, G.—Musculature of Heteropoda and Pteropoda .. 


y: Gastropoda. 
mitn, A. A.—Abnormal Growth in Haliotis 
ACAZE-DutuiERs, H. pe—Testacella 

FL&1scuMann, A.— Absorption by Water vs 


-‘Feipe, A. M.—Dorsal Appendages .. 


(: 3223 
se 6. Lamellibranchista. 
Porsctare, P.—Lamellibranchiata without gills .. +. 
im Broos, So-called Eyes of Tridacna and Disuvsies of Pseudochlorophyll Cor- 


les in the Vascular System of Lamellibranchs .. 0, =» es ss + 
Ssarr, B.—Phylogeny of Lamellibranchs on pane ape say Ve ae Gane Ge ook 


es ; Hasetorr, B.—Crystullene EYE oaks ans Saab cee ene we 
Molluscoida, 
B. Polyzoa. 
Kononser, A.—S, pabeainkigencitéin WCE oe Sse a ey eed a 
een —Freaewater Polyzon SUP See MEA ue Oe Bak Tae DEAE SM eat ee 
- Arthropoda. 
Bcc, i mie of Tnsbele Od APQONMIAE ag ES ae Sas ee 
a. Insecta. 


Gaanen, V.— Poly pody of Irsect Embryos s. 0s es oe ; aes 
_ Rats, eS vom—Dermal Sensory Organ of Insects 2. ss ve ae ten we 
- Sonm, E .—_Sub-aquatie Respiration .. .. .% se 


Emery, C.—So-called Digestive Stomach of some Anis SUPP SO go ous be 
Foret, A A.— Senses of Ants oe ee oe ee oe oe se oe ee oe ee 
~Vurson, E.—Parthenogenesis in Bombyx Mole eagle es Gacsee eras 


. Puaryer, G.—Karyokénesis tn Lepidoptera .. .. seem eee 


Urecu, F.—Decrease of Weight in Winter: Pupz of Pontia ‘brassicn . Sek Sewanee 6 
‘VoritsKkow, A.—Development in Egg of Musca vomitoria .. 1. 0 ae nos 


 ‘Henxinc; H— Early Stages in ces abs og Bagg 1] Ba OT peer a Rabe rare nia Ng CH 


Witt, L. eng sae of Aphides.. oo 68 2° oa ay on oe 


‘ ¥- Arachnida, 


Cee G. W. & E. G@.—Mental Powers of Spiders Rare Sapp eek eotea eek Soe 
'. > Samnr-Remy, G.—Brain of Phalangida’ 2.0 ks ee a ae ee we ee 


: 6. Prototracheata, 
~ Sepewrer, A. ES aaacarenk of the Genus Peripatus  .. i 


SHELDON, es ees of Peripatus capensis and P. nove Dealandix =e sean 


e, Crustacea. 


MACKAY, Ww. J.—Intercoxal Lobe of certain Crayfishes 4. +. sv - +0 om ve 
Herrics, F. H.—Development.of Alpheus .. 

Norpovist, O.—Moina bathycolor and the greatest depths, at which Cladocera are 
found . ee ee oe ma) oe os 2° oe ae se 22 os ov aq oe 


Warnes 
a, Annelida. 


= Flava, W. naan of Veriilia cxspitosa and Hupometus a 

_ Brpparp, F. E. —Reproductive Organs of Phreoryctes —«. =f 
Bourne, G. C.—Kleinenberg on Development of Lopadork ynchus es bares tees 

~ KUKENTHAL, W.—Ezxperiments on Harthworms .. +s 2s 00 os ee wes 

* Ko Acin, N.—Russtan: Lumbrieidaz S566 ce aa es eww ee es os 

- Etsen, G.—New Annelid, Sutroa rostrata... Se Rear Pane 
pres, A. O— Two new Aquatic Worms from North ‘America.. Sot alg eect ¢8 


B: Nemathelminthes. : 
Kunrsourrny; N.—Fertilization Of SPORTS CS nahi Tere w er ml te ee ae Vee wigs ee 
- Ewxsanow, S. M.—Intestinal Epithelium of Ascaris Bae eaeeet rane oak tae 
>Vesporsny, ¥'.—Studies on Gorduidz 1. . PE a acer eNO MEP Va en ee 


= Cyan, J.—Anguillulide of the Onions, x9 we we ge ee eee be ee 
a) Bos, Suet ene EU ASLMN I= fa nas Seas ak Sag ea ee ne 


¥: Platyhelminthes. 


oe Hie P E _—Embryogeny of Fresh-water ah i ap lee Reg ee a 
te EE W.—Lateral Organs... ~ + Heeler takee Fades meer weak: s 
. Frarrson, G.—Bulharzia. 2.1. eo eS aes baer te TC ey 


(“459 


5. Incertszs Sedis. 
Scummxkewitscn, W.—Balanoglossus Mereschkovshkit .. ss sp ee ne new 


GREEFF, L. von—‘ Challenger’ Myzostomida oe oe * * * * * “* 
Echinodermata. 

FLeiscHMANnn, A.—Development of Egg of Echinocardium cordatum «1 4,» 

Sarasin, P. & F.—Renal Organ of Echinoida .. ost.) “ool Lew lee 

Betz, F. Jerrrey—Remarkable Ophiurid from Bhasils oo. ae 


Lupwie, H.—New and Old Holothurians 4. 12 ee ee ae te a ee ee 


Ceelenterata. 


Fewxes, J. W.—New Mode of Life among Meduse 1... 2s ee tp ee 7 
$5 e Medusz from New England”... cu0 0 se a ee ee a 


New Physophore ... « Pee ae ines OE re Tras 5 

Fow LER, G. H.—New Pennatula from the Bahamas +o Be pene Li tenle tees 

FISCHER, P.—Actinizx of Coasts of France .. .. ae het Sar 58 

BLocuMANN, F., & C. Hireer—Gonactinia prolifera Re re Ee ara 

HAAcks, W.—Nature of Polyparium .. «. Pi CSR A BF ctr 
Porifera. 


Denpy, A.—Comparative Anatomy of Sponges .. 4. se ne ae we et 


MacMunn, C. A.—Chromatology of Sponges 4. su et ue ew 


Torsent, E.—Gemmules of Silictspongiz ..  s« ve bu wee te tes 


Noti—Silicoblasts... ss ta 

We.tner, M.—Survival of Spongiilx after Development of ‘Swarm-larve 4. vs 

Riptey, 8. O., & A. Denpy— Challenger’ Sponges... .. elas 
Protozoa. 

Birscuu’s Protozoa .. eee 


GreBper, A.—Multinucleate Infusoria Gee Cdn wes hea 
Mosics, K.—Folliculina ampulla .. re Ree aa 
Sroxes, A. C.—Fresh-water Infusoria of the United States <2. 35 Dove 
Bianco, H.—New Foraminifera Bp NG ge gied toh ee reba, hips Sge ee 
Wierzesskr, A .—Psorospermium Haeckelit Oe ew nfs one 


Grass, B., & W. ScuewiaKkorr—Megastoma entericum a” eae Ss Cee ee 


BOTANY. 


A. GENERAL, including the Anatomy and Physiology 
of the Phanerogamia. 
a. Anatomy, 
(1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm. 
STRASBURGER, E.—Division of the Nucleus, Cell-division, and Impreqnation .. .. 
Korscne_t, E.—Relation between the Function and Position of the Nucleus ... .. 
Janse, J. M.—Permeability of Protoplasm .. ei 
Fiscner, A., J. Wiesner, & F. Krasser—Albuminous feaction of Cell-wall ay 
Ampronn, H.—Pleochromism of coloured Cell-walls. 2. 20 ww) ee as on we 


(2) Other Cell-contents (including Secretions). 
Baccanimi, P.—Spherocrystals 25> 6 ee os ew) we 0 fo 
Tassi, F Nectar of Rhododendron med ec ee 2 Se pee sas ons, 0 
Waener, E.—Tannin in the Crassulacexr .. oo 
Mintz, A.—Oceurrence of the Elements of Sugar of Milk in Plants. an We ante 
TscuincH, A.—Development of some Seeretions and their Receptacles .. .. 


(3) Structure of Tissues, 
Lestois, A.—Secretory Canals and Secretory Reservoirs .. 
Mitier, C.—Seereting Canals of Umbelliferx and Araliacez contained in ‘the Phloem 
Scuirer, R. P. C.—Influence of the Turgidity of the Epidermal Cells on the Stomata 
Wituiamson, W. C.—Anomalous Cells in the Interior of the Tissue of “sea Plants 


Dovtior, H.—Periderm of the Leguminose .. _.. ses tee 

Avetta, C.—Anomalies in the Structure of the Roots of Dicotyledons s 

dp ot Sn Big eet oady a 2 she seg eee Filiaces, and ‘ter 
iacex oc 


we oe 


(4) Structure of Organs, 
Lierat, M.—RRoots of Aracezw.. . 
TarFeL, F. y.— Mechanical Protection of Bulbs ; 
Scort, D. H.—Floating-roots of Sesbania aculeata Y 
Tiecuem, P. yan, & P. Picut—Tubereles on the Roots of Leguiminose - 


(obo): 


PAGE 
FW acon: P. Beate of Hisiourun = berAca sais he a wo OOS 
ae M.—Anatomical Structure oy th the foe ‘of Orchideze 608 
‘Noack, F.—Injluence of Climate on the Cuticularization and d Thickening oy the 
Leaves of some Conifer 2... + Pests parte ah OC se OOS 
-BEAUVISAGE—Bracts of Cruciferz .. Be Se Sa eee iho) ara Ne 7 RAC eres 9) 
- Scuvitz, O.—Physiological Anatomy of Stipules Bis Va eri te 


eee P. A.—Foliar Sheath of the Salicornie Baer ee ons 
Went, F.—Embryo-sac of Rosacex PSSA Serer eaten as 
Prtit, L.—Petiole of Dicotyledons .. .. es 
- Mancin, Lovis—Development of Flowers in fe tad Ae ee : 
Scuumann, K.—Morphology of the Flowers of Canna .. Soe Vash oe ae One eer nee OLE 
Cuopat, R.—Diagrain of the Flower of Crucifere ea ae ve ys 2S 


Batiuon, H.—Ovules of Grasses i gig oS Pe Ee EES ee oe AD Se a OLE 
Batrour, 1. B.— Replum in Cructfer® .22 20 ek as ee ae a te ee GT 
Garon, A: G.—Fruit of Solanacew ... eet oe adi en eseniis 1 OLE 


DINGLER, H.—Motion of rotating Winged Fruits and Seeds... UeaS oes aes ee Ole 


B. Physiology. ; 
a) Reproduction and Germination. 


Cee A.—Pollination and Distribution of the Sexual Organs .. Pee Oe 
~ Baresoy, ANNA--—Effect of Cross-fertilization on Inconspicuous Flowers... .. . 612 
- SANCZEWSKI, E. DeE—Germination of Anemone apennina ., .. 1. ws es -~= 618 
-HILprEBRAND, F.—Germination of Oxalis rubella., 1.0 200 ue aes ee = 
MGuiter, F.— Germination of the Bicuiba .. .. Pontos sees OLS 
GREEN, J. R.—Germination of the Tuber of the Jerusalem Artichoke. SEE ra 
(2) Nutrition and Growth (including Movements of Fluids). 
ARCANGELI, G.—Injluence of Light on the Growth of Leaves .. 614 
 Liepsonrr, G.—Supply e Food Constituents at Pilon ent Loree of the Growth of 
DAOAE. 9 ne Gis wad is as a8 on eae Olt 
2 (3) Irritability. 
~ Garpiner, W.— Power uf Contractility exhibited by the Protoplasm of certain Cells 614 
_ Wortmann, J.—Movements of Irritation of Multicellular Organs .. .« sor LD 


- Gopiewss!, E.—Tfrritability of Growing Parts of Plants»... «2 4. 1. se) G15- 
Oxtver, F. W.—Sensitive Labellum of Masdevallia muscosa .. .. ess? se) GIG 


(4) Chemical Changes Gneluding Respiration and Fermentation). 
; BRN, B.—Formation of Nitric Acid in Plants... 22. sa see ee we ~~ «G6 


: Sees 


Ses G Desert Flora ie Per aie aha a 
- Deruer's (W.) Laboratory Course of Vegetable Physiology ie SOP foe 5 aes eee OEM 


Bie H. pE—Isotonie Coefficient of Glycerin .. ge PCG Sete ee eno 


B. CRYPTOGAMTA. 
Cryptogamia Vascularia. 


ean F, O.—Oophyte of Trichomanes .. 617 
~ CAMPBELL, D.- “H.— Development of Onoclea Strattcopteri is Hagin. “(Steuthiapteris 
germnica Wiild.) Se sferetes 618 
.- Mourine, W Branching of the Frond ‘of Pobiis ae ee EBS 
_.. Benzz, W.—Leavesof Polypodiacee — .. Soe Ran eR; Cae EIS ee ET OND 
- Daccomo, G.—Aspidol from Aspidium- Foliaqied es fas? Sic OED 
~ Leckerc pu SABLon—Selaginella depicaply li ROE tase Rae SW AR oo OLD 
~Soums-Lavpacy’ Ss Introduction to Fossil AS ONUB Ya ee Re se ere yn EO BAD 
nea cigs hee eee Bes Muscinesw. 

SEE aiEEnr— Petstome of Masses yo 0 Sah ate ee eee oat bate ae BLO 
eM: Dee Sphagnace’ 0 2 wey we ee ee ee Eee ae a G2T 
pens ; - Yichenes. — : ae : 

“. AWarnto, it: Cladonta “7. See aeee GAG aS OUR, ER Ot GON 
_ ‘Sypow’s f) Lichens of Germany. Fe aw COE RY TO ae ie eds Pee ge eee AL 
y f . x : ree = Bier. . é a; ; 

a Woonwonns, ww. i Apioad Cell of Pueue ss eo re lee a eae dt nw COT 
Scutrr, F.—Phycoerythrin. ..  .. PR eo es ge be eee tae Oe 
Jounson, T.—Procarp and -Cystocarp of ‘Gracilaria ee or, CMAN eae chee OO 
BiceLow, R. P.—Frond of Champia parvula .. ee nee in ae 628 


“LAGERHEIM, G.—Development of Hydrurus .. 2.0 6. oe os ue ee ew 628 


(02) 


ASKENASY, E.— Development of Pediastrum.. ‘4. ++ es ee ee we 
Weser, VAN Bossp—Alge# parasitic on the Sloth.. 6. +s ee ae te 
Overton, C. E.—Conjugation of Spirogyra .. Ae hae F 
Lacerurim, G.—Uronema, a new genus of Chilorozoosporeat py aes ame 
Wite’s (N.) Contributions Ca Algalogy sc: tisis. ees faige gto 2G de ures. ee 
Hanserre’s (A.) Alga-flora of Bohemia at eee hie, tk apes aay eS 
Hatvcr anv Ricurer’s Phycotheca wniversalis ., 2. se ae ae 
Der Ton anp Levi's Venetian aca ht Bat? oad cents es wal home 
Scutitr, F.—Chextoceros .. OF. ba ale ee awl ae ues 
Ratrray, J.— Varieties of Aulacodiseug a ee sk ae ks oe 


Fungi. 
Roitanp, L.—Blue Coloration of Fungi by Todine .. ee ee ewe 
Karsten, H.—Clussification and Description of Fungi... ws we we 
VUILLEMIN, P.— Biological Studies of Fungi ae 
Hecke, E.—Formation of tavo * aide hymenta in Polyporus applanatve.. 
Fiscuer, E.—Stretching of the Receptacle of the-Phalloidet. _.. o 
Masser, G.—Revision of the Genus Bovisla..  .. eA eve 
Fricuov— Formation of the Asei in Physalospora Bidwellii fs Thine tae 
Dvrovur, L.—Development and Fructification of Triehocladium .. .. 
Seynes, J. pE—Ceriemyces and Fibrillaria.. © .. ve 


Saccarpo, P. A.—New Genus of Sphzxriaceous Pyrenomyedtes.- at Sat Se 
Berese, A. N.—New Genus Peltospheria ..- .. repr Atay 
Bovupter—New Mucedinex . -- *e oe oe * 


Brriese, A. N.—Clathrospora ‘and 'Pyrenophora Pres et oe 
Saleem J.—New Papulaspora 5 50 ie es on jl ann” lh ee 
Maents, P.—Sehinzia ... Bruits pe pee es 
Rovumerevrre, C.— Fungus Parasitic onthe Plane... ss ws ve os 
SanrorD, E.—Anatomy of the Common Cedar-apple ..  -. ee ee we 


Protophyta. 
Sacre M.—Cellular Envelope of the Filamentous Nostocacez Pa Ftee 
Borzi, A.— Development of Mischococcus confervicola .. .. ++ ee. we 
LA@ERHEIM, G.—Stlichococens bacillaris.. 6. 4. ke ete we 
De Toni, G. B.— Remarkable Flos-aqux es oa ae koe 


PERRONcITO, E. & Varaupa, L,— Pa te of . auf” » ee isnes 
ARCANGELI, G.—Sacchiromyces minor .. Sas 

WAssERzUG, E.—Spores of the Ferments ss os 
‘Fomascuek, A.—Symbiosis of Bacteria with Glaocapaa polydermatica ae 


ARLOING, S.— Presence of a Phlogogenous matter in the Cultures of certain Microbes 


Garier—Chromo-aromatic Wiergbes = oe Oe ten at Soe ee te eae 
Havser, G.—Sarcina of the Lungs. 


ad 


Borvoni-Urrrepvuzzi, G.—New Pathogenic Di Microphyte in Men and Animals 


SPeLiMaNN & HavsHALTER—Dissemination of Bacillus by Flies .. + 


MICROSCOPY. 
e«, Instruments, Accessories, &c. 
(1) Stands, 
Zetss’s (C.) IFa, Microscope (Fig.96)°.. 4: «sive fee oe ta ee 
Baxccuin’s Microscope (Fig. 97) .. ee Sate a na tia el, Sede ae 
GatiLe0’s Microscopes (Figs. 98 and 99) Sasa AEs ne aCe reilee cae 
JosLot’s Microscope (Fig. 100)... eis ae ee 


Hensoipr's (M.) Reading Microscopes (Figs. 102 and 402) ee eee 


(2) Eye-pieces and Objectives. 
Vocrer, H.. W.—Hartnack's new Objective... +. as 00 | aw eee 


(3) Illuminating and other Apparatus, 
Hitcenpdorr’s Auwranograph (Fig. 103)... 
CuarMan, F. T.—Slide for observing Soap-bubble Films (Fig. 104) .. ss 
Senaren’s Hot-water Circulation Stage and Swift's Pee (Fig. 105) 
BErrRrany’s Refractometer 9 .. 0 oe ne ae ee SSecreee 


(4) Pui alee Ne 


Lxr1z’s small Photo-micrographic Apparatus (Fig. 106)... 1. « s. 
Puosst’s Focusing Arrangement (Fig. 107) .. el oR nee 
Carranica, 5.—Jnstantancous Photomicrography ee haar epph ee eae 


(5) Microscapical Optics and Manipulation. 


oad 


oe 


se 


aes, 


(6) Miscellaneous. ~ 


oe CO FAO, F.—American Microscopes. pal Citoger girl tga acy aa nk ea ae 108 


Deatu of Mr. Wee ne iva 2 os Mani an Mag ce a wg Sime hae ee eT many ee ee 
: . g. Technique. 
(1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes. 


JacoBl, E.—Preparation of Nutritive Media «es on ewe te wet 
FREUDENREICH, H.—Preparing Agar-agar_ .. ee fae ee, oes 
~ Rasxin, M.—Milk-peptone-gelatin for cultivating Patingente Micro-organisma 

PEN, N. W.—Vessel for the Culture of Low Organisms (Pig. 2 ee eiwe 


(2). Preparing Objects. 


; MisonToip, A. Spee scecnlGit of Parts and Organs of Animals deawae Maen mee 
oie Mie L. v.—Two new Methods for preparing Nerve-cellg 4. 21 00 +s 
Bionp1, D.—New Method for the Microscopical Study of the Blood... «1 oss. 


Ranvier, L.—Preparation and Staining of the Spinal Cord .. .. ae 
Cutarvel, G.— Demonstrating the Canalicular Prolongations a Bone-cor: puscles ue 
PaLapino, G.—Prepuring Mammalian Ovaries... +. ss “2 net ae 


- JOURDAN, E.—Preparing and Staining Annelida..  ..  .« - <- 
_ Fratronr, J.—Preparing Polygordius ..  .. 
Zacuarias’ (O.) Method of Preparing Eqgs of Aare megalocephala 


_. Bovert’s (T.). Method of Preparing the Eggs Sos Ascaris rele nnae 


’ Keuier, C. C.—Isolating Foraminifera .. PES my see 
Branvt, K.—Prepuring Spherozoa .. spies naam A Coe aie 
Kine, J. D. —Preparation and Mounting of Ferns, 
Lacernemm, G.— Application of Lactic Acid to the Ezamination es ‘Algae 
Temrere’ 8 (J.) Preparations of Diatoms .. Age See 


(8) Cutting, including Tabeiding.: : 
Duvat, M.—Collodion for Imbedding in Embryology... 2. +» s+ ess 


ae? Scuwase’s Sliding Microtome (Fig. 109) 


_ Zwsarpemaker, H.—Accessory to the Cambridge Rocking Microtome igs. 110 


PAGE 
652 
6o4 


655 
696 
656 
657 


658 
658 
659. 
660 
661 
662 
662 
662 
663 


664 - 


664 
665 
665 
666 
667 


667 
668 


676 


c and }11) ... ts 666 

Bomrvs, H. C. — Inexpensive Section-smoother (Fig. 112) .. See on ree ee ee OLE 

_ Apsruy, J—Preparing Long Series of Sections with Celloidin cs. br ae 670 

- Prorer Thickness of Microscopical Sections .. Peres ea Gon eee OEE 

-  Netsser, A.—Preparing Sections from Test-tube Cultivationa wes ae we 671 

(4) Staining and Injecting. f 

Gray, W. M.—Double-staining of Nucleated Blood-corpuscles .. .. 4, +. +.» 673 

Ktune, W.—Staining Nerve-endings with Gold Chloride... 2. 4. 0. ee OTB 

» Boccarnt, G. —Staining-Nerve-endings with Gold Chloride ie 674 
SCHIEFFERDECKER, P.— Weigert’s Hamatoxylin Method as ‘applied to other than 

Nervous Tissues :. Re aii ae Se ad eee eg wee EN 

- Bizzozmro, G., & G. Vassate—Staining Mitoses So 674 

Zimmerman, A.—Staining Leucoplasts, Protein-granules, Bordered Pit Membranes, 

_ . and Woody Tissue - .. ta Vids toe) OLS 
Wetlcrrt, C.—New Method for ‘Staining ‘Fibrin and Micro-organisms ie ease LOE 
“PLatNer, G.—New Nuclear Stain and Note on Fixation ..0 «2 0s 20 00 ee. 675 
Lewin, A.—Baumgarten’s Method of Triple-staining .. 4. 25 25 (as te 0s ~—66 

_ Bases, V.—Anilin-oil Safranin Sclution ... en on se os ee ee wks 
Griespacnu, H.—Metanil-yellow. bbe eae ey Sag gaa OLE 
-Brauns, R.—Simple Method for daring Methylen Iodide ee tia eran’ cee cae LF 
Borpen, W. C.— Carmine Injections Penis sip 
Rosin’s, Lacaze-Duruiers’, & FARAB@UF’ s “Injecting Byringes (Figs. 113-115) - 678 
Foi, H—Collin’s Antomatic Cannula-holder (Fig. 116) 2. 4. ve «> +s. 680 
(5)- Mounting, including Slides, Preservative ies ee 
BRAMWELL, Brrom—Half-clearing method of preparing Nerve Sections . 680 
Port, A.— Adaptation of Kaiser’ & gelatin for. arranging “microscopic preparations 
- in rows . os) fee 680. 
KELxer, C. C. — Puri ‘fication of Tolw Balsam for Micr oscopical Purposes we) ae (OGL 
pees L.—Hot Plate Apparatus (Figs. 117 and eee Baste ee ee a ee. OE 
(6) Miscellaneous, . 
es H., T. Lonearp, & G. Rrepiin— Method oe Calculating the tapsiaty 
ae OF, Bacterial Increase (Fig. 119)- .. 682 
ie Se E. C. aes of Water used for Br reaving as regards Micro- organisms. ~ 685 
5 Paocespises OF THE Socmy Rak eign th Vow oe dak enue 


BSP ee: 


I.—APERTURE TABLE. 


. 


Corresponding Angle (2 u) for Limit of Resolving Power, in Lines to an Inch. 
Wumericwill: .si.020. ule oa ee cee ee Monoch ti 
Aperture. Air Water as Ate White Light. (Blue) Light. Photography. 
(nsinu=a)|; (n=1°00). | (M= 1°33). | = 1°52). (a Tine &.) Ma} (A Line F}) & Gest Lines 

1:52 si é 180° 0’ | 146,543 | 158,845 | 193,087 
1:51 me 166° 51’ | 145,579. |. 157,800. | 191.767 
1-50 3 Ss 161° 23’ | 144.615 | 156,755 | 190.497 
1:49 “4 # 157° 12’ | 148,651 | 155.710 | 189,297 
1:48 * 5 153° 39’ | 142,687 | 154,665 | 187,957 
1:47 : a 150° 32’ | 141,723 | 153,620 | 186,687 
1:46 3 ~ 147° 42" | 140,759 | 152,575 | 185,417 
1:45 Se ¥ 145° 6 | 139.795 | 151.530 |. 184147 
1:44 % . 142° 39" | 138.830 | 150,485 | 182.877 
1°43 ; is 140° 99" | 137,866 | 149.440 | 181,607 
1:42 “a % 138° 12’ | 136,902 | 148,395 | 180,337 
1:41 i * 136° 9’ | 135,938 | 147,350 | 179,067 
1:40 i x 134° 10° | 134,974 | 146,305 | 177,797 
1:39 i 2 132° 16" | 1342010 | 1452260 | 176,527 
1:38 5 Ss 130° 26" | 133,046 | 144,215 | 175,257 
1:37 = = 128° 40’ | 1322082 | 143.170 | 173,987 
1:36 0% sg 126° 58’ | 131,118 | 142,125 |. 172,717 
1:35 3 = 125° 18' | 130,154 | 141,080 -| 171,447 
1-33 ae eect ior im rie tas mer ee eae 
1-32 3 165° 56’| 120° 83" | 127,261 | 137.944 | 167.637 
1:31 Su 160° 6’, 119° 3’ | 126,297 |. 136,899 | 166,367 
1-30 2 155° 38” | 117° 35’ | 125,838 | 135,854 | 165,097 
1:29 " 151° 50’| 116° ‘s' | 124,369 | 134,809 | 163,827 
1:28 bs 148° 49°! 114° 44" | 123.405 | 133.764 | 162,557 
1:27 “ 145° 27’} 113° 21’ | 122.441 | 132/719 | 161,287 
1:26 “ 142° 39’} 111° 59’ | 121.477 |- 131,674 | 160,017 
1:25 .. . | 140° 3} 110° 39° | 120,513 130,629 158,747 
1:24 > 137° 36'| 109° 20’ | 119,548 | 129,584 | 157,477 
1-23 % 135° 17'| 108° 2" | 118.584 | 128.539 | 156,207 
1:22 1 133° 4’| 106° 45’ | 117,620 | 127,494 | 154,937 
1-20 een ey ee ce pe ts Be A A oe yi Bren ao 
1:19 3 196° 58'| 103° 9° | 1142738 124°359 | 151,128 
1:18 i 125° 3'| 101° 40’ | 113,764 | 123°314 | 149,857 
1:17 3 123° 13'| 100° 38’ | 112,799 | 122,269 | 148,588 
1:16 x 121° 96'| 99° 99° | 111,835 | 121,924 | 147,317 
1:15 * 119° 41'| 98° 20° | 110.872 | 120,179 | 146,048 
1-14 w: 118° 0| -97° 11 | 109,907 | 119,134 | 144,777 
1:13 = 116° 20'| 96° 2 | 108.943 | 118,089 | 143,508 
tit ‘ys Paes apt apogee tagieie: toa totean Gla eile 
ie ia Baeeee ieee Bee eel foe OM Bere 
1:08 a 108° 36’| 90° 34’ | 1o4'193 | 112,864 | 187,158 
Be aa] Gee |e uae 
1:05 S 1° Jerk ee BY PG a 1097729 | 1337348 
1-04 ie 102° 53'| 86° 21 | 100,266 | 108,684 | 132,078 
1-03 5 101° 30"| 85° 19’ | 99.302 | 107.639 | 130,808 
1:02 s 100° 10'| 84° 18’ | 98,338 | 106,593 | 129,538 
1-01 98° 50’| 83° 17’ | 97,374 | 105,548 | 128,268 


1:00 || 180°. 0’ 97° 31°] 82° 17" 96,410 | 104,503 | 126,998 
0:99 || 163° 48’ 96° 12'| , 81° 17° 95,446 | 103,458 | 125,728 
0:98 || 157° 2° 94° 56’ | 80° 17’ 94,482 | 102,413 | 124,458 
0°97 |} 151° 52’ | 93° 40’| 79° 18” 93,518 | 101,368 | 123,188 
0:96 || 147° 29° 92° 24"| 78° 20’ 92,554 |} 100,323 | 121,918 
0-95 |} 143° 36’ | 91°.10"| 77° 29" 91,590 99,278 | 120,648 
0°94 || 140° 6’. | — 89° 56’| 76° 24’ 90, 625 98,233 | 119,378 
0:93 || 136° 52’ 88° 44'| 75° 27’ 89, 661 97,188 | 118,108 
0°92 |}-133° 51’ 87° 32’| 74° 30’ | 88,697 $6,143 | 116,838 
0°91. || 131° 0! 86° 20°] 73° 33" 87,733 95,098 | 115,568 
0:90 || 128° 19’ 85° 10’| 72° 36’ | 86,769 94,053. | 114,298 
0:89 || 125° 45’ 84° 0"} 71° 40° 85, S05 93,008 | 113,028 
0°88 |} 123° 17’ 82° 51’| 70° 44" | 84,841 91,963 | 111,758 


re 

. . *-. . . . . . . . . 
i=) 
— 
bo 


APERTURE TABLE—continued. 


‘Corresponding Angle (2 w) for Limit of Resolving Power, in Lines to an Inch. Denes 
Pieter ie eS fenton Ss  WNtmtaaatngl tating 
Aperture.|| Air Water pe ha White Light. Xplne) Light. | Photography.} (ae), rae 

rege NG ey ee (A = 0°5269 m, | (A =.0°4861 p,| (A = 074000 pe, ee aa 
cm sin t= G:)|) (at = 1°00). e 133). | (= 3°62). Line E.) Line F.): near Line h.) G) 
- 0°87 120° 55’ 81° 42’ 69° 49’ 83,877 90,918 110,488 "TdT 1°149 
0:86 118° 38! 80° 34’ 68° 54’ 82,913 - 89,873 109,218 *740 1-163 
~ 0°85 116° 25’ 192 3t 68°. 0! 81,949 $8,828 107,948 *723 1-176 
0°84 ~ |} 114° 17’ 78°20! 67°. 6’ 80,984 87,783 106,678 *706 1-190 - 
- 0°83 112° 12! 77°14". 66° 12’ 80,020 86,738 105,408 | “689 1-205 
0°82 110° 10’ 76°. 8’ 65° 18’ 79,056 85,693 104,138 "672 1°220 
0:81 108° 10’ Poo = Bie 64° 24’ - 78,092 84,648 102, 868 "656 1-235 
0-80 106°. 16’ 73° 58’ 63°-ol! 77 5128 83,6035 + 101,598 *640 1°250 
0:79 104° 292’ 720-53" 62° 38’ 76,164 82,558 100,328 624 1-266 
0:78 102° 31’ 71° 49° 61° 45’ 75,200 81,513 99,058 ~*608 1-282 
0:77 || 100° 42’ 70° 45° 60° 52’ 74, 236 80,468 97,788 *593 1-299 
0:76 98° 56’ 69° 42’ 60° 0’ Tas 2lars 79,423 96,518 “578 | 1:316 
-- 0°75 fact a 68° 40’ B90 °. BF 72,308 78,378 95,248 “563 1-333 
0°74 95°: 28! 67°. 37’ 58° 16’ 71,3438 17,333 93,979 *548 1°351 
0-73 93° 46’ 66°. 34’ 57° 24’ 70,379 76,288 92,709 °533 1:370 
0°72 3 A 65° 32’ 56° 32’ 69,415 7d, 242 91,439 °518 1°389 
0°-71— 90° 28’ 64° 32’ 55° 41’ 68,451 74,197 90,169 “504 1°408 © 
0:70 88° 51 63°31" 54° 50’ 67,487 78,152 88,899 -490 1-429 
0:69 87° 16’ 62° 30’ 53° 59’ 66,523 72,107 87,629 |} ~:476 1:449 
0°68 85° 41’ 61° 30’ Hears i 65,559 © 71,062 86,359 | *462 1-471 
0°67 . 84° 8! 60° 30’ Layee ey 64,595 70,017 85,089 | 449 1°493 
‘0:66. 82° 36’ 59° 30’ 51° 28’ 63,631 68,972 83,819 "436 1°515 
0-65 81° 6! 58° 30’ 50° 38’ 62,667 67,927 82,549 | °423 1-538 
0°64 79° 36’ Die. ole 49° 48’ 61,702 66,882 81,279 - *410° ff 1+562 
0°63 78° 6’ 56° 32’ 48° 53’ 60,738 65, 837 80,009 *397 1°587 
0°62 76° 38’ 55° 34’ 48° 9! 59,774 64,792 78,739 “384 1°613 
0:61 75°10’ 54° 36’. | 47° 19° 58,810 63,747 77,469 *372 1°639 
0:60. 73° 44! 53° 38’ 46° 30’ 57,846 62,702 76,199 *360 | 1-667 
0:59 722.18! 52° 40’ 45° 40° 56,881 61, 657 74,929 “348 | 1°695 
0-58 70° 54’ 51° 42’ 44° 51’ 55,918 60,612 73,659 “336 | 1-724 
0:57 69° 30’ 50° 45’ 449-9" 54,954 59,567 72,389 °325 1-754 
0:56 68° - 6’ 49° 48’ 43°. 14’ 93,990 98,522 7i,119 “314 1°786 
0°55 66° 44! 49° 51’ 42°. 25! 53,026 57,477 69,849 *303 1°818 
0:54 65° 22’ 47° 5A’ | 41° 37’ 52,061 56,432 68,579 “292 1°852 
0°53 64° 0’ 46° 58’ 40° 48’ 51,097. 55,387 67,309 *281 1-887 
0:52 62° 40! 46°. 2? 40° 0’ 90,133 54,342 66,039 -270 1°923 
0-51. 61° 20° 45° 6! Doe 12" 49,169 53, 297 64,769 -260 | 1-961 
0°50 60° 0° 44° 10’ 38° 24’ 48,205 52, 252 63,499 *250 2°000 
0°48 - 572.22! 42° 18' 36° 49’ 46,277 50,162 60,959 *230 | 2-083 
- 0:46 54° 47’ 40° 28" 35° 15! 44,349 48,072 58,419 +212 | 2°174 
- O-45- 53° 30’ 39° 33! 34° 27’ 43,385 47,026 97,149 +203 2-222 
(0°44 52° 13° 38° 38’ 38° 40’ 42,420 45,981 95,879 *194 2°273- 
0-42: |} 49° 40’ 36° 49! 32°59 40,492 43,891 53,339 176 2-381 
~ 0-40 | 47° is ea ora 1 30° 31’ 38,064 41,801 50,799 -160 27500 
0:38 44° 40’ |. 38° 12’ |. 28° 57’ 36,636 39,711 48,259 °144 2°632 
20°36} 42° 12’ 31° 24 27° 24! 34,708 37,621 49,719 -130 | 2°778 
- 0°35- 40° 58! 30° 30’ 26° 38’ 33, 744 36,576 44,449 °123° | 2°857— 
0°34 39° 44" VAS is y (ee Winey Soares 32,779 35,531 43,179 °116 2°941 
0°32 37° 20° 272°51! 24° 18’ | 30,851 33,441 40,639 102 37125 
0°30 34° 56! 26°. 4’ 22° 46’ 28,923 31,351 38,099 *090 3°333 
0:28 -B2° 32’ 24°18’ |- 21° 14’ 26,995 29,261 — 39,509 *078 3:571 
0:26. 30° 10’ | 22° 337 19° 42’ 25, 067 27,171 33,019 "068 | 3:846 
0°25 — 28° 58’ -21°-40’ | 1-18° 56! 24,103 © 26,126 31,749 “063 4-000 
0°24 || 27° 46’ 20° 48’ 18° 10’ 23,188 25,081 30,479 “058 4-167 
0°22 25° 26! 19° -2’ }--16° 38’ 21,210 22,991 27,940 *048 4°545 
~0:20— 23° 4! |-- 17° 18’ Lee 19,282 20,901 | 25,400 -040 57000 
0-18 20° 44’ 15° 34’ 13° 36" 17,354 | 18,811 22,860° | *032 9°555 
0-16 18° 24’ 13° 50’ 120 c5'> 15,426 16,721 | 20,320 *026 6°250 
0°15 P17 14! 12° 58’ 11° 19’ 14,462 ~ 15,676 19,050 j= +023 6°667 
50:14 16° - 5' 12°. 6’ | 10° 34’ 13,498 14,630 17,78) “020 7T°143 
°Q-12 13° 47% 10° 22' 9° 4’ 11,570 | 12,540 ~* 15,240 “014 | 8-333 - 
. 0°10 AVS 29" coherent] igs bazar: of 264s: 10,450 12,700 “010 - 10-000 — 
0:08 — OO ee Gerba 6S Be I 7,713 _ 8,360 10,160 “006. -J12°500 
0-06. 6° 53! 5° 10’ 4° 32! 5,789. 6,270 7,620 ‘004 (16-667 


0°05. AANA: AOEBE = 8S AGE 4,821 0,225 6,300 "003. 920-000 


( 10 ) 
GREATLY REDUCED PRICES 


OBJECT-GLASSES MANUFACTURED BY 


R. & J. BECK, 


68, CORNHILL, LONDON, E.C. 


PRICES OF BEST ACHROMATIC OBJECT-GLASSES. 


| Angle. ) 

a s | Linear magnifying-power, with 10-inch 
No. | Focal length. | aper Price. | body-tube and eye-pieces. 

: ture, | eae ae ee 

| aes, | No. 1.| No. 2.| No. 3.No. 4.| No. 5. 

o | £5. d. | | ) | 
100 4inches .. .. 9 | " 2 7 ro} 164 - 30 ) 40 50 
101} Sinches .. «. 74 \ ; 
102 | Sinches .. .. | 12 . 210 0 a ees Bl Ae 
103 2 inches * ee Io ; | | 
104 2inches .. -.| 17 | 210 0 } bi be Sc td Beet pegs 8 
105. 13 inch Fe A Se ! 3 2 rs | 30 48 go | 120 150 
106 | 2 inch p25] 2 
107 , 2 inch 32 | 210 0 } Le Pree Bene Se c, | 35° 
108 inch + | 45 | 210 0} 100} 160) 3001 400} 500 
109 + inch. - | 65 4 0 QO°§ 125 } .200; 375-}| 500} -625 
110° + inch s 1-95 | B&B O O-§ 150) 240; 450 600 750 
111. iinch 75} 810 0} 200 | 320°} 600} 800 | 5000 
112  iinch |} 120 | 410 O}. 250) 400.) 750} 1000] 1250 
113 | 2 inch | 130 | & O O§ 400}. 640 | 1200 | 1600} 2000 
114 , 5, imn. | 10 | 5 6 Q% 500; B00! 1590 2000] 2500 
115 + imm., | 10 | 8 O O | 750 | 1200 | 2250 | 3000 375° 
116 | 3 imm. | 180 (10-0 0. 1000 | 1600 | 3000 ; 4000 | 5000 
117 3 inch. | 160 | 20 0 O-§ 2000 | 6000 | 8000 | To,0co ~ 


ECONOMIC ACHROMATIC OBJECT-GLASSES, 


APPLICABLE TO ALL INSTRUMENTS MADE WITH THE Untrvyersat Screw. 


: Angi! ) MAGNIFYING-POWER, | 
: | of -| | with 6-inch body and 
|No. | Foecallength. | aper-| Price. ! eye-pieces, 
. ture, | oo 
) | about | No, 1.| No. 2.; No. 
as eee rae es oe Ie a Be ee 
: ° i caer Mgeey | i / 
| 150 | Sinches= .. 2.) 6 | 1 0-0 | 312 15-} 27 
| 351+ 2inehes .2 -.. ] 8 7-1 0-0 8 23 41 
352) Dinch “..- 20-4 18 | 28 OS ee 61 | 106 
(1583 | finch’... .. .. | 38 4-1 5°O | -90-} 116: | 205 
154 : mehias 43 2< 80 1-5-0 170 *} 2205} 415 
155 iinch «2s 2. | 110°} 2 5 O-} 250 <1 330°) 630 | 
156 © 3 inch Soo was ve 4 110°4 310 0-7 350 | 450 | 800 | 
157 | 3, imm. -. «+ | 180 | 6 O © 7-654 | 844-1500 -] 


Revised Catalogue sent on application to 
R. & J. BECK, GS, Cornhill. 


th.¢ Imp. Camb. Sci. Inst Co. 


mY — 


ARPRONIPF?TR A ItTa 1 . NTT 5 
VARBONIFE ROUS fORAMINIFBRA. 


=Venan- 
ae 


ONIFE 


Re 
YU 


By Ba 
VAR 


JAN 20 1903. 


JOURNAL.  sasanen 


OF THE 


ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 


AUGUST 1888. 


TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY. 


VIII.— Additions to the Knowledge of the Carboniferous 
Foranunifera. 


By the Rev. Water Howcuiy, F.G.S. 
; (Read 18th June, 1888.) 
Puates VIII. anp IX. 


RESEARCHES in relation to the Carboniferous Foraminifera of the North 
of England were begun by the author in 1873, and some of the earlier 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 
Puate VIII. 


Figs. 1, 2—Hyperammina elongata, var. clavatula, nov. x 60 diam. 
a at oe — vagans, Brady x 50 diam. 
» 4—Placopsilina cenomana, d’Orbigny sc cc -- X 3d diam. 
5» * 9.—Lituola rotundata, sp.nov. .. : oc oc -- X 50diam. 
> oO ~ , transverse section. x 50 diam. 
»  1.—Lituola Bennicana, Brady ; x 55 diam. 

Vertical section showing the coarse perforation of the test. 
» 8, 9.—Webbina fimbriata, sp. noy. A or oc x 100 diam. 
a LO: ‘—Endothyra circumplicata, sp. nov. ac -» 40 diam. 
a, b, the two lateral aspects of the test. 
sale —_— —_— , transparent section showing the 
septal plane of the last convolution at right angles to 
that of the earlier whorls.. oe ae 2 so 8k GH) Clana 
PuaTe IX. 
5, 12.—Endothyra conspicua, sp. nov.. 2c ae Bo GH Gini: 
» 13.—— radiata, var. Tateana, nov. ae a -- - 40 diam: 
a, lateral aspect ; b, peripheral aspect. 
» 14.—-— x 40 diam. 
Weathered specimen exhibiting the double septal partitions. 
> 15.— — —, transparent section iG a . 45 diam. 
5 16.— Webbina irregularis, d@Orbigny, attached specimen 22) a0 diam: 
ey LT -— , inferior surface of two detached chambers x 35 diam. 
5, 18.—Archelagena Howchiniana, Brady, sp. c x 45 diam. 
Transparent section through a group showing ‘interseptal 
communication. 
5, 19.—Stacheia moriformis, sp. Dov. .. x 35 diam. 
5 20.— - , transparent section x 60 diam. 
» 21.—WNodosaria (D.) farcimen, Soldani sp.. x 60 diam. 


a, lateral aspect; 6, apertural end. : 
», 22.—Patellina Bradyana, sp. nov. .. 58 ar a «6 Ga diam. 
Lateral aspect of a tall specimen. 


ho 


a, lateral aspect of a short pucenee x 55 diam. 

6, inferior face of another shell : - XX 65 diam. 

» 24.——- , transverse section BF a Eoordiam. 
25.— ——-— —_——,, ; longitudinal section x 55 diam. 


1888. Ce ee tone 


534 Transactions of the Society. 


results were included and acknowledged by Mr. H. B. Brady, F.R.S., 
in his ‘ Monograph of the Carboniferous and Permian Foraminifera,’ 
published in the Paleontographical Society’s volume for 1876. The 
publication of a general treatise on the subject, by so competent an 
authority, offered great facilities for workers in this interesting although 
somewhat difficult paleontological study. In 1876 the author of the 
present paper began a systematic investigation of the microzoic beds 
of Carboniferous age over an extended area of the North of England. 
The country thus geologically examined may be roughly stated as 
extending from the Wansbeck to the Wear, in a north and south 
direction, and from a line a little east of Corbridge, on the east, to 
Greenhead, on the west. ‘The vertical range of the geological section 
concerned extends from the highest calcareous bed of the district down 
to the “P” Limestone of the Ordnance Geological Survey map. 
Within the limits of the vertical section, 80 distinct calcareous beds 
are included and separately denominated, and in their examination for 
Foraminifera, results have been tabulated from 83 localities and 242 
separate washings. Although every available argillo-calcareous horizon 
in this series was placed under examination, only five samples throughout 
the entire vertical range were found to yield no trace of Foraminifera. 
The district, as defined above, is generally rich in microzoa, whilst 
some geological horizons are extraordinarily so. The labour of 
gathering, preparing, and examining so much material, together with 
manipulating many hundreds of transparent sections necessary to 
determine doubtful forms, can only be appreciated by those who have 
had experience in working out these or similar minute palozoic 
organisms. 

The object of the present communication is to place on record 
some of the more interesting forms, either new to science or previously 
unobserved in rocks of paleozoic age, met with during my investiga- 
tions. I may add that in addition to the species enumerated in the 
following pages, there are a number of other organisms, which I have 
some ground for believing to be foraminiferal ; but as the evidence of 
their affinity is scarcely sufficient to carry conviction to those less 
accustomed to handle the obscure and often much altered fossil 
microzoa of these palzozoic limestones, it appears safest for the 
present to leave them undescribed. 

I must express my great indebtedness to Mr. H. B. Brady, not 
only for many valuable hints and the trouble he has taken in the pre- 
liminaries of publication, but also in seeing this paper through the 
press, a service all the more valuable in that it was cheerfully rendered 
and that without it the difficulties of publishing these notes at so great 
a distance, I fear, would have been insuperable. Mr. Rogers, of 
Adelaide, has also placed me under great obligation in drawing the 
objects, in the first instance, from nature, a work in which he has 
shown great patience and accuracy. 


Carboniferous Foraminifera. By Rev. W. Howchin. 535 


Family ASTRORHIZID/. 
Sub-family Rhabdamminine. 
Genus Hyprramuina, Brady. 


Hyperammina elongata, var. clavatula,noy. Plate VIII. figs. I, 2. 


Test free, clavate in form; primordial end inflated, rounded and 
closed; tubular extension straight or only slightly curved, of uniform 
diameter throughout, and short; sometimes marked externally by 
slightly depressed transverse lines. Texture finely arenaceous. Walls 
thin, smooth on both exterior and interior surfaces. Aperture, the 
epen end of tubular extension. Short diameter of tube 1/130 in. 
Length 1/30 in. 

The discovery of Hyverammina in the Jurassic rocks of Switzer- 
land, by Dr. Haeusler, and, almost concurrently, that of a vermiculate 
fossil in the Silurian of Scotland (Girvanella) by Messrs. Nicholson 
and Etheridge, which Mr. H. B. Brady thinks more than probable 
may belong to the same genus, indicate a high probability that some 
representatives of this very simple form might occur in the rich 
microzoic beds of the Carboniferous Limestone. The organism now 
described seems, in all respects, very characteristic, and comes so near 
the smooth examples of H. elongata, Br., that it can hardly be specifi- 
cally distinguished from that form. It differs, however, in its minute 
dimensions, the proportionately larger size of its primordial chamber, 
and its shorter contour. With regard to the last mentioned feature it 
is just possible that the Carboniferous examples fail to show the entire 
length of the tube. Its minute size and delicate proportions render it 
very liable to breakage in the mechanical operations of cleaning the 
material; but, on the other hand, I have not detected a single frag- 
ment in the material searched that would be recognized as a fractured 
portion of the organism. 

Distribution.—It was noted in seven samples of material, embracing 
the Great Limestone and the “ D,” “ H,’ “I,” and “J” Limestones 
of the Cowburn and Tipalt districts. It is more or less scarce 
except in the overlying shale of the Great Limestone at Clowes Gill. 
It maintains a remarkable uniformity of character throughout the 
geological section, and cannot well be mistaken for any other form. 


Hyperammina vagans, Brady. Plate VIII. fig. 3. 


An adherent vermiform test of arenaceous texture ; consisting of 
a primordial chamber (not clearly defined in the Carboniferous speci- 
mens) and a tubular extension, the latter disposed either in more or 
less closely set parallel lines or growing wildly and irregularly ; 
always either attached to the surface of some foreign body or forming 
of itself acervuline masses, the diameter of the tube being about 
1/800 in. 

It has not been an easy matter to assign a place to this minute 
and very irregular organism. It occurs in confused masses, and it is 

2P 2 


536 Transactions of the Society. 


rarely that a specimen can be found showing the primordial cell, the 
latter haying been generally obscured by the subsequent growth of the 
tubular portion. 

Prof. Nicholson and Mr. R. Etheridge, jun., in their monograph 
of “The Silurian Fossils of the Girvan District,’ have described a 
minute vermiform object [Girvanella problematica| which appears 
closely to resemble the above. With the hope that Mr. Etheridge 
would be able to determine their identity, or otherwise, I sent him 
some examples of the Carboniferous form. Mr. Etheridge was much 
struck with their apparent resemblance, but as he only knew the 
Silurian object from polished sections, his determination could go no 
further. 

In assigning this little fossil to Hyperammina vagans, it is need- 
ful to state that though its zoological characters and general habit 
correspond with those of the recent species the diameter of the tube is 
much smaller than that of any living specimen hitherto described. 
Further, that in some instances the transverse fracture of the tube, and 
the apparent absence of proper investment on the attached side, suggests 
an aflinity with the genus Webbina; though in other cases this is not 
apparent. 

Distribution.—Only known from the “D” Limestone of the 
Tipalt in which it is by no means a rare form. 


Family LITUOLIDZ. 
Sub-family Lituoline. 
Genus Puacorsizina, d’Orbigny. 


Placopsilina cenomana, @’Orbigny. Plate VIII. fig. 4. 


The “D” Limestone, which has added so much to our knowledge 
of the Paleozoic Foraminifera, is especially rich in adherent forms. 
Amongst these there occur some few which exhibit a close resem- 
blance in texture and habit of growth to the above species. ‘The test 
is somewhat coarsely arenaceous, imperfect on the side of attachment, 
generally more or less spiral in manner of growth (though often a 
very open spiral), and exhibits at irregular intervals constrictions of 
the testaceous tube, suggestive of septal divisions. The tube varies 
considerably in size in different individuals, varying from 1/200 in., 
or less, to 1/75 in. in diameter. The drawing given in Plate VIII. 
fig. 13 may be taken as an average specimen. 

Distribution —Only known in connection with the “D” Lime- 
ae Tipalt, growing adherent to small fragments of shell and other 
objects. 


Genus Lirvona, Lamarck. 
Lituola rotundata, sp. nov. Plate VIII. figs. 5, 6. 


_ Test free, globular, subglobular, or, more rarely, subcylindrical ; 
spiral, nautiloid, more or less asymmetrical, consisting of about five or 


Carboniferous Foraminifera. By Rev. W. Howchin. 587 


six chambers, four of which are commonly visible externally ; chambers 
globose, increasing rapidly in size, the final segment very large, 
slichtly overlapping and generally equal in size to the rest of the 
shell, giving a ventricose appearance to the oral extremity. Septal 
divisions often confused and labyrinthic. External surface rough. 
Aperture compound or cribriform, very distinct, and situated on the 
convex surface of final segment. Diameter of globose example 
1/50 in. ; subcylindrical, 1/30 in., long diameter. 

This form is easily distinguished from Lituola Bennieana, Br. by 
its much smaller size, more rounded form, the fewness of its chambers, 
their greater inflation, and the position of its compound aperture. 
The aperture, which generally is very clearly visible, occurs, not on 
an incurved septal face, but on the convex part of the final segment, 
suggestive of a rectilinear growth. Fig. 5, whilst a fairly typical 
example in other respects, exhibits this feature in a less degree than 
the average number of specimens. The tendency to variation in this 
species is in the direction of a partial uncoiling of the spire, and some 
individuals even exhibit intermediate gradations with the crozier- 
shaped members of the genus. A comparison of the transparent 
vertical section given of L. Bennieana, Plate VIII. fig. 7, with a 
similar section given of the present species, Plate VIII. fig. 6, will 
give a fair idea of the distinctive features of their internal structure. 
The only form with which L. rotundata is likely to be confounded in 
the Carboniferous shales, is Valvulina bulloides, Br. I have not had 
the good fortune to obtain this latter form from the district concerned 
in the present investigations ; but, judging from Mr. Brady’s excellent 
drawings, the concave surface of the oral extremity of Valvulina 
bulloides, as well as the very distinctive apertures, in each case, would 
be easy guides to their identification. is 

Distribution.—It is not a very frequent form. It is rare in the 
Great Limestone of Curry Hill, Allendale; moderately common in 
the “D” Limestone of the Tipalt, and was recognized in transparent 
sections of the “ K’’ Limestone, Cowburn. 


Lituola Bennieana, Brady. Plate VIII fig. 7. 


In the schemes of classification where the perforate or imperforate 
character of the test was made a ground of primary division among 
the Foraminifera, the genus Lituola was placed among the “Imper- 
forata.” Mr. Brady's reasons for rejecting this principle of classi- 

fication receive from time to time additional justification. The 
artificial nature of this method of division has received conspicuous 
illustration in that, whilst the Lituolide are normally imperforate, 
the large Carboniferous species, L. Bennieana, is frequently coarsely 
perforate. This has been demonstrated by several sections made 
both in horizontal and vertical directions, in which the perforate 
character of the test is equally manifest. Plate VIII. fig. 7 
is one such section, taken vertically, which also shows, in this 
individual, an aperture at the inner margin of the terminal segment. 


538 Transactions of the Society. 


The chambers are much more numerous than in L. rotundata (nearly 
double) and less globose. Long diameter 1/28 in. 

Distribution.—I have notes of the occurrence of this fine species in 
twelve samples of material, viz. the Felltop Limestone, at Wolf Hills, 
near Haltwhistle; First Lower Felltop, Thornbrough; Great Lime- 
stone, of Allendale; Small Limestone, of Nenthead ; “D” Limestone, 
of Tipalt and Cowburn valleys; and the “J” Limestone, in Tipallt. 
In the Thornbrough quarry I obtained it from five horizons, and in 
the majority of these it was a common form. 


Sub-family Trochamminine. 
Genus Wespina, d’Orbigny. 


Webbina hemispherica, Jones, Parker, and Brady. 


In the rich material of the “D” Limestone there are frequent 
examples of a monothalamous and adherent Foraminifer which appear 
to me to belong to this species. The test is convex and imperfect on 
the side of its attachment. The degree of convexity varies from a 
somewhat low relief to almost subglobular. The margin is at times 
slightly spreading, and not unfrequently exhibits a clear space between 
some parts of the edge of the test and the object to which it is 
attached. It is a minute form, not exceeding 1/50 in. in diameter. 
It is an interesting feature to find this rare form, which has hitherto 
only been known in the living state as dredged off the coast of Durham, 
and as a fossil by a single specimen from the Suffolk Crag, with so 
high an antiquity as these Palzozoic examples confer upon the species. 

Distribution—Only known in the Carboniferous rocks in con- 
nection with the “D” Limestone, Tipalt. 


Webbina fimbriata, sp. nov. Plate VIII. figs. 8, 9. 


Test thin, adherent; in shape, convex or subconical; normally 
monothalamous, sometimes two or three grouped together and con- 
nected by minute stoloniferous tubes; margin attenuated, spreading, 
and deeply notched, giving the test a fringed or stellate appearance. 
Stellate projections numerous, short, raised, and tubular, sometimes 
open at their extremities. Diameter of test 1/100 in. 

This is a very pretty little shell, and makes a conspicuous object 
by its white colour shown on a dark background. ‘The test is to all 
appearance finely arenaceous and very thin, and owing to this latter fact 
most of the examples have the test broken at the apex, as shown in one 
of the figures. Some of the fractures probably date from a period prior 
to the fossilization of the specimens. Its habit of growth, in throwing 
out tubular extensions from a primordial chamber, gives it a likeness to 
Webbina clavata, and it is more closely isomorphic with Placopsilina 
vesicularis, Brady ; but it differs from the former species in the number 
and stellate form which these tubular processes assume, as well as in 
their very short length, seldom exceeding a length greater than the 
diameter of the chamber from which they emanate; whilst the finely 


Carboniferous Foraminifera. By Rev. W. Howchin. 589 


arenaceous texture of the test at once distinguishes it from the coarser 
Placopsiline species. ‘The radiating tubuli undoubtedly formed the 
general apertures of the test, they sometimes bifurcate, and there is 
commonly a thin film or weblike extension of the testaceous envelope 
partly covering the spaces separating the tubuli. 

Distribution.—It is rather a common form in the “ D” Limestone, 
where it is found attached to a great variety of objects, but I have not 
found it at any other horizon in the district. 


Webbina irregularis VOrbigny. Plate IX. figs. 16, 17. 


There can be little doubt, I think, that figs. 16 and 17 represent 
examples of this species. Although differing in some respects from 
the recent form, they carry clearly marked Trochamminina character- 
istics. The test is typically, although not constantly, oval in shape ; 
finely arenaceous in structure, smooth externally, and imperfect on the 
side of attachment. The segments are arranged in a moniliform 
order, and sometimes in several parallel and adjoining series of such an 
order of arrangement. The features of divergence from the modern 
examples of the species, exhibited by the Carboniferous specimens, are 
in the direction of a greater thickness of test, the stoloniferous con- 
nection between the chambers is often imperfectly developed, the 
division of segments being at times marked by a simple constriction of 
the test rather than by stoloniferous tubes; whilst in many examples 
there is an approach to the cylindrical form by the margin of the 
chambers almost coalescing on their under sides when the object on 
which they have grown has been a column of small diameter. 

These divergences may be regarded as features of minor conse- 
quence where the general agreement to the type is so close. Average 
size of segments, long diameter 1/75 in.; short diameter 1/125 in. 

Distribution.—Very rare in Great Limestone of Blagill, Allendale, 
but common in the “D” Limestone of the Cowburn and Tipalt 
outcrops. 


Sub-family Endothyrine. 


Genus ARCHELAGENA, noy. 
Syn. Lagena (in part), Brady. 


Shell parasitic or free; either monothalamous or polythalamous. 
Chambers inflated ; ovate, subglobular, or irregular in shape. Poly- 
thalamous examples confused in arrangement. Test thicker than in 
the typical Lagenidx; finely perforated. Texture either entirely cal- 
careous or with only a small proportion of included arenaceous particles. 
Aperture at the termination of a short neck ; in parasitic examples 
the orifice may be defective on the side of attachment, and is then a 
semicircular, slightly produced lip. 

The genus now described may be regarded as bearing a similar 
relation to Lagena that Nodosinella bears to Nodosaria. In both cases 
we probably possess ancestral, generalized types, from which have 
diverged distinct lines of modification leading up to more specialized 


540 Transactions of the Society. 


forms of recent times. The not unfrequent duplication, seen im 
aberrant examples among recent Lagenx, may, perhaps, be instances 
of reversion to type, as seen in the polythalamous examples of 
Carboniferous times, and included in the present genus. 


Archzlagena Howchiniana, Brady, sp. Plate IX. fig. 18. 


Mr. Brady’s description of the monothalamous examples of this 
species is a very accurate one, and needs no adjustment. A more 
extended acquaintance with this form has, however, shown that it is 
much more commonly polythalamous than monothalamous in its habit 
of growth. The chambers usually number from two to twelve, and, 
in rare cases, even up to nearly twenty, and are irregularly grouped 
around the axis of growth. ‘lhe method of growth is apparently by 
budding. ‘lhe chambers differ greatly in relative size, and many 
show more or less distortion in shape by compression through the 
concurrent growth of adjoming segments. ‘There may be one or more 
general orifice to each group of united segments, the latter communi- 
cating by interseptal apertures. 

Possessing the morphological and structural characteristics now 
described, Archxlagena Howchiniana can no longer be consistently 
regarded as belonging to a genus which is essentially monothalamous. 
On the other hand, Lagena Parkeriana, and L. Lebouriana, although 
exhibiting in test structure some points of resemblance to the forms 
classed under the present species, have never been met with except as 
single-chambered and free examples, and may therefore be left, at least 
for the present, in the position assigned them by Mr. Brady. 

Distribution—Not very common; recorded in connection with 
twelve washings from the following:—First Lower Felltop, at 
Penpeugh ; at various localities and horizons of Great Limestone; and 
from the “D” Limestone of Tipalt and Cowburn, the last-named 
limestone being the best bed for the form. 


Genus Enporuyra, Phillips. 
Endothyra conspicua, sp. nov. Plate IX. fig. 12. 


Test nearly circular in lateral outline, compressed, slightly 
asymmetrical bi-laterally, composed of about three convolutions, all of 
which are more or less visible exteriorly. Segments inflated, sub- 
globular, from ten to twelve in the outer whorl. Diameter of large 
specimens 1/20 to 1/16 in. 

This is an interesting variety in which the usually embracing 
character of the genus is but feebly developed. It has probably its 
closest relationship with EH. Bowmanz, some examples of which exhibit 
a considerable umbilical depression not embraced in the fold of the 
outer convolution. It is, however, easily distinguished from the latter 
species, by its more circular outline, its more numerous and globular- 
shaped segments, and, more particularly, in the exposure of the inner 
whorls which are often visible throughout their entire convolutions. In 


Carboniferous Foraminifera. By Rev. W. Howchin. 541 


E. ammonoides there is the same exposure of the inner whorls by the 
only slightly embracing character of the test, but its minute size and 
the number of its convolutions and septal divisions at once distinguish 
it from the present species. This departure from the normal character 
of the genus, shown by EL. conspicua, is not likely to have arisen from 
starved conditions as some of the individuals attain a larger size, 
exceeding those of H. Bowmand, whilst the beds in which they occur 
are somewhat rich in Foraminifera. 

Distribution.—Rare in the “J ” Limestone of the Tipalt, and in 
a limestone, low in the series, situated in a burn between The Banks 
and Lannercost, occurring at three horizons in the limestone, in one 
of which it is moderately common. 


Endothyra circumplicata, sp. nov. Plate VIII. figs. 10, 11. 


Test free, subglobular, irregularly spiral, embracing ; composed of 
three or more convolutions, which, instead of following the same plane 
of growth throughout, become twisted, so that the later convolutions 
are formed more or less at right angles to the plane of the earlier 
segments. Segments numerous, and in their later growths enlarging 
rapidly and becoming ventricose. Later chambers subdivided near their 
umbilical margins by transverse septa. Septal divisions marked 
externally either by depressed lines or slight limbation. Test plicate. 
Exterior surface smooth; white or reddish-white. Texture finely 
arenaceous, and in some cases (?) perforate. The final segment has a 
protruding lip forming its convex or outer margin, with a correspond- 
ing lip or ridge transverse to the peripheral margin and parallel to 
the inner margin of the septal plane. Aperture distinct, oval. 
Diameter 1/25 in. 

This striking variety exhibits an extreme of inequilateral growth. 
In its large size and globose form it somewhat resembles Endothyra 
crassa. ‘The latter includes the “nearly symmetrical,” large, globose 
Endothyrz of the Carboniferous rocks, whilst H. circwmplicata is 
extremely unsymmetrical, and from this cause exhibits considerable 
divergence in internal structure from its more equilateral congeners. 
The umbilical axis is not unfrequently shifted in position by the 
inequilateral plan of growth to the peripheral margin. Transparent 
sections show in many instances a remarkable confusion in the 
arrangement of the earlier chambers with successive foldings, amount- 
ing in some cases to two, three, or four plications of the shell 
substance ; and in the expanded chambers of the final whorl, transverse 
septa, giving rise to small chamberlets, near the umbilical margins 
of the terminal segments. The last segment is sometimes much 
contracted by vertical compression towards the aperture, taking the 
form of a slit which, with its pouting margins and great obliquity of 
the septal plane, gives the shell a very grotesque appearance. ‘he 
shelly investment, consequent upon the laminated construction of the 
test, is very stout in comparison with the other Endothyre, especially 
in its earlier convolutions, and has a clear, smooth, and sometimes 


542 Transactions of the Society. 


lossy surface. The test, whilst finely arenaceous, exhibits great 
uniformity of structure, and when viewed in section by transmitted 
light exhibits a peculiar white opacity of texture not commonly 
seen in members of this genus. 

Distribution. — It is a form apparently much limited in dis- 
tribution. Recorded in four samples, three of these belonging to the 
“‘T)” limestone of the Cowburn and Tipalt districts, and the other 
in “ K” limestone, near West Stone Folds, Cowburn. In the “D” 
limestone it is common. 


Endothyra radiata, var. Tateana, nov. Plate IX. figs. 13-15. 


Test free, nautiloid, nearly circular in peripheral outline, com- 
pressed laterally, embracing, umbilicus sunken, slightly inequi- 
lateral, peripheral margin thin or subcarinate ; convolutions numerous, 
five to six in fully grown examples; chambers very narrow and 
numerous, from 25 to 40 in last convolution; septal walls double ; 
sutural lines slightly excavated ; septation sometimes indistinct and 
often showing considerable irregularity in arrangement on exterior 
surface. ‘I'exture finely arenaceous with large proportion of calcareous 
cement. Diameter of fully grown specimen 1/25 in. 

A fine variety of Endothyra, ditfermg in some minor particulars 
from HE. radiata. ‘The shell attains about twice the diameter of 
typical specimens of the latter species ; it is more symmetrical and 
compressed, and the segments are more numerous and less regular, 
often showing crenulations, meeting at various angles on the surface 
of the test. The duplication of the septal walls is also an important 
feature, and one that has not been observed in connection with any 
other members of the genus. It is well seen, not only in transparent 
sections of this form (Plate IX. fig. 15), but in those examples 
which have been subjected to a degree of weathering, as shown in 
fiz. 14 of the same plate. The double septation gives a higher 
character to the genus than was at first imdicated, and is another 
feature confirmatory of Mr. Brady’s opinion, expressed when working 
out this interesting paleozoic type, of the close analogy which the 
genus bears to the more recent and distinctly calcareous Rotaline series, 
with which Endothyra in its various modifications is closely isomor- 

hie. 
4 I have great pleasure in associating this variety with the name 
of the late Mr. George Tate, I'.G.S., of Alnwick, who was one of the 
earliest and most enthusiastic students of the palzeontology of North- 
umberland. 

Distribution.—Endothyra radiata, var. Tateana is not uncommon 
in the lower Carboniferous beds of south-west Northumberland. It 
was noted in the upper beds of the Great Limestone at Blagill, Alston ; 
but all of the twenty-four localities in which it has been observed, 
with the exception just noted, are at horizons included between the 
«B” and “N” limestones of the Cowburn and Tipalt valleys. 


Carboniferous Foraminifera. By Rev. W. Howchin. 543 


Genus Stacuera, Brady. 
Stacheia moriformis, sp. nov. Plate IX. figs. 19, 20. 


Test parasitic (or free?); globular, subglobular, or, more rarely, 
elongate or complanate in shape. Chambers larger than those of 
allied species, more or less rounded in outline, and often showing a 
roughly concentric or spiral arrangement of segments around the 
axis of growth. Chambers of the superficial layer inflated and tumid, 
raised in hemispherical bosses upon the surface of the test; walls very 
thin, often abraded on their convex surfaces so as to expose the darker 
material fillmg the interior of the chambers. Diameter of globose 
examples, from 1/30 in. to 1/25 in. 

This species is pretty constant in character, and cannot well be 
confounded with any other of the Carboniferous Foraminifera. Its 
globular form and conspicuously inflated chambers are ready means of 
identification, It is often impossible in the other members of this 
genus to mark any superficial indications of the septal divisions, and 
when distinguished they are made apparent only by a faint areolation 
or mottled appearance of the exterior surface: but in Stacheca mort- 
formis the superficial chambers are not unfrequently elevated to the 
extent of half their diameter. The test is not nearly so compact asin 
the allied species, and the chambers are relatively larger, whilst the 
shelly investment is remarkably thin. In this respect, and from a 
greater or less tendency to a spiral arrangement in building up the 
test, there is some morphological analogy to the acervuline 
modifications of Planorbulina, especially when 8. moriformis has 
grown parasitically on a flat surface ; but the subarenaceous and im- 
perforate characters of the test show its affinity to be with the 
Endothyrinz rather than the recent perforate and hyaline forms. 

Distribution.—Stacheia moriformis is not very common in point 
of number of specimens, but is widely distributed through the 
Carboniferous Limestones of the North of England. It occurs in fifty- 
two washings gathered from the following horizons :—First Lower 
Felltop, Second Lower Felltop, Great Limestone, Four-fathom Lime- 
stone, and the “ D,” “ BE,” “G,” “J,” “N,” and “O” Limestones. 


Family LAGENID i. 
Sub-Family Nodosarine. 


Genus Noposar1a, Lamarck. 
Nodosaria (Dentalina) farcimen, Soldani. Plate IX. fig. 21, a, b. 


Amongst the many interesting forms which the “D” limestone 
has revealed must be included the above species. Its lowest strati- 
graphical record hitherto known has been the Upper Permian, 
where it is found associated with several other cognate forms. No 
unquestionable Nodosarian had been found in rocks older than the 
Permian. It is, therefore, of some interest to secure examples of this 
common recent species so far back as the Carboniferous Limestone. In 


544 Transactions of the Society. 


the Permian seas it was scarce, and apparently was still more rare in 
Carboniferous times, when the arenaceous types were in the ascendant. 
Only one undoubted example of this species was obtained from the 
material searched, but with the exception of exhibiting a mineraliza- 
tion corresponding to the much older formation from which it was 
obtained, it does not materially differ from the examples of later age. 
It is a minute shell with a clear calcareous appearance. ‘Test slightly 
compressed laterally. The chambers, which are elliptical in shape, 
number six, in a curved linear series, and increase somewhat rapidly 
in size in the direction of growth. Septal lines marked by oblique 
and rather deep constrictions. Primordial end apiculate. Length 
1/28 in. 

Distribution.—Only known from the “D” Limestone, Tipalt; rare. 


Family ROTALID/. 
Sub-family Rotaline. 
Genus Patenuina, Williamson. 
Patellina Bradyana, sp. nov. Plate IX. figs, 22-25, 


Test free; conical; trochoid; primordial end obtusely pointed ; 
transverse section circular; length equal to two or three times the 
diameter of the test; inferior side slightly concave; external surface 
limbate, exhibiting numerous annular, semi-annular, or spiral whorls of 
raised shell-substance alternating with lines of depression ; depressed 
areas bridged by minute crenulations of the test, which, as raised 
transverse lines, connect the limbate septal ridges. Internal structure 
a simple, undivided and continuous spiral chamber (or alternating 
semi-annular chambers?). Chamber cavity compressed. Umbilical 
region extending almost the entire length of the shell and of nearly 
equal diameter throughout, filled with uniform shell-substance. Con- 
volutions of spire varying from five to twelve; average number ten. 
Aperture a narrow slit, extending from the periphery to the umbilical 
margin. Umbilicus depressed ; or, frequently, marked by a raised 
lip extending from the umbilical termination of the orifice, forming a 
low, semicircular wall defining the central portions of the test. Length 
about 1/88 in.; diameter, at base, 1/100 in. 

This is, perhaps, the most interesting find in the present group of 
new forms. The oldest record of Patellina has not, hitherto, extended 
beyond the Cretaceous formations, in which, as well as in rocks of early 
Tertiary age, the genus was represented by shells of relatively large size 
and complicated structure. ‘The common recent species, P. corrugata, 
exhibits to some extent the subdivision of chambers by secondary 
septa, so remarkably developed in some of the earlier forms. The - 
Carboniferous examples are of a simpler type, and do not possess any 
subdivision of the chamber cavities. Mr. H. B. Brady, in the 
“Challenger Foraminifera,” describes a new recent species, Patellina 
campaneformis, which shows the same simple and undivided chamber 


Carboniferous Foraminifera. By Rev. W. Howchin. 545 


(or chambers) as in P. Bradyana, and it seems probable that the 
palzozoic form has its nearest relationship with this interesting 
but extremely rare species of the present day. ‘The recent species 
combines the twofold plan of growth, of semi-annular, crescentic seg- 
ments in the early whorls, with a true spiral form of chamber in 
the later whorls. From a careful examination of several transparent 
sections of the test of P. Bradyana I cannot satisfy myself that it 
conforms to the normal type, with respect to an alternating series of 
semi-annular segments, but appears to exhibit the generic characters 
under the simplest possible form, that of a non-segmented spiral 
chamber with the spire drawn out from the primordial plane ‘to that 
of an elongated cone. Its spiral growth gives it a likeness to P. Cooke, 
although wanting the subdivision of chambers seen in that species. 
The bridging of the lines of depression by shelly matter, between the 
raised sutures on the external surface, may have been the foreshadow- 
ing of that modification of the type which, in later ages, became more 
definite in the subdivision of the chamber cavities. The chief varia- 
tions to which the Carboniferous form is subject are in the height of 
the spire, the occasional irregularities of the limbate outlines of the 
chamber walls—the latter, at times, being subject to interruption or 
coalescence—or an abnormal constriction or inflation of the test at some 
stage of its growth, producing more or less distortion of outline. . The 
umbilical region is filled with calcareous shell-substance which in 
section has a mottled appearance, but is unsegmented. The only 
species with which Patellina Bradyana is likely to be confounded in 
Carboniferous material are Valvulina palzotrochus or V. Youngi, but 
P. Bradyana has ashorter transverse diameter in comparison with its 
length than either of these forms, its numerous limbate sutures are 
also distinctive, whilst the respective apertures and internal structures 
are widely different. 

As the most striking addition to our knowledge of Carboniferous 
Foraminifera, I have much gratification in associating with the species 
the name of Mr. H. B. Brady, to whose researches we are indebted for 
the first systematic treatment of this group of paleeozoic fossils, 

Distribution.—Only known from the “D” Limestone of the 
Tipalt and Cowburn outcrops. 


With this species I may fitly conclude my notes. In the present 
series details have been given of four genera and of thirteen species 
and varieties not previously known as Carboniferous fossils, some of 
them of peculiar interest. As has already been stated I have still a 
number of specimens which appear to me to belong to the Foramini- 
fera, and if so to types hitherto undescribed, but these I withhold for 
the moment in the hope of obtaining further evidence respecting 
them. 


ADELAIDE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA, 
August 1887. 


546 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


SUMMARY 


OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTAN 
(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), 


MICROSCOPY, &c., 


INCLUDING ORIGINAL COMMUNICATIONS FROM FELLOWS AND OTHERS.* 


ZOOLOGY. 
A. VERTEBRATA :—Embryology, Histology, and General. 


a. Embryology.t 


Kinetic Phenomena of the Egg during Maturation and Fecunda- 
tion.t—Dr. C. O. Whitman finds that the odkinetic phenomena are 
diversiform in the extreme, rarely present regular form-series, and so 
stand in marked contrast with nuclear metamorphoses, which, every- 
where, both in plant and animal cells, exhibit a most remarkable 
uniformity. With regard to the movements of the germinal vesicle and 
pronuclei, the author, from the unique character of many of these 
cytokinetic displays, refuses to consider them as the direct effect of 
nuclear influence. Any hypothesis that refuses to admit that the cyto- 
plasm is endowed with subtle powers of its own, is unable to account 
for the characteristic difference between telolecithal and centrolecithal 
eggs. The remarkable phenomena observed in developing eggs must 
be due to the interaction of nuclear and cytoplasmic forces. There is 
little evidence, in the explanation which is usually given, to support the 
view that the pronuclear asters attract each other. When, however, a 
careful analysis is made, we find three facts which can be said to furnish 
indisputable evidence of attraction between the pronuclei. These are— 
(1) The curved path of the male pronucleus in the amphibian egg; 
(2) The meeting of the pronuclei before reaching the centre of equili- 
brium ; and (3) The centrifugal movement of the earlier pronucleus to 
meet the more lately formed pronucleus. The author amplifies these 

oints. 
: In discussing the receptivity of the ovum for spermatozoa, the dis- 
tinction between receptivity and accessibility is very generally ignored. 
Dr. Whitman believes that the period of receptivity may be said to date 
from the moment the conditions of centripetal attraction are reversed in 
the germinal vesicle. A period of non-saturation begins with the centri- 


* The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial “ we,” and they do 
not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers noted, 
nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of this part of 
the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually published, and to 
describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, &c., which are either new or have 
not been previously described in this country. 

+ This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so called, 
but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, and Reproduction, and allied 
subjects. ¢ Journ. of Morphol., i. (1887) pp. 227-52. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 547 


fugal movement of the germinal vesicle, and terminates with the penetra- 
tion of the spermatic body. As soon as all the elements of saturation 
are present, external manifestations of centripetal attraction cease, and 
there remains only the work of internal equilibration, which ends with 
the centripetal march of the pronuclei. 

From this point of view it is idle to talk about mechanical con- 
trivances for preventing the admission of supernumerary spermatozoa, 
as if the receptivity of the ovum were not self-regulating. The idea 
that the spermatozoon remains passive until after the extrusion of the 
polar globules seems to be quite erroneous. 

In the copulation of the sexual cells, the most interesting point is 
that attraction between the ooplasm and the spermatozoon can manifest 
itself at a distance. This fact is, however, not quite unique, for some- 
thing analogous is seen in the attraction between the pronuclei. There 
are, it seems, two distinct kinds of attraction; there is that of one 
nuclear body upon another, which may be called nuclear attraction, and 
the action of nuclear bodies on the ooplasm which manifests itself in 
astral lines, and which may be called centripetal attraction. The at- 
traction of the egg for the spermatozoon is probably polar, and the place 
of penetration a predetermined point or region. On this point, however, 
the evidence is very conflicting ; the most important memoir on this 
point is that of Kupffer and Benecke on the fertilization of the egg of 
the lamprey. The important points in this and in other essays are 
indicated by Dr. Whitman. 


Human Ovum.*—Dr. W. Nagel gives a full account of his observa- 
tions on that rare subject of satisfactory investigation—the human ovum. 
The principal results have been already noticed.t 

The first part of the lengthy paper is taken up with historical 
reference to previous observations, of which a full bibliography is 
appended. After describing his material and mode of investigation, the 
author discusses and figures the primordial ovum and primary follicle, 
the subsequent growth of both of these, and the conditions observable in 
maturity. In the latter, he describes (1) the epithelium of the ovum; 
(2) the zona pellucida; (3) a perivitelline space; (4) a narrow, clear 
cortical zone of the vitellus ; (5) a broader, finely granular, protoplasmic 
zone ; (6) a central deutoplasmic zone; (7) the germinal vesicle and 
spot. The ovary of a newly born child and that of an ape (Macacus) are 
described, and many relevant questions are incidentally discussed. 


Spermatogenesis of Mammals.{—Prof. V. v. Ebner communicates an 
important memoir on the spermatogenesis of mammals, in which he 
resumes the investigation which he busied himself with seventeen years 
ago. He discusses in the first two chapters the nomenclature employed 
by investigators, the material and method of investigation, and the actual 
state of the question. In a third chapter he investigates the relation of 
the basal nuclei of the spermatoblasts to the cells of Sertoli and the 
spermatogonia of vy. La Valette St. George. Fourthly he shows in what 
cells within the testicular canals division is really to be observed. Then 
he discusses the granular excretions of the spermatoblasts, the absorption 
of the fat by Sertoli’s cells, and the general physiology of the spermato- 
blasts. The last chapter is occupied with a description of the topo- 


* Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 342-423 (2 pls.). 
+ See this Journal, 1887, p. 932. t Tom. cit., pp. 236-92 (3 pls.). 


548 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


graphical distribution of the various developmental stages, and with a 
discussion of the conclusions to be drawn from these. 

The true spermatogonia are the cells of the peripheral layer. They 
multiply in that position by indirect division. The spermatogonia grow 
into spermatocytes (= Henle’s cells) each of which, after double division, 
produces four spermatides (= sperm-cells). Then a large number of 
spermatides, originating from several spermatogonia, come into associa- 
tion with a follicular cell (= Sertoli’s cell), and form a spermatogemma 
(= spermatoblast). In this finally the spermatosomata (= spermatozoa) 
develope from the spermatides. By this von Ebner declares his deter- 
mination to abide, unless some firmly established counter observations are 
forthcoming. 


Embryology of Lizard.*—Dr. H. Orr has worked chiefly at the 
development of Anolis sagrzi, but has also examined some stages of 
Spherodactylus notatus and Liocephalus carinatus. The notochord arises 
by a differentiation of the linear median area of the dorsal wall of the 
primitive intestine ; and this condition seems to be primitive, for the 
notochord continues as far as the anterior extremity of the intestine. 
The mode of development of the notochord and hypophysis seems to 
point to some peculiar relation between the two organs; with these the 
muscular elements of the head are intimately related. At an early 
stage there is seen to be a median connection of the head-cavities and 
notochord, which the author proposes to call the cceelenteric zone. The 
first appearance of the tip of the notochord, the celenteric zone and 
head-cavities, is in the form of a small mass of cells, apparently budded 
from the hypoblast. This mass is fused with the epiblast. In some 
individuals the notochord and ccelenteric zone separate from the epiblast 
at the same time, though retaining connection with each other. In other 
individuals the ccelenteric zone separates from the epiblast much earlier 
than does the notochord, and disappears ; while the notochord remains a 
long time connected with the epiblast or hypophysis. 

‘I'he oral fusion of epiblast and hypoblast is effected very early. The 
gill-cleft rudiments first appear as paired pouch-like protrusions from 
the dorso-lateral parts of the alimentary canal; the first and second are 
the first and second clefts, and are the first to acquire an external open- 
ing; then, in order, the third and fourth, but the fifth rudiment does not 
seem to get an external opening. The part of the alimentary canal from 
which the gill-clefts open is, comparatively, extremely large. On the 
ventral surface of the large gill-chamber the first rudiment of the thyroid 
gland appears. In horizontal section it has a circular outline; it is a 
compact thickening of the wall of the gill-chamber, and its cells are 
arranged radially. The caudal intestine appears to continue to grow in 
the neurenteric region, even after its anterior part behind the anus has 
atrophied; this atrophy obtains from before backwards, and for a time 
the proximal end seems to atrophy about as fast as the distal end grows. 

The segmentation of the mesoblast into somites is effected from before 
backwards, and the first somite appears at just the distance behind the 
ear that would equal the space occupied by one somite. With regard 
to the mode of origin of the segmental duct, about which much has been 
recently written, Dr. Orr states that near the region of the neurenteric 
canal, opposite that part of the unsegmented mesoblast which has not 


* Journ. of Morphology, i, (1887) pp. 311-63 (5 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 549 


yet divided into a dorsal and a ventral part, there appears a small linear 
thickening of the epiblast. This thickening is the same on either side, 
and lies horizontally and a little above the level in which the intermediate 
cell-mass is to appear. Posteriorly this epiblastic thickening fades away, 
but in the direction of the head it becomes more marked, and appears in 
cross-section as a distinct semicircular clump of five to eight cells 
adhering to the epiblast. A little further forward it becomes gradually 
separated from the epiblast, and lies as a solid cord about midway 
between the epiblast and the rudiment of the Wolffian body. Still 
further forward the cord of cells acquires a lumen, and lies in contact 
with the Wolffian body, so that it is now easily recognizable as the 
segmental duct. The development of the circulatory system agrees 
generally with the account given by Shipley of the same system in Petro- 
myzon. This portion of the paper concludes with an account of the 
development of the brain. 

In the second part the bearing of the facts of the development of 
the Lizard on certain speculations regarding the phylogeny of the 
Vertebrata is pointed out. 


Gastrula of Amphibians.*-—Dr. Schwinck discusses the nature of 
the gastrula in amphibian development. Bufo vulgaris, Rana temporaria, 
and Triton alpestris were investigated. The clearest results were obtained 
from the study of Bufo; frog ova are more difficult. The general con- 
clusion established is that the whole of the endoderm, including the 
dorsal portion, arises from a differentiation of yolk-cells. The gastrula 
of Amphibians occupies a midway position between that of Selachia and 
that of Amphioxus. In all, the dorsal blastopore wall is the more active, 
and it is there that the formation of endoderm first begins. ‘“ At the 
close of gastrulation, an archigastrula might be hypothetically formed 
from the amphigastrula by supposing the yolk-cells to be replaced by a 
single layer of endoderm.” 


Development of Petromyzon fluviatilis.j;—Prof. A. Goette has a 
preliminary notice of his observations on the development of Petromyzon 
fluviatilis. Gastrulation is effected as in the Amphibia; the archenteron 
commences with the prostoma, which lies beneath the germinal cavity ; 
its dorsal wall becomes differentiated into ecto- and endoderm, and this 
differentiation is continued on to the lateral parts of the thick lower 
half. The mesoderm does not appear till gastrulation is complete, when 
it is developed in the dorsal endoderm. ‘This is at first multilaminate, 
and the lower layer gives rise to mesodermal plates. Segmentation of 
the mesoderm commences in the anterior portion of the region of the 
trunk, and is thence continued backwards and forwards. 

The notochord is developed in the way described by Calberla; its 
hinder end has at first no definite termination, but is lost in the cell- 
mass at the dorsal margin of the prostoma, where the ectoderm passes 
into the endoderm. There is no neurenteric canal in the embryos or 
larvee of Petromyzon; the prostoma becomes the anus, and the primitive 
lumen of the mid-gut is replaced by a second which arises more deeply, 
while the primitive lumina of the fore- and hind-gut are retained. 

The spinal nerves do not arise in the way described by Sagemelhl ; 
the several rudiments of the spinal nerves become, secondarily, dorso- 


* Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 29-31. + Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 160-3. 
1888. 2 Q 


550 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


lateral appendages of the medullary tube, but they are not outgrowths 
of it, but purely epidermal structures. The first rudiments give rise to 
the dorsal roots and their ganglia, while the ventral roots do not arise 
till later ; they are not, either, independent outgrowths of the medullary 
tube, but connections between it and the adjacent ganglia, which gra- 
dually become drawn out into cords. The rami dorsales grow out from 
the upper end of the ganglia, and the separation, therefore, into sensory 
and motor fibres does not correspond with the development of the dorsal 
and ventral roots. In addition to the spinal nerves, and independently 
of their rudiments, the lateral nerve appears as an epidermal ganglionie 
mass which, later on, becomes connected with the root of the vagus, and 
grows out horizontally backwards; there are also five ganglionic bodies 
within the mesoderm or above the gill-pouches, which only secondarily 
enter into connection with one another, and with the vagus; they give 
off branchial branches. The whole peripheral nervous system does not 
therefore arise as one, nor even from one and the same germinal layer. 
The histogenesis of the nervous system of Petromyzon is essentially 
similar to that of the Amphibia; the nerve-fibres and nerve-cells appear 
separately, and only become connected secondarily. 

The formation of mesodermal segments is continued as far as the 
most anterior end of the head; as in the Amphibia, the head consists of 
four mesodermal segments; they give rise to the trigeminal, facial- 
auditory, glossopharyngeal, and vagus nerves; the hypoglossus is re- 
garded as the first spinal nerve of the trunk. The eight gill-sacs are 
homologues of the inner gill-sac of the anurous Amphibia ; the “ enteric 
gills” of the lamprey are therefore essentially distinct from the ordinary 
“ dermal gills” of Fishes and Amphibians. 

The heart is developed behind the branchial region below the 
cesophagus, so that the pericardial cavity communicates superiorly with 
the ccelom; the endocardium is formed by the endoderm, and the blood 
is formed in the ventral endoderm behind the rudiment of the liver. 
In correspondence with the position of the heart the pronephros lies 
exactly above the pericardiae cavity. 


Egg-shell of Lepadogaster.* —M. F. Guitel has investigated the 
mode of attachment of the eggs of Lepadogaster. With moderate mag- 
nification a small clear circle surrounded by a dark zone may be seen at 
the centre of the base of the shell of LE. bimaculatus. Towards the 
centre a number of small rods may be seen to converge. They are 
cylindrical and bifurcated, and are longest at the edge, where they 
project around the base of the egg. At the moment when the egg is 
laid, the two terminal filaments of each small eylinder are soft, and they 
easily fix themselves to the least asperities of the surface to which they 
are applied ; they then harden, and the egg is thus firmly attached to the 
substratum on which the mother has deposited it. The author finds that 
this fixation apparatus is secreted by the follicle of the egg, the follicle 
itself being derived from the germinal epithelium. Moreover, the 
secretion is on the hemisphere of fixation, and this is always the one 
which is directed outwards. In a perfectly ripe ovary all the eggs have 
the hemi-ellipsoidal form of the deposited egg, and they are all attached 
to the wall of the gland by the surface which, after oviposition, will be 
fixed by means of the fixing-apparatus. 


* Comptes Rendus, cy. (1887) pp. 876-8. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 551 


Albuminoid Constituents of White of Egg.*—MM. G. Corin and 
E. Berard have investigated the albuminoid constituents of the white of 
egg. They find that of those which are coagulable by heat two belong 
to the class of globulins and three to that of true albumins; the quan- 
tity of peptones increases with the age of the egg. There is a colouring 
matter which is not coagulated by heat, but is taken up by every 
coagulation which occurs in it. The albumins strictly so-called have, 
when made opalescent by an increase of temperature, a property which 
has hitherto been supposed to be peculiar to globulins; that, namely, of 
being precipitated by sulphate of magnesia. It is possible that albumin, 
just before coagulation, passes through a stage in which it has the 
composition and properties of globulins. 


Embryochemical Investigations.{|—Prof. L. Liebermann has inves- 
tigated some of the less well known constituents of the egg of the fowl. 
He finds that the germinal disc chiefly consists of albuminoid bodies, 
belonging apparently to the globulin group; there seem to be also 
smaller quantities of lecithin or some similar substance. Few fatty 
acids were found in the yolk. The fat of the egg consists of a mixture 
of a solid and a fluid fat with some cholesterin. The firm fat consists 
chiefly of tripalmitin with, probably, a very little stearine; the fluid or 
true oil of the egg is a glyceride. Both are much poorer in carbon than 
other animal fats. The fat of fresh unhatched egg does not contain any 
considerable quantity of free fatty acids, which are, however, developed 
to a considerable extent during hatching. Fowls’ eggs do not contain 
any appreciable quantity of organic phosphates,—there is, however, a 
relatively large quantity of calcium which probably exists in the form 
of calcic albuminate; there is no direct evidence of the presence of 
sulphates; the quantity of chlorine is variable, but it is not certain on 
what the variability depends. There may be other inorganic consti- 
tuents, but, if so, their amount must be very small. The albumen of the 
egg is capable of forming, in the presence of strong acids, phosphates 
with the phosphoric acid, while, in the presence of dilute acids, soluble 
organic phosphates are formed. 

In the second portion of the essay the metastasis of the egg while 
being hatched is dealt with. The embryo itself always becomes richer 
in mineral matters, fat, and albumen, but the dry substance of the whole 
contents of the egg, taken as a whole, diminishes considerably; the con- 
siderable increase in the fat of the chick is not due to the formation of 
fresh fat, but is chiefly dependent on the fact that what remains of the 
nutrient yolk is taken up into the abdominal cavity of the chick. The 
constituents of the egg are used up regularly during the period of 
hatching; the quantity of mineral matter remains almost unaltered. 
Notwithstanding the taking up of oxygen, there is a loss in the amount 
of that gas. The loss in weight suffered by the egg is obscured by the 
evaporation of water; the undeveloped egg loses more water than the 
developed, and on the last day of hatching the ripe chick in the egg 
contains more water than an equal quantity of untertilized egg-matter. 
The embryo uses up oxygen, of which a part only becomes carbonic 
acid ; this indicates the formation of a fresh quantity of water. 

The special chemistry of the embryonic body is next dealt with. In 


* Bull. Acad. R. Sci. Belg., lvii. (1888) pp. 643-62. 
{ Arch. f. d. Gesammt. Physiol. (Pfliiger) xliii. (1888) pp. 71-151. 
Ze, 2 


Q 


552 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


it, just as much as in freely living animals, the firm substance increases 
considerably at the expense of the watery; the inorganic constituents 
take but a very small share in this increase. At the beginning of deve- 
lopment there are formed tissues which are very rich in water, and this 
richness of water steadily diminishes as development goes on. |The 
substances soluble in water are so disposed that their absolute quantity 
increases with increasing development, while their relative quantity (as 
compared with the other constituents) diminishes. It is just the reverse 
with the constituents which are soluble in alcohol. The fatty matters 
undergo considerable increase. The quantity of albumens and albu- 
minoids which are insoluble in water absolutely increases as develop- 
ment goes on, but relatively the quantity remains almost unchanged. 

Among other points dealt with by the author are the presence of 
mucin, the quantity of hemoglobin, and the composition of the embryonic 
feathers and of bone as compared with those of older forms. 


B. Histology.* 


Cell-Studies.jt—Herr T. Boveri believes that the course of karyo- 
kinetic division may be generally described in the following terms :— 
The chromatic nuclear material becomes collected together into a definite 
number of isolated pieces of a form characteristic of the kind of cell—the 
chromatic elements; an achromatic filamentar figure is formed into two 
poles, either from the substance of the nucleus or from that of the cell. 
The chromatic elements, so far as their number, form, and size allow 
it, are deposited in the equatorial plane of the achromatic figure; the 
chromatic elements divide into two halves, one of which makes its way 
towards either pole; the daughter elements break up in the framework 
of the new nuclei. 

In the ova of Ascaris lumbricoides the germinal vesicle has, in the 
earliest stage, the typical structure of the resting nucleus, and we are 
justified in supposing that the chromatic elements arise from the frame- 
work in exactly the same way as in other cases, though the details cannot 
be certainly made out in consequence of the small size of the object. 
The arrangement of the elements in an equatorial plate, their transverse 
division, and the formation of daughter-plates are effected in just the 
same way as they are now known to be in other cases, and especially 
in the ova of Arthropods. The only point of difference is the relation 
of the daughter-elements which remain in the egg after the expulsion of 
the first polar globule, for these remain isolated, and so are the direct 
mother-elements of the next spindle. 

In the germinal vesicle of the ovum of Ascaris megalocephala (Carnoy’s 
type) two independent portions of chromatin are found in the earliest 
known stage; though nothing is certainly known of their mode of 
formation, it may be assumed that they are derived from a typical 
nuclear framework. This conversion, however, of the reticulum into 
the chromatic elements, which in other cells and in some ova (A. lumbri- 
coides) directly precedes division, appears in most eggs to take a long 
time. The important difference in the eggs of the type of Van Beneden 
is that there is but one chromatic element; this seems to be unique. 

There are many reasons for supposing that the division of the chro- 


* This section is limited to papers relating to Cells and Fibres. 
+ Jenaisch. Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., xxi. (1887) pp. 423-515 (4 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 553 


matic elements sometimes happens at a time when there is no indication 
of the achromatic figures of division. The most striking of these cases 
has been lately described by Flemming. Similar phenomena have been 
observed by the author in the eggs of Ascaris. In the germinal vesicle 
of A. lumbricoides the twenty-four rods exhibit the most distinct transverse 
division, long before the germinal vesicle begins to be converted into the 
spindle. 

‘ After considering several cases in different forms the author expresses 
his belief that they form parts of a series in the degeneration of the 
process of nuclear and cellular division. In the case of Corydalis cava, 
described by Strasburger, the process is least rudimentary; two typical 
daughter nuclei arise, but these again fuse into a single nucleus; in 
Thysanozoon and A. megalocephala daughter stars or plates are formed, 
but at once pass into a single resting nucleus. In the cells of Flemming 
and Carnoy there is a division of the chromatic elements, but no 
arrangement in two groups. 

Herr Boveri suggests that in the parthenogenetic eggs described by 
Weismann as having only one directive corpuscle we have to do with 
the same process as in the eggs of Ascarids; there are two divisions, 
but the second is limited to division of the chromatic elements. If this 
be so, the parthenogenetic development is not to be regarded as dependent 
on the suppression of the development of the second directive corpuscle, 
but by its retention in the egg, and the fusion of its nucleus with the 
ovarian nucleus. The second directive corpuscle may then be regarded 
as playing the part of the spermatozoon, and it may be said that 
parthenogenesis is due to fertilization by the second directive cor- 

uscle. 

In the achromatic nuclear figure the mode of origin of the spindle, 
and the complete want of polar rays are of significance. The often dis- 
cussed question whether the nuclear spindle is derived from the substance 

of the nucleus or of the cell may, in the case of Carnoy’s type of A. 
megalocephala, be certainly decided in favour of the former. 

A number of points in Carnoy’s account of the phenomena of matura- 
tion of the ova of Nematodes are discussed, and corrections offered. 


Flemming on the Cell.*—Prof. N. Flemming has been investigating 
the cellular division in the spermatocytes of Salamandra maculosa. He 
finds that these cells exhibit a remarkable dimorphism of mitosis; in 
the heterotypical form the chromatic formations exhibit metakinesis. 
The two forms, the other of which may be called homeotypical, are 
sometimes found together, but, as a rule, the heterotypical form is found 
in the first multiplication of the testicular epithelium after fecundation 
(April or May). In both types the chromatic filaments undergo a 
longitudinal division. All the differences, it should be remarked, pre- 
sented by mitosis, whether in spermatocytes or other kinds of cells, are 
simple peculiarities of form and aspect, and are in no way fundamental. 
In the heterotypical form the extremities of one pair of divided filaments 
unite in the same way as in the egg of Ascaris megalocephala; the united 
parts are, later on, placed at the equator, and when they become 
definitely separated, one might believe that the separation of the loops 
was effected transversely, whereas it is due to longitudinal division. 


* Abstract in Arch. Zool. Expér. et Gén., v. (1887) pp. xxxiii.-y. Original 
source not cited. 


554 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Finally, a second longitudinal division of the filaments takes place in 
the daughter-cells during the Diaster-phase. 

In the homeeotypical form the divided filaments, after separating 
from one another, during metakinesis, remain for a long time in the 
region of the equator. The appearance of the figures might lead to the 
erroncous opinion that there had been no longitudinal fission of the 
filaments. 

The number of primary segments is, in both types, only half of that 
which it is in the mitosis of other kinds of cells of Salamandra (twelve 
instead of twenty-four). All the differences are reduced to one chief 
fact—the prolongation of the process united to a special form of 
metakinesis, that is to say from that phase in which the unfolded 
segments separate from one another to form the two groups of daughter 
figures. These special forms are found, with very similar characters, in 
the egg of Ascaris (according to Van Beneden), and probably (according 
to Carnoy) in the spermatocytes of Arthropoda. As yet they have only 
been found in sexual cells. 

These observations throw light on the remark of Carnoy that the 
characteristic phenomena of karyokinesis are variable and that no case 
appears to be essential. It is possible that in the small spermatocytes 
of Arthropods the first longitudinal division of the filaments escaped 
Carnoy’s notice, and so led him to a generalization which Flemming 
shows to be inexact. 


Cell-division.*—Dr. T. Schottliinder reports the results of his re- 
searches on nuclear and cell-division in the endothelium of the inflamed 
cornea. His principal conclusions are as follows :— 

(1) In some cases irritation of the frog cornea by chloride of zine 
simply causes rapid decomposition of the endothelium. This happens 
with prolonged irritation, or with weak animals. (2) With moderate 
irritation and strong animals certain changes are seen from the second 
day onwards, which seem to be progressive, and doubtfully suggest 
amoeboid movements of the cells, or direct segmentation, or direct frag- 
mentation. (3) From the seventh day the mitotic changes of regenera- 
tion begin, and continue till the fifteenth day. 

(4) The mitoses are for the most part typical. The anaphases are 
remarkable for the splitting of the achromatic connecting threads, which 
appears to mark the completion of division, and recalls the cell-plate 
formation in plants. (5) Various abnormal cellular figures occur, 
especially characterized by varied disposition of the chromatic loops. 
(6) Multiple nuclear division rarely but really occurs, both in regular 
fashion and with certain irregularities of procedure. (7) Among the 
deviations from the typical mitosis must be noted certain figures which 
may possibly represent indirect fragmentation. 


Karyokinesis and Heredity.t—Prof. W. Waldeyer has lately pub- 
lished a series of papers on the phenomena of karyokinesis and their 
relation to the problems of heredity. He confines himself for the most 
part to a summary of past researches, in which the results and 
divergences of Hertwig, van Beneden, Nussbaum, Carnoy, Weismann, 


* Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 426-82 (1 pl.). 
+ ‘Ueber die Karyokinese und ihre Bedeutung fiir die Vererbung,’ Leipzig, 
1887. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 500 


and Zacharias are stated and criticized. Naturally much space is 
devoted to a discussion of the much disputed question of the behaviour 
ef the pronuclei. 


Cellular Statics.*—Prof. L. Errera has investigated the statics of 
ceell-form, comparing them with soap-bubbles. It is interesting to notice 
that in the same year (1887), Leblanc, Fuchs, Hrrera, and Berthold 
were independently at work on the same problem. 

At the moment of appearance the cell-membrane is extremely thin, 
delicate, plastic, and changeable in its particles. Like similar fluid 
lamelle, it tends to assume that form which wouid be taken by a 
weightless fluid lamella under the same conditions, and to exhibit a 
minimal surface and constant curvature. Apart from the mere shape of 
the cell, questions of division, wall-formation, and the like are discussed 
in a suggestive way. Even the thirteen conclusions, however, involve 
technicalities which hardly admit of compression. 


Fusion of Lymphatic Cells into Plasmodia.;—M. A. Michel does 
not accept the explanation of Mr. Geddes, by which the fusion of lymph- 
cells of Lumbricus is compared to that seen in Myxomyceies. 'The 
lymph when first collected contains a large number of flattened branched 
cells; after a few minutes’ exposure to the air these become spherical in 
form, with pointed projections; some elongate and ramify into proto- 
plasmic prolongations, which constantly change their form, especially if 
placed in a warm chamber at 30°. In about half an hour these cells 
form a plexus; there is a gradual concentration. At the end of two or 
three hours there are only rounded masses with peripheral prolongations. 
The free cells give out a transparent protoplasmic layer which is often 
much vacuolated and of such delicacy that its boundaries can only be 
made out with difficulty ; some of the cells meet and form a continuous 
layer with spaced granular centres, each with a nucleus, or they form 
fine complicated or amceboid plexuses. Finally, the masses die at the 
end of some hours, and break up into rounded elements, each of which 
has its nucleus. 

The author points out that, even in the warm chamber, the living 
masses have no general movements; the only changes which occur are 
due to the general contraction and rupture ef very extended filaments. 
If isolated moving cells are carefully followed it will be seen that, 
among the massed cells, some will separate from and leave the fused 
mass. These masses, when observed with a high magnifying power, do 
not present the homogeneity which would be exhibited if the fusion 
were real. The circular strie which may be noticed suggest that there 
has been a tangential displacement of imprisoned cells. The best 
results are obtained with the vapour of osmic acid, and staining with 
picro-carminate of ammonia ; chromo-nitric liquid (Perenyi’s fluid) shows 
the distinct cells with their nuclei. 

In addition to the objections raised by these considerations, the author 
points out that death occurs successively at different points, and that 
each element may be made to swell by water into an agglomeration of 
vesicles pressed one against another, and he concludes that the fusion of 
the cells is only pseudo-plasmodic. 


* Biol. Centralbl, vii. (1888) pp. 728-31 (60 Versamml. Deutsch. Naturf. 
Wiesbaden, 1887). 
t Comptes Rendus, cvi. (1888) pp. 1555-8. 


556 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Secreting Cells of Intestinal Epithelium.*—Herr J. Paneth has 
made a detailed investigation of the histology of the secreting cells of 
epithelium of the small intestine. The subjects of research were mainly 
newt and mouse. By far the fittest staining reagent was safranin, used 
after Pfitzner’s method. 

His chief conclusions are as follows :— 

The goblet cells of the small intestine arise from ordinary epithelial 
cells. The secretion appears first in the form of granules. A portion 
of the protoplasm and the nucleus persist but undergo certain changes. 
If a reticulum be found in the theca of these goblet-cells, it is not proto- 
plasmic, but consists of secretion. After the secretion is emptied, the 
goblet-cell becomes again epithelial. ' 

In the crypts of various mammalian intestines, secreting cells occur 
which are neither goblet-cells, nor mucous, nor pancreatic. They lie at 
the bottom of the crypts, and are filled with granules of variable, and 
often large, size. 


Spinal Ganglion-cells.;—Herr H. Daae has investigated the spinal 
ganglion-cells of mammals, and especially those of the horse. His chief 
results are as follows:—The spinal ganglion-cells of the horse are so far 
unipolar, since each cell is associated with one large nerve-fibre. But 
only in some cases is this process undivided. Often it divides within or 
outside the capsule into many thin medullary fibres, which may 
ramify and form by the union of their smaller branches a coil. From 
this there issue, in variable number, terminal fibres, without medullary 
sheath, and in connection with the body of the cell. These the author 
calls “origin fibres.” Where only two such origin fibres are present 
the cells are therefore bipolar, and the poles lie apart. Where there are 
more than two origin fibres, the cells are multipolar, even though the 
multiple processes unite into one main fibre. The peculiar ramification 
and reunion of the fibres in the aforesaid coil appears to have been 
hitherto overlooked. 


Axis-cylinder and Nerve-cells.{—Dr. J. Jakimovitch has investi- 
gated, by the silver nitrate method, the histology of the nervous system. 
His objects of investigation ranged from mammals to fishes, and also 
included insects. A short summary of the history of past research is 
prefixed. 

The chief conclusions arrived at are as follows:—The axis-cylinder 
and the nerve-cell are constructed on the same type. The latter is only 
a nucleated enlargement of the former. Both consist of delicate fibrils 
and an intermediate substance. The primitive fibrils include two 
distinct substances; a clear unstained component alternates with a 
brown-stained material, so as to produce a striated appearance. The 
stained substance is dense, elastic, and more solid than the clear sub- 
stance. The two may be separated by maceration, and the primitive 
fibril is resolved into nervous particles (“ particules nerveuses ”), which 
form the primitive elements. They are irregularly disposed in the 
cylinder and cell in the resting state; but group themselves to form 
striz during activity. The strie are nowise artificial ; their state varies 
after death. The same essential appearances are seen throughout the series. 


* Arch, f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 113-91 (8 pls.). 
¢ Ibid., pp. 223-35 (2 pls.). 
} Journ. de PAnat. et de la Physiol., xxiii. (1888) pp. 142-68 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 557 


y. General.* 


Growth by Intussusception.j — Prof. O. Biitschli discusses the 
general question whether we must suppose a growth of the plasma by 
intussusception. He states the well-known theory, and notes its general 
acceptance, and the recent criticism. Whatever be true of starch-grains 
and cell-wall, in regard to the plasma itself intussusception has seemed 
to most the only possible mode of growth. But the modern recognition 
of the reticular, vacuolate, or webbed structure of protoplasm seems to 
Biitschli to suggest another possibility. Like others, he distinguishes 
in the Protozoon body two substances—the web-forming plasma proper, 
the included more fluid chylema. The existence of such structures 
makes it quite possible that newly formed plasma molecules are directly 
apposed to the extremely fine walls of the plasmic web. 


Remarkable Case of Mutualism.{—Dr. C. P. Sluiter describes a 
remarkable case of mutualism, in which two species of Trachichthys (or 
Amphiprion) live with certain large tropical Actinie. The fishes swim 
about between the numerous tentacles, notwithstanding the presence of 
numerous stinging organs. Here the fishes appear to be safe against the 
attacks of larger fishes, and they never go far from their hosts. While 
there can be no difficulty in seeing the advantage to the fish, there is 
but little in detecting the benefit to the Actinian. The continual move- 
ments of the fish bring about an advantageous change of water; and it 
has been observed that one species brings food to the Actinian. 


B. INVERTEBRATA. 


Blood of Invertebrata.§S—M. L. Cuénot, after some remarks on the 
general composition and function of blood, gives a brief account of the 
results of his observations on various groups. Notwithstanding the 
statements of Foettinger and Howell, he denies the existence of hemo- 
globin in Echinoderms; in them the amcebocytes are almost the only 
nutrient parts of the blood. In Insects the liquid of the coelom contains 
a dissolved albuminoid, varying in colour, which has both respiratory 
and nutrient functions. In the blood there are a number of typical 
amoebocytes, which are produced by a large gland which completely 
surrounds the heart, and even extends over the aleform muscles; this 
gland is formed of a connective stroma filled with nuclei and fine granu- 
lations. These nuclei gradually surround the albuminogenous ferment, 
and escape from the gland. This lymphatic gland is found in the larve 
as well as in the imagines of all orders of Insects, with the single excep- 
tion of Chironomus plumosus, in which there is hemoglobin. In Scorpions 
the lymphatic gland is an elongated body, situated on the dorsal part of 
the nerve-chain; it seems to be merely a spongy diverticulum of the 
dorsal artery of the nerve-chain. 

In the crayfish, crab, and Pagurus the blood-fluid, in addition to its 
ordinary albuminoids, contains amcebocytes with a yellowish ferment; 
these are produced by a gland which is situated in the gill, and which 
is so arranged that the just oxygenated blood traverses it, and carries 


* This section is limited to papers which, while relating to Vertebrata, have a 
direct or indirect bearing on Invertebrata also. 

+ Biol. Centralbl., vii. 44888) pp. 161-4. 

t Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 240-3. 

§ Arch. Zool. Exper. et Gén., v. (1888) pp. xliii.—vii. 


558 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


away the ripe elements that have been formed in it. The gland is 
merely a connective reticulum in which nuclei are scattered. 

In Mollusca the lymphatic gland is generally placed near the 
respiratory apparatus ; in Gastropods it varies considerably in position 
and relation. 

In the Oligocheta the amcebocytes are formed by the so-called 
hepatic layers of the intestine; in Hirudinea they form the bothryoidal 
tissue of Ray Lankester; the cells are often of large size, and contain 
large yellow or greenish granules. The blood of Gephyreans has a re- 
markable likeness to that of lower Vertebrates, well marked amcebocytes 
with a yellow ferment and nucleated corpuscles containing a colourless 
liquid different from hemoglobin being found in it; in the Tunicata 
there appear to be two kinds of elements, but they are very different 
from those of Vertebrates, 


Pelagic Animals at Great Depths and their Relations to the 
Surface Fauna.*—Dr. C. Chun has made a number of interesting and 
important observations on pelagic animals living at great depths, which 
are reviewed by Prof. Alexander Agassiz.f From a depth of 1300 metres 
Dr. Chun brought up a large pelagic fauna; small craspedote Meduse, 
Ctenophores, Tomopteride, Sagitte, Alciopide, larvee of Decapod Crus- 
tacea, Appendiculari#, Pteropoda, and small transparent Cephalopods. 
Dr. Chun assumes that there were no currents at the spots whence he 
obtained his rich hauls, but Prof. Agassiz thinks there is nothing to 
show that when so near the shore as he was there is not a more or less 
active interchange of the fauna from the shore slopes to that of greater 
depths. If a deep-sea pelagic fauna should be found in the deep water 
of oceanic basins it would help to explain the manner in which the deep- 
sea fauna obtains its food. Prof. Agassiz thinks that Chun’s results 
merely prove that in a close sea (the Mediterranean) near shore there is, 
even at considerable depths, a great mixture of true deep-sea types and 
surface pelagic animals which sink at certain times far beyond the limits 
usually assigned to them. 

Many of the so-called surface pelagic types have been proved by 
deep-sea expeditions to be the young of abyssal species. Chun has, 
however, clearly proved that many embryonic stages of surface pelagic 
animals are only found at considerable depths. Deep-sea fishing with a 
properly closing net promises to be a material help to embryological 
investigations. 

Dr. Chun considers that the great increase of temperature at the 
surface compels surface pelagic animals to seek cooler depths; while 
allowing this for some groups, Prof. Agassiz thinks that the calm or 
ruffled condition of the surface is a more powerful influence. It is only 
on calm nights that a good harvest of surface animals can be obtained. 
In his own experience of surface collecting Prof. Agassiz “never met 
with such prodigious masses of surface pelagic animals as on the hottest 
days of our dredging expeditions. When the sea happened to be smooth 
as glass under a blazing tropical sun it seemed as if the water was nearly 
solid as far as the eye could reach with countless surface animals of all 
sorts.” 

Prof. Agassiz thinks. that there is nothing to show that the more 
active deep-sea Crustacea, Fishes, Cephalopods, Pteropods, Annelids, 


* Bibliotheca Zoologica, i. (4to, Cassel, 1888) pp. 1-66 (5 pls.). 
+ Amer. Journ, Sci., xxxv. (1888) pp. 420-4. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 559 


Acalephs, Polyps, Rhizopods have not a considerable range, and may 
pass either vertically or near the bottom through layers of water of very 
considerable differences of temperature and pressure. 

It is to be borne in mind that nearly all the Radiolaria which Dr. 
Chun took with a tow-net at a depth of 300 fathoms have also been 
collected at the surface, and the same is true of some other forms. The 
author seems to have demonstrated for surface pelagic animals a far 
greater bathymetrical range than they were known to have, and one 
which, perhaps, corresponds to the wide bathymetrical range of many 
so-called deep-sea types, which extend from the greatest depths at which 
animals have been dredged almost to the regions of the littoral belt. 

Dr. Chun gives an account of the development of Ctenophora, and 
shows that the Cydippe-form of Bolina, after the degeneration of the 
genital organs, which are fully developed soon after leaving the egg- 
envelope, is developed into the Bolina-form; this peculiar mode of 
reproduction he calls Dissogonie. 


Physiology of Nervous System.*—Herr Steiner has made some 
experiments on nervous functions among Invertebrates. The cerebral 
ganglion of the crayfish is shown to be the general locomotor centre. 
In the leech, however, this is not the case; the removal of the cerebral 
ganglia made no great difference; even separated portions crept about. 
In Pterotrachea mutica, a conveniently transparent mollusc, the removal 
of the central ganglion made no difference, but movement ceased with 
the destruction of the pedal. The latter is the general and the only 
locomotor centre of the body. One side of the pedal ganglion was 
removed in the pelagic Cymbulia, which then exhibited circular move- 
ments on the injured side. Removal of the cerebral ganglion in Octopus 
vulgaris stopped voluntary and spontaneous nutrition, but the reflex 
action of the eye persisted. The removal on one side of the anterior 
portions of the sub-cesophageal ganglion led to circular movements as in 
Cymbulia. In Appendicularia the tail ganglion is the locomotor centre. 


Mollusca. 
a. Cephalopoda. 

Shell-growth in Cephalopoda.—Professor J. F. Blake ¢ urges that 
Mr. F. A. Bather, whose communication has been already noticed,{ has 
added nothing of value to what he himself taught as to the morphology of 
the shell in the Introduction to his work on ‘ British Fossil Cephalopods.’ 
Mr. F. A. Bather § replies that Prof. Blake now appears to accept the 
view which it was his object to defend rather than originate—namely, 
that successive chitinous membranes are given off by the body-surface 
and subsequently calcified, but that that is not the teaching of the Pro- 
fessor’s monograph. Prof. Blake criticizes the suggestion that the 
membranes of the septa are typically continuous with those of the shell- 
wall, but it is urged that not only are the two descriptions that he gives 
inconsistent with one another, but both are in disagreement with the 
facts of the case. Objection was also taken to the assumption that 
the lamelle of Sepia are homologous with the septa of a Belemnite- 
phragmocone, but this is an old view first taught by Voltz in 1830, held 
by many first-rate observers, and supported by original observations on 
Mr. Bather’s part. 


* Biol. Centralbl., vii, (1888) pp. 732-3 (60 Versamml. Deutsch. Naturf. Wies- 
baden, 1887). } Ann, and Mag. Nat. Hist., i. (1888) pp. 376-80. 
t Ante, p. 397. § Tom. cit., i. 888) pp. 421-7. 


560 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Spermatozoa of Eledone moschata.*—M. A. Sabatier finds a double 
method of spermatogenesis in Eledone moschata, comparable to that already 
observed in some Gastropods by MM. Koehler and Robert. In one set, 
the head is formed by a fine, very regular spiral ; in the other kind, the 
head, which is much longer, is a simple straight or very irregular sinuous 
filament. In the spermatoblasts which give rise to the spiriform 
spermatozoa the chromatin of the nucleus is condensed at the centre of 
the cell into a mass which is at first globular, but soon becomes club- 
shaped. The nuclear membrane becomes invisible, and the chromatic 
rod is situated at the centre of the cell, which also becomes elongated. 
The cytoplasm which surrounds the rod becomes very delicate, and 
becomes largely aggregated round the thinner end of the club-shaped 
body. The thicker end of the latter frees itself from the body of the 
cell, and gets at its end a very fine colourless filament which appears to 
be formed by the elongation of part of the cytoplasm ; this is the tail of 
the spermatozoon. As the rod elongates it becomes more and more 
delicate, till at last its massive form gives place to a spire with regular 
turns, which are at first close, and gradually separate from one another. 

The filiform spermatozoa are developed after a different fashion. 
The chromatin of the spermatoblasts becomes condensed at the periphery 
of the nucleus, close to the nuclear membrane. It is at first an are 
which elongates as it grows. ‘I'he cell becomes ovoid, and the chromatin 
narrows at one extremity, which carries a mass of granular protoplasm. 
The remainder remains rolled round a clear, spherical mass; it next 
elongates and loses its spiral form, when the spermatozoon appears as & 
chromatic filament with a very long tail, and attached by its base to a 
mass of granular cytoplasm, which, in its turn, disappears. 

M. Sabatier’s observations on Eledone have confirmed him in the 
opinion he long since expressed that the vermiform spermatozoa of 
Paludina are true colonies of spermatozoa, corresponding to a group of 
spermatozoa, the heads of which have become fused, while the tails have 
remained distinct. 


8. Pteropoda. 


Musculature of Heteropoda and Pteropoda.t—Herr G. Kalide has 
investigated the musculature of the Heteropoda and Pteropoda with the 
view of throwing light on the morphology of the foot of Mollusca. In 
the former the musculature of the trunk consists of two muscular strata 
lying one above the other; the fibres of the upper layer pass from above 
forwards to below backwards, and those of the lower layer from below 
forwards to above backwards. In the caudal region, the visceral sac, 
and the proboscis, this musculature has a longitudinal direction. Above 
it there is a circular muscle which covers the greater part of the body 
(Carinaria), or is limited to the proboscis (Pterotrachea). The fin has 
its own musculature, which is connected with the spindle-muscle. The 
author thinks that sufficient attention has not been given to the fact that 
the musculature of the fin has no connection with that of the trunk, 
while that of the anterior processes of the body passes continuously into 
the trunk. If the fin of the Heteropoda be homologous with any part 
of the body of any other Molluse, that part must have a similar arrange- 


* Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 954-6. 
{ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 337-77. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 561 


ment of its muscular fibres. In this connection an investigation must 
be made into the morphology of the Pteropoda; in them, too, there is a 
great differentiation of the foot, leading to the formation of two laterally 
placed fins—the epipodium of Huxley—and, in some, to the distinction 
of a horseshoe-shaped and a conical piece in the median part of the foot. 
As in Heteropods, the fin-musculature of Pteropods is formed by rays 
from the spindle-muscle; by this character and by the independence of 
the whole fin-musculature of the musculature of the body, the fins of 
Pteropods are shown to be homologous with those of Heteropods. 

It has not yet been demonstrated that these fins are derived, onto- 
genetically, from the foot. The protopodium of all Molluscs is a mere 
outpushing of the body-wall into which the ccelom is merely continued. 
In the Heteropoda this protopodium is separated from the body by the 
caudal portion and carried backwards. This caudal portion is a structure 
quite similar to the protopodium, in so far as it is a mere prolongation of 
the body-wall, although filled by gelatinous material. The intercalation 
of the caudal portion may be regarded as due to the growth of the tissue 
at the base of the protopodium, and this region may be looked upon as 
part of the organ which corresponds to the developed protopodium. If 
this be so, there is nothing surprising in the musculature of the body 
passing directly into the tail. The arrangement of the muscles of the 
fin seem to show that it is not a differentiation of the protopodium, but 
a formation sui generis. While we regard the tail as an outgrowth of 
the body, due to local growth, the fins of Heteropods and Pteropods 
must be looked upon as an outgrowth of the spindle-muscle, or of a part 
thereof; the body-wall having been broken through in such a way that 
the newly-formed structures are only accompanied by the epidermis and 
the gelatinous cuticle. 

When we ask if there is in Gasteropods or Lamellibranchs any organ 
homologous to the fins of Pteropods or Heteropods, we find that in them, 
as in all Molluscs save Cephalopods, the first rudiment of the foot is the 
protopodium, which is the only differentiation on the ventral surface of 
the embryo. No other differentiations appear, or, in other words, there 
is no deutopodium. 

vy. Gastropoda. 


Abnormal Growth in Haliotis.;—Mr. EH. A. Smith gives a descrip- 
tion of an example of the Japanese Haliotis gigantea, which is remarkable 
for having two rows of perforations in the shell instead of one. Four of 
the holes of the outer or normal series are open, while all those of the 
inner series are closed or filled up. Mr. Smith supposes that the edge 
of the mantle at this particular point was accidentally notched in early 
life (or from congenital defect), and that the notch was not deep. It is 
probably correct to suppose that the perforations are for the purpose of 
conveying water to the gills, and to some extent, for the extrusion of 
feeces. As there are neither gills nor anus beneath the abnormal series 
of holes, they had no special function to perform, and so became closed 
up as soon as possible. In figures of H. tuberculata given by Cuvier and 
by Fischer a tentacle may be seen to be protruded through each of the 
last six or seven perforations; in no specimen or species examined by 
Mr. Smith are there ever more than three tentacles, and these are always 
similarly located. 


* Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., i. (1888) pp. 419--21. 


562 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Testacella.*—Prof. H. de Lacaze-Duthiers has published an in- 
teresting memoir on this Gastropod. Altered though its organization 
may be, and displaced as are some of its organs, it is still possible to 
associate it with the rest of the Pulmonata. Though the mantle and shell 
are very small they both remain as evidence of the parts which are so 
well developed in allied groups. The only portion of the body which 
they protect is the true respiratory cavity. 

The details of anatomical peculiarities may be largely explained by 
the drawing down of the mantle and shell, and the elevation of the liver 
and the organs of reproduction. These two fundamental modifications 
are the cause of others which are no less important. Thus, when the 
organ of respiration, which is always intimately connected with the 
central organ of circulation, changes its place, the heart invariably 
follows it, and comes to occupy such position as the lung leaves free for 
it. The same thing happens to the kidney, which is always attached to 
the pericardium. As arule the marginal folds of the mantle are quite 
close to the head, which they often protect, and in consequence of this, 
the pallial nerves are short. But in Testacella, the mantle is separated 
from the head, and consequently from the nerve-centres; the pallial 
nerves are, therefore, of greater length, though they preserve their fixed 
relations. Long and delicate nerves, such as those of the foot, float in the 
general cavity, and are only recognizable by their origins and insertions. 
“ The connections of the nervous system are so constant and imperative, 
that to follow a nerve is to take in hand the thread of Ariadne which 
guides and conducts us to the part which it is required to determine, and 
which, at first, might be misunderstood, in consequence of the trans- 
formation it has undergone.” 

The same is true of the arteries. The heart being removed to the 
lower part of the body, the organs which have in consequence been dis- 
placed, have, so to speak, carried the arteries with them. A very 
interesting relation is presented by the passage across the cesophageal 
collar of the termination of the ascending aorta. The pedal artery, 
crossing above the pedal ganglia, ought te pass in front of them to 
redescend and nourish the foot as far as its lower extremity. This isa 
constant arrangement in the Pulmonata, but in Testacella, owing to the 
length of the course which it has to take, the aorta gives off an accessory 
branch at the middle of its length, which opens freely with the true 
pedal vessel, and so makes up for the insufliciency of supply which is 
due to the too great length of the latter. Here there is deformation due 
to elongation, but the relations are fixed, and the parts, modified though 
they are, have been able to preserve this same relation. 

The superiority of the value of characters which are drawn from con- 
nections over those furnished by diversity of forms and deviations from 
the normal is shown by the relative position of the heart and lung in the 
economy of Testacella. The fixed connection of the two organs is seen 
in the connection between the auricle and the efferent vessel of the lung, 
but the relative position of the two, as regards the rest of the body, 
depends on changes effected in the body in consequence of the displace- 
ment of some of the viscera. 

Whatever be the cause of the change which it has undergone, we 
cannot but recognize that Testacella is atrophied in some of its parts and 
disproportionately developed in others. As compared with a slug, we 


* Arch. Zool. Expér. et Gén., v. (1887) pp. 459-596 (12 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 563 


see that the mantle is in both rudimentary, and has become unable to 
secrete a shell sufficiently large to form a protection for a whorl of 
viscera. In the slug, the mantle retains its dorsal position, and is at 
about the middle of the axis of the body; in Testacella it is terminal 
and ventral. In the slug the viscera pass into the foot, in Testacella 
into the neck; but in both the distribution of the nerves enables us to 
establish the true nature of the parts which have been modified to the 
purpose of new functions, and which have become irrecognizable. In con- 
clusion Prof. M. Lacaze-Duthiers urges that, if modifications in the 
position of some organs can change the general physiognomy and external 
appearance of an animal, it is no less true that we ought not to regard 
their displacement as affording a criterion of the highest value for the 
characterization of classificatory divisions. Although the heart and lung 
are altered in relation to the whole, they are not altered in their relation 
to one another ; the heart is always intercalated between the body which 
it has to nourish, and the lung from which it draws its freshened blood. 
In so natural a group as the Pulmonata it is sometimes behind, sometimes 
beside, sometimes in front of the lung, but its absolute position does not 
alter. The corollary from this is that classifications based on the rela- 
tive situation of lungs and heart ought to be revised. 


Absorption of Water.*—Herr A. Fleischmann returns to the old 
question of the taking in of water by molluscs. The affirmative position 
maintained by Delle Chiaje was supported by the observations of Koll- 
mann and Griesbach ; criticism has, however, weakened the latter, but the 
recent researches of Schiemenz f seem to settle the question definitely. 
To the latter and to his own investigations the author refers, 

Schiemenz has described with great definiteness the water-pores found 
on the foot of Natica josephina. They are minute (7-8 » in maximum 
diameter), below them strong closing muscles are aggregated, from them 
minute cavities extend into the foot. As to the physiology, Schiemenz 
sets aside any mixture of water and blood, declares the vascular system 
of Natica to be closed; the elements of the foot (muscles, nerves, glan- 
dular cells) are all inclosed and protected from the water by a limiting 
membrane which surrounds vascular lacune. The membrane also ex- 
tends below the epithelium, and gives off protrusions including blood- 
sinuses between the epithelial cells. 

The water is taken in as follows :—the vessels of the foot are richly 
filled with blood; the muscles become tense ; cavities are left between 
them, and into these the water enters. When a sufficient quantity has 
passed in, the closing muscles shut the pores, the animal moves with its 
tense foot. 

Schiemenz has also noted, in another case, the modifications produced 
in the blood by the introduction of water, and concludes that where the 
vascular system and the histological system are not inclosed, there can 
be no entrance of water. 

With the results reached by Schiemenz, Fleischmann entirely agrees. 
He refers to the researches of Roule and Grobben, which go against the 
existence of pores, and believes that in most cases the blood and the 
vascular sphincters are of themselves sufficient to explain the erection of 
the foot. He maintains as before, in spite of Roule’s denial, the certain 
existence of the ‘‘ Keber venous valves.” 


* Biol. Centralbl., vii. (1888) pp. 713-7. 
+ MT. Zool. Stat. Neapel, vii. (1888) pp. 423-72. 


564 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


3. Lamellibranchiata. 


Lamellibranchiata without gills.*—M. P. Pelseneer has been able 
to confirm the remarkable observation of Mr. Dall that Cuspidaria has no 
gills. On raising the mantle one finds oneself in the presence of a mus- 
cular surface which Dall regarded as the body-wall. This surface is a 
partition which separates a dorsal from a ventral chamber ; it is traversed 
by the foot, and extends from one adductor to the other; on either side 
it is connected with the mantle, which is continuous along its whole 
length ; posteriorly it is connected with the partition which separates 
the two siphons. The visceral mass is found in the dorsal chamber. 
The labial palps are present, but are very small. 

The study of the allied genera Lyonsiella, Poromya, and Silenia has 
resulted in the unexpected discovery that the muscular septum is a 
modified gill. In Lyonsiella abyssicola the gills are united to the mantle, 
fused with one another behind the foot, and then joined to the division 
between the two siphons; but the structure of the gills is preserved. 
In Poromya there is a similar partition, but this is muscular; on either 
side, however, there are two groups of branchial lamelle, separated from 
one another by clefts which allow of a communication between the two 
pallial chambers. In Silenia the reduction is still greater, for the 
branchial lamelle have disappeared, and the clefts have become arranged 
in three separate groups. In Cuspidaria reduction is brought to an 
extreme. M. Pelseneer proposes to form a separate group for the last 
three genera, and to call it the Septibranchia ; Cuspidaria must form the 
type of Dall’s family Cuspidariide. 


So-called Eyes of Tridacna and Occurrence of Pseudochlorophyll 
Corpuscles in the Vascular System of Lamellibranchs.t—Herr J. Brock 
gives an account of the so-called eyes which aid so largely in giving a 
splendid coloration to the margins of the mantle of living species of 
Tridacna. They form an irregular row of differently coloured points, 
and look like gems. The method employed by Vaillant did not permit 
him to successfully investigate the minute structure of these organs. 

The larger wart-like elevations which are found at some distance 
from the margin of the mantle agree in structure with the mantle itself. 
In the warts, however, there are a few peculiarly constructed minute 
organs which might be taken for eyes. These bodies are flask-shaped, 
and have their long axis perpendicular to the surface of the epithelium ; 
the whole organ is surrounded by a thin membrane in which fusiform 
nuclei are scattered. Within are large cells, also with a distinct mem- 
brane, and containing clear, and probably highly refractive protoplasm. 
These transparent cells are surrounded by a layer which is characterized 
by its great irregularity, and the component cells of which contain 
coarsely granular protoplasm. No nerve was in any case seen to pass 
to a flask-shaped organ. 

The author is unable to make any suggestion as to the function of 
these organs, but he thinks it may be confidently asserted that they 
are not optic. It is much more probable that they are luminous organs; 
if the cells of the outer layer have the faculty of shining, the more trans- 
parent inner cells may act as prisms. The only bodies which can be 


* Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1029-31. 


+ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp, 270-88 (1 pl.), Transl. Ann. and 
Mag. Nat. Hist., i. (1888) pp. 435-52. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 565 


said to resemble them in structure are the so-called eyes on the tentacles 
of Cardium, and these are possibly luminous organs. 

All the available interstices of the mantle-margin of a Tridacna were 
found to be densely packed with “‘ green cells” or pseudochlorophyll 
corpuscles. These, which are certainly true cells, have a distinct 
nuclear framework, which is very deeply coloured by Grenacher’s alum- 
carmine. The nucleus is ordinarily spherical, but sometimes oblong or 
reniform, and not unfrequently, especially in alcoholic preparations, 
strikingly stellate. Increase by transverse division was also observed. 
There is some reason for believing in the presence of a special (cellu- 
lose?) envelope. The green colouring matter is fixed by chromic acid, 
but extracted by alcohol; it is not generally diffused through the 
protoplasm, but localized in small round corpuscles, which are dis- 
tributed through the cells in variable numbers. It was not possible to 
decide definitely whether the corpuscles are situated in the vacuoles or 
in the protoplasm, but more probably they lie in the latter. These 
symbionts are not, as is generally the case, found in the cells of the 
host, but float freely in the cavities of the system of blood-lacune. 

The protoplasm of the blood-corpuscles was found to have distinctly 
separated into two different constituents, a perfectly hyaline part, in 
which the nucleus was always situated excentrically, and a “ proto- 
plasmatic ” part which showed a very marked fibrous coagulation. This 
was observed in all of those specimens which had been treated respec- 
tively with chromic acid, alcohol, and osmium. In addition to the 
ordinary amceboid blood-cells, there were a few bodies which were very 
characteristic of the blood; these were rounded, or oval, lobate, or 
otherwise irregularly formed cells, the protoplasm of which was so 
completely filled with strongly refractive granules of a fatty nature that 
no cell-nucleus could be found. These ‘“ granule-cells” usually attain 
twice or three times the size of the ordinary blood-cell, and they often 
lie close to the walls of the blood-lacune, in recess-like depressions. 
These cells have a very remarkable resemblance to certain cells of the 
interstitial connective substance of the Pulmonata, which were first de- 
scribed by Semper. It is probable that in both cases the cells have 
some relation to glycogen, or a glycogen-like compound. 

With regard to the much discussed question as to intercellular spaces 
in the epithelium of Mollusca, Herr Brock states that of his three 
Tridacne, the osmium and chromic acid specimens did not present the 
smallest interstices between the individual cells, while the spirit 
specimen had the whole epithelium traversed by numerous large typical 
intercellular spaces. As only one of these can represent the natural 
condition, the comparative value of the preservative fluids has to be ~ 
taken into consideration. ‘The author declares against the spirit and 
the spaces. 


Phylogeny of Lamellibranchs.*—Dr. B. Sharp submits some con- 
siderations on the phylogenetic classification of Lamellibranchs. He 
regards the entire group as degenerate, as derived from Gastropoda, and 
as represented in primitive form by forms like Nucula and Trigonia. 
The loss of one adductor is referred to mechanical causes. This is 
followed through Mytilus and Pinna to Ostrea. A passage from regular 
to irregular shell is to be seen in the fresh-water forms. Unio repre- 


* Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., 1888, pp. 121-4. 
1888. 22 


566 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


sents a fresh-water Mytilus, and a form that closely resembles the oyster 
can be traced through Avtheria to Muelleria. 

In another direction the author traces development from the central 
Arca types to the extreme of Aspergillum. In this procedure, Lucina, 
Cardium, Venus, Mya, Solen, Macha, Teredo, Gastrochzena, and Clavagella, 
are discussed. 

In the first branch towards Ostrea, the fulcrum moves from a position 
between the two equally large adductors, toward the oral pole of the 
body. This brought the anterior adductor in a line with the fulerum 
and posterior adductor, where, being of no use, it disappeared. In the 
other direction, development is in the antero-posterior direction, the 
shell, however, not taking part in the growth until a form is reached 
where the shell is exceedingly small and the animal protected by a sup- 
plementary deposit of carbonate of lime. 


Crystalline Style.*—Herr B. Haseloff has made some very interest- 
ing observations on the formation of the crystalline style in mussels. 
Acting on the suggestion of Prof. Mébius that the structure in question 
represented reserve food-material, the author made experiments with 
Mytilus edulis. The structure seems in natural conditions to be almost ~ 
constantly present. In some specimens, however, which were set apart 
and starved, the style disappeared in a few days, and that the more 
completely, the more complete the fasting. The demonstration was 
completed, however, by re-feeding some mussels of the same set as those 
in which the style had disappeared; the result seemed to be the re- 
appearance of the style. Some observations by Hazay agree with those 
of the author, and the supposition of Prof. Mobius that the crystalline 
style represents reserve material seems quite justified. Herr Haseloff 
does not regard it as a secretion, but a chemical modification of surplus 
food. 


Molluscoida. 
B. Polyzoa. 


Spermatogenesis in Alcyonella.j—Prof. A. Korotneff has studied 
the development of the spermatozoa in Alcyonella fungosa, which seems . 
to be a particularly fit object for the investigation of spermatogenesis. 
The main steps of the process, which exhibits the well-known stages 
named by v. la Valette St. George, has been already summarized; but a 
few other results may be recorded. 

Head, neck, and tail develope independently, and are secondarily 
united. In the sperm of Ascaris, the amceboid portion is the much 
shortened tail, which here is more complex than usual, and includes 
several fibrils instead of only one. Referring to van Beneden’s obser- 
vation that the fibrils of an Ascaris sperm were cross-striped, Korotnetf 
characterizes a spermatozoon as “a free-living, highly specialized 
muscle-cell.” 


Fresh-water Polyzoa.{—Dr. K. Kriipelin has monographed the fresh- 
water Polyzoa of Germany. The part published treats of the morphology 
and systematic. The history of research is first discussed, then the 


* Biol. Centralbl., vii. (1888) pp. 683-4. 

t+ Arch. f. Miky. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 334-47 (1 pl.). 

t he Naturwiss. Hamburg, x. (7 pls.). Cf. Biol. Centralbl., vii. (1887) 
pp. 724-5. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 567 


general facts of colony-forming and classification, in a third chapter 
the anatomy, in a fourth the conditions of life. The detailed classifica- 
tion and the phylogenetic probabilities form the subjects of the conclud- 
ing chapters. Herr Krapelin does not believe in the existence of a 
continuous phylogenetic series including all modern forms, The 
ctenostomatous genera Victorella, Pottsiella, and Paludicella stand in 
close relationship; the group of Phylactolemata has arisen from 
Paludicella-like Ctenostomata, starting from Fredericella. Among the 
higher Phylactolemata parallel differentiation may be observed; thus 
the genera Lophopus, Pectinatella, and Cristatella form each in their way 
the terminal point of a series. The greatest advances in the phylogeny 
are marked by the families Fredericellide, Plumatellide, and Crista- 
tellide. The genera Plumatella, Lophopus, and Pectinatella are insepar- 
able, and must all be referred to the family Plumatellide. A diagnostic 
table of the genera is appended. 


Arthropoda. 
Embryology of Insects and Arachnids.”—The late Mr. A. T. Bruce, 


from his observations on the development of Insects and Arachnids, was 
led to certain views as to the relations of tracheates. He was of opinion 
that Pertpatus and the Myriopoda, from the absence of wings and other 
primitive characters, may fairly be considered the most primitive 
tracheates. Some Myriopods exhibit indications of a hexapod stage in 
their development, and they may, therefore, be related to the wingless 
Hexapods. The mode of origin of the endoderm is not very important 
for classificatory purposes, as it is very likely moditied by the presence 
or absence of food-yolk. The mesoderm of Peripatus grows forwards 
from an undifferentiated cell-mass at the posterior end of the embryo; 
the mesoderm arising from the “ primitive cumulus” of Spiders also 
grows forward from an undifferentiated cell-mass at the posterior end of 
the embryo. But this resemblance must not be taken to indicate any 
close relationship, for in the Crustacea the mesoderm has a similar mode 
of growth. In the higher insects the yolk-cells appear to represent the 
inner layer of the gastrula, and are consequently equivalent to the 
endoderm of lower forms; the true endoderm is functional only during 
embryonic life in absorbing the yolk, and takes little or no part in the 
formation of the digestive tract. In these tracheates the layer which 
corresponds to the mesoblast of Arachnids and of Peripatus has usurped 
the functions of the true endoderm. 

In endeavouring to separate the different divisions of the Arthropod 
phylum, anatomical characters as well as embryological phases must be - 
taken into consideration. The possession of a single well-developed 
pair of antenne, of tracheal invaginations, and of embryonic membranes, 
together with the existence of a hexapod stage in their development, 
afford sufficient ground for regarding Myriopods as lowly-organized or 
degenerate Insects. Peripatus perhaps belongs to the same category, 
but its embryonic membranes do not appear to correspond fully to those 
of Insects. Arachnids, in all probability, never possessed antenne, for 
all their appendages, like those of Limulus, are at one period post-oral, 
and are not innervated by the supra-cesophageal ganglion. 


* ¢Observations on the Embryology of Insects and Arachnids, 4to, Baltimore, 
1887, 31 pp. and 6 pls. 
2R2 


568 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


The antenne of insects are shown by their innervation to correspond 
to the first pair of crustacean antenne ; the bilobed upper lip of insects 
is innervated from the second division of the supra-cesophageal ganglion 
which forms part of the cireumcesophageal commissure. In the Nauplius- 
stage, the second pair of crustacean antenne is innervated from the 
circumcesophageal commissure, and a comparison may fairly be drawn 
between the paired upper lip of Insects, and the second pair of crustacean 
antenne. Mr. Bruce regards the antenne of the Insecta and Crustacea 
as probably homologous structures which ally the two groups. 

The amnion of Insects and Arachnids is probably homologous and 
allies the two groups, but they and the Crustacea may not have arisen 
one from the other, but each independently from a common source. The 
trachex of Insects and Arachnids are probably analogous, not homologous, 
structures; this may be concluded from the fact that the trache of the 
latter are derived from the lung-books, which are involuted appendages. 


a. Insecta. 


Polypody of Insect Embryos.*—Prof. V. Graber considers that the 
abdominal appendages which are found on the germinal stripe of various 
Insects, and which in their mode of development, completely resemble 
the typical or thoracic legs, are homologous with them. These embryonic 
abdominal appendages have been most accurately observed in certain 
Orthoptera, such as Gryllotalpa, Mantis, and Blatta, Neuroptera as 
Neophalax, and Coleoptera as Hydrophilus and Melolontha. In most 
cases they are only found on the first segment of the abdomen, but in 
some forms they are also found on the second, and even (in rare cases) 
on the third. Melolontha is the only form in which they have been 
found on all except the last two or three segments, but it is not im- 
probable that polypody, or, better, pantopody obtains in Hydrophilus 
and the Bee. 

The abdominal appendages are always unjointed, and, as compared 
with the thoracic, quite rudimentary ; those of the first segment appear 
simultaneously, or almost so, with those of the thorax, but the others, 
when developed, only appear later. With the possible exception of the 
appendages seen by Kowalevsky in Lepidoptera, they are all confined to 
the embryonic period. Even within this the length of their existence 
varies considerably, and the hinder appendages are very transitory. The 
extent and mode of development of the first pair also vary a great deal; 
they may either undergo a gradual reduction, or be converted into flat 
saccules filled internally by loosely arranged cells, which, by constric- 
tion at the base, become attached to the body by a hollow stalk. In 
most cases the saccules are only one-third of the length of the legs, but 
in the Cockchafer they cover nearly the whole of the ventral surface. 

The conditions under which these organs appear make it probable that 
they are merely the remnants of appendages, or, in other words, that 
Insects (or Spiders) are derived from ancestors which had well-developed 
extremities of definite function on their abdomen. These organs were 
probably all similar, but it may have been that, in adaptation to definite 
conditions of life, the saccules had the function of gills, or, in other 
words, the ancestors of Insects and Spiders may have been heteropodous, 
and been allied to the Crustacea that have posterior branchial sacs. 


* Morphol. Jahrb., xiii. (1888) pp. 586-615 (2 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 569 


Dermal Sensory Organ of Insects.*—Dr. O. vom Rath has published 
én extenso an account of his observations on the dermal sensory organs of 
Insects, the preliminary notice of which we have already reported.t As 
to the physiology of these organs little is definitely known, and as the 
structure of the various organs is essentially the same, nothing can be 
concluded therefrom. The most important position is that of the 
antennez; here we find sensory hairs, cones, and membranous canals. 
With most authors, Dr. vom Rath thinks that the olfactory sense is 
located in the sensory cones, and perhaps also in the membranous 
canals, and that the hairs have a tactile function. The function of the 
canals appears to be one which is well developed in a few Insects only, 
as they are only occasionally present; where they are found they are 
present in large numbers; it is not likely that they are of an auditory 
nature, and it is more probable that they serve for the perception of 
definite odours, or fulfil an unknown function. 

It is only in rare cases that it can be definitely asserted that there is 
an orifice at the anterior end of the cones, and this point seems therefore 
to be of little physiological significance. The chitin at the anterior end 
of the cone is in any case thin and pale, and is probably affected by 
chemical and physical influences; treatment with dilute potash easily 
dissolves the chitinous membrane, when the cone is laid open. Where 
the cones stand in chitinous pits and do not reach the surface we cannot 
suppose that there is any tactile function, but rather an olfactory. If 
this be so, and if there are different kinds of cones, we may suppose that 
these have somewhat different functions. It is possible that some serve 
for the perception of the feeble odours of distant objects, and others for 
those that are nearer. 

On the palpi cones and hairs are alone found; Leydig was certainly 
justified in declaring that their anatomical structure shows that the 
palpi have the same or similar functions to the antenne. Dr. vom Rath 
believes that the cones are olfactory organs, and probably perceive not- 
distant odours. The cones on the maxilla, labium, epipharynx, and 
hypopharynx seem to be gustatory organs. 


Sub-aquatic Respiration.{—Herr E. Schmid has studied minutely, 
in Donacia crassipes, the mode of breathing to which Siebold called 
attention as common among the larve and pup of beetles, i. e. extract- 
ing air from the air-passages of submerged water-plants. 

Pupa-cases, found by him attached to the roots of the water-lily, 
were observed to be filled with air. A hole in the side of the case 
next the root corresponded exactly to a deep canal passing through many 
of the air-passages of the root. This canal had evidently been bored 
by the insect, and the consequent pressure had caused the air to pass into ~ 
the cocoon. The larve have two main tracheal trunks opening into two 
sickle-shaped chitinous appendages on the abdomen. ‘These appendages 
are used, apparently, for boring into a plant so as to allow air from its 
air-passages to pass into the trachex of the insect. When the insect 
escapes from the cocoon it is borne to the surface by the air surrounding 
it and imprisoned in the hairs on its ventral surface. 

The same mode of breathing may be observed in the genus Hemonia. 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 413-54 (2 pls.). 

+ See this Journel, ante, p. 210. : 

{ Entom. Zeitschr., xxxi. (1887) pp. 325-34. Cf. Naturforscher, xxi. (1888) 
p- 193. 


570 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


A butterfly—Paraponyza stratiolata—fills its cocoon with air, probably 
in the same way, for the leaf to which it is attached is often pierced 
with numerous canals. 


Dorsal Appendages.*— Miss A. M. Fielde reports finding at Swatow, 
in still pools of fresh water, an insect or insect-larva which bore on 
its back four longitudinal rows of jointed appendages, of nearly the same 
length as its body, and capable of being raised, lowered, or bent, either 
by the insect or by external pressure. ‘T'he colour varies with the 
habitat from pale green to black. The head is flat, with a pair of large 
eyes made up of six ocelli; the antenne are short and six-jointed, and 
the biting mouth-parts strong and horny. The three thoracic segments 
bear three pairs of six-jointed legs ending in a long claw. The abdomen 
has nine segments, the last bearing ventrally a pair of long, sharp, 
jointed styles. 

The body is cylindrical, tapering posteriorly, with the ventral surface 
flattened. All the segments except the last bear dorsally four tapering 
jointed tubes. The main tracheal trunks run, one on each side, between 
the proximal ends of these two rows of appendages, through which they 
send long straight branches. 


So-called Digestive Stomach of some Ants.t—Prof. C. Emery has 
examined the stomach of most genera of Camponotide and Dolichoderidx, 
as well as several Cryptoceride, and some members of other groups. In 
the first of these the crop is succeeded by the calyx, in which are four 
calycinal lamelle, held together by a continuation of the crop. Further 
back are valves, and still further back there is an enlargement. Between 
this apparatus and the chyle-intestine there is a narrow tube which ends 
in the latter by a knob. Between the four lamelle the intermediate 
membrane forms four folds which project into the lumen of the cup ; at 
the open concavities of the folds are the bundles of longitudinal muscles. 
The whole is surrounded by the circularly arranged transverse muscu- 
lature. In every section of a lamella we may distinguish a median 
portion and two wings; the former contains a groove, which is sharply 
limited externally, but seems internally to lose itself gradually on the 
wings. In these two layers may be recognized, the outer of which, as 
well as the wall of the groove, should be regarded as the continuation 
of the chitinous membrane of the crop; the striation which is observed 
is the expression of fine pore-canals. The inner layer of the wings is 
formed by small very closely packed chitinous hairs. In the valves 
there are clefts, and these the author looks upon as the continuation of 
the clefts which connect the groove of the lamelle with their free 
surface; there is no homologue of the wings in the region of the valves. 
The musculature of the stomach, which has been correctly described by 
Forel, consists of longitudinal and transverse bundles; the latter form a 
powerful system of constrictors: the greater part of the longitudinal 
bundles are continued on to the crop, and become lost in its muscular 
network. 

After describing a number of forms, the author proceeds to discuss 
the morphology and physiology of what should be called the pumping 
stomach. In the Camponotide and such Dolichoderide as have a 
“conical bell,’ the organ consists of parts which have two different 


* Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., 1888, pp. 129-30 (1 pl.). 
+ Zeitschr, f, Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (i888) pp. 378-412 (3 pls.). 


ZOCLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. aval 


functions. By the action of the muscles of the crop the entrance to the 
stomach is closed, so as to stop the flow of the contents of the crop to 
the bell or enlargement; by the pressure of the transverse musculature 
of the stomach the contents of the enlargement are emptied into the 
ehyle-intestine, while the return into the crop is prevented. In the 
Dolichoderide and Plagiolepidinez the closure in both cases is effected 
by the valves. The longitudinal musculature is only found in such 
stomachs as are not elongated or too compressed; in many of the 
Dolichoderidz the stomach is very short, and there is no longitudinal 
musculature at all. 

The primitive type, from which the various forms of stomach have 
been evolved, may be imagined to have been an elastic chitinous tube, 
provided with four longitudinal folds, and surrounded by longitudinal 
and transverse muscles; the primitive function was probably the peri- 
staltic contraction of this musculature, by means of which an incomplete 
pumping action was effected. The genus Dolichoderus is a very lowly 
differentiated form, but a more indifferent stage is found in the Ponerides 
and Myrmicide, where the crop is continued backwards into a cylin- 
drical or conical tube, from which the longitudinal muscles appear to be 
wanting. 

The author gives a phylogenetic table, in which is exhibited his view 
of the relationship of the genera he has examined. 


Senses of Ants.*—M. Aug, Forel, in an appendix to his former 
memoir, first corrects an error in regard to the absorption of the ultra- 
violet rays, and then cites two recent works which confirm the con- 
clusions previously arrived at by him. 

Mr. G. W. Peckham affirms, after numerous experiments, that wasps 
do not hear, but that they have memory and a sense of smell, and that 
they possess no such mysterious instinct of direction as is indicated in 
the terms “bee-line” and ‘‘wasp-line.” If they are far away, they 
can only find their nests by seeking for them. Handl maintains, with 
Forel and in opposition to Graber, that animals do not perceive colours 
by their skin. 

Finally, M. Forel gives an account of a series of experiments made 
by him upon ants. These have led him slightly to modify his former 
opinion, and to conclude that, though, in general, they use both senses, and 
are entirely lost without their antennz, without eyes they may succeed 
in finding their way back to their nest if the task be not too difficult. 


Parthenogenesis in Bombyx mori.j—Signor E. Verson draws atten- 
tion to a suggestion { that’ it might be possible to produce the silkworm 
parthenogenetically. He points out that this parthenogenetic develop- - 
ment does not go further than the formation of the serous membrane. 
After an experience of twenty years he feels confident that no real 
parthenogenesis can obtain in the silkworm. 


Karyokinesis in Lepidoptera.s—Herr G. Platner has studied karyo- 
kinesis in the spermatocytes of some Lepidoptera, and bases on it a 
theory of cell-division. The author believes that the separation of the 


* Rec. Zool. Suisse, iv. (1888) pp. 515-23. 

+ Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 263-4. 

t By Prof. Krause in the ‘ Jahresber. iiber die Leistungen u. Fortschritte in, der 
Ges. Medicin.’ 

§ Internat. Monatschrift f. Anat. u. Hist., ili. pp. 8341-98 (2 pis.). 


572 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


daughter-elements on the dislocation of the equatorial plate is the result 
of a circulating streaming; he supposes that the spindle-shaped fibres 
form a continuous coil, and that a stream of fluid circulates in them in a 
definite direction. If we suppose that the daughter-clements pass along 
the fibres and are moved by the stream, it follows that they must separate 
from one another in opposite directions. The changes in the form and 
position of the spindles are believed to be the result of the mechanical 
action of the fluid moving away from the poles. If the asters arise 
primarily their origin is independent of the direction in which the 
stream of nutrient fluid traverses the cell, and the spindles are developed 
at right angles to it. The changes in the position of the nucleus are 
due to the same cause. 

The formation of the coil and the arrangement of the equatorial plate 
are believed to be the result of protoplasmic streams which traverse the 
nucleus in a definite direction. The achromatic substance is considered 
to be the active element in karyokinesis, the phenomena of which cannot 
be explained by supposing the existence of opposing forces. Division 
of the protoplasm is looked upon as a purely mechanical process; the 
constriction and separation of dividing animal-cells being a simple 
mechanical consequence of the elongation of the nuclear spindle. 


Decrease of Weight in Winter Pupe of Pontia brassice.*—Herr 
F. Urech has made a number of elaborate observations on the weight of 
the pupe of Pontia brassice. He finds that this weight steadily 
diminishes. If the temperature surrounding the pupe be kept constant, 
the decrease is increased towards the end of the pupal stage, and 
especially so a few days before escape; if the temperature be raised 
moderately, the duration of the pupal stage diminishes ; dry air has an 
abbreviating influence on the duration of this stage. 


Development in Egg of Musca vomitoria.t— Dr. A. Voeltzkow 
has a preliminary communication on the development of Musca vomitoria. 
The blastoderm is formed simultaneously over the whole periphery of 
the egg, and no cells remain internally. The polar cells lie at the 
hinder pole of the egg, and by their presence push the cells of the 
blastoderm inwards, so that a conical process projects into the interior 
of the egg. From this cone blastoderm-cells break off, which wander 
into the interior, and form the so-called yolk-cells; these, in Musca, 
mainly serve to break up the yolk. 

The formation of the germinal layers commences with an invagina- 
tion of the blastoderm on the whole of the ventral surface, and an 
almost completely closed tube is so formed. The germ-stripes are drawn 
over on the dorsal surface by the development of dorsal folds. The 
three layers arise by the constriction and subsequent flattening out of 
the tubes. The rudiment of the hind-gut now appears as an invagina- 
tion of the dorsal ectoderm in the hinder third of the egg. The 
cesophageal invagination does not appear till somewhat later. The 
amnion is formed simultaneously with the rudiment of the hind-gut, 
and later on it forms the greater part of the back of the embryo. The 
polar cells wander on to the dorsal surface, and pass into the hind-gut ; 
their later fate has not yet been made out. 

The mid-gut is formed by two lateral thickenings of the endoderm, 
just behind the blind end of the cesophagus; the lateral pads so 


* Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 205-12. + Ibid., pp. 235-6. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 573 


developed extend, later on, throughout the whole length of the egg. 
They all grow dorsally and ventrally, and so come to completely inclose 
the yolk and form the epithelium of the mid-gut. The ccelom is formed 
by the separation of these pads from the mesoderm. 

The traches arise as segmental invaginations, which extend back- 
wards and forwards, and unite into one longitudinal trunk ; the segmental 
invagination-orifices close up. The nervous system arises in three 
parts, a median invagination of the ventral surface of the ectoderm, and 
two lateral thickenings. 


Karly Stages in Development of Egg of Fly.* Dr. H. Henking 
has investigated the early stages in the development of the fly’s egg, 
with especial reference to free nuclear formation. In the prepared 
unripe egg the germinal vesicle may be seen as a colourless sphere 
floating in the egg-contents, which are distinctly coloured by carmine ; 
it has a sharp, simply contoured wall, and contains very fine granules 
and some clear vesicles, as well as an excentric and distinctly coloured 
germinal spot, which is provided with vacuoles, The large nuclei of 
the nutrient cells are very striking, and are very rich in chromatin; 
these cells and nuclei have almost altogether disappeared from ripe 
eggs; their chromatin has probably been taken up by the egg-cell. In 
the ripe egg there is but a rudiment of the germinal vesicle in the shape 
of a small coloured corpuscle surrounded by a clear space. Only a few 
observations were made on the polar globules. In most cases of fertili- 
zation it would seem that four spermatozoa enter the egg. Nothing 
definite can be said as to the fate of the female chromatin substance. 

The first yolk-cells are formed in two clouds of protoplasm by free 
cell-formation. The first two cleavage-nuclei appear as clear bodies 
with an equatorial zone of distinct chromatin filaments; the succeeding 
divisions follow very rapidly, owing to the number and rapidity of the 
divisions of the embryonic cells. 

By free nuclear formation, the author means all those cases of the 
formation of nuclei, in which the substance of the mother nucleus does 
not pass directly, and unaltered, into the daughter-nuclei. The drop- 
like bodies which are seen in the developing egg must not be called by 
the same name as the nuclei which contain chromatin, for they have not 
the same chemical composition. The former have no membrane. The 
supernumerary spermatozoa break up, and the first primitive nuclei 
arise in their place. The disappearance of the marginal portions of 
chromatin, and the formation of a colourless spot is explained by the 
chromatin having entered into another chemical combination. When 
there have been chromatin particles formed from the spermatozoa, 
cleavage-spindle, and yolk, there may arise free nuclei which take part 
in the conversion of yolk nuclein into nuclear nuclein. 


Development of Aphides.t—Herr L. Will reports the results of his 
recent investigation of the important but difficult subject of the develop- 
ment of the viviparous aphides. 

(1) Gastrulation—The blastoderm, as the author and Metschnikoff 
have previously noted, does not overgrow the whole of the surface, but 
leaves a roundish spot at the lower pole. At the margin of this lower 
aperture, an active proliferation occurs; the new-formed cells are 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 289-336 (4 pls.). 
+ Biol, Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 148-55. 


7 


574 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


separated off, and wander into the yolk and represent the endoderm of 
the true gastrula. The Aphides thus preserve a primitive character. 

(2) Apical plates and bilateral symmetry.—The blastoderm thickens 
at the apical pole to form the apical plate, which mainly gives origin to 
the brain. JBilateral symmetry is soon established, and is due to 
differences of growth and to displacement in the outer germinal layer. 
One half of the blastoderm diminishes greatly to form a thin skin, the 
serosa ; the other side thickens greatly, especially in the apical plate. 
As the thickening increases, the whole portion is markedly shortened, 
and the apical plate displaced until it occupies the inferior pole of the 
egg. The result is the establishment of symmetrical halves, and this is 
soon emphasized by the median division of the plate into two apical 
lobes. 

(8) The germinal streak and the secondary yolk.—The appearance of 
the latter obscures the relations of the former. The secondary yolk 
penetrates the egg from the outside, but can only do so by the apposi- 
tion of the still open blastopore against the follicular epithelium, and by 
its conerescence with the same. In abnormal cases this does not occur, 
and such ova are most instructive. As in other Bilateralia, the closure 
of the blastopore seems non-concentric, an inconspicuous elevation over 
the blastopore forms a short germinal streak. Details are given to 
show that in extant aphides the germinal streak is established upon the 
previous blastopore. Will also emphasizes that the secondary yolk 
does not really affect the endoderm cells. 

(4) Reproductive rudiments and mesoderm.—Directly after the appear- 
ance of the at first cylindrical germinal streak, certain indifferent cells on 
the thickened side of the germinal cylinder towards the apical plate, in- 
crease in size, multiply rapidly, and form the reproductive rudiments. 
Thereafter the mesoderm is formed by a process of invagination within a 
groove, along the median line of the thickened side of the germinal 
cylinder. The formation of endoderm and mesoderm in Aphis are two 
successive stages of one and the same process of gastrulation. 

(5) The embryonic membranes in these and other insects are to be 
regarded as modifications of portions of the blastoderm, and of the 
germinal streak, which were already present in rudiment in pre-existent 
forms. (6) Segments and body-cavity. Transverse grooves are seen in 
the mesoderm plate, which divides into two lateral strands. These 
leave the median line free except in the region of the future mouth. 
The cavities of the segments arise by a folding of the single sheathed 
mesoderm in consequence of the formation of appendages. They all 
open medianly. A primary body-cavity arises as a cleft between the 
blastoderm and the apposed portion of the germinal streak. A secondary 
body-cavity appears from the above folds, but the details of this can 
hardly be given. The whole parietal mesoderm is utilized for mus- 
culature, The intestinal peritoneum alone remains along with the 
endodermic fatty body to line the final body-cavity. (7) The products of 
the layers. The endoderm constitutes the mid-gut, part remains in the 
secondary yolk, the rest forms fatty body and blood. The mesoderm 
forms the peritoneal sheath of the gut, the heart, and above all the 
musculature. The ectoderm forms trachex, epithelium of mouth and 
hind-gut, skin, sense-organs, and nervous system. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. ; 575 


yy. Arachnida. 


Mental Powers of Spiders.*—Mr. G. W. and Mrs. EB. G. Peckham 
have made a large number of observations on the mental powers of 
spiders. 

Sense of Smell. Three species (Argyroepeira hortorum, Dolomedes 
tenebrosus, and Herpyllus ecclesiasticus) did not respond to the tests. 
In all other cases it was evident that the scent was perceived by the 
spiders. 

Sense of Hearing. All the Epeirids responded promptly to the tests, 
being evidently alarmed by the sound of the tuning-fork, but the spiders 
that make no web gave not the slightest heed to the sound. It is 
suggested that this difference may be partly explained by the difference 
in the feeding habits of the two groups. 

Maternal Emotions. Notwithstanding many efforts the authors never 
found one of the Lycoside that was constant in her affection for as long 
as forty-eight hours. A female of Clubiona pallens, however, remembered 
her eggs for this length of time, and when they were returned to her, 
she spun a web over them in the corner of the box in which they were 
placed. Theridiwm globosum had the best memory for her cocoon; after. 
fifty-one hours’ absence she at once went to the eggs, and touched them 
with her legs. Several species of Attide and Thomiside did not 
remember their cocoons for twenty-four hours, although these spiders, 
which do not carry the egg-sac about with them, remain near it for 
from fifteen to twenty days. 

Sense of Sight. It is well known that spiders are supposed not to 
see their own cocoons at a very short distance ; the authors explain this 
by describing how the cocoon is made without its maker ever even 
seeing it, and they come to the conclusion that the use of the sense of 
touch is necessary for the spider to be able to perceive the cocoon. 

Colour Sense. ‘There is a marked preference for red, and there can 
be no doubt that some spiders have a distinct colour sense. 

Feigning Death. The authors consider the gist of the matter to be 
this; certain Epeiride, when alarmed, drop from the web and remain 
quiet for a longer or shorter time, their concealment being greatly 
assisted by the protective colouring which is present to some extent in 
nearly all of them. This amounts to nothing more than that when 
another spider runs to a place of safety, an Epeirid drops a greater or 
less distance to a place of safety. Both then remain quiet, unless dis- 
turbed, in which case the first spider trusts to its powers of running, 
while the Epeirid often (but not invariably) finds its best chance of 
safety in keeping quiet unless it is actually abused ; the habit of keeping 
quiet also insures the spider’s safe return to its web when the danger is 
over. There is no need to call in “ kataplexy ” to explain the origin or 
development of a habit which can be so easily explained by natural 
selection alone. The habit is found in its greatest development among 
the comparatively sluggish Hpeiridx, whereas it is badly developed or 
lacking in the running and jumping spiders which are able to move with 
astonishing rapidity. 

Mistakes of Spiders. Spiders were found to be much less clever than 
supposed, in regard to the recognition of their cocoons, little pith-balls 
leading them quite astray. If allowed a choice a Lycosid will select the 


* Journ. of Morphology, i. (1887) pp. 383-419, 


576 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


cocoon rather than the pith-ball, but in the absence of the former will 
content herself either with a pith-ball or a web-covered shot. The 
carrying of the latter indicates a poorly developed muscular sense. 


Brain of Phalangida.*—M. G. Saint-Rémy has examined the brains 
of Phalangium opilio, and P. parietinum. He finds that the brain may be 
divided into two ganglionic regions; the optic ganglion which gives 
rise to a pair of optic nerves, and a rostro-mandibular ganglion from 
which arise an unpaired nerve which passes to the rostrum, and a pair 
of mandibular nerves which go to the chelicere. 

Though the brain of the Phalangida is much simpler than that of 
Insects or Crustacea it has some points in common with them which are 
of some importance. At the origin of each optic nerve there is a lobe, 
of comparatively complicated structure, which is altogether comparable 
to what is known as the optic ganglion in Insects; the same lobe, ina 
simpler condition, has been observed in the Scorpion and in Spiders. In 
the optic ganglion of the Arachnida there are, further, ganglionic nuclei 
which seem to be found in sensorial ganglia only, and have been 
observed in Insects, Crustacea, and Myriopoda. 


5. Prototracheata. 


Monograph of the Genus Peripatus.}—Mr. A. Sedgwick has prepared 
a monograph of the genus Peripatus, which is based on the examination 
of a considerable number of specimens. He has been able to establish 
a definite series of characters which distinguish quite sharply all the 
species found in one area of distribution from those found in others. 
The number of walking-legs varies considerably within the same species, 
and a large number of individuals are required to determine the limits 
of the variation. The other specific characters are very inconspicuous, 
and relate simply to the texture and tint of the skin. 

A general account is given of the genus, within which, as is pointed 
out, there is no gradation; the number of species is small, and the cha- 
racteristics of the genus are equally sharply marked in all. The long 
continuance of this ancient form may be explained by its peculiar habits 
of life—habitual avoiding of the light of day, and seeking the obscurity 
and protection afforded by spaces beneath stones and under the bark of 
trees. It is an animal of striking beauty: “the exquisite sensitiveness 
and constantly changing form of the antenne, the well-rounded plump 
body, the eyes set like small diamonds on the side of the head, the 
delicate feet, and, above all, the rich colouring and velvety texture of 
the skin, all combine to give these animals an aspect of quite exceptional 
beauty.” 

4 South Africa there are four species—P. capensis, P. balfouri, and 
P. brevis from Table Mountain, and P. moseleyi from near Williamstown. 
The Australasian species are P. nove Zealandize from New Zealand, and 
P. leuckarti from Queensland, Australia. From the Neotropical Region 
P. edwardsii from Caracas, P. im thurmi of Sclater (or P. demeraranus, 
as Mr. Sedgwick proposes to call it) from Demerara, P. trinidadensis 
(P. edwardsii Kennel) and P. torquatus, described by v. Kennel from 
Trinidad, and P. juliformis from St. Vincent ; the Chilian species may be 
called P. chilensis ; Schmarda has given a short description of P. quitensis 


* Comptes Rendusg, evi. (1888) pp. 1429-31. 
+ Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., xxviii. (1888) pp. 431-93 (7 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 577 


from Quito, Ecuador. Some specimens in the British and Copenhagen 
Museums cannot be specifically determined. The author has some 
doubts as to the locality of the species described by Horst from Sumatra 
(P. sumatranus), as it has a number of the characters of Neotropical 
species. 


Anatomy of Peripatus capensis and P. nove Zealandie.*—Miss L. 
Sheldon has some notes on the points in which these two species differ 
from P. edwardsit. P. capensis always seems to have crural glands in all 
but the first pair of legs; in P. nove Zealandiz they seem to be quite 
wanting, while in P. edwardsi they are found on some of the legs of the 
male. In P. nove Zealandiz the external aperture of the generative 
apparatus is placed on the ventral surface of the body in front of the 
last pair of legs, and there are no segmental organs in this pair; in 
P. capensis the generative aperture is placed at the posterior end of the 
body, and the last pair of legs has segmental organs. In P. nove 
Zealandize the accessory glandular tubes lie more laterally in the body 
than in P. capensis, and they also differ in opening quite independently 
of the vas deferens. This duct is much shorter in P. capensis than in 
P. nove Zealandiz ; and this difference appears to be due to the very great 
difference between the spermatophores of the two species; in P. nove 
Zealandiz the duct very closely resembles that of P. edwardsit. The 
ovarian funnel described in P. edwardsii is not found in the New Zealand 
species. 


e. Crustacea. 


Intercoxal Lobe of certain Crayfishes.;—Mr. W. J. Mackay has ex- 
amined certain appendages connected with the branchie of Astacopsis 
Franklinii, which have been figured but not described by Prof. Huxley. 
These bodies, which may be called the intercoxal lobes, have the upper 
portion of the anterior face attached to the arthrodial membrane, while the 
lower surface of the anterior face is attached to the base of the coxopodite, 
which is smooth and convex. The lower portion of the surface first 
exposed when the base of the podobranch is removed, is covered with 
setze which project prominently from its surface; the anterior face is 
concave, and is so well able to fit on the convex base of the coxopodite. 
The whole arrangement is such as to lead us to suppose that the inter- 
coxal lobe acts as a valve between the thoracic limbs and the branchio- 
stegite, and prevents the too ready entrance of foreign bodies. In Astacus 
jluviatilis the only representative of this lobe is a small hard ridge on 
the arthrodial membrane of the fourth pair of legs; in Homarus vulgaris 
the lobes occur in the limbs of the 9th to the 13th segments. No repre- 
sentative of this structure was found in any anomurous or brachyurous 
crustacean which was examined. 


Development of Alpheus.j;—Mr. F. H. Herrick has been able to 
make a complete study of the development of Alpheus. He has been 
convinced that the germinal layers in the early stages of development 
have not the significance which is usually assigned to them. “The mass 
of cells which results from gastrulation, some of which are poured into 
the yolk, is an unspecialized indifferent layer, and cannot be regarded 


* Quart, Journ. Micr. Sci., xxviii. (1888) pp. 495-9. 
+ Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, ii. (1888) pp. 967-9. 
¢ Johns-Hopkins Univ. Circ., vii. (1888) pp. 36-7. 


578 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


as mesoderm and endoderm in the sense in which these terms are used.” 
The ectoderm is, by its position and function, more clearly defined from 
the first. 

The enveloping chorion functions as an egg-sac. When the fertilized 
nucleus divides, its products pass towards the surface until a syncytium 
of eight nuclei is formed; the yolk segments over the whole surface 
simultaneously into the same number of partial pyramids ; each of these 
latter has a large nucleus at its base, while its apex fuses with the common 
yolk-mass in the interior of the egg. After a time, by retardation in 
one half, the egg loses its radial symmetry, and becomes two-sided, 
When the primitive blastoderm is formed, a general migration of nuclei 
takes place from the surface to the yolk within; this is followed by a 
partial secondary segmentation of the food-yolk into balls. 

The gastrula is modified, a slight invagination occurring where the 
superficial cells are thickest; the included cells multiply rapidly, and 
form a mass of similar elements, some of which pass into the yolk. 'The 
protoplasm surrounding the nuclei of these cells is prolonged into a 
reticulum which incloses myriads of small yolk-fragments, and probably 
digests them intercellularly. 

At the beginning of the egg-nauplius period, when numerous yolk- 
cells have passed forward and joined the inner surface of the embryonic 
ectoderm, certain new bodies begin to appear in great numbers. These 
are the secondary mesoderm cells, and they arise by a process of endo- 
genous growth from the embryonic cells or nuclei, and chiefly from the 
wandering cells. Some of them appear to become ordinary mesoderm 
cells, while others seem to be converted directly into blood-corpuscles. 

The plasticity of the embryonic cells and layers and the comparative 
slowness with which they are clearly differentiated are very striking ; 
the cell-mass developed round the blastopore cannot be artificially 
divided into layers. The endoderm, which does not appear definitely 
till comparatively late, is developed from yolk-cells which assume a 
peripheral position. 


Moina bathycolor and the greatest depths at which Cladocera 
are found.*—Dr. O. Nordqvist refers to Herr J. Richard’s paper on 
Moina bathycolor Vernet, and points out that last year he suggested that 
this form was probably the same as Ilyocryptus acutifrons Sars. Ilyo-* 
eryptus, Alona, and Eurycercus are the Cladocera which are found at 
greatest depths—as far as 200 metres down. 


Vermes. 
a, Annelida. 


Embryology of Vermilia cespitosa and Eupomatus elegans.,— 
Mr. W. A. Haswell has some notes on the development of these two 
Annelids, in both of which artificial impregnation was readily effected. 
In Vermilia segmentation is equal and regular, as in Serpula and 
Pomatoceros. 'The blastopore, which is at first nearly terminal, becomes 
shifted to that side of the larva which will be the ventral; at the same 
time it becomes elongated and slit-like, the anterior end of the slit 
widening to form the mouth, while the anus is formed near the posterior 
end at a somewhat later stage. When the process of invagination 


* Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 264-5. 
} Proc. Linn. Soc. N. 8. Wales, i. (1888) pp. 1032-4. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 579 


commences the larva is uniformly covered with cilia; the cephalic end 
soon loses them, but becomes surrounded just in front of the mouth by a 
strong preoral ciliated band. The epiblast of the cephalic end 
becomes thinner than the rest, except in the centre, where a group of 
thicker cells remains to give rise to the cerebral ganglion. From the 
broader anterior end of the pyriform embryo one or sometimes two long 
and slender motionless flagella occasionally grow out; the alimentary 
canal becomes densely ciliated internally, and a few irregularly placed 
cells are to be found between the epi- and hypoblast, which are probably 
the foundations of the middle layer. 

In the course of the third day the preoral circlet of cilia becomes 
elevated on a distinct, slightly oblique ridge, and a reniform eye-spot 
becomes developed at a little distance from the ganglion, with which it 
is connected by a fibrous strand. <A thin-walled vesicle which appears 
at the hinder extremity of the body soon attains a considerable size; it 
is apparently formed by involution of the epiblast, and remains connected 
with the exterior by a pore at the side of the anus. 

The larva of Hupomatus is much smaller than that of Vermilia. 


Reproductive Organs of Phreoryctes.*—Mr. F. E. Beddard de- 
scribes the reproductive organs of a new species of Phreoryctes from New 
Zealand. There are two pairs of testes, which are large bodies, of, 
apparently, an irregularly conical form; an identical arrangement is 
seen in Ocnerodrilus. There are two pairs of vasa deferentia, the funnels 
of which are simple fiattened discs, with an epithelium composed 
of rather small, columnar, ciliated cells, so that they are not readily 
found. All four vasa open independently, and there are no atria. So 
far as is known this is a unique arrangement among the Oligocheta. 
The simplicity of the efferent ducts in Phreoryctes suggests that they are 
in a primitive condition. There are two pairs of ovaries, and as there 
are two pairs of oviducts we may suppose that the peculiar possession of 
the two pairs of ovaries is not an abnormal arrangement in this species. 
Phreoryctes differs from all Oligocheta except Lumbriculus in the fact 
that there are two pairs of oviducts opening on a line with the ventral 
pair of sete between segments 12 and 13, and segments 13 and 14. The 
close agreement between the ducts as well as the glands of the male and 
female reproductive systems in Phreoryctes is more apparent than in any 
other Oligochete, and is probably to be regarded as an indication of the 
archaic condition of the reproductive system of this Annelid. 


Kleinenberg on Development of Lopadorhynchus.;—Mr. G. C. 
Bourne calls attention to Prof. Kleinenberg’s paper on the development 
of Lopadorhynchus.t One important point on which Kleinenberg in- 
sisted was that there is no such thing as a mesoblast as a specially 
developed germ-layer. The mesoblast, so called, is in fact nothing more 
than the aggregate of the primary, secondary, and tertiary tissues, the 
precise origin of which is often obscured by the tendency to precocious 
development. The study of Lopadorhynchus shows that the internal 
organs of the adult Annelid are developed by successive differentiation 
of derivates of the two primary layers, ectoderm and endoderm. This 
Annelid has no mesoblast in the sense of a germ-layer composed of 


* Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., i. (1888) pp. 389-95 (1 pl.). 
+ Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xxviii. 1888) pp. 531-46. 
t See this Journal, 1837, pp. 87-8. 


580 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


undifferentiated cells. The larva has its own nervous system and its 
own musculature, no parts of either of which pass over to the adult, but 
are replaced by a new nervous system and musculature, and are after- 
wards aborted. The central nervous system of the adult is formed from 
a number of separate centres or foundations, the situation of which is in 
part determined by the pre-existing nerve-centres of the larva, although 
the latter have no direct share in their formation, but act only as foci, in 
connection with which fresh groups of nervous elements are differentiated. 
The muscle-plates do not split into two layers, comparable to the 
somatopleure and splanchnopleure, and the ccelom is formed simply as 
an extension of the space existing between ectoderm and endoderm, the 
peritoneal walls of which are formed by cells derived from the muscle- 
plates. All the tissues usually classed as mesoblastic are derived from 
the ectoderm, and the endoderm appears to form nothing more than the 
lining of the gut. 

Kleinenberg does not believe that a new organ is formed by the 
gradual growth or change of a pre-existing organ. “In animals of simple 
organization, tissues and organs are formed to which special functions 
are appropriate. Their functional activity is, as it were, a disturbing 
element in the organism; it induces changes in neighbouring tissues, 
and gives the signal for new specializations in them. The functional 
activities of the newly specialized tissues must always bear some relation 
to the function of the organ which determined their origin, and must 
either support or modify their action. The newly formed tissues again 
affect the organism; their importance increases, and they may in time 
give rise to fresh tissues. Finally, they may become so important that 
they outweigh in functional importance the organ to which their origin 
was due; they then take its place, and the latter dwindles till finally it 
may disappear altogether. This process, which is of the greatest 
importance, is called by Kleinenberg the development of organs by sub- 
stitution... . . In no case of substitution are the intermediate steps 
represented by an indifferent germ-layer, but always by a functional 
and specifically differentiated organ.” A striking instance of this is the 
development of the axial skeleton of the Chordata; another is the 
successive development of pro-, meso-, and metanephros. “Rudimentary” 
organs are thus seen to be intermediary. 

It isan open question whether Kleinenberg’s views will stand the test 
of further proof, but it cannot be doubted that investigations undertaken 
from his point of view must be fertile in results. It is better to trace 
back organs through the intermediary organs which gave them origin, 
and to attempt to establish homologies between the latter and the per- 
manent organs of lower forms than to attempt to refer an organ merely 
to one of the three primary germ-layers. 


Experiments on Earthworms.{—Herr W. Kiikenthal describes some 
interesting observations and experiments which he made on earthworms, 
After noting the nature of the secretion which comes from the body, 
which includes entire glandular cells from the hypodermis, he describes 
how he fed the animals with carmine and indigo in order to test whether 
the above glandular cells were not in certain conditionsexcretory. The 
result proved that the granules of carmine were taken up by the cells of 
the gut which become amceboid. Lang observed a similar amceboid 


* Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 80-6. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 581 


change in regard to Polycladide. The carmine grains were further 
traced in the body-cavity to lymph-cells where they were angular, and to 
loose chloragon-cells where the grains seemed to be in drops. He 
believes from his observations that the carmine entered the chloragon- 
cells vid the blood, while it entered the lymph-cells directly from 
the cells of the gut. No carmine particles were ever found in the 
nephridia ; but they were found in the cells of the hypodermis, whither 
they were probably carried by the lymph elements. The author thus 
shows that waste matter may pass from gut to hypodermis. Further 
observations are promised in the author’s forthcoming monograph of the 
Opheliacez. 


Russian Lumbricide.*—Herr N. Kulagin has investigated the 
anatomy and systematic characters of the Lumbricide which are found | 
in Russia. The cuticle is shown by chemical analysis not to be chitin, 
but a special body, which, so to say, is preparatory to the chitin of 
Arthropods. This cuticle is easily soluble in quite weak solutions of 
hydrochloric acid, the presence of which can be easily demonstrated in 
the humus in which earthworms live; as a protection against this acid 
there is excreted from the ectodermal glands a protective alkaline fluid. 
The cocoon of L. rubellus resists acids more strongly, and is not dissolved 
in pepsin. The number of folds in the calcareous glands diminish in 
winter and increase in summer ; the so-called investing cells disappear 
in winter and reappear in summer. 

The hypodermis of the labium contains, in addition to cells already 
described, knobbed cells, the widened ends of which are connected with 
nerves ; at their free end they are provided with sete which traverse the 
cuticle ; these may best be regarded.as sensory cells. Besides these there 
are on the second and third rings cylindrical cells connected with nerves ; 
these cells are somewhat narrowed at their anterior end, while at. the 
posterior they have one or two processes which are connected with 
nerves. In the lower layer of the hypodermis there may be found 
all the intermediate stages between the cells that form the upper layer 
of the hypodermis and those which he in the ccelom and between the 
muscular cells. 

Two pigments were discovered in L. rubellus, one is green and is 
dissolved by water, the other is red and can be extracted by ether; the 
former appears to be converted into the latter by the action of acid. In 
young examples of Allolobophora mucosa it was observed that the muscles 
in the region of the pharynx occupy very much the same position as 
those which protrude the proboscis in Aeolosoma; in the adult this 
position is masked by the enlargement of the tissue of the connective | 
substance and of the muscles of the walls of the pharynx. 

The author’s observations on the calcareous gland of Lumbricus 
rubellus, Allolobophora mucosa, and A. fetida do not agree with those of 
Claparéde. He has found calcareous glands in a new species of Tubifex, 
or, in other words, in Oligocheta limicola as well as O. terricola. The 
typhlosole is found to vary in form in different genera, in different parts 
of the body, and at different times of the year. 

The fluid secreted from the cavity of the mouth and pharynx is 
alkaline in reaction and converts starch into sugar, and fibrin into 
peptone ; the calcareous glands are said to convert starch into sugar ; 


* Zool, Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 231-5. 
1888. 258 


582 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


the gastric secretion of L. rubellus and A. mucosa appears to act better 
in the presence of weak acids than in that of alkalies. The cells of the 
typhlosole not only serve in absorption, but have a digestive function 
similar to that of the pancreas in Vertebrates. 

L. rubellus and A. feetida are found as far north as the mouth of the 
Lena. In Siberia there is A. tenuis, which has, as yet, only been found 
in North America and Scandinavia. L. multispinus and L. brevispinus 
are synonyms of A. mucosa. In the Caucasus, the new species L. cauca- 
sicus, Dendrobeena Bogdanowii, and D. Nassonowii have been found, in 
addition to A. arborea, A. profuga, A. longa, and A. subrubicunda, which 
have also been found in the Crimea and in South Russia. In Central 
Russia, A. mucosa, A. carnea, A. pellucida, A. fetida, D. Beckii, 
L. rubellus, and L. agricola have been found. 


New Annelid, Sutroa rostrata.*—Mr. G. Eisen describes, under 
the name of Sutroa rostrata, a new Lumbriculine found near San 
Francisco. The seminal receptacles consist of several pairs of lobes, 
which all open in the so-called albuminous gland in the eighth segment. 
A solitary albuminous gland is found in the eighth segment. Preseptal 
and interseptal secondary dorsal vessels are branching and feathered. 
Postseptal vessels are gastric, not feathered, nor branching; spines 
simple, not forked; cephalic lobe filiform. The new genus is closely 
allied to the two known genera of the sub-family Lumbriculina—Lum- 
briculus and Rhynchelmis. The “albuminous gland,” however, differs 
somewhat in structure; for, instead of being distinctly glandular, it is 
covered by smooth epithelium, under which are found numerous long 
and narrow cells. All the six seminal receptacles, moreover, open into 
the gland instead of having separate pores. The segmental organs are 
found in all the segments behind the twelfth, and are very similar to 
those of Rhynchelmis. The dorsal vessel differs from that of the other 
two genera in not being forked. 


Two new Aquatic Worms from North America.j—Dr. A. C. Stokes 
points out that very little is yet known as to the oligochetous worms of 
North America. <Aeolosoma distichum sp. n. is very abundant in stale, 
or even partially decayed collections of aquatic plants; it is about 
2/5 in. long, but none have yet been seen in the sexually mature stage. 
The body is colourless, depressed, changeable in form, and attractively 
variegated by the large, irregular, red spots which are distinctive of the 
genus. ‘here is a large subcircular lip, the lower surface of which is 
clothed by fine vibratile cilia; laterally and posteriorly to the mouth 
there is a thick, muscular, U-shaped lip. The nephridial tubes begin 
with a slightly expanded orifice which is clothed with long, fine cilia; 
there is no undulating membrane. The labial cilia are the chief 
swimming organs. Pristina flavifrons sp. n. has been found abundantly 
on the under surface of Lemna polyrrhiza, and among the leaflets of 
Myriophyllum ; the sete on the body are short, widely separated, and 
there is no invariable rule as to the number of stylets in each fascicle. 


No sexually mature forms have been observed, reproduction being 
effected by fission. 


* Mem. California Acad. Sci., ii. (1888) pp. 1-8 (2 pls.). 
+ The Microscope, viii. (1888) pp, 33-41 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 583 


8. Nemathelminthes. 


Fertilization of Ascaris.*— Dr. N. Kultschitzky contributes yet 

another account of the phenomena of fertilization in Ascaris megalo- 
cephala. 
_ (1) Formation of polar bodies. Boveri’s account is confirmed ; but, 
like Zacharias, the author maintains the presence of two achromatic 
spindle figures lying beside one another. (2) The modifications of the 
spermatozoon are described in a few words. Reason was seen to believe 
that not the whole chromatin goes to the formation of the male pro- 
nucleus. (8) Formation and structure of pronuclet. Both appear to be 
constructed on the same plan. The author notes as new that each has 
a characteristic nucleolus, sometimes two, rarely three, but the same 
number always in both. The results being similar, while the com- 
ponents of the two pronuclei are originally very different, the process of 
formation is regarded as something sui generis. 

(4) The number of pronuclet is usually two; very rarely there is only 
one, somewhat more frequently three. The single pronucleus is 
probably that of an unfertilized ovum ; the presence of three is perhaps 
due to the entrance of a bi-nucleate spermatozoon. (5) First processes 
in development. After the formation of two pronuclei, there is no 
further change while the eggs remain in the uterus of the living 
Ascaris. Herr Kultschitzsky is convinced that without exception the 
karyokinesis of each pronucleus is independent. The attractive spheres 
of van Beneden belong to the protoplasm, and represent the first hints of 
incipient protoplasmic division. ‘The changes seen after the formation 
of the pronuclei pertain strictly to the segmentation. 

(6) Minutiz of fertilization. The essence of fertilization consists 
in the process by which the sperm-nucleus—an element foreign to 
the ovum—is modified into an essentially inseparable component, a 
nucleus of the same. The act is ended with the establishment of the 
male pronucleus, what follows belongs to development. A fusion of 
the pronuclei, when such exists (the author doubts it), does not pertain 
to the strict process of fertilization. 


Intestinal Epithelium of Ascaris.;—Prof. 8. M. Lukjanow has in- 
vestigated the epithelium of the intestine in Ascaris mystax. He recom- 
mends strongly double imbedding with a combination of collodium and 
paraffin, and double staining with hematoxylin and aurantia. 

Between the cells and the homogeneous membrane below them is a 
clear space traversed by very fine threads parallel to the long axis of the 
cells. Externally the cells exhibit filiform processes like cilia. The 
cells contain granules, in part at least, consisting of fat. The possible 
physiology is briefly noticed ; certain not very noteworthy variations in 
the size, position, membrane and structure of the nuclei are noticed in 
detail; and the plasmosomata to which the author has recently directed 
much attention are fully discussed. 


Studies on Gordiide.{—Prof. F. Vejdovsky has lately had the 
opportunity of examining a large number of specimens of Gordius 
tolosanus. He has some evidence as to variability in the arrangement 
of the cuticular areole, which he discusses at some length. He does not 


* SB. K. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1888, pp. 17-21. 

+ Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 293-302. 

t Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 188-216 (1 pl.). 
2s 2 


584 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


agree with Villot’s conceptions of the limits of species of the genus 
Gordius. The ccelom of all the females examined was found to be very 
well developed, and in no case was the anterior or median region filled 
by the so-called cellular tissue ; but this was present in the hinder part 
of the body-cavity. In no individual were the elements of the peritoneal 
epithelium found dividing, from which it may be concluded that there is 
no formation of cell-tissue at the time when the ova are being produced. 

A peculiarity was noticed in the peritoneal cells; beside the nucleus 
there is a small body which is only faintly coloured by picrocarmine; 
it has an irregular contour, and is generally lobate ; its contents are 
almost homogeneous, and its size is 0°003-0:005 mm. It is impossible 
to say definitely what this body is, but it appears to be a thickened 
portion of the cell-substance. 

The mesenteries are mere continuations of the modified peritoneal 
epithelium. 

The author makes some additions to his earlier account of the 
nervous system. He has already shown that the ganglion-cells only 
occupy the lower part of the ventral cord, and that in Gordius Presslit 
there are transverse commissures which, in some sections, are to be seen 
in the dotted substance. In G. tolosanus he finds that some sections 
show on either side a ganglionic cell which gives off a process to the 
dotted substance ; the two processes fuse and form the transverse com- 
missure. As this is again repeated after a number of sections in which 
it is not to be seen, we may suppose that the lateral ganglionic cells 
and the transverse commissures are repeated in a definite order ; this is 
a fact of some significance in the morphology of the Gordiide, especially 
when we consider that the ovaries are arranged symmetrically in the 
body-cavity. 

The author at one time believed that he could recognize the 
peripheral nervous system in the so-called neural lamella, but with more 
satisfactory material he has been able to see that in some transverse 
sections there is no lamella. It must, therefore, be concluded that the 
peripheral nervous system is not represented by a continuous median 
lamella, but by separate nerve-stalks closely succeeding one another. 
Separate ganglionic cells send off their processes towards the hypodermis 
inclosed in a homogeneous sheath-like membrane, which appears to be a 
continuation of the capsular investment of the ganglionic cells. 

The author has altered his view as to the nature of the so-called 
dotted substance, which he regarded as fibrillar or fibrous substance, as 
he has now convinced himself that there is a real network. He proposes 
to speak of the substance as “neural reticulum,” or simply “ nerve- 
network.” He believes that the neural reticula of Mollusca, Arthro- 
pods, and Worms are completely homologous structures. To understand 
this substance properly, it, must be examined during the course of its 
development ; the author has done this in Oligocheta, with the following 
results :—In each half of the ventral cord, four upper cell-rows of the 
primitive ganglionic rudiments take part in forming the nervous tissue. 
As the cells increase in size their membranes become absorbed, and in 
each half of the ganglion we get a syncytium with four nuclei. The 
latter lose their membranes and swell up considerably, so that the 
regularly disposed nuclei touch. The swelling of the nuclear substance 
continues, the nucleoli become absorbed, and the nuclear reticulum 
becomes very distinct. The cytoplasm which surrounds them forms at 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 585 


first a broad hyaline area, in which the filaments of the network are only 
indistinct. As the nuclear network grows, the surrounding protoplasm 
becomes more and more indistinct, while the fibres of the successive 
nuclei fuse with one another. Finally, the two upper rows of nuclei 
unite, and we get the neural reticulum. This, in sections of each half 
of the ganglion, has the form of three plexiform areas, two inferior and 
one superior ; the lower are separated from the upper by the cytoplasm, 
in which the processes of the ganglia form the transverse commissures. 

The youngest ovaries of Gordiide are characterized by the absence 
of lateral lobes and ovarian cavities; in the older ovaries each lobe 
consists of similar cells, and has a racemose form; their cavities com- 
municate directly with the lumen of the receptaculum ovorum, the walls 
of the latter being continuations of the epithelium of the ovary. The 
development of ova does not occur in all the lobes, but in a few only; 
it is very simple, some epithelial cells of the ovarian lobes growing con- 
siderably, their protoplasm being converted into yolk-granules, and the 
nuclei increasing a little in size; but the change appears to be effected 
very rapidly. It is very probable that several epithelial cells are 
simultaneously converted into ova, the consequence of which is that the 
eggs take on a shield-shaped or polyhedral form. The mature ova pass 
directly from the ovarian tubules into the receptaculum ovorum; this 
last is provisionally regarded as a modified excretory organ, but this 
supposition must be tested by embryological investigations. In well- 
preserved material it is possible to see that the receptaculum has proper 
walls. The atrium, the oviduct, and the seminal pouch have probably 
all arisen from an evagination of the hind-gut. The cloaca of G. 
tolosanus is much more evident than that of G. Presslii. 

In appendices the author deals with some recent statements of 
M. Villot, and with Herr Nansen. account of the nervous system of 
Myzostoma. 


Anguillulide of the Onion.*—M. J. Chatin, who has given an 
account of the disease caused by Tylenchus putrefaciens in the edible 
onion (Allium Cepa), has continued his observations on the nematode 
parasites of this vegetable. He has been able to recognize three species, 
Pelodera strongyloides, Leptodera terricola, and T. putrefaciens. The 
last of these appears to be the cause of the disorganization and destruc- 
tion of the bulb, and the premature destruction of the appended organs. 
The first two are only met with in the superficial parts of the plant, or 
only follow T. putrefactens into the deeper parts; they are simple 
“ saprophytes.” , 


Tylenchus devastatrix.j—In a third communication on the natural 
history of Tylenchus devastatrix, Herr Ritzema Bos discusses the diseases 
which this Nematode causes on plants. He discusses first the disease of 
rye, marked especially by the abnormal swelling of the stem base. 'The 
relevant literature, the nomenclature, and the symptoms are noted, and 
the disease is illustrated in two cuts. He emphasizes the fact that it is 
by the soil that the worms are perpetuated, and notes how the activity 
of the ‘parasites themselves, the action of wind and water, and even 
human agencies effect propagation. In the second place he discusses 


* Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1481-3. 
+ Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 129-88. 


586 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


the tulip-root disease of oats, in which he found in specimens supplied 
by Miss Ormerod the constant presence of Tylenchus devastatriz. 

In his final report * the anthor treats of other diseases of onion, 
hyacinth, clover, fuller’s teasel (Dipsacus) &c., and gives in all nine 
figures of affected plants. The details have rather an agricultural than 
a general biological interest, though the latter is by no means over- 
looked. 


y. Platyhelminthes. 


Embryogeny of Fresh-water Dendrocela.t—Dr. P. Hallez has 
observed that in Planaria polychroa the cocoon is formed in the uterus 
and not in the genital cloaca, as is the case in Dendrocelum lacteum ; 
he believes that the bursa copulatrix will be shown to be a propelling 
organ, the function of which is to introduce the ova and fertilizing ele- 
ments into the uterus. An account is given of the yolk-cells, their 
structure, and the formation from them of a syncytial mass which 
surrounds the eggs. The period of maturation of the egg is character- 
ized by the formation of a certain number of clear vesicles (three in the 
case of D. lacteum) which arise at one of the poles of the egg, in the 
neighbourhood of the nucleus. These bodies are, finally, eliminated ; 
they are certainly homologues of the formations to which Sabatier has 
especially called attention ; the author suggests that they have no more 
significance than the liquid which is expelled by the contractile vesi- 
cles of the Protozoa. No polar globule is formed. The fecundated 
egg is surrounded by a score of radial vitelline cells, which are nearly 
conical in form, and are attached to the egg by their base. The blasto- 
meres of the 2-stage are equal, as are also those of the 4-stage. After 
the 8-stage the surrounding syncytium begins to be formed. About the 
stage in which there are 20 cells a new series of vitelline cells becomes 
disposed radially around the embryo, and this likewise becomes syn- 
cytial, From this mode of distribution of the nutrient elements M. 
Hallez applies the term ectolecithal to the eggs of fresh-water Dendro- 
ceela. 

The first organ to be differentiated is the primitive ectoderm ; this 
is formed by the most external embryonic cells, which approach the 
periphery of the syncytium, and there become flattened. During the 
whole course of development fresh embryonic cells are continually 
becoming flattened on the surface of the embryo, and being converted 
into ectodermic cells; in this way the ectodermal membrane of the 
embryo insensibly passes into the epidermic investment of the adult. 
When the primitive ectoderm has been formed, three groups of blasto- 
meres may be distinguished in the embryo; those of the rudiment of 
the pharynx consist of about twenty cells; immediately behind these 
there are four primitive endodermic cells; and, lastly, there are about 
fifty migratory cells. Till the provisional pharynx begins to function, 
the archenteron is merely lined by the four initial cells of the endoderm ; 
but when the vitelline cells pass into the intestinal cavity, the endoderm 
increases considerably in size, and some of the migratory cells become 
connected with the four primitive endodermic. The blastomeres, when 
undergoing histological differentiation, incorporate a certain quantity of 
the nutrient syncytium which surrounds them. After the embryonic 


* Biol. Centialbl., viii. (1888) pp. 164-78. 
t Arch, Zool. Expér. et Gén., y. (1888) pp. xxxix.-xliii. 


ZCOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 587 


pharynx begins to function, the migratory cells which are scattered in 
the syncytial mass continue to divide and increase considerably in 
number. 

The straight or rhabdoccelic intestine becomes dendroccelic by the 
development of septa, which arise from the periphery and make 
their way towards the interior in a manner which recalls the septa of 
Anthozoa, The permanent endoderm is formed of the migratory cells 
which lie on the internal surface of the walls of the body, and not, as 
Metschnikoff thinks, of yolk-cells swallowed by the embryo. The 
rhabdites, the brain, and the organs of sense are developed at the expense 
of the cells of the connective reticulum. 

M. Hallez recognizes, in fresh-water Planarians, only two layers—the 
ecto- and endoderm. The migratory cells which give rise to various 
organs are regarded as homologous with the “ pseudomesoderm” of 
Ceelenterata, the nutrient syncytial mass corresponding to their 
gelatinous mass. With regard to the affinities of the Turbellaria, 
the author admits that the solid mesoderm of the Pseudocclia 
of the Hertwigs is homologous with the mesoderm of the Entero- 
celia; that the pseudomesoderm of Ceelenterates and the cutis- 
cells of Echinoderms are homologous ectodermic differentiations, and 
that the gastric diverticula of the Ctenophora are homologous with those 
of Hchinoderms. Starting with these bases he divides multicellular 
animals into four groups:—(1) Mesozoa, characterized by ectoderm and 
endoderm only ; (2) Porifera or Coelenterata, characterized by ectoderm, 
pseudomesoderm, and endoderm; (3) Ctenophora and Hchinodermata, 
with the three germinal layers and pseudomesoderm ; and (4) the rest of 
the Metazoa, with three layers but no pseudomesoderm. Having shown 
that most of the Polyclades have a true mesoderm, while the Triclades 
and Stylochus have not, he concludes that the Dendroccela which possess 
a primitive mesoderm, ought to be associated with the fourth group, 
while the Dendroccela which have only a pseudomesoderm, ought to be 
associated with the second, and more particularly with the true Ccelen- 
terata. 

From this point of view the connective reticulum of the Polyclades 
is seen not to correspond morphologically to that of the Triclades; this 
is supported by a number of anatomical and embryological facts. M. 
Hallez is not convinced by the arguments which have been adduced in 
favour of the descent of the Dendroccela from the Ctenophora, but thinks 
that the ancestors of the former must rather be sought for among the 
Anthozoa. 

The Rhabdoccela, as much as the Dendroccela, may be divided into 
two groups, according as they do or do not possess a pseudomesoderm. 
The Microstomea will probably be found to be allied to Hydra or 
Protohydra. 


Lateral Organs.*—Prof. W. Salensky discusses the homology of the 
lateral organs of Nemerteans in connection with an observation made by 
the brothers Sarasin on peculiar “cerebral tubes” in the embryos of 
Helix waltonti. These tubes arise on each side of the cerebral mass as 
two invaginations of the sensory plates, and were compared by the dis- 
coverers with the smelling organs of some Annelids (e. g. Lopadorhyn- 
chus). With this Salensky entirely agrees. He goes further, however, 


* Biol. Centralbl., viii. 1888) pp. 79-80. 


588 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


and regards both the structures above mentioned as homologous with the 
lateral organs of Nemerteans. The similarity in development is un- 
doubtedly very striking, and according to Salensky warrants us in 
associating the three eventually very different organs in a morphological 
series. 

Bilharzia.*—Herr G. Fritsch has reinvestigated the anatomy of 
Bilharzia hematobia Cobbold. In the introductory chapters the occurrence 
and distribution of this important parasite, its probably almost un- 
exceptional origin from impure water, its various names, and the curious 
copulatory conditions are discussed. 

The author then gives a detailed account of the structure of the 
female, of which we have hitherto been to a great extent in ignorance. 
The skin is not smooth, but covered with minute, scattered, readily 
broken spines. They are directed forwards, and perhaps hinder the 
animal from slipping out of the canalis gynzcophorus. The mouth, 
pharynx, and divided limbs of the alimentary canal are then noticed. 
The vagina leads to the expanded uterus, and a narrowed portion of the 
Jatter ought to be called the oviduct. He identifies as the shell-gland 
what Bilharz called the “ capsule,” and treats of the unpaired ovary, the 
large vitelline organs, the hitherto undescribed excretory apparatus, 
and the distinct caudal excretory pore. The next chapter describes the 
position of the above organs in cross sections. The author then dis- 
cusses the histological details :—the clear refractive cuticle without 
distinct subcuticular layer, the inconspicuousuess of distinct skin-glands, 
the sparse longitudinal muscular fibres, and the absence of any closed 
circular sheath, the connective tissue of the parenchyma, and the like. 
The histology of the reproductive organs is described in detail. No 
Laurer-Stieda canal was to be found. As was to be expected, very little 
of the nervous system could be made out. 

The structure of the male is very simple. The formation of the 
gynecophoric canal, the suckers stronger than those of the female, the 
slight development of the alimentary canal, the union of the two limbs 
as in the female behind the generative gland, the position of the testis 
very near the ventral sucker, the opening of the vas deferens in the 
depth of the first part of the canalis gyneecophorus, the absence of any 
copulating organs, are described at length. Finally, the histology is 
briefly reviewed. The strong cuticle with its fine spines, the longi- 
tudinal muscles, the practical absence of glands, the muscular pharynx, 
the muscular seminal vesicle without distinct epithelium, but with 
peculiar cuticular insheathing, the central nervous system more distinct 
than in the female, are shortly described. 


5. Incertze Sedis. 


Balanoglossus Mereschkovskii.|—Herr W. Schimkewitsch gives an 
account of this northern species of Balanoglossus. The body may be 
divided into three parts: cephalic lobes, a single body-segment, and a 
hinder unsegmented portion ; it may be compared with a larval Ascidian, 
save that the latter has no cephalic lobes. The unpaired head-ccelom 
opens to the exterior by means of a left excretory canal only ; the latter 
exhibits the same relation to the peritoneum of the celom as do the 


* Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 192-223 (2 pls.). 
t Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 280-3. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 089 


ectodermal parts of the segmental organs to their mesodermal rudiment. 
As, however, there are two canals in B. Kuppferi, we may homologize 
their duct with the cephalic segmental organs (but not with head- 
kidneys). 

The folds of the inner peritoneal layer have not, as Bateson thought, 
anything to do with the so-called proboscis gland, but rather have the 
same kind of relation to the vascular system as have the pericardial 
glands of Annelids; their function is that of excretory organs. The 
proboscis gland of Bateson (heart of Spengel), has a proper muscular 
wall, while its epithelium is like that of the endothelium of some parts 
of the peritoneum of the proboscis. If Spengel is correct in regarding 
this organ as derived from the pulsating vesicle of Tornaria, it may be 
compared with the similar vesicle of Molluscan larva. These last (e. g. 
in Lima) do not communicate with the vascular system, but with the 
cavity inclosed between the two mesodermal layers, which Salensky, in 
Vermetus, homologized with the ccelomic cavity. The organ which 
Bateson regarded as the notochord cannot be compared with the true 
chord ; it probably represents the preoral part of the enteron, and is 
well developed in correlation with the great development of the preoral 
lobe. The lacuna in the proboscis appears to have no proper walls, and 
must not be homologized with the heart. 

The vascular system of this species appears to be very simple, the 
dorsal and ventral trunks alone being developed. The layer of nerve- 
fibres is under the whole of the integument; its dorsal and ventral 
thickenings have a simpler relation to the body epithelium than is the 
case in B. minutus. The dorsal central nervous system has no central 
cavity, no neuropores, and no dorsal cords. 

The skeleton, as Spengel rightly supposed, is merely a local thicken- 
ing of the membrana propria, and has none of the morphological 
elements described by Marion in B. Talaboti. The branchial part of 
the enteric canal forms a few loops, and the gills have the same structure 
as in B. Kowalevskit. 'The branchial region divides into two parts—an 
upper with the epibranchial ridge, and a lower which has the form of a 
small groove, the base of which is beset with papille. This groove is 
similar to the diverticulum of the segmented portion, and the two may 
be regarded as the homologue of the endostyle, the hypobranchial 
groove, and the thyroid gland of the Cyclostomata. The lateral evagina- 
tions of the segment-region probably form rudimentary gill-sacs, and 

' may be compared with the peribranchial spaces of Tunicates, and the 
lateral diverticula of the anterior part of the intestine of larve of 
Amphioxus. Behind these is a looped portion; in the second and 
fourth of these loops there is communication with the exterior by means 
of pores ; of the last there are no less than six in the fourth loop. They 
are probably to be regarded as rudimentary gill-clefts, without valves or 
skeleton. 

The funnel-shaped organs in the segment have no internal folds, 
and may apparently be compared with the ectodermal parts of the 
segmental organs of the first body-segment. Bateson’s view that the 
reproductive organs have some relation to the epidermis is not accepted ; 
these organs consist of a series of peritoneal outgrowths on either side 
of the body. Hach ovary is attached to a hollow stalk, which represents 
the neck of the outgrowth, and, like it, consists of modified peritoneal 
cells. The eggs develope in the walls of the sac, in the midst of meso- 


590 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


dermal cells. The testes are formed of hollow saccules, which consist 
of an external connective tissue, and an internal epithelium; as their 
internal surface has no peritoneal investment, the genital cells project 
directly into the cavity of the sac. 

B. Mereschkovskii may be regarded as a trochophore provided with a 
single, first, body-segment, and the cephalic ganglion. It is modified 
by the possession of certain characters (dorsal nerve-tube, gill-clefts, 
&c.), which bring it close to the Chordata. 


‘Challenger ’ Myzostomida.*—Dr. L. von Greeff has published a sup- 
plementary report based on the Myzostomida found by Dr. P. H. Car- 
penter during the investigations of the Crinoids collected during the 
voyage of H.M.S8. ‘ Challenger’; seven new forms are described. 


Echinodermata. 


Development of Egg of Echinocardium cordatum.t— Herr A. 
Fleischmann has exarined the early stages in the development of this 
irregular Echinoid. The fertilized ovum is a homogeneous finely- 
granular sphere of protoplasm inclosed in a vitelline membrane and a 
rather thick gelatinous envelope. The first cleavage-plane is seen 
about an hour and a half after fertilization, and segmentation is nearer 
one pole than the other. The first plane appears first at the animal 
pole, and later, extends to the vegetative, so that division is first com- 
pleted at the animal pole. In consequence of the mode of appearance 
of the second plane there is, for a short time, a three-celled phase of 
cleavage. The cleavage-cavity next begins to appear, and has at first 
a somewhat tubular form, but, owing to the closer approximation of the 
cells of the upper (animal) pole, the cavity takes the form of a trun- 
cated cone. 

From the very beginning of cleavage the egg loses more and more its 
distinctly spherical form, and the four cleavage “spheres” are drawn 
out. The details of cleavage are given, but the result attained is that 
differences in cleavage have no anatomical or phylogenetic significance. 


Renal Organ of Echinoids.t{—Herren P. and F. Sarasin offer a 
suggestion as to the function of the brownish organ which accompanies 
the stone-canal of Echinoids, and has had such different uses assigned to 
it. In Asthenosoma the organ is for its whole length traversed by a 
large cavity; from this there are given off a number of large glandular 
lobes with narrow lumina. The glandular tubes opening into the chief 
cavity contain large clear vesicular cells, which, in a striking manner, 
call to mind the renal cells of Molluscs. The tubes are imbedded in a 
stroma of connective tissue, in the smaller or larger meshes of which 
the nutrient hemolymph circulates. Fine canals lined by regular 
epithelium are given off from the large glandular lobules, and then make 
their way towards the periphery, and after a more or less coiled course, 
pass into larger spaces, which open on the surface of the organ by small 
orifices into the ccelom ; these during life are well ciliated. The authors 
believe that these infundibular openings of the renal canals correspond 
to the ciliated infundibula of certain Holothurians, and they believe 
that they are right in calling them nephrostomata. The well-known 


* Reports of H.MS. ‘Challenger,’ Myzostomida (ii.), lx. (1887) 16 pp., 4 pls. 
+ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 131-42 (1 pl.). 
} Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 217-8, 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 591 


corpuscles of the coelom may be sometimes found in considerable numbers 
in the infundibular ducts. 

It is clear that if the Sarasins’ view of the function of this organ be 
correct, the organ must have an efferent duct or ureter: this is to be 
found in the structure, as to the existence of which authors have differed 
so much. The causes of the difficulty in detecting it are that it arises 
from the side of the organ, and that it becomes lost in the remarkable 
spongy structures filled with coelomic corpuscles, about which so much 
has been recently written. 

The renal cavity, which is of some size in the lower and middle 
parts of the organ, is much constricted superiorly. The stone-canal and 
ureter unite into a common collecting vesicle, which, by means of a 
narrow canal, passes into the collecting cavity of the canuliculi of the 
madreporite. The renal cavity ends blindly near the cirecumeesophageal 
vascular ring, and the blood-carrying meshes of the connective tissue of 
the kidney communicate with the lacunz of the blood-vascular ring. 
The excretory matters of the blood are alone removed from the body by 
the ureter. The authors regard the whole kidney as an appendage of 
the water-vascular system, the excretory nature of which has lately been 
insisted on by Hartog. 


Remarkable Ophiurid from Brazil.*— Prof. F. Jeffrey Bell gives an 
account of an Ophiurid from Itamaraca, the arms of which are about 
forty times the diameter of the disc. Owing to the fact that all three 
specimens have lost the covering of their disc, it is impossible to say 
definitely to what genera these interesting forms belong, but on the 
supposition that the amount is small, or that the disc is nearly “naked,” 
the species, which is called sesquipedalis, is placed in Liitken’s genus 
Ophionephthys. It is possible that the loss of the upper surface of the 
disc is associated with the evacuation of the genital products. Naturalists 
who may have the advantage of seeing this very long-armed form alive, 
should carefully observe the phenomena of the restoration of the disc. 


New and Old Holothurians.j—Prof. H. Ludwig has had the oppor- 
tunity of examining the sixteen Holothurians collected in Ceylon by the 
Drs. Sarasin, and he takes the opportunity of suggesting that some 
recently described species are synonymous with forms already known. 
Three species from Angra Pequena are also noticed. Highteen species 
collected by Dr. Sander, of the German ship ‘ Prinz Adalbert,’ are also 
enumerated ; among them there is a new. species of Pseudocucumis 
(P. Theeli) ; the study of this has resulted in a fresh diagnosis of some 
allied genera; with Pseudocucumis Prof. Ludwig would place Amphi- 
cyclus, as he does not attach as much importance to the presence of an 
inner circlet of smaller tentacles as do Bell and Lampert; he refuses 
consequently to accept Lampert’s division of the Polychirote of Bell 
into the sub-groups of Monocyclia and Amphicyclia. 


Coelenterata. 


New Mode of Life among Meduse.{—Mr. J. W. Fewkes gives an 
account of an extraordinary case of parasitism among Meduse. Near 
the anal fin of Seriola zonata curious appendages, which reminded him 

* Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., i. (1888) pp. 368-70. 


+ SB. K. Preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1887, pp. 1217-44 (1 pl.). 
t{ Ann. and Mag, Nat. Hist., i, (1888) pp. 362-8. 


592 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


of an attached fungus growth, were observed. By the aid of a lens the 
attached body was seen to be a Hydroid, for which the name of Hydrichthys 
mirus has been proposed, The hydroid forms consist of sexual and asexual 
individuals, the latter of which are simple flask-shaped bodies without 
tentacles and with terminal mouths; they may be called filiform bodies, 
and the sexual persons gonosomes. Neither have a circle of tentacles 
around the mouth-opening. The medusa-stage (gonophore) has a Sarsia- 
like bell and manubrium, four radial tubes, and four tentacles without 
appendages. 

The loss of tentacles by the hydroid may be ascribed to the parasitic 
habit. The relation of the medusoid to the Sarsia-like group implies 
degeneration and not phylogenetic simplicity. The polymorphism of the 
hydroid stages is also an important character. Hydrichthys appears to 
be the nearest known ally of Velella. Mr. Fewkes thinks that we may 
learn from the present case that the true affinities of most Hydroids 
cannot be definitely made out until both Hydroid and Medusa are 
studied together. 


Meduse from New England.*—Mr. J. W. Fewkes gives an ac- 
count of the Meduse observed on the coast of Maine and at Grand 
Manan. The only Physophore captured was Nanomia cara, of which 
little is known; the author was able to make some observations on its 
development, and to see that the primitive larva preserves the Medusa- 
form; it “may be supposed to approach more closely the ancestral form 
of the Siphonophora among other Hydromeduse than any other medusi- 
form larva.” The close homology between a medusiform gonophore 
and a simple hydroid is such that the author thinks we are justified in 
regarding the young of Nanomia with a float and no primitive hydro- 
phyllium as analogous with the primitive larva of Agalma. Mr. Fewkes 
believes that the ancestral form of all Hydromeduse, as well as of all 
the Siphonophora, will be found to be similar to the primitive larva of 
Agalma in its youngest stages. It had the form of a ciliated placenta, 
with an enlargement at one end and a mouth at the opposite. The 
enlargement at one end was formed of three layers, wall bell-shaped or 
gelatinous, and it is this which forms the bell of the Medusz, the float 
of Nanomia, and the primitive hydrophyllium of Agalma. In the fixed 
hydroid it becomes a base of attachment, in Rhizophysa or Nanomia a 
float, and in Agalma a covering scale. 

Hydrichthys mirus is @ new genus and species, for which see supra. 
The remarkable genus Callinema was rediscovered by Mr. Fewkes, who 
gives some notes on the anatomy of C. ornata|um|; he does not agree with 
Prof. Haeckel in thinking that it belongs to the genus Phacellophora. 


New Physophore.t—Mr. J. W. Fewkes describes a new genus of 
Physophorids—Pleophysa—which has interesting morphological affini- 
ties with already known genera. The large float is partially covered by 
a hood-shaped body which is (or appears to be) bound by muscular bands 
to a globular enlargement of the polyp-stem. There are no nectocalyces 
nor hydrophyllia. The form of the stem (axis) which ordinarily bears 
polypites, is reduced to a globular shell, and the nectostem, or part which 
ordinarily carries nectocalyces, is modified into the hood. P. agassizii 
is the name of the species. 


* Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Camb., xiii. (1888) pp. 209-40 (6 pls.). 
+ Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., i. (1888) pp. 317-22 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 593 


A new family, which may be called Pleophysidx, must be formed for 
the reception of this remarkable form ; its affinities are difficult to make 
out, but it has close resemblance to the Angelide, from which it differs 
in the characters of the hood. This hood appears to be homologous 
with the nectostem of other Physophores, which assumes a variety of 
shapes in certain genera; the forms most nearly approaching it are to 
be seen in Pleurophysa and Haliphyta. In the Rhizophyside the necto- 
stem is ordinarily reduced to nothing or is wanting. 


New Pennatula from the Bahamas.*—Dr. G. H. Fowler describes 
Pennaiula bellissima sp.n. from the Bahamas. The siphonozooids, which 
are mainly placed on the ventral surface of the rachis, are specially 
massed at the bases of the leaves. They are not separable into two types 
by size or other characters, and are distinguishable from the immature 
autozooids at the point where the two meet; they have a strong siphono- 
glyphe at the abaxial end of the stomodceum. The immature autozocids 
are not provided with tentacles, though they have stomodcea and the 
usual eight mesenteries; they have a true siphonoglyphe, though that 
groove is wanting from the mature polyps. As the organ appears to be 
useless in young buds, it would seem that we have here to do witha 

case in which asexual ontogeny is repeating phylogeny. 
The spicules are long and fusiform, and apparently triradiate in 
section. ‘The new species appears to be most nearly allied to P. naresii, 
but differs from it in the number of rudimentary leaves, the absence of 
wartlike protuberances from the concave border of the leaf, the freedom 
of the mid-dorsal line of the rachis, &c.; the row of immature zooids is 
characteristic of both forms. 


Actinize of Coasts of France.t—Dr. P. Fischer, in this contribution 
to the Actinology of the French coasts, deals with the forms observed at 
Roscoff and at Banyuls. The work is purely descriptive, and the author 
attempts to remove some of the difficulties which all must have felt who 
have tried to determine specifically these variable creatures; the modifi- 
cations observed in different regions are duly noted. Sixty species in all 
are now known from the French coast, seventeen of which are common 
to the Atlantic and Mediterranean coasts; many are known in more 
northern latitudes. Nineteen species are confined to the Mediter- 
ranean Sea. 

Gonactinia prolifera.t—Herren F. Blochmann and C. Hilger give 
an anatomical account of this Norwegian Sea-Anemone, the chief interest 
of which lies in its power of asexual reproduction by transverse fission. 
This appears to be quite a regular phenomenon. The first sign is the 
appearance of small, bud-like projections, a little below the middle of 
the body; these are the rudiments of the new tentacles. They soon 
exhibit a distinct arrangement in two rows, similar to that of the 
circumoral tentacles. An oral disc and an cesophageal tube are formed, 
and above the new circlet of tentacles the body-wall becomes marked by 
a circular constriction, and grows inwards. Sars once observed three 
connected individuals. 

Various modes of asexual reproduction have now been observed 
among Actinians. The most ordinary is that first observed by Dicque- 


* Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1888, pp. 135-40 1 pl.). 
+ Arch. Zool. Exper. et Gén., v. (1887 [8]) pp. 381-442, 
t Morphol. Jahrb., xiii. (1888) pp. 385-401 (2 pls.). 


594 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


mare, in which fragments of various sizes are given off from the base of 
the body-wall, and grow up into new animals. It is doubtful, however, 
whether this is a normal process. Longitudinal division has also been 
observed, though not frequently ; division may begin either with the 
oral dise or with the base. Here again it is not certain that the pheno- 
menon is not due to chance external influences. In some cases, at any 
rate, the division is not complete as far as the base. Andres has 
observed transverse fission in an Aiptasia, but he did not think that he 
there had to do with a normal occurrence. In Gonactinia the fission has 
been observed only in young animals without developed generative 
organs ; similar phenomena have been observed in Flabellum and Fungia, 
but here there were certain morphological differences which led Semper 
to suppose that he had to do with an alternation of generation. In 
Gonactinia there are no such differences, and at present we may rather 
compare its mode of multiplication with that of Hydra, where all the 
forms finally become sexually mature. Special interest attaches to this 
mode of reproduction now that Gétte has suggested that the youn 
Scyphostoma has the essential structure of an Anthozoon. While there 
are, no doubt, remarkable resemblances between them, there is one 
important difference. In Gonactinia the products of division are exactly 
alike, but the Ephyra which is set free is not the same as the sessile 
Scyphostoma. Moreover, the products of Gonactinia may both again 
multiply by transverse fission, but this is not the case with Ephyra. 
Notwithstanding these differences we may regard this regular division 
in Actiniz as a further support to the views of Gitte as to the connection 
between the Anthozoa and the Acalephe. 
One case of reproduction by budding was observed in Gonactinia. 


Nature of Polyparium.*—Herr W. Haacke discusses the “ tectology 
and phylogeny ” of Korotnefi’s Anthozoan genus Polyparium. The dis- 
coverer regarded it as a colony or corm; Ehlers (on theoretical grounds) 
as the portion of a person ; Haacke differs (on theoretical grounds) from 
both, and would derive the curious form from an ordinary bilateral 
Anthozoon. He starts from a form like a young Halcampa ; the conical 
aboral end is replaced by a broad cylindrical basal disc, and the simple 
tentacle wreath is supposed to be multiple; the organism is pulled out 
in breadth, the esophagus and mouth are supposed to disappear, the 
tentacles become short, and acquire wide terminal apertures ; and lastly 
the basal disc is supposed to develop a number of suckers—the result 
would exhibit the external features of Polyparium. The author goes on 
to justify such an interpretation and derivation of Korotneff’s genus, but 
his theoretical arguments are difficult to summarize. It is probably 
better to await the possible reinvestigation of the animal itself. 


Porifera. 


Comparative Anatomy of Sponges.t—In the first of his studies on 
the Comparative Anatomy of Sponges, Mr. A. Dendy describes Ridleia 
g.n., and Quasillina Norman, allied Monaxonid genera. In the former 
the inhalent and exhalent channels are canalicular, and the flagellated 
chambers are provided with special inhalent and exhalent canaliculi, 
while in Quasillina the inhalent and exhalent channels are for the most 


* Biol. Centralbl., vii. (1888) pp. 684-9. 
+ Quart. Journ. Micr, Sci., xxviii. (1888) pp, 513-29 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 595 


part lacunar, and the flagellated chambers open directly into them. 
There is, however, some evidence to show that flagellated chambers 
with and others without special canaliculi may coexist in the same sponge. 
Both genera are remarkable for the development of the fibrous tissue. 
In Ridleia it is largely developed in the ectosome proper, and in the 
wall of the oscular tube, where it is arranged in well-defined layers of 
longitudinal and circular fibres. In Quasillina it is almost entirely 
absent from the ectosome proper, but is well developed in the wall of 
the oscular tube, where it forms definite annular ridges in which the 
close-packed fibres (myocytes) have a distinct, wavy outline. The mode 
of occurrence of the fibrous tissue indicates that its function is a contrac- 
tile one, or in other words, that the fibres are muscular fibres; the 
annular bands of fibres around the oscular tube of Quasillina are probably 
to be regarded as sphincter muscles. 

With regard to the origin of spicules Mr. Dendy now takes Prof. 
Schulze’s view that the polyactinal type of spicule is the primitive form 
from which the monactinal type has been derived by abortion of the 
rays. ‘The swollen base or head of a typical Suberitid spicule, together 
with the corresponding enlargement of the axial thread, indicates the 
position where other rays were at one time united with that one which 
now alone remains. In the typical Suberitide and in Ridleia all rays 
but one have disappeared, but their former presence is still indicated by 
the head of the tylostylote spicules. In Quasillina the spicules are still 
more modified, and the head has, in most cases, disappeared. 

It is probable that the lacunar type of canal system, as it occurs in 
the Monaxonida, with chambers opening directly into wide lacune, is less 
primitive than the canalicular type. 


Chromatology of Sponges.*—Dr. C. A. MacMunn, out of the twelve 
species of British sponges examined, found ten to contain chlorophyll; 
Krukenberg and other observers have figured the dominant chlorophyll 
band in eight others. Probably Krukenberg { used solutions which 
were too dilute to show the remaining bands, or examined only thin 
layers of the solutions. Lipochromes occur in nearly all sponges, and 
a histohematin in seven of the sponges examined. A pigment resembling 
a floridine (a class of red pigments described by Krukenberg) occurs in 
Halichondria rosea, in addition to chlorophyll, a histohzmatin, and a 
lipochrome. A uranidine (a class of yellow pigments also described by 
Krukenberg), occurs in Grantia coriacea, in addition to chlorophyll and 
a lipochrome. This uranidine, like Krukenberg’s aplysinofulvin (one 
of the five pigments of Aplysina), and others of the same class was 
changed by boiling to dark green. 

With regard to the chlorophyll present in so many sponges, it was 
found to resemble plant chlorophyll very closely. The lipochrome 
constituent or constituents, however, reacted differently from the lipo- 
chrome constituents of plant chlorophyll, as it remained unchanged by 
the action of iodine in iodide of potassium, and the fractional method did 
not separate the chlorophyll constituents (Hansen’s “ chlorophyll-green” 
and ‘“chlorophyll-yellow”) so completely as in the case of plant 
chlorophyll. In these two points it resembles enterochlorophyll, and 
proves that the chlorophyll is of purely animal origin. Microscopic 


* Journ. of Physiol., ix. (1888) pp. 1-25. Cf. Journ. Chem. Soc. Lond., 1888, 
Abstr., pp. 619-20. + ‘Grundziige einer vergleich. Physiol. der Farbstoffe,’ 1884. 


596 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


search for unicellular alge, moreover, yielded negative results. The 
fact that in sponges lipochromes so often accompany chlorophyll, and 
sometimes replace it, would go to show that the step from a lipochrome 
to a chlorophyll is not a great one; and it is highly probable that these 
pigments are concerned in the formation of fatty matters, perhaps from 
the waste carbonic anhydride given off during the katabolic changes in 
the tissues, and from the water in which they are bathed ; carbohydrates 
are perhaps similarly formed. ‘This would coincide with the views of 
Schunck, who regards chlorophyll as a respiratory pigment, but probably 
a carbonic acid-carrier, not an oxygen-carrier. In sponges, the histohe- 
matin, when present, has probably the function of an oxygen-carrier. 
A chart of spectra, with measurements, accompanies the paper. 


Gemmules of Silicispongize.*—M. E. Topsent describes the occur- 
rence of gemmules in Chalina oculata, C. gracilenta, Cliona vastifica, 
Suberites ficus. They consist of large cellular elements with aggregations 
of bright granules, and of an envelope of keratode, but they exhibit no 
foramen nor special spicules. Those of the first-named species occur on 
the lower part of the firm stalk, and are somewhat complex. Bowerbank 
seems to have described a Chalina with gemmules as a new species, 
Diplodemia vesicula. In Chalina gracilenta they occur close upon the 
substratum ; in Cliona, close beside the perforated substance ; in Suberites 
domuncula and S. ficus they have a similar position near the shell or 
substratum on which the sponge is seated. Carter saw them, and re- 
garded them as arrested ova. Except in Cliona vastifica the gemmules 
become mature in spring; in this species they occur all the year round, 
and contemporaneously with the sexual reproduction. 


Silicoblasts.t—Herr Noll describes the silicoblasts of some siliceous 
sponges. In Desmacidon bosei N. he found on the strands of skeletal 
spicules traces of very large spindle-shaped cells, which seemed to be 
either spongioblasts or silicoblasts. Similar cells were seen in Sponyilla 
fragilis. They inclosed in some cases minute incipient spicules. A 
cell seems to become elongated, its content becomes thin and clear, the 
central filament appears as a darker streak quite inclosed by the cell. 
With the growth of the spicule the protoplasm disappears, leaving in 
some cases a very. thin envelope. In some cases the cells which form 
the spicules contain two nuclei. 


Survival of Spongille after Development of Swarm-larve.{—Herr 
M. Weltner has examined the common belief that reproduction causes 
the death of Spongilla. After various failures in the attempt to keep 
alive for a long time examples of Hphydatia fluviatilis, he found it easy 
of accomplishment with young Spongille reared from larve. A de- 
cidedly female Spongilla was kept alive for nearly four months after the 
issue of the last larva. In opposition to the statements of Lieberkiihn 
and Metschnikoff, it was found that dermis, excurrent tubes, and 
flagellate chambers and canals do not completely disappear in the 
perennial sponges of the Tegelsee. The author agrees with Gitte 
that in FE. fluviatilis there can be no question of a decided seasonal 
difference, or of a true alternation of generation, such as, according to 
Marshall, occurs in Spongilla lacustris. 


* Comptes Rendus, ev. (1888) pp. 1298-1300. 
+ Biol. Centralbl., vii. (1888) pp. 767-8 (60 Versamml. Deutsch. Naturf. Wies- 
baden, 1887). ¢ Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., i. (1888) pp. 340-3. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 597 


‘Challenger’ Sponges.—Messrs. 8. O. Ridley and A. Dendy report * 
on the Monaxonid Sponges collected by H.M.S. ‘ Challenger.’ In the in- 
troduction a full account is given of the spicules. Cladorhiza tridentata 
(from a depth of 1600 fathoms) has imbedded in its soft tissues a large 
number of small yellow globular bodies; each of these consists: of a 
central, more deeply staining and granular portion which is surrounded 
by and imbedded in a matrix of faintly staining, perfectly hyaline, 
ground substance. Other peculiar cup-shaped bodies occur towards the 
periphery of the sponge, and the authors suggest that the whole structure 
may be phosphorescent, and serve to attract the minute organisms on 
which the sponge feeds. ‘The order Monaxonida is divided into the two 
suborders Halichondrina and Clayulina; the former consists of the 
Homorhaphide, Heterorhaphide, Desmacidonide, and Axinellide ; the 
latter of the Suberitidee and Spirastrellide. More than two hundred 
species or well-marked varieties are described, twenty-four of which 
were found at depths between one and two thousand fathoms ; those from 
great depths are, almost without exception, beautifully symmetrical, 
while shallow-water forms are characteristically shapeless, or at most 
digitate or ramose. The Hexactinellidat are reported on by Prof. 
F. E. Schulze, who gives an atlas of 104 most beautiful plates. Twenty 
new genera and sixty-five new species are described ; the greatest depth 
at which they were found was 2900 fathoms, from which Bathydorus 
jimbriatus was taken. 


Protozoa. 


Butschli’s Protozoa.t{—Since we last gave a notice of this important 
work parts 35-46 (pp. 1089-1376), with plates 51-71, have been 
published. The history of the progress of our knowledge of the 
Infusoria is completed, and a bibliography containing 822 titles is 
appended. The account of the first sub-class—that of the Ciliata—is 
commenced, its general morphology being first dealt with; this is 
followed by descriptions of the ectoplasm and its differentiations, in 
which, inter alia, the interesting question of the striation sometimes 
observed is discussed ; the locomotor organs of the ectoplasm and allied 
structures are next described, and here, in addition to pseudopodia and 
tentacular processes, cirri, membranelle, and undulating membranes are 
noticed. Part 46 breaks off in the midst of an account of the mouth 
and gullet considered as differentiations of the ectoplasm. 


Multinucleate Infusoria.s—Prof. A. Gruber describes the various 
multinucleate Infusoria which he has observed, and gives a detailed 
account of the division of Holosticha scutellum. When the process 
begins the numerous small nuclei unite; beside the large nucleus thus 
formed a small accessory nucleus for the first time appears; the latter 
Gruber believes to be due to the fusion of extremely small previously 
invisible elements. The accessory body divides first, then the large 
nucleus. All the divisions of the latter exhibit nuclear figures pre- 
viously described. A transverse constriction of the body becomes more 
and more marked. Each half contains the division products of large and 


* Reports of H.MLS. ‘Challenger, Monaxonida, lix. (1887) 273 pp., 51 pls. 
+ Reports of H.M.S. ‘Challenger,’ Hexactinellida, lili. (1887) 513 pp., 104 pls. 
{ Bronn’s ‘Klassen u. Ordnungen. Protozoa,’ by Dr. O. Biitschli, parts 35-46, 
Leipzig and Heidelberg, 1887-8. 
§ Ber. Nat, Gesell. Freiburg, iii. (1888) pp. 58-69 (2 pls.). 
1888. Ty Fe 


598 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


small nuclei, which then exhibit a long series of further divisions. The 
divisions of the accessory elements do not keep pace with those of the 
larger nuclei. In each half of one individual just before separation 
Gruber observed thirty-two division products of the large nucleus, and 
the number is increased after separation. The aecessory elements seem 
to divide again and again, till too small to be seen, 


Folliculina ampulla.*—Prof. K. Mébius has reinvestigated that in- 
teresting Infusorian (F'laschentierchen) Folliculina ampulla, specimens 
of which he found on the woodwork of Kiel harbour. The nature of 
the individual animals is described. The lobes of the anterior funnels 
bear ciliated combs (pectinellx) and ciliated lappets (membranelle); the 
mouth is guarded by a crescentic valve; the “gullet” is conical, and 
leads directly into the digestive plasma. A dorsal anterior anal opening 
is present. The nucleus is posterior and necklace-like. 

Mobius describes the peculiar budding process which results in mul- 
tiplication. The young form remains until mature connected with the 
parent byastrand. The bud has no developed funnel-lobes nor protective 
sheath. It differs from a Metozoan germ in being almost as large as the 
individual parent. The duration of the free life of the young form was 
not discovered. 

Lastly, the author discusses the “ psychical life” of Folliculina. He 
maintains the necessary supposition of a low grade of “ consciousness,” 
and on this subject submits some instructive considerations. 


Fresh-water Infusoria of the United States.;—Dr. A.C. Stokes has 
published a preliminary contribution towards a history of the fresh- 
water Infusoria of the United States. The forms identical with 
European species are mostly recorded by name only, while American 
genera and species are much more fully characterized. Of a number of 
these forms we have already given more extended notice. 


New Foraminifera.t—Dr. H. Blanc describes an interesting new 
species of Gromia (G. brunneri) from the mud at the bottom of Lake 
Geneva. The colour was pale yellow, the form varied with size from 
oval or spherical in the larger, to fusiform or bottle-shaped in the smaller 
specimens. There is a strong opaque shell, with oval or circular aperture, 
composed of small vegetable bodies cemented together, sometimes along 
with quartz-grains. Under this there is also a peculiar chitin-like, 
internal membrane or shell. Fine pseudopodia flow from the aperture, 
and cover the shell. They lengthen, anastomose, and exhibit currents. 
Part of the external protoplasm probably forms the cement of the shell, 
The vacuoles are small and not numerous. Whether any were contractile 
could not be determined. The nucleus has a peculiarly thick membrane, 
a zone of globules surrounding this internally, and granules of chromatin, 
With high power it exhibits a reticular appearance. The author finally 
discusses the peculiar habitat and emphasizes the distinctiveness of this 
interesting new Gromia. 


_ _ Psorospermium Haeckelii.s—Dr. A. Wierzejski has examined this 
interesting parasite. He finds that, in the quiescent condition, it is 
inclosed by thin capsules ; the outermost is very finely striated, and is 


* Biol. Centralbl., vii. (1888) pp. 721-3. 

+ Journ Trenton Nat. Hist. Soc., i. (1888) pp. 71-345 (18 pls.). 
t Ree. Zool. Suisse, iv. (1888) pp. 497-513 (1 pl.). 

§ Zool. Anzeig., xi, (1888) pp. 230-1. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 599 


distinctly hyaline; it does not take up any colouring matter, and is, to 
all appearances, produced by the tissue of the host. The median capsule 
appears to be made up of separate strong plates, laid down somewhat 
irregularly, and having fine ducts between them; this capsule stains 
very intensely with anilin-dyes. The internal capsule is the thinnest, 
and like the other two is transparent; it does not stain with carmine or 
anilin. Treatment with iodide of potassium and sulphuric acid shows 
that the median capsule consists of true cellulose, and it may be, therefore, 
that the parasite is a plant and not an animal. 


Megastoma entericum.*—MM. B. Grassi and W. Schewiakoff have 
an account of the structure of this protozoic parasite of mammals. The 
latter author is alone responsible for the views enunciated as to the 
systematic position of the animal. He believes it to be closely allied to 
Hexamitus inflatus Duj.,and to Giardia agilis of Kiinstler. They agree 
essentially in the arrangement of the flagella, but Megastoma is dis- 
tinguished by the development of its peristome, which has brought about 
some change in the place of insertion of the flagella, and in the form of 
the nucleus. . 

The parasite has been found in a number of Rodents, and in Cats, 
Dogs, and Sheep. It lives chiefly in the duodenum and jejunum, and is 
found encysted in the colon. By means of its peristomial excavation it 
attaches itself to the epithelial cells of the villi, at the cost of which it 
lives; while it is dangerous as preventing normal absorption. From the 
observations of Grassi it appears probable that Megastoma may produce 
diarrhoea and anemia in man. 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 143-54 (1 pl.). 


272 


600 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


BOTANY. 


A. GENERAL, including the Anatomy and Physiology 
of the Phanerogamia. 


a Anatomy.* 
(1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm. 


Division of the Nucleus, Cell-division, and Impregnation.}— Prof. 
E. Strasburger has continued his observations on the changes which take 
place during the division of the nucleus in vegetable and animal cells. 
He adopts Schwarz’s terminology of linine for the substance of the 
hyaloplasmic filaments of the nucleus in a state of repose, chromatine for 
the substance of the granulations. The filaments of linine are composed 
of numerous folds, and anastomose so frequently in the nucleus when in 
a state of repose, that it presents the appearance of a weft of close 
meshes in which the threads cannot possibly be followed throughout 
their course. The nuclear cavity does not, however, as the author 
previously supposed, contain only a single filament. The use of eau de 
Javelle shows that the division of the nucleus is not accompanied by the 
segmentation of a single filament, but by the dissociation of filaments 
already distinct. 

The filaments of the spindle are always formed, in the higher plants, 
at the expense of the cytoplasm which has penetrated into the nuclear 
cavity, as has been shown also by Guignard. The changes which take 
place in the nuclear filaments, as well as the movements which they per- 
form, are of an active nature, and the poles serve only to regulate this 
movement. The movements which the filaments execute in the knot-phase 
(‘phase du peloton”) are independent of the future poles, showing that 
the filaments are endowed with forces of their own, capable of modifying 
their structure and of changing their position. While this phenomenon 
is proceeding, the nuclear membrane is still intact. The two poles of 
the future spindle are formed in the surrounding cytoplasm during the 
phase of lax knot. After the formation of the bundle and of the nuclear 
plate, the segments double themselves where they have not done so 
previously. The secondary segments of each daughter-nucleus approach 
one-another, and the surrounding cytoplasm envelopes them with a 
membrane ; no other elements take part in the formation of the daughter- 
nuclei. 

There can be no doubt that, in the higher plants, the cytoplasm 
enters into the nuclear cavity for the purpose of forming the spindle- 
fibres. The spindle filaments do not persist in the form of primary con- 
necting threads between the secondary segments; and it is only at a 
later period that they receive an addition of secondary filaments at the 
expense of the cytoplasm entering between their interstices. The whole 
mass of filaments usually separates later from the daughter-nuclei, and 
forms between them a lenticular body surrounded by the cytoplasm. 
When the cells are filled with cell-sap, the cytoplasm finally forms 
around the connecting filaments only a tube with more or less thin wall, 


* This subdivision contains (1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm; (2) Other Cell- 
contents (including Secretions); (3) Structure of Tissues; and (4) Structure of 
Organs. + Morot’s Journ, Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 81-91. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 601 


its edges resting on the masses of cytoplasm which surround the daughter- 
nuclei, For this tube Strasburger proposes the term connecting-tube. 

The nucleoli disappear during these changes at an earlier or later 
period, and take no important part in the nutrition of the nuclear 
filaments. The chemical changes which take place in the elements of 
the cellular plate may possibly be due to the influence of the substance 
of the nucleoli. In cells filled with cytoplasm the cellular plate soon 
stretches across the whole width of the equatorial plane, and the trans- 
formation of the dermatesomes into membrane progresses rapidly from 
the centre towards the periphery. The formation of cell-wall is therefore 
entirely dependent on the presence of a nucleus. 

Prof. Strasburger finally discusses the question whether the male 
and female organs in the act of impregnation have the same number of 
nuclear filaments. He believes that this is the case in the higher plants, 
and also in the animal kingdom, as shown by observations on nematodes, 
and that the participation of an equal number of nuclear filaments in 
impregnation is a very general fact in the organic world; but it is 
certainly not without exception. In Arion empiricorum, for example, 
according to Platner, the number and volume of the nuclear filaments 
are less in the spermatic nucleus than in that of the oosphere. Union of 
the nuclei he believes to be essential to the act of impregnation. 


Relation between the Function and Position of the Nucleus.*— 
Dr. E. Korschelt calls attention to the researches of Haberlandt} on 
this subject, and confirms, from corresponding facts in the animal king- 
dom, his conclusion that the nucleus is to be found in that part of the 
cell which has to supply the greatest portion of the food-material for a 
growing organ. His examples are taken from the position of the ger- 
minal vesicle in the ovum of insects, which (in Forficula and Dytiscus) 
is to be found, according to circumstances, nearest to that part of the 
ovum in which an absorption of new substances, and very probably also 
an assimilation of them, takes place on the part of the ovum. Other 
examples to a similar effect are adduced. 


Permeability of Protoplasm.{—In continuation of his investigations 
on the plasmolysis of Alge,§ Dr. J. M. Janse distinguishes between two 
forms of the permeability of protoplasm for water—inirameability, or 
the capacity of the protoplasm to allow of the passage of certain sub- 
stances into the vacuoles; extrameability, the capacity to allow of their 
exit from the vacuoles. The plants experimented on were chiefly 
Chetomorpha zxrea and Spirogyra nitida, also the epidermal cells of 
Curcuma and Tradescantia. 

The use of very dilute solutions of various substances—sodium chloride, 
potassium nitrate and sulphate, cane-sugar, &c.—and then staining 
with a solution of diphenylamin in concentrated sulphuric acid, showed 
that the protoplasts of all the plants examined were intrameable for 
these substances ; and further, that when the protoplast is intrameable 
it is not also extrameable. The parietal utricle (Hautschicht) is, on the 
other hand, both intrameable and extrameable; this is shown in the 
excretion of sugar from nectaries, in the secretion and absorption in the 


* Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 110-8 (8 figs.). 

+ See this Journal, 1887, p. 980. 

t Versl. Meded. K. Akad. Wetensch. Amsterdam, 1888, pp. 332-436 (1 pl.). 
§ See this Journal, ante, p. 93. 


602 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


glands of Drosera, and especially in the processes which accompany the 
aggregation of protoplasm, the transport of water and nutrient substances, 
and the absorption of nutriment by young seedlings out of the endosperm. 
The phenomena which accompany the movements in the leaves of 
Mimosa cannot, in the opinion of the author, be explained by the expulsion 
of pure water out of the cells of the pulvinus, but only by the power of 
extrameability of the protoplasts. 

The cause of the intrameability of protoplasts requires further 
experiments for its determination. 


Albuminous reaction of Cell-wall.*—Herr A. Fischer disputes the 
validity of Wiesner’s and Krasser’s demonstrations ¢ of the presence of 
albumen in the cell-wall, on the ground that a red coloration with 
Millon’s reagent is by no means so certain a test for albumen as those 
writers suppose. In the leaves of many species of Bromeliaces, he 
finds not only the epidermis, hypoderma, and sieve-tissue, but all the 
unlignified cell-walls, even those of the chlorophyll-tissue, coloured by 
this reagent, the very same unlignified cell-walls being all coloured 
deep-blue by chlor-zinc-iodide. The tint with Millon’s reagent is not 
precisely that produced by undoubted albuminoids, but is rather pink 
than scarlet or flesh-coloured. It is obvious that the red staining takes 
place uniformly throughout the whole of the cell-wall, which would not 
be the case if it were due to strands of protoplasm. Fischer finds, 
moreover, that the red-staining with Millon’s reagent does not manifest 
itself in very young tissues, as would be the case were it due to proto- 
plasm, and concludes that it may probably be caused by tyrosin, or 
some other product of the decomposition of albumen. 

In reply to this criticism, Herr J. Wiesner remarks { that his object 
has not been simply to demonstrate the presence of an albuminoid in 
the cell-wall, but to support the view that, at all events up to a certain 
period, the cell-wall is a living constituent of the cell itself, deriving 
that character from a proportion of protoplasmic substance which enters 
intu its composition. In support of this view, he does not depend only 
on the reaction with Millon’s reagent. 

To this Fischer again replies, § repeating his objections to Krasser’s 
and Wiesner’s micro-chemical tests for the presence of albuminoids. 

In a further communication, || Herr F. Krasser comments on Klebs’s 
arguments on the presence of albuminoids in the gelatinous sheath and 
cell-wall of the Zygnemacesw,§ which he considers not conclusive, 
although the conclusion arrived at is probably correct. 


Pleochromism of coloured Cell-walls.** — According to Herr 
H. Ambronn, there are two kinds of pleochroistic cell-walls; those 
which are already coloured in nature, and those in which the colour is 
brought out artificially. The former are comparatively rare; they 
occur especially in the skin of some seeds, of which the pigment is not 
in the cavity, but in the cell-wall. The testa of Abrus precatorius fur- 
nishes a good example. In the parts which surround the umbo, the 
radial walls of the palisade-cells are violet; in the other parts of the 


* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., v. (1887) pp. 423-30. 
t See this Journal, 1887, p. 981. 
t Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 33-6. § Ibid., pp. 113-4. 
| Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) pp. 209-20. { See this Journal, 1887, p. 440. 
** Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 73-84 (2 figs.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 603 


seed red. If these cell-walls are examined optically by a contrivance 
described in the paper, it is seen that when the plane of oscillation of 
the rays of light is placed parallel to the longer axis of the actual ellipse 
of elasticity, the smallest amount of absorption takes place, the largest 
if it is placed in the direction of the shorter axis. 


(2) Other Cell-contents (including Secretions). 


Spherocrystals.*—Dr. P. Baccarini has investigated the structure 
and properties of the spheerocrystals formed by precipitation by alcohol, 
especially in Bignonia venusta and other species of Bignoniaces, Cam- 
panula Cervicaria, Trachelium coeruleum, Specularia Speculum, Daphne 
Laureola, and Anagyris foetida. In Bignonia venusta he finds them in 
all parts of the plant, floral as well as vegetative, especially during the 
period of flowering. They are insoluble in alcohol, in water, whether 
cold or hot, in ether, in chloroform, in benzol, and in glycerin. Glacial 
acetic acid, picric, citric, oxalic, and tartaric acids have no effect on 
them. Osmic acid of 1 per cent. turns them brown, but very slowly ; 
chromic acid of 5 per cent. causes disintegration in some hours at the 
ordinary temperature, more rapidly when hot. Concentrated sulphuric 
acid destroys them instantly; dilute hydrochloric acid has no effect 
upon them even when boiling; dilute nitric acid has a feeble, when 
concentrated a very powerful action. A solution of potash of from 
5 to 10 per cent. dissolves them rapidly. The spherocrystals from the 
other species examined agree with those of Bignonia in their general 
properties, but their distribution in the plant is much more limited. 


Nectar of Rhododendron.j—Sig. F. Tassi records the results of 
analyses made by Sig. C. Grimaldi of the nectar secreted by the floral 
glands of Rhododendron arboreum. He finds it to consist of 92-1 per 
cent. volatile, and 7°9 per cent. dry substance. The chief ingredient of 
the latter appears to be an invert-sugar, with a divergence of 1°5° to 
the left. This is mixed with a nitrogenous substance, and with traces of 
calcium and potassium sulphates and chlorides. Inoculated into a frog, 
the secretion had strong toxic properties. 


Tannin in the Crassulacez.{—According to Herr E. Wagner, tannin 
is especially abundant in plants belonging to this natural order. It 
occurs only in the parenchymatous tissue, and always dissolved in the 
cell-sap ; but its distribution in the fundamental tissue varies greatly in 
nearly related species. The structures which contain the largest 
quantity are the secondary cortex, the bundle-sheath, and the epidermis 
or one or two layers lying immediately beneath it; it was not found in 
the growing point, the first rudiments of the leaves, the cambium, or 
the starch-sheath. The cells containing tannin do not usually differ 
materially from those which surround them in size; but there is a 
strong contrast between them and those which contain starch, they often 
have thicker walls than the other cells of the same tissue. In the 
species of Crassulacez examined, it does not transfer itself from one 
part of the plant to another, but remains in the cells where it is formed 
until the death of the plant. 

* Malpighia, ii. (1888) pp. 1-18. 

+ Tassi, F., ‘Del liquido secreto dai fiori del Rhododendron arboreum,’ 17 pp., 
Siena, 1888. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) p. 50. 


t Wagner, S., ‘Ueb. d. Vorkommen u. d. Vertheilung des Gerbstoffes bei d. 
Crassulaceen,’ 44 pp., Gottingen, 1887. See Naturforscher, xxi, (1888) p. 70. 


604 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Occurrence of the Elements of Sugar of Milk in Plants.*— 
According to M, A. Miintz, the mucous substances of plants—gums, 
mucilages, pectic substances, &c.—contain, in the products of their 
doubling, galactose identical with that of sugar of milk; and these 
mucous substances exist in vegetable food-materials in such quantities 
that they are able to supply the galactose which enters into the com- 
position of the sugar of milk secreted by the mammary glands of herbi- 
yorous animals. 


Development of some Secretions and their Receptacles.t—Herr 
A. Tschirch calls attention to the different origin, in the general way, 
of gum, which is a pathological product and the result of the disor- 
ganization of the cell-wall, and resin, which is formed in the cell-cavity 
in the bark and wood, diffuses through the cell-walls, and is secreted 
into the intercellular passages by a thin-walled tissue, the “ secreting 
epithelium,” which clothes the schizogenous canals. There are, how- 
ever, instances in which gum or mucilage occurs as a cell-content, as in 
Orchis, or is excreted into schizogenous receptacles, as in the Cycadee ; 
and, on the other hand, instances in which the cell-wall takes part in 
the formation of ethereal oils and resins, as in the lysigenous oil-passages 
of the Aurantiacex. 

The author then describes the method of formation of copaiva-balsam, 
which takes place, not in schizogenous, as sometimes described, but in 
lysigenous canals. The absorption of the cell-walls, and the formation 
of the resin, commence in the parenchyma of the wood, advancing from 
there to the medullary rays, the libriform, and the vessels. In Styrax 
Benzoin also, the source of the benzoin of commerce, the resin is not 
formed in schizogenous canals, but originates in the medullary rays, 
advancing from them to the surrounding phloém-parenchyma, and finally 
to the bast-cells and sclereides. The same is, in general terms, the 
history of the formation of the resin in Abies, Thuja, and Dipterocarpus. 

In the so-called myrrhs, on the other hand, species of Balsamea and 
Boswellia, the gum-resin is always formed in schizogenous receptacles or 
in true cells. 


(3) Structure of Tissues. 


Secretory Canals and Secretory Reservoirs.{—M. A. Leblois gives 
a detailed account of the origin and development of secretory canals and 
secretory reservoirs. 

The paper is divided into four portions :—(1) Those families which 
possess only secretory reservoirs :—e. g. Myoporer, Myrtacex, Rutacer, 
and Myrsinee. (2) Those which possess both secretory canals and 
secretory reservoirs :—e. g. Composite, Hypericacer, Clusiacer, and 
Aroidew. (3) Those which possess only secretory canals :—e. g. Cannee, 
Anacardiacere, Simarubes, Pittospores, and Butome ; and (4) Study of 
laticiferous vessels. 

In conclusion, the author states that the tissue which has been 
studied in this paper is a living tissue. It arises always in the same 
manner, by division and dissociation, and not by the destruction and 
resorption of cells. It is a secretory tissue, and it presents itself in two 


* Ann. Chim. et Phys., x. (1887). See Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) 
Rey. Bibl., p. 11. 


+ Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 2-13 (1 pl. and 1 fig.). 
t Ann. Sci. Nat. (Bot.), vi. (1887) pp. 245-330 (5 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 605 


forms: that of the canal, and that of the reservuir; in the one case as 
in the other, it is generally surrounded by a protecting sheath. The 
two forms may be met with either isolated or united, but one never finds 
reservoirs in roots, although they are often abundant in the leaves. 


Secreting Canals of Umbellifere and Araliacee contained in the 
Phloem.*—It is well known that to each vascular bundle in the leaf- 
stalk of Umbellifer there is in general a corresponding collenchymatous 
bundle beneath the epidermis, below which runs a secreting canal, this 
canal sometimes originating from a common source in the cambium with 
the collenchymatous bundle. In addition to these canals, Herr C. Miiller 
finds, in the phloém portion of each bundle, canals, varying in number 
according to its strength, which cannot in any case belong to the peri- 
cycle. 'These were observed especially in Astrantia and the allied 
genus Hacquetia. 'They are always closely associated with those in the 
collenchyma. Their size and the number of secreting cells surrounding 
each canal vary with the species. Their origin does not appear to be 
always the same. The cavity of the secreting cells is usually much 
larger than that of the adjacent phloém-cells, and the outline of their 
ceJl-wall much sharper. 

Herr Miiller gives a list of a large number of species of Umbelliferse 
in which these phloém-canals were observed ; the highest number observed 
in a single phloém was eleven. The number of secreting cells belonging 
to each canal varied between two and nine. In a smaller number of 
species of Umbelliferee the most careful observation failed to detect the 
presence of phloém-canals. 

In the Araliaceze phloém-canals were found in the leaf-stalk of a 
number of species ; but they were usually less numerous than in the 
Umbelliferze, mostly only one canal in each phloém. 


Influence of the Turgidity of the Epidermal Cells on the Stomata.t+ 
—According to Herr R. P. C. Schafer, the opening and closing of the 
pore of the stoma is due to the relative intensity in the action of two 
opposing forces,—the turgidity of the guard-cells, and the smaller 
turgidity of the adjoining cells of the epidermis. The stomatic appa- 
ratus exercises an independent function of its own; and the author 
contests the theory that the guard-cells are compressed by an external 
force originating in the turgidity of the adjacent epidermal cells. In the 
stomata of Azolla the opening and closing of the pores takes place in the 
ordinary way, although the guard-cells are destitute of the thickening- 
bands which are elsewhere characteristic of them. 


Anomalous Cells in the Interior of the Tissue of Fossil Plants.t— 
Prof. W. C. Williamson describes the occurrence of “intrusive” cells 
lodged in the interior of “ host-cells” in the remains of plants from the 
coal-measures. They occur in parenchymatous tissue, in the interior of 
scalariform vessels or tracheides, and within macrospores belonging to 
the Lycopodiacee. In the case where they occur within vessels they 
appear to be genuine examples of thylosis; those found in paren- 


* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 20-32 (1 pl.). 

+ Schafer, R. P. C., ‘Ueb. d. Hinfluss des Turgors d. Epidermiszellen auf d. 
Function d. Spaltoffnungsapparates,’ 45 pp., Berlin, 1887. See Bot. Centralbl., 
XXxiv. (1888) p. 49. 

+ Ann. of Bot., i. (1888) pp. 319-23 (1 pl.). 


606 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


chymatous tissue may possibly be of an algoid character; it is much 
more difficult to account for the cellular appearance of the contents of 
macrospores. 


Periderm of the Leguminose.*—M. H. Douliot states that in a branch 
of Myroxylon Pereira of one year’s growth a periderm formed exteriorly 
of centripetal cork-layers may be seen, the cells of which are tabular, 
and preserve their thin appearance ; there is also a centrifugal phelloderm 
somewhat less abundant. The case of the exodermic (sub-epidermic) 
periderm may be seen in a number of genera. In Hymenea Courbaril 
the cork remains thin and the cells tabular, the tangential septa being 
nearer one another than the radial divisions of the mother-cells of the 
periderm. The phelloderm is composed of two or three layers of cells, 
and the cork of about a dozen. There are two groups of Leguminosae 
in which the periderm is formed in the cortex; and in certain species of 
this natural order the periderm is pericyclic. A good example of this 
may be seen in Soja hispida, 


Anomalies in the Structure of the Roots of Dicotyledons.t —Sig. 
C. Avetta distinguishes between two types of anomalies in the roots of 
Dicotyledons :—(1) Those produced by the generating zone due to an 
inequality in the proportion and nature of the secondary tissues formed 
by the cambial zone at various points in the circumference ; and (2) Those 
produced by the pericycle, due to the formation of new collateral 
bundles in the secondary parenchyma, resulting from the generating 
activity of this pericycle. Under each type a number of special cases 
are described. One of the varieties of the second type, occurring in the 
Polygonacee, affords the only example of supernumerary bundles formed 
in a centripetal direction. 


Comparative Anatomy of Malvacez, Bombacee, Tiliacee, and Ster- 
culiacee.{—M. A. Dumont states that among the Malvacee, the genus 
Malva, and especially M. oxyacanthoides, may be taken as representing 
the fundamental primitive type. The secondary liber is sharply divided 
into layers; the three cortical zones, the pith, the epidermis, and the 
mesophyll of the leaves, contain numerous gummy elements. In this 
family the essential characters undergo from one species to another 
certain modifications and gradual attenuations, corresponding to the form 
and disposition of the reproductive organs. The different species of the 
family thus form a descending series. 

In conclusion, the author states that Malvacee, Bombaceex, Tiliacer, 
and Sterculiaceze so closely resemble one another in the structure of 
their stems and their leaves, and in the organization of their flowers and 
their fruits, that an anatomist would not hesitate to unite them in one 
and the same natural family. By the help of anatomy, the tribes may 
be divided into secondary groups, and these secondary groups ought to 
be considered as groups containing a certain number of species in which 
the characters have undergone modifications of about the same value 
from that of the fundamental type. 


* Morot’s Journ. Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 71-6 (7 figs.). 


+ Ann. R. Ist. Bot. Roma, iii. (1887). See Morot’s Journ. Bot., ii, (1888) Rev. 
Bibl., p. 9. 


{ Ann. Sci. Nat. (Bot.), vi. (1887) pp. 129-246 (4 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 607 


(4) Structure of Organs. 


Roots of Aracexe.*—Herr M. Lierau has examined the structure of 
the roots in 46 genera and about 150 species of Aracez. 

The epidermis usually consists of a single layer in the terrestrial 
species; occasionally there are two, three, or even four layers of cells. 
The root-hairs are developed from the outer layer, and are either simple 
or forked, but never thickened like those of many epiphytic orchids. In 
the epiphytic species the epidermis is replaced by a root-sheath or 
velamen, usually thin-walled, but consisting, in some species of Anthu- 
rium, of several layers of thickened tracheides. The velamen is often 
only a temporary structure. It is always separated from the cortical 
parenchyma by a protecting sheath or outer endoderm, easily recognized 
by the fine striation of its suberized walls on longitudinal section, and 
the wavy appearance of the walls on tangential section. This outer 
endoderm is very commonly a phellogen-layer, passing over later into 
cork ; in some genera it disappears altogether with the velamen. 

The cortex of the root is more or less permeated by large air- 
passages in the aquatic or paludose species. Almost all possess raphides, 
and bundles of crystals are found in some cases. Receptacles both for 
secretion and excretion abound, such as the oil-receptacles in Acorus, the 
tannin-cells in Anthurium, latex-vessels, and resin-passages. Spicular 
cells in the intercellular spaces occur only in the Monsteroidee. An 
inner endoderm was found in the root of all Araceze examined, and is 
usually somewhat suberized. The axile fibrovascular bundle is almost 
always of typical structure. 


Mechanical Protection of Bulbs.t—Herr F. v. Tavel describes the 
mode in which the tissue of bulbs which is used as a store-house for 
reserve food-material is protected against pressure or impact throughout, 
in species belonging to the genera Crinum, Brunsvigia, Allium, Gagea, 
and Narcissus. These contrivances have no relation with the systematic 
position of the species. They consist in most instances of stereides, 
which may be collected into a sclerenchymatous layer of cells. Their 
special development depends on the nature of the climate, and of the 
injurious influences against which the particular bulb has to be 
protected. 


Floating-roots of Sesbania aculeata.{—Dr. D. H. Scott gives the 
following as the results of his examination of the floating-roots of 
Sesbania aculeata Pers., a plant belonging to the papilionaceous tribe 
Galegex. (1) The floating tissue of the roots of Sesbania is a secondary 
cortical structure, arising from a phellogen. (2) This tissue, though 
falling under the definition of periderm, differs from cork in its per- 
manently living cells, its non-suberized cell-walls, and its large inter- 
cellular spaces, in which alone air is contained. In all these respects it 
agrees with the floating-tissue of the stem of Neptunia oleracea. (8) The 
phellogen originates immediately outside the endoderm, thus differing 
from the phellogen of most roots with typical periderm. 


* Lierau, M., ‘ Beitr. z. Kenntniss d. Wurzeln d. Araceen,’ 37 pp. and 1 pl, 
Breslau, 1887. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) p. 53. 

+ Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., v. (1887) pp. 488-58 (2 pls.). 

t Ann. of Bot., i. (1888) pp. 307-13 (1 pl.). 


608 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEAROHES RELATING TO 


Tubercles on the Roots of Leguminose.—M. P. Van Tieghem * 
discusses the origin, structure, and morphological nature of the radical 
tubercles of Leguminose. Like the rootlets, they originate in the 
pericycle of the mother-root, opposite the woody bundles if there are 
more than two, and on each side of them if there are less than two. At 
the same time the endoderm, and sometimes also several of the internal 
cortical layers, increase, and their cells divide so as to envelope the 
rootlet. By their origin, and by their disposition, radical tubercles 
may be said to be only rootlets that have enlarged. Sometimes the 
tubercles possess two, three, or four distinct central cylinders inserted 
the one above the other on points on the central cylinder of the mother- 
root, opposite the same woody bundle. In this case the tubercle may 
be said to be formed from a compound rootlet. 

Sig. P. Pichit regards the Y-shaped bodies found in the tubercles 
of the roots of Melilotus alba as probably spores. He describes also the 
occurrence of hyphe in the corresponding structures of a large number 
of species belonging to the Leguminose. 

Leaves of Bupleurum.t—Herr P. Klausch classifies the leaves of the 
various species of this genus of Umbellifere under three heads :—grass: 
like; elliptic; and those with reticulate venation; in addition to the 
monotypic B. difforme: the special form of leaf being adapted to the 
external conditions of climate and habitat of the species. In many cases 
the epidermis of the two surfaces of the leaf is quite alike, the internal 
structure of the leaf bearing a striking resemblance to those of Mono- 
cotyledons. 


Anatomical Structure of the Leaves of Orchidee.$—Dr. M. Mobius 
discusses the structure of the leaves in different genera of Orchidew, and 
the bearing of the characters thus obtained on the division of the order 
into tribes as proposed by Pfitzer. He finds in his observations a 
support in the general way for the classification proposed. The charac- 
ters to which his observations chiefly refer are: the degree of cuticu- 
larization of the epidermis, and the presence or absence of trichomic 
structures; the presence or absence of hypoderma and of scleren- 
chymatous bundles or fibres; the degree of development of the bast in 
the vascular bundles; the differentiation of the epidermis; and the 
presence or absence of stomata on the two sides of the leaf, &e. 


Influence of Climate on the Cuticularization and Thickening of the 
Leaves of some Conifere.|| Herr F. Noack finds, from observations 
on the leaves of a number of Conifers, chiefly species of Pinus and 
Picea, that they owe their great power of resistance to the effects of 
climate, partly, like those of other evergreen plants, to the extraordinarily 
strong cuticularization and thickening of the walls of the epidermis; 
partly also to the lignification of larger or smaller portions of the cell- 
walls. In Picea various degrees of this lignification are exhibited, 
increasing with the increase of latitude in which the trees grow, or with 
the height above the sea-level. 


* Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) pp. 105-9. 

+ Atti Soc. Tose. Sci. Nat., vi. (1888) pp. 45-7. Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 251. 

} Klausch, P., ‘Ueb. d. Morphol. u. Anat. d. Blatter v. Bupleurum,’ 30 pp. and 
2 pls., Leipzig, 1887. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) p. 169. 


§ Pringsheim’s Jahrb, f. Wiss, Bot., xviii. (1887) pp. 530-607 (4 pls.). 
| Ibid., pp. 519-29 (1 pl.). C ) PP (4 pls.) 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 609 


Bracts of Cruciferee.*—M. Beauvisage points out that the absence of 
bracts from the inflorescence of Crucifere is not nearly so constant a 
character as is usually stated in text-books. In the wall-flower a tri- 
angular elevated patch at the base of each pedicel represents the entirely 
adnate bract. 


Physiological Anatomy of Stipules.t — Herr O. Schultz classifies 
stipules, from a physiological point of view, under three heads :— 
Q) those which serve for protection ; (2) those which serve for nutrition, 
there being also transitional forms between these two; and (8) those 
which have become abortive and functionless. To these may be added 
those which are transformed into bud-scales, and those which are 
transformed into ochree. 

Those stipules which serve for nutriment or assimilation make their 
appearance at the same time as the leaves, and endure as long; protec- 
tion against freezing is often afforded by the presence of anthocyan in 
the cells, giving them a red colour. The anatomy of stipules of this 
kind agrees in almost all respects with that of the leaves themselves. 

Stipules which serve for protection may again be divided into those 
with and those without mechanical strengthenings. The palisade-tissue 
of ordinary leaves is in them altogether wanting ; stomata are absent or 
very few in number; other trichomic structures are usually wanting ; 
anthocyan is very frequently present in the cells. Where there is 
mechanical strengthening, it is of various kinds :—great thickening and 
cuticularization of the cell-walls, sclerenchymatous hardening, formation 
of periderm, &c. 

When stipules are converted into bud-scales, they are usually 
abundantly furnished with trichomes, bristles, woolly hairs, or colleters, 
which serve to reduce transpiration; the tissue itself may also be 
modified in various ways, as in protecting stipules. LHxamples of stipules 
transformed into ochrez are furnished by the Platanacese and Poly- 
gonacee. Structurally they may belong to the class of protecting 
stipules either with or without mechanical strengthening. 


Foliar Sheath of the Salicorniee.{—M. P. A. Dangeard points out 
that it is well known that in Salicornia the foliar bundles, when tra- 
versing the cortex more or less obliquely, give out descending branches, 
which ramify and anastomose in a rosette in the interior of the cortical 
parenchyma. ‘The author has studied various types in this family, and 
gives the following as his conclusions :—That in the Salicorniez (Arthro- 
cnemum, Salicornia, Halostachys, Halocnemum) there is a foliar sheath 
with palisade-tissue. This sheath is altogether distinct from the cortex 
in the internodes (Arthrocnemum fruticosum), but is sometimes confounded 
with the cortex in the lower part of the internodes; it incloses a large 
number of fibrovascular bundles, which proceed from two lateral and 
symmetrical foliar bundles. The large spiral cells which are met with 
in Salicornia peruviana, S. virginica, Arthrocnemum fruticosum, and A. ? 
ambiguum, belong to this foliar sheath. The formation of such a sheath 
ought to be attributed to a decurrence of the edges of the limb, a point 


which may be easily seen in Kalidium foliatum, which has the leaves 
alternate. 


* Bull, Soc. Bot. Lyon, 1887. See Morot’s Journ. Bot., ii. (1888), Rev. Bibl., 


p. 1. { Flora, lxxi. (1888) pp. 97-107, 113-128 (1 pl.). 
{ Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) pp. 157-60. 


610 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Embryo-sac of Rosacewe.*—M. I’. Went states that the study of the 
embryo-sac of the Rosacez is interesting, as it leads one to the opinion 
that either the Rosacew and Saxifragacee have a common origin, or that 
the Rosacew have descended from the Saxifragacew. The chief difference 
between these two families is the fact that the Saxifragacese possess 
endosperm; but if one examines the Spireeew, certain rudimentary traces 
of endosperm will be found when the seeds are ripe. The Spireez then 
form the point of transition between Saxifragacew and Rosacew. The 
author then, beginning with Prunus, describes the form of the embryo- 
sac in various members of the Rosaces, especially pointing out to what 
extent endosperm is present. 


Petiole of Dicotyledons.t—M. L. Petit describes the structure of 
the petiole in various Dicotyledonous families, and gives a table showing 
the principal differential characters of this organ. The author, in his 
conclusions, states that the study of the course of the fibrovascular 
bundles in petioles has been very much neglected. It is useful, however, 
because of the fact that it is possible to group the numerous objects 
which are studied under a small number of types. The general law on 
the disposition of the fibrovascular bundles is, that in herbaceous plants 
they are usually isolated, while in woody plants they are in close 
proximity to one another. The author insists on the importance of the 
petiole for purposes of classification. 


Development of Flowers in the Bud.t{—M. Louis Mangin states 
that organs generally present two phases of growth. In the first phase 
the organ acquires a certain structure, the dimensions of which are very 
restricted ; but in the second phase, an energetic intercalary growth takes 
place, and the organ arrives at the adult state without sensibly modifying 
its structure. In this paper, the author records a series of observations 
on the development of flowers. The fruit trees were first studied on 
account of their earliness of flowering, and of the ease with which flower- 
buds can be distinguished from leaf-buds. 

If a longitudinal section of a flower-bud of the cherry, taken about 
the 25rd of June, be examined, the growing point will be found to be 
protected by four or five layers of scales. A month later the growing 
point will be found enlarged ; the apex, however, now ceases to grow, but 
round the apex a certain number of cellular papille are formed, each of 
which represents a flower. On the edges of the hollow papilla five 
protuberances will be found; these represent the calyx, the hollow 
portion of the papilla forming the floral receptacle. About the 16th of 
August, the base of the calycine protuberances will be found to have 
enlarged so as to form a tube; on the internal face of this tube, at the 
base of the indentations separating the calyx-teeth, appear the emergences 
which represent the petals. Finally, at the base of the receptacle, 
which has been up to the present time empty, arises the protuberance 
which is to form the carpel. 

The author then traces the growth of the ovules, formation of the’ 
pollen, and origin of the bundles, and concludes by comparing the 


oe of the flowers of other members of the Amygdalew with the 
cherry. 


* Aun. Sci. Nat. (Bot.), vi. 1887) pp. 331-41 (1 pl.). + Ibid., pp. 342-54, 
~ Morot’s Journ. Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 1-7, 20-30 (22 figs.). a 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 611 


Morphology of the Flowers of Canna.*—Herr K. Schumann dis- 
cusses several very difficult points in the structure of the flower of 
Canna. The usual view of the inflorescence, that it is a 2-flowered 
cyme, in which the second flower is not antidromous, but homodromous, 
he cannot altogether accept, believing rather that it presents an inter- 
mediate form between the two chief groups of inflorescences. He also 
contests the theory of Hichler, that in the formation of the style only 
one out of the three carpids of which the flower is composed has been 
concerned. 


Diagram of the Flower of Cruciferee.j,—From an examination of 
abnormal flowers of Capsella bursa-pastoris, which displayed phyllody of 
the flowers and strong branching of the whole plant, Dr. R. Chodat 
confirms Dr. J. Miiller’s view that the flower is diplostemonous, and 
tetramerous throughout. He would construct the diagram thus:—A 
median bract, usually suppressed ; 2 lateral bracts usually suppressed ; 
4 sepals in an orthogonal whorl; 4 petals in a diagonal whorl ; 8 stamens 
in two alternate whorls of 4, the outer whorl in orthogonal position, of 
which the two median stamens are usually doubled; the inner whorl in 
diagonal position, usually suppressed ; 4 carpids in orthogonal position, 
of which the two median ones are usually suppressed. 


Ovules of Grasses.{—Besides the ordinary position of the ovules in 
grasses, ascending and subbasilar, M. H. Baillon describes two abnormal 
positions; a directly opposite pendent position in Lygeum, and an 
intermediate position, occasional in Hierochloe borealis, where the ovule 
is attached to a point in the ovary about half-way between the base 
and the apex, and the hilum is situated about half-way along the posterior 
margin of the ovule, the chalazal and micropylar extremities of the 
ovule being at about an equal distance from the point of attachment. 


Replum in Crucifere.§—Prof. I. B. Balfour states that the term 
replum is used either for the framework of the fruit left after the fall of 
the valves, across which the septum stretches, or, in most British text- 
books, for the septum itself. ‘The word was introduced by Brassai; 
and although he does not specially mention the septum, it is clear from 
the whole context that he introduced the term for the framework across 
which the septum stretches, and not for the septum. The use of the 
word in most of our text-books in Britain is therefore wrong. 


Fruit of Solanacee. |\—M. A. G. Garcin describes the fruit of various 
members of the natural order Solanaceze. The tissues consist of four 
layers of cells; the innermost but one gives rise to the bundles. The 
septa are either numerous, as in Solanum robustum, or few, as in Petunia ; 
but the most important fact is that in certain fruits the definite number 
of cells has been entirely formed before the ovules are fertilized, that is 
to say, that in order for the ovary to become transformed into fruit, it 
has only to increase the dimensions and not the number of thecells. In 
others, on the contrary, after the ovules are fertilized, further cells are 
formed. To the first type belong the dry fruits, and, what is a curious 


* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 55-66. 

+ Flora, xxi. (1888) pp. 145-9. 

t Bull. Mens. Soc. Linn, Paris, 1887. See Morot’s Journ. Bot., ii. (1888) Rev. 
Bibl, p. 33. § Ann. of Bot., i. (1888) pp. 367-8. 

|| Morot’s Journ. Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 108-15 (5 figs.). 


612 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


fact, certain berries, such as those of Atropa Belladonna; but a greater 
number of the fleshy Solanaceous fruits belong to the second type. 


Motion of rotating Winged Fruits and Seeds.*—Herr H. Dingler 
finds that in the path of winged fruits and seeds in falling to the ground 
when there is a current of air, there is a double motion—a movement of 
rotation of the body round its own axis, and a helicoid movement in 
the opposite direction. He explains both these movements on the prin- 
ciple of the motion of a top spun between the fingers. 


B. Physiology.t 
(1) Reproduction and Germination. 


Pollination and Distribution of the Sexual Organs.{—Herr A. 
Schulz publishes the results of his observations on these points on a 
very large number of species. The following are some of the more 
general results at which he has arrived »— 

In the Silenew there is a very strong tendency to unisexuality and 
dicecism ; the female are usually smaller than the male, and these again 
than the hermaphrodite flowers. Among the latter proterandry is nearly 
universal. The Alsinez produce, in addition to the ordinary herma- 
phrodite, smaller female, but no male flowers; the hermaphrodite flowers 
are often proterandrous, and usually can be fertilized only by external 
assistance. Almost all Umbelliferre have both hermaphrodite and male 
flowers, either in the same umbel or not; in the former case the marginal 
flowers of the umbel are usually hermaphrodite, the inner flowers male ; 
but some genera have a central hermaphrodite flower. The herma- 
phrodite flowers are in most cases so strongly proterandrous that self- 
pollination is impossible, the stigmas often not arriving at maturity until 
the stamens and even the petals have disappeared. Almost all Labiate 
have female in addition to the hermaphrodite flowers, and they are 
usually much smaller; the two kinds may occur on the same or on 
different individuals, and in the former case in the same or in different 
inflorescences. The hermaphrodite flowers are almost always strongly 
proterandrous. 


Effect of Cross-fertilization on Inconspicuous Flowers.§—Miss Anna 
Bateson gives the details of some experiments showing the effect of cross- 
fertilization on inconspicuous flowers. The plants experimented on were 
Senecio vulgaris, Capsella bursa-pastoris, and Stellaria media. In the 
case of Senecio vulgaris the crossed plants showed an advantage in 
fecundity over the self-fertilized, the average number of seeds per 
capitulum of the cross-fertilized being to the average number per capi- 
tulum of the self-fertilized as 100 to 78. With Capsella bursa-pastoris 
the relation in the case of crossed to self-fertilized plants was as 100 to 
96, and with Stellaria media as 100 to 95; thus it appears that incon- 
spicuous flowers do benefit by a cross, though apparently in a less degree 
than those adapted for self-fertilization. 


* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., v. (1887) pp. 430-4. 

+ This subdivision contains (1) Reproduction and Germination; (2) Nutrition 
and Growth (including Movements of Fluids); (3) lritability; and (4) Chemical 
Changes (including Respiration and Fermentation). 

{ Uhlworm u. Hanlein’s Biblioth. Bot., Heft 10, 104 pp. and 1 pl., Cassel, 1888. 

§ Ann. of Bot., i. (1888) pp. 255-61. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 613 


Germination of Anemone apennina.*—M. E. de Janezewski points 
' out several singular features in the germination of this species, which 
produces exceedingly few mature seeds. In the form of the achene and 
other points it belongs to the section of the genus Sylvie (A. ranun- 
culoides, trifolia, nemorosa, &c.) At an early period the young seedling 
consists of a primary root and of a green deeply bilobed leaf in direct 
continuation of the root, without any hypocotyl or buds, or any appear- 
ance of cotyledons. When about two months old, there appears on the 
root, which has already branched, a small tubercle situated a little below 
the junction of the root with the petiole, belonging evidently to the root 
itself, and composed of parenchymatous tissue loaded with starch. On 
the upper side of this tubercle is a bud, from which proceed the secondary 
axes, i.e. all the remaining leaves and the flowers, the primary leaf soon 
perishing. 

Germination of Oxalis rubella.j—Herr F. Hildebrand describes the 
peculiar phenomena presented by the germination of this species and 
others nearly allied to it. The base of the cotyledons lengthens into 
a sheath inclosing a hollow space within which the base of the single 
leaf grows downwards. This prolongation of the leaf-stalk becomes 
compressed by its further growth into a corkscrew-like structure, bearing 
the apical bud, within the sheath above described. About two or three 
months after the commencement of germination, the root ceases to grow 
in length, and swells out in its lower part into a fusiform swelling, 
which serves as a receptacle for water. The upper part of the root is 
forced down within the cotyledonary sheath by the continued growth 
downwards of the base of the leaf-stalk until it reaches this water- 
receptacle, where the first bulb is formed. 


Germination of the Bicuiba.{—Herr F. Miiller describes the process 
of the germination of the seeds of Myristica Bicuhyba Sch., nearly related 
to the nutmeg. The “ruminated endosperm” characteristic of these 
plants he considers may be advantageous to the seedling in forcing the 
growing cotyledons of the very small embryo to a large development of 
surface by folding and wrinkling. 


Germination of the Tuber of the Jerusalem Artichoke.$—Mr. J. R. 
Green summarizes the results of his investigation into the germination 
of the artichoke tuber (Helianthus tuberosus) as follows :— 

(1) The inulin stored in the tuber is made available for the use of 
the plant by ferment-action. (2),This ferment is not diastase, but a 
special body working on inulin. ‘Tne inulin-ferment is not able to act 
upon starch; saliva, which is so energetic with the latter, has little or 
no power to convert inulin. (3) Its action is to produce from inulin a- 
sugar and an intermediate or collateral product. (4) The latter difiers 
from inulin in its solubility in water and alcohol, its crystalline form, 
and its power of dialysis. (5) The ferment does not exist as such prior 
to the commencement of germination, but is present in the resting tuber 
in the form of a zymogen. (6) Its activity is only manifested in a 
neutral or very faintly acid medium, and it is destroyed by prolonged 
contact with acids or alkalies. 


* Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1544-6. 

+ Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) pp. 193-201 (1 pl). 

+ Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., v. (1887) pp. 468-72 (1 pl.). 
§ Ann. of Bot., i. (1888) pp. 223-36. 


1888. Pui 


614 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


(2) Nutrition and Growth (including Movements of Fluids). 


Influence of Light on the Growth of Leaves.*—Sig. G. Arcangeli 
discusses this subject from a mathematical point of view. He is of 
opinion that the statement that the size attained by leaves is propor- 
tional to the intensity of the light to which they have been subjected is 
too absolute. While some plants are heliophilous, i. e. are dependent on 
light for the full development of their foliage, others are sciaphilous, or 
thrive best, and their leaves assume a full dark-green colour, only when 
the light is not too intense. This he found to be especially the case 
with Huryale ferox and Camellia japonica. It has been shown by 
Wiesner that in many plants at least the direct rays of the sun act 
injuriously on the chlorophyll, and hence on the power of assimilation ; 
and the development of the palisade-tissue, the increase in the number 
of rows of cells of which it is composed, and their elongation in the 
direction of the incident rays, not merely facilitate the transport of the 
assimilative substances, but also offer a means for the chloroplasts and 
the protoplasm to withdraw from the too intense radiation which would 
act injuriously upon them. The plaiting of the leaves of Huryale and 
of other plants has a similar purpose. 


Supply of Food Constituents at Different Periods of the Growth 
of Plants.t—Herr G. Liebscher advances a new theory as a basis for 
the science of manuring. Each day the root should supply a certain 
amount of food to the plant; this amount varies more or less at different 
stages of growth, and further, these variations differ in case of different 
plants; thus, one species requires a fairly uniform daily supply through- 
out its period of growth, whilst another requires much more at one stage 
than at another. Thus, for a plant requiring a uniform daily supply, a 
slowly decomposing and lasting manure is appropriate, whilst an easily 
soluble one should be given to a plant whose demand is large during a 
short period. 


(8) Irritability. 


Power of Contractility exhibited by the Protoplasm of certain 
Cells.t—Mr. W. Gardiner gives the results of experiments made on the 
power of contractility exhibited by the protoplasm of certain plant-cells. 
In Mesocarpus, we have a cell which reacts in a most powerful manner 
to the stimulus of temperature, of light, of electricity, and of poisons, 
and this reaction, which may be watched under the Microscope, is 
attended by a diminution in size. In the author’s opinion, there is in 
every cell a sufficient quantity of osmotically active substance to insure 
turgidity, but the increase or decrease of turgidity depends essentially 
on the contraction or relaxation of the parietal utricle. All the ex- 
periments tend to show that it is the ectoplasm which mainly determines 
the state of turgidity of the cells. The power of contractility which the 
author has established for the irritable cells of Drosera and Mimosa, and 
for the less specialized cells of Mesocarpus, is a property which is 
possessed in a greater or less degree by all the actively living cells 
which constitute the tissues of plants. 


* Nuoy. Giorn. Bot. Ital., xx. (1888) pp. 331-41. Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 84, 
t Bied. Centr., 1887, pp. 658-60. See Journ. Chem. Soc. Lond., 1888, Abstr., 
p. 382. t Ann. of Bot., i. (1888) pp. 362-7. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY,. MICROSCOPY, ETO. 615 


Movements of Irritation of Multicellular Organs.*—Herr J. Wort- 
mann confirms by fresh observations his previous conclusion that the 
curvatures of irritation of invested cells, or of masses of cells, which 
take place during growth, depend on movements of the proto- 
plasm. In the organ observed, the root of Phaseolus multiflorus, he 
finds, whenever there is geotropic irritation, a more or less abundant 
transference both of starch and of protoplasm to the parts where a strong 
formation of cellulose takes place. This fact furnishes a strong 
argument in favour of De Vries’s view { that the transport of formative 
materials in the plant does not take place by osmosis, but is effected 
through the movements of the protoplasm-body. 


Irritability of Growing Parts of Plants.{ — Prof. EH. Godlewski 
supports the views of Wortmann § with regard to the nature of this 
phenomenon. He classifies the various phenomena belonging to this 
category under the following heads, viz. :— 

(1) Phenomena which must be regarded as resulting from the 
positive geotropism of the specific protoplasm of the root. Under this 
head come the geotropic downward curvatures of roots removed from their 
normal position, and the facts that when shoots are hung horizontally in 
moist air, adventitious roots are formed only on the under side; that 
when a cut shoot is hung vertically in natural position, adventitious 
roots are formed only at the basiscopic end; that in general roots form 
more readily in the basiscopic than in the acroscopic portion of a shoot ; 
and that in the bulbils of Marchantiez the rhizoids grow only on the 
under surface. 

(2) Phenomena which result from the negative heliotropism of the 
specific protoplasm of the root :—The negatively heliotropic curvature of 
many roots and root-hairs when more strongly illuminated on one side ; 
the retarding effect of light on the new formation and development of 
the rudiments of roots; the formation of adventitious roots exclusively 
on one side of an organ illuminated on one side only, such as ivy-shoots, 
prothallia of ferns, &c. 

(3) Phenomena resulting from the positive hydrotropism of the 
specific protoplasm of the root:—The curvature of roots in the direction 
of the greater moisture; the favourable influence of moisture on the 
fresh formation and development of the rudiments of roots; the fact that 
the roots of plants growing on a block of turf rotating on a clinostat 
become closely attached to, or even grow into the turf. 

(4) Phenomena resulting from the negative geotropism of the 
specific protoplasm of the shoot:—The geotropic curving upwards of 
growing shoots removed from their normal position; and the 
facts that on a horizontal shoot, whether cut or still attached to the 
parent plant and placed in moist air, the buds which face upwards grow 
much more rapidly than those that face downwards, the latter often 
remaining quite dormant; that, when a plant is reversed, new shoots are 
formed on its oldest part, where they would not be formed if the plant 
were in its natural position; and that when cut pieces of a shoot or root 
are placed in moist air, regeneration of the buds takes place at the 
acroscopic end of the shoot, and at the basiscopic end of the root. 


* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., v. (1887) pp. 458-68 (2 figs.). Cf. this Journal 
ante, p. 259. + See this Journal, 1885, p. 660. 
+ Bot. Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) pp. 82-5, 143-6, 181-4, 211-3. 
§ See this Journal, ante, p. 259. 
20 2 


616 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


(5) Phenomena resulting from the positive heliotropism of the 
specific protoplasm of the shoot :—The positively heliotropic curvatures 
of growing shoots; the fact that seedlings, when growing in the light 
on a block of turf rotating in a clinostat, place their hypocotyledonary 
organs at right-angles to the surface of the block. 

(6) Phenomena resulting from the negative hydrotropism of the 
specific protoplasm of the shoot :—The negatively hydrotropic curvatures 
at the conidiophore of Phycomyces nitens. 

(7) Phenomena which must be regarded as a consequence of a com- 
bination of these various causes. 


Sensitive Labellum of Masdevallia muscosa.*—Mr. F. W. Oliver 
states that up to the present time only two genuine cases of motile 
labella have been recorded in Orchids: Megacliniwm, in which the 
movement is spontaneous, and Pierostylis where it is called forth by an 
external stimulus. The object of the present paper is to give an account 
of the mechanism of movement of anew case, Masdevallia muscosa Rehb. f. 
This plant produces a number of flowers borne singly on erect scapes 
some 15 cm. long. The labellum is roughly triangular and articulated 
by a delicate hinge to the foot. The movement is displayed as a sudden 
and rapid folding up of the labellum on its band-like neck, so that the 
broad distal part of the blade is approximated to the top of the column. 
This movement is called forth by the gentlest touch of a hair or insect’s 
foot on the median crest of the blade. Within a second of stimulating 
the crest, the blade is moved upwards through an angle of some 10°, 
then for a brief space, which is only just appreciable, and amounts to 
a small fraction of a second, a slight hesitation or slowing, as it were, 
is noticeable, and finally, the upward movement is continued through 
a further angle of 70° or 80° with great rapidity. The whole process 
barely occupies two seconds. This manifestation of movement in the 
labellum seems to be simply one of the numerous ways chanced on 
by orchids in promoting cross-fertilization by the agency of insects. 


(4) Chemical Changes (including Respiration and Fermentation). 


Formation of Nitric Acid in Plants.t—Herr B. Frank contests the 
ordinary view that the conversion of nitrates into organic nitrogenous 
substances takes place exclusively in the leaves. He finds, on the 
contrary, as the result of direct experiments, that in those which he 
terms “nitric acid plants” much more nitric acid is absorbed during 
the period of growth than is required at the time for the formation of 
new organs, and that the excess accumulates in the form of unchanged 
nitrates in all the organs adapted for the purpose—the parenchyma of 
the root and stem, the leaf-stalk, and veins—where it is stored until the 
period of ripening of the fruit. The transformation of the nitrates into 
nitrogenous substances which serve as food-materials for the plant takes 
place in all the organs which are penetrated by vascular bundles, even 
in the root. He further states that the whole of the nitrate contained 
in vegetable tissues must have been absorbed as such by the root, the 
plant having no power, whether in the light or in the dark, of converting 
ammonium salts into nitrates. 


As examples of typical “ nitric acid plants” Herr Frank names the 


* Ann. of Bot., i. (1888) pp. 237-53 (1 pl.). 
+ Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., v. (1887) pp. 472-87. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 617 


sunflower, pea, haricot-bean, scarlet-runner, cabbage, maize, wheat, 
eucumber, and Trifolium hybridum ; while, on the other hand, the lupin 
and most woody plants contain but a very small proportion of nitrates. 


y. General. 


Volkens’ Desert Flora.*—In his ‘Flora of the Egypto-Arabian 
Desert’ Herr G. Volkens states a number of exceedingly interesting 
facts respecting the means of protection of desert plants against excessive 
evaporation, such as the storage of water in tissue especially adapted for 
the purpose, a dense covering of hairs, unusual length of the root, &c.; 
and discusses the question whether transpiration is a physiological or a 
purely physical process. 


Detmer’s Laboratory Course of Vegetable Physiology.{—Prof. W. 
Detmer publishes a very useful handbook for the use of practical students 
in vegetable physiology. The methods of manipulation are, in particular, 
described with great minuteness. 


Isotonic Coefficient of Glycerin.{—The isotonic coefficient of gly- 
eerin has generally been assumed, in experiments on the plasmolysis of 
cells, to be about 2, but without being founded on any definite observa- 
tions. Herr H. de Vries has determined the point experimentally. 
In the first place he was able to confirm Klebs’s statement§ of the 
permeability of the protoplasm for glycerin, not only in the cells 
of Zygnema, but also in Spirogyra, and in those of the violet epi- 
dermis of the under side of the leaf in Tradescantia. But the per- 
meability of protoplasm varies in different plants, in different cells of 
the same plant, and probably also in the same cells at different periods 
and under different external conditions. As the result of a series of 
experiments de Vries found the isotonic concentration of potassium 
nitrate, as compared with that of glycerin, to be, on the average, 0-592, 
and the isotonic coefficient of glycerin to be 1°78. The following are 
the coefficients for other substances :—cane-sugar, 1°88; invert-sugar, 
1:88; malic acid, 1:98; citric acid, 2°02; tartaric acid, 2°02. 


B. CRYPTOGAMIA. 
Cryptogamia Vascularia. 


Oophyte of Trichomanes. ||—Prof. F. O. Bower describes certain 
normal and abnormal developments of the oophyte of Trichomanes 
pyxidiferum and alatum. 

In the former species the spores germinate freely while still within 
the indusium, or even in the sporangium, developing a much-branched 
filamentous protonema-like prothallus, not unlike a Vaucheria to the 
naked eye, resembling the protonema of a moss, but coarser; the fila- 
ments are partitioned by septa into somewhat barrel-shaped cells. This 
prothallus is frequently an aposporous growth, derived from imperfect 
sporangia arrested in their growth, or even from cells of the columella. 
The antheridia are produced laterally on the prothallus, either singly or 


* Volkens, G., ‘Die Flora d. agyptisch-arabischen Wiiste,’ 156 pp. and 18 pls. 
Berlin, 1887. See Flora, Ixxi. (1888) p. 25. 

+ Detmer, Dr. W., ‘Das Pflanzenphysiologische Prakticum,’ Jena, 1888. 

i Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) pp. 229-35, 245-53. 

§ See this Journal, 1887, p. 440. || Ann. of Bot. i. (1888) pp. 269-305 (8 pls.). 


618 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


in pairs, and are shortly-stalked spherical bodies presenting nothing 
very striking in their structure. The archegonia are borne on arche- 
goniophores or massive outgrowths of the prothallus, each archegoniophore 
bearing cither a single archegonium or a number. The archegoniophore 
is usually a multicellular structure, and the venters of the archegonia 
are imbedded in its tissue. The species is probably dicecious. In old 
fronds there is an additional mode of propagation by direct budding, 
resulting in the formation of new sporophytes. 

In T. alatum Prof. Bower supplements his previous description of 
aposporous and apogamous developments.* Although normal sporangia 
and spores are in some cases produced, the greater number of the 
prothalli observed were formed, not by germination of spores, but by 
peculiar aposporous growths which arise in remarkable profusion from 
such old fronds as have fallen to the ground, or even from the tips of 
pinne of fronds which still retain their normal position. The prothalli 
differ from those of J. pywidiferum in being frequently not protonemal, 
but flattened structures. They may arise from the surface of the frond 
or from the sporangium, with or without the intervention of protonemal 
filaments. On their apices are very frequently produced in great 
numbers the remarkable spindle-shaped gemma borne on sterigmata. 
The protonemal filaments and the prothalloid growths may pass 
insensibly one into another. From the filaments are produced either 
rhizoids or protonemal branches. The mature gemme@ are composed of 
from five to seven cells; they germinate only with extreme slowness. 
The antheridia are produced on the protonema, but have never been 
seen to produce antherozoids; and no archegonia have ever been seen 
on cultures of this species. The author believes that this species is 
never reproduced sexually; apogamous budding is common on the 
protonema. 

As regards the bearing of these facts on the phylogenesis of Ferns, 
Prof. Bower thinks there can be no doubt that the Hymenophyllaces 
must be regarded as the lowest family of Ferns, and that the protonema 
of Trichomanes corresponds to the protonema of a Moss. The oophyte is 
probably the more ancient of the two generations in the Filicine, but 
is adapted only to conditions of great and uniform moisture. For the 
dissemination of the spores of the sporophyte dryness is in most cases 
essential; and when the fern grows in very moist situations, as is the 
case with the Hymenophyllacee, we have the dissemination of the 
spores in abeyance, and a general reversion to aposporous reproduction. 


Development of Onoclea Struthiopteris Hoffm. (Struthiopteris 
germanica Willd.).t|—Dr. D. H. Campbell publishes a very careful and 
detailed account of the development of the “ostrich fern.” The spores 
have, when mature, three distinct coats, a brown exospore, furnished with 
ridges and folds, and two inner coats. The prothallium is distinctly dice- 
cious, the female prothallia being usually larger than the male. By con- 
tracting and staining, the continuity of protoplasm from cell to cell of 
the prothallium can be clearly demonstrated. The antheridia and arche- 
gonia are distinctly trichomic in their origin, the latter are much more 
limited in their distribution than the former. The ventral canal-cell of 
Janczewski does not appear to exist in the archegonium. The actual 


* See this Journal, ante, p. 262. 
+ Mem. Bost. Sec. Nat. Hist., iv. (1887) pp. 17-52 (4 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 619 


entrance of an antherozoid into the central cell was observed. At an carly 
period in the development of the embryo it consists of eight primary 
cells, each of which has the form characteristic of the apical cell of the 
mature stem and root. 

The vascular bundles of the stem contain no true vessels, but tracheids, 
which are chiefly scalariform, though there are some spiral and reticulate 
ones, and sieve-tubes. Hach leaf originates from a single segment of 
the apical cell of the stem. The leaf-stalk developes at first much more 
rapidly than the lamina, which remains very small proportionately until 
the latter part of the summer previous to its unfolding, after which its 
development is remarkably rapid. As in some other ferns, the 
arrangement of the leaves in the mature plant is in a 5/13 spiral 
phyllotaxis, although they are so crowded that it is difficult to make this 
out. The growing point of the stem is completely concealed by the 
young leaves; the epidermis of the stem is very feebly developed. 

The sori are formed in connection with the veins. The division of 
the nucleus in the formation of the spores was very clearly followed out ; 
the formation of the nuclear spindle was distinctly seen, but no satisfactory 
view of the nuclear disc could be obtained. The cells of the annulus 
soon project above the other cells of the sporangium, and their division- 
walls become thicker. The cells of the annulus on one side of the 
sporangium are rather more elongated than the others; and four, or 
sometimes only three of these near the base of the capsule form the 
“stomium,” at which place the capsule opens. 


Branching of the Frond of Ferns.*—According to Herr W. 
Méhring, sympodial branching in the frond of ferns never takes place in 
any of the species examined by him. In the youngest state of the frond 
he finds a two-edged apical cell, which soon produces a periclinal, and 
then cuts off segments towards the upper and under side of the leaf. 
This cell divides again by an anticlinal into two cells, the true apical 
cells of the frond. Beneath the apex the segments are produced in 
acropetal succession. The course of the veins is dichotomous, one of 
the two branches having greater energy of growth than the other; but 
the branching of the leaf remains monopodial. Its growth in length is 
determined only by the apical cell, its growth in breadth by the marginal 
cells. 


Leaves of Polypodiacese.t|—Herr W. Benze describes the adaptations 
for different degrees of moisture in various Polypodiacez. A typical 
assimilating system is wanting in Adiantum; palisade-cells occur in 
species of Acrostichum, in Platycerium alcicorne, and Polypodium Lingua ; 
branching palisade-cells in Asplenium faleatum, <Aspidium Sieboldi, 
Blechnum, Dicksonia, and Doodia. Stomata are found only on the under 
side of the leaf, and depressed in the tissue only in Polypodium Lingua 
and Platycerium alcicorne. The mechanical tissue is usually composed of 
bast-cells, less often of collenchymatous cells. 

Aspidol from Aspidium Filix-mas.{—Signor G. Daccomo has 
obtained from the root of the male fern a compound which has received 

* Mohring, W., ‘Ueb. d. Verzweigung d. Farnwedel,’ 33 pp., Berlin, 1887. See 
Bot. Centratbl., xxxiv. (1888) p. 7. 

7 Benze, W., ‘Ueb. d. Anatomie der Blattorgane einiger Polypodiaceen,’ 47 pp., 
Berlin, 1887. 

¢ Ann. Chim. Farm., Ixxxvili. pp. 69-90. Sce Journ. Chem. Soc. Lond., 1888, 
Abstr., p. 621. 


620 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


the name of aspidol ; it has the composition C.H,,O, and is insoluble in 
alkalies, but easily soluble in ether, benzene, chloroform, light petroleum, 
and hot alcohol. 


Selaginella lepidophylla.*—M. Leclere du Sablon describes the 
curious property of revivification possessed by Selaginella lepidophylla. 
When the root withers, each branch curls up, and the plant appears 
more or less in the form of a ball. In this state it is able to remain for 
a long time ; and then, when the water necessary for its growth is supplied, 
the branches unroll, the green color which had almost disappeared 
returns, and the branches and roots recommence to grow. The structure 
of the plant is such that when dehydration occurs, the cells on one side 
of a branch are thicker than those on the other, thus they contract 
unequally and cause the branch to curl up. 


Solms-Laubach's Introduction to Fossil Botany.t—This valuable 
work is devoted chiefly to the remains of Vascular Cryptogams, no 
reference being made to Angiosperms, and a small portion only of the 
space being devoted to Thallophytes, Muscinew, and Gymnosperms. 
Besides the organisms of doubtful position, he classifies the fossil 
Vascular Cryptogams under the following heads, viz.:—Ferns, Equise- 
tacee, Hydropteridee, Lycopodites and allied forms, Lepidodendree, 
Sigillariex, Stigmaria, Calamariee, and Sphenophyllee. The Leioder- 
maries are regarded as belonging to the Sigillariee rather than to 
Gymnosperms. The Calamariex are treated as belonging to a different 
section to the true Equisetacee, and as having been furnished with both 
macrospores and microspores. 


Muscinesx. 


Peristome of Mosses.{—Continuing his observations on this organ, 
M. Philibert now especially deals with the structure of the internal 
peristome and its variations. The internal peristome of the Ortho- 
tricher is not very dissimilar from that of Neckera, Webera acuminata, 
Cylindrothecium, and the other Hypnobryacee, where the basilar mem- 
brane is very short. The primitive rosette is always composed, on the 
dorsal surface, of sixteen rows of rectangles opposite to the ventral 
plates of the teeth, and on the ventral surface, of less regular trapezes 
forming fewer rows. This structure of the internal peristome is not 
essentially different from that of the Bryacee. In the genus Cinclidium 
the internal peristome presents a somewhat singular aspect. It has the 
form of a cylinder closed above by a hemispherical dome. The lower 
half has the same appearance, the same colour, and the same structure 
as in the genus Mnium. The only difference between the structure of 
the internal peristome in the Cinclidiew and the genus Mnium is that in» 
the former the thickening extends all over the surface of the peristomal 
cylinder. In the Fontinalaceew the internal peristome has the form of 
an elongated cone, composed of sixteen straight, vertical filiform columns, 
which are connected by numerous equidistant horizontal branches. 
Cinclidium subrotundum forms a connecting link between the structure 
as found in the Cinclidiez and that of the Fontinalacee. 


* Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) pp. 109-12. 

+ Solms-Laubach, H., Graf zu, ‘ Einleitung in die Paleophytologie, 416 pp, and 
49 figs., Leipzig, 1887. 

t Rey. Bryol., xv. (1888) pp. 24-8, 37-44, Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 461. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 621 


German Sphagnacee.*—Herr H. Russow contests the view of Réll + 
that the species of Sphagnum cannot be distinguished by any constant 
characters, but pass insensibly one into another. He finds, on the con- 
trary, the specific characters as well marked as in any other group of 
plants. Herr Russow includes in the section Eusphagnum twenty-two 
European species, which he classifies as follows:—(1) Acutirotia (S. 
jimbriatum Wils., Girgensohnit Russ., Russowii Warnst., Warnstorfii Russ., 
tenellum Kling., fuscum Kling., quinquefarium Warnst., subnitens R. & W., 
acutifolium Ehrh. ex parte) ; (2) Paprniosa (squamosum Pers., teres Angst., 
Wulfianum Girg.); (8) Cusprpata (Lindbergii Schpr., riparium Angst., 
cuspidatum Ehrh., mollusewm Bruch.); (4) Susszcunpa (cavifolium 
Warnst.); (5) Trunoata (molle Sulliv., rigidum Schpr., Angstreemii 
Hartm.); (6) Cymsrrouia (palustre L., Austini Sulliv.). Of these, S. 
Warnstorfir is new. 


Lichenes. 


Cladonia.t—In his monograph of this genus of lichens, Herr EK. 
Wainio describes four species of the subgenus Cladina, two of Pycnothelia, 
and eighty-one of Cenomyce. In the diagnosis of the species he makes 
use of characters drawn from the form and size of the spermogonia, from 
a red pigment, chrysophanic acid, which he found in several species 
with brown and light apothecia, and from the presence or absence of 
certain layers in the podetia. In each species the gonidia of the podetia 
and of the thallus are described. 

The author takes the opportunity of correcting Krabbe’s description 
of C. papillaria,§ who states that only pseudopodetia occur on it, whereas 
it possesses true podetia. — 


Sydow’s Lichens of Germany. || Herr P. Sydow publishes a mono- 
graph of the Lichens of Germany, amounting to 1065 species. The 
classification adopted is founded on that of Massalongo and Kérber. 
After an introduction on the morphological and anatomical characters of 
the group, follow directions for the collection and preparation of lichens, 
a guide to the literature, a clavis for the determination of the families, 
and a description of each species. 


Alge. 


Apical Cell of Fucus.—Mr. W. M. Woodworth has made a careful 
study of the structure of the growing point in Fucus, and is unable to 
confirm the statements of Reinke and Rostafinski as to the existence of a 
group of initial cells. The species chiefly examined is F. furcatus of the 
New England coast. 

The author finds the apex of the frond to be here frequently occupied 
by a slit-like depression of considerable depth. Sections in different 
directions through the growing point show that at the base of this 
terminal depression there is always one cell considerably larger than all 
the rest ; on either side of this apical cell is a series of cells that become 


* Russow, E., ‘Ber. iib. d. . . . einheimischen Torfmoosen,’ 1887, 23 pp. See Bot. 
Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) p. 103. + See this Journal, 1886, p. 108. 

t Wainio, E., ‘Monogr. Cladoniarum univ. Pars prima,’ 509 pp., Helsingfors, 
1887. § See this Journal, 1882, p. 388. 


\| Sydow, P., ‘Die Flechten Deutschlands, 334 pp. and numerous figs., Berlin, 
887. q Ann. of Bot., i. (1888) pp. 203-11 (1 pl.). 


622 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


smaller as the distance from the central cell increases; and these are 
continuous with the epidermal cells. At the base of these larger cells 
are smaller ones of irregular shape, from which the hyphe of the stem 
originate. The larger central cell is undoubtedly the initial cell of all 
the rest ; it is a four-sided wedge-shaped cell, the smaller and upper end 
being rounded and the base truncated; its longer diameter is at right 
angles to the broad surface of the frond. 

The same general results were obtained in F. vesiculosus and F. 
filiformis. 

The preparations were made by preserving the fresh material in 
alcohol of about 70 per cent., and imbedding in paraffin, after staining 
with various anilin dyes; sections were then made in ribbons on a Jung 
microtome, and mounted in balsam. 


Phycoerythrin.*—Herr F. Schiitt proposes the term rhodophyll for 
the compound pigment of the red alge, limiting the use of phycoerythrin 
to the portion soluble in water, while the portion soluble in alcohol he 
calls Floridez-green. Corresponding to the terms chlorophyll and 
rhodophyll, we shall then have phzophyll for the chromophyll of the 
Pheophycex, cyanophyll for that of the Cyanophycex, melinophyll for 
that of the Diatomacez, and pyrrophyll for that of the Peridines. In 
the same manner, the portion soluble in alcohol is composed of chloro- 
phyllin and of the various forms of xanthophyllin found in the different 
groups, viz. phycoxanthin, diatomin, and peridinin; while the pigments 
soluble in water may be termed phycoerythrin, phycophezin, and phyco- 
JVITIN. 

i The absorption-spectrum of a solution of phycoerythrin is described 
in the cases of extracts of Ceramium rubrum and Dumontia filiformis. 


Procarp and Cystocarp of Gracilaria.t—Mr. T. Johnson finds that 
the position of the hitherto undetected procarp in Gracilaria confer- 
voides is indicated by a lateral swelling. ‘The procarp consists of six or 
seven cells, distinguished by general arrangement, size, and contents 
from the surrounding cells of this swelling. From an apical and usually 
smaller cell of this group arises the trichogyne, which, after a more or 
less circuitous course within the swelling, reaches the external surface, 
on which it projects, exposed for contact with the “spermatium.” The 
pericarp is, in Gracilaria, formed before fertilization, and, together with 
the procarp and placenta, arises by repeated periclinal division of the 
two or three outermost cortical layers of cells of the swelling. 

The act of impregnation exhibits several remarkable peculiarities. 
The cells both of the procarp and of the placenta coalesce with one 
another by the disappearance of their cell-walls; and the fused cells of 
the procarp and of the placenta are placed in communication with one 
another by protoplasmic protrusions (diverticula), proceeding from the 
fused cells of the procarp and passing through their swollen walls. The 
cells forming the free surface of the placenta now produce radiating 
rows of basipetally formed spores; while from the fused procarpial cells 
other diverticula arise, which also form spores at their free ends inde- 
pendently of the placental cells. 

The author suggests that the nucleus resulting from the impregnation 
of the trichogyne by the “spermatium,” fuses in turn with the nuclei of 


* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 36-52 (1 pl.). 
+ Ann. of Bot., i. (1888) pp. 213-22 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 623 


the combining procarpial cells. ‘This complex nucleus then undergoes 
repeated division, and the daughter-nuclei pass, one through each of the 
diverticula, into the placental cells, there to fuse with their nuclei, this 
union being followed by division. This process occurs throughout the 
whole placenta, so that in the end each of the placental cells from which 
the spores are directly formed, has received into its nucleus part of the 
substance of the nucleus formed by the fusion of the nucleus of the 
“ spermatium ” with that of the carpogenous cell. 

The procarpial cells of Gracilaria are homologous with the auxiliary 
cells in Dudresnaya; but, owing to the concentration of these cells 
round the procarp, there is no need of the long connecting-tubes of the 
latter genus, which are replaced by the protoplasmic protrusions or 
diverticula. Nothing was seen corresponding to the production, in 
Dudresnaya, of several cystocarps from a single procarp. 


Frond of Champia parvula.* —Mr. R. P. Bigelow confirms the 
observations of Debrayj on the structure of the frond of this seaweed, 
and adds also particulars regarding those of C. salicornioides, Lomentaria 
Baileyana, and L. Coulteri. 


Development of Hydrurus.{—Herr G. Lagerheim finds this alga 
extraordinarily abundant in the neighbourhood of Freiburg-i.-B. in the 
winter and spring, disappearing in the summer, as it grows only in cold 
running water. Hach individual is inclosed in a slimy gelatinous 
envelope which differs in consistency at different parts of the thallus, 
but is quite structureless. The cells are dispersed through this jelly; 
towards the apex of the branches they are in close contact with one 
another ; but in the older parts of the thallus they are at some distance 
apart; while at the base, above the point of attachment, they are again 
crowded. In each cell are one or two parietal chromatophores, coloured 
brown by phycophein, accompanied apparently by phycoxanthin. Hach 
chromatophore contains a lenticular pyrenoid, and probably a single 
nucleus. In the lowest part of the protoplasm are several small vacuoles, 
some of which can be distinctly seen to pulsate. Hach cell is surrounded 
by a very delicate membrane, possibly of the same substance as the 
envelope, but containing less water. 

It is only the cells of the branches which produce zoospores, each 
cell in this position giving birth to either two or four. They force 
their way through the deliquescent cell-membrane and envelope, and, 
when mature, are of very peculiar form. When mature they are tetra- 
hedral, each angle being prolonged into a slender colourless beak; in 
one of the angles is a brown chromatophore ; and in the centre of the 
side opposite to the chromatophore a single short cilium, and near it two 
pulsating vacuoles, but no pigment-spot. The zoospore moves very 
slowly with its cilium in front. After a time it rounds itself off. They 
appear to germinate directly without conjugation. 

Hydrurus probably remains in a dormant state through the summer 
and autumn. The author has found at this time on stones in streams 
collections of roundish cells inclosed in jelly, which may be the palmella- 
condition of the alga. He has observed the formation of resting-spores, 
which are produced, like the zoospores, in the branches, about 15 » in 


* Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., xxiii. pp. 111-20. Sce Bot. Centralbl., 
XXxiv. (1888) p. 99. t See this Journal, 1887, p. 624. 
{ Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 73-85 (5 figs.). 


624 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


diameter, nearly spherical and inclosed in a firm double membrane. They 
are also surrounded by a peculiar stalked envelope of colourless gelatin, 
which forces itself through the gelatinous envelope of the thallus, and 
finally becomes detached. They are produced on different individuals 
from the zoospores. 

With regard to the systematic position of Hydrurus, Lagerheim 
thinks that it should possibly be placed as a diverging branch at the 
base of the Pheeophycee. 


Development of Pediastrum.*—Herr E. Askenasy has been able to 
follow out the history of development of this alga, chiefly in the case of 
P. Boryanum, and has found it correspond closely to that of Hydrodictyon. 
He found this species accompanied by large quantities of a Polyedrium, 
which he calls P. polymorphum, with a rather thin cell-wall, and spiny. 
This is a stage in the development of Pediastrum Boryanum. The 
contents of the Polyedrium-cell gradually arrange themselves into a disc, 
its membrane then bursts by a transverse slit, and the entire contents, 
still surrounded by the innermost layer of the membrane, escape through 
the slit and assume a globular or ellipsoidal form, the macrogonidia 
being now in active “‘swarming” movement. Finally they arrange 
themselves in a plane, invest themselves in a thick membrane, and 
become a Pediastrum-disc. These ccenobia may again produce new 
ccenobia of the same kind, and in either case the process is a very rapid 
one. The usual number of cells in a ccenobium is sixteen, thirty-two, or 
sixty-four. 

The author believes that a large number of forms hitherto described 
as distinct species of Pediastrum are in reality but stages in the develop- 
ment of other species. 

A nucleus can be readily detected in the cells of Pediastrum, as also, 
in young discs, distinct chromatophores. 

Herr Askenasy has been able to follow the escape of the macrogonidia 
from the cells of the ccenobium; they are provided with two very short 
cilia, which are very difficult to detect. The microgonidia are fusiform 
in shape, and are provided with two long cilia; they are gametes, and 
conjugate with one another, but not with those which originate from the 
same cell. ‘The zygotes soon come to rest, surround themselves with a 
firm membrane, and increase gradually in size from 4 p» to 21 or 24 p. 
After a long period of rest they no doubt develope swarm-spores, in the 
same manner as Hydrodictyon, from which polyhedria are developed. 

The author regards Hydrodictyon and Pediastrum as forming together 
a single family very nearly related to the Volvocinex. 


Algse parasitic on the Sloth.t—Mdme. Weber van Bosse describes 
alge, comprising three new species and two new genera, found as a 
parasitic growth on the hairs of two genera of Tardigrada, Bradypus and 
Choloepus. On the side exposed to the light the hairs of these sloths are 
completely covered, when living in their natural very moist atmosphere, 
to the extent of possibly 150,000 to 200,000 individuals on a single 
hair. 

One of the species is green, and appears to constitute a new genus of 
Chroolepidee. It has two kinds of reproductive organ, large ovoid 


* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 127-38 (1 pl.). 
+ Natuurk. Verhand. Holland. Maatsch. Wetensch. (2 pls.), 1887. See Bot. 
Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) p. 161. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 625 


macrozoospores with four cilia, and small ovoid or angular microspores, 
on which no cilia were detected. The mode of reproduction could not 
be followed. The following is the description of the new genus Tricho- 
philus :—Fila articulata, irregulariter ramosa, in stratis tenuibus expansa, 
amoene Viridia ; fila singula late confluentia, ad apicem plerumque sensim 
attenuata, reptantia. Ramuli uni- pauci-articulati, appendice radiciformi 
destiti. Articuli vegetativi cylindracei, diametro equali vel 1/2 latiore 
longitudini, ad genicula leviter constricti, contento viridi, chromatophoris 
exiguis, loculo centrali sine colore, granulis minutis circumdato; mem- 
brana hyalina, firma, duobus stratis constituta. Cellule vegetative 
intumescentes in zoosporangiis transmutantur. Propagatio agamica 
macro-zoosporis et microsporis. Macro-zoospore libere ovate, polo 
antico hyalino, ciliis quaternis vibrantibus instructe; contento viridi, 
ocello rubro non viso. Microspore contenti divisione succedanea repetita 
orte, 32 in quaque cellula, pariete matricali lateraliter ostiolo poriformi 
aperto liberatee, macrosporis minores, ovate v. angulata et ciliis destitute. 
Verisimile statim porro evolventes, nec inter se discedentes in thallum 
transformantur. Propagatio sexualis adhuc ignota. 

The two other parasitic alge are violet, belonging to the family 
Chamesiphones, and forming a new genus named Cyanoderma, with 
coccogonia, each of which contains a varying number of gonidia. The 
following is its diagnosis:—Alge unicellulares, conidiis et cellularum 
vegetativarum divisione sese multiplicantes. Cellule vegetative: cum 
coccogoniis in eodem thallo evolventes, contento homogeneo, colore cceru- 
lescente violaceo, minute, in pili substantiam penetrantes. Coccogonia 
globosa aut subglobosa, membrana crassa circumdata, matura demum ad 
apicem soluta. Conidia pauca aut numerosissima, et contenti divisione 
in tres directiones angulis rectis sese secantes orta. Species omnes in 
aere crescentes. 


Conjugation of Spirogyra.*—Herr C. E. Overton has followed the 
course of the process of conjugation in Spirogyra, especially in S. decimina 
and nitida. He finds the most convenient fixing material to be chromic 
acid and its compounds, or picric acid, and the preparation was then 
stained with an alcoholic solution of borax-carmine, treating afterwards 
with a 0-1—0°5 per cent hydrochloric acid in 70 per cent. alcohol. 

In S. Weberi, with a diameter of 24-28 yp, the conjugating processes 
approached one another with a rapidity of about 3» in the hour. After 
contact, it takes twenty-four hours for them to become firmly attached to 
one another, and for the separating wall to become absorbed. The 
author believes that, during their growth, a substance is exuded from the 
processes by which the direction of their growth and their ultimate 
meeting is brought about. The development of the processes does not 
appear to be always caused by their mutual action on one another, as a 
cell is sometimes found to put out one of great length, which does not 
unite with any other cell. In many species the sexual nature of the cells 
can only be regarded as relative, not absolute, as is shown by the occur- 
rence of lateral conjugation. This frequently takes place with groups 
of four cells, of which the two central ones are of the same sex. 

The passage of the contents of the male cell, which usually takes 
place at night, is a purely physical process. By the use of the method 
mentioned above, and examining in xylol or Canada balsam, it is easy to 


* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 68-72 (1 pl.). 


626 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


detect the two nuclei in the zygote after conjugation, which afterwards 
coalesce. The formation of the membrane of the spore probably takes 
place by apposition. 


Uronema, a new genus of Chlorozoosporee.*—Herr G. Lagerheim 
gives the following diagnosis of this new genus of Algw, which he 
regards as a connecting link between the Chetophoracee and the 
Ulothricacee :—Fila non ramosa, muco non inyoluta, e serie simplici 
cellularum formata, basi adnata. Cellula apicalis attenuata. Membrana 
cellularis tenuis et hyalina, non lamellata. Nuclei cellularum singuli. 
Chromatophori singuli, parietales, laminiformes, virides, margine 
inequali, pyrenoidis binis (rarius singulis) preediti. Megazoospore 
singule, rarius bine (vel complures?) e contentu cellularum omnium 
fili non mutatarum ort, ovoider, ciliis vibratoriis quaternis et puncto 
rubro predite, per ostiolum magnum poriforme vel cellula parte mediana 
membrane gelificata fracta examinantes, germinantes fila nova formantes. 
Aplanospore contractione contentus cellule formate (vel e zoosporis 
orte ?). 

The species on which the genus is founded, U. confervicolum, was 
found by the author epiphytic on filaments of Conferva in ditches near 
Warberg in Sweden. He thinks it probable that Stigeoclonium sim- 
plicissimum Reinsch belongs to the same genus. 


Wille’s Contributions to Algology.j—-Prof. N. Wille publishes in 
German a number of his observations on various classes of Alga, most 
of which have appeared before only in Swedish. They comprise :—On 
the swarm-cells of Trentepohlia and their conjugation ;{ On a new endo- 
phytic alga (Entocladia Wittrockii);§ On cell-division in Conferva; || 
On cell-division in Gdogonium ; |; On the germination of the swarm- 
spores of Cidogonium; 4 On the resting-cells of Conferva;** On the 
genus Gongrosira;t{ and on akinetes and aplanospores;{{ as well 
as the paper on Chrysopyxis bipes and Dinobryon sertularia.§§ In the 
paper on Gongrosira, Prof. Wille gives this definition of his terms 
akinetes and aplanospores: —The former are non-motile reproductive 
cells produced non-sexually and without rejuvenescence ; the latter are 
non-motile reproductive cells produced non-sexually by rejuvenescence. 
Akinetes occur in Trentepohlia, Conferva pachyderma, and Ulothriz, as 
well as in the so-called spores of Nostocacez and Rivulariacez ; aplano- 
spores in Conferva stagnorum and Wittrockii. The two kinds of resting- 
cells pass into one another, and akinetes into ordinary vegetative cells, by 
insensible gradations. 


Hansgirg’s Alga-flora of Bohemia.||||—Prof. A. Hansgirg has now 
completed the first part of his important ‘Prodromus of the Alga-flora 
of Bohemia,’ comprising the Rhodophycesw, Pheophycex, and Chloro- 
phycee. The number of species described is 523, each genus being 
illustrated by one or more woodcuts. 

Hansgirg agrees with Rostafinski in including Hydrurus and Chromo- 


* Malpighia, i. (1887) pp. 517-23 (1 pl.). 
+ Pringsheim’s Jahrb. tf. Wiss. Bot., xviii. (1887) pp. 425-518 (4 pls.). 
t See this Journal, 1879, p. 601. § Ibid., 1880, p. 1023. 
\| Ibid., p. 1024. q Ibid. p.1025. ** Ibid., 1882, p. 836. 
+t Ibid., 1884, p. 107. tt Ibid., p. 272. 8§ Ibid., 1883, p. 863. 
||\| Hansgirg, A., ‘Prodr. d. Algenflora v. Bohmen,’ Theil 1, Heft 2, Prag, 1888, 
See Bot. Centralbl., xxxiy. (1888) p. 97. Cf. this Journal, 1887, p. 125. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 627 


phyton under Pheeophycee, as well as Syncrypta, usually placed under 
Volvocineze. The Chlorophycez are divided into Confervoidex, Siphonex, 
Protococcoidex, and Conjugate ; and the isogamous Confervoidex again 
into Chetophoracezs, Cladophoracee, Trentepohliacee, and Ulvacez. 
The Protococcoides are again divided into Volvocinex, including the 
new genus Cylindromonas, and Palmellacez, with which the Protococcaceze 
are united. Under the Protococcacee is placed the new subfamily 
Coccaceze which includes a number of forms regarded by the author and 
others as stages in the development of higher alge. A number of new 
Species and varieties are described. Some further details are given in 
another paper.* 


/Hauck and Richter’s Phycotheca universalis.—Three parts of 
this valuable publication are now issued. Lach contains a specimen of 
50 species belonging to every class of alge, many of these being rare 
and difficult to obtain. The synonyms of each species are given in 
detail, and the locality whence the specimen was obtained. 


Venetian Chlorophycee.t—The third part of De Toni and Levi’s 
‘Flora Algologica della Venezia’ is devoted to the Chlorophycez, the 
authors following almost entirely the classification of Rabenhorst. The 
members of each genus, as well as of the larger groups, are arranged in 
an analytical key. 


Cheetoceros.{—Herr F. Schiitt describes the structure of this genus 
of Diatomacez, of which several species are at times exceedingly 
abundant in the Baltic, floating free on the surface of the water. The 
cell-wall consists usually, as in Melosira, of only three pieces, the two 
valves and a single girdle, and the genus is distinguished from all others 
by the very long horns, a pair of which spring from each end of each 
cell. They are not above 1/20 the diam. of the cell, but many times as 
long. They are continuations of the cellJ-wall, and are, like it, strongly 
silicified, the cell-contents being in unbroken communication; and they 
may even contain chromatophores. The separate cells which result from 
the division of a single mother-cell usually remain for a time attached to 
one another in chains, the mucilaginous substance which connects them 
together being apparently formed between the horns. In the process of 
cell-division the horns do not begin to make their appearance, as small 
papille, until the young cells have nearly separated from one another. 

Like many other genera of diatoms Chztoceros is characterized by the 
formation of “internal cells” or resting spores, formed singly in the 
mother-cells. They are formed by the contraction of the contents of the 
mother-cell, which retreat from the cell-wall and round themselves off, 
secreting at the same time a new cell-wall which is provided with spines 
or protuberances. ‘These are not, like the horns, hollow, but are solid 
silicified rods. The horns of the mature cell vary greatly in form and 
size in different species of the genus, and even within the same species. 


Varieties of Aulacodiscus.S—Mr. J. Rattray supplements his mono- 
graph of this genus || by a description of abnormalities which occur in 
the different species in the following points :—(1) Outline :—the ordinary 


* Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr., xxxviii. (1888) pp. 41-4, 87-9, 114-7, 149-51. 

+ De Toni, G. B., e D. Levi, ‘ Flora Algologica della Venezia. Parte terza, Le 
Cloroficee,’ 206 pp., Venezia, 1888. 

{ Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) pp. 161-70, 177-84 (1 pl.). 

§ Journ. of Bot., xxvi. (1888) pp. 97-102 (1 pl.). || This Journal, ante, p. 337. 


628 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


circular outline becomes occasionally polygonal, and normally so in A. 
polygonus. (2) Surface :—elevations and inflations of various kinds occur 
in different species. (3) Colour :—differences of colour in mature valves 
depend on the thickness of the valve, those having the superficial layer 
absent from certain portions being lighter there than elsewhere. (4) 
Central space :—in some species the central space is uniform in outline 
and dimensions, while in others it varies. (5) Markings :—variations 
are constantly met with in the degree of distinctness of the individual 
markings, arising from their greater or less elevation above the general 
surface. (6) Primary rays:—the number of these is extremely variable, 
from entire absence in abnormal forms of A. Kittoni to 45in A. orientalis, 
and they are far from constant even in the same species. (7) Processes :— 
these vary in their distance from the circumference, and are altogether 
wanting in A. apedicellatus and A. suspectus, and in abnormal forms of 
A, Kittoni. 


Fungi. 
Blue Coloration of Fungi by Iodine.*—M. L. Rolland records 


several instances in which the tissues of Fungi give the blue reaction 
with iodine alone. This occurs with the hairs and fibres of the stipes 
of Mycena tenerrima, a small agaric growing on the bark of poplars in 
the neighbourhood of Paris; also in the spores of Cyphella vitellina, a 
new Hymenomycete from Chile. 


Classification and Description of Fungi.t—Herr H. Karsten com- 
ments on and criticizes various points in Winter’s Monograph of the 
German Fungi in Rabenhorst’s ‘Cryptogamen-Flora von Deutschland’ ; 
some details of the classification adopted, and also the terminology, 
nomenclature, and synonymy.’ 


Biological Studies of Fungi.t—M. P. Vuillemin describes a new 
Entomophthora, E. gleospora, parasitic on flies. The mycelium is formed 
of elongated branched filaments, with here and there dense tufts of 
hyphe, which ramify several times, each of the ultimate branches forming 
a spore at its apex; the spores give birth, on germinating, either to 
sporidia or toa mycelium. The mycelial filaments are unseptated, but 
contain a number of nuclei dispersed with great regularity, each segment 
containing several. Each spore contains a nucleus, which passes into 
the sporidium when this is formed from it. 

After an account of the life-history of Mucor heterogamus,§ M. 
Vuillemin describes two newspecies of the genus :—WM. neglectus, a very 
small species, with the sporangiophores branching in a sympodial manner, 
and M. ambiguus, with coiled sporangiophores resembling those of Circi- 
nella. He states that the sporangium of Mucor does not dehisce at all 
when the atmosphere is very dry. 

Further notes follow on some species of Ascomycetes. The author 
confirms Tulasne’s statement that Trichoderma viride is a conidial form 
of Hypocrea rufa. The name Melanospora Fayodi he gives to a fungus 
growing on Leotia lubrica, which had been called by Fayod Hypomyces 
Leotiarum ; he has observed its ascospores, and has also discovered 


* Bull. Soc. Mycol. France, 1887, p. 134. See Rev. Mycol., x. (1888) p. 49. 

+ Flora, Ixxi. (1888) pp. 49-61, 65-80, 

t Bull. Soc. Sci. Nancy, 1887. See Morot’s Journ. Bot., ii. (1888) Rev. Bibl., 
p. 13. § See this Journal, 1887, p. 281. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 629 


sclerotia on it. Peziza mycetophila, which grows in its conidial form on 
Lactarius vellereus, is known, not only in its pezizoid, but also in its 
conidial form as Monilia albo-lutea, and as a sclerotium. "When the 
sclerotium germinates, it gives birth not to a fructification, but to a 
mycelium. In Saccobolus depauperatus the whole membrane of the ascus 
is coloured an intense blue by a solution of iodine. 


Formation of two fertile hymenia in Polyporus applanatus.* 
—M. HK. Heckel describes a specimen of Polyporus applanatus with a 
double hymenium. The first hymenium, which was normal, was more 
developed than its congener situated on the opposite side of the same 
pileus. The second hymenium, which was formed of short oblique 
tubes, was less than half as thick as the former. The most remarkable 
fact about this monstrosity was that the two hymenia were both fertile, 
though so different. 


Stretching of the Receptacle of the Phalloidei.t—Herr HE. Fischer 
has investigated the cause of the remarkably rapid extension of the 
receptacle of the Phalloidei, by which the volva is burst, and the mass 
of spores raised up. The observations were made chiefly on Phallus 
impudicus, but the explanation probably applies to the other species also. 

The extension is well known to be accompanied by a smoothing out 
of the previously folded or plaited walls of the chambers of the recep- 
tacle ; and De Bary attributes this to the inflation of the chambers by 
air. Herr Fischer does not consider this explanation adequate. He 
suggests that the folding of the walls is due to their rapid growth, while 
the extension of the stalk is prevented by the surrounding tissue. The 
cells which lie on the concave side are thus arrested in their growth, 
and become extremely compressed. As soon as the pressure is removed 
by the severance of the connection with the surrounding tissue, the 
tension causes a sudden smoothing out of the walls of the chambers, and 
a corresponding increase in their size; and this is no doubt assisted by 
the entrance of air into the chambers, which probably at first takes place 
from the intercellular spaces of the surrounding tissue. 


Revision of the Genus Bovista.t—Mr. G. Massee gives a diagnosis 
of the genus Bovista, and also descriptions of thirty-nine species, several 
of them new. Although allied to several genera, it has perhaps the most 
affinity with Lycoperdon, the points of difference between the two genera 
being that in Bovista the cortex is free, and falls away in patches, the 
sterile base is absent, and the capillitium springs from every portion of 
the inner wall of the peridium; while in Lycoperdon the cortex becomes 
broken up into warts or spines, the sterile base being present. The 
author subdivides the genus Bovista by means of spore characters :— - 
(a) Spores globose, warted or spinulose. (b) Spores globose, smooth. 
(c) Spores elliptical. (d) Species in which information about the spores 

is wanted. 

Formation of the Asci in Physalospora Bidwellii.s—M. Fréchou 
states that since the black rot was noticed on the vines in France, in 
1885, by MM. Viala and Ravaz, only the estival forms of the parasite 
had been studied. ‘Towards the end of June, at Nerac, shortly after the 


* Rey. Mycol., x. (1888) pp. 5-6. 
+ MT. Naturf. Gesell. Bern, 1887 (1888) pp. 142-57 (6 figs.). 


{ Journ. of Bot., xxvi. (1888) pp. 129-37 (1 pl.). 
§ Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1361-3. 


1888. 2x 


630 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


appearance of the first spots on the leaves, the fungus propagated itself 
by the aid of spores contained in receptacles (pycnidia). These spores 
are ovoid and colourless, and easily germinated when the necessary con- 
ditions of heat and humidity were furnished. It appears that the fungus 
always attacks the leaves first; the spores are @hen conveyed from the 
leaves to the grapes by rain. Besides the pycnidia, other smaller 
receptacles may be seen; these are the spermogonia which contain the 
spermatia. The role of these organisms has not yet been determined in 
a satisfactory manner. 


Development and Fructification of Trichocladium.*—M. L. Dufour 
states that Trichocladium asperum Harz, consists of long, colourless, 
branched filaments, and on these are short ramifications which terminate 
in asinglespore. This spore is formed of two cells, the lower of which, 
although smaller at first, gradually becomes as large as the upper one. 
They are at first colourless, then brown, and finally black, and are 
tuberculated when mature. The author found that the liquid best 
suited for the culture of this fungus was neutralized orange-juice. 

The commencement of germination took place in twenty-four hours 
after sowing. From one of the two cells of the spore, or sometimes 
from both, a small colourless vesicle may be seen to grow, from which 
arise some short and slightly branched germinating filaments. The 
mycelium then increases, branching abundantly. The important points 
to notice are that the mycelium is not septated, and that the spore is 
bicellular, black, and warty. 


Ceriomyces and Fibrillaria.t— According to M. J. de Seynes 
Fibrillaria consists of radiciform threads analogous to the mycelium of 
Clathrus and Phallus, ramifying and anastomosing in a manner some- 
what similar to Rhizomorpha, from which however it differs in colour ; 
Rhizomorpha being black, and Fibrillaria white, or yellowish white. 
Certain specimens of Fibrillaria exhibit irregular nodosities along the 
course of the radiciform threads. These bodies have been described 
under the name of Ceriomyces by Corda. The author has, however, been 
able to determine the complete identity of Ceriomyces and Fibrillaria. 


New Genus of Spheriaceous Pyrenomycetes.{—Sig. P. A. Saccardo 
gives descriptions of two species which form a new and very remarkable 
type of Pyrenomycetes. The following is the diagnosis of the genus :— 

Berlesiella Saccard. Perithecia subcarbonacea, atra, globosa, stromate 
pulvinato vel hemispherico, v. effuso carbonaceo, inserta, discreta vel 
basi tantum connexa, botryoso-prominula, setosa, ostiolo minuto vel 
obsoleto. Asci elongati (spurie paraphysati, octospori). Sporidia 
ovoideo-oblonga, 2-pluri septata et muriformia, e hyalino flaveola. 

Berlesiella nigerrima grows on Prunus Padus, and is often parasitic 
on the perithecia of Lutypella padina ; B. hirtella grows on the branches 
of Sambucus, near Rome. 


New Genus Peltospheria.$—Sig. A. N. Berlese gives the diagnosis 


of a new genus of spheriaceous Pyrenomycetes, to which he gives the 
name of Peltosphzria :— 


Perithecia sparsa epidermide tecta et basi ligno infossa, sursum 
clypeo stromatico atro tecta, raro bina sub eodem clypeo. Ostiola vix 


* Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) pp. 159-44. + Ibid., pp. 124-7. 
; Rev. Mycol., x. (1888) pp. 6-8 (1 pl). § Ibid., pp. 17-8 (1 pL). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 631 


erumpentia, brevia. Asci cylindracei sessiles, paraphysati, octospori. 
Sporidia monosticha ovoidea, septata, muriformia. The author describes 
one species, P. wvitrispora Berl., which grows on the branches of a 
Californian Lonicera. 


New Mucedinee.*—M. Boudier describes a new fungus Isaria 
cuneispora, which he finds parasitic on the dead bodies of spiders; also 
another new species, Stilbum viridipes, on decaying chips of oak. 


Clathrospora and Pyrenophora.j—Sig. A. N. Berlese follows up his 
monograph of Pleospora { with those of the two allied genera Clathrospora 
(8 species), and Pyrenophora (27 species). In both genera the primary 
divisions of the genus are made to depend on the number of septa and 
on other characters drawn from the structure of the sporidia. 


New Papulaspora.s—Under the name P. Dahliz, M. J. Costantin 
describes a new species of Papulaspora found on the tuber of a dahlia. 
It appears to be a form of the genus Dactylaria, and produces a number 
of spherical bodies, somewhat of the nature of sclerotia, which have the 
power of germination, each cell of the spherule giving rise to a germi- 
nating filament. 


Schinzia.||—Herr P. Magnus gives a revised diagnosis of this genus 
of Fungi (Hntorrhiza Weber), with descriptions of two new species :— 
S. Aschersoniana, on the root-swellings of Juncus bufonius, and S. Cas- 
paryana, on the same organs of J. Tenageia. 


Fungus Parasitic on the Plane.{ —M. C. Roumeguére speaks of 
the ravages committed on plane-trees in the south of France by the 
attacks of a parasitic fungus Fusarium ramulorum. It is the conidial 
form of a well-known Ascomycete Calonectria pyrochroa; both forms 
may sometimes be found on the leaves or young branches of the same 
tree. 


Anatomy of the Common Cedar-apple.**—Mr. E. Sanford states that 
this species of cedar-apple (Gymnosporangium macropus) originates in the 
leaves of the smaller branches of Juniperus virginiana. The mycelium 
of the fungus causes an abnormal growth in the leaf-tissue, which carries 
up the apex of the leaf as it developes, and pushes the branch to one side 
until the knot itself appears to be terminal. About the lst of May the 
mycelium of the fungus collects in masses a little beneath the surface, 
raising it up into little papille. Later, the surface of the knot is broken 
through at these points, and yellow cylindrical masses, composed of 
spores borne upon long hyaline and more or less gelatinous stalks, are © 
protruded, and when moist swell up, and often extend to the length of 
nearly an inch. The author then describes in detail the changes which 
take place in the leaf as the result of the attack of the fungus. The 
most striking of these is the great multiplication of cells which takes 
place, and their generally enlarged size. 


* Rev. Mycol., ix. (1887) pp. 157-9 1 pl.). 

+ Nuov. Giorn. Bot. ital., xx. (1888) pp. 193-260 (4 pls.). 

{ See this Journal, ante, p. 469. 

§ Morot’s Journ. Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 91-4 (1 pl.). 

|| Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., iv. (1888) pp. 100-4 (6 figs.). 
- Rev. Mycol., ix. (1887) pp. 177-9. 
** Ann. of Bot., i. (1888) pp. 263-8 (1 pl.). 

2 A 


632 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Protophyta: 


Cellular Envelope of the Filamentous Nostocacee.*—M. M. 
Gomont differs to a certain extent from the conclusions of Borzi t with 
regard to the nature of the envelope immediately surrounding the cell 
in the filamentous Nostacacese, which is stated by Borzi to be inseparable 
from the protoplasm, and to pass insensibly into it. According to M. 
Gomont, writers have hitherto confounded the enyelope proper of the 
cell with the mucilaginous sheath of the trichome. Taking as a favour- 
able example Scytonema myochrous, he finds that the mucilaginous 
sheath can be rapidly dissolved by chromic acid of a strength of from 
33 to 50 per cent., with the exception of a very thin external pellicle, 
the very thin perfectly transparent envelope proper of the cell being also 
left behind. This appears to possess properties intermediate between 
those of the membrane of the hyphe of fungi and those of vegetable 
cutin. It displays a remarkable power of resistance to acids; it is un- 
affected by the action for twenty-four hours of chromic acid of 33 per 
cent., or of concentrated sulphuric acid; chromic acid of 50 per cent. 
dissolves it in a few hours. It is insoluble in potash; with iodine re- 
agents it never takes a blue colour, but remains uncoloured or takes a 
light yellow tint. It takes up anilin dyes, especially fuchsin, with 
great avidity. 

Development of Mischococcus confervicola.{—Prof. A. Borzi has 
followed out the life-history of this Protophyte more fully than previous 
observers. The ordinary dendroidal form, in which each branch consists 
of two nearly spherical cells supported on a gelatinous stalk, is com- 
monly found attached to alge and other water-plants. The cells have 
thin smooth cell-walls giving the reaction of cellulose. Each has from 
two to four chromatophores without pyrenoids, and a nucleus. In 
addition to the ordinary dendroidal, Mischococcus has also a palmelloid 
form, in which it spreads itself as a thin layer over the surface of the 
substratum, dividing in two directions only; the cells being in com- 
parison twice as large or larger. ‘The cells of the palmelloid form 
finally give birth to zoospores, sometimes one, more often two or four, 
from each cell. Each zoospore has a red pigment-spot, and a single very 
delicate cilium. On germinating they again give birth to palmelloid 
colonies. The dendroidal colonies are the result of a tendency of certain 
cells in the palmelloid colonies to divide in a direction parallel to the 
substratum; or more often they are derived directly from the germina- 
tion of zoospores. The cells of the dendroidal colonies also give birth 
to zoospores, either one or two from each cell, which may be described 
as microzoospores, in contrast to the somewhat larger macrozoospores 
resulting from the palmelloid colonies; otherwise they are identical 
with them. Sig. Borzi is satisfied that, at least under certain conditions, 
these microzoospores are zoogametes, conjugation taking place between 
re the zygospores resulting from the conjugation have at first two 
cilia. 

Stichococcus bacillaris.§— Herr G. Lagerheim describes a variety of 
this are B fungicola, growing on various Polypore, and distin- 
guished from the normal form by its cells being oval instead of cylin- 


* Morot’s Journ. Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 43-8. 
+ See this Journal, 1887, p. 448. t Malpighia, ii. (1888) pp. 133-47. 
i § Flora, Ixxi. (1888) pp. 61-3. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 633 


drical. Itis of interest in reference to the question of the polymorphism 
of the Chlorophycex, exhibiting evidently a change of form resulting from 
altered vital conditions, since all intermediate stages occur between the 
typical and the varietal form. Stichococcus bacillaris assumes a similar 
form when it occurs as gonidia in the lichen-thallus of the Caliciez. 


Remarkable Flos-aque.*—Dr. G. B. De Toni records the observa- 
tion of a remarkable scum or “ flos-aque ” observed on the surface of the 
water in an aquarium in the botanic garden at Parma. It consisted of 
an enormous number of biciliated zoospores in very active motion, which 
apparently could not be derived from any Cladophora or other alga 
belonging to one of the higher groups. On germinating the zoospores 
gave birth to a pseudo-pediastroid organism apparently identical with 
Dictyospherium Ehrenbergianum. 

Composition of “ Muffe.” {—Prof. EH. Perroncito and Dr. L.Varalda 
have examined the nature of the substance known as muffe (mould) used 
largely for curative purposes in the district of Valdieri in Piedmont. 
It is found as a scum on the surface of hot springs of a temperature from 
56° to 69° C. more or less impregnated with sulphuretted hydrogen, and 
is largely cultivated on the surface of wet inclined rocks. They find it 
to consist almost entirely of Leptothrix valderia, among which are inter- 
spersed filaments of an Oscillaria and cells of a Gleocapsa. The fila- 
ments of the Leptothrix have a diameter of from 0:8-1°0 uw. 


Saccharomyces minor.{—Sig. G. Arcangeli maintains that this 
organism is the chief factor in panic fermentaticn. It differs from S. 
cerevisiz chiefly in the size of its cells, which are considerably smaller. 
He describes various nutritive media on which he was successful in 
obtaining pure cultures of this ferment:—a mixture of gelatin and 
honey, Koch’s nutrient gelatin, and agar-agar. In Koch’s gelatin and 
agar-agar, it developes chiefly on the surface of the substratum, forming 
a white scum. 

The author obtained an organism closely resembling S. minor, and 
apparently identical with it, from the fermentation in water of the aril 
of the seeds of Huryale ferox, which contain a large quantity of 
mucilage, 

Spores of the Ferments.§—M. E. Wasserzug states that in 1868 
the spores of what was known under the name of Mycoderma vini were 
observed for the first time by M. de Seynes. -Shortly afterwards Reess 
cultivated various species of the genus Saccharomyces, not ina liquid, but 
on slices of carrot, or potato, and found that the spores formed easily. 
On account of their endogenous formation, and because there were usually 
four in a cell, Reess placed the Saccharomycetes among the lower 
Ascomycetes. The author's method for studying the spores of the 
Saccharomycetes is to sow them on small pieces of filter-paper. Steriliza- 
tion having been effected, the spores begin to form in about twenty- 
four hours at a temperature of 25°. The author was able to study ten 
species obtained from various kinds of wine and beer; in each case 
purification was made with care by successive cultures on gelatin. In 
order to render the ascospores plainly visible, a weak solution of eosin 


* Wuov. Giorn. Bot. Ital., xx. (1888) pp. 295-7. 

+ Notarisia, ii. (1887) pp. 333-7. 

{ Nuovy. Giorn. Bot. Ital., xx. (1888) pp. 303-6. 
§ Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) pp. 192-7. 


634 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


may bo used; the spores then detach themselves, and are coloured deep- 
blue, the cells of the ferment being rose-coloured. 


Symbiosis of Bacteria with Gleocapsa polydermatica.*—Dr. A. 
Tomaschek replies to Kronfeld’s criticism ¢ on his previous paper on 
this subject. Although the symbiosis is not of so intimate a character 
as that which takes place in the union of an alga and a fungus or 
Schizomycete to form a lichen, it is nevertheless quite distinct from true 
parasitism. He maintains the identity of the bacterium with Bacillus 
muralis. 


Presence of a Phlogogenous matter in the Cultures of certain 
Microbes.{—M. 8. Arloing states that there exist in the nutritive media 
in which microbes have been artificially cultivated certain toxic sub- 
stances capable of reproducing more or less exactly the symptoms of the 
malady caused by the microbes. M. Pasteur found these poisons in the 
cultures of the active principle of chicken-cholera, and M. Charrin in 
those of Bacillus pyocyaneus. The properties of this phlogogenous 
substance show some interesting peculiarities. It manifests its maximum 
activity at a temperature of 80°. It still possesses a noticeable influence 
when it has been submitted to a temperature of 110° for a quarter of an 
hour. Finally, its effects do not operate with the same intensity on the 
various domestic animals on which it has been tried. 


Chromo-aromatiec Microbe.s—M. Galtier describes the properties 
of a microbe obtained from the ganglia of a young pig. 

Cultures were made on agar, gelatin, and potato, and at the end of 
twenty-four, thirty-six, or forty-eight hours, a yellowish-green colour 
was observed; this colour gradually became deeper, and was slightly 
different with the different materials used. The cultures of this 
microbe were also aromatic. The odour which was exhaled was very 
pronounced, and was an odour sui generis, strong, but rather agreeable. 


Sarcina of the Lungs.|—Herr G. Hauser records the interesting 
discovery of the endogenous formation of spores in a micrococcus. It 
occurs in a Sarcina obtained from the lungs in pneumomycosis, consist- 
ing of cocci always united in groups of 2 or 4, instead of 8, as in 
Fischer’s pneumomycosis-sarcina. It forms on gelatin patches of a 
pearly-grey colour, extending over the surface, but not liquefying the 
gelatin. Certain isolated cells contain, at a particular moment, strongly 
refringent corpuscles, at first surrounded by a membrane which 
gradually gelifies, and sets the corpuscles at liberty. In this state they 
present the properties of ordinary spores. These spores are readily 
demonstrated by heating the preparation in an aqueous solution of 
fuchsin, and decolorizing by sulphuric acid of 25 per cent.; the spores 
alone resist the decolorization ; they may then be re-stained by methylene- 
blue. They can be heated to 110° C., without destroying their power of 
germinating even after the lapse of three years. 


New Pathogenic Microphyte in Men and Animals.{—Dr. G. 
Bordoni-Uffreduzzi relates a case in which the post-mortem appearances, 


* Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr., xxviii. (1888) pp. 184-6. Cf. this Journal, 1887, p. 785. 
+ See this Journal, 1887, p. 996. 


¢ Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1365-8. § Ibid., pp. 1368-70. 


cists), Rov, Bibl meee Wochenschr., 1887, p. 545. See Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xXxv. 
5 . ev. 1D1,, p. ov. 


{ Centralbl. f. Bacteriol. u. Parasitenk., ii. (1887) pp- 33-4. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. §35 


&e., resembled those of anthrax, but were yet sufficiently different to 
warrant a careful examination. 

Cultivations from the mesentéric glands resulted in the isolation of 
a micro-organism which resembled, but was not identical with, anthrax 
bacillus. As the microphyte was found in the other organs of the body, 
and in those of inoculated animals, it was regarded as the cause of the 
disease. The animals inoculated from pure cultivations were dogs, 
rabbits, guinea-pigs, and white mice. In morphological characteristics 
it resembles Proteus to some extent. According to the various nutritive 
media, the micro-organism grows in the culture sometimes as long 
jointed or wnjointed threads, sometimes as encapsuled rodicts and 
roundish corpuscles. The name proposed by the author for his new 
microphyte is Proteus hominis. 


‘Dissemination of Bacillus by Flies.* — MM. Spillmann and 
Haushalter call attention to some observations made by them which 
show that flies may be of injurious importance in the dissemination of 
the bacillus of tuberculosis. 

They captured some flies from the vessels containing the expectora- 
tions of patients suffering from tuberculosis. These flies soon died, 
and examination showed the presence of abundant bacilli of tubercu- 
losis both in their excrement and in their abdominal cavities. Since 
the flies die and crumble to dust in odd corners, the bacilli may be readily 
liberated, and the germs may also be landed along with the excrement 
on articles of food and clothing, While it is not yet known how the 
life within the fly may affect the vitality of the bacilli, it seems at 
least advisable that the precaution should be taken of covering and 
of sterilizing the vessels containing the expectorations of tuberculosis. 


* Comptes Rendus, cv. (1887) pp. 352-3. 


636 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


MICROSCOPY. 


a, Instruments, Accessories, &c.* 


(1) Stands. 


Fig. 96. 


mc. ZEISS, JENA. 


— a = _vsg))t]s)—sassqsspssiS]tSqoS 


= = SSS 


_* This subdivision contains (1) Stands; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives; (3) Tilu- 
minating and other Apparatus; (4) Photomicrography; (5) Microscopical Optics 
and Manipulation ; (6) Miscellaneous. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 637 


Zeiss's Ila, Microscope.—Dr. C. Zeiss’s new stand IIa. (fig. 96), 
resembles his No. II. in general form and dimensions, but differs from 
it in having the fine-adjustment described in this Journal, 1887, p. 150. 
The upper part is not made to rotate about the optic axis as in No. IL, 
but there is instead a disc of vulcanite which rotates on the stage; this 
is centered by means of two screws working against springs, one of 
which is shown in the figure immediately below the right-hand clip. 
The play of the centering screws is said to be sufficient to answer the 
purpose of a mechanical stage with high powers. The stage is large 
enough for cultivation plates. The Microscope inclines and can be 
clamped in any position. 

The Abbe illuminator is provided with an Irisediaphragm. The 
optical system (1°40 N.A.) is fixed in a brass holder which fits 
into a corresponding sliding socket, so that it may be withdrawn 
without difficulty from below, and replaced by a cylinder diaphragm 
or any other appliance similarly fitted (photographic condenser, illu- 
minator for monochromatic light, rficrospectral - objective, spectral- 
polarizer, &c.). 

The height of the stage above the base of the stand is reduced as far 
as possible fag two reasons: (1) in order that the hands of the observer 
while manipulating the object may rest easily upon the stage, which is 
not the case with the stands of larger dimensions; (2) because a low 
stand is more convenient for most observers, and makes the instrument 
more portable. 


Babuchin’s Microscope.—This stand (fig. 97), is made by Dr. Zeiss, 
after the design of the Moscow histologist Prof. A. Babuchin. 

The Abbe illuminator has almost the form adopted by M. Nachet; 
the optical system, fixed in a holder, can be inserted from above into the 
carrier, which can be screwed downwards and swung out to the left. 
By these means the lenses are most easily interchanged with those of 
different aperture, or with a cylinder diaphragm, or polarizer. Below 
the condenser is a slot made to rotate about the optic axis in which the 
iris-diaphragm with rack and pinion is inserted; for oblique illumina- 
tion it can be adjusted excentrically. The illuminator is moved in the 
optic axis, not, as is generally the case, by rack and pinion, but by 
a screw fitted to the left under side of the stage, which gives a slower 
and more exact motion. When the screw has been turned until the 
illuminator has reached the lowest point, a further turn swings it out to 
the left. 

A specially large mirror is fixed to a sliding carrier by which it may 
be raised or lowered, or, when the condenser is swung to one side, fixed 
in any oblique position. The stage, which is not made to rotate or 
move, is large enough for cultivation plates. 

The upper part of the stand is attached by a hinge-joint to a short 
pillar, which slides in a tube on the base, so that it can be drawn out 
and clamped. This renders it possible to lower the stage as much as is 
required for convenient manipulation or portability, or to increase the 
height of the stage and stand if this is required for application to a 
photographic camera, or to admit a larger substage, &e. The height of 
the stand can be varied between 200 and 230 mm., and that of the stage 
from 105 to 185 mm. It has the adapter for changing objectives which 
was described in this Journal, 1887, p. 646, and the fine-adjustment 
described p. 150. 


638 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


SY MGB AM S™”U7=. 


—————— 


BaBucHIN’s Microscope. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 639 


Galileo’s Microscopes.—In the “ Museo di Fisica,” at Florence, are 
two small Microscopes made wholly of brass, which Professor Meucci 
(Curator of the Museum) informs us are considered to have been con- 
structed by Galileo (ante 1642), they having been handed down from 
the days of the “ Accademia del Cimento,” always bearing the traditional 
association of Galileo’s name, and forming part of the collection of in- 
struments belonging to that Academy at the date of its dissolution (1667). 
By the courtesy of Professor Meucci we were enabled recently to photo- 
graph the instruments, whence our figs. 98 and 99 are reproduced. 

The two Microscopes are of essentially the same design, differing 
only in the shape of the scroll tripod supports, and in the fact that one 
is provided with a cap over the eye-lens. 

As the lenses are wanting in both instruments, we are not able to 
determine whether the eye-lens was of the convex (Keplerian) or the 
concave (generally known as the Galilean) form. For focusing there 


Fic. 98. 


are two screw adjustments, one for distancing the whole optical-body 
from the object, and the other for regulating the distance of the eye-lens 
from the objective, as in the Campani Microscopes we recently ficured.* 
The absence of any kind of stage would imply that the examination of 
opaque objects was principally intended. 

Apart from the late Professor Harting’s conjecture regarding the 
possible origin of the so-called “‘ Janssen” Microscope,t and on the 
supposition that these instruments were really made by Galileo, they 
must be regarded as the earliest Compound Microscopes in existence. 


* See this Journal, 1886, p. 643, and 1887, p. 109. 
+ See this Journal, 1883, pp. 708-9. 


640 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


One of the Microscopes was exhibited at the Loan Collection of 
Scientific Instruments in London in 1876. 


Joblot’s Microscope.—In the same Museum referred to in the pre- 
ceding note we also found the Microscope shown in fig. 100, which is 


Mi 


Mt 


"iH il 
I ni 


Mii 


HV Hitt 
en il 


constructed of ivory, tortoiseshell, 
and brass. It bears no name, and 
no record of its origin is contained 
in the Museum. From the ornate 
character and general resemblance 
to a Microscope figured by Joblot * 
we think it probable that he was 
the maker. 

For the coarse-adjustment the 
socket slides on the pillar; the 
fine-adjustment is by means of a 
screw passing down the pillar to 
the stage-socket, and is actuated by 
the shaped knob on the top. 


Hensoldt’s Reading Micro- 
scopes.| — Herr M. Hensoldt has 
published an elaborate article “On 
Reading Microscopes in general, 
and on screw Microscopes, and the 
scale Microscopes of the author in 
particular.” 

The great advantage of Micro- 
scopes over verniers in reading 
divided circles and scales, consists 
in the greater magnifying power of 
the Microscope as compared with 
the lens of the vernier, as well as 
in obviating parallax, and the possi- 
ble excentricity of the latter. While 
the lens only possesses a magnify- 
ing power of 8-10 (and those of 
greater power cannot well be em- 
ployed), the Microscope can easily 
be used with a power of 40-60, 
which means a 5-7-fold increase of 
efficiency. For if the interval be- 
tween two divisions is increased 
5-7-fold by optical means, the in- 
termediate positions or subdivi- 
sions can be estimated with greater 
certainty in the same proportion. 
With screw Microscopes in which 


the subdivisions are measured by 


the turns of the screw, the hundredth or sixtieth part of such a division 
is determined with greater certainty in proportion as the magnitude of 


* «Descriptions et usages de plusieurs nouveaux Microscopes, tant simples que 
eomposez, &e., par L. Joblot, Paris, 1718, fol., pl. 14. 
+ Central-Ztg. f. Opt. u. Mech., viii. (1887) pp. 242-6 (8 figs.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 641 


the hundredth or a sixtieth of a turn can be recognized with greater 
accuracy; otherwise the reading of the drum is merely illusory. If 
the magnifying power of the Microscope is small, and the pitch of 
the screw very shallow, the hundredth parts which are read are only 
approximately true, and different results will be obtained from re- 
peated observations, because the small size of the hundredths in the 
image cannot be clearly distinguished. With stronger magnifying 
power a screw of greater pitch can be used, and the hundredth parts can 
be more clearly determined. With scale Microscopes of high power, the 
micrometer divisions are more widely separated, and their tenths or 
half-tenths can be estimated with proportionally greater accuracy. 
The latter also possess, besides great simplicity, the advantage of rapid 
reading. While, with the vernier and lens, it is necessary to search a 
length of divisions for the coincident lines; and with the screw Micro- 
scope, the distance of the cross wire from the nearest division must be 
measured by rotating and reading the screw-head; with the scale Micro- 
scope, a single glance is enough to show how many minutes, tenths, &c., 
are to be added to the nearest division. 

Considering the accuracy attainable with scale Microscopes, and the 
inconvenience attaching to screw Microscopes with their high power and 
consequent loss of light, the latter must be regarded as inferior to the 
former, unless means are devised for improving their optical character 
to the same extent. 

In the author’s opinion screw Microscopes are generally made too 
long (and too heavy), in which there is no advantage, for, (1) the instru- 
ment becomes large and inconvenient, and (2) the efficiency is not 
increased, but diminished. In Microscopes used for scientific observa- 
tions where the greatest efficiency and strongest magnifying power are 
necessary, it has long been known that the best results are obtained 
from powerful objectives combined with weak eye-pieces. Their short 
focal length necessitates close approximation to the object, involving 
increased aperture and greater intensity of light. Since, here as with 
telescopes, increase of light means increased efficiency, this is of particular 
importance in the present case where the object is opaque and cannot be 
satisfactorily illuminated. But as with the telescope, so here in greater 
degree, it is impossible to retain the same relation between focal 
length and apertures for all focal lengths. Short focal lengths involve 
much ‘greater apertures than long; both with a single objective lens 
and with a compound system. Thus the most powerful dry systems 
of 2°8 and 1:85 mm. equivalent focal lengths can have an aperture of 
116°; while with 4°3 mm. focal length, the latter falls to 74°, with 
7 mm. to 50°, with 11 mm. to 40°, with 18 mm. to 24°, and with 
27 mm. to 20°. 

Half the aperture corresponds to one-quarter of the intensity of light; 
the latter varies as the square of the former. From this it follows that 
reading Microscopes with objectives of short focal length have the 
advantage. Since they give brighter images, they can have stronger 
magnifying power, and therefore greater efficiency, while at the same 
time they are shorter and more convenient. 

To gain space for illumination, the objectives should consist of a 
single aplanatic lens. The following table gives the most convenient 
relation between aperture and focal length for such lenses. 

The aperture is slightly diminished by the fact that the object is 
never strictly at the focus as is assumed in the table. 


642 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Focal Length. Linear Aperture. Angular Aperture. 

lines. | mm. mm, degrees. 

Bi | 6'°8 3°1 26:0 

4 9°0 3°6 22°6 

5 11°3 4-1 20°6 

6 13°5 4°5 18°9 

7 15°8 4°75 17°0 

8 18-0 5-0 15°8 > 
10 22:5 5°6 14°] 

12 27°0 6°2 13-0 
15 34:0 6°6 i BG 
18 40°5 70 oo 
24 54°0 75 739 


NS 


The intensity of light, taking that of the 3-line objective as = 1, 
is for the objectives of 6, 12, 18, 24 lines focal length, 0°53, 0-25, 0-144, 
0-091 respectively. 

With screw Microscopes, objectives of less than 8-15 lines focal 
length have rarely been employed, in spite of the advantages which they 
would realize. It is advisable with the strongest objectives, and even if 
possible with the others, to use orthoscopic eye-pieces which give greater 
definition of image near the borders of the field. 

To test the relative advantages of short and long focal length in the 
objective, a comparison was made between a Microscope of the author’s 
construction, and a theodolite Microscope, with an objective of 30 mm. 
focal length, 6*7 mm. free aperture, and (as it stood 38°6 mm. from the 
scale) 10° angular aperture. The magnifying power was 40 (objective. 
3°5 and eye-piece 11°3). The total length from the scale to the end of 
the eye-piece was 20°5 em. The other Microscope had a length of 
95 mm. from the scale to the end of the eye-piece, magnifying power 
= 50 (objective 3:6, eye-piece 14), focal length of objective = 5 lines, 
angular aperture = 20°. It was found that with the smaller Microscope 
the intensity of light was three times as great as with the larger. 

There are cases in which for special reasons long Microscopes are 
desirable or necessary, as with dividing machines where the heat of the 
body is to be avoided, or where it is necessary to read from a distance, 
The angular aperture may here be increased by using an objective com- 
posed of two weaker lenses of greater diameter so as to gain light; or 
the tube may be lengthened by a terrestrial eye-piece (with erect image) 
without weakening the objective; or the light may be increased by 
setting the Microscope at an angle to the plane of the scale. This last 
contrivance, which "is so convenient with vernier lenses, can only be 
applied to Microscopes to a limited extent. The inclined position serves 
to reflect light from the silvered scale into the lens or Microscope; so 
that the divisions appear as sharply defined black lines upon a bright 
white ground. In the normal position of the Microscope, when it is 
perpendicular to the scale, the angles of incidence and reflection must 
both be 90°, i.e. the light must come vertically downwards; this is 
effected by the illuminator. If the Microscope is inclined backwards 
the field is brighter, but the divisions are not visible in their whole 
length, but only in a small part. In practice, however, a backward 
inclination of 10° may be attained; the light incident between 80° and 
90° is then reflected from the scale directly into the Microscope and 


ZOCLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 643 


gives a much brighter field, while the above-mentioned objection, which 
in no way diminishes the accuracy of the measurements, has also a 
certain advantage; for since powerful Microscopes are very sensitive in 
respect of exact focusing, the plane of the scale must be accurately 
perpendicular to the axis of the Microscope, or the image will not remain 
clear during a complete rotation; whereas with the inclined position one 
part is always in focus. ; 

Describing the special advantages of his own arrangement of the 
Microscope which has now béen largely used since 1879, the author 
says: “The great advantage is simplicity; the few divisions of the 
micrometer are easily taken in by the eye, so that no other method of 
measurement is so rapid. Further subdivisions or transverse lines are 
unnecessary and troublesome, and do not increase the accuracy. A 
portion of the scale of the instrument is separated by the Microscope 
into 100 parts; one-tenth of these are read by the direct divisions of 
the micrometer, and the tenths of the latter by estimation. The reading 
is not conducted in any other way except for special purposes. 

If, for example, a circle is divided by one-sixth of a degree, or at 
intervals of ten minutes, and the micrometer contains ten equal intervals 
which occupy exactly one division of the circle, each such interval cor- 
responds to one minute. If the latter can by estimation be subdivided 
into tenths (by practice even into half-tenths) the unit of reading is six 
(or three) seconds. Fig. 101 shows the sixth division of a degree on the 
circle near the ten divisions of the micrometer. The divisions of the 
circle are numbered from degree to degree with 0 to 9, either by 
the pantograph or with figures made as small as possible and as near as 
possible to the lines so that at least one number shall be visible in the 
Microscope whose field covers more than one degree. It is not then 
necessary to use a special index or a lens to read the angle; for the 
principal numbers at each 10 degrees may be made large and placed 
outside the silver strip where they can be easily seen with the naked 
eye. If the circle is not covered the illuminator will at once show 
whether the reading is between 10 and 20 or 30 and 40, &c., and the 
single degrees are given by the divisions in the Microscope. If the 
circle is covered it will be necessary to have, in addition to the two 
small apertures for the Microscopes, a larger one inclosing about 
15 degrees, at a point 90° from them, and having in the middle of its 
glass a black line by which the approximate angle is read off. Sup- 
posing that this line shows the reading to be between 30° and 40°, and 
that the micrometer stands as shown in the figure, the reading will be 
33° 37':3 or 33° 87' 18”. 

In the inverting Microseope the division on the circle always runs 
towards the long or zero mark of the micrometer, i.e. from left to right 
when the numbers of the horizontal circle run from right to left. The 
divisions of the micrometer are reckoned from zero point in the opposite 
direction, from right to left. With vertical circles where the numbers 
go from left to right, because the circle turns with the telescope, every- 
thing is reversed; in the right-hand Microscope alone the graduations 
are reckoned from right to left or downwards, and the micrometer 
divisions upwards; in the left-hand Microscope the graduations are 
read upwards and the micrometer downwards. For small instruments 
it is convenient to have the scale divided at intervals of 20 minutes; a 
micrometer division is then equivalent to 2 minutes; in this case it is 


644 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


not necessary to take the mean of the two Microscope readings since 
their sum will give the mean directly. A glance into the Microscopes 
is sufficient to give the mean of the readings and scarcely occupies a 
quarter of the time necessary for vernier readings. The scale gradua- 
tions, which cannot be made so fine upon metal as the micrometer 
graduations upon glass, and which are magnified three to five times by 
the objective, appear much broader than the latter. With ordinary 
instruments which are finely divided a line on the scale covers at least 


Fia, 101. 


80 seconds to one minute, and from this fact would result a source of 
error if means were not found to obviate it. Instead of using the whole 
breadth of the mark the attention is confined to the same edge of it, 
namely that which is on the right-hand side towards the long mark. It 
is still better if the graduations terminate at one end in a point, such as 
is generally produced by the graving tool; but the pointed end should 
always be that at which the divisions are level, and not towards the pro- 
longations of the whole degrees and half degrees. The tenths, &e., can 
then be very accurately estimated if the micrometer divisions project 
beyond the pointed ends (fig. 101).” : 

The divisions should be short (not more than 1/2 mm. in length), 
and as fine as possible; the exact coincidence of ten divisions in the 
micrometer with one division of the scale is secured as nearly as possible 
by preliminary calculations and then made absolute by a slight movement 
of the objective-tube. 

With powerful Microscopes it is desirable to have some simple and 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 645 


steady means of focusing; on this point the author says: “In place of 
the ordinary ring with clamp enclosing the Microscope tube, I apply 
above and below two segments /1' (fig. 102) which accurately fit the tube, 
most closely however at the edges, so that they are not quite in contact 
in the middle. The upper one, next to the eye-piece O and micrometer, 


Fie. 102. 


is only fixed to the holder H by a screw so that it can be turned slightly. 
The other, which is broader at its lower end, has a square pin, which 
passes through the holder, and is also secured by a screw; it can be 
slightly moved sideways by two milled head screws n to bring the reading 
accurately to 180°. Into the two bearings Jl’ the Microscope-tube 
T is placed and is held in position by a screw s which passes into the 
Microscope-tube; for this purpose a thick ring r, having a screw thread _ 
for s,is let into the tube. s is not to be turned so far as to fix the 
Microscope. Between T and H, and attached to the latter, is a small 
lever h turning on a screw; through this s passes and can be slightly 
raised or lowered by touching the end of the lever after slightly loosen- 
ing s, which is finally screwed up tight. In this way I obtain a 
satisfactory fine-adjustment by simple means.” 

To clean the micrometer, if necessary, the upper part of the Micro- 
scope unscrews. The connecting-piece v contains the micrometer m 
which is to be adjusted parallel to the scale. This would generally be 
done by rotating the tube in the rings which hold it, but with the above 
fe-adjustment the tube cannot turn, and it is necessary to elongate v so 
that it passes down inside T and fits accurately in the lower part of the 

1888. 7) 5 


646 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


tube and can be rotated with it. m is fixed in position by the screw a. 
The eye-piece is movable, to suit different eyes. The illuminator # is 
screwed to the holder of the objective b, and is turned towards the light 
by a small handle c. The scale should be covered with thin glass 
brought as near to it as possible in order that the illuminator may not 
be further from the scale than is necessary. 

The author claims that his method of reading has also the advantage 
that errors in the dividing are at once detected by the failure of coin- 
cidence between the micrometer divisions and those of the scale, and he 
concludes with the results of some observations with a theodolite of 
13-5 cm. diameter divided to one-third of a degree, which showed the 
mean error in an angular measurement to be + 3”, and the maximum 
error + 5”, 

Lreacu, W.—The Lantern Microscope. 
(Cf. this Journal, 1887, pp. 1019-21.) 
Trans. and Ann. Rep. Manchester Micr. Soc., 1887, pp. 52-7 (1 fig.). 


Quinn, E. P.—The Advantages and Deficiencies of the Lantern Microscope. 
Trans. and Ann. Rep. Manchester Micr. Soc., 1887, pp. 26-7. 


(2) Eye-pieces and Objectives. 

Hartnack’s new Objective.—We transcribe the following paragraph 
verbatim :*— 

“ A new objective, after calculations of Dr. Schréder, has been pro- 
duced by Professor Hartnack, in Potsdam, whose microscopic objectives 
enjoy a well-deserved reputation, and which is destined to fill out the 
place between the photographic aplanat and the microscopic system. The 
weak microscopic systems, which are ordinarily applied, if more extended 
microscopic objects, histological preparations, polished stones, and metals 
are to be photographed, have besides their proportionate light-weakness 
and their chemical focus, a very moderate expansion of the evenly 
illuminated available picture field, comprising hardly more than 6 to 8 
degrees. The small aplanats, which are used for the same purpose, 
require very strong diaphragms and give a picture field with little plane. 
The new objective, which is furnished without diaphragms, comprises an 
extremely large picture angle of almost 26°, and covers to the edge of 
the field with almost equal sharpness and without the least trace of 
chemical focus. The instrument, which I have tested, has an equivalent 
focal distance of about 50 mm., and forms a sharp object of nearly 4 sq. 
em. The light power is quite extraordinary ; for enlargements 10 to 15 
times by ordinary 15-candle gaslight the exposure was 3 to 8 seconds 
upon bromide of silver gelatin. The instruments, whose general intro- 
duction is only to be desired, can also be executed in other sizes, as for 
instance from 4 to 6 inches equivalent focal distance.” 


Penny, W. G.—Eye-pieces—Physical Aberration and Distortion. 
Engl. Mech.. XLVII. (1888) p. 215 (1 fig.). 


(8) INuminating and other Apparatus. 
Hilgendorf’s Auxanograph.t — This instrument, devised by Dr. 
F. Hilgendorf, isa micropantograph designed to produce outline sketches 
(orthogonal projections) of small objects down to less than 1 mm. on an 
increased scale of from 2 to 10. 
The four arms Wb, W V, ZY, X Y (fig. 103), are supported on long 


* Dr. H. W. Vogel in *‘ Anthony’s Photographic Bulletin,’ 1888, p, 230. 
+ Zeitsehr. f. Instrumentenk,, vii. (1887) pp. 290-1 (1 fig.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 647 


vertical axes at W, X, Z, Y, above a drawing board; at f is a rod, held 
by drawing pins, which serves as the fixed point about which the whole 
instrument turns in drawing; the paper is placed under the pencil at b ; 
the object is at d under a lens which is carried bya 
diopter in ZY, and which has a cross engraved upon Fic. 103. 
its upper surface. The pencil at b is moved by the W. x 
hand in such a way as always to keep the centre of 
the cross upon the outline of the object as it appears 
to the eye aboved. The scale of the drawing may 
be varied by sliding the rod f and the lens d along 
their bars; the points fd b are to be always in the 7 an 
same straight line. Between Vand Zareslotscor- ||, f 
responding to an amplification of 2, 5/2, 8, 4, 6, 8, 
and 10 respectively, and the lens is adjusted by 
means of a scale along ZY having its zero pointat V7 
Z. The board being set horizontal by a level, and 
the upper opening of the tube being adjustable, the line joining the two 
openings may be made vertical by a plummet, so that the line of vision 
is always perpendicular to the plane of the drawing. The lens is made 
horizontal by means of a pendulum movement about the screw which 
fixes the lens-holder to the tube. The lens may also be adjusted by 
means of a horizontal mirror placed below it, the engraved cross being 
made to coincide with its image seen in the mirror. When higher 
powers are used the object is to be raised by a support to the correct focal 
distance. When a large object is being drawn, the long axis at Y may 
be replaced by a short one ; and in this case the bar X Y may be pro- 
longed beyond Y, and fitted with a long axis at its end. 

The instrument is designed “rather with a view to practical con- 
venience than to realize with mathematical accuracy the exact repro- 
duction of an object.” 


Slide for observing Soap-bubble Films.*—A simple means for 
showing soap-films by the Microscope, may, Mr. F. T. Chapman points 


Fic. 104. 


out, consist of a thin strip of wood (3 in. by 1 in.), or other material, 
with a metal plate secured to it. The plate should have one end 


* Read before the Washington Microscopical Society. Cf. Amer. Mon. Mier 
Journ., ix, (1888) pp. 81-2 (1 fig). 
Zax 2 


648 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


bent upward from the strip at an angle of 45°, and have a square hole 
through it. The film increases in brilliancy as it grows thin. The 
light should be thrown on the film from above, so that the beam will be 
reflected up the tube of the instrument. The proper angle can readily 
be found by trial. 

The following are some directions for making suitable soap- 
bubbles :— 

(1) Shave Marseilles (Castille) soap and dry thoroughly in the sun or 
ona stove. (2) Put the dried shavings ina bottle with alcohol of exactly 
80 per cent. strength (specific gravity 0°865), sufficient to form a 
saturated solution at 60° Fahr., the solution then marking 74° on the 
centesimal alcoholometer, with a density of 0°880. The solution must 
be made cold, as warm alcohol would dissolve too much soap, and the 
solution would solidify when cool. 

(3) Make a mixture of glycerin and water, so as to mark 17:1° 
Baumé, or have a density of 1°35 at 68° Fahr. This solution can be 
made of equal parts of the most concentrated glycerin and water, and 
it is well to heat the solution in a water-bath. 

(4) To make the final solution, take 100 parts, by volume, of the 
glycerin solution (3) to 25 parts of the soap solution (2), mix and boil 
to expel alcohol. When cool, pour into a graduate and add water to 
equal 100 volumes. Then filter several times to remove oleate of lime. 
Common glycerin is apt to make the solution turbid on account of the 
presence of gypsum and lime. A funnel with a plug of cotton makes 
the best filter, as the flow can be regulated by the tightness of the cotton 
in the funnel. Soap-bubbles, not more than 4 in. in diameter. and sup- 
ported on a tripod under a bell-glass, are said to last for an hour. The 
preparation is suitable for Plateau’s experiments with thin. films, soap- 
bubbles, &e. 

Plateau’s soap-bubble solution is prepared as follows :— 

Dissolve one part of Marseilles soap in 40 parts of water (rain or 
distilled), which may be warmed. When cool, filter through very porous 
filter paper and add Price’s glycerin in the proportion of 11 parts of 
glycerin to 15 parts of the soap solution. Shake thoroughly, and allow 
the solution to stand for seven days where the temperature will not fall 
below 67° Fahr. Then cool to 37° Fahr. and filter, keeping a bottle of 
ice in the funnel. The first parts filtered should be refiltered, using 
very porous filter paper. Halbrook’s brown oil silk soap, or his 
Gallipoli soap, and Sheering and Glatz’s glycerin work very well. Long 
standing and decantation from sediment may take the place of the second 
filtration. After all the trouble, the mixture may not give very good 
results. 

An excellent soap-bubble solution may be formed by a compound of 
oleate of soda and pure glycerin. Bubbles 2 feet in diameter may be 
blown, and bubbles have been kept under glass for 48 hours. 

A good and easily prepared solution may be made by shaving 4 oz. 
of Marseilles, or better, of pure oil soap, and placing it in a quart of 
distilled or rain-water, Shake until a saturated solution is formed, 
and let it settle for a few hours. The solution should then be clear. 
If otherwise, pour off the water, and add fresh water to the same soap 
and try again. To the clear solution add about one-half the quantity of 
glycerin that is absolutely pure. The presence of the least quantity of 
acid in the glycerin is fatal to good results and therefore it is recom- 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 649 


mended that for any soap-bubble solution the ingredients be the best 
and purest obtainable, and that chemically pure glycerin be used. 


Schafer’s Hot-water Circulation Stage and Swift's Regulator.— 
Prof. H. A. Schifer’s hot stage (fig. 105), consists simply of a metal box with 
a pipe at each end; hot water entering by the lower end, and flowing 
away at the upper. 

Messrs. Swift and Son use as a regulator for maintaining an even 
temperature what is practically the same apparatus as was described in 


Fig. 105. 


READINGTON 


this Journal, 1887, p. 316, a pipe for the gas leading into a tube with 
mercury, whence it flows by another pipe to the gas-jet beneath the 
water reservoir, the milled head screw regulating the height of the mercury 
in the tube in the first instance. 


Bertrand’s Refractometer.*—In order to measure the index of refrac- 
tion of pyroxene, amphibole, &c., which is > 1:69 with this apparatus,{ 
M. E. Bertrand has made the hemispherical lens of flint glass (n = 1-962), 
and proposes as moistening fluid methylen iodide (n = 1-75), the 
refractive index of which might possibly be increased by dissolving 
other substances in it. 


* Bull. Soc. Franc. Min., x. (1887) pp. 140-1. 
+ See this Journal, 1887, p. 469. 


650 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


SEAMAN.—Exhibition of Lamp and Vertical Illuminator. 

(He said, “You may remember that some time ago I showed a vertical 
illuminator made by Mr. Chas. Fasoldtof Albany. I have here a slide of his 
rulings, which contains 19 bands, from 5000 to 120,000 to the inch, which is 
no doubt a very excellent specimen of this kind of work, similar to the cele- 
brated Nobert plates. I have no hesitation in saying that on an object of this 
kind, with an immersion-lens, the definition obtained by this illuminator is 
superior to anything I have ever seen, and that by its means the human vision 
may be pushed to its utmost limit.” 

Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., TX. (1888) p. 97. 


(4) Photomicrography. 


Leitz’s small Photomicrographic Apparatus.—This, fig. 106, is an 
adaptation of several somewhat similar forms which have been already 


Fie. 106. 


= 
a 


G""7”ZZZZ 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 651 


described. Its speciality consists in attaching the camera to a rod which 
is extensible in a socket (with a clamp screw), by which means the 
camera can be made to fit any Microscope, whatever its height. 

Plossl’s Focusing Arrangement.—Messrs. S. Pléssl apply to their 
photomicrographic camera the fine-adjustment shown in fig. 107. 


Fic. 107. 


————— = —=—==>= 


This is practically a very large form of the Jackson fine-adjustment, 
the lever which raises and depresses the movable nose-piece being actuated 
by a large rod with a “ Hooke’s joint,” the handle of which is at the end 
of the camera. 

_ It appears to us (without having practically tested the point), that 
the enormous leverage of the focusing rod must add greatly to the 
difficulty of focusing. 


Instantaneous Photomicrography.* — Sig. S. Capranica comes to 
the following conclusions as the results of his experiments on instanta- 
neous photomicrography :— 

(1) Rapid photography 1/20 of a second, or very rapid 1/200 of a 
second, can be obtained with the photographic Microscope if very high 
powers and immersion lenses be used. 

(2) By means of a special shutter and a particular arrangement, any 
number of successive negatives of the movements of an object can be 
obtained just as, macroscopically, the flight of birds, and the rapid move-= 
ments of other animals (Marey, Maybridge, &c.), have been. 

(8) By the method of successive positions, the author has succeeded 
in reproducing upon the same sheet the different planes of any prepara- 
tion, obtaining thus a photograph unique in its entirety. 

The author particularly calls the attention of microscopists to the 
results noticed in (2), as they are entirely new and susceptible of 
numerous and important applications in the study of the Infusoria and 
of all living micro-organisms. 

Kirt, T.—Ueber Mikrophotographien. (On Photomicrographs.) 
Oesterr. Monatschr. f. Therheithk., 1888, No. 6, 18 pp. 
Miuuer, N. J. C.—Atlas der Holzstructur dargestellt in Mikrophotographien. 


(Atlas of wood structure represented in photomicrographs.) 
21 pls. and 60 figs., 4to, Halle, 1888. 


* Journ. de Microgy., xii, (1888) p. 227. 


652 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Simmons, W. J.—Magnification in Photomicrographs. Sci.-Gossip, 1888, p. 162. 


Wa.ums.ey, W. H.—Photomicrography and the making of Lantern Slides. 
Anthony’s Phot. Bulletin, XTX. (1888) pp. 281-3. 


(5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. 


BLACKBURN, W.—Diffraction Spectra. 
Trans, and Ann. Rep. Manchester Mier. Soc., 1887, pp. 58-60. 
Crisp, F.—Micromillimetre. 
[Announcement of the decision of the Council and Fellows, ante, p. 503. 
Nature, XXX VIII. (1888) p. 221. 
NELSon, E. M.— 
[Nomenclature of eye-pieces and objectives—Relation of aperture to power, Xe. ; 
also letters by T. F. S., F. D’Agen, and A.S. Z.] 
Engl. Mech., XLVI. (1888) pp. 190-1, 216. 
Royston-Picort, G. W.—Microscopical Advances. XXXVII., XX XVIII. 
[Researches in high-power definition—Attenuated lines, circles and dots.] 
Engl. Mech., XLVI. (1888) pp. 293 ( 2 figs.), 447 (1 fig.). 
Ricker, A. W.—Micro-millimetre. 
[Reply to Mr. Crisp’s letter, supra.] Nature, XX XVIII. (1888) p. 244. 
SaLomons, D.—Note on Depth of Focus. 
Journ. and Trans. Phot, Soc. Gr. Britain, XII. (1888) pp. 160-5. 


(6) Miscellaneous. 


American Microscopes.*—Mr. C. F. Cox in his inaugural address 
as President of the New York Microscopical Society, said that it was 
“not long since some professed advocates of the popularization of 
science went through the form of reading us microscopists out of the 
general body of scientists, on the ground that we were not entitled to 
fellowship or encouragement because we were only ‘amateurs’ (that is 
say, lovers of science), were ‘hangers on to the regular scientific army,’ 
were ‘universal gatherers, and were ‘ undertaking to divide the sciences 
according to the tools used;’ and we were spoken of contemptuously as 
‘delighting in a formidable and extensive deal of brass stand” To 
most of these charges it was hardly necessary to put in any formal 
defence, for it was obvious that the animus of the attack upon us was 
the old-fashioned delusion that there is some kind of merit in doing 
scientific work with poor appliances. But another phase of this general 
notion has recently manifested itself in a vigorous onslaught upon 
American Microscopes, for which, with evident appropriateness, the 
vehicle selected has been the journal which three years ago promulgated 
the now celebrated bull of excommunication. According to the latest 
champion of scientific orthodoxy, who declares that he has ‘seen and 
examined a great many different stands, and the lenses of many manu- 
facturers, ‘it is undesirable to recommend a student to purchase any 
Microscope whatsoever of American manufacture, but it is desirable 
‘to always counsel him to obtain, if possible, one of the German or 
French instruments, which, as nearly as I can make out, conform to 
the common model of twenty-five or thirty years ago. The general 
objection to American stands seems to be that they furnish more 
mechanism than the particular worker who wrote the complaint happens 
to require for his particular work. He makes a more specific charge, 
however, that they have a joint in the body by means of which they may 
be tipped out of a vertical position, when the makers ought to have 


* Journ. New York Micr. Soc., iv. (1888) pp. 106-15. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 653 


known that he and his pupils never care to tip their Microscopes; and 
another specification is made of the fact that the length of the tube has 
not been determined solely with reference to the height of the ,table or 
the chair which this rather exacting critic commonly employs; at least 
this is the inference I draw from his demand that tubes should never be 
made longer than suits his convenience. 

Now, I presume you find it as difficult as I do to understand why all 
supposed faults are laid at the doors of American manufacturers; for 
surely all bad Microscopes are not American, even if all American 
Microscopes are bad. But the unreasonable and sweeping denunciation 
in which this somewhat self-opinionated iconoclast indulges is only 
another illustration of the familiar phenomenon of blotting out all the 
rest of the world by holding a comparatively small object close to one’s 
eye; for here is an acknowledged expert in histology, who is so com- 
pletely absorbed in his speciality as to be entirely oblivious to, or regard- 
less of, the instrumental needs of all other branches of microscopy. In 
common with others who have lately made public display of their 
ignorance of the vastness and variety of microscopical research, he 
would actually prescribe ‘for one that uses the Microscope for real 
work’ a single simple pattern which, as you may imagine, would be 
pretty strictly limited to the requirements of his own restricted field of 
investigation. Instruments which perhaps meet the demands of different 
classes of observers are ‘constructed with a view of entrapping in- 
experienced purchasers.’ 

Unfortunately, this sort of narrow opposition to the inevitable 
elaboration of scientific implements is not a thing which decreases with 
the general increase of knowledge. It has accompanied every step in 
the development of the Microscope and its accessories, and I suppose it 
will go right on in the future; for I can hardly imagine a time when 
some specialist will not think it praiseworthy to contemn ‘the latest 
improvements,’ and take personal pride in pointing to the results of his 
own labours accomplished by the use of only the simplest mechanical 
aids. 

Within a short time we have heard learned sermons preached upon 
the superiority of specimens prepared without the employment of 
circular cover-glasses, and, of course, without the assistance of the turn- 
table. It was admitted that they were not very attractive to the naked 
eye; but then there was ‘no nonsense’ about them, they were intended 
‘for use!’ So, too, we have witnessed a later contest over the micro- 
tome. What earnest homilies we have listened to upon the superlative 
excellence of the German method of free-hand section-cutting, and how 
positively we have been assured that all mechanical section-cutters were 
- only delusions and snares. I have to admit that some of the later 
developments of this accessory are rather formidable-looking engines 
which seem capable almost of cutting timber for commercial purposes ; 
but I notice that the gentleman who denounces all American Microscopes 
as being too complicated, is himself the inventor of one of those elaborate 
slicing machines. Yet the automatic microtome plainly has come to 
stay, so have the mechanical stage, the swinging substage, and many 
other contrivances over which we have seen battle waged. 

Shall we ever forget the terrific struggle with which the homogeneous- 
immersion lens was obliged to win its way to a footing in the micro- 
scopical world? Men of no small importance blocked the road, not 


654 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


with drawn swords, but with drawn diagrams which most certainly 
proved, if they proved anything, that an angle of more than 180° was an 
optical impossibility, and that, no matter what people might think they 
saw, they at all events could not see round a corner; for, as old 
John Trumbull wrote,— 


‘Optics sharp it needs, I ween, 
To see what is not to be seen.’ 


But now how perverse and prejudiced all that opposition seems, and 
how simple and reasonable the new system of numerical aperture is seen 
to be! 

Before our time the fight was fought over the binocular body, the 
achromatic objective, and even the compound principle itself.” 

The author then quotes from Hill’s ‘ Essays in Natural History and 
Philosophy ’ (1752), a passage in which the general superiority of the 
simple over the compound Microscope is insisted upon, and refers to an 
“amusing case of circumstantial mendacity, or of clever fiction,” quoted 
from Father Noel D’Argonne* in that curious work attributed to 
Dr. John Campbell, entitled ‘Hermippus Redivivus, or the Sage’s 
Triumph over Old Age and the Grave, in which is mentioned a 
Microscope which not only showed the atoms of Epicurus and the 
subtile matter of Des Cartes, but the secret of personal sympathy and 
antipathy which was shown to depend on the similarity or contrariety 
of the perspired vapours. A recent writert has also described “an 
original arrangement of lenses,” by which he has “hit upon the awful 
discovery of the departing soul with its astral covering!” 

These matters were introduced by the author into the subject with 
which he was dealing, because he “ cannot see anything better in under- 
rating the value of our mechanical appliances than in over-estimating 
the capabilities of our lenses.” 


Death of Mr. Webb.—We regret to have to record the death of 
Mr. Webb, the well-known engraver of the Lord’s Prayer in characters 
so minute that the whole Bible could (in the case of one slide in our 
possession) be written fifty-nine times in a square inch, In this and 
similar feats Mr. Webb was without a rival, and his name may fitly be 
linked with that of Nobert as one of the great masters of the art of 
minute engraving with a diamond on glass. 


American Postal Microscopical Club. 
[Comments on 13th Ann. Report.] The Microscope, VIII. (1888) p. 149. 
BIDWELL, W. D.—The Microscope in Medicine. 
Amer. Mon, Micr. Journ., 1X. (1888) pp. 108-9. 
Bowman, F. H.—Does Science aid Faith? II. 
[Contains illustrations drawn from the Microscope. 
Christian World Pulpit, 1888, May 30th, pp. 348-50. 
Couvreur, E.—Le Microscope et ses Applications a l'étude des Vegétaux et 
des Animaux. (The Microscope and its applications to the study of plants and 
animals.) 390 pp. and 112 figs., 8vo, Paris, 1888. 
Examinations in Microscopy. 
(“The examination in microscopy passed by the graduating class of the 
St. Louis College of Pharmacy, and published in the ‘ National Druggist,’ is 


* ‘Mélange Vhistoire et de litérature, par M. de Vigneul-Marville,’ Paris, 1700. 
+ ‘The Hidden Way across the Threshold,’ by J. C. Street, Boston. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 655 


_ a model of its kind.. We are certain of 51 Ph.G.’s who know something of 

the use of the Microscope.” | 
The Microscope, VIII. (1888) p. 156. 
Italian Microscopical Society. 

(Just formed; articles and papers are to be published in Latin, French, 
English, and German, Secretary, Sigr. J. Platania, 14, Via S. Giuseppe, 
Acireale, Sicily. ] 

Sci.-Gossip, 1888, p. 139. 
Munchausen still alive. 

[While the following is too outrageous rubbish for the pages of the Summary, 
it ought not to go quite unrecorded. “A weekly and much-read paper has 
the following bit of veracity: The Human Blood.— Professor Bronson (an 
American) states, that if a drop of human blood be subjected to examination 
by the hydrogen Microscope, and magnified some 20,000,000 of times, all the 
species of animals now existing on the earth, or that have existed during 
the different stages of creation for thousands of years past will be then 
discovered. In the blood of a healthy person all the animalcula are quiet 
and peaceable; but in the blood of a diseased person they are furious, 
raging, and preying upon each other. That man contains within himself all 
the principles of the universe; also, that, if a dead cat be thrown into a pool 
of stagnant water, and allowed to dissolve there, a drop of water taken from 
any part of the pool, will show as above, every species of animal of the cat 
kind that has ever existed on the earth, raging and destroying one another, 
the bodies of all the lower animals being thus made animalcula similar to 
themselves, and the body of man being compounded of all that is below in 
the scale of creation.’ ”’] 

Sci.-Gossip, 1888, p. 142. 

QuinN, E. P.—The use of the Microscope in the examination of Rock Sections 
by Polarized Light. 

Trans. and Ann. Rep. Manchester Micr Soc., 1887, pp. 60-1. 

Zentmayer, J., Obituary of. Queen’s Micr. Bulletin, VY. (1888) p. 9. 


8. Technique.* 
(1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes. 


Preparation of Nutritive Media.t—Dr. EH. Jacobi prepares agar, 
gelatin and Fucus as nutritive media as follows :—The test-tubes, flasks, 
&e., are first cleaned and stopped with cotton-wool, and then heated for 
24 hours in a Papin’s digester over a gas-burner. The cotton-wool must 
nowhere touch the sides of the digester. The temperature inside reaches 
to about 150°. 

(1) In making agar-agar, the ordinary agar is cut into small pieces, 
and (a) either 1} litre of cold meat infusion with 15 gr. (1 per ma 
peptone, 7:5 gr. (0°5 per cent.) NaCl, and 15-22°5 gr. (1-14 per cent. 
agar, or (b) 13 litre of water, 7:5 (0-5 per cent.) Kemmerich’s meat- 
peptone, 15 gr. (1 per cent.) peptone, and 15-22°5 gr. agar, are boiled in 
a metal saucepan over the open fire until the agar is perfectly dissolved, 
which happens in about 3/4 hour. The water lost by evaporation is re- 
placed and the solution rendered slightly alkaline by means of carbonate 
or phosphate of soda. The fluid is then poured into flasks and steamed 
until the albuminous matters have separated out; if neutralized with 
sodium phosphate. this happens in about 2 hours; if with carbonate of 
soda, the time is longer. Filtration is effected in a few minutes. A 
tube holding about 14 litre, about 70 cm. long and 6 cm. in diameter, is 


* This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro- 
cesses; (2) Preparing Objects; (3) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes; 
(4) Staining and Injecting; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservative fluids, &c. ; 
(6) Miscellaneous. 

+ Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 538-40. 


656 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


closed at its lower end by a layer of cotton-wool 5 em. thick; the fluid 
is then poured in and the upper end closed with a caoutchoue plug, in 
which is an opening for a glass tube. To the glass tube is connected a 
rubber bellows which, when worked, compresses the air inside the tube, 
so that the agar soon runs out quite clear, and is then sterilized in the 
usual manner. 

(2) For preparing gelatin, 1} litre of water, 22:5 gr. (14 per cent.) 
Kemmerich’s meat-peptone, and 45 gr. (3 per cent.) peptone, are boiled for 
some minutes in a metal pan over the open fire and then cooled down to 
50°-60° C. In this mass are dissolved 225 gr. (15 per cent.) gelatin, 
and the solution neutralized with carbonate of soda. The whole mass 
is then shaken with the white of an egg and steamed for 1/2 hour; 
the albumen and other substances are precipitated, and then filtration 
is done in the way described above. The water-clear gelatin is then 
distributed into flasks and sterilized in the usual manner. 

(3) For preparing a fucus mass, the same directions as were given 
for agar must be followed, except that 25 per cent. Fucus crispus is 
used. Before neutralization it must be strained through a cloth, as 
Fucus crispus is not so perfectly soluble as agar. 


Preparing Agar-agar.*—Dr. E. Freudenreich prepares agar, and at 
the same time shortens the process in the following manner:—1 per 
cent. of agar is added to meat infusion, and the mixture boiled on the 
open fire until the agar is quite dissolved. The solution is then neu- 
tralized and afterwards reboiled until the albuminous matters are preci- 
pitated. So much of the solution as will be required to fill a flask or 
test-tube is then poured into a funnel with paper filter and placed in a 
steam sterilizer, and the temperature raised to about 110°, and in about 
one hour the glass vessel will have received its proper quantity of clear 
agar. Of course, several flasks, &c., may be got ready at the same time. 
When complete the vessels are plugged with cotton-wool, and in this 
way one sterilization is saved. 


Milk-peptone-gelatin for cultivating Pathogenic Micro-organisms.t 
—Mdlle. M. Raskin prepares milk-peptone-gelatin by warming 1000 cem. 
of new milk to 60°-70° C., and then adding 60-70 gr. of solid gelatin. 
When the gelatin is dissolved the solution is boiled until complete 
coagulation of the casein has taken place. It is then strained through a 
linen cloth into a wide glass vessel, in order that the fat may ascend to the 
surface without difficulty, and when it has settled the fat is skimmed off. 
When freed from the fat the mixture is heated and 1 per cent. peptone 
added, and then soda to neutralization. The addition of NaCl increases 
the nutritive value of the quite clear transparent gelatin. 

The preparation of milk-peptone-agar is somewhat more complicated. 
To 1000 cem. of milk are added 50 cem. gelatin and five to seven pieces 
of agar cut up small. After standing for fourteen hours at the ordinary 
room temperature, the mixture is boiled for three hours until the casein 
is coagulated; the rest of the procedure is as in the foregoing 
preparation. 

In preparing milk-casein-gelatin and milk-casein-agar, 150 ccm. of 


* Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 797-8. 
+ Petersburger Med. Wochenschrift, 1887, pp. 20-43. Cf. Centralbl. f. Bacteriol. 
u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 568-9, 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 657 


pure 8 per cent. casein solution, quite free from fat, are mixed with 
350 ccm. of a filtered mixture of whey and 12 per cent. gelatin or 
1:75 per cent. agar. The whole mass is then heated to 60° C. and 
transferred to test-tubes. 

To prepare milk-albumen-gelatin and milk-albumen-agar the peptone 
is replaced by a saturated solution of sodium albuminate. 

With the foregoing media cultivation experiments were made with 
Bacillus mallet, B. Typh. abdom., comma bacillus, B. tussis convuls. 

The authoress states that glanders-bacillus developes luxuriantly on 
the milk-peptone media at 37°-38° C. On the second day after inocula- 
tion a thick dull-white crust forms on the agar surface. In three to four 
days the colour is amber to orange, the deeper layers being brownish- 
red. The authoress is disposed to regard these milk media as being 
very favourable to the growth of certain microbes which on others do 
not betray any special characteristics. 


Vessel for the Culture of Low Organisms.*—Herr N. W. Diakonow 
has constructed an apparatus, of which the following is a description, 
for the culture of low organisms, the special object being to prevent the 
intrusion of bacteria and other foreign bodies. 

The apparatus (fig. 108) consists of a vessel composed of two parts, 
a bulb A provided with two necks, and a burette B, connected with one 
another by a caoutchouc tube in such a 
way that the burette moves easily from side Fic. 108. 
to side. ‘To the lower end of the burette, 
which must be supplied with a glass tube 
of equal diameter with the upper portion 
of the neck of the bulb, is fused a short 
and narrow glass tube running out into a 
capillary prolongation. The upper part 
of the burette is again connected with a 
narrow glass tube by means of a caou- 
tchouc tube shut off by a stop-cock, the 
glass tube being widened at its upper end 
for the reception of a wad. The size of the 
entire apparatus may be adapted to the 
requirements of the experiments ; for fungi 
cultivated on a nutrient solution only 
10-15 ccm. in quantity, the height need 
not exceed 15-17 cm.; the bulb then 
having a capacity of about 70-80 and the 
burette of about 8-5 ccm. It is especially 
needful that the apparatus should be so 
constructed that, after the sterilizing of the 
nutrient solution, no foreign organisms can 
enter it. 

In using the apparatus, the burette and 
the solution to be introduced into it must 
first of all be sterilized. For this purpose 
the whole burette with its capillary pro- 
longation is dipped into boiling water, which is sucked up to the upper 
bulb containing the wad; this process is repeated several times. The 


* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 52-4 (1 fig.). 


658 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


burette is then immediately immersed in the hot solution, filled with it, 
and placed in connection with the bulb A; and the nutrient solution 
in A is then further sterilized by long boiling. After the sterilized 
nutrient solution has become cold, it is neutralized from the burette until 
the red colour has almost entirely disappeared ; and the germs are then 
introduced into A through the lower neck. The exchange of gases 
between the interior of the apparatus and the external air can take place 
only through this neck, which is stopped by a wad. In experiments 
where quantitative estimation is required, the burette B may be replaced 
by another, represented at the right of fig. 108, 


Pureren, M. D. v.—Ueber Bereitung fester Nahrungsgemische fiir Mikroben aus 
der Milch. (On the preparation of solid nutrient media for microbes from milk.) 
Wratsch, 1888, pp. 281-4 (Russian). 


(2) Preparing Objects. 


Preservation of Parts and Organs of Animals.*—Dr. A. Misch- 
told praises highly Giacomini’s method of preserving organs, both 
normal and pathological. The parts retain their normal size and ap- 
pearance and remain perfectly supple, so that they can be placed in any 

osition. 
: With time the volume diminishes about 1/20, but the weight is in- 
creased by 150-200 grm. in consequence of the impregnation. The 
procedure is as follows :—The organ, for example a whole brain, is first 
of all injected through an artery with a saturated filtered solution of 
chloride of zinc, and then placed in a solution of this until the brain 
has sunk down to the bottom of the vessel. 

During this time (about eight days) it is advisable to strip off the 
membranes, otherwise rusty patches appear along the course of the 
vessels. The brain is then placed in strong spirit for ten or twelve 
days, or until it has sunk to the bottom. The spirit must be changed 
two or three times. It is next placed in pure glycerin, to which 1 per 
cent. of carbolic acid is added, until it again sinks to the bottom. The 
preparation should be turned over several times, and when saturated 
with glycerin should be exposed to the air for several days upon a layer 
of cotton-wool to dry. It is finally coated over with a thin layer of 
a solution of gummi elasticum or guttapercha in benzin. For prepara- 
tions other than brains an 8 per cent. zinc chloride solution is advised, 
and for still smaller ones a solution half as strong. 


Two new Methods for preparing Nerve-cells.tj —(1) Instantaneous 
preparation.—Prof. L. v. Thanhoffer takes a small piece from the grey 
substance and presses it between two cover-glasses, so that when drawn 
apart there adheres to both a thin layer of nervous matter. The cover- 
glass is then heated in the flame of a spirit-lamp or of a gas-jet until the 
nervous layer has assumed a blackish-brown colour, and a distinct smell 
of burning is perceptible. The preparation is then mounted in xylol- 
dammar. The nerve-cells and the nuclei of the neuroglia-cells, as well 
as the blood-vessels and their nuclei, are very clearly seen in such pre- 
parations. 

(2) Double cover-glass preparation—To produce permanent and 

* Morskoi Sbornik, Supplement, 1886, pp. 207-9. Cf. Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., 


iv. (1887) pp. 375-6 
* Zeitschr. f. Wiss, Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 467-9. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 699 


stained preparations of nerve-tissue, the author squeezes a piece of grey 
substance about the size of a hemp-seed between two cover-glasses. The 
double cover is then placed for 15 days in picrocarmine, four days in 
absolute alcohol, and then for two days in oil of cloves and xylol apiece, 
and lastly fixed up with xylol dammar, which is poured over the cover- 
glasses. After the dammar varnish is dried the surface of the cover- 
glass is cleansed of the resin. 


New Method for the Microscopical Study of the Blood.*—Tho 
methods hitherto employed in preparing the blood for microscopical 
examination have aimed either at the production of fresh or of dry pre- 
parations. Preparations of the first class are not permanent, and those 
of the second class never exhibit the morphological elements intact. 
Dr. D. Biondi has worked out a method which combines the advantages, 
and is free from the defects, of previous methods. ‘I'he problem was to 
find the means of perfect fixation, preservation, imbedding, and mounting 
—in other words, a method by which the blood could be treated as a 
solid tissue. The method is equally useful in the study of other organic 
fluids, and has been successfully employed in tracing the changes that 
take place in the maturation of the spermatozoa. It may doubtless be 
used to advantage in the study of Infusoria, as suggested by Biondi. 

The point of chief interest in Biondi’s method is the use of agar as 
an imbedding material. Agar is a vegetable gelatin obtained from 
Gracilaria lichenoides and Gigartina speciosa, and has already been 
successfully employed for some time by Koch in bacteriological investi- 
gations. Among the different sorts of agar, the columnar form (Siulen- 
Agar) is considered the best. A perfectly transparent solution is 
required, in the preparation of which great care must be taken. This 
may be accomplished in the following manner:—Place two parts of 
agar in 100 parts of distilled water, leaving it to soften for twenty- 
four hours at the ordinary room temperature ; then heat to boiling on the 
sand-bath until the agar is all dissolved. The evaporation of the water 
may be checked by closing the flask with a cork provided with a long 
glass tube. Add carbonate of sodium to the point of weak alkaline re- 
action, and boil for an hour in a steam apparatus. Pour the solution 
into long slender test-tubes, and leave from 12-24 hours at a temperature 
of 50° to 60° C. The solution separates into two layers, the upper of 
which is quite clear, and this layer alone can be used for imbedding 
purposes. But clarification must be carried still farther before it is fit 
for use. The clear portion of the solution is next to be heated to about 
40°, white of egg added, the mixture shaken up several times in the 
course of ten minutes, boiled for an hour in the steam apparatus, and 
then filtered. The reaction should then be tested, and, if necessary, 
carbonate of sodium added until the solution is neutralized. Exact 
neutralization is necessary, in view of the staining fluid to be employed.] 

It is important that the mass should be kept sterile up to the moment 
of using, as otherwise a large number of micro-organisms may develope 
in it and render it worthless for the finer uses. It is advisable, there- 
fore, to keep the mass in test-tubes, limiting the quantity placed in each 
to the probable requirements of a single imbedding operation. For a 
single preparation of the blood five cmm. of the mass is sufficient. The 


* Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1887) p. 103. Cf. Amer. Natural., xxii. (1888) 
pp- 379-81. 


660 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


test-tubes should be cleansed with hydrochloric acid and then washed 
with distilled water. After receiving the agar solution, the tubes are 
closed with cotton, and then sterilized in the steam apparatus for half 
an hour daily on three successive days. 

As the preparation of the agar mass is somewhat complicated, much 
time and trouble may be saved by turning this work over to some 
apothecary. 

The best medium of fixation for the elements of blood is a 2 per cent. 
solution of osmic acid. Ifa drop of blood from the frog be examined in 
this medium under the Microscope, it will be seen that both the red and 
the white corpuscles are perfectly preserved in form and structure. The 
red corpuscles become a little paler than in the living condition, and are 
slightly browned. The corpuscles of mammalian blood are isolated and 
seen to greater advantage than in any other medium of fixation. As it 
is important that the acid should be perfectly clear and free from all 
impurities, it is well to filter before using. 

Method of Procedure.—(1) By the aid of a clean pipette, take a little 
blood from the heart of a frog, and allow two drops to fall into five ecm. 
of osmic acid (2 per cent.). Shake a little—the sooner the better—in 
order to separate the elements and scatter them through the whole body 
of the acid. After standing a while, the blood-corpuscles will be found 
at the bottom of the tube, the deeper layer being formed mainly of red 
corpuscles, which sink first by virtue of their greater specific gravity. 
Exposure, 1-24 hours. 

(2) The process of fixation completed, four to five drops of the mixture 
of blood and osmic acid are allowed to fall from a pipette into the 
melted agar, which is kept fluid at a temperature of 35°-37° C. By 
rotating the test-tube the blood-corpuscles are distributed through the 
agar, and then the whole is poured into a paper box, as in the ordinary 
paraffin method of imbedding. Within a few minutes the mass stiffens 
and may be removed from the box to 85 per cent. alcohol for hardening. 
In three to six days the mass is hard enough for sectioning, and may be 
inclosed in elder-pith and cut with the microtome. 

If finer sections are required than can be obtained in this way, the 
agar block may be imbedded in paraffin in the following manner:—The 
block is to be transferred from the 85 per cent. alcohol to bergamot 
oil (24 hours), then direct to soft paraffin kept at a tempera- 
ture of 45° C. After one to two hours, the imbedding process may 
be completed in the usual way. As the agar is saturated with paraffin, 
very fine sections may be obtained ; and these may be freed from paraffin 
with the usual solvents, and then stained. 

(83) Sections thus prepared may be safely treated with nearly all 
staining media. Methyl-green, methyl-blue, fuchsin, safranin, &c., give 
the most reliable results. The agar itself is stained only by the most 
intense anilin dyes (e.g. gentian-violet), but in such cases it loses its 
colour quickly in alcohol, or in any other decolorizing fluid. 

(4) Sections may be clarified, preparatory to mounting, in balsam or 
dammar, in clove oil, origanum oil, bergamot oil, creosote, &ce. , Xylol 
alone should not be used as it causes the sections to curl. 


Preparation and Staining of the Spinal Cord.*—Prof. L. Ranvier, 
who has been making observations on the transformation of nerves with 


* Journ. de Mierogr., xii. (1888) pp. 142-4. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 661 


Schwann’s sheath to nerves without the sheath at the point of union of 
the anterior and posterior roots with the spinal cord, examined trans- 
verse sections of the cord in the following manner :—The dorsal region 
of a calf was chosen because the direction of the roots are more 
perpendicular to the axis of the cord than in other parts. Segments 
1 to 14 cm., with the corresponding roots, were placed in a solution of 
bichromate of ammonia, renewed two or three times during the course 
of a year. Jt requires quite a year to harden cord in bichromate of 
ammonia, but the process may be hastened by using successively bichro- 
mate of ammonia and chromic acid, according to Deiter’s method. 
Sections were then made with an ordinary microtome perpendicular to 
the axis of the cord, and afterwards deeply stained with picrocarminate 
of ammonia. The sections having remained in 0:1 per cent. picro- 
carminate of ammonia are too deeply stained, and the colour must be 
removed with formic acid. This acid is of the usual strength and 
dissolves part of the carmine, leaving the sections a rose colour. 

The decolorizing action is extremely valuable, inasmuch as it is very 
slow, and acts unequally on certain elements which retain carmine more 
than others. The formula for the formic acid solution is equal parts of 
ordinary formic acid and alcohol at 36°. In twenty-four hours the 
sections are sufficiently decolorized; they are then placed in absolute 
alcohol, cleared up in oil of cloves, and mounted in balsam or dammar. 

All the nuclei of the neuroglia are admirably distinct, but the fibres 
are usually quite decolorized. The axis-cylinders are rose, and not red, 
but less decolorized than the neuroglia fibres. The neuroglia nuclei 
are able to withstand a prolonged action of the formic acid and spirit 
mixture, and their greater abundance in the grey matter than in the 
white matter of the cord is strikingly shown. The neuroglia nuclei 
may also be stained with purpurin or with Boehm’s hematoxylin, 
which, from lapse of time, has become brownish. As this stains all the 
elements, everything but the neuroglia nuclei must be decolorized by 
means of acetic acid diluted with an equal volume of water or of spirit. 
A better result can be obtained from a logwood solution made from the 
deposit from Boehm’s hematoxylin. This deposit is washed with dis- 
tilled water and dissolved in a 1 per cent. aqueous solution of alum by 
the aid of heat, and then filtered. This solution only stains the 
neuroglia, the axis-cylinders and nerve-cells remaining quite uncoloured. 


Demonstrating the Canalicular Prolongations of Bone-corpuscles.* 
—Sig. G. Chiarugi in attempting to solve the problem of the existence 
of protoplasmic prolongations of bone-cells in the primitive canaliculi, 
answers the question partly on theoretical grounds, for thereby the. 
formation of the canaliculi is explained, and partly on practical, since 
they have already been demonstrated in the tooth. The author employed 
the following method. 

Small pieces of fresh bone were decalcified in picro-nitrie acid 
diluted with two parts of distilled water. These were then transferred 
to spirit, at first dilute, but afterwards gradually concentrated. The 
sections were stained for some minutes in a one per cent. watery solution 
of eosin, and then treated with a 3-4 per thousand solution of hydrate 
of potash until the colour was no longer altered. In this way the 


* Bollet. Soc. tra i Cult. Sci. Med. Siena, 1886, Fasc. viii. and ix. Cf Zeitschr. 
f£. Wiss. Mikr., iv, (1887) p. 490. 
1888. 22 


662 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


ground substance was unstained, while the cell elements and their pro- 
longations remained of a bright red hue. This staining was fixed by 
immersing the sections for some hours in a one per cent. solution of 
alum. They were then examined, and mounted in the alum solution, 
which must be sterilized. The prolongations of adjacent cells were 
found to anastomose. 


Preparing Mammalian Ovaries.*— From his investigation on the 
ovaries of mammalia Prof. G. Paladino finds that these organs are the 
seat of a continuous movement of destruction and renovation, and further, 
that in the formation of the ovules, the regeneration of the parenchyma, 
the development of the follicles, and in the production of the corpora 
lutea, karyokinesis occurs freely. 

For hardening the ovaries the author used a 2-4 per cent. bichromate 
of potash solution, Miller’s fluid, 1/2 to 1 per cent. osmic acid, saturated 
aqueous solution of sublimate, 2 per cent. chromic acid, and also 
Flemming’s chrom-osmium aceticacid. The staining seems to have been 
effected entirely with picro-carminate of ammonia, of which two solutions 
were used, a 1 and 2 percent. The pieces were placed in these solutions 
fur a short time only, and then transferred to very dilute solution of 
picric acid. The pieces were always completely freed from the hardening 
fluids, and rendered neutral as the neutral reaction is indispensable for 
properly staining the nucleus. 


Preparing and Staining Annelida.;—M. B. Jourdan found that 90° 
alcohol and picric acid gave very bad results in examination of Annelida ; 
the tissues being crumpled and their elements unrecognizable. From 
bichromate of ammonia in 2 per cent. solution, sublimate in 5 per cent., 
or a saturated solution and Lang’s fluid, beautiful preparations were 
obtained, One per cent. solution of osmic acid was found to give excel- 
lent results for examining antenne and other delicate organs. After 
fixation in the above-mentioned fluids, the preparations were hardened 
in spirit. The objects were stained with carmine solution, principally 
with Grenacher’s alum-carmine, and were imbedded in celloidin or in 
paraffin. The sections, which were stuck on by Schallibaum’s method, 
were, for studying gland-cells, stained with hematoxylin eosin and with 
Hoffmann’s green. 


Preparing Polygordius.t—Dr. J. Fraipont hardens the entire animal 
in 1 per cent osmic acid, washes with water, stains with ammoniacal 
picrocarmine, and after treating with alcohol and turpentine oil mounts 
in balsam. 

Macerated specimens are prepared in 40 per cent. spirit for 36 to 48 
hours, or still better in chromic acid 1/10000 for 24 hours. Besides 
employing the usual methods for macerated specimens, the author found 
it also advisable to squeeze half macerated parts between cover-glass and 
slide, by which the separated parts and their relation to one another 
were recognizable. Living animals treated with 1 per cent. gold chloride 
and citric acid, and afterwards teased out, is not a very easy method, but 
sometimes gives very instructive pictures. The macerated parts can be 


* «Ulteriore ricerche sulla distruzione e rinnovamento continuo del parenchyma 
ovarico nei mammiferi: nuove contribuzioni alla morfologia e fisiologia dell’ ovaja.’ 
8vo, Naples, 1887, 230 pp. (9 pls.). Cf. Journ. de Microgr., xii. (1888) pp. 223-6. 

¢ Ann. Sci. Nat. (Zool.), ii. (1887) pp. 239-304 (5 pls.). 

{ Fauna u. Flora d. Golfes von Neapel, xiv. (1887) 125 pp. (16 pls. and 1 fig.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 663 


stained with borax-carmine, haematoxylin or ammoniacal picrocarmine, 
and mounted in glycerinor balsam. In order to kill the animals without 
contraction, so that they may be suitable for sectioning, the author re- 
commends benumbing them by pouring spirit into sea water aml then 
hardening, or to pour a hot and strong solution of sublimate over them. 
Hot sublimate, however, alters the tissues somewhat, especially the epi- 
dermis, but even by the first mentioned method the epidermis, and also 
the central nervous system, are not quite satisfactory. For hardening, 
the author used strong spirit, osmic acid, picro-sulphuric acid, chromic 
acid, cold sublimate, and then treated the animals with the foregoing 
fiuids or with acetic acid, absolute alcohol, 1 per cent. gold chloride, and 
a mixture of 1 per cent. osmic acid and of chromic acid 2/1000 For 
staining, picrocarmine and borax-carmine gave the best results. The 
former colours badly after chromic acid or sublimate, but after being 
allowed to act for 24 hours, the hue may be increased by the aid of 
borax-carmine. Hzmatoxylin and the anilins were tried on the chromic 
acid specimens. 


Zacharias’ Method of Preparing the Eggs of Ascaris megalo- 
cephala.*—Dr. O. Zacharias has discovered an acid mixture which over- 
comes the resistance of the egg membrane and fixes the egg completely 
within 25 to 80 minutes. The mixture consist of—alcohol 90 to 100 per 
cent., 80 ccm.; glacial acetic acid, 20 ccm.; osmic acid 1 per cent, 20 to 
30 drops. A little glycerin or chloroform increases the clarifying power 
of the mixture. Van Beneden employed a stronger mixture, consisting 
of absolute alcohol and acetic acid in equal parts, without the addition 
of osmic acid. 

(1) Ascaris females obtained from the living horse by means of arsenic 
pills, are placed between two sheets of cotton which have been slightly 
moistened in a 3 per cent. salt solution, then covered with a bell-glass and 
exposed one to three hours to an incubation temperature of 25° C. This 
procedure brings the polar globules to development in the younger eggs, 
and forces the cleavage in the older eggs. 

(2) After an hour’s incubation it is well to preserve a part of the 
material at disposal. The genital sacs are laid bare by a longitudinal 
slit in the body-wall opposite the sexual aperture; the vagina is then 
cut free from the body, the alimentary tract lying between the two sacs 
is carefully removed, and the ovarian portions of the sacs are cut off, 
leaving the uterine portions with their contents for preservation. The 
anterior ends of the uteri contain eggs in all stages of maturation and 
fecundation ; the posterior ends contain eggs already beginning to cleave. 
The killing and hardening process should vary considerably for these © 
different stages. 

(8) It is advisable, therefore, to cut each uterus into thirds, and to 
expose the anterior third to the action of the acid mixture only 5 to 7 
minutes, and the posterior third at least 25 minutes. After fixation the 
anterior and middle thirds are transferred to 30 per cent. alcohol, and 
after a few hours to 50 per cent. alcohol, in which they may be kept for 
along time. Eggs in process of cleavage—found in the posterior third 
—should be removed to absolute alcohol the moment they begin to show a 
light brown staining. After two or three hours they are to be trans- 
ferred to 70 per cent. alcohol for preservation. If the acid mixture be 


* Anat. Anzeig., iii, (i888) p. 24. Cf. Amer. Naturalist, xxii. (1888) pp. 277-9. 
222 


664 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


heated to about 24° C., the posterior third of the uterus will require an 
exposure of only 10 to 15 minutes. 

(4) Schneider’s acid carmine is an excellent staining agent. It is 
prepared as follows :—Glacial acetic acid is diluted with distilled water 
to about 50 per cent,, then as much pulverized carmine is added to the 
boiling acid as will dissolve. After filtering until the fluid becomes 
clear, a little rectified wood-vinegar is added (one drop A. pyrolignosum 
to 10 cem. of the carmine solution) for the purpose of strengthening the 
clarifying power of the mixture. The younger stages may be left in 
the dye 3 to 4 hours, the older stages 8 to 10. 

Beautiful views of the karyokinetic figures are thus obtained, but 
they are not permanent; after 3 or 4 hours they begin to lose in distinct- 
ness. Grenacher’s alcohol carmine gives more durable preparations. 
Eggs thus stained may be improved by treatment with methyl-green 
(2 per cent.) to which have been added a few drops of glycerin. The 
spindle-fibres of the first and second amphiasters may be most success- 
fully stained with “ Modebraun” in very dilute aqueous solution. Pre- 
parations are mounted in two-thirds glycerin. 


Boveri’s Method of Preparing the Eggs of Ascaris megalo- 
cephala.*—The following is Prof. T. Boveri’s method :— 

(1) The egg-sacs are plunged for a few seconds in boiling absolute 
alcohol which contains 1 per cent. glacial acetic acid. The eggs are 
thus killed instantly, and at the same time the egg-membrane is rendered 
penetrable to the reagents. The alcohol is allowed to cool gradually, 
and after a few hours the eggs are transferred to pure alcohol, coloured, 
and examined in glycerin or clove oil. This method shows the achro- 
matic spindles and the chromatic equatorial plates, but not a trace of 
protoplasmic asters. 

(2) The following mixture was used cold, with excellent results. A 
saturated solution of picric acid is diluted with twice its volume of 
water, and then 1 per cent. glacial acetic acid is added. The egg-sacs 
are left at least twenty-four hours in this mixture, then washed in 
70 per cent. alcohol, stained in Grenacher’s alcoholic borax-carmine 
(24 hours), transferred to 70 per cent. alcohol plus 1 per cent. hydro- 
chloric acid (24 hours), and finally placed in pure alcohol. 

For examination, glycerin is preferred to clove oil. If the egg-sacs 
are removed from alcohol to a mixture of glycerin (1 part) and absolute 
alcohol (3 parts), and then allowed to stand until the alcohol has 
evaporated, the eggs do not shrink. It will be found, however, that the 
eggs are not all equally well preserved with the cold mixture, owing 
probably to individual differences in the constitution of the membranes, 
some being more, others less permeable to the fixing reagent. 


Isolating Foraminifera.}—Herr C. C. Keller states that Foraminifera 
can be obtained from marl in a very short time and in a very clean con- 
dition in the following manner. The marl is first reduced by means of 
highly concentrated Glauber’s salts. When the pulverization has pro- 
ceeded sufficiently, the sulphate of soda is washed out and the residue 
poured into a glass vessel in which there is a little water. The vessel 
is then filled up with carbonic acid water, and then placed in some warm 
spot or 1s warmed in a water-bath, its contents being carefully stirred up 


Se Jenaisch. Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., xxi. (1887) p. 482. Cf. Amer. Naturalist, 
XXil. (1888) pp. 381-2, + Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 474-5. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 665 


from time to time with a glass rod. The carbonic acid then bubbles up 
and escapes, and at the same time numerous Foraminifera collect on the 
surface. The explanation of this is simple. Small bubbles of the gas, 
owing to the heat, are developed and become entangled in the shells of 
the Foraminifera, and the latter are raised to the surface. The 
Foraminifera may then be skimmed off with the sieve used for diatoms. 
Permanent preparations are made by placing the Foraminifera thus 
obtained in absolute alcohol in order to expel the air. They are then 
cleared up in oil of cloves or xylol, and mounted in Canada balsam. 


Preparing Sphzrozoa.*—For examining living Spherozoa, Dr. K. 
Brandt recommends the use of a polarizing apparatus and also staining 
the organisms while alive. He points out that while 0:1 per cent. 
osmic acid fixes well, its value is discounted by the great blackening it 
causes, especially of the pseudopodia. The author notes also that all 
Spherozoa are not equally susceptible to the action of the same reagent. 
(1) For Collozoum inerme, C. pelagicum, C. fuluum, Spherozoum punctatum, 
S. acuferum, and S. neapolitanum, the most advantageous is a tincture of 
iodine (1 part 70 per cent. spirit; 1 part sea water; and so much 
tincture of iodine as will impart a distinctly yellow colour to the mixture). 
The tube in which the animals are killed is very gently shaken, and 
after 15-80 minutes its contents are washed with water to remove the 
sea salt, and then the colonies are removed to spirit of 30,50, and 70 per 
cent. successively. (2) Myxosphzra czrulea, Collosphera Hualeyt, and 
Aerosphzra spinosa are well fixed in 0°5 to 1°0 per cent. chromic acid. 
After having been well washed they are transferred to 30, 50, and 
70 per cent. spirits. By the iodine tincture the jelly of the species last 
mentioned is either dissolved or completely altered in form, while those 
mentioned under number (1) with the exception of S. acuferum, lose their 
jelly by the action of chromic acid, or at least their shape is damaged. 
(3) Strong solutions of picric acid (and picro-sulphuric acid too) behave 
like weak solutions of chromic acid. The species given under (2) retain 
some connection, but in the others the jelly is dissolved. (4) Hydro- 
fluoric acid fixes the plasma well. (5) A 5 to 15 per cent. solution of 
sublimate in sea water retains the shape of C. pelagicum, S. punctatum, 
S. neapolitanum well (after acting 15-30 minutes they are well washed 
in sea water, then in sweet water; afterwards alcohols 30, 50, 70 per 
cent.). The most useful stain was found to be a watery solution of 
hematoxylin, but for Collosphera Hualeyi Grenacher’s alcohol carmine. 
Besides these were used dahlia, the other carmine solutions of Grenacher, 
and Mayer’s alcoholic cochineal solution. 


Preparation and Mounting of Ferns.{—Mr. J. D. King remarks 
that the selection of the fern is all-important. It should be of robust 
growth and free from dirt. If not fully ripe the spores will be shrunken, 
if over ripe, absent. Have ready wide-mouthed bottles, to hold about an 
ounce, and filled with a mixture of equal parts of spirit and water. In 
this place the selected pinne. 

If the pinne are to be kept for some time, add one-fourth part 
spirit, put only one kind in a bottle, avoid shaking the bottles, and 
handle the material with forceps without touching the sori. 

For bleaching, the following mixture is successful :—Dry chloride of 


* Fauna u. Flora d. Golfes v. Neapel, xiii. (1885) 276 pp. (8 pls.). 
¢ The Microscope, viii. (1888) pp. 78-81. 


666 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


lime, 2 0z.; common soda, 3 oz.; water, 2 pints. Mix the chloride of 
lime with half the water, and the soda with the other half, then mix the 
two solutions and let settle in a well-corked bottle; pour off the clear 
liquid for use, and keep in stoppered bottles. 

Pour the spirit and water from the fern and replace it with tho 
bleaching fluid, and put ina strong light if you wish to hasten the 
process. Look at them often, and when there is no longer any appear- 
ance of chlorophyll in the sporangia or in the leaf, the bleaching has 
gone far enough. It is not always safe to wait for a stout mid-vein to 
become perfectly clear, for a very little over-bleaching may injure or 
ruin the fern. In some cases, however, it may be necessary to change 
the bleaching fluid two or three times. 

When the bleaching is completed, remove to a liberal supply of soft 
water and change frequently until no trace of chlorine remains, for if the 
chlorine be not quite removed the staining will be a failure. Then 
harden the material in alcohol. 

For staining epidermal structure the author advises alum-carmine and 
methyl-green in the proportion of one drop of methyl-green to ten drops 
of alum-carmine. The time required is variable. The spores and cases 
stain green and the leaf red; sometimes the larger veins also take on the 
green. If stained too long the red will supplant the green. Transfer 
to at least two ounces of water and soak for three or more hours to 
remove the alum. 

For thick-leaved ferns, and for showing the fibro-vascular system 
and sporangia, the following procedure will be found more satisfactory : 
To forty drops of borax-carmine add one drop of methyl-green. The 
time required is longer than with alum-carmine. Then soak in water as 
before. A saturated solution of ammonia acetate used as a mordant will 
heighten the colour a trifle. 

The best medium for mounting is glycerin jelly made after Kaiser’s 
formula, with additional gelatin to give it hardness. First transfer to a 
mixture of equal parts of glycerin and alcohol. Then heat the glycerin 
jelly in a water-bath, keeping hot while using to prevent air-bubbles. 
With a glass rod place a few drops on the slide with or without a cell; 
a cell makes a better finish. Place the ferns in the glycerin jelly, add 
a few drops, and pour off to get rid of the alcohol and glycerin, replace 
what is poured off and examine with a dissecting Microscope for air- 
bubbles, which must be removed before the cover is applied. Breathe 
on the cover and apply a drop or two of hot glycerin jelly, then breathe 
on the slide and impose the cover. 

Another way is to let the glycerin jelly harden on the slide with the 
fern on it and afterwards apply some hot jelly to the surface before 
putting on the cover. Wood sections may be stained and mounted in 
the foregoing manner. 


Application of Lactic Acid to the Examination of Alge.*—Herr 
G. Lagerheim recommends the use of lactic acid for restoring the turgidity 
to dry algez. Thre acid is used in a concentrated semi-fluid form. The 
dry alga is first softened in water, and then placed in small pieces in 
a few drops of the acid on a glass slide, and heated until small bubbles 
make their appearance in the acid. The alga must be prevented from 
becoming too fluid and flowing away by heaping up with a knife. After 


* Hedwigia, xxvii. (1888) pp. 58-9. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY,-MICROSCOPY, ETC. 667 


being heated for a sufficiently long time, the cover-glass is placed on, and 
the alga, which was previously dry and shrunk, is now found to have 
swollen up to its natural form. The cell-contents are at least partially 
dissolved or clarified if the preparation has been boiled sufficiently long, 
a point of great importance, especially in the examination of desmids. 


Tempere’s Preparations of Diatoms.* —M. J. Tempére is preparing 
series of all the known genera of diatoms. Tach series will comprise 
twenty-five preparations, and each preparation will contain one to three 
species or varieties. The first series has recently appeared. 


FREEBORN, G. C.—Notices of new Methods. III., IV. 

[Sublimate as a hardening medium for the brain (Diomidoff). New methods 
of preparing nerve-cells (Thanhoffer). Neutral anilin staining fluid (Babes). 
Safranin solution with anilin oil (Babes). 

Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., YX. (1888) pp. 84, 111-2. 


LucGeEr, O.—A new Method of Preserving transparent Aquatic Insects for the 
Microscope. Proc, Entom. Soc. Washington, I. (1888) pp. 101-2. 


Manton, W. P.—Rudiments of Practical Embryology. III. 
[Preparation of the Embryo. Hardening. ] 
The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 144-5. 


PELLETAN, J.—Les Diatomees, histoire naturelle, préparation, classification et 
description des principales espéces, avec une introduction a l'étude des diatomées 
par M. J. Deby et un chapitre sur la classification des diatomées par M. Paul Petit. 
(The Diatomacesx, natural history, preparation, classification and description of 
the principal species, with an introduction on the study of the Diatomacez by 
M. J. Deby, and a chapter on classification by M. Paul Petit.) 

[Contains chapters on collecting, preparing and mounting.] 
vol. i., 350 pp., 5 pls, and 250 figs., 8vo, Paris, 1888. 


(3) Cutting, including Imbedding. 


Collodion for Imbedding in Embryology.t{—In a note appended to 
a paper on “ Collodion in the Technique of Embryology,” Prof. M. Duval 
states that celloidin has no advantage over collodion ; with thick collodion 
the same hard and resisting mass is produced, and this is always quite 
transparent, which is not the case with celloidin. 

The method given for imbedding in collodion is as follows :—When the 
piece is removed from spirit after having been hardened, it is placed for 
some short time in a mixture of alcohol and ether (1 spirit, 10 ether). It 
is then placed in a solution of pure collodion for 10 minutes to 24 hours, 
according to size, after which it is immersed in a solution of collodion 
of a syrupy or pasty consistence, according to the degree of hardness 
required for the imbedding mass. On removal the mass is exposed to 
the air for not more than a minute, and it is then plunged into alcohol 
of 36°; the vessel containing the spirit is left open. In 6 to 10 hours 
the collodion is sufficiently solidified, and transparent as glass. The 
mass is then stuck on a piece of elder-pith with collodion, and fixed 
then in any position for cutting sections, which are made with a wet 
knife. Under certain circumstances, as, for example, when it is desired 
to obtain sections of batrachian ova, which are extremely friable, it is 
necessary to smear the surface of every section with collodion, in order 
to prevent the sections breaking up or evacuating their contents. The 
collodion for this purpose is made very thin, and a few minutes after it 


* Journ, de Microgr., xii. (1888) pp. 226-7. 
+ Ibid.. pp. 197-204. 


668 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


is laid on the surface of the section is washed with spirit. In practice 
this does not involve any waste of time. These collodion sections may 
be mounted in glycerin or in balsam, in which latter case the author 
proceeds in two ways. First, when he deals with sections of the blasto- 
derm with an embryo up to the sixth day; secondly, when the embryo 
is larger and exceeds six days. 

(1) The embryos are hardened, stained, and kept in some provisional 
medium. When required for sections they are passed through 36° spirit, 
absolute alcohol, the mixture of spirit and ether, very thin collodion, 
and lastly the thick collodion. A piece of elder-pith cut straight is 
washed with ether and then immersed in the thick collodion wherein 
is the blastodermie dise. The latter is then placed on the pith in the 
desired position and then carefully withdrawn, and after being allowed 
to dry in the air for a minute or two is immersed in absolute alcohol 
for at least 24 hours. The sections are then made, with or without 
brushing the surface each time with collodion, and are swept into water, 
from which they are easily placed upon the slide in the proper order. 
The sections are then dehydrated completely, and this done, the cover- 
glass is imposed. Clarifying is then effected by running benzine under 
the cover-glass, and when this is complete the section is mounted in 
balsam dissolved in benzine. The benzine and the benzine-balsam are 
run under the cover-glass, and their entrance facilitated by drawing out 
the fluid at the opposite side with filter-paper. The benzine used is 
that known as benzine Collas. 

2) If the embryo be too large to be stained en masse, the section is 
stained on the slide ; moreover, the largeness of the embryo necessitates 
special care in the imbedding. They must be inclosed in a block of 
collodion, and the hardening of a block requires that the evaporation 
of the ether should be slow. This is effected by placing the cup in 
which the embryo lies imbedded in thick collodion in a saucer con- 
taining 36° spirit, and covering the two vessels with a bell-jar. In 
12-36 hours the consistence of the mass is examined, and if the embryo 
appear above the level, more thick collodion is added and the process 
continued until the desired consistence is attained. The mass is then 
dug out and cut into a block, which is stuck on elder-pith with collodion. 
The sections must be stained on the slide, and this is done by coating 
the sections with glycerin coloured with the staining solution (picro- 
carmine, Grenacher, alum-carmine, &e.). Owing to the glycerin, there 
is no fear that the section will dry: an aqueous solution may be used for 
staining, but in this case the slide must be placed in a moist chamber. 
In 24 hours the sections are well stained with carmine. The sections 
are mounted in balsam, but, owing to their size, the benzin and balsam 
cannot be run under the cover. The sections are first dehydrated 
with 36° alcohol, the slide is then placed on a warm brick and washed 
with absolute alcohol, then with benzin, and finally the balsam is 
dropped or brushed on, and this followed by putting on the cover-glass. 


Schwabe’s Sliding Microtome.*—Schwabe’s microtome consists of 
three separate parts; an oblong support a (fig. 109) which also serves 
for the slide-way, the piece b which carries the object, and the knife c. 

The slide-way e is grooved, and d flat; in both cases ivory pegs are 
used to prevent friction, these are shown at f, g,andh. The stability 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 463-4 (1 fig.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 669 


of the carrier is insured by its weight and by its working along the 
triangular grooved slide-way e. In the cross pieces 7 k are several holes, 


these are for the purpose of 
altering the angle of the 
knife c, which is fixed by 
means of the screws / and 
m. The angle which the 
knife makes with the slide- 
ways depends on the size 
or diameter of the prepa- 
ration, and must always be 
so selected that the edge of 
the knife can be used as far 
as possible throughout its 
extent. 

The upper part b carries 
the micrometer screw 2 
which moves the object- 
carrier o up and down. This 
screw has a turn of 1 mm., 
and as the head is divided 
into 100 parts the carrier 
can be raised 0:01 mm. 
The lower part of the 
microtome can either be 
constructed as a pan, or 
the instrument be placed in 
one, so that it can be made 
to work under fluid, and is 
therefore very useful for 
the preparation of nervous 


Fic. 109. 


tissue. In the later constructions the object-clamp is made indepen- 
dent of the micrometer screw for its coarse-adjustment. 


Fic. 110. 


ie, In 


Accessory to the Cambridge Rocking Microtome.*—Dr. H 


Zwaardemaker has in conjunction with h 


is amanuensis L. Hasselaer 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 465-6 (2 figs.). 


670 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


adapted to this microtome an adjunct which is intended to obviate the 
defect in this instrument of not being able to alter the position of the 
object in an easy way. Instead of the tube in which the object is fixed 
with paraflin, the author devised the apparatus shown in figs. 110 and 111. 
This consists of a copper tube which fits over the main piece, and carries 
two parallel semicircular rings. Along these half rings runs a steel 
block, which by means of a binding-screw can be fixed at any point 
of their circuit. The block carries the small movable cylinder which 
takes the place of the English contrivance. In use the semicircular 
rings are placed horizontally, and by combination of the movement 
along the rings with that of the cylinder about its own axis, the prepara- 
tion is moved in all directions. But on account of the construction of 
the microtome, this movement is cramped, and only a turn of 60° instead 
of 90° is possible. This amount, however, suffices for most cases. 
Inexpensive Section-smoother.*—Fig. 112 shows a device for pre- 
venting the curling of paraffin sections, which Mr. H. C. Bumpus 
considers is extremely simple and easily made. After cutting off the 
head and point of an ordinary brass pin, fix it parallel to the edge of 


Fie. 112. 


the knife by pressing its ends into two small pellets of beeswax. The 
proper elevation is easily determined by testing on the waste paraffin 
before the object is reached. The pin can only be used with the trans- 
verse knife. With the knife set obliquely, a piece of drawn wire will 
serve the same purpose. 


Preparing Long Series of Sections with Celloidin.j—The pro- 
cedure which Dr. J. Apathy advocates very warmly consists in 
dehydrating the surface of the celloidin block immediately previous to 
and during the act of sectioning and removing the section to a strip of 
paper kept moist with bergamot oil. The method in detail is as follows :— 

After fixation by any method, and hardening in spirit, the preparation 
is passed into absolute alcohol, and when imbedded in celloidin kept in 
80 per cent. alcohol. 

Staining is done in toto by the hematoxylin and chromic acid method. 
The strength of the chromic acid salt (mono- or bichromate of potash) is 
1/2 to 1 per cent., and this, frequently renewed, is allowed to act for not 
more than one hour. The hematoxylin solution is 1/2 per cent., and 
allowed to act for ten minutes to one hour, according to size of object. 
The object is then washed, and next transferred to spirit, first 70 per 
cent., then absolute. The imbedding then follows, and when cutting, in 
the right hand are held a camel’s-hair brush and a needle, while this 
hand also works the microtome. In the left is held a strip of tracing 
paper, which is at the same time flexible and stiff. The paper strip is 
about as broad as the slide and thrice as long as the cover-glass. The 


* Amer. Naturalist, xxii. (1888) p. 382 (1 fig.). 
+ MT. Zool. Station Neapel, vii. (1887) pp, 742-8. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 671 


free end of the paper strip, which is well saturated with bergamot oil, is 
allowed to dip into a capsule of this oil. The surface of the celloidin 
block is then brushed over with absolute alcohol, the section made and 
transferred to the oil, from which it is picked up by the needle and 
arranged on the paper strip. When the required number of sections 
have been duly placed in position on the strip of paper, the latter is 
drained. The paper is then laid, the section side downwards, on a 
carefully dried slide, and then dried with blotting-paper. The paper 
strip is then carefully removed by rolling it off from one end or corner. 
If a section should stick to the paper the surface may be moistened with 
the oil again, and the strip pressed down again, and if this fail it must 
be taken with a brush and placed in its proper position. When all the 
sections are properly arranged, the surface is smoothed down and all 
the oil removed with smooth blotting-paper. The balsam is then 
applied, and the cover-glass imposed. 

The sections, in order to prevent decoloration, should not be allowed 
to get too near the edge of the cover-glass. In imbedding long objects 
as certain worms, the process may be hastened by imbedding first the 
whole object and then cutting it into pieces and arranging these in their 
proper order in a second imbedding, so that one action of the knife 
produces ten to twenty sections serially arranged. 


Proper Thickness of Microscopical Sections.*— Nowadays, says the 
Editor of the ‘ Microscope, it seems to be the aim of many possessors 
of good microtomes to cut their sections as thin as possible, e.g. from 
1/2000 to 1/4000 of an inch in thickness. The origin of this fashion of 
cutting over-thin sections is difficult to determine, for such sections are, 
in the majority of cases, quite useless for any purpose of study, and the 
time involved in their preparation is as good as wasted. It is probably 
due to a desire to exhibit one’s skill without regard for utility—something 
like that which induces one to write 10,000 words on a post-card, simply 
because some one else has succeeded in writing 9000. 

Friedlander in his excellent little ‘Manual of Microscopical Tech-- 
nology,’ raises the following objections to sections of extreme thinness :— 
“‘(1) They are manipulated with difficulty and considerable time is often 
lost in spreading them on the slide. (2) The various elements contained 
in the meshes of these sections are very apt to fall out, and as these are 
generally of extreme importance, the object of the examination may be 
defeated. (38) Structures which are sparingly distributed throughout an 
organ, as, for example, animal and vegetable parasites, are naturally more 
apt to be discovered in thick sections. (4) In thick sections definite 
stereometric conceptions of the structure of an object are frequently 
obtained, inasmuch as several superimposed strata are scanned directly, 
in situ et im continuo, while with extremely thin sections plane images 
alone appear.” For sections of fresh organs he recommends a thickness 
of from 1/500-1/250 in.; for hardened preparations from 1/2500 to 
about 1/850 in. The rule should be, then, not to make sections as 
thin as possible, but rather to have them of a thickness that will include 
as many layers as can be clearly studied. 


Preparing Sections from Test-tube Cultivations.t—Prof. A. Neisser 
first warms the test-tube containing the cultivation, so that the gelatin 


* The Microscope, viii. (1888) pp. 147-8. 
+ Centratbl. f. Bacteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 506-10. 


672 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


cast slips easily out of the tube. According to its size and thickness 
it is placed for 1-4-8 days in 1 per cent. bichromate of potash solution, 
which must stand in the light so as to produce a modification of gelatin 
insoluble in water. The gelatin is then carefully washed and hardened 
in 70° and 96° spirit. When the desired consistence has been attained 
the gelatin cast is cut up longitudinally or transversely into pieces, and 
these are stuck with gum on cork, and then placed in absolute alcohol 
for twenty-four hours. Before making sections it is advisable to remove 
the external layer of gelatin, as it is too hard, and interferes with 
manipulation. Drying, staining, decolorizing, and clearing up are to 
be carried out on the cover-glass. 

For staining the author used— 

(1) Léfiler’s alkaline methylen-blue solution, but did not employ the 
1/2 per cent. acetic acid, and decolorized with the spirit. This usually 
gave good results. 

(2) Watery methyl-violet solution (b B extra, Stuttgart Fabrik, Catal. 
528) was not so useful, as although the bacteria were well stained, they 
easily lost their colour. 

(3) Gentian-violet in watery solution was a failure, as it had some 
solvent action on the gelatin. 

(4, 5) Bismarck brown and Babes’s anilin safranin stained well, but 
the decoloration of the gelatin was slow and rarely perfect. 

(6) Gram’s and Weigert’s method gave excellent results. The former 
requires oil of cloves for decolorizing, as spirit alone is insufficient. 
The decolorized sections should always be cleared up with bergamot oil. 

(7) Double staining with anilin methyl-violet, Bismarck brown, or 
anilin fuchsin-methylen blue did not produce favourable results. 

When decolorizing it is advisable to wash in water before using the 
spirit; clearing up should be performed in bergamot oil, and the 
specimen mounted in thickened balsam. 

Though this method has the advantage of allowing spore-formation 
to be observed under high powers, of showing the way in which the 
individuals are disposed, and even of disclosing impurities otherwise 
unsuspected, it is not available for micro-organisms which fluidify gelatin. 

Agar cultivations were manipulated by stripping off small lumps of 
the cultures and plunging them into agar liquefied at 40°, so that they 
became imbedded when the agar set. The agar was removed from the 
tube and hardened just as in the gelatin cultivations, but as it was not 
susceptible of being sectioned, the pieces were saturated with bergamot 
oil, then plunged into a mixture of paraflin and bergamot oil, and lastly 
left in pure paraffin for twelve to twenty-four hours in an incubator. 
When cooled very fine sections can be made, and the process is then 
reversed to rid them of the paraffin, and they are then treated like the 
gelatin sections. The staining is not so satisfactory as with the gelatin 
method, but the photographic results are very good. A mixture of agar 
and gelatin was also used by the author for certain organisms which 
require a firm medium. This method does not offer any other advan- 
tage, as the microscopical appearances are deceptive and hardening an 
impossibility. 

CAMPBELL, D, H.—Paraffin-Einbettungs-Methode fiir pflanzliche Objecte. (Paraffin 
imbedding method for vegetable objects.) 


Naturwiss. Wochenschr., II. (1888) p. 61. 
Romittr, G.—Presentazione di un Microtomo. (Exhibition of a microtome.) 


Atti Soc. Tosc. Sci. Nat. Pisa, V. (1888) pp. 250-1. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 673 


(4) Staining and Injecting. 


Double-staining of Nucleated Blood-corpuscles.*—Dr. W. M. Gray 
gives the following directions :-~-Spread a thin layer of blood on a 
clean slide, and dry; immerse the slide in a beaker of alum-carmine 
(Grenacher’s formula) for five minutes; wash in clean water, and im- 
merse in a beaker of a weak solution of sulphindigotate of soda or 
potash (the solution should be of a dark-blue colour, not black-blue as 
in a strong solution). After the slide has acquired a purplish hue, wash 
in water and dry. After drying, warm slightly and mount in balsam. 
The nuclei will be a beautiful red, and the protoplasm a greenish blue. 


Staining Nerve-endings with Gold Chloride.{|—In his new researches 
on motor nerve endings, Dr. W. Kihne gives the following as the best 
methods for manipulating gold chloride :— 

(1) Lowit’s method, sometimes to be followed by strong formic acid, 
is especially useful, as thin muscles need not be dissociated. 

(2) First, 1/2 per cent. formic acid, gold chloride 1 per cent., then 
equal parts of a mixture of glycerin and water, to which 1/4 to 1/5 
volume formic acid has been added. Specially useful for muscle of 
warm-blooded animals. 

(3) Same as (2), but without preliminary acidulation. For cold- 
blooded animals. 

(4) Golgi’s method. 1/2 per cent. arsenious acid, 1/2 per cent. 
gold chloride of potash, then 1 per cent. arsenious acid, and reduction in 
sunlight. Useful for all objects. 

(5) Modification of 4, consists of laying the strips of muscle in a 
mixture of 1/2 per cent. arsenious acid, 1/4 per cent. gold chloride of 
potassium, and 0-1 per cent. osmic acid, then 1 per cent. arsenious acid, 
and reduction in sunlight. Best suited for reptiles. 

With regard to the rest of the preparation, the author says that the 
finer dissociation should be effected at the most favourable stage of the 
hardening, therefore always in the gold solution. Secondly, many small 
- bits of muscle (ten to twenty from 1-2 mm. broad) should be placed in 
2-5 cem. of the fluid, which should be allowed to act for different lengths 
of time, then in the gold solution from four to thirty minutes; from the 
reduction fluid they are to be removed, say hour by hour, and transferred to 
unacidulated dilute glycerin. In Golgi’s method the separate portions 
were transferred to fresh arsenious acid in the dark when staining began. 
In this way various degrees in the effects can be obtained. With the 
exception of Golgi’s all the methods are usually found to overstain, and 
this has therefore to be removed. The effect of acid on nerve-endings 
is always disadvantageous; it is, therefore, a great advantage to produce 
gold preparations without previous acidulation, and the acidulation stage 
should always be shortened as much as possible. 

Preservation of preparations in dilute glycerin acidulated with formic 
acid is not very favourable for details. Golgi’s method, therefore, has a 
great advantage in not employing glycerin, but mounting in balsam 
after dehydration in absolute alcohol is perfectly suitable for showing 
the stained nerve-endings. The certainty of the results varies with 


* Queen’s Micr. Bulletin, v. (1888) p. 15. 
+ Zeitschr. f. Biol., xxiii. (1887) pp. 1-148 (pls. A-Q). 


674 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


different animals, being most favourable in Reptilia, most unfavourable 
in the osseous fishes and in the Invertebrata, 


Staining Nerve-endings with Gold Chloride.*—Dr. G. Boccardi 
recommends the following method for staining nerve-endings in muscle 
with gold. 

The muscles are treated by Ranvier’s method with lemon juice and 
gold chloride, or the mixture of gold chloride and formic acid; they are 
then washed in distilled water and the preparations laid for about 
2 hours in a 0°1 or even 0°25-0°3 per cent. solution of oxalic acid. 
A still better mixture is, acid. formic. pur. 5 cem.; acid. oxalic. 1 per 
cent. 1 cem.; aq. destil. 25 com. Then wash in water, and mount in 
glycerin. 


Weigert’s Hematoxylin Method as applied to other than Nervous 
Tissues.;—Dr. P. Schiefferdecker states that Weigert’s hematoxylin 
ferridcyanide method can be usefully employed on other tissues than 
nervous, for example it shows the nuclei of connective tissue well, but 
has little or no effect on lymph-corpuscles, hence its applicability to 
lymphatic glands for distinguishing between the framework of the gland 
and the corpuscles. It seems to have different actions on _ blood- 
corpuscles, but it is on the epithelium that its speciality is prominent, 
the sweat-glands, blood-vessels, and nerves standing out very clearly. 
Yet on the whole the method seems uncertain, and it is questionable 
how far the chemical, and how far the physical properties of the tissues 
are the important factors. 


Staining Mitoses.{—Dr. G. Bizzozero and Dr. G. Vassale found the 
following method gave the best results for fixing mitoses. 

The sections made from pieces hardened in absolute alcohol were 
placed for 5-10 minutes in Ehrlich’s fluid (gentian violet 1, aleohol 75, 
anilin oil 3, water 80), then rapidly washed in absolute alcohol, and 
then transferred to chromic acid solution 1:1000 for 30-40 seconds, 
whereupon they were replaced in absolute alechol wherein they lost part 
of their colour. To better fix the mitoses it is well to put the sections 
back again in the chromic acid solution, and afterwards in absolute 
alcohol. After 30-40 seconds they are placed in oil of cloves; this 
process may be required to be repeated like the last stage. When no 
dye is any longer given off in the cloves, the sections may be mounted in 
dammar. This method gave good results with all tissues and organs. 
In many cases, however, a still better result was attained by treating 
the sections, previously to the chromic acid, with the Gram iodine solution 
(iodine 1, potassium iodide 2, water 300). The former method was 
found better for lymphatic glands, the latter for those organs in which 
the nucleus is easily decolorized, e. g. liver, salivary gland, kidney, &c. 
The foregoing staining method is also available for preparations stained 
in Flemming’s chrom-osmium acetic acid mixture; the sections, however, 
must be well washed before they are placed in absolute alcohol. But 
whatever the hardening method, the cell-substance was uncoloured or 
slightly yellowish ; in resting nuclei the nucleoli were slightly stained 
while the mitoses were violet or almost black. 


* Lavori eseguiti nell’ Ist. fisiol. di Napoli, 1886, p. 27. 
t Anat. Anzeig., ii. (1887) pp. 680-4. 
{ Arch. f. Pathol. Anat., ex. (1887) pp. 165-244 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 675 


Staining Leucoplasts, Protein-granules, Bordered Pit Membranes, 
and Woody Tissue.*—In his treatise on the morphology and physiology 
of the vegetable cell, Dr. A. Zimmerman recommends acid fuchsin for 
staining leucoplasts and chromatophores. After the objects have been 
placed in a concentrated solution of the dye for some minutes, they are 
shaken about in a solution of picric acid in 50 per cent. alcohol for one 
minute, and then washed in 50-70 per cent. spirit. The preparations are 
mounted in balsam. For the fixation of the protein-granules a saturated 
solution of picric acid in strong spirit is recommended. When fixed and 
stained the protein-granules can be mounted at once in balsam. Ina 
mixture of hematoxylin and Bismarck brown, woody membranes are 
stained brown, the others violet. For showing the membrane of the 
bordered pits in material preserved in spirit, gentian-violet is recom- 
mended. The dye is picked up from a watery solution by this mem- 
brane, which becomes deeply stained, while others are almost colourless. 
Next to the bordered pit membrane the middle lamelle stain best. 
The sections may be examined in oil of cloves and then mounted in 
balsam. 


New Method for Staining Fibrin and Micro-organisms.{—Prof. C. 
Weigert has devised a modification of Gram’s method in which the 
alcohol and oil of cloves are replaced by anilin oil. The procedure is 
as follows:—The section (hardening in spirit) is stained with the anilin- 
gentian violet solution. ‘The staining may be done either on the slide 
or in a watch-glass. In the latter case the section must be washed with 
water or with NaCl solution to remove excess of dye before it is placed 
on the slide. The section is then mopped up with bibulous paper and 
the iodine solution dropped on; when the latter has acted sufficiently 
the section is again blotted and then covered with a drop of anilin oil, 
which must be removed several times as it quickly picks up the stain. 
The section becomes gradually transparent and the anilin oil is removed 
with xylol and then mounted in balsam. 

If a double stain be desired the additional colour must be imparted 
before the violet. In this method there is no need to remove the 
celloidin. By this procedure fungi and pneumonia cocci are more 
easily demonstrated than by Gram’s method, but its principal recom- 
mendation is the sharp stain it imparts to threads of fibrin. Bacteria 
and fungi appear quite dark, almost black, the fibrin threads a beautiful 
blue. 


New Nuclear Stain and Note on Fixation.{ —Dr. G. Platner 
describes a new pigment to which he gives the name nucleus-black. It 
is imported from Russia as a black solution, and appears to be a metal 
base in combination with an organic acid. When used in weak solution 
it is specially adapted for staining nuclei, nucleoli, and axis cylinders, 
the protoplasm, connective tissue, and nerve-sheath remaining unstained. 
If used in concentrated solution the staining is more diffused, but may 
be reduced by alkalies. Thus five or six drops of liquor ammoniz to a 
watch-glassful of water or a saturated solution of lithium carbonate 
diluted, if required, with distilled water, are convenient for limiting the 
stain to the nucleus and showing up the karyokinstic figures. 

* Sep. Repr. from ‘ Encyklopedie der Naturwissenschaften,’ Abtheilung : Hand- 
buch d. Botanik, Schenk, 1887, 223 pp. Cf. Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) 


pp. 529-80. + Fortschr. d, Med., v. (1887) p. 228. 
{ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 349-52. 


676 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


The time required for staining sections with this nuclear stain is as 
a rule only a few minutes, but if the material have been hardened in 
Flemming’s mixture 24 hours are necessary. The duration of decoloriz- 
ing must be judged by the desired effect and from the previous staining. 
The author notes that this black pigment seems to be very resisting, and 
the preparations are very suitable for photographic purposes. 

The author then proceeds to advocate the use of heat for fixing and 
preserving material, especially for certain objects such as the ova of 
Ascaris megalocephala which are impenetrable to the action of ordinary 
reagents. The thin oviduct of the animal is placed in a test-tube and 
exposed to the action of water at a temperature which need not exceed 
50° C., for Max Schulze has shown that the protoplasm is killed and 
stiffened at this degree. The test-tube must be continually shaken 
during the heating. The ova are afterwards hardened in spirit which 
must be increased in strength. Care must be taken not to overheat the 
preparation, as their form is thereby much altered. 

By this method certain details in the ova of Ascaris can be brought 
out which have hitherto escaped notice. For example, certain elements 
of the equatorial plate, hitherto described as spherical, now appear as 
short thick rods which by a distinct fissure may be seen to separate into 
two dumbbell-shaped daughter elements; an important point, as it 
shows agreement with the ordinary type of nuclear fission. 


Baumgarten’s Method of Triple-staining.*—Dr. A. Lewin says 
that excellent results are obtainable by means of Baumgarten’s triple- 
staining method, for which the procedure is as follows :— 

(1) After having washed the sections in absolute alcohol, they are 
immersed for five minutes in borax-picrocarmine; excess of stain is 
then removed with filter paper. This picrocarmine is prepared by 
adding crystals of powdered picric acid to Grenacher’s borax-carmine 
until the solution assumes a blood-red colour. 

(2) The sections are then passed twice successively into absolute 
alcohol for two minutes ; to the spirit picric acid is added until the hue 
resembles that of hock. 

(3) The sections are then soaked in a freshly prepared solution of 
Ehrlich’s gentian-violet (100 parts anilin-oil water and 11 parts alco- 
holic solution of gentian-violet) for one minute. 

(4) The sections are then immersed in Lugol’s iodine solution 
(iodine 1, iodide of potash 2, water 300) for one minute, after which 
they are washed in absolute alcohol for thirty seconds. 

5) Excess of gentian-violet is removed with acidulated spirit (HCl 3, 
absolute alcohol 97). 

(6) The preparations are then dehydrated in absolute alcohol to 
which picric acid has been added until the colour is pale yellow (about 
five minutes), Afterwards the sections are cleared up in oil of cloves 
and mounted in xylol balsam. 


Anilin-oil Safranin Solution.j—Dr. V. Babes gives the following 
modification of his anilin-oil safranin, and which he states gives very 
superior results. It colours sections almost in a moment, is available 
for all kinds of tissues, and is especially good for showing up mitoses. 
To 100 parts of water are added 2 parts of anilin oil and excess of 


* Bull. Soc. Belge de Micr., xiv. (1888) pp. 146 -7. 
+ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 470-1. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 677 


safranin powder. The mixture is then heated to 60°-80° and filtered. 
Thus made the fluid is clear and deep red, and it will keep for one or 
two months. 


Metanil-yellow.*—This is a yellow powder with sp. gr. 1-3102, 
soluble in water, 12 parts aq. destil. at 16° C. dissolving 0-031 grm. 
The watery solution is orange coloured and neutral on reaction. On 
evaporation, crystals are formed which belong to the rhombic system. 
Dr. H. Griesbach says that, for microscopical investigation it may 
be used for staining tissues, to which it imparts usually a yellow colour, 
the tone of which may vary from a bright toa dark hue. It may also 
be used as a double stain in conjunction with other dyes, such as Congo 
red, methyl-violet, acid fuchsin, so that a double or triple staining, 
according to the combination, is effected. 


Simple Method for clearing Methylen Iodide.{—Herr R. Brauns 
found quite accidentally a method for clearing methylen iodide which 
has become brown. Some brownish methylen iodide happened to 
become frozen, only a small quantity, dark brown in colour, remaining 
fluid. When the latter was poured off, and the methylen iodide melted, 
the methylen iodide was found to be of a pale yellow colour and of 
excellent quality. At 15° C. the sp. gr. = 3°330. 

As methylen iodide solidifies at 5° C., it is only necessary to expose 
it to comparatively slight cold to clarify it in the best and simplest 
manner. 


Carmine Injections.{—Trouble with carmine gelatin fluids when 
used for micro-injections, arises, says Dr. W. C. Borden, in two ways, 
either from an excess or deficiency in the amount of acid used to pre- 
cipitate the carmine. In the first case the carmine precipitates in a 
too coarsely granular form, in the second, all the ammonia not being 
neutralized, the ammoniacal solution of carmine will diffuse through the 
walls of the blood-vessels. The difficulty is obviated by determining 
beforehand the exact amount of acid which it takes to neutralize a given 
quantity of ammonia—that quantity which is to be used in the fluid made. 
To this end take a drachm of aq. ammoniz, and add gradually, with 
constant stirring, acetic acid, testing with blue litmus paper. The instant 
the paper changes to red stop adding the acid and note the amount which 
has been used. Suppose that it is 1% dr., then the proportion of acetic 
acid will be 11 to 6, and if the amount of ammonia used be 4 dr., 
then the amount of acid needed will be 74 dr. In this way the proper 
amount of acetic acid to ammonia may be found in any formula. The 
following formula is recommended as being the best of the gelatin- 
carmine warm flowing masses. 

Carmine solution :—Carmine No. 40, 4 dr.; aq. ammonie fort., 4 dr.; 
water, 6 oz. Grind the carmine in a mortar, gradually adding the water, 
then add the ammonia, and heat gently until the carmine is dissolved. 

Gelatin solution :—Gelatin, 14 oz.; water, 7% oz. Soak the gelatin 
in the water until soft, and then dissolve by heating. Take 5 oz. of the 
gelatin solution and add to it the solution of carmine. Add to the re- 
mainder of the gelatin solution sufficient acetic acid as found by previous 
trial to neutralize 4 dr. of ammonia contained in the carmine solution. 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 439-62 (4 figs.). 
+ Neues Jahrb. f. Mineral., Geol. u. Palzontol., 1888 G.) pp. 213-4. 
{ Amer, Mon. Micr. Journ., ix. (1888) pp. 39-41 (1 fig.). 


1888. oA 


678 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Heat the solution containing the carmine and that containing the acid 
to the same degree, by placing the bottles containing them in a pan of 
water kept hot on a stove or over a lamp. Add gradually with constant 
stirring the gelatin solution containing the acid to that containing the 
carmine. Filter while hot through two thicknesses of flannel. The fluid 
can be poured into the flannel shaped into a bag, when pressure on the 
sides of the bag will cause the contained fluid to pass through the cloth. 
Add four dr. of chloral hydrate and shake until dissolved. The chloral 
will preserve the mass for quite a long time, but if it is to be used within 
a day or two the chloral is not necessary. A mass made up by the 
formula given is sufficient in amount to inject a cat or rabbit. If 
needed for a single organ the ingredients can be reduced to the relative 
proportion. 

A manometer should always be used for injecting and the apparatus 
suggested by the author consists of a wide-mouthed bottle fitted with 
a manometer made from a piece of bent glass tubing fastened to an 
upright board with a scale in inches or millimetres marked on it. The 
only other articles necessary are a tin box with a shelf inside on which 
to lay the animal to be injected; a sheet of glass large enough to cover 
the box, a thermometer, a few feet of rubber and glass tubing, and a 
couple of spring clamps for closing the tubing when it is necessary to 
stop the flow. Good atomizer bulbs are also required. There is no 
difficulty in maintaining a pressure of 100 mm. while injecting. 

Before making an injection the apparatus should be tested by closing 
the exit tube and gradually raising the pressure to 100 mm., in order 
that any defects may be remedied. Before killing the animal the 
box is filled below the shelf with water at 40°C., and a lamp placed 
underneath to keep the temperature at that point. The melted injecting 
mass is then poured into the injecting bottle in order that it may attain 
the same temperature. About 12 oz. of a 3/4 per cent. salt solution 
is poured into another bottle also arranged with injection-tubes and 
placed in the box. The animal is chloroformed, and the apex of the 
heart having been snipped off, the salt solution is injected at a pressure 
of 50 mm. until it runs clear. The carmine mass is then injected, begin- 
ning with a pressure of 50 mm., and gradually increased to 100 mm. 
When the injection is finished the animal is cooled down in ice-water or 
a refrigerator, and the selected parts afterwards hardened in spirit. 

Robin’s, Lacaze-Duthiers’, and Farabeuf’s Injecting Syringes.*— 
Dr. Beale ¢ prefers the syringe to any of the contrivances described in 
this Journal, 1884, pp. 643-51, for producing pressure by the fall of a 
liquid. The ordinary syringe has, however, several inconveniences 
which it is the object of the following modified forms to remedy. 

Robin’s syringe (fig. 113), has a rack-and-pinion movement to the 
piston so as to avoid the dangerous irregularities of pressure which are 
very liable to occur, especially after prolonged work. It also has a 
second tube and tap at the side for taking up the injecting fluid. 

* Fol’s Lehrbuch der Vergl. Mikr. Anatomie, 1884, pp. 21-4 (3 figs.). 

+ “After having tried many different methods of proceeding, I find that upon 
the whole the ordinary injecting syringe is the most successful as well as the 
cheapest, the most convenient, and the most simple instrument, and it is very easily 
kept in good order. It need scarcely be said that by no mechanical means can such 
varieties of pressure be obtained as by the aid of the muscles of the fingers and 


thumb, while the pressure can be instantly modified or removed at the pleasure of 
the operator.”—‘ How to work with the Microscope,’ 1880, p. 104. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 679 


Lacaze-Duthiers’ (fig. 114), has also a rack-and-pinion arrangement 
and double tube but is designed to obviate the difficulties found to arise 
in many cases from movement of the syringe, as well as unequal pressure. 
It is attached to a heavy base, so that it will stand upright by itself, and 
a disc is placed on the top of the piston for weights, by which the piston 
ean be made to descend automatically and at any given rate. The 


Fic. 113. Fig. 114. 


syringe can be placed in a vessel of warm water when it is necessary to 
keep the injecting fluid at a given temperature. M. Robin* preferred, 
instead of the disc, a stretched indiarubber band, which passes through a 
ring at the top of the piston, the ends being fastened to the cylinder. The 
two tubes can be used for injecting two orders of vessels simultaneously. 

Farabceuf’s (fig. 115) is covered with a non-conducting material so as 


Fig. 115. 


th 
T 
il 
Thal 
fi tf 
Fil 
1] 
| 
{ 


to protect the hand from the heat when fluids are used which must be kept 
very hot. The intervals allow the contents of the glass syringe to be seen. 


* Robin’s ‘ Traité du Microscope, 1877, pp. 990-1 (1 fig.). 
3A 2 


630 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Collin’s Automatic Cannula-holder.—On the other hand, Prof. H. 
Fol * prefers a pressure arrangement, on the ground that with all forms 
of syringe the leather dries up when it has not been used for some 
time, with the result that when the syringe is wanted it is not in a 
serviceable condition. 

Whatever form of pressure-apparatus is used, it is very convenient, he 
points out, to have a cannula-holder with an automatic closing arrange- 
ment, such as that of MM. Collin shown in fig. 116. 


Fie. 116. 


The holder is hollow, and is connected with the tube from the 
pressure apparatus. Having been filled with the fluid, and some having 
been allowed to run out of the cannula, the cock is closed and the cannula 
is placed in the vessel to be injected, the holder being held in the hand 
like a pen. By pressing the lever the flow of the fluid can be regulated 
as desired. Prof. Fol says, “ Whoever has worked with such an instru- 
ment will hardly again use the old syringe, especially where difficult 
injections of invertebrate animals have to be performed.” 


(5) Mounting, including Slides, Preservative Fluids, &c. 

Half-clearing method of preparing Nerve Sections.|—Dr. Byrom 
Bramwell lays the section previously stained with carmine on a slide, 
and then pours on methylated spirit; the spirit is then mopped up, 
and a small quantity of oil of cloves poured on. While the prepara- 
tion is still cloudy the oil of cloves is drained off quickly, and having 
been replaced by Canada balsam, the cover-glass is put on. The 
results attained, although in some cases extremely good, are eminently 
uncertain on the whole, the preparations being spotty, irregularly or 
too much cleared up. 

Adaptation of Kaiser’s gelatin for arranging microscopic prepara- 
tions in rows.{—Signor A. Poli commends to the notice of botanists, 
especially for the preservation of alge, the mixture of gelatin and 
glycerin known as Kaiser’s glycerinated gelatin, as first proposed by 
Nordstedt, and recommended in Strasburger’s ‘ Botanisches Practicum.’ 
He finds it especially convenient when it is desired to arrange a number 
of minute objects in rows under the same cover-glass. A fine streak of 
the fused gelatin, which melts at 45° or even lower, is first placed on the 


* Fol’s Lehrbuch, p. 24 and pp. 25-6 (1 fig.). 
{+ Edinburgh Med. Journ., Oct. 1886. t Malpighia, ii. (1888) pp. 107-9. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 681 


slide by a very fine brush, at the spot intended to be occupied by the 
object, which is then deposited on the gelatin by a pencil, and adheres to 
it directly, and the cover-glass at once placedon. If they do not adhere 
immediately, the slide may be slightly warmed, and then allowed to cool. 

Purification of Tolu Balsam for Microscopical Purposes.*—Herr C. 
C. Keller who has already advocated the use of tolu for mounting 
diatoms, gives the following method for purifying the balsam. 1 kilo- 
gramme of crude tolu balsam is heated in a water-bath until it is com- 
pletely melted, when an equal quantity (up to 1200 grm.) of pure 
spirit of at least 95 per cent. is added. The solution is then filtered, 
and to it are added 500-600 grm. of petroleum ether in small portions. 
At first a clear solution results, the petroleum ether being taken up by 
the alcoholic balsam solution, but soon it separates into two layers. It 
is then shaken up vigorously, and allowed to stand for 24 hours. Two 
clear layers are then found, the upper yellowish one consisting principally 
of cinnamic and benzoic acids, the lower brown one being composed of 
the tolu resin plus much cinnamic and benzoic acids dissolved in alcohol 
and a little petroleum ether. The two layers are next separated by 
decantation. The following step consists in heating 4 litres of distilled 
water in a capacious vessel almost up to boiling point, and when the flame 
is put out the resinous solution is poured slowly in. As the petroleum 
ether boils at 65°-75° C. it disappears, the resin is precipitated, and 
when cold the cinnamic and benzoic acids crystallize out. The resinous 
mass is then stirred up several times with boiling water in order to get 
rid of the last traces of the acid. The resin is best dried over sulphuric 
acid or by the aid of gentle heat, and dissolved in benzol or chloroform. 
If, as may happen, when dried by heat, the balsam becomes red or 
brown-red, it should not be used. 


PTT 


Hot Plate Apparatus.t—It is uscful for microscopists to have at 
hand an apparatus capable of being heated to different temperatures in 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 471-4. 
+ Arch. de Physiol., viii. (1886) pp. 275-5 (2 figs.). 


682 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


order to melt paraffin mixtures of wax and oil for imbedding, for heating 
specimens mounted in balsam, for drying and coagulating blood, sputum, 
&e. For this purpose M. L. Malassez has devised the apparatus (fig. 117) 
which consists of a metal plate bent into the shape of a capital S. The 
whole length of the plate is 50 cm., and it is 6 cm. broad and 2-5 mm. 
thick. The apparatus takes up very little room, as it is only 12 cm. 
long, 12 cm. high, and 6 cm. broad. It may be heated from below or 


Fie. 118. 


from above ; if from below it must be supported on four legs, and the 
Bunsen burner placed underneath (fig. 117). If from above, then the 
topmost shelf must be made to project so that the burner can go under- 
neath (fig. 118). 


MacDonneELu.—{Exhibition of Slides.] 
[“« Three dozen slides (chiefly entomological, and sections of wood) mounted by 
Mr. H. Sharp in balsam in an ingenious manner, so as to obviate pressure 
and distortion of the object, by pasting a rim of paper on the slide, and thus 
leaving a space of any requisite thickness for the object. This process was 
invented by Mr. Sharp, of Adelong, and the results were excellent.”] 
Journ. and Proc. Roy. Soc. of N. 8S. Wales, X XI. (1887) p. 294. 


Minot, C. S.—The Mounting of Serial Sections. 
[Summary of existing state of knowledge on the subject. 
The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 133-8. 


(6) Miscellaneous. 


Method of calculating the rapidity of Bacterial Increase.*—Drs. 
H. Buchner, T. Longard, and G. Riedlin, who have been investigating 
the rapidity with which certain micro-organisms increase, remark that 
the following six conditions must be fulfilled in any attempt to determine 
maximum rapidity of development:—(1) The nutrient medium must be 
as favourable as possible (they used cold meat infusion: peptone 5 per 
cent., sugar 1 per cent., salt 1/2 per cent.; solution alkaline; in some 


* Centralbl. f. Bacteriol. u. Parasitenk.,, ii, (1887) pp. 1-7 (1 fig.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 683 


cases the sugar was omitted). (2) The temperature must be the most 
favourable—37° C. (3) The cultivation must be not only pure, but 
strong. (4) The number of individuals in the nutrient medium must 
be accurately determined ; this number must be small. (5) At the con- 
clusion of the experiment the number of individuals must also be calcu- 
lated. (6) The duration of the experiment must be known, and also short 
(2-5 hours). 

The actual procedure was as follows:—From a pure cultivation of 
the bacillus in the meat-peptone solution a small quantity on a platinum 
wire is transferred to 50 ccm. of a sterile 0°6 per cent. salt solution. After 
having been well shaken up, 1 ccm. is taken up with a pipette and trans- 
ferred to 50 ccm. of meat-peptone solution. With the last solution, which 
contains at most a couple of hundred individuals to the cubic centimetre, 
three plate cultivations are made with 1 ccm. each of the solution. In 
this way the bacterial contents of the solution are determined with suffi- 
cient accuracy. These quantities having been removed, the nutrient 
solution, which has previously to the inoculation been raised to 37° C., 
is kept at this temperature for 2-5 hours. At the expiration of this time 
three more (secondary) plate cultivations are inoculated with 1 ccm. each 
of the solution. This gives the number of individuals present at the 
conclusion of the experiment. 

The enumeration of the colonies was made by numbering those visible 
under the field of the Microscope and striking an average from 10-30 
such enumerations. The gelatin layer of the plate should be perfectly 
even, and not too thick. Having obtained the average number of colonies 
to the field of vision, and then having ascertained the size of the field, 
the number of colonies on the whole plate was calculated. As the size 
of the field for a given objective diminishes with 
the strength of the eye-piece, the size of the field Fic. 119. 
for each individual eye-piece should be determined 
once for all. The higher eye-pieces with the 
smaller fields are more convenient for the more 
thickly crowded plates. 

This method may be further developed by 
adapting to the diaphragm of a high eye-piece two 
pairs of crossed threads (fig. 119). The distance 
between the threads should amount to about 
1/10-1/12 of the diameter of the diaphragm. 
The small square in the middle of the field is 
convenient for enumerating very thickly sown colonies. The number of 
colonies seen within the small square is ascertained at many different 
places of the cultivation plate. Colonies which happen to lie on the 
boundary of the square are only numbered if their larger half fall within 
the square. From many enumerations an average is obtained which 
serves as a basis for calculating the contents of the colonies of the whole 
plate. In this way a plate with 5-10 millions of colonies can be 
numbered. 

_ In the eye-piece used by the authors the small square had the apparent 
size of 1:7 sq. cm., but the actual space with the objective used was 
0-0156 sq. cm., that is, the 6410th part of asq.cm. If, therefore, there 
were ten colonies to the square, in the gelatin layer of 80 sq. cm. super- 
ficies there would be a total of 5,128,800 colonies. 


684 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


The method for calculating was as follows :— 


Let a = number of primary colonies. 
b= . secondary colonies. 
n= “ generations. : 
a cells or rods after 1 generation = a x 2. 
2 generations = a X 2 x 2 


n - =ax 2". 
oo 6 2 = Be 
= PA 
a 
oe log, -— log 
log, 


The cholera vibrio was chiefly experimented on, and the results of 
seven examinations are given. In number these are too few for any 
precise knowledge ; in certain details of time they vary considerably, and 
the last experiment given was apparently the first made, and seems to 
have been thrown in to add length to a too short series. 

The following are the numbers given :— 


Experiment 1. (Feb. 1887.) Duration 3 hours. 
Primary colonies = 
Secondary ,, = 7250 
ee oy A 
-, each brood developed in 20°7 minutes. 


Experiment 2. (Feb, 1887.) Duration 3 hours. 
Primary colonies = 149 
Secondary ,, 
n 
Period of development 


Hou tl 
to) 
oo 


9-3 minutes. 


Experiment 3. (Feb. 1887.) Duration 2 hours. 
Primary colonies = 3,583 
Secondary ,, = 90,666 

n 

Period of development = 25°5 minutes. 


Experiment 4. (March 1887.) Duration 2 hours. 


l| 
> 
~] 


Primary colonies = 15,345 
Secondary ,, = 133,545 
io 


Period of development = 38'7 minutes. 


Experiment 5. (March 1887.) Duration 2 hours. 
Primary colonies = 3,550 
Secondary ,, = 27,608 
n=3 
Period of development = 40 minutes. 
Experiment 6. (April 1887.) Duration 2 hours. 


Primary colonies = 143 
Secondary ,, = 1291 
n= 3°18 


Period of development = 37'7 minutes. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 685 


Experiment 7. (June 1886.) Duration 5 hours. 
Primary colonies = 35 
Secondary ,, = 981,792 
n = 14°8 
Period of development = 20°3 minutes. 


It may be noted that either the period of development of each brood 
yaried considerably, or the method of experimentation or of calculation 
was at fault. 


Analysis of Water used for Brewing as regards Micro-organisms.* 
—The examination of drinking-water, remarks Dr. EH. C. Hansen, is 
made by means of Koch’s plate-cultivation method, by means of meat- 
peptone gelatin; and this method is also employed in zymotechnical 
laboratories. But for the analysis of water used in brewing another 
method must be adopted. The question at issue is not so much to find 
out what and how many micro-organisms exist in the water, nor what 
will-develope in gelatin with or without the addition of meat and 
peptone, but rather how the water behaves towards the wort and the 
beer, to what degree it is rich in micro-organisms which can develope 
in these media, and if among them there be any kinds capable of exerting 
a detrimental action. The analysis, in short, must be carried out under 
conditions obtaining in the brewery itself. 

The nutrient solutions, the beer and the wort, are placed in small 
flasks plugged with cotton-wool. ach flask, fifteen filled with beer and 
fifteen with wort, was inoculated with 0:02 cm. of cold tap-water. The 
water was inserted by means of a pipette, the upper end of which was 
fixed to a rubber tube, in order to prevent any germs entering from the 
air. The number of drops was regulated by means of a stopcock. It 
need hardly be remarked that the apparatus and the media were carefully 
sterilized. Also, the amount of water placed in each bulb was accurately 
measured, in order that the result could be calculated up to 1 ccm. 

For the sake of comparison, an analysis was made by Koch’s method 
from the same water, and also on another plate; but instead of meat- 
peptone gelatin; wort-gelatin (wort with about 5 per cent. gelatin) was 
used here. The cultivations were placed in a thermostat at 24°-25° C., 
and the experiment was suspended after fourteen days. None of the 
beer- or wort-flasks contained a trace of vegetation. In Koch’s gelatin 
there were 111 spots of vegetation, that is 222 for 1 ccm. water; all 
contained bacteria, but only a few fluidified the gelatin, The wort 
gelatin showed fifteen vegetations, or thirty to 1 ccm. water. Other 
experiments gave analogous results, and on the whole showed that while 
the hygienic method put the total too high, the estimates from the wort- 
gelatin cultivations were too low, and that very few of the bacteria 
present in the water had any effect on the wort, and none at all on the 
beer. Yet, when both of these fluids were much diluted, they lost their 
original power of resistance, but then of course they were neither what 
is usually understood by beer and wort. 

Some further experiments established the fact that bacteria from 
water, even though introduced in large quantity, were unable to develope 
in beer, but hyphomycetes of water occasionally did so. 

Based on these observations, the author made an analysis of the 


* Centralbl. f. Backteriol. u. Parasitenk, iii. (1888) pp. 377-9, from Zeitschr. f. d. 
Gesell. Brauwesen, 1888, No. 1. 


686 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES, ETC. 


properties of the Alt-Carlsberg water. Fifteen flasks of beer and fifteen 
flasks of wort were inoculated with one drop of water (0°04 ccm.) and 
ten flasks of each sort with 1/4 ccm. of water; they were then shaken 
up, and for fourteen days kept at a temperature of 24°-25°C. The 
result was that 1 ccm. water contained 1*3 wort-bacteria and 1-3 moulds, 
or 2°6 vegetations altogether. They were all in the wort; the beer was 
quite unaffected. 


Brown, F. W.—A Course in Animal Histology. II. (concluded.)—Practical Work. 
The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 145-7. 
DetMER.—Das Pflanzenphysiologie Praktikum. (Practical Vegetable Physiology.) 
352 pp., 8vo, Jena, 1888. 
Dusier, H.—Manuel pratique de Microbiologie comprenant les Fermentations, la 
Physiologie, la Technique histologique, la culture des Bactéries et l’etude des 
maladies d’origine bacterienne. (Practical Manual of Microbiology, comprising 
Fermentations, Physiology, Histological Technique, tlie culture of Bacteria and 
the study of the diseases of bacterial origin.) 
600 pp., 162 figs. and 8 pls., 12mo, Paris, 1888. 
Ea@ex, J.—The value of microscopical examination of Phthisical Sputum as a means 
of giving a correct Prognosis. Queen’s Micr, Bulletin, V. (1888) p. 16. 
Hessez, W.—Zur quantitativen Bestimmung der Keime in Flissigkeiten. (On the 
quantitative determination of germs in fluids.) 
Zeitschr. f. Hygeine, TV. (1888) pp. 22-4. 
His, W.—Srrasser, H.—Ueber die Methoden der plastischen Reconstruction 
und iiber deren Bedeutung fiir Anatomie und Entwicklungsgeschichte. (On 
the methods of Plastic Reconstruction and their importance for Anatomy and 
Embryology.) 
Anatom. Anzeiger, II. (1887), pp. 382-92, 392-4. 
KASTSCHENKO, N.—Eine kurze Notiz in Bezug auf meine Methode. (A short note 
in reference to my method.) Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., TV. (1887) pp. 353-6. 
Mayer, P.—Aus der Microtechnik. (Microtechnique.) 
Monatschr. f. Anat., 1887, 10 pp. and figs. 
Mayer, S.—Histologisches Taschenbuch. (Histological Pocket-book.) 
9 Hefte and 158 figs., 8vo, Prag, 1887. 
M‘Cassry, G. H.—Microscopy and Histology for Office Students. 
Arch. of Dent., 1887, May. 
Ne son, S. N.—Methods of examination of Bacteria for laboratory purposes. 
Journ, Amer. Med, Assoc., 1888, pp. 381-6. 
Oszorn, H. L.—Studies for Beginners. II. 
Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., 1X. (1888) pp. 85-6, 
ParkKER, W. N.—On the objects of the Biological and Microscopical Section of the 
Cardiff Naturalists’ Society. 
Rep. and Trans. Cardiff Naturalists’ Soc., XIX. (1887) pp. 107-10. 
PEAL, C. N.—Microscopy for Beginners. 
[Report of Lecture.] Ann. Rep. Ealing Micr. and Nat. Hist. Soc. for 1887-8, 4 pp. 
Ranvier, L.—Traite technique d’Histologie. (Technical Treatise on Histology.) 
Fase. VII. (and last), pp. 977-1109, figs. 325-79, 8vo, Paris, 1888. 
Sanvperson, B., Foster, M., and BrunTron.—Manuel du Laboratoire de 
Physiologie. (Manual of the Physiological Laboratory.) Transl. ty G. Moquin- 
Tandon. ii. and 620 pp., 184 figs., 8vo, Paris, 1888. 
Sr6ur, P.—Lehrbuch der Histologie und der mikroskopischen Anatomie des 
Menschen mit Einschluss der mikroskopischen Technik. (Handbook of Histo- 
logy and Human Microscopical Anatomy, including Microscopical Technique.) 
2nd ed., 209 figs., 8vo, Jena, 1888. 
TirMANN, F.—Illustrirter Leitfaden fiir die praktische mikroskospische Unter- 
suchung des Schweinefleisches auf Trichinen. (Illustrated guide to the practical 
microscopical investigation of hog’s flesh for Trichinz.) 
3rd ed., 8vo, Breslau, 1887, viii. and 139 pp., 29 figs. 
Zune, A.—Cours de Microscopie médicale et pharmaceutique. (Course of medical 
and pharmaceutical microscopy.) Contd. 
Moniteur du Praticien, III. (1887) pp. 190, 215, and 249. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 


Maetine or 137TH Junz, 1888, at Kine’s Cottner, Stranp, W.C., 
W. T. Surrotz, Hse., Viczr-Presipent, IN THE CHAIR. 


The Minutes of the meeting of 9th May last were read and 
confirmed, and were signed by the Chairman. 


The List of Donations (exclusive of exchanges and reprints) received 
since the last meeting was submitted, and the thanks of the Society given 
to the donors. 


From 
Cutter, E., Clinical Morphologies. xviii. and 81 pp. ee 
New York, 1888) ee The Author. 
Slides (12) of Foraminifera from the ‘London. Clay, Wimbledon .. Mr. W. Godden. 
Slides (9) and 21 drawings of Insect i eae omar deGy. ies Mr. F. Enock. 
Diatomaceous Earth from Oamaru, N. Z. .. ws wee on Ur W. G. Watson: 


Mr. Crisp said that a letter had been received from the President 
expressing his great regret and disappointment at being unable again to 
be present, but his visit to London last time had been rather too soon, 
and he had been thrown back again in consequence. The President had 
in fact offered to resign, but of course they could not entertain that 
suggestion, especially as there would not be another meeting until 
October, by which time they hoped that Dr. Hudson would be completely 
recovered. 


Mr. A. W. Bennett said it would probably interest the Society to 
know that an exceedingly rare Alga had lately been found in this 
country at Kew, where it was discovered in considerable quantity. 
This was especially interesting because, although mentioned by Dr. M. 
C. Cooke as a British species it had, so far as he was aware, never been 
found in England before. This species, Spheroplea annulina, was well 
marked and exceedingly interesting in several particulars. He thought 
this must be regarded as the most interesting discovery of the kind 
which had been made in this country for many years. 


Mr. J. Deby exhibited slides, mounted at his request by Mr. F. 
Enock, of a curious and interesting Dipterous insect collected by himself 
at Biarritz during the latter days of April last. This small fly does not 
possess the pelagic habits of Halobates, so well figured and described by 
Mr. Buchanan White, but is strictly a littoral marine form, whose larva 
lives among the green alge, which along that iron-bound coast cover all 
the rocks between tide-marks. The adult form is found swarming on 
the wet sea-weed as the tide recedes, and seems to enjoy the sunshine. 
Its movements are remarkably swift, and its life must be short as the 
waves of the Bay of Biscay break in heavy surf upon these rocks at high 
tide. A peculiarity of this dipteron is that the male is possessed of only 
rudimentary and nervureless wings, while those of the female are nearly 
obsolete, so as to make this last resemble a dark-coloured overgrown 
louse, when observed superficially. 


688 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 


The structure of the insect’s foot is very remarkable and beautiful as 
seen under the Microscope, being furnished with a singular comb-like 
branching apparatus facing the two ordinary claws. The habits of the 
insect are also peculiar, as the males, which are furnished with a power- 
ful pair of anal forceps, are in the habit of using these for the purpose 
of seizing the females by the back of the neck and dragging them along, 
seemingly much against their will, while stopping ever and anon to 
allow their spouses to oviposit among the weeds or in minute crevices in 
the bare rock. Not having had time to wade through the bibliography 
of this tribe of insects he deferred describing it until its novelty had 
been fully ascertained. It evidently belongs to the division Nemocera- 
Tipularia, having six joints to the antenne. Its details can only be 
studied with advantage under the Microscope, as its total length does 
not exceed 1/4 in. Mr. C. Waterhouse of the British Museum stated 
that the insect did not exist in the collection, but that it is very like the 
Halirytus of the Rey. A. Eaton, found in exactly similar conditions at 
Kerguelen Island. The European insect is in consequence most 
probably generically and specifically new to science. 

Mr. Deby also exhibited a series of sections of the Myrmecophilous 
plants, Myrmecodia tuberosa and Hydnophytum formicarium, from Java, 
brought back in spirits by himself from Buitenzorg, through the kindness 
of Dr. Treub who gave him the living plants. The stained sections, of 
unusually large size, were beautifully prepared by Mr. A. Cole. 
Natural size drawings of the plants and of the sections of their tubers 
executed by the late Mr. Draper (being the last performances of this 
artist before his death) were also shown. 

These sections seem to demonstrate successfully that the cork lining 
of the cavities is always quite continuous, and that lenticelle, or some 
similar ‘structures, exist abundantly within them. This, Mr. Deby 
thought, demonstrates that the ants have had really little or nothing 
whatever to do with the formation of these curious meandering excava- 
tions in which they live. Thus Mr. Deby considered that Dr. Treub in 
his original communication published in the ‘Annals of the Botanical 
Garden of Buitenzorg, was nearer the truth in this matter than were 
MM. Beccari, Forbes, Huth, Moseley, Wallace, and J. Brittain. The 
ant infesting both these plants in Java is the Iridomyrmex cordata Sm. 
var. Myrmecodiz Emery. In many specimens of flourishing plants, 
not a sign of ants was to be seen, while in many they were very few in 
number; thus contradicting the assertion that the plants cannot live 
without the ants. 

Prof. Stewart said that Mr. Deby’s observations showed how im- 
portant it was to use one’s eyes, even in places where it might be 
supposed that the fauna and flora were thoroughly well known. The 
question now seemed to be whether if the original cavities had been made 
by ants it might in course of time have come to be a race peculiarity. 

Mr. H. B. Brady said that in confirmation of the remark as to the 
desirability of collecting under all circumstances he might mention that 
having to visit the cinchona plantations he found there an insect 
pest which was said to be Helopeltis Antonii, and was supposed to be 
the same insect as that which ravaged the tea-plantations of Assam. 
On inquiry, he afterwards found that there was no specimen at the 
British Museum, and on further investigation it turned out not to be 
Heliopeltis at all, but another species altogether. 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 689 


Mr. A. D. Michael said that the account which Mr. Deby had given 
of the Dipterous insect was of very great interest; the point which 
struck him most being the kind of parallelism shown to what was found 
in the case of some of the Calcidide. Most of the members of this 
family were free-flying creatures, but from the fact of many kinds acquir- 
ing running habits the wing power had been lost, the organs becoming 
small and feeble. The degradation of the wings in the specimens shown 
might probably be due to a similar alteration of habits. With regard 
to the peculiar foot, there were one or two instances of a similar kind 
found amongst the outlying groups of the Diptera, which were chiefly 
parasitic, where, between the properly developed claws, the sucker had 
been modified into a comb-like structure, which was very curious, and 
was certainly an approach to that shown in the specimen exhibited. 

Prof. Stewart said they had a familiar example of the reverse of this 
‘process in cases where the comb-like structure was the usual form in the 
case of some of the spiders. Usually amongst spiders there was a claw 
deeply toothed in the manner so well known to all who had examined a 
spider’s foot, but in the case of the hunting spiders this had been 
developed into a sucking foot. 


Mr. Crisp read a letter from Mr. Enock, in which he said that having 
succeeded in tracing out the life-history of the Hessian fly, he hoped to 
be able to exhibit a complete set of slides at the meeting. 

Mr. Enock said that having unfortunately spoilt one of the slides, he 
was unable to show a complete series that evening; he hoped, however, 
to be in a position to do so on a future occasion. He had bred both the 
American and the Russian species to see if they were the same as those 
found in this country, but he found that whilst Dr. Reinsman (?) said 
they laid from 80 to 100 eggs, the first specimen he bred laid 158 eggs 
on a stalk of barley. He had spent a great amount of time in watching 
the transformation of the fly, which emerges generally between 4 and 5a.m., 
though he had found them in the act soon after 3 a.m. 


Mr. Crisp called attention to two slides which had been sent by Mr. 
Cole, and asked Prof. Stewart to describe them. 

Prof. Stewart said that the first of these was a section of the eye of 
a newt, which showed most of the features of the retina, and at the same 
time the general relations of the other elements of the eye. The other 
slide was a section of the head of the human embryo, a thing always 
difficult to obtain, especially in a sufficiently fresh condition for cutting 
sections of much value. This slide was labelled as showing the 
primary and secondary optic vesicles ; this however was a slip, because 
it was not possible for these to be seen at the same time. Prof. Stewart 
then, by means of drawings on the blackboard, described the process of 
development of the eyes in the embryo, and showed the difference 
between the primary and secondary vesicles with their relation to the 
ultimate structure of the organs. 


Mr. Badcock said that he had the pleasure on one or two occasions 
of calling attention to a pond which in all his experience of collecting 
was the most extraordinary he had ever found, in consequence of the 
rarity of the forms and the variety to be obtained from it. Dr. Millar 
had asked him more than once to write a paper or to make a cata- 


690 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 


logue of the various forms of life to be found there, and as the pond 
was almost within a stone's throw of where he lived, he had promised 
to do so in the course of this summer. But to his great dismay 
the Metropolitan Board of Works, who had taken over the manage- 
ment of some of the parks, had carted rubbish into these ponds, with the 
idea of improving them, but of course with the result of destroying them. 
Two or three years ago the Corporation of London began the same 
process at Epping Forest, with the object of trying to make it pretty ; 
a deputation waited upon them on the subject, and succeeded in pre- 
serving something. As regarded the pond in Victoria Park, it was 
especially to be regretted on account of the great variety of forms which 
had been thus destroyed. 

Mr. Ingpen said he could quite confirm all that Mr. Badcock had 
said by his own experience of the similar doings of the Board on 
Wimbledon Common and Putney Heath, where the old ponds had been 
completely spoilt. In some instances a pond of some years’ standing 
had found its natural level, but by cutting a trench from the pond not 
only had it been spoilt, but the neighbouring ground had been converted 
into a quagmire. 


Mr. Crisp called attention to two slides which had been sent up by 
Dr. Peter Yates, of Bolton Infirmary, and which were exhibited under 
Microscopes in the room. They consisted of thin transverse sections cut 
with a Cambridge microtome of Sycon ciliatum, a calcareous sponge sur- 
rounded by a siliceous sponge, Isodictya varians—a very curious and rather 
abnormal condition. Also sections of Sycon ciliatum cut longitudinally, 
showing ova, &c., but especially noticeable for the fine specimens of 
entomostracans which back to back filled up the cloacal cavity within the 
Sycon. These entomostracans do occasionally find shelter within the 
Sycon, but these seem so large that it was suggested they had grown 
with the sponge’s growth. The slides were mounted by Dr. Yates from 
specimens gathered in Jersey by Mr. George Swainson, F.L.S. Sarcode 
stained blue-black. 

Professor Stewart said he had looked at these specimens, but could 
searcely reconcile the appearance with ordinary facts, because where, as 
on the Devonshire coast, they constantly found sponges of various sorts 
growing up together, they found that as a rule they stopped short as 
soon as they touched, and there was nothing like union between them. 
In one of the specimens shown a siliceous sponge had apparently com- 
pletely surrounded a calcareous one, without seeming to destroy it. He 
should very much like to know how it happened that the sarcode of the 
inner sponge seemed to be in such a well-nourished and healthy condition. 
By means of drawings on the board he pointed out the difficulty of 
understanding how the process by which the currents of water were 
drawn into and expelled from the living sponge, by means of which it 
supplied itself with necessary nourishment, could be carried on if the 
sponge were entirely invested by the wall of siliceous material. The 
other slide showing entomostraca inclosed in the sponge was a matter of 
comparatively common occurrence. It was well known that crustacea 
were often found inside Huplectella, and this was so frequently the 
case that the Spaniards thought that the Euplectella was something 
which had been spun by the crustacean. In the Hyalonema from Japan, 
the same kind of thing occurred, and they hardly ever obtained specimens 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 691 


in which the outer portions did not show depressions dotting the surface. 
These were merely the small holes where the crustacea had lived. 


Mr. H. B. Brady communicated to the Society a paper by the Rev. 
Walter Howchin, of Adelaide, South Australia, “On some additions to the 
Knowledge of the Carboniferous Foraminifera ” (see p. 533). He said that 
when he was working some years ago on his paper on Carboniferous Fora- 
minifera, Mr. Howchin, then living in England, collected a number of speci- 
mens; shortly afterwards his health failed him and he went to Australia, 
taking with him a large quantity of material to look through and examine. 
The result was that about a year ago he sent over to England an elaborate 
paper detailing what he had done. Situated, however, as Mr. Howchin 
then was, without access to current literature upon the subject, he was 
not aware of much which had been done since the publication of his 
(Mr. Brady’s) monograph. As it was not possible to present the paper 
in its then form, he communicated with Mr. Howchin, and was asked in 
reply to do what was necessary in the way of revision, and then to offer 
it either to that or some other Society as he might think fit. As he felt 
deeply grateful to the Royal Microscopical Society for the interest it had 
taken in the Rhizopods and other subjects, he had great pleasure in pre- 
senting the paper to them that evening. It formed a remarkably 
interesting addition to their knowledge, and was well worthy of a place 
in their T'ransactions. The most interesting thing to him was the fact 
that many of these palzeozoic forms were identical with those dredged up 
by the ‘ Porcupine’ and ‘ Challenger’ expeditions. 

Mr. Crisp said that, speaking for their Publication Committee, he 
could only say they were very pleased to have the paper, and thanked 
Mr. Brady for handing it over to them. His name was with every 
microscopist quite a household word, and they were all very glad to have 
that opportunity of seeing him with them. 


Mr. A. Frazer’s improved form of microtome for objects imbedded in 
paraffin was exhibited, the instrument being a modification and extension 
of the Cathcart microtome. 


Mr. J. Mayall, Jun., referring to the new Nelson-Curties Microscope 
for Photomicrography exhibited in the room, with the differential screw for 
the fine-adjustment applied under the arm, said that the application of 
the same thing to the substage, he might point out, was due to 
Mr. Lombardi. This arrangement for purposes of photography was 
extremely important, enabling the condenser to be adjusted with great 
accuracy, without which the high degree of excellence shown in some 
photographs could never have been obtained. 

With regard to the old Microscope before them, if his conjecture as 
to its age was correct, this instrument would be of great interest as 
enabling them to claim the so-called “Continental” form of fine-adjust- 
ment, which was made upon exactly the same principle. 


The Chairman said that in adjourning to October he could only 
express a hope that during the recess they would be able to collect 
plenty of matter for the work of the next session, and that when the 
time came for their next meeting they might have the pleasure of seeing 
Dr. Hudson again with them. The Library would be closed from the 
13th August to the 8th September inclusive. 


692 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 


The following Instruments, Objects, &c., were exhibited :— 


Mr. Bolton :—Notommata brachionus. 

Mr. Cole :—Section of head of Human Embryo, six weeks in utero. 
Eye of Newt, V.T.S. 

Mr. Crisp :—Nachet’s Crane-arm Microscope. Nachet’s Photographie 
Microscope. Old Microscope with “Continental” fine-adjustment. 
Klénne and Miiller’s Focusing arrangement for Photomicrography. 

Mr. Curties :—New Nelson-Curties Microscope for Photomicrography. 

Mr. Deby :—Slides of a Dipterous Insect. Slides of Myrmecophilous 
Plants. 

Mr. F. Enock :—Slides of Hessian Fly. 

Mr. A. Frazer:—Improved Microtome for Objects imbedded in 
Paraffin. 

Dr. P. Yates :—Slides of Sycon and Isodictya. 


{ To Newey ee 
Price 5s. 


2 « 1888. Part 5. : OCTOBER. 


‘JOURNAL 


OF THE 


= ROYAL : 
| MICROSCOPICAL SoclETY: 


CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS, 


AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTAND 
(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), 


MICROSCOPY, &c. 


Ldited by 


FRANK CRISP, LLB. B.A, 
One of the Secretaries of the Society 
and a Vice-President and Treasurer of the Linnean Society of Londost ; 
WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE: AND 


2 A W. BENNETT, M.A., B.Sc., F.LS., F, JEFFREY BELL, M.A., F.Z.S., 
 Lectureron Botanyat St. Thomas's Hospital, Professor of Comparative Anatouy in King’s College, 


JOHN MAYALL, Jon., F.Z5S., R. G. HEBB, M.A., M.D. (Canéab.), 
% AND 


J. ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A.,, 
Lecturer on Zoology in. the School of Medicine, Edinburgh, 
FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY, 


“ WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 
~ LONDON AND EDINBURGH. 


PRINTED BY WM. CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED : STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING CROSS: 
Fahy 5 y “ge 2 : 


CONTENTS. 


——— 


Transactions oF THE SooretTy— 


PLANATA, VAR. LACINIATA. By Ferny Be peace RS 4 
(Plate X.) 59 Meek Etats aes ree’, ae : 


X.—Nortoes or New Inrvsorta ee FROM ‘Ascrmrcay ri 
Fresn Waters. By Alfred C. Stokes, M.D, (Plate ue " 


SUMMARY OF CURREN T RESEARCHES. 
ZOOLOGY. | 


a. Embryology. rower . 
WEISMAN, A., + LC. Iscurcawa— Formation of Polar Globules ¢ in dntad Pete ‘ 
HorrMann, 0. K <.—Origin and Significance of the so-called free Nuclei 4 
Nutrient Yolk of Bony Fishes .. © .: ohn hae 
Ryper, J. A.—Resemblance of Ovarian Ova and. the Primilive Foraminifera” 
BieurtGer, J.—Inversion of the Germinal Layers in the Shrew... .. 
Epner, V. v., & E. Serrori—Spermatogenests of Mammals ., ts ate 
Sanrevice, F'.—Spermatogenesis in Guinea-pig ss. 1. ae 3 
Massarv, J. —“Trritability of Spermatozoa of Frog 
Hovssay, F., & BaratLton—Development of the Axolotl gate stg 
KUPFFER, C.—Development of the Lamprey .. .. wo raise ate ae 
Weismann, A., & C. Iscurkawa—Partial Impregnation Wai tiots 
Hertwie’s (0.) ‘Human and Vertebrate Embryology’ — .. 


B. Histology. 
Leypic, F.—Cells and Tissues Sf SSE ES Rua Ne oy 
ARNOLD, J.—Cell-division phe Sees cia ee 
Ive, M.—Cell-membrane. .. Pg Hees Lee 
Sremuats, J.—Goblet-cells of. Intestine of Salamander Pie ee iy Be 
Fiescn, M.—Micro-chemistry of Nerve-cella .. 4. 0 st ee ke 
Janosik, J.—THistology of the Ovary... ees ; 


: y: General. - ERE <r ? aa 
Loxp, J.—Influence of Light on Oxidation .. .. .. 


B. INVERTEBRATA. 
dant A. B.—Problematical Organs of the spteiheis se yoR gos 
Fou, H.—Distribution of Striped Muscle .. etsy pert 


Mollusca. 
y: Gastropoda. Seo 
Perrier, R.—Comparative Histology of Glandular Epithelium of Kidney cs ef 080 
branch Gastropods’ .. Sry as eee Stes 
Hanirson, R. REP a and Histology of Liman ‘agrestis ice 
GaARN act, P.—Anatumy and Histology of Cyclostoma elegans... +. +0 
Perit, L.—Lffeets of Lesion of Supra-esophageal Ganglia in Snailg ..«. 
Witiem, V.— Creeping Movements... ..  .. : 
Vayssiire, A .—Systematic Position of Hero... un te ne nee 
GARNAULT, F.—Anatomy of Valvata piscinalis ..0 1. ck ck kee 


3. Lamellibranchiata. ws 
GrosBey, C.—Pericardial Gland. oe ee a Se Se 
Molluscoida, ; 
8. Bryozoa. ee etge ce 
Harmer, 8. F.—Embryogeny of Ectoproctous Bryozoa . 


ae oe - o oe oe 


*s “e ee * 


ae zi a 2s : a = 2 i Arthropoda. 
SORE, Oe a peieage a. Insecta. = 
a HL Byg-movibrediea of Insects ss oe out e Seay 29 oe So ek A ies “38 


F.—Antennary Sensory Organs of Insects .. ++ 4s en 42 os ws 
Poison of Hymenoptera .. a ame ek A ae ne eae 


ey OFER, Bruno—Salivary Glands of Cockroach .. ss se 4s eae ne se 


_ TIoHOMMOFF, A.—Parthenogenesis in- Bombyx mort .. Opal roa he Bat aree ent 
“Loran, L., & A. Prorti—Respiration of Silk-worm Ontos ees aero 


ee Ee ee oe 28 pl ier pe os ee oe oo an Sea pose eos 
ee 8. ‘Myriopoda. a 


é. Arachnida. 


ee _ ~~ ¢, Crustacea, 


JATT. NEO, G. Tihine and Digestive Glands of Decapods .. 
Perit, L.—LEffects of Lesions of the Nas maa Ganglia of the Crab Paes 


Manas)... Ae eR ee wi we cisao Sitka Te alt ise 
ENDAL, D. —Male Appendages on Females se RAY wa, de RO ae ar ee meee 

arp, F, E.—Eyes of Cymothoidz .. .. By SOLS, OS eee wert ae 
p, A., & J.. Bonnren—New Species of Ceponinz AG Fea pte 


mn, J. pe, & J. RicuarD—Geographical Distribution of Diaptomus eee 


-Vermes.- 
iS gq, Annelida. 
Oe Cpiadsilis ean we 
1—Formation of Embryonie Havers and Ceelom of a Vaile Otigischeste 


IGHAM, J. T.—Nephridia of Lanice conchilega 2 os se oe nn we 
a Me ew Enchytreide oa ee => oe a Bs - #8 oe a : ee oe oe” (te 


fp. Nemathelminthes. 


0, Li.— Structure and Position of Gordiacez.. . eer age ee 


—Integument of Heterodera Schachtit..- se 6, ee ne Foe ca we 
05 CaLanpruccio—Echinorhynchus ‘parasitic in Man, and whose 
itermediary host isa Blaps .. «+ 41 es ne ap ohh wet 
7, O.—Ankylostomum DANE: a al eens alee ak ee se ee LY Se ee 


N 2 SINGHAM—Gape mes) Sonne: de Bed pba oe ne See gi REE oath 


0s Incertio Sedis, j 


Se = "Echinodermata. ; 


oe 29 os ve oo oe ie 


a! ea see Coelenterata, 


System of Siphonophora RSS be ge it ee os OT 
K.— Life-history of Epenthesis HMeCradyi, n LLY OO EE PA Ty 
-Arachnactis and Cerianthus .. 2. 2. we eee aE er gt 
C.—New Be of Anthozoa 44. Ap Ree ie 


meee Porifera. peg y 
LL, FL O—Natural Fistor RS SVONGCE Sa oe FS wee sop ign ae oe 


A.—Presh-water Sponges PER ross pes ea eene a yea awe pia Sian the he eoe 
New eee Ff Uruguay ‘8 eb See nes noe. $509 awe Ae oe 


OK, A J.—WMorphology of the Legs of Hymenoptera Leva oltead ieee eate, Van aoe 


LET, G.—Mode of Locomotion of Caterpillars - 2... a beuhre pa pana eee 
B,. W.—Colour-relation between Pupez and ‘Surroundings ag Oe Sips Poa soe 


os WeAnatomy of Gannsie eae EL eS 38 eee g 


Z. oe G.—So-called Mucous Gland of Male Cane Bap Se alate Saestegeon ts ae 


rr ORY, WN: __ Fertilization of Ascaris ae irene dn ge yaw SP oa! ae Seats 


;, A.—Structure and Developinent of Heterodera Schachtit.. See Te Pt era 


See Te ee ee ee oe 


oh. G. H. Tiga Ponenipgi? Pennatulida ae are 


juLzE, F. B=‘ Challenger’ Hexactinellida Pca get aoPey NAYS Seeia  ee ery ees ae 


PAGE 


722 


- 723 


7124 


C23 


Protozoa. 


Kounsturn, J.—Vesicular Elements of Protoplasm in Protozoa see © is es 
Metssner, M.—Physiology of Nutrition in Protozoa... 6. e+ than ewe 
Brvyxe, ©. pe—Nature of Contractile Vacuole .. 1.0 4s ae ee te ne 
Groner, A A.—Further Observations on Multinuclear Infusoria .. 4. eee 
Fapre-Domercur—Researches on Ciliated Infusoria ..  -. sn ee ewe 
Maurras, E.—Conjugation of Vorticellide 16 oe ee oe ne ae ae oe 
Fasre-Domercue—Structure of Urceolaria .. 9s. 40 ae ee oe aw wt 
FaNKHAUSER, J:—Figlena v0 day 0 ed foe ey ean, eee nee es loo tae 
Dancearp, P. A.—Cryptomonadine® .) 0s se ee ee ee ae ee) ae te 
Gournret, P., & P. Rorser—Protozoa of Corsica soe os ve we te 
VERWORN, M. —Biological Studies on Protista +. ee ee ae ee wt 
Gruper, A.—New Rhizopods.. 2s ee ee 9 oe oe ne oe ae ee oe , 
Carter, H. J.—Observations on Parkeria .... oq, eal 2 oe een 
Surerporn’s (C. D.) Bibliography of the Foraminifera. PRN ey ge oe TAs 


BOTANY. 


A. GENERAL, including the Anatomy and Physiology 
of the Phanerogamia. 


a. Anatomy. 
(1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm. — : 
Bororyy, T.—Action of basic substances on living Protoplasm.., + > ss 
ERRERA, L.—Forms of Cells oe. “* oo” oe oe ae oe ee oe *e oe 
Kures, G.—Physiology of the Cell... abi eho eee 
Wierer, A.—Plasmolysis in Flowering Plants ~) ane rh 


> 


(2) Other Cell-contents (including Secretions). 

Micnacp, G.—Alkaloid and Sugar in Cyclamen...  .. is Pee: 
HEcKEL, RB, & F, pre ein: an <n ets produet of “insops 
Payena m! ieee 
Acton, E. H. Formation of Sugars in the Septal Glands of Narcissus... .. 
Tscurren, A.—Contents of the Cells of the Aril of the Nutmeq .... vee 
BrrrHe1or, & G. Axpre—Phosphorus and Phosphoric Acid in. Plants. es 


(8) Structure of Tissues. 
TrreseL, R.—Oil-receptacles in the Roots of Composite ..  .. 
Dov.ior, H.—Formation of Periderm-.1 ©... seve | we 
PRAEL, z= —Protecting-wood and Duramen “ eer red 1 
Mer, E.—Causes which produce Eccentricity of the Pith in Pines .. PP, 
» x Influence of Exposure on the Formation of the Annual Rings t in the Sonic: 762. 
Comes, O.—Mal nero of the Vine 1. 00 ou wo oe an ee ae ae es ok 72 


(4) Structure of Organs. 


Borzi, A.—Formation of Lateral Roots in Monocotyledones — .. 
Maney, L.— Permeability of the Epidermis of Leaves for Gases 
ScuaErER, R.—Influence of the Turgidity of the entre, Cells 
Mirrmany, R.—Anatomy of Spines .. 4. a. 
Hoveiacavn, M.—Propagula of Pinguicula Pee be L 
Pritzer, E. —-Flower of Orchider .. .. 
Oaxont, $.—Ovules of Rumex ws BAL IY ate a ae 
Hyrano, K.—Seeds of Pharbitis triloba.. .. 
HetnricuEer, E.—Structure of Impatiens ee eee 
DENNERT, E. —Anatomy of Nelumbium .. 16 ae 


B. Physiology. 
(1) Reproduction and Germination. 
HecermaiEr, F.—Formation of Endosperm in Dicotyledons .. 
Marinacn, A. K. y.—Fertilization of Euphrasia — .. 


167 
Dammurn, U.— Adaptation of the Flowers of Eremurus allaicus to Cross fertilzation 167. 
Lewrn, M.— Germination of Monocotyledons..  «. 716T 


«eo we - Sir F 
4 ay 


Menozzi, A.— —Chemistry of Germination’ (00 we Hae ve’) bul as aoe Peg: ge ea 
(2) Nutrition and Growth (including Movements of Fluids). a 
Krevster, U.—Assimilation and Expiration of Plants .. ony sate 188 


HiLpesrand, F.—Production of Vegetative from Fertile Shoots of Opuntia 7 3 
Huxerr, E. H.—Viviparous Plants and Apogamy rt ge fore 


oe ee De ys. 


ESS ae ie of Sap through the Secondary Wood - Pe he eS GER 


Ba.ianp—Development of Wheat ..  ». aE tee (ine iipean pean Rs wee as ath OD > 
Giags. CBs Rootpresswre ss! nck ee. tty Feet Neae) de eaten 0 Kate jae LOD 
‘Exvine, F.—Curvature of Plants AS 769 


RIFFITHS, A. B., & Mrs. Gacuiras teres of certain “Raye. of the ‘Solar 
Spectrum on Root-absorption- and on the Growth of Plants ..  s. «+ es + 769 

> epee & late eens tad aie of Nitrogen by Plants.. 4... -.. +. 770 

: (8). Irritability. Sees 

Bartsox, a & F. Darwis—Method of Studying Geotropism.. +» arin 4! as 

PFEFFER, W.—Chemotactic Movements of Bacteria, Plagellata, and Volvocines reer iit) 

(4) Chemical Changes (including Respiration and Fermentation). 


c : WALD, H.—Changes of Substance and Force connected with Respiration... .. 771 
pare I og ees of Starch from various substances... ss vn ws we TTL 


' -», General. Beis 
ite, A. BF, W.— Relationship between Ants and Plants in ‘the Tropics... +.  T72 
Prinesurmt, N.—Deposition of Caleareous Incrustations on Fresh-water Plants ., 773 


RENSTELN, G.—Action of Ether on Plant-lfe <<. (00) ee ay oe ne ne we TD 
ee -B. CRYPTOGAMIA. ; 
Cryptogamia Vascularia, 


INES, ‘s. Fes ycteinuiie Position of Isoctes’ 2. vs. se ae on anes ‘78 
V. Be R.— Development of the Root of Equisetum Opes a ET ian Pe ee Ee 


Muscinez, Ps 
BTZLER, es; B.—Reproduetion of Thamnium alopecurum .. ss +6 ae on TTB. 
Nout, F. —Protonema of Schistosteya osmundacea i Be bies ila ah Cae 
~ Russow, E.—Physiological and Comparative Anatomy of Sphagnacez mahi teed saya 
Ro: iL— Forms 3 Ee eu. sateen OSes garth uty eye Pape: wat CAd oot oper a aeRO 
ee $ : 4 F Algee. F Z ; 
oy: B. pi —Classéfieation BF OMT DWC og wa aia Pee ok Aad oe teed AIOE 
scirG, A.—Classification of Confervoider .. Sete re peed WO 
BNET, E., & C. Franautr—New Genera of Perforating Ag Ste Cee a ae IO = 
‘DEMAN, "B. pe—Ulothrix and Stichococeus ... ++ ss Pee yee re ey eet 


Seed ROME PIDIGLLOs “hee ec psa COP tae) ite ade te ae WO OR ee! LAS 
NI, 2s Bz pE—Diatoms from a LUG ie Ae MV GL te URES 5 RU OS + Se AT opp EE k 
<5 ; Fungi. 
LIPS, SWE Lunia Gf POU Ge EA iis Fe NS ot ip GN Gee vag? Spe soe AED 
ER—Conidiferous Form of Lapin biennis Ee ees ened ic eaaera BCT ey pales 
LD, O.— Classification of Basidiomycetes .. 1. ss ss ax ew ws 178 
ILLARD, N N.—New Tubercularia .; ES eg BE ey ere rE rs gee ETE! 
, G—Calostoma Desv. (Mitremyces Nees) .. 38 Rp lige teite (patty oe ete te OU 
, W. B.—Pimina, a new Genus of Hyphumyectes pi A ST are re, arpecne ko}l 
EN a ngs. of Mirutbtsces oe A's ey Seo tn eS Eas ay ae i 
H.—Parasitism of the Trugie .._.. Giediighe Sie ee ae Sept eee pais RA DO 
J. DE—Fungus Parasitic on the Pine-apple Bae ea 5 


wt & Vurrtemin—* Rouge” of the Scotch Fir... 1. +6 0s 0 ee ee 781 
MANGHARD, A.—Pavrasites of the Peridiniex Au tela taw 1 eee rapa pier tes ee OLR er 
Vouemin, P.—Disease attacking AiG die pI See ia, Pee flay gan crea on AOE 

f Wie Haplncoccun reticmlatus, shes, Mast onc ow fo ees os ea tae ae oy EBS 


Symbiotic Fungus in Molgulide — 3 ee : eeaeiae See re Lcaeur $04 

wer, A.—Plasmodium of Badhamia and Brefeldia Bae ig eet ty eA he 

D: ee P. ee tela NOS Seen bt ae eden a eben a et reat ee Poe 
Aires -~ Protophyta. ey 

OMONT, M— Relationship between Phormidium and ae ope age S oe tee es BA 


AGERHEIM, G.— New Pleurocapsa-__- hig ona: LOE 
TZLER, J. B.—Colouring matter of the waters: of the ‘Lake of Bret . Sig eel 

UEMIN, G. — Saccharomyces ellipsoideus and, its Use in the Preparation of Wine peso ae 

tas ee a ey. Boke oe ee Cr ee os ee eo ee oe oe “ee 785 Sy 


PAGE - 


HoRST, J.—Fungus Parasitie on the Salt-fish .. .. .. + 2 Se Bee coe 


GC NEE PUCCIO 6 ab oe ds aes ae eS oe es Ma BE ee 


ACE, — Cultures of Cladothrie dichotoma Sewer peal tae Giese ae pea SEE 


Cece: 


Laurent, E.—Organic nourishment of Beer-ferment +» «+ «+ 
Ermencem, E. Van—Scheuerlen’s Cancer Bacillus.» +s ee 
Wrnoagrapsky, §.—IZron-bacteria .. PSO ws Tye 
TomascHek, A., & A. Hansatre— Bacillus muralie Sy hs Bata 
PRAZMOWSKI, A.—Spore-formation tn Bacteria 1. 10 ee ae 
Buuer, A.— New Marine Bacterium .. és 
FRANKLAND, GRACE C., & Percy F. FRANELAND —Nein and 
organisms from Wi ater did Bet ode ec Bae eee aS 


BavumGarten’s Pathological Mycology ’ Mee seijin wes Se Sept 
MICROSCOPY. 
a, Instruments, Accessories, &c. 
(1) ees 
Tuvry’s Five-tube Microscope (Fig. 120) tele peu 
Scuiecr’s (FE. W.) Meat-examining Mitroasene ig, 121) Pe ae 33» cee ee TD 
Ss Travelling Microscope (Fig. 122)... ..  .. bat Tien: Paty he eee 


Zetss’s IIa Microscope—Babuchin’s Microscope ve 
Lxitz’s Demonstration Microscope — Old Demonstration Microscope Pigs: 123 and Se 

124) . . o* “e -* Me we! 
Wuite, 8. S.—Dentist’s Examining Glass (Fig. 125) vena ® : 
Bavscu anp Lomp Opricat Co.’s ‘Watchmaker Glass” (Fig. 126). a8 eh, latarel, fa 
Ganz’s (J.) Pinakoscope with Dreyfus’s Reflector (Pig. 127)... ee ee ne te 
TRI-OCULAR, Quadri-ocular, &c., Prisms (Figs. 128-132) .. 6. +s ee ae we 


(2) Eye-pieces and Objectives. Ryetse 
Ze1ss’s “ Compensation Eye-piece 6 with 1/1 Micron-division” (Fig. 133) a4 gnome 


(3) Illuminating and other Apparatus. , sy Ae 
Erernov's (A.) Drawing-board (Figs. 184-139) ., 2. eee ee ae te . 798 
Bars’ (V.) Hot Stage (Figs. 140 and 141) .. Bae ; 
Cuasry, L.—Capillary Slide and accessories for the examination of Ova (Figs. 14 42 
and 143) ... oa OEY sats 
Berke, F. .— Measuring Corrosion Surfaces in Iron Pyrites (Fig. 148) Spire 
Row.anyp’s (W.) Reversible Compressorium (Fig. 145) + © ee ee ee ee 
Bravmonn’s (C. R.) Reservoir Life-slide ee Nae Had 147) 3.6 eR es 


Hoiman’s Current Slide...» se se Bot Sagtnd eae ive ae. eee 
Sroxes, A: C.—Life Slides 00. 60) ne tn o> PO oe we ey ae eee 
Lames for pak a hoes Work >... Pere he 


Mavassez, L.—Tubes for Microspectroscopic “Analysis (Big: 148) Breer tl? pues 
(4) Photomicrography. eri s hy 


Bunrstert’s (H.) Photomicrographic Apparatus (Fig. 149). wor tage daies 
Nevnatss’s (R.) Focusing Arrangement (Fig. 150 8 
Piersot, G. A.— Drawings v. Photographs.—Screen for the Abbe Camera “Lucida ae 

Srenciemn, M.—Instantaneous Photomicrography = +. ++ ee ty tee 
ERRERA, if —Photographing moving Microscopie Objects .... Felines eens 
Fiscurn—Photographing phosphorescent bacilli by means of their own light br Rts © 


(5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. if ba Cay ae 
Fasotpr, C.—Variation in Micrometric Measurements due to different Wiiméasdou: ge | : 
LEINHERTZ— Testing Screw-Micrometers of Reading-Microscopes  .. ss se “aoe ES, 
Smirn, ‘TI’. F.—Arachnoidiseus as a new Test for High-power Objectives .. vet) 6m oe 815 ay 
NELSON, E. M.—Tests for Modern Oberiavey Be alae hone Sly leigh: eee ae 816 


F AsoLpr’s (C.) Test-plates .. Sey waraeateuees se 

MicroscoricaL Optics and the Quelcett Club Téjuatad 2 Be Wi wet ig ht oe aa ae 7 
(6) Miscellaneous. Sestak eer 

Quiny, E. P.—Simple method of Projecting upon the ‘ 


Sections, both by ordinary and by polarized light .. 
Jupp, J. W.—Microscopy and the Study of Rocks — +. 
Hovzeav, J. C.—Microscope and Telescope .. 6. 


B. Technique. ‘ 
(1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Procssase: x 


Birou-HirsonrELD— Cultivation of Schizomycetes in Coloured Nutritive Media’ . ; : 
FRANKEL, O.—Cultivation of Anaerobic Micro-organisms 1... se oe ee te 
Grose — Bacterial Growth between 50° and 70°C. se oe ee ee oe es 


ty 


Rovux—Cultivation on Potato— : or, 

Pea bDE—Simple Method for “reproducing Koch's Cilkivation ‘Plates eS 

B V-) modified Cultivation Vessel (Fig. 151) Lae Rater iwaege tee 
, A.—Cooler for quickly setting Gelatin Plates — .. ae eS gee dade Soke 

EN, T. F.— Collecting and Preparing Characee .. Ciuanne eres e 

nen, A.—Cultivation of Lichen-forming Ascomycetes. poeta Wine: a 

<e) Wy N. W.—Apparatus for Infeeting (Fig. 152)... es es 

sae : (2). Preparing Objects. 


SKI, 8. — Effect of Hardening Agents on the Ganglion- -cells of the Spinal Cord 
2: Dromworr, A A.—Sublimate as a Hardening Medium for the Bratm +. 6. ve as 
, A—Preparation of Criodrilus lacuwm ... a Ceas 
mr, J.—Method of Preparing Tequmentary Filaments of Flagellata. Pease 
~- Fiscur, R.— New Method for making Microscopical. Preparations Hoe Test-tube 
-Cultétations.. .. Heaney ees wm imme eV saan Gods cen wa ee 
tAN, TY oie: Sileonts Reena at See org 
iS WHELPLEY, H. M.—Preparing Slides to show Bvanian Movement CEE axe ies 


(8) Cutting, including Imbedding. 


y ee D, H.—Parafin-imbedding Process in ; Botany SSOiae Coa Laseicneee es 
Apstuy, S.—Further Notes on Celloidin Technique .. 


Figs. 153.and 154)... .. Ey arh ee en emer eu eae Ok bak eens ah 

AvTE’s (P.) New Microtome (Fie. 155). eee 
J.— Accessory for rapid cutting with ‘the Thoma Mier otome Gig, 156). 

ER, H.—New Section-stretcher, with arrangements for removing the Section Be 


: (4) Staining and Injecting,. ; 
av M.—Double-staining of Nucleated Blood-corpuseles SE eh Gre Ns 


R. 
eee O.—Vital Methylen-blue Reaction of Cell-granules..  .6 > wv ano 
TLLIET,. 4 A.—Differential Staining of the Tissues of Living Animals .. 


Sr RT 


40 Pe Aas, JUN. aa se Nutrient Gelatin and tag ee ea ok ok 
[UPPH, aes Cultivation purposes 1. we eon ee ae et 


sR —Photozylin for Imbedding .. .. Eo et Oe 


Br cu’s (A.) Microtome for cutting whole sections of the Brain and bier organs. 


Rorvterer, eae ates Oe Ba Muscle and. ae ee “Tissue 


bres Ma Sie 


ER, J. Sonia in ihe ‘Study of “Bone Delonte Seer en 
wt, A.—Preparing and Staining Mammalian Testicle’ .. 2. ss 
_ EF. L.—Stain for the Morphological Elements in Urine Pe eye a ri 
rR, G.—Staining Spores... Nhe N mess Paar ae 
piMorr, N.—Staining Tubercle and Lepr osy Placita PR ee ae een oe 
x  G.—Aleoholie Solution of Haematoxylin. see ee ue ee 
ae A:—Osmic Acid and Gold chloride MEROASY pce a Suk seers va kee as 
ut, H).—Phenol in Microscopical Technique... +. 20 ee ne ee wes 
H.—Double Staining... .. a Ppa Rlaar ok weg as oe ee 


H.—Injection Mass for the Vessels of the age Terese Neteeaiset ne ree 
, K.— Injection with Indian Ink -.. —. Nears. eight vale i ee arte Cite 


(6). Mounting, including Slides, Preservative Fluids, Sex 


Acu’s (.) Filter-capsule (Figs. 158 and. 159) ts 


a objects mounted in glycerin Big. 160)... 
us, H. pE—Preservation of Plants in Spirit and. the Prevention of Browning «. 


(6) Miscellaneous, pe Le oes 


proved method for Enumerating Blood-corpuseles cone 


relatin Culture Test for. Miero- Sean Of Welker 0 a5. wot sven sox 
Fane Ele. oe oe aE ice ee or oe ST mae Coie on gig t tS aha: 


OF THE Socmry ere As ae See LG a as, aoe - es ; oe 


O81 E.— Hardening and Staining Plate-cultivations Eris tei pean a egcis Gees 
a, M.—Beck's Microsyringe (Fig. 197) ~ Hp tinel Sede ay NO apse IRR 


ZABRISKTE, J. Li.— Continuous Centering of a Cover jie. FM ipe OR eee ae 


LD, M.—Apparatus for tnclosing microscopical preparations of boli : 
ee Sections. to the Slide... Caner se ree: pater aoe 
H— Methods of Plastic Reconstruction ES ide pees a eer ee s oe 
W.—Making Mounts Photographic .. 2.0 2 8y ew be ae 


uRTZ—Improved method for the Bacteriological Eaneae of Air ae 


I.—APERTURE TABLE. 


Co : ye 
eae MOTE caste Sierla tas — Lach Limit of Resol Sipe 
Pr 20 o esolvi >, . Ly 
naymne: Air Water | Howinsscus Tr Power, in Lines to an Inch. _ ~ . 
ont Rag ae (m= 1°00). | (n= 1°33). | trl tts Pace Light. (Bine) Light ; meeey 5) 

; on RTE Bat aot “3 | A=0" - | Photo; 10g 
Hp Bik sora Feb wl hss bee wad Rida bi yc Fe 
1-51 2 “ Teoe o | 446,543 “Tine Fr)" petra Pepe Dit 
1-50 3 ss | 166° 51’ 146,543 158.845 ine A.) a 
ae e "| gore os | adverse ay ee eye oh or cE 

ef, | 157° 12° ; f % , 767 ate 
1:47 i "| TBge Bor | a42'687 188, 756 ag ae 
vag | “. |AMe gor | auatosr | ibe60s | 057 2-280. 
é 147° 42’ y72: 158 7,957 1 9: % 
1:44 Bey oy ae BEEN ,620° | 186. 190 
46 : 45° , 4 152.5 , 687 2° ¥ 
1°43 5 14 6 139.795 3979 185.4 161 F- 

: ae f g° 89g! ? 151.530 s417 2: s 
1-42 taka 138,830 ,530 | 184 13%, 

° ¥ ee 0° 99! ’ 150 48 147 : 2-1 a, io 
1-41 : 137,866 485 | 182 03 | 
: a8 . 3° 12" 0 149.4 877 2-074 
1-40 ; 136 12’ | 136,902 440} 181 a 

“- x 86° , ; 148.3 , 607 2-045. 
1:39 m 8’ | 1385,9: ,395 | 180 2045, 
eS ms 34° 0! »938 147.35 »337 -P. 2: is 
brs * 9° 16! ; 146 5067 1° < 
1:37 ; 1 16’ | 134,010 305 | 177.7 988. 

v 30° 267 145,2 77,797 | 1-960 

1:36 | 198 6’ | 133,046 ,260 | 176 960 
/ < 28° 40’ ; 144 3927 1-932 - 
1°35 \ 1 40 132,082 »215 175 932-3 

o :: 26° 58" ; 143,17 6257 | 1-904 
1:34 ; 1 131,118 170 173 904 — 

; “ 25° 18" cher i peered 
rag | | 186 9 me rie | 1a) | 1850 
1:31 s 165° 56’, 120° a 128,225 sagions 170177 | ee 
eo . ieee iS he 127,261 | 137,944 168,907 | 1-769 | 
Tee : 1952 38" 117° 35/ 126,297 | 136,899 1e7 oa Lee 
eet a we 50" | 116° 8° orgie 135,854 ee tiicd ‘ 1-716 _ 
He oe 145° a eit 44! eet 134,809 alee : 1-690 
1:25 - 1499 39 L11¢ oy ae be 495 708 | Lea cee 
= . 137° Pe vith ss me Aa 131,674 lentes ; 1-613” 
1-22 -- 135° 177} 10 : 119.548 ,629 158. 3 [588 - 

: ae ‘ 8° ? ? 1 > 747 ~hes 
121 |. 1g 4" | toe 46 | 117620 129,584 | 197,477 1368 

7' 1 105° 30’ > 620 127. 3,207 1513. 
1:19 “Sy 128° 55’ | 104° 0 116.656 - , 494 154,937 : 1513 
1:18 <A 126° 58'| 1 - 15’ 115 692 126,449 153. 1:488 
“ 03° 2! : 125,4 ,668 | 1464 
1:17 125° 31 1 2 114,72 » 404 152 464 — 
és ‘ 01° 50’ +728 124 3897 1: 3 
1-16 123° 131 1 50 113.764 3359 151 440 
z 00° 33’ , 123 ,128 | 1-416 — 
1-15 121° 26’ 112,79 314 149 16 

* ay 99° , > 9 122 , 857 a +e 
1-12 " ise | 97241 | 1097907 hare pent 1-346 
he 116° 20'| 96° 2 | 109,907 tI sak 146.048 | 1-393 
ee re | ae 

. . ' ; ; ? 
ees $ ee 90° set 10m 088 The 139.698 _ 
ee me ae 8° 89° 30’ janie 3 112 864 138 423 
1: 5 oe J fh 42’ 8s° 27' 03,159 111.819 137,158 
Hs. oe al 16’ 87° 94! 102,195 110.774 135,888 
1:0 29 ggo 10’} 84° 18’ 9,302 107.639 32,078 
nag 180° 0’ ee “at 83° 17’ a te 106,598 ae 

163° 48° 1* | 82°17 374 105 ,938 
0:98 63" 48 96° 9 17 96 ; 548 | 12 

157° ’ 6° 12 81° 17% ,410 10 8,268 
0:97 1 22 94° 56! 17 95 4,503 |° 12 

51° 59" 56 80° 17° ,446 10 6,998 
0-96 ane 93° 40! 17 94 3.458 | 125.7 

147° 99" 40 79° 18° »482 10 Aes 25,728 

43° 36’ 24’| 78° 90° ,518 | 101,36 4,458 Pe 
pss 140° 6’ oe ad Lae a ee toutes ae “941 op 

’ 136° 52’ 3 1) 76° 94! , 990 ; 918 Berets Ry 4 
0-92 | 133° Bee Bee tf Be (ee Ee ek 100 '6he | ood area 
one 131° 0’ 87° 39'1 74° 30! 89, 661 onan 119,378 Rye = -1°058 i 
0-89 || 125° 45" ne eg Bah Sgr 87.733 On iae. ane ee 884 J 17064 

; 25° 45° r} go 34 1 7103 9 5838 ) fee 

| 82° 51" | 70° 44" 85,805 ayes 114,298 
111,758 


APERTURE TABLE—continued. 


Corresponding Angle (2 w) for Limit of Resolving Power, in Lines to an Inch, Panes 
ee eR eh Pee er La Te Gee ee eA ee eumatniatin ay trating 


Poe Wea Monochromatic ee 
Air, 4} Water — Hambgcnc gas | White Light. | (Blue) Light. | Photography. i (a2y’ | Power. 
(m = 1°33), | (n= 1°52) (A= 0°5269 pn, bar 4861 p14) (A= 0° 4000 jx, G 
eee a es aie eer 2 Line b.) Line FE.) “| near Line 2.) § 


"190° 55" | 81° 49 | 69°49’ | 93,877 |- 90,918 | 110,488 | +757 J 1-149 
3 jj 1is°.3s’ | 80° 3¥ | 68° 54’ 82,913 89.873 | 109,218 740 | 1°16 
|| 118° 25" | 79°87" | 68° oO! 81,949 88,828 |. 107,948 793 11-176 
“114° 17’ | 78° 90" | 67°. 6 80,984 87,783 | 106,678 -706 | 1-190 
112° 12’ | 77° 14’ | 66° 12’ | 80,020 | 86,738 | 105,408 “689 | 1-205 
110° 10' | 76° $' | 65° 18’ 79,056 | $5,693 | 104,138 |  -672 -} 1-220 
108° 10’ | 75° 3" | 64° 24! 78,092 | 84,648 | 102,868 | -656 | 1-235 
106°.16" | 73° 58’ | 63° 31’ 77,128 83,603 | 101,598 | °640 | 1-250 
104° 99’ | 72° 53’ |}. 62° 38’ 76, 164 82,558 | 100,328 | -624 | 1-266 
102° 31’ | 71° 49° | 61° 45’ |> 75,200 | 81,513 99,058 608 | 1-282 
100° 42’ | 70° 45’ | 60° 52’ 74,236 80,468 | 97,788-| -593 | 1-299 
"98° 56’ | 69° 42’ | 60°. 0! 73,272 79.423 96,518 | °578 | 1-316 
97° 11" | 68° 40’ | 59° 8° 72,308 78,378 95,248 | +563 | 1-333 
95° 28’ |. 67° 87% | 58° 16! 71,343 17 333 93,979 | -548 |.1-351 
98° 46’. | 66° 34" | 57° 24" 70,379 76,288 92,709 -533 | 1-370 
99° 6’ | 65°32’ | 56° 32° 69,415 75 ,242 91,439 | +518 | 1-389 
90° 29’ | 64° 32’ | 55° 41’ 68,451 74,197 90,169 -504 | 1-408 
88° 51’ | 63° 31’ | 54° 50’ | 67,487 | 73,152 88,899 | -490 | 1-429 
87° 16’ | 62° 30’ | 53° 59° 66,523 | 72,107 87, 629 476 | 1:449 
"85° 41’ |. 619-30? | 53° 9! 65,559 71,062 86,359 -462 | 1-471 
“4° 8” | 60° 30’ | 52° 187 64,595 70,017 85,089 -449 | 1-493 
82° 36’ | 59° 30’ | 51° 28” 63,631 68,972 83,819 436 | 1-515 
B12. 6’. | 58° 30’ | 50° 38” 62, 667 67,927 82,549 -493 | 1+538 
79° 36’ | 87° 31’ |. 49° 48° 61,702 66,882 81,279 -410 | 1-562 
“78° 6’ | 56° 32’ | 48° 58 60,738 65,837 80,009 +397 | 1-587 
76° 88’ | 55° 34’ | 48° 9’ 59,774 64,792 78,739 “384 | 1-613 
75° 10’ | 54° 36" | 47° 19° 58,810 63,747 | -77,469 -372 | 1:639 
73° 44’ | 53° 38” | 46° 30! 57,846 62,702 76,199 “360 [1-667 
72918’ |. §2°-40" | 45° 40° 56,881 61,657 74,929 -348 | 1-695 
0° 54’ | 51° 49’ | 44° 51’ 55,918 60, 612 73, 659 -336 | 1-724 
69° 30’ | 50° 45" |. 44° 9° 54, 954 59, 567 72,389 “825 | 1°754 
“68°. 6" | 49° 48"-| 43° 14’ 53,990 58,522 71,119 “314 1 1°786- 
66° 44” | 49° 51’ | - 490-95" 53,026 57,477 69,849 | +303 | 1-818 
65° 29’ | 47°54’ | 41° 37° 52, 061. 56,432 68,579 | -292 | 1-852 
64° 0" | 46° 58’ | 40° 48” | ~51,097 55,387 67,309 -281 | 1-887 
62° 40’ | 46° 2° | 40° 0! 50,188 54,342 66.039 270 | 1-923 
61° 20’ | 45° 6 | 39°12’ | - 49,169 53,297 64,769 -260 | 1-961 
60° 0" |. 44°. 10" | 38° 24" | 48,205. | -52,952 | 63,499 950. | 2-000 
57° 29° | 49° 18’ | ~36° 49’ | 46,277 50, 162 60,959 “230 | 2-083 
54° 47’ | 40° 28” | 35° 157 44 349 48,072 58,419 “212, | 9-174 
53° 30" | 39° 33° | 34° 27’ 43.385 47,026 | 57,149 | -203 | 2-299 
52° 13’ | 38°38" | 33° 40! 42,420 45,981 | 55,879 -194 | 2-973 
49° 40’ | 36° 49’-| 39° “5” 40,492 | - 43.891 53,339 176 | 2-381 
AT? 9" | 35°. Or | 30° 31’ 38,564 41,801 50,799 -160 | 2-500 
44° 49’ | 33° 12’ | 98° 57’ 36,636 | 39,711. | 48,259 | -144- | 2-632. 
- 49° 19" | 31° 24 | 97° 94° | 34.708 | 37,621 45,719 | -130 | 2-778 
- 40° 58’ | 30°30" | 26° 38° 33,744 | - 36,576 44,449 123 | 2-857 
39° 44" | 29° By" | 95° 51’ | 32,779 | 35,531 43,179 116 | 2-911 
87° 20" | 27° 51 | 94° 18’ | 30,851 33,441 | 40,639 102 | 3125 
34° 56” | 26° 4° | 99° 46’ | 98,993 .| 31,351 38,099 -090 | 3°333 
390-39 | 940-18 | 91°14" | 26.995 | 29.961 35,559 078 | 3°571 
|| 30° 10" | 29° 33° | 19° 49" | 25°067 27,171 83,019. “068 | 3-846 
98° 58” | 21° 40” | 18° 56’ | 24,103 26,126 | 81,749 -063 | 4-000 
“97° 46' | 20° 48' | 18°10’ | 23,138 | 25,081 30,479 “058 | 4-167 
95° 96’ | 19° 9° | 16° 38’ | 21,210. | — 22,991 97,940 | -048 | 4-545 
Page 4 | VPABt =| 15°: 7" 19,282 20,901 25,400 | -040 } 5-000 
90° 44” | 15° 34’ | 13° 36" | 17,354 | 18,811-—|~ 22,860 “032 | 5-555 
18° 24" | 13° 50’ | 12° 5 | 15,496 16,721 | 20,320 } -026 | 6-250 
179 14’ | 12° 58’ | 11° 19’ |. 14,462 | 15,676 | 19,050 | +023 | 6-667 
~ 16° 5’ | 12° 6’ | 10° 34" | 13,498 | 14,630 17,780 020 | 7-143 
“13° 47" | 10° 29' | 9° 4’ | 11,570 | 19,540 | 15,240 “O14 | 8-333 
|. 11° 29° ge 38! 7° 34’ | -9,641 | 10,450 | 12,700 | +010 410-000 
98-11! | 69.54’ 1 6? BA 7,713 | 8,360 | 10; 160 -006 {12-500 
6° 53! 5° 10’ | 4° 397 5,785. 6,270 7,620 | -004 416-667 
5° 44’ | 4° 18’ | 3° 46 | 4,897 5,295 | 6,350 -003 {20-000 


( 20°53 = 
GREATLY REDUCED PRICES 
OBJECT-GLASSES MANUFACTURED ‘BY 


R. & J. BECK, 


68, CORNHILL, LONDON, E.C.. 


PRICES OF BEST ACHROMATIC OBJECT-GLASSES. 


ee 93 Linear magnifying-power, with ro-inch 
No. Focal length. aper- Price. body eebeidnd Tye: ete 
ture Sh PPR ais DIT ee 
| about | No. 1.| No. 2.| No. 3.!'Now4.| No. 5. 
es peep a | 
a £8.00. : 
100 | 4inches .. 9 110 0 30 40 50 
101 | 3 inches 7 EIO=-05 60 . 
102 | 3 inches 42 to 20*. 0 ay i) 
103 | 2 inches be) 110 0O 
104 | Qinches .. 17 | 210 0 6746 90 2 Bee 
105 | Ifineh.. ©... 23 < . 2 go-| 120 150 
106: |: Sanches 25 
107 3 inch .. 32 210 0 hs As 35° 
108 | $ inch 45 210 0 300 | 400 500 
109 | +4;inch.. 65 4 0 0 375. | 500 }>- 625 
PEO.) St neh 253 95 5 0 0 450.| 600 | ~ 750 
i Oe Or BS Ss) eee aes 75 310 0 600} 800°]. 1000 
1722 iineh .. -. 120 410 0 750 | 1000 | 1250 
113 | dinch .. 130 6.20"-9 1200 | 1600 | 2000 
114 | 3, imm. | 180 5 O 1500 | 2000 | 2500 
115 | 34 imm. 180 8 0 0 2250 | 3000 }: 3750 
116 | 2; imm. | 180 | 10°00 3000 | 4000 |. “5000-, 
i160 | 20 0 0 6000°| 8000 | 10,000 


117 | Pinole 


ECONOMIC ACHROMATIC OBJECT-GLASSES, 


APPLICABLE TO ALL INSTRUMENTS MADE WITH THE UNIVERSAL SorEwW, 


Angle MAGNIFYING-POWER, 
of with 6-inch body and 
No. Focal length. aper- Price. eye-pieces, 
ture, Ss Bude s FA 
about No, 1.| No. 2, No. 3. 
5 £3. a. | 

150 | Sinches  .... 6 AP DE4O I2 15 
161 |.2 inches»... 3 Sn 18 23 
163-4 a Snck 42S VS 8 1 6.0 46 61 
L5S | dine eo eel 38 Lo 9°. | 116 
£64") neh? i ea et BO gg 9 eae © pe ine ey foe ap bee v0} 
L5G inch we eee Se LO 2 5 O | 250 |-330 
EG} Fn Fis oes] ERO 310 0 } 350 | 450 
| 157 | + imm. wens oh B80." | Be Oy OF 6a Bae 


Revised Catalogue sent on application to 
RR. & J. BECK, GS, Cornhill. 


,amb. Sci. Inst Co. 


ae 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 


ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 


OCTOBER 1888. 


TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY. 


IX.—Note on the Reproductive Condition of Orbitolites complanata, 
var. laciniata. 


By Henry B. Brapy, F.R.S. 
(Read 10th October, 1888.) 
PLATE X. 


Amonest the Foraminifera that have their home in the shallow waters 
of the coral-islands of the South Pacific, one of the most remarkable 
is the large Orbitolite with “crumpled” edges, known as Orbitolites 
complanata, var. laciniata. It can scarcely be called a common form, 
in... uch as its occurrence, so far as at present known, is confined to 
the Friendly Islands and the Fiji group, though in certain favourable 
localities it is tolerably abundant. I have never observed it in New 
Caledonia, where the more typical forms exist in the greatest profusion 
and specimens of Orbitolites complanata in the normal condition often 
attain dimensions nearly as great; nor, so far as I recollect, on the 
reefs of Samoa. A considerable gathering of the variety referred to 
was made on the ‘ Challenger’ expedition, and some of these specimens 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE X. 


Fig. 1.—Orbitolites complanata, var. laciniata, from the Suva reef; 
natural size. 

»; 2.—Peripheral view of a portion of the margin, the perforated 
external wall broken away, showing the outer annulus 
crowded with young embryonic shells, corresponding 
to the “ primitive discs” of adult normal specimens .. x 15 diam. - 

»  o.—Transparent horizontal section of the marginal annuli of 
a portion of the shell with embryos in situ 

» 4, 5.—Embryos (“primitive discs”); lateral aspect 


25 
AY) cg 


x xX 


op 6, 7.— - , one showing a single row 

of seers the other two rows ;—peripheral aspect .. x 40 ,, 
Se o>. o-— —_—_—. , horizontal sections, seen 

by nel light . x 40 ,, 
» 10—Young specimen, with three annuli of chamberlets, laid 

open to show the interior... x 40° 5, 
», L1, 12.—Masses of embryos—horizontal and transverse sections 

—hby transmitted light son 40023 


» 13.—Horizontal section of the central portion of an adult 
: specimen, by transmitted light EMCI DR RAE Pee 4) aoe 
oA 14,—Transverse section of a similar shell .. x 


1888. one 


694 Transactions of the Society. 


were described in more or less detail by the late Dr. Carpenter * and 
myself. 

. On as visit to Fiji at the end of the year 1884, my attention was 
naturally turned to this amongst other Foraminifera peculiar to the 
region, but beyond a few worn examples, apparently dead shells, found 
on the beach at Loma-Loma, my search for it was at first almost fruit- 
less. The weather was stormy, I had been delayed by vexatious 
quarantine regulations until the hurricane season had set in, and I 
could rarely get out to the reefs. When at last I was able to land on 
the reef off Suva, I soon met with the object of my quest, though the 
specimens, as we shall presently see, did not correspond in all respects 
with those collected in such numbers by the ‘ Challenger’ naturalists. 
To my surprise the shells were parasitic, generally firmly attached to 
a green Alga which flourishes amongst the coral-sand at the bottom of 
the shallower pools on the reef ;—I had previously supposed that the 
adherent habit of the Orbitolite ceased at a very early stage in the 
growth of the disc. Their peripheral edges were exceedingly brittle 
—so fragile indeed that it was often impossible to remove the speci- 
mens without more or less breakage. Other slight peculiarities were 
apparent, but there was little opportunity for close examination on 
the spot. 

a working over the material collected in Fiji, since my return, 
my attention was attracted to these specimens, not only by the 
peculiarity of their general appearance, but more particularly by 
what seemed to the naked eye to be a number of very young indi- 
viduals adhering to the central portion of one of the flatter discs; and 
on further investigation I found that not only was this inference 
correct, but that the marginal annuli, wherever the interior was exposed 
by fracture, were crowded with similar minute embryonic shells; and 
further, that the coral-sand obtained from the same pools contained 
enormous numbers of young specimens in various stages of develop- 
ment, together with fragments of the thin, perforated, annular septa 
of the parent shells. 

The occurrence of young individuals in this position is not 
altogether a new fact. Many years ago Prof. W. K. Parker found 
“a number of very young specimens, consisting simply of the 
primordial chamber and the one surrounding it” in the “deeply 
channelled margin of one of these plicated forms of Orbitolites”’ ; t 
and the same specimens are referred to in Dr. Carpenter’s ‘ Challenger’ 
Report, as “consisting only of the ‘nucleus’ and a single annulus of 
sub-segments,” the author adding that he had found “similar speci- 
mens in the same situation in some of the large Fijian dises.”’§ My 
own examination of a considerable number of the ‘Challenger’ 
specimens leads me to think that the occurrence amongst them of 
such examples must be comparatively rare; and not one of the 


* ‘Report on the Genus Orbitolites,’ p. 35, pl. vii. 

+ ‘Report on the Challenger Foraminifera,’ p. 220, pl. xvi., figs. 8-11. 

¢ Carpenter, ‘ Introduction to the Study of the Foraminifera,’ p. 38, pl.iv., fig. 22. 
§ ‘Report on the Genus Orbitolites,’ p. 16, 


Reproductive Condition of Orbditolites, &e. By H. B. Brady. 695 


numerous sections I have made from them reveals a single such 
embryo z# siéi. Be this as it may, it is quite safe to say that 
specimens in the precise condition of those now brought under notice 
are practically new to morphologists. 

The specimens obtained on the Suva reef vary a good deal as to 
size and external characters; the drawing, Plate X. fig. 1, represents 
one of the larger and more characteristic of them. ‘The dimensions 
range from a diameter of about a quarter of an inch to very nearly an 
inch (6 mm. to 24 or 25 mm.); but from the broken edges of the 
smaller discs it may be inferred that they have lost some of their outer 
annuli. At the centre, the disc is often not more than 1/300 of an 
inch (0°08 mm.) in thickness, but this increases rapidly, though by no 
means regularly, towards the circumference. The shells are seldom 
so massively built as those in the ‘Challenger’ collection or as others 
which have come under my notice. The ‘Challenger’ specimens, if 
I understand rightly, were found unattached, in some of the more 
sheltered pools on the reefs, and as they were taken at a different 
season of the year (in July) they may perhaps represent a later stage 
in the history of the animal. 

The plication of the margin is also a very variable feature ; for 
whilst some of the discs are very deeply lobed and divided, others, 
generally those of smaller size, are only slightly crenulated, and the 
peripheral edge shows little tendency to duplication. The edges are 
often ragged and grooved, owing to the breaking away of the external 
annular septum, whilst the lateral walls are left standing. Wherever 
the peripheral wall is fractured, the annular space it inclosed is seen to 
be completely filled with young shells in the earliest stages of develop- 
ment, as shown in fig. 2. These, however, are not confined to the 
outermost circlet. If a horizontal section of the dise be made no 
less than five or six of the outer annuli may often be found more 
or less closely packed with these little bodies (fig. 3). It was 
previously known that the later chambers of this variety of Orbitolites 
were not regularly subdivided into chamberlets on the normal] plan,* 
but the explanation which could only be conjectured is now obvious. 

The embryo shells correspond exactly with what is termed by 
Carpenter the “ primitive disc ” or “ nucleus” of the typical Orbitolctes 
complanata. They are compressed discs generally rounded, often 
~ nearly circular, in outline, but sometimes slightly irregular, or even 
subangular (figs. 4 -7). Their diameter ranges from 1/60 to 1/30 in. 
(0°4 mm. to U'8 mm.), their thickness averaging about 1/100 in. 
(0°25 mm.). The lateral surfaces are flat or somewhat convex, seldom 
perfectly even, but more frequently marked by slight irregular eleva- 
tions and depressions (figs. 4, 5). The peripheral edge is rounded 
and presents either one or two rows of perforations placed at tolerably 
regular intervals on a slightly elevated ridge (figs. 6, 7). The orifices 
are sometimes situated in small nipple-like protuberances. The 


* This is well shown in the drawing of a transverse section in the ‘Report on 
the Challenger Foraminifera,’ pl. xvi., fig. 11. 
3B 2 


696 Transactions of the Society. 


interior invariably presents the same general characters—a primordial 
chamber of relatively small dimensions, and a curved shelly process 
springing from its base—apparently the incomplete septum of a 
second segment; the whole inclosed in a large “ circumambient 
chamber” (figs. 8, 11). I have not in any case observed the com- 
mencement of the annular mode of growth characteristic of the mature 
shell, until after the embryo has left the parent. Subsequently the 
peripheral apertures form the connection with the first annulus of 
chamberlets (fig. 9); and from this point it is easy to follow the 
successive stages of the growth of the test. Fig. 10 is drawn from a 
young specimen consisting of the embryo or “ primitive disc” and 
three annuli of chamberlets, the test laid open so as to show the 
interior. 

One interesting point remains. There is no difficulty, as has just 
been remarked, in tracing the growth of the shell, by the addition of 
successive annuli of gradually increasing thickness, until the full size 
of the adult Orbitolites complanata is reached. The relatively large 
“ primitive disc” remains a conspicuous feature throughout, as shown 
in almost every published drawing illustrating the structure of the 
complex type of the genus. But the adult specimens under notice— 
that is to say, the parent shells—present no such feature. ‘The draw- 
ings, figs. 13, 14, represent horizontal and transverse sections of the 
central portions of two of these large viviparous specimens, the 
magnifying power employed being the same as in figs. 4-12. By the 
horizontal section it will be seen that, in place of the “ primitive disc,” 
the centre is occupied by a multitude of small chamberlets arranged on 
no very regular plan ; and what is more remarkable is the fact revealed 
by the transverse section, namely, that at its centre the adult test is 
scarcely 1/300 in. (0°08 mm.) in thickness, or only about one-third 
of the thickness of an embryo of average size. ‘he ‘Challenger’ 
specimens of the same form, such as I have examined, though more 
stoutly built, show the same absence of a “primitive disc.” In one 
or two instances I have observed at the centre of the shell a small 
convexity, not unlike the structure referred to in point of size and 
outline; but further examination showed that in every case it 
consisted of a labyrinthic mass of little chamberlets, to all appearance 
of exogenous growth. 

We are indebted mainly to the labours of two French naturalists, 
MM. Munier-Chalmas and Schlumberger, for a knowledge of the 
existence of a sort of ‘ dimorphism ” amongst the Foraminifera. They 
have shown that in certain families, perhaps in all, but notably in the 
Miliolide, each species presents itself in two forms; one of which, 
called by them “Form A,” has a large primordial chamber and 
consists altogether of but few segments; whilst the other, ‘ Form B,” 
has a small initial chamber, and the succeeding segments are relatively 
numerous. ‘Two possible explanations are indicated by the authors, 
the one which they prefer is based upon the supposition that “each 
individual passes through two successive phases, the first of which would 


Reproductive Condition of Orbitolites, &c. By H. B. Brady. 697 


correspond to Form A, but that after a process of resorption of the 
large central chamber, the animal constructs a series of new chambers 
corresponding to Form B.”* ‘The authors further state, as an 
objection to the alternative theory of the distinct origin of the two 
forms, that they “ have not been able to discover amongst the numerous 
species they have studied any very young individuals of Form B.” 
The case before us, in which the young individuals taken from the 
parent shell exhibit the large initial chambers, whilst in the parent 
itself the centre is occupied by numerous chambers of relatively minute 
size, gives great weight to the former explanation. 

The question naturally arises, whether the embryonic forms which 
have been described are the result of sexual intercourse of any kind, 
or simply of a process of gemmation. With reference to the “di- 
morphism” of the Foraminifera, Mr. Geddes has suggested that “ the 
better grown and less modified” shell “ with fewer partitions and a 
‘grand loge central’ seems distinctly the anabolic or female, the other, 
since smaller and more modified, the male; ” ¢ but as yet this view is 
founded on analogy rather than direct observation. The probabilities 
in the present case are in favour of simple gemmation, and, if this be 
correct, the mere fact of the presence of very young shells in the 
manner described has no bearing either way on the question of sex. 
On the other hand, it must be admitted that the change of the 
individual from one form to the other, if clearly established, would 
render the sexual theory superfluous. 

It is possible that the same explanation may serve both for the 
plicate margin of the discs and the production of large broods of 
young individuals, and that both may be due to redundant growth 
consequent upon exceptionally favourable external conditions and a 
plentiful supply of food. 

It is to be regretted that none of the specimens were preserved in 
alcohol. Verworn has recently shown that the presence of a nucleus 
is essential to even simple, scarcely more than vegetative, processes 
amongst the Foraminifera,t and it would have been interesting to 
trace the relation, which may be assumed to exist, between the 
numerous minute nuclei, found by Biitschli in the plasma of the 
peripheral chambers of the Orbitolite§ and the young individuals 
which make their appearance in such abundance in the same portion 
of the test. ; 


* Comptes Rendus, xcvi. (1883) p. 1601. 

+ Proc. Roy. Soc. Kdinb., xiii. (1886) p. 931. The idea originated with de la 
Harpe, but does not appear to have been seriously entertained by him. 

t Zeitschr. fiir Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 455-470, pl. xxxii. 

§ Morph. Jahrb., xi. (1885) p. 80, &c., pl. vii. figs. 1, 4. 


698 Transactions of the Society. 


X.—Notices of New Infusoria Flagellata from American Fresh 
Waters. 


By Aurrep C. Sroxes, M.D. 


(Reud 9th May, 1888.) 
Piate XI. 


Mastigameba flexuosa, sp. nov. Fig. 1. 


ExtENDED body elongate-ovate or sublinear, from five to six times as 
long as broad ; the anterior extremity obtusely pointed ; ee a 
numerous, their length equalling or exceeding the breadth of the body, 
smooth, tapering, seldom branching, those of the posterior extremity 
similar to the lateral ones, or fine, filamentous and short, or both; 
the posterior border also often emitting a broad, irregular, wave-like 
pseudopodium ; anterior extremity usually exhibiting a lateral, ante- 
riorly directed pseudopodium on each side of the flagelliferous apex ; 
endoplasm of the pseudopodia containing many short, fine, colourless, 
rod-like structures; endoplasm of the body eoarsely granular, fre- 
quently inclosing numerous greenish-yellow food-masses, the granules 
entering the pseudopodic extensions for only a short distance ; flagellum 
about one-half the length of the body; contractile vesicle apparently 
single, near the posterior extremity; nucleus (?) subpyriform, close to 
the anterior extremity. Length of body 1/150 in. Habitat: Pond 
water. 

The movements are slow so far as progression is concerned, but 
quite active in connection with change of form, the soft body bending 
on itself, shortening, lengthening, and undergoing various other 
changes of shape with considerable rapidity. Excrementitious par- 
ticles are extruded with some force, apparently from any portion of 
the surface. 


Cercomonas truncata, sp. nov. Figs. 2-6. 


Body ovate or elongate flask-shaped, soft, flexible and changeable 
im form, especially posteriorly; length from two to four times the 
breadth ; dorsal surface rounded, the ventral flattened, sometimes 
slightly concave; posterior extremity usually rounded, the anterior 
narrow and truncate; posterior appendage trailing, stout, exceeding 
the body in length, largest near the body, tapering and changeable in 


EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI. 


Fig. 1.—WMastigameba fleruosa. Fig. 18.—Heteromita nasuta. 
», 2-6.—Cercomonas truncata. » 19.— ” parvifilum. 
> T— = heterofilum. » 20.—Tetramitus frondarius. 
» &— “a lapsa. *,, 21.—Hexamita truncata. 
» o— a undulans. »» 22.—Atractonema pusilla. 
10-12. = mutabilis, » 23.—Hymenomonas flava. 
» 13.—Heteromita granulifera. » 24.—Hymenomonas fusiformis. 
ULE amen tremula. 5 25.—Zygoselmis obovata. 
» 16— i stagnatilis, »» 26.—Sterromonas parvula. 


» 17i— Z Sphagni. 3 27.—Anisonema obliqua. 


JOURN.R.MICR.SOC.1888.P1 XI 


paren aaah emo 


a ES 


@ 
a 


MG 


27 


West, Newman &Co hth. 


New American Infusoria Flagellata. 


New American Infusoria. By Dr. A. C. Stokes. 699 


thickness and contour, the anterior flagellum short, fine, originating 
from the left-hand angle of the truncate frontal margin, its length not 
exceeding one-half that of the body, its movements not rapid; con- 
tractile vesicle single, located near the posterior extremity ; endoplasm 
often inclosing numerous granules. Length of body from 1/4500 to 
1/2250 in. Habitat: Standing pond water with Sphagnum. Move- 
ments slowly gliding. 


Cercomonas heterofilum, sp. nov. Fig. 7. 


Body ovate, obovate, or suboval, soft and changeable in shape, 
about twice as long as broad; anterior border rounded; posterior 
margin tapering and obtusely pointed; anterior vibratile flagellum 
about one and one-half times as long as the body, the trailing caudal 
prolongation subequal to the zooid in length; nucleus apparently 
subcentral ; contractile vesicles two, one near the posterior extremity 
close to the left-hand body margin, the other near the centre of the 
right-hand side; endoplasm finely granular. Length of body 
1/2250 in. Habitat: Standing pond water with aquatic plants. 


Cercomonas lapsa, sp. nov. Fig. 8. 


Body obovate, about three times as long as broad, rounded and 
widest anteriorly, tapering to the posterior extremity, where it is 
continued as a flexible tail-like prolongation equalling or exceeding 
the body in length, and not rarely extending and retracting a fine, 
flexible filament; anterior flagellum not equalling the body in length; 
contractile vesicle apparently single, subcentrally located ; endoplasm 
finely granular and occasionally inclosing several small, dark-bordered 
particles which change their position with the motion of the sarcode ; 
zooid’s movements slow and smoothly gliding. Length of body, 
1/2250 in. Habitat: Pond water with decaying Sphagnum. 


Cercomonas undulans, sp. nov. Fig. 9. 


Body elongate obovate, from five to six times as long as broad, 
much depressed, very soft, flexible and changeable in shape ; posterior 
border tapering and terminating in a fine, flexible, tail-like trailing 
appendage about one-third as long as the zooid; anterior border 
rounded ; vibratile flagellum slender, about one-third as long as the 
zooid ; anterior extremity expanded, flattened, constricted behind the 
rounded frontal border; contractile vesicle single, near the posterior 
extremity, close to one lateral border. Length of body 1/1800 in. 
Habitat: An infusion of decaying Sphagnum. Movements by lateral 
flexure and undulations of the soft body. 


Cercomonas mutabilis, sp. nov. Figs. 10, 11, 12. 


Body obovate, soft, flexible and changeable in shape, twice as long 
as broad, the anterior border rounded ; the posterior extremity pointed, 
soft and plastic, emitting one or more short, lobate, sarcodic extensions, 
or one or more long, irregularly linear pseudopodic prolongations which 


700 Transactions of the Society. 


are quickly withdrawn ; anterior flagellum scarcely equalling the body 
in length, apparently arising from the lower surface a short distance 
behind the frontal margin; caudal flagelliform appendage trailing, 
not equalling the body in length, constant and unchangeable in shape ; 
contractile vesicle double, spherical, close to the frontal border ; nucleus 
spherical, subcentrally situated; endoplasm granular, often inclosing 
numerous yellowish food-particles; excrementitious matters extruded 
near the posterior extremity, apparently from the right-hand side 
only. Length of body 1/1500 in. Habitat: Standing pond water. 


Heteromita granulifera, sp. nov. Fig. 13. 


Body subspherical, smooth, slightly changeable in shape; endo- 
plasm often densely crowded with comparatively coarse, dark-bordered 
granules; nucleus and contractile vesicle obscured by the endoplasmic 
granules; flagella slender, originating close together at the centre of 
the frontal border, the anterior subequal to the body in length, the 
trailing appendage from four to five times as long as the zooid; anal 
aperture near the posterior extremity. Length of body 1/3000 in. 
Habitat: An infusion of decaying Sphagnum with pond-water. 

This differs from H. globosa (Stein) 8. K., in its somewhat smaller 
size, its smooth surface, and especially in the comparative length of 
the flagella, and their point of origin, these appendages in H. globosa 
being subequal in length, and arising from a point on the anterior 
portion of the ventral surface. 


Heteromita tremula, sp. nov. Figs. 14, 15. 


Body elongate, subcylindrical or subfusiform, from four to five 
times as long as broad, not conspicuously changeable in shape, usually 
slightly curved toward the ventral surface ; both extremities obtusely 
pointed, the anterior somewhat the narrower; flagella unequal in 
length and size, the anterior stout, about one-half as long as the body, 
the posterior, or trailing, appendage slender, arising at some distance 
from the anterior border, twice as long as the body; nucleus appa- 
rently subcentral; contractile vesicle near the anterior extremity. 
Length of body 1/4500 to 1/3000 in. Habitat: Standing pond 
water. Movements by rapid lateral undulations, with a sudden 
reversal of the direction of the zooid’s forward progression. 


Heteromita stagnatilis, sp. nov. Fig. 16. 


Body cylindrical, three times as long as broad, not noticeably 
changeable in shape. the surface smooth; posterior margin rounded ; 
anterior border convexly truncate; flagella diverse in length, ori- 
ginating close together at the frontal margin, the anterior or vibratile 
appendage less than one-half as long as the body, the trailing about 
twice the body in length; contractile vesicles several, scattered ; 
nucleus subcentrally located. Length of body 1/2250 in. Habitat: 
Standing pond water, with Lemna and other aquatic plants. 


New American Infusoria. By Dr. A. C. Stokes. 701 


Heteronuta Sphagni, sp. nov. Fig. 17. 


Body elongate ovate, smooth, about four times as long as broad, 
somewhat depressed; anterior border acutely pointed, the posterior 
rounded, the posterior region flattened; one lateral border convex, 
the opposite flattened, nearly straight; flagella subequal in size and 
length, each about twice as long as the body, inserted at the anterior 
apex of the zooid ; contractile vesicle single, conspicuous, situated in 
the posterior body-half, near the flattened lateral border; nucleus 
represented by a circular light spot near the posterior extremity, in 
the median line. Length of body 1/750 in. Habitat: Standing 
pond water, with Sphagnum. 


Heteromita nasuta, sp. nov. Fig. 18. 


Body ovate, smooth, somewhat depressed, very slightly change- 
able in form, about twice as long as broad, the posterior extremity 
rounded, the anterior produced into a stout, undulating flagellum less 
than one-half as long as the zooid; posterior or trailing flagellum 
slender, about twice as long as the body, arising from the ventral 
surface at some distance from the frontal border; contractile vesicle 
apparently single, situated near the anterior extremity ; nucleus pre- 
sumably subcentrally located. Length of body 1/4500 in. Habitat: 
Standing pond water, with decaying Sphagnum. 

This form is readily recognizable by the peculiar and characteristic 
condition of the anterior flagellum. This appendage is thick, stout, 
and apparently a continuation of the apical extremity of the body. It 
presents much the appearance of a comparatively robust, vibratile, 
proboscidiform prolongation. In a few instances it has been observed 
to become thickened by a temporary outflow of sarcode from the 
body. 


Heteronuta parvifilum, sp. nov. Fig. 19. 


Body ovate, smooth, slightly changeable in form, less than twice 
as long as broad, the posterior extremity rounded, the anterior obtusely 
pointed ; flagella subequal, less than one-half as long as the body ; 
contractile vesicles two, situated side by side, at the anterior extremity ; 
nucleus broadly ovate or subspherical, subcentrally located ; endoplasm 
granular, especially at the posterior extremity. Length of the body 
1/3000 to 1/2250 in. Habitat: A vegetable infusion. 


Tetramitus frondarius, sp. nov. Fig. 20. 


Body very soft and changeable in form, normally elongate, sub- 
cylindrical, about three times as long as broad, the posterior border 
obtusely pointed, the anterior truncate and often centrally emar- 
ginate; flagella in length somewhat exceeding the width of the body, 
originating close together near the centre of the frontal margin; 
nucleus apparently subspherical, situated in the anterior body-half; 


702 Transactions of the Society. 


contractile vesicles two, small, one placed on each side near the anterior 
extremity ; endoplasm inclosing numerous dark-bordered corpuscles. 
Length of body 1/640 in. Habitat: An infusion of dead leaves. 


Hewxamita truncata, sp. nov. Fig. 21. 


Body broadly obovate, soft and changeable in shape, less than 
twice as long as broad; frontal border rounded, the posterior ex- 
tremity usually constricted and prolonged as a short, somewhat 
flattened extension with subparallel lateral borders, and a truncate 
posterior margin ; anterior flagella four, arising from the body at some 
distance from the anterior border, each extended rigidly at right angles 
with the surface, the distal extremities more or less curved ; posterior 
trailing flagella two, less than three times as long as the body, each 
arising from a lateral border of the posterior truncate prolongation ; 
contractile vesicles two, placed near the origin of the posterior body 
extension; endoplasm granular; movements rotatory on the longi- 
tudinal axis. Length of body 1/2250 in. Habitat: Standing water, 
with Sphagnum. 


Petalomonas orbicularis, sp. nov. 


Body suborbicular or broadly ovate, the length but slightly ex- 
ceeding the breadth, much depressed, the lateral borders curved 
toward the ventral aspect, so that the dorsal surface is evenly convex, 
the ventral concave; lateral and anterior borders rounded, the anterior 
slightly emarginate centrally, the posterior extremity rounded or 
slightly tapering and obtusely pointed; flagellum subequal to the 
body in length; oral aperture distinct, apparently followed by a short 
pharyngeal passage; nucleus spherical, subcentrally located; con- 
tractile vesicle single, placed in the median line in close proximity to 
the pharyngeal passage; endoplasm often inclosing numerous dark- 
bordered, probably amylaceous corpuscles, which slowly change their 
position. Length of body 1/1500 in.; greatest width 1/1285 in. 
Habitat: Standing pond water, with Sphagnum. Movements rotatory 
on the longitudinal axis. 


Atractonema pusilla, sp. nov. Fig. 22. 


Body subcylindrical, from 3-5 times as long as broad, curved 
toward the lower or ventral surface, the dorsal aspect evenly convex, 
the opposite or ventral border concave, the surfaces longitudinally 
traversed by from 6-8 straight or slightly oblique furrows; frontal 
margin slightly emarginate, the posterior border rounded ; flagellum 
subequal to the body in length ; endoplasm colourless, often inclosing 
near the extremities of the body several dark-bordered, probably 
amylaceous corpuscles; contractile vesicle single, near the centre of 
one lateral border ; pharyngeal passage small but distinct. Length 
of the body 1/1000-1/1200 in. Movements rotatory on the longi- 
tudinal axis. Habitat: Standing water with decaying Sphagnum. 
Reproduction by longitudinal fission. 


New American Infusoria. By Dr. A. C. Stokes. 703 


Hymenonema (ipnv, membrane ; vnwa, thread), gen. nov. 


Animalcules free-swimming, inhabiting a flexible, membranous 
lorica, and inclosing two laterally developed pigment-bands ; flagellum 
single; no eye-spot. Habitat: Fresh water. 

The presence of but one flagellum is the only distinguishing 
feature between the animalcules of this generic group and the 
Hymenomonas of Stein. The lorica apparently possesses the same 
peculiarity of flexibility and the power to somewhat change its contour 
as are possessed by Hymenomonas. 


Hymenonema Sphagni, sp. nov. 


Lorica ovate, flexible and slowly changeable in form, often less 
than twice as long as broad, the entire surface covered with rounded, 
shallow depressions ; inclosed zooid entirely filling the cavity of the 
lorica; colour-bands yellowish-brown, broad, almost meeting in the 
centre of the body ; flagellum single, shorter than the lorica, its distal 
end usually arcuately curved; contractile vesicle single or double, 
situated at the anterior extremity; a refractive corpuscle usually 
conspicuously developed in the anterior body-half, near the centre of 
one lateral border. Length of lorica 1/750 in. Habitat: Pond 
water with Sphagnum. 


Hymenomonas flava, sp. nov. Fig. 23. 


Lorica ovate, punctate, twice as long as broad, very slightly 
flexible, the posterior extremity rounded, the anterior prolonged into 
a short, inconspicuous, neck-like extension, the frontal margin trun- 
eate; body filling the entire lorica except the neck-like prolongation ; 
endoplasm yellow, inclosing numerous granules; contractile vesicle 
apparently single, antero-terminal ; flagella not equalling the lorica 
in length, usually only one-fourth as long. Length of lorica 
1/1125in. Habitat: Standing pond water, with decaying Sphagnum. 


Hymenomonas fusiformis, sp. nov. Fig. 24. 


Lorica subfusiform, less than four times as long as broad, widest 
centrally, the anterior border pointed, the posterior extremity obtusely 
and narrowly rounded; the body usually filling the entire lorica, 
but often somewhat removed from both extremities of the sheath; 
endoplasm yellow; contractile vesicle double, small, near the anterior 
extremity ; nucleus obscure, apparently subcentrally located ; flagella 
about one-half as long as the lorica. Length 1/690 in. Habitat: 
Standing pond water, with Sphagnum. Movements rotatory on the 
longitudinal axis. 


Zygoselmis obovata, sp. nov. Fig. 25. 


Body normally elongate obovate, about seven times as long as 
broad; anterior extremity obtusely pointed, the posterior rounded ; 
flagella diverse, the longer subequal to the extended body in length, 


704 Transactions of the Society. 


shorter from one-third to one-fourth as long ; contractile vesicle near 
the frontal border; nucleus ovate, subcentrally placed; endoplasm 
inclosing numerous dark-bordered corpuscles, usually aggregated at 
the anterior extremity, thus leaving the posterior region clear and 
transparent. Length of body 1/428 in. Habitat: A standing 
vegetable infusion in fresh water. 


Sterromonas parvula, sp. nov. Fig. 26. 


Body elongate ovate, somewhat gibbous, about twice as long as 
broad, the posterior extremity rounded, the anterior obliquely 
truncate, slightly excavate; flagella rising from near the centre of 
the frontal margin, close together, the longer about one-half as long 
as the body, held stiffly in advance, the distal extremity arcuately 
curved; the shorter flagellum extremely small, about one-third, or 
less, as long as the primary appendage; contractile vesicles two or 
three, near the anterior extremity, two near the frontal border (one on 
each side), a third often developed near one lateral margin; nucleus (?) 
large, ovate, subcentral; endoplasm granular posteriorly. Length of 
body 1/2250 in. Habitat: A vegetable infusion. 


Anisonema obliqua, sp. nov. Fig. 27. 


Body ovate, about twice as long as broad, the anterior extremity 
narrowed, obtusely pointed, the posterior obliquely truncate and 
emarginate; dorsal surface smooth, convex, the ventral concave ; 
flagella diverse in length, arising near together at the anterior 
extremity, the vibratile short, the trailing rather less than twice as 
long as the zooid; contractile vesicles two, one on each side of the 
median line near the anterior extremity; nucleus subcentral ; 
pharyngeal passage obscure; endoplasm usually granular posteriorly. 
Length of body 1/1500 in. Habitat: Standing pond water. 


9705. } 


SUMMARY 


OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


ZOO L.0: Ga¥e A) Ne D::4 BeOVl sANaY: 
(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), 


MICROSCOPY, &c., 
INCLUDING ORIGINAL COMMUNICATIONS FROM FELLOWS AND’ OTHERS.* 


ZOOLOGY. 
A. VERTEBRATA :—Embryology, Histology, and General. 


a. Embryology.t 


Formation of Polar Globules in Animal Ova.t—Prof. A. Weis- 
mann and Mr. C. Ischikawa have investigated the history of the polar 
globules in various parthenogenetic ova. It will be remembered that, in 
1885, the former of these writers discovered that a polar globule was 
formed in the parthenogenetic egg of Polyphemus oculus ; the conversion 
of the germinal vesicle into the globule, the cellular nature of the latter, 
and its later division into two cells were observed, as well as the fate of 
the portion of the nucleus which remained in the egg, and which became 
the cleavage-nucleus. An account is now given of the fourteen cases 
recently observed, chiefly by the authors of this paper, in which it is 
certain that parthenogenetic ova give rise to one polar globule only; 
among these are Leptodora hyalina, Sida crystallina, Cypris reptans, 
Conochilus volvox, and an Aphis (Blochmann). 

A list is given of a number of cases in which two primary globules 
have been observed, and this extends from Ccelenterates to Mammals; it 
would have been much longer had it not been confined to a record of the 
cases in which the describer distinctly states that the globules have been 
successively given off from the nucleus of theegg. In afew cases where 
sexual reproduction occurs, it has been stated that only one globule has 
been observed ; but there is only one case, that of Gonothyreea Loveni, 
in which the observer (in that case Bergh) remarks definitely that there 
is never more than one globule. It is to be noted, however, that Bergh 
himself states that the ova were difficult to isolate, and the finer processes 
could only be seen with great difficulty through the walls of the 
gonozooid. 

If we confine ourselves to observations that may be certainly trusted, 


* The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial “we,” and they do 
not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers noted, 
nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of this part of 
the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually published, and to 
deseribe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, &c., which are either new or have 
not been previously described in this country. 

’ + This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so called, 
but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, and Reproduction, and allied 
subjects. 

t Ber. Naturf. Gesell. Freiburg i. B., iii. (1886) pp. 1-44 (4 pls.). 


706 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


we find that in sixty-six species of animals the eggs gave off two primary 
polar globules, and that for all these the necessity for fertilization was 
certain, and in most of them fertilization was observed. On the other 
hand we know of fourteen species, the ova of which undoubtedly pro- 
duced only one polar globule, and these were without exception partheno- 
genetic. We cannot, therefore, but conclude that eggs that require to 
be fertilized form two polar globules, and parthenogenetic eggs one. 
The significance of these facts has already been pointed out by Prof. 
Weismann.* 


Origin and Significance of the so-called free Nuclei in the 
Nutrient Yolk of Bony Fishes.t—Prof. C. K. Hoffmann has a paper, 
largely critical and controversial, in which he deals with the observations 
of embryologists who have treated of the matter since the time when 
he asserted that these nuclei arise directly from the first cleavage- 
nucleus. 


Resemblance of Ovarian Ova and the Primitive Foraminifera.t 
—Prof. J. A. Ryder remarks that upon cutting sections of nearly mature 
ovarian ova with their investing membrane, zona radiata, in place, it 
was found that in quite a number of cases fine protoplasmic processes or 
pseudopods extended from the peripheral layer of protoplasm of the egg, 
through its capsule or zona, and joining the cells of the granulosa or 
discus proligerus. This arrangement reminded one forcibly of the 
filamentous pseudopods extended from a Heliozoon, or of the slender 
pseudopods extended through the perforations in the walls of the single 
chambers of Globigerina. This resemblance is all the more suggestive 
if one will compare a section of one of the chambers of a Globigerina 
made through the calcareous shell and its contained protoplasm with 
a similar section through the ovum of the Gar pike, where the zona is 
formed of pillars of homogeneous matter. 

Such prolongations of pseudopods through the investing zona radiata 
in the case of many species of animal forms show fairly well that this 
must be the principal means by which new matter is taken up from 
without and incorporated, as there is no direct extension of the vascular 
system into the egg by which it can take up nutriment. 

It is thus seen that the early stages of the growing ovum not only 
resemble some of the lower forms of Heliozoa and Foraminifera as 
respects the grade of their morphological differentiation, but also as to 
the mode in which they exhibit their nutritive or physiological activities. 
This resemblance is still further heightened if a form like Arbulina is 
compared with certain stages of the development of ova. It is thus seen 
that in many cases the ovarian germ, at least, passes through a stage 
which may be morphologically as well as physiologically compared with 
some of the lowest grades of the Protozoa. 


Inversion of the Germinal Layers in the Shrew.$—Herr J. Bich- 
ringer reports the results of some studies on the development of the 
germinal layers in Arvicola amphibius Desm. He gives a short ei: 
of previous investigations. 

He begins with the 42-cell stage, a roundish mass without segmenta- 


* See this Journal, 1887, p. 934. 

¢ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 517-48 (1 pl.). 

t Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., 1888, p. 73. 

§ Arch. f. Anat. u. Physiol. (Anat. Abth.), 1888, pp. 279-86 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 107 


tion cavity, and surrounded by a zona pellucida. The next stage, with 
64 cells, is also without distinct cavity, and is somewhat elongated and 
curved. When segmentation is complete, a simple layer of cells with 
large nuclei is seen close under the zona pellucida. This corresponds to 
what Rauber described in other rodents as the “‘ Deckschicht.” It incloses 
a cavity filled with fluid, in which lies the mass of germinal cells. In 
the latter hints of separation into ectodermic and endodermic layers were 
discernible. 

In the next stage the endoderm cells begin to broaden out as a lining 
of Rauber’s sheath, while the ectoderm les as a connected mass at one 
pole. The modification of the free germinal mass into a germinal 
cylinder closely united with the uterus, the invagination of the germinal 
layers, the changes in Rauber’s sheath, &c., are discussed, and Biehringer’s 
results corroborate those of Kupffer and Selenka. The inversion of the 
germinal layers in rodents is essentially similar in all forms yet inves- 
tigated, but the genera vary in details. Cavia stands by itself; Mus 
musculus, M. sylvaticus, and M. decumanus form a group; while the 
inversion in Arvicola amphibius most closely resembles that of A. arvalis. 


Spermatogenesis of Mammals.*—Prof. V. v. Ebner calls attention 
to a research by Prof. E. Sertolit on the spermatogenesis of the rat, 
which appears to have been overlooked by many. Division was observed 
only in the movable cells, and that always in definite periodic order, as 
von Ebner has corroborated. The ‘‘ nematoblasts” or sperm-cells have at 
first nuclei which remain unstained by safranin, and only gradually 
exhibit this property. 

Spermatogenesis in Guinea-pig.{—Sig. F. Sanfelice has studied the 
regeneration of the testicular cells in the guinea-pig. The testicle 
regenerates, not from the interstitial substance, but from the pre-existent 
epithelium. The germinal cells (“ cellules fixes” of Sertoli, “ cellules de 
soutien ” of Merkel) take part in this regenerative process. 


Irritability of Spermatozoa of Frog.s—Dr. J. Massart gives an 
account of some observations made with the object of demonstrating the 
irritability of the spermatozoa of the frog. They are preparatory toa 
future demonstration of how sensitiveness to touch aids in the penetration 
of the spermatozoon into the ovum. 


Development of the Axolotl.|-MM. F. Houssay and Bataillon give 
an account of the formation of the gastrula, of the mesoblast, and of the 
notochord in the Axolotl. About twenty hours after deposition the egg 
consists of a sphere with two poles; one is black and made up of small 
cells, the other is a clear grey, and is formed of larger cells. Between 
these there is a segmentation cavity, but there is not yet any radical dis- 
tinction between the two kinds of cells. The epiblast is, indeed, derived 
from both the large and the small cells, the whole peripheral layer of the 
egg differentiating and separating itself from the subjacent cells. After 
a little the epiblast divides into two layers; this is in accordance with 
the views of Scott and Osborn, who regard the possession of a unilaminate 
epiblast as a primitive condition among the Urodela. It is clear from 


* Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 424-5. 

+ Rend. R. Istit. Lomb., xviii. fase. 16, and Arch. Ital. Biol., vii. (1888) p- 369, 
¢ Arch. Ital. Biol., ix. (1888) pp. 425-6. Rev. Internaz. Napoli, 1887, | pl. 

§ Bull. Acad. R. Sci. Belg., lvii. (1888) pp. 750-4. 

|| Comptes Rendus, cvil. (1888) pp. 434-6. 


708 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


this description that it would be inexact to speak of epiboly in connec- 
tion with the egg of the Axolotl. While this differentiation has been 
going on the gastrula has begun to be invaginated ; the first sign of this is 
the appearance of a broken line; sections show that this line is a groove, 
and that it exists among cells not yet differentiated, or, in other words, 
at the dense pole of the egg. The line takes the form of a horse-shoe, 
and the two branches meet. In this way an invagination is produced ; 
the segmentation cavity becomes reduced, and another cavity—which 
will become the mesenteron—appears, and begins to put itself into rela- 
tion with the invagination. The differences between this mode of 
invagination and that which obtains in the Anura are pointed out. 

As there is at first no mesoblast along the axial line of the body, it 
would seem that the notochord must be developed at the expense of the 
hypoblast; and this is the view of all embryologists who have written 
on the question, with the exception of Goette. But, a little later, the 
medullary plates rise, and leave between them a rounded pad. The 
interior of the egg is the seat of active work, and the result is that the 
mesoblast forms a continuous layer which passes below the axis. The 
authors, therefore, are of Goette’s opinion that the notochord of the 
Axolotl is of mesoblastic origin. To avoid any verbal dispute, in face 
of the fact that the mesoblast itself is derived from the hypoblast, they 
definitely state that the vitelline cells which give rise to the notochord 
are first organized in the mesoblast, and do not form it directly. 

In another communication * the authors state that in the segmenta- 
tion of the egg there are 2, 4, 8, 24, 32, cells; it was difficult to follow 
the segmentation later on. As to the fate of the blastopore which is so 
various among the Urodela, they find that in the Axolotl it remains 
always open, and becomes the definite anus; there is no neurenteric 
canal. 


Development of the Lamprey.|—Herr C. Kupffer reports the results 
of his further study of the development of the lamprey. The material 
was the result of artificial fertilization. Some ova kept at Kénigsberg, 
at a temperature of 8-10° C., developed into larve on the 16-17th day, 
while others kept at Naples did the same in 8 days. In both cases the 
larve, when liberated, had reached the same stage, and measured 3 mm. 

In the formation of the blastoderm there is not an “ overgrowth ” of 
one half of the ovum by the elements of the other. The outer layer of 
morula cells acquires epithelial characters ; this begins, not at the ger- 
minal or animal pole, but at the region which is subsequently dorsal. 
This region appears along with the formation of a special keel or em- 
bryonic shield. Gastrulation begins before the epithelial blastoderm has 
quite surrounded the ovum. The blastopore appears at the posterior 
border of the embryonic shield. 

The archenteron arises as a closed sac, with its dorsal wall directly 
in contact with the ectoderm, though between them a group of smaller 
cells is subsequently insinuated. These arise from the cells of the in- 
vaginated margin, and are not to be regarded as mesodermic. They serve 
for the caudal extension of the dorsal axial structures, and represent the 
terminal bud in Teleostei, the sickle or terminal pad of Amniota. 
Herr Kupffer proposes the term Teloblast. 

In the lamprey no neurenteric canal is formed, the blastopore is not 


* Loe. cit., pp. 282-4. + SB. K. Bayer. Akad. Wiss., i. (1888) pp. 71-9. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 709 


closed, but remains as anus. The teloblast lies in front of or dorsal to 
the blastopore, the reverse of its position when neurenteric canal or 
corresponding strandis formed. ‘The teloblast is not the primitive streak, 
but corresponds only to its posterior end, and possibly also to the pole- 
cells of the mesoderm described by Hatschek in Amphioxus. 

The spinal cord and notochord are formed together from a simul- 
taneous activity of both germinal layers, resulting in the development of 
a massive double keel before alluded to. The separation and further 
development of both axial organs are then described. 

The mesoderm appears differently in head and trunk. In the former, 
celomic diverticula are formed as in Amphioxus. In the latter the two 
external layers of reserve yolk-cells form first the dorsal blocks, and then 
the lateral plates, the somatic before the splanchnic. The ccelomic cleft 
appears at the same time as fore-kidney and heart. The pronephric duct 
is ectodermic. 

The rest of the memoir is mainly devoted to a description of the 
development of the nerves. The optic nerve is an exception to the usual 
rule in this, that its ganglion appears much earlier than all the rest, and 
arises not from a peripheral portion of the epidermis, but from the median 
keel—that is, from the common origin for brain, spinal cord, and this pair 
of ganglia. The branchial nerves form a second series, and the dorsal 
spinal nerves a third. 

An anterior endodermic diverticulum is protruded between notochord 
and epidermis dorsalwards to the brain. It forms a narrow median por- 
tion and two lateral pockets. The former represents the well-known 
diverticulum between hypophysis and notochord; the latter form the 
paired pre-oral head-cavities, which Kupffer regards as homologous with 
the anterior endodermice diverticula in Amphioxus. 


Partial Impregnation.*—Prof. A. Weismann and Mr. C. Ischikawa 
report that on examining the sexual cells of certain species of Moina 
they found to their astonishment that those in which four segmental 
cells were already present still contained a sperm-cell. This was found, 
by further observation, to be a case of partial impregnation, only one of 
the first four segmental cells and not the entire egg-cell becoming united 
with the sperm-cell. In Moina paradoxa a spermatozoon penetrates 
into the region of the vegetative pole of the egg, immediately after its 
extrusion into the brood-chamber, where the egg is a naked sausage- 
shaped mass. The vitelline membrane then becomes formed and prevents 
the entrance of a second spermatozoon. The two polar bodies become 
constricted off, and the nucleus of the ovum migrates to the centre of the 
egg. The first two segmental cells appear, the sperm-cell always lying 
in the neighbourhood of the one which is nearest the vegetative pole, - 
without, however, becoming united with it. The four-cell stage follows, 
and the sperm-cell is now seen to exhibit amceboid movements, and to 
approach a segmental cell; fusion then follows and in the next following 
stage, that of eight segmental cells, no sperm-cell can any longer be 
seen in the egg. 

Since making these observations t the authors have found that, “in 
spite of the entire accuracy of our facts, we were mistaken as to the 


* Ber. Naturf. Gesell. Freiburg i. B., iv. (1888) p. 51. See Nature, xxxviii. 
(1888) p. 329. 


¢ Translated (from a proof) in Nature, xxxviii. (1888) pp. 329-30. 
1888. 3.0 


710 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


explanation of the phenomenon described”; the first segmentation 
nucleus is here, as in all sexual cells, formed by the fusion of the nucleus 
of the ovum with the sperm-nucleus, and the fusion of the two cells 
observed at a later stage is something additional to the ordinary impreg- 
nation. They urge a number of facts in extenuation. They propose to 
call this additional body the conjugating cell, and at present only apply 
to it the epithet of enigmatical. 


Hertwig’s ‘Human and Vertebrate Embryology.’*—In the earlier 
portion of Dr. O. Hertwig’s recently published text-book of vertebrate 
embryology, the sexual elements, the maturation of the egg, fertilization 
and cleavage, the development of the germinal layers, the blood and 
connective tissue and egg-envelopes of reptiles, birds, and mammals are 
described, and the formation of the organs from the epiblast, hypoblast, 
mesoblast,and mesenchyma. The genesis of the organs from the primary 
layers is admirably illustrated with special reference to its bearings on 
the anatomy of the adult human body, while enough data from com- 
parative embryology are laid under contribution to give the reader a fair 
knowledge of the wide application of the principles laid down. It is 
believed that this little work will be found of great value to the medical 
student in understanding many questions in pathology, physiology, the 
structure of the brain and the mechanism of the nervous system. 


8. Histology.f 


Cells and Tissues.t—Prof. F'. Leydig has published another sugges- 
tive essay, which is based on the study of the cells and tissues of Argulus. 

Tn dealing with cells he treats first of spongioplasm and hyaloplasm ; 
it may always be considered an advance in knowledge to be able to break 
up into structures parts of an organism which have been hitherto sup- 
posed to be of one and the same nature. This is now the case with the 
cell. In 1876 the author pointed out that there might be (a) concentrie 
striation of protoplasm, as in the ganglionic spheres of Insects and 
Annelids; or (8) striped differentiation, which might be longitudinal, 
transverse, or radial; or (y) there may be plexiform differentiation of 
the protoplasm, as in the cell-nuclei and blood-corpuscles of Triton. 

Tt is now generally recognized that there are in the cell-substance 
two substances; one of these forms a kind of network, and has been 
called the substantia opaca, the other lies in the interspaces and is soft 
and clear; it is the s. hyalina. With these the newer terms of spongio- 
plasm and hyaloplasm are synonymous. Leydig has also shown that 
these two parts play a definite réle in the conversion of the cells into 
tissues, and this has been confirmed by Rabl and by Sedgwick. Argulus 
is well adapted for the kind of investigations the author wished to 
undertake ; for not only the eggs, but also the large cells which belong 
to the fat-body, and, especially, the unicellular glands show the plexiform 
and radiate arrangement of the spongioplasm. The space around the 
nucleus was distinctly observed. In the large cells of the fat-body it 
was possible to see numerous nucleoli without any inclosing membrane. 


* Hertwig, O., ‘Lehrbuch der Entwickelungsgeschichte des Menschen u. der 
Wirtelthiere,’ 8vo, Jena, 1887-8, viii. and 507 pp. (figs.). Cf. Amer. Naturalist, xxii. 
(1888) pp. 179-82. 

+ This section is limited to papers relating to Cells and Fibres. 

t Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 254-9, 274-80, 309-15, 328-33. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. Faull 


Leydig knows of several cases in which whole cells have become cuticu- 
larized, and cites the jaws of Paludina, Ancylus, and Lymneus. 

In treating of the tissues, Prof. Leydig deals with some recent 
remarks of Dr. H. Hisig.. As to the mode of origin of the cuticular 
fringe, it is to be observed that, as long as the cell-substance was regarded 
as a homogeneous mass containing granules, the fringe could only be 
regarded as a secretion of the matrix-cells; but when the difference 
between hyaloplasm and spongioplasm was recognized, the question arose 
—Is the cuticle formed by the hyaloplasm only, or does the spongioplasm 
take any share in it? ‘The author believes that both take a part, but 
the cardinal point is that the cuticular substances are formed by the 
secretory and metamorphic activity of the matrix-cells. Hisig’s view 
that the cuticle is formed by agglomeration of rod-like structures formed 
by glandular cells may be shown to he erroneous by the following obser- 
vations :—In some German Gastropods peculiarly-formed corpuscles are 
to be found in the dermal glands, and the byssus, and the “bloom” on 
some shells, as well as the powder of some insects, are all formations of 
dermal glands, yet they never take any part in giving rise to the fibrous 
differentiation of the cuticle. 

Prof. Leydig is of opinion that cuticular tissue is allied to connective 
tissue. This view is based on a number of observations :— 

(1) The cuticular tissue forms the hard or skeletal parts of Arthro- 
pods (dermal carapace as well as skeletal parts), and represents therefore 
the tissue which takes its place in Vertebrates. 

2) In the form of their early development the cuticular tissue of an 
Arthropod and the connective tissue of a Vertebrate agree ; in both cases 
it consists of matrix-cells and an overlying layer of homogeneous sub- 
stance. Sarcolemma or neurilemma or the corium of a Batrachian larva 
present the same characters as the cuticular tissue of an Arthropod. 

(3) The cuticular tissue of the integument is in Arthropods con- 
nected uninterruptedly with the connective tissue of the interior of the 
body. 

(a) When the minute structure of cuticular tissue, especially that of 
the dermal carapace of Arthropoda, is compared with the connective 
tissue of Vertebrates, we find in both striated homogeneous layers and 
parts condensed into fibres, and in both cases there is a traversing system 
of lacune, clefts, and pore-canals. 

While some recent authors have taken different views as to the struc- 
ture of the dotted substance of Vertebrates from those held by Leydig, 
it has been a matter of satisfaction to him that the most exact (Nansen) 
holds his doctrine. He does not doubt that Nansen’s explanation of the 
dotted substance as a thick plexus of very fine nerve-tubesis correct. It 
is clear from Leydig’s earlier observations that we ought to speak of the 
nerve-tubes rather than the nerve-fibres of Annelids and Arthropods. 
In these tubes one may distinguish a spongioplasm, which forms the 
investment, and the hyaloplasm or inclosed soft and semi-fluid nerve- 
material. The former may be continued inwards as a framework. The 
nerve-fibres of Vertebrates also ought to be called nerve-tubes and not 
fibres, and in them there appear to be at least remnants of an internal 
meshwork. Here again the author finds matter for criticism in Hisig’s 
latest work. 

The hyaloplasm ought to be regarded as the “ primum agens” in the 
nerve-tissue. Leydig has spoken of the spaces in the spongework as an 

30 2 


712 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


uninterrupted system of hollow ducts, and this agrees very closely with 
the view of Nansen, who regards the grey substance, as a whole, as a 
plexus of fine nerve-tubes. The well-known physiological phenomenon 
of the dependence of the parts of the organism on the nervous system is, 
from a morphological point of view, seen more clearly when we know 
that the nervous material is intermixed with the protoplasm of the cell- 
substance in all parts of the living body. 


Cell-division.* —Prof. J. Arnold makes a further communication on 
the division of cell and nucleus in the spleen, and also discusses such 
processes as diverge from the typical mitos‘s. He thus describes “ pluri- 
polar mitosis,” “‘ indirect fragmentation,” the “ homaotypic” and “ hetero- 
typic” forms of Flemming, and the pathological phases described by Rabl. 
The distinctiveness of indirect fragmentation is maintained, though it is 
not denied that transitions occur between it and the forms of pluripolar 
mitosis. The main object of his present contribution is to show the 
agreement and the difference between mitosis proper and indirect frag- 
mentation. 


Cell-membrane.t{—M. M. Ide has investigated the nature of the mem- 
brane in the cells of the mucous Malpighian layer of the epithelium. 
The best material was obtained from embryonic epithelium in the skin 
and digestive tract. 

He regards the reticulated peripheral layers of the cells as cellular 
membranes in the true sense, and that for two reasons: first, because they 
exhibit the general and typical structure of cellular membranes; and 
further, because they are derived from the primitive membrane of the 
young cells by a simple cleavage. 

As to the bridges which connect the cells, he regards them as forming 
part of the cellular membrane. They are in substantial continuity with 
its reticulum ; they present the same structure as its trabecule, and are 
derived, ke the envelope itself, from the original membrane. 


Goblet-cells of Intestine of Salamander.t—Herr J. Steinhaus has 
investigated the so-called goblet-cells in the epithelium of the intestine of 
Salamandra maculosa. They are neither exclusively epithelial cells under- 
going mucous degeneration, nor cells modified into unicellular mucus- 
glands. They are partly the one, partly the other. 1f nosecond nucleus 
be present in the cell it completely degenerates ; if one be present the 
cell functions as a gland, and is regenerated after secretion. In forming 
a goblet the nucleus undergoes mucous metamorphosis ; the theca is iden- 
tical with the nuclear membrane, the foot of the goblet is never inclosed 
in the theca, but is protoplasmic to its end. 

Any cylindrical cell of the intestine may become a goblet-cell, and 
the change, though not yet understood, is in association with physiological 
processes in the intestine. The more energetic the processes, the greater 
the number of goblet-cells. As the number increases greatly in certain 
pathological processes (e.g. intestinal catarrh), it is of importance to 
understand the conditions of the development of goblet-cells. 


Micro-Chemistry of Nerve-cells.—Prof. M. Flesch § sums up the re- 
sults of investigations made by himself and others on the differences in the 


* Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 541-64 (8 pls.). 

+ La Cellule, iv. (1888) pp. 403-33 (1 pl.). 

+ Arch. f. Anat. u. Physiol. (Physiol. Abth.), 1888, pp. 311-22 (3 pls.). 
§ MT. Naturf. Gesell. Bern, 1888, pp. 192-9. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 713 


chemical reactions of nerve-cells. (1) The specific cells of the nervous 
system are distinguishable, not only by their morphological characters 
and the number of their processes, but also by their chemical reactions. 
(2) The chemical differences of the nerve-cells are demonstrable by 
their varied characteristics in the living tissue, by their various reactions 
to alkaline tests, by their variable amount of free oxygen present, and 
by their unequal reducing powers. (3) The chemical difference is a 
function of the protoplasm, and not of the contained granula. (4) The 
chemical characters of the protoplasm of nerve-cells are different from 
those of all other cells in the body. The only exceptions are those 
chromophilous cells which from the nature of their nuclei appear to be 
in process of degeneration. (5) The chromophilous character is seen in 
the younger cells only next the nucleus, and gradually extends over the 
cell. The differences vary with age. The smallest nerve-cells are 
intermediate between chromophilous and chromophobic cells. (6) The 
chromophilous or chromophobic character depends on the functional 
import of the cells. The demonstration of change in chemical con- 
stitution in association with difference of function is the most important 
result. 

Frl. Anna Kotlarewsky * has continued the investigations of Prof. 
M. Flesch and Frl. Koneff on the micro-chemistry of the nerve-cells in 
peripheral ganglia. Her observations were made in part on living, in 
part on hardened tissues. As the result of the former, it is shown that 
the chromophilous and chromophobic cells of the spinal ganglia in their 
living state differ widely in their chemical state and in the intensity of 
their metabolism. It seems most probable that the chromophilous cells 
have a stronger alkalinity and a greater proportion of oxygen than the 
chromophobic elements. The latter exhibit less reducing power than 
the former. - 

Observations made on hardened nerve-cells led the author to the 
result that under all conditions the different forms of nerve-cells may 
exhibit their differences of constitution, that hardening in alkaline media 
is the best condition for the demonstration of the chemical differences 
in the body of the cell, and that the chromophilous cells show, without 
exception, a stronger affinity for metallic solutions than do the chromo- 
phobic elements. 

The results of staining went to show that the nerve-cells have dis- 
tribution of cellular substance different from that of the other tissues. 
The nucleus is poor in chromatin, and the protoplasm is readily stained 
by various reagents. It seems also possible to determine various 
metabolic or functional stages by fixing the corresponding morphological 
conditions. 


Histology of the Ovary.t—Prof. J. Janosik has investigated the 
structure of the ovary in various vertebrates. He finds that the egg and 
the follicular epithelium have their origin in the superficial epithelium 
of the ovary. The structures described by Kélliker and Mihalkovics do 
not develope into follicles; they are merely modified medullary cords 
which have the appearance of follicles. They were seen in all the forms, 
including man, which he examined, but they do not appear always at the 
same stage, nor do they all attain the same grade of development. In all 


* MT. Naturf. Gesell. Bern, 1888, pp. 3-23. 
7 SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, xevi. (1888) pp. 172-93 (1 pl.). 


714 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


these ovaries, although at different and ordinarily later periods, there also 
appear special cells, which are the homologues of the intermediate cells 
of the testis. In some cases special structures, which are perhaps 
analogous to the adrenals, are developed in connection with the medul- 
lary cords. In all ovaries a large number of follicles atrophy ; this 
atrophy varies in various follicles, and especially with regard to the dis- 
tribution of the cells of the granulosa. The impulse to atrophy appears 
to arise in all cases from the connective-tissue cells of the three folliculi. 
The membrane which incloses the egg seems to be merely a product of 
the granulosa-cells. 


y. General.* 


Influence of Light on Oxidation.t—Herr J. Loeb has made a num- 
ber of experiments with pupe to test the influence of light on the 
processes of oxidation withia the organism. He measured the variation 
in the expiration of CO, under different conditions of illumination. 

There is no doubt that the light stimulus increases oxidizing pro- 
cesses. ‘This increase has its seat mainly in the muscles, but may be 
observed when there is no movement, as was the case obviously in the 
pup. Moleschott’s opinion that the light influenced the muscles 
through the central nervous system, is confirmed. In the lower animals 
the stimulus may be influential without the presence of eyes ; in mammals 
light has no appreciable local influence in increasing oxidation; this 
is only to be observed in plants where the proportion of surface to 
mass is so much greater. The results of the author’s experiments are 
summed up in two tables. 


B. INVERTEBRATA. 


Problematical Organs of the Invertebrata.t—Dr. A. B. Griffiths 
has made a chemical and physiological study of some of the problematical 
organs of the Invertebrata, and states the results as follows:—A. (1) 
The nephridia of Cephalopoda are true kidneys; (2) the renal organs 
of Astacus fluviatilis, Anodonta cygnea, Limaa flavus, Helix aspersa, 
and Periplaneta orientalis, are analogous in function to the renal organs 
of higher animals; (3) the renal organs of the Lamellibranchiata and 
Crustacea are true kidneys; and (4) the “segmental organs” of the 
Oligochta and of the leech are renal in function. B. The “salivary 
glands” of the Gasteropoda and Insecta are similar in function to the 
salivary glands of higher animals. C. The so-called “livers” of the 
Gasteropoda, Lamellibranchiata, Crustacea, and Insecta are pancreatic 
in function. 


Distribution of Striped Muscle.§—Prof. H. Fol discusses the dis- 
tribution of striped muscular tissue in Invertebrate types. The distri- 
bution of the two kinds of muscle in the different systems in Vertebrates 
hardly holds good among the lower animals. In Celenterates the 
striped tissue is only found in swimming forms, in the umbrella and 
tentacles; the same is true of Tunicata; but most of the agile worm 
types have only unstriped muscles. In the Arthropods, on the other 


* This section is limited to papers which, while relating to Vertebrata, have a 
direct or indirect bearing on Invertebrata also. 

t Arch. f. d. gesammt. Physiol. (Pfliiger), xlii. (1888) pp. 393-407. 

t Proc. Roy. Soc. Edin., xiv. (1887) p. 230. 

§ Comptes Rendus, cyi. (1888) pp. 1178-80. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 115 


hand, no unstriped muscle-fibres seem to occur; while the most mobile 
organs of molluscs, the arms, the siphon, the heart of Cephalopods, the 
fins of Pteropods and Heteropods, do not include any truly striped 
fibres. But all Molluscs are not without striped muscle, for this may 
be seen, as R. Blanchard observed, and as the author confirms, in one 
portion of the adductor muscle of Pecten. In Lima also, striated fibres 
were seen. 


Mollusca. 
y. Gastropoda. 


Comparative Histology of Glandular Epithelium of Kidney of 
Prosobranch Gastropods.*—-M. R. Perrier, who has already described 
the structure of the kidney in Littorina, now enters on a comparison 
between various allied forms. He finds that in some of the lower 
Prosobranchs, such as Fissurella, the epithelial cells are not so much 
differentiated as in the Limpet. As Haller has shown, the cells are all 
of the same kind, and all glandular and ciliated, but they differ both 
from the ciliated and from the vesicular cells of the higher Monotocardia, 
for they are large, and have no excretory vesicles. Sometimes they con- 
tain no concretions, while at others they are so loaded with them that the 
nucleus is invisible. The epithelial investment is of an almost diagram- 
matic regularity ; the elements are clearly all of the same age, and one 
cannot distinguish between cells that have performed and others that 
are about to perform their function. Secretion appears to be effected by 
osmosis, but if the production of renal material becomes exaggerated, it 
is deposited in the form of small granules in the interior of the cell. 
There is no absolute line of demarcation between granular and vesicular 
cells. 

A very different arrangement obtains in the higher Tenioglossata, 
such as, for example, Cassidaria. The structure of the kidney is here 
extremely complex. Instead of the simple lamelle found in Littorina, 
there is a complicated network of connective trabecule; these are 
hollowed by blood-lacune, and invested with a continuous epithelial 
layer. The whole forms a thick spongy mass which leads the author to 
propose the term of “ glande hématique.” The free surface of this mass 
is grooved by afferent vessels, and the epithelial layer is differentiated 
in a remarkable way. In addition to the numerous ciliated elements, 
there are glandular cells, which have not, however, the ordinary 
appearance of the vesicular renal cells which abound in the deeper parts 
of the mass. The vacuole is not clear, nor does it contain a solid con- 
cretion, but is loaded with granulations which take a blue colour with 
methylene. They have all the characters of mucus-cells. 

The numerous intermediate types found in the kidney of the Gastro- 
poda will be described in a detailed memoir. The author differs from 
M. Garnault in his interpretation of the structure of the kidney of 
Valvata and Cyclostoma. He is further convinced of the accuracy of 
-his views as to the mechanism of the secretion of the vesicular cells, but 
he does not, of course, mean that the renal cells are eternal; like the 
cells of all glands they become worn out and absorbed, but there is no 
direct connection between the secretion and the death of the cell. The 
gentian-violet used by M. Garnault has nof a sufficient selective power ; 


* Comptes Rendus, evii. (1888) pp. 188-91. 


716 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


methylene-green and picrocarmine are to be preferred. The best way to 
fix the cells is to place the organ for some time in a saturated solution 
of acetic and picric acids. 


Anatomy and Histology of Limax agrestis.*—Dr. R. Hanitsch has 
a contribution to the knowledge of the Slug. He is of opinion that the 
chief part of the movement of the radula is due to the extrinsic muscles, 
The roof of the mouth is provided with a jaw, the epithelium of which 
rests in a layer of muscle-fibres which run in longitudinal, transverse, 
and dorsoventral directions, and seem to enable this upper jaw to move 
freely in various directions, The epithelium of the kidney, unlike that 
of the Lamellibranchs and Nudibranchs, is not ciliated. The lobes of 
Semper’s organ were found to be masses of pyriform glandular cells, 
arranged in the form of a bouquet; the pointed ends of the pyriform 
cells lie anteriorly, and the ends of the individual cells are continued 
into long canals of very small diameter, which lead to a papilla placed 
immediately above; each canal seems to open separately to the exterior. 

The pedal gland has been lately investigated by Dr. Székely who 
describes its opening as being elliptical in transverse section; further 
back the lumen has the form of a fungus, and the posterior part is 
flattened and lanceolate. ‘The floor of the duct is raised into two 
longitudinal folds, which are separated in the median line by a slight 
depression ; these folds and depression are covered by ciliated epi- 
thelium; glandular cells are numerous on the ventral and lateral 
portions of the duct. The fine fibres which form a network at the base 
of the ciliated cells are regarded by Székely as connective tissue, and 
not nervous, and he comes to the conclusion that the pedal gland is not 
a sense-organ, but simply a secretory gland which furnishes the mucus 
necessary for creeping. Dr. Hanitsch agrees generally with the 
Hungarian anatomist, but he found elongated and pointed cells of 
apparently a sensory nature, and so numerous that he cannot accept 
Székely’s explanation of Sochaczewer’s observation, that they were 
accidental products. Numerous ganglion-cells were found lying beneath 
them, but he has not yet been able to trace nerve-fibres from one to the 
other. What Sochaczewer took for nerve-fibres were probably fibres of 
the connective tissue from the capsules which inclose the ganglion- 
cells. 


Anatomy and Histology of Cyclostoma elegans.t—M. P. Garnault 
has made a detailed study of the anatomy and histology of Cyclostoma 
elegans. He begins with describing the crystalline structure of the 
shell. The alimentary system is then discussed ; the stomach is clothed 
by a cuticle pierced with minute canals; all the parts of the canal have 
an alkaline reaction. In regard to the vascular system, he denies the 
existence of a clothing endothelium on the walls of the lacune, and 
regards the afferent veins as narrowed lacune. The venous network of 
the mantle is described. Sections of the superior region compared with 
the same in Bithynia tentaculata show that Cyclostoma has a rudimentary 
gill in process of disappearance. Analyses of the contents of the 
respiratory cavity demonstrated, even with the animal inclosed in its 
shell, the occurrence of gaseous interchange with the exterior. 

The glandular lamelle and very complex arrangement of the 


* Proc. Biol. Soc. Liverpool, ii. (1888) pp. 152-70 (3 pls.). 
{ Actes Soc. Linn. Bordeaux, 1887, pp. 1-152 (9 CS : 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. (ws 


secondary chambers of the organ of Bojanus are studied. The author 
shows that it is principally the blood from the lower parts of the body 
which traverses this organ. The vascular system within the organ is 
formed from modified lacunz. Distributed in the kidney are cells with 
green concretions, and others granular and ciliated. 

Careful attention is given to the course and structure of the reno- 
pericardial canal. The glandular character of the pericardial wall is 
noticed. Uric acid is absent from the kidney, and the author’s observa- 
tions on this head agree with those of Barfurth. He has also proved 
that neither by kidney nor by pericardium can blood flow to the exterior. 
The globules of the concretionary gland consist almost entirely of uric 
acid. The formation and absorption of the concretions is discussed. 
The gland has no excretory canal, is filled with bacilli, is a reservoir for 
uric acid, which is afterwards eliminated by the kidney. The bacilli 
appear to act as true symbions. 

The pedal glands are next described in detail. The supra-pedal 
exhibits a curious histological diversity in its walls. Sections of the 
concave wall show a network of pericellular canals, opening on one 
side into the general cavity, on the other into the excretory canal of the 
gland. This communication between interior and exterior raises 
interesting morphological and physiological problems. 

The anatomy and histology of the nervous system was investigated 
in great detail, but the results hardly admit of summary. The different 
forms of muscular fibre, the nerve terminations, the apparently olfactory 
epithelium-of the tentacle extremity, the otocyst and the eye, and 
the special olfactory organ of Spengel, &c., are described, and the 
structure and development of the egg discussed. The follicular cells 
are not formed from within the ovum. The oviduct and uterus are fully 
described. 

Finally, the male reproductive organs are dealt with. The sperma- 
togenesis was not fully elucidated. The spermatocytes result from 
the repeated nuclear division of spermatogonia. The nucleus of the 
spermatocyte forms the head of the spermatozoon, after the elimination 
into the protoplasm of a portion of its substance. 


Effects of Lesion of Supra-csophageal Ganglia in Snails.*—M. L. 
Petit has made some observations on the rotatory movements produced 
by the lesion of the supra-cesophageal ganglia in Molluscs. This group 
has been hitherto neglected by physiologists. The form selected for 
experiment was Helix aspersa. 'The animal takes about three weeks or 
a month to recover from the effects of the operation. A snail which had 
its left supra-cesophageal ganglion removed on the 26th of June began 
to crawl about on the 29th of July. The right tentacle was normal, 
and 18 mm. long, while the left was partly retracted and only 6 mm. 
The animal described spirals, turning from right to left, or from 
the uninjured towards the injured side. ‘The removal of the right 
ganglion produced corresponding results. A snail which had its left 
cerebro-pedal-visceral connectives cut crawled about in curves, which 
were broken in upon by short circles, in which it turned towards the 
left. Five months after the operation it crawled about almost normally. 
When the commissure connecting the supra-cesophageal ganglia was 
cut the tentacles preserved their normal length; in one case the snail 


* Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1809-11. 


718 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


was observed to take a zigzag course, but in most cases there were 
curves and rings; the latter might be to the right or to the left, but 
either direction was constant in any given snail. After removal of 
both supra-cesophageal ganglia, the snail was enticed from its shell with 
difficulty, and soon retired again. Removal of the pedal-visceral 
ganglia paralysed the animal and it could no longer return to its shell ; 
it bled profusely and soon died. 

In slugs the effect of removal of a supra-cesophageal ganglion is the 
immediate curvature of the body from the opposite side; the head is 
applied to the foot, and the animal forms a ring. If it moves it turns 
from the uninjured towards the injured ganglion, or in the opposite 
direction to the snail. This difference may be due to the slugs having 
been examined immediately after the operation had been performed on 
them. 


Creeping Movements.*—Prof. V. Willem seeks to explain the facts 
that fresh-water Gastropods can glide slowly along the surface of the 
water, with the foot upwards, as if they were creeping along the inferior 
surface of a horizontal plate of glass; and that when they do so the 
motions of the foot are the same as when the animal is moving on a solid 
surface. After discussing the various explanations which have already 
been offered, Prof. Willem proceeds to give an account of his own 
observations and experiments. These have led him to conclude that the 
animal begins by attaching itself to the thin superficial skin which 
always covers pond-water, and that then it creeps along the inferior 
surface of a thin coat of mucus secreted by its foot. ‘This locomotion,” 
he says, “ only differs from locomotion on solid substances in that here 
the mollusc has to depend on the rigidity of the train of mucus alone, 
while in the other case the train of mucus is attached to a solid 
surface.” 


Systematic Position of Hero.;,—M. A. Vayssiére has some notes 
on the organization of this opisthobranch mollusc, whose exact syste- 
matic position is still a matter of some uncertainty. The dendritic 
form of the appendage of the edge of the mantle, which has led to the 
creature being placed with the Dendronotide, appears to be due to the 
action of alcohol. In life, however, these appendages are seen to be 
true dorsal fusiform cirri, which are arranged symmetrically by pedun- 
culated groups on the lateral parts of the back. They have considerable 
resemblance to those of Calona Cavolinii, but there are, in addition, on 
the sides of the cephalic region a pair of tufts, which carry the largest 
number and the longest of the cirri, the posterior groups having only 
one, two, or three rudimentary cirri. The arrangement of the append- 
ages shows that Hero is one of the Aeolidide, and this is confirmed by 
the odontophore. As the radular characters of the species found in the 
Bay of Marseilles differ from those of H. formosa described by Sars and 
Bergh, the author regards it as a new species, to which, however, he 
gives no name. 


Anatomy of Valvata piscinalis.—M. F. Garnault { has investigated 
the anatomy of this hermaphrodite mollusc. He finds that the renal 
tube is simple above, but that the greater part is divided by a partition 
into two secondary tubes. Of these the right communicates with the 


* Bull. Acad. R. Sci. Belg., lvii. (1888) pp. 421-9. 
+ Comptes Rendus, cvii. (1888) pp. 136-8. } Ibid., evi. (1888) pp. 1813-15. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. a19 


pericardium by a very wide canal, which passes between the left renal 
tube and the dorsal wall of the pallial cavity; the epithelium of this 
canal has very long and powerful cilia, which are turned towards the 
kidney. As in Cyclostoma, there may be one or more rows of cells on 
the transverse lamelle which project into the renal cavity. In the 
kidney of Valvata there is only one kind of cell; these are ciliated, and 
contain a number of very small yellowish granules. When they are 
about to fall away their protoplasm contains fine vacuoles. Their débris 
form a kind of mucus in the middle of the renal cavity, and in this their 
nuclei, only slightly modified, may be made out in sections. Some 
points raised by M. Remy Perrier with regard to the physiology of 
secretion are criticized. 

The pericardiac epithelium is not glandular, but in the wall of the 
auricle there are racemose masses of cells with homogeneous contents, 
which absorb powerfully colouring reagents; these cells correspond 
almost exactly to those described by M. Sabatier in the heart of Mytilus, 
and that author is probably right in regarding them as having a secreting 
function. 

M. Garnault’s observations on the nervous system correspond pretty 
closely to those of M. Bouvier; neuro-epithelial cells on the part of the 
mantle between the gill and the body-wall appear to represent an ill- 
defined organ of Spengel. Neither the structure nor the innervation of 
the pallial filament justify us in regarding it as a gill or false gill; 
Moquin-Tandon was probably right in considering it to be the homo- 
logue of the pallial filaments of young Paludine. 

M. F. Bernard has also written* on the anatomy of Valvata 
piscinalis. The epithelial cells of the auricle described by M. Garnault 
are always met with in the Diotocardia, and are identical with those 
which Grobben has described in the Acephala. There are no arterial 
capillaries. The abdominal sinuses are prolonged anteriorly by several 
systems; there is an anterior abdominal sinus which ends near the 
cardia and arises from the general cavity of the body; in the mantle 
there is a large sinus between the rectum and the genital ducts, and 
there is a system of sinuses which ends in the formation of a transverse 
pallial vein. The whole surface of the mantle is covered by a network 
with distinct meshes, which connects the transverse vein, the afferent 
and efferent branchial veins, the circumrectal lacune, and a circumpallial 
sinus which is given off from the anterior abdominal sinus near the 
pericardium. At first sight this plexus appears to be formed of true 
capillaries, but it really only consists of lacune. 

The gill receives its blood by a large afferent sinus, which is 
enlarged at the point of attachment of the organ. It differs from that 
of all the Diotocardia by not being prolonged behind the line of inser- 
tion into the mantle. The branchial nerve is very large, and gives off 
to the epithelium delicate fibres, as in Fisswrella, and not large bundles, 
as in Haliotis and the Trochide. 

As to the kidney, the author agrees with M. R. Perrier (see supra). 
The visceral commissure arises partly from the so-called supra-intestinal 
ganglion and partly from the large right pallial nerve. The visceral 
ganglion is to the right and at the bottom of the pallial cavity, on the 
cesophagus, and at the end of the right salivary gland. There are two 


* Comptes Rendus, cyii. (1888) pp. 191-4, 


720 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


pallial commissures. The penial nerve arises near the right pallial, has 
a large ganglion at the base of the penis, and remains ganglionic to 
near its extremity. There is a small but distinct olfactory ganglion. 
On the whole the nervous system is very much like that of Bithynia. 

The tentaculiform filament is almost identical in structure with the 
tentacle itself; like it, it has an axis of ramifying connective tissue, and 
longitudinal and circular muscular bundles, but there is only one nerve in- 
stead of two, and the blood-lacuna is very reduced. The genital organs are 
difficult to make out. The hermaphrodite gland produces eggs at the 
periphery and spermatospores at the centre; the oviduct has an important 
dilatation, and receives the united products of the two albuminiparous 
glands. Contrary to the statement of Moquin-Tandon, the author found 
that the genital ducts were separated. 

The salivary and albuminiparous glands and all the pallial organs 
have only one layer of epithelial cells, and the distinction between 
ciliated and secretory cells may be observed very distinctly. 

The zvological affinities of Valvata are somewhat obscure, for the 
various organs have points of resemblance to those of the most various 
Gastropods. It is clearly enough a tenioglossate Prosobranch, but it is 
an aberrant type in which some of the points of the organization of the 
Diotocardia are retained, but it is not, strictly speaking, an intermediate 
form. 


5. Lamellibranchiate, 


Pericardial Gland.*—Prof. C. Grobben gives a full account of his 
investigation of the but little-known pericardial gland of Lamellibranchs. 
His memoir discusses the structure of the organ, the occurrence of con- 
cretionary deposits in other parts of the body, the function of the gland, 
and its morphological relations. The chief results may be condensed as 
follows :— 

The pericardial gland occurs in numerous Lamellibranchs as an 
epithelial modification in two regions, namely, above the auricles and in 
the anterior angles of the pericardium. In the first position it is in- 
cipient in Arca, well developed with processes in Pectunculus, especially 
large in Mytilus and Lithodomus, but tending to degenerate in the 
Monomyaria—Pecten, Spondylus, Lima, Ostrea. It is more or less 
markedly developed in Dreissena, Unio, Anodonta, Venus, Cardium, Scro- 
bicularia, Solen, Pholas, and Teredo. The glandular sacs formed by 
invagination of the mantle lamelle in the anterior angles of the peri- 
cardium occur in Unio, Anodonta, Venus, Cardium, Scrobicularia, Solen, 
and Pholas, while in the series of Heteromyaria and Monomyaria they 
are exhibited by Dreissena alone. In Pholas the openings of the pallial- 
pericardial gland are lost, and the sacs exhibit a partial division, as is 
also seen in the auricular glands of Arca, Pectunculus, and Lithodomus. 
In Meleagrina there are projecting tufts on the posterior margin of the 
pericardial cavity. 

The epithelial cells of the pericardial glands of Arca, Pectunculus, 
Mytilus, and Lithodomus bear flagella and contain concretions. When 
richly laden with the latter they are thrown off, and most probably pass 
to the exterior from the pericardial space vid the kidneys. The function 
is excretory and kidney-like. The dark colour seen even when the 


* Arbeit. Zool. Inst. Uniy. Wien, vii. (1888) pp. 355-444 (6 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. on 


glands are degenerate or absent may be due to excretion inside the 
auricles (Pecten, Spondylus, Ostrea, Lima, Pinna, Meleagrina), or to 
concretions in the mantle (Arca). 

The double character of the heart-chamber in Arca is a secondary 
result of the marked development of the posterior retractor. 

The ciliated funnel of the kidney is not absent in Pecten or Spondylus, 
and lies in front of, and dorsal to the atria. 

The union of the two atria in Monomyaria in front of the ventricle 
is the same as the posterior union in Arca, Pectunculus, Mytilus, and 
Lithodomus, the change in position being due to the torsion of the body. 

The position of the heart behind the posterior adductor in Teredo is 
due to the posterior and ventral displacement of the body. The single 
aorta is due to the union of the anterior and posterior. The anterior 
adductor is present, as in all other Pholadide, but is weakly developed. 


Molluscoida. 
B. Bryozoa. 


Embryogeny of Ectoproctous Bryozoa.*—Mr. S. F. Harmer has 
studied, at Roscoff, the development of Alcyonidium polyoum. The ova 
are large and contain a number of vitelline spherules, which, in the 
early stages of development, are found indifferently in all the cells. 
The segmentation is of the remarkable type which appears to be 
characteristic of the Ctenostomata and Cheilostomata. At the 48-stage 
the aboral region has two longitudinal rows of four cells, which are 
disposed symmetrically right and left of the median plane, and occupy 
the centre of the aboral surface ; there is a complete circle of eight cells 
which surround the central group, and are themselves surrounded by a 
peripheral ring of sixteen cells, which are, as Barrois has shown, the 
commencement of the ciliated circlet. The oral half has a central group 
of four large cells, which are surrounded by twelve peripheral cells. 
The segmentation-cavity is, at this stage, relatively large, but is partly 
filled by four ceils which are placed immediately above the central oral 
cells, from which they are probably derived; these four cells are the 
commencement of the hypoblast. Ata slightly more advanced stage the 
blastopore appears as a well-marked depression, which is continuous 
with a rather irregular cavity surrounded by several large hypoblastic 
cells. The segmentation-cavity becomes completely obliterated by the 
internal cellular mass, and the various organs of the larva begin to make 
their appearance. 

The alimentary canal of the embryo is well developed ; it consists of 
a vast stomach, bounded by an extremely irregular epithelium; the 
cesophagus, which is perhaps formed as a stomodcum, has a very 
narrow cavity; the mouth is larger and more evident in early than in 
later stages. There is some reason for thinking that the region immedi- 
ately behind the opening of the sucker (which is placed a little behind 
the middle of the ventral surface) represents the anal region. If this be 
really the case, the embryo is entoproctous. When the alimentary canal 
has acquired its maximum of development, which it does at an early 
stage, the cavity of the stomach may be justly called gigantic. It is 
not, however, easy to make out the epithelium which lines it, for it is 
composed of a mass of vitelline spherules enveloped in protoplasm with 


* Arch. Zool. Expér. et Gén., v. (1887) pp. 443-58 (2 pls.). 


722 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


rare nuclei, or it has the appearance of a very delicate layer of proto- 
plasm with scattered nuclei. In a word, the epithelium of the stomach 
is as completely different from an ordinary secreting epithelium as one 
can well imagine, and this fact, in connection with the diminution of the 
lumen of the stomach as development advances, leads Mr. Harmer to con- 
sider the alimentary canal of Alcyonidium as a “ rudimentary organ.” 
It is owing to the considerable amount of nutrient yolk in the egg, to » 
the fact that development is accomplished in the wall of the body of the 
parent, to the extreme shortness of the free larval life, and to the degenera- 
tion of many embryonic organs during metamorphosis that the ali- 
mentary canal does not long preserve its functional form. 

The groove which appears in the aboral region of the embryo, and 
which has been regarded by Barrois and others as the pallial cavity, has 
probably the function of allowing the involution of the ciliary circlet 
into the interior vestibule, which is formed during the process of fixation. 

With regard to the much discussed pyriform organ, Mr. Harmer 
states that it has, at first sight, the appearance of a mucous gland, owing 
to the presence in its interior of a transparent substance which does 
not stain easily. When examined more carefully, it is seen to be 
composed of a series of cells closely packed together at their outer 
extremity, while on their inner side they are prolonged into fine pro- 
cesses, among which are other cells full of vacuolated spaces. It is 
important to note that there is no sharp limit between the pyriform 
organ and the central mass of nerve fibres, which are prolonged into the 
bases of the cells of the pyriform organ. It may, therefore, be justly 
supposed that the pyriform organ has a sensory function; as the larva 
ordinarily swims with this organ in front it is possible that its duty is 
to test the bodies to which the larva desires to fix itself. It may be 
noted that this organ has considerable resemblance to the cephalic shield 
described by Kleinenberg in the larva of Lopadorhynchus. 

It is probable that the greater part of the nervous system arises from 
the dorsal epiblast; if this be so, the “brain” of Alcyonidium is the 
homologue of the “ dorsal organ” of entoproctous Bryozoa. On this 
point the author discusses the views of preceding writers, such as 
Repiachoff and Vigelius. 

It is probable that Cyphonautes is not an archaic larva, but rather 
one very much modified, in which the alimentary canal has preserved its 
functional forms (owing, perhaps, to its larval life being longer than that 
of other Bryozoa), while the oral surface is transformed into an atrium 
in which the pyriform organ and sucker are situated. 

The descriptions given by Repiachoff of the larva of Bowerbankia 
cannot be easily brought into accord with Mr. Harmer’s observations on 
Alcyonidium, unless (as is probably the case) Repiachoft’s mantle-cavity 
is really the internal sac or sucker, and the ciliated dorsal groove the 
pyriform organ. 


Arthropoda. 
a. Insecta. 


Egg-membranes of Insects.*—Dr. E. Korschelt publishes a full 
account of his researches on the formation of the egg-membranes, micro- 
pyles, and chorionic appendages in Insects. The vitelline membrane 


* Nova Acta Acad. Czs. Leop.-Carol., li. (1887) pp. 183-252 (5 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 123 


arises by the hardening of a thin layer differentiated as a fringe from 
the rest of the yolk. It may appear before or after the chorion, and at 
different stages of egg ripeness. On the growing egg it cannot be very 
firm, and is capable of extension. 

The chorion is a cuticular secreted product of epithelial cells. In its 
young state it is soft and plastic. The chorion of Musca in process of 
being formed remained, on the contraction of the yolk, in part adherent 
to the latter, in part to the epithelium, and became drawn out in threads. 
Towards the close of its formation the chorion seems at length to become 
hard ; it also undergoes, as the staining reactions show, some change in 
its constitution. In its origin it is often unequal, forming first on the 
inferior portion, and becoming subsequently extended upwards. 

The cellular-like appearance of the chorion is deceptive. As the 
internal surface of the epithelial layer changes its form in the course of 
chorion formation, it may be the condition of manifold structures on the 
same chorion. Korschelt also shows that the same cells may successively 
produce very different substances. The close association between epi- 
thelial layer and chorion is emphasized, and numerous modifications 
are described. 

The secretion of cuticular substance is not always confined to the 
free surface of the epithelial cells, but sometimes occurs on their lateral 
surfaces, and therefore between the individual cells. In this way flat or 
filiform structures are formed which are in connection with the forming 
chorion, and appear on the mature egg as little basket-like structures or 
as a network. 

The pore-canals which penetrate the chorion often in great abun- 
dance have their origin from processes of the epithelial cells. By longer 
and stronger processes, yet essentially in the same way, arise the 
elongated and superiorly expanded canals of the multiple micropyles. 

In a general way the origin of the chorion may be said to be the 
same as that of the cuticle. A marked deviation from the typical 
cuticular mode of formation of the chorion and its associated struc- 
tures is that exhibited in the formation of the “egg-rays” (“ Hi- 
strahlen ”) in Nepa, which take origin in the interior of modified epithelial 
cells. In investigating the details of this process Korschelt has been 
led to conclude that the nuclei exercise a direct and essential influence 
on the secretory activity of the cell. Two cells fuse before the forma- 
tion of the rays, but the fusion is quite complete, and the process takes 
place not between two cells, but within a double bi-nucleate cell. This 
mode of formation of chitin is indeed unique. 


Antennary Sensory Organs of Insects.*—Herr F. Ruland points 
out that, notwithstanding the great variations in the antenne of Insects, 
they may, with perhaps one exception, be referred to a common funda- 
mental type. The external apparatus is a more or less well-developed 
chitinous hair which is supplied by a branch of an antennary nerve. 
Free nerve-endings, such as have been described by Hauser in Caloptenus, 
Tabanus, Vanessa, and others, do not really exist. 

The first function of these organs is tactile, for there can be no doubt 
that a large number of the structures which are found on the antennze 
have this office. Some of the hairs are stronger and are articulated at 
their base. Necrophorus and Geotrupes have peculiar organs of this 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 602-27 (1 pl.). 


724 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


kind in the form of bent or straight sete, which are very strongly 
chitinized, and appear to be connected with a wineglass-shaped pore- 
canal, by means of a chitinous membrane ; the pore-canal in its narrower 
lower part was, as a rule, filled by a homogeneous mass, which was 
found to be coloured red by carmine. The olfactory organs may be in 
the form of cones placed on the surface or in pits; the typical structure 
of the former has already been investigated by Leydig in the Hymeno- 
ptera. Organs of this kind appear to be found not only in all orders of 
Insects, but also in Myriopoda and Crustacea; they may, therefore, be 
regarded as the chief form of olfactory organ among Arthropods. When 
the cone is placed in a pit there may be one (simple pits) or several 
cones (compound pits); these cones agree in all essential points with 
those which are set on the surface. The differences in the pits are fully 
pointed out. 

The auditory organs are not hair-like structures; they were first 
distinguished by Kriipelin, who called them pore-plates; there is a firm, 
thick membrane, without any orifice, which completely shuts off the 
lumen of the pore-canal from the outer air. The author’s observations 
on the structure of these organs confirms Kriipelin’s account. When 
separate antenne of Hymenoptera were boiled with concentrated potash 
the plates were found, after the disappearance of all the soft parts, to be 
completely uninjured and to still lie in their original position; this 
showed that they did not consist of modified nerve-substance, but of firm 
chitin. In Vespa crabro the greater part of the pore-canal closed by the 
plate was seen to be filled by epithelial cells; through these there 
extends a central nerve-cord which arises from the basal ganglion. Just 
below the pore-plate there is a cavity closed by two plates, which at 
first lie close to one another, but then separate; these are connected with 
a hyaline intermediate piece of the ring. It seems to be clear that the 
nerve from the ganglion is not directly inserted into the pore-plate, but 
its exact course could not be made out. As the structure of this organ 
forbids us.from regarding it as either tactile or olfactory, Herr Ruland 
thinks it probable it is auditory; the form and mode of attachment of 
the plates are such as to adapt it to vibratory movements, and the cavity 
below is such as we might expect to find in an auditory organ. 

The structures were also examined in Ichneumonide, Cynipide, and 
the Ants; in the last of which they were the most complicated. Pure- 
plates were also found in the coleopterous genus Necrophorus. 


Poison of Hymenoptera.*—M. G. Carlet has a note on the poison of 
Hymenoptera with a smooth sting, and on the existence of a poison- 
chamber in the Mellifera. The forms examined were Philanthus, 
Pompilus, and others. In them the alkaline gland, which the author 
has already shown to be well-developed in the Bee and others, is rudi- 
mentary. These are the Hymenoptera whose incomplete poison does 
not kill the insects with which they provision their nest, for the purpose 
of feeding their larve with living prey. In M. Carlet’s opinion it is the 
presence of two liquids or of one only which produces respectively the 
mortal poison or the anesthetic, and not the asserted power to select the 
point of the body at which the Hymenopteron will sting its victim. 

The poison-chamber is useful as furnishing poison immediately to 
the Hymenopteron, while it protects the poison from the air which would 


* Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1737-40. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 725 


alter it; as it empties it is filled by aspiration. This reservoir is only 
found in the Mellifera, where it is necessarily correlated with the 
perforation syringe which forms the stinging apparatus of these Insects. 


Morphology of the Legs of Hymenoptera.*—Prof. A. J. Cook dis- 
cusses some points in the morphology of the legs of hymenopterous 
insects. He begins with the prothoracic legs of the honey-bee, and 
traces the modifications of the ‘‘ antenna cleaner” throughout a series of 
forms. From the study of this organ alone (so persistent is the type 
within each family) the species of Hymenoptera might, with very few 
exceptions, be arranged in their respective families. The discussion of 
this apparatus in its details and varied occurrence forms the greater part 


of the paper. 


Salivary Glands of Cockroach.;—Herr Bruno Hofer has made an 
intimate investigation of the structure of the salivary glands in Blatia 
and of the nature of the associated nervous arrangements. 

(a) The general structure and mechanism of the glands is first de- 
described. Special attention is directed to the paired muscle passing 
from the under side of the cesophagus to the gland, and probably in part 
contracting the reservoir and accommodating the gland to the movements 
of the body. In B. germanica there is another muscle from the posterior 
end of the reservoir, which it probably serves to empty. Any connection 
of the salivary duct with the cesophagus is excluded by the interposition 
of the very massive hypopharynx. ‘The duct opens between hypophysis 
and under lip, to the outer walls of which it is completely fused. 

(b) The histology of the glands is next discussed. The formation of 
the secretion is apparently as follows :—In the fine protoplasmic threads 
of the unencapsuled cells, fine glancing secretion-granules appear; these 
become more numerous, form larger spherules, and replace the proto- 
plasm; these granules must then in some way (probably by a water- 
stream) become soluble and diffuse into the capsules and ducts; the 
secretion passes from capsules to ducts, and thence into the reservoir; 
at the same time the unencapsuled glandular cells re-exhibit fine proto- 
plasmic threads extending from their margin into the lumen of the gland. 

The second chapter of the memoir deals with the nervous apparatus, 
Herr Hofer first discusses the unpaired and paired visceral nervous system, 
and describes the distribution and histology of the nerves. They have a 
double function, serving as a centre for the peristalsis of the cesophagus, 
and forming the innervation of the salivary glands. Passing to the 
more intricate question of the exact connection between nerves and 
glands, the author confirms the correctness of Kupffer’s observation that 
the nerves do really penetrate into the glandular cells. He completes 
it in the more detailed observation that several nerve-fibrils fuse with 
the striated protoplasm of the encapsuled glandular cells, but do not 
exhibit any peculiar terminations, 


Parthenogenesis in Bombyx mori.{—Prof. A. Tichomiroff urges 
that both well-known and recent observations confirm the statement 
that true parthenogenesis does occur in Bombyx mori, though it has been 
recently doubted by Prof. Verson.§ 


* Amer. Natural., xxii. (1888) pp. 193-201 (10 figs.). 
+ Nova Acta Acad. Cees. Leop.-Carol., li. (1887) pp. 349-95 (3 pls.). 
{ Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 342-4. § See this Journal, ante, p. 571. 


1888. oe D 


726 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Respiration of Silk-worm Ova.*—Profs. L. Luciani and A. Piutti 
have made a long series of experiments on the respiratory phenomena in 
the eggs of Bombyx mori. Their general results are as follows :—The 
respiratory activity is usually much depressed during hibernation. 
Lowering of the surrounding temperature has the same effect. Dry air 
causes them to lose moisture, while they gain from damp. With these 
alterations in humidity the respiratory activity also varies. Consider- 
able desiccation at medium temperature may cause absolute latent life. 
The respiratory activity of hibernating ova varies, ceteris paribus, with 
the quantity of available oxygen. Limited space brings about progres- 
sive diminution of the CO, eliminated; when too prolonged asphyxia 
results. During artificial incubation there is a gradual increase in the 
quantity of CO, developed in unit time; humidity or dryness favours or 
depresses activity. The curve of respiratory activity is an index to the 
internal rate of life or development. The respiratory ratio of CO, and 
O, is not constant, but is a fraction progressively increasing even above 
unity. “Itis probable that during embryonic development there are 
formed, besides the formative materials, chemical molecules less oxy- 
genated, and therefore provided with a sum of potential energy always 
ou the increase.” 


Mode of Locomotion of Caterpillars.;—M. G. Carlet has been 
investigating the mode of locomotion of caterpillars. He finds that the 
ordinary statement that two limbs of the same pair never move simul- 
taneously in terrestrial locomotion is incorrect. If observation is started 
on a caterpillar which has come to rest with its body well extended, it 
is found that its first movement is to detach the anal appendage and to 
approximate it to the one in front by contracting the two intermediate 
apodal rings. The four pairs of false limbs are then detached in order 
from behind forwards, and are at the same time pushed forwards by the 
extension of the two hinder apodal rings. This series of progressive 
movements of the rings reaches, in the form of a wave, the first two 
apodal rings of the abdomen, which are held in position by the ap- 
pendages of the first three rings. These two apodal rings become com- 
pressed, and the fourth appendage (or one nearest behind them) is 
approximated to the third appendage, or one nearest in front of them. 
This third appendage is immediately raised, and, almost simultaneously, 
though successively, the second and first pairs of appendages are 
raised. 

We can now understand why it is that the “false legs” are so strong 
as compared with the others; they may be appropriately called mooring 
legs (“« pattes-amarres ”), for it is they which maintain the caterpillar and 
order its progression. Physiologically, they are the true legs, and the 
true legs (or “ pattes écailleuses”) are the false legs of the caterpillars. 
The author proposes to do away with the term of false legs, and to 
replace it by that of membranous legs (“ pattes membraneuses”’). 

The loss of hooks from the membranous legs of Cossus and some other 
xylophagous caterpillars is correlated with their habitation of trunks in 
which they hollow out galleries; but, as compensation, the masticatory 
apparatus is exceedingly well developed. The looping caterpillars loop 
so as to bring their remaining two pairs of membranous legs into 


* Arch. Ital. Biol., ix. (1888) pp. 319-58 (1 pl.). 
t+ Comptes Rendus, cvii. (1888) pp. 131-4. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 727 


apposition with their true legs; this leech-like mode of progression is 
less satisfactory, but its defects are made up for by the protective 
colouring of the bodies of these caterpillars. 


Colour-relation between Pupe and Surroundings.*—Mr. W. White 
describes some experiments made by Mr. G.C. Griffiths upon the colour- 
relation between the pupe of Pieris rape and their immediate sur- 
roundings. 

(a) Poulton’s observation that dark surroundings exercise a retarding 
influence upon the period before pupation is confirmed, (b) To all 
appearance the freshly formed pupa is not photographically sensitive. 
(c) The general results of the colours themselves also entirely confirm 
Poulton’s observations, notably in the case of dark pupe produced by 
black and of green pup produced by yellow. (d) The special effects 
of yellow surroundings in arresting the formation of dark superficial 
pigment, and in tending towards the production of green pups, were 
very striking, and confirm Poulton’s suggestion that rays from this part 
of the spectrum, when predominant in the light incident upon the sus- 
ceptible larva, determine the production of these results whenever green 
pupz are produced by the influence of surroundings. When green pupa 
of Pieris are produced, as in nature, on green leaves, it is probable that 
the effect is wholly due to the reflected yellow rays. Though these 
experiments do not exactly furnish materials for new conclusions, they 
are valuable as independent corroborations of Poulton’s results. 


Aphides.t—Dr. H. F. Kessler discusses the development and life- 
history of Chaitophorus aceris Koch, Ch. testudinatus Thornton, Ch. lyro- 
pictus Kessler, which he regards as three distinct species instead of as 
one (Aphis aceris Linné) as they have been hitherto considered. 


8B. Myriopoda. 


Post-embryonic Development of Julus terrestris.t—In his second 
memoir on the development of the Myriopoda, Mr. F. G. Heathcote 
describes the development of different organs. The mode of develop- 
ment of the somites is essentially the same as that of Peripatus, for the 
ceelomic spaces are found to have nothing to do with the body-cavity or 
vascular system of Julus; the body-cavity is a series of spaces contained 
between the gut and the body-wall, and is a pseudocele. With this 
general resemblance there are considerable differences in the details. 
In the hinder part of the body of Julus, that is behind the third body- 
segment, part of the somite is in the limbs, and part in the body; the 
latter passes towards the top of the nerve-cord, and not to the dorsal part 
of the body as in Peripatus; the part of the somite within the limbs, 
which in Peripatus forms the nephridium and its vesicle, furnishes in 
Julus the muscles of the limbs. 

One of the most interesting points about the development of the 
somites is the fact that the so-called double segments have two meso- 
blastic segments each; this is against the suggestion of Balfour that the 
double segments might represent single segments which had developed 
a second pair of limbs, and had altered the nervous system and other 
organs to suit them. 

* Trans. Entomol. Soc. Lond., ii. (1888) pp. 247-67. 


+ Nova Acta Acad. Ces. Leop.-Carol., li. (1887) pp. 151-79 (1 pl.). 
} Phil. Trans., clxxix. B (1888) pp. 157-79 (4 pls.). 
3D 2 


728 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


In the history of the nervous system we may note the appearance of 
a pair of cerebral grooves resembling those of Peripatus ; they become 
obliterated and disappear entirely later on. Temporary cavities appear 
in the ganglia which disappear when the two cords unite to form one; 
as to the function of these the author has no suggestion to offer, but he 
thinks that the cerebral grooves may be for the aeration of the cerebral 
tissue, as they disappear as soon as the tracheal invaginations begin to 
be formed. 

The trachem arise as pit-like invaginations formed just behind and a 
little externally to the bases of each pair of appendages; the walls are 
thick and composed of cells like those of the epidermis; as the pit 
becomes deeper it forms a kind of vesicle within the body. As this 
vesicle changes its form it gives off two short thick diverticula; the cells 
composing these break up, alter their arrangement, and form the tracheal 
tubes. The stink-glands also arise as invaginations. 

The heart of the adult Julus, which has never been fully described, 
has two pairs of ostia in each segment; these are originally spaces left 
in the tubes during development; the lips of the ostia which project 
into the tube of the heart are formed by four peculiarly-shaped muscle- 
cells, which evidently control the operations of the ostium; there are 
two pairs of arteries to each segment, and they lead directly into the 
spaces of the fat-body. The internal coat of the cardiac tube is not 
nucleated, being secreted by the cells of the middle coat early in 
development; this middle coat has a well-developed muscular structure ; 
the fibres are circular and disposed in bands, a narrow band alternating 
with a broad one. The heart is suspended by thin muscle-fibres which 
are attached to the hypodermic matrix layer; there are also muscle- 
fibres attached to the fat-body which probably correspond to the aleform 
muscles of the heart of insects. The cavity in which the adult heart of 
Julus is inclosed is partially cut off from the rest of the body-cavity by 
a pericardial membrane, formed from the same network of cells which 
gives rise to the heart, and which is continuous with the fat-bodies. 

In the formation of the eye a single ocellus appears first, and the 
rest are added on one by one till the full number is reached; in each 
case the process of development is the same. A deposition of pigment- 
granules of a dark red-brown colour takes place within a thickened 
mass, which has been formed by a multiplication of the cells of the 
hypodermis, and this secretion of pigment is accompanied by a separation 
from one another of certain cells within the mass.. As a result, we have 
the formation of a vesicle bounded by a mass of dark pigment. The 
cells which compose the external wall of this vesicle give rise to the 
lens which fuses with the chitin of the exoskeleton, and the same cells 
continually add layers to the lens till it assumes its full size. This 
development of the eye-spots from a vesicle agrees with Patten’s belief 
that the simple myriopod eye has been developed from a vesicle 
invaginated from the ectoderm; but what Patten describes as the 
vitreous layer is clearly the corneal hypodermis. The original hypo- 
dermis present before the formation of the eye is represented by the 
external chitin of the exoskeleton formed by it and now fused with the 
external wall of the vesicle. 

With regard to the phylogeny of the Myriopoda, it is observed that 
the essential features which they have in common with Peripatus, are 
such as would be likely to occur in many Tracheata, if the latter are 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 729 


derived from a Peripatus-like ancestor. The carboniferous Myriopod 
Euphoberia, as described by Scudder, presents arrangements which are 
found during the development of Julus. The Archipolypoda have the 
dorsal part of the body ring, which is now single, distinctly divided. 
Tt is probably best to regard each part of the so-called double-segments 
as a segment complete in itself, but joined to its fellow by the fusion of 
two dorsal plates. It seems likely that the Chilopods and Diplopods 
branched off from a common ancestor at some period not very long 
before the appearance of the Archipolypoda, and that both are remotely 
descended from some Peripatus-like stock. 


5. Arachnida. 


Anatomy of Gamaside.*—Herr W. Winkler has investigated the 
structure of Gamaside, especially of the genera Gamasus and Uropoda. 
In regard to the general segmentation of the body, he regards the 
boundary of the “capitulum” as marked by a chitinous ridge which 
extends directly in front of the first pair of legs. As to the mouth 
appendages, the chelicere are equivalent to the mandibles, for their 
nerves come from the sub-cesophageal ganglion, from a portion distinct 
from the rest of the mass. The maxille, lower lip, and tongue are 
carefully described, and their relations and modifications discussed. In 
discussing the other appendages, he emphasizes, against Méenin and 
Pagenstecher, that the first pair are not labial palps, but true legs. The 
terminations are very fully described. 

The cuticle with its plates and layers, the interstitial connective 
tissue, the musculature like that of Tyroglyphide, the nervous system, 
and the sensory bristles are then briefly described, and the author 
discusses the richly-branched tracheal system. The actively pulsating 
heart lies in the anterior half of the abdomen, above the posterior end - 
of the mid-gut. It is one-chambered, short and broad, with two valved 
openings and a long aorta. It may be regarded as a reduction from the 
heart of Araneidz, and between the two the hearts of Chernetide and 
Phalangidz may be placed. 

In the alimentary system Herr Winkler describes the pharynx with 
its six pairs of muscles, the narrow cesophagus, the wide mid-gut with 
six sacs and hepatic glands, the simple glandular hind-gut, and the 
vesicular rectum. The excretory organs are certainly homologous with 
Malpighian vessels. They consist of two separate long tubes, which 
open along with the hind-gut into a capacious collecting bladder, which 
is really part of the excretory and not of the alimentary system. Finally, 
the author describes at length the male and female reproductive organs, 
and makes a few notes on development. 


e. Crustacea. 


Intestine and Digestive Glands of Decapods.j—Prof. G. Cattaneo 
has investigated the histology of the intestine in Decapoda, and the 
function of the associated glands. In the intestine of Palinurus vulgaris 
he distinguishes and describes seven layers—the chitinous cuticle, the 
cylindrical epithelium, the connective layer, the longitudinal muscles, 
the radial muscles, the circular muscles, the external connective tissue. 
Many types are discussed. The histological part of the research evi- 


* Arbeit. Zool. Inst. Univ. Wien, vii. (1888) pp. 317-54 pl). 
+ Arch. Ital, Biol., ix. (1888) pp. 255-66. 


730 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


dently suffers from delayed publication, since the not very recent 
memoir by Frenzel on the same subject was not seen by the author 
until his results, which are corroboratory, were being published. 

As to the function of the glands, the author demonstrated the presence 
of diastase, pepsine, and trypsine, of emulsionizing enzymes, of pigments 
analogous to those of the bile. These substances were not free, but 
incorporated in adipose drops, which probably lose their contents in 
digestion and are reabsorbed. 


Effects of Lesions of the Supra-cesophageal Ganglia of the Crab 
(Carcinus Mcenas).*—M. L. Petit has been partly induced to study the 
effects of lesion of the supra-cesophageal ganglia of the Crab by their 
curious habit of lateral locomotion. If the animal attempts to move 
after the operation has been performed on the left side, it describes a 
series of circles in the direction of the hands of a watch, but its head is 
directed sometimes outside and sometimes inside the circle. It passes 
from one to the other of these positions by a half-turn. There is the 
same spoke-wheel movement which is observed in Mammals, when the 
brain is injured ; but, whereas in them, the head of the animal is always 
opposite to the axis of rotation, it may be opposite to, or turned to it in 
the Crab. If the right supra-cesophageal ganglion be injured, the move- 
ments of rotation are in the opposite direction to those of the hands of 
a watch. 


Male Appendages on Females.}—Herr D. Bergendal describes the 
occurrence of distinctly male copulatory appendages on female crabs. 
In many cases there were no appendages on the first somite of the ab- 
domen; in other cases they were rudimentary ; in others spoon-shaped ; 
in a few like those of the male. Herr Bergendal regards this abnor- 
mality as due to inheritance from the male parent, and lays stress on the 
fact that only the useless and normally rudimentary first pair of appen- 
dages are thus modified, while the second pair which are functional never 
exhibit modification. A fuller description is in course of publication. 


Eyes of Cymothoide.{—Mr. F. E. Beddard has investigated the 
minute structure of the eye in certain Cymothoide. His chief con- 
clusions are as follows :— 

The Serolide and Cymothoide possess eyes which differ in certain 
important particulars from the compound eyes of all other Crustaceans 
as at present understood. The points of difference concern the retinule. 
Each retinula consists, in the first place, of four (Serolis) or seven 
(Cymothoide) elongated cells resembling those of other Isopoda; each 
of these cells secretes a chitinous body, the rhabdomere. In Cymothoa 
(Bullar) the individual rhabdomeres retain their distinctness. In other 
Cymothoide and in the Serolide the rhabdomeres become fused to form 
an axially placed rhabdom, which has often a complicated form, and in 
which a large quantity of pigment is deposited. The Serolide (not the 
deep-sea species) and many Cymothoidz possess a pair of large hyaline 
nucleated cells, surrounded by the other retinula cells. In the axis of 
these, and inclosed by them (in the Serolide), is a delicate fibre, passing 
back as far as the ommatial membrane, and expanding anteriorly into a 
conical body, which appears to penetrate into the axis of the rhabdom. 


* Comptes Rendus, evii. (1888) pp. 278-9. 
+ Ofvers. K. Vetensk. Akad. Férhandlingar, 1888, pp. 343-6. 
t Trans. R. Soc. Edin., xxxiii. (1888) pp. 443-52 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. tok 


In young specimens of Serolis schythet the future hyaline cells are 
small and granular, and inclose the extremity of this axial cone and 
fibres, which may be partly a product of their activity, though chiefly 
formed by the other retinula cells. Hach retinula, therefore, consists of 
two central clear cells (corresponding in number to the cells of each 
vitrella), surrounded by four or seven pigmented cells. 

The pigmented retinula cells are connected with transversely striate 
fibres, which pass into the ganglion, and are generally regarded as 
nerve-fibres. The hyaline cells do not end in a nervous filament, 
unless the axial cuticular rod, which is hollow, incloses a nerve-fibre. 
The specialization of the retinula into clear and pigmented cells recalls 
the eye of certain Annelids and Molluscs. The eye is ‘ diplostichous,’ 
the upper row of cells forming the vitrella, and the lower row the 
retinula. To this extent, therefore, Mr. Beddard’s results harmonize 
rather with those of Grenacher than with those of Patten. 


New Species of Ceponine.*—MM. A. Giard and J. Bonnier have, 
since the publication of their monograph on Cepon elegans, received a 
number of new forms allied to that parasite. On Nautilograpsus there 
is a species which it is proposed to call Grapsicepon Edwards ; it is 
apparently rather common. Although it does not produce any apparent 
deformation of the carapace, its presence can be easily enough detected 
on account of the transparency of its host’s integument. The male is 
much less degraded than that of other Ceponine, and therein it approaches 
Leidya. The species found on Trapezia dentifrons is called G. amicorum, 
but unfortunately, only one example is as yet known; on the whole, 
however, its characters, so far as it has been possible to make them out, 
are rather those of members of the group which are parasitic on Grapsidee 
than of the parasites of Gelasimide; and, as is known, it is with the 
former that Milne-Edwards, in opposition to Nauck, is inclined to place 
the genus Trapezia. 

The name of Portunicepon Hendersoni is given to a parasite of 
Thalamita callianassa, which appears to be pretty common at Madras. 
This parasite produces a very slight deformation of the carapace; the 
male is very degraded, pigment being rare, and the lateral lobes of the 
pygidium almost fused with the median part. 

Grapsicepon Edwardsi is the first example of a Bopyrid being found 
parasitic on other Crustacea than those of small bays with quiet waters, 
for it was brought from the Sargasso Sea. Prof. A. Milne-Hdwards has 
lately found a magnificent Bopyrid, which it is proposed to call 
Pleurocrypta formosa, on Piychogaster formosus, a splendid Galatheid, 
which was dredged by the ‘ Talisman’ at a depth of 946 metres. 


Geographical Distribution of Diaptomus.j —MM. J. de Guerne 
and J. Richard bring forward evidence in favour of the cosmopolitan 
range of this fresh-water Copepod; further investigations will probably 
show that many of the species already described have a wider range 
than is yet assigned to them. 


So-called Mucous Gland of Male Cypride.t—Herr C. G. Schwarz 
has investigated the structure of the so-called mucous gland of the male 
Cypridz. It is, as he observes, a remarkable thing that we should be 


* Comptes Rendus, cvii. (1888) pp. 44-7. + Ibid., pp. 47-50. 
t Ber, Naturf. Gesell. Freiburg i. B., ili. (1888) pp. 133-48 (2 pls.). 


132 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


in doubt as to the function of an appendage of the male generative 
apparatus which is nearly one-fourth of the size of the whole body of 
the animal. 

In Cypris monacha the organ is thus constituted: it is made up of 
a chitinous framework, a contained glandular tube, and an investing 
musculature. The framework consists of a chitinous tube formed of 
about sixty rings connected by a membrane, and of the spines placed 
thereon. Every ring carries several spines, which, at the proximal and 
distal ends, are arranged in circlets, and are specially attached at their 
tips by a strong chitinous ring; while all the rest stand at right angles 
to the long axis these are inclined outwards, and so form funnel-like 
structures, in the walls of which the spines run like ribs. These spines 
consist of one piece, while all the rest not only divide into two arms, 
but each of these breaks up again into two secondary arms, which are so 
arranged that the last arm of one and the first of the following spine 
always belong to the same ring. 

The chitinous tube passes at its hinder end into a knob-shaped 
enlargement, which very rapidly narrows to a fine efferent duct which is 
proportionately short, and opens into the penis; at its anterior end it 
passes into a shallow cup which is bored by a narrow orifice hardly 
wider than a spermatozoon; around the inner concave side of this small 
chitinous cup corpuscles are arranged. Thence a tube is invaginated 
into the chitinous tube; this appears to consist of a single layer of cells, 
but the examination of young forms teaches that the layer is double. 
This invaginated tube only extends to about the middle of the chitinous 
tube; the rest of the latter contains a secretion which is coloured a 
light-blue by hematoxylin, and which passes into the efferent duct, and, 
when the latter is injured, escapes as a small, mucous, and highly re- 
fractive droplet. The secretion is probably formed by the cells of the 
invaginated tube, for which the author proposes the term of glandular 
tube in place of Nordquist’s name of internal epithelium ; this secretion 
is of great importance for the spermatozoa, which, in Cypris punctata, 
were observed to be rolled up in it. 

After some observations on the differences which obtain in different 
species, the author proceeds to inquire how the apparatus works. The 
activities of the muscles and of the spine-arms appear to be antagonistic, 
for the rings of the chitinous tube are approximated by the contraction 
of the muscles, while, when these relax, the elasticity of the spines must 
tend to separate the rings from one another. In this way the chitinous 
tube is alternately, and rapidly, shortened and elongated. We have, 
therefore, to do with a pumping apparatus, the suction-power and driving 
power of which are produced by the alternate action of the spine-arms 
and muscles. The shallow cup at the anterior end of the tube seems to 
act as a valve. As soon as the spermatozoon has completely entered the 
apparatus it must be driven out into the ductus ejaculatorius by renewed 
shortenings of the tube. 

It may be concluded that the “slime gland” is morphologically an 
invagination of the vas deferens into itself; its function is to isolate the 
spermatozoa which lie collected in quantities in front of it, and to pump 
them onward. It may also, as Weismann has suggested, have some 
ejaculatory power. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 733 


Vermes. 
a, Annelida. 


Criodrilus lacuum.*—Dr. A. Collin has made a detailed investigation 
ef this Oligochete. Lxceptionally large specimens from the Spree were 
as much as 30 centimetres long, and had 450 segments. The clitellum, 
which has been overlooked by all writers except Dr. Benham, is not 
distinctly marked off, but is merely a slight swelling; its colour, like- 
wise, differs but little from that of the rest of the body, and it is only by 
its histological structure that it can be recognized. 

This worm has, in Berlin, as yet only been found in the Tegeler-See 
and in the Spree, where it lives on mud rich in organic substances. The 
author was able to keep specimens alive for some months in a glass 
basin, but they never became sexually mature; as they live, naturally, 
at a depth of from 8 to 10 feet, the difference in the pressure may be the 
cause of this. In Berlin the worm is sexually mature in June and July. 
The cocoons are chitinous, and about 5 centimetres long ; they exhibit a 
slight indication of a transverse marking, which is probably the expression 
of the several segments of which the cocoon is formed. 

The cuticle is like that of Lumbricus, but much thinner; there is no 
longitudinal or circular arrangement of the fibres, but an oblique one 
only ; the mechanical disadvantage of circular fibres to the contraction 
of the longitudinal muscles is obvious. The whole of the hypodermis, 
especially in the hinder region, is traversed by closely set, fine, 
capillary vessels which aid in respiration. Between the cylindrical 
there are here and there filamentar cells, with a swelling in the middle, 
which corresponds to the position of the nucleus. Unicellular glands 
are not nearly so numerous as in Lumbricus. 'The hypodermis of the 
cephalic lobes differs somewhat from that of the rest of the body; it 
consists of extremely delicate cylindrical cells, which are twice as long 
as those of the hypodermis of other parts of the body. 

A number of the cells of the hypodermis of the cephalic lobes and 
of the first segment are specially differentiated, and form groups of 
goblet-shaped cells, which appear to have a gustatory function. The 
circular muscles consist of flattened fibres which, in transverse section, 
do not exhibit any lumen; with high magnifying powers, however, a 
darkish line may be seen in the middle, and this indicates the lumen of 
the compressed tubular fibre. There are scattered nuclei, which belong 
to the intermuscular connective substance between the muscles. The 
arrangement of the longitudinal muscles of Criodrilus differs somewhat 
from that of the Lumbricide. Rosa has distinguished a ventral, four 
lateral, and two dorsal muscular bands. Dr. Collin, however, does not 
find any break in the median dorsal line, but only a thinning of the 
layer. Into the septa which separate the bundles of muscular fibres 
there are inserted transverse muscles, which extend to the enteric tract, 
and the chief longitudinal vessels. The bundles of the Lumbricide 
consist of two regularly arranged rows of muscular lamelle, which are 
grouped around the central lamella, but in Criodrilus they consist of a 
number of muscular lamelle which are irregularly scattered in the space 
between two neighbouring central lamellez. ‘The separate muscular 
fibres can be easily isolated by potash. 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 471-96 (1 pl.). 


734 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


The lining of the peritoneum is a thin layer of large very flat cells, 
of which, in section, one can generally distinguish only the nuclei, which 
are placed at some distance from one another. The celom is only 
incompletely separated into segments by dissepiments, as the cavities, 
especially around the ventral medulla, are in communication with one 
another. The dorsal mesentery of Criodrilus appears to be aborted. The 
surface of the intestine and of the dorsal vessel is invested by a layer of 
much modified peritoneum—the chloragogue-glands. These are pyriform 
or saccular cells, with brown, coarsely granular contents, which, as a 
rule, hide the nucleus. The muscles of the dissepiments and of the 
ccelom extend in very various directions. 

On the whole, the author confirms the description given by Vejdovsky 
of the structure and arrangement of the nervous system, but he was not 
able to detect the well-developed layer of cells which that author 
describes as lying on the ventral half of the ventral medulla; he finds, 
indeed, that the ganglionic cells are arranged in four rows; the whole of 
the median part of the cord is occupied by fibrous substance in which 
tracts, which follow various directions, can be made out. The walls of 
the large neural canals appear to have double contours. In the hinder 
part of the body there are two, but in the median part three canals, so 
that Vejdovsky’s figure represents a section of the hinder part of the 
body. The median canal is at first of the same size as the two lateral, 
but in the median and anterior part of the body it has a considerably 
greater diameter. In some of his sections the author was astonished to 
find a fourth canal underlying the median third, with which at one point 
it was observed to become connected. 

Around the tip of the tail there are groups of hairs, which are much 
longer than the sete of the gustatory knobs. As it was often observed 
that worms which had extended the caudal portion for the purpose of 
breathing were very sensitive to sudden movements of the water, it may 
be supposed that these hairs are special tactile organs for the perception 
of movements of the water. 

Like the Lumbricide, but unlike the Limicole, Criodrilus has a 
longitudinal subneural, as well as a dorsal and ventral vessel. In 
segments seven to eleven the lateral vessels take on the function of a 
heart. In the dorsal vessel there are valves, which are arranged in a 
segmental manner; the author does not agree with Kuppfer in re- 
garding them as blood-forming organs, but as true valves which, on the 
contraction of the vessels, shut off two adjoining chambers from one 
another, and prevent the return of the blood. In addition to the super- 
ficial capillaries at the hinder end of the body, it was observed that 
there is a large collection of capillaries in the hypodermis of the cephalic 
region, by means of which a good supply of oxygen is obtained for the 
brain. 

Segmental organs are present in the generative segments, and this 
points to close relations between Criodrilus and the Lumbricide. The 
pharyngeal mass, which can be protruded, is provided with three strong 
groups of retractor muscles, but with only one protractor. The author 
agrees with Rosa and Benham in asserting the presence of a typhlosole, 
which was stated by Vejdoysky to be absent. In most points he agrees 
with the descriptions of the generative organs which have been recently 
given by Rosa, Oerley, and Benham. 

In a few cases, but then in large number, the ccelom, and especially 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 735 


the genital segments, was found to contain encysted Gregarines in the 
pseudo-navicella-stage, which resembled the Monocystis of Lumbricus. 

Dr. Collin agrees with Rosa in believing that Criodrilus has close 
systematic affinities to the Lumbricide. Rosa’s views are supported by 
Benham’s discovery of the clitellum. 


Formation of Embryonic Layers and Celom of a Limicolous 
Oligochete.*—M. L. Roule has investigated the earlier stages in the 
development of Enchytreoides Marioni (sp. n.). The nutrient yolk, 
though abundant, is distributed uniformly through the egg, and the first 
two blastomeres are, consequently, almost equal. Afterwards segmenta- 
tion is very irregular, but the germinal does not separate from the 
nutrient yolk and develope much more rapidly. In the morula-stage 
the outer cells form the ectoblast, and the inner the meso-endoblast ; of 
the latter the central cells will give rise to the endoblast. There is 
no definite blastoccel. 

At the end of the morula-stage a cavity, which is at first irregular, 
appears in its centre; this is the first indication of the digestive cavity ; 
the cells which surround it become cylindrical. As the digestive cavity 
increases in size spaces appear in the mass of mesoblastic elements ; 
these spaces fuse with one another, and there is thus formed a cavity 
which divides the mesoblast into two layers, and which will become the 
ceelom. At no period was it observed to communicate with the enteric 
cavity. As the embryo grows the ccelom increases in size; the inner- 
most cells of the parietal layer of mesoblast proliferate, and some become 
free in the cavity, where they produce the formed elements of ccelom ; 
others remain in their places and advance towards the visceral mesoblast, 
with which they fuse; in this way the septa which separate the 
segments are produced. Others of the cells of the parietal layer of the 
mesoblast elongate, secrete a contractile substance, which accumulates 
round the protoplasm which surrounds the nucleus, or become smooth 
muscular fibres. This mesenchymatous origin of the muscular fibres is 
comparable to what happens among the Mollusca; it and the absence of 
initial mesoblast-cells are facts which appear to be explicable by the 
abundance of nutrient yolk, and they must be set against the existence 
of initial mesoblast-cells in most chetopod Annelids, and the epithelial 
origin of the muscular tissue of the adult in the Archi-annelids. 
It is clear from these considerations that the more or less large 
quantity of yolk has an influence on the mode of development of the 
germinal layers and of the tissues, and that consequently we cannot base 
the embryo-genetic relations of animals solely on their histogenetic 
characters. 


Nephridia of Lanice conchilega.t—Mr. J. T. Cunningham gives an 
interesting account of the excretory system of Lanice conchilega 
Malmgren. It consists of eleven nephridia, three rudimentary, in 
somites 3-5; four perfect, in somites 6-9; and four imperfect, in 
somites 10-13. The eight posterior nephridia communicate with each 
other by means of a longitudinal tube formed by the fusion of their 
distal parts. “This,” Mr. Cunningham concludes, “is the first case in 
which such a longitudinal coalescence of nephridia has been discovered, 
and its morphological similarity to vertebrates is obvious.” 


* Comptes Rendus, cvi. (1888) pp. 1811-13. 
+ Proc. R. Sos. Edin., xiv. (1887) p. 2388. 


736 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


New Enchytreide.*—Dr. W. Michaelsen continues his researches 
on Enchytreide. He first describes the new genus Sterculus. The 
bristles are S-shaped ; there is no head-pore; the dorsal vessel springs 
from the girdle segment and is associated with a heart-body ; the blood 
is colourless; there are no salivary glands, the gut is adapted for fluid 
or semi-fluid nutriment, and is blind; the vasa deferentia are long. 
S. niveus n. sp. is described in detail, also Pachydrilus sphagnetorum 
Vejdowsky, var. nov. glandulosus, Mesenchytreeus setosus n. sp. 


B. Nemathelminthes. 


Fertilization of Ascaris.;—Dr. N. Kultschitzky reports in more 
detail the results of his investigation of the processes of fertilization in 
Ascaris megalocephala. The importance of the subject justifies a fuller 
summary than was possible from the preliminary communication. 

He emphasizes the deceptiveness of using different optical appliances 
in the observation of these fine details, and rightly insists on the necessity 
of investigators noting in their researches what objectives, apertures, 
&e., they have used. The best fixing medium is an equal mixture of 
alcohol and acetic acid. Acetic ether was also utilized. For studying 
polar globules and pronuclei fresh material from living animals is 
essential. For segmentation the dead worm, not later than 3-4 hours 
after death, must be kept for some hours, or for a stage beyond four for 
2-3 days, in damp warmth of 35-38° C. There are several advantages 
in inclosing in balsam instead of the usual glycerin. 

The polar globule formation is accomplished after the manner of 
ordinary karyokinesis. By giving off minute amceboid processes, the 
protoplasm of the sperm is gradually reduced during the formation of 
the polar globules. Nor is the entire chromatin of the sperm nucleus 
utilized in the formation of the male pronucleus. When the second 
polar globule is extruded, the sperm nucleus has always a distinctly 
reticular structure. As it is at this stage only rarely quite surrounded 
by its protoplasm, it is partially in direct contact with the protoplasm 
of the ovum. 

In the formation of pronuclei, there is no mixture of male and female 
chromatin. Both pronuclei arise quite independently of one another. 
Each consists of a tolerably firm shining achromatic sheath, of a 
chromatin substance lying apparently in the peripheral portions of the 
pronucleus, and forming there a thick network with a number of nodes, 
of an achromatic substance, and of nucleoli which are usually peripheral. 
The two pronuclei are quite homologous, they originate in a manner sui 
generis. The number of pronuclei was sufficiently noted in the previous 
summary. 

Lach pronucleus begins its karyokinetic changes independently. The 
coil stage, the mother aster, the metakinesis, the dyaster stage, the 
daughter coils, and the resting stage are described in detail. The 
attractive spheres of van Beneden were often observed. ‘They belong to 
the protoplasm of the egg and represent the first sign of the division of 
the cell. Kultschitzky calls them “ Richtungssonnen,” and is convinced 
that they belong entirely to the protoplasm. 


* Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 483-98 (1 pl.). 
~ Ibid., pp, 567-93 (2 pls.). ~ See this Journal, ante, p. 583. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 737 


Finally, he discusses the various theories of the ultimate nature of 
fertilization. The essential fact is the process by which the sperm- 
nucleus becomes modified into an inseparable portion—a nucleus—of the 
ovum, ‘The act is finished with the establishment of the male pro- 
nucleus, the rest is developmental. The punctum saliens is the modifica- 
tion of the nucleus of the sperm-cell into a nucleus of the ovum, and not 
in a replacement of extruded portions of the germinal vesicle by the male 
pronucleus. No fusion of pronuclei was observed. 


Structure and Position of Gordiacew.*—Dr. L. Camerano discusses 
the structure of adult-free-living species of Gordius, gives an anatomical 
diagnosis of the genus, and debates the question of their systematic 
position. Villot regards them as an order of Nemathelminthes, 
Vejdowsky places them as an independent order of “ Nematomorpha,” 
and considers them as degenerate Annulata. The author maintains their 
close affinity with Nematoda, connecting them with Acanthocephala, 
Kinorhyncha, and further back with the Protoannelids. 


Structure and Development of Heterodera Schachtiit—Dr. A. 
Strubell has investigated the structure and development of this nematode 
parasite of the turnip. He has no doubt that during its life-history 
this creature not only passes through a metamorphosis, but through one 
which is more complicated than that of other round-worms, and which is 
of a very extraordinary character. The first larva, which has externally 
the appearance of a nematode, is capable of movement, and lives freely 
in earth, is succeeded by a second form in which the sexual characters 
are also not marked, but which is sessile and parasitic, and of a plump 
appearance. ‘The female generative forms never become developed 
beyond this stage ; they remain all through their lives in a larval con- 
dition. In the male, on the other hand, the second larval stage appears 
to be followed by a period of quiescence, after which the mobile sexual 
form appears, with a partial fresh formation of organs, and a further 
development of the rudiments of the generative apparatus. 

Notwithstanding the observations of Leuckart, which have demon- 
strated the unexpected variability of the nematode type, and have proved 
the existence of heterogeny, no form has yet been described whose 
history can be compared to that of Heterodera. The closest resemblance 
is perhaps established by Hchinorhynchus, for in them, as in Heterodera, - 
there is a pupal stage, during which the old larval skin incloses the 
new worm like a cyst. But Hchinorhynchus has no second larval form, 
the embryo, after a brief period of wandering, passing into the quiescent 
stage. ‘lhe only parallel to the otherwise isolated history of Heterodera 
is to be found in some Insects, and particularly among the Coccide, 
which also lead a phytophagous life. In them there are two larval 
stages with similar biological characteristics; the first larval form is 
freely mobile and of an elongated form, while the second is incapable of 
movement and is plumper. In the Coccide the females likewise retain 
their larval characters, remaining sessile at one spot, and forming a 
brood-capsule which protects the young. The male has a somewhat 
similar history to the male of Heterodera, for, after a pupal stage, in 
which no nourishment is taken, an agile creature is produced, provided 
with all the attributes necessary to copulation. 


* Arch. Ital. Biol., ix. (1888) pp. 243-8. 
+ Leuckart and Chun’s Bibliotheca Zoologica, ii. (1888) 52 pp., 2 pls. 


738 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


The author is careful to point out that, in this comparison, he is 
speaking only of resemblances, and does not suppose that there are close 
relations between the Nematode and the Insect. The parallelism 
in life-history is due to similarity in external conditions. Both forms 
lead a parasitic life, and both have adapted themselves to its require- 
ments. 

The author deals in detail with the structure of the male, of the 
female, with the embryonic and the post-embryonic development. All 
the forms, except the pregnant females, are of microscopic size; the 
free-living larve were found in sufficient numbers in the earth, sticking 
to the root-fibres. The best media for investigations were found to be a 
1/2 per cent. salt solution, or egg-albumen ; to stop their movements the 
animals were slightly warmed over a spirit-lamp, and were thus extended 
though not killed. 


Integument of Heterodera Schachtii.*—M. J. Chatin has investi- 
gated the structure of the integument of Heterodera Schachtii, and the 
modifications which it undergoes in fertilized females. Ina young adult 
female the integument is formed of a cuticle with a hypodermis, which 
invests the musculature of the body. The superficial layer of the cuticle 
is striated, and the deeper layer is fibrillar. The former is transparent, 
refractive, and capable of resisting most chemical agents, and above all 
alkalies; its elegant circular strie are due to the presence of ringlike 
elevations, which are separated by fine grooves. The hypodermis is 
formed of a granular layer in which there are well-marked but not very 
numerous nuclei. Immediately below it there are thick layers of muscular 
tissue. The first change which is observed as a result of fertilization is 
a diminution in the number of the nuclei of the hypodermis, which at the 
same time becomes clearer. As the female increases rapidly in size, the 
muscular layers become more and more delicate, and undergo a sort of 
delamination. Later on their retrograde change is marked by others 
which obtain in the hypodermis. In that layer the number of nuclei 
increases remarkably, and with the proliferation which obtains there is 
also to be noted the appearance of viscous and refractive droplets, which 
collect at the surface of the cuticle. This exudation does not escape by 
cutaneous pores, of which there seem to be none, but by local ruptures 
of the cuticle, which yields to the enormous growth of the body distended 
by ova. 

‘ The muscular layers disappear, sometimes a vestige being left in the 
form of a delicate band attached to the hypodermis, which becomes very 
delicate, and tends to fuse with the cuticle. If the ova are set at liberty 
directly, the cuticle breaks at several points and follows the other tissues 
of the integument in their fate of disintegration. 

The facts just detailed show that those histologists have erred who 
have refused to distinguish sharply the integument from the musculature, 
Some of the changes that are undergone recall the phenomena of histo- 
lysis in other Invertebrates. The brown cyst which is sometimes formed 
for the eggs, being constituted by the exsudation from the hypodermis, 
is neither a new pathological form nor an induration of the integument 
of the worm. Asa measure of prophylaxis it would be well to look for 
mothers with disorganized integuments. 


* Comptes Rendus, cvii. (1888) pp. 139-41. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 739 


Echinorhynchus parasitic in Man, and whose intermediary host 
is a Blaps.*—Prof. B. Grassi and Sig. 8. Calandruccio find in Catania 
that not only is the Echinorhynchus gigas widely disseminated (being 
found in 40 per cent. of the pigs slaughtered), but also another Hchino- 
rhynchus in the small intestine of the dog, and a third in the intestine of 
Mus decumanus and of Myoxus quercinus. Of this last, which is identical 
with Echinorhynchus moniliformis Bremser, and has also been found in 
Arvicola arvalis and Cricetus vulgaris, the most important characteristics 
are given. Greatest length of the female, 7-8 cm. ; of the male, 4-44 cm. 
Diameter 1-13 mm. The anterior extremity is somewhat tapered, and 
the body is marked by a series of constrictions, so that it seems divided 
into segments, except near the tail, which in the female is smooth for the 
last two centimetres, and for the last one in the male. Length of proboscis 
is 425-450 p, and its breadth, 176-190 ». The hooklets are arranged 
in the proboscis in a quincuncial manner (not always evident), and form 
fifteen transverse and fourteen longitudinal rows. Each hooklet is much 
curved. The lemnisci are more than 1 em. long, and 169 » thick. In 
the vascular apparatus are many annular vessels, which encircle the 
body. The bell-like bursa of the male is visible to the naked eye. The 
eggs are elliptical, 85 « long and 45 »% broad. They have three inyest- 
ments: a thin outer yellowish shell ; a middle thick, colourless, and homo- 
geneous one, which is without the hollowings characteristic of Hchino- 
rhynchus gigas; the innermost is likewise colourless, pretty thick, and 
extensile. In its posterior two-thirds the embryo shows a transverse 
striation, and is beset with points, which towards the anterior end increase 
in size and become hooklets, of which at least four are distinguished by 
their greater size (17 ;). 

The Echinorhynchus. just described inhabits the small intestine, and 
principally its upper two-thirds. The common beetle Blaps mucronata 
Lat., is the intermediate host. 'The authors have thrice found more than 
a hundred young of Echinorhynchus moniliformis in a single Blaps. The 
young Hchinorhynchi, easily visible to the naked eye, were encysted, had 
the same characteristics as in the adults, and were oval in shape, their 
long axis being about 1100 » with the investment, and without it 600 p. 
Some of these young Hchinorhynchi were given toa young rat, and others 
were swallowed by one of the authors, Dr. Calandruccio. This was done 
on December 26th, 1887, and on January 10th, 1888, numerous Echino- 
rhynchi, 1 em. long, were found in the intestine of the rat. On January 15th 
Sig. Calandruccio was seized with severe pains in the abdomen, accom- 
panied by occasional diarrhoea, buzzing in the ears, malaise, and drowsi- 
ness. On February 1st a few Echinorhynchi were found in the feces, and 
by February 13th the symptoms became so severe that he was forced to 
take Hair. Fil. liq. This was followed by the expulsion of 53 Echino- 
rhynchi, chiefly female, and in a few days he became quite well, and no 
more ova were found in the feces. From this it will be seen that a 
parasite of Mus decumanus, Echinorhynchus moniliformis, is capable of 
developing in man. 


Ankylostomum duodenale.j|—Herr O. Seifert continues his study 
of Ankylostomum duodenale, the occurrence of which as a human parasite 
makes it an important subject of research practically. After giving an 


* Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 521-5 (7 figs.). 
+ Verh. Phys, Med. Gesell. Wirzburg, xxi, (1888) pp. 283-94 (1 pl.). 


740 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


account of its general occurrence, the author notes its special prevalence 
in the tile-works near Cologne, and points out how its local distribution 
shows that the encapsuled larvee passed from the clay, by way of un- 
washed hands and the like, to their human hosts. Several obvious 
hygienic precautions are suggested, the symptoms of the disease are 
described at length, and the mode of treatment noted. 

The observations of Leichtenstern as to eggs and larve are corrobo- 
rated. The mature animals are more abundant in jejunum and upper 
regions of the ileum than in the duodenum. They attach themselves to 
the mucous membrane, and suck blood. The number present varies 
from 15-8000. The differences between the sexes and some of the 
prominent features are then described. The average length of life is 
five years. 


Gape Worm of Fowls.*—Lord Walsingham calls attention to Dr. 
H. D. Walker’s recent paper t on the Gape Worm of Fowls (Syngamus 
trachealis). The American naturalist claims to have discovered that the 
common earthworm (Lumbricus terrestris) is the intermediate host of this 
parasite, and suggests the use of common salt on infected poultry runs 
with the object of destroying the hosts. This theory is strongly sup- 
ported by the experience of game preservers; those who have fed birds 
with food carefully moistened with pure spring water only have had 
good results, though they have not always escaped from attacks of the 
disease. Dry summers are always much more favourable for rearing 
pheasants and partridges than those in which there is much rain; as 
everybody knows, earthworms do not come to the surface so long as the 
ground is dry and hard, but when it becomes sufficiently moistened they 
reach the surface, and all species of birds of which they form a natural 
or favourite food are eager to seek and devour them. Notwithstanding 
the incredulity with which Dr. Walker’s results have been received in 
America, Lord Walsingham thinks that men with field experience will 
be inclined to endorse them. 


3. Incertz# Sedis. 


Asplanchnide.t{—M. J. de Guerne takes the opportunity of having 
to describe a new species (A. Imhofi) of Asplanchna from Lagoa Grande, 
to write a monographic note on this family of Rotifers. The other new 
species described are A. Herricki, A. Krameri, and A. Girodi. A key- 
table of the known species is given, the characters of the masticatory 
apparatus being taken as one of the most important aids in distinction. 
A new genus (Asplanchnopus) is proposed for Brachionus multiceps of 
Schrank. The author is of opinion that the genus Ascomorpha should 
not be placed with the Asplanchnide; it has only been so assigned 
because of the absence of an anal aperture, but this is a character due to 
adaptation to a peculiar mode of life, and if generally adopted, would 
lead to a very incorrect idea of the relationship of Rotifers. In Asco- 
morpha the mastax is feeble, and the form and appendages of the stomach 
are very peculiar ; for the present it had better be left among the forms 
incerte sedis. The synonymy of the three known species is given, 


* Nature, xxxviii. (1888) pp. 324-5. 
t Bull. Buffalo Soc. Nat. Sci., v. (1886-7) No. 2. 
~ Ann, and Mag. Nat. Hist., ii. (1888) pp. 28-40. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 741 


Echinedermata. 


Nervous System of Echinodermata.*—Dr. C. F. Jickeli deals, in 
his second preliminary communication, with the nervous system of 
Asterids. He is able to confirm the chief results of preceding inquirers. 
The ambulacral nervous system, in the region of the mouth, exhibits a 
distinction of the parts of the masses of nerve-fibres; the ventral longi- 
tudinal fibrous masses of the radial ambulacral nerves pass into the 
circular fibres of the oral ring. If a transverse section be made through 
an ambulacrum of Asterias rubens close to the mouth, fibres are found in 
the dorsal part which run parallel to the direction of the section, while 
ventrally there is a rounded body made up of fibrils which have been cut 
across. In Stichaster roseus, a separation of a ventral from a dorsal 
mass may be made out throughout the whole length of the ambulacral 
nerve. 

The subepithelial plexus is much more highly differentiated than has 
been hitherto supposed. Lange’s nerve is seen in cross sections to be a 
paired thickening of the ventral wall of the perihemal canal. Careful 
histological investigation shows that it is made up of a delicate flattened 
epithelium which invests the whole of the perihemal cavity, of large 
ganglionic cells lying directly beneath this, and having their processes 
woven into a fibrous layer, in which separate ganglionic cells are 
imbedded, and of a lamella of connective tissue which forms a parti- 
tion between the ambulacral nerves and those of Lange. The latter 
accompany the ambulacral nerves along the groove, and take part in the 
formation of the oral ring. Between two successive ambulacral plates 
the nerve extends, with a continuation of the perihemal canal, as far as 
the adambulacral plate, where it forms a swelling; from this a cord may 
be traced into the fibrous mass of the muscle between the ambulacral 
and adambulacral plate; in some cases, e.g. Luidia Sarsi, it may be 
traced on to the neighbouring parts of the body-wall. 

Dr. Jickeli announces the discovery of a fourth system of nerves, 
which forms a layer of fine fibrils intermixed with stellate cells at the 
base of the epithelium of the digestive tract. This was best seen near 
the anus of Astropecten andromeda. 


Ceelenterata. 


System of Siphonophora.}—Prof. E. Haeckel proposes a new theory 
to explain the organization of the Siphonophora. ‘This he calls the 
medusome theory. 

(1) The primary larva which first arises from the gastrula of the 
Siphonophora is always a simple medusa-person. It may be more or 
less modified cenogenetically, but it has always great palingenetic 
significance. 

(2) This primary larva appears in two essentially different forms 
which may be called the Disconula and the Siphonula ; according to the 
presence of one or the other we haye the two subclasses of Disconanthe 
and Siphonanthe. 

(3) The Disconanthe, which contain the single order of Chondro- 
phoride or Porpitariz, are developed from the regular and octoradial 


* Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 339-42. 
+ Jenaische Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., xxii. (1888) pp. 1-46. 


1888. 38 


742 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


medusa-larva Disconula ; it has a marginal circlet of tentacles throughout 
life, and produces the persons of the colony by budding from the 
subumbrella. 

(4) The Siphonanthe, which include the Calycophoride, Physo- 
phoridw, Pheumatophoride, and Aurophoride, have as a primary larva a 
bilateral medusa, which is distinguished by a ventral umbrella-cleft, and 
the possession of a single tentacle (Siphonula)., The persons of the 
colony are produced by unilateral budding from the gastric wall of the 
manubrium. 

(5) The primary larva of the Disconanthe is to be regarded as the 
ontogenetic repet tion of a common and archaic octoradial stem-form 
(Archimeda), and its phylogenetic origin is probably t» be sought for 
among the Trachomeduse (Trachynemidx, Pectyllide). 

(6) The primary larva of the Siphonanthe is to be regarded as 
the ontogenetic repetition of a common archaic bilateral stem-form 
(Protomeda), whose origin is probably to be sought for among the 
Anthomedusze (Codonidz, Euphyride). 

(7) All the parts which arise by budding from the primary larva of 
the Siphonophora are either medusiform persons or special organs 
thereof. 

(8) All the organs which primitively belong to a medusa-person may 
be comprehended under the medusoma, and that whether they arise from 
a common basis on the trunk, or separately in various places, in con- 
sequence of cenogenetic migration or dislocation, The multiplication 
of separate equivalent parts (such as nectophores or bracts) are not to 
be regarded as multiplication of persons or medusome, but merely of 
organs. 

*9) Although the medusome arises under two distinct forms these 
cannot be sharply separated from one another; in the palingenetic 
medusomes the chief organs remain more or less in their primitive con- 
nection (as, for example, in the gonophore of Hudoaia); in the cenogenetic 
medusomes the primary organs are more or less dislocated, as in the 
sterile medusa of Hudowia. 

(10) The lateral budding of the secondary medusomes (appendages) 
on the trunk may be solitary or in groups; the name of cormidia is given 
to the groups which are composed of several medusomes. 

(11) The cormidia are primitively simple segmental repetitions 
of a medusome-group in metameric succession, which are separated by 
free internodes (cormidia ordinata) as in the Hudoxiz of the Calyco- 
phorida, &e. 

(12) By the breaking up of such primitive cormidia there arose those 
centralized cormi in which the persons bud at various points of the trunk ; 
in this way the several organs become separated from one another 
(cormidia dissoluta), e.g. Agalmopsis, Polyphyes. 

(13) The retrograde development of the several medusomes and their 
dislocated organs is of very great significance in the development of the 
Siphonophorous colonies, and is greater proportionately to the centraliza- 
tion of the cormus. 

The several points here noted are then treated separately and in 
more detail. Notes then follow on monogastric and polygastrice cor- 
midia, on the stem or trunk, the nectosoma (or swimming body), and 
the siphosoma (or nutrient body), the nectophores or swimming bells, 
the pneumatophore or swim-bladder, and the aurophore or air-bell; 


9 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 743 


there may be one or more siphons. The palpones or tactile organs, 
the cystones or anal bladders, the seizing organs and touch-filaments, 
the bracts or covering pieces, the gonostyle or generative stalk, and 
the gonephores or generative persons are all separately dealt with. 
The Disconanthe have one order, the Disconecte, in which the family 
Discalide is new. Among the Siphonanthe we have the Calyconecte 
as the equivalent of the Calycophoride, the Physonectx for the Physo- 
phoridz, and the new order of Auronecte, and the Cystonecte, which 
are equivalent to the Pneumatophoride. 


Life-history of Epenthesis McCradyi, n. sp.*—Prof. W. K. Brooks 
describes the life-history of an interesting Hydro-medusa (Hpenthesis 
MecCradyi n. sp.), remarkable and indeed unique in the possession of 
“buds which, like ege-embryos, recapitulate, in their own ontogenetic 
development, larval stages which their parent has already passed.” 

The medusa carries on its reproductive organs campanularian 
hydroid blastostyles, inclosed in chitinous gonangia. These do not 
multiply by budding or form hydroid corms, but produce meduse by 
budding. 

The ectoderm of the blastostyle is produced by ordinary gemmation, 
and is directly continuous with the ectoderm of the medusa. The 
endoderm has no direct connection with that of the medusa, though the 
germ cells from which it arose were probably in remote origin endo- 
dermic. The germ cells form the endoderm of the blastostyle by a 
process of specialization like that which Metschnikoff has described in 
Cunina as sporogenesis. The blastostyles and their medusa buds have no 
direct nutritive communication with the medusa. They are parasites 
upon the tissue of its reproductive organ. 

The Eucopide, to which Epenthesis belongs, is not among the 
families in which proliferous meduse are common. Haeckel doubts the 
occurrence of budding in the family. The new species under discussion, 
however, certainly produces buds, and it is very probable that another 
species, E. folliata, multiplies asexually by fission. Brooks notes that 
his drawings (made in 1881) of ZH. folliata in all essential particulars 
duplicate those recently published by Lang in regard to his Gastroblasta 
raffaelii. “It is not improbable that Gastroblasta raffaelii is also an 
Epenthesis which in addition to this power (of multiplying by fission) is 
also able to build up, by incomplete fission, polygastric meduse of con- 
siderable size.” Just as Lang pointed out how his species illustrated 
the way in which a form like Porpita may have been evolved from a 
polygastric medusa, so Brooks notes that Hpenthesis McCradyi, with its 
pendant blastostyles hanging from a swim-bell and carrying medusa 
buds, stands in a somewhat similar relation to the ordinary Siphono- 
phores. 


Arachnactis and Cerianthus.t—Prof. C. Vogt has no doubt that 
Mr. Alexander Agassiz is wrong in thinking Arachnactis to be a larval 
form of Edwardsia. It is an Anthozoon which swims about during the 
whole of its life, exhibits in its organization a well-marked bilateral 
symmetry, and is closely allied to the Cerianthide. Cerianthus is an 
animal which is strictly bilateral in its symmetry, for its body is divided 


* Stud, Biol. Lab. Johns Hopkins Uniy., iv. (1888) pp. 147-62 (3 pls.). 
+ Arch. de Biol., viii. (1888) pp. 1-41 (8 pls.). 
SoBe 


744 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


into two identical halves by a plane which passes through the axis of 
the body, the buccal cleft, the unpaired tentacles and ventral chamber, 
the groove between the two continuous septa, and the dorsal chamber of 
multiplication. This symmetry is due to the primitive formation of the 
unpaired ventral chamber and the two (buccal and marginal) unpaired 
tentacles; it is continued, during life, by the formation of new septa 
and cavities, with their external or tentacular and internal or mesen- 
teric appendages, from a single median point whence the products pass 
towards either side. Though the ventral chamber undergoes no 
change, the dorsal one is repeatedly subdivided owing to the forma- 
tion of new internal septa. Arachnactis and Cerianthus appear to be the 
only living Anthozoa which preserve this bilateral symmetry intact 
during the whole of their lives. In others this symmetry is affected 
by the growth of new septa from other points of the periphery of the 
body. 

The Cerianthide may be defined as free Actinie with persistent 
bilateral symmetry, a terminal pore leading into the general cavity, a 
large buccal disc, surrounded by two circlets of tentacles, marginal and 
buccal, which are separated by a wide smooth peristome. The tentacles 
are arranged by pairs in such a way that a tentacle of each kind opens 
in each lateral chamber. The septa do not reach to the floor of the 
general cavity, with the exception of the two which correspond to the 
unpaired tentacle, and these form an internal groove which leads to the 
pore. The genus Arachnactis (Sars) has a rounded body, a few tentacles, 
and short similar septa; the animals are pelagic and swim by means of 
vibratile cilia. Cerianthus (Delle Chiaje) has an elongated body which 
is surrounded by a sheath formed by mucus and nematocysts; the 
tentacles are numerous; the short septa are either sterile or repro- 
ductive. The animals live in tubes at the bottom of the water. Bathy- 
anthus of Moseley is regarded as a doubtful genus. 

The observations of Lacaze-Duthiers have shown that bilateral 
symmetry is characteristic of larval Anthozoa, and is a point of great 
importance. Such forms as retain it throughout life may be justly 
regarded as presenting a primitive arrangement. Haime drew attention 
to the resemblance between Cerianthus and the rugose corals; these 
paleozoic forms reached their highest development in the Silurian 
period. Another point to be noted is that the development of Arach- 
nactis is continuous, and that there is no intermediate secondary 
stage. 

There is a certain primitive conformation common to the Anthozoa 
and the Acalephe among the Meduse, whence Arachnactis goes off in one 
and Pelagia and its allies in another direction. But they always remain 
free, and produce ova and larve in that condition. In most Anthozoa 
and Acalephe there is a more or less well-marked period of fixation, due 
to different causes, and characterized by the asexual production of buds. 
Now, no one will deny that the primitive and ancestral form of the 
Anthozoa was an animal swimming freely in the sea, provided with an 
invaginated buccal tube which is retained in that position by vertical 
septa developed symmetrically on either side of the buccal cleft; this 
bilaterally symmetrical form produced eggs and not buds, and the young 
grew up directly into the likeness of their parent. Nor will any one 
deny that the fixed state is secondary and is generally characterized by 
asexual modes of reproduction. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 745 


If an Anthozoon had produced medusoid buds it would, on the 
analogy of our explanation of the morphology of the Hydrozoa, be said 
that the fixed stage was the primitive, ancestral, and normal. 

At this the author stops, but it is not difficult for the reader to see 
the significance of these considerations. 


New Type of Anthozoa.—M. C. Viguier describes,* under the name 
of Fascicularia radicans, a new type of Anthozoa which was collected in 
the port of Algiers. The single specimen was a female colony which 
formed a fixed network of anastomosing stolons from 3 to 6 mm. wide. 
The polyps which rose from these had, when completely retracted, very 
much the appearance of those of Paralcyonium ; when expanded, how- 
ever, they were seen to be very different. The polyps of the new form 
are entirely distinct from one another, and their separation is very 
strongly marked by white lines, formed by the spicules which lie at the 
top of the septa between the polyps. The common wall which surrounds 
the cluster of polyps is supported by a palisade of long white spicules, 
which are set vertically. The free portion of the polyps may expand to 
twice the height of the basal column or to a length of from 16 to 18 mm. 
The number of polyps in one cluster is uot more than ten or twelve. 
The author proposes to form for the reception of this new type a sub- 
family of Fascicularine, intermediate between the Cornularine and the 
Alcyonine. 

M. Lacaze-Duthierst thinks this new type is his Paralcyonium 
edwardsit. 


‘Porcupine’ Pennatulida.t—Prof. A. Milnes Marshall and Mr. G. 
H. Fowler report on the Pennatulida dredged by H.MLS. ‘ Porcupine.’ 
The collection included seven genera and nine species, of which one genus 
(Deutocaulon), and one variety (candida) of Pennatula phosphorea are 
new to science. Kélliker’s classification is followed, though not regarded 
as satisfactory, e.g. in the wide separation of Protocaulide and Virgu- 
laride. Descriptive notes are given in regard to Piteroides griseum KOU. ; 
Pennatula phosphorea L. var. aculeata Koll.; var. lancifolia, sub-var. 
variegata K6ll.; var. candida, n.; P. rubra Ell.; Svava glacialis, var. 
alba Kor. and Dan.; Funiculina quadrangularis Pall.; Kophobelemnon 
stelliferum Mill.; Deutocaulon n. g., D. hystricis n. sp.; Protoptilum 
carpenteri. 

Deutocaulon is intermediate between the simple Protocaulon and such 
forms as Oladiscus and Svava. It is defined as—Pennatulida ex familia 
Protocaulidarum, quorum autozooidea, singulatim orta, penne laterales 
fiunt; calyx nullus; axis cylindratus. 


Porifera. 


Natural History of Siliceous Sponges.§—Prof. F. C. Noll, in the 
first of his essays on the natural history of siliceous sponges, deals with 
Desmacidon Bosci Noll from the coast of Norway, and makes some ob- 
servations on Craniella carnosa and Spongilla fragilis. ‘The new species 
is about 6 cm. high, and from 5 to 6 mm. thick; it is of a greyish- 
yellow colour, and becomes whitish-grey in spirit. There are a large 


* Comptes Rendus, evii. (1888) pp. 186-7. + Loe. cit., p. 215, 
t Trans. R. Soc. Edin., xxxiii. (1888) pp. 453-64 (2 pls.). 
§ Abh. Senckenberg. Nat. Gesell., xv. (1888) pp. 1-58 (8 pls.). 


746 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


number of oscula, which are found on both sides of the sponge, and 
which vary a good deal in size. No afferent pores could be detected 
on the surface of the sponge. There are various forms of siliceous 
structures, into the detailed account of which the author enters very 
fully. He discusses also their mode of growth, and comes to the 
conclusion that the skeletal spicules probably grow by apposition, 
while those of the cortex are not essentially increased in size by such 
process. 

Prof, Noll was unable to make out the ectoderm, but he ascribes this 
to the mode of preparation, as he does not accept the doctrine of Gétte 
that the ectoderm of all sponges is lost during metamorphosis, and he 
brings evidence afforded by his own observations on Spongilla fluviatilis 
as opposing it. The surface of the Desmacidon is thin and transparent ; 
it generally lies close to the parenchyma, and cannot be easily torn off 
in large shreds. Sometimes the layer appears to be merely formed of a 
homogeneous ground substance with a few cell-nuclei, but in other cases 
there are cellular elements, some contractile fibres, or non-nucleated 
fibres. Where the clear ground-substance is predominant, numerous 
cell-nuclei of various sizes are imbedded in it; these do not colour 
strongly, and never lie so close to one another that their boundaries 
touch. The non-nucleated fibres generally lie close to one another and 
form bands which run in various directions. The contractile fibres 
appear to be the elongated terminal poles of long spindle-shaped cells ; 
the nuclei of these cells are oval, and the cell-contents finely granular. 
One would be inclined to speak of these as muscle-cells, if they could be 
shown to be provided with nerves. In any case it is possible that they 
have some reflex activity, and changes in the form of the surface of the 
sponge may be often observed. 

Around the osculum there is a circlet of the so-called muscle-cells, 
and by their elongation the orifice could certainly be narrowed. The 
contractile fibres are wanting in the neighbourhood of the smaller 
openings which serve as incurrent orifices. 

The parenchyma is very well developed, and forms the chief part of 
the sponge; in it the cellular elements are predominant, and the ground- 
substance is considerably reduced; compared with those of Spongilla, 
the cells are proportionately small, but they vary considerably in form 
and size. Non-nucleated protoplasmic corpuscles make up the chief part 
of the parenchyma; between them a number of free ccell-nuclei are to 
be seen in the parenchyma, and these are all spherical in form. Complete 
cells with protoplasm and nucleus, but in all cases without a membrane, 
are not so numerous as the bodies just mentioned. Occasionally there 
are two nuclei in one cell; wandering cells are also to be seen, and 
they may or may not have a nucleus; indeed, it might almost be thought 
that the nuclei and protoplasm of the cells can lead an independent life. 

With regard to the formation of spicules, the author concludes that 
definite cells are set apart for the purpose ; these silicoblasts elongate, 
their contents clear up, and the central filament first appears. As the 
delicate membrane of the body of a Rhizopod conditions the form of the 
calcareous shell, and as the test of the diatom is preformed by the 
delicate cell-membrane which serves as its basis, so we may, with 
Bowerbank, call the central filament a membrane formed internally by 
the cell. Its form depends on that of the silicoblast, and so we see the 
spicular mother-cells of the spicula of Spongilla elongate like the 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 747 


spicules, while the amphidiscs arise in almost spherical and only 
laterally compressed silicoblasts. The central filament is rich in water. 
As to the origin of the silex we know nothing definitely. The activity 
of the mother-cells appears to be periodic, for it sometimes secretes 
spiculin, and then again silex. The cell-contents of the silicoblast are 
soluble and give rise to the central filament; around this silica is 
deposited, and so the axial cylinder is formed; layers of silica with their 
membrane succeed one another until the mother-cell is used up. The 
spongoblasts are cells which differ essentially from the silicoblasts, 
and in Spongilla are often remarkable for their large size; in it and 
Desmacidon they have the same form and position. 

The water, which passes by numerous pores into the sponge, first 
passes into the meshes of the subdermal network, whence itis distributed 
to numerous fine canaliculi, to pass to the flagellated chambers which 
are scattered throughout the whole of the parenchyma. Other canaliculi 
surround them and carry off the water directly to the efferent orifices. 
D. Bosci appears to belong to Vosmaer’s third type, for the region of 
collar-cells opens directly into wide canals, and then again into wider 
vessels, or cloacal cavities which open to the exterior. 

It is possible that the new sponge is bisexual, but the evidence as to 
the spermatozoa isincomplete. Ova are developed in great numbers and 
are found in all parts of the tissue; they are rapidly aud easily stained, 
and can also be recognized by their considerable size from the cells 
among which they he. The nucleus and nucleolus are well marked, but 
the finely granular protoplasm is not bounded by any membrane; indeed, 
they vary in form, and are certainly amceboid. Their further develop- 
ment is commenced within the sponge ; when four blastomeres are formed 
a follicle becomes developed, which has the form of an extremely fine 
membranous investment, and is found in all further stages of develop- 
ment observed within the sponge as a closed capsule. 

The author concludes with some observations on the systematic 
characters of the genus Desmacidon. 


‘Challenger’ Hexactinellida.*—Apart from the systematic portion 
of Prof. F. EH. Schulze’s monograph on Hexactinellida included in the 
reports of the ‘ Challenger’ expedition, the results of most value are to be 
found in the discussion of the general structure of the soft and hard parts, 
and of the general system of the group. Of the ninety forms collected 
by the ‘ Challenger,’ fifty-nine were new, and in addition to these nine 
new species from other sources are described. The geographical and 
bathymetrical distribution of the Hexactinellida are discussed at length, 
and furnish valuable results. From the nature of the case, but few histo- 
logical results were forthcoming. Thus Schulze was unable to demon-_ 
strate the collars or flagella of the ciliated chambers, or the contours of 
the flat epithelial cells. The only chapter in regard to which serious 
difference of opinion can arise is of course that which deals with the 
phylogeny. The Hexactinellida are all derived from a common stem. 
From this the Hyalonematide early diverged. The other branch in- 
cludes the Uncinataria (Dictyonina minus Meandrospongie), an offshoot 
for the Huplectellide, Rossellide, and Asconematide, and the Mzandro- 
spongie. 


( * Reports of the Voyage of H.M.S. ‘Challenger,’ Zoology, xxi. (1888) 513 pp. 
105 pls.). 


748 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Fresh-water Sponges.*—Dr. A. Wicrzejski found near Lemberg in 
Galicia, what appeared to be a new form of fresh-water sponge, most nearly 
resembling Spongilla nove terre, described by Potts from Newfound- 
land. More accurate examination convinced him, however, that the 
form in question was a deformed Meyenia (Ephydatia) miilleri Lieberk., 
and he believes that the same is true of the Newfoundland species. The 
author makes a detailed comparison of the two forms, showing their 
close resemblance and the reasons for regarding both as abnormal 
varieties. He believes that the conditions affecting the abnormal 
development, especially of the gemmules, are environmental. The 
various forms of Euspongilla are briefly discussed, and aceording to 
Wierzejski are all referable to one species. The paper is mainly of 
systematic interest. 


New Species of Uruguaya.{—Dr. G. J. Hinde gives an account of 
two new species of this fresh-water sponge—U. macandrewi and U. 
pygmea—from Paraguay, together with notes on U. coralliodes. Dr. 
Hinde shows that Mr. Carter was wrong in thinking that gemmules were 
not developed in this genus ; in one species gemmules have not yet been 
found, and in another they are scarce. These facts may be correlated 
with the evident conditions of existence to which they are subjected ; 
their large size results from an uninterrupted growth of several years’ 
duration, so that the specimens must have lived in positions where they 
were not exposed to those influences of heat, drought, or cold which 
limit the existence of most fresh-water sponges to a single season. In 
other words, their conditions of existence must have approximated 
closely to those of marine forms. The gemmules are only found in the 
basal layer of the sponge, and it is probable that they are not produced 
after the first year. Uruguaya is probably related to Meyenia. Dr. 
Hinde approves of Dr. Marshall’s suggestion that fresh-water sponges 
are of polyphyletic origin. 


Protozoa. 


Vesicular Elements of Protoplasm in Protozoa.t—M. J. Kunstler 
remarks that for the last six years he has taught that the protoplasm of 
certain beings, especially Protozoa, is not the continuous material— 
sarcode—as some have declared, but that it has a special and constant 
structure, which, now that his view has become almost classical, he 
proposes to speak of as areolar and alveolar. This structure is charac- 
terized by an intimate mixture of denser and more fluid matter, the 
former forming the closed alveoli which contain the latter. 

In some recent observations on a Foraminifer M. Kunstler observed 
that, in a young stage, the protoplasm was perforated by fine vacuoles 
with thick walls and containing a small quantity of fluid; externally it 
was covered by a delicate pellicle with oblique striw. In the course of 
development these small cavities, in the internal region, become altered 
in appearance; they grow into small vesicles. At the periphery of the 
body the primitive appearance persists for a longer time, and there thus 
arises a differentiation between endo- and ectoplasm. We arrive at a 
stage in which we have not to do with a protoplasmic being merely 


* Verh. K. K. Zool.-Bot. Gesell., xxxiii. (1858) pp. 529-36 (1 pl.). 
+ Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ti. (1888) pp. 1-12 (1 pl.). 
t~ Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1684-6. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 749 


hollowed by vacuoles, but we see distinct, rounded, floating vesicles, 
with a dense wall and a contained liquid. 

As the animal grows the number of vesicles increases at the expense 
of the ectoplastic vacuoles, and they end by constituting by far the 
greater part of the mass of the body, while the importance of the ecto- 
plasm gradually diminishes. There may, indeed, be at last merely a 
more or less thick sheath formed by the ectoplasm. The vesicular 
elements do not only increase by the transformation of the primitive 
areole of the protoplasm, for they are often found elongated or con- 
stricted in the middle, as though they were about to divide. The degree 
of disappearance of the ectoplasm varies much in different creatures. In 
some the whole of the body is transformed, and, when there is no inter- 
vesicular liquid, the protoplasm is completely formed by a reticulation 
with polygonal alveoli; in this case all ectoplasm disappears. In other 
cases only a few vesicles are produced, the liquid is abundant, and the 
ectoplasm is more or less distinct. The author denies the existence of 
the plexus which has been described as being present in the ectoplasm 
of ciliated Infusoria, and regards it as an optical illusion. 


Physiology of Nutrition in Protozoa.*—Dr. M. Meissner finds that 
in the Rhizopods which he examined no chemical or optical change 
could be detected in starch-grains or oil-drops, but that in many cases a 
digestion of vegetable and animal albumen was observed. Many Infu- 
soria, if deprived of other food, convert the starch they take up into a 
substance (? dextrin) which stains red when treated with iodine solution, 
and, later on, becomes dissolved in the body. Oil, however, remains 
unchanged. Vegetable and animal albumens are easily dissolved by 
Infusoria, while albumen that has been cooked appears to undergo no 
change. 

The author remarks that in most text-books Amebe are described 
as “flowing around” their food; Duncan, Leidy, and Greenwood have 
described them as drawing in foreign particles with their hinder im- 
mobile parts. He has himself observed both kinds of ingestion, and the 
latter, which is not easy to make out, in Ameba princeps. The animal 
drew in its prey, which was in this particular case a Bacterium, by means 
of its hinder fringe-like protoplasmic processes, while the water taken in 
at the same time formed the ingestion-vacu le. In the anterior part of 
the Ameba, in which the nucleus was visible, there was no movement 
forwards of the protoplasm, but a very lively Brownian movement, 
during this process. 

The Rhizopoda used for observation were Ameba princeps, A. radiosa, 
Pelomyxa palustris, and Actinophrys sol. The Infusoria were Climaco- 
stomum virens, Vorticella nebulifera, and Peranema trichophorum. The 
first-named infusorian digested a Difflugia in about twenty-five minutes, 
when the completely unaltered test was found in a vacuole. The un- 
altered chlorophyll was generally excreted by the Infusoria, and the 
chitinous carapace of a Rotifer, which had served as food for a Stentor, 
was also seen to be extruded. 


Nature of Contractile Vacuole.{—Dr. C. de Bruyne is of opinion 
that the contractile vacuole of Protozoa has no communication with the 
exterior. He does not regard it as an excretory organ, but thinks it 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (L888) pp. 498-516 (1 pl.). 
+ Bull, Acad. R. Sci. Belg., lvi_ (1888) pp. 718-44 (1 pl.). 


750 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


probable that it has respiratory and circulatory functions, while its con- 
tained liquid may possibly be of a nutrient nature. This judgment is 
chiefly based on the fact that in no case has the author been able to 
observe a direct communication with the exterior. He regards it as 
certain that the liquid which is driven out by the vacuole does not quit 
the protoplasmic body, but is distributed throughout it. A confirmatory 
fact is to be found in the observation that in the protoplasm droplets 
appear which fuse to form the first sign of the contractile vacuole. As 
the droplets leave the vacuole they grow smaller and smaller till they 
are, at last, invisible. 


Further Observations on Multinuclear Infusoria.* — Prof. A. 
Gruber has made some further observations on multinuclear Infusoria. 
He finds that there are a considerable number of marine Infusoria, 
holotrichous, and, especially, hypotrichous forms, in which numerous, 
sometimes hundreds of nuclei are scattered in the plasma. The fact 
that these bodies show, when dividing, the well-known striated structure, 
proves that they are really nuclei. When a division is about to take 
place they fuse into a single mass; but this may again break up before 
the daughter-individuals have separated, and so in each of these there 
may be a large number of nuclei. 

It is difficult to say what this multinuclear condition means; it is 
possible that it is an advantage against injuries, for each separate piece 
would contain at least a nucleus or a paranucleus, and so be capable of 
regeneration ; such pieces are, also, capable of growing up into complete 
individuals, while non-nucleated pieces do not last long. In support of 
this supposition it should be noted that these multinuclear Infusoria are 
all very soft and changeable in form ; some also are greatly elongated, 
and so frequently exposed to injuries. The multinuclear fresh-water 
Infusoria, Loxodes rostrum, is also a fragile organism, and here too the 
numerous nuclei have perhaps the same significance. 

In Opalina ranarum the large number of nuclei is connected with the 
mode of reproduction which, as is well known, consists in a number of 
rapidly succeeding divisions, or what might be called a breaking up of 
the body into a number of pieces, each of which has one or more nuclei. 

The case of Holosticha scutellum shows us that we are not justified in 
concluding that a substance is absent because we cannot see it at once 
with the best of our optical instruments. The paranuclei are here so 
small, owing to repeated division, that they cannot be seen by our eyes. 
In Chenia teres and in Trachelocerca the nuclei themselves are so small 
that they only appear as fine granulations. If the author’s idea that the 
nucleus is the seat of the histogenetic plasma, and the paranucleus that 
of the idioplasma (germ-plasma) be correct, Holosticha scutellum affords 
us a proof that the latter, although of material nature, may be removed 
from our perception, in consequence of repeated divisions. This is 
generally the case in the metazoic cell, although at certain times of 
cell-life it may be visible to us. In the process of division in Holosticha 
the nuclear mass, which is at first single, becomes broken up into pieces, 
not in any chance way, but by a succession of nuclear divisions; we 
must suppose that the same happens to the substance of the para- 
nucleus, recognizing that we have to do with values which are so small 
that we cannot perceive them with our present means of research. What 


* Ber. Nat. Gesell. Freiburg i. B., iii. (1888) pp. 57-69 (2 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. fol 


we do know is that a body which is at one time visible becomes invisible 
by repeated divisions, but we recognize that it is still present. 

The chief multinuclear holotrichous Infusoria are Holophrya oblonga, 
Lagynus elongatus, Cheenia teres, Trachelocerca pheenicopterus, and T. minor 
(sp. n.); while the hypotrichous are Holosticha lacazei, multinucleata, 
flava, scutellum, Uroleptus roscovianus, zignis, Epiclinites auricularis, 
vermis (sp. n.), and Gonsstomum pediculiforme. 


Researches on Ciliated Infusoria.*—M. Fabre-Domergue divides 
his present memoir on the ciliated Infusoria into a descriptive and a 
general part. The former is necessary on account of the disorder and 
confusion which obtains in our knowledge of the holotrichous forms, on 
which we have not such fine monographs as those of Stein on the other 
groups. The species dealt with are Prorodon niveus, Cyrtostomum leucas, 
Ophryoglena atra and O. flava of Ehrenberg, Plagyopyla fusca of 
Quennerstedt, Balantidium elongatum of Stein, and Monodinium Balbianti 
g.et sp.nov. The last differs from Didinium nasutum by having only 
one anterior circlet of cilia in the adult stage, and two in that of division, 
and by its smaller size. From Mesodinium it differs in the character of 
its cilia. 

In the general part the author commences with an account of the 
protoplasm ; this is made up of two elements which are closely united — 
a solid reticulated hyaloplasm and a liquid paraplasm. Both these 
elements are endowed with a very high degree of osmotic power, but 
they cannot mix with water during life. It is on the hyaloplasm that 
the density of the protoplasm depends ; it is contractile, and is capable 
of fusing with itself; it is in its mass that true nutrition is effected, and 
in it that reserve or excreted material is deposited; it is eminently 
coagulable by acids, heat, &c. When fresh it is soluble in potash, but 
cannot be attacked by that reagent after it has been coagulated. 

The paraplasm corresponds to the sarcode of Dujardin, as he studied 
it by transudation through the cuticle of Paramecia. Its chemical 
properties are the same as those of hyaloplasm, but it has no contractility. 
The ectoplasm is a more or less dense layer of hyaloplasm; in some cases 
the reticulations of the endoplasm are closely packed, when it is dense 
and exhibits no cyclosis, which, however, may be seen when the reticula- 
tion is loose. The endoplasm sometimes presents a disposition to form 
a digestive tube without proper walls; the most marked differentiation is 
met with in Didinium nasutum and Monodinium Balbianii. The con- 
tractile system is exclusively situated in the innermost layer of 
ectoplasm ; it may be localized at one point of the body in the form of a 
simple vesicle, with or without a differentiated peripheral layer, or it 
may form a plexus which completely surrounds the body of the Infusoria. 
The contractile vesicle opens to the exterior by one or several pores, 
which, in species with a thick ectoplasm, always remain open, and are 
only closed by a layer of contractile hyaloplasm. This last may be 
differentiated to give rise to the contractile fibres of Vorticella, Stentor, or 
other contractile forms. There seems to be a relation between the 
muscular differentiation and that of the layer of trichocysts, the one 
excluding the other. The ectoplasm corresponding to the cortical layer 
may give rise to a secretion layer, the presence of which is more or less 
constant, and which may be considered as the homologue of the cuticle. 


* Ann. Sci. Nat., v. (1888) pp. 1-140 ( pls.). 


752 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


The second chapter deals with the phenomena of encystation. This 
may, in a general way, be said to be provoked by modifications of the 
medium which become unsuitable for the life of the individual. The 
author is of opinion that desiccation, or the evaporation of water, which 
is so often invoked as the sole cause of encystation, has not the import- 
ance which has been attached to it, for the modifications which are due 
to putrefaction play an equal if not a greater part than those due to 
evaporation. The secretion of the membranes of the envelope of the 
cyst takes place from within outwards, and the density of the membranes 
diminishes in the same order. Preservation-cysts must be distinguished 
from division-cysts ; the membrane of the former is quite membranous, 
while that of the latter is more or less mucous, and soluble in potash, 
or even in water. The membrane of the cyst is permeable to liquids, 
but has the property of opposing the passage of certain bodies, or, in 
other words, acts like a dead dialysing membrane. Active life persists 
in the cyst until the complete elimination of the food-material which it 
contains. The residue may be rejected between the body and the 
membrane, or remain in the interior of the protoplasm under the form of 
refractive masses. The contents of the cyst are rich in reserve-material 
(glycogen) which gradually diminishes in cysts preserved in water. 

Appendicular organs such as cilia, cirri, or hooks are completely 
absorbed at the time when the latest life-stage is complete ; the nucleus 
preserves its normal form, and, if it is composed of several granules, these 
only fuse with one another in the preservation-cysts. Cysts which are 
preserved in air become highly refractive, and, after a diminution in 
their volume resulting from the loss of water, they preserve the same 
volume for an indefinite time. Cysts, on the other hand, which are 
preserved in water, die after a more or less long time. 

Revivescence is variable, and is often effected by simple aeration or 
under the influence of repeated movements of the support on which the 
cyst is fixed. Thisis due to the permeable membrane of the cyst allowing 
the passage of soluble matters which are favourable to the life of the 
infusorian. The mechanism of revivescence appears to be an absorption 
of water considerable enough to swell the protoplasm and dilate the 
membrane. Some Infusoria have no power of secreting a membranous 
envelope. Bodies that produce an anesthetic effect on animals that have 
a nervous system appear, doubtless on account of the rapidity of the 
osmotic changes, to have a mortal influence on Infusoria. In one case 
only—that of Nassula ornata—was a real anesthetic influence only; in 
this species there is a grey spot which is constantly found in the left 
anterior region, and is, possibly, a sort of localization of the nervous 
element; this spot takes on a deep brown colour with osmic acid. 

The observations which M. Fabre-Domergue has made on the physio- 
logy of nutrition lead him to think that the digestion of food is effected 
by the same chemical process in all the forms examined ; they absorb 
food presented to them in larger quantities than they can consume, for 
they reject part without utilizing it. In perfect conditions of nutrition 
(looked at in the largest way) reserve-material is stored up which is used 
when the conditions become unfavourable to life. 


Conjugation of Vorticellide.*—M. E. Maupas states that he has 
been able to make complete observations on Vorticella monilata, almost 


* Comptes Rendus, evi. (1885) pp. 1607-10. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. Lae 


as complete on Carchesium polypinum, V. nebulifera, and V. cucullus, and 
-to observe some isolated facts in V. putrina and V. microstoma. In 
V. monilata and others the microgametes are produced by equal and 
simple binary divisions; in V. microstoma the binary divisions are 
unequal and gemmeform, while in C. polypinum they are equal, but are 
repeated twice or perhaps thrice. 

The microgamete is only provided with a single micronucleus; it 
attaches itself to the macrogamete by fixing itself at first to the stalk, 
immediately below its point of attachment to the body ; it thence ascends 
to the lower part of the body of the macrogamete, and fuses with it. As 
soon as it is thus fixed its micronucleus divides by karyomitosis; while 
this division is being effected, the two gametes coalesce. 

The micronuclei, of which one is simple in the macrogamete and 
double in the microgamete, now grow, and four micronuclear corpuscles 
are produced in the former and eight in the latter. Tull this is done 
the macrogamete, which has kept its peristome open, has continued to 
feed; it now contracts itself and closes its peristome hermetically. 
Water accumulates within and forms a large vacuole, which pushes all 
the contents of the body of the macrogamete backwards towards the 
microgamete. The micronuclear corpuscles of the former have till now 
been at some distance from the microgamete. Three of the micronuclear 
corpuscles of the latter and seven of the former now become absorbed 
and disappear; the two that survive increase considerably in size and 
enter into contact. They have the form of two large longitudinally 
striated spindles, and as they elongate they divide; of the four micro- 
nuclear corpuscles thus formed two are placed in the microgamete, and 
two in the macrogamete; the two former become absorbed, while the 
others fuse and form a single nucleus of mixed origin. 

Fecundation is now accomplished; the large watery vacuole dis- 
appears, and the contents of the microgamete empty themselves slowly 
into the body of the macrogamete. ‘The cilia of the peristome which 
disappeared become renewed, the peristome reopens, and the Vorticella 
begins to eat again. 

The new mixed nucleus now passes through several stages of division, 
and gives rise to eight corpuscles. One of these takes on the type of the 
micronucleus, while the other seven grow considerably. When this 
growth has reached its maximum, and if the Vorticellz are well fed, the 
micronucleus divides into two, and the creature undergoes fission, one 
half having three nuclear bodies, and the other one. After two analogous 
divisions each piece has only one large nuclear body of discoidal form, 
which soon takes on the normal band-shape. 

The primitive nucleus of the two gametes divides into a number of 
small spherical corpuscles, each of which persists for a long time, and 
only disappears during the fissiparous divisions. 

It is obvious that this mode of reproduction in the Vorticellide does 
not differ essentially from that of other Ciliata. Notwithstanding the 
difference in size and fate the two gametes play an identical sexual part; 
both possess a hermaphrodite nucleus which has exactly equivalent 
reproductive properties. 


Structure of Urceolarie.*—M. Fabre-Domergue has studied the 
structure of Urceolarie both in marine and in fresh-water forms, and 


* Journ. Anat. et Physiol., xxiii. (1888) pp. 214-60 (2 pls.). 


754 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


also of certain types closely related to this family. His memoir includes 
a lengthened historical review, a general description of the structure of 
Urceolariw, and in the third place special descriptions of the various 
genera and species examined. 

In discussing the general form, the author notes the weakness of the 
evidence in fayour of Biitschli’s theory that the forms of Licnophora 
have their origin from Hypotricha, and that the Trichodine are directly 
descended from Licnophora. The interesting fixing apparatus is dis- 
cussed at length. In sucha peritrichous type as Scyphidia the structure 
is seen at its simplest; it is specialized in varying degrees in the 
Urceolariz. The suctorial mechanism is described. A few notes on 
the minute structure of ectoplasm and endoplasm are communicated. 

As to reproduction, the Trichodinide multiply by longitudinal 
division, but this was never observed in the Licnophoride. In the 
division of the former the solid covering pieces split up and regenerate 
like the rest of the body; they are certainly merely ectoplasmic. The 
processes of division in Leiotrocha serpularum and Anhymenia scorpenz 
were especially observed. 

As a general character of the group, the author emphasizes especially 
the fixing apparatus, and discusses the classificatory value of the direction 
of the buccal spire, the presence or absence of a striated cupola on the 
fixing apparatus, the form of the supporting ring, the character of the 
resting nucleus, &c. 


Buccal spire to left, no } Licnophora C 


striated cupola 


£ iS supporting circle of cilia »» « Orceolaria St. 
3/4 seals cilia and cirri Leiotrocha n 
§$ { (= | Buccal spire | smooth a eS oe 
g |4 to right, a circle of cilia... .. ..  Anhymenian.g. 
~ striated ciliaand cirri ..  .. Cyclocyrrhan.g. 
cupola toothed ciliaand velum .. .. TZrichodina Ehrb. 
cilia, with atrophied 
peristome .. .. i; Cyclocheta Jack, 
Ciliated body * 15.5 cy oe ee’ ce ne ws we, ioROdnOpeT Oe 


All the known species are parasitic on the surface or in the interior 
of marine or fresh-water animals. Amphibians, fishes, molluscs, worms, 
ceelenterates are all infested. The same species may frequent very 
different hosts; thus Trichodina pediculus of the Hydra is the same as 
that which infests frog tadpoles and the abdominal cavity of newts. 


Euglena.*—Herr J. Fankhauser has observed that when Euglene 
are treated so as to remove the water, spiral furrows make their appear- 
ance on the surface of the body running in the direction of the ciliary 
movement. 


Cryptomonadinee.t—M. P. A. Dangeard states that Ehrenberg places 
in Cryptomonadina the genera Cryptomonas, Ophidomonas, Prorocentrum, 
Lagenella, Cryptoglena, and Trachelomonas. ‘The author’s conclusions 
are as follows :—(1) That the work of M. Kunstler must be regarded as 
inaccurate. (2) The development of Cryptomonas includes reproduction 
by longitudinal division, a production of colonies or palmelloid forma- 


* MT. Naturf. Gesell. Bern, 1888, p. xxiii. 
+ Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxyv. (1888) pp. 127-30. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. CD) 


tions, and an encystment providing new colonies. (8) Solid nourishment 
is not introduced into the interior of the protoplasm. (4) Chilomonas 
Paramecium is distinct from Cryptomonas. 


Protozoa of Corsica.*—Prof. P. Gourret and M. P. Roeser report on 
the fifty-seven Protozoa which they have found in the new port of 
Bastia. Among the new forms described by them, Colpodopsis latifrons 
g.et sp. n. is a holotrichous Infusorian which has close relations to 
Colpoda, but differs in the absence of the tuft of oral cilia, and by the 
possession of a posterior tuft of large cilia; as in Cryptochilum, the body 
is compressed laterally. Cryptochilum fusiforme sp. n. has no long rigid 
seta at its hinder extremity, nor has it any longitudinal cuticular strie. 
Aulaz paucisetosa g. et sp. n. has a more or less oval body, provided 
with four tufts of cilia, two of which are antero-lateral and two postero- 
dorsal and postero-ventral, there is a caudal seta, and the body is divided 
by 2 ventral groove (whence the generic name) into two equal parts. In 
front of the mouth, which is situated in this groove, there is a triangular 
vibratile membrane. It seems to be most closely allied to Lembadion, 
with affinities to Cyclidium and Colpidium. 

Clypeolum is a new genus of the Peritricha, which does not appear 
to be closely allied to any known form. The body is conical, with the 
apex posterior; the dorsal surface is divided by a transverse groove into 
two unequal parts, of which the posterior is the larger. The ventral 
surface is moderately convex; the buccal pit describes the half of a 
spire, occupies the anterior portion of the ventral surface, and is pro- 
vided with vibratile cilia and a membranella; the dorsal cones are 
armed with cilia, which serve to fix the animal. 

Among the Hypotricha Chilodon auricula, Afigyria semilunaris, cris- 
tata, compressa, Kerona ciliata, and Holosticha coronata are regarded as 
new species. Amphisiella is a new genus allied to Amphisia, but it has 
only one row of ventral cirri, and the oral pit is completely ventral and 
not at all anterior in position. Stylonethes fusiformis sp. n. has much 
resemblance to the incompletely known Oxytricha scutellum, which Cohn 
has, there can be little doubt, referred to a wrong genus. Psilotrix ovalis 
g. et sp. n. seems to be most closely allied to Actinotricha saltans, but it 
differs in the form of its mouth. 

Paramonas ovalis is a new species of Hustomata-monomastiga cha- 
racterized by its oral excavation, and Dinomonas mediocanella and D. 
acuta are new Hustomata-dimastiga. The only new Rhizopod is Ameba 
monociliata. 


Biological Studies on Protista.j—Dr. M. Verworn, in the course of 
some psychophysiological investigations, has observed the process of 
test-formation in some of the test-bearing fresh-water Rhizopods. The 
form selected was Difflugia urceolata, and some further observations were 
made on the marine Polystomella crispa. 

The author found that, in Diflugia, the formation of the test was 
effected in just the same way as in other fresh-water Rhizopods, with 
the difference that only foreign bodies were taken up to form the test 
by certain reflex processes. ‘There was no regeneration of an injured or 
removed test by the protoplasmic body, though the vital functions were 
carried on normally. With Polystomella the result was very different ; 


* Arch. de Biol., viii. (1888) pp. 139-204 (3 pls.). 
+ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 455-70 (1 pl.). 


756 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


here there was regeneration, if the nucleus was contained in the injured 
part, but not otherwise. ‘he processes of regeneration were found to be 
either in the form of a healing of the wound by deposit of carbonate of 
lime, which was excreted by the surface of the protoplasm, or in the 
formation of new chambers. There is a similar process of regeneration 
in Orbitolites tenuissima and O. complanata, but the formation of new 
chambers was more frequent than in Polystomella. 

When we come to ask how it is that there can be such a difference 
in regenerative processes between a Diflugia and an Orbitolites, it is 
obvious that there must be a difference in the shell. This difference 
appears to lie in its mode of formation. In the former, as in all Mono- 
thalamia, the shell appears at the moment of division, and is quite perfect 
after the separation of the newly-formed individual. There are no 
further changes—that is to say, there is no growth of the shell. Put 
in terms of the protoplasm, this means that it has no secretory activity, 
and it is in consequence of this that there is no regeneration of a shell 
which has been injured or totally removed. 

In the Polythalamia the relations are quite different; their forms 
almost certainly reproduce themselves by a kind of spore-formation, 
although this has not yet been directly observed. It is, however, known 
that young Polythalamia are to be found as unicamerate Protista in the 
body of the mother. If these develope into complete Polythalamia a 
new chamber is formed on the primitive one, to which again another 
new one is attached, and so on. From this it follows that the Poly- 
thalamia, so long as they continue to form new chambers, must have the 
power of secreting tests. A natural consequence of this mode of test- 
formation in the Polythalamia is the phenomenon that the forms with a 
relatively small number of chambers, such as Polystomella, have much 
less power of regeneration than forms with an enormous number of 
chambers, such as Orbitolites. The capacity for regeneration in the 
Polythalamia is, therefore, proportional to their capacity for forming 
new chambers; the latter, again, marks the extent of development, and 
the power of regeneration is, therefore, at least continuous with the 
whole period of development. Dr. Verworn cannot accept the view of 
Gruber that we ought not to speak of the development of Protozoa, for 
he sees in the chamber-formation of the Polythalamia a process which 
is not mere growth, for the chambers do not resemble one another, and 
the Protist has quite a different appearance when it has only a few 
chambers from that which it presents when it has many. Regarding 
the process as representing a true development, he believes that it may 
be made useful in determining the phylogenetic relations of some forms 
of tests. 

It would be of interest to discover whether the capacity for regene- 
ration diminishes or is lost when new chambers cease to be formed. 
The influence exerted by the nucleus in the regeneration of the test of 
Polystomella appears to be of especial importance. Among recent obser- 
vations on the formation of the nucleus are those which bear on its 
relation to secretion ; Korschelt observed in the epithelial cells which 
secrete the chitinous ovarian rays in the eggs of Nepa and Ranatra that 
the nucleus, at the time of secretion, has a peculiar rhizopodal form, 
and sends out pseudopodia-like processes to the side in which the chitin 
is secreted. He further convinced himself that all cells which are 
known to have branched nuclei have a secretory character. As, however, 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 757 


there have been no direct observations on the share taken by the cell- 
nucleus in the secretory activity of the cell, it was of great interest to 
observe such a case in the regenerative processes of the Polythalamia. 


New Rhizopods.*—Dr. A. Gruber gives an account of new, or as yet 
imperfectly described, species of Rhizopods found by him in the harbour 
of Genoa. 

(a) Protomyxa pallida, n. sp. The protoplasm is colourless; it has a 
tendency to flow out in thread-like processes, so that the whole is some- 
times a perfect network. The substance of the nucleus is distributed 
in such small particles that, during life, they cannot be distinguished 
from the other granules contained in the protoplasm. 

(b) Various Amebe—Ameba fluida, A. globifera, inclosing yellowish 
globules, and A. flavescens, yellowish in colour, rich in fine granules, 
unusually fluid, and with many small nuclei of the vesicular type. 

(c) Schultzia diffluens. The fine skin which seems to cover the 
whole is in reality only a slight thickening of the outer layer, and 
pseudopodia may be given off at any point. The nucleus consists of a 
great many very small granules. 

(d) Lieberkiihnia Biitschlii n. sp. This species differs from others of 
the genus in being larger and in having only one nucleus. The skin is 
easily seen. At the anterior end there is an opening through which the 
main pseudopodia stalk is projected. From it there ramify a great many 
fine pseudopodia, and the skin becomes covered so that it seems as if 
pseudopodia were given off from the whole circumference. 

(e) Polymastix sol Gruber. The nucleus is of the type usual among 
Flagellates. Fine thread-like processes radiate from the whole cir- 
cumference and give it the appearance of a Heliozoon, but these 
processes have a flagellate motion. 


Observations on Parkeria.t—Mr. H. J. Carter has some observa- 
tions on the organic and inorganic changes of Parkeria, in which he deals 
with their “ transformations” and not with natural structure. There are 
also some further observations on the nature of the opaque scarlet 
spherules in Foraminifera. 


Sherborn’s Bibliography of the Foraminifera.t—Mr. C. D. Sherborn 
has published a very useful Bibliography of the Foraminifera founded 
on previously published Bibliographies, but containing a large amount 
of original work in the way of enlargement and amendment, and with a 
number of explanatory notes which much increase the value of the book. 


* Ber. Naturf. Gesell. Freiburg i. B., 1888, pp. 33-40. 
+ Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ii. (1888) pp. 45-55 (1 pl.).. 
t ‘A Bibliography of the Foraminifera Recent and Fossil, from 1565-1888, with 


notes explanatory of some of the rare and little-known publications,’ vii. and 152 pp. 
Svo, London, 1888. : 


1888. oF 


758 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


BOTANY. 


A. GENERAL, including the Anatomy and Physiology 
of the Phanerogamia. 


a. Anatomy.* 
Q) Cell-structure and Protoplasm. 


Action of basic substances on living Protoplasm.t—Herr T. 
Bokorny has investigated the action of a number of different basic sub- 
stances on living protoplasm. In all cases they agree with the action of 
ammonia in causing granulation both in the protoplasm and in the cell- 
sap. Experiments were made with the following substances :—potassa, 
soda,* amine-bases, diamide or hydrazin, hydroxylamin, strychnine, 
chinine, atropine, veratrine, chinoline, and caffeine. 


Forms of Cells.t—Prof. L. Errera offers 2 mathematical explanation 
of the various forms assumed by vegetable cells, from the corresponding 
phenomena observed in the blowing of soap-bubbles. 


Physiology of the Cell.§—Herr G. Klebs has collected his recent 
observations on various points in the structure of the cell, adding also 
some fresh ones. 

Alge, leaves of mosses, and similar structures, can be preserved in a 
living condition in solutions which afford a supply of nutriment, to which 
0:05 per cent. of normal potassium chromate has been added. 

The author describes the artificial fresh formation of the cell-wall 
after plasmolysis in concentrated solutions of cane-sugar and glycerin. 
This takes place with Vaucheria within an hour, in most other alge after 
1 or2days. A similar formation of cell-wall after plasmolysis takes place 
also with some leaves of mosses, and prothallia of ferns, and with leaves 
of Elodea canadensis ; but was not observed with desmids or diatoms, or 
with the tissues of dicotyledonous plants. The formation of the new 
cell-wall is best exhibited by the use of congo-red. In a 1 per cent. 
solution of sugar coloured by congo-red, the first formation of the cell- 
wall could be detected in opened tubes of Vaucheria. The author does 
not agree with de Vries that the parietal utricle has the special faculty 
of forming cellulose; it belongs, on the contrary, to every part of the 
protoplasm. It was distinctly seen that the growth of the new cell-wall 
takes place by apposition. In Zygnema also he found no evidence of 
growth by intussusception. 

The growth and division of protoplasts was observed in Gidogonium, 
Cladophora, and other objects plasmolysed in a concentrated solution of 
sugar. Growth of the protoplasts and formation of starch may take 
place in the dark, but apparently not division. Portions of the protoplast 
which contain no nucleus can assimilate and form starch, but appear to 
have no power of growing or forming a new cell-wall. 

A peculiar degradation of the chlorophyll-bodies was observed in 


* This subdivision contains (1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm; (2) Other Cell- 
contents (including Secretions); (3) Structure of Tissues; and (4) Structure of 
Organs. 

“+t Pringsheim’s Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot., xix. (1888) pp. 206-20 (1 pl.). 

+ Versamml. Deutscher Naturf. u. Aerzte, Wiesbaden, Sept. 21, 1887. See Bot. 
Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) p. 395. 

§ Unters. Bot. Inst. Tiibingen, ii. (1888) pp. 489-568 (2 pls.). See Bot. Centralbl., 
xXxXiy. (1888) p. 228. Cf. this Journal, 1887, p. 254. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 759 


Elodea and Funaria, especially in solutions containing potassium chromate ; 
they are finally transformed into small red balls. The tannin-vesicles of 
the Zygnemaceze may, under certain conditions, be expelled from the 
cytoplasm ; but this is probably only a pathological phenomenon. 


Plasmolysis in Flowering Plants.*—Herr A. Wieler has repeated 
on flowering plants (Phaseolus multiflorus, Vicia Faba, Helianthus 
annuus), the experiments made by Janse on fresh- and salt-water algze, 
and with the same result, viz. that after remaining for a Jong time in 
plasmolysing media, the plasmolysis disappears. The phenomenon 
regarded by Janse as exceptional, appears therefore to be of wider dis- 
tribution ; the results obtained by Wieler being in direct opposition to 
those of De Vries. f 


(2) Other Cell-contents (including Secretions). 


Alkaloid and Sugar in Cyclamen.{—M. G. Michaud finds in the 
rhizome of the Cyclamen a poisonous principle, cyclamine, and in addi- 
tion, a new sugar, a levogyrous saccharose, to which he gives the name 
cyclamose. 


Laticiferous product of Mimusops and Payena.§ —MM. E. Heckel 
and F. Schlagdenhauffen state that their attention has been lately turned 
to the product obtained from Mimusops and Payena, as it has been 
suggested that it might be capable of replacing the gutta-percha obtained 
from Isonandra gutta. After giving the analyses of the various products, 
the authors state in conclusion that the gutta obtained from the Mimusops . 
somewhat resembles in composition and properties that obtained from 
Isonandra, but that it would be necessary to mix it in order to make it 
a useful industrial product, while, on the contrary, that obtained from 
Payena might more properly be classed among the caoutchoucs. 


Formation of Sugars in the Septal Glands of Narcissus.|| —Mr. E. 
H. Acton states that in the genus Narcissus there are three separate 
glands, one in each septum of the ovary, not united, and simple; they 
only occupy the upper part of each septum, not extending below the 
middle of the ovary. The author gives the details of various experiments, 
and draws the following conclusions as to the nature of the process of 
secretion of sugars in Narcissus and other plants having the kind of 
nectaries called septal glands:—(1) That the first stage consists in a 
maximum formation of protoplasm containing a large amount of meta- 
plasm, especially in the form of proteid granules, but not of starch-grains, 
mucilage, or any form of solid carbohydrate. (2) That the sugars are 
probably derived from the decomposition of this metaplasm, and con- 
stitute one of the products of the change. That both glucose and 
saccharose are formed simultaneously. (3) That the excretion of the. 
saccharine liquid into the gland-cavity in the first instance takes place 
through the cell-walls without any rupture, splitting away of the cells of 
the epithelium from one another, or mucilaginous degeneration, and must 
therefore be supposed to result, in the first instance at least, from the 
direct activity of the protoplasm in the secreting cells. 


* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., v. (1887) pp. 375-80. 
+ See this Journal, 1885, p. 84. 
t Arch. Sci. Phys. et Nat., xviii. (1887) pp. 198-212. 
§ Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1625-7. 
|| Ann. of Bot., 11. (1888) pp. 53-63 (6 figs.). 
oF 2 


760 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Contents of the Cells of the Aril of the Nutmeg.*—Herr A. 
Tschirch finds the cells of the aril of Myristica fragrans to be character- 
ized by the presence of a large amount of amylodextrin. ‘The grains 
are from 2 to 10 » in size, and are coloured reddish-brown by an aqueous 
solution of iodine; they do not contain even a nucleus of true starch. 
They are usually rod-shaped, rarely roundish or disc-shaped, but often 
curved or coiled; they seldom exhibit distinct stratification. 


Phosphorus and Phosphoric Acid in Plants.;t—MM. Berthelot and 
G. André give the results of some experiments with Amaranthus 
caudatus and A. pyramidalis, protected from rain but freely exposed to 
the air, which show that the plant absorbs both phosphorus and 
potassium from the soil in the early stages of its growth, though the 
amount of both, and especially of phosphorus, increases less rapidly 
than the weight of the plant. When flowering begins, the absorption of 
phosphorus practically ceases, but the absorption of potassium continues 
so long as the plant grows, and the increase in the quantity of this 
element during flowering is very considerable. The increase in the 
quantity of nitrogen is almost proportional to the increase in the weight 
of the plant up to the beginning of inflorescence, although somewhat 
smaller in the early stages of growth. When the plant flowers, the 
total quantity of nitrogen increases but little, and therefore the propor- 
tion of this element decreases. In a soil containing about 8 grams of 
potassium acetate per kilo., the plant grew with some difficulty, but 
those which survived became much larger. They contained nearly 
twice as much potassium as under normal conditions, but the increase 
in the amount of phosphorus followed the ordinary law. 

From the results detailed in this paper, it follows that manures con- 
taining phosphorus and nitrogen are of no value after the plant has 
begun to flower, but manures containing potassium may be useful 
throughout the whole period of growth. 


(3) Structure of Tissues. 


Oil-receptacles in the Roots of Composite.{—Herr R. Triebel gives 
the following general results from the examination of a number of 
species. 

: The oil-passages are always the result of the tangential division of 
the protecting-sheath (endoderm). In most cases they always remain in 
contact with the protecting-sheath; exceptions occur in Ligularia and 
Telckia. 'The cells surrounding the oil-passage contain more protoplasm 
than the other cells, in proportion to the size of the passage; as the oil- 
passage increases in size, these cells become shorter by horizontal 
division. Fully formed oil is never found outside the oil-passage; the 
protoplasm of the passage-cells appears to take an important part in its 
formation. Although formed in the protecting-sheath, the walls of the 
oil-passage are never suberized; even in comparatively large passages 
the walls are thinner than those of the surrounding cells. When mature 
the oil is often entirely replaced by protoplasm. They are intercellular 
spaces with no special wall of their own; they never contain starch. No 


* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 138-41. 

+ Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 711-6. . 

~ Nova Acta Acad. Cs, Leop.-Carol. Germ, i. (1887) pp. 1-44 (7 pls.). Cf. this 
Journal, ante, p. 447. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 761 


connection could be traced between the formation of oil and that of 
inulin. 

Besides the oil-passages, there oceur in Inula Helenium, in the middle 
of the root, special oil-receptacles bounded on all sides, also of schizo- 
genous origin. In some roots (Inula Helenium, Cirsium oleraceum, 
C. canum, Tagetes patula, Lappa tomentosa), a gradual separation takes 
place sooner or later of the elements of the cortex, often aided by a 
previous formation of cavities. In Inula and Lappa this proceeds so far 
as to attack the oil-passages, and then the protecting-sheath, and even 
parts which lie beneath it. 


Formation of Periderm.*—M. H. Douliot points out that, in con- 
sidering the origin of the periderm, one has five cases to deal with, 
viz. :—(1) Epidermal periderm ; (2) Exodermal periderm ; (3) Cortical 
periderm ; (4) Endodermal periderm, and (5) Pericyclic periderm. In 
the Rosacez, where the periderm is pericyclic, it is formed of layers of 
hard cork, which from the first present on their radial walls foldings 
analogous to those of the endoderm. 'The same phenomenon is shown in 
the Ginotherez, and in several genera of Myrtacez, where the periderm 
is pericyclic. In the Ginothereex the periderm is in immediate contact 
with the endoderm ; it is the same in the Rosacez. 


Protecting-wood and Duramen.j—Herr E. Praél, adopting Frank’s 
designation of “ protecting-wood” (Schutzholz) for the brown-coloured 
wood formed at spots where injury has been inflicted, has examined the 
relationship in structure between this and ordinary duramen in a large 
number of different trees. The following are the more important results. 

The protecting-wood formed as the result of injury always agrees in 
structure with the duramen of the same species. The three substances 
which fill up the vessels of the duramen—gum, resin, and thylla—occur 
also in the protecting-wood, in contradistinction to the alburnum of the 
same age. The filling up by thylle and by gum takes place in the 
same plant; larger vessels have a tendency to become filled by thylle. 
The colour of the cell-wall agrees in the alburnum and in the protecting- 
wood. In some species the formation of thylle in the wood takes place 
at an early period; the tendency to their formation is increased by age 
and by injury to the wood. The strong colouring of the duramen is 
produced by characteristic pigments, which are probably formed within 
the cell, and infiltrate into the cell-walls when the tension of the cells 
ceases. The intimate deposition of these in the cell-wall, and possibly 
also a chemical combination with lignin, are the reason why they cannot 
be entirely removed from the cell-wall by substances in which they are 
soluble. Hermetic closing of cut surfaces of the wood prevents or 
hinders the formation of protecting wood. The “wood-gum” of 
Thomsen must be regarded as a modification of cellulose. 


Causes which produce Eccentricity of the Pith in Pines.t—M. E. 
Mer states that transverse sections taken from the trunks of trees are 
far from being always circular, especially towards the base. The pith 
is often eccentric because the annual rings are not constant in thick- 
ness. This is brought about by various causes, among which may be 
mentioned :—The influence of the slope on which the tree grows, and 


* Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 158-60. 
+ Pringsheim’s Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot., xix. (1888) pp. 1-81 (1 pl.). Cf. this 
Journal, ante, p. 248, } Comptes Rendus, cvi. (1888) pp. 313-6. 


762 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


whether the aspect is north, south, east, or west; then there is the effect 
of other trees which happen to grow in the immediate neighbourhood ; 
and finally the influence of curvature or lesions. 


Influence of Exposure on the Formation of the Annual Rings in 
the Savin.*—M. E. Mer gives the details of a number of observations 
made to determine the influence of exposure on the formation of the 
annual rings in the savin. The results may be stited in the fact that 
nutrition had evidently been made much more active on the east side of 
the trees than on the west. A southern exposure had produced an 
analogous though less accentuated effect upon the cambium than a 
westerly one. One of the tables shows the difference in the breadth of 
the annual rings east and west. 


Mal nero of the Vine.,j—Sig. O. Comes has studied the cause of the 
“mal nero” or gummosis of the vine, and finds it to be characterized by 
the presence of brown corpuscles in the amyliferous parenchyma, which, 
though described by some writers as elements of solid tannin, he regards 
as produced by gummy degeneration of the starch-bearing cells. 


(4) Structure of Organs. 


Formation of Lateral Roots in Monocotyledones.{—In further 
instalments of this paper Prof. A. Borzi describes a second type of the 
lateral roots of Monocotyledons, in which the meristem is composed of 
only three distinct kinds of initial cells, producing the plerome, the 
periblem, and the root-cap, the dermatogen being a dependency of the 
periblem. He describes in detail the structure of the root in Elegia 
deusta and Scirpus lacustris. In the former case the pericambium is 
constituted of a double row of cells, and this type is characteristic of 
the Cyperacesw, Graminer, and Musacez. 

In a third type the growing apices of the radicles are made up of 
two distinct kinds of initial cells; the one are the common origin of the 
periblem, dermatogen, and root-cap, the other of the plerome. Examples 
of this type are furnished by Richardia africana and by a number of 
other Aroidez. 

In the fourth type the apex of the cone of growth with the initial 
cells are the common origin of the plerome, periblem, and dermatogen, 
and normally also of the root-cap. This may again be divided into two 
subdivisions :—in the first the root-cap is altogether distinct from the 
other histogenous elements of the cone of the root. This occurs in 
Sparazis versicolor and in many other Iridexw. In the second subdivision, 
of which Lilium candidum may be taken as an example, the root-cap is 
not distinct from the apex of the cone of growth. Here the initial rows 
of plerome give birth to the periblem, the outer layers of which are con- 
verted into the root-cap. The endoderm of the root forms the dermatogen, 
laterally to the nascent cone of growth, and, in the region of the apex, a 
thin temporary protecting sheath. In a further stage of development 
the increase of the growing apex of a radicle takes place by means of 
initial cells situated at the apex of the plerome-cylinder, which, as long 
as they renew this cylinder, generate the periblem. The outer central 


* Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 165-70, 184-91. 
+ Atti R. Ist. d’Incoraggiamento alle Sci. Nat., 1887. See Rev. Mycol., x. (1888) 
p- 165. } Malpighia, i. (1887) pp. 541-50; ii. (1888) pp. 53-85. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 763 


layers of this cylinder are converted into root-cap, the lateral external 
layers into dermatogen and root-cap. 


Permeability of the Epidermis of Leaves for Gases.*—M. L. 
Mangin gives the details of a number of experiments made to determine 
the permeability of the epidermis for gases. The following are his 
conclusions :— 

(1) That the permeability of the epidermis of aerial leaves is very 
limited ; ordinarily feeble for plants with persistent leaves, it is rather 
more considerable in plants with deciduous leaves. (2) In leaves in 
which the upper and lower surfaces are dissimilar, the permeability of 
the lower epidermis is greater than that of the upper. (3) The 
permeability of the epidermis of submerged leaves which are destitute of 
stomata is very great,—five, ten, or even twenty times more than that of 
aerial leaves. (4) The permeability of cutinized surfaces is notably 
weakened by the waxy matter which is found in the cuticle of all leaves; 
this applies to submerged as well as to aerial leaves. 


Influence of the Turgidity of the Epidermal Cells on the Stomata.t 
—Dr. R. Schaefer contests the theory of Schwendener { that the chief 
cause of the widening and narrowing of the cleft of the stomata is the 
changing pressure exercised on them by the varying turgidity of the 
epidermal cells which adjoin the guard-cells. From observations on 
a number of plants (Polygonum, Lilium, Potamogeton, Azolla, &c.), he 
comes to the conclusion that the stomatic apparatus is endowed with an 
independent function, and that this function is rendered possible only by 
the changes in the turgidity of the guard-cells. It must, however, be 
admitted that the turgidity of the neighbouring cells of the epidermis 
prevents the free expansion of the guard-cells. The width of the cleft at 
any particular time is therefore the resultant of two opposing forces, the 
stronger of these being the turgidity of the guard-cells, the weaker that 
of the adjoining epidermal cells. The observations on the stomata of 
Azolla were especially instructive, as here the opening and closing of the 
cleft takes place in the ordinary way, and must be brought about by 
internal forces only, as the thickening-bands which occur in other plants 
in the neighbouring epidermal cells are here wanting. In grasses, also, 
the case is very similar, the changes in the width of the cleft being 
obviously due to forces which have their origin in the guard-cells. 


Anatomy of Spines.s—Under the term spine Herr R. Mittmann in- 
cludes all structures which end in a sharp point, and which are adapted 
by their anatomical construction for the protection of the plant, and for 
the dissemination of the seeds or fruits through the agency of animals. 
The following are, with some exceptions, the general anatomical charac- 
teristics of all spines :—A strong development of the mechanical tissue ; 
its situation near the surface, and increase in strength from the base 
towards the apex; the strong thickening and lignification of the walls of 
the cells of which this tissue is composed. A corresponding reduction 
of the assimilating and conducting tissues. The peculiarity, especially 
striking in stem-spines, that growth continues longest at the base of the 


* Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 771-4. 

+ Pringsheim’s Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot., xix. (1888) pp. 178-205 C1 fig.). 

ft See this Journal, 1882, p. 216. 

§ ‘Beitr. z. Kenntniss d. Anat. d. Pflanzenstacheln,’ 43 pp., Berlin, 1888. See 
Bot. Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) p. 359. 


764 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


organ, so that its apex is its oldest part, and the one which first passes 
over into its permanent condition. 


Propagula of Pinguicula.*—M. M. Hovelacque describes organs of 
propagation hitherto unknown in Pinguicula vulgaris, in the form of buds 
or propagula seated in the axil of the lower leaves of the underground 
stem, which ultimately become detached. Each bud consists of a short 
axis and four or five leaves.. The first internode elongates considerably. 
The axis of the bud contains atits base only two vascular bundles ; higher 
up they unite, but not so completely but that the two bundles can still 
be distinguished. The planes of insertion of the roots do not form at the 
periphery of the vascular cord a layer resembling that which clothes the 
vascular system of the underground stem. Nothing warrants the hypo- 
thesis that the axis of the propagulum is a stem with several confluent 
central cylinders. 


Flower of Orchidez.|—Herr E. Pfitzer commences a series of papers 
dealing with the details in the structure and development of the flowers 
of Orchidese. The present instalment deals with the Cypripediline 
(Cypripedilum, Selenipedilum, Paphiopedilum), Ophry dine (Orchis Morio), 
and Neottiine (Hpipactis, Cephalanthera). 

Ovules of Rumex.{—From examination of the structure of anomalous 
flowers of Rumex scutatus, Dr. 8. Calloni draws conclusions favourable to 
the hypothesis of Sachs, that the ovule of Rumex is an axial structure, 
and not a production of the carpel. In the anomalous flowers examined 
it has become modified in a way opposite to that of the ovary. It is the 
result of a vertical and lateral prolification of the axis, and becomes 
changed into a floral organ, i.e. into a pistil. The mode of evolution of 
the ovule leads to the same conclusion. 


Seeds of Pharbitis triloba.s—M. K. Hyrano describes in detail the 
structure of this plant, a native of Japan, and especially of the seeds, 
from which he obtains a resin identical in composition and in medicinal 
properties with the convolvulin contained in jalap-root; and suggests 
that the seeds of the Japanese plant may be introduced into commerce 
as a purgative. A resin was obtained by dissolving the finely powdered 
seeds in alcohol, precipitating with acetate of lead, and purifying the 
filtrate. The resin thus obtained consisted partly of an oil, the 
remainder being nearly pure convolvulin. 


Structure of Impatiens.||—Dr. E. Heinricher describes several pecu- 
liarities of structure in different species of Impatiens examined by him. 
Alone among Dicotyledons, with the exception of Cucurbita, and in all 
the species examined, he finds in the embryo four secondary roots formed 
already in the seed, which develope rapidly on germination and serve to 
fix the young plant in the soil. 

In I. Balsamina (Balsamina hortensis), capensis, and other species, 
the cells of the embryo, and especially those of the cotyledons, display 
strong thickenings of their walls; these thickenings serving as reserve 
food-materials, which are dissolved and used up in germination. The 
micro-chemical reactions of these thickenings are given in detail, and 


* Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 507-10. 

+ Pringsheim’s Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot., xix. (1888) pp. 155-77 (2 pls.). 

~ Mém. Soc. Phys. Geneve, xxix. (1887) 23 pp. and 2 pls. 

§ MT. Med. Facultat K. Japanischen Universitat, i. (1888) pp. 201-8 (2 pls.). 
|| Flora, 1xxi. (1888) pp. 163-75, 179-85 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 765 


the author concludes from them, in the case of I. Balsamina, that they 
are not composed of cellulose, but of a substance probably identical with 
Schleiden’s amyloid. Similar thickenings occur in the embryos of some 
species of Papilionacee, Ceesalpinies, and Tropzolum. During germina- 
tion large quantities of starch are formed, and the author states that this 
is not the direct result of assimilation, but of the transformation of the 
substance of these thickenings. This is shown by the fact that starch is 
formed in just the same way when the germination takes place in the dark. 
The object of these thickenings appears to be to protect the seeds from 
injury by mechanical pressure, and also to a certain extent against being 
devoured by birds and other animals. 


Anatomy of Nelumbium.*—Dr. E. Dennert publishes a monograph 
of Nelumbium speciosum, completed from an unpublished MS. of Dr. A. 
Wigand. The following points are treated of in detail :—The structure 
of the seedling; the arrangement and imbrication of the leaves; the 
morphology of the leaf; the structure of the flower; the structure and 
form of the ripe fruit ; the mode of growth of the rhizome; the develop- 
ment of the leaves and flowers; the development of the ovule; the 
anatomy of the rhizome and stem; the structure and development of the 
vascular bundles; the structure and formation of the air-passages; the 
anatomy of the leaf and leaf-stalk; the anatomy of the receptacle and 
floral organs; the formation of the starch in the leaves and rhizome. 

The vascular bundles of Nelumbiwm agree with those of Monocoty- 
ledons in their isolated position, and in the absence of cambium; but 
differ in the fact that the xylem and phloém do not coalesce, but remain 
distinct ; only in some small bundles were they found united into a closed 
ring. The large air-passages of the internodes are separated from one 
another by the pith of the nodes; only in the periphery, where they 
unite into a white, spongy, structureless mass, are they in communication 
from one internode to another. The air-passages of the nodes contain 
unstalked clusters of crystals. The larger part of the leaf is occupied 
by large air-passages ; they are in immediate contact with the epidermis 
of the under surface, which is entirely destitute of stomata; the single 
layer of cells of which the lower epidermis is composed is united with 
the spongy parenchyma above the air-passages by strings composed of a 
single row of cells; attached to the spongy parenchyma are clusters of 
crystals projecting into the air-passages. Between the spongy paren- 
chyma and the upper epidermis is a layer of palisade-cells. The upper 
epidermis consists of a single layer of thick-walled cells, penetrated by 
numerous stomata. It is elevated here and there into warts consisting 
of several layers of cells. 


B. Physiology.f 
(1) Reproduction and Germination. 


Formation of Endosperm in Dicotyledons.t—Dr. F. Hegelmaier has 
investigated with especial care the cases where the endosperm is formed 
in Dicotyledons by free cell-formation. The filling up of the entire 


* Uhlworm u. Haenlein’s Biblioth. Bot., 1888, Heft 11, 68 pp. and 6 pls. 

+ This subdivision contains (1) Reproduction and Germination; (2) Nutrition 
and Growth (including Movements of Fluids); (3) Irritability; and (4) Chemical 
Changes (including Respiration and Fermentation). 

{ Nova Acta Acad. Cees. Leop.-Carol. Germ., xxix. (1887) pp. 1-103 (5 pls.). Cf. 
this Journal, 1887, p. 116. 


766 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


cavity of the embryo-sac with tissue may take place in three different 
ways, viz.:—(1) The endogenous type, by the division of a nucleated 
mass of protoplasm which fills up the cavity, as in Eranthis; (2) By the 
formation of tissues, which commences at the periphery on all sides, and 
advances centripetally ; this occurs in other Ranunculaces, as Helleborus, 
Nigella, Ranunculus, Adonis, and Caltha, in the Rosaces (Cotoneaster), 
Umbellifere (Archangelica), Malvacee (Malva, Hibiscus), certain Legu- 
minosex (Hippocrepis, Coronilla, Anthyllis, Lotus), and some Papaveraces 
(Glaucium, Chelidonium, Hypecoum, Eschscholtzia, Fumaria), also, in a 
modified way, in Bocconia, Scabiosa, and Euphorbia; (3) A formation of 
tissue commencing at the periphery on one side only, at the micropylar 
end, and leaving the chalazal part at first more or less unaffected, but 
afterwards advancing towards it; this was observed in many Leguminose 
(Cytisus, Sarothamnus, Baptisia, Hedysarum, Onobrychis, Trigonella, 
Galega, Colutea (?)), and in Polygonacesee (Fagopyrum, Polygonum, 
Rumex). 

In Ae third case the formation of parenchyma from the micropylar 
end may be so sparing as not entirely to envelope the embryo, as in the 
Caryophyllacee ; or the enveloping tissue may be broken through and 
ruptured before it reaches the hinder part of the embryo-sac, as in 
Chenopodiaceew, Nyctaginer, Phytolacca, and some Leguminosae. A 
peculiar modification of this process occurs in those cases where it is 
localized to some other part of the embryo-sac than its apex, namely, in 
a concavity, as in strongly campylotropous ovules ; this is characteristic of 
the majority of species of Lupinus. Tropzeolum is peculiar in the parietal 
layer of protoplasm not breaking up into cells. 

These various modes of formation of endosperm only correspond to a 
certain extent to systematic affinities; thus Hranthis differs from the 
other Helleborer, and the Leguminose are broken up into several 
groups. Free cell-formation, in the narrowest sense of the term, has 
not at present been observed ; the ordinary process being an intermediate 
one between that and true cell-division. 

The author points out various essential differences between the 
process of the formation of the endosperm in Dicotyledons and that of 
the primary and secondary prothallium in the heterosporous Vascular 
Cryptogams, such as Selaginella. In Marsiliacew and Salviniaces, and 
in the formation of the primary prothallium in Selaginella, a true process 
of cell-division takes place. The prothallium of Conifers, in which 
there is not the sharp differentiation into two distinct portions which 
occurs in Selaginella, is at first formed by free cell-formation round 
distinct nuclei; though cell-division afterwards takes place in the 
formation of the tissue. 

The endosperm-tissue has two distinct functions, separated from one 
another in time by a period of rest. In the first place it serves as 
a reservoir for the reserve-substances subsequently consumed by the 
embryo ; and in the second place it conveys nutrient materials to the 
embryo on its free surface during the period of its development. In some 
cases, however, this latter function is performed vicariously by the fluid 
of the embryo-sac, or a portion of the material is conveyed by the enlarged 
base of the embryo, whether developed into a suspensor or not; but in 
these cases the endosperm always co-operates in the conveyance of the 
nutrient material. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 767 


Fertilization of Euphrasia.*—Herr A. K. v. Marilaun discusses the 
modes of fertilization in species of Huphrasia—E. rostkoviana, E. minima, 
E. Odontites, E. lutea. In reference to the first of these species, the 
flowers are protogynous ; in the first stage the style protrudes for some 
distance beyond the anthers, and self-fertilization is impossible; after 
twenty-four hours an intercalary growth occurs in the corolla, by which 
the tube is lengthened, the stamens pushed forward, and the style 
straightened. In this second stage the stigma now lies on the anthers 
of the anterior stamens, but cannot sink deeper because of the long hairs 
binding the two anthers together. Meanwhile the anthers have opened, 
but the pollen is not allowed to escape until an insect visiting the 
nectary shoves apart the obstructing anthers and dusts itself with pollen. 
When the animal withdraws, it cannot touch the stigma, but takes its 
load to a stigma in the first stage. In the next stage a growth again 
takes place in the lower portion of the corolla, the stamens are again 
shoved forward, the stigma lies above the two posterior anthers. These 
are not felted together by hairs, they are pressed apart by the style, the 
stigma passes into the pollen-filled space between the anthers, and in 
this stage self-fertilization may occur. 

The slightly different conditions in the other three species are then 
described, and the author notes how the differences form not only specific 
distinctions, but generic characters. Thus Huphrasia Odontites is nearer 
to Barisia than to the white-flowered species of Huphrasia; while E. lutea 
strikingly suggests Tozzia. In establishing the genera more emphasis 
should be laid upon the reproductive than upon the floral organs. 


Adaptation of the Flowers of Eremurus altaicus to Cross-fertili- 
zation.;—Herr U. Dammer describes the arrangements in this flower for 
hindering self-pollination and promoting cross-fertilization. He con- 
siders the chief agents in pollination to be Syrphus pyrastri and other 
Syrphide, and not, as H. Muller states, night-flying moths. 


Germination of Monocotyledons.{—Herr M. Lewin has studied the 
development of the seedling in a large number of Monocotyledons 
belonging to the orders Alismacez, Liliacez, Iridee, Commelynacea, 
Scitaminez, Aroidez, Palme, and Graminez. In Monocotyledons the 
first leaves which develope have often special characters. One of the 
species specially studied is Tamus communis. Almost at the commence- 
ment of germination the tubercle begins to develope at the base of the 
cotyledon, in the region corresponding to the tigellum; from different 
points of the small spherical tubercle thus formed grow adventitious 
roots, which increase rapidly in number. Other interesting details are 
given in the cases of other plants. 


Chemistry of Germination.s—Dr. A. Menozzi publishes a pre- 
liminary account of his chemical researches on the germination of 
Phaseolus vulgaris. His object was to study the transformations of 
nitrogenous and non-nitrogenous substances in germination. As far as 
he could observe, the most abundant product was asparagin, then amido- 
valerianic acid, then phenyl-amido-propionic acid. A substance like leucine 


* Verh. K. K. Zool.-Bot. Gesell., xxxviii. (1888) pp. 562-6 (1 pl.). 

+ Flora, lxxi. (1888) pp. 185-8 (1 fig.). 

} ‘Bidr. t. Kjertbladets anat. hos Monocotyledonerna,’ Stockholm, 1887. See 
Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888), Rev. Bibl., p. 77. 

§ Arch. Ital. Biol., ix. (1888) pp. 235-42. 


768 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


was also obtained, beside hypoxanthin and xanthin. That the substances 
obtained result from the transformation of reserve products in the seeds, 
is of course shown by the fact that before germination there was no 
asparagin nor any of the substances afterwards present. The author 
meanwhile abstains from general conclusions. 


(2) Nutrition and Growth (including Movements of Fluids). 


Assimilation and Expiration of Plants.*—Herr U. Kreusler de- 
scribes experiments instituted to ascertain the influence of lower tem- 
perature on the assimilation of plants. 

The plants observed were the bramble, bean, castor-oil, and cherry- 
laurel; the conditions of experiment and the methods employed were the 
same as on former occasions, but the temperatures were lower. At zero 
the exhalation of carbonic anhydride was 17-20 per cent. of that which 
occurs at 20° C. in the case of the cherry-laurel and castor-oil plant; in 
the case of the bramble, the exhalation was only one-half of that at 10°. 
Assimilation at zero is for the cherry-laurel only 8 per cent. of the 
possible maximum. 


Production of Vegetative from Fertile Shoots of Opuntia.;— 
Herr F. Hildebrand describes in detail experiments in causing fruits of 
Opuntia to vegetate by detaching them and placing them in contact with 
the soil. The species experimented on were O. Ficus-indica, O. Raffines- 
quiana, and an unnamed cultivated species. In all cases the tendency 
was for cultivation of this kind to produce vegetative rather than fertile 
shoots. In some cases fertile shoots were first produced, but the 
tendency to the production of vegetative shoots gradually gained the 
upper hand. The tendency to produce both fertile and vegetative shoots 
can, however, be incited in almost any part of the plant by external 
influences. 


Viviparous Plants and Apogamy.{—Herr E. H. Hunger describes 
the appearance of viviparous buds in Poa bulbosa and alpina, Polygonum 
viviparum, Atherurus ternatus, Ficaria, and Fourcroya. In Poa bulbosa 
he thinks we have a true instance of apogamy combined with viviparous- 
ness, and to a less extent in P. alpina, Polygonum viviparum, and 
Fourcroya, but not in Atherurus ternatus or Ficaria ranunculoides. In 
Poa bulbosa the bulbs are formed in the fructification, but not in con- 
nection with the flowers, which are usually altogether wanting, or, if 
present, unfruitful; they consist of two or three leaves strongly 
thickened at the base. Where seeds are produced, the resulting seed- 
lings show no special hereditary tendency to the formation of bulbs. The 
bulbs borne in the inflorescence also usually produced, on germination, 
normal plants with no well-marked tendency in this direction; while, on 
the other hand, the terrestrial buds displayed the inherited tendency 
very strongly. 


Conduction of Sap through the Secondary Wood.§ —Herr A. Wieler 
has investigated, in the case of a number of different dicotyledonous trees, 


* Bied. Centr., 1888, pp. 265-7. See Journ. Chem. Soc. Lond., Abstracts, 1888, 
p- 742. + Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 109-12 (1 pl.). 

¢ ‘ Ueb. einige vivipare Pflanzen u. d. Erscheinung d. Apogamie b. derselben,’ 
63 pp., Bautzen, 1887. See Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) p. 332. 

§ Pringsheim’s Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot., xix. (1888) pp. 82-137 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 769 


the part played by the secondary wood in the conduction of sap, and the 
importance of the anastomosing of the veins in the leaves for the supply 
of water to the transpiring surfaces. 

In all the trees examined, with possibly the exception of the horse- 
chestnut, only a portion of the alburnum of the branches has the power 
of conduction, and even this portion displays the property in very 
different degrees, the last annual ring exhibiting it the most strongly. 
The method of examination was by causing the wood to absorb a soluble 
pigment, and the same results were obtained with fuchsin and with 
methylene-blue. The different vessels in the same vascular bundle 
display very different properties in this respect. The author confirms 
Pfeffer’s statement that many soluble aniline-pigments pass readily 
through the protoplasm. 


Development of Wheat.*—M. Balland states that an ear of corn 
rapidly increases in weight and attains its maximum about the thirtieth 
day after flowering ; it then diminishes progressively during the fifteen 
days which precede harvest. The grain follows the same course, but it 
attains its maximum a few days later. Inversely the other parts of the 
ear (the rachis and chaff) diminish up to the moment when the grain 
attains its maximum; they are then to the grains nearly in the pro- 
portion of one to four. While the grain grows, the acidity of the nutrient 
fluids diminishes, and we are able to follow the condensation of the 
soluble alluminoid matter simultaneously with the transformation of the 
sugar into starch. 


Root-pressure.t—Mr. C. B. Clarke represents the accepted doctrine 
regarding root-pressure thus :—‘‘ Another kind of motion of water in the 
plant, depending not on suction but on pressure from below, is caused by 
the roots. It is the root-pressure which forces out drops at particular 
points of the leaves.” The author denies that root-pressure exists in 
any case, and maintains that the whole mechanical fluid action in plants 
must be considered in accordance with the laws of capillarity. 


Curvature of Plants.{—M. F. Elving states that it is well known 
that plants grow in a certain direction, and that this direction is deter- 
mined by their weight, by radiation, humidity, &c., and that they seek 
to regain their normal position by characteristic curvatures if they are 
in any way disturbed. Ifa tube containing Phycomyces nitens is placed 
horizontally, the first effect noticeable is a movement of the protoplasm 
towards the uppermost wall of the cell; in consequence of this, growth 
takes place to a greater extent in the upper part. It may be taken as a 
general rule, then, that flexion of a stem favours the development of the 
collenchyma on the convex side, while hindering it on the other side. 


Influence of certain Rays of the Solar Spectrum on Root-absorp- 
tion and on the Growth of Plants.s—Mr. A. B. Griffiths and Mrs. 
Griffiths daily exposed mustard and bean plants grown in calcareous soil, 
to which had been added a definite amount of ferrous sulphate, to various 
portions of the solar spectrum. Incineration of the plants showed that 
the greatest amount of ferric oxide was contained in those exposed to the 


* Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1610-2. 

+ Journ. of Bot., xxvi. (1888) pp. 201-3. 

{ Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 197-200. 
§ Proc. Roy. Soc. Edin., cxxiii. (1887) pp. 125-9. 


770 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


yellow-green rays D-E, under the influence of which rays also the greatest 
amount of oxygen is evolved. Examination of the plant for sulphur as 
representing the albuminoids, which must have derived their sulphur 
from the ferrous sulphate, showed that the maximum of albuminoids was 
attained under the influence of the rays D-E, 


Absorption of Nitrogen by Plants.*—Herren Helriegel and Will- 
farth have made some experiments in boxes in which were sown oats, 
peas, buckwheat, &c. It was found that those of the order Papilionacew 
were able to grow and flourish long after all the nitrogen present in the 
soil had been absorbed by them, whereas oats, &c., only grew as long as 
there was any of the nitrogen left that had been originally contained in 
the seed, &c. 


(3) Irritability. 


Method of Studying Geotropism.t—Miss A. Bateson and Mr. F. 
Darwin describe a method for studying geotropic curvatures. If a 
flower-stalk remains for an hour or two pinned down to a board ina 
horizontal position, so that no curvature can take place, a well-known 
result is seen on its being released. The freed ends spring up with a 
sudden geotropic curvature. The method employed by the authors is 
based upon this fact. Geotropic stems were immovably fixed at various 
angles, and the amounts of curvature occurring on release were taken 
as representing the geotropic stimulus corresponding to each position. 
Whatever may be the faults of the method, it has one merit, that the 
organ is exposed to a constant instead of to a varying stimulus, as must 
be the case if the stem is free to curve during the period of stimulation. 
The authors then give the results of a series of experiments made with 
the young flower-stalks of plantain (Plantago lanceolata). 


Chemotactic Movements of Bacteria, Flagellata, and Volvocineez. 
—Dr. W. Pfeffer in a previous work has shown that the spermatozooids 
of ferns and Selaginella are attracted by malic acid, and that this serves 
to conduct them into the archegonial canal. In the present paper t he 
proves that motile bacteria, colourless Flagellata, and some chlorophyll- 
containing Volvocinez are in a similar manner enticed or dispersed by 
certain substances, a phenomenon which he designates by the term “‘chemo- 
taxis.” The method of investigation is very simple. A capillary tube 
closed at one end, from 0:03 to 0:08 mm. wide, and 4 to 7 mm. long, is 
furnished with a definite solution, and its open end pushed into the drop 
of fluid containing the organisms in a state of equal distribution. To 
obtain a striking congregation of bacteria for instance, it suffices to 
introduce a capillary tube charged with a 2 to 4 per cent. meat sc tion 
in a drop containing B. termo. In a few seconds there is alr dya 
marked confluence of the bacteria, and in from 1 to 2 minute. the 
anterior part of the tube is thickly filled with them. 

The author worked out completely the chemotaxis of Bacterium termo, 
Spirillum undula, and Bodo saltans; Bacillus subtilis, Spirillum rubrum, 


* Bied. Centr., 1888, pp. 228-30. See Journ. Chem. Soc. Lond., Abstracts, i888, 


p. 742. 
+ Ann. of Bot., ii. (1888) 65-8. 


¢ Untersuch, Bot. Inst. Tiibingen, ii. (1888) p.582. Cf. this Journal, 1884, p. 412. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. Vwial 


typhoid bacillus, Spirillum cholere asiatice, &c., were also investigated 
with positive results. On the other hand, the colourless Flagellate, 
Astasia proteus and Chilomonas paramecium were found to be absolutely 
non-chemotactic, as also were the green Flagellata and all the Infusoria 
investigated (12); the latter indeed seemed to possess no chemotactic 
susceptibility whatever, oxygen excepted. 

The organisms examined were found to be positively or negatively 
chemotactic according to the nature of the stimulant material, and 
sensitive in different degrees. A given substance may act upon one 
organism, but not upon another, e.g. dextrin excites B. termo to an 
extraordinary degree, but not Spirillum. 

Among inorganic bodies the salts of potassium in general, and 
among the organic bodies peptones particularly act as lures, the carbo- 
hydrates less, whilst glycerin has no effect. 

Negative chemotaxis or dispersion of the organisms is usually pro- 
duced by alcohol, acid and alkaline reactions, and by a too great 
concentration of the stimulant material. The nutritive value of any 
substance, and its stimulant capacity, stand in no direct relation; glycerin, 
for instance, possesses no chemotactic action, although an excellent 
nutritive material for many bacteria. How extremely sensitive organisms 
are to certain substances is shown by the fact that B. termo is attracted 
by even a 0:001 per cent. peptone solution. 

The paper contains numerous remarks on the convenient application 
of chemotaxis for catching certain organisms, which if correct may be 
found of service in shortening the time taken in obtaining pure 
cultivations. 

M. J. Massart* has repeated, and to a large extent confirmed, 
Dr. Pfeffer’s observations. The Flagellata, Tetramitrus rostratus and 
Chilomonas paramecium, stated by Pfeffer to be non-chemotactic, he finds, 
on the other hand, to be very sensitive. 


(4) Chemical Changes (including Respiration and Fermentation). 


Changes of Substance and Force connected with Respiration.t— 
Dr. H. Rodewald continues his observations on the chemical and 
mechanical changes which accompany the process of respiration of plants. 


The average value of the fraction = he finds to be 1:061; for 1 ccm. 
of CO, there is given off 4°37 cal., and for 1 ccm. of O, 4°46 cal. 


Formation of Starch from various substances.{—By immersing 
filaments of Spirogyra in the substances in question, Herr T. Bokorny 
finds that plants have the power of producing starch from various sub- 
stances of the nature of alcohols, as well as from glucoses, viz. from 
methylol (probably in consequence of its splitting up readily into formic 
aldehyd and methyl alcohol), glycol, glycerin, and mannite. All these 
substances agree in being compounds of hydroxyl OH with carbon and 
hydrogen. 


* CR. Soc. R. Bot. Belg., 1888, pp. 88-98. 

+ Pringsheim’s Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot., xix. (1888) pp. 221-94 (1pl.). Cf this 
Journal, ante, p. 455. 

t Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. 1888) pp. 116-20. 


772 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


y. General. 


Relationship between Ants and Plants in the Tropics.*—Herr 
A. F. W. Schimper publishes the results of observations on the nature 
of the connection between myrmecophilous plauts and the ants which 
inhabit them in tropical America. 

The leaf-cutting ants are probably the most powerful enemy to which 
vegetation is subject ia tropical and subtropical America. Other species 
of ants, on the other hand, afford protection to vegetation by destroying 
or keeping aloof the leaf-cutting ants and other enemies of plants. The 
orange trees in the province of Canton in China are in this way protected 
by nests of tree-dwelling ants. 

With regard to myrmecophilous trees and shrubs, the author states 
that in most cases no special adaptation in the structure of the plant to 
its habitation by ants can be proved. In other cases, however, observed 
by him in Brazil, it is evident that such adaptations do exist, and this 
is especially the case with Cecropia adenopus. In this and in other 
species of the genus, the ants inhabit hollow cavities in the tubular inter- 
nodes, which serve, in the first place, to add to the flexibility of the 
branches, but also as a dwelling-place for countless myriads of ants. 
The protective function of these ants is shown by the facts that in every 
specimen in which these cavities were not inhabited by ants, the leaves 
were found to be entirely destroyed by leaf-cutting ants. In another 
species of Cecropia which is not inhabited by ants, and which does not 
possess these cavities, the tree is protected from the visits of the leaf- 
cutting ants by the extreme smoothness of the stem, which is covered by 
a coating of wax. In C. adenopus a special source of nutriment is fur- 
nished to the ants which inhabit it, in a quantity of ovoid or pear-shaped 
bodies, which cover the under side of the base of the leaf-stalk with a 
velvety coating. These bodies, known as “ Miiller’s corpuscles,” are 
probably metamorphosed organs for the excretion of mucilage or resin. 
They are but slightly attached to the hairs, and are very rich in albumi- 
noid substances and in fatty oils. They are entirely wanting in the 
species of Cecropia which are not inhabited by ants. In Acacia sphzro- 
cephala, the spines of which are inhabited by ants, similar bodies, which 
serve for their nourishment, are found at the apex of the pinne. If these 
bodies are removed they are formed again with great rapidity. 

Extra-floral nectaries are regarded by Schimper, along with Belt and 
Delpino, as having for their primary function the attraction of friendly 
ants which proteet the plant from the attacks of leaf-cutting species. 
The formation of the nectar in these nectaries may extend over a period 
of several weeks. The nectaries are not in themselves directly service- 
able to the plant, as can be shown by removing them, when the health 
and vigour of the plant are not injured. The sugar in the nectar is 
undoubtedly a product of the assimilating power of the leaf itself. 
Extra-floral nectaries are especially numerous in the Tropics where the 
leaf-cutting ants most abound; and they are found most frequently in 
the floral region, where they are most serviceable in rendering protection 
to the organs of reproduction. 


* «Die Wechselbeziehungen zw. Pflanzen u. Ameisen im tropischen Amerika,’ 
96 pp. and 3 pls., Jena, 1888. See Naturforscher, xxi, (1888) pp. 171-4, Cf. this 
Journal, unte, p. 87. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. Ta 


Deposition of Calcareous Incrustations on Fresh-water Plants.*— 
Herr N. Pringsheim maintains that the deposition of a calcareous 
incrustation on plants growing in fresh water is necessarily connected 
with the process of assimilation, and takes place only in the light. This 
can be shown by experimenting on Chara, Nitella, Confervacer, the 
leaves of some mosses (Mnium) or aquatic flowering plants, with a satu- 
rated solution of calcium bicarbonate. The lime-salt used is by no 
means indifferent, no precipitation taking place from neutral calcium 
carbonate. The deposition is accompanied by the evolution of bubbles 
of oxygen, and is evidently a function dependent on transpiration. 


Action of Ether on Plant-life.;—Dr. G. Brenstein finds that an 
atmosphere saturated with ether kills barley and wheat sprouts within 
thirty minutes. Five minutes’ exposure affected the plants, the tips of 
the leaves, consequently the oldest portions, being first killed, whilst the 
basal portions of the leaves, and therefore the youngest parts, resisted 
longest. EXxperiments made with portions of Hlodea canadensis showed 
that five minutes’ exposure to the ether atmosphere sufficed to kill the 
plant ; the thin texture of the leaf of this plant seems to make it more 
permeable to ether than are the leaves of wheat and barley. 


B. CRYPTOGAMIA. 


Cryptogamia Vascularia. 


Systematic Position of Isoetes.i—Dr. 8. H. Vines points out the 
objections to the position now generally assigned to the Isoetee—that 
proposed by Sachs and Goebel, according to which they, together with 
the Selaginellacezs, make up the class Ligulate. He suggests, on the 
other hand, that they are a heterosporous form—and the only one 
hitherto recognized as such—of the Eusporangiate Filicine. In its 
general habit, and in the absence of sporangiferous cones and of specially 
differentiated sporophylls, Isoetes resembles Filices, as also in the more 
general features of its embryogeny. The velum of Isoetes may also be 
homologous with the indusium of many Filices. 


Development of the Root of Equisetum.s—Mr. J. R. Vaizey has 
investigated the origin of the double endoderm of the root of Equisetum. 
He finds that the apical cell gives rise to two kinds of tissue, the outer 
layer or cylinder constituting the exomeristem, which incloses the 
central cord constituting the endomeristem of Russow. The exomeri- 
stem is distinguished from first to last by its cells being arranged in 
radial rows, while those of the endomeristem are not so arranged, and 
are smaller than those of the exomeristem. 


Muscinez., 


Reproduction of Thamnium alopecurum.|—Herr J- B. Schnetzler 
describes specimens of Thamniwm alopecurum, which were fructifying 
freely, and the sporanges filled with well-developed spores. The author 
placed the moss under water; it continued to grow all the winter, and 


* Pringsheim’s Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot., xix. (1888) pp. 138-54, 

+ Arch. Pharm., xxv. pp. 918-24. Cf. Journ. Cliem. Soc. Lond., 1888, Abstr., 
p. 624. 

¢ Ann. of Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 117-23. § Ibid., pp. 123-4, 

| Bull. Soc, Vaud. Sci. Nat., xxiii, (1888) pp. 161-4. 


SO. 3G 


774 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


in the spring formed a number of new shoots. After growing under 
water the moss exactly resembled a sub-lacustrine variety of 7’. alope- 
curum, which grows at a depth of 200 metres in the Lake of Geneva. 
On examining the young shoots, brown filaments which were formed of 
cells with oblique septa were seen. On these filaments or rhizoids 
gemmz were developed, 


Protonema of Schistostega osmundacea.*—Herr F. Noll describes 
the mode of vegetative reproduction of the protonema of this moss, and 
explains its shining appearance by its peculiar construction, which causes 
its lenticular cells to concentrate all the light that falls upon them on 
their posterior wall, and to illuminate intensely the chlorophyll-grains 
which collect on these walls. The rays which enter these cells in a 
parallel direction are so reflected that they again emerge parallel or 
slightly convergent, by which the bright shining appearance is brought 
about. 


Physiological and Comparative Anatomy of Sphagnacee.f—In 
this treatise Herr E. Russow treats especially of the anatomy of the 
leaves of Sphagnum from a physiological point of view. He shows that 
not only the leaves on both the erect and the pendent branches, but also 
the separate parts of the leaf, are adapted, by their structure, to the 
various requirements as regards firmness. This firmness is chiefly secured 
by the stiffening of the hyaline cells by means of annular and spiral 
fibres. These occur in all the cells of the leaves of the pendent branches, 
and in those of the basal half of the cells of the erect branches, in the 
form of bands projecting slightly into the cell-cavity. In the cells of 
the upper half of the leaves on the erect branches there are, on the other 
hand, a larger or smaller number of broad stiffening plates or bands 
placed at right angles to the cell-wall. The diameter of these plates at 
right angles to the cell-wall decreases from the apex towards the base 
of the leaf. It is chiefly by these plates that the surface of the 
leaf becomes folded in; they run across the leaf, and are united by 
anastomoses running in the direction of the length of the leaf. The 
leaves belonging to the fertile stem and branches, which are usually 
completely concealed, have no similar stiffening-bands; they consist 
simply of uniform chlorophyllous cells, their main function being the 
nutrition of the sporogonium. The pseudo-fibres of the stem-leaves must be 
distinguished from the true fibres of the hyaline cells, being nothing 
more than portions of cell-wall which remain behind between the orifices 
resulting from resorption. The pores of the hyaline cells have, in all the 
species which do not permanently live in water, their margins strongly 
thickened in a peculiar way, for the purpose of preventing the rupture 
of the margins, and in order to facilitate the absorption and the retention 
of water. The stiffening-bands increase the inner surface of the hyaline 
cells, and hence their capillary power. The position of the chlorophyll- 
cells is determined by the necessity of protection from light. Hither on 
both sides or on the one most exposed to the light they are partially or 
entirely covered on both sides by the hyaline cells. When this is not 
the case, the free walls of the chlorophyll-cells are imbricately apicu- 


* Versamml. Deutscher Naturf. u. Aerzte, Wiesbaden, Sept. 21, 1887. See Bot. 
Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) p. 399. 

+ ‘Zur Anat. resp. physiolog. u. vergleich. Anat. d. Torfmoose,’ 35 pp, and 
5 pls., Dorpat, 1887. See Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) p. 335. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 775 


late, and the light can reach them only after being repeatedly refracted 
in the cells. In the pendent branches, where the leaves are better pro- 
tected from light, the two kinds of cell lie side by side without covering 
one another, but the hyaline cells are more tumid. Further protection 
from the light is afforded by papille, and the deposition of pigment in 
the cell-walls, giving the living plant a brown appearance, especially in 
sunny spots. 

The use of these morphological characters for purposes of classifica- 
tion is then discussed. 


Forms of Sphagnum.*—Dr. Réll defends his previously published 
views against the objections of Warnstorf, and adduces additional 
arguments in favour of classifying the numberless forms of bog-mosses 
into a number of series passing into one another by insensible gradations, 
rather than into sharply differentiated species and varieties. 


Algee. 


Classification of Chlorophycee.t—Dr. J. B. de Toni proposes the 
following classification of the green algew, viz. :— 


Order I. ConFervomwsEzZ. 

Suborder 1. Oogamz. Families :—Coleochetacex, Mycoideacer, 
(idogoniacez, Spheropleacew, Cylindrocapsacee. 

Suborder 2. Isogamz. Families:—Ulvacee, Chetophoracee, 
Ulothricacee, Cladophoracew, Pithophoracee, Pheo- 
thamnacee, Trentepohliacee. 

Order II. SrpHonez. 

Suborder 1. Oogamez. Family :—Vaucheriacee. 

Suborder 2. Anogamzx. Families :—Botrydiacew, Phyllo- 
siphonacee, Bryopsidaceze, Derbesiacee, Spongodiacee, 
Udoteacez, Valoniaceze, Caulerpacez, Dasycladacee. 

Order III. ProrococcipEZ. 

Ist Family. Volvocacee. Subfamilies:—Volvocee (Oogames, 
Isogamez), Hematococcee, Cylindromonadee. 

2nd Family. Palmellacee. Subfamilies :—Ccenobiex (Hydro- 
dictyez, Pediastree, Scenedesmezx), Pseudo-ccenobier, 
Hremobiee (Rhaphidiex, Characiee, Endospheriex), 
Tetrasporee, Dictyospheriez, Nephrocyties, Palmellezx. 

Order IV. DrsmipioIibEz. 

Ist Family. Desmidiaceze. Subfamilies :—Hudesmidiex, Didy- 
moidez (Closteriex, Docidiew, Micrasteriez). 

2nd Family. Zygnemacez. Subfamilies :—Mesocarper, Zyg- 
nemeee. 


Classification of Confervoides.{—Prof. A. Hansgirg points out that 
two quite different genera of alge have been confounded under the name 
Aphanochxte, viz.:—(1) the true Aphanochete Berth., distinguished 
by its vegetative cells being furnished with stiff bristles, which appears 
to be nearly allied to Coleochzxte, but differing in having no oogamous 
mode of reproduction, and in its zoogonidia being provided with four 
vibratile cilia instead of two ; and (2) Aphanochzte A. Br. = Herposteiron 
Nag., belonging to the Chetophoracez. 


* Bot. Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) pp. 510-4, 338-42, 374-7, 385-9. Cf. this 


Journal, 1886, p. 108. 
+ Notarisia, iii. (1888) pp. 447-53. ¢ Flora, lxxi. (1888) pp. 211-23. 
342 


776 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Dr. Hansgirg proposes the following classification of the Confervoides 
or Nematophycer :— 
A. Vegetative cells uninucleated. 
1. CoLEoCHETACER. 
a. Anoogame :—Aphanochexte Berth., Chetopeltis Berth. ; 
doubtful, Ochlochzete Thw., Acrochzte Prings., Pheophila 
Hauck, Bolbocoleon Prings. 
b. Oogame :—Coleochzte Bréb. 
2. CHDOGONIACER. 
(Edogonium Link, Bulbochete Ag. 
. CYLINDROCAPSACER. 
Cylindrocapsa Reinsch. 
. TRENTEPOHLIACE. 

a. Chroolepidacese :—Trentepohlia Mart., Leptosira Bazi., 
Trichophilus Web., Ctenocladus Bzi., Microthamnion Ktz., 
Chlorotylium Ktz., Pilinia Ktz., Acroblaste Reinsch, 
Chlorothamnion Bzi. ; doubtful, Bulbotrichia Ktz. 

b. Mycoidacese :—Phycopeltis Mill., Mycoidea Cunn. 

. ULoOTHRICHACER. 

a. Ulothrichess :—Hormidium Ktz., Schizogonium Ktz., 
Hormiscia Aresch., Ulothrix Ktz., Gleotila Ktz. ex p. 

b. Chetophoracez :—Stigeoclonium Ktz., Endoclonium Szym., 
Entocladia Reinke, Chetophora Schr., Draparnaldia Ag., 
Chetonema Now., Herposteiron Nig., Reinkia Bzi., 
Chloroclonium Bzi., Lithobryon Rupr. 

c. Ulvacee:—Ulva L., Monostroma Thr., Enteromorpha 
Link., Zetterstedtia Ag., Ilea Ag., Diplonema Kjell., 
Schizomeris Ktz., Protoderma Ktz., Dermatophyton Pet., 
Ulvella Crouan, Prasiola Ag. 

B. Vegetative cells 2-multinucleated. 
6. ConFERVACER. 
a. Conferves :—Conferva L., Microspora Thr., Chaetomorpha 
Ktz., Binuclearia Wittr., Rhizoclonium Ktz.; doubtful, 
Confervites Brongn., Dictyothele Bzi., Urospora Aresch. 
b. Cladophoracese :—Cladophora Ktz., Chloropteris Mont., 
Periphlegmatium Ktz., Gongrosira Ktz. ex p. 
c. Pithophoraces :—Pithophora Wittr. 
C. Vegetative cells multinucleated. 
7. SPHHROPLEACER. 
Spheroplea Ag. 


New Genera of Perforating Alge.*—MM. E. Bornet and C. 
Flahault refer to the two alge described by Lagerheim + as perforating 
the shells of molluses, viz. Codiolum polyrhizwm and Mastigocoleus testarum. 
They point out that the so-called chroococcoid cells of the latter alga 
do not belong to it at all, but to an altogether distinct species, which 
they’ now describe as the type of a new genus under the name Hyella 
cxespitosa. 

The genus Hyella is regarded by the authors as the highest type yet 
known of the order Chamesiphonacee. It forms, when young, circular 
patches of an olive colour composed of radiating filaments permeating 


mem co 


iy 4 


* Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 161-5. 
¢ See this Journal, 1886, p. 665, 1887, p. 285. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 777 


the chitinous coat of the shell, and striking branches downwards into 
the test. Each filament is composed of a number of cells which readily 
separate from one another, and which may divide internally into secon- 
dary cells, and then present a remarkable chroococcoid appearance, 
the cells thus formed being without doubt organs of propagation. In 
addition to these Hyella produces sporangia resembling those of 
Dermocarpa, usually terminal, pyriform, and containing a large number 
of minute globular spores. 

The organism described by Lagerheim as Codiolum polyrhizum is in 
reality the sporange of an alga most nearly allied to the Siphonocladacee, 
and named by the present writers Gomontia polyrhiza. The sporanges, 
however, differ from any hitherto known. Gomontia forms green 
patches, especially on dead shells, composed of branched segmented 
filaments. The sporanges result from a total or partial usually unilateral 
swelling of one of the cells of the horizontal filaments. From these 
sporanges proceed two kinds of reproductive bodies, biciliated zoospores 
which conjugate without germination, and aplanospores. These aplano- 
spores do not germinate directly, but give birth to bodies resembling the 
sporanges from which they spring. After remaining for a time in this 
form, they put out rhizoids into the shell, or divide into from 2 to 8 
secondary aplanospores. 


Ulothrix and Stichococcus.*—M. E. de Wildeman agrees with 
Hansgirg in regarding Ulothrix nitens Men. and U. flaccida Ktz. as 
forms of the same species, but differs from that authority in his view 
that Stichococcus bacillaris belongs to the cycle of evolution of the same 
species. Ulothrix undoubtedly has a tendency to break up into isolated 
cells bearing a strong analogy to those of Stichococcus, but in their 
filamentous condition there is always a sufficient difference between 
them. M. de Wildeman has found, associated with U. tenerrima Ktz., 
another filamentous alga which also has a tendency to break up into 
isolated cells, and which he identifies with Gleotila. He suggests that 
it is this alga which is really another phase of Stichococcus. 


Trentepohlia.j—M. E. de Wildeman defines the characters of several 
species of this genus, and confirms the observation that species of 
Trentepohlia enter into the composition of Coccogonium and of other 
genera of lichens. 

Diatoms from a Trygon.{—Dr. G. B. de Toni has examined the 
contents of the digestive apparatus of a specimen of Trygon violacea, 
caught in the Adriatic. Besides a few filaments of Ulothria implexa and 
some fragments of an undetermined Cladothrixz, he found a large number 
of diatoms, of which two, Isthmia enervis and Rhabdonema arcuatum, 
were additions to the diatom-flora of the Adriatic. 


Fungi. 


Luminosity of Fungi.§—Mr. W. Phillips enumerates the following 
species of fungus as certainly known to be luminous :— Agaricus olearius 
from Europe, A. igneus, Amboyna, A. noctilucens, Manila, A. Gardner, 
Brazil, A. lampas, Australia, A. Hmerici, Andaman Isles, Polyporus 


* CR. Soc. R. Bot. Belg., 1888, pp. 80-7. Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 632. 
+ CR. Soc. R. Bot. Bele. 1888, pp. 140-8. 

t Atti R. Istit. Veneto ‘Sci., vi. (1888) 5 pp. 

§ Proce. Woolhope Club. See Rey. Mycol., x. (1888) p. 120. 


778 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


annosus, and P. sulphwreus, Europe, and Didymium sp., Jamaica. The 
luminosity of the following species, all from Europe, rests on more 
doubtful observations :—Agaricus fascicularis, Corticium cceruleum and 
lactewm, and Cladosporium umbrinum. To these must be added the 
structures known as Rhizomorpha, probably the mycelium of other fungi. 
The author believes that the seat of the phosphorescence is always the 
mycelium, and that when the case appears to be otherwise, it is due to 
a mycelium parasitic on the fungus, and imparting to the latter its 
luminosity. 


Conidiferous Form of Polyporus biennis.*—M. Boudier has met 
with a curious form of Polyporus biennis Bull., which may be specified 
under the name of Ptychogaster alveolatus. It was composed of two oblong 
club-shaped bodies, of from 23 to 3 cm, in height and 1 em. in breadth ; 
the pedicels were united in a common stipe some mm. from the base. 
These club-shaped bodies were of a reddish-white colour, and were 
tomentose on the surface, which was covered with a slightly prominent 
network composed of roundish angular or labyrinthiform pores. 


Classification of Basidiomycetes.{—In the last-published part of_his 
‘ Mycological Observations’ Herr O. Brefeld proposes the primary clas- 
sification of the Basidiomycetes into two groups, PRoTOBAsSIDIOMYCETES 
and AvrosasipiomycetEs. In the former the basidia are septated and 
pluricellular, each cell producing one spore; in the latter the basidia 
are unicellular, usually giving birth to two or four spores. 

The Protobasidiomycetes are again divided into three families, 
Pilacrex, Auriculariex, and Tremellinee, distinguished by the internal 
or external position of the basidia and the mode of their septation. In 
the Pilacree the basidium is septated transversely, and is composed of 
four superposed cells, and the fructification is angiocarpous, an envelope 
being formed round the basidial apparatus, which must perish in order to 
set the spores free. In the Auriculariee the basidium is also septated 
transversely, but the fructification is gymnocarpous. The Tremellines 
have their basidia septated longitudinally, the primitive mother-cell 
being divided into four by two septa at right angles to one another; 
each of the four cells is a long sterigma terminated by a spore. 

The Autobasidiomycetes are divided into the following ten families, 
according to the degree of protection of the fructification :— 


Dacryomycetes. 
Gymnocarpi J Clavariee. 
{ Thelephorez. 
Tulostomee (Lycoperdacez). 
Hymenogastree. 
Nidulariez. 
Phalloidez. 
Hydnee. 
Hemi-angiocarpi | Agaricinee. 
Polyporez. 


Angiocarpi 


Comparing this with the ordinary classification, the group usually 
designated Hymenomycetes includes the last two families of Brefeld’s 


* Soc. Bot. et Mycol. de France, Session Cryptogamique, 1887 (1888) pp. 55-8. 
+ ‘Unters. aus d. Gesammtgeb. d. Mykologie,’ Heft vii., 178 pp. and 11 pls., 
Leipzig, 1888. See Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) Rey. Bibl., p. 69. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 779 


Protobasidiomycetes, and the angiocarpous and hemi-angiocarpous 
Autobasidiomycetes. The Tremellini in the ordinary sense of the 
term include the author’s Auriculariez, Tremellinee, and the greater 
part of the Dacryomycetes. The angiocarpous Autobasidiomycetes 
correspond to the Gasteromycetes. 

The Pilacreze consist of the single genus Pilacre. It possesses a 
peridium composed of the ultimate ramifications of the hyphe, while 
the lower parts of the same hyphe give birth to the basidia. The 
germinating spore developes into a mycelium, a portion of which grows 
beneath the surface of the nutrient fluid, while the aerial portion gives 
birth to conidia. Pilacre may be regarded as a Gasteromycete with its 
basidia septated transversely. 

The fructification of the Auriculariez: consists of irregular masses 
enveloped in abundant mucilage; it is gymnocarpous, the basidia being 
formed on the surface ; each of the four superposed cells of which they 
are composed puts out a long broad sterigma which traverses the whole of 
the mucilaginous envelope, and terminates in a large reniform spore. 
Brefeld divides it into two genera :—Auricularia, with which Hirneola 
is united, and a new genus T'achaphantium, composed of a single species, 
which forms small warts on the bark of branches of the lime. 

The Tremellinez have a gymnocarpous fructification, and the basidia 
are divided longitudinally by two septa at right angles to one another. 
It comprises the genera Exidia, Ulocolla, Craterocolla, Sebacina, Tremella, 
aud Gyrocephalus. The new genus Ulocolla (formed of Tremella saccha- 
rina and foliacea) is distinguished by the mode of germination of the 
spores, which resembles that of Hxidia, the spore dividing into two cells, 
each of which puts out a short filament ending in a group of conidia 
having the form of straight rods. Craterocolla is also a new genus, 
formed from the single species Tremella Cerasi, distinguished by conidi- 
ferous filaments differing greatly in appearance from those which give 
birth to the basidia. Gyrocephalus is also composed of a single species, 
Guepinia helvelloides Tul. 

Of the Autobasidiomycetes the only family treated of in this section 
of the work is the Dacryomycetes, composed of the genera Dacryomyces, 
Guepinia, and Dacryomitra, usually placed under Clavarieex, sometimes 
under Tremellini. ‘The Dacryomycetes are distinguished by their 
basidia having the form of an elongated bifurcate club, bearing at its 
extremity two long arms or sterigmata, which narrow gradually up- 
wards, each ending in a single large spore. The characters of the four 
genera are given by the author in detail. 


New Tubercularia.*—M. N. Patouillard, while examining some 
fungi sent from the Jura, noticed on the stems and leaves of some 
grasses small white spots, which presented a remarkable structure. 
These little tubercles were round, from 0:5 to 2 mm. in diameter, and 
sessile, hyaline, and gelatinous. Under the Microscope these tubercles 
were seen to be composed of colourless and branching filaments; a 
slight swelling can be observed at the end of these, and this forms an 
ovoid mass, which is the commencement of the spore. This spore is 
Separated by a septum, and below this the filament emits a lateral 
branch which continues to elongate. The author gives a diagnosis of 
this plant, to which he has given the name of Tubercularia chztospora. 


* Soc. Bot. et Mycol. de France, Session Cryptogamique, 1887 (1888) pp. 29-30. 


780 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Calostoma Desv. (Mitremyces Nees).*—Mr. G. Massee discusses 
the morphology of the genus Calostoma Desy. He was enabled in one 
case especially to follow the course of development from the period of 
differentiation of the gleba to that of dehiscence. The structure was 
found to be in every respect homologous with the peridium of the 
Phalloidex, but differs in being entirely deliquescent at an early period. 
Calostoma is morphologically most nearly related to the genus Geaster, 
the homology in many respects being absolute, the differences at the 
same time extreme. The external peridium of Geaster, which splits in a 
stellate manner when ripe, corresponds to the exoperidium and endo- 
peridium in Calostoma, the inner peridium in Geaster being the morpho- 
logical equivalent of the spore-sac in Calostoma. Although the species 
of the genus Calostoma are, with two exceptions, restricted to narrow 
areas, the genus is widely distributed, extending from Massachusetts to 
the south of Tasmania, and from New Granada to Tasmania, with a 
vertical range from near the sea-level to 9000 feet in the SikkimHimalayas. 
The author concludes with descriptions of the various species of the 
genus. 


Pimina, a new Genus of Hyphomycetes.t—Mr. W. B. Groves 
describes a new genus of Hyphomycetes parasitic on the hyphe of 
Polyactis, and on the leaves of Passijflora princeps and P. quadrangu- 
laris from Monkstown, Dublin. Pimina:—Hyphe steriles repentes, 
hyaline y. subcolorate; fertiles erectw, fuliginem, sursum basidiis 
coronate. Conidia simplicia, hyalina, acrogena. 


Fungi of Fruit-trees.{—Herr F. v. Thiimen enumerates 4202 species 
of parasitic fungus which attack 77 different kinds of fruit. The sweet 
chestnut appears to have the largest number of enemies, as many as 326 
species, and the vine comes next with 323. The author remarks that 
when the same fungus appears on different organs of the same plant, it 
is constantly described under different names. 


Parasitism of the Truffle$—M. H. Bonnet states that M. Tulasne 
first observed truffles entirely covered by their mycelium. Numerous 
white cylindrical threads were noticed, and these adhered to particles of 
earth by the extremity of their branches. Microscopical examination of 
these threads shows them to be composed of septated cylindrical fila- 
ments which are straight and parallel to one another. As to the 
anatomical relation of the mycelium with the surface of the fungus, the 
filaments which compose the first are all connected with the surface of 
the truffle, and it is not at all easy to discover where the peridium 
separates itself from its byssoid envelope. 


Fungus Parasitic on the Pine-apple.||-M. J. de Seynes, in a 
recent work on the formation of acrospores, described a Hyphomycete 
belonging to the genus Sporoschisma, which he calls S. paradoxum. In 
this paper he adds more particulars about the same species. This 
fungus vegetates in the pulp of the fruit of the pine-apple. The 
mycelium is composed of filaments which intertwine with the elements 
of the parenchyma of the host; these filaments are colourless, and but 


* Ann. of Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 25-45. ¢ Journ. of Bot., xxvi. (1888) p. 206. 

t+ ‘Die Pilze der Obstgewiachse,’ 126 pp., Vienna, 1887. See Bot. Centralbl., 
Exxiv. (1888) p. 307. 

§ Rey. Mycol., x. (1888) pp. 69-73. Cf. this Journal, 1887, p. 791. 

|| Soe. Bot. et Mycol. de France, Session Cryptogamique, 1887 (1888) pp. 26-30. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 781 


little branched. The sporophore appears first as a small spherical 
eminence which becomes divided off by a septum from the mycelial cell. 
The sporophores bear at their summit the spores or conidia, which are 
unilocular and cylindrical. 


Fungus Parasitic on the Salt-fish.*—Herr J. Brunchorst describes 
a mould-fungus parasitic on the salt-fish, and very destructive to it 
(Torula pulvinata Sace., Wallerina ichthyophaga Johan-Olsen). It forms 
on the skin brownish, more or less hemispherical patches 1-3 mm. in 
diameter, or a brownish coating. It produces conidiophores, from 
which are abstricted brown spherical smooth conidia 4-5 » in diameter, 
which, on germinating, divide into a kind of parenchymatous tissue 
which produces root-like hyphe and flask-shaped conidiophores. 


“Rouge” of the Scotch Fir.t— According to MM. Bartet and 
Vuillemin, the disease which is exceedingly destructive to Scotch firs in 
the neighbourhood of Nancy, known as “rouge,” is quite distinct from 
the “rouille,” and probably identical with that known in Germany as 
“ Schiitte.” It makes its appearance in the form of brown spots on the 
leaves, the spermogonia of Leptostroma Pinastri Desm. The best 
remedy for the disease they found to be the use of “‘ bouillie bordelaise,” 
a preparation containing copper, which is also very efficacious against the 
Peronospora of the vine and of the potato. 


Parasites of the Peridinieze.{—According to M. A. Dangeard, the 
Peridiniez form a very interesting group, but as yet imperfectly known. 
The species which furnished a good part of the material for this paper 
was Glenodinium cinctum Ehrb., which is very common in fresh water. 
The body of this species is covered with a membrane of cellulose, its 
anterior part being shorter than the posterior; under the membrane 
yellow chromatophores may be seen. Multiplication takes place by 
longitudinal division, and spherical resting-spores having a thick 
membrane are formed. 

The author then goes on to discuss the nature of the endogenous 
germs which exist in the Peridiniew. Inthecase of Glenodinium cinctum 
the protoplasm incloses from one to four germs, and sometimes even a 
greater number may be observed; these germs are spherical or sometimes 
elliptical, and after a time give rise to an Olpidium. The endogenous 
germs do not belong then to the Peridiniex, but are parasitic structures. 
The author describes various species of Chytridium in which the 
sporangia remain exterior to the host. C. echinatwm was met with on 
Glenodinium cinctum; it is easily distinguished by the form of its 
sporange. The genus Chytridium can be divided into three sections, in 
the first two there is only one opening in the sporange for the escape of 
the zoospores, while in the third there are several. 


Disease attacking Amygdalez.§s—M. P. Vuillemin describes a 
disease which attacked various Amygdalew in Lorraine in 1887. The 
first examination revealed the parasitic nature of the disease; the 
laminz of the leaves, petioles, and fruits were found covered with more 
or less numerous spots. If one of the spots is examined the spore may 


* Norsk Fiskeritidende, 1886, pp. 136-60, and 1888, pp. 65-80 (2 figs.) (Nor- 
wegian). See Bot. Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) p. 133. 

+ Comptes Rendus, cvi. (1888) pp. 628-30. 

t Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 126-32, 141-6 (1 pl.). 

§ Soc. Bot. et Mycol. de France, Session Cryptogamique, 1887 (1888) pp. 40-7. 


782 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


be seen frequently in the centre of the altered region. The infecting 
spore is composed of a thread of cells, and is able to emit simultaneously 
several germinating tubes. The mycelium is composed of cylindrical 
filaments. 'The fungus hardly seems to comport itself like an ordinary 
parasite, but rather like certain Sclerotinia described by Prof. de Bary. 
The history of this fungus is not complete, as the perithecia have not 
been discovered ; the conidiferous condition is, however, already known 
as Coryneum Beijerinckii ; this is admitted to be a stage in the evolution 
of a Spheria. 


Haplococcus reticulatus.*—Prof. W. Zopf had described under the 
above name a presumed parasite of the flesh of swine. ‘This he notes, 
however, was a mistake due to accidental contact with Lycopodium spores. 
He justly expects that his “ youthful error may be gently overlooked.” 


New Puccinia.t—Herr G. Lagerheim describes a new species of 
Puccinia, which he calls P. gibberosa, found on leaves of Festuca sylvatica. 
It is distinguished by its large uredospores provided with a great number 
of germinal pores, by the paraphyses among the uredospores, and by the 
apex of the teleutospores being furnished with a few short warts instead 
of a larger number of horn-like protuberances. 


Sexual Organs in Acidium.{—Mr. G. Masscee has noticed, on leaves 
of Ranunculus Ficaria, a spherical weit of interlaced hyphe, the tip of 
one thread situated in the centre of the mass ending in a clavate head 
rich in coarsely granular protoplasm. Being desirous of ascertaining 
whether the clavate body mentioned was in any way connected with the 
Aicidium, numerous young unopened peridia were cut, but without 
result ; it was only when sections were made through those portions of 
the leat first showing traces of the fungus in the form of a slight dis- 
colouration, or the appearance of spermogonia, that the clavate body in a 
ball of mycelium, which represented the initial stage of an Aicidiwm, was 
discovered. In this instance the object of search was in a more advanced 
stage, clearly showing it to be an oogonium, accompanied by an antheri- 
dium. The oogonium was much larger than the one first seen, in form 
irregularly oblong, measuring about 50 by 25 », terminal on a thread, 
from which it was cut off by a transverse septum, and containing finely 
granular protoplasm with numerous refractive globules. The author 
could see no trace of a nucleus. 

The antheridium is cylindrical, about 40 by 12 p, and, like the 
oogonium, filled with protoplasm and oil-globules, and terminated by a 
short lateral branch springing from a thread distinct from the one sup- 
porting the oogonium, as far as the two could be traced in the mass of 
mycelium. The antheridium is cut off from its supporting hypha by a 
transverse septum. The point of contact between the antheridium and 
oogonium was on the side turned away from the eye, so that the author 
is unable to state the exact manner in which fertilization is effected. 


Symbiotic Fungus in Molgulide. §—M. A. Giard has observed in 
the kidneys of Molgulide various species of a new genus of Fungi (Nephro- 
myces) living in apparent symbiosis. The genus seems most akin to 


* Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 144-5. 

+ Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 124-6 (2 figs.). 
} Ann. of Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 47-51 (1 pl.). 

§ Comptes Rendus, cyi. (1888) pp. 1180-2. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 783 


Catenaria Sorokine. The sporangia are always terminal. The unicellular 
mycelium with fine filaments, the zoosporangia, zoospores, and zygospores 
are described. ‘The two species especially studied were Nephromyces 
Molgularum from Molgula socialis Alder, and Nephromyces Sorokini from 
Lithonephrya eugyranda Lacaze Duthiers. M. Giard believes that the 
fungus is of use to the Tunicate which they infest, in helping to break 
up the waste products which would otherwise soon obstruct the ductless 
kidney. 

Plasmodium of Badhamia and Brefeldia.*—Mr. A. Lister finds Bad- 
hamia utricularis and Brefeldia maxima very favourable species for observ- 
ing the phenomena connected with the plasmodium of the Myxomycetes 
The plasmodium of B. utricularis can be kept in constant streaming 
movement on various kinds of woody fungi for more than a year, often 
covering large spaces, and it may with great facility be thrown into the 
sclerotium or resting-stage, in which condition it can be stored away for 
months, and brought back at any time into the active state by moistening. 
When placed in a glass box it will soon crawl up the sides, and is then 
in a favourable condition for observation. 

The application of small pieces of any digestible substance excites the 
streaming of the plasmodium to an extraordinary degree; but it possesses 
a remarkable power of discriminating between different kinds of food. 
Thus raw potato-starch is scarcely if at all affected, while if the starch 
is swollen by moderate heat, it is rapidly digested. Cotton-wool is not 
affected. The plasmodium can be raised from a sluggish and almost 
quiescent condition to one of great activity by supplying it with Agaricus 
campestris, Boletus flavus, or the prepared hymenial surface of Stereum 
hirsutwm, while the coarser fibres of the latter fungus are more slowly 
absorbed ; and this is also the case with Agaricus melleusand A. rubescens 
and still more so with A. fuscicularis. The digestive principle of the 
plasmodium is not confined to any special part of the mass; it may take 
place in the streaming interior or in the hyaline margin alone. 

The author is unable to suggest any explanation of the rhythmic 
streaming motion of the plasmodium, or of the causes of the sudden 
changes from a quiescent to a streaming condition, or of the impulse 
which occasions the change into sporangia, though the latter is no doubt 
favoured by hot weather. 

In Brefeldia maxima Mr. Lister records the remarkable observation 
of an instance of spore-formation not confined by any inclosing wall. 

The presence of nuclei and nucleoli in the plasmodium of Badhamia 
is easily proved. ‘They are most readily detected by suddenly dipping 
into absolute alcohol cover-slips which have been smeared with it, and 
then staining with magenta. 


Mycological Notes.;—M. P. A. Dangeard follows up his researches 
on the Chytridinez { by giving the descriptions of several new species. 

Chytridium Brauni grows on Apiocystis brauniana ; the sporangia are 
oval, and each forms at maturity from fifteen to twenty-five zoospores. 
C. zoophthorum resembles the preceding species, but the radicular system 
is much more developed and more strongly branched; it attacks 
Rotifers. 


* Ann. of Bot., ii. C588) pp. 1-24 (2 pls.). 
+ Soc. Bot. et Mycol. de France, Session Cryptogamique, 1887 (1888) pp. 21-5. 
+ See this Journal, 1887, p. 284. P que, (1888) pp. 21-5 


784 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


In reference to Dentigera, which has been established as a section of 
Chytridium by M. Félix Rosen,* if all the species whose sporangia possess 
a basilar swelling are placed in the genus Rhizidium, the section Denti- 
gera ought not to remain in the genus Chytridium, but become a part of 
the genus Rhizidium. 

When the author in his former paper gave a description of the genus 
Spherita, he was unable to follow the development of the cysts for want 
of proper material. Since then the cultures have been continued, and 
a number of cysts obtained ; their development resembles that of the 
sporangia, but from the first the protoplasm is denser, and there are no 
sexual phenomena apparent. Their form is sometimes spherical ; more 
often they are elongated and elliptical. 

The author then describes a new Pyrenomycete which attacks Sali- 
cornia herbacea, under the name of Pleospora Salicorniz. 


Protophyta. 


Relationship between Phormidium and Lyngbya.{—M. M. Gomont 
has been able to follow the course of development of an Oscillaria, the 
study of which was interesting as bearing on the relationship between 
the genera Phormidium and Lyngbya. The plant (Oscillaria viridis), 
which presented all the characters of a Phormidium, was cultivated in two 
ways—in a vase filled with water, and on a brick which was simply kept 
moist. The trichomes in both cases became strongly flexuous, and were 
surrounded by solid sheaths. These sheaths had, however, no tendency 
to agglomerate, and the filaments could be separated without tearing by 
the aid of needles. In fact, it appeared as a true Lyngbya. It remains 
then proved that the same plant can possess the characters of Phormidium 
as well as those attributed to Lyngbya. 

Cultures of Cladothrix dichotoma.{—M. E. Macé states that Olado- 
ihrix dichotoma Cohn is a filamentous bacterium found in fresh or 
salt, but especially abundant in stagnant water. In the cultures made 
with gelatin, the colonies appear on the fourth or fifth day as very small 
yellowish points surrounded by a brown ring. All the cultures emitted 
a somewhat mouldy odour. On the filaments of the cultures true ramifi- 
cation could be observed ; on the side of the filament a rupture appeared 
which was indicative of a lateral branch. This bud enlarged and formed 
a cylindrical prolongation until it attained to the same size as the mother 
filament. On the same filament, frequently a series of these lateral 
branches at different stages of development could be observed, and it was 
thus possible to follow the transformations. The author concludes by 
stating that Cladothrix dichotoma appears to be a saprophytic bacterium 
inoffensive to men and animals. It very probably may take a large part 
in the calcareous concretions which are found deposited in the pipes 
used to conduct certain waters. The bacterium brings about the precipi- 
tation of lime salts around its very long filaments, in the same manner as 
Leptothrix buccalis occasions the precipitation of the lime salts in saliva, 


New Pleurocapsa.S—Herr G. Lagerheim describes a new species of 
this genus, hitherto exclusively marine, P. fluviatilis, growing attached to 
mosses on wet planks in the canal of the Dreisam near Freiburg-i.-Br. 

* See this Journal, 1888, p. 1002. 

+ Soc. Bot. et Mycol. de France, Session Cryptogamique, 1887 (1888) pp. 18-21. 

} Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1622-3. 

§ Notarisia, iii, (1888) pp. 429-31 (1 fig.) 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 785 


Colouring matter of the waters of the Lake of Bret.*—Herr J. 
B. Schnetzler states that last autumn a red colouring matter, held in 
suspension in the waters of the Lake of Bret, was brought for his 
examination. Under the Micrcscope it appeared as irregularly lobed 
masses of a red colour, and consisted of micrococci. These the author 
identified as the zooglea of Beggiatoa roseo-persicina. A second search 
was made this spring in the Lake of Bret for the red colouring matter, 
which, however, could not be found but, instead, a bluish-black substance. 
When this was examined, a number of diptera were seen, the decomposi- 
tion of which served as the points of departure of the long colourless 
filaments of Beggiatoa. 


Saccharomyces ellipsoideus and its Use in the Preparation of Wine 
from Barley.t—M. G. Jacquemin gives the details of some experiments 
which were made to determine whether Saccharomyces ellipsoideus is a 
stable or merely an abnormal form of beer-yeast developed under special 
conditions, and liable to revert to the original form; but these experiments 
are not yet complete. The action of elliptical yeast on barley-wort pro- 
duced a liquid with an alcoholic strength of 6°, containing 60 grams of dry 
extract and 3 grams of ash per litre. It had the following percentage com- 
position :—Alcohol, 4:80; reducing sugar, 1:00; dextrine, 3°00; albu- 
minoids, &c., 1°28; glycerol, 0°20; succinic acid, 0:04; acetic acid, 
0:02; potassium hydrogen tartrate, 0°25; ash, 0°23; water, 89°18. 
This liquid has an agreeable flavour, and contains a greater proportion 
of albuminoids and phosphates than wine from grapes. It differs from 
the latter in giving an abundant precipitate with tannin. In these 
experiments it was found that the elliptical wine-yeast remained stable 
for eighteen months, and it would therefore seem to be quite distinct from 
beer-yeast. When wine obtained in this way from barley is distilled, 
it yields brandy of good flavour, whilst the brandy from wine produced 
by beer-yeast has a bad flavour. 


Organic nourishment of Beer-ferment.t—M. H. Laurent has tried 
the nourishing effect of different organic bodies on beer-ferment, the 
object being to find from what organic bodies glycogen could be formed 
by the ferment; as there can be no doubt, after the results obtained by 
Hrrera,§ that this body plays the part of reserve carbohydrate in fungi as 
in animals, The author then gives a long list of bodies which were to a 
greater or less extent assimilated :—e.g., acetates, lactates, glycerin, 
mannite, asparagine, salicin. In many cases the presence of glycogen 
has been determined in these bodies. 


Scheuerlen’s Cancer Bacillus.|—Dr. EH. Van Ermengem concludes 
from experiments made on dogs, guinea-pigs, and rats that Scheuerlen’s 
cancer bacillusis non-pathogenic. Twoccm. of the pure cultivation were 
injected, and after two months all the animals were quite well. The 
author finds that the pseudo-cancerous bacillus is an organism very 
common in the air, dust, soil, &c., and identifies it with the “ bacille 
rosé” found in an impure cultivation of bacillus tuberculosis. 


* Bull. Soc. Vaud. Sci. Nat., xxiii. (1888) pp. 152-5. Cf. this Journal, 1887, 
p- 1007. t+ Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 643-4. 

t CR. Soc. R. Bot. Belg., 1888, pp. 131-40. 

§ See this Journal, ante, p. 96. 

|| Bull. Soc. Belg. Micr., xiv. (1888) pp. 92-5. 


786 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Tron-bacteria.*—Bacteria which assume a rust-coloured hue were 
denominated iron-bacteria by Ehrenberg, who found that this coloration 
was due to the presence of compounds of iron oxide deposited in the 
substance of the jelly, and regularly distributed. The exact significance 
of this deposition of iron and the conditions under which it is called 
forth, are at present problematical. According to one view, that of Cohn, 
the brown coloration is due to the deposition of iron oxide by the 
vegetative activity of the cells, just like silex in diatoms or carbonate of 
lime in the cell-membrane of Melobesiacew. The other view is that the 
process is purely mechanical, and is effected by the deposition of iron 
compounds dissolved in water in the gelatinous parts. 

To ascertain which and how far either of these views were correct, 
Herr 8S. Winogradsky made experiments chiefly with Leptothrix ochracea 
Ktz. 

(1) When finely-powdered iron oxide was placed in water containing 
colourless Leptothriz, no brown staining was produced; but directly 
water containing carbonate of iron in solution (Pyrmont, Schwalbach) was 
used, in 10-15 hours a yellowish-brown colour appeared. 

(2) The co-operation of the living plasma is shown by the fact that 
where the brown coloration is produced, there is no deposit of iron 
oxide in the immediate vicinity ; consequently the effect is not due to the 
action of the oxygen in the air. Moreover, the sheaths are only stained 
when the cells are alive. 

(3) Without the presence of iron oxide, Leptothrix ochracea does not 
grow. This is clearly shown by changing the fluids; when the water 
contains no iron the threads stop their development, but directly it is 
added growth proceeds again. 

(4) The oxidation process is therefore as follows:—The salts of the 
oxide of iron are eagerly taken up by the cells, oxidized in the 
protoplasm, and the compounds formed excreted by the cells. These 
compounds are soluble; and after twenty-four hours the colour may 
usually be removed by washing the threads in water, especially if it 
contain CO,. Very dilute acids seem to remove the brown hue jmost 
efficaciously, but are not always successful. 

(5) Leptothrix ochracea can grow in water which contains very little 
organic matter, e.g. the natural ferruginous waters. The addition of 
0:005-0-01 per cent. butyrate of lime or acetate of soda to Strasburg 
water sufficed to make this bacterium grow well. 

The author does not draw any conclusion from the foregoing experi- 
ments, except that the oxidizing power of the cells of iron-bacteria 
must be extremely great, but promises a more complete account in 
some future publication. 

Bacillus muralis.— Prof. A. Tomaschek,f in reply to Prof. A. Hans- 
girg, who identifies Bacillus muralis with Glaucothria gracillima Zopf,t 
points out that the rods in Glaucothrix (Aphanothece caldariorum Richter) 
are distinctly green, while those of B. muralis consist of a plasma which 
is perfectly homogeneous and almost transparent. The author then pro- 
ceeds to call attention to the endogenous spore-formation of B. muralis. 
The commencement of this process is indicated by a number of strongly 
refracting roundish corpuscles with a bluish reflex, collecting together 

* Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) pp. 261-70. 


+ Bot. Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) pp. 279-83 (2 figs.). 
t See this Journal, ante, pp. 276-7. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 787 


from the ends and gradually drawing together towards the more central 
parts. This is the case chiefly with the two-celled rodlets. In the 
longer ones the corpuscles make their appearance about the middle of 
the rodlet. When these forms have attained a certain size and distinct- 
ness, the plasma surrounding them gradually clears up and they seem as 
if environed by a bright halo. The brightness of the spore afterwards 
disappears and it assumes the pale homogeneous appearance of the 
vegetative rod, and, though still roundish, attains the ordinary breadth 
of the rods. In this transition from the spherical to the cylindrical 
shape no striation of the spore membrane is observable. The membrane, 
like the parent-cell, seems to disappear by dissolution or absorption. 
The spores, however, remain inclosed in a general gelatinous invest- 
ment, which may contain from two to eight rodlets. The arrangement 
of these rodlets in relation to the common envelope and to each other is 
quite irregular. 

The author then proceeds to notice the effect of iron or its rust on 
B. muralis. The accidental mixture of some scales of rust produced 
a dark olive-green colour in the zoogloea mass surrounding the rust. 
Examination under the Microscope showed that each cell-membrane was 
now distinctly laminated or consisted of a number of concentric layers. 

Two mosses were found thriving luxuriantly on the zoogloea, Hphe- 
merum tenerum and Ephemerella recurvifolia. 

Prof. A. Hansgirg* replies at some length to Prof. Tomaschek, 
and at the same time takes the opportunity of copiously recapitulating 
certain facts bearing on the subject of jelly-formation by Algae. 

Tomaschek had pointed out that B. muralis differs from Aphanothece 
caldariorum Richter in being green. This, says the author, is of no 
consequence, inasmuch as Alge grown without access of light become 
blanched. He considers that not only is the green rod of B. muralis 
identical with its colourless variation known as Plectonema gracillimum 
(Glaucothria gracillima Zopf), but that there exists a coccus-form derived 
by continuous subdivision which is common to Plectonema gracillimum 
and B. muralis. 

The author points out that Tomaschek himself throws some doubt on 
the truly bacillous nature of B. muralis, as he was unable from direct 
observation to trace the transition from the motionless rod to the mobile 
condition, a stage which is easily ascertainable in the transformations of 
real bacilli. 

The author then turns to the highly refracting granules found at the 
ends of the rods both in Aphanothece caldariorum and B. muralis. In 
the latter Tomaschek considers that they are intimately connected with 
endogenous spore-formation, while Prof. Hansgirg says that there is no 
difference between the corpuscles, and is disposed to regard them simply 
in the light of the resting cells (aplanospores, cysts) of Alge and Fungi. 

Referring to the gelatinous laminated sheath, Prof. Hansgirg shows 
that the formation of jelly is not uncommon in certain kinds of Alga, 
and that this sheath may consist of several layers, the innermost being 
the most recent. 


Spore-formation in Bacteria.j—Dr. A. Prazmowski deduces from 
his experiments on micrococcus and bacterium that the earlier view 


* Bot. Centralbl., xxxv. (1888) pp. 54-7, 102-9 (2 figs.). 
+ Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 301-7. 


788 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


respecting the fructification of bacteria is more correct than that at pre- 
sent adopted, which was promulgated by de Bary and Hueppe. This 
doctrine, which also served as a means of classification, subdivided 
bacteria into the endosporous and the arthrosporous, according as on the 
plasma there arose small, refracting globular bodies surrounded by a 
definite membrane, which were set free from the parent cell by some 
process of softening of the parental cell membrane or not. When these 
spores found suitable conditions, they lost their refracting qualities, their 
investing membrane swelled up, and they began to assume the appear- 
ance of the predecessor from which they had sprung. In the arthro- 
sporous bacteria it was understood that any single individual, without 
going through the process of endogenous formation, was able to assume 
a reproductive condition, and thus start a new series similar to that from 
which itself had been developed. 

The micrococeus selected by the author was the coccus which 
has been long associated with the ammoniacal fermentation of urine. 
On account of its cruciform fission the author calls it Merista ureex. 
Notwithstanding that this urinary ferment had been subjected to search- 
ing investigation (Pasteur, Leube, Cohn, &c.), spore-formation had not 
been observed, and yet spores are regularly formed as soon as the 
urinary fermentation is drawing to a close. When added to sterilized 
urine, there are found at the commencement of the process, and as long as 
fermentation is energetic, relatively large cocci of an oval or elliptical 
form, the long diameter of which varies from 1°5 to 2-2 p, and the short 
from 0°8 to 1:2. Dividing cruciformly they form diplo- or tetra-cocci 
which may accumulate into irregular heaps or shorter or longer chains. 
Vegetation having come to an end, the relatively large form of coccus 
gives place to a much smaller spherical cell which shows special 
differences from the first kind. The one sort is large, strongly refracting, 
and invested in a firm dark membrane, the others, which show several 
gradations of size, have pale contents and no noticeable contour. The 
bright, refracting cells are really spores, the pallid cells are in a condi- 
tion of involution, that is, are dead vegetative cocci. 

The spores are distinguished by their great resistance to injury. 
They withstand prolonged drying, and are only killed by a temperature 
of 100° C., resisting 90° C. for a minute, and 80° C. for 2 minutes. 
Dried under a cover-glass, they show a double outline, the outer of 
which is dark and thick, the inner thin and delicate. Placed in fresh 
urine, they germinate with appearances similar to endogenous spores, 
becoming pale, assuming the form and size of the vegetative cocci, and 
multiplying by cruciform fission. With regard to the spore membrane, 
it could not be ascertained by direct observation if it originated as a 
thickening of the primary membrane of the vegetative cell, or was a new 
formation, the parental cell membrane being dissolved. Apart from this, 
which the author considers of little importance, the spores of Merista urez 
behave so much like the endogenous spores of other bacteria that their endo- 
genous origin must be conceded. This view is strengthened by observa- 
tions on bacteria obtained from the excrement of cattle. In their early 
stage in pure cultivations they are short rods 2°5 to 4 » long, and 1:0 
to 1:5 p broad, usually single or in pairs, more rarely in very short 
chains. On the 3rd or 4th day a dirty white scum forms on the surface, 
and this afterwards falls to the bottom. It is in this scum that the 
spore-formation takes place. The rodlets become thickened, and at the 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 789 


pyriform expansion a spherical highly - refracting spore is formed. 
Sometimes the parental membrane is dissolved, sometimes it is retained, 
and invests the spore even for months. Placed in fresh nutrient solution, 
the spores present appearances similar to those of Merista urex, they 
become pallid, larger in one direction, and divide by fission. During 
the act of germination no separation of a membrane is observable. 
Dried on a cover-glass, the spores are seen to be highly refracting, and 
surrounded by a double outline, the outer contour being thick and 
black, the inner one fine and thin. In their resistance to high tempera- 
tures they closely resemble the spores of Merista wre. This con- 
sonance in structure, germination, and general characteristics, shows that 
no difference exists between spores of fecal bacteria and of urinary 
ferment—in other words, the latter develope endogenously. 

The author concludes by pointing out that where spore-formation 
can be controlled throughout its whole course, only one form of fructifica- 
tion has been observed, namely the endogenous. The cases of arthro- 
sporous fructification only refer to bacteria wherein, on account of their 
smallness, or the special form of the vegetative or fructifying cells, it was 
impossible to follow the processes throughout their course. 


New Marine Bacterium.*—M. A. Billet has observed in sea-water 
a new Bacterium, to which he has given the name of B. Laminariz ; and 
describes its life-history and its morphological variations. In the fila- 
menious or initial stage it consists of colourless, immobile filaments, 
which appear to consist at first of homogeneous and uninterrupted 
protoplasm ; later, however, fine transverse strie can be detected. ‘The 
protoplasm then commences to segment, the separate portions being 
divided by more or less pronounced intervals, and the filamentous 
sheath can be distinguished. The second or dissociated stage is thus 
reached. The third stage is characterized by a peculiar disposition 
which affects the filaments of the initial stage, these latter interlacing 
one with another and extending and forming variable groups, which 
finish by spreading like a veil on the surface of the liquid. The fourth 
stage is characterized by the formation of the zooglcew, which are 
ageregates of bacterian elements, and are enveloped in a common 
gelatinous matrix. The author has only been able to study imperfectly 
the formation of the spores. On the surface of certain filaments roundish 
corpuscles with a thick membrane were noticed; these were probably 
the endospores. 


New and Typical Micro-organisms from Water and Soil.;—In 
their paper on Micro-organisms obtained from soil and water, the authors, 
Mrs. Grace C. Frankland and Dr. Percy F. Frankland, point out the 
striking difference between the aerial and aquatic micro-organisms, - 
micrococci being predominant forms amongst the former, whilst bacillar 
forms are almost exclusively present in water. In fact, all the aquatic 
forms described are bacilli. 

With regard to the chemical action which these micro-organisms 
exert upon certain solutions containing salts of ammonia and of nitric acid, 
it was found that while none of the forms were found to oxidize ammonia, 
either to nitrous or nitric acid, several of them exerted a powerfully 
reducing action on nitrates, converting the latter into nitrites; others 


* Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 293-5. 
+ Proc. R. Soc. Lond., xliii. (1888) pp. 414-8. 
1888. 3H 


790 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


were without any action on nitric acid ; and others again caused the dis- 
appearance of an appreciable proportion of the nitric acid without the 
production of a corresponding amount of nitrite. These differences in 
the behaviour of micro-organisms when introduced into solutions con- 
taining nitrates, are capable of furnishing important data for distinguish- 
ing between forms which otherwise present a very close resemblance. 

Thus Bacillus subtilis and Bacillus cereus, which closely resemble 
each other, can be easily distinguished by their behaviour towards the 
nitrate solution; for whilst both grow luxuriantly in this medium, 
Bacillus subtilis has no action on the nitric acid, which can be quantita- 
tively recovered; Bacillus cereus powerfully reduces the nitrate with 
formation of nitrite. 

The nitrate solution employed contained potassium phosphate, 
magnesium sulphate, calcium chloride, calcium nitrate, invert sugar, 
peptone, and an excess of calcium carbonate. 

The following is a brief account of the various micro-organisms :— 

Bacillus arborescens, under a high power (x 1000) isa slender bacillus 
giving rise to long wavy threads; no spores were observed. In drop 
cultivations it is seen to be vibratory. On gelatin plates (x 100) the 
centre of the colony consists of a thin axial stem, with root-like branches 
from each of its two extremities, which, when largely developed, give 
the whole colony the appearance of a wheat-sheaf. The plate is slowly 
liquefied. On potatoes it produces a fine deep-coloured orange pigment. 
On nitrates it has no action in the solution employed. 

Bacillus aquatilis.—A slender bacillus giving rise to wavy threads. 
No spores were observed. The individual bacilli in drop cultivations 
show only an oscillatory motion. Gelatin is liquefied very slowly by 
this bacillus, which grows with great difficulty in all the media except 
the aqueous solution, wherein it grows abundantly. It does not convert 
nitrate into nitrite. 

Bacillus liquidus.—A short fat bacillus of very variable dimensions. 
In drop cultivations they are exceedingly motile and usually in pairs. 
Gelatin is rapidly liquefied into large circular depressions with clear 
contents. On agar is produced a clear shining expansion, and on potato 
a thick flesh-coloured pigment. The nitrate in the aqueous solution is 
powerfully reduced. 

Bacillus vermicularis.—A large bacillus with rounded ends giving rise 
to vermiform threads, It produces fine oval spores. In drop cultivations 
it shows oscillatory motion only. It powerfully reduces nitrates to 
nitrites. 

Bacillus nubilus.—A fine slender bacillus giving rise to wavy threads ; 
no spores observed. In drop cultivations the isolated bacilli show 
violent circular movements; on gelatin plates only patches of cloudy 
expansions with, in some cases, a faintly defined centre. Gelatin is 
rapidly softened and liquefied. In the aqueous solution it reduces a 
small proportion of nitrate to nitrite. 

Bacillus ramosus.—A large bacillus much resembling B. subtilis, 
giving rise to long threads and spores which are, however, rounder in 
shape than those of the latter organism. Slight oscillatory movements 
seen in drop cultivations. On gelatin plates the colonies show a cloudy 
centre with tangled root-like branches which extend in every direction. 
The gelatin is liquefied. In tubes the gelatin first becomes impregnated 
with fluffy ramifications, later liquefaction ensues, and a tough pellicle 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 791 


forms on the surface. On potatoes there forms a dry, continuous, almost 
white surface expansion. Nitrates are powerfully reduced in the aqueous 
solution. 

Bacillus awrantiacus.—A short fat bacillus of variable dimensions. 
No spores were observed. In drop cultivations the isolated bacilli are 
seen to be motile. On gelatin plates it produces bright orange pin-heads ; 
on potatoes a brilliant red orange pigment not extending far beyond the 
point of inoculation. Nitrates are only slightly reduced to nitrites. 

Bacillus viscosus.—A short bacillus about three or four times as long 
as broad, occurs mostly in pairs; no spores were seen; is exceedingly 
motile. Gelatin is rapidly liquefied, becoming viscid and green-coloured ; 
on agar the whole surface quickly assumes a green tint; no reduction of 
nitrates in the aqueous solution. 

Bacillus violaceus.—A bacillus of variable thickness, on agar being 
more slender; sometimes gives rise to short threads. Spore-formation 
observed. Vibratory motions observed in drop cultivations. It produces 
on agar a dark violet expansion. Powerful reduction of nitrates to 
nitrites. 

Bacillus diffusus—A slender bacillus, frequently in pairs, but 
occasionally in long undulating threads. No spores observed. Oscil- 
latory movements seen in the drop cultivations. On gelatin plates the 
colonies on reaching the surface give rise to a halo which, extending 
from the centre, spreads considerably, and is composed of a thin mottled 
expansion. Nitrates are slightly reduced. 

Bacillus candicans varies in form both in the same cultivation and in 
different media ; sometimes looks like a micrococcus, sometimes shows 
a tendency to grow into short threads. On gelatin plates the surface 
expansions resemble milk drops. Has no reducing action on nitric 
acid, but grows abundantly in the medium. 

Bacillus scissus much resembles B. prodigiosus. No spores observed. 
Is seen to be very motile in drop cultivations. On gelatin plates it 
produces light-green surface expansions which, under a low power 
(x 100), are seen to be of a fine granular texture, and both their edges 
much frayed out. In tubes the gelatin and agar become tinted green. 
It powerfully reduces nitrates to nitrites. 

Of the foregoing the first nine were derived from water, the last three 
from garden soil. 


Baumgarten’s Pathological Mycology.*—This part of Prof. Baum- 
garten’s work on pathological mycology treats specially of the pathogenic 
cocci, which are exhaustively discussed. 


* Baumgarten, P., ‘ Lehrbuch der pathologischen Mykologie,’ ii. Halfte, 1 Halb- 
band, 48 Abbildungen, Braunschweig, 1887. : 


oon 2 


792 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


MICROSCOPY. 
a. Instruments, Accessories, &c.* 
(1) Stands, 


Thury’s Five-tube Microscope.—M. Thury has designed, and the 
Geneva Society for the Construction of Physical Instruments have con- 
structed the Microscope with five body-tubes shown in fig. 120. 


Fic. 120. 


_* This subdivision contains (1) Stands; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives; (3) Illu- 
minating and other Apparatus; (4) Photomicrography; (5) Microscopical Optics 
and Manipulation ; (6) Miscellaneous. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 793 


The principle of the instrument is the same as was described in this 
Journal, 1887, p. 796, where a Microscope with four tubes was figured. 
A totally reflecting prism is placed over the objective, and as this is 
rotated by the milled-head at the top, the image is thrown into each 
of the tubes in succession, thus enabling a Professor to show the same 
object to various members of his class. 

Four of the tubes have each two screws for centering in two rect- 
angular directions. They also have each a rack and pinion for focusing. 
An unavoidable difficulty of the instrument is, that the object appears 
differently placed to the different observers, but a mark in the field of 
each of the four tubes shows which was the right-hand side of the object 
to the observer using the first tube. 


Schieck’s Meat-examining -Microscope.—Herr F. W. Schieck has 
applied to this Microscope (fig. 121), an arrangement for inclination, 


Fic. 121. 


which, although adopted in the case of small instruments, has not been 
hitherto applied, so far as we know, to those of the sixe of his 


794 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Microscope, which is stated to be 12 in. high, stage 4 in. by 4 in., 
“weight 23 kilo.” The tail-piece attached to the under side of the 
stage turns on an axis projecting laterally from the standard, the latter 
having a diagonal stop-piece at the bottom, against which the end of 
the tail-piece, which is sloped off as shown in the fig., abuts when the 
instrument is upright. 


Schieck’s Travelling Microscope.— We are reminded that Herr 

Schieck some years ago brought out the Microscope shown in fig. 122, 

which anticipates those of Dr. Zeiss 

Fic. 122. described ante, p. 637, inasmuch as the 

prolongation of the stem beneath the 

stage slides in a socket on the base, and 
can be clamped at any point. 

The object of this device was stated 
to be to enable the instrument to go 
into a case of reduced dimensions for 
travelling. 


Zeiss’s Ila Microscope—Babuchin’s — 
Microscope.—In the description of these 
Microscopes, ante, p. 637, we should 
have explained that by means of the 
screw at the back of the limb, the fine- 
adjustment can be thrown out of gear 
when travelling, thus preventing the 
point of the micrometer-screw from 
getting damaged. 


Leitz’s Demonstration Microscope— 
Old Demonstration Microscope. — The 
design of this Microscope sufficiently 
appears from fig. 123. The form of the 
frame in which the body-tube socket 
screws, is devised to enable it to be held 
in the hand and passed round for class 
demonstration (the object being viewed 
by transmitted light), and at the same 
time to allow of its being rested on the table when not in use. 

We are forcibly reminded by this Microscope of the tendency to the 
repetition—with more or less modifications—of antique forms. On page 
109 we reproduced a figure from the ‘ Acta Eruditorum’ (1686), illus- 
trating the employment of Campani’s Compound Microscope on opaque 
and transparent objects, and it is evident that Leitz’s Demonstration 
Microscope might be substituted for Campani’s, the difference of form 
being only a simplification certainly not suggestive of an intervai of 
upwards of two centuries in their construction. 

Fig. 124 shows what appears to have been a Demonstration Microscope 
of the last century. It is constructed of wood and cardboard, and is 
apparently a modification of Culpeper and Scarlet’s Microscope figured. 
in Dr. Robert Smith’s ‘ Opticks’ (Cambridge, 1738, 2 vols. 4to.). The 
body-tube slides in a socket for focusing, and has a draw-tube in which 
the lenses of a Huyghenian eye-piece are applied respectively above and 
below, the draw-tube serving not only to increase the amplification, but 
also (probably) as a means of focusing the image more accurately, as in 
some of the modern “ miniature” Microscopes. Mounted transparent 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 795 


Fie. 122. Fig. 124. 


objects were viewed on “sliders” passing through a bent staple on 
either side of the under face of the base, the instrument being directed 
to the source of light. For viewing 
opaque objects, some such method as 
that shown with Campani’s Micro- 
scope (above quoted), was probably 
employed. 


Dentist’s Examining Glass.—In 
Mr. §. S. White’s Catalogue of 
Dental Materials,* we find an ex- 
amining glass figured, consisting of 
a low-power lens (fig. 125), mounted 
in a metal ring, hinged on a socket 
that slides on a rod terminating in 
a spiral, by which it is carried on 
the finger in examining teeth, &c. 
In practice we should expect the difficulty of holding the lens steady a 
great drawback to its utility. 


Bausch and Lomb Optical Co.’s Fie. 126. 
“Watchmaker Glass.”—The Bausch and — 
Lomb Co. have obtained a patent for the 
application of a spiral spring to a watch- 
maker’s glass to encircle the head and thus 
keep the lens in position. We are unable 
to say how far this arrangement has been 
found to be of practical utility, nor can we 
trace its origin with certainty. We have, 
however been informed that such a device was in use in the last century, 
if not earlier. 


* Philadelphia, 1877, p. 227. 


796 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Ganz’s Pinakoscope with Dreyfus’s Reflector.— Herr J. Ganz’s 
instrument, which was exhibited at the Wiesbaden Exhibition last year, 
is practically a Sciopticon,* but for microscopic purposes it is fitted with 
a stage and carrier for objectives. Mr, L. Dreyfus (now of Wiesbaden), 
has added a reflector fixed in a short tube which can be pushed over the 
end of the tube carrying the objective (fig. 127), so that the images in 
place of being shown on a screen, can be thrown on the table, an arrange- 


Fig. 127. 


soll - 


i 


_ a 
| UU HH 


ment which is very effective for drawing objects. Mr. Dreyfus writes, 
“By the aid of this apparatus we make all the drawings used in the 
lectures here with perfect ease, sitting at the table. The drawing can 
be left, and finished whenever we have time again.” 

The illumination being obtained from a mineral-oil lamp is not 
strong enough to show objects under powers higher than a 2/3 in. 
objective. 


Tri-ocular, Quadri-ocular, &c., Prisms.—Figs. 128 to 132 show the 
various prisms belonging to the Microscopes described in this Journal, 
1887, pp. 796-800. Fig. 128 is the prism over the objective of Nachet’s 
double-bodied Microscope, fig. 129 that of Nachet’s triple-bodied, and 
fig. 130 the small four-sided prism for which M. Nachet (pp. 1067-8) 


* Of. J. Scherrer, ‘Das Pinakoskop und seine Anwendung,’ &c., 61 pp. and 30 figs., 
8vo, Speicher, 1886. Cf. also Boll. Accad. Med. Roma, 1886, pp. 178-92. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 197 


claimed priority over that of Prof. Harting (p. 799) shown in fig. 131. 
The prisms of Mr, Ahrens’s Tri-ocular Microscope (p. 799) are shown 
in fig. 182. 


Fic. 129. Fie. 130. 


Fig. 128. 


Hevrck, H. van.—lLe Microscope Anglo-Continental ou Microscope d’Etudiant 
de M. Watson and Sons. (Watson and Sons’ Anglo-Continental or Student’s 
Microscope.) : 

inetades also a photomicrographic apparatus. ] 
Journ. de Micr., XI. (1888) pp. 314-8 (2 figs.). 

SEamMAN, W. H.—American and Foreign Microscopes. Science, XI. (1888) p. 120. 


kK2) Eye-pieces and Objectives. 


Zeiss’s “Compensation Eye-piece 6 with 1/1 Micron-division.” *— 
The graduation of the eye-piece micrometers hitherto made is arbitrary, 
and has no intimate connection with the magnifying power of the objec- 
tives used with them for micrometric measurement. For this reason it 
is necessary to have a table giving the value of an interval for each 
objective and eye-piece ; for example, the interval may be— 

With eye-piece 2, for objectives A, C, E, and 1/12 = 16, 6-7, 2°7, 
1°82 p. 

With eye-piece 3, for the same objectives = 14, 6:0, 2:4, 1°67 p. 

If, then, the image of an object observed with a 1/12-in. homo- 
geneous-immersion objective covers 3°75 intervals of the micrometer 
eye-piece 2, the true dimension is 3°75 x 1°82 = 6°82 yu. 


* From the description issued by Dr. Zeiss. Cf. also K. Schliephacke in Flora, 
Ixxi. (1888) pp. 33-44. 


798 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


The rational gradation in the focal lengths of the apochromatic 
objectives has made it possible to essentially simplify both in calculation 
and tabulation the measurements to be made with them. The micro- 
meter eye-piece (fig. 133) used is a compensation eye-piece, No. 6, of the 

usual form (new construction), and a graduation 

Fic. 133. in which the intervals for an ideal objective of 

1-0 mm. focal length (with normal tube-length) 
are 0°001 mm. = 1 p. 

The value of an interval rises in the same 
ratio as the focal lengths of the objectives, and 
is represented by the same numbers, it is there- 
fore 


2°0 » for apochromatic 2:0 mm.| ( 40. NAD 
2°5 ” ” 2°5 ” 
1-30 and 
soils » 3-0 » {M40 N.A.) 
4-0 ” ” 4-0 ” 
aU 3, a S50" 5, 
1670) 5; 7 cis Cee 


so that the same number denotes the interval in 
terms of », and the focal length inmm. The use of this eye-piece there- 
fore renders a special table unnecessary. 

Measurements made in this way will always be correct within a 
slight percentage, since individual variations of particular eye-pieces 
and objectives always lie within very small limits. If, however, it is 
necessary in special cases to find a very exact value of an interval for a 
particular objective, it must be tested in the ordinary way by a stage 
micrometer, and then the small deviation in the value of an interval 
from its true value for a given objective, as expressed by its number, can 
be corrected by a slight alteration of the tube-length. In such a case 
the objective in question is focused upon a stage micrometer, and if 
an interval of the micron-division does not cover exactly so many 
thousandths of a mm. as are given by the focal length of the objective, 
the correction is made by a small lengthening or shortening of the tube- 
length, and the exact tube-length shown by the graduations of the draw- 
tube noted for each objective. 


American y. Foreign Microscopes; the Verdict of an Impartial Expert. 
{Results of Dr. H. J. Detmers’ examination of objectives by Leitz, Seibert, and 
Zeiss. | St. Louis Med. and Surg. Journ., LY. (1888) pp. 160-3. 


(3) Illuminating and other Apparatus. 


Eternod’s Drawing-board.*—Prof. A. Eternod recommends the use 
of a drawing-board invented by him, and which he has found useful for 
microscopical drawing, as it is very stable and easy of management. It 
consists of a shallow box (fig. 134, a), the sides of which are strongly 


* Internat. Monatschr. f. Anat. u. Histol., ii. (1885) pp. 269-70 (6 figs. of a 
plate). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. -- 799 


morticed together ; a drawing-board (fig. 184, b) made of poplar; a 
rackwork arrangement (fig. 134, c) by which the board can be fixed in or 
altered to any desired position with great rapidity ; and a brass catch by 
which it can be fixed instantly with a turn of a screw (fig 134, d, e). 
The advantages of this apparatus pointed out are: (1) it can be raised 


Fig. 134. 


() 


\ QS ST SN TH 


ir @& 


e SS 


or lowered to any level, and still kept in the horizontal position (figs. 134, 
136, 188, 139); (2) it can be placed obliquely (figs. 1385 and 137) ; (8) it 


Fig. 135. Fic, 136. 


S 


can be displaced laterally (fig. 188), and obliquely (fig. 137); (4) when 
‘folded up, the apparatus only takes up a very small space; the measure- 
ments given by the author are 70 em. by 55 cm. 


Fic. 137. Fic. 138. 
Fie. 139. 


i en 


Tf the rackwork arrangement be made to a curve (fig. 137, a) the teeth 
will hold more firmly, but this is not necessary, as the apparatus is 
perfectly steady. 


800 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Babes’ Hot Stage.*—In figs. 140 and 141 are shown different aspects 
of Dr. V. Babes’ hot stage for constant temperatures. By means of the 
two screws sch it is fas- 
tened to the stage of the 
Microscope or to Reichert’s 
movable stage. The hot 
stage consists of a gnomon- 
shaped box filled with 
water or glycerin. The 
preparation is slipped in 
through the aperture o, and 
it can be moved about. It 
is warmed both from above 
and below. The objective 
and the Abbe condenser 
are partly surrounded by 
the box. Heat is imparted 
by a thick copper wire k 
heated in a gas flame. The 
other end, which is within 
the box, is convoluted. The 
copper wire is insulated 
from the sides of the box 
by a layer of asbestos. 

The regulation is ef- 
fected by means of an 
electrical thermometer T 
inserted in the same orifice 
as that in which the pre- 
paration is placed, and con- 
sequently exposed to the 
same temperature. The 
wires of the electric ther- 
mometer pass to the appa- 
ratus shown in fig. 140, 
which is supplied by a 
small Leclanché battery. 
By the movement of the 
pole to a point previously 
settled upon, the current is 
closed, and the plate V 
attracted towards the elec- 
tro-magnets. This reduces 
the stream of gas at Z, and 
the flame is consequently 
diminished. As the mer- 
cury sinks, the valve V is 
again opened, and the gas 
again flows through the 
pipe Z tothe jet. To the 
thermostat there is also 


140, 


Ita. 


* Centralbl. f, Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iy. (1888) pp. 23-5 (2 figs). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 801 


attached a screw (R, fig. 140) for specially regulating the flame when it 
has been reduced by the regulation apparatus. As the regulation of the 


Fic. 141. 


temperature is instantaneous, the vital conditions of bacteria at definite 
temperatures can be studied exactly. 


Capillary Slide and accessories for the examination of Ova.*— 
This apparatus, which was designed by M. L. Chabry for the examina- 
tion of Ascidian ova, has now received several additions rendering it 
more serviceable than the original form (see this Journal, 1887, p. 319). 

It consists of a thick glass plate p (fig. 142) placed on the stage of 
the Microscope, and upon which rests a capillary tube T bent at a right 
angle, the latter part projecting over the stage. The tube lies in a 
couple of glass sockets d d fixed to the plate with shellac. This allows 
the capillary tube to be pushed up and down from left to right, and also 
to turn on its axis. This axial revolution is effected by a special con- 
trivance. Po is a metal plate bent at a right angle with a long anda 
short leg. The longer leg is clamped to the stage by a screw, so that 
the shorter leg is parallel to the side of the stage and about 5 cm. distant 
from it. Through the short leg passes the rod M B, bent twice at a right 
angle, and one end of which is fixed on a dise, about the size of a penny 
piece. Kisa plate of shellac fastened to the short leg. By turning 
the disc the capillary tube is made to revolve. The tubes must be per- 
fectly free from air-bubbles, and it is advised to keep a quantity of 
them on hand. They should be about 10cm. long and arranged accord~ 
ing to the breadth of their lumen, and that tube should be selected of which 
the diameter is about equal to that of the object to be examined, so that 
when the tube is made to revolve the ova may not be damaged. 

The ova are introduced into the capillary tube by a suction-pump 
made out of a piece of glass tubing fitted at both ends with a piece of 
rubber tube. On one piece of the rubber tube is fitted a self-acting clamp, 
between the clips of which is slipped the capillary tube. To the other 
piece is fitted a small syringe, by the use of which the ova are sucked 


* Journ. de Anat. et de Ja Physiol., xxiii. (1887) pp. 167-320 (5 pls.). Cf. 
Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 60-5 (2 figs.). 


802 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


into the tube. This operation may be performed under the Microscope 
if necessary. 

If any other movements are to be imparted to the ovum an additional 
apparatus is required. This is called the perforator, and consists of a 


needle, its case, and motor apparatus—a lever controlling screw and 
spring. The needles are made out of glass by drawing out very fine 
threads from a glass rod over a lamp. A quantity of these about 10 cm. 


Fig. 143. 


long should be made. Those which are quite regular in thickness are 
then to be arranged in packets, after inspecting them under the Micro- 
scope ; the points are then fixed on to capillary tubes by means of a thermo- 
cautery. This piece of manipulation requires much practice and patience. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 803 


In order to introduce a needle into the capillary tube upon the slide, 
a special protector is necessary. This is shown in fig. 143 where it 
appears as a black tube fastened to the slide by shellac G. The difference 
between the parts sliding on one another must not amount to more than 
10 pw. The lever L, figs. 142 and 143, is fixed to the capillary tube with 
a minute drop of marine glue. The other extremity lies upon the screw 
V fixed to the standard of the Microscope at A, and between the milled 
head E and the spring R, made of brass wire. The perforation of an 
ovum is effected by just flicking the spring after having turned the screw 
back to the required degree. 

There are numerous minute details given by the author as to points 
of manipulation, but for these the original must be consulted. 


Measuring Corrosion Surfaces in Iron Pyrites.*—Herr F. Beeke, 
while examining iron pyrites, came to the conclusion that the primary 
corrosion surfaces were those of greatest resistance, and in order to prove 
this measured the difference between several parallel surfaces on the 
same crystal. For this purpose 
a screw micrometer by Zeiss Fig. 144. 
was used in conjunction with 
an apparatus (shown half its 
natural size, fig. 144) for 
measuring the thickness of the 
crystal under the Microscope. 
To the metal plate A inter- : 
rupted at O, the upright piece B is attached, and to this a piece of 
plate glass E is fixed. Upon A are also fixed two more uprights C D, 
through which the screws S and F work. The screw § is rounded off 
at one end, pointed at the other, and bears a milled head. The screw 
F is pointed at one extremity, and at its other terminates in a milled 
head. This screw during the experiments is fixed. The crystal K is 
placed between the glass plate and the screw S, which is made to fix it 
closely both before and after corrosion. Then the difference in distance 
between the points S and F shows the amount of substance lost. 


Rowland’s Reversible Compressorium.—This device of Mr. W. 
Rowland (fig. 145) consists of two thin German silver plates each with a 


Fic. 145. 


ring having a piece of cover-glass cemented to it. The lower plate is 
attached to a rod turning in a socket, while the upper pivots on a milled 


* Tschermak’s Mineral. u. Petrogr. Mittheil., viii. (1887) p. 318. Cf. Zeitschr. 
f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 411-2 (1 fig.). 


804 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


head which clamps it if required, or releases it when needed for more 
easy cleaning. Varying pressures of the cover-glasses are obtained by 
turning the milled head in the centre of the plate as in Wenham’s com- 
pressorium. ‘The socket fits in a hole in the stage, in the same way as 
stage forceps. 


Beaumont’s Reservoir Life-slide-—Mr. C. R. Beaumont describes 
this (figs. 146 and 147) as follows :—“ Haying long felt that if a cell were 
constructed in which minute organisms could be kept alive under as nearly 
as possible natural conditions, and at the same time allow of fairly high 


Fie. 146. 


powers being used for their examination, a much more accurate knowledge 
of the life-history of such organisms would be obtained, I at last con- 
ceived the idea of making a slide having reservoirs at each end, in which 
could be stored a supply of water; and so made that a small current 
could be continually kept flowing through the cell, from one reservoir to 
the other, either on or off the Microscope, thereby keeping the organ- 
isms in the cell constantly supplied with fresh water, in amanner as near 
as could be similar to the conditions obtained in their natural habitat. 


Fic, 147. 


The gentle percolation of water through the life-cell serves the treble 
purposes of keeping the organisms cool, and supplying them with food 
and aeration. It is not necessary to remind experienced microscopists 
that when small organisms are placed with a drop of water in a shallow 
cell and subjected to the concéntrated light and heat from a condenser 
during protracted observations with the Microscope, very great changes 
are induced in the environment of the organisms, which very frequently 
lead to important physiological changes. Assuming these changes to be 
mainly caused by the concentrated heat from the condenser on so small 
a quantity of water, the immense advantage of using a slide wherein 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 805 


fresh water is constantly percolating the cell, and regulating the 
temperature will be self-evident. 

The slide consists of a slip of non-oxidizing metal 13 by 3} by 1/8 in., 
having a central opening of 1/2 in. D, with a dise of glass forming 
the bottom of the central cell, and fitting flush with the underside of the 
base, allowing of illumination with a paraboloid. Surrounding the glass 
on the upper surface is a slightly raised edge of metal forming a central 
flat cell, having a uniform depth about equal to the thickness of ordinary 
blotting-paper. Outside this central cell is a slight recess in the metallic 
base, which forms an annular cell C, surrounding the central one through 
which water percolates when in use. The central and annular cells are 
ciosed by means of a thin cover-glass, cemented toa rim of metal E, which 
fits watertight over the two cells; the under surface of the cover-glass being 
held close against the raised edge of metal forming the boundary of the 
inner cell, thus closing and preventing the escape of organisms placed 
therein. There is water communication between the central and annular 
cells, by a series of very fine capillary lines, ruled in the metallic edge 
between the cells. 

On each end of the metallic base is fixed a reservoir A having a glass 
cover. These reservoirs are directly connected with the annular cell by 
fine tubes B, through which water flows when in use from one reservoir 
to the other. 

The action is as follows :—Organisms are placed in the central cell 
and the cover-glass pressed tightly down; one of the reservoirs is then 
filled with water and the circulation established. If the slide be now 
placed on the stage of a Microscope provided with a revolving slide 
carrier so that the full reservoir is highest, the water will flow through 
the fine tube to the annular cell; a portion of which will percolate to the 
inner cell by capillary motion, and thence through the second tube into 
the other reservoir. When the upper reservoir is empty the motion may 
be reversed, thus enabling a constant circulation to be kept up during 
microscopic examination. Hach reservoir is provided with a small air- 
vent, drilled coincidently through the upper edge of the reservoir and 
the rim of the cover. These vents may be entirely closed when 
desirable, by simply turning the covers slightly round so that the holes 
do not coincide. The flow of water may also be regulated, by placing 
bristles within the fine tubes leading from the reservoirs to the annular 
cell. 

To continue the water circulation when off the Microscope several 
methods are available, two of which I will here mention. The method 
which recommends itself as the simplest, and perhaps gives the best 
results, consists of a stand or support for carrying the slide and large 
supply reservoir for coutaining enough water to last several days. The 
supply vezsel is placed at a higher level than the slide, and a siphon 
may be used to convey water from this vessel into one of the reservoirs. 
A suitable siphon is easily made by bending a length of vaccine tube (to 
be had from most chemists) having a short piece of thread pushed inside 
the long end to regulate the drip. Another shorter siphon made from 
the same material is placed in the hole near the top of the other reservoir, 
to conduct the overflow into a vessel placed beneath. A better arrange- 
ment is obtained when the supply cistern is fitted with a miniature water- 
tap near the bottom, the water beiug allowed to fall in drops into the first 
reservoir of the slide, and flow out as before stated. 


1888. oI 


806 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Another system of keeping up the circulation is by means of an auto- 
matic tilter. ‘This apparatus consists of a small balanced table having 
an oscillating motion on a central axis, and made to carry one or more 
slides. The slides rest on the table with the reservoirs at right angles 
to its axis, so that each reservoir may be raised or depressed at intervals 
of about three hours; this being about the time occupied for the water to 
flow from one reservoir to the other when properly adjusted. The tilting 
is obtained from clockwork placed in a box underneath. 

The first method has the advantage of simplicity and also of giving 
a complete change of water, and on that account is perhaps the best for 
most organisms. I may say that with a slide of this kind I have had the 
pleasure of watching three generations of Floscularia in succession. 
These organisms are probably amongst the most difficult objects to keep 
in a small slide on account of their voracious habits.” 

Mr. Beaumont also informs us that a friend who uses one of the slides 
without any tilting arrangement, finds that all that is necessary is to lay 
the slide on a flat surface and remove the cover from one of the reservoirs ; 
this allows free evaporation to take place in the uncovered reservoir, thus 
setting up a current through the slide. Mr. Beaumont thinks that, on 
the whole, an arrangement without tilting is preferable, as the organisms 
are not precipitated against the sides of the cell so much. 


Holman’s Current Slide.*—Dr. Holman says that on his slide 
Protococcus may be kept alive many days; Amelba three weeks; and 
Bacteria for six months. In the minute canal, 1/100 in. wide, and 1/1000 
in. deep, between the two concavities with shallow margins in his slide, 
blood-corpuscles may be caused to flow in either direction, to roll 
over, or to stand on edge by the warmth of the hands of the operator, 
brought towards the stage of the Microscope at a distance of about six 
inches. 


Life Slides.j—Dr. A. C. Stokes in studying the morphology of 
minute animal organisms, uses only a shallow shellac cell, with about 
one-fourth of the ring scraped from both the upper and the lower 
margins, thus leaving two curved supports for the square cover, one on 
each side. This gives the inclosed drop with its animal life plenty of 
air, and facilitates the application of the wet brush at the point where 
the square cover projects beyond the lateral cell-wall. The secret of 
success consists in leaving enough of the cement ring to properly 
support the cover, and to lessen the force of the inflowing water supply, 
and also in having the cell shallow or deep according as the animals 
are microscopically small or large. Much depends on the depth of the 
cell in all cases. A comparatively large Infusorian, a Rotifer, or a 
Chzetonotus can be injuriously hampered in its movements and in the 
proper performance of its functions by a cell of insufficient depth, and a 
good objective can be greatly hampered in its functions by a cell of too 
great depth. 

The author also proposes the following form :—A small square, cut 
from glass of any desired thickness, is cemented with Canada balsam to 
a slip, and surrounded by a thick glass or zinc ring so as to leave a 
wide space between these parts. On the ring place a ring of wax, and, 


* Journ. New York Mier. Soc., iv. (1888) p. 168. 
+ The Microscope, vii. (1887) pp. 129-33 (8 figs.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 807 


after the object has been arranged on the central square, cover the whole 
with a thin circle and cement it fast by running a warm wire around the 
edge to melt the wax. A small drop of water may be placed in the 
annular space if desired. The thickness of the slip and square, and the 
depth of the cell must of course be determined by each worker according 
to his needs. The secret of success here is, to be sure that the joint 
between the ring and the slip is air-tight, and to firmly secure the cover, 
using an abundance of wax. 


Lamps for Microscopical Work.*—The Editors of ‘The Micro- 
scope’ consider that in the efforts to put before the microscopical public 
attractive illuminating apparatus, writers seem to have lost sight of the 
excellencies of the humble hand-lamp. Beginners are thus led to pur- 
chase the expensive German student’s lamp or some still more costly 
microscopical lamp. It can safely be asserted that for the general pur- 
poses of the working microscopist, a small hand-lamp giving a broad, 
flat flame (such a lamp as can be bought anywhere for 25 or 30 cents) is 
superior to any of the expensive lamps made especially for the pur- 
pose, and we are convinced from our observation of the methods 
of many microscopists that this is not realised by many except the 
experts. 

By the size of the flame and the distance of the lamp from the Micro- 
scope, the intensity of the light can be readily adapted for any work, 
from the use of the lowest powers to the examination of histological and 
biological specimens with the highest immersion lenses. For bacterio- 
logical work with the 1/12 in. or 1/18 in. immersion lenses this 
light is unsurpassed. In the examination of opaque objects this lamp 
is not so convenient, as it is necessary then to have the source of 
light at quite an elevation. It is very easy, however, to improvise a 
stand. 


Tubes for Microspectroscopic Analysis.t—For microspectroscopic 
analysis it is necessary to be able to alter the depth of the liquids ex- 
amined and to know exactly what these depths are. Three forms of 
tubes answer these requirements. The first is a prismatic tube with 
the same proportions as that of the author’s (M. L. Malassez) first 
hemochromometer, so that the glass plates at the end of a length of 
10 cm. are 10 mm. apart; consequently at distances, say, of 1, 2, or 
3 cm. from the top the thickness of the liquid layer is 1, 2, or 3 mm. 
A millimetre scale placed along the side of the tube indicates the depths 
corresponding to different points in the length. 

In the two other tubes there is an internal sliding tube (“ tube 
plongeant”). The simpler form consists of a metal tube, 2 to 3 cm. 
long and 5 mm. in diameter; the lower extremity is closed by a piece of 
glass, and the upper expands like a basin. This is the tube into which 
the liquid to be examined is poured and it is placed in the aperture of 
the Microscope stage where it is held by the expansion at the upper end. 
The tube which slips into this is made of metal, and is a little longer 
and narrower than the outer one. Its lower end is closed by a glass, 
and its upper screws into the Microscope tube in place of the objective. 
By screwing down the Microscope tube the layer of liquid is thereby 
diminished. If on the Microscope tube there is a millimetre scale, and 


* The Microscope, viii. (1888) p. 206-7. 
+ Arch. de Physiol., viii. (1886) pp. 268-71 (1 fig). 


Saal ae 


SUS SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


if the milled head of the fine-adjustment be graduated, the thickness of 
the liquid layer is easily ascertained. 

The third tube (fig. 148) is less simple than the foregoing, but it is 
constructed so that it gives the thickness of the liquid layer at once. It 
consists of (1) a metal tube, the lower end closed by glass, while the 
upper end is expanded ; (2) of another tube to dip into the former and 

closed at the lower end by glass. But the 
Fig. 148. latter tube, instead of being screwed to the 
Microscope, is screwed to an arm, the upright 
of which is fixed to the edge of the first or 
outer tube, so that by turning the inner tube 
round it sinks or rises, and thereby produces 
a thinner or thicker layer of fluid. The 
depth of the liquid is measured by means of 
a millimetre scale marked on one side of the 
upright. The head of the internal tube almost 
touches this scale, and hence it is easy to read 
off the number of millimetres the tube has 
risen or fallen. This procedure is facilitated 
for fractions of millimetres by dividing the 
upper surface of the disc into 10, and each 
of these divisions into two parts, by which a 
tenth or twentieth of a millimetre is given. 

In order that the instrument may be more 
M easily cleaned and fixed at zero, the upright 

Se is made in two pieces, the outer being fixed 
i to the inner tube, and the inner one to the 

mi] . outer tube. The two pieces are kept tight 
2, by a binding-screw. When a liquid is to be 
examined, the outer piece is withdrawn, and 
the milled head of the other turned until 
the zeros of the two scales coincide; the tube is then slipped in so 
that the two glasses at the lower extremities are in apposition. The 
binding-screw is then tightened up. This position evidently corresponds 
to the thickness 0. 


Weiss, D.—Ueber das Fleischl’sche Hamometer. (On the Fleischl Heemometer.) 
Prager Med, Wochenschr., XIII. (1888) p. 20. 


(4) Photomicrography. 


Burstert’s Photomicrographic Apparatus.*—Dr. H. Burstert’s appa- 
ratus is shown in fig. 149. The camera A is attached to the wooden 
stand L RS, the end of the expanding bellows being also fixed to the 
piece W which carries the Microscope, the stage m, and the illuminating 
apparatus fed. W slides in a slot on R, and may be adjusted to any 
desired distance from the focusing plate. The various parts of the illu- 
minating apparatus are made to slide upon an iron bar screwed to W, so 
that they may be adjusted independently. 

The whole apparatus is set at any desired inclination by means of 
the chain K and leg 8, and it may be used vertically or horizontally. In 
the latter case the mirror f is removed, and replaced by the source of 


* Jeserich, P., ‘ Die Mikrophotographie,’ 8vo, Berlin, 1888, pp. 98-9 (1 fig.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 809 


light. Upon R is ascale which gives the d:stance of the objective from 
the focusing plate. 
The advantages claimed for the instrument are “the firm stand resting 
on three points, and the attach- 
Fic. 149. ment of the whole (illuminating 
apparatus and camera) to a com- 
mon stand,’ “the Microscope, 
illuminating apparatus, and 
front part of the camera being 
capable of being brought to 
different distances from the 
focusing plate without the posi- 
tion of the separate parts to each 
other being in any way changed.” 


Neuhauss’s Focusing Ar- 
rangement.—Dr. R. Neuhauss 
uses for the camera described 
ante, p. 294, the mechanism 
shown in fig. 150. 


j 
AINA 


Pa 


A piece of watch-spring is bent as shown in the figure, and is 
secured to a pin attached to a plate. The Microscope being horizontal, 
the plate is placed vertically with the ends of the watch-spring engaging 
in the milling of the micrometer-screw of the fine-adjustment, To the 
sides of the bottom of the plate cords are attached, which pass over hori- 
zontal pulleys on the right and left of the Microscope and are fastened 
to a wooden rod at the end of the camera. By pulling the one cord or 
the other the fine-adjustment screw is turned to the left or right. 

“In this way” (see p. 294) “the fine-adjustment is made without 
any inconvenient connecting rods, and can be effected directly by one 
hand, while the other is engaged with the focusing lens.” The motion 
obtained by the action of the clamp on the micrometer-screw is, it is 
claimed, quite fine enough to secure the complete sharpness of the 
image. 

Drawings v. Photographs.—Screen for the Abbe Camera Lucida.* 
—At the present time, when to almost every Microscope a photographic 
camera is being attached, and when photomicrographs, of every degree of 
merit, are being produced on all sides, it may be well, Dr. G. A. Piersol 
considers, to weigh the respective values of the pencil and sunbeam as 


* Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., ix. (1888) pp. 103-4. 


810 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


means of recording the observations of the investigator. The idea of 
reproducing, by photography, what is seen in the Microscope, is so 
captivating, that it is a matter for little surprise that so many undertake 
the work. These remarks do not apply to the photographing of pre- 
parations for the purpose of producing excellent pictures, but bear upon 
the merits of the two methods as auxiliaries to the work-table. That 
the pencil is being unwisely neglected, owing to a too implicit reliance 
on photography, is an unfortunate present tendency, especially for the 
young investigator, who loses the training to accurate observation which 
the conscientious use of the pencil brings. But both the photographie 
camera and the drawing-prism have their advantages, and the investigator 
can afford to dispense with neither, as, by their judicious employment 
—sometimes by their combination—more satisfactory and valuable results 
are obtained than are possible by any exclusive adherence to either. 

An experience in photomicrography, which warrants a full appre- 
ciation of its value and capability, has taught that the most serviceable 
and satisfactory field of photography lies at the extremes of the table of 
amplification, with very low (20 to 70 diam.), and with very high powers 
(500 to 1500 diam.). What drawing can equal, in beauty of detail, a 
really good photograph of a suitable specimen taken with a fine low- 
power objective ? who can draw fibrille of striated muscle, a group 
of bacteria, or a delicately marked diatom in competition with photo- 
graphs? Excellent pictures are made under ordinary magnifications 
(200 to 350 diam)., but in the majority of cases there is much less cause 
for congratulation. Under these circumstances, the conscientiously and 
skilfully used pencil will produce a more valuable and satisfactory record 
for the investigator than the camera. The reason that good photographs, 
with very low or very high powers, are so satisfactory is, that under both 
conditions suitable lenses reproduce all the planes of tissue necessary 
for a serviceable representation of the object ; nine times in ten this will 
not be the case with the pictures demanded of the 1/4 or 1/6. While it 
is unreasonable to expect the lens to reproduce more than the plane 
accurately in focus, it is nevertheless true that this physical limitation 
(reduced to a minimum by the thinnest possible sections) frequently 
renders photographs, under medium powers, unsatisfactory substitutes 
for more diagrammatic drawings. At the present time the investigator 
who depends upon photographs for his illustrations, finds himself con- 
fronted by the pertinent question as to the manner in which his pictures 
shall serve as journal illustrations. That photography, in its applica- 
tions to book-making, is yet in its infancy, no one doubts; that really 
beautiful results are already accomplished by the best methods is equally 
certain ; if, therefore, the liberality of the publisher places one of the 
unexceptional “processes” at his command, the investigator may feel 
confident. Let him, however, be cautious as to where he places his 
hopes when economy is consulted, for there is nothing more annoying 
to the worker himself, or more unfortunate for the cause of photomicro- 
graphy, than the dissemination of those monstrosities whose harsh black 
and white masses, devoid of half-tone and detail, are supposed to “re- 
produce” a really fine negative. 

Frequently, however, the use of the photograph is out of the question, 
and the investigator or the artist must make the necessary substitute ; 
by all means let it be the microscopist himself, for he will then have 
the guarantee that the feature of the drawing, especially valuable, is 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 811 


appreciated. Under such circumstances, a combination of the camera 
and pencil, which the writer has employed since the introduction of 
the Eastman ‘“‘ bromide paper,’ may often be found very satisfactory. 
Selecting the “B” grade, and marking out all undesired parts of the 
negative, a somewhat under-exposed print is made and developed until 
the cardinal parts of the picture are visible; this, when dried, yields a 
black and white sketch which, after being worked over with Indian ink 
and hard lead-pencil, presents the appearance of an elaborately finished 
drawing, and, as such, will be satisfactorily copied by the artist on the 
block or stone. Where details are very simple, the outlines of the 
photograph are easily transferred to the drawing-paper by means of the 
interposed sheet of “ graphite ” or “ carbon” paper and the tracing point. 

But, after all, for the busy worker the direct sketch on paper is 
frequently the most convenient and economical. It is to be regretted 
that the drawing-prisms in use on the Continent are not more generally 
used among our own microscopists. An experience embracing all the 
usual forms has resulted in a settling down to the Abbe apparatus as 
being the most satisfactory, and, due regard to the inclination of the 
mirror and the warranted size of the sketch being observed, as leaving 
little to be desired. After a long observation of struggles with the 
drawing-prisms usually furnished by American and English makers, it 
is truly refreshing to see with what ease and accuracy complicated 
contours are followed with this instrument even at the first attempt. 

With any form of drawing attachment the nice balance between the 
illumination of the microscopical image and that of the paper is an all- 
important condition; having had occasion recently to use the Abbe 
prism to sketch some 1400 sections, the author found a simple device of 
great service. This consisted of a light stand supporting a small glass 
plate (10 x 15 em.), two-thirds of which was “matt,” being very finely 
ground, leaving the remaining third as a clear strip extending in the 
direction of the greatest length of the plate. The section being well 
lighted and focused, and the paper adjusted for the drawing, the screen 
should be interposed between the source of illumination and the 
mirror, when the object becomes illuminated by a soft diffuse light, 
very favourable for the rapid and accurate sketching of details. 
Slight lateral movements of the screen by the left hand soon determine 
its best position. When a doubt arises as to some detail, a movement of 
the wrist floods the field-with light, enabling an exact observation to be 
made, while a second change restores the mellow illumination so favour- 
able for drawing. All this can be done without moving the eye from 
the tube or taking the pencil from the paper. The position of the screen 
between the light and mirror is more effective than when the ground 
glass is mounted as part of the substage apparatus. Those who have 
never used this simple contrivance in drawing will find it a material aid 
in many cases. Its frequent usefulness on other occasions, as a light- 
moderator for low-power examinations, will insure it a permanent place 
on the work-table. 


Instantaneous Photomicrography.*—Herr M. Stenglein, who has 
been trying to adapt the instantaneous method to photomicrography, 
recommends a mixture of magnesium, chlorate of potash, and sulphide 
of antimony, which gives a flash lasting for 1/50-1/30 of a second. The 


* Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii, (1888) pp. 670-4, 702-7 (1 fig.). 


$12 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


percentage composition is 60 parts (by weight) chlorate of potash, 
30 parts magnesium in powder, 10 parts sulphide of antimony. The 
combustion of this powder is effected in a lantern L, the body of which 
is a metal tube, closed at one end and provided at the other with a glass 
plate and a diaphragm, the aperture of which corresponds accurately with 
the diameter of the illuminating lens. Within the lantern, and on a 
level with its central point, is a metal plate, upon which the powder and 
touch-paper are placed. On the left side of the lantern is a slit closed 
by a shutter; through the slit the touch-paper is lighted. The lantern 
is further provided with a chimney, bent at an angle and about 5 metres 
long. The chimney, which fits on the lantern, is not shown in the 
illustration. About 0°75-1 metre from its end the chimney is fitted 
with a special apparatus for absorbing the smoke. 

The camera is placed vertically and the illuminating lens B horizon- 
tally. The preliminary focusing is made with a mineral-oil lamp, after- 
wards exchanged for the lantern. 

For instantaneous photography the sensitiveness of the plate must 
be known, and to estimate it for this magnesium powder the author has 
devised a special sensitometer. This consists of a glass plate 12 x 15 
em., divided up into thirty rectangular spaces of 2 x 3 cm. and covered 
with tissue paper. The spaces are numbered according to the number 
of layers of paper. This sensitometer is fixed in a copying frame and 
then inside a pasteboard box open in front. The frame is then placed in 
a room lighted by a candle and exposed for a certain time. The ordinary 
developer is used, but without the addition of bromide. Then the 
number on the sensitometer gives the sensitiveness of the plate. The 
author’s results were obtained from stearine candles (eight to the pound), 
distance 30 cm., exposure one minute, and developing five minutes with 
the pyrogallic developer ; he found that plates 22 and 23 were quite 
distinct, and that No. 2£ was almost as good. 

As most objectives differ more or less in their focus, it is obviously 
advisable to obtain a filter which will permit sharp photographic 
pictures to be produced by their aid. A mixture of copper nitrate and 
chromic acid in water allows only 7 per cent. of all spectrum colours to 
pass through (or diluted 12-14 per cent.). By using this as a light 
filter in combination with erythrosin the focal differences are quite ob- 
viated. As dry plates are not usually obtainable in a condition suitable 
for the erythrosin emulsion, wet plates are recommended. All opera- 
tions with these plates must be conducted in a very subdued red light. 
Mixtures of erythrosin and silver nitrate give precipitates of a silver 
compound which are very sensitive to yellow light, and act more power- 
fully in bromide-gelatin than the pure dye. For making this mixture 
the following formula is given:—25 ccm. erythrosin solution, 1:1000; 
1 cem. silver nitrate solution, 1:80; 1/2 ccm. ammonia; 75 ccm. water. 
The plates are bathed therein for one minute and dried in the dark. 


Photographing moving Microscopic Objects.*—M. L. Errera pro- 
poses to apply to microscopic objects the process already employed for 
recording each phase of the movement of a horse, &c., more especially 
the plan adopted by Anschiitz in his “ Schnellseher,” which is fixed in 
a dark chamber which that author describes as follows : |—“ The succes- 


* Bull. Soc. Belg. Micr., xiv. (1887) pp. 32-5. 
t Catalogue of the Wiesbaden Exhibition, 1887, 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 813 


sive images on the glass of the man or animal in movement are fixed on 
a circular plate turning on its centre, and they are made to pass one 
after another behind an opening in a large screen in front of the ob- 
server. Hvery time that one of the images reaches the middle of the 
aperture it is illuminated during the fraction of a second (about 1/10,000) 
by the discharge of an induction coil through a Geissler tube placed 
behind the movable disc.” The effect is of course the same as that of 
the zoetrope or “ wheel of life.” 

M. Errera’s idea of applying this process to microscopic objects is 
thus expressed :— 

“The details and the mechanism of the movements of microscopic 
beings are still very imperfectly known. The cells with vibratile cilia, 
the infusoria, and the zoospores still present a crowd of problems to be 
resolved. i can hardly think that photography, which has rendered 
such great services in analysing the leap of man, the flight of the sea- 
gull, and the gallop of the horse, could not also be employed with 
success in the case of fishes, insects, worms, protozoa, alge, or isolated 
histological elements. I propose, in conjunction with a skilful photo- 
grapher, to make some experiments in this direction. The aquarium 
Microscope of Klénne and Miiller, and that of Nachet with several 
bodies, suitably modified, will probably allow of the instantaneous 
photography of microscopic movements.” 


Photographing Phosphorescent Bacilli by means of their own 
light.*—Dr. Fischer has taken good photographs from cultivations of three 
different phosphorescent bacteria. To do this successfully it is necessary 
that the cultivation should shed an intense light, the dry plates must be very 
sensitive, and the exposure long (24~36 hours). The best pictures were 
obtained from B. phosphorescens, the cultivations of which in a dark 
room at 5°-10° C. gave out their brightest light. In these photograms 
not only are the colonies seen distinctly and sharply formed, but the 
outlines of the test-tubes and other vessels are recognizable. A herring 
illuminated with B. phosphorescens took extremely well, the scales 
showing with perfect distinctness. The head and tail, which were not 
illuminated, did not appear in the photograph. 

Dr. Fischer then went a step farther, and obtained photographs of 
external objects, e.g. a watch, by the illumination of these phospho- 
rescent colonies in a dark room. Not only could the time be read, but 
the hands and second-hands were distinctly visible. The illuminant 
bacteria alluded to are those commented on before in this Journal 
(ante, p. 277)—the “ West Indian” and the “ endemic” phosphorescent 
bacilli, and B. phosphorescens. 


Gray, W. M.—Photo-micrography. : 
[Methods used by the author in photomicrography of sections of animal tissues. ] 
The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 172-5. 
NevuuHAvSS, R.—Die Entwickelung der Mikrophotographie in den letzten zwei 
Jahren mit besonderer Berticksichtigung ihrer Bedeutung fiir die Lehre von den 
Mikroorganismen. (The development of Pliotomicrography in the last two years 
with special reference to its importance for the theory of micro-organisms.) 
Centralbl. f. Bacteriol. u. Parasitenk., TV. (1888) pp. 81-4, 111-6, 283-4. 
[Also reply by M. Stenglein, zbid., pp. 282-3.] 
RAFTER’s (G. W.) Photomicrographs. 
[Commendatory notice of them.] Amer. Mon. Mier. Journ., 1X. (1888) p. 113. 


* Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iv. (1888) pp. 89-92. 


814 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


(5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. 


Variation in Micrometric Measurements due to different illumi- 
nation.—Mr. C. Fasoldt sends us the following ‘“ Table showing the 
variation in measurements due to the different applications of light and 
illuminations.” 

“The image of 4/10 in. was the object on which these measure- 
ments were made, and was ruled on a glass dise of No. 2 covering glass, 
7/1000 in, in thickness. 

« All measurements were taken on one and the same ruling, with the 
same Microscope, objective, and eye-piece, under the same focus, and 
having the Microscope in the same position continually, and only 
changing the mirror and excluding the one light while the other was 
used. 


Unmounted—Lamplight. 
Lines downward. Lines upward. 
Concave mirror 4/10 in. 10/100,000 — | Coneave mirror 4/10 in. 10/100,000 + 
Plane » 4/10 in. 5/100,000 + | Plane » 4/10 in. 14/100,000 + 


Il. through , Ill. through 2 
objective \ 4/10 in. 5/100,000 + objective \ 4/10 in, 15/100,000 + 


Mounted on Glass. 
Lamplight. Daylight. 
Coneave mirror 4/10 in. 0 Concave mirror 4/10 in. 39/100,000 + 
Plane » 4/10 in. 15/100,000 + | Plane » 4/10 in. 20/100,000 + 


Til. through : 
fuecute \ 4/10 in, 31/100,000 + 


“ A number of comparisons were made at each position and in the 
same temperature. 

«A Spencer objective was used for these measurements ; but Bausch 
and Lomb and Gundlach objectives were also tried, obtaining the same 
results. 

“The Microscope used is one constructed on my late patents, and 
has a micrometer for measuring similar to a cobweb micrometer. But 
instead of cobwebs, three movable steel pointers are used, which are 
worked as fine as this metal will permit. The stage is mechanical, and 
the main slide is moved with great precision by a fine screw 100 threads 
per inch.” 

Error was therefore eliminated in the case only of the lines mounted 
on glass when the concave mirror and lamplight was used. 


Testing Screw-Micrometers of Reading-Microscopes.*—Prof. Rein- 
hertz points out that every micrometer is liable to special errors and 
that these must be studied before the requisite corrections can be 
applied. The errors are due to (1) the screw itself; (2) the mounting of 
the screw ; (3) the remaining parts of the micrometer. 

(1) According as the screw produces unequal linear movements at 
different parts for a complete turn, or unequal linear movements for 
equal fractions of a single turn, the errors may be called “ progressive ” 
or “ periodic”; the former are due to inequalities of pitch, the latter to 
irregularities of the thread. 

(2) The position of the screw is fixed by its point or head being 
maintained in constant pressure against a plane surface; if this surface 


* Central-Ztg. f. Optik u. Mech., ix. (1888) pp. 37-40. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 815 


has inequalities, or is not perpendicular to the screw, or if the screw- 
point is out of centre, the errors in the readings are functions of corre- 
sponding fractions of a single turn, or are “ periodic.” 

(3) Imperfections in the other parts may introduce numerous irregu- 
lar errors, capable of entirely destroying the advantantages of micro- 
metric reading. 

The errors may therefore be either progressive, periodic, or irregular; 
the first may practically be neglected since only one or two or at the 
most five turns are employed in theodolite readings; the irregular 
errors must be determined and eliminated by repeated readjustment to 
the same graduation mark, the vernier being clamped, and by observing 
the mean errors of adjustment and reading; if these are subject to 
occasional large variation they indicate imperfections in the mechanism, 
lubricant, &e. 

It remains to determine the periodic errors; i.e. to compare the 
different values found for the same interval on the scale as measured at 
different parts of the drum. The most convenient interval to use is the 
distance on the scale between some graduation and a supplementary 
mark which corresponds to 1/10, 1/8, or 1/5 of a complete turn. The 
drum is set to 0, one end of the interval is brought on to the cross wires 
by the vernier screw, and then the other end by a movement of the 
drum ; the first position is then recovered by a movement of the vernier- 
screw ; and in this way a series of measurements are made by alternate 
use of the vernier-screw and drum until the zero-reading upon the latter 
is again reached; the readings are then reversed. A series of such 
double sets of observations will give a mean value of the interval which 
may be regarded as the true value, and tke differences between this and 
the values obtained at different parts of the drum will be the corrections 
to be applied. An example quoted by Prof. Reinhertz shows how the 
periodic error was determined on a micrometer screw, so that by 
applying the correction the mean error of a single measurement could be 
reduced from 8°5 in. to 4:4 in.; and was finally removed altogether by 
correcting the eccentricity of the hollow cone in which the screw point 
was made to work. 

If the periodic errors do not lie within the mean errors of adjustment 
and reading the screw should be rejected, and in any case the periodic 
errors should be eliminated by repeated readings at different parts of 
the drum. ; 


Arachnoidiscus as a new Test for High-power Objectives.*—Mr. 
T. EF. Smith says that there are two great objections to using the 
Podura scale as a test object for an oil-immersion. The first is that the 
conventional markings can only be seen when the scale is a little 
way off the cover-glass, and, consequently, the objective not working 
at its full aperture; and, secondly, it is impossible to tell the best 

oint. 

A dry glass, on the Podura scale, is exceeding sensitive, and a little 
turn of the correction-collar, or a little difference in the length of the 
draw-tube, will make all the difference between fine definition and no 
definition at all. With the oil-immersion, however, you can go through 
the whole range of the correction-collar without making any difference 
in the markings, beyond changing them from red to blue. Of course, 


* Journ. Quek. Micr. Club, iii. (1888) pp. 247-53, 


816 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


opticians will tell you that they know the best point, but his experience 
is as follows: 

Four object-glasses, with a correction-collar, were supposed to be 
set with best definition on the Podura scale at the point 0; the first was 
best on a balsam-mounted slide at point 24; No. 2 glass was at its best 
at point 5; No. 3 at point 74; and the last glass at its best on the same 
slide at point 10, or as far as it could go. It is no use blaming opticians, 
for the English microscopists have been brought up (and rightly, up to 
a certain point) to believe in the Podura scale, and makers cannot be 
expected to run the risk of producing a glass that is not at its best on 
that test. The only way then is to offer a substitute that shall stand for 
the oil-immersion in the same relation as the Podura scale does to the 
dry glass, and for that purpose Mr. Smith “ offers the outer plate of the 
Arachnoidiscus (anything) mounted in balsam.” 

To him there is a particular appropriateness in choosing this as a test 
object, from the fact that although its main features for the last forty 
years have been as well known as the Podura scale itself, the discovery 
of the finer markings or structure is due entirely to the oil-immersion 
objective. 

The advantages claimed for the new test-object for an oil-immersion 
are that the little projecting points or spines can only be clearly 
defined where the objective is perfectly corrected and set at its best point. 

It is not every disc of the diatom that will act as a test, any more 
than will every scale of Podura. Some will show no projecting spines 
even with the widest-angled objective, and others are so coarse as to be 
no test at all; but a properly selected one will answer all the purpose, 
both for defining and resolving power. 


Tests for Modern Objectives.*—Mr. E. M. Nelson considers that the 
advance of the Microscope in recent years is due to the Podura scale and 
the following diatoms :—I1st, Rhomboides ; 2ndly, Grammatophora subti- 
lissima ; 3rdly, and probably to a greater extent, Amphipleura pellucida ; 
lastly, and at the present time, to Pleurosigma angulatum, N. rhomboides, 
and the secondary markings of diatoms in general with large angled 
cones of central light. It was the demand for glasses that would give 
classical images of the Podura scale which improved the central portions 
of the objectives, and it was the demand for diatom-resolving lenses 
which spurred on the opticians to make wide angles and to correct the 
margins. 

But however much we may regret it, these old tests—the Podura and 
the Amphipleura pellucida—which have been of great service to the cause 
of microscopy, must be laid aside. The classical picture of Podura 
demands such a very small area of the centre of an objective that it tests 
too little of the glass. 

The following are a few tests for modern objectives :— 

1, Pleurosigma angulatum, showing dark perforations on a light 
ground, with a fracture passing through them. While the dioptric beam 
passes though the centre of the lens the diffraction spectra sweep the 
margin. Unless a lens be truly centered it will not stand this test. 

2. A Cherryfield Rhomboides in balsam or styrax with the full aper- 
ture of Powell’s latest condenser is a very severe test. 


* Engl. Mech., xlviii. (1888) p. 51. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 817 


3. To these may be added the secondary marking on diatoms, e.g. 
Coscinodiscus asteromphalus, &e. 

4. The fracture passing through the secondary markings, such as 
(a) Triceratium, (b) Isthmia nervosa. 

5. The secondary markings in the areolations on the hoop of Isthmia 
nervosa in balsam. 

All these tests are intended for solid cones of direct light of various 
apertures. ‘T'wo classes of tests are comprised in this list. The first, 
and perhaps the best, is the way a fairly large test is presented. 1, 2, 
4 (a), and some of 3 are in this class. 

The other class consists in the possibility of making out the test at 
all. 4 (6), 5, and some of 3 are in this class. 


Fasoldt’s Test-plates.*—Mr. C. Fasoldt replies to Dr. R. H. Ward’s 
report on the examination of one of his test-plates. He claims that Dr. 
T. F.C. Van Allen “resolved every band up to and including the 
200,000 lines per inch in the presence of Dr. Ward.” Also that “a 
number of gentlemen ” have resolved all bands up to and including the 
200,000, “ seeing plainly lines and spaces.” 

“The successful resolution of the lines is not dependent on the mode 
of ruling, but on the eyes. And, considering the admitted inability in 
Dr. Ward’s eyes, it would seem no more than an act of justice to all 
concerned had the Doctor delegated his position on the committee to 
some one whose eyes were more reliable, and who would have been 
equally unprejudiced as himself in making the investigations. Good 
eyesight is certainly an essential factor in such close tests as the 
resolution of even 120,000 lines per inch, and there may perhaps be a 
reasonable doubt whether the Doctor was able to resolve the 120,000 
lines per inch, as he claimed he was able to do. His admissions are, 
however, very candid, and his report can, therefore, have no value as to 
the number or resolvability of the rulings under discussion.” 


Microscopical Optics and the Quekett Club Journal.—When an 
esteemed friend goes astray it is often very perplexing to know what 
course to take. Are we to leave him unadmonished out of fear of 
impairing the ties of friendship, or are we to openly recognize the evil 
of his ways and act accordingly ? The friend who has more especially 
brought this difficulty to mind at the present moment is the Quekett 
Microscopical Club, for which we retain unimpaired all the regard of 
early days, and the evil in this case relates to some papers printed in 
its Journal. 

We recently had occasion to comment upon some comical blunders 
occurring in a paper in which optical principles were turned upside 
down in a very naive manner, but the last part of the Journal goes 
beyond even that extraordinary paper, and we find page after page 
containing the most terrible nonsense that has ever been published 
hitherto in a microscopical journal. The paper to which we more particu- 
larly refer is one entitled “On True and False Images in Microscopy,” 
the writer of which, as he shows in paragraph after paragraph, has 
not taken the trouble to master even the rudiments of the subject about 
which he writes, although he starts with the ludicrous statement that, “ to 
him the subject presents no difficulty whatever”! One of the more strik- 


* The Microscope, viil. (1888) pp. 220-3. 
t Journ. Quek. Micr. Club, iii. (1888) pp. 267-72. 


818 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 

ing instances of this will be found in the author’s statement (p. 268) that a 
passage quoted from Prof. Abbe “clearly means that, given perfect 
* correction of the objective, there is perfect definition of the object, which 
“ to me seems to contradict the former part of the paper.” The writer there- 
fore has avowedly not a glimmering of a notion of that most elementary 
point of the diffraction theory—the difference between, “ delineation” 
and “definition,” or that perfect definition is quite consistent with 
imperfect delineation. 

If the only result of publishing the paper were to raise a laugh at 
the expense of the author, the matter might be treated as not being of 
more than personal interest, but when we find the Quekett Club printing 
such rubbish, it is necessary to make a protest in the interest of micro- 
scopical science against so retrograde a proceeding, and this the more so 
as it was at the Quekett Club that one of the earliest demonstrations was 
given of the fact that microscopic images cannot be interpreted by 
simply “ believing the evidence of one’s own eyes,” as it is now suggested 
is all that is necessary. ; 

In another part of the same No. we have a bewildering mixture of 
conflicting statements.* As will be seen from the extracts we print 
below, the speaker declares as “‘ absurd on the face of it, and Prof. Abbe 
did not believe anything of the kind,” just what Prof. Abbe, as appears 
from another part of the same Journal, does believe, and which is nothing 
less than the cardinal fact of the diffraction theory, while the speaker 
himself later on, apparently quite unconscious of the discrepancy, states 
his belief in the very thing which he had before denounced as absurd. 


Speaker’s first Statement. 


“There had no doubt 
“been some very objec- 
“tionable passages written 
‘in connection with the 
“subject—not perhaps by 
“Prof. Abbe, but in such 
“away as to appear to 
“put them into Prof. 
“ Abbe’s mouth; such for 
“instance, as the state- 
“ment that because the 
“whole of the diffraction 
“images were not taken 
“in, therefore the whole 
“structure of the object 
“could not be known. 
“That, of course, was 
“absurd on the face of it, 
“and Prof. Abbe did not 
“believe anything of the 
“kind.” 


Prof. Abbe’s own Statement. 


“Perfect similarity be- 
“tween the microscopical 
“image and the object 
“always depends on the 
“admission to and utiliza- 
“tion by the objective of 
“the whole of the dif- 
“fracted rays which the 
‘structure is competent to 
“emit. When a portion 
“only of the total diffrac- 
“tion fan appertaining to 
“a given structure is lost, 
“the image is more or less 
“incomplete or dissimilar.” 


Speaker’s second Statement. 


“With these difficult 
“ objects, however, though 
“they could get a fair 
“knowledge of them with- 
“in the limits of their 
“optical power, yet they 
“came at length to a point 
“where the largeness of 
“the angle required was 
“such that they could not 
“yet grasp the diffraction 
“spectra, and at that point 
“their entire knowledge 
“necessarily ended,” 


The mischief of all this is that it must necessarily have the effect of 
making a student believe that the subject is so confused and unsettled 
that it is of no use to try and understand it. ; 

There is plenty of room for most interesting criticism on the subject 


of diffraction, but to be worth printing it must be founded on intelligent 
doubt, and must not consist of raw and undigested ideas arising from 
simple ignorance of the subject, which renders it necessary to win over 


* Journ. Quek. Micr, Club, iii. (1888) p. 288. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 819 


again (for some minds) the ground formerly won and now so incon- 
siderately put in peril of being lost. 


HARcCHER, A.—Optometer und Apparat zum Messen der Brennweiten und zum 
Centriren optischer Linsen, System North Harchek. (Optometer and apparatus for 
measuring the foci of and centering optical lenses, —North Harchek’s system.) 

Breslauer Aertztl. Zeitschr., XII. (1888) p. 139. 

Highest Magnifying Power. 

[Another specimen of the general ignorance on this subject. ‘What is the 
highest magnifying power that has been obtained? In 1864 an eminent 
microscopist expressed his opinion that in object-glasses with one twenty-fifth 
of an inch focus the Microscope had reached its utmost attainable limit of 
perfection. He added that it appeared impossible to separate or define lines 
more numerous than 90,000 in an inch on account of the decomposition of 
light. Yet within a few years after this opinion had been expressed, an 
object-glass with a one-fiftieth of an inch focus was made which magnified 
1,575,000,000 times. This revealed the one four hundred thousandth part of 
an inch; but it again has been left far behind by a glass recently made in 
Sweden, which enables us to distinguish the one two hundred and four 
million seven hundred thousandth part of an inch.’’] 

Tit- Bits, XIV. (1888) p. 310. 

Mercizr, G. H.—Traité pratique de Manipulations de Physique a V'usage des 
Etudiants en Médecine, précédé d’une Préface par M. le Prof. C. M. Gariel. 
Optique. (Practical treatise on physical manipulations for students in medicine. 
With a preface by Prof. C. M. Gariel. Optics.) 

iv. and 251 pp. and 90 figs., 8vo, Paris, 1888. 

NeEtson, E. M.—On the Interpretation of a Photomicrographic Phenomenon by the 
Abbe Diffraction Theory. Journ. Quek. Micr, Club, I11. (1888) pp. 273-9. 

¢: 33 True and False Images in Microscopy. 

Journ. Quek. Micr. Club, III. (1888) p. 288. 

a f Amphipleura pellucida. 

[Report of resolution with Powell’s 1/4 in. objective 1:17 N.A. with dry 
front, i.e. with 1:0 N.A.] Engl. Mech., XUIII. (1888) p. 51. 

Smiru, T. F.—On True versus False Images in Microscopy. 

Journ. Quek. Mier. Club, III. (1888) pp. 267-72, 288-9. 

TANAKADATE, A.—Note on the Constants of a Lens. 

Journ, Coll. of Sci. Tokio, I. (1888) p. 333. 

VEREKER, J. G. P.—Numerical Aperture. 

Journ. of Micr., I. (1888) pp. 155-66 (4 figs. ). 


(6) Miscellaneous. 


Simple method of Projecting upon the screen Microscopic Rock 
Sections, both by ordinary and by polarized light.*—Mr. E. P. 
Quinn “knowing the difficulty experienced in pointing out to students 
any particular crystal in a rock section when viewed with the Microscope 
direct, attempted to project the images on the screen, and by the aid of 
comparatively simple apparatus met with very gratifying success, both 
with ordinary and with polarized light. 

The tube of the Microscope was screwed out and replaced with a 
cork, through which a hole had been cut to carry the ordinary 1 in. 
objective, and behind it the analyser of the Microscope. The polariscope 
and rock section occupied their usual position as when used with the 
Microscope in the ordinary way. The Microscope-stand being inclined 
into the horizontal position was placed in front of the object-lens of the 
limelight lantern. The object-lens of a lantern usually consists of a 
combination of two lenses. If so the back lens is taken out and the front 
lens only used, acting as an extra condenser, concentrating the light 
upon the rock section and causing it to pass through the polarizer and 
the analyser. 


* Rep. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 1887, p, 725. 


820 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


A little adjustment of the light was required to get it well through 
both polarizer and analyser, but this with a little care was soon dune, 
and a bright picture, several feet in diameter, was projected upon the 
screen, showing the crystals well defined and exhibiting very strikingly 
the changes of colour, &c., characteristic of the crystals when viewed 
by polarized light, and in such a manner as to be well seen by a number 
of people at once and also allowing the lecturer to readily point out any 
particular crystal or crystals to which he desires to draw the attention 
of his audience. As the optical axis of the lantern and Microscope did 
not coincide, the lantern was placed on a board provided with four 
levelling screws, with which the necessary adjustments were readgly made. 

Much better effects may be got if the ‘ Prazmowski’ form of prisms 
made by Zeiss are used instead of the usual Nicol’s prism on account of 
their greater aperture and shorter length, and the most brilliant results 
with the 1 in. objective of fifty angular apertures (sic) by Wray of London.” 


Microscopy and the Study of Rocks.*—Prof. J. W. Judd thinks 
there is perhaps just now a danger of our exaggerating the importance 
of the microscopic method as applied to the study of rocks. That the 
method has already done much in enabling us to follow out and trace 
the effects of the slow processes of change within the earth’s crust, and 
that it will do still more in the future no one can doubt. But when it 
is sought to make the Microscope a “ court of final appeal” in geological 
questions, and in doing so to disregard the importance of field observa- 
tion, we perceive the same source of danger as is now perhaps being 
experienced in connection with almost every branch of natural history 
research. It must be remembered that while the Microscope enables us 
to see a little more than the naked eye or the pocket lens, yet, neverthe- 
less, between what is actually seen by the very highest powers of our 
Microscopes and the molecular groupings and reactions which give rise 
to the varied phenomena of the mineral kingdom, there is room f:r 
almost infinite possibilities. We accept the teaching of the Micro- 
scope with all thankfulness, but we recognize the fact at the same time 
that it has enabled us to get only a very little nearer to the heart of 
those great physical problems which we aim at solving. 


Microscope and Telescope.t—M. J. C. Houzeau, formerly Director 
of the Brussels Observatory, has a lengthy paper under this title, from 
which we extract the following :— 

“ The field of scientific research was immensely widened by the simul- 
taneous invention of the Microscope and Telescope. In the whole course 
of history there is not another invention which has exerted a similar 
influence in the sphere of material facts. The circle of individual action 
was extended in an unexpected degree by gunpowder ; it was this which 
enabled Cortez and his four hundred followers to put to flight armies 
which outnumbered his own in the proportion of 100 to 1. In the 
strictly material order of things. gunpowder is the first signal triumph 
of applied science—of modern science. But we must grant that it had 
an essentially destructive character; it belonged to the arts of war, 
which in our social childhood take precedence of the arts of peace. 

The second invention which—still in the material world—produced 
a profound revolution, belonged to the useful arts. This was the steam 
engine, by which our industrial forces have been enlarged to an enor- 


* Nature, xxxviii. (1888) p. 386. 
+ Bull. Soc. Belg. Micr., xiii. (1887) pp. 90-110. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 821 


mous extent; it constituted an addition of energy which was equivalent 
to the creation of millions of workmen. The steam engines at work in 
civilised countries represent the labour of ten or twelve times the total 
number of adult males in the population of the world. This was an 
acquisition of power, but not of intelligence. 

But after these two inventions, the one warlike, the other industrial, 
there came one belonging to science, that. of the Microscope and Tele- 
scope, which has had no parallel in history for the extent and the effects 
of its material results. Outside the world as perceptible by our senses, 
there was, above and below, a sort of immense envelope, which had for 
thousands of years escaped the eyes of man. Beyond the boundaries of 
the visible, both in the large and the little, there was, as it were, a second 
sphere, vaster than that in which so many generations had lived, which 
had remained up to that time an impenetrable domain. One day, thanks 
to what I shall call the new eyes with which man learnt to endow himself, 
the previously unknown world was revealed to us; and we know now 
whether it contained sufficient subjects of interest and wonder. 

Viewed thus in its glory, the double invention of the Microscope 
and the Telescope appears a sudden thing. Yet this great and extra- 
ordinary extension of the sense of sight was not altogether new. 
Primitive man could not remain a stranger to certain facts of magnifica- 
tion which, so to speak, forced themselves upon his attention. 

When I was living in the Antilles, I once saw a black, who had been 
brought from his native land of Africa before the suppression of slavery, 
and who was consequently a savage, looking through a drop of dew at 
a gnat upon a leaf. This was a temporary observation, unintentional 
and the effect of chance; still it was none the less an observation, and 
the chance would naturally recur in certain circumstances. Primitive 
man could not then be entirely ignorant of the magnifying power of 
drops of water. ... 

The two instruments, the Microscope and Telescope, thus appear to 
us as proceeding from the same germ. We see that they were produced 
at the same time, the beginning of that 17th century to which they were 
destined to reveal so many marvels, and in the same form, namely a 
convex lens associated with a concave lens. The first improvement was 
made contemporaneously in both, by the substitution in both cases of a 
convex for a concave eye-piece ; for the Telescope in 1613 by Scheiner at 
the suggestion of Kepler, for the Microscope in 1618 by Francesco 
Fontana. Both profited, so to speak, by Huyghens’ idea of using three 
lenses, and both were at the same time invested with a new power by the 
application of achromatism. There is a further resemblance; the names 
of the two instruments remained vague and to some extent confused ; the 
Academy dei Lincei, at Rome, judged it necessary to have distinct names, 
and a Greek, named Remiscianus, settled in Italy, supplied the two 
words Microscope and Telescope; so that the two instruments born 
together received baptism at the same time, after having shared every- 
thing at their entrance into the world. 

If they have subsequently separated, and if they tend to separate 
more widely in their construction, it is only in consequence of the 
different purposes to which they are applied. Practical convenience has 
led by degrees to distinct arrangements adapted on both sides to the 
conditions which they have to satisfy. But this diverging course should 
not make us forgct the original similarity of the types... . 

1888. 3K 


822 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


The invention of the Microscope and Telescope has not only contri- 
buted to open out a new sphere to us so vast that we cannot yet realize 
its extent, but it has also shown us the contrast which exists between 
our mental faculties and the fertility of nature; we have here an evident 
proof that the imagination, however potent it may at first appear, is only 
rich in combinations of known things; it forms combinations of great 
variety, often fantastic and unnatural; it can magnify or reduce images 
to any extent; but from its own source it extracts nothing that is really 
new ; and however inventive it may imagine itself to be, it would discover 
nothing if nature did not supply examples.” og 


Brain Markings. 

[“ A well-known New York physician has just published the sort of discovery 
which Lord Lytton would have made a novel out of. An aged Polish count, 
formerly professor of languages and a famous oriental scholar, died in the 
hospital, and Dr. Rookwood had oceasion, in conjunction with other experts, 
to make a microscopical examination of a certain part of the cerebrum. 
They noticed a peculiar set of markings, which took the form of Egyptian 
and Chinese hieroglyphics. These were amplified to a magnitude of 3000 
diameters, and the results shown to another oriental scholar, who declared 
them to be true characters in the Ethiopic, Syriac, and Egyptian languages. 
Dr. Rookwood suggests that his discovery will lead to extracting from the 
dead their literary achievements as well as their suppressed opinions.’ 

Sci.-Gossip, 1888, p. 67. 
Conservirung von Zeichnungen. (Preserving drawings.) 

(Lay the drawing on a flat surface and pour over it collodion in which 2 per 

cent. of stearine has been dissolved. In twenty minutes it is dry and fixed.] 
Neueste Erfind. u. Erfahr., 1887, p. 571. 
DALLINGER, Rev. W. H.—Memoir. Research, I, (1888) pp. 40-1 (portrait). 


Dallinger, Dr., Presentation to. 

[‘** All Sheffield, of any public note, took its leave of Dr. and Mrs. Dallinger 
in the Council Chamber of the cutlery metropolis on Tuesday. The Mayor, 
on behalf of numerous subscribers, presented Mrs. Dallinger with a silver 
tray, and the Dr. with a substantial sum of money, the value of the gifts 
being enhanced by the kindest expressions of regard for the recipients. 
The Mayor regarded Dr. Dallinger’s removal from the town almost as a 
public calamity. The Doctor said that since he came to Sheffield he had been 
privileged with companionship and friendships and intercourse which had 
made his life, that was full of labour, equally full of sweetness. His labour 
during the past eight years had not been barren; some work had been 
accomplished. He had been enabled, by increasingly powerful instruments, 
to penetrate still further and further down, but so far as this portion of his 
life had been serviceable to science, it had been more powerful than it 
otherwise could have been because he was surrounded by such friends and 
such interests in this never-to-be-forgotten town. He thanked them for the 
present to his wife, without whose constant assistance he could never have 
performed the work that had been done at Wesley College. The gift to 
himself would be devoted to the purchase of any new instrument that he 
required, so long as it lasted. He had been working in a department of 
science that had been absolutely untouched, and he was constantly finding 
that something was wanting that was not existing in scientific instruments 
before. It was a source of joy to him that through its gift Sheffield would 
be permanently represented on the scientific side of his house.”’] 

Christian World, Aug. 16, 1888. 
Fritscu, G.—See Neumayer, G., infra. 
Gosse, P. H., Hon. F.R.M.S.—Obituary. Athenxum, 1888, Sept. 1, pp. 294-5. 
Gray, Asa, Hon. F.R.M.S.—Obituary. Nature, XX XVII. (1888) pp. 375-7. 
[Manton W. P., and oruEers.—Use and Abuse of the Microscope. | 

[‘‘Dr. E. L. Nealey, of Bangor, read a paper on the ‘Use and Abuse of the 
Microscope’ before the recent meeting of the Maine Medical Society. Our 
experience leads us to think that most physicians abuse the instrument by 
not using it.”] The Microscope, VILL, (1886) p. 217. 


—- 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 823 


NEumMAYeER, G.—Anleitung zu wissenschaftlichen Beobachtungen auf Reisen. 
(Guide to scientific observations in travelling.) Contains Fritsch, G., Praktische 
Gesichtspunkte fiir die Verwendung zweier dem Reisenden wichtigen techni- 
schen Hilfsmittel : Das Mikroskop und der photographische Apparat. (Practical 
suggestions for the use of two of the traveller’s important technical aids: the 
Microscope and the photographic apparatus, pp. 512-612, 8 figs.) 

2nd ed., 2 vols. 8vo, Berlin, 1888. 

Routwey, F.—Rock-forming Minerals. 

[Contains chapters on (1) Apparatus, Methods of Preparation, Examination, 
&e., (2) Propagation of Light, Reflection, Refraction, Double Refraction, 
Optic Axes, &c., (8) Polarization of Light, (4) Axes of Optical Elasticity, 
Examination in Polarized Light, (5) Wave Surfaces, (6) Bisectrices and 
Optic Normal, (7) Examination in Convergent Polarized Light, (8) Pleo- 
chroism. | iv. and 252 pp., 126 figs., 8vo, London, 1888. 


VEREKER, J. G. P.—(0n the Choice of a Microscope.] 
Scientif. Enquirer, III. (1888) pp. 152-4. 


Wiesbaden, Katalog zur wissenschaftlichen Ausstellung der 60. Versammlung 
deutscher Naturforscher und Aerzte zu. (Catalogue of the Scientific Exhibition of 
the 60th Meeting of German Naturalists and Physicians at Wiesbaden.) Edited 
by L. Dreyfus. 

ix. and 224 pp., 8vo, Wiesbaden, 1887. 
Cf. also Zeitschr. f. Instrumentenk., VII. (1887) pp. 428-9. 
Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., LV. (1887) pp. 303-25 (1 fig.). 


8B. Technique.* 
(1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes. 


Cultivation of Schizomycetes in Coloured Nutritive Media.t—Herr 
Birch-Hirschfeld found three years ago that the comma bacilli of 
cholera not only retained their lively movements in stained bouillon, 
but multiplied in a manner similar to what they do in unstained hang- 
ing drops. It was afterwards found that other kinds of bacteria, both 
mobile and immobile varieties, behaved in a similar manner, and this 
method of staining Schizomycetes was then used by the author for 
demonstration purposes. Besides fuchsin, other anilin pigments were 
employed (dahlia, Victoria blue, &c.) For the observation of fission 
fungi in hanging drops, this method offers decided advantages, as the 
small and motile forms are more easily found and focused, and the 
morphological characters of the bacteria are also rendered more evident 
by the staining of their protoplasm. 

The author remarks that bacteriological literature scarcely notices 
the relation of living bacteria towards anilin pigments, and seems to 
think that such a method might afford information about the morpho- 
logical changes bacteria undergo in their development and multiplica- 
tion, and that inoculation experiments with living stained pathogenic 
bacteria might help to decide certain questions anent the localization 
and spread of germs imported into the organism. With regard to these 
points, it may be mentioned that anthrax bacilli deeply stained with 
diamond-fuchsin or victoria-blue, and grown on gelatin, retain their 
virulence quite unchanged. 

For observing the morphological changes connected with growth 


* This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro- 
cesses; (2) Preparing Objects; (8) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes; 
(4) Staining and Injecting; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservative fluids, &c.; 
(6) Miscellaneous. 

+ Arch. f. Hygeine, vii. pp. 341-53. Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii, 


(1888) pp. 447-9. 
3K 2 


824 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


and spore-formation, the dyes previously mentioned are of little value, 
but phloxin-red may be employed with advantage. It is extremely 
soluble in water, stains spores quite intensely, and cultivations on 
gelatin and bouillon stained with this dye throve luxuriantly. Experi- 
ments on typhoid bacillus made by this method confirmed the formation of 
spores as first stated by Gaffky. Benzo-purpurin was also found to be 
a useful dye, as it stained the spores alone, and left the rest of the proto- 
plasm uncoloured. . 


Cultivation of Anaerobic Micro-organisms.*—Dr. C. Friinkel has 
invented an apparatus for the cultivation of anaerobic microbes, which 
he says combines the advantages of the methods of Liborius and Gruber, 
The nutrient media, bouillon, gelatin, agar, are placed in test-tubes 
somewhat wider than the ordinary ones. Sterilization, inoculation, &c., 
are then performed in the usual way. ‘This done, the tube is closed 
with a caoutchouc plug, through which pass two glass tubes bent at a 
right angle. One of these reaches to the bottom of the test-tube, the 
shorter one goes no farther than the bottom of the caoutchoue plug. 
The exposed extremities are drawn out to fine points, and this arm of the 
longer tube, besides containing a plug of cotton-wool, is connected with 
a hydrogen apparatus by means of a piece of rubber tubing. The gas 
then passes through the nutrient medium and escapes through the 
shorter leg. When the air is thoroughly expelled, the pointed ends are 
melted up, and then the medium is spread over the surface of the test- 
tube in the manner proposed by Ehrlich. 

In order to prevent certain sources of error, two points must be 
rigorously observed ; first, the two pieces of glass tubing and the rubber 
plug must be thoroughly sterilized. This is best done by laying them 
for an hour in a 1 per cent. sublimate solution. The second source of 
error is the escape of the hydrogen and the entrance of air. This is 
avoided by covering the plug with paraffin which melts at about 80°. 

When bouillon is the medium, the test-tube can be freed from every 
trace of air in 14-2 minutes. 

If gelatin be used, then the test-tube must be placed in water at 
37° while the gas is passing through. This takes only 3-4 minutes. 
Agar must be used in 2 per cent. solution to which 1 per cent. grape 
sugar is added. As the agar solidifies rapidly below 40°, it is necessary 
to be quick in passing the gas through and wetting off the points. The 
tube must then be rolled round in lukewarm water or in the hand. 

The advantages claimed for this method are cheapness, convenience, 
and suitability for its intended purpose. 


Bacterial Growth between 50° and 70° C.j—Dr. Globig who has 
been experimenting with Bacteria found in garden mould, made his 
preliminary isolation in covered capsules of 5-7 cm. diameter, and 
grew the micro-organisms on pieces of potato. The colonies thus 
obtained were cultivated in test-tubes on blocks of potato cut obliquely. 
For the latter step, potatoes were boiled and disinfected with sublimate 
solution, and then cylindrical blocks punched out of them with a cork- 
borer, the diameter of which was just less than that of the test-tubes. 
The blocks were then cut obliquely, and jammed in the test-tubes so 
that they did not move, and closed with the usual precautions. By this 


* Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 735-40, 763-8 (1 fig.). 
+ Zeitschr, f. Hygeine, iii. (1887) p. 295. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 825 


procedure 30 different kinds of bacteria were bred, which developed 
between 56° and 58°. With higher and lower temperatures different 
kinds of bacteria appeared. At 68°-70°, only a few colonies developed, 
while if the temperature were lowered to 50° or below, the potato 
bacillus appeared, and this overgrew all other colonies. The author notes 
that these bacilli are located on the superficial layers of the mould, and 
that the sun’s warmth must be the most powerful factor in their genesis. 


Alkali-Albuminate as a Nutrient Medium.*—Prof. J. Rosenthal 
and Dr. O. Schulz make alkali-albuminate in the following manner 
which is simpler than that of Tarchanoff. 

The albumen taken from fresh hens’ eggs is separated from the 
chalaze, and clarified before it is mixed with the alkali solution. ‘This 
is done in the most simple way by straining the albumen through a bag 
made of a double layer of muslin. It should be squeezed through 
slowly with the hand. The filtrate, quite clean and free from bubbles, 
is then poured into a graduated vessel closed with a ground-glass stopper 
and diluted with a 1 per cent. solution of caustic soda or potash and 
distilled water. The proportions are, to every 5 ccm. albumen, 3 ccm. 
alkali solution, and 2 ccm. water. The mixture is then shaken until it 
froths, after which it is allowed to stand for some hours, when the 
shaking is repeated in order that the three constituents may be inti- 
mately mixed. The alkali-albuminate is then poured into test-tubes, 
Erlenmayer’s bulbs, or flat glass pans, and heated over water to a tempera- 
ture of 95°-98° C. for a short time. In a few minutes a jelly is pro- 
duced, which in thin layers is perfectly clear, in thick somewhat opal- 
escent, but which always possesses the consistence and transparency 
requisite for a nutrient medium. Heating up to 100°C. should be 
avoided, as bubbles are produced owing to the vaporization of the water. 

The alkali-albuminate may, if desired, be modified by the addition of 
certain inorganic salts (NaCl, KCl, Na,CO,, Na,SO,, NaHPO,, &c.), or 
by diluting with other nutrient fluids; thus the authors have obtained 
very good results from the following mixture:—5 ccm. albumen and 
2°2 ccm. 1 per cent. alkali solution mixed with meat infusion, diluted 
about one-half with distilled water so that the whole quantity amounted 
to 10 ccm. 


Preparation of Nutrient Gelatin and Agar.;—The practical worker 
in bacteriology deplores, says Dr. T. L. Cheesman, jun., the loss of 
time usually attendant upon the preparation, and especially upon the 
filtration of nutrient gelatin and agar. The method formulated by Koch 
and closely followed by most workers, is very satisfactory in producing 
good, clear culture media, but a few modifications render the procedure 
a much less formidable one, and as the changes to be suggested are 
simply those of detail, it may be well to state in brief the method now 
in use in the Bacterial Laboratory of the College of Physicians and 
Surgeons, New York, which after considerable trial gives uniform and 
satisfactory results. One pound of finely chopped beef, as free as possible 
from fat and gristle, is mixed with 1000 ccm. of distilled water and kept in 
a cool place for 12 or 18 hours. It is then strained, cold, through a 
coarse cloth, into a wide-mouthed “agate ware” or “enamelled iron” 
vessel of sufficient size, and 5 gm. of C.P. sodium chloride, 10 gm. of 


* Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 307-11. 
+ Amer. Naturalist, xxii. (1888) pp. 472-3. 


826 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


pepton, and 100 gm. of gelatin (or 10 gm. of agar) are added. This is 
then placed in a water-bath (to which a large handful of rock salt has 
been added, if agar is to be prepared) and the gelatin (or agar) melted 
as rapidly as possible. The fluid is then neutralized by the careful 
addition of sodium bicarbonate in solution, and the boiling continued 
for a few minutes after, in order to precipitate the phosphates. 

The fluid is now cooled by running water, to such a temperature as 
will not coagulate the white of egg, yet not enough to solidify it, when 
the whites of two eggs, thoroughly beaten up, are mixed with it, and the 
whole boiled for half an hour. 

Filtration which has usually been effected by means of filter paper, 
can be much more rapidly performed by the use of absorbent cotton in 
large quantity. ‘The pores of the paper become clogged by the fine pre- 
cipitates and by the cooling of the medium, and even with the use of the 
“hot funnel” the filtration is sometimes very slow. Cotton, on the other 
hand, presents in its meshes a much larger surface for the entanglement 
of the fine precipitates, and when used in large quantity, allows the 
gelatin (or agar) even when not very hot, to flow through it rapidly. 


The preparation of the filter is as follows :—The absorbent cotton is un- - 


rolled and sterilized in bulk in the hot-air chamber, care being taken 
not to char it. A 6-in. (15 cem.) glass funnel is packed full with the 
dry sterilized cotton, placed in in layers, in such a way as to keep it well 
out of the neck, and having no folds nor ridges of cotton next the glass, 
through which the precipitates might pass into the receiving flask. The 
neutralized culture medium, after being boiled with the white of egg, as 
above described, is strained through coarse flannel into a flask, and poured 
slowly upon the centre of the filter until the cotton is thoroughly soaked, 
and the fluid begins to run into the flask below. This moistening causes 
the cotton to sink considerably, and packs it in the funnel, and when packed, 
the fluid filters through it almost as rapidly as it is poured into the 
funnel. The funnel is now filled and the fluid filtered as fast as it will 
run through. The first filtration seldom produces a clear medium, but 
through the same filter the fluid may be poured again and again, each 
time becoming clearer, and the moderate cooling which necessarily 
occurs, does not sensibly retard the rapidity of filtration. When filtra- 
tion is completed, a considerable portion of the medium entangled in the 
filter can be saved, by pressing upon the cotton with a sterilized glass 
rod, gently at first and near the sides, then in the centre and with con- 
siderable force. The gelatin or agar pressed from the cotton is some- 
times cloudy, for which reason it is well to catch it in a separate flask. 

It not infrequently happens that gelatin which filters clear pre- 
cipitates phosphates on boiling; and that agar, on cooling, forms a 
flocculent precipitate. To insure against filling tubes with such media, 
it is safest always to fill one tube with the medium, and by first cooling, 
then by boiling and again cooling, to test the permanence of the trans- 
parency obtained. Should these precipitates form, it will be necessary 
to boil the gelatin in the flask, and to refilter it through a small plug of 
dry cotton placed in a funnel; while agar should be allowed to com- 
pletely solidify, when it is again melted and filtered through a small 
plug of cotton. The media are now ready for tubing and sterilizing in 
the usual way. 

The large quantity of absorbent cotton used and the considerable 
amount of medium lost, by remaining entangled in the meshes of the 


——<—S OO 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY,. MICROSCOPY, ETC. 827 


cotton (this may amount to 200 ccm. for each of the large cotton filters 
employed) are unquestionably objections to this method of filtration, but 
in its favour it may be stated that one filter, when properly packed, serves 
to clear a large quantity of medium, and the great saving of time in 
filtering enables one to prepare a large amount of these nutrients at one 
operation, which may be stored for future use. Furthermore, the “hot 
funnel” is dispened with. 

The modifications here described may be best appreciated by the fact 
that they render it possible to prepare within three hours several litres 
of the above-mentioned culture media. 


Eggs for Cultivation purposes.*—Dr. F. Hiippe has used eggs in 
the natural condition for the cultivation of micro-organisms for about 
twelve months. Fresh eggs are first cleaned and the shell is then 
sterilized with sublimate solution. They are next washed with sterilized 
water and wiped with sterilized cotton-wool. This done, an opening is 
made in the shell with an instrument (previously heat-sterilized) and 
then the contents are inoculated in the usual way. Before the opening 
is made the egg is well shaken in order to mix its contents. The 
opening is closed with a thin piece of sterilized paper, and then the 
paper coated over with collodion. By this procedure experiments have 
been made as to the reduction of sulphur compounds to sulphuretted 
hydrogen and on the cholera bacillus. For the latter purpose the pro- 
cedure is very favourable, as the conditions resembling those of the 
intestine with regard to oxygenation are imitated very closely. 


Cultivation on Potato.;—M. Roux has for more than a year used 
the following method of cultivating on potato. Without any disinfecting 
washing the potato is cut up into long slices and these put into test- 
tubes about 24 cm. in diameter. About the lower fourth of these tubes 
is a constriction which prevents the potato slice from slipping to the 
bottom. The tubes (not hitherto sterilized) are then plugged with cotton 
wool and heated in a steam sterilizer to 115° for about 15 minutes. The 
pieces of potato should be thick enough not to bend. When removed 
from the sterilizer the surface of the potato is damp, but after being 
placed in a vertical position in an incubator it dries in a few hours. 
The potato is then ready for use. The tubes are then covered with a 
rubber cap and kept till wanted. 

This method, by a simple modification, is applicable to the cultivation 
of anaerobic micro-organisms. For this purpose a side-piece is added to 
the test-tube just below the constriction. After inoculation the top of 
the tube is melted up and then the air is evacuated through the side- 
piece. Another done, this tube is also melted up. The bacilli of 
malignant cedema, when cultivated in this way, thrive extremely well. 


Simple Method for reproducing Koch’s Cultivation Plates.{— 
Prof. de Giaxa records a simple method for obtaining copies of the 
colonies on cultivation plates by asystem of coarse photography. After 
the plate has been removed from the moist chamber, its under surface is 
wiped with blotting-paper moistened with ether, and it is then placed 
on a piece of albumen paper which has been sensitized with nitrate of 
silver. The plate and paper supported by a board are then covered with 


* Centralbl. f. Bacteriol., u. Parasitenk., iv. (1888) pp. 80-1. 
+ Ann. Inst. Pasteur, 1888, p. 28 (2 figs.). 
t Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 700-2 (1 fig.). 


828 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


a bell-jar. These manipulations are carried out in a dark room, and 
having been finished the apparatus is placed in the sunlight about half a 
minute. The paper is next repeatedly washed in a dark room to remove 
the excess of silver, then placed in a gold chloride bath, and afterwards 
fixed in one of hyposulphite of soda. After this it is well washed and 
finally dried. 


Babes’ modified Cultivation Vessel.*—In fig. 151 is shown Dr. V. 
Babes’ recent modification of his cultivation capsule. In this the edge 
of the lower pan is made oblique, a, so that the agar does not slip 
down when the capsule is turned about in microscopical examination. 


Fie. 151. 


The condensation water now no longer drops upon the cultivation, but 
1uns away down a fissure between the upper and lower pans (at c¢). 
Vessels made with this shape are much less exposed to infection from 
without than those with parallel edges. The cultivation can be closed 
up by means of a rubber ring c. 


Cooler for quickly setting Gelatin Plates.t—Dr. A. Pfeifer recom- 
mends instead of the glass apparatus usually employed, a box made of 
zinc plate (the sides = 25 cm. each, and the height = 14-2 em.) and 
supported at each corner on cast-iron feet. When filled with water the 
box may be made to acquire any temperature. Water from 8°-10° R. 
suffices to set gelatin in a very short time, and when manipulating 
agar plates, warm water may be used to prevent the agar from setting 
too quickly. This apparatus does away with ice, is very cheap, certain, 
and saves a lot of time. 


Collecting and Preparing Characee.{—Mr. T. F. Allen says that 
to gather Characez successfully a dredge must be used; for shallow 
water a small fine-toothed rake is preferred, but for deeper water (one 
rarely finds them at a greater depth than 10 feet) the dredge and line 
are essential. The best dredge for all purposes is the one recommended 
by Prof. Nordstedt, made as follows:—A disc of lead about 3 in. diam., 
and 3/4 in. thick has imbedded in its circumference a row of hooks, 
about 10 in number; through the centre of this disc is passed an iron 
rod, which projects about 3 in. below the disc, and about 9 in. above ; to 
the ring in the upper end toward which the points of the hooks are 
directed, a cord is attached. The dredge weighs about 25 1b., and catches 
all sorts of “ weeds” growing on the bottom. 

The dissection of these plants is perfectly simple. The delicate 
species are placed in water until their normal form is restored (if they 
have been dried), and a portion is put in a “cell” on a glass slide, and 
examined under a 2 in. objective ; sometimes, but rarely, a higher power 


* Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iv. (1888) p. 26 (1 fig.). 
ft Deutsche Med. Wochenschr., 1887, No. 42. 


t ‘The Characex of America.’ Cf. Amer. Naturalist, xxii. (1888) pp. 455-7. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 829 


is needed for determining fine points, such as the structure of the 
cortex. Should these species be incrusted with lime, a piece should be 
placed in a little strong vinegar till the lime is completely dissolved, 
then washed in pure water and examined. Specimens foul with mud 
must be cleaned in water with a camel’s hair brush, but this is liable to 
detach the globules of fruit, and is only occasionally to be resorted to. 
Should it be desirable to preserve bits for future reference, they are best 
mounted in glycerin-jelly, in cells deep enough to avoid crushing, and 
shallow enough to permit free examination (flattened brass curtain-rings 
make excellent cells). When the jelly has dried at the edges, turn on a 
ring of white zinc cement. 


Cultivation of Lichen-forming Ascomycetes without Alge.*— 
Dr. A. Méller has, in a number of lichens, especially crustaceous lichens, 
succeeded in cultivating on nutrient media the fungus from ascospores 
and spermatia to the exclusion of gonidia, considerable thalli being 
formed, and in two kinds even spermogonia. ‘The cultivations were 
rendered difficult in one way by the extremely slow growth of the objects, 
and in another by the presence of bacteria and saccharomyces. To 
meet the latter inconvenience the author took the apothecia from 
places which were as free from dust as possible, and placed them under 
a stream of water for 10 minutes, and by so doing a few pure cultivations 
were obtained. When the cultivations on the slides had become visible 
to the naked eye they were placed in flasks of the same shape as 
Exlenmayer’s bulbs, some in nutrient media, some on sawdust &c., and 
the flasks closed with filter paper. 


Apparatus for Infecting.t—Herr N. W. Diakonow proposes the 
following plan for the culture of fungi. The advantages claimed for the 
process are :—(1) the absolute purity of the cuiture from admixture with 
any other species ; (2) the possibility of carrying on the culture in several 
different vessels at the same time; and (8) the equal distribution of the 
spores over the whole surface of the nutrient fluid, and the consequent 
unimpeded growth of every separate mycelium. The author has culti- 
vated Penicillium glaucum with great success in this way. 

The apparatus (fig. 152) consists of a centre-vessel A, and a number 
of side-vessels C surrounding it in a cirele. To the upper neck of A is 
fixed, by an india-rubber connection, a tube B, dipping deep down into 
the vessel ; the upper broad half of this tube is loosely filled with cotton- 
wool; the whole tube is easily movable in all directions. A number of 
short glass tubes a, usually from 4 to 7, are fused into the vessel A in a 
horizontal plane, at equal distances from one another. To these glass 
tubes a are fixed, by india-rubber connections, the side vessels C of any 
desired form and size. Hach of these vessels has a small glass tube c 
fused into it at the same level as the tubes a; the ends of these tubes, 
about 2 cm. in length, project into the vessels, and are curved at right 
angles downwards. 

When the apparatus is about to be used, each of the side vessels is 
provided either with the same or with different nutrient fluids. In the 
centre vessel is also placed a nutrient mixture of glucose and peptone. 
The side-necks d and e are then stopped with wads, and all the vessels 
sterilized at the same time by boiling. During the boiling the cocks b 


* Unters. Bot. Inst. Mister i. W., 1887, 52 pp. 
+ Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. 1888) pp. 120-6 (1 fig.). 


830 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


are left open, so that the steam may produce its sterilizing effect in all 
parts of the apparatus. When the sterilizing is completed, the cocks b 
are closed, and then, after cooling, the germs are introduced with all 


Fic. 152. 


needful precautions, into A through the side-neck d. As soon as the 
conidia in A have developed fertile mycelia, the infection of the side- 
vessels may be effected. 

For this purpose the side-neck d is closed by an india-rubber cap or 
in some other way, and an india-rubber tube f fixed to the glass tube B. 
The cocks b are then opened, the tube B moved by the hand in all direc- 
tions, and a current of air blown through f and B into the centre vessel 
A; and the conidia are thus blown through the connecting-tubes a and 


c into all the side-vessels C. The side-vessels can then be detached at 
pleasure. 


HANseN.—La culture pure de la levure. (The pure culture of yeast. 


Mon. Scientif., XXIX. (1887) p. 1033. 
Jackson, R. T.—Catching fixed forms of Animal life on transparent media for 


study. Science, XI. (1888) No. 275, 3 pp. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 831 


KLEMENSIEWICz, R.—Hin Vegetationskasten fiir niedrige Temperatur. (A 
culture chamber for low temperatures.) Wiener Klin. Wochenschr., 1888, p. 283. 


NorGGERATH, H.—Ueber eine neue Methode der Bacterienziichtung auf gefarbten 
Nahrmedien zu diagnostischen Zwecken. (On a new method of bacteria culti- 
vation on coloured nutrient media for diagnostic purposes.) 

Fortschr. d. Med., V1. (1888) pp. 1-3 (1 pl). 

Unna, P. G.—Die Ziichtung der Oberhautpilze. (The cultivation of skin fungi.) 

Monatschrift fiir Prakt. Dermatol., 1888, pp. 465-76. 

ZAGARI, G.—La Coltura dei Micro-organisme Anaerobi. (The culture of anaerobic 

micro-organisms. ) Giorn. Internaz. Sci. Med., 1888, p. 218. 


(2) Preparing Objects. 


Effect of Hardening Agents on the Ganglion-cells of the Spinal 
Cord.*—Dr. 8. Trzebinski has experimented on a number of hardening 
media to ascertain whether and in what way they affect the ganglion- 
cells of the spinal cord in rabbits and dogs. 

(1) Miiller’s fluid: hardening 4 to 5 weeks. The preparations were 
either washed before being placed in spirit, or were placed in spirit in 
the dark without being washed. The spirit was from the first of 96° or 
it was made weak (10°), and increased in 5 days to 96°. 

(2) Hardening in spirit either of 96° at once or by increased 
strengths as in No. 1. 

(3) Hardening in chromic acid. The preparations were placed for 
6 hours in a 0°1 per cent. solution, then for 48 hours in a 0°25 per 
cent. solution, and were afterwards hardened in spirit or in a mixture of 
Miiller’s fluid and spirit. 

(4) Hardening in 10 per cent. sublimate solution (8 days) with 
subsequent hardening in spirit which contained 0°5 per cent. iodine. 

The stains used were, borax-carmine, alum-carmine, with or without 
previous staining in Weigert’s hematoxylin solution, magenta-red, and 
Weigert’s method. Fresh preparations were coloured with methyl-green. 
In fresh preparations stained with methyl-green the ganglion-cells were 
on the whole well stained, their finer structure recognizable, and there 
was no evidence of pericellular spaces. In all the preparations treated 
by the above hardening methods the ganglion-cells were altered, (1) peri- 
cellular spaces appeared ; (2) vacuoles in the cell-substance ; (3) the cell 
contents did not show the same structure as in the fresh cells; (4) the 
susceptibility of the cell contents for dyes had become inconstant. On 
the whole the most satisfactory method seemed to be the sublimate 
process which was followed by iodized alcohol. 


Sublimate as a Hardening Medium for the Brain.tj—Herr A. 
Diomidoff hardens brains and cords in 7 per cent, watery sublimate 
solution. The preparations, which should not be larger than 1 ccm., are 
left in the solution not longer than five to nine days, and then passed 
through successively 50°, 70°, and 90° spirit. In each spirit the pre- 
paration remains about twenty-four hours, so that the whole hardening 
occupies about eight days. 

The chief point in the author’s paper consists in his observation 
that all hardening fluids which contain mercury salts alone or in com- 
bination with silver solutions, or solutions of the latter in combination 
with chromic or copper salts, produce after long action on nerve prepara- 


* Virchow’s Archiv, cvii. (1887) pp. 1-17. 
+ Wratsch, 1887, pp. 472-4. Cf. Zeitschr. f. Wiss, Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 499-500. 


832 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


tions, precipitates or albuminates which are indistinguishable from natural 
pigment, and for which they have been repeatedly mistaken. 

Preparations hardened in the above manner can be made into very 
thin sections, and are easily stained with anilin colours, but are not 
susceptible of being treated by Weigert’s haematoxylin method. Safranin 
stains the chromoleptic substance very beautifully. Over the freezing 
and aleohol hardening the sublimate alcohol method has the important 
advantage of not altering the contour of the cells. 

With regard to the pigment produced along the vessels and in the 
nerve-cells, it was found that it disappeared entirely therefrom after 
long immersion in warm distilled water. Alcohol and ether had no 
effect except to change the black into brown. Caustic potash dissolved 
in spirit or 25 per cent. acetic acid had no action. 25 per cent. nitric 
acid destroyed it slowly, while a 30 per cent. solution of iodide of 
potassium converted it into a yellow-brown, and the strong Lugol 
solution quite effaced it in five minutes. Cold distilled water dissolves 
it after several weeks. 

This artificial black pigment, according to the author, is either a 
compound of a metal and of albumen, or the result of a simple 
mechanical saturation of the tissue, probably the former. 


Preparation of Criodrilus lacuum.*—In his investigation into the 
structure of Criodrilus lacwwm Dr. A. Collin examined living specimens, 
and sections prepared with Jung’s microtome. Hardening was generally 
effected by a mixture of one part of corrosive sublimate and one part 
70 per cent. alcohol. The pieces were left in the mixture for from 
thirty minutes to one hour, according to their size. They were then 
placed in water or weak spirit for some time, dehydrated by alcohol and 
chloroform, and imbedded in paraffin. Neither chromic nor picric 
acids are adapted for hardening worms. Specimens were killed with 
chloroform, and died without any violent muscular contraction. The 
staining of the pieces was best effected by ammoniacal picrocarmine ; 
the sections were successfully stained by methylen-blue or borax- 
carmine with acetic acid ; the former coloured the ganglionic cells, and 
the latter the nuclei of the epithelia and of the connective tissue. 
Macerations were effected partly with Miiller’s solution and partly with 
potash. 


Method of Preparing Tegumentary Filaments of Flagellata.t— 
M. J. Kiinstler refers to the well-known fact that flagellate Infusoria, 
when treated with certain reagents, become covered with a variable, 
though often very considerable quantity of filaments, which are sometimes 
very long, and that an analogous phenomenon may be observed in ciliate 
Infusoria. In the latter, however, each filament is derived from a small 
refractive capsule, placed in the peripheral layer of the body. Till their 
homology shall be disproved all these processes may be called tricho- 
cysts. The best way to prepare them is to treat perfectly fresh speci- 
mens with concentrated osmic acid, so as to fix them, and then to colour 
them very slowly by diffusion by means of picrocarminate of ammonia. 
A less delicate method, by which one can at least determine whether or 
no a given species has trichocysts, is to fix a specimen with concentrated 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 474-5. 
+ Comptes Rendus, cvii. (1888) pp. 138-9. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 833 


osmic acid, and colour it with Collin-black acidulated by chromic acid to 
which glycerin has been added. 


New Method for making Microscopical Preparations from Test- 
tube Cultivations.*—Dr. R. Fisch] recommends the following procedure 
for obtaining microscopical preparations from test-tube cultivations :— 
By means of a cork-borer the central track is removed from the gelatin. 
This gelatin cylinder containing the micro-organisms is then placed for 
24-48 hours in 96 per cent. alcohol or in a mixture of equal parts of 
ether and alcohol, and then sectioned on a microtome between cork 
layers. The sections are then stained by Gram’s method, the micro- 
organisms alone retaining the stain. ‘The author has applied the 
foregoing to the examination of ferment-fungi with excellent results. 


Chitin Solvents.;—Mr. T. H. Morgan reports the results of experi- 
ments which he has made with chitin solvents. He followed a prescrip- 
tion recommended by Dr. Loob,} namely, Labaraque solution (potassium 
hypochlorite) and Javelle solution (the corresponding sodium com- 
pound). Mr. Morgan used the solutions successfully in two forms, 
strong as in the commercial fluid, weak when diluted from five to six 
times with water. In most cases the strong solution acts too rapidly 
and powerfully. The preparations after removal of the chitin were 
hardened in picro-sulphuric acid, corrosive sublimate, or different 
strengths of alcohol. The method was also used for specimens already 
hardened and preserved. The experiments seem to show that something 
else in the compound besides free chlorine is brought into play. 


Preparing Slides to show Brownian Movement.§—Prof. H. M. 
Whelpley says that permanent mounts to illustrate the phenomenon of 
pedesis are not difficult to make, “ provided, however, that the motion 
does not cease after a few days, as claimed by some authorities.” He 
has “no reason for doubting the statement of one writer, who says he 
has a mount six years old that shows the movement nicely and as well 
as it ever did.” Place a well-cleaned slide on the turntable and run 
a ring of cement on it about 0°5 mm. high. In warm weather, or in a 
warm room during winter, the cement will become sufficiently dry in 
a half hour to permit of finishing the mount. This is accomplished by 
placing in the cell a large drop of a liquid made by mixing carmine or 
other powders || with 100 times its volume of water, and placing in posi- 
tion a well-cleaned cover-glass. When the cover is pressed down, the 
superfluous liquid will be pressed out and the fresh cement will hold 
the cover firmly to the cell. The pressure reduces the depth of the cell 
to about 0°25 mm. The slides should be washed to remove any par- 
ticles of the powder that may have run out with the liquid and been 
deposited on the cover-glass. When dried it is ready for use, and such 
a mount, at least as far as the mechanical part is concerned, will last a 
lifetime. Hither white zinc cement or Brunswick black can be used. 


* Fortschr. d. Med., v. (1887) p. 653. 

+ Stud. Biol. Lab. Johns-Hopkins Univ., iv. (1888) pp. 217-9. 
ft See this Journal, 1885, p. 896. 

§ Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., ix (1888) pp. 125-7. 


|| Vermilion, cobalt, wood charcoal, indigo, camboge, pumice stone, carbonate of 
lead, glass. 


834 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Benpa, C.—Eine neue Hartungsmethode besonders fiir das Centralnervensystem. 
(A new hardening method especially for the central nervous system.) 
Centralbl. Med, Wiss., XX VI. (1888) p. 497. 
GirEson, J. vAN.—A Résumé of recent Technical Methods for the Nervous System. 
Journ, Nerv. and Mental Diseases, XIV. (1887) p. 310. 
Girrorp, J. W.—Preparations for High Powers. 
[Beale’s glycerin-carmine fluid—Gum and glycerin and glycerin jelly—Modifi- 
cation of Flemming’s chromo-aceto-osmic acid.] 
Journ. of Micr,, I. (1888) pp. 152-4. 
Kuen, L.—Beitrage zur Technik der mikroskopischen Dauerpriparate. (Contri- 
butions to the technique of permanent microscopical preparations.) 
MT. Bot. Vereins Freiburg, 1888, Nos. 49-50. 
Ru pDANOWwskI.—Making Microscopical Nerve Preparations by dividing the nerves 
into primitive bundles by chemical processes, and the latter into their component 
parts. Russhaja Medicina, 1887, No. 38 (Russian) 
WoopuEAD, G. S.—Method of preparation of large sections of the Lung. 
Brit. Med. Journ., 1888, p. 737. 


(3) Cutting, including Imbedding. 


Photoxylin for Imbedding.—Dr. Krysinski * suggests the use as an 
imbedding substance of photoxylin, a kind of pyroxylin used by Russian 
photographers, and which he considers superior to celloidin on account 
of its keeping without deterioration, and remaining clear in solution or 
mass. Mr. G. M. Beringer,f who has experimented in the production of 
photoxylin, finds that the following formula gives the best results:— 
Nitrous acid, 43° R., 34 lb. av.; sulphuric acid, 4} lb.; potassium 
nitrate, granular, 8 oz.; wood pulp, 4 oz. 

The nitrous and sulphuric acids are mixed in an earthenware crock 
and allowed to stand until the temperature has fallen to 90° F., when 
the potassium nitrate is added and thoroughly incorporated with the acid 
mixture. The wood pulp is then immediately immersed in the mixture 
and allowed to remain for twelve hours. It is then removed from the 
acid and thoroughly washed. 

The material thus obtained is quite soluble in equal parts of ether 
and absolute alcohol. For general work Krysinski recommends two 
solutions; a thin solution (1/2 to 1 per cent.), anda 5 percent. The 
specimen is placed from strong alcohol into the thin solution, to remain 
from twelve to twenty-four hours, when it is transferred to the thicker 
solution. To fix the specimen before cutting, it is only necessary to 
place it on a cork. A film soon spreads over the mass, which is then 
submerged in 70 per cent. alcohol, and after two or three hours is ready 
for sectioning. 


Paraffin-imbedding Process in Botany.{—Within a few months 
there have appeared two articles$ on this subject, and as Mr. D. H. 
Campbell has been devoting some attention to it lately, he thinks it may 
be of interest to state briefly the results obtained. It was found con- 
venient to combine to some extent the methods given in the articles 
referred to, as neither was found in all respects satisfactory, and some 
simplifications of the processes were made which were found advan- 
tageous. 


* Virchow’s Arch. f. Path. Anat. u. Hist., 1888. Cf. The Microscope, viii. (1888) 
p- 183. + Amer. Journ. Pharm., 1888. Cf. ibid. 

t Bot. Gazette, xiii. (1888) pp. 158-60. 

§ Schonland, 8., Bot. Centralbl., xxx. (1887) pp. 283-5. See this Journal, 1887, 
p. 680. Moll, Bot. Gazette, xiii. (1888) pp. 5-14. See this Journal, ante, p. 315. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 835 


The experiments were made upon the germinating macrospores and 
the young embryos of Pilularia globulifera, and the results obtained 
warrant a very strong recommendation of the imbedding process where 
the sectioning of very delicate tissues is necessary; indeed, when the 
results thus obtained are compared with the imperfect and uncertain 
methods ordinarily used in such work, no one who has used both will 
hesitate as to their comparative merits. With the firmer plant tissues 
there is usually no necessity for any imbedding process, and owing to the 
time and care necessary to successfully apply this method, it is not to be 
recommended in such cases. 

In regard to the best hardening agents, Schonland and Moll disagree, 
the former recommending alcohol, which Moll does not consider satis- 
factory, preferring chromic acid or the mixture of chromic, osmic, and 
acetic acids used by Flemming. There is no question that for many 
purposes absolute alcohol is to be preferred, owing to its convenience 
and the perfection with which it ordinarily preserves all plant tissues. 
With mixtures of chromic, picric, or osmic acid thorough washing is neces- 
sary after hardening ; but as Moll rightly remarks, where cuticularized 
cell-walls are present it is extremely difficult to get the paraffin to 
penetrate such membranes, whereas it is much easier where fixing solu- 
tions containing chromic acid are employed. A practical illustration of 
this was found in the very thick-walled macrospores of Pilularia. 

After the material is thoroughly hardened, and, in the case of alcoholic 
material, allowed to remain for twenty-four hours in borax-carmine, it is 
treated as described by Schonland. For the gradual transfer from 
30 per cent. to absolute alcohol the Schultz apparatus * was found most 
serviceable. 

The following method of imbedding was found practical and simple: 
—A small paper box is made by taking a strip of pretty firm paper and 
winding it tightly about an ordinary cylindrical cork, fastening the paper 
with a little gum arabic, and holding it in place with a pin until dry. 
On taking out the pin the paper cylinder can of course be slipped off the 
cork. ‘The box is completed by cutting out a round piece of paper of 
exactly the size of the cylinder, and putting this into the cylinder as the 
bottom of the box. The object to be imbedded is placed horizontally 
upon the bottom, and the melted paraffin poured over it, after which the 
whole is placed in a shallow flat-bottomed vessel filled with melted 
parafin. Thus there is no possibility of the parafiin’s escaping, which 
otherwise it is almost impossible to prevent, and there is also no neces- 
sity of handling the objects after they are once in the paraffin, which in 
the case of small objects is a great advantage. In case the objects are 
displaced in pouring the paraffin over them, it is a simple matter to adjust 
them, using a heated needle for this purpose. : 

In order to insure thorough saturation, the objects were usually left 
overnight in the melted paraffin, and then, as in the articles mentioned, 
quickly cooled to avoid the formation of bubbles. The vessel containing 
the paper boxes may be exposed to the air for a few minutes until a thin 
film has formed over the surface of the paraffin in the latter, when these 
may be quickly lifted out and plunged into cold water. As soon as the 
parafiin is thoroughly hard, the pasted seam in the paper cylinder may 
be loosened with the blade of a knife or scalpel, when it will be found 


* Strasburger, Bot. Prak., 2nd ed. 


836 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


that the paper separates readily from the inclosed paraffin, and on 
removing the bottom of the box in the same way the result is a solid 
cylindrical block of paraffin, with the object to be cut lying horizontally 
close to the smooth lower face, so that the sectioning is easily regulated. 

Schénland recommends parafiin with a melting-point of about 45° C., 
but the author found this much too soft to cut well, and prefers (as Moll 
recommends) a harder sort, melting at about 50°C. Schdnland again says 
that a temperature above 50° C. is to be avoided, but in no case has the 
author found that a temperature of 50°-55° C. was in the least degree 
hurtful. 

For sectioning the rocking microtome used by Schénland was em- 
ployed, and found in every way satisfactory. 

Moll describes fully the fixing processes, but the author’s experience 
has been that it is not desirable to hasten the staining process. Safranin 
was mainly used, and the best results were had by allowing the sections 
to remain for about twenty-four hours in a very dilute watery solution. 
At the end of this time they should be deeply stained. The slide is 
then plunged in absolute alcohol until the excess of the colour is re- 
moved, and when this is accomplished, and most of the alcohol has 
been removed from the slide with a cloth or blotting-paper, taking 
care of course not to touch the sections, a few drops of xylol are applied, 
and allowed to remain until the sections look perfectly transparent, 
when a drop of Canada balsam dissolved in xylol or chloroform may be 
applied, and a cover-glass put over the preparation, which is now 
complete. 

The employment of soft paraffin in order to make the sections adhere, 
as described by Schénland, is quite unnecessary, as the sections adhere 
perfectly without this; indeed, it is much easier to get a good ribbon of 
sections without the soft paraffin than with it, owing to the difficulty of 
perfectly removing the surplus soft paraffin. 


Further Notes on Celloidin Technique.*—Dr. 8. Apathy communi- 
cates some further instructions for manipulating celloidin by way of 
supplement to his previous paper.T 

(1) How to keep celloidin blocks.—If cork be used for sticking 
the celloidin blocks on, it must first be saturated with soft paraffin in 
order that the 70-80 per cent. spirit in which the object is to be pre- 
served may not be spoilt by the tannic acid. But as celloidin will not 
adhere to paraffin, the latter must be shaved off from one end, and then 
this end, together with the celloidin block which has been stuck on, is 
plunged for a second in some paraffin heated above its boiling point. In 
this way a block of celloidin can be kept even without spirit without any 
danger of its becoming dry. Sectioning must, of course, be done with a 
dry knife. The thin casing of paraffin, even if it does not fall off of itself, 
can be dissolved at once in bergamot oil, and offers no difficulty. If it 
be desired to discontinue making sections, it is only necessary to cover 
the exposed surface with a drop of paraffin. 

(2) Writing on celloidin.—Mark the bottom of the paper case in which 
the object is to be imbedded with a lead pencil. Then, when the paper 
case is stripped off from the block consolidated in 70-80 per cent. spirit, 
the writing will be found transferred to the celloidin, and in order to 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 45-9. 
t See this Journal, ante, p. 670. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 837 


preserve it there it is only necessary to brush over the surface a layer of 
thin celloidin. 

(3) Staining of the series.—The arrangement of unstained sections 
or of very small objects may be facilitated by adding to the bergamot oil 
a few drops of an alcoholic solution of safranin. The sections stained 
rose-colour are then easily visible. This staining of the celloidin dis- 
appears in a day or two, and in a few hours after exposure to sunlight. 
If now the series, which is placed on a slide, and from which the oil has 
been mopped up, is to be stained, the slide is placed in a capsule, on the 
bottom of which are a few drops of ether and absolute alcohol. The 
series clears up at once, and the celloidin is so far softened that it cleaves 
firmly to the slide. As soon as drops of ether and of absolute alcohol 
appear on the slide, it is at once removed to another capsule containing 
90 per cent. spirit, whereby the celloidin is hardened, and all trace of 
the bergamot oil removed. After a quarter of an hour the slide may 
be placed in any stain which is free from water or contains at least 70 per 
cent. spirit. If aqueous staining solutions are to be used, care must be 
taken that when exposed to the alcohol-ether vapour the celloidin sections 
overlap, or at least touch, so that the series may be treated as one large 
section. 

(4) Applying direction-lines to the celloidin block.—As a general 
rule, the sides of the block suffice as direction-lines, provided that the 
celloidin is distinguishable from the outline of the object. This dise 
tinction may be rendered more evident by adding to the fluid celloidin 
or to the bergamot oil a few drops of some pigment dissolved in 90 per 
cent. spirit, such as picrie acid or carmine, dyes which stain celloidin 
much more quickly than the object. 

If it be necessary that the position of an object should be very accu- 
rately determined, it is better to imbed in the celloidin a thin plate of 
gelatin and to arrange the object upon this. By this means there is in 
each section a fixed outline with fixed end-points, and for the purposes of 
plastic reconstruction leaves little to be desired as regards orientation. 

(5) Modification of the method of staining with hematoxylin and the 
chromic acid salts.—The author finds that a modification of Haidenhain’s 
method for staining celloidin series prevents the sections from becoming 
overstained and brittle. He now uses hematoxylin and the chromic salt 
in 1 per cent. solutions in 70-80 per cent. spirit. The bichromate 
solution is made by mixing 1 part of a 5 per cent. solution of bickro- 
mate of potash with 4 parts of 80-90 per cent. spirit. Not only must 
the solution be kept in the dark, but the object must be stained, treated 
with alcohol, and imbedded in the dark. 

Bruce’s Microtome for cutting whole sections of the Brain and 
other organs.—This instrument (fig. 153) was designed by Dr. A. Bruce 
to meet the requirements of those who wish to cut sections of 4 in. 
diameter and upwards. The construction was necessitated by the incon- 
veniences which were found to attach to large microtomes made after the 
manner of Rutherford’s microtome. The method of freezing adopted in 
Rutherford’s instrument is well adapted for freezing tissues of moderate 
size, where the freezing mixture is at a small distance from the tissue, 
but is quite unsuited for a tissue of 4 or 5 in. diam., where some part 
of the object to Le frozen would be at least 24 in. from the freezing 
mixture. 

In the new instrument freezing is effected by laying the object to be 

1888, 3.L 


838 SUMMARY OF OURKENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


frozen upon a zine plate A connected with metallic pillars, which are 
surrounded by a freezing mixture, as in the Williams microtome. In 
order that the plate may be quickly and effectively cooled to a tem- 
perature sufficient to freeze a tissue placed upon it, it is put in con- 


153. 


Fic. 


nection, not with one, but with twelve pillars, which rest upon the bottom 
of the freezing-box D, and are in close metallic contact with the plate. 
Tn order to further increase the effect of the freezing mixture, the pillars 
are made of a cruciform shape in their transverse section, as shown in 
fig. 154. The freezing mixture of ice and salt is passed between the 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 839 


pillars and against their arms, and this process is found so effective that 
tissues of 6 in. diam. and upwards, and half an inch in thickness, are 
frozen through in twenty minutes. Dr. Woodhead has made a further 
improvement in the method of freezing by placing a shallow box filled 
with a freezing mixture upon the plate. This box, the 
under side of which is immediately over the tissue to be Fie. 154. 
frozen, considerably accelerates the freezing process. ; 

The knife F is attached to a plate B, which slides in 
grooves in the “plough” EH, and is moved forward or 
backward by a screw. The capstan head is shown at G. 
As the knife is placed obliquely, it moves but a small 
distance vertically for each forward movemeni of the screw, 
so that a comparatively coarse screw is as efficient as a fine one would 
be if acting vertically. The plough is moved backwards and forwards 
by two handles, one of which is shown at H, travelling in the rails at C C. 
All the parts are made with “fitting strips,” as in a slide-rest, so that 
wear may be readily taken up. 

The dimensions of the apparatus are as follows:—Freezing-box, 
length 22 in., breadth 12 in., depth 8 in.; rails upon which the plough 
slides, 34 in. long and 13 in. wide; plough, 14 in. long and 8 in. high; 
knife, 9 in. on cutting face. 

The microtome is made by Mr. A. Frazer, scientific instrument 
maker, of Edinburgh. 


Thate’s New Microtome.*—Herr P. Thate has invented an immer- 
sion microtome which possesses advantages in its arrangement of the 
knife-carrier and circumvents certain difficulties inherent in the sliding 
microtome. It is fully represented in fig. 155. 

The three columns §, 8, §; are connected near their base by a trian- 
gular cast-iron piece. The pillar §, is hollowed out at the top, so that 
the arm A, about 50 cm. long, may be worked through the ball-joint. 
The columns §, 8; are joined by the arciform piece B, along the upper 
surface of which the end of the arm A, expanded at its extremity, works. 
The expanded end of A is supported on two hard steel knobs. The 
arm A is moved to and fro by the handle k. About 20 cm. from its 
tree end the piece A is perforated by a slit through which the tap of the 
binding-screw C projects, and by means of which the knife-carrier is 
clamped to the arm A. For this purpose the lower end of C is swallow- 
tailed, so that it may be pushed into a corresponding opening in the 
double piece D, and that when the binding-screw is tightened it is fixed 
to the arm A. The ends of D are gripped by the block E EH, joined 
together by a flat horizontal plate. To the under surface of E EH the 
ends of the knife are screwed, while through their upper extremities pass 
the screws binding EE to D. Consequently, by altering the screws in 
EE and the screw C, the knife can be placed in any desired position. 
The amount of vertical movement of the edge of the knife, which, of 
course, moves through part of a circle, is shown by the indicator at EH. 
F is the clamp for holding the specimen, and K the pan or well which 
contains the fluid, water, or spirit. The clamp and well are formed in 
one piece and fixed to the tube J, which in its turn passes through the 
block G, and is fixed in any position by the binding-screw S. The 
fine-adjustment of the block is effected by the micrometer-screw M, 


* Zeitschr. f. Instrumentenk., viii. (1888) pp. 176-7 (1 fig.}. 
3L 2 


840 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


which passes through G, and the latter in its turn is supported on an 
inclined plane formed by the bars L. Every raising of the block G, 
0:005 mm., is indicated by an audible click produced by the plate H. 
The last arrangement is ungeared by means of the handle h when the 


coarse-adjustment of the preparation is necessary. The pressure of the 
block G on the micrometer-screw is obviated by the counterpoise N 
suspended by a cord running over two rollers. 


Accessory for rapid Cutting with the Thoma Microtome.*—Herr 
J. Erdés has devised an arrangement for the Thoma microtome whereby 
the knife-carrier is set in motion by pedals, thus leaving both hands free 
to manipulate the sections, &e. This is claimed to be an improvement, as 
heretofore the right hand was employed in moving the knife along, &e., 
while the left was used merely for preventing the section from rolling up. 

A plate about 14 cm. in diameter, and perforated by a hole in its 
centre, is fixed to the knife-carrier by means of its binding-screw. 
Either end is terminated by a small hook. These hooks are connected 
with cords which run over pulleys (see fig. 156) to pedals. On the end 
of the microtome farthest from the pulleys, the cord runs over two 
pulleys, on the nearer side over one. Both cords then pass over another 
pair of pulleys which are fixed to the edge of the table, and then pass 
down to the pedals. 


It is advised to fix the microtome to the table by means of strips of 


* Internat. Monatsehr. f. Anat. u. Hist., ii. (1885) pp. 343-6 (1 fig.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 841 


wood nailed to the table round the instrument, so that it cannot move 
while being worked. 
The sections are prevented from rolling up by fixing in the joint of 


Fie. 156. 


the object-holder a camel’s-hair brush, so that the latter just touches the 
surface of the section or the paraffin. 


New Section-stretcher, with arrangements for removing the Sec- 
tion.*—Prof. H. Strasser describes a device invented by him for keeping 
sections straight and causing them at the same time to adhere to a paper 
band which is one of the principal parts of the apparatus. Over the object 
and the knife-blade a paper band is arranged parallel to the long axis of 
the microtome. One end is clamped to the object-holder, and the other 
kept taut by a weight connected with the band by a cord running over a 
roller. The band is made to just touch the surface of the object by 
means of a metal roller of 1 to 15. cm. in diameter. The roller can be 
placed in any position by means of a universal joint, and it is made to 
move up and down in the same groove as the knife-carrier, by means of 
a similar carrier. The roller is then adjusted parallel to the edge of the 
knife, and thus the section is kept from curling up by the superjacent 


* Zeitschr f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 218-9. 


842 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


pressure. The under surface of the paper band is rendered adhesive by 
means of gum and collodion, and thus by each action of the knife a new 
section is placed in position along the band, the front end of which must 
be snipped off to remove the piece carrying the section, and then 
reclamped. 


BautTzar, G. and E. ZIMMERMANN.—Microtom mit festem Messer und selbst- 
thaitigem Vorschub des Objekts. (Microtome with fixed knife and automatic 
movement of the object.) German Patent, Kl. 42, No. 1431, 1888. 


[Manron, W. P., and others.}—Modern Methods of Imbedding. 
The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 181-4. 


Srowerwu, C. H.—Thin Sections. The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 175. 


(4) Staining and Injecting. 


Double-staining of Nucleated Blood-corpuscles.*—Dr. W. M. Gray 
gives the following directions:—Spread a thin layer of blood on a 
clean slide and dry. Immerse the slide in a beaker of alum-carmine 
(Grenacher’s formula) for five minutes; wash in clean water, and 
immerse in a beaker of a weak solution of sulph-indigotate of soda or 
potash (the solution should be of a dark-blue colour—not black-blue, as 
in a strong solution). After the slide has acquired a purplish hue, wash 
in water and dry. After drying, warm slightly and mount in balsam. 
The nuclei will be a beautiful red, and the protoplasm a greenish 
blue. 


Vital Methylen-blue Reaction of Cell-granules.j—If the larve of 
the frog or triton, says Dr. O. Schultze, be placed in a watery solution 
of pure methylen-blue, of the strength of 1:100,000-1,000,000, after 
twenty-four hours, certain granules in the cells of the cutaneous epithelium 
become stained with the weakest solution ; the staining is confined to 
a small spot close to the pylorus which to the naked eye resembles a 
small blue ring. When the strongest solution is used for eight days, 
all the parts become of a deep blue colour. The pigment is absorbed by 
certain granules within the cells and causes them to swell up. These 
are identical with Altmann’s bioblasts. These granules are not stained, 
or at any rate very slightly, when the dye is introduced through the 
blood-current, while, on the other hand, in larve living in the blue 
solution, the nerves are not stained. If the larve be removed from the 
blue solution to pure water all trace of the pigment disappears in 
eight days. 


Differential Staining of the Tissues of Living Animals.{—M. A. 
Pilliet has found that, by a simple subcutaneous or intra-peritoneal 
injection of methyl-blue, in rats, guinea-pigs, and other small animals, 
the entire kidney and some other organs are stained a diffused blue. 
By mixing the same material (methyl-blue) with the food of rats and 
guinea-pigs, only the glomerules of the kidneys were stained. If, 
instead of blue, fuchsin be used, the entire kidney becomes stained a 
vinous red, which, under section, however, shows the glomerules and 


* Queen’s Micr. Bulletin, v. (1888) p. 15. 

t Anat. Anzcig., ii. (1887) pp. 684-8. 
_ St. Louis Med. and Surg. Journ., lv. (1888) pp. 28-9 from ‘ Progrés Médical.’ 
Cf. also Journ. de Microgn, xii. (1888) pp. 285-90. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 843 


epithelial nuclei to have taken a much deeper colour than the balance of 
the structures. So marked was this in the experiments of the author, 
that in perfectly fresh sections these were very sharply and neatly 
differentiated. 

A very remarkable fact was brought out in the course of Pilliet’s 
experiments, viz. that when methyl-blue is introduced intra-peritoneally 
into guinea-pigs, the glomerule is stained a rose-carmine. When 
frogs were placed in an aqueous solution of methyl-blue, so weak 
that they could live in it several days, it was found that while the 
balance of the tissues were stained a diffused blue the glomerules showed 
a colour varying from rose-carmine, or rose-red, to ochre-yellow, the 
nuclei being more strongly tinted than the balance of the cell. In rats 
in which the blue had been intraperitoneally introduced, the blue was 
changed to red only on the surface of the glomerule. From these 
experiments it follows that in certain cases the glomerule possesses a 
peculiar oxidizing property in a high degree, since methyl-blue is a sub- 
stance relatively refractory to oxidation. The significance of this 
discovery is that, in the kidney, the capillary circulation of the 
glomerules contains a large quantity of oxygenated blood, a fact which 
demonstrates the organ to be a true reducing apparatus and not simply 
a filter. We know that in the Reptilia the dark-blood returning 
from the tail is collected by a voluminous vein and carried to the 
glomerule, from which it departs, vid the renal vein, not as black 
but as red blood. The kidney in this becomes a true reducing appa- 
ratus, partaking in this respect in the functions of the lung. The 
experiment of Ehrlich in this direction, made some three years ago, 
demonstrated these facts in a beautifully exact manner. By introducing 
intravenously into the system two substances, the combination of which 
gave rise to a coloured produce (indo-phenol), and which combination 
could take place only where oxygen existed in exceedingly feeble 
quantity, he arrived at a very exact knowledge of the degree of oxida- 
tion existing in any organ or part. In a similar manner, conversely, by 
using substances easily reducible (alizarine-blue, for instance), a scale 
of oxygenation may be arrived at. He thus demonstrated the scale of 
reductive power of the lungs, the cortical substance of the kidney, the 
mucous membrane of the stomach, &c. Later he established the same 
functions in the muscles, the liver, glands, &c. 


Staining-differences of Unstriped Muscle and Connective Tissue 
Fibres.*—For distinguishing between smooth muscle-fibres and spindle- 
shaped connective tissue-cells, M. E. Rotterer recommends the following 
procedure. The fresh preparation is placed for 24 hours in a mixture 
of 10 vols. 86° alcohol, and 1 vol. formic acid. The hardening fluid is 
then quite extracted in water, after which the piece is treated with gum 
and spirit and then sectioned. The sections are stained for 36 hours in 
Grenacher’s alum-carmine, and having been thoroughly washed, mounted 
in glycerin or balsam. The protoplasm of the unstriped muscle-fibres 
then appears red, the nucleus having a darker tinge. The cell contour 
is quite sharp. Connective tissue is quite colourless or rose-coloured, 
the cells are swollen, and their boundaries ill-defined. From this the 
author concludes “that the contractile protoplasm of unstriped muscle 
is not the same as that of connective tissue.” 


* Comptes Rend. Soc. Biol., iv. (1887) p. 645. 


844 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Improvements in the Silver-nitrate Method for Staining Nervous 
Tissue.*—Dr. C. Martinotti obtains the silver-nitrate reaction in large 
pieces of tissue, e.g. pons Varolii, by altering Golgi’s method as 
follows :—(1) The quantity of silver-nitrate is increased relatively to 
the size of the object. (2) The solution is allowed to act for 13-30 
days. (3) The pieces are kept at a temperature of 25°, in order that 
the reaction may reach the ganglion cells, but in order that all the cells 
of the neuroglia should participate in the reaction, a temperature of 
35°-40° is necessary. 

If 5 per cent. of glycerin be added to the solution, the reaction in 
the ganglion cells and their ramifications is facilitated. In order to 
prevent precipitates forming at the periphery of the pieces, these were 
imbedded in a mass made out of filter paper and distilled water after 
the objects had been taken out of Miiller’s fluid. This artifice was 
found to increase the contraction of the silver nitrate solution. 


Staining in the Study of Bone Development.j—Dr. J. Schaffer in 
a large and diffuse article recapitulates the various stains which have 
been recommended from time to time for staining cartilage in the tran- 
sition stage to bone so as to differentiate the osseous and cartilaginous 
elements. The method upon which the author dilates most was invented 
by Bouma, who found that safranin imparted a yellow colour to the 
cartilage, while the connective and osseous tissues appeared red. This 
yellow stain was supposed by Bouma to be due to the fact that safranin 
is not a chemically pure substance, and starting from this observation, 
the author proceeded to examine the relative staining capacities of several 
kinds of safranin in watery solution (1:2000). (1) The commercial. 
(2) Pheno-safranin a chemically pure dye. (3) Tetraethyl-pheno- 
safranin, a substance which contains NaCl. The commercial safranin 
gave the best differentiation, cartilage orange, bone colourless, medullary 
tissue red. The pheno-safranin gave similar but less marked results. 
The tetraethyl-phenosafranin stained the cartilage red-violet, the bone 
and medullary tissue blue. The author then gives his method for 
fixing the stain, a 1 : 2000 watery solution of safranin. 

The unstained sections, decalcified in nitric acid or in hydrochloric 
acid and salt solution, are placed for half an hour in the safranin solu- 
tion. They are then washed in water and transferred for 2 to 3 hours 
to 1/10 per cent. sublimate solution and mounted in glycerin. If, 
however, the preparations are to be fixed up permanently, the sections 
on being removed from the sublimate solution must be passed rapidly 
through alcohol, dried upon the slide with bibulous paper, and left for a 
long time in oil of cloves or bergamot. They are then mounted in 
xylol balsam. 


Preparing and Staining Mammalian Testicle.t — For hardening 
the mammalian testicle, Dr. A. Prenant found that osmic acid and 
Flemming’s fluid were the best media, Kleinenberg’s picro-sulphuric 
acid, nitric acid, strong oxalic acid, absolute alcohol, 3 and 4 per cent. 
bichromate of potash being less effective. A 1 per cent. solution of 
osmic acid acting for one to two hours gave the best results. Of the 


* Congresso Medico di Pavia, Seduta 6a, Riforma Med., 12 Ott., 1887. Cf. 
Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., vy. (1888) p. 88. 

t Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 1-19. 

} Internat. Monatsschr. f. Anat. u. Physiol., iv. (1887) pp. 358-70. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 845 


various “ Flemming” solutions tried, that which contained most osmic 
acid was the most successful. The preparations were then soaked in 
chloroform and imbedded in paraffin and then sectioned in a Dumaige 
microtome. The sections were fixed to the slide with a mixture of equal 
parts of albumen and glycerin. The stains used were safranin, hema- 
toxylin, hematoxylin-eosin, acid carmine, picro-carmine, and gentian- 
violet. These dyes all acted very slowly on preparations treated with 
the Flemming solutions, but very quickly on those fixed in osmic acid. 

Bizzozero’s method was employed for staining the nucleus, safranin 
being found to be quite as good as gentian-violet for this purpose, pro- 
vided that the iodine solution were allowed to act more effectually, and 
the spirit less powerfully. 


Stain for the Morphological Elements in Urine.*—Dr. F. L. James 
has hitherto recommended for this purpose the ordinary aqueous solution 
of eosin. It acts rapidly, and but a small amount is needed to give all 
the elements so decided a tinge that the most delicate hyaline cast will 
rarely escape the practical eye. He recently made a solution of boro- 
eosin, and after a number of experiments with it, much prefers it for this 
purpose to the simple aqueous solution above referred to. The new 
stain acts more rapidly, and imparts a deeper and richer tinge to the 
elements. In nucleated elements the nuclei take the stain in a much 
more intense degree than does the balance of the structure, and as a con- 
sequence, are clearly and sharply differentially stained by it. As to its 
lasting properties, it is yet too early to speak, but it is reasonable to 
suppose that it will be quite as permanent as the stain made with the 
aqueous solution of eosin. This, however, is a secondary consideration, 
as the chief value of the stain is the rapidity and the ease with which it 
enables us to find otherwise difficult objects. The formula for boro-eosin 
is as follows :—Kosin, 10 parts; sodium biborate in powder, 15 parts; 
alcohol of 95°, 60 parts ; distilled water, 415 parts. Dissolve the borax 
in half of the water. Add the alcohol to the remainder of the water, 
dissolve the eosin in the mixture, mix the two solutions and filter. 

In using it allow the urine to.stand in a conical glass until the 
suspended elements have in a great measure subsided. The clear 
supernatant fluid is siphoned, or otherwise drawn off and the stain 
added to the remainder. A few drops of perosmic acid solution is 
added at the same time. This gives the urine a dark or almost black 
appearance by direct light, but when examined with transmitted light, the 
colour is a deep rich ruby. A drop withdrawn and examined within a 
half hour after adding the stains will show all the elements well coloured, 
the epithelia and granular casts especially so. The hyaline casts will be 
sufficiently coloured to be very distinct, but require more time for 
thorough staining. Permanent mounts of urine thus prepared will last 
a long time without deterioration, but for preservation the author 
advises the use of glycerin. 


Staining Spores.f—Dr. G. Hauser recommends the following method 
for staining spores. ‘The cover-glass is passed thrice through the flame 
in the usual manner, and is then covered with a strongish watery 
solution of fuchsin. The cover-glass is then passed through the flame 
forty or fifty times until the stain evaporates or even simmers, If 


* St. Louis Med. and Surg. Journ., lv. (1888) pp. 98-9. 
+ Miinchener Med. Wochensehr., 1887, p. 654. 


846 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


evaporation takes place too quickly, more stain must be dropped on. 
The preparation is then decolorized for a few seconds in 25 per cent. 
sulphuric acid. The acid is washed out with water, and the preparation 
after stained with a weak solution of methylen blue. The time required 
for the whole manipulation is not more than five minutes. 


Staining Tubercle and Leprosy Bacilli.*—Prof. N. Liibimoff recom- 
mends the following solution for staining the bacilli of tubercle and 
leprosy. It is called borofuchsin, and consists of fuchsin, 0°5 gr. ; 
boracic acid, 0°5 gr.; absolute alcohol, 15 cm.; distilled water, 
20 em. It is made by first mixing the boracic acid and water, then 
adding the spirit, and finally the fuchsin. The latter dissolves gradually 
on agitation. 

Thus prepared, the staining fluid has a slightly acid reaction, is 
transparent, clear, and as it does not deteriorate by keeping, is always 
ready for use. Cover-glass preparations of phthisical sputum are 
stained in 1-2 minutes. Sulphuric acid in the proportion of 1-5 is used 
for decolorizing, the cover-glasses are then washed in spirit, and then 
immersed for 14 minute in a saturated alcoholic solution of methylen 
blue. The superfluous stain is washed off with water, and the cover-glass 
dried. It is advised to examine the preparation in Ol. ligni cedri, or in 
xylol balsam. Sections are treated in exactly the same way, but it is 
preferable to stain twenty-four hours in the borofuchsin. The author 
notes that lepra bacilli are much more easily and rapidly decolorized 
than tubercle bacilli. 


Alcoholic Solution of Hematoxylin.t—Dr. G. Cuccati gives the 
following formula for making a hematoxylin solution which possesses 
the advantages of never going bad, and of staining only the chromatic 
part of the uuclei, the colour being fixed most deeply in the karyokinetic 
figures. 

Z Dissolve 25 grm. of pure iodide of potassium in 25 cem. of distilled 
water, and pour the mixture into a glass-stoppered bottle containing 
75 ecm. absolute alcohol, shaking the while repeatedly. 

Then grind together in a mortar 75 cgrm. of hematoxylin crystals 
and 6 grm. of alum. When these are intimately mixed, add 3 ccm. of 
the iodide solution. Keeping the mixture well stirred, add little by 
little the rest of the solution, and then pour into a well-stoppered bottle, 
and leave for 10-15 days. At the end of this period shake up well 
again, and in an hour or two afterwards filter and preserve the filtrate 
very carefully to prevent evaporation and deposit of alum or iodide 
crystals. 

This solution only stains up to a certain point, consequently the 
sections may be left in it almost indefinitely. 


Osmic Acid and Gold chloride Methods.j—Dr. A. Kolossow says 
that the penetrating power of osmic acid, which is intrinsically almost 
nil, may be increased by a mixture of the acid with uranium salts. The 
author prepares a 0°5 per cent. solution of osmic acid in a 2 to 3 per 
cent. solution of nitrate or acetate of uranium (the former is the better). 
Large pieces of an object, for example a frog’s tongue cut into two or 
three pieces, are easily penetrated by this mixture, wherein they may 


* Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 540-3. 
+ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 55-6. ¢ Tbid., pp. 50-3. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 847 


remain for 16, 24, 48 hours without becoming brittle, and only being 
stained a yellowish-brown colour, except the myelin, which is almost 
black, the medullated fibres and their endings are clearly seen. The 
author says that he has had quite satisfactory results with Meissner’s and 
Grandry’s corpuscles. The objects fixed by the foregoing solution should 
be well soaked in water, and after-hardened in absolute alcohol. 

The author also gives the following procedure for treating con- 
nective tissue formations with gold chloride. The objects are placed for 
two, three, or more hours in a 1 per cent. chloride solution, acidulated 
with hydrochloric acid (100:1). After having been washed they are 
placed in the dark in a 1/50-1/100 per cent. solution of chromic acid 
for reduction. Though reduction may not at this stage be perfect, it is 
completed later on in oil of cloves, and the preparation is then mounted 
in balsam. The more carefully the chromic acid is washed out the 
clearer the picture is. 'The non-medullated nerve-fibres and their rami- 
fications are stained almost black. The connective tissue cells appear 
just as distinctly, while the intercellular substance of the connective 
tissue is unstained. Muscle-fibres, striped and unstriped, are stained 
a greenish-blue colour. The author states that this method is almost 
always certain. 


Phenol in Microscopical Technique.*— When sections imbedded in 
paraffin curl up and are placed in turpentine oil it is found extremely 
difficult to flatten them without breaking them. This inconvenience, 
says Signor HE. Aievoli, may be remedied in the following manner :—the 
sections are immersed for 15-30 minutes in benzin or turpentine oil, 
and are then transferred to pure fluid phenol, wherein the sections unroll 
themselves and come to the surface of the fluid. The carbolic acid does 
not damage the tissue structure, even if the sections be left in it for 
twenty-four hours. The sections are then treated in the usual manner. 

The author found great advantage in staining tissues en masse with 
a carmine solution prepared in the following manner:—One grm. of 
carmine is dissolved in 100 ccm. of hot water, and then 7 grm. of powdered 
carbolate of soda are added. The solution is kept stirred for 30-40 
minutes and filtered when coid. In this solution large pieces of tissue 
may be stained in twenty-four hours. They are then transferred to 
acidulated (1 per cent.) spirit for some hours. This method is stated to 
give stronger and clearer colouring to the nuclei than other carmine 
solutions. It is also especially suitable for tissues which have been 
fixed with sublimate or absolute alcohol. 


Double Staining.|—Dr. J. H. List states that the double stains re- 
commended by him for epithelia, glands, and cartilage have undergone 
the test of time, the preparations retaining the beauty of the stain after 
a lapse of four years. (For the original methods see this Journal, 1885, 
p- 902.) In his present note the author mentions again eosin-methyl-green 
for epithelium, glands, and cartilage, and hematoxylin-eosin for glands 
and retina. With this stain it is absolutely necessary that objects 
hardened in acids should be thoroughly washed to remove all traces of 
the acid, otherwise a precipitate may form on the preparation. 

Bismarck brown (Weigert’s formula) gave excellent results with 
Invertebrates (connective tissue of molluscs), and rosanilin nitrate was 


* Rivista Internaz. Med. e Chirurg. Napoli, iv. pp. 101-4. 
+ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 53-4. 


818 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


very effective for differentiating, for the nuclei of wandering leucocytes 
and for the mitoses in epithelia. 


Hardening and Staining Plate-cultivations.*— Dr. E. Jacobi 
hardens and stains plate-cultivations by putting the plates in flat vessels 
and pouring over them a 1 per cent. solution of bichromate of potash, 
which is allowed to act for three days in the light. If the thin gelatin 
layer does not detach itself it can be easily removed with a knife. Then 
follows twenty-four hours’ soaking in water and afterwards hardening in 
50 per cent. and 70 per cent. spirit. From this small pieces of the 
gelatin, which are treated just like sections, are stained with Léfiler’s 
alkaline methylen-blue and afterwards washed in very dilute acetic acid, 
then placed in absolute alcohol, removed to the slide, where they are 
cleared up in xylol or in turpentine oil, and then mounted in Canada 
balsam. <A leaden weight placed over the cover-glass serves to keep the 
specimen flat. Anilin-water-safranin or Gram’s method may be used 
for staining. Experiments with agar plates were unsuccessful. Photo- 
grams obtained from these specimens coloured red or blue, the latter 
from orthochromatic plates, were satisfactory. 


Injection Mass for the Vessels of the Spleen.j—Dr. H. Hoyer 
prepares a mass for injecting the vessels of the spleen in the following 
manner :—5 grm. of Berlin blue made up with oil (obtained from artists’ 
colourmen in zinc tubes) are rubbed up in a mortar with 5 grm. of in- 
spissated linseed oil. To this are then gradually added about 30 grams 
of some essential oil which is easily soluble in alcohol and has little 
action on the tissues round about the vessels (e.g. oil of lavender, 
fennel, thyme, rosemary) until a syrupy fluid is produced. It is then 
poured into a well-stoppered glass vessel and allowed to stand for 
twenty-four hours, when the supernatant fluid is poured off from the 
sediment. This blue fluid may then be preserved for an indefinite time, 
but if it has stood for a few days it is necessary to shake it up before 
using it. This must also be done if other than blue pigments be used, 
for example, chrome yellow, with which very satisfactory results are 
obtainable, the splenic capillaries appearing greyish-yellow by trans- 
mitted, bright yellow with reflected light. 

The cannula is best filled with the injection mass by pouring the 
latter in at the end. Injection of the spleen must be carried out very 
slowly and at a very low pressure, and should be suspended when the 
surface arteries become visibly coloured, and if the venous side be in- 
jected when the whole organ shows the stain and before any actual 
swelling is observable. The preparation is then placed for twenty-four 
hours in strong spirit or absolute alcohol in order to dissolve the essen- 
tial oil and to precipitate the pigment on the inner surface of the walls of 
the vessels. The organ may then be sectioned, stained, and mounted in 
the usual way. 

This mass may be used for any other organ or tissue difficult of 
injection, as, for example, the marrow of bone. 


Injection with Indian Ink.{—I’rof. K. Taguchi recommends, from 
nine years’ experience, the use of Indian or Chinese ink for cold 
injections. The colouring matter is not affected by light or chemical 

Ceutralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 536-8. 


* 
+ Internat. Monatsschr. f, Anat. u. Physiol., iv. (1887) pp. 341-57. 
~ Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxxi. (1888) pp. 565-7 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 849 


action, the carbon particles do not change the tissues outside the vessels, 
the material adheres so firmly to the walls of the vessels that it does not 
flow out on the surface of sections, the preparations may be hardened in 
alcohol, chromic acid, &c., without losing colour, and they may be 
examined fresh in glycerin. The sections may be afterwards stained 
with any colour. 

A medium quality of black ink is chosen, Japanese rather than 
Chinese; it is rubbed down in water till the fluid is such that when 
dropped on thin blotting-paper it coheres, and forms no grey ring 
round the drops. The mode of using 
the fluid is in no way peculiar. Until 
the preparation is hardened there must 
be no contact of the section with water. 
Some sections are figured to show the 
success of this injection. 


Beck's Microsyringe.* — Prof. M. 
Flesch recommends Dr. G. Beck’s 
apparatus for minute injection. It isa 
small syringe, the piston-rod of which 
is worked by a cog-wheel arrange- 
ment, and can consequently be used for 
aspiration as well as injection without 
a change of hands being necessary. It 
is so made that the cannula needle fits 
on quite flush, thus preventing the in- 
closure of air-bubbles. In the original 
form the cannula screwed on, but this 
has been found to be quite unnecessary. 
The graduation, marked on the piston- 
rod, is accurate enough to allow about 
10 cem. of a fluid to be injected at one 
time. The piston washer is made of 
felt and not of leather. As this 
material does not become hard when heated the syringe can be disin- 
fected in an oil-bath at 150° C. without damage. 

The syringe itself and the method of working it are shown in the 
illustration (fig. 157). 


Barsnsxi, A.—Zur Farbung des Actinomyces. (On staining Actinomyces.) 
Deutsch. Med. Wochenschr., 1887, p. 1065. 
Dvurpuri, G. N.—Beitrag zur physiologischen Methylenblaureaction. (Contri- 
bution to the physiological reaction of methyl-blue.) 
Deutsch. Med. Wochenschr., XXVI. (1888) p. 518. 
GIESON, J. VAN.—The Brain-cortex stained by Golgi’s method. 
New York Med. Rec., XX XIII. (1887) p. 283. 
GunTHeR.—Die schnellste Methode zur Farbung von Tuberkelbacillen. (The 
quickest method for staining tubercle bacilli.) 
Wiener Klin. Wochenschr., 1888, pp. 292-3. 
NicKkeEuL, E.—Die Farbenreactionen der Kohlenstoffverbindungen. 1. Farbenreac- 
tionen mit aromatischen Charakter. (The colour reactions of carbon combina- 
tions. I. Colour reactions of an aromatic character.) 
Tnuugural diss., 42 pp. 8vo, Berlin, 1888. 
Nort, T. E.—Staining of Tubercle Bacilli. 
Atlanta Med. and Surg. Journ., 1888, pp. 200-2. 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 43-5 (1 fig.). 


850 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


TAnzeER, P.—Ueber die Unna’sche Farbungsmethode der elastischen Fasern der 
Haut. (On Unna’s staining method for the elastic fibres of the skin.) 
Monatsschr. f. Prak. Dermatol., VI. (1887) No. 9. 
UnGanr.—veber Farbung von Spermatozoen. (On staining spermatozoa.) 
Verh. Naturhist. Vereins. Preuss. Rheinlande, XLII1. (1887) SB. p. 3038. 
Upson, H. S.—Die Carminfarbung fiir Nervengewebe. (Carmine staining for 
nerve-tissue.) Neurol. Centralbl., VIIL. (1888) pp. 319 and 320. 


(5) Mounting, including Slides, Preservative Fluids, &c. 


Continuous Centering of a Cover-glass.*—The Rev. J. L. 
Zabriskie finds that a very satisfactory method for the continuous 
centering of a cover-glass, for subsequent operations with the self- 
centering turntable, with either a glycerin or a balsam mount, when no 
cell is employed, is to run a very delicate ring of india-ink with a fine 
pen upon the upper, or clean side of the glass slip, while the slip is 
revolving upon the turntable, and 1/32 in. larger than the cover about 
to be used, as the first step in the operation of mounting. 

He has heard of such rings being employed on the under side of the 
slip. But very few of the latter are such accurate parallelograms that 
a ring on the under side will be central for the upper side, because, when 
the slip is turned over, it is liable to be held on the turntable by the 
pair of diagonal corners, which were not employed in the first instance. 
And moreover, when the ring is run on the under side the thickness of 
even a thin slip renders difficult the subsequent centering of a cover 
by sight. 

J If the ring of ink is run on the clean side of the slip it is accurately 
centered for each subsequent operation; the cover can be centered 
within it accurately without returning to the turntable, and if the 
application of a spring-clip causes the cover to slide, the latter can still 
be immediately readjusted by sight. 

The india-ink dries at once, and does not, as might be supposed, 
cause any practical difficulty by running in under the cover-glass. In 
case of a glycerin mount, if there is excess of glycerin around the cover, 
a small stream of cold water, used to wash away the excess glycerin, 
also instantly carries away the ring of ink. If there is no excess of 
glycerin the ring of ink may be left, and it will be entirely hidden by 
the sealing of the mount, if any dark-coloured cement is used. In case 
of a balsam mount the ring of ink will be scraped away when cleaning 
the slide, or if there is no excess of balsam, it may be quickly removed, 
when the mount has hardened, by the moisture of the breath and gentle 
rubbing with a handkerchief. 


Steinach’s Filter-capsulej—Dr. E. Steinach has devised an 
apparatus for aiding certain manipulations in microscopical technique. 
It is a glass filter-capsule, and consists of a small round pan 4 cm. high 
and 6 em. in diam. (figs. 158 and 159). Its floor is about 2 to 3 mm. 
thick, is slightly deepened towards the centre, and perforated by numerous 
funnel-shaped holes, the small ends of which are uppermost. The holes 
in the bottom of the sieve may vary in size as required, but as usually 
made are just capable of allowing a fine needle to pass through (about 
1/2 to 1 mm.). The sieves are of two kinds, according as they are 
supported on feet or not. ‘I'he sieve or filter-capsule is placed within 


= Journ. New York Mier. Soc., iv. (1888) pp. 159-60. 
+ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 433 -8 (2 figs.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 851 


an outer pan which is supplied with a lid. This external glass capsule 
is of course somewhat larger than the inner or filter capsule, and its 


Fic. 158. Fic. 159. 


ll 
7 


measurements are about 9 cm. in diam., and 6 cm. high. By means of 
this apparatus, preparations are washed, stained, decolorized or dehy- 
drated, &c., by placing the section in the inner pan, and the fluid in the 
outer, and when the latter has acted sufficiently, the inner pan is merely 
lifted out, and having been allowed to drain is placed within another pan 
containing the next reagent and so on. When the reagent is expensive 
it is advisable to use the filter-capsule without lezs. When required for 
removing all traces of acid from preparations, the apparatus is used as an 
irrigator. 


Apparatus for inclosing microscopical preparations of botanical 
objects mounted in glycerin.*—Dr. M. Kronfeld has devised an 
apparatus for facilitating the inclosure of preparations with turpentine 
resin when these preparations are mounted in glycerin and a square 
cover-glass is used. ‘The tool used for laying on the resin is a triangular 


instrument made of wire. The resin is applied by heating the layer-on 
in the flame of a spirit-lamp or gas-jet, and it is to obviate the incon- 
venience of having the several apparatus required for this purpose in 
different places that he has brought them together. 

U (fig. 160) is a tray resting on 4 feet F'; its edges R are turned up 
and it is provided with a handle G. It carries two circular filletings in 
which the spirit-lamp L, and the resin-box H fit. On the side are two 
clips T T in which the laying-on tool A, with a wooden handle, rests. 


* Bot. Centralbl., xxxiv. (1888) pp. 345-6 (1 fig.). 


852 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


The spirit-lamp is a metal box filled with tow, and covered with wire 
gauze. 


Preservation of Plants in Spirit and the Prevention of Browning.* 
—Dr. H. de Vries describes the following methods for preserving 
vegetable tissues in spirit and for the prevention of browning. 

As the cause of the browning must be sought in certain uncoloured 
matters present in the cell-juices, and which by oxidation become 
brown, it follows that the first object is to remove these substances from 
the preparations before they become oxidized. It has long been known 
that many leaves become less darkly coloured, if, before the death of the 
cell, the air be removed (by means of the air-pump or boiling), 

Boiling in water and then placing the preparation afterwards in cold 
spirit frequently gives satisfactory results, e.g. in Viscus albus. An 
excellent method is to boil the parts of the plants in spirit. Leaves of 
rhododendron, Viscus, Aucuba, which are only immersed for five minutes 
in boiling spirit, become quite decolorized afterwards, a result which, at 
any rate in Aucuba, can be attained in no other way. 

Another method which, with the exception of Aucuba, gave excellent 
results, is to kill the plants in spirit to which about 2 per cent. hydro- 
chloric, sulphuric, or acetic acid has been added. The preparations are 
kept in this fluid for several months and then transferred to spirit 
without acid. This is remov:d from time to time until all the colouring 
matter has been removed. The long stay in the acid fluid does not at 
all injure the plants as they are just as useful for microscopical purposes 
as fresh or otherwise preserved organs. Even the crystals of oxalate of 
lime are not dissolved by the mixture of spirit and hydrochloric acid, 
although they are when the acid is mixed with water. In this way 
completely decolorized preparations of Monotropa and Orobanche can be 
obtained, and this fluid will also prevent Boletus from becoming blue. 

As the oxidation products are partly insoluble in acid alcohol, organs 
do not become thoroughly decolorized by the fluid; thus the bracts of 
Plantago lanceolata retain their colour, and in unripe fruits the places 
where the flowering parts were attached can still be recognized, because 
these parts were dead before they came into the acid spirit. 

The decoloration of preparations which have already become brown 
can only be effected by oxidation. The most effective reagents for 
this purpose are chlorate of potash or soda with sulphuric acid. This 
completely or almost completely removes the browning. The prepara- 
tions are placed in spirit to which 0°2-0°5 cem. per cent. of strong sul- 
phuric acid and a small quantity of chlorate of potash crystals are added. 
If the vessel be shaken from time to time, oxidation will be completed 
in 6 to 8 days; any trace of pigment left after this time will always be 
unaffected by the solution. The preparations are then transferred to 
spirit. 

Another method of preservation consists in the use of a one per cent. 
solution of picric acid. The preparations, however, become stained 
yellow and always remain flabby, but as the chlorophyll is unaltered by 
the solution, it is very useful for preserving variegated flowers. Spirit 
through which sulphurous acid has been passed until a large quantity 
has been taken up gives satisfactory results. Pure glycerin is not 

* Maandblad van Natuurwetenschappen, 1€86, Nos. 1, 5, and 6, 1887, No. 4. 


Handelingen van het eerste Natuur- en Geneeskundig Congres te Amsterdam, 1887, 
p- 189. See this Journal, 1887, p. 675; 1886, p. 1075. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 853 


recommended for preserving the coloured parts of plants, as the dyes 
are given off after the lapse of a few months. 

The author then discusses the brittleness which affects plants which 
have been long kept in strong spirit. This brittleness may be prevented 
by soaking the parts in water until they become quite flaccid and then 
placing them in spirit. As the results of his examination into the cause 
of this brittleness, the author finds that when the tinged parts of a plant 
are killed by immersion in spirit, their death is effected before the 
tension of different parts has had time to become equalized. Hence this 
tension is “fixed” by the spirit and becomes the cause of the brittleness. 
Water, however, equalizes the tension of the various parts, and hence 
removes the brittleness by rendering the tissue elastic. 


Fixing Sections to the Slide. *—Mayer’s albumen fixative, says 
Mr. J. Nelson, is absolutely reliable for fixing sections to the slide, and 
should be used whenever sections are loosely coherent in their parts. 
Neat results with this can only be obtained with a very thin and even 
film, to secure which proceed as follows:—A small drop of the fixative 
is spread on the slide with the ball of the index finger. Excess of 
fixative is removed by wiping the finger dry, and continuing the rubbing 
until no frothy streaks appear in the film. Then tap the moist surface 
lightly with the finger, so that by light reflected at a proper angle it 
appears finely stippled. ach section is pressed into the film with a 
brush, and when the slide is full, a piece of filter paper is placed over 
all, and pressed firmly with the finger until every part of each section is 
in even contact with the glass. Then heat the slide over steam until 
the paraffin melts, and then plunge into turpentine. The film is opaque 
in alcohol, but this is corrected in turpentine and mounting. Should 
the presence of the foreign albumen in the sections be undesirable, 
recourse should be had to Gaule’s alcoholic fixative. It is a means 
whereby the albumen molecules of the section are brought into the same 
adhesive contact with the glass as those of ordinary fixatives. The 
slide is brushed over with 40-70 per cent. spirit, and when this film has 
evaporated, thin sections stick closely. Superfluous spirit is removed 
with bibulous paper, and the slide then evaporated to dryness; this is 
best done in a thermostat at 40° C. for 1-2 hours. The paraffin should 
never be allowed to melt. It is removed with turpentine as for other 
fixatives. Celloidin sections stick well with this method. 

VoiInorF, R. G.—0On the different Cements for closing microscopical sections. 
Ejened. Klin. Gaz. St. Petersburg, VII. (1887) p. 411 (Russian). 
Wosnorr, K.—Einige Bemerkungen betreffend das Festkleben mikroskopischer 


Schnitte auf Objecttrager. (Some remarks on fixing microscopical sections to 
the slide.) Klin. Wochenschr., 1887, 6 pp. ~ 


(6) Miscellaneous. 


Methods of Plastic Reconstruction.{—Prof. H. Strasser writes at 
great length and in copious detail on methods of reconstructing the 
object. All he has to say is practically a recapitulation of Born’s 
procedure for making wax plates upon which the image of the object is 
drawn. The outline is then cut out, and the various plates are united 
together in their proper order, and this done the edges are smoothed off 
so that an enlarged solid copy of the original object is obtained. For 


* American Naturalist, xxii. (1888) p. 664. 
+ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., iv. (1887) pp. 168-209, 330-9. 
1888. 3M 


9 6) 


54 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


this purpose wax is melted and poured out on a picce of plate glass, 
and this sheet of wax is rolled level with an iron roller. The wax 
sheets may be simple, or laid on paper which has been previously 
saturated with wax, and the roller used may be hot or cold according 
as the wax is softer or harder. Instead of glass a lithographic stone is 
recommended. 


Making Mounts Photographic.*—Mr. G. W. Rafter writes that 
there is a phase of mounting which could well be impressed upon the 
attention of microscopists. That is, to make all mounts with reference 
not merely to use under the tube, but with reference to good photographic 
results. He thinks he is justified by experience and study in saying 
what has been well said before, that whatever can be seen with an 
objective and eye-piece can be photographed as clearly as it can be 
seen, provided proper methods of preparation for photography are 
followed. He thinks it may be further stated that such methods of 
preparation will not diminish their value under the tube. “Go through 
a cabinet of ordinary mounts and see how few are photographable! The 
enormity of the thing appears when we consider that nearly all classes 
of mounts, including opaque, may be readily photographed if properly 
prepared. To this, however, there are a few exceptions. The additions 
to general knowledge of matters microscopic which could be made, if 
all working microscopists would prepare with reference to photography 
is simply enormous.” 


Improved method for Enumerating Blood-corpuscles.t—M. Mayet 


has made a further improvement in artificial serum used in the enumera- - 


tion of blood-corpuscles. Blood to the volume of 4 mm. is first mixed 
with 500 mm. of a watery 1 per cent. solution of osmic acid by which 
the corpuscles are fixed and rendered colourable. At the end of three 
minutes 500 mm. of the following liquid is added :—Glycerin, 45 ccm. ; 
distilled water, 55 ccm. ; eosin in aqueous 1 per cent. solution, 17 ccm. 
The red corpuscles are brightly stained, the leucocytes being scarcely or 
not at all coloured, and this difference of tint allows the two kinds of 
corpuscles to be easily counted. The distribution of the corpuscles on 
the side is quite uniform, owing to the fact that the mean density of the 
two fluids used for dilution is equal to about 1084, and also to the 
viscosity of the glycerin. The further steps in the procedure are as 
heretofore. 


Improved method for the Bacteriological Examination of Air.{— 
The method adopted by MM. Straus and Wurtz for passing air through 
fluidified gelatin consists in transmitting the air through a tube con- 
tracted at the end, whereby fine bubbles are produced. Frothing is 
prevented by adding a drop of sterilized oil to the gelatin. The 
apparatus consists of a glass tube closed at the lower end and measuring 
40 mm. broad by 20 cm. high. ‘The diameter of the lower part is 
reduced to 15 mm., and herein 10 em. of gelatin are placed. In the 
upper end, also contracted, is inserted a glass tube, the end of which 
reaches right to the bottom, and is there much reduced in size. Through 
this tube the air passes, and those germs which are not caught up by the 
gelatin are entangled in sterilized cotton-wool, a plug of which is placed 


* Amer. Mon. Mier. Journ., ix. (1888) pp. 77-8. 
+ Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1558-9. 
¢ Ann. Instit. Pasteur, 1888, p. 171. 


‘ "7 == 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 805 


around the inner tube at the top of the outer one. The wool is then 
shaken up in the gelatin, which afterwards may be removed by the 
inner tube and spread out on plates, or it may be rolled out on the 
inside of the large tube. The entrance of air is very quick, 50 litres in 
15 minutes. 


Gelatin Culture Test for Micro-organisms of Water.* — Dr. C. 
Smart concludes an extensive consideration of the micro-organisms of 
water with the following remarks in reference to the gelatin culture test, 
which he believes to be valuable only in its doubtful promise for the 
future: “At present,” he says, “in the hands of the sanitary inquirer, it 
gives but little information, and that little is surrounded on all sides by 
interrogation points. In the laboratory of the scientific investigator, 
new methods may be discovered by which pathogenetic germs may be 
isolated and identified ; but until that time arrives the sanitary analyst 
must depend upon the chemical results as translated in each particular 
instance by the aid of the ascertained sanitary environment of the water, 
and however much he may cultivate the microbes, he should not forget 
to inspect that other field of microscopic life (Wostoc, Kerona, Alge, &c.) 
to which reference was made at the beginning of this paper.” 


Illustrations of Pond Life.—The following paragraph appears in the 
‘Times’ report of the 12th September of the soirée of the British 
Association at Bath :— 

““ At the soirée there were a large number of Microscopes and illus- 
trations of the vegetable and animal kingdoms, and of histology, but the 
greatest novelty, which quite surprised most of the company, was a new 
method of illustrating pond life. Three sides of a long room were 
occupied with what are called transparencies. Brown paper is stretched 
on frames. Pieces are cut out of the brown paper corresponding with 
the size of the illustrations, which are painted on tissue paper. Behind 
the long row of these illustrations there are rows of gas-jets, and the 
strong light passing through the tissue paper made the objects distinctly 
visible at a long distance. The naturalists from other parts of the 
country quite envied the Bath and Bristol societies for the success they 
had attained in devising such a method of illustration, and carrying it 
out so efficiently.” 

Microscopists will recognize the method as that originally devised 
by Dr. Hudson, the President of this Society, to exhibit his drawings of 
Rotifers.f 


Brown, F. W.—A course in Animal Histology.- III. Blood. IV. The Connective 
Tissues—Hndothelium, 

The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 177-80 (1 fig.), 201-3, 244-6. 

Ewicu.—HEin Beitrag zur Fleischschau und Fleischkunde. (A contribution to the 

examination and knowledge of meat.) 8vo, Osterwieck, 1888. 
FREEBORN, G. C.—Notice of new Methods. V. 

Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., 1X. (1888) pp. 130-2. 

Hensoupt, H.—The Microscopical Investigation of Rocks. A plea for the study 

of Petrology. Journ. N. York Micr. Soc., 1V. (1888) pp. 139-44. 


* The Microscope, viii. (1888) p. 215, from ‘ Philad. Med. News.’ } 

t+ The ‘ Athenzeum’ of 15th September refers to them as “ representing micro- 
scopic insect life from its lowest to its highest forms (!). They had been prepared by 
Dr. Hudson, of Clifton, who also described them verbally.” 


856 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES, ETO. 


Hnrssr, W.—Zur quantitativen Bestimmung der Keime in Fliissigkeiten. (On the 
quantitative determination of germs in fluids). 
Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, TV. (1888) p. 22. 
Ktune, H.—Praktische Anleitung zum mikroskopischen Nachweis der Bacterien im 
thierischen Gewebe. (Practical guide to the microscopical demonstration of 
Bacteria in animal tissue.) vi. and 44 pp., 8vo, Leipzig, 1888. 
Manton, W. P.—Rudiments of Practical Embryology. 
[Staining—Infiltrating the paper cell—Section-cutting—Preparation of slides— 
Mounting. ] The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 180-1, 203-6 (8 figs). 
MiqveEt, P.—De la valeur relative des procédés employés pour l’analyse ‘micro- 
graphique des eaux. (On the relative value of the processes employed for the 


microscopical analysis of water.) Revue d@ Hygiene, 1888, pp. 391-406. 
Nixirororr, M.—Kurze Studien in der mikroskopischen Technik. (Short studies 
in microscopical technique.) 169 pp., 16mo, Moscow, 1888. 


Ossporn, H. L.—Studies for Beginners. III. The Vinegar Eel. 
Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., TX. (1888) pp. 121-3. 
Srrena, A.—Ueber einige mikroskopisch-chemische Reaktionen. (On some micro- 


chemical reactions.) 
Neues Jahrb. f. Mineral., Geol., Palzxontol., 1888, pp. 142-50 (8 figs.). 


TINDALL, S. J.—Scales on Red Currants. 
[A very beautiful object for the Polariscope.”] Sci.-Gossip, 1888, p. 187. 
Troup, F.—The Diagnosis of early Phthisis by the Microscope. 
Edinburgh Med. Journ., 1888, pp. 1-7. 
WATERMAN, S.—How to produce Hemoglobin or Hematocrystallin. 
The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 165-171 (1 pl.). 
Wenpsz, E.—{The Microscope in the Diagnosis of Skin Diseases.] 
The Microscope, VIII. (1888) p. 217, from Med. Press of West. New York. 
WueELrLeEyY, H. M.—Microscopy for Amateur Workers. 


[Recommendation of vegetable histology and morphology for amateurs.] 
The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 195-8. 


( 85) 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 


Tux first Conversazione of the Session was held on the 23rd November, 
1887. 
The following objects, &c., were exhibited :— 


Mr. J. Badcock: 

Carchesium polypinum. 

Mr. C. Baker: 

(1) Bacteriological Microscope with 1/2 in. homogeneous-immersion 
and Abbe condenser. (2) Nelson Model Microscope, with differen- 
tial screw fine-adjustment specially adapted for photomicrography. 
(3) New Microscope Stands by Zeiss with Iris Diaphragm to Abbe 
condenser. (4) Podura scale x 500 under Zeiss apochromatic 
4-0 mm. objective N.A.0°95. (5) Triceratium favus x 300 under 
Zeiss CC (1/4 in.) objective and Abbe condenser, dark ground 
illumination. (6) Aulacodiscus Stoschii and A. formosus, under 
Zeiss apochromatic 16:0 mm. objective and Abbe condenser; dark 
ground illumination. 

Messrs. R. and J. Beck: 
(1) Spirillum under new 1/12 oil-immersion. (2) Podura Scale under 
cheap 1/4 in. with 4th eye-piece. 

Mr. Bolton : 

Dendrosoma radians. 
Mr. H. T. Browne: 

Orihesia cataphracta and O. insignis. 
Mr. Crisp: 

Dellebarre Microscope. 
Prof. Crookshank : 

Demonstration of specimens in the new Bacteriological Laboratory, 
and projection of Photographs of Bacteria upon screen with 
Oxyhydrogen Lantern. 

Mr. Dadswell: . 

(1) Cyclosis in bulbil of Lychnothammus stelliger. (2) Epistylis. 

(38) Ameba princeps. 
Mr. F. Enock : 

(1) The Hessian Fly, Cecidomyia destructor Say. (2) Parasite of 
ditto, Semiotellus destructor Say. (3) Head of Devil’s Coach- 
horse, Oxypus oleus. 

Mr. F. Fitch: 
Dissection of Garden Spider, Hpeira diadema. 
Mr. H. H. Freeman: 

(1) Serial sections of Spiders prepared by Mr. H. M. Underhill. 

(2) Sections of Hyes of Butterfly (Pieris brassicz). 
Prof. Groves : 

Continuity of Protoplasm between the cells of a medullary ray in 
internodes of species of Nertwm (Oleander) and Helianthus annuus 
(Sunflower). 

Mr. H. F. Hailes: 
Foraminifera from Davis’ Straits. 


858 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOOIETY. 


Mr. J. D. Hardy: 

Zoophytes, &c., chiefly from Weymouth. 

Mr. J. E. Ingpen: 

Vallisneria. 

Mr. 8S. J. M‘Intire: 

Larva of Tiresias serra, the insect whence the hairs formerly known 
as “ Hairs of Dermestes” are obtained. 

Mr. R. Macer : 

Musca domestica, showing eyes, proboscis, &e., by tle exhibitor’s 
special apparatus. 

Mr. A. D. Michael: 

Anelasmocephalus Cambridgei. 

Dr. J. Millar: 

Coltosphare n. sp. 

Mr. E. M. Nelson: 

(1) Photomicrographic negative of Amphipleura pellucida taken by 
Zeiss apochromatic 1/8 in., N.A. 1°42, and projection eye-piece ; 
x 730 diam. (2) Ditto of Coscinodiscus asteromphalus; * 550 
diam. (3) Amphipleura pellucida, Powell and Lealand homogene- 
ous-immersion 1/12 in., 1:43 N.A. ; achromatic compensating eye- 
piece; x 1800. Powell and Lealand achromatic oil-immersion 
condenser. Intensified by a Nicol analyser. 

Messrs. Newton and Sons : 

Electrical Polarization Microscope. 

Mr. G. D. Plomer : 

(1) Spongilla fluviatilis. (2) Larva of Corethra plumicornis. 

Messrs. Powell and Lealand: 

(1) Amphipleura pellucida with apochromatic homogeneous-immer- 
sion 1/12 in.and achromatic oil-immersion condenser. (2) Pleuro- 
sigma angulatum with 1/30 in. water-immersion and achromatic 
condenser. 

Mr. B. W. Priest: 

(1) Diatoms from Arafura Sea. (2) Surface organisms, Faroe 
Channel. 

Mr. C. W. Rousselet: 

Floscularia ornata. 

Mr. G. J. Smith: 

(1) Fungus (with sporangia) in Shelly Purbeck Limestone, Durlstone 
Bay, Swanage. (2) “Flint” from the Purbeck with valves of 
Entomostraca, Durlstone Bay. (3) Section of Fish-tooth in Pur- 
beck Limestone, Durlstone Bay. (4) Fragment of Corroded 
Quartz in Basalt, the Weilberg, Nassau. (5) Dolerite, Rossell 
Hill, I. of Mull. 

Prof. C. Stewart : 

Shell of Galathea strigosa. 

Mr. A. W. Stokes: 

Peristome of Moss (Funaria hygrometrica). 

Mr. W. T. Suffolk : 

Drosera rotundifolia, glandular hair. 

Messrs. W. Watson and Sons : 

(1) Group of Eggs of Butterflies, Moths, &e. (2) Type slide of 
Diatoms from Oamaru—88 species. (3) Type slide of Holothuride. 
(4) Type slide of Spines of Echini. (5) Lungs and ovipositor 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 859 


of Spider. (6) Section through bud of Liliwm candidum, showing 
Ovary, Anthers, Pollen-grains, Petals, &c. 
Mr. T. Charters White : 
Album of Photomicrographs. 


The second Conversazione of the Session was held on the 25th April, 
1888. 
The following objects, &c., were exhibited :— 

Mr. Badcock : 
(1) Fresh-water Polyzoa. (2) Lophopus cristallinus. (8) Rotifers, 
&e 


Rev. G. Bailey: 

Foraminifera from the Red Chalk. 
Mr. J. W. Bailey: 

Dr. Kibbler’s Photo-Microscope. 
Mr. C. Baker: 

(1) Model of proposed form of Mayall removable mechanical stage 
giving 1 inch vertical and horizontal movements. (2) Large 
Nelson model Microscope specially adapted for photomicrography, 
and having differential screw fine-adjustment to substage. 

Mr. F. G. Bernau: 
(1) Bacillus anthracis (kidney). (2) Plant bug, Ceylon. 
Mr. Bolton : 
Volvox globator. 
Mr. E. T. Browne: 
Pollen of Gotha Makoyana. 
Mr. H. Burns: 
Nests of Living Ants. 
Mr. Crisp: 
Adams’ Projection and Compound Microscope. 
Mr. HE. Dadswell: 
Volvox showing cilia. 
Mr. F. Enock: 

Salticus tardigradus showing the 8 eyes. Various Insect preparations 

and drawings. : 
Mr. F. Fitch: 
(1) Rectal valve of Blow-fly covered and uncovered. (2) Rectal 
papille of Blow-fly covered and uncovered. 

Mr. W. Godden: 

Foraminifera from London Clay. 
Mr. R. T. Lewis: 

Stentors, Vorticelle, and Callidina. 
Mr. J. W. Lovibond: 

New instrument for measuring pigmentary colours. 
Mr. A. D. Michael : 

Female reproductive organs of Cepheus latus (Oribatide). 
Messrs. Powell and Lealand: 

Amphipleura pellucida with apochromatic homogeneous-immersion 
1/12 in, N.A. 1°4, and achromatic oil-immersion condenser, 
N.A. 1:4. 


860 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOOIETY. 


Mr. B. W. Priest: 
Fossil spicules from deposit, Jackson’s Paddock, Oamaru. 
Mr. H. B. Robinson: 
Hairs (human), long and transverse section. 
Mr. T. B. Rosseter: 
Stephanoceros Hichhornii. 
Mr. C. Rousselet: 
Free-swimming Rotifers. 
Mr. G. J. Smith: 

(1) Gabbro, Penig, Saxony. (2) Dolerite (Tertiary) Crawfordjohn, 
Lanarkshire. (3) Twin Crystals of Augite. (4) Granite, Cheese- 
wring Quarry, Cornwall. 

Mr. J. H. Steward: 
(1) Moving sand from the Diamond Fields, Brazil. (2) Platino- 
cyanide of Cerium. 
Prof. C. Stewart : 
Stridulating Organs of Lomaptera yorkiana. 
Mr. A. W. Stokes: 
Diffraction spectra by means of photograph of grating 3000 lines to 
inch. 
Mr. A. Topping: 
Insect preparations. 
Mr. J. J. Vezey: 
Longitudinal section of Embryo in grain of Maize. 
Messrs. W. Watson and Sons: 

(1) Hand of Human Embryo, 2 months, showing commencement of 
ossification in metacarpal bones. (2) Group of Eggs of Batterflies, 
Moths, &e. (8) Head of Cysticercus from Hare. 

Mr. C. West: 

(1) Lagena spiralis n. sp., Macassar Straits. (2) Technitella melo 

Norman, Cebu, Philippines. 
Mr. W. West: 

(1) Ovaries of House Fly. (2) Wing of Moth infested with 
parasites. 

Mr. G. Western: 

Free-swimming Rotifers. 

Mr. T. Charters White : 
Photomicrographs, 


{ To Non- Fettows, 
Price 5s. 


1888. Part 6. DECEMBER. 


P - JouURWAL 
ROYAL 
_ MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY; 


CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS, 


AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


ZRmOooLtLoGey AND BOTAN DW 
{principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), 
MICROSCOPY, &c- 


Edited by 5; 
FRANK CRISP, LL.B. B.A, 
One of the Secretaries of the Soctety 
and a Vice-President and Treasurer of the Linnean Soctety of London ; 


WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PuBLICATION COMMITTEE AND 


A. W. BENNETT, M.A., B.Sc., F.L.S., F. JEFFREY BELL, M.A., F-Z.S., 
Lecturer on Botany at St. Thomas's Hospital, Professor of Comparative Anatomy in King’s College, 


JOHN MAYALL, Jun., F.ZS., R. G. HEBB, M.A., M.D. (Cantab.), 
AND 
. J. ARTHUR THOMSON, M.A., 
Lecturer on Zoology in the School of Medicine, Edinburgh, 
FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY, 


“WILLIAMS & NORGATE, : 
- LONDON AND EDINBURGH. : ME 
SST: ' , ibe : 


~ PRINTED BY WM. CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED,] — _ = [STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING CROSS. © 


aN a 


CONTENTS. 


TRANSACTIONS OF THY Soctery— 


XIL—A Reviston or Tae GrENUs Retievod Exns, anb oF ‘SOME. 
autiep Genera. By John Rattray, M.A., B.Sce., FCS. va 
(Plates XIL= VE) id pec oY lan oat inden Ae Aoi 


XI.—Nors on tHe Lanae Swe or wae Sprovues or Aors ORIEN- oa 
pais. By F. Jeffrey Bell, M.A., Sec, R.MS. Tee es): 
SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES. eee 


ZOOLOGY. 
A. VERTEBRATA: —Embryology, Histology, ap General 
a. Embryology. 
Vircuow, H=—Physies of the LN! Binge Ode gcse tins MOL RO ON GL. Re Te 


Rovx, W. ea to Axis... Bi Fit tas eee er gil 
SANFELICE, F.—Sperm itugenesis of. Varkabviias Bigs Cae So ah ERO @ Beet 
Prenant, A.— Spermatogenesis of. Reptiles se ah IDS Nate VAD oo eal 
SipExori. Am, H.—Fate of the Blastopore in Rana temporaria ei Sea wR 


MARSHALL, A. mare —Development of the. Hee Rab PH 
Ciarke, 5. F.— Eggs of Alligator lucius. :. ~.. Ae ab 
Rarrare, F.—Egqs and Larve of Teleosteans 22.2) i. eee ge 
WEISMANN, A.—Heredity . —. : 
KuAwKgine,- M. W.— Principle, of "Heredity cand the Siwe of Mochanies ia wien 
to the Morphology of Solitary Cells... .. Boda akihSra Ata rN tes 
Tuomson, J. A.— Action of the Environment... 3. - Se wel tysr ay we ae 
MorcGan, O, Lioyp.—Elimination and Selociion A ake Some? coe 


B. ‘Histology. 
Cranct, C., & G. ANGIOLELLA.—Structure of Red Blood-corpuscles es 


Rasi-Rickuarpd, H.—Peeuliar Fat-cells  .. Rese) Coa asoe y 
Watperer, W.—Karyokinesis in its Relation to Fertilization ERC Semi 
Pemacuma Fy P.— Reticulum of Muscle-fire Pe te OE erie oe 
Scunemer, A.—Sarcolemma —. Bs Tea) nee hiraeg Tee er 
Roapve, E.—Nervous System of Amphiowus. SPEC Me ee ee Pe rt Sei 


B. IN VERTEBRATA, 


Cuatin, J.—Myelocytes of Invertebrates .. 
Dvsors, R.—Role of Symbiosis in Luminous Marine Animals , 


ZACHARTAS, O, —Disiribution Oey Hts fie: OP anes ot 
Mollusca. 
a. Cephalopoda. 
Gicantic Cephalopoda. SO) Mages tna opt Dingt ar ee 
Warase, 8.—Germinal Layers in Cophalopods Ba hie ee, Ste hawt ete 


Jarra, G.—Olfactory Ganglia of Cephalopods .. 1. ee te ve oe 
WEIss, F. E.—Some Oigopsid Cuttle-fishes ..° .. ee ee a 
Laurie, M.—Organ of Verrill in Loligo a3 : 
GRIFFITHS, A. B.—Salivary Glands of Sepia officinalis: ‘and ‘Patella eng x 
¥- Gastropoda. 
PRENANT, A _—Bpermatogenesis of Gastropods 


PELSENEER, P.~Classification of Gastropoda by the " Characters of the si : 
System i prea ts 

iceamey P.—Structure ‘and Development of Egg in. Chitonides YS iene 

PLATE, L,—Organization of Dentalium  — .. sk ws seg ie sit ianee Sad 


é. Lamellibranchiata. Pont 
BLANCH at R.—Structure of Muscles of Speck aes Ries Catt ea. 
Reicne., L.—Formation of Byssis «+ —- eet ewe ites howe ata eae 
i diliscotia. 3 ine 
8. Bryozoa. 

JULLIEN, J. ar eta of Polypides in Zowcia of Bryozoa a ee 
Vicenius, W. J. Ontogeny of Marine Bryoz0a .. © 1. 0s. ee ie ae 
JULLIEN, J.—Cristutella mucedo’ .+ tigpett wow Cree SON DO De ake 
Joyevx-Larrvuis, J.—Delagia Chatopteri LT OCR. she CREE oe ee 
BRAEm, F, —Fresh- water Bryozow “ ef + os) * thas +; ae : 3 Tae . “ae cad re 


(85) 


Be: eae Sea 
Pirres: W.—Eyes if Arthropods .. =. Ceca se gees MRSS Use ba 
Gitsoy, G.—Spermatogenesis of Arthropods . RSET SRT if 


bith SeNcout Es: A. Agee cae of Arthropods... «5 = ise = fete 
a a. Insecta. 


; ec y y.—Primary Sees of the Germ- oe - Insects +1 0 oe 
Nuspaum, J—Germinal Layers of Meloe .. nr Nees oe 


~ Pranta, A, v.—Nutrient Food-Material of Bees: Bogie can Rae tess Nears tole 
- Ginson, G.— enki Glands of Blaps .. .- with Guess ane ee Soo 
~ Casacranpe, D.—Alkimentary Canal in Metunaeions pit ap oe ee 
~ Cuatin, J—Nerve-terminations in Lepidoptera .. «a. te pe a ee 
~ Reuter, E.—Basal Spot on oe of Butterflies .. 2. +. as 
*. Burscuxi, Se atid Ale of Musea ©... ig Rae Eee ge ep 
 Branpr, E.— Larva of Sarcophila Wontfartit in “Gum of Han Seay aoe Wacom hate 
C000KTE G-Bran of Somomya +1 ue wee ws Peep tae ten sar Ree 


a BB. Weyriopoda. 
‘ Gazonas J. —Phosphorescence in Myriopoda AS thy eae Bra Ie Srey 
= $. Arachnida. . 
M:Coox, H. C.—Relations of Structure and Function to Colour Nea m Spiders 


; ~Faussek, V.—Development of Generative Organs in- Arachnida 
mar WAGNER. V.— Blood of Openers: = ve hoa) de oe 96 cea en ee de ee ae 
pret e. Crustacea. 
_- -Sramati, G.—Castration of the Cray-fish  .. «2 se ek ne ee wee 
Pee ak tages ah 0 DIUGESLLON: 11 OT OY=fISRER saa a's Cie n ea dave ate ae i ed ee 
' Brepermann, W.—Innervation oF Crabs’ Claws .. aa tee os 
“Bats, C. Spence— Challenger’ Crustacea Macrura.. 3. 0 we 
Ga e B.—Strueture of Asellus .. . Sey : Sere 


- Barrois, T.—Sexual Dimorphism in Amphipoda Sa ees Paes inane 
~ PEREYASLAWZEWA, SoPHIE— Development of Gammarus ,, es -» 21 ss 
- EYLMANN, E. Se pea tel Drephins hee a Fo oif x vite hop tae nani Stee Wn ee 88 ao 
-. CuEyREUX, H.—Orchestia..  -. PP tie ROT GATS Che ERT 
CATTANEO, G.—Amebocytes of Crishatn ot Ae ee Sis we 2 Fes 
Vermes. ; 
Saas a, Annelida, 
_, Apstuy, S.—LEzternal Morphology of Hirudinea.. 5. 1. +e os ne aes 
Heymann, J. F.—WNerve-endings in the Leech . .. eee ai ie see uiee Seale 
_- FRrepLanper, B.—Creeping Movements of Earthworm. : p 
ee, R. S: ee Organs of Criodrilus : 


8. Nemathelminthes. 
aren A.— Abnormal Ova of Ascaris meg olaeer tale 


7: Platyhsininthes. 


_ Hoyre, W. E.— General Sketch of the Trematoda ., 
- - VorntzKkow, A.—Aspidogaster conchicola «1. sas 

- “Branvdes, G.—Holostomum™ .. BRE eas BARE SIRo: 

Branvt, H.—Tenia cucumerina in "Man rt grea tir ie shige ee aph Shee rea toe 
Sains B.—Tenia saginata gon Hes de Marie ek ot eas lias 
a. Incertze Sedis. 


Posuiavicr, L.  Oontrnctile Vesicle of Hieber: Shes oer Eis 


: ai aise 
5 os P. & ¥F.—Anatomy of Echinothurida and Phy rylogeny g Echinodermata: - 
_ Grirritas, A. B.—Renal Organs of Star-fishes .. . : 
_ Cusnor, L.—Anatomy of Ophiurids .. .. + Pew Sacer pe ora py ee. 
Ae etiee J:—Development:of Comatulas.. os 6 ioe | na ua Scan 50 OU ge 

Se: P. H.—‘ Challenger’ pupal Sa EE 
, Coelenterata. 


eer: A. ie Descent of Hydridz ae eae here eaves 
~ Kocu, G. v.—Flabellum .. 
“Hicsson, &. J.— Sexual Cells and Early Stages in 2 Development of Millepora plicaia 
~Happon, A. C.—Larval Actiniz parasitic on Hydromedusz .. 1 4s ss os 
‘Fiscuer, P.—Scyphistomata of. Acraspedote Mahisags os ek ene if 
pes, He euppiuentae 7] Pa on ‘ Chiatienge Reaintaria: 3 


: ees ticterodons Schachtit BS os A 2 a & ee oe 


: pene, W. F. R.—Haplodiseus piger —.. BSE see oe See et 


PAGE 
938 
940 
94] 


941 — 
942 
942 


C.&2) 


Porifera. PAGE ~ 
Nassonorr—Boring Clionids . hace Sogi re game 
Frepier, K.—Formation of Ova and Spermatozoa 1 in "Spongilla "fluviatilis oe Foes OGD) ee we 
Priest, B. W.—Kemarkable Spicules from the Oamaru Deposit .. 6 se ee 967 


Protozoa. 


Burscutt, O.—Phylogeny of Protozoa .. ss» sete ee ae ae 
Gruser, A.—Notes on Protozoa... 
Ruvme.er, L.— Various Cyst -formations and Developmental History of Capa “s 


CuarK, J.—Ciliary Movement... ‘3 fe 
Carranso, G.—New Parasitic Ciliated Infusorian : ye 
Masxett, W. M.—Fresh-water Infusoria of Wellington District, Naw Zealand ¥i 
GARCIN, A. G. —Euglena.. ** * oe “* ca * J 


Bruyne, C. pp—New Monad, "Endobiella Bambekii Rotter Fs kh ie Sate. a eee 
BuANcuAarD, R.—Monas Dunali SANs oh Sse NaS PAA be hein Tbe T aad ee 
Puave, L.—Asellicola digttata eS ya ca Lée= op hee ty aN’ Dee peu eg 
oon Madmalotdes, 6c he eh Vek be eS Gee ey See we lead havea 
Grassi, B.—Parasitic Protozoa... PR pap a es 
Sonuserc, A.—Protozoa found in the Stomach of Ruminants aiid Teg ect tae SOS 
BepparD, F. E.—New Gregarine ., +. se ee eee ee ree ae 


BOTANY. 


A. GENERAL, including the Anatomy and mia Arend 
of the Phanerogamia, 


a. Anatomy. 


(1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm. ; a 

SrRASBURGER, E.—Division of the Nucleus and of the Cell... -. ( os 
Frommann, C.—Properties and Changes of the Membrane, Protoplasn, and Nucleus ms 
of Plant-cells .. Fe oor eg BO & Ba 
Went, F. A. T. 0.— Increase of No ormal "Vacnoles sy Ditision vos. a eM 
Wirsner, J.—Albumen in the Oell-wall., 6. ve tse ne nee oe ne OBR we 
(2) Other Cell-contents (including Secretions). hi % 

Renpit, A. B.—Development of Alewrone-grains in the Taepere ys ava % 00s Poi ae = 
% Occurrence of Starch in the Onion .. Goiitncet te eee 

Beiivccr, G G.—Formation of Starch in the Chloraphyll-grains .. vo Sag Sap Dies See ee 
Scnvurz, E.—Reserve-substances in Evergreen Leaves .. ce Reh. gcia st Een 
Fisoner, A A.—Glucose as a Reserve-material in Woody Plants . ta. Ses 1a Se ee 


Lunpstrém, A. N,—Colourless Oil-plastids in Potamogeton «. «ss ae ae 984°. 
Hoanet, F. v.—Substance of which Gum-arabic OTe ae seb dy cid ane eee 


Moetuer, H.—Tannin and its connection with Metastasis... .. 2+ ee ae we 984 Ce 
(3) Structure of Tissues. ee eS a‘: 

T1anrEr, O.—Importance of the Foliar Fibrovascular Sisen in LS date Anatomy 985 

WisseLincu, CO. van—Wall of Suberous Cells... ees sa eae ke ROE 
Perersey, O. G.—Reticulations in Vessels .. +. +s ‘ae ee oe oe ee oe 986 os ca 
DANGEARD, P. A.—Secretory Canals of Araucaria .. pe Se OURY ee 
Tizcuem, P, yan—Super-endodermal Network of the Root of Leguminosex and ree Re. 
Ericacez ¢ 23986. 

rs * & Monat—Sub-epidermal Network ‘of ‘the Root of Geraniacez pete 


Supporting Network in the Cortex iif 1 1) Ea a TN 


» ”» 


;; ‘5s Exoderm of the Root of Restiacez.. .. GTR rg 
Dovtror, O _—Periderm of Rosacex ; 
TrecHem, P. vAn, & H. Dovrior—Plants which form their " Rootlets “without ¢ a 

Potket 52 5dé aN T PE Ve Pi icy St 
DANGEARD, P. A. — Observations on ) Pinguicula . Re ey thte 


Fs Anatomy of the Salsolew., 1+ +1 ss ws MPG ead 
Mouscs, H. —Thyllz Gast Soe tapioca gt coal eee eet ah heat cw eta aa oe 


(4) Structure of Organs. 


Ducuartre, P.—Rooting of the Albumen of Cycas .. 4+ oe 4s we ove 
TRELEASE, W.—Subterranean Shoots of Oxalis .. 6s 2. es 0s te we 
GortTuHE, R.—Torsion of Stems .. big Sp ent eaercok... veer ase Ak p ee 
ne, A.—Spines of certain Plohes 0. aoe ee es 
Feist, A.—Protection of Buds... eae oe oe eee ns 


©) 


. J ost, L.—Development of the Planers of the Motes ae SS oe 
Jounson, T.—Arceuthobium .. Eps a Oak See eae ee eee eet as 
JUMELLE, H.—Sceeds with Two Tnteguments .. ats Seale ee UPR cee Miro pre cae | Sala Pee 


Bessey, C. H.—Overlooked Function of many Fruits. 00) se ee ie wes 
OuiyEr, FE. We Ee: Oliv., a new Genus of Pedaline® +. 42 os as as 


B. ‘Physiology. 
eb Reproduction and Germination. 


Poaceae A. G.—Cross-fertilization .. rons ee 
. Riwiey, H. N.—Self-fertilization and Cleistogamy in Orchids .. HR thoes Sian eee ee 
- Macenus, P.—Self-pollination of Spergularia salina .. .. ga rae! uted er 


zi VEITCH, H: _J.— Fertilization of CONCH OMADIOUE Etec ats ae oe ee TE poe 


@) Nutrition and Growth Gxttadine Movements of Fluids). 


- Menzz, 0. —Daily Assimilation of Carbohydrates Rae Rp Ta dt ia Ce 
~ Devaux—Action of Light on Roots grown in Water .. Saarion 
&. ‘Voourie, H a NE of Radiant Heat on the Development of the Flower = 


(8) Irritability. 


a, Binoecon. J. Burpon—Electromotive Properties of the ae ea Dionza ee ee 
DucwarrRe, P.—Case of Abolition of Geotropism ...  . BG ase Br 


rs erage §. Le M.—Studies in Vegetable Biology Berane han = awe a faa eee eae 


ies (4) Chemical Changes (including Respiration mut Fermentation). 
_. Hansen, A.—Function of the Colouring Matter of Chlorophyll... .. ses 
».. Fanxnavser, J.—Diastase .. en aPoss 2 Sesto’ 
~. Smrru, J. —Substance containing Sulphur m ‘Orueiferous Plants Buker Lupe aati we 
ee A by : : y- General. | 
> “Panos, M.— Myrmecaphilous Plants” = 262) 005 Sen as ee be So ne 
2. DELPINO,, W.—Myrmecophilous Plants i0- see oe ae en eke ee 
-..- Scuumann, K.—New Myrmecophilous Plants. Apia 
~. Bonnier, G.—Comparative Cultures of the same species at ‘different ‘dite. SMe ae 


Bea 3B. CRYPTOGAMIA. 
eS Cryptogamia Vascularia. 


BERGGREN, S.—Apogamy in Notochlena .. Bee alt Hgiae pay e's 
Newcomse, F. C.— Dissemination of the Spores of Equisetum BERGER ber ee 


Muscinez. 


Seb Pp Puuiert—Peristome aay 
~~ Watpner, M.— Development of the Sporogonium “of Andrexa and Sphagnum. a 
_ Mantiroio, O.—Hygroscopic Movements of the Thallus of Marchantiexw .. .. 


Characes. 


iz ‘Nonnenevs O.—New Chara a SAPS dan PN ER ae LOS = Pea ae 
ant ne _ 9 New Nitella peste eee Seg: oat Dies eel, eae MeR teen Gs ame a 
Alge. 
 Remscn, P. F.—New ‘Conon Of TOPIC EO Sort lan ss eM So Toe eee 
= Kuserann, H.—Zygospores of Conjugate = 12 6. ane ae sn ew 


 Mourray; G., & L. A. Boopre— Spongocladia . Bia Bae ES BO SNA a fe PT oe th oe 
~_ Hanserse, A.—Aerophytic Species of Ulotrichacew 2. ss s+ ss se ee 


~ WiILDEMANN, E. DE—Bulbotrichia .. ESE 
- Toni, J. B. De—Hansgirgia, a new genus of aerial Alge: .. Se riten es 
o Danceany, V2 A = Chloroqoninm sss on) we 008 oe ce 
pce ae » Chlamydomonas .. pA EEE ADE 2 
eer S 5 Chlamydococcus pluvialis Lee ee eet 
‘Hacirvuenscy, P.—Cell membrane and Gelatinous Envelope of Desinidiaw BED 


Fungi. 


~Coxun— Basidiomycetes .. SDS pies ae ered 
‘COSTANTIN, J- —Heterobasidial ‘Basidiomycetes asi sar Sata a ei setn Pete ean was 
Sarna, di DE Poly por eae = os oF oe acne oo oe pane owe ay pe Meh eh we as 


" SABLON, Leciero pu—Antherozoids of Oneitamthes shirtin( hive Seen as ge es 


-Istvsnrri, G.—Structure of Ulothrix -.. —.. Datetiew if eb pee anes Soe 


Mouier, A.—“ Spermatia” of the Ascomycetes eas tog s Selb Nia ero foe BGS ee 


PaTOcILUARD, | N.—Prototremella Sse 5 os eee ie ice ae Da halgeOe! ust 


VuitLemin, P.—Ascospora Beijerinckti 6. se ee ae a tee wt 
DierTeEL, P_— Uredinex and their Hosts . 5 , oR he ek 
Warp, H. MArsuatt—Structure and Lifedistory ibe Puccinia Graminis <9. Ny 
Cvson1, G.—Peronospora viticola .... a ig 


»  Peronospora of the Rose -. oS Oe ee 
Mort, F .—Ascophorous form of Penicillium eandidum yt Riedy sh sae viet Ree 
EICHELBAUM, F'.—New Aspergillus.) 60620: “oe. Se eed lo an Se 
Qvé.et, L.—Ombrophila and Guepinia pa yas C8 lets tw Oh it aie.t 4 “nd Ba Uae 
KLEBAEN, H.—Peridermitine Pint oo oe e0 i 0d as ee he ed a 
Bountek, Fi Pilaera 32d iegeht Pern o See OO ad le LES aE ey ae 


Waseenzug, T.—-Fusomag ess ins Cae ae Ss” Mes % obo eats iP 
CosTANTIN, J. —Diplocladium .. oe 7 - - -- - a - “ - 
Mittrr, H.—*‘ Edelfaiule ” of Grapes ws ah Beaty Swe 
eatpeag iat J., & Rottanp—Stysanus and Hormodendron- She ob a ee 
Emam, E ).—New Mould . * ad of -* * : 
THaxTer, R. —Entimophthores of the United States aS S&S bites ti 3a oe tee 
Krenitz-Ger.orr, F.—Gonidia of Gymnosporangium 4. an ee ee 
Harroc, M.—Recent Researches on the Saproleqniex .. . »y* 
Perroncito, E.—Chytridium elegans, n. sp., a Parasite ae the Rotatoria 
TomascuEK, A.—New Chytridium .. eo ee AGS Smee 
CosTantin, J. — Parasites of the Higher Fungi ge este OR Sede Seat oe 
Protophyta. ; : 
Gomont, M.—Cellular Envelope of the Filamentous eT See ah ae 
Borzi, A.—Chlorothecitum = ny PR as as 


DancearD, P. A.—Reproduction of Nephroeytium YA Ns oe ep hee Fae C 
Hanserre, A.— Trochiscia and Tetraedron ..- os oe © on oe ee wee 
ReEINsScH, P. F.—Polyedriacee.. EP lig PS 
Miqvet, P.—Bacillus living at a temperature execeling 70° | tet ty 
Fiscner— Bacterial Growth at 0° GC, se uu ea ce eee ne te ae 
Hawnsoire, A.—Cellar Backeria 2.0 se ke oon cae ee le Wee en ee 
Kocu, A. — Endosporous Bacteria. 4 Pir me ree hie 
Bucuyer, H. —Supposed Spores of the Typhoid Bacillus... 
NeissER—Spore-formation in the Bacilli of Xerosis conjunctive, Streptococei, and 
Cholera spirilla .. .. pti Pte Vie artsy he 
Gautier, V.— Pathogenic her vimo-avOnetes Microbe Fe peg eae PER 
WirBEL, E.— Vibrios *s 
O.tvier, L.— Physiological Experiments on Organisms of Glairine and ec "3 


MICROSCOPY. 
a. Instruments, Accessories, &c. 
@) Stands. 


Aurens’ New Erecting Microscope (Fig. 161) «2 1 te we ot nee 
Kuein’s Excursion Microscope (Figs. 162-164) .. . 

Prircuard’s Microscope with “Continental” Fine-adjustment Pigs. 1 165 and 166). 
GrirFita’s (E. H.) Fine-adjustment (Figs. 167 aud 168) .... 

Maya, J.— Necessity for a Sub-stage .. «1 ee es ne ne tee 


(2) Eye-pieces and Objectives. 
Derective Objectives and the Binocular Microscope 


(8) Illuminating and other Apparatus. 
Kocn’s & Max Wouz’s Reflector (Figs. 169-172) «2 6. see 
NUTTALL’s (e) Warm Chamber (¥Pig.173).. .«. sb hea 
ScuONLAND, S.—Modification of Pagan’s “ Growing Slide” (Fig. 174) WE a 
(4) Photomicrography. - 
Jesericn's (P.) Photomicrographie Apparatus (Fig. 175) :.  .. <1 se as 
Grirritn’s (E. H.) Photomicrographie Camera (Fig. 176) aS rep eu tape eae 
JesEnicu’s (P.) Focusing Arrangement (Figs. 177 and 178) _.. E 
Srencet’s (M.) Coarse and Fine Focusing Arrangements (Figs. 179 and 180) : 
Nevunavss, R.—Adaptation of the ordinary Eye-piece for Photomicrography .. 
SrencLemn, M.—Illumination of Objects in Photomiecrography .. «+ 4. +s 
Scumiprt & Harenscu—Zirconium Light for Photomicrography PA = 


{5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. 
MicgoscoricaL Oplies and the Quekett Club Journal ..% 25 i. ee os 
(6) Miscellaneous. 


Cu 


B. Technique. 
ye @ Colidetine Objects, including Culture Processes. _ Pacn 
. RiceTer—Agar-agar for Cultivation — .. Diy ee LOSG 
- Pozzo, D. Dat—Albumen of Plovers’ Eggs as ‘Nutrient "Medium for Micro-organisme 1037 
tale H.—New Method for Cultivating Anaerobic Micro- eigancene (Hig. 181).. 10387 


Rasew, M.—Milk asa Medium .. sev ieery ex LOSS 
Pawtowsky, A. D.—Cultivation of Bacillus Tuberculosis on Potato vert Mes wae LOSS 
Rovx, E.~Cultivation of Anaerobic Microbes —., Seca ear LOSS 
: Bincu-Hrrscurmip—Cultivation of. the “ Typhus” Bacillus in 1 coloured nutrient 
media- .. .- 1039 
Norccrrata—New Method oF cultivating Bacteria in Coloured Media for Diagnostic. 
pines Sots fom tae ese P0G9 
“Pat, H.— Improvements an Plaut’s Flasks for sterilizing Se Seeds: pees LOAD 
DAS AOBCHEW ASCH, S.—Fire-proof Cotton-wool Plug for Test-tubes',. ... .. s. 1040 


(2) Preparing Objects. 


e 7 ae Miia: A eo Methads of Examining Blood-corpuscles.. — .. oo os ee 2040 


~ Lricu, R.—Preserving Blood-corpuscles for Microscopical Examination ve ee ww 1041 


Fe OBERSTEIN, H.—Methods for Investigating the Structure of the Central Nervous 


Organs in health and disease .. ae ee LOSE 
: Prrrone, Li=—Methods for Examining the Structure of ‘the ‘Cerebrospinal Nerves ~»- 1042 
' Wei, L. A.—Making Preparations of Bone and Teeth and pee their soft 


gay parts Sas wees «+ os 1042 

~ WoopHeap, G.'S. —Preparing large Sections of Lung mnie fae Sat ae Comcast LOA 

ie Htwoytwar— Cleansing the Intestine of many animals of sand. we ieee ih wees NOES 

~ Rous, L.— Killing contractile Animals in a state of extension... ». +» .. «. 1044 

-FEewxkes, J. W.—Preparation of Embryos of Asterias.. .. mie ei soa ast Ose 

Frepimr, K.—Investigation of Generative Products of Spongilla pn 1045 
Hiasertanvt, G.—New Method for Marking Root-hairs and for. Hardening and 

SOS Plant-cellg .. .. mates ae ene ae ove, oe, 1045 

> Kiri, L Be A ape of Fresh-water ‘Algz sescas reeset! ee s LOAG 


 Nixtrorow, M.—Stmple Method for Fixing Cover-glass Preparations Sevthae vec ORT 


(8) Cutting, including Imbedding. 


i CATHCART Trinttocd Microtome (Figs. 182 and ee me rsa gh ete wala ae oat a nies OLY 
Renyes, J. E.—Thin Sections... .. .. sae Seog ee ee LOLS, 


: (4) Staining ee Inj ecting, 
-Mosso, A.—Methyl-green for observing the Chemical Reaction and Death Le Cells .. 1049 


Nixirorow, M.— Nuclear Carmine Stain .. . v. 1050 
Resrcorrt, L pegs ocd Karyokinetie Figures .. Sih eek LODO 
Nixirorow, M.—Suafranin as a Stain for the-Central Nervous System SA 1051 
Hamitton, D. J.—Combining Weigert’s Hematoxylin-copper Stuin for Nerve -fibre 

with the use.of the freezing Microtome .. 1051 


ss Ferra, L oe of Elastic Fibres with Cheon Acid: Bee Safranin a hs eee: ie 
_ Herricuer, E.—Congo-red as a Reagent for Cellulose .: Yet eae LUOD 


Loomis, H. P.—Simple and rapid Staining of the Tubercle Bacillus Pls isto LOO 
NIKIFOROW, N.— Staining the Spirochxte of Relapsing Fever .. ..  .,... «. 1054 


-Sovza, A. peed aes in Histological Technique ~.. 1054 
~ Garpini, A.—WVodification of Garbini’s Double Stuin with Anilin. ‘hae and Safr anin 1054 
_ Worstur, C.—Congo-red as a Reagent for Free Acid.. — .. fea LOD De 


£3 - Marrinortt, G.— Absorption of Anilin Pigments by Living Animal Cells se oe L055 
- Grizspaca, H.— Theory of Microscopical Staining. ..  .... cae oe wes 1056 


Gaus, 8. H—Starch Injection-mass NTH Peeks inact on opp ieee ys care tas ond tees CLOUD 


(5) Mounting, including Slides, Preservative Fluids, ec! 
Garzini, A.—Mounting of spectmens to be examined. with homogeneous-immersion 
ae Lenses. .. UG Pa AURIS b EF Saree RCE Ree ae Pee LOD bis 
a os TH. —Preparing Styraz Balsam Fate ahs ea SG ae bg Pe Phe ee ea LOD E 
(6) Miscellaneous. i 


: Garsrnr s (A) Closed Water-bath (Fig. 184) — .. Sas age mene ts LOTS 


. Vas, H. pr—New Application of the Plasmolytic Method’ ee 1059 
ce Pernt, R. J.— New. Method ae DOG and Cunlengs Bacteria and Bunge. 
: Spores tn the attr... oe wquresty ses eee ae LOOD 
‘ Sone oe ae & Bacat— Investigating the Bye at Remedies by y the 
_ Mieroscope~, —-. bine eisee Sac oe = Penge enrerrae (1s) 


-* Aswaus eisai ie! seh An Seay Given, (cobs Seer soa, Seany tea ho ces) aes 2 a4 LOOO” A 


- Paocespnves ‘OF THE Society Ue ea ue ale ag ese ga ee OE, 


I.—APERTURE_ TABLE. 


7 
ERS 


Penes > 


Corresponding Angle (2 u) for Limit of Resolving Power, in Lines to an Inch. 
5 Tllominating] trating 


Numerical Monochromatic 


; Homogeneous 1 white Light. | (Blue) Light. | Photography. | Power. | Power, 
pent rad sabres Dmmersion (A teres pe Ay ie By ar waters (a*.) 6 Weer 
(o sin w= a.) i)" (m= 2:00). |. Co = 1°83). | = 1°52 Tine Be) Line F.) "| near Line h.) (- 

1°52 . 3 a 180° - Q’ 146,543 158,845 193,037 +65: 
1°51 en os 166° 51’ 145,579 157,800 191 , 767 F 
1-50 ts 5 161° 23’ 144,615 156,755 190,497 
1:49 a sid IST? 32 143,651 155,710 189, 227 
1:48 ea ee 158° 39’ 142,687 154,665 187, 957 
1:47 ws a2 150° 32’ 141,723 153,620 186 , 687 
1°46 rat Zs 147° 42’ 140,759 152,575 185,417 
1-45 pi bea 145° 6’ 139,795 151,530 184,147 
1:44 149° 39’ | 138,830 | 150,485 | 182.877 
1:43 140° 22° | 137,866 | 149,440 | 181,607 
1:42 138° 12’ 186,902 148,395 180 ,337 
1-41 F369: =8F 135,938 147,350 179, 067 
1°40 134° 10’ 134,974 146,305 177,797 
1-39 Re 132° 16’ | 184,010. | 145,260 | 176,527 
1:88 “i 130° 26’ | 133,046 | 144,215 | 175,257 
1°37 128° 40’ 132,082 143,170 173,987 
rae toes 58’ ran aee 142,125 172,717 
*35 Py! Se 25°°18" 130,154 141,080 171,447 
1‘34 ag as 123° 40’ 129,189 140,035 170,177 
1°33 oS 180°. 0’| 122° 6’ 128,225 138,989 168,907 
1°32 165° 56’ | 120° 33’ 127,261 137,944 167 , 637 
1:31 160° 6'| 119° 3’ | 126,997 | 136,899 | 166,367 
1°30 155°:38" (117° 35’ 125,333 135,854 165,097 
1:29 11°50" |" 116° © 8’ 124,369 134,809 163,827 
1°28 148° 42’ | 114° 44’ 123,405 133,764 162,557 
1:27 145 o OF 4h L1BO 2h 122,441 132,719 161,287 
1:26 142° 397 | 111° -59’ 121,477 131,674 160,017 
1°25 140° 3’ | 110° 39’ 120,513 130,629 158,747 
1°24 137° 36’ | 109° 20’ 119,548 129,584 157,477 
1:23 $3590.175| 1082: =o 118,584 128,539 156,207 
1:22 133° 4’ | 106° 45’ | 117,620 127,494 154,937 
1:21 130° 57’ | 105°-30’ 116,656 126,449 ‘153,668 
1-20 128° 55’ | 104°° 15’ 115, 692 125,404 152,397 
1:19 126° 58’ | 103° 2° 114,728 124,359 151,128 
1-18 125° 3'| 101° 50’ | 113,764 | 123,314 | 149,857 
E17 123° 13’ | 100° 38' 112,799 122,269 148,588 
re 121° 26’}- 99° 29' 111,835 121,224 147,317 
“15 119° 41’ | 98° 20’ 110,872 120,179 146, 048 
ag a a 0’ o7” ibe 109,907 119,134 144,777 
‘ = 1629520"): 962 =97 108,943 118,089 143,508 
1-12 114° 44’| 94° 55’ 107,979 117,044 142 , 237 
1-11 113°< =9' |. 932 47! 107,015 115,999 140,968 
1:10 11 T°'S6":|° -92° 43° 106,051 114,954 139,698 
“ee 110° SEF O1e 238; 105 , 087 113,909 138,428 
: 108° 36’ |} 90° 34’ 104,123 112,864 137,158 
1:07 107° 8’ | 89° 80’ 103,159 111,819 135,888 
es 105° 42’ 88° 27° 102,195 110,774 134,618: 
7 104° 16’ | &7° 24’ 101,231 109,729 133,348 
1:04 102° 53’ | 86° 21’ 100,266 108,684 132,078 
roe 101° 30’ 85° 19’ 99,302 107,639 130,808 
: 100° 10’ | 84° 18’ 98,338 106,593 129,538 
1:01 s. 98° 50'| 83° 17! 97,374. | 105,548. | 128,268 
1:00 180° 0’ 972 BE Seo 47 96,410 104,503 126,998 
0:99 163° 48’ 96° 12'|. 81° 17’ 95,446 103,458 125,728 
0:98 VEY pea i 94° 56’} 80° 17’ 94,482 102,413 124,458 . 
0:97 151959" 93° 40'| 79° 18’ 93,518 101,368 123,188 
0:96 || 147° 29 92° 24'| 78° 20! 92,554 | 100,323 | 121,918 
0°95 143° 36’ DIS MIG STOO" 91, 590 99,278 120,648 
0:94 140° 6’ 89° 56’| 76° 24’ 90,625 98,233 119,378 
0:93 136° 52’ 88° 44’ | 75° 27’ 89,661 97,188 118,108 
0:92 332° 61 87° 32’ | 74° 80° 88, 697 96,143 116,838 
0-91 131° = 0! 86° 20’| 73° 33’ 87,733 95,098 115,568 
0-90 128° 19’ 85°. 10’ | 72° 36’ 86,769 94,053 114,298 
Eos 125° 45’ 84° 0’| 71° 40' 85,805 93,008 113,028 


123° 17’ 82° 51'| 70° 44’ 84,841 91,963 111,758 


~ APERTURE TABLE—continued. 


Corresponding Angle (2 w) for | Limit of Resolving Power, in Lines to an Inch. 


ee ns Pene- 
Wumerical||: WT oncchcomatlers flluminating} trating 
Aperture. Air Water -|#omogencous | white Light. | (Blue) Light. | Photography.| Gay: Foie: 
ire is per iia Immersion | (, — 90-5269 uw, |(X = 04861 m,| (A= 0°4000 p ; eo 
(n Lelgaw apa Ae Sag: (i= 1°38), | (w= 1°52). Line E.) Line F.) near, Line kh.) a 
0:87 120° 55’ 81° 42’ } 83,877 90,918 |} 110,488 “157 1-149 
0°86 118° 38’ ! $2,913 89,873 109,218 +740 1:163 
0°85 ||| 116° 25! — Ss 81,949 | 88,828 | 107,948 *723 1-176 
0°84 114° 17’ - 80,984 87,783 106,678 “706 4} 17190 
~ 0°83. }}.112° 12’ 80, 020 86,738 105,408 | <689 1 1-205 
0°82. 110° 10’ 16° SSG 79,056 85,693 104,138 ~ *672 1°220 
0-81. 108° 10’ DIA 78,092 84,648 102, 868 *656 1°235 
0:80 || 106° 16’ ie 77,128 83,603 101,598 © *640 1-250 
~ 0°79 |} 104° 22’ 76,164 82,558 100,328 "624 1°266 
- 0°78 102° 31’ . # 75,200 81,513 99,058 . -608 1:282 
0°77 100° 42’ |. 74,236 80,468 97,788 ~ +693 4 1-299 
O86 oi 989 S56" ; 73,272 79,423 96,518 -578 1°316 
0:75 97° 11’ : ; 72,308 78,378 95,248 "563 1:333 
0:74 || 95° 287 71,343 | 77.333. | 93.979 “548 | 1-351 
se O2"43 2. 93°. 46/ - - 70,379 76,288 92,709 “533 1-370 
~0:72 92° 6! 69,415 75 , 242 91,439 ‘518 1-389 
Ore: iit-:-909 :28" 2 68,451 74,197 90,169 | :504 | 1-408 
-- 0*'70 88° 51’ 67,487 73,152 88,899 -490 71-429 
0°69 -87° 16’ 3 66,523 72,107 87,629 *476 1:449 
0°68 85° 41’ 30’. 65,559 71,062 86,359 . °462 1:471 
~ O-67 |) 84°. 8 64,595 70,017 . 85,089 *449 1-493 
0:66 - 82° 36’ 63,631 68,972 83,819 *436 1-515 
- 0°65 81° 6’ 62,667 67,927 82,549- *423  4.1<538 
0°64 - 79° 36’ 61,702 66,882 — 81,279 *410 1°562 
- 0°63 PUB Orde 60,738 65, 837 80,009 “397 1°587 
- 0:62 - 16° 387 4 59,774 64,792 78,739 *384 411-613 
0°61 75° 10’ 58,810 © 63,747 17,469 °372 1°639 
~ 0:60 || 73° 44’ 57,846 62,702 76,199 *360 1-667 
~ 0:59 72° 18° | |: ; 56,881 61,657 74,929 °348 1-695 
*. 0:58 70° 54’ i 50,918 60,612 73,659 *336 1°724 
0°57 69° 30’ ; 54,954 59, 567 72,389 *325 1/1+754 
0:56 || 68° 6° 53,990 | 58,522 | 71,119 ‘314 | 1-786 
0°55. || 66° 44° 53.026 | 57.477_| 69,849 -303 | 1-818 
0:54 65° 22’ 52,061 06,432 68,579 ° 292 1°852 
0°53 . 64°. 0' 51,097 55,387 67,309 “281 1887 
0-52 || 62° 40’ 60,133 | 54,342 |. 66,039 -270 | 1-923 
0°51 — || 61° 20’ 49,169 53,297 64,769 °260 1 1-961 
0°50 60° 0’ 48,205 2,252 63,499 * 250 2°000 
0:48 || 57° 29" 46,277 | 50.162 | 60,959 -930 | 2-083 
~ 0:46- 54° 47° - 44,349 - 48,072 98,419 “212 2°174 
-. 0:45 Dasa : 43,385 47,026 97,149 *203.: | 2°222 
- 0°44 522:13' ; 42,420 45,981 55,879 °194 | 2:273 
~ 0:42 49° 40° 40,492 |} 43,891 53,339 176 | 2-381 
0°40 47° 9! ; 38,564 41,801 50,799 *160 2°500 
~- 0°38 . 44° 40! 36, 636 39,711 48,259 “144 | 2-632 
~~ 0-36 -||. 42° 12’ 4’ ~ : 34,708 |} 37,621 45,719 -130 2°778 
0:35 40° 58’ 83,744 36,576 44,449 | °123 | 2°857 
~ 0:34 39° 44°. 825779 35,531 43,179 ‘116 2°941 
. 0°32 37° 20° ; | 30,851 | 33,441 | 40,639 102 3°125 
- 0:30 . 34° 56’ 285923 31,351 38,099 *090 | 3°333 
~ 0°28 - 32°32! : : 26,995 29,261 | 385,559 “078 8°571 
» 0°26 30° 10’: 25, 067 27,171 33,019 068 | 3-846 
0:25 - 28° 58’ $ yf 24,103 26,126 31,749. -063.. | 4:000 
~ 0°24 27° 46’ 23,138. 25,081 30,479 | °058 | 4-167 
> 0°22 _ 2507267. ; 21,210 22,991 27,940 “048 4°545 
0-20. || 93° 4° 19,282 | 20,901 | 25,400 |  -040 | 5-000 
0:18 20° 44’ 17,354 18,811 | .-22;860- *032 97555 
0:16 | 18° 24’ Aa ~ 15,426 16,721 ~ 20,320: - *026 6*250 
—-Orls — 17° 14’ : 14,462 15,676 19,050 *023 6° 667 
~ O14 || 16° 5! 13,498 14,6380 | 17,780 °020 | 7°143 
~~ 0:12 13° 47’ : ) 11,570 | -12,540°° 15,240 “O14 8°333 
0°10 . 11° 29' j / (9,641 - 10,450: 12,700 “O10. §10-000 
~ 0°08. 292 NI! 7,713. -8,360 10,160 | = -006 12-500 
Ee eae 6° 53 ey, 0,785 -6,270 7,620 §  *004 6:667 — 


ple 6 Se 4,821 5,225 | 6,350 ‘003 20-000 - 


Sal 


( 10 ) 
GREATLY REDUCED PRICES 


OBJECT-GLASSES MANUFAGTURED BY 


R. & J. BECK, 


68, CORNHILL, LONDON, E.C. 


PRICES OF BEST ACHROMATIC OBJECT-GLASSES. 


Ange Linear magnifying-power, with 10-inch 
<8 Vidal leigth. Saget Price. hody-tube and eye-pieces. 


ture, PREIAR 3 MgO GORTERTE acm 
about No. 1. No. 2.) No. 3. No. 4.| No, 5. 
BS £85 =, 
100 | 4 inches... 9 : pi 18) Io 16 30 40 50 
101 | 3 inches x 7 0 | 
102 | Sinches .. 1 | 210 0 } ee a Re Nd a 75 
103 | 2inches .. . 10 110 0). 
104 | Q2inches .. ..} 17 210 0 } a2. BO)" G7 le, mae 
105 ; 14 a eee 23 4 o 4 30 48 go | 120 150 
2; | 
ae A neh ss ; : ; ee 210 0 70} 12} 210} -280 350 
108 | finch . 2s 45 210 0}! 100} 160) 300; 400 500 
109 | 4; inch ae Bar 4 4 O O} 125 }. 200} +375 | 500 625 
110 | 54, inch os se | 95 5 0.0} 150 240} 450} 600 750 
111 finch Stitplesees 75 810 0 | 200} 320} 600}, 800] 1000 
AVS}. 2 neh save azo 410 0 250} 400]. 750 | 1000 | 4250 
113 | iinch .. .. 130 5° O QO} 400} 640} 1200 | 1600 | 2000 
114 | 3, imm. . 180 5 6B O| 500} 800] 1590 | 2000 | -2500 
115 | 4 imm. : . { 180 8 O Oj 750 | 1200 | 2250 | 3000 | 3750 
116 | 3,imn. oe ae fe 20g ef 104-00 | 1000 | 1600 | 3000 | 4000 | 5000 
117 | 2; inch. - | 160 | 20. 0 0 | 2000 | 3200 | 6000 | 8000 | 10,0c0 


ECONOMIC ACHROMATIC OBJECT-GLASSES, 


APPLICABLE TO ALL INSTRUMENTS MADE WITH THE UNIVERSAL Screw. 


MAGNIFYING-POWER, 
r with 6-inch body and 
Price. eye-pieces, 


Focal length. 
No. 1.|No. 2. | No. 3.| 


os be Bad 
3 inches 6 i~O=8 $3.) SS 
8 100 18 23 
18 17''6::°O 46 61 
38 165 0 go | 116 
80 1 5 O | 170 | 220 
1I0 2 5 Oj 250 |} 330 
110 310 O | 350 | 450 
180 6 O O |} 654 | 844 


Revised Catalogue sent on application to 
R. & J. BECK, 68S, Cornhill. 


F| | 
a 


Auliseus 


Sy 


AS i 
= 
: 


Mees 


geo oo? ¢o Oj; 


West, Nevanan &Co.lith 


Auliseus. 


hy 


ERVIN 


. 


. i 
. 
Tae ty 


Se YOR. 


& 


Auliscus &c. 


J Rattray del 


West Newman & Co. ith. 


JOURNAL 


OF THE 


ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 


DECEMBER 1888. 


TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCISTY. 


XI.—A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb. and of some allied 
Genera. 


By Joun oe M.A., B.Se., F.R.S.E. 


Chad 12th December, 1888.) 
Puates XII-XVLI.- 
Ix the elaboration of the present paper, I have again had the 
privilege of consulting the specimens now preserved in the British 
Museum (Natural History) as well as many valuable preparations 


from the private collections of the same home and foreign observers 
as I have already named in my Revision of Aulacodiscus Ehbrb., 


EXPLANATION OF PLATES XII.-XVI. 
Puiate XII. 


Fig. 1—Auliscus amcenus sp. n. x 660. 
3 2 | Rattrayi Cleve MS. x 660. 


Sen es raeanus sp. n. X 660. 

5) A 5 nitidus sp. n. 660, 

Sit COs Ls pectinatus sp. n. x 660. 

i Oe decoratus sp. n. x 660. 

BS Ai ee ine sublevis sp. n. x 660. 

9» 8 5 intermedius sp. n. x 660. 
Puate XIII. 

» 1.—Auliscus rugosus sp. n. x 660. 

Be 2 35 spectabilis sp. n. x 660. 

isa it leiioe interruptus var. sparsa nov. x 660. 

Pet: ees antiquus sp. n. x 660. 

$5 ON ss interruptus sp. n. x 660. 

9 8.— 45s gracillimus sp. n. x 660. 
PLATE XIV. 

», 1.—Auliscus acutiusculus sp. n. x 660. 

Stee as eximius sp. n. X 660. 

» 3 » subspeciosus sp. n. X 660. 

3 A" opulentus sp. n. x 660. 

ema tee fractus sp. n. X 660. 

Oris dissimilis sp. n. x 650. 

» 7.—Eupodiscus parvulus var. concentrica noy. x 400. 

ee > 6 Grev. MS. x 400. 

9.— decrescens sp. n. X 610. 


10. —Pseudauliscus tetraophthalmus Cleve MS. x 660. 
1888. 3.N 


862 Transactions of the Society. 


published by the Society in June of the present year ; but in addition 
to the names there recorded, I would here express my gratitude to 
Dr. A. C. Macrae and Mr. A. de Souza Guimaraens, for the liberality 
and readiness with which they have placed at my disposal the resources 
of their cabinets, and to the former for verbal summaries which he 
has from time to time given me of his extensive observations on the 
distribution of the Diatomaceze in the Indian Ocean and Eastern 
Archipelago. 


AULISCUS Ehrb. emend. 
Avuiscus Ehrb. emend., Mon. Ber. Ak., 1843, p. 270. 


Valves circular, subcireular, or elliptical, rarely obtusely angular. 
Surface almost flat, or rising from central space to processes; trans- 
verse areas at right angles—rarely oblique—to line of processes 
frequent, flat or rising towards, and widest at the outer ends ; obconical 
or obcordate areas between central space and processes often distinctly 
defined ; the central portion of the valve between the processes some- 
times sharply circumscribed, regularly rounded, elliptical, protuberant, 
or constricted opposite the central space, sometimes extending to the 
outer side of the processes, rarely much elevated. Colour pale to pale 
smoky grey, rarely dark grey or bluish. Central space circular, ellip- 
tical, obtusely angular or diamond-shaped with concave sides and pro- 
truding angles, hyaline, distinct or inconspicuous. Markings minute, 
punctate, in delicate continuous or pruinose strie, sometimes forming 
wider, straight or curved, continuous or interrupted strands, those 
strie converging to central side of processes usually distinct; rarely 
large, areolate, pearly, and without order ; interspaces hyaline ; apiculi 
irregularly scattered outside of central space and processes, or confined 
to more definite bands, sometimes few or absent; a reticulum with 
delicate, small or large, coarse, subequal or irregular meshes extending 
from central space to border or confined to central portion only, more 
rarely only outside of central portion, sometimes present. Processes 


PuLaTEe XV. 


Fig. 1—Pseudauliscus ambiguus var. major nov. x 660. 
»  2.—Auliscus conyolutus sp. n. x 660. 
5 3.—Pseudauliscus hirsutus sp. n. x 660. 


» 4+— a anceps sp. n. x 660. 

» 5.—Auliscus celatus var. delicatula noy. x 660. 

» 6.— 5s » var. mutabilis nov. x 660. 

» i a * var. picta nov. x 660. 

» 8.— as » Var. constricta nov. x 660. 

» I— “ s Var. impressa nov. x 660. 
Puate XVI. 

» 1.—Auliscus decoratus var. affinis nov. x 660. 

» 2— » elegans var. subpunctata, nov. x 660. 

» ;  celatus var. tenuis nov. x 660. 


, 4.—Isodiscus mirificus x 660. 

» 0.—Auliscus intermedius var. simplex noy. x 660. 
oo »  celatus var. protuberans var. noy. x 660, 
» 7.—Pseudauliscus rotatus sp. n. x 660. 


West, Newman&Colith 


iseus ke. 


. Al 


q 


Wet 


(i 


ip 


7K | 


st, Newman &Colith. 


We 


(Ce 


TSCuUs 


Aul 


7 
olse 
Sp otd se 
Past ay 
ae 


32° ee) 


RO eka 
Se ase  ae o OG 


roy s 
Aa 0%, 
92a aso. 


SISO g Dia 


> 
ag tees aaa an 
3 8 ett Ne gOd 
Aaa epee AS P 
Prat he i : ee i . 
n%s 22 ac 00h Gas : 
Py OLD 
aye en 


ice 
* 


bes) 


af, Batine del. 


A Revision of the Genus Auliseus Ehrb., &c. By J. Rattray. 863 


2, rarely 1, 3 or 4, mastoid and low or mammillate and more elevated, 
the free ends flat or convex, with central portion hyaline or punctate, 
round, elliptical, or obtusely angular, their border hyaline, rarely 
striated, the circumference smooth or with minute irregularities.— 
Bail. Smiths. Contrib., 1853, p. 4; Coscinodiscus pro parte Ehrb., 
ibid. 1843, p. 271, 1844, p. 77; Kiitz. Sp. Alg., p. 126; Mastodiseus 
Bail. ibid., p. 4; Hupodiseus pro parte Smith Syn. Brit. Diat. 
vol. i. p. 25. 


§ 1. GranuLatt. 


Markings granular. No converging strize between central space 
and processes. 
A. robustus. 


A. punctatus var. robusta Truan & Witt, Jerem. Diat. 1888, p. 12, 
ple wi, fis. 9 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0°1025 mm., about 1,4 times 
minor. Surface with central portion indistinct, its edge convex 
outwards between the processes about 3/4 of radius from border, slope 
at border slight. Colour pale grey, darker at outer edge of central 
portion. Central space rounded, 0°01 mm. broad. Markings 
prominent round granules, subequal, 5} to 4 in 0°01 mm, in 
inconspicuous radiating and diverging rows. Processes 2, nearer 
central space than border, irregularly round, about 0°02 mm. broad, 
their border wide, the central portion small, irregular. 

Habitat: Jeremie deposit, Hayti (Weissflog! ). 


A. pauper sp. n., Sch. Atl, pl. exxy. fig. 5 (no name). 


Subcircular, diam. 0°053 mm. Surface subplain, rising but 
slightly at the processes, the transverse central area defined by a 
distinct clear band, convex outwards between, and passing on central 
side of, processes. Central space indefinite. Markings small, rounded 
granular, chiefly on an irregular space around the edge of the trans- 
verse area, and in loosely disposed radial lines outside of the clear 
band, interspaces hyaline. Processes 2, subcircular, 0:0125 mm. broad, 
their border wide, circumference subsmooth. 

Habitat : Simbirsk (Thum). 


A. Rattray Cleve in litt. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0°06 mm., about 1} times minor. 
Surface subplain. Central space circular, 0:0075 mm. broad. 
Markings round, granular, most evident towards the border, about 
4 in 0°01 mm., interspaces narrow, hyaline. ows distinct, radial, not 
converging around the processes. Processes 2, placed from 3/8 to 1/2 
of distance between central space and border, their border broad, 
irregular.—Pl. XII. fig. 2. 

Habitat: Barbadoes deposit (Cleve!). 

gn 2 


864 Transactions of the Society. 


A, nanus, Sch. Atl. pl. xxxii. fig. 27. 


Subcircular or elliptical, diam. 0°04 mm. Surface flat. Colour 
hyaline, with dark border. Central space circular, hyaline, incon- 
spicuous, about 0°003 mm. broad. Markings round, granular, minute, 
with wide interspaces, irregular or in faintly marked radiating lines 
curved towards the processes, sometimes absent between the processes 
and the central space, and for a distance of about 0°0025 mm. from 
each process. Processes 2, subcircular, 0°005 mm. broad. 

Habitat: Cambridge deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson!) ; Simbirsk 
Polirschiefer (Schmidt). 


A. Clevei Grun., Sch. Atl., pl. xxxi. figs. 1-4. 


Elliptical, major axis 0°06 mm.,about 11 times minor. Surface 
rising suddenly to the processes, a narrow, clear, parallel band passing 
between the base of the processes on each side of the central space. 
Colour pale grey. Central space rounded, 0:0075 mm. broad. Markings 
rounded, distinct, 8 in 0°01 mm., smallest towards central space, 
arranged in lines radiating and diverging from the central space to 
the border, and concave towards the processes, absent from a narrow 
area at base of processes. Processes 2, about 0°0055 mm. broad at 
the base, free ends rounded, in girdle aspect conical, rising to about 
0:0125 mm. above edge of girdle. 

Habitat: Campeachy Bay (Weissflog! Cleve !). 


§ 2. SrRIoLaTi. 


No transverse median areas. Markings delicate, straight, flexuous 
or uniformly curved, striz usually inconspicuous. Apiculi minute or 
prominent, irregularly scattered, sometimes confined to distinct areas, 
rarely absent. 


A. pressus Leud.-Fort. Diat. Ceyl., p. 63, pl. vii. fig. 72. 


Trregularly elliptical with obtuse extremities, major axis about 
0:045 mm., 14 times minor. Surface with low processes, slope at 
border slight. Central space circular, about 0°003 mm. broad, 
distinct. Markings irregular, flexuous, but evident, short striae 
radiating from the central space towards the border, those converging 
to the processes inconspicuous, irregular. Processes 2, subcircular, 
about 0°0055 mm. broad, their central portion distinctly punctate. 

Habitat: Ceylon (Leuduger-Fortmorel). 


A. nitidus sp. 0. 


Elliptical, major axis 0°0625 mm., 14 times minor. Surface almost 
flat. Colour subhyaline. Central space diamond-shaped, indistinct, 
minute, with straight sides, the angles in the direction of the processes, 
and of the minor axis. Markings obscure, punctate, isolated delicate 
puncta around the outer edge of the central space, a few delicate striz 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., de. By J. Rattray. 865 


between the central space and the processes; sparsely disposed, 
irregular, minute, clear specks chiefly towards the border. Processes 
2, close to major axis of valve, circular, 0°01 mm. broad, with wide 
border.—Pl. XII. fig. 4. 

Habitat: Newcastle deposit, Barbadoes (Firth !). 


A. barbadensis Grev., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1865, p. 5, pl. 1. fig. 1. 


Elliptical, major axis 0°05 mm., about 14 times minor. Surface 
highest and slightly convex along the line of the processes, slope at 
border gentle. Colour subhyaline. Central space subcircular, distinct, 
about 0:003 mm. broad. Markings obscure ; the two narrow, irregular, 
clear bands passing obliquely between the central space and the border 
on each side of the striz converging to the processes, curving and 
branching towards their outer ends. Processes 2, placed close to the 
major axis, about 0°0075 mm. broad. 

Habitat: Cambridge deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson!); Newcastle 
deposit, Barbadoes (Weissflog !). 


A. lineatus Grove & Sturt, Journ. Quek. Mic. Cl., 1887, p. 141, 
pl. xii. fig. 36. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0°065 to 0°1 mm, about 1,4 to 
1,1, times minor. Surface rising gradually to the processes, and 
sloping gently to the border, three distinct ridges diverging from the 
angles of the central space, and dividing the area between the pro- 
cesses on each side into four subequal portions. Colour pale smoky 
grey. Central space irregular to hexagonal, from 0°0075 to 0-1 mm. 
broad. Markings granular, scabrous, in flexuous, somewhat curved, 
short striz placed obliquely to the ridges, and converging around each 
process, elsewhere irregular, around the border an inconspicuous circlet 
of more distinct granules. Processes 2, large, obovate, 0°02 to 0°025 
mm. broad, ther border with distinct striz, their central portion 
minutely punctate—Not A. fenestratus Grove & Sturt, Sch. Atl, 

L. exxyv., fig. 13. 

Habitat: Oamaru deposit (Grove and Sturt! R. Rattray! 

Doeg! Cleve !). 


A. parvulus Grey., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 74, pl. v. 
fig. 22. 


Subcircular, diam. 0°0325 to 0:0375 mm. Surface flat. Colour 
subhyaline. Central space inconspicuous, diamond-shaped, with sides 
concave and angles protruding, about 0°003 mm. broad. Markings 
obscure, minute, punctate. Processes 3 or 4, subcircular, about 0-005 
to 0-006 mm. broad, their circumference with minute irregularities. 

In a valve with 3 processes these are somewhat larger, the central 
space is still more indistinct and triangular. 

Habitat: Cambridge deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson !). 


866 Transactions of the Society. 
A. Caballi Sch. Atl., pl. xxxii. figs. 1, 2. 


Circular or subcircular, diam. from 0°0425 to 0°05 mm. Surface 
rising gradually at the processes. Colour subhyaline. Central space 
rounded, indistinct, about 0°0025 mm. broad. Markings obscure, 
sometimes a set of delicate stri# converging to each process just 
visible, those at the middle of the intervening space diverging slightly 
towards the border ; at their outer ends, and close to the border, a few 
well-marked round apiculi. Processes 3, circular or obtusely triangular, 
about 0°U06 mm. broad.—H. L. Smith, Sp. Diat. Typ., No. 617. 

Habitat: Venezuela (H. L. Smith!) ; Puerto Cabello (Grundler, 
Weissflog'); Santa Marta (Firth !). 


A. punctulatus Grun., Sch. Atl., pl. xxx. fig. 10. 


Circular, diam. about 0°045 mm. Surface subplain. Central 
space obscure. Markings obscure, striz converging to the processes 
undifferentiated ; apiculi distinct but minute, forming a narrow 
irregularly elliptical band around the clear central area, and a some- 
what broader band around the border, a few close to, and on the central 
side of the processes. Processes 2, rounded, about 0°009 mm. broad. 

Habitat: Simbirsk Polirschiefer (Schmidt). 


A. propinquus Grove & Sturt, Journ. Quek. Mic. Cl., 1887, p. 141, 
pl. xi. fig. 34. 


Subcircular, diam. 0 525 to 0°0625 mm. Surface flat at the 
centre, slope at border gentle. Colour pale grey. Central space sub- 
quadrate or rounded, 0°0035 mm. broad. Markings obscure, delicate, 
curved, strie radiating and diverging from the central space towards 
the border; apiculi prominent, numerous, fewer on a narrow zone 
about 7/10 to 3/4 of radius from the centre, somewhat larger on a 
distinct band close to the border. Processes 2, circular, 0°01 to 
0:0125 mm. broad, placed close to the central space. 

Habitat: Oamaru deposit (Gray! Grove & Sturt! Hardman !). 


A. nebulo-punctatus Leud.-Fort., Diat. Ceyl., p. 63, pl. vil. fig. 13. 


Subcircular, diam. 0°0875 mm. Surface slightly elevated between 
the processes for about 1/3 of radius from centre, outside of this almost 
flat. Colour pale grey, darker around the edge of the elevated area. 
Central space round, 0°01 mm. broad, distinct. Markings punctate, 
minute, in radiating strie straight or slightly flexuous, subpruinose on 
the elevated area, converging but slightly to the processes, beyond the 
elevated area only visible near the border; apiculi on a narrow 
band close to the border, distinct, crowded, irregular, minute. Pro- 
cesses 2, flat on the central side, elsewhere convex, reaching the 
border, 0:025 mm. broad, their border uniform narrow, the central 
portion distinctly punctate. 

Habitat: Ceylon (Deby! Kitton *). 

* In the Collection of Mr, E, Grove. 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &c. By J. Rattray. 867 


A. normanianus Grey., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1864, p. 82, 
pir fe bh 


Circular or roundly elliptical, diam. 0:08 to 0°13 mm., the major 
axis about 1} times minor. Surface rising but slightly at the pro- 
cesses. Colour pale smoky grey. Central space rounded, 0°0125 to 
0-015 mm. broad. Markings striate, the strize converging to the 
processes delicate, the others radiating and diverging towards the 
border, more sharply defined, rarely pruinose. Apiculi distinct on a 
narrow band close to the border, elsewhere irregular, sometimes a few 
scattered near this band at the middle of the areas between the pro- 
cesses and around the central space. Processes 3, rounded or obtusely 
triangular, 0°02 to 0°03 mm. broad, with border delicately striated.— 
Sch. Atl, pl. xxxu. fig. 3, pl. Ixvu. fig. 5, pl. exvi. fig. 8. Pant. 
Fossil. Bacil. Ung., p. 56, pl. xxx. fig. 314. 

Habitat: Moron deposit (Johnson! Hardman! Kitton! Griffin !) ; 
Szakal deposit (Pantocsek !). 


A. superbus Leud.-Fort., Diat. Ceyl., p. 63, pl. vii. fig. 70. 


Subcireular, diara. 0°0475 mm. Surface with central portion 
having the edges distinct, angular, extending between the processes, 
and reaching about 2/3 of radius from centre. Central space 
triangular, with somewhat obtuse angles and convex sides, about 
0-006 mm. broad. Markings on central portion granular, distinct, 
closely placed, round, subequal, the strize converging to the processes 
short, and only evident close to them, those radiating from the outer 
edge of the central portion to the border faint, somewhat more evident 
near their outer ends; apiculi minute, scattered, on a narrow band 
at the border, but absent opposite the outer side of the processes. 
Processes 2, reaching the border, rounded, about 0°015 mm. broad, 
their central portion minutely punctate. 

Habitat: Ceylon (Leuduger-Fortmorel). 


A. Stockhardtii Jan., Abh. Schl. Ges. viter. Cult., 1861, p. 163, 
pl. i. fig. 4. 


Subcircular or roundly elliptical, major axis from 0:0875 to 
0°125 mm, 1} to 15 times minor. Surface rising gently at the 
processes, elsewhere almost flat. Colour pale to dark smoky grey- 
Central space distinct, elliptical, with major axis at right angles to the 
line of the processes, irregularly round, triangular, or quadrate, from 
0-01 to 00175 mm. broad. Markings striate, the strize converging 
to the processes inconspicuous, elsewhere still more faint, radial and 
diverging but slightly or straight; apiculi prominent, on a distinct 
band extending between the processes on each side of, and inflexed 
opposite, the central space, and on a narrow band at the border, 
ageregated around the processes, sometimes absent at the outer ends 
of the diameter at right angles to line of processes. Processes 2, 


868 Transactions of the Society. 


irregularly round, 0°015 to 0°025 mm. broad, their border finely 
striated, and central portion minutely punctate-—Sch. Atl, pl. xxx. 
figs. 11-13; pl. Ixvii. fig. 6. A. racemosus Ralfs, Trans. Mic. Soe. 
Lond., 1863, p. 46, pl. it. fig. 9. A. constellatus Mills, Journ. Roy. 
Mic. Soc. Lond., 1881, p. 867, pl. xi. figs. 2, 3. 

Habitat: Peruvian guano (Janisch); Cambridge deposit, 
Barbadoes (Johnson!); Monterey deposit (Firth!); “ Barbadoes ” 
(Greville!); Santa Maria deposit (Kinker! Rae!*); Newcastle 
deposit, Barbadoes (Firth! Weissflog! Griffin!); Jackson’s Paddock 
Oamaru (Grove!); Oamaru deposit (Firth! Rae! Hardman! 
Cleve!); Santa Monica deposit (Rae! Cleve! Grove!); Szent 
Peter deposit (Pantocsek!); Pisagua, Peru (Weissflog!); Islay, 
Peru (Griffin!) ; W. Coast S. America (Kinker!); San Pedro and 
Peru (Grove!); Mejillones, Bolivia (Firth!); Ceylon (Kitton!) ; 
California, Pacific Coast (Cleve!) ; Iquique (Kitton). 

Var. grandis.—Major axis 0°225 mm., 15); times minor. Colour 
pale bluish grey, slightly yellowish between the processes, pale yellow 
around the border. Markings on the central area punctate, between 
this area and the punctate band in interrupted strands expanding 
outwards and with hyaline interspaces, towards the border in coarse, 
sometimes broken strie; apiculi numerous around the processes and 
on the intervening bands about the semi-radius, widely scattered on 
the band at the border. 

Habitat: Pisagua (Kitton !). 

Var. inconspicua. —Subcireular, diam. 0°07 to 0°0925 mm. 
Central space sub-quadrate or rounded, 0°0075 mm. broad. Mark- 
ings striate, the'strize converging to the processes distinct, wide between 
these, a few straight and diverging from central space, but disappearing 
about 3/5 of radius from centre; apiculi indistinct, on bands between 
processes, the band close to the border less evident, but within it a zone 
bearing numerous irregular apiculi. 

Habitat: Oamaru deposit, New Zealand (Rae !). 

Var. subpunctata.—Irregularly round with one large lobe, diam. 
about 0°105 mm. Surface with an indistinct central area slightly 
constricted opposite the central space. Central space circular, 
0:0125 mm. broad, distinct. Markings striate, the striz converging 
to the processes evident, those at border obscure; apiculi numerous, 
most prominent around the processes and along the edges of the 
central area, a single well-marked circlet around the border. Processes 
2, 0:02 mm, broad. 

Habitat: Oamaru deposit (Grove !). 


A, australiensis Grey., Edin. New Phil. Journ., 1868, pl. iii. fig. 3. 


Circular, diam. 0°07 mm. Surface subplain. Central space 
circular, distinct, 0°0075 mm. broad. Markings obscure, radiating 
striz slightly curved near the sides of the processes, those between 


* In the Collections of Dr, John Murray and Dr, Griffin, 


A Revision of the Genus Auliseus Ehrb., de. By J. Rattray. 869 


the centre and processes straight; apiculi minute, scattered. Pro- 
cesses 2, roundly oval, 0°0275 mm. broad. 

Habitat: Sharks Bay, West Coast of Australia, in stomachs of 
Ascidia (Macdonald*). 


A. formosus Leud.-Fort., Diat. Ceyl., p. 63, pl. vii. fig. 71. 


Circular or subcircular, diam. from 0:05 to 0:07 mm. Surface 
with low processes, elsewhere almost flat. Colour pale to pale smoky 
erey. Central space subcircular, distinct, from 0°005 to 0°0075 mm. 
broad. Markings, delicate uniform radial striw, most evidert and 
separated by narrow hyaline interspaces around central space, those 
converging to the processes indistinct ; apiculi minute, irregular, dis- 
tinct on a narrow band close to the border, absent on the outer side 
of the processes, a few smaller and more faint sometimes near the 
central space. Processes 2, flat on the central side, elsewhere uni- 
formly curved, forming the arc of a circle, rarely obtusely quadrangular 
with slightly convex sides, from 0°015 to 0°0225 mm. broad. 

Habitat : Ceylon (Macrae !t Weissflog!) ; ‘Gazelle’ expedition 
(Weissflog !) 


A. punctatus Bail. Smiths. Contrib., 1853, p. 5, fig. 9. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0-0725 to 0°125 mm., from 1/9 to 
1/13 times minor. Surlace sometimes with a faintly defined trans- 
verse median area, almost flat to the border. Colour pale grey. 
Central space rounded, distinct, sometimes somewhat elongated in the 
direction of the processes, from 0°0075 to 0-015 mm. broad. Mark- 
ings, delicate striz, those converging to the processes most evident, 
elsewhere radiating, diverging, and slightly curved, around the border 
sometimes hardly visible; apiculi prominent, most crowded on the 
transverse area and around the border. Processes 2, elliptical or 
circular, 0°02 to 0:0225 mm. broad.—Grev. Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 
1863, p. 49, pl. iii. figs. 15,16; Ralfs in Pritch. Inf, p. 845; Sch. 
Atl, pl. lxvii. figs. 7, 8, pl. Ixxxix. figs. 16, 17, pl. cviii. tig. 10. 

Kitton believes that this species is the same as A. pruinosus; by 
Bailey it was stated to be probably a var. of the latter. Greville, I 
think, correctly retained both, the apiculi and other markings being 
very distinct. 

Habitat : Cambridge deposit Barbadoes (Johnson !) ; Szakal deposit 
(Pantocsek !) ; Kékk6 deposit (Grove !); Santa Monica deposit (Rae! 
Deby !); Oamaru deposit (Grove! Firth! Rae!); Yokohama mud 
(Kinker!); St. Bartholomew (Weissflog!); Pensacola (Kitton !) ; 
‘Gazelle’ expedition (Weissflog) ; Gallapagos Islands (Weissflog !) ; 
Santos (Weissflog!); Los Angelos (Hardman!); Port Elizabeth 
(Hardman !t); Rembang Bay (Deby!) ; Apia Samoa, Vera Cruz, and 
Port Seguro (Deby !); Bahia (Griffin! Kitton !) 


* Formerly in the Collection of Mr. George Norman. 
+ In the Collection of Dr. R. K. Greville. 
{ In the Collection of Mr, A. de Souza Guimaraens. 


870 Transactions of the Society. 


Var. circumducta. 
A. pruinosus Bail., Sch. Atl., pl. xxxi. fig. 6-9. 


Major axis 0°1175 mm., about 1, times minor. Surface 
with an indistinct but irregularly bounded transverse median area 
reaching almost to the border. Central space round, 0°0175 mm. 
broad. Markings punctate, the strands converging to the processes 
delicate, those on the transverse area flexuous, interrupted, diverging, 
near the border irregular or indistinct; apiculi minute, irregular 
around the border. Processes 2, rounded, 0:03 mm. broad, their 
centre distinctly punctate. 

Habitat: North America (Weissflog!); St. Augustine, Florida 
(Weissflog!); Los Angelos (Hardman!); San Pedro (Grove!) ; 
Bahia (Hardman !*); Oamaru deposit (Grove !). 

Var. abrupta. — Major axis 0°08 mm., about 1,), times 
minor. Surface without transverse median area. Central space 
0:°0125 mm. broad. Markings punctate, the strie converging 
to processes only visible near the latter; apiculi prominent, 
irregular, numerous. Processes 2, 0:02 mm. broad, close to central 
space. 

4 Habitat: Santa Monica deposit (Rae !). 


Var. Carpentariz. 


A. pruinosus yar. Carpentarie Grun., Sch. Atl., pl. xxxi. fig. 11, 
pl. xxxui. fig. 5. 


Diam. 0°07 to 0°145 mm. Central space 0°0125 mm. broad. 
Markings inconspicuous, strize closely placed, those converging to the 
processes short, within the border a narrow band with strie just 
visible ; apiculi irregular within this band, and sometimes forming 
a narrow zone at its outer side. Processes 2, 0°015 mm. broad, 
placed towards the central space.—A. pruinosus var. zanzibarica 
Grun., Sch. Atl. pl. xxxi. figs. 13-15 ; A.macraeanus MAll. (not Grey.) 
Sch. Atl, pl. xxxi. fig. 11. 

Habitat: Gulf of Carpentaria (Weissflog!); Zanzibar (Weissflog ! 
Cleve!); Manilla (Hardman!); R. Elizabeth (Hardman !f); Yoko- 
hama (Kitton!); Labuan (Cleve !). . 


Var. striolata. 


A, punctatus Bail., Sch. Atl., pl. lxxxix. fig. 14, 15. 


Circular, diam. 0°0675 mm. Surface with transverse median 
area undifferentiated. Central space round, 0°0125 mm. broad. 
Markings irregular, clear, rarely anastomosing, lines diverging from 
central space, the anastomoses sometimes most evident around border ; 
apiculi few, irregular. 

Habitat: Los Angelos (Hardman !); Rio de Janeiro (Rae !f) 

* In the Collection of Mr. Julien Deby. 


+ In the Collection of Mr. A. de Souza Guimaraens. 
t In the Collection of Dr. Griffin. 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &c. By J. Rattray. 871 


Forma monocula Hardman M.S.—Subcircular, diam. 0°07 mm. 
Markings irregular, radiating, clear, faint lines ; apiculi few, chiefly 
on a band near the border. Process 1, flat on central side 0°02 mm. 
broad. 

Habitat : Los Angelos (Hardman !). 


A. accedens sp. n., Sch. Atl, pl. exxv.-fig. 6 (without name). 


Subcircular, diam. 0°08 mm. Surface rising slightly towards 
the processes. Colour? Central space small,rounded. Markings of 
delicate radiating slightly flexuous strize, those converging to the 
processes well marked; apiculi numerous, distinct, absent from the 
area bearing converging striz. Processes 2, circular, about 0°02 mm. 
broad, placed about half-way between the central space and the border, 
or somewhat nearer the former. 

Habitat: Oamaru (Weissflog). 


§ 3. InFLATI. 


A prominent sharply defined central inflation extending between 
the processes, widest opposite the central space. No transverse 
median areas. 


A, inflatus Grove & Sturt, Journ. Quek. Mic. Cl., 1887, p. 141, 
pl. xu. fig. 37. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0°0875 mm., about 1, times 
minor. Surface with the central inflation uniformly convex towards 
the circumference, outside of it flat to border. Colour pale smoky 
grey, darker along the margins of the inflation. Central space round, 
distinct, 0-0075 mm. broad. Markings striate, the striz converging: 
to the processes delicate, the others radial, straight, or slightly convex 
towards the processes, sometimes slightly flexuous, more evident upon 
than outside of the inflation,a faint reticulum near the border and 
around the central space; apiculi inconspicuous, chiefly around the 
central space, near the processes few, and confined to the inflation. 
Processes, 2, large, elliptical, major axis 0°025 mm., about 12 times 
the minor, their circumference smooth. 

Habitat : Oamaru deposit (Hardman! R. Rattray! Firth !). 


§ 4. Mrrrrtct. 


Central portion between processes more elevated than peripheral, 
its edges distinct, constricted opposite the central space. Strie 
sometimes geniculate at edges of elevated area. 


A. amoenus sp. 0. 


Circular, diam. 0°045 to 0°0575 mm. Surface with central por- 
tion sharply defined, suddenly constricted opposite the central space. 


872 Transactions of the Society. 


Colour pale grey, darker at sides of elevated area. Central space 
round, indistinct, 0°005 mm. broad. Markings striate, faint, at the 
edges of the elevated area geniculate, beyond this area straight along 
a line at right angles to the direction of the processes, elsewhere 
slightly concave towards the processes. A hyaline irregular curved 
narrow band passing outwards from the centre space along the edges 
of the sets of converging striz. Processes elliptical, outer side some- 
times protuberant, 0:0125 mm. broad at base—PI. XLI. fig. 1. 
Habitat : Galapagos Islands (Weissflog!). 


A. elegans Grev., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 45, pl. ii. fig. 8. 


Subcircular or roundly elliptical, diam. 0°0625 to 0:1125 mm. 
Surface rising from the central space around the processes, transverse 
median area short, extending to about 1/4 of radius from centre, with 
outer ends irregular, beyond this sloping gently to border. Colour, 
pale grey. Central space rounded, 0:0075 to 0°0125 mm. broad, 
indistinct. Markings striate, the striz converging to the processes 
distinct, those on the transverse median areas short, straight, or slightly 
concave towards the processes, the narrow adjacent area hyaline, or 
with a faint irregular reticulum, beyond this the strie delicate, 
straight, at right angles to line of processes, elsewhere concave away 
from this, but again slightly convex near the processes; separate, 
minutely punctate, narrow, irregular strands between the striz, some- 
times apiculate. Processes 2, rounded, 0:015 to 0°0225 mm. broad, 
with the circumference irregular and border sometimes minutely 
punctate—A. Grunovii Sch. Atl., pl. Ixxxix. fig. 7. 

Habitat: Patos Island guano (Johnson!) ; Santa Monica deposit 
(Rae! Hardman!*); Chalky Mount, Barbadoes (Griffin!); Los 
Angelos (Hardman !). 


Var. californica. 
A. Grunovii var. californica Grun., Sch. Atl., pl. Ixxxix. fig. 8. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0'125 mm., about 154 times minor. 
Markings more pruinose, continuous at outer end of transverse median 
areas, those converging to the processes more extended, sharply curved 
towards their inner ends, elsewhere almost straight, around border the 
punctate strize narrower than the hyaline interspaces. Processes 2, 
sometimes relatively smaller, elliptical, 0°015 mm. broad. 

Habitat: Santa Monica deposit (Rae !). 


Var. Grunovit. 
A. Grunovit Sch. Atl., pl. xxx. fig. 14. 


Subcircular, diam. 0°22 mm. Markings punctate, scabrous, the 
clear strize-like interspaces converging around the processes uniformly 
curved, at outer ends of transverse area an irregular hyaline space 
with irregular puncta, near border an irregular crescentic clear 


* In the Collection of Mr. A. de Souza Guimaraens. 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., dc. By J. Rattray. 8738 


space widest on diameter at right angles to line of processes, absent 
opposite the processes, beyond this space the markings irregular. 
Pant. Fossil. Bacil. Ung., p. 56, pl. xxix. fig. 293. 

Habitat: Rio de Janeiro (Griffin! Grundler); San Pedro 
(Grove!) ; Szakal deposit (Pantocsek!); Chalky Mount, Barbadoes 
(Griffin!) ; Galapagos Islands (Cleve !). 

Var. subpunctata.—Subcircular, diam. 0°045 mm. Central space 
circular, distinct, 0°005 mm. broad. Markings somewhat distant 
strie, apiculi numerous, distinct, the circlet adjacent to the border 
obvious, the clear area opposite to the transverse area absent. Pro- 
cesses circular, extending from the border half-way to central area.— 
EE XV’. fis. 2. 

The specimen figured by Schmidt (Atl, pl. exxy. fig. 7) as 
perhaps A. pruinosus var. must come here. It is quite distinct from 
A. pruinosus. 


Habitat : Oamaru deposit, New Zealand (Griffin !). 


§ 5. Locvnatt. 


Clear areas between central space and processes. Markings closely 
placed, granular or pruinose striz, apiculi distinct. © 


A, lacunosus Grove & Sturt, Journ. Quek. Mic. Cl., 1887, p. 140, 
pl. xii. fig. 35. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis, from 0-1 to 0°1125 mm., about 
1,5 to 14 times minor. Surface with transverse median areas flat, the 
outer ends indistinct, rounded, about 0°0125 mm. from the circum- 
ference, between the sides and each process a distinct concayo-convex 
hyaline area surrounding the central sides of the latter, and from 
0°0375 to 0°04 mm. in length, with rounded ends about twice as 
broad as its median portion. Central space distinct, rounded, hyaline, 
0-015 to 0°0175 mm. broad. Markings distinct, strie radiating and 
diverging from the central space, on outer portion straight along the 
diameter at right angles to line of processes, elsewhere slightly concave 
towards the processes; between their outer ends and the border a 
hyaline space narrowest or absent opposite the processes; apiculi at 
outer ends of transverse area, and forming a band close to border, but 
interrupted opposite the processes. Processes 2, irregularly round, 
about 0°025 mm. broad, with central portion minutely punctate.— 
Sch. Atl., pl. exxv. fig. 4; not A. fenestratus Grove & Sturt, Sch. Atl., 
pl. exxy. fig. 12. In Cleve’s collection specimens named A. nova- 
zealandicus belong to this species. 

Habitat: Oamaru deposit (Grove & Sturt! R. Rattray! Hardman ! 
Cleve !) 


A. fenesiratus Grove & Sturt, Journ. Quek. Mic. Cl., 1887, joe ally 
pl. i. fig. 12. 


Elliptical, major axis 0°08 to 0°0925 mm., from 14 to 11 times 
minor. Surface with central portion flat, slope at border gentle; a 


874 Transactions of the Society. 


hyaline lunate or concayo-convex area close to and on central side of 
each process, and close to each of these a narrower and longer straight 
transverse hyaline band. Colour pale grey. Central space round, 
inconspicuous, 0'005 to 0:0075 mm. broad. Markings delicate, 
granular strie radiating from the central space, between the hyaline 
areas curved and converging towards the processes, on the outer 
portion still more delicate and slightly convex towards the processes ; 
apiculi small, numerous, chiefly between the outer ends of the straight 
hyaline bands, elsewhere sparsely and irregularly placed. Processes 2, 
circular, about 0°01 mm. broad, with border striated. 

An oblique view of one of Grove’s specimens indicates the presence 
of delicate strize on the girdle at right angles to its margin. 

Habitat: Oamaru deposit (Grove & Sturt! Rae! Hardman! 
Kitton !). : 


§ 6. Convoxovtt. 


Transverse median areas sharply defined, those between the cen- 
tral space and processes undifferentiated. Markings large areolate, 
unequal, somewhat pearly. 


A. convolutus sp. 0. 


Elliptical, major axis 0°01 mm., about 13 times minor. Surface 
rising but slightly at the processes; the transverse median areas 
somewhat oblique, their outer ends rounded, reaching close to the 
border. Central space sub-diamond-shaped, sometimes minute. Mark- 
ings separated by narrow clear lines, those on the transverse areas sub- 
recular, with the clear intervening lines straight or curved, and but 
slightly oblique to the long axes of the area ; a distinct band surround- 
ing the base of each process. Processes 2, elliptical, 0:0175 mm. 
broad, inserted close to the border—Pl. XV. fig. 2. 

Habitat: Oamaru deposit (Grove !). 


§ 7. Opnati. 


Transverse median areas and the areas between central space and 
processes evident, widest towards their peripheral ends. Markings 
forming punctate, closely arranged striz. Processes large, simply 
rounded, or sides concave, but towards their base and free ends 
convex. 


A. lunatus Grove & Sturt in litt. 


Elliptical, major axis 0°08, about 1} times minor. Surface with 
the transverse median areas large, the edges diverging outwards, the 
outer angles rounded, the extremities reaching the border. At their 
centre a short transverse elliptical area with outer ends indistinct, 
an indistinct lunate band close to inner edge of processes. Colour 
pale smoky grey. Central space round, indistinct, 0°0U05 mm. broad. 
Markings minute punctate, strie converging to processes and 
diverging from central space indistinct. Apiculi numerous, minute. 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &c. By J. Rattray. 875 


Processes 2, round, with a small protuberance on the side towards the 
border, 0:01 mm. broad, placed midway between the outer edge of the 
transverse areas and the border. 

This is not A. fenestratus Grove & Sturt, as indicated in Sch. 
Atl. pl. exxv. fig. 11. 

Habitat: Oamaru deposit (Grove & Sturt !). 


A. dissimilis sp. n. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0°1075 mm., about 1, times 
minor. Surface subplain; transverse areas with outer extremities 
rounded, reaching close to the border, and bounded by an evident 
clear band. Colour pale grey. Central space circular, 0-02 mm. 
broad. Markings delicate, subpruinose, closely-placed striz, most 
evident on the transverse areas, hardly converging around the pro- 
cesses. Processes 6, two large, equal, and mammillate towards the 
ends of the major axis, two smaller subequal at the extremities of the 
transverse area, and two others subequal to the latter, placed towards 
the opposite sides of the mammillate pair, and at considerable unequal 
distances from them.—Pl. XIV. fig. 6. 

Habitat: Yokohama (Cleve !). 


A. insignis Cleve, Kongl. Sv. Vet. Ak. Handl. Stockh., 1881, No. 5, 
p- 22, pl. v. figs. 64a, 640. 


Subcircular, diam. 0°0625 to 0°12 mm. Surface with a distinct 
obcordate area between the centre and each process, the transverse 
median areas narrow, expanding towards the outer concave or sub- 
straight ends, their outer edges clear, well-marked. Colour pale grey, 
darker along edges of transverse and obcordate areas. Central space 
0-0075 to 0-015 mm. broad. Markings obscure, punctate, sometimes 
between the areas darker irregular spots. Processes 2, tapering 
gradually to rounded apex, 0°015 mm. broad.—Sch. Atl., pl. Ixxxix. 
syoe Ob 
‘ Habitat : Galapagos Islands (Cleve, Weissflog !). 


A. gracillimus sp. n. 


Subcircular, diam. 0°2 mm. Surface flat at centre, the obconical 
elevated area around processes short, extending only to outer ends of 
angles of central space, the transverse median areas indistinct, with 
outer angles obtuse and ends rounded. Colour pale grey. Central 
space with sides slightly concave outwards, and angles slightly pro- 
tuberant, about 0°03 mm. broad. Markings obscure; apiculi absent ; 
a reticulum with delicate meshes evident, absent from central space. 
Processes 2, mammillate, free ends rounded, near their base a series of 
subparallel strize evident.—Pl. XIII. fig. 6. 

Habitat: Santa Monica deposit (Rae! Firth!). 


Transactions of the Society. 


CO 
~] 
lor) 


A, antiquus sp. 0. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0°125 mm., 14 times minor. Sur- 
face rising slightly to processes, outlines of elevated areas between 
central space and processes obconical, irregular and acutely angular, 
those of transverse median areas indistinct, but outer ends slightly 
convex and irregularly angular. Colour pale grey. Central space 
indistinct, sides deeply concave outwards. Markings obscure, short 
faint strie visible around the processes, a few irregular costate lines 
at the outer ends of the transverse, and between adjacent sides of these 
and the obconical areas ; apiculi minute, irregular between the eleva- 
tions. Processes 2, uniformly convex, about 0°02 mm. broad.— 
Pl. XIII. fig. 4. 

Habitat : Santa Monica deposit (Rae !). 


A, decoratus sp. 0. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0°15 mm., about 14, times minor. 
Surface with obconical elevated areas around processes well marked, 
their sides straight or slightly concave, extending to the border; the 
transverse median areas of same size as foregoing, but with outer 
angles somewhat more obtuse. Colour pale grey. Central space 
0-0175 mm. broad, inconspicuous, sides deeply concave outwards, the 
angles obtuse, more protuberant on the transverse areas than towards 
the processes. Markings delicate punctate, in flexuous lines on the 
transverse and obconical areas, and in less evident straight oblique 
lines between their inner ends ; elsewhere irregular; apiculi absent ; 
around the outer edge an irregular band of radially elongate or rounded 
prominent pearly markings, sometimes double and extending farthest 
inwards between outer ends of transverse and obconical areas, a single 
less evident straight band passing from each angle of the obconical 
areas and meeting at a short distance within the processes on a line 
joining them with the centre. Processes 2, small, with free ends 
obtuse.—Pl. XII. fig. 6. 

Habitat: Santa Monica deposit (Rae !). 

Var. affinis. — Major axis from 0°0925 to 0°22 mm., 14 to 
1), times minor. Markings more distinct, scabrous, those in the 
prominent band at border extending less deeply inwards between the 
transverse and obconical areas, no bands meeting on the obconical 
areas within the processes. Processes larger, more protuberant, sides 
concave outwards, free ends rounded.—Pl. XVI. fig. 1. 

This var. is intermediate between A. decoratus and A. hard- 
manianus. 

Habitat: Santa Monica deposit (Rae!); Santa Maria deposit 
(Rae !). 

A. eximius sp. 0. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 00925 mm., about 1} times minor. 
Surface rising slightly at processes, obconical areas around the latter 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., dc. By J. Rattray. 877 


distinct, their outer angles rounded, the transverse median areas 
narrow, clavate. Colour hyaline, light grey around edges of these areas. 
Central space inconspicuous, 0°015 mm. broad. Markings indistinct 
punctate, in faint radiating lines diverging from centres of transverse 
and obconical areas, elsewhere obscure; apiculi few, irregular, chiefly 
between the angles of these areas. Processes 2, roundly elliptical, 
about 0°02 mm. broad, around their base a series of evident parallel 
strie.—Pl. XIIL. fig. 2. 
Habitat : Santa Monica deposit (Rae !). 


A, hardmanianus Grev., Trans. Mic. Soc., 1866, p. 6, pl. ii. fig. 17. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis from 0°075 to 0°2 mm., about 154, 
to 1,1, times minor. Surface flat at centre. Obconical areas between 
central space and processes, and the transverse sometimes narrower 
areas rising slightly outwards, their sides sharply defined and outer ends 
indistinct, the remaining portions flat to border. Colour pale grey. 
Central space 0°0125 to 0:03 mm. broad. Markings prominent, 
distant strize stretching between adjacent sides of obconical and trans- 
verse areas, the striz around and at right angles to margins of these 
areas numerous, distinct, traceable across about 1/3 of the intervening 
portions, often curved at the outer ends, those around border more faint, 
straight, or slightly convex towards the processes, irregular, distinct 
puncta about middle of obconical areas and intervening spaces ; apiculi 
sometimes present. Processes 2, conical free ends rounded, from 0°015 
to 0°025 mm. broad—Sch. Atl., pl. Ixvii. fig. 1, pl. Ixxxix. fig. 4. 
A. Joynsoni Sch. Atl, pl. Ixvii. fig. 2. A. hardmanianus var. (?), 
Sch. Atl. pl. evi. fig, 1. A. hardmanianus var. haytiana Truan 
& Witt, Jerem. Diat., 1888, p. 12, pl. i. fig. 4. 

In smaller valves the outer ends of the elevated areas bearing the 
processes are greatly expanded and rounded. 

Habitat: Santa Monica deposit (Kinker! Firth! Cleve! Hardman ! 
Deby !); Santa Maria deposit (Rae !); Santa Barbara deposit (Griffin !); 
Oamaru deposit (Grove! R. Rattray !); Monterey deposit (Hardman) ; 
Crescent City, California (Weissflog!); San Pedro (Grove); Los 
Angelos, California (Hardman !). 

Var. futilis.—Elliptical, major axis 0'075 mm., 1} times minor. 
Surface with transverse and obconical areas indistinct, outer ends of 
former close to border. Central space with the angles on the trans- 
verse area extending close to the outer end of this area. Markings | 
most evident on the transverse area, a few indistinct lines passing to 
the edges of the areas around the processes. 

Habitat: Santa Monica deposit (Rae! Firth !) 

Var. labyrinthula.—Subcireular, diam. 0°0725 mm. Surface, 
with outer ends of transverse areas, sharply defined. Markings dis- 
tinct broad clear lines, convex towards the processes, radiating from 
the angles at outer ends of transverse areas, and similar irregularly 
curved lines passing between the angles of the adjacent transverse and 
obconical areas, and sometimes anastomosing. Processes 2, one regu- 

1888. 3 0 


878 Transactions of the Society. 


larly rounded, the other with sides concave at the middle and with 
rounded protuberant ends. 

Habitat : Santa Monica deposit (Rae !) 

Var. olscura.—Roundly elliptical, major axis 0°145 mm., about 
1} times minor. Surface, with outer ends of transverse median areas, 
broad and slightly convex ; the sides concave. Central space obscure. 
Markings obscure punctate, delicate striae around the outer ends of the 
transverse areas; between the elevations a few large irregular spots. 

Habitat : Santa Monica deposit (Rae !). 

Var. bifurcata.—Major axis from 01 to 0°18 mm. Surface, with 
the four areas, sharply defined, the outer ends of those passing to 
processes close to border, but slightly convex. The outer ends of the 
transverse areas bifurcate, the branches tapering outwards and curving 
towards one another ; the intervening central portion convex. Markings 
distinct, punctate at the middle of these areas and of the intervening 
portions. Processes rounded. 

In Prof. P. T. Cleve’s collection of Aulisci, preserved in the Royal 
Botanical Museum, Stockholm, this is named Auliseus nobilis 
Cleve MS. 

Habitat: Oamaru deposit (Grove & Sturt! Rae!) Jackson’s 
Paddock, Oamaru (Katton !). 


A. intestinalis Sch. Atl., pl. eviii. fig. 2. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0°13 mm., about 14}, times minor. 
Surlace with the transverse median and obconical areas sharply defined, 
subequal, expanding regularly and rapidly outwards from their inner 
ends. Markings delicate striz radiating outwards from the centres of 
the transverse areas; short prominent clear lines distinct between the 
sides of the adjacent areas, and around the outer ends of the transverse 
areas, convolute and frequently anastomosing; non-apiculate. Pro- 
cesses 2, large, mammillate, with rounded free ends. 

Habitat : Santa Monica deposit (Kinker !). 


A. pectinatus sp. n. 


Elliptical, major axis 0°0625 mm.,about 1; times minor. Surface 
rising but slightly to the processes, transverse median areas narrow, in- 
distinct. Colour pale smoky grey. Central space with sides slightly 
concave, the angles in the direction of processes most protuberant and 
almost extending to inner edges of latter, about 0°01 mm. broad. 
Markings obscure, punctate, on the transverse areas more distinct, 
delicate almost parallel strize passing obliquely from the edges of the 
transverse area to the processes, those diverging from the outer ends 
of this area to the border more evident, curved; apiculi minute, 
crowded around the processes, few in the course of the oblique striz. 
Processes 2, round, 0:0125 mm. broad.—Pl. XII. fig. 5. 

In Cleve’s collection specimens of this species occur under the 
name A. Sturtii Cleve MS. 

Habitat : Oamaru deposit (Grove & Sturt !). 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &c. By J. Rattray. 879 


A, raeanus sp. 0. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0°15 mm., about 1} times minor. 
Surface rising gradually from centre, steeply from border to processes ; 
transverse median areas oblique to line joiming processes, flat on 
central portion, with outer ends indistinct, broader, rounded, and close 
tothe border. Colour pale grey. Central space elliptical, major axis 
corresponding in direction with axis of transverse area, 0:0175 mm. 
long, about 23 times minor. Markings punctate and irregular around 
the central space ; strie delicate, flexuous around the processes and at 
middle of outer portion of transverse areas, straight between outer 
ends of latter and the nearer process, elsewhere slightly convex 
towards the process near the border. Processes 2, elliptical, 
0-03 mm. broad, delicate parallel closely placed strize contiguous to 
the markings on their central side.—Pl. XII. fig. 3. 

Habitat: Oamaru deposit (Rae !). 


A. Biddulphia Kitton, Sch, Atl., pl. lxvii. fig. 3. 


Elliptical, major axis 0°125 mm., about 13 times minor. Surface 
with obcordate areas between central space and processes well defined, 
transverse median areas less prominent, widening greatly outwards, 
with outer angles rounded, the ends close to the border, slightly 
convex. Colour pale grey. Central space with the angles but 
slightly protuberant, 0°0175 mm. broad. Markings minute, punctate, 
delicate strie, only visible about outer edges of obcordate and trans- 
verse areas. Processes 2, large, the sides towards the base concave, 
the ends convex. 

Habitat: Santa Monica deposit (Weissflog! Kitton! Cleve). 


Var. prominens. 
A. Biddulphia var., Sch. Atl., pl. Ixxxix. fig. 2. 


Major axis from 0°1325 to 0°16 mm., from 1} to 1} times minor. 
Surface with obcordate and transverse areas more evident, outer ends 
of the latter narrower and farther from border. Markings punctate, 
more evident, the striz converging to the processes and diverging 
around outer ends of transverse area distinct, large blunt apiculi 
prominent between transverse and obcordate areas. 

i aad Santa Monica deposit (Rae! Weissflog! Hardman! 
irth !). 


Var. dentata. 
A. Biddulphia var.? Grun., Sch. Atl., pl. Ixxxix. fig. 3. 


Surface with obcordate and transverse areas indistinct. Markings 
delicate striz converging to processes and around border, sometimes 
also passing obliquely inwards from edges of transverse areas; apiculi 
prominent at outer ends of transverse areas, elsewhere smaller and 
less distinct. Processes more rounded. 

Habitat: Santa Monica deposit (Schmidt). 

3 0 


i) 


880 Transactions of the Society. 


§ 8. Lingoarti. 


Transverse median areas indistinct or absent. Markings distinct, 
forming rough strands or narrow sharply defined pruinose strie, entire 
or interrupted around central space. ‘The interspaces distinct, usually 
wide, hyaline. 

A. interruptus sp. n. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0°1125 to 0°15 mm., about 1} to 
1,1, times minor. Surface rising gradually near the processes, 
transverse median areas at right angles to line of processes incon- 
spicuous, with faint rounded outer ends. Colour pale grey. Central 
space round, distinct, about 0°0125 mm. broad. Markings coarse 
strie with irregular edges, and with hyaline wide interspaces, those 
converging to the processes and on the transverse median areas often 
interrupted, around the border more regular, but of unequal lengths. 
Processes 2, large, close to ends of major axis, about 0-02 mm. broad. 
—P]. XIII. fig. 5; Sch. Atl, pl. evil. fig. 8. 

This species has sometimes been associated with A. moronensis 
Grey., from the type of which it differs in the character of its 
markings. 

Habitat: Santa Monica deposit (Rae!) ; Kékk6 deposit (Kinker) ; 
San Pedro (Grove!); Moravian Tegel (Kinker!); Yokohama mud 

Kinker !). 
Var. siesta diam. 0°075 mm. Markings similar, but 
the striz converging to the processes more sharply curved, only a few 
on the transverse median areas, those around the border more crowded 
and irregular, delicate apiculi on the transverse areas, chiefly aggre- 
gated about their outer ends.—Pl. XIII. fig. 3. 
Habitat : Oamaru deposit (Hardman !). 


A, rugosus sp. 0. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0°095 mm. Surface rising but 
slightly to the processes. Colour pale smoky grey. Central space 
circular, distinct, 0°0125 mm. broad. Markings pruinose, in rounded or 
narrow irregular patches, forming interrupted irregular curved strands 
between central space and processes and more straight but more incon- 
stant strands on the transverse areas, elsewhere more crowded and 
without order, short strands evident on the distal side of the processes. 
Processes large, circular, their circumference rugose, with broad hyaline 
border.—Pl. XIII. fig. 1. 

Habitat: Peruvian guano (Firth!). 


A. moronensis Grey., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1864, p. 83, pl. xi. fig. 6. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0°07 mm., about 14 times minor. 
Surface rising slightly near the processes, elsewhere almost flat. 
Colour pale grey. Central space rounded, about 0°0075 mm. broad. 
Markings distinct granular pruinose striw, those converging to the 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &c. By J. Rattray. 881 


processes most prominent, the others straight, radiating, and divergent, 
close to the border more delicate, non-pruinose, 8 to 10 in 0:01 mm. ; 
apiculi inconspicuous, irregular. Processes 2, circular, about midway 
between the extremities of major and minor axes, 0:015 mm. broad, 
their circumference with minute irregularities—Sch. Atl. pl. xxxii. 
fig. 4, pl. cv. fig. 7. Pant. Fossil. Bacil. Ung., p. 56, pl. xix. 
fig. 172. 

A specimen in Weissflog’s collection, named A. moronensis var. 
pruinosus, belongs to this species. 

Habitat: Moron deposit (Johnson! Weissflog!); Szakal and 
Kékk6 deposits (Pantocsek!) ; Szent Peter deposit (Pantocsek ! Firth ! 
Doeg !) ; Oamaru deposit (Grove & Sturt!) ; Pensacola (Grove !). 


A Hauckit Pant., Fossil. Bacil. Ung., p. 56, pl. xxx. fig. 304. 


Circular, diam. from 0°07 to 0:0925 mm. Surface rising but 
slightly to the processes, transverse median areas indistinct, with outer 
ends rounded close to border. Colour dark bluish grey, sometimes 
somewhat mottled. Central space circular, 0°015 mm. broad, some- 
times roundly elliptical with long axis at right angles to direction of 
processes. Markings minute punctate, in prominent strands, those 
converging to the processes closely placed with narrow hyaline inter- 
spaces, those on the transverse area irregular, radiating and diverging, 
widest near the central space, sometimes curved, near the border 
becoming delicate straight uniform strie. Processes 2, circular, 
0-0175 to 0°025 mm. broad, their circumference subregular. Sch. 
Atl., pl. cviu. figs. 8, 9. 

Habitat: Szent Peter deposit (Pantocsek! Hardman! Grove! 
Kinker!); Kékk6 deposit (Pantocsek! Kinker!); Szakal deposit 
(Pantocsek !). 


A. confluens Grun., Sch. Atl., pl. xxxi. fig. 16; pl. xxxii. figs. 6-8. 


Circular, diam. from 0°045 to 0°115 mm. Surface rising gently 
from the centre to the processes, elsewhere almost flat, slope at border 
slight. Colour pale grey. Central space round, from 0:005 to 
0°01 mm. broad, sometimes eccentric. Markings distinct, the con- 
verging striz evident all round the processes, the others straight 
radial, or but slightly curved and divergent, numerous shorter striz 
around the border, interspaces wide, hyaline ; apiculi minute, numerous, 
scattered at wide irregular intervals along the strive. Border with — 
delicate striz, 8 to 10 in 0°01 mm., about 0:0025 mm. broad, inner 
edge indistinct, in small valves obscure. Processes 2, rarely 1 or 3, 
round, 0:°005 to 0-015 mm. broad, sometimes unequal on the same 
valve, or unsymmetrical and confined to one of its halves, their 
circumference regular. 

Habitat: Campeachy Bay (Weissflog! Hardman! Cleve) ; Zanzibar 
(Weissflog !) ; Kékk6, Szakal, Szent Peter deposits (Pantocsek!) ; Bahia 
(Kitton). 


882 Transactions of the Society. 


A. pruinosus Bail. Smiths. Contrib., 1853, p. 5, pl., figs. 5-8. 


Cireular or subcircular, diam. 0°0675 to 0°13 mm. Surface 
rising slightly near the processes, slope at border gentle. Colour pale 
or pale smoky grey. Central space rounded, 0°V05 to 0°0075 mm. 
broad. Markings pruinose, lines distinct, entire or interrupted, those 
converging to the processes most curved near their outer ends, the 
others radiating straight, or gently curved towards the processes, with 
narrow hyaline interspaces, sometimes more crowded around border ; 
non-apiculate. Processes 2 or 3, round, 0-0125 to 0:025 mm. broad, 
their circumference with slight irregularities.—Ralfs in Pritch. Inf., 
p- 845. Grey. Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 48, pl. iii. fig. 18. H. L. 
Smith, Sp. Diat. Typ. Sup. No. 706. 

In H. L. Smith’s specimens the bevelled edge described by Bailey, 
but questioned by Greville, is quite distinct. The form described as 
perhaps A. pruinosus var. by Schmidt (Atl., pl. exxy. fig. 8) may 
come here. 

Habitat: Charleston Harbour (Kitton!); Bahia (Kitton! 
Hardman! Deby !); Pensacola, Florida (H. L. Smith!) ; Nottingham, 
U.S., and Port Ehzabeth (Hardman !*). 


A. acutiusculus sp. 0. 


Elliptical, major axis 0:14 mm., about 1} times minor. Surface 
rising steeply from central space to processes, the intervening areas 
flat at centre and sloping gently at border. Colour dark grey. 
Central space circular, 0°02 mm. broad. Markings granular, irregular, 
the lines converging to the processes prominent, irregular, closely 
placed, those radiating from the central space on the intervening areas 
straight, indistinct in their inner half, more evident and crowded 
around the border, interspaces hyaline. Processes 2, elliptical, 0°0175 
min. broad, reaching the border.—Pl. XIV. fig. 1. 

Habitat : Santa Barbara deposit (Hardman !) ; San Pedro (Grove!) 


§ 9. Srevuatti. 


_ Surface divided into zones. Markings costate, distant, arranged 
in a star-shaped manner around central space on the innermost zone. 
alte formed by a single band of granules in contact with one 
another. 


A. stelliger Petit., Fonds de la mer, 1877, p. 37, pl. v. fig. 35. 


Elliptical, major axis about 0-04 mm., 1} times minor. Surface 
with 3 distinct areas: the central subcircular, extending to about 1/4 
of radius, the median extending almost to the semi-radius, sharply 
defined, the external widest. Central space minute, circular. Markings 
on the central area, 5 distinct costate rays in the form of a star, on 
the median area the rays irregular, straight or slightly bent, on the 


* In the Collection of Mr. A. de Souza Guimaraens. 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &e. By J. Rattray. 883 


external area straight and radial between those passing obliquely out- 
wards from the processes, at the inner edge of the external area a band 
of evident round granules with hyaline interspaces. Processes 4, 
symmetrical, 2 smaller at the ends of minor axis, elliptical, about 
0-003 mm. broad. 

Habitat: Campbell Island, N. Zealand (Petit). 


§ 10. Cosratt. 


Transverse median areas with outer ends rounded, rarely indistinct. 
Markings narrow, continuous, distinct, widely arranged coste and 
delicate strize around border, transverse areas often punctate, some- 
times with a faint reticulum near their outer ends. 


A. incertus Sch. Atl. pl. Ixxxix. figs. 18, 19. 


Elliptical, major axis about 0°05 mm., from 14 to 1} times minor. 
Surface rising slightly from central space to processes, transverse 
median areas indistinct or absent. Colour pale grey. Central space 
circular, distinct, from 0°0045 to 0°0075 mm. broad. Markings 
distinct striz, those converging to the processes distant, the others 
diverging, straight along the minor axis, elsewhere convex towards the 
processes, puncta sometimes distinct between the central space and 
outer limits of the converging striz. Processes 2, subcircular, from 
0-°0075 to 0:012 mm. broad. 

Habitat: Santa Monica (Rae!); Balearic Islands (Weissflog) ; 
Newcastle deposit, Barbadoes (Firth!) ; Moron deposit (Firth !). 


A. obscurus sp. 2. 


Elliptical, major axis 0:04 mm., about 1,4, times minor. Surface 
rising steeply near the processes, transverse median areas indistinct, 
with outer ends rounded close to border. Colour hyaline. Central 
space round, indistinct, 0-005 mm. broad. Markings delicate stric 
converging to processes, elsewhere the striz radial, straight or slightly 
curved, more distinct around the border, most crowded at the outer 
portion of the transverse areas. Processes 2, prominent, conical, with 
sides straight or slightly convex at the base, the apices rounded ; the 
inner side obscure. 


Habitat: Zanzibar (Weissflog !). 
A, sculptus Ralfs in Pritch. Inf., p. 845, pl. vi. fig. 3. 


Major axis (0-055 to 0°0875 mm., from 1} to 1), times minor. 
Surface rising slightly near the processes, transverse median areas 
distinct, with outer ends regularly rounded. Colour pale grey. 
Central space rounded, 0°01 to 0°0125 mm. broad, sometimes 
elongated in direction of processes. Markings distant, the lines con- . 
verging to the processes distinct, those on transverse areas radiating, 
straight or slightly curved, around their ends flexuous and almost 
parallel to the edge, near border convex towards processes. Processes 


884 Transactions of the Society. 


2, rounded, about 0°0125 mm. broad, their circumference almost 
smooth.—Brightw. Quart. Journ. Mic. Sci., 1860, p. 94, pl. v. fig. 5. 
Ralfs in Pritch. Inf., p. 845. Grev. Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, 
p. 43, pl. ii. figs. 1-3. Sch. Atl, pl. xxxii. figs. 21,22. Van Heurck, 
Syn. Diat Belg., p. 209, pl. exvii. figs. 1, 2. Raben. Alg. Europ., 
Nos. 2487, 2555, 2556, 2558. Eupodiscus seulptus W. Sm. Syn. 
Brit. Diat., i. p. 25, pl. iv. fig. 42. 

In Rabenhorst’s Alg. Europ., No. 2556, there is noted Auliscus 
sculptus y interruptus. This specimen, which I have not seen, is by 
Schwarz made synonymous with A. Gregori Janisch. 

Habitat: Poole Bay (W. Smith!) ; Lamlash (Gregory !) ; Ipswich 
(Kitton !); sponge sand, West Indies (Dallas!) ; Ballast, Mediter- 
ranean ((riffin!); Mer du Nord (Van Heurck!); “In Mare” 
(H. L. Smith !); coast of Holland (Suringar); coast of Denmark 
(Heiberg) ; Mejillones, Peru (Kinker !) ; Levant, Cuxhaven, Sheerness, 
and Galway (Grove!); Smyrna sponges (Grove!); Auckland 
(Cleve!); mud from Glickstadt, Port William, Falkland Islands, 
Elbe above Cuxhaven (Rabenhorst and Schwarz !). 


A, rhipis Sch. Atl, pl. xxxii. figs. 10, 11. 


Elliptical, major axis from 0°045 to 0°1 mm. 1} to 1,), times 
minor. Surface with transverse median areas distinct, their outer 
ends rounded and well marked. Colour pale grey. Central space 
elliptical, rectangular, or diamond-shaped, 0-0075 to 0:01 mm. broad. 
Markings striate, those converging to the processes distinct, finely 
punctate; those on the transverse areas faint, wide, radiating, straight, 
or curved and diverging, the interspaces minutely and closely punctate ; 
those around the border well defined, straight along the minor axis, 
elsewhere convex towards the processes, the inner ends of the inter- 
spaces rounded towards the centre at the transverse areas. Processes 
2, round, 0:01 to 0:015 mm. broad. 

Habitat: Japan (Grundler); Bay of Kerguelen dredged by 
H.M.S. ‘ Challenger’—19th Jan. 1874—20 to 60 fathoms (Rae!) ; 
King George’s Sound (Grove!) ; Yokohama (Cleve!). 


A, intercedens Jan., Sch. Atl., pl. xxxii. fig. 9. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0°0875 mm., about 1 times minor. 
Surface with central area distinct, its outer edge convex between the 
converging strie, reaching about 4/5 of radius from the centre and 
passing close to the processes on their outer side. Central space 
subcireular, about 0°015 mm. broad. Markings striate, those con- 
verging to the processes faint, punctate, closely placed; those on the 
central area similar, diverging, slightly curved ; outside of the central 
area distant, distinct, continuous, straight, along the minor axis, else- 
where slightly convex towards the processes. Processes 2, round, 
0-01 mm. broad, their border narrow. 

Habitat: Bay of Carpentaria (Janisch). 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &e. By J. Rattray. 885 


A. spectabilis sp. n. 


Elliptical, major axis 0-1125 mm., about 144 times minor. Surface 
rising slightly for about 1/2 radius from centre, highest zone circular, 
at inner side of processes indistinctly defined, about 0°0125 mm. 
broad, beyond this sloping gently to the border. Colour pale grey. 
Central space minute, about 0-0025 mm, broad, indistinct. Markings 
punctate, in straight radiating lines, those converging to the processes 
more evident, a faint irregular reticulum upon the highest zone, and 
less evident on outer portion of depressed central area, outside of this 
zone narrow, distinct, almost straight lines passing to the border. 
Processes 2, circular, 0:0125 mm. broad, their border finely striated. 
—PI. XIII. fig. 2. 

This species is related to A. cxlatus through A. celatus var. picta. 

Habitat: Yokohama (Hardman !). 


A. splendidus sp.n. A. gigas Grun. (not Ehrb.), Sch. AtL., 
pl. exvu. figs. 5-7. 


Elliptical, major axis, 0°15 to 0°305 mm., 1} to 15}, times minor. 
Surface rising but slightly near the processes, elsewhere flat, trans- 
verse median area sharply defined. Colour pale grey. Central space 
roundly elliptical, 0-025 to 0°03 mm. broad. Markings conspicuous, 
distant, narrow coste, those converging to the processes often ana- 
stomosing near the latter, on the transverse area delicate strize, straight 
or slightly curved, and diverging from the central space ; at its centre 
a few diverging, sometimes anastomosing radial coste. Processes 2, 
rounded, from 0°035 to 0°04 mm. broad, outer edge irregular, with 
border broad and central portion distinctly punctate.—A. sculptus var. 
permagna Witt, Sch. Atl., pl. exvu. figs. 5-7. 

Habitat: Loe. ? (Griffin!) ; Iquique (Kitton !). 


A, celatus Bail. Smiths. Contrib., 1853, p. 6, pl. figs. 3, 4. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis from 0°04 to 0°12 mm.,, 11 to 
1} times minor. Surface rising gently to processes, transverse 
median areas distinct, with outer ends broad, rounded, sharply defined. 
Colour pale grey. Central space rounded or obtusely angular, rarely 
rectangular, sometimes indistinct, 0:0075 to 0-0125 mm. broad. 
Markings costate, those converging to the processes, sometimes less 
prominent than those proceeding from their outer side to the border, 
the latter straight in line of processes, elsewhere concave towards 
that line; on the transverse area least evident, sometimes punctate, 
straight or flexuous, and diverging; near the outer ends of this area 
anastomosing between it and the border conspicuous, convex towards 
the processes. Processes 2, rarely 3, rounded, 0-0075 to 0:0175 mm. 
broad, their circumference sometimes irregular.—Ralfs in Pritch. Inf, 
p. 849; Grev. Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 44, pl. ii. fig. 7; 
Sch. Atl, pl. xxxi. figs. 14, 15; Pant. Fossil. Bacil. Ung., p- 99, 
pl. xix. fig. 173; H. L. Smith, Diat. Spec. Typ., No. 54. A. Sinithii, 


886 Transactions of the Society. 


Jan. Abb. Schl. Ges. viter. Cult, 1861, p. 163, pl. ii. fig. 9. 
A. Gregorit, Jan. ibid., pl. ii. fig. 12. A. celatus forma triocellata, 
Pant. ibid., p. 56, pl. xxvii. fig. 279. ; 

Habitat: Moron deposit (Greville! Griffin!); Californian guano 
(Greville! Griffin!) ; Patos Island guano (Greville!) ; Newcastle 
deposit, Barbadoes (Firth!) ; Santa Monica deposit (Rae! Kinker! 
Griffin! Deby! Grove!); Szent Peter deposit (Pantocsek! Kinker! 
Doeg!); Oamaru deposit (Grove!); Santa Marta deposit (Doeg !); 
Kékk6 deposit (Pantocsek! Kinker!); Kerguelen (H. L. Smith !); 
Arran (Greville! Gregory!); Bass Straits (Johnson!); Cagayan 
Island, Sulu Archipelago (O’Meara!); Woodlark Island (Roberts !) ; 
coral washings, Mauritius (Doeg!); shell cleanings (no locality) 
(Doeg!); Holothurians, Java and California (Kinker !) ; Yokohama 
mud (Kinker! Griffin!); West Coast South America (Kinker!) ; 
Rembang Bay, Colon, Samoa, Vera Cruz, China (in Holothurians), 
Monterey and Port Seguro (Deby!); San Pedro, Georgia Swamps, 
New South Wales, King George’s Sound, Sumatra, and Tamatave 
(Grove) ; Japan (Firth!); Bahia (Kitton! Grove). 

Var. aucklandica Grun., Sch. Atl., pl. Ixvii. fig. 13.—Surface 
with broader transverse median area. Central space elliptical, 
major axis in line of processes, and about twice minor. Markings 
on transverse median area irregular, obscurely anastomosing. Border 
narrow, definite, with delicate uniform strie.—A. aucklandicus 
Habirsh. Cat. Diat., § Auliscus. A. cxlatus var., Sch. Atl., pl. lxvii. 
fig. 12. 

4 Habitat: Auckland Island (Grunow). _ 

Var. strigillata, Sch. Atl., pl. xxxii. figs. 24-26.—Rarely unequally 
and obtusely angular, major axis 0°0625 to 0'165 mm, 1} to 14 
times minor. Central space obtusely angular, its long axis some- 
times slightly oblique to line of processes. Markings, the cost on 
transverse median area continuous to border; apiculi evident, on this 
area most crowded around and sometimes confined to its outer edge, 
more rarely few and large. Processes more irregular on outer than 
on inner side. —Grev., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond. 1863, pl. i. 
figs. 5, 6. 

Habitat: Patos Island guano (Johnson!); Peruvian guano 
(Browne!); Californian guano (Johnson!); Lamlash, Arran (Gre- 
gory!); Iquique (Hardman!); China, from Holothurians (Macrae!) ; 
Balearic Islands* (Weissflog!); Bahia (Hardman!t); Yokohama 
(Grundler). 

Var. deliculata —Major axis 0°05 to 0°08 mm., about 13 to © 
1,), times minor. Surface almost flat, with transverse median area 
evident. Markings faint or indistinct, striae minute; apiculi around 
ends of transverse area. Processes small.—Pl. XV. fig. 5. 

Habitat: Yokohama (Hardman!); China (Macrae!); Oamaru 
deposit (Grove !). 


* This specimen has been associated by Grunow with A. sculptus. 
+ In the Collection of Mr. Julien Deby. 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &c. By J. Rattray. 887 


Var. major, Sch. Atl. pl. Ixvi. fig. 11.—Major axis 0°14 to 
0°15 mm., about 1,4, times minor. Central space rounded or bluntly 
angular. Markings punctate on transverse median areas, in strands, 
widening towards their outer ends, narrow and in uniformly curved 
sigmoid or flexuous bands towards the processes, interspaces between 
coste at border minutely punctate—<A. seulptus, var. permagna 
Witt, Sch. Atl., pl. exvu. fig. 4 

Habitat: AXgina (Ehrenberg); Santa Monica deposit (Rae!) ; 
Mejillones, Bolivia (Witt); Moron deposit (Greville !). 

Var. constricta—Major axis 0°075 mm., about 1,4 times minor. 
Surface with transverse median areas short and narrow. Central space 
round, 0:01 mm. broad. Markings costate, those converging to the 
processes as distinct as those passing to the border, on the transverse 
areas more delicate. Processes 2, about midway between central 
space and border.—PIl. XV. fig. 8. 

Habitat: Moron deposit (Johnson !); Tamatave (Grove!) ; Mejil- 
lones (Deby !). 

Var. ampressa.—Major axis 0°0575 to 0:065 mm., about 12 to 
1,4, times minor. Surface rising but slightly near the processes, the 
transverse median areas indistinct or absent. Markings costate, those 
passing to the border flexuous or simply curved, sometimes anasto- 
mosing, their inner ends distinct, passing inwards to the central space. 
—Pl. XV. fig. 9.—A. seulptus var., Leud.-Fort. Diat. Ceyl., pl. vii. 
fig. 67. 

Habitat: West Port Bay (O’Meara!); Arran Island (Greville!). 

Var. late-costata, Sch. Atl. pl. xxxi. figs. 16-20.—Major axis 
0:0425 to0°0625 mm., about 1,4 to 1,), times minor. Surface with 
transverse median areas sometimes narrow and short. Markings 
costate, placed at wide intervals, at outer ends of the transverse areas 
an irregular faint reticulum and sometimes minute apiculi—aA. sculptus 
var., Leud.-Fort. Diat. Ceyl., pl. vii. fig. 66. 

Habitat: Bass Straits (Johnson !); Newcastle deposit, Barbadoes 
(Doeg!); Yokohama (Hardman!); Holothurians, Java (Kinker !); 
Campeachy Bay (Grundler). 


Var. mergens. 
A. celatus var., Sch. Atl. pl. xxxii. figs. 12-13, 23. 


Major axis 0°07 to 0°09 mm., about 14 times minor. Surface 
with outline of transverse median areas indefinite. Central space 
roundly elliptical, long axis in line of processes, 0°01 mm. broad. 
Markings: the lines converging to the processes uniformly curve |, 
closely placed, those diverging from outer ends of transverse areas to 
border often more distinct than others nearer the processes, transverse 
areas punctate. 

Habitat: Moron deposit (Weissflog) ; Oamaru deposit (R. Rat- 
tray!); Tamatave (Grove!); King George’s Sound (Grove!); Port 
Lincoln, Australia (Schmidt). 

Var. picta.—Major axis 0°12 mm. 1} times minor. Surface 


888 Transactions of the Society. 


with transverse median areas wide, extending almost to the processes. 
Central space minute, 0°003 mm. broad, elongated obliquely to 
direction of processes. Markings on transverse areas delicate, radiating, 
punctate stria, a distinct irregular reticulum around their outer edge, 
on peripheral side of processes short irregular costs tapering out- 
wards, a few reaching the border.— Pl. XV. fig. 7. 

Habitat: Yokohama (Hardman !). 

Var. protuberans.—Major axis 0°1025 mm., about 1} times 
minor. Central space rounded, 0°01 mm. broad. Markings punctate 
on the transverse areas and disposed in strands separated by hyaline 
interspaces with irregular edges, the strands converging to the pro- 
cesses distinct all round the latter, almost straight about their 
middle, but sharply curved at their inner ends. Processes 2, round, 
0-01 mm. broad.—Pl. XVI. fig. 6. 

Habitat: ‘ Challenger’ trawl, 22nd January, 1875, 100 to 150 
fathoms (Rae !). 

Var. ¢enuis—Major axis 0°0575 to 0-115 mm., about 14}, times 
minor. Surface with transverse areas merging gradually into those 
rising to the processes, and having the outer ends broad, sharply 
defined. Central space round, 0°075 to 0°015 mm. broad. Markings 
minute apiculi sometimes on striz converging to processes, and upon 
the transverse areas. Processes elliptical, 0°0075 to 0°01 mm. broad. 
—Pl. XVI. fig. 3. 

Habitat: Singapore (Doeg!); extinct crater, Cagayan Island, 
Sulu Archipelago (O’Meara!); from Holothurians, China (Deby !). 

Var. mutabilis—Major axis 0'1 to 0°125 mm., 1} to 15}, times 
minor. Colour dark brown to bluish. Central space angular or 
elliptical, the angles sometimes extending almost to the processes, 
0°015 mm. broad. Markings distinct, on the transverse areas ir- 
regular, granular, in indistinct radiating and diverging rows, around 
the border the striz closely placed, with irregular outlines. Processes 
2, irregularly elliptical, 0°02 mm. broad, their circumference with 
minute irregularities.—Pl. XV. fig. 6. 

Habitat: Yokohama (Kitton *). 


§ 11. AREoLAtTI. 


Transverse median areas, when present, with indistinct outer ends. 
Markings irregular, pearly over general surface, or only on more 
limited areas. Processes large. 


Auliscus fractus Grove and Kitton in litt. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0-105 mm., about 1,1, times minor. 
Surface rising but slightly to the processes, slope at border gentle. 
Colour smoky grey. Central space round, 0-015 mm. broad. Markings 
prominent, unequal areole, separated by narrow clear lines, converging 
between central space and processes, elsewhere the rows straight or 


* In the Collections of Mr. E. Grove and Mr. Julien Deby. 


A Reviston of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &c. By J. Rattray. 889 


sigmoid near the converging lines. A band of larger subequal areolze 
adjacent to processes. Processes 2, elliptical, 0°03 mm. broad, separated 
from border by a single band of areole. Central portion convex, 
hyaline.—Pl. XIV. fig. 5. 

Habitat : King George’s Sound (Grove !). 


A. mirabilis Grev. Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 47, pl. i. fig. 11. 


Elliptical, major axis 0°05 to 0°145 mm., from 14 to 1} times 
minor. Surface rising gently at the processes, transverse median 
areas with sides distinct but outer ends inconspicuous. Colour pale 
grey. Central space quadrangular, rarely rounded, from 0-005 to 
0°015 mm. broad. Markings minute punctate; strands converging 
to the processes irregular, distinct, sometimes interrupted; on the 
transverse areas radial, diverging, sometimes scabrous; around the 
border a single band of larger lanceolate areolz, with acute peripheral, 
and more rounded central ends. Processes 2, from 0°01 to 0°025 
mm. broad, with broad irregular border, and hyaline central portion.— 
Sch. Atl., pl. Ixxxix. figs. 10-13. 

San Diego specimens (Grundler), and some of those from Santa 
Marta and Santa Monica have the markings more interrupted and 
less prominent than San Pedro valves. 

Habitat: Santa Marta deposit (Doeg!); Monterey (Firth! 
Griffin !) ; Santa Monica deposit (Kinker! Cleve, Firth*); Santa Maria 
deposit (Rae!*) ; San Pedro (Grove!) ; Los Angelos (Hardman ! f). 


§ 12. Noprnissrut. 


Transverse median areas distinct. Markings prominent between 
the lines converging to processes, and in strands widening towards 
border ; on transverse areas sometimes plumose. Processes large, high. 


A. subczlatus sp. n. 


Elliptical, major axis 0°1125 mm., about 1} times minor. Surface 
rising slightly to processes, and sloping gently from ends of transverse 
median areas to border. Colour pale smoky grey. Central space 
irregularly hexagonal ; those sides on the transverse areas most closely 
placed, 0°015 mm. apart, the acute angles extending close to the 
processes. Markings punctate, forming delicate striz around the 
processes; beyond these, 4 or 5 unequal strands separated by narrow, 
wavy, clear bands passing obliquely to the edges of the transverse 
areas, similar but more uniform strands diverging from outer ends of 
these areas to the border ; upon the transverse areas irregular, diverg- 
ing, plumose, punctate lines. Processes 2, less convex on inner than on 
outer side, 0°0225 mm. broad. 

Habitat: Oamaru deposit (Rae !) 


* In the Collection of Dr. Griffin. 
} In the Collection of Mr. Julien Deby. 


890 Transactions of the Society. 


'A. oamaruensis Grove & Sturt, Journ. Quek. Mic. Cl., 1887, p. 10, 
pl. iii. fig. 13. 

Roundly, subregularly, elliptical, major axis from 0°15 to 0°23 mm., 
1,), to 1} times minor. Surface with an elevated broadly obcordate 
area between central space and processes, having the outer edge sharply 
defined ; the transverse areas with edges sometimes less abrupt, outer 
ends rounded at about 7/9 of radius from centre, and sides uniformly 
concave. Colour pale brownish yellow, alternating with hyaline 
strands. Central space diamond-shaped, large, hyaline. Markings 
granular, closely aggregated in strands with hyaline interspaces, the 
strands between the edges of the obcordate and transverse areas 
distinct, the four sets together diamond-shaped ; those on the transverse 
areas radial, expanding towards border, almost straight at the middle, 
elsewhere convex towards the processes. Processes 2, large, rounded, 
first expanding to median widest portion, and from this rounding 
to apex; from 0°02 to 0:03 mm. broad.—Sch. Atl., pl. exvii. fig. 2, 
pl. exxv. fig. 1. 

Habitat: Oamaru deposit (Grove & Sturt! R. Rattray! Hard- 
man! Rae!). 


A. intermedius Grove & Sturt in litt. 


Elliptical, major axis 0-1125 mm., about 1} times minor.. Surface 
rising from centre towards processes, a transverse area at right angles 
to the line of processes, distinct, with outer ends rounded at about 3/4 
of radius from the centre, outside of this the slope to the border gentle. 
Colour light smoky grey. Central space rounded, about 0:0125 mm. 
broad. Markings granular, the strands separated by hyaline spaces, 
those converging to the processes almost straight or slightly concave 
outward towards the outer, sharply convex outward towards the inner, 
ends, elsewhere almost straight, elongately obconical, towards the 
processes confluent laterally. Border indistinct, striz delicate, 8 in 
0-01 mm. Processes 2, subcircular, about 0°015 mm. broad, with 
the border opaque.—Pl. XII. fig. 8. 

Habitat : Oamaru deposit (Grove !). 

Var. stmplew.—Major axis 0°08 mm., about 1;/5 times minor. 
Markings: the strands narrower and of more uniform width, those 
converging to the processes more concave towards the central space, 
the inner ends of those on transverse median areas more distinct, 
around each process an irregular slightly angular band of large 
unequal granules. Processes round, simple, 0:015 mm. broad, their 
circumference with minute irregularities —Pl. XVI. fig. 5. 

Habitat : Oamaru deposit (Rae! Grove !). 


§ 13. Sranatt. 

The central portion of the valve sometimes distinct, transverse 
areas indistinct, short or reaching close to border. Markings delicate 
close strize around border, convex towards processes, sometimes 
punctate. 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &c. By J. Rattray. 891 


A. sublevis Grun. MS. 


Trregularly elliptical, major axis 0°045 mm., about 1,4 times 
minor. Surface almost flat, a dark indistinct band between processes 
and close to border, slope at border gentle. Colour pale grey. 
Central space round, about 0:0025 mm. broad, indistinct. Markings 
punctate, minute, striz just visible on central side of processes. 
Processes 2, plano-convex, or outer side protuberant, 0:01 mm. 
broad.—Pl. XII. fig. 7. 

Habitat: Moron deposit (Weissflog !) 


A, lucidus sp. n., Sch. Atl, pl. xxxi. figs. 10, 12. 


Elliptical, major axis 0°15 mm., 1} times minor. Surface with 
central portion slightly elevated, its outer edge faint, convex out- 
wards, at about 2/3 of semi-minor axis from central space and passing 
round the outer side of the processes. Colour hyaline, central space 
round, indistinct. Markings obscure, a few delicate strie converging 
to the processes somewhat more evident. Processes 2, round, 0-02 mm. 
broad, placed near middle of semi-major axis, their circumference 
distinct, central portion punctate. 


Habitat: Gulf of Carpentaria (Weissflog! Grundler). 


A. ovalis Arnott in Pritch. Inf., p. 846. 


Elliptical, sometimes more convex on one side than on the other, 
or oval, major axis 0°08 to 0°125 mm., about 14 to 12 times minor. 
Surface rising slightly from the centre to the processes, transverse 
median areas extending to about 4/5 of radius, with outer ends 
rounded, sometimes indistinct and closer to border, outside of this slope 
to border gentle. Colour pale grey. Central space roundly elliptical, 
from 0-008 to 0°0125 mm. broad. Markings delicate, closely placed 
stri, straight in direction of axis of transverse areas, sigmoid about 
sides of these areas, the peripheral curves convex towards the processes ; 
apiculi few between central space and processes, and on transverse 
median areas, chiefly at outer ends of latter, sometimes absent. 
Processes 2, elliptical or obtusely triangular, about 0-0225 mm. broad. 
—Grey. Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 47, pl. iii. fig. 12; Sch. Atl, 
. xxx. figs. 16, 17, pl. exxv. fig. 3; H. L. Smith, Sp. Diat. Typ. 

o. 55. 

Some Oamaru valves have the striz converging to the processes 
specially well defined. 

Habitat: Iquique (Hardman!) ; Pisagua, Peru (H. L. Smith! 
Weissflog !) ; Peruvian guano (Griffin! Grove) ; Islay, Peru (Griffin !) ; 
Algoa Bay guano (Greville!); South African guano (Greville Ne 
Japan oysters (Rae!) ; Cape of Good Hope (Macrae! Weissflog !) ; 
Oamaru deposit (Grove !); Santa Monica deposit (Kinker !). 


892 Transactions of the Society. 


A. prelatus sp. n. 


Elongately elliptical or suboval, major axis 0°125 to 0°15 mm., 
from 14 to 1} times minor. Surface rising gently from central space 
to processes, transverse median areas distinct, their outer ends rounded 
at about 3/4 of radius from centre, outside of this the slope to border 
gentle. Colour pale grey, darker towards centre. Central space 
rounded, 0°015 mm. broad. Markings, distinct strie with clear 
interspaces, those converging to the processes uniformly curved but 
replaced close to the processes by short delicate strize 8 in 0°01 mm. ; 
most crowded on the transverse median area, beyond this straight, in 
direction of axis of this area, elsewhere convex towards processes, at 
border and near the processes more pruinose, often interrupted or 
represented by irregular scattered granules; apiculi inconspicuous, 
chiefly on transverse median areas. Processes 2, large, roundly 
elliptical, major axis oblique, 0°03 mm. long, border finely striated. 

Habitat: Peruvian guano (Rae! Griffin !); Pisagua (Kitton !*) ; 
Islay, Peru (Griffin!) ; Mejillones, Bolivia (Firth !). 


A. earibeus Cleve, Sch. Atl., pl. lxvii. figs. 9, 10. 


Subcircular, diam. about 0°05 mm. Surface with indistinctly 
defined transverse median areas, processes low. Colour? Central 
space circular, distinct, about 0°0075 mm. broad. Markings punctate 
and irregular, but distinct on transverse areas, strize converging to 
the processes inconspicuous, beyond the central areas radial and 
straight to border. Processes rounded, about 0°013 mm. broad, with 
broad border. 

Habitat: Darien (Schmidt). 


A. macraeanus Grev., ‘Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 51, pl. iii. 


fig. 18 


Circular or roundly elliptical, major axis 0:0625 to 0:115 mm., 
about 14 times minor. Surface rising slightly from the centre to 
processes, elsewhere almost flat, transverse median areas short, indis- 
tinct. Colour pale grey. Central space circular, 0°005 to 0:01 mm. 
broad. Markings delicate strie, those converging to the processes 
most evident, elsewhere radial and diverging; apiculi sometimes 
evident on transverse areas, and on a narrow band close to border. 
Processes 2, large, about 0°0325 mm. broad, cirenlar.—Sch. Atl., 
pl. xxxi. fig. 5. 

Habitat: Ceylon (Macrae!); Oamaru (Rae!); Ashley River, 
North America (Weissflog !). 


A. Grevillei Jan., Abh. Schl. Ges. vater. Cult., 1861, p. 163, pl. ii. 
pT da ot 


Elliptical, rarely oval, major axis from 0°12 to 0°165 mm., about 
11 to 1} timesminor. Surface rising slightly from centre to processes, 


* Tn the Collection of Dr. Griffin. 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &c. By J. Rattray. 893 


transverse median areas distinct, with outer ends rounded about 3/5 
of radius from centre, slope towards border gentle. Colour pale grey, 
darker at outer ends of transverse areas. Central space round, distinct, 
0°01 to 0-015 mm. broad. Markings delicate strie, those converg- 
ing to processes most evident, the others almost straight or slightly 
convex towards processes at border; apiculi numerous, irregular, 
most prominent at outer ends of transverse areas, Processes 2, 
roundly elliptical, from 0°025 to 0°325 mm. broad. 

Girdle aspect * showing obliquely truncate processes with margin 
slightly protuberant. Girdle hyaline, with median line parallel to its 
edges, 0°025 mm. broad in valve 0°115 mm. in diam.—Sch. Atl., 
pl. xxx. fig. 15. 

Habitat: Peruvian guano (Firth! Rae! Kitton!); Mejillones 
guano (Kitton !) ; Pisagua (Weissflog! Kitton!*); Mejillones, Bolivia 
(Firth! Bessels! ft); Pabellan de Pico guano (Cleve). 


§ 14. RerirormEs. 


A reticulum over entire surface or confined to central or peripheral 
portions, sometimes indistinct. Markings obscure, delicate strie or 
costz, or forming punctate interrupted strands. Interspaces hyaline. 
Apiculi obscure or absent. 


A. textilis Sch. Atl., pl. lxxxix. fig. 9. 


Subcircular, diam. 0°095 mm. Surface sloping gently to border. 
Central space circular, distinct, 0-015 mm. broad. Markings a deli- 
cate reticulum with minute irregular meshes, having delicate points at 
the angles. Border distinct, with irregular radial or somewhat oblique 
lines. Processes circular, 0-019 mm. broad, central portion relatively 
small, hyaline. 

Habitat: Santa Monica deposit (Schmidt). 


A. subreticulatus.— A. pruanosus var. subreticulata Grun., Sch. Atl., 
pl. Ixxxix. figs. 5, 6. 


Elliptical, major axis 0-075 to 0°15 mm., 1} to 14 times minor. 
Surface flat or central portion sometimes slightly elevated, with outer 
edge distinct and convex between processes. Colour pale grey or 
smoky grey. Central space rounded, 0:01 to 0°0175 mm. broad, 
distinct. Markings evident, striz converging to the processes, those 
on intermediate areas indistinct, straight, radial, a reticulum with 
unequal meshes well defined; apiculi absent. Processes 2, round or 
elliptical, 00175 to 0°0275 mm. broad, their circumference sometimes 
rough. 

‘Habitat: Santa Monica deposit (Rae! Firth! Griffin! Cleve!) ; 
Crescent City, California (Weissflog ! Griffin!) ; Los Angelos (Hard- 
man ! ft). 

* Also in the Collection of Dr. Griffin and Mr. E. Grove. 

+ In the Collection of Dr. Griffin, t In the Collection of Mr. J Dae Deby. 

1888. 3 P 


894 Transactions of the Society. 


Var. decipiens. —Irregularly elliptical or suboval, major axis 
0:°0575 mm., about 1} times minor. Surface with transverse median 
areas indistinct, the outer ends about half of semi-minor axis from 
centre. Markings minute, punctate, a few short faint irregular strie 
converging to the processes ; apiculi indistinct or absent. Processes 
2, round, 0°0075 mm. broad. 

Habitat : Ceylon (Weissflog !) ; Los Angelos (Hardman !) 


A. reticulatus Grey. Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 46, pl. i. 


fig. 10 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0°0725 mm., about 1,1, times minor. 
Surface rising gradually from centre to processes, the central portion 
sharply defined, extending to outer side of processes, widest opposite 
the central space, reaching to 4/5 of radius from centre. Colour pale 
grey. Central space round, distinct, 0°0125 mm. broad. Markings 
evident, striae converging to the processes sometimes with minute 
lateral protuberances, rarely anastomosing on the central portion, but 
between the converging sets more faint with frequent anastomoses, 
around the border distinct, straight, or slightly bent, distant. Pro- 
cesses 2, small, outer end rounded, about 0:01 mm. broad.—Sch. Atl., 
pl. xxx. figs. 1-3. A. reticwlatus var., Sch. Atl., pl. xxx. fig. 4. 

Habitat: Zanzibar (Weissflog!); Bass Straits (Johnson !) ; 
scrapings from Haliotis shells, Peru (Grove!) ; Holothurians, Cali- 
fornia (Kinker !); Red Sea (Grunow) ; Peru and Amboyna (Grove). 

Var. quadrisignata Sch. Atl, pl. xxx. fig. 5—Major axis 
0:05 mm., about 1} times minor. Markings: striae converging to 
processes less evident, reticulum on transverse areas faint but evident, 
on 2 or 4 small subsymmetrical areas more prominent. 

Habitat : Campeachy Bay (Weissflog !) ; Auckland (Cleve). 

Var. capensis Sch. Atl., pl. xxx. fig. 6—Major axis 0°07 mm., 
about 1,!- times minor. Surface with central portion extending to 
middle ot processes, its protuberant lateral portion nearer the border. 
Markings: striz converging to the processes more distant and irregular, 
a reticulum faint and only on lateral protuberant parts of central 
portion. Processes oval, long axis directed straight or obliquely 
towards centre. 


Habitat: Cape of Good Hope (Schmidt). 


A. compositus Sch. Atl., pl. xxx. fig. 9. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0°1325 mm., about 14 times minor. 
Surface rising slightly towards the processes, elsewhere almost flat ; 
a distinctly defined, irregularly oval, subsymmetrical, median area, 
extending to, and with long axis in line of, processes, its minor axis 
from 1/2 to 3/5 of that of the valve. Colour light smoky grey. 
Central space circular, about 0°015 mm. broad. Markings: around 
central space a band of large, somewhat obconical, unequal, mostly 3- 
or 4-sided areolz, reaching from 1/2 to 3 /5 of minor axis of median 
area, on the remainder of this area an irregular reticulum with meshes, 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &c. By J. Rattray. 895 


large, unequal, mostly 4-sided, outside of it the radial lines distinct, 
slightly concave towards processes, with transverse anastomosing 
lines, few irregular.. Processes 2, outer edge close te border, 
mammillate, elliptical, breadth 0:02 mm. 

Habitat: Manilla (Hardman !); locality unknown (Weissflog !). 


A. Schmidt Grindl., Sch. Atl. pl. xxx. fig. 7. 


Irregularly elliptical, lobate, major axis 0° 1425 mm., about 1 
times minor. Surface with central portion slightly elevated, its outer 
edge irregularly rounded, distinct, not reaching processes, but extending 
to about 3/5 of radius from centre. Colour pale grey. Central space 
inconspicuous, rounded, about 0°005 mm. broad. Markings on central 
_ portion faint, irregular, distant, striee forming an irregular reticulum, 
most distinct towards its outer edge, those converging to the processes 
short, distinct, at wide unequal intervals on the outer side of the pro- 
cesses, a distinct reticulum sometimes present but not reaching border, 
the striz around the border straight or somewhat convex towards pro- 
cesses, distinct, rarely closely disposed. Processes 2, rounded, about 
0:015 mm. broad, at some distance from border. 

Habitat: From Holothurians, Sumatra’ (Deby !}; King George’s 
Sound (Grove!) ; Campeachy Bay (Schmidt). 


A. opulentus sp. 2. 


Circular, diam. 0°0875 mm. Surface with outer edge of central 
portion indistinct, concave between processes. Colour pale smoky 
grey. Central space round, distinct, 0°0125 mm. broad. Markings 
minute, punctate, forming distinet ‘strands, diverging from central 
Space, sometimes irregular “with hyaline interspaces, the striz converg- 
ing to processes irregular, outside of central portion narrow hyaline 
lines between the punctate areas, the strize around the border delicate, 
radial; reticulum absent. Processes 4, unsymmetrical, somewhat 
anequal, from 0°0125 to 6:0175 mm. broad.—Pl. XIV. fig. 4. 

This form has been united by Grunow with A. celatus as forma 
quadrioceliata, but it bears little affinity to this species. It is nearer 
A. speciosus. 


Habitat: Santa Monica deposit (Weissflog !). 


A. speciosus Sch. Atl., pl. Ixxx. fig 5. 


Obtusely quadrangular, diam. 0°15 mm. Surface with central 
area flat, its outer edge distinct, irregular, concave outwards between 
the processes at about 2/3 of radius from centre. Elevations beneath 
processes high. Colour pale smoky grey. Central space round, 
0:0225 mm. bread. Markings punctate, distinct, on evident strands 
diverging and widening outwards from central space, and separated 
by hyaline interspaces, less distinct around the border, delicate strize 
present around base of processes, a reticulum with unequal meshes 
well marked outside of central area and sometimes around processes, 

oP 2 


896 Transactions of the Society. 


the meshes smallest close to border. Processes 4, roundly elliptical, 
about 0°02 mm. broad.—Sch. Atl. pl. eviti. fig. 3. 
Habitat : Santa Monica deposit (Rae! Gray! Kinker! Kitton !). 


A, subspeciosus sp. n. 


Elliptical, major axis 0°1125 mm., from 1} to 14 times minor. 
Surface with central portion between processes somewhat elevated, 
oval or irregularly diamond-shaped, outer edge distinct, sometimes 
irregular, beyond this slope to border gentle. Colour pale grey. 
Central space circular, 0-015 mm. broad, distinct. Markings punctate, 
minute, in interrupted, narrow, irregular strands radiating from central 
space, an irregular reticulum about outer edge of central portion, 
beyond this the striz radial or oblique and curved, those converging to » 
the processes irregularly bent and irregular. Processes 2, elliptical, 
0:015 mm. broad, the outer ends convex, high.—Pl. XIV. fig. 3. 

Habitat: Santa Monica deposit (Rae! Gray! Deby! Griffin !) ; 
Los Angelos (Hardman !). 


§ 15. SprcIES DUBIZ VEL EXOLUSH. 


A. (?) gigas Ehrb., Mon. Ber. Ak., 1844, p. 77.—Fragmentary, 
sides slightly protuberant opposite process and about 90° from this. 
Central space absent. Markings distinct, distant, curved lines radi- 
ating and diverging towards tumid border, the latter bearing sigmoid 
lines separating similarly curved rows of granules. Process pro- 
minent, convex, elliptical, around the central portion a narrow granu- 
late band, and outside of this a broader band similar to the tumid 
border.—Ehrb. Mikrog,, pl. xix. fig. 63; Ralfs in Pritch. Inf, p. 846 ; 
Grey. Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 52. Coscinodiseus Auliscus 
Kiitz., Sp. Alg., p. 126. 

Habitat : Adgina (Ehrenberg). 

A. americanus Ehrb., Mikrog., pl. xxxiii. 14, fig. 2.—Circular. 
Central space large irregularly quadrate, with rounded angles at pro- 
cesses and middle of intervening area. Markings distinct, distant, lines 
straight at right angles to line of processes, elsewhere concave 
towards the processes. Processes 2, subeircular, their border wide.— 
Ralfs in Pritch. Inf, p. 846; Grev. Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, 


Roy 
: Probably, as pointed out by Ralfs, this species is the same as 
A. sculptus W. Sm. 
Habitat: Brackish marshes near Norwich, Connecticut (Ehrenberg). 
A. cylindricus Ehrb., Mon. Ber. Ak., 1843, p. 271.—Of this 
species no figure has been published. The frustule is said to be 
cylindrical, often tibia-like, the disc on each side orbicular, plain, its 
margin and middle portion marked by various radiating lines, the 
apertures (= processes) 2, oblique, large, but scarcely raised above 
the margin. Diam. 0°045 to 0:095 mm. Specimens so named were 
observed by Ehrenberg from Ems mud near Weimar, from marine 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &c. By J. Rattray. 897 


mud at Norderney, from Jahde mud near Hochsiel Jeverland, and 
from sand at the mouth of the Tajo—cConf. Ralfs in Pritch. Inf., 
p. 846; Grey. Trans. Mic. Soc. land, 1863, p. 52. 

A. polystigma Ehrb., Mon. Ber. Ae 1844, p- 77, has not been 
adequately defined. Ehrenberg only noted that the valve had “cellules 
or apiculi” equal, small, disposed without order, and not contiguous. 
His specimens were from Ems mud near Weimar. Kiitzing added 
that it differed from Coscinodiscus radiolatus in having a little larger 
radiating markings—about 7 instead of 9 in 0:01 mm.—conyerging 
in two lateral whorls, and recorded it as fossil in North America. It 
is identical with Coscinodiscus polystigma Ehrb., Mon. Ber. Ak., 1843, 
p- 271, and Auliseus polystigmus Ralts, in Pritch, Inf., p. 846. Conf. 
Grey. Trans. Mie. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 52. 

A. fulvus Raben., Flor. Europ. Ale. aq. dulce, p. 320, is Hupodiscus 
fulvus W. Sm. (Syn. Brit. Diat., 1. p. 24), and was correctly referred 
by Ralfs to Actinocyclus. 

IT am unacquainted with A. granulatus Bail. and A. quadriceps 
Bail., which occur, according to Habirshaw, in the collection of 
Prof. Bailey, but remain nomina nuda. 


ARTIFICIAL Key. 


_ 


. Processes six, two large mammillate, two smaller at ends of 
transverse area, and two at considerable unequal distances 
from the corresponding sides of the large ones. Markings 
pruinose striz; a clear curved band at outer ends of trans- 


VWGEE® QREWT oo on on | co 60 od 0 00, 00 | cg | CROTON 
No such processes .._ .. ac 2 
2. A clear concavo-convex space on inner r side of each ‘process .. lacunosus. 
Two clear spaces between each process and the central ee 
that nearer the centre long, narrow no 400 60 a0 50 | AGT IRA: 


No such clear areas é 
3. Valve with three distinct zones. Markings costate, star-shaped 
QUCENLTO mach need) bse . stelliger. 
No such zones.. .. 
4, Markings areolate, unequal, large, pearly ; processes low, broad. 


Transverse median areas obscure .. . . fractus. 
Markings areolate, unequal, large, pearly ; processes low, broad, 
Transverse median areas prominent, obovate »» eo «+  convolutus. 
No such markings .. Baer et: aap 
5. A marginal band of large lanceolate markings oe 0s = Mirabilis. 
No such marginal band... Be tect 
6. Striz short, distant, flexuous, inregular but distinct 1... pressus. 
No such strie .. .. FO ADO soee Oooo aroD 7 
7. Processes close to the central space ao) age hod. pen. job ae 8 
“5 much nearer border” 3) 2. 925 -« cs se? «s 9 
& ADIGHIENGy ah Mage ric secs deO Aan) PaO ONIAOR Mita UcAGy a anima 10 
Non-apiculate .. . 11 
10. Striz converging to the processes ‘evident, elsewhere ‘obscure .. accedens. 
Markings obscure throughout .. .. propinquus. 
TE Markings minute, round, granular, most evident towards 
border, rows radial... Rattrayi. 
rs large round granules, rows ineonspiewous, ‘radiating 
ATL OUEHSIMN? o5 65 po 0G) oo. ob -. robustus. 
9. Central space diamond- shaped elug usr Geet sh ccic a Rane (crea ats 12 
a »  notdiamond-shaped .. .. .. «2 « « 13 
12, Transverse areas absent eeu d nie Saas erro al cod | fee: la op 14 


Priat| O RSE = rioee HAPremup ds: Saiy Rec LenGe MBN | aie 15 


898 


14. 
15. 
16. 
18. 


19. 
17. 


20. 


13. 


21. 
22. 


24, 


25. 


27. 


26. 


28. 


29. 


Transactions of the Society. 


Markings obscure. Processes 4 


es minute, punctate. Processes 2, close to major axis. 
‘Transverse areas faint: oo. ksliias, an 0 oe) Med: w at ee Lads 
5 (OUSEINGE Tee oe et ess 
Apiculate 


Non-apiculate, a delicate reticulum with small meshes evident 
Apiculi aggregated on a narrow band around each process 
am few, minute, between onter edges of transverse areas 
and the areas between the centre and processes 
Transverse area narrow, with clavate outline .. 


3 », Widening towards border with irregular outline 

Transverse areas, with concaye or straight ends and obscure 
markings .. 

- » With convex ends ‘and evident ‘markings ; 


pearly areole forming a marginal band 
and V-shaped lines on the central side of 
each process Pe are Cer tvs 
Appearance otherwise ; osemere 
Markings scabrous. Transverse areas narrow towards the 
centre, their outer ends suddenly expanding, 
FOWENGHMT. Sha iss) uae 

2 delicate. Transverse areas expanding widely out- 
wards. Processes large, high, with sides concave 
and apices convex .. 

“ delicate. Convolute anastomosing ‘clear lines be- 
tween transverse areas and those extending 
between central space and processes .. 

Central space elongately elliptical. ‘Transverse areas oblique 
to direction of processes .. 

indefinite, Transverse areas defined ‘by : a clear 
band. Markings small, round, chi tiesionna din 
radial rows beyond this band . - 

9 Tound Oraneulan oy. else .<8e ey Ge 


” ” 


No transverse median areas... .. «. 
Transverse median areas present “4 
A reticulum .. peters 
Reticulum almost confined to central portion of valve... 


No reticulum 
Reticulum with small subregular meshes, central ‘portion of 
valve not differentiated from peripheral : 
~ coarse, irregular, outline of central portion extending 
between sides of processes faint .. .. 
y irregular, distinct only outside of sharply defined 
central portion. Processes4  .. = or 
Central portion of valve distinct... 
indistinct, regularly rounded, “a re- 
ticulum with small delicate meshes 


” ” ” 


chiefly on its outer part .. .. 
Central portion regularly rounded, not reaching central side 
of processes 


extending round outer side of processes and 
protruding opposite the central space 

elliptical, not See cues bes central 
space a “c 

Central porhionimdistinety a2. ees tect ee ene wes neues 

no 5, distinct . SVE ae Met dR eee 
= undifferentiated ah 

Central portion continued round outer side of " processes. 
Markings obscure striae  . 

extending to processes, between these its 
sides reaching close to border. Markings 
minute, punctate .. 

extending to processes, its sides between these 
concave outwards, Processes 4.. 

Outline of central portion hourglass-shaped sk was 

not hourglass-shaped .. .. «. 


3” »” 


7 ” 


” ” 


” ” 


»” ” ” 


parvulus. 
nitidus. 


gracillimus. 
pectinatus. 


19 
eximius. 
antiquus. 


insignis. 


decoratus. 
20 


hardmanianus. 


Biddulphia. 


intestinalis. 


raeanus. 


textitis. 
subreticulatus. 


speciosus, 
27 


spectabilis. 
Schmidtit. 


reticulatus. 


lucidus. 


sublevis. 
opulentus. 
31 
32 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &e. 


31. 


32. 


30. 
33. 


34, 


35. 


38. 


36. 


37. 


23. 
39. 


41. 


The central portion distinct. Stria distant, at border concave 
towards processes 

faint opposite the central space. 
crowded .. .. 

The central portion continued round outer side of processes, 
protruding between these opposite the 
central space Sf Sacha delegate 

reaching the processes. Markings in in- 
terrupted strands radiating from central 


" Strie 


tb} bb] 


ted ” 


space Se ine 
A clear curved band at sides of central space. _ Markings 
UAMUM ATI sen Meee tack Miele + Paice os bh cele obs nc 


No such band . 


On each side of valve 3 symmetrical lines diverging from 
central space towards border .. .. .. . . c 

No such diverging lines..- .. Soir Bow ee 

Markings punctate, without order. HO aA Stead 
Rs GDSCUNO ME ents ss. uss eae ete ks ae alee 
fs delicate strize Bau Sn. A Cokeon a arraAe oe aera cis 
5 distinct 


A clear irregular narrow band, radiating from central space to 
border at sides of converging strize. Processes 2 20 
No such band . 


Apiculi few at border and midway between processes, ’ Pro- 
cesses 3 . Es 
on a narrow band around centre and at border. Pro- 


GEES po oc 60° ko. | 80 
Apiculi at border only, between processes. “Processes 2, large 
», prominent, chiefly at border and around central space 
55 numerous, absent only from central space 
Pe aggregated on a narrow band around border, about the 
processes, and on narrow bands at or within semi- 
radius, and concave outwards at the middle 
» Minute, numerous. Strice between central "Ear and 
processes straight .. 
at border. Rounded granules a ger egated 
around central space 
is most evident around border. Strize most evident around 
central space.. 
The strands of markings diver cing from central space distant, 
often interrupted ¢ 
irregular, broadest but unequal around 
central space .. .. 
interrupted to form round or irregular 
patches, curved, pruinose, towards 
the border crow ded, without order 
Stris coarse; irregular, radial and diver cing from central 
space, at border delicate. Apiculate - 
forming subregular sharp rough lines, with shorter lines 
around border. Apiculi minute, scattered . 
rough, more closely placed, radial and diverging. Non- 
apiculate Oc 
diverging from conta space ie orders straight or sig- 
moid, distant, convex towards the processes 
course, interrupted towards central aes 
small, high Oe Me, cack tt ial das 
Transverse areas with outer ends faint ., slob pele’s aise ie uen 
» distinct .. 
Diverging eiries interrupted near central space, feat: at Borden 
Non-apiculate.. 
Striee faint, continuous. Processes s small, high, with free ends 
convex .. biesrdo. td - sledge Saas Mine 
Markings otherwise | 
Markings in radial strands | expanding regularly ‘to border, 
lines ¢ converging to processes: sharply curved at inuer ends, 
almost straight on outer portion .. Cutie ry o eaee 
No such strands 


39 bP) 


b>) ” 


bb) ” 


Processes 


oo On oo oo oo oo oo oo 


By J. Rattray. 


899 


elegans. 


amenus. 


antercedens. 


subspeciosus. 


Clevei. 
33 


lineatus. 
34 


barbadensis. 


38 

Caballi. 
punctulatus. 
nebulo-punctatus. 
normanianus. 
punctatus. 
Stéckhardtit. 
australiensis. 
superbus. 
formosus. 


interruptus. 


Hauckii. 


TrUugosUs. 
moronensis. 
confluens. 
pruinosus. 
incertus, 
acutiusculus. 
40 
caribeus. 
obseurus. 


41 


intermedius. 
42 


900 Transactions of the Society. 


42. Valve elongately elliptical .. .. «6 ss" 6 s oF 43 
,, subeircular. Strie delicate but little curved.. ..  .. maecraeanus. 
43. Outer ends of transverse areas close to border; striz delicate, 
closely placed, convex to- 
wards processes. Apiculifew  ovalis. 
& a rt » notclose to border; strive dis- 
tinct. Apiculi minute, 
chiefly on transverse areas 
and around border .. .. pralatus. 
40. Processes 2, large, proximal portion obconieal distal convex .. oumaruensis. 
No such processes ». «6 22 ss 22 06 06 0 o0  * 44 
44. A second elliptical area, with major axis transverse within 
outer larger transverse area... «see we ee we we Cunt. 
No buch area present 5. secre Set ise Pee Giey ers ce 45 
45. Transverse areas with a series of flexuous striz around and 
almost parallel to their outer ends.. sculptus. 


a 2 ,, afaint reticulum at their outer ends. 
Stris continuous, punctate, distinct. cz#latus. 
= - » markings in irregular plumose strands, 


a few irregular evident bands passing 
from the outer sides of these areas 


towards the processes .. .. .. subcxlatus. 
= fc » short distinct coste at their middle, 
and delicate curved diverging striz 
around the sides .. .. .. «. splendidus. 
- = ,, strive fine, distant, radial; the intervals 
closely punctate,. SPce Wine it: 
Strie throughout delicate, closely placed. Apiculi numerous, 
most prominent on transverse area, valve elongately 
elliptionl Jcnjo i. tatow: 9 ety oho Cxned ary len ally ae, ao, OT 


PSEUDAULISCUS Sch. emend. 
Pseudauliscus Sch. emend., Atl. Explan., pl. xxxii. figs. 28, 29. 


Valve circular, subcireular, or elliptical. Surface flat or with an 
elevated zone within, more rarely outside of the processes. Colour 
pale grey to pale smoky grey. Central space absent or minute. 
Markings areolate, granular or punctate in radial, rarely in secondary 
concentric or oblique rows, sometimes without order ; strie incon- 
spicuous, sometimes converging around the processes or placed at a 
distance from these; a reticulum rare; apiculi frequent, scattered 
over the whole surface, or more rarely confined to the highest zone or 
only near the border. Border narrow, hyaline or striated. Processes 
2 to 9, rarely minute, round or elliptical, inserted close to the circum- 
ference, their border sometimes striated.—Leud.-Fort. Diat. Ceyl., 
p. 64. Auliscus pro parte Jan. Abh. Schl. Ges. vater. Cult, 1861, 
p- 162. Eupodiscus pro parte Kitton in Pritch. Inf, p. 988. Grey. 
Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1864, p. 88. Cerataulus pro parte Grun. in 
Sch. Atl. pl. exv. fig. 10. 


Pseudauliscus ambiguus Grev., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 7 4, 
pl. v. fig. 23. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis 0-045 to 0°055 mm., about 14 times 
minor. Surface highest and slightly convex between the processes, 
thence sloping gently to the border. Colour hyaline. Markings 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &c. By J. Rattray. 901 


irregularly polygonal, about 5 to 6 in 0°01 mm., decreasing slightly 
towards the border. Processes 2, roundly elliptical, about 0°01 mm. 
broad, a limiting band of minute markings sometimes distinct. 

This species forms the transition to Hupodiscus. 

Habitat : Cambridge deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson !). 

Var. major.—Subcircular, axes 0°05 mm., subequal. Colour pale 
erey. Markings 4 in 0:01 mm., outlines more distinct, largest about 
each side of the convex area between the processes. Border finely 
undulate. Processes 2, at ends of minor axis, their peripheral side 
more sharply defined than their central—Pl. XY. fig. 1. 

Habitat: Barbadoes (Hardman !). 


P. hirsutus sp. n. 


Elliptical, major axis 0°2 mm., about 1} times minor. Surface 
rising suddenly at the processes. Colour pale grey. Markings 
minute polygonal areole, 8 in 0:01 mm., without interspaces, rows 
visible only around the processes, elsewhere without order; apiculi 
numerous, scattered but prominent. Processes 2, circular or elliptical. 
0:025 mm. broad, their free ends obliquely truncated outwards, 
hyaline, insertion a short distance from the border.—Pl. XV. fig. 3. 

Habitat: Eastern Archipelago * (Macrae !). 


P. tetraophthalmus Cleve MS. 


Circular, diam. 0°0825 mm. Surface with 4 slight but evident 
cuneate inflations expanding outwards almost from the centre to the 
outer edge of the processes. Markings faint reticulate, about 4 in 
0:01 mm., subequal, in obscure radial rows or without order, most 
evident on the inflations. Processes 4, symmetrical, rounded, about 
0°0075 mm. broad, most abrupt on the outer side, their border 
narrow, smooth —PI. XIV. fig. 10. 

The inflations here recall those found in some Coscinodiset and 
Aulacodiset. 


Habitat : Barbadoes deposit (Cleve !). 


P. notatus—A. notatus Grev., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1865, peo: 
pl. i. fig. 2. 


Circular, diam. 0°05 mm. Surface flat. Colour pale grey. 
Markings small, rounded, granular, irregular on the central portion, 
in indistinct radial but slightly curved rows towards the border, 
interspaces distinct, widest towards the centre. Processes 2, circular, 
apeut 0-0075 mm. broad, insertion about 1/3 of radius from the 
border. 


Habitat: Cambridge deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson!); Oamaru 
deposit (Grove). 


* Found, according to Dr. Macrae, in Holothurians purchased in the China 
market, but probably from Torres Straits. 


902 Transactions of the Society. 


P. radiatus Bail., Smiths. Contrib., 1853, p. 6, fig. 13. 


Subcireular to elliptical, major axis 0°0525 to 0:1 mm., from 
1} to 1,4 times minor. Surface almost flat, rising but slightly 
towards the processes. Colour pale grey. Central area rounded or 
irregularly elliptical, with long axis at right angles to line of processes, 
indistinct, from 0°0075 to 0°0125 mm. broad. Markings irregular, 
and granular on central area, outside of this areolate, minute, gradually 
increasing in size towards the border; rows converging around the 
processes distinct, elsewhere straight or slightly convex towards the 
processes, and radial. Border distinct, with evident radial strie. 
Processes 2, subcircular, from 0°01 to 0°015 mm. broad.—A. Baileyi 
Grey., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 49. 

The border is more evident in some smaller subcircular, than in 
larger elliptical specimens from Nottingham U.S. 

Habitat: Nottingham deposit (Hardman!) ; Long Island, United 
States (Bailey !*); New York Harbour (Kitton!*); mud from New 
York Harbour; mud from Hudson River at West Point (Bailey, 
Weissflog !); Rockaway, Long Island, United States (Bailey) ; 
Pensacola (Grove!); Vera Cruz and Pensacola Bay (Deby !). 


P. Debyi Leud.-Fort., Diat. Ceyl., p. 64, pl. viii. fig. 75. 


Circular, diam. 0'125 mm. Surface sloping gently between the 
processes to the border. Markings rounded, granular, about 4 in 0°01 
mm.; rows straight, radial, secondary indistinct concentric rows most 
evident towards the centre; interspaces hyaline; indistinct short 
radiating lines around the border, extending from about outer 2/5 of 
radius, striae converging to the processes distant, short, straight or 
slightly curved; apiculi round, widely placed, irregular, forming a 
single band near the border. Processes 3, irregularly elliptical or 
more rounded, about 0°01 mm. broad. 

Habitat: Ceylon (Leuduger-Fortmorel). 


P. peruvianus.—Auliscus peruvianus Grey., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 
1862, p. 25, pl. 11. fig. 6. 


Subcircular, elliptical or obtusely triangular, diam. 0°055 to 0°21 
mm., major axis sometimes 1? times minor. Surface flat at centre, 
sloping gently to the border, and rising gradually to the processes. 
Colour pale grey. Markings polygonal, 5 in 0°01 mm., irregular at 
the centre, elsewhere in straight radial fasciculate rows, those con- 
verging to the processes almost straight in their central, but sharply 
curved in their outer portion; apiculi sometimes present, but incon- 
spicuous. Border distinct, from 1/20 to 1/40 of radius broad, striz 
10 to 12 in 0°01 mm., and at subregular intervals more evident 
radial lines. Processes 2, rarely 1, 3, or 4, elliptical, in small valves 


* In the Collection of Dr. R. K, Greville. 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Hhrb., de. By J. Rattray. 908 


often circular.—Auliscus radiatus Jan. (not Ehrb.) Abh. Schl. Ges. 
vater. Cult., 1861, p. 162, pl. i. fig. 6. Hupodiscus? Peruvianus 
Kitton in Prich. Inf., p. 938. 

This is not Hupodiscus radiatus W. Sm. (Syn. Brit. Diat., i. 
p. 24, pl. xxx. fig. 255) as Janisch has stated with some hesitation, 
Smith’s species being a Biddulphia with a variety of synonyms (see 
p- 915). Auliscus peruvianus var. (?) ovalis Grun. forma quadri- 
ocellata, in Weissflog’s collections, is typical. 

Habitat: Peruvian guano (Kitton! Macrae! Weissflog! Greville! 
Rae!*); Patos Island guano (Johnson!); Santa Marta deposit 
(Weissflog! Deby!); Colon, (Deby! Hardman!); Port Seguro, 
intestine of turtle (Hardman!) ; Holothurians, California (Kinker !) ; 
loc. ? (Griffin !). 

Var. tenera nov.—Circular, diam. from 0°05 to0°065 mm. Surface 
with slope at border less evident. Markings more delicate, 8 to 10 in 
0:01 mm., those around the roundly elliptical central area more pro- 
minent; the rows radial, non-fasciculate, those converging to the 
processes less obvious. Processes 2, round or elliptical, 0-0075 mm. 
broad. 

Habitat: Foreign Ascidia, locality unknown (Firth!). 

Var. spinosa Kitton MS.—Roundly elliptical, major axis 
0-135 mm., about 1'; times minor. Surface rising somewhat steeply 
to the processes. Central area elliptical, distinctly defined, with major 
axis almost in line of processes. Markings: apiculi numerous, large, 
rare, on a narrow band within the border, most distinct in a circle 
around the border. Processes 2, relatively small, circular, 0°0075 mm. 
broad. 

Kitton is of opinion that this var. might be united to the genus 
Biddulphia. 

Habitat: Rio Janeiro (Kitton !). 


P. ralfsianus—Auliscus ralfsianus Grev., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 
1868, p. 52, pl. ii. fig. 21. 


Roundly elliptical, major axis from 0-1125 to 0°2 mm., about 14 
times minor, or circular and smaller, 0:06 mm. diam. Surface highest 
on a median oval area extending between the processes, and about 1/2 
of minor axis broad, with outer edge indistinct, sometimes on this area 
a depression about half of distance of process from centre, slope to the 
border gentle. Markings round, granular, 4 in 0°01 mm., rows 
straight, radial, those converging to each process manifest ; a reticulum 
of large irregular polygonal meshes, distinct, but sometimes evanescent 
towards the central side of the processes, the meshes subequal or 
slightly smaller on the depressed portions of the median area. Border 
with almost regular radial sharp lines, inner edge finely and irregularly 
undulate. Processes 2, elliptical, large, 0°0175 to 0°025 mm. broad. 
—Cerataulus pacificus Grun., Sch. Atl, pl. exy. fig. 10. Hupodiseus 


* Tn the Collection of Dr. Griffin. ‘t In the Collection of Mr, Julien Deby. 


904 Transactions of the Society. 


barbadensis Grev., ibid., 1864, p. 88, pl. xii. fig 4. Auliseus cellulatus 
Grey., MS. in Coll. 

Habitat : Nottingham, Maryland (Johnson! Griffin !) ; Cambridge 
deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson! Hardman!) Bridgewater deposit, 
Barbadoes (Johnson!) ; Rio Janeiro (Hardman!) ; Colon and Calvert 
County, Maryland (Kitton) ; Galapagos Islands (Cleve). 


P. spinosus.—Auliseus spinosus F, Christian, Sch. Atl., pl. exxy. 
fig. 2 


Circular, diam. 0°0925 to 0°145 mm. Surface rising gradually 
from the centre for about 2/3 of radius to the highest zone, the latter 
sharply defined on inner, less distinctly on outer side, about 0°0075 
mm. broad, slope to the border gentle. Colour pale grey. Markings 
minute, polygonal, 10 to 12 in 0°01 mm., without interspaces, rows 
radial, secondary, indistinct, concentric rows visible on the highest 
zone, striz converging to the processes short, distant, well marked ; 
apiculi minute, irregularly scattered on the highest zone, a faint 
irregular reticulum on the outer portion of the depressed central area, 
and irregular short radial lines on the slope around the border. 
Processes 2, round, 0°0125 to 0:0175 mm. broad, close to border.— 
Auliscus Febigerii Cleve MS. 

Grunow and Schmidt justly regard this species as hardly referable 
to Auliscus, but haye not proposed its union to another genus. 

Habitat : Nottingham deposit at West River (Febiger !* Deby !) ; 
Cambridge deposit, Maryland (Deby !). 


P. ornatus. Auliscus ornatus Grey., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1864, 
p. 88, pl. xii. fig. 2. 


Subcircular, diam. 0°0575 mm. Surface flat. Colour pale smoky 
grey at centre, towards border hyaline. Markings minute, punctate, 
irregularly disposed, largest towards the centre, near the border faint, 
short faint striz visible at the edge of the processes. Processes 5, 
circular, about 0°01 mm. broad, their circumference with minute 
irregularities. 

Habitat: Cambridge deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson!); Barbadoes 
(Cleve !). 


P. nebulosus Rattr. (not Leud.-Fort.).t—Auliseus nebulosus Grey., 
Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 74, pl. v. fig. 21. 


Circular, diam. 0°0875 mm. Surface rising slightly to the 
processes. Colour pale grey to hyaline. Markings delicate striae, 
those converging to the processes meeting at the centre, and at the 
middle of the space intervening between the processes, least distinct 
towards the centre; apiculi few, irregular, chiefly between the 


* In the Collection of Herr E. Weissflog. 
+ The name nebulosus has been used by Leuduger-Fortmorel for a different form, 
which more properly belongs to Lupodiscus (see p. 912), 


_ A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., dc. By J. Rattray. 905 


processes and around the border. Processes 4, subcireular, about 
0-0175 mm. broad, their circumference with minute irregularities, the 
central portion distinctly punctate. 

Habitat: Cambridge deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson!); Cebu, 
Philippine Islands (Cleve!) ; Labuan (Cleve !). 


P. johnsonianus.—A. johnsonianus Grev., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 
1863, p. 51, pl. i. fig. 20. 


Subcircular, diam. 0:0775 mm. Surface with low mammillations 
beneath the processes, the space between these sloping gently to the 
border. Colour pale smoky grey. Markings minute, punctate, 
irregular at the centre, about half-way between the centre and the 
processes in oblique irregular short lines, on the mammillations in 
sets of radial slightly curved striz, and on the middle of the inter- 
vening space in radial finely flexuous rows, more faint towards the 
border. Processes 4, symmetrical, circular, about 0:0075 mm. broad, 
their border with distinct radial strie. 

Habitat: Cambridge deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson! Greville !). 

Var. eludens.—Diam. 0°065to0°07 mm. Surface with diamond- 
shaped central area well defined, no mammillations beneath the pro- - 
cesses. Colour almost hyaline. Markings on central area more 
delicate obscure puncta, striz converging to the processes faint. 
Processes 4, with narrow non-striated border. 


Habitat: Springfield deposit, Barbadoes (Doeg !). 


P. elaboratus.—Auliscus elaboratus Ralfs, Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 
1868, p. 51, pl. ii. fig. 19. 


Circular, diam. 0°075 to 0°125 mm. Surface flat on central 
area, rising somewhat towards each process. Colour pale smoky grey. 
Central area indistinct, triangular, its sides concave between the inner 
ends of the curved striz. Markings punctate on the central area, 
largest at its centre, delicate non-flexuous strice curving from the 
outer edges of this area to the zone around the processes; this zone 
with its outer edge rounded, about 0:01 mm. broad, bearing delicate 
closely-placed irregular puncta or faint striz, which converge around 
~ the processes, at its inner edge faint radial flexuous strie, diverging 
towards the border, at the middle of the area between the adjoining 
processes. Processes 3, circular, about 0-015 mm. broad, the border of 
each faintly striated. 

Habitat: Cambridge deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson !) ; Bridgewater 
deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson!) ; “ Barbadoes” (Greville! Cleve!) ; 
Chalky Mount, Barbadoes (Firth !). 


P. trigemmis.—Auliscus trigemmis Sch. Atl., pl. exxv. fig. 16. 


Circular, diam. 0°1075 mm. Surface flat, slightly convex at border. 
Colour pale smoky grey. Markings punctiform, scabrous, closely 
placed but without order. Border broad, sharply defined, hyaline. 
Processes 3, symmetrical, circular, about 0°025 mm. broad, their 


906 Transactions of the Society. 


central portion with numerous evident radial subpruinose striz, some- 
times fasiculate, and meeting at their centre or leaving an elongate 
narrow hyaline space, their border narrow, hyaline, their circumference 


smooth. : ee. 
Habitat: Sysran deposit (Grove!) ; “Simbirsk ” (Thum). 


P. pulvinatus Cleve, Journ. Quek. Mic. Cl., 1885, p. 171, pl. xii. fig. 9. 


Subeircular or circular, diam. from 0°0675 to 0°125 mm. Sur- 
face rising slightly from the centre for 1/4 to 3/5 of radius to the 
highest zone, this zone from 1/3 to 1/12 of radius broad, with shallow 
median depression, its edges indistinctly defined, sometimes passing 
on the outer side of the processes, slope to the border gentle. Colour 
pale smoky grey, darker around the edges of the highest zone. 
Markings minute, punctate, in indistinct irregular radial lines, those 
converging to the processes short, a series of faint, frequently ana- 
stomosing, hyaline lines sometimes present, most evident about the 
highest zone; apiculi few, near the border and about midway between 
the processes, sometimes absent. Processes 2 or 3, rounded, from 
0:0025 to 0:0075 mm. broad, their circumference sometimes rough. 
—Pant. Fossil. Bacil. Ung., p. 56, pl. xix. figs. 174, 175, 177. 
A, pulvinatus var. ? Grun. in Sch. Atl. pl. exxy. fig. 17. 

In small valves the elevated zone is sometimes indistinct. Pantoc- 
sek has distinguished.as forma appiculata and forma inermis specimens 
with and without the marginal apiculi respectively. Specimens of the 
latter with three processes he has named forma inermus triocellata. 

Habitat: Kékk6 deposit (Pantocsek! Kinker! Weissflog!) ; Szent 
Peter, Szakal, and Felso-Estergaly deposit (Pantocsek!); Sysran 
deposit (Thum !*) ; Mihren deposit, Austria (I’hum !*). 


P. Petiti Leud.-Fort. Diat. Ceyl., p. 64, pl. viii. fig. 76. 


Circular, diam. 0°0875 to 0°1225 mm. Surface flat from centre 
to about semiradius, thence sloping gently to the border. Colour 
pale yellowish grey, darker about the semiradius. Markings, delicate, 
minute areole; rows straight, radial ; secondary oblique decussating 
rows distinct ; apiculi close to the border, distant, usually from 3 to7, 
occurring between each process. Border opaque, sharply defined on 
its inner edge, narrow. Processes 3, irregularly and transversely 
elliptical, about 0°0075 mm. broad.—Eupodiscus obscwrus Grev., 
Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1862, p. 90, pl. ix. fig. 4. 

Habitat: Ceylon (Leuduger-Fortmorel, Kitton! Macrae!) ; Cape 
of Good Hope (Macrae !). 


P. letonensis Janisch, Sch. Atl. pl. xvi. fig. 14. 


Circular, diam. 0°035 mm. Surface convex. Markings, delicate 
areole, 6 to 8 in 0:01 mm., rows straight, radial; secondary oblique 
decussating rows evident, striz converging to the prccesses absent. 


* In the Collection of Mr. Julien Deby. 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &c. By J. Rattray. 907 


Processes 2, round, about 0:0015 mm. broad, but little elevated above 
the level of the adjoining surface. 
Habitat: Leton Bank (Janisch). 


P. anceps sp. n. 


Subcireular, diam. 0°0825 mm. Surface subplain, rising some- 
what at the processes, sometimes a cleirer area, much more convex, 
and reaching closer to the border on one side than on the other, ex- 
tending between the processes. Markings subpruinose, irregularly but 
inconspicuously and closely disposed radial striz, those converging to 
the processes short, more distinct ; apiculi numerous, minute, irregular, 
most crowded on the outer half of the valve, absent towards the centre. 
Processes 2, circular, about 0°0125 mm. broad, their border narrow, 
the circumference smooth.—Pl. XY. fig. 4.—Auliseus Grovei Cleve 
MS. in Coll. 

Habitat: Oamaru deposit (Grove! Cleve!). 


P. diffusus sp.n. Sch. Atl., pl. exxv. fig. 10 (without name). 


Circular, diam. from 0°075 to 0:1125 mm. Surface subplain, 
processes low. Colour pale smoky grey. Markings minute, punctate, 
closely disposed, irregular or in faint radial or oblique rows; apiculi 
numerous, most crowded towards the border, absent from a central 
circular area, about 0°0175 mm. broad. Processes 2, oval, with the 
narrower end directed towards the centre, sometimes more nearly 
circular, about 0°02 mm. broad, their border with distinct radial 
punctate striz, their circumference rough.—Auliseus punctatus var. ? 
or n. sp. ? Cleve MS. in Cell. 

I have not observed the small central space shown in Schmidt’s 
figure. 

° Habitat: Oamaru deposit (Grove! Hardman! Cleve !). 


P. rotatus sp. n. 


Circular, diam. 0°075 mm. Surface subplain, the central area 
clear, pentagonal, with sides deeply concave outwards, and angles 
obtuse, extending outwards to processes. Colour pale grey. Markings 
minute, punctate, obscure, least evident on the central area, without 
order, striz converging to processes absent, non-apiculate. Pro- 
cesses 5, symmetrical, circular, 0°01 mm. broad, their border narrow. 
—PI. XVI. fig. 7. 

Habitat: Chalky Mount, Barbadoes (Firth !). 


ArRtIFIcIAL Kay, 


1. Processes 3, large, circular, their central portion with evident 
radial strie extending to their border .. .. .. .. .. trigemmis 
INO GON FOMOCERSE "Ge. feo. ot Poo Ye bbe ge ge SoBe 
2. Highest zone distinct, sharply defined on inner side and apicu- 
late; markings minute, granular, in secondary concentric 
rows on the highest zone .. .. .. «1 «» «» «» «»  spinosus 


908 Transactions of the Society. 


Highest zone indistinctly defined; markings punctate in radial 


TOWS ONLY «4, «0 ss ss @s e. oe pe ‘oe tes Oe OHNDINOLUE 
INO "such ZONG.s. as) as, Wee ays) Seaeroe ee: Gest eee 
8, Border sharply defined G2 52." 40 ssee an os we epee 4 
ss. ANCONEPICUOUS!= Se yen ss dee es ae ee eee 5 
4. Markings minute, areolate, in radial and oblique rows ; apiculi 
3 to 7 between adjoining processes, prominent .. Petiti 
= granular, increasing towards the border, non-fascicu- 
late. Border striated ... .. .. .. « «. *radiatus 
Fe areolate, rows fasciculate, the converging rows sharply 


curved near the processes ae anne aac 
5. Surface convex. Processes minute. Markings delicate, areolate, 
in radial and oblique decussating rows. Processes 2 letonensis 


peruvianus 


»  almostflat. Processeslarge... <2 <2 +. as ~ s« 6 
» With a cuneate inflation tapering inwards from each of 
the 4 processes. Markings areolate, 4 in 0°01 mm., 
most evident on the inflations .. .. .. .. ..  tetraiiphthalmus 
6. Markings areolate, 4in 0°01, non-apiculate .. .. .. .. ambiguus 
- . 8 in 0°01 mm., rows visible only at pro- 
cesses, apiculi prominent.. .. .. .. «. «. hirsutus 
5 Caine as AS cr BG. Are, cee cd. ie | ce 7 
- more minute, punctate, or forming delicate strie .. 8 


7. Rows radial, stris converging to processes short, a circlet of 
distinct apiculi at border; no reticulum.. .,  Debyi 


5 » alargemeshedreticulum .. .. .. .. .. vralfsianus 
» Short, radial, indistinct near border, elsewhere markings 
irregular .. .. notatus 


8. A zone round each process punctate, outside of this zone short 

curved striz, centre punctate .. .. o.  -- .«. .. eélaboratus 
ING'SUCH/ZONC) Non elias Slices metic ctmetes aos atc umes ee 
9. Markings punctate, irregular at centre, in faint oblique lines 
near processes ; low mammillations beneath the 


processes. Processes 4 .. johnsonianus 


Ps striate in subregular order. Valve apiculate... .. 10 
ue punctate, without order. Valve non-apiculate .. 11 
10. Apiculi evident, absent from a small central area. Processes 2. 
Markingsin radialrows .. .. .. «.. =» =. G@iffusus 
a minute, but numerous. Markings subpruinose in 
conspicuous close radial strise, those converging to 
the processes short, more evident .. .. anceps 


BS faint, chiefly near border. The four sets of con- 
verging striz meeting at centre and at middle of 
space between adjoining processes... .. .. .. nebulosus 

11. Markings largest at centre. Processes5 .. .. .. « «. ornatus 
A pentagonal clear central area with sides concave and angles 
reaching: the processes) | ay )se) ssl lacll Uses )ae) 6s loses OLatuS 


MONOPSIA Grove & Sturt. 
Monopsia Grove & Sturt, Journ. Quek. Mic. Cl., 1887, p. 141. 


Valves circular. Surface rising gradually towards the process. 
Colour pale yellowish grey. Central space absent. Markings, delicate 
closely-placed strize radiating from the edge of the process to the 
border, but less evident on a narrow distinct band contiguous to the 
border, minute scattered apiculi irregularly disposed, or most abundant 
near the inner edge of the marginal band. Process single, eccentric, 
circular, with a single band of distinct elliptical granules, having the 
long axes radial about its semiradius, the outer portion finely striated, 
the free end almost flat. 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &e. By J. Rattray. 909 


M. mammosa Grove & Sturt, Journ. Quek. Mic. Cl., 1887, p. 142, 
pl. xiii. fig. 38. 


Diam. from 0°07 to 0:1325 mm. Colour sometimes pink near 
the process. Markings striate, strie 8 in 0°01 mm., sometimes 
scabrous, the marginal band about 6:01 mm. broad, its inner edge 
irregular. Process from 0°0125 to 0°0275 mm. broad.—Sch. Atl, 
pl. exxv. figs. 14, 15. 

Habitat: Oamaru deposit (Grove! Rae! &.). 


DEBYA gen. n. 


Valves circular. Surface flat on central portion, slope to border 
distinct. Colour pale smoky grey. Markings minute, punctate, in 
radial lines, a reticulum sometimes present. Processes minute, 3 to 
15, rounded or elliptical, between each adjoining pair 1 or 2 small 
apiculi.imGlyphodiscus pro parte Grove & Sturt, Journ. Quek. Mic. 
Cl., 1887, p. 10. Grun. in Sch. Atl, pl. cxxv. Hupodiscus pro parte 
Grun., Bot. Centralbl, Bd. xxxi. No. 5, 1887, p. 183. Sch. Atl, 
pi lxxx. 


D. oamaruensis—Eupodiscus oamaruensis Grun., Bot. Centralbl., 
Bd. xxxi. No. 5, 1887, p. 133. 


Diam. 0°06 to 0:095 mm. Surface almost flat from centre for 
about 5/18 of radius, slope to border steep. Colour most opaque around 
the flat central portion. Markings in faint radial lines; a reticulum 
sometimes distinct, with meshes 34 to 4 in 0:01 mm., diminishing some- 
what towards the border. Processes distinct, 0°0035 mm. broad. Height 
of centre above edge of girdle 0:025 mm.—Glyphodiscus scintillans 
Grove & Sturt, Journ. Quek. Mic. Cl., 1887, p. 10. Hupodiscus 
simbirskianus Grun., Bot. Centralbl., Bd. xxxi. No. 5, 1887, p. 188. 
Sch. Atl, pl. lxxx. fig. 8. Glyphodiscus(?) simbirskianus Grun. in 
Sch. Atl, pl. exxv. figs. 18 a-c, 19. G.(?) oamaruensis Grun. in 
Sch. Atl., pl. cxxv. fig. 20. 

Habitat: Sysran deposit, Simbirsk (Deby !); Oamaru deposit 
(Grove! Hardman !). 


EUPODISCUS Ehrb. emend. 
Evpopiscus Ehrb. emend., Mon. Ber. Ak, 1844, p. 73. 


Circular. Surface fiat or slightly convex, the centre sometimes 
slightly depressed. Colour pale to dark grey. Central space and 
rosette absent. Markings areolate, subequal or decreasing from the 
centre outwards, rarely smallest at the centre ; rows radial, straight 
or curved, sometimes fasciculate or subradial, concentric, or without 
order; oblique decussating rows sometimes manifest, a distinct band 
surrounding each process rare; apiculi few or more numerous, and 
forming a circlet close to the border. Border narrow and hyaline, or 
with delicate strize, and sometimes broad and more prominent, with 

1888. 3 Q 


910 Transactions of the Society. 


evident striw. Processes 1 to 4, circular or roundly elliptical, with 
major axis radial or at right angles to the radius, sometimes small, 
inserted close to or a short distance within the border.—Aulacodiscus 
Brightw. pro parte, Quart. Journ. Mic. Sci., 1860, p. 95. 


§ 1. Humes. 


Markings in radial, sometimes concentric or oblique rows or 
without order. Border simple. 


E. trioculatus Grey., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1864, p. 88, pl. xii. 
fig. 3; Van Heurck, Syn. Diat. Belg., pl. cxvin. fig. 8. 


Diam. from 0°0525 to 0°0825 mm. Surface almost flat. Colour 
pale grey. Markings delicate unequal areole, about 24 to 3 in 
0-01 mm., disposed without order, an indistinct band surrounding 
each process. Border indistinct. Processes 3, circular, about 
0-01 mm. broad, insertion near border. 

Habitat: Cambridge deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson! *). 


E. oculatus Grev., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1862, p. 90, pl. ix. fig. 3. 


Diam. from 0°05 to 0°15 mm. Surface flat or slightly depressed 
at centre, with the highest zone indistinctly defined, extending 
between the processes and sloping gently outwards to border. Colour 
dark grey. Markings irregular polygonal areole, about 3} to 4 in 
0-01 mm., largest at the centre, decreasing gradually towards the 
border, somewhat pearly, strongly marked, disposed without order within 
zone of processes, and in faint, oblique, curved, decussating rows near 
the border; short delicate radial strie, 8 to 10 in 0 01 mm. around 
inner edge of border. Border distinct, from 1/10 to 1/15 of radius broad, 
its inner wider portion hyaline, the outer with a single band of closely 
disposed granules. Processes 2, subcircular or radially elliptical, from 
0-01 to 0:015 mm. broad, insertion about 2/3 of radius from centre. 

Habitat: Monterey Stone (Johnson! Kitton! Griffin!); Santa 
Monica deposit (Kitton! Nae!7 Griffin !); ‘ Monterey ” (Hardman !) ; 
Los Angelos (Hardman !). 


E. simplex Grey., Trans. Mic. Soe. Lond., 1863, p. 73, pl. iv. fig. 20. 


Diam. from 0 075 to 0°17 mm. Surface flat. Markings sub- 
equal, hexagonal areole 4 in 0°01 mm., without a central dot, dis- 
posed in straight or slightly curved oblique decussating rows, no 
distinct band around processes or border; apiculi numerous, pro- 
minent, somewhat irregular, forming a single band close to the border. 
Border narrow, hyaline. Processes 2, subcircular or roundly oval 
with long axis subradial, from 0:0125 to 0:0175 mm. broad. 

Habitat: Cambridge deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson!); “ Bar- 
badoes” (Greville !). 

* In the Collection of Dr. Greville. 
+ In the Collection of Dr. John Murray, Edinburgh. 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &e. By J. Rattray. 911 


E. inconspicwus sp. n. 


Diam. 0°055 mm. Surface flat. Colour pale grey. Markings 
hexagonal areole, 4 in 0°01 mm., subequal or somewhat smaller 
around the border, without order. Border narrow, hyaline. Processes 
4, symmetrical, minute; subcircular, about 0:0025 mm. broad, placed 
upon the outermost band of areole. 

This species has sometimes been united to H. radiatus to which 
it shows no close affinity. 

Habitat: Cove, Calvert County, Maryland (Greville!). 


E. minutus Grey., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1866, p. 5, pl. i. fig. 13. 


Diam. 0°05 mm. Surface slightly convex. Markings obscure, 
areolate, 5 in 0°01 mm., subequal to border, without order. Border 
narrow, hyaline. Processes 4, about 1/4 of radius from circumference, 
ceircular,* 0-005 mm. broad, provided with a prominent lip on their 
peripheral side. 

Greville expresses doubt as to the position of this species, and 
notes that the processes are somewhat similar to those of Craspedo- 
porus. The structure is, however, quite eupodiscoid. 

Habitat: Springfield deposit, Barbadoes (Hardman {). 


E. californicus Grun., Van Heurck, Syn. Diat. Belg., pl. cxvui. fig. 8. 


. Diam. 0°0475 to 0°075 mm. Surface almost flat. Colour pale 
grey. Markings, delicate polygonal areolz without a distinct rounded 
central granule, irregular but largest about the centre, and decreasing 
gradually towards the border, 6 to 8 in 0:01 mm., arranged to form 
an evident band round each process, elsewhere in straight, radial, 
non-fasciculate rows; apiculi 3, distinct, equidistant from the 
processes, but closer to the border, sometimes a few other smaller 
apiculi also near the border. Border distinct, about 1/10 to 1/14 of 
radius broad, strize at its inner edge delicate, 8 in 0°01 mm., those on 
the outer edge shorter, about 6 in 0°01 mm., intermediate portion 
hyaline. Processes 3, circular, about ()°-003 mm. broad, insertion 
from 3/4 to 4/5 of radius from border. 

Habitat: Gulf of California (Hardman! Van MHeurck); 
“ California” (Cole !tf). 


EE. decrescens sp. n. 


Diam. 0°04 to 0°0625 mm. Surface slightly convex. Colour 
pale to dark grey. Markings hexagonal, areole largest at centre and 
decreasing uniformly towards the border, from 3 to 6 in 0:01 mm., 
forming oblique, slightly curved, decussating, non-fasciculate rows; 


* In the figure the processes are shown as transversely elliptical. 
+ I am informed by Mr. Hardman that the original of the species is lost, the 
slide on which it was mounted haying been broken in the Post Ofiice. 
t In the Collection of Mr. F’. Kitton. 
3 gat, 


912 Transactions of the Society. 


a distinct apiculus close to border on each side of the valve and equi- 
distant from the processes. Border hyaline, narrow. Processes 2, 
close to the border, about 0-003 mm. broad, but high, with truncated 
ends, and directed obliquely outwards.—PI. XIV. fig. 9. 

Habitat: Kannahack, Cannibal Islands (Greville !). 


E. nebulosus.—P. nebulosus Leud-Fort., Diat. Ceyl., 1879, p. 64, 
pl. vii. fig. 74. 


Diam. 0°12 mm. Surface slightly convex towards the border. 
Markings minute, areolate, (8 ?) in 0-01 mm., radial rows obscure, the 
oblique decussating rows straight, evident ; apiculi many, prominent, 
forming a distinct circlet close to the border, inserted at subregular 
intervals. Processes 3, symmetrical, elliptical, with major axis at 
right angles to corresponding radius, low. 

The appearance of the markings and processes seems to me to ally 
this valve to Eupodiscus rather than to Pseudauliseus, 

Habitat: Ceylon (Leuduger-Fortmorel). 


E. parvulus Grey. MS. in Herb. Brit. Mus. 


Diam. 0°0525 to 0'0875 mm. Surface with central portion flat, 
the slope to the border gentle. Colour pale grey to subhyaline. 
Markings areolate, towards the centre 5 to 6, decreasing gradually 
towards the border to 8, in 0°01 mm., without order at the centre, 
elsewhere in uniformly curved, radial, subfasciculate, decussating rows. 
Border narrow, hyaline, or with faint striez, 8 in 0°01 mm. _ Processes 
1 or 2, subeircular or subregularly elliptical, 0°0025 to 0-003 mm. 
broad, placed close to the border, sometimes more prominent on the 
peripheral side.—P1. XIV. fig. 8. 

Some specimens labelled H. punctulatus by Greville agree with 
several others which he named EL. parvulus. 

Habitat: “ Barbadoes” (Johnson! Greville!) ; Cambridge deposit, 
Barbadoes (Johnson !). 

Var. concentrica.—Diam. (?). Markings subequal from the centre 
to about semiradius, beyond this decreasing somewhat rapidly out- 
wards, becoming punctiform near the border; on the central portion 
irregular, beyond this in evident concentric regular bands. Processes 2, 
prominent, but small.—PI. XIV. fig. 7. 

This var. is established on an unpublished drawing by Greville, 
now in the British Museum. It is distinguished from H. punctulatus 
by the concentric arrangement of the markings beyond the semiradius. 
I have found no specimens in Greville’s collection corresponding to 
the drawing, which he left unnamed. 

Habitat : Loc. ? (Greville). 


E. punctulatus Grey., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 73, pl. v. 
fig. 19. 


Diam. 0°08 mm. Surface slightly convex. Colour pale grey. 
Markings punctate, smallest at the centre, soon becoming somewhat 


A Revision of the Genus Auliseus Ehrb., &c. By J. Rattray. 9138 


larger and subequal to the border; irregular at the centre, beyond 
this in evident, regular, concentric bands. Border narrow, hyaline. 
Processes 4, roundly elliptical, placed close to the border, about 
0°0075 mm. broad. 

Habitat : Cambridge deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson). 


§ 2. Nopizes. 


Markings fasciculate, evident. Border prominent. 


H. radiatus * Bail. Smiths. Contrib., 1851, Art. 8, p. 39. 


Diam. from 0°045 to 0'1175 mm. Surface flat, slope at border 
gentle. Markings hexagonal areole, 4 in 0°01 mm., subequal, in 
subradial, almost straight rows arranged in fasciculi, a single distinct 
band of smaller areole around the processes, and of larger somewhat 
unequal ones around the border. order narrow, striz delicate, 14 
to 16 in 0-01 mm. Processes 4, central portion hyaline, rounded, 
about 0°0075 mm. broad.—Aulacodiscus radiatus Brightw., Quart. 
Journ. Mie. Sci., 1860, p. 95, pl. v. figs. 10a, 10b (not Aulacodiscus 
radiatus Grey., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1864, p. 11, pl. i. fig. 4) ; 
Ralfs in Pritch. Inf., p. 843; H. L. Smith, Diat. Spec. Typ., No. 164 ; 
Van Heurck, Typ. Syn. Diat. Belg., No. 509. 

Ralfs states that the processes may be more than 4, as formerly 
doubtfully asserted by Bailey. I have only seen specimens with 4. 

Habitat : Soundings, South Atlantic, 2835 fathoms (H. L. Smith!) ; 
South America (Van Heurck!); rice-fields, Georgia (Norman !) ; 
sand from Kamortha, Nicobar Islands (Frauenfeld); shell cleanings 
(Doeg! +); Colon (Hardman !). 

Var. humulis—— Diam. 0°045 mm. Surface slightly convex between 
the processes. Markings sometimes forming fasciculi only between the 
centre and the processes, the rows in the fasciculi converging to the 
processes, elsewhere the secondary oblique rows more evident; no 
distinct band around the processes or border; apiculi 2, inserted near 
the border, long, narrow, and equidistant, on opposite sides of the 
valve from the processes. Processes 2, conical, with obtuse free ends. 


Habitat: River Orwell (W. Smith !) ;, Medway (Dallas !). 


E. hardmamianus Grey., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1866, p. 80, 
pl. vi. fig. 14. 


Circular, rarely irregularly oval, diam. from 0°0925 to 0°16 mm. 
Surface flat or slightly convex at the centre, the outer half flat. 
Colour pale grey. Markings hexagonal areola, subequal, 4 in 
0-01 mm., irregular, on a small central area outside of this in straight 
or substraight, subradial, fasciculate rows. Border broad, somewhat 
elevated, its inner edge irregular, with remote, irregular, coarse radial 
strie and delicate intervening strie, 8 in 0°01 mm. Procexses 4, 


* Not Z. radiatus W. Sm., see p. 915. + In the Collection of Dr. Griffin. 


914 Transactions of the Society. 


rarely unsymmetrical, inserted close to border, circular, or transversely 
elliptical, hyaline, about 0°005 mm. broad. 

This species, founded on Hardman’s South American valves, is not 
to be separated from the specimens in the collections of Greville and 
Hardman labelled EH. marginatus. 

Habitat: Bridgewater deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson!) ; Cambridge 
deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson! Greville!); Colon (Hardman! Kitton !); 
shell cleanings, South America (Hardman); Gulf of California 
(Hardman !), 


SPECIES EXCLUSH VEL INQUIRENDZ. 


E. americanus Ehrb. (fide Ralfs in Pritch. Inf, p. 843). £. 
germanicus Ehrb, (Mon. Ber. Ak., 1844, p. 81). EH. quaternarius 
Ehrb. (ibid. 1844, p. 81). HE. quinarius Whrb. (ibid. 1844, p. 81). 
E. monstruosus Ehrb. (ibid. 1884, p. 81), and E. argus W. Sm. (Syn. 
Brit. Diat.,i. p. 24) are Aulacodiscus argus (Rattray, Journ. Roy. Mie. 
Soe. Lond., 1888, pp. 373, 374). 

E. Rogersii Ehrb. (Mon. Ber. Ak., 1844, p. 81), and EH. Bazleyt 
Ehrb. (ibid.) are Aulacodiseus Rogerstt Sch. (Rattray ibid.), 

E. crux Kitz. (Sp. Alg., p. 185) is Aulacodiseus crue Ehrb. 
(Mon. Ber. Ak., 1844, p. 76). 

E. ? tripes Johnson (Amer. Journ. Sci., vol. xiii., 1852, p. 33) is 
said to resemble Coscinodiscus radiatus, but it possesses 3 processes 
similar to those of Hwpodiscus. Specimens so uamed have been 
procured from Chincha guano near the Pacifie Coast. 

E. crassus W. Sm. (Syn. Brit. Diat., i. p. 24, pl. iv. fig. 41) is 
identical with Actinocyclus octonarius Ehrb. (Mon. Ber. Ak., 1837, 
p- 61) which is one of the forms of A. Ehrenbergii Ralfs (Pritch. Inf, 
p- 834). 


E. fulvus W. Sm. (Syn. Brit. Diat.,i. p. 24, pl. iv. fig. 40), belongs 


to Actinocyclus (see p. 897). 

E. sculptus W. Sm. (Syn. Brit. Diat., i. p. 25, pl. iv. fig. 42) is 
Auliseus sculptus Ralfs (see p. 884). 

E. tenellus de Bréb. (Mém. Soc. Imp. d. Sei. Nat. Cherb., 1854, 
p. 257, fig. 9) belongs to Actinocyclus. The pseudonodule near the 
border is evident, and the structure otherwise is actinocycloid. De 
Brébisson united the specimen with some doubt to Eupodiscus, and 
Donkin, though endorsing the same doubt, did not remove it from 
Eupodiscus (Quart. Journ. Mic. Sci., 1861, p. 7). 

E. crucifer Shadb. (Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1854, p. 16, pl..1. 
fig. 12) and #. Petersii Kitz. (Sp. Alg., p. 185) are Aulacodiscus 
Petersii (Rattray, ibid., 1888, p. 366). 

E. falfsii W. Sm.* (Syn. Brit. Diat., ii. p. 86) is Actinocyelus 
Ralfsti (Ralfs in Pritch. Inf., p. 835). H. sparsus Greg. (Trans. Mie. 


* Prof. W. Smith was induced to separate his Hupodiscus Ralfsii, BE. fulvus, and 
E. crassus from Actinocyclus as he limited the latter genus to frustules possessing 
undulate valves. He however recognized the presence of the pseudonodule which is 
a structural feature more significant tlian mere form of surface, and also a better guide 
to natural relationship. 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Hhrb., dc. By J. Rattray. 915 


Soe. Lond., 1857, p. 81, pl. i. fig. 47) is Actinocyclus Ralfsi B 
sparsus Greg. (Ralfs in Pritch. Inf, p. 835). 

Li. tesselatus Roper (Quart. Journ. Mic. Sci., 1858, p. 19, pl. 1. 
figs. la, 6) is Roperia tesselata Grun. (see p. 917). 

.? Grevillec Ralfs (Pritch. Inf, p.938). Ralfs only supplies the 
following characters: Markings obscure, punctate, spines arranged ina 
circlet between the processes and the centre, systephanioid. Primary 
rays absent. Processes 3, clavate, aulacodiscoid.—Habitat : Monterey. 
This unfigured species probably belonged to Awlacodiscus. 

E. ovalis Norman (Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1861, p. 8, pl. 11. fig. 6) 
is Actinocyclus ovalis (Van Heurck, Syn. Diat. Belg., pl. exxiv. fig. 11). 

E.? peruvianus Kitton (Pritch. Inf, p. 938) 1s Pseudauliseus 
peruvianus, (see p. 903). 

Ei. obscurus Grey. (Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1862, p. 90, pl. ix. 
fig. 4), is Pseudauliscus Petiti (see p. 906). 

E. minutus Hantzsch (Raben. Beitr., Heft i, 1863, p. 21, pl. vi. 
fig. 9) is an Actinocyclus. 

E. barbadensis Grey. (Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1864, p. 88, pl. xi. 
fig. 4) is Pseudauliscus ralfsianus (see p. 904). 

H. scaber Grey. (Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1864, p. 81, pl. x. fig. 1) 
is a Cerataulus. 

EH. excentricus O’Me. (Quart. Journ. Mic. Sci., 1867, p. 245, 
pl. vu. fig. 2) is Coscinodiseus excentricus var. hyalina, not Coscino- 
discus minor as stated in the second edition of Habirshaw’s Cat. 
Diat. § Hupodiscus. 

E. gregorianus Breb. (Journ. Quek. Mic. Cl., 1870, p. 41) is 
synonymous with H. subtilis Greg. (Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., 1857, 
p- 501, pl. xi. fig. 50; Raben. Alg. Hurop., No. 2001), and belongs to 
Actinocyclus. EH? subtilis Khrb. (Mon. Ber. Ak., 1855, p. 302) is a 
nomen nudwm. Specimens so designated were procured from 
Simbirsk. 

HL. Roperii de Bréb. (Journ. Quek. Mic. Cl., 1870, p.41; Raben. 
Alg. Europ., No. 2005) is identical with Coscinodiscus ovalis Roper 
(Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1858, p. 21, pl. ui. fig. 4), with Actinocyclus 
ovalis Grun., and A. Roperit (Van Heurck, Syn. Diat. Belg., pl. exxv. 
fig. 5). 

E. velatus Grey. (Mall. Cat., 1874).—The specimen in Mr. Julien 
Deby’s Typenplatte No. 380, 4-38-12, by Moller, is H radiatus W. 
Sm. (Syn. Brit. Diat., 1. p. 24, pl. xxx. fig. 255), and is synonymous 
with Biddulphia radiata W. Sm.—not Roper or Brightw.—(ibid., ii. 
p. 48, pl. lxi. fig. 255), B. hemitropa L. W. Bail. (Boston Journ. 
Nat. Hist., 1862, p. 344, pl. vii. figs. 71-73, Zygoceros hemitropus 
Bail. (ibid.), Cerataulus Smithi Ralfs (Pritch. Inf, p. 847), and 
Odontella Smithii Van Heurck (Syn. Diat. Belg., pl. ev. figs. 1, 2.), 
but not with Auliscus radiatus Janisch (Abh. Schl. Ges. vater. Cult., 
1861, p. 162, pl. i fig. 6; Raben. Beitr., 1863, p. 4, pl. iu. fig. 15) 
as stated in 2nd edition of Habirshaw’s Cat. Diat. § Auwliscus. 

LE. interpunctatus Brightw.—This species is only mentioned by 
Grunow (SB. naturw. Ges. Isis Dresden, 1878, p. 131) in his 


916 Transactions of the Society. 


remarks on Hyalodiseus maximus (Cyelotella maaima Kiitz.). Ac- 
cording to Prof. H. L. Smith, who possesses original specimens, it is 
identical with the latter, an opinion which Grunow is unable to 
adopt. 

77 commutatus Grey. (MOll. Cat., 1883, fide Habirsh. Cat. Diat. 
§ Eupodiscus) has been named by some Coscinodiseus concinnus var. 
commutata ; it may be united with the older EH. jonesianus (Grey. 
Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1862, p. 22, pl. ii. -fig. 3) which is a var. of 
Coscinodiscus eoncinnus. 

E. Weissflogii Grun. (Typ. Syn. Diat. Belg. No. 11) has been 
justly associated to Ewpodiscus with hesitation by Van Heurck who, 
in the explanation of his slide, has provisionally united it to Micro- 
podiscus Grun. ‘To this genus, modified from its original conception, 
it may be united. 

E. punctatus Bail. is an MS. name found in Bailey’s collec- 
tion, but remains a nomen nudum (Habirsh. Cat. Diat., 2nd ed., 
§ Eupodiscus). 

E. Debii Grove & Sturt (Grun. in Bot. Centralbl., Bd. xxxiv. 
Nos. 15-16, p. 38) is Lampriseus (?) Debii Grove & Sturt (Journ. 
Quek. Mic. Cl. 1887, p. 138, pl. x1. fig. 27). To neither of these 
genera is this valve readily assignable, and I regard it as the type of 
a new genus Isodiscus. 

The transition to Biddulphia from Eupodiseus is found in the 
Oamaru Biddulphia lata Grove & Sturt (Journ. Quek. Mic. Cl., 1887, 
p. 135, pl. xiv. fig. 53). 


ARTIFICIAL Key. 


io Markiner delicate... sss san esc pe escent ae ene 2 
os well defined and more evident .. .. .. .. «. 3 
2. Processes 4. Markings punctate, irregular at centre, elsewhere 
in concentric bands .. .. oe oe ewe we we | punctulatus, 


ef 
Markings not in concentric bands ante ® yp Diaconate 
4. Processes 1 or 2. Markings 5 to 6, decreasing gradually out- 
wards to 8 in 0°01 mm.; rows curved, subfas- 
eiculate © 6. a> pa eS ee ae RE face lg 
s 3, circular. Markings unequal, 23 to 3 in 0:01 mm., 
without order, an indistinct band round each 


process, “Sos aes a. Pe ee 
es 4, inserted at one-fourth of radius from cireumfer- 
ence, prominent on their outer edge. Markings 
5 in 0°01 mm., subequal, without order 1. ee minutus, 
3. Apiculate Pee tk A as Oe Re 5 
Non-apiculate 5° 2). Js Ssdc ES Was eel ee 6 
5. Apiculi 3, equidistant from the 3 processes. Markings 6 to 8 
in 0°01 mm., rows radial, a distinct band round 
each process... “S221 4a ose ese se se CCU ONE 
2, equidistant from the 2 processes. Markings largest 
at centre, decreasing rapidly outwards from 3 to 6 
in 0°01 mm., rows oblique, curved, decussating .. decrescens. 
i numerous, forming a distinct cirelet close to border. 
Markings subequal, 4 in 0°01 mm. Processes 2, 
large, oval, with long axis radial simplex. 


7 evident, forming a cirelet close to border. Markings 
equal, in straight, oblique, decussating rows. Pro- 
cesses 3, elliptical, with major axis at right angles 


to radius nebulosus. 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Ehrb., &c. By J. Rattray. 917 


6. Border narrow, hyaline or with faint strice Aree aoc weet Zi 
» broader, more prominent, striz distinct Bint ee mere 8 
7. Processes 4, subcircular, small. Markings 4 in 0:01 mm, 
subequal withoutorder J. <2.) Y<-9 2.) ena 
55 4, larger. Markings hexagonal, 4 in 0°01 mm.; 
rows fasciculate, subradial: a single distinct band 
of smaller areole around the processes, and of 
larger unequal ones around the border -- . radiatus. 
8. Processes 2, large. Markings 33 to 4 in 0:01 mm., withou 
order within the processes, in faint, oblique, curved, 
decussating rows near border. Border with inner 


imconspicuus. 


part hyaline, outer granular .. .. .. .. .. oculatus. 
= 4. Markings subequal, 4; rows fasciculate, sub- 
radial. Border with remote, coarse, and delicate 
intervening siti  .. .; «. + «. « = hardmanianus, 


ROPERIA Grun. 


Roperia Grun., Van Heurck Syn. Diat. Belg. Explan., pl. exviii. 
fig. 6. 


Circular or subcircular. Surface flat at centre, sloping gently 
near border. Colour pale grey. Markings hexagonal, areolate, in 
almost straight decussating rows at centre, subfasciculate towards the 
border. A single small circular hyaline spot close to the border.— 
Eupodiscus pro parte Roper, Quart. Journ. Mic. Sci., 1858, p. 19. 
Actinocyclus pro parte Ralts in Pritch. Inf, p. 835. 


R. tesselata Grun., Van Heurck Syn. Diat. Belg., pl. exviii. figs. 6, 7. 


Diam. from 0°0575 to 0:07 mm. Surface with slope around 
border extending inwards for 1/8 to 1/10 of radius. Markings 6 in 
0-01 mm., decreasing towards the border, the hyaline spot close to 
the border from 0°0025 to 0:003 mm. broad.—Hupodiscus tesselatus 
Roper, Quart. Journ. Mic. Sci., 1858, p. 19, pl. iu. figs. la, 10. 
Actinocyclus tesselatus Ralfs in Pritch. Inf., p. 835. 

This is not Coscinodiscus limbatus Khrb. (Mikrog,, pl. xx. fig. 29) 
nor Coscinodiseus fimbriatus Khrb. (Mikrog., pl. xxi. fig. 2) as stated 
by Roper. 

Habitat: Caldy, Pembrokeshire (Roper!) ; Ascidians, Hull (Gre- 
gory! Greville!) ; off Cape Finisterre, in 2360 fathoms (Greville !) ; 
stomach of Pecten (Grove!) ; ‘ Gazelle’ Expedition (Weissflog !). 


FENESTRELLA Grev. 
Fenestrella Grey., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 67. 


Frustules free, disciform. Surface slightly convex ; a small, semi- 
circular, hyaline area, convex towards the border, on opposite sides of, 
and at equal distances from, the central space, at about 3/5 of radius 
from centre. Colour pale grey. Central space narrow, bent, but 
elongate between the inner ends of the converging rows of areolz. 
Markings hexagonal, areolate, minute around border, in evident rows 
converging from central space to the semicircular hyaline areas, 
elsewhere in fasciculate or radial, less conspicuous rows. 


918 Transactions of the Society. 


F. barbadensis Grey., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 68, pl. iv. 
fig. 8. 

Diam. 0°0875 mm. The semicircular hyaline areas about 
0:005 mm. broad. Colour darker towards the centre. Central space 
00125 mm. long. Markings in the converging rows subequal, 4 in 
0:01 mm., elsewhere decreasing gradually for about 3/5 of radius, 
and then more suddenly to the border. Border narrow, with minute, 
irregularly placed, distant apiculi. 

Habitat: Cambridge deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson !). 


CRASPEDOPORUS Grev. 
Craspedoporus Grey. emend., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 68. 


Valves circular, sometimes dissimilar. Surface usually with dis- 
tinct compartments, subplain or the compartments sometimes rising 
towards the border. Colour pale grey. Central space distinct, 
rounded, sometimes small or absent. Markings punctate, areolate or 
granular, without order or in radial or oblique rows, secondary sub- 
concentric rows rarely visible, sometimes converging around processes. 
Border with delicate stri or hyaline. Processes 5 to 11, placed on 
the alternate compartments, subcircular, or roundly elliptical, with 
major axis radial or at right angles to the radius, sometimes with the 
outer edge elevated and pocket-like, a surrounding hyaline space 
sometimes present. 

In its general characters this genus hardly approaches Coscino- 
discus as stated by Greville. It is much nearer the Mupodisce# in 
the character of the processes, but is quite distinct in other respects. 
Some frustules with dissimilar valves have one of the valves approach- 
ing Porodiscus. 


C. ralfsianus Grey., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 68, pl. iv. fig. 9. 


Diam. 0°105 mm. Surface with distinct compartments, those 
bearing the processes expanding outwards at first regularly, then more 
suddenly near the processes, the others wider. Central area circular, 
about 1/4 of diam. broad, somewhat more dense than outer portion. 
Markings irregularly areolate, the meshes smallest about outer edge 
of central area, about 4 in 0-Ol mm, Processes 8 to 9, subcireular, 
with major axis radial, their distal edge sometimes elevated, giving 
a pocket-like appearance. 

Habitat: Cambridge deposit, Barbadoes (Ralfs, Johnson). 


C. johnsonianus Grey., Trans. Mic. Soc. Lond., 1863, p. 69, pl. iv. 
fig. 10. 

Diam. 0°625 to 0°07 mm. Surface compartments with straight 

elges, those bearing the processes rising gradually outwards, the 

others flat. Central space pentagonal, hyaline, about 1/5 of diam. 


A Revision of the Genus Auliscus Hhrb., dc. By J. Rattray. 919 


broad. Markings minute, punctate, in faint lines passing obliquely 
inwards from the centre of the compartments bearing the processes, 
and converging around the latter, on the intervening compartments 
without order. Processes 5, elliptical, with major axis at right angles 
to corresponding radius, about 0-01 mm. long, their border broad, 
striated. Border narrow, hyaline. 

Habitat: Cambridge deposit, Barbadoes (Johnson !). 


C. elegans Grove & Sturt, Journ. Quek. Mic. Cl., 1887, p. 64, pl. v. 
fic. 6. 


co) 


Diam. 0°0625 to 0°0825 mm.. Valves dissimilar, the one with 
surface subplain or slightly convex from centre to zone of processes, 
between the latter sloping gently to border. Central space angular 
to round, from 1/!2 to 1/16 of diam. broad. Markings round, 
granular, towards the centre 6 to 7, near the border 8 in 0°01 mm.; 
rows uninterrupted, radial, straight, inconspicuous within the processes, 
secondary irregularly subconcentric rows most evident, on a band close 
to, and within the processes; interspaces minute, hyaline. Border 
distinct, striz delicate, 16 in 0°01 mm. Processes 8 to 11, elliptical, 
with major axis at right angles to corresponding radius, surrounded 
by a cuneate hyaline space, with sides slightly convex or straight 
and symmetrical with respect to the processes. The other valve 
with surface convex. Central space circular, hyaline, about 1/3 of 
diam. broad. Markings round, granular, increasing slightly outwards 
towards central space, 8 to 10, towards border 6 in 0°01 mm., rows 
radial, interrupted near border by an irregular hyaline band, beyond 
this band the markings forming coarse strie. Border distinct, 
hyaline. Processes absent.-—Porodiscus interruptus Grove & Sturt, 
Journ. Quek. Mic. Cl, 1887, p. 67, pl. v. fig. 8; Morland, Journ. 
Quek. Mic. Cl, 1887, p. 167. 

Herr E. Weissflog in a letter to Mr. F. Kitton, says that he has 
been able to confirm Morland’s observation of the identity of Craspedo- 
porus elegans and Porodiscus interruptus. 

Habitat: Oamaru deposit (Grove! Doeg!). 


ARTIFICIAL Kuy. 


1, Compartments not differentiated. Valves dissimilar, the one 
with, the other without processes. Markings 


small, round, granular; rowsradial .. .. elegans 
re GIishinei ope cette Sea ea ew Ek) eas ee ciel cee. bees 2 
2. Markings large, areolate, edges of compartments not straight  ralfsianus 
: minute, punctate, edges of compartments straight ..  johnsonianus 


ISODISCUS gen. n. 


Valves circular. Surface almost flat or slightly convex towards 
border. Colour pale smoky grey, darker at border. Central space 
large, rounded, and evident, sometimes absent. Markings angular, 
areolate, without interspaces, in evident subradial rows converging 


920 Transactions of the Society. 


somewhat around the processes, or small, round, granular, with evident 
interspaces largest towards the centre, and arranged without order. 
Processes low, most prominent towards the border, 2 or 3 larger, 
sometimes asymmetrical, between these 3 to 8 smaller similar pro- 
cesses at subregular intervals. Border distinct, sharply defined, striz 
sometimes indistinct.—Lampriscus pro parte Grove & Sturt, Journ. 
Quek. Mic. Cl., 1887, p. 188; Hupodiseus pro parte Grove & Sturt, 
Bot. Centralbl., Bd. xxxiv. Nos. 15-16, p. 38. 


I. Debyi.—Eupodiscus Debyi Grove & Sturt, Bot. Centralbl., 
Bd. xxxiv. Nos. 15-16, p. 38. 


Diam. 0°12 to 0°125 mm. Surface distinctly convex towards 
the border. Central space circular, 1/5 to 1/6 of diam. broad, with a 
few isolated round granules. Markings areolate, 44 to 5 in 0°01 mm., 
subequal; rows distinct, straight or flexuous, converging around the 
processes, secondary oblique decussating rows evident. Processes 2, 
larger, opposite, with rounded inner and outer edges and flattened 
sides, about 0°02 mm. broad, 3 smaller intervening, about 0°0125 mm. 
broad, subcircular, roundly elliptical, with major axis at nght 
angles to corresponding radius. Border sharply defined, striz evident, 
5 in 0:01 mm. 


Habitat : Oamaru deposit (Grove & Sturt! W. J. Gray !). 
I. mirifieus sp. n. 


Diam. 0°1375 mm. Surface almost flat, but slightly convex at 
border. Central space and rosette absent. Markings small, round, 
granular, and without order towards the centre; towards the border 
subangular, more crowded, and in faint radial rows, short rows con- 
verging round each process. Processes 2, large, rounded, about 
0°02 mm. broad, more protuberant on the outer edge, subopposite ; 
a third similar, but somewhat smaller, about 0°015 mm. broad, at 
equal distances from the former on one side of the valve; 8 still 
smaller, 0:0075 mm. broad, on the opposite side between the 2 large 
processes, and 5 of similar size between the latter and the intermediate 
process. Border distinct, striee obscure.—Pl. XVI. fig. 4. 

Habitat! Oamaru deposit (W. J. Gray !). 


ARTIFICIAL Key. 


A central space. Markings obviously areolate, rows evident 
between central space and border . os. Pup on le ae 

No central space. Markings small, round, granular, without 
order towards ceutre, nearer border subangular, in faint 
OE LOWS Ss; > oo. ann Be. Seba eR eee 


Debyi 


mirificus 


Ge Setter) 


XII.—WNote on the Large Size of the Spicules of Acis orientalis. 
By F. Jerrrey Bett, M.A., Sec. RMS. 
(Read 14th November, 1888.) 


In the year 1882, Mr. Stuart O. Ridley described * a species of Aczs 
from Mauritius. A specimen lately purchased by the Trustees of the 
British Museum from the same island shows that the examples seen by 
Mr. Ridley were either starved or incompletely grown. In the very 
much finer example lately acquired the spicules of the coenenchym are 
seen to form quite astout armour for the colony, and the examination 
of it leads to a few considerations of some interest. The scales may 
be as much as 7 mm. long. These large plates appear to be 
scattered quite irregularly over the colony ; that is to say they are not 
more common on one side than the other, on the larger than the 
smaller branches; they are not more frequently developed at the angles 
of branching than elsewhere; they are quite irregular in form, but 
they are always longer than broad, and there is a tendency to a 
lozenge-shape. The smallest plates may not be more than about half 
a millimetre along their longest axis, but these are, of course, visible to 
the naked eye; between these two extremes there are plates of every 
possible intermediate size. 

The plates of the calicles offer a somewhat remarkable disposition ; 
they are arranged in two or three rows of slightly imbricating scales of 
varying size; often, though not always, the basal scales are larger than 
those above them; the mouth of the cup is guarded by eight scales, so 
small as to be only just visible to the unaided eye. These scales 
exhibit a simplified arrangement of the type which Professor Kolliker 
has made familiar to us by his figures of Primnoa lepadifera, 
P. verticillaris, and P.regularis, A somewhat similar, but simpler, 
striation is seen on the scales of the cortex of the ccenenchym, but the 
larger plates are almost smooth, and exhibit no characteristic markings. 
The indentations at the edges, where they unite with theirneighbours, 
offer nothing worthy of notice. : 

It appears to be obvious that the point of real interest in thig 
species is the remarkable size of the cortical scales; other forms have, 
before now, been described as having large scales, such as Thesea exserta 
or Acis guadalupensis, but the greatest length given by Kélliker for 
the former is 1-2 mm., and for the latter2:0 mm. In Calyptrophora 
japonica Dr. Gray reports that the scales are large, but the largest 
scales, which are not those of the ccenenchym but of the polyps, are 
not more than 1 mm. in their greatest length. The interest of this 
large size of the spicules lies in the fact that paleontologists, with the 
exception of Poéta,f seem to have hitherto neglected to look for the 
deposits of Aleyonarians on account of their small size; or, as Prof. 


* Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., x. (1882) p. 126. 
+ See SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, xcii. (1885) p. 7. 


922 Transactions of the Society. 


Zittel * expresses it, “ Isolirte Spiculii von fossilen Alcyonarien sind bis 
jetzt noch nicht mit Sicherheit nachgewiesen worden. Ihre wenige 
Grosse entzieht sie nach ihrer Zerstreuung leicht der Beobachtung und 
iiberdies diirfte der reichliche Gehalt an organischer Substanz ihre 
Zersetzung beschleunigen.” Spicules of the size I have described in 
this paper might, however, be very easily recognized, now that it is 
known that such exist.t 

Evidence of the geological age of such large ccenenchymal plates 
would be of great value in aiding us to determine whether or no a 
species with large spicules appeared early in the history of the 
Gorgonid Alcyonarians. At present we can only argue by way of 
analogy from what we know about Fishes. The earliest were naked, 
and such must, of course, have been the case. Some of the latest are 
naked too; so nakedness per se offers us no aid. The oldest scaled 
forms are, like Cephalaspis, formed with great shields. Structurally, 
we are bound to suppose these great shields were formed by the fusion 
of granules; some of the youngest, like Dzodon, have large scales 
also; so, the possession of large scales is, of itself, no aid. But the 
very early existence of large-scaled fishes shows that, though not 
primitive, such a character may have been primeval. And it is 
possible that the Alcyonaria will be found to exhibit a history analogous 
to that of Fishes. In the present state of our knowledge the case must 
be left here. It is to be hoped that microscopists who have the 
opportunity of examining deposits that may contain Alcyonarian 
spicules will not fail to look for them. 


* «Handbuch der Paleontologie,’ i. p. 209. 

+ By a curious error the figure of Acis guadalupensis is stated by Duchassaing 
and Michelotti to be “de gr. nat.,” when it is clearly the “portion grossie de la 
méme espece.” Cf. figs. 14 and 15 of pl. i, Mem. Acad. Torino (2) xix. 


@ 925%) 


SUMMARY 


OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY 
(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), 


MICROSCOPY, &c., 


INCLUDING ORIGINAL COMMUNICATIONS FROM FELLOWS AND OTHERS.* 


ZOOLOGY. 
A. VERTEBRATA :—Embryology, Histology, and General. 


a. Embryology.t 


Physics of the Yolk.{—Dr. H. Virchow reports the results of an 
inquiry (prompted by the observations of G. Quincke) into the physical 
conditions which lie behind the microscopic phenomena to be seen in 
studying the yolk of a fowl’s egg. Two questions in particular are 
raised: in what form is the fatty body inclosed in the yolk-spherules, 
and in what degree do reagents produce artificial features. Herr Virchow 
describes the phenomena observed in yolk after retention in alcohol 
for twenty-four hours, after boiling for half an hour, after treatment for 
twenty-four hours with concentrated sublimate solution. He gives what 
seems to be the explanation of some of the differences observable. As 
to the form the fatty body takes in the spherules, he is uncertain. It 
is contained, at any rate, in all parts of the spherule, perhaps in the 
form of fine drops, perhaps in solution in the albumin-body which gives 
shape to the spherules. 


Embryonic Axis.§—Dr. W. Roux replies to certain criticisms made 
by Herr O. Schultze on his researches in regard to the axes of frog-eggs 
and embryos. On most points of importance the two investigators differ, 
indeed directly contradict one another. In the present paper Roux 
examines the evidence for Schultze’s conclusions, and maintains the 
integrity of his own. 


Spermatogenesis of Vertebrates.||—Sig. F. Sanfelice gives a com- 
pleted account of his researches on the spermatogenesis of Vertebrates 


* The Society are not intended to be denoted by the editorial “ we,” and they do 
not hold themselves responsible for the views of the authors of the papers noted, 
nor for any claim to novelty or otherwise made by them. The object of this part of 
the Journal is to present a summary of the papers as actually published, and to 
describe and illustrate Instruments, Apparatus, &c., which are either new or have 
not been previously described in this country. 

+ This section includes not only papers relating to Embryology properly so called, 
but also those dealing with Evolution, Development, and Reproduction, and allied 
subjects. ¢ SB. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, xxxvii. (1888) pp. 977-81. 

§ Biol. Centralbl., viii. 1888) pp. 399-413. 

|| Boll. Soc. Nat. Napoli, i. (1887) pp. 33-45; ii. (1888) pp. 42-98 (8 pls.). 


924 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


(Fishes, Amphibians, Reptiles, Birds, and Mammals); and deduces the 
following general conclusions :— 

(1) With a few differences, conditioned by the structural level of the 
testes, the spermatogenesis of Vertebrates exhibits a constant type. 

(2) In Mammals, Birds, and Reptiles, there is some division of 
labour, for the spermatoblasts produce not only spermatozoa, but also 
elements destined for the expulsion and nutrition of the essential pro- 
ducts. In Amphibians and Selachians, the spermatoblasts form only 
spermatozoa, expelled by the proliferation of the germinal cells. 

(3) The Amphibian spermatogenesis is a median type; a spermatic 
cyst in the canal of an Amphibian corresponds morphologically to an 
ampulla in the Selachian testes. 

(4) The germinal cells, the fixed cells of Sertoli, the “cellules de 
soutien” of Merkel, represent the matrix of the spermatic epithelium, 
giving origin to the new spermatoblasts. 

(5) Following Flemming, the author regards as cellular what other 
investigators describe as nuclei—the elements, namely, which divide to 
give origin to the spermatoblasts. 

(6) Lhe protoplasmic network described by various authorities as 
originating from the germinal cells and extending between the elements 
of the testicular canal, is the result of the action of the nuclei of the 
dividing spermatoblasts, 

(7) In Mammals, Birds, and Reptiles, the expulsion of the sperma- 
tozoa is favoured by the secretory modification of some of the elements 
of the canal. In Amphibians and Selachians the expulsion is referable 
to the proliferation of the germinal cells. 

(8) The spermatozoa arise directly from small nuclear asters, and 
are equivalent, therefore, not to cells, but to nuclei. Both chromatic and 
achromatic portions of the spermatozoa have nuclear origin. Only in 
Mammals were two different kinds of spermatozoa to be observed. 

(9) The polymorphic nuclei, as yet described only in Amphibians, 
occur throughout the Vertebrate series. 

(10) The physiological regeneration of the epithelium of the canals 
occurs from the germinal cells, when all the elements produced by the 
first generation have been expelled. There is a constant relation between 
the transformation of the spermatoblasts and the proliferation of the 
germinal cells, 


Spermatogenesis of Reptiles.*—Dr. A. Prenant has studied the 
spermatogenesis of reptiles in Gecko communis, Anguis fragilis, Lacerta 
agilis, and Vipera aspis, but especially in the first named. 

(1) Spermatogonia, seminiferous, or germinative cells. In these cells 
the author has especially studied the granular crescent in the protoplasm 
which forms the “ Nebenkern,” and has observed the presence of that 
element itself. 

(2) Nematoblasts and Spermatozoids. The nematoblasts exhibit the 
*“Nebenkern.” It forms amid a crescent of granules. Its history seems 
to be that as it becomes differentiated it gains the anterior pole of the 
nucleus, there becomes less definite, and along with the surrounding 
protoplasm forms a head-cap. The crescent of granules appears to give 
rise also to the caudal knob and to the beginning of the caudal filament. 


* La Cellule, iv. (1888) pp. 181-97 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 925 


The nature of the various parts of the spermatozoid is discussed at length, 
but does not readily admit of summary. 


Fate of the Blastopore in Rana temporaria.*—Mr. H. Sidebotham, 
from the examination of more than sixty embryos, is more inclined to 
agree with the acoount given by the late Prof. Balfour in his ‘Com- 
parative Embryology’ than with those of Spencer, Johnson and Sheldon, 
or Durham as to the fate of the blastopore in the frog. He differs from 
Balfour in so far as he finds that the neural folds do not inclose the 
blastopore, the closure of the latter being effected subsequently to the 
meeting of the neural folds. From Spencer he differs essentially, for 
he finds that the anus is not derived from a persistent blastopore, but 
is formed from an independent proctodceal invagination. 


Development of the Frog.;—In the new third edition of his manual 
on the Frog, Prof. A. Milnes Marshall has added a chapter on its 
development, which should prove useful to many classes of students. 
It is illustrated by several woodcuts, some of which are new and very 
instructive. 


Eggs of Alligator lucius.{—Prof. 8. F. Clarke has examined the 
nests and eggs of the alligator. He states that the eggs are white, 
elliptical, and varying from 39 to 45 mm. in the shorter diameter, and 
from 67 to 88 mm. in the longer. The shell is thicker than that of a 
hen’s egg and more brittle, and the shell-membrane is also thicker. The 
white has the consistency of a very thick jelly, so that it will adhere to 
the yolk after the shell-membrane is removed; the yolk is spherical, 
and of the faintest yellow or straw colour; the white forms a very thin 
pellicle, and as, after the first day, it is almost impossible to get off the 
membrane without rupturing this thin pellicle, and so breaking the 
embryo, the eggs are very difficult to work with. 


Eggs and Larvee of Teleosteans.$—Sig. F. Raffaele gives a pre- 
liminary account of his observations on the ova and larve of Teleostean 
fishes. He starts with emphasizing the necessity for rigorous comparison 
of pelagic and ovarian eggs, and for making the series of larval forms 
as complete as possible. He proceeds to describe the characters of 
certain eggs from the Gulf of Naples, which resemble those referred by 
Agassiz aud Whitman to Osmerus mordax Gill. The appearance of the 
hatched larve proved them to be Clupeids, and it seemed likely that 
they were the common sardines (Clupea pilchardus). A noteworthy 
character, which begins to appear in very young larve (15-20 days), is 
a series of regularly disposed transverse folds of the intestinal mucous 
membrane, from the pylorus to the anus. This appearance, which 
recalls the spiral valve of Elasmobranchs, and still more that of Ganoids, 
has been described by Cuvier and Valenciennes in C. alosa, C. pilchardus, 
and in some allied forms. The author believes that hints of natural 
affinities may be profitably looked for in the structure of the vitellus. 

The author also describes || the ova and larval form of the anchovy 
(Engraulis encrasicholus). 'The eggs had a much elongated ellipsoid 
form ; the very transparent vitellus exhibited large vesicular segments ; 
the delicate capsule was perforated by a single micropyle at the inferior 


* Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xxix. (1888) pp. 49-54 (1 pl.). 

t ‘ The Frog,’ 3rd ed., 1888, Manchester and London. 

t Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 568-70. 

§ Boll. Soe. Nat. Napoli, i. (1887) pp. 53-8. | Ibid., pp. 83-4. 


1888, 3 R 


926 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


pole. The very young ova had the usual round form; the elongated 
shape was assumed along with the granulation of the vitellus. The 
ovarian ova are more minutely described. In regard to the origin of the 
blastoderm Kupffer’s observations are confirmed. The incubation lasts 
2-3 days; the larve are like those of other Clupeids; the vitellus is 
prolonged far back in the abdominal cavity, and the yolk-sac has a much 
restricted and elongated form. The very large notochord, the transverse 
folding of the post-pyloric portion of the intestine, are then alluded to. 
Referring to his previous description of Clupea pilchardus, the author 
again emphasizes the vesicular structure of the vitellus as expressing a 
natural affinity. 


Heredity.* — Prof. A. Weismann discusses the alleged botanical 
evidence in favour of the inheritance of acquired characters. In a pre- 
liminary discussion the author reiterates the essentials of his often 
misunderstood position. Jndividually acquired characteristics, not of 
constitutional origin, are not transmitted ; functional and environmental 
variations may effect the “soma” of the individual, but unless the repro- 
ductive elements be affected there can be no transmission ; proof of the 
transmission of such variations is not forthcoming ; the ground is taken 
from under the feet of Lamarckians; direct germinal modification 
remains the sole fountain of specific variation. But Detmer and Hoff- 
mann have submitted a number of cases among plants which appeared 
to these botanists to warrant the conclusion that individually acquired 
characters might be transmitted. Weismann subjects Detmer’s cases to 
examination, but does not find that any of them warrant the conclu- 
sion drawn. ll the illustrations given by Hoffmann are secondary 
variations in consequence of variations in the germinal protoplasm, none 
of them are directly acquired modifications of the soma. With the 
former, Weismann has of course no difficulty. Beyond the critique of 
the two botanical memoirs, the paper contains numerous side-remarks 
illustrating the author’s position. 


Principle of Heredity and the Laws of Mechanics applied to the 
Morphology of Solitary Cells.;—M. M. W. Khawkine has made a study 
of the development of Paramecium aurelia. He observes that a mother- 
cell of Paramecium, in which fission is produced, has an annular constric- 
tion but no other depression of the body; on the contrary, its external 
layer is stretched, its contours are rounded, and the whole of its body 
approaches the form of a revolving solid. The young organisms when 
freshly separated have likewise no depression, and approach the same 
form. Under ordinary conditions the freshly separated Paramecia long 
remain at the same place, working with the cilia of their ventral surface 
so as to attract food; or the young Paramecium may at once begin to 
swim and turn somersaults in the surrounding water ; as this somersault 
and movement of rotation are always produced in opposite directions, 
the work is almost exclusively that of the ventral cilia. It is possible 
that it is the large share in diffusion which obtains in the region of the 
mouth that is the direct cause of the greater part of the work being 
thrown on the ventral cilia, and of their elongation and increase in 
strength; whatever and however it be, the work of these cilia produces 
a pressure on the whole of the corresponding surface of the body. This 


* Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 65-79, 98-109. 
t Arch. Zool. Expér. et Gén., vi. (1888) pp. 1-20. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MIOROSCOPY, ETC. 927 


pressure is quite sufficient to make a deep depression on the whole of 
the surface covered by these cilia, and it is on this surface that the 
elongated peristome, which is characteristic of the Paramzcia, gradually 
becomes hollowed out. This depréssion once produced and retained for 
a sufficiently long time is preserved of itself; as the ventral cilia work 
throughout the whole of the life of the Paramzcium more than the rest, 
this buccal depression is assured for ever. As the cilia of the anterior 
part work much more than those of the posterior, there isa much greater 
pressure on the first half than on the second, and the former, therefore, 
appears more compressed. ‘To convince oneself of the truth of these 
generalizations, it is only necessary to make use of a reagent which stops 
the work of the cilia and causes the contents of the cell to swell out. 
Under the influence of such a reagent, e.g. a faint odour of ammonia, 
water penetrates rapidly into the Paramecium and equalizes its walls. 
The creature at once returns to the form under which it commenced its 
existence, and becomes completely rounded. 

The author considers that the “law of heredity” must yield to the 
physico-mechanical cause which underlies it. 


Action of the Environment.*—Mr. J. Arthur Thomson gives a sum= 
mary of the influence of the environment upon the organism. The 
paper is mainly an appendix to Semper’s ‘ Animal Life,’ and an expan= 
sion of Spencer’s conclusion that “the direct action of the medium was 
the primordial factor in organic evolution.” The author first furnishes 
a tabular analysis of the external factors, and a classified review of 
typical concrete researches. He proceeds to discuss the physiological 
classification of the results, the variable susceptibility to environmental 
influence, the different degrees and periods of environmental action, and 
the like. The relation of environmental modification to heredity and to 
‘“‘functional”’ and “organismal” variations are then referred to. In 
conclusion the author summarizes the history of opinion in regard 
to the action of the environment as a factor in organic evolution. This 
“ balance-sheet of representative facts and opinions in regard to environ= 
mental modification ” is backed up by a copious bibliography. 


Elimination and Selection.j—Prof. C. Lloyd Morgan suggests the 
use of the term “Natural Elimination” alongside of “Natural 
Selection.” ‘ Variations,” he says, “are subjected to a double process 
—a process of elimination—weeding out the unfit; and a process of 
selection—choosing out the more fit. Of these, elimination is the more 
universal, selection only coming into play when intelligence has definitely 
appeared on the scene of life. Of the three kinds of variations—favour- 
able, neutral, and unfavourable — elimination only gets rid of the 
aes leaving both favourable and neutral in possession of the 
field, except where severe and long-continued competition has rendered ~ 
even the neutral variations relatively unfavourable. Selection, on the 
other hand, picks out only the favourable variations; so that under 
selection alone, the occurrence of useless structures and features would 
be anomalous. Both principles have been operative under Nature; and 
both are included under Mr. Darwin’s terms, “ Natural Selection ” and 
“ Sexual Selection.” 


* Proc. R. Phys. Soc. Hdin., ix. (1888) pp. 446-99. 
+ Proc. Bristol Nat. Soc., v. (1888) pp. 13. 
oR 2 


928 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


8. Histology.” 


Structure of Red Blood-corpuscles.t—Signori C. Cianci and G. 
Angiolella have investigated the minute structure of red blood-corpuscles. 
Their results agree rather with those of Briicke than of Rollet. They 
have been able to show the existence of two different substances within 
the corpuscles, one forming a network, the other an amorphous mass. 
This has been demonstrated from fishes to mammals. 


Peculiar Fat-cells.j—Prof. H. Rabl-Riickhard described a peculiar 
condition of the fatty tissue which he observed in sections of the head of 
Cobitis barbatula. In the typical fat-cell, the protoplasm of the original 
connective-tissue cell forms a thin envelope, and no evidence of spon- 
taneous amceboid movements has as yet been recorded. But inside the 
head-bones of C. barbatula, active protoplasmic movements appear to 
occur in the envelope of the fat-cell. These find expression in fine 
“ pseudopodia” radiating from the surface of the envelope, and produc- 
ing an appearance curiously like that of an Actinophrys. Wenckebach 
has described apparently similar phenomena in the pigment-cells of 
pelagic fish-ova. 


Karyokinesis in its Relation to Fertilization. $—Prof. W. Waldeyer 
republishes in extended form a lecture on karyokinesis and its relations 
to the phenomena of fertilization. Some portions have been rewritten, 
and recent researches have been incorporated. The memoir gives an 
account of the history of research, and presents a critical summary up 
to date. A useful bibliography from Martin Barry’s observations on 
mammalian fecundation (1840) down to those of Kultschitzky (1888) is 
appended. 


Reticulum of Muscle-fibre. || Sig. P. Mingazzini reports the results 
of his study of the supposed protoplasmic reticulum in striped muscle. 
His material was obtained from the crayfish. His principal conclusion 
is as follows :—The appearance of longitudinal filaments in the plasmic 
reticulum is referable to the walls of the fibrils; their varied forms 
along their course are due to the contours of the clear and dark zones, 
and of the membrane of Krause in the individual fibrils. These images 
are produced in relation to the particular coagulations caused by various 
reagents acting on the constituent elements of the striated fibres, and 
especially on the refractive substance of the clear zone. The appearance 
of transverse bars is referable to the interstitial substance of Cohnheim’s 
areas. 


Sarcolemma.§—Prof. A. Schneider maintains that the bundles of 
muscle-fibrils in all animals are imbedded directly in the connective 
tissue, and are not snrrounded by a fine structureless membrane, the 
sarcolemma, as has hitherto been invariably stated. He describes in 
detail some of his investigations on various animals, and affirms that 
what, in cross-sections, has been taken for sarcolemma is, in reality, 
only the boundary-line formed by the minute fibrillar columns coming 


* This section is limited to papers relating to Cells and Fibres. 
+ Boll. Soc. Nat. Napoli, i. (1887) pp. 67-74. 

¢ Arch. f. Mikr. Anat., xxxii. (1888) pp. 182-7 (2 figs.). 

§ Ibid., pp. 1-122 (14 figs.). 

|| Bull. Soc. Nat. Napoli, ii. (1888) pp. 24-41 (1 pl.). 

§, Zool, Beitr. (Schneider), ii. (1888) pp. 212-18 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 929 


into closer proximity at the edge of the fibre. ‘The sarcolemma is 
a delusion. It is so firmly established in the conceptions of histologists, 
that this short essay will hardly avail to displace it. Nevertheless, in 
time, it will disappear from the text-beoks.” 


Nervous System of Amphioxus.*—Dr. E. Rohde has made a detailed 
investigation of the histology of the nervous system of Amphioxus, in 
continuation of his previous researches on that of Chetopods. The chief 
interest of the memoir lies, on the one hand, in the completeness of the 
account, but even more in the critical review of other researches bearing 
on the histology of the nervous system. It does not admit of summary. 


B. INVERTEBRATA. 


Myelocytes of Invertebrates.;—M. J. Chatin does not agree with 
the view that myelocytes can be compared to free nuclei. They repre- 
sent true cells, and possess all the essential parts of these elements. 
This may be proved with various forms of Invertebrates. These cells 
are always very small, but they do not vary in size as much as those of 
Vertebrates (6 » to 18 1), for they are never less than 9 nor more than 
15 » long. The protoplasmic portion of the element never occupies 
more than a narrow peripheral zone, and this explains how it is that it 
has escaped the attention of many observers; it has often fine granules 
scattered in its substance. The nucleus, which is always very large and 
effaces or masks the other parts of the element, is elliptical or spheroidal, 
rarely polyhedral in form. The nuclear mass is always more granular 
than the somatic portion of the myelocyte. The nucleoli vary somewhat. 
The secondary products of the cell are chiefly represented by adipose 
globules or pigment granulations; the former are generally placed in 
regions parallel to the long axis of the nucleus, while the pigments are 
found near the poles of the myelocyte. 

According to classical descriptions, the myelocyte of Vertebrates 
has constantly two prolongations placed opposite to one another. Many 
Invertebrates (such as Pontobdella, Arenicola, Locusta), have only one 
process, while other (Gastropoda) have several. The prolongations 
unite to form a fibrillar network, the nature of which becomes mixed 
when connective fibres take part in its constitution. 

The variations observed in the form of the myelocyte are determined 
by corresponding variations in the nerve-cells; when all the myelocytes 
are unipolar the nerve-cells are unipolar too; when the former are 
multipolar the nerve-cells have generally the same form. The author 
thinks that there can be no doubt that, histologically, the myelocyte is 
allied to the nerve-cell, and he doubts whether it should be specially 
distinguished from other forms of nervous cells. 

Anthropotomists have long insisted on the localization of myelocytes 
in the grey substance or in the retina; in Invertebrates these cells have 
a very similar mode of grouping; they are chiefly observed in ganglia 
of high physiological value which give off nerves of special sensibility, 
and they are found near the optic rods. 


Role of Symbiosis in Luminous Marine Animals.{—M. R. Dubois, 
who has already urged that the fundamental reaction necessary for the 


* Zool. Beitr. (Schneider), ii. (1888) pp. 169-211 (2 pls.). 
+ Comptes Rendus, evil. (1888) pp. 504-7. t Ibid., pp. 502-4, 


930 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


production of light in animals is of the nature of those which are effected 
under the action of ferments, brings forward some new evidence. He 
has recently demonstrated the normal presence in the walls of the siphon 
of Pholas dactylus of micro-organisms (Bacillus pholas) which give a 
bright light when cultivated in a nutrient fluid prepared from the phos- 
phorescent tissues of the living animal. These tissues contain the 
substance which M. Dubois has provisionally called luciferine, and on 
which the ferment acts. The medium in which it acts must have a 
suitable chemical composition, 

The author considers that he has here to do with a case of symbiosis ; 
another case is afforded by Bacterium pelagia and Pelagia noctiluca. If 
this bacterium be cultivated in gelatin it rapidly makes funnel-shaped 
openings filled with a fluid substance; in this there are a number of 
more or less long filaments, filled with very small, perfectly rounded 
spores. By the side of these filaments there are free spores and some 
mobile rods which become spore-bearing filaments, In pure gelatin 
these filaments are not luminous, but if placed in nitrogenous bodies 
which contain phosphorus, such as nuclein or lecithin, they give rise to 
a beautiful bluish phosphorescence in the parts which are in contact 
with air. 

It is possible to collect in these cultivation fluids the characteristic 
doubly refractive substance which forms the chalky layer of the luminous 
tissue of various insects, as well as other animals, and the existence of 
which has been recognized by the author in the phosphorescent sea- 
water of Mentone. In chemical characters this body somewhat resembles 
leucin. In addition to it there are found a number of phosphatic 
crystals which are almost all formed by the oxidation of the phosphorized 
nitrogenous substances which are found in the cultivation fluid. 

The author thinks that these researches enable us to reconcile the 
theory of photogenic fermentation with the hypothesis of some authors 
that there is an oxidation of a phosphorus-containing body. 


Distribution by Birds.*—Prof. O. Zacharias notes that although the 
transportation of lower aquatic animals by migratory swimming-birds has 
long been accepted as affording a possible explanation of the similarit 
of the fauna in widely separated inland basins, until recently little has 
been done to find out definitely what animals might be thus distributed. 
M. Jules de Guerne has lately made a careful examination of the organic 
contents of particles of slime adhering to the feathers, bills, and feet of 
wild ducks (Anas boschas). The webbed feet were washed with especial 
care, and a microscopic examination of the water revealed the presence 
of little nematods, rotifers (Philodinidex), rhizopods (Trinema enchelys), 
diatoms, desmids, numerous encysted organisms, isolated Cladocera- 
eggs, pieces of Polyzoon-statoblasts (Plumatella), and the shell of an 
ostracod (Cytheridea torosa Jones). Spores and eysts were also found 
in slime-particles taken from the feathers. 


Mollusca. 


& Cephalopoda. 


Gigantic Cephalopoda.t—TIn an anonymous article on gigantic 
Cephalopoda, in the compilation of which considerable use has been 
wade of Prof. Verrill’s well-known researches, it is stated that a blood- 


* Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 268-9. + Naturforscher, xxi. (1888) pp. 231-3 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 931 


red Decapod measuring more than 28 feet was observed in 1886 at Cape 
Campbell, New Zealand. 


Germinal Layers in Cephalopods.*—Mr. §. Watase gives a more 
detailed account of his investigations on the homology of the germinal 
layers in Cephalopods (Loligo pealit). His more important results in 
regard to the “‘ yolk-membrane” and the phenomenon comparable to an 
epibolic gastrula have already been reported. 

The “ yolk-membrane ” is a true endoderm and its sole representative 
in the Cephalopods. The digestive tract with its appendages is entirely 
formed by the ectodermic invaginations, by the prolongations of the 
proctodeum and stomodeum. At no period of development is there 
any connection between the “yolk-membrane” and the digestive tract, 
and long before the absorption of the food-yolk is completed the 
permanent digestive canal is formed. With the absorption of the food- 
yolk the “ yolk-membrane ” disappears. 

The consequences of the gradual increase in the size of the yolk, as 
emphasized by Ryder for the Vertebrate series, apply with equal force 
in the Molluses. “'The endoderm in the highest group, the Cephalopoda, 
is made a temporary embryonic structure which may be said to have no 
chance of leaving traces of definite structure in the organization of the 
adult, and the set of secondary digestive organs in addition to the 
primary one is developed from an entirely different source, the ecto- 
derm.” This may possibly be an extreme instance of the influence 
which the food-yolk exerts in modifying the course of development and 
the history of the-germ-layers. 

Olfactory Ganglia of Cephalopods.t—Sig. G. Jatta has investigated 
the so-called olfactory ganglia of Cephalopods, and comes to the following 
conclusions :—(1) The so-called olfactory ganglia include a true ganglion 
and a mass of connective tissue; (2) the ganglion is united to the 
cerebral by means of nerve-fibres; (3) it may be considered as accessory 
to the otic ganglion; (4) the mass of connective tissue which in the 
Cephalopods with more evolved nervous system tends to be less distinct 
from the ganglion to which it adheres, may perhaps be regarded as itself 
representing a ganglion, which tends to disappear with cessation of 
function. 

Continuing his observations § he discusses the origin of the olfactory 
nerve. His investigations were based on Sepia, Loligo, Eledone, and 
Octopus, and warranted him in concluding that the olfactory nerve of 
Cephalopods arises from the supra-cesophageal ganglion, called by Dietl 
the superior frontal ganglion. 


Some Oigopsid Cuttle-fishes.|—Mr. F. E. Weiss has made a careful 
examination of the cutile-fishes in University College, London. He has 
studied, among the Oigopsida, Chiroteuthis Veranyi, Doratopsis vermicularis, - 
Histioteuthis Rueppelli, Tracheloteuthis Behni, and Verania sicula. He 
comes to the conclusion that the family Chiroteuthide should be re- 
tained, but not on the grounds formerly given, namely the absence of 
siphonal valve, loss of accessory nidamental glands and of one of their 
oviducts. The various leading points of agreement are pointed out. 


* Stud. Biol. Lab. Johns-Hopkins Univ., iv. (1888) pp. 163-83 (2 pls.). 
+ This Journal, 1888, pp. 396-7. 

{ Bull. Soc. Nat. Napoli, i. (1887) pp. 30-33. § Ibid., pp. 92-3. 
|| Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., xxix. 1888) pp. 75-96 (3 pls.). 


932 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Organ of Verrill in Loligo.*—Mr. M. Laurie has discovered in a 
young Loligo about 6 mm. in length an organ which appears to be homo- 
logous with the valve-like organ described by Verrill at the base of the 
siphon in Desmoteuthis and Taonia. It consists of a median dorsal 
cushion, which is prolonged backwards with two large processes, and a 
pair of lateral cushions on the ventral wall of the siphon. The organ 
is glandular in structure. It is well developed in specimens of Omma- 
strephes about 8 mm. long, but there is no trace of it in adults of that 
genus or of Loligo ; it is probably, therefore, an archaic organ, but cannot 
be compared with anything known in Gastropods, 


Salivary Glands of Sepia officinalis and Patella vulgata.t—Dr. A. 
B. Griffiths has found that the salivary secretion of the euttle-fish con- 
verts starch into glucose; mucin, sulphocyanates, and what seemed to 
be phosphate of calcium were found in the salivary secretion. Similar 
results were obtained with the limpet. The subjoined table gives a 
résumé of the author’s already attained results. 


Cephalopoda. Gastropoda, 
(a) Dibranchiata. Pulmogastropoda. Branchiogastropoda. 
Soluble diastic ferments Present Present Present 
Mugs. fos we ten Present se Present 
Sulphocyanates .. .. Present (?) Present 
Calcium phosphates .. Present (?) Present 


The salivary glands of these molluscs seem to have the same func- 
tions as those of Vertebrates. 


y. Gastropoda. 


Spermatogenesis ‘of Gastropods.j—Dr. A. Prenant describes the 
spermatogenesis of Pulmonate Gastropods (Helix, Arion), and draws 
the following principal conclusions. (1) The resting spermatogonium 
includes peculiar cytomicrosomata, which are the rudiments of the 
“ Nebenkern,” or it may contain the perfect Nebenkern itself. It may also 
exhibit other structures, described by Platner in Lepidoptera as well 
as Gastropods, and regarded by him as distinct from the Nebenkern. 
(2) In division the initial phase of the karyokinesis exhibits a remarkable 
mode of ‘* pelotonnement” and transverse fission, as Platner observed, 
though Prenant’s details differ from those of the previous investigator. 
(3) The Nebenkern appears to the author to develope indirectly, not 
directly, from the spindle. Vestiges of the spindle form special 
cytomicrosomata, which give rise to the Nebenkern. 

(4) In the spermatides, the Nebenkern takes part along with the 
protoplasm in forming the spiral filaments of the envelope of the axial 
filament. The long caudal filament described by Platner as the head- 
piece, seems to the author to result from the median portion. The axial 
filament is formed in its anterior portion of two or more superposed 
knobs, as Jensen has described in mammals. The differentiation of the 
spermatide nucleus is described at length. 


* Quart. Journ, Mier. Sci., xxix. (1888) pp. 97-8 (1 pl.). 
+ Proc. Roy. Soc., xliv. (1888) pp. 327-8. 
} La Cellule, iv. (1888) pp. 137-77 (2 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 933 


Classification of Gastropoda by the Characters of the Nervous 
System.*—Dr. P. Pelseneer has some critical remarks on the attempt 
made by Prof. Lacaze-Duthiers to arrange the Gastropoda by the cha- 
racters of their nervous systems. He regrets that that anatomist did not 
include in his scheme the Amphineura, Heteropoda, and Pteropoda. It 
seems unnecessary to give new names to groups whose boundaries remain 
unaltered. Various instances are cited in which animals have not the 
anatomical disposition of parts which is assigned to the group to which 
they belong. The five “ orders” of M. Lacaze-Duthiers do not appear to 
be of the same systematic importance, and that of the Notoneura does 
not seem to be natural. M. Pelseneer thinks that the imperfections of 
the new system are due to the inexact interpretation of the morpho- 
logical value of the pleural ganglia which falsifies the very basis of the 
system. These ganglia do not belong to the visceral commissure, that 
is to the asymmetric centre, but to the anterior symmetrical group of the 
nerve-centres. Moreover it is easy to show that the pleural ganglia do not 
fuse with the asymmetric or visceral centres, while they often do fuse with 
one or other of the two anterior pairs. 


Structure and Development of Egg in Chitonide.{—Dr. P. Garnault 
differs from Prof. Sabatier in his account of the development of the egg 
in Chitonide. He finds that the egg is developed at the expense of the 
germinal epithelium which lines the ovary ; the membrane which sur- 
rounds it is always composed of nucleated cells, formed by the trans- 
formation of sister-cells of the ovum; this membrane may be called 
follicular, and it is, contrary to the opinions of Ihering and Sabatier, 
the only one which is ever formed round the egg. The author finds that 
the inclosing vitelline masses do not take any part in the formation of 
the nuclei of the membrane. An account is given of the expansion and 
retraction of the vitelline masses; these may be considered as the 
highest known expression of the faculty, possessed by all eggs, of 
emitting amceboid expansions. The author also describes in some 
detail the characters of the membrane of the ripe egg. 


Organization of Dentalium.t — Dr. L. Plate has been induced to 
study Dentalium by the suggestion of Grobben that the Scaphopoda are 
the ancestors of the Cephalopoda. The glandular cells on the margin 
of the mantle are of extraordinary length, and are swollen out at either 
end. They are succeeded by a layer which seems to be formed of a kind 
of gelatinous tissue, delicate connective-tissue and muscular filaments 
lying radially and vertically in a hyaline ground-substance. Further 
back the mantle-zone becomes quite muscular. On the inner edge there is 
again a well-developed glandular zone, the elements of which have the 
form of short flasks. Between it and the outer muscular ring there is a 
system of irregular blood-lacunze. The muscles consist of rounded smooth 
bundles of fibrils; each of these is invested by a delicate membrane; the 
elongated nuclei lie below this membrane and externally to the fibrils. 

The author does not agree with Lacaze-Duthiers in regarding the 
elongated swellings which le outside the cerebral ganglia as secondary 
appendages of these centres, but as independent ganglia which are con- 
nected by two commissures, on the one hand with the brain and on the 

other with the pedal ganglia. Dr. Plate thinks there is no doubt that 
: * Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xiii. (1888) pp. 113-5. 


+ Arch. Zool Expér. et Gén., vi. (1888) pp. 83-116 (2 pls.). 
t Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 509-15. 


934 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


they are the homologues of the pleural ganglia of Gastropods. The 
cerebropleural commissure in Dentalium is very short; the cerebropedal 
and the pleuropedal commissure run together for almost their whole 
course, and appear indeed to be closely fused with one another. The 
author cannot confirm Fol’s statement that the ganglionic cells are all 
unipolar, and in all the nerve-fibres he finds scattered nuclei. 

Both Lacaze-Duthiers and Fol have failed to notice that there are 
two kinds of tentacles, which may be distinguished as “true” and 
“‘rmdimentary ”; the former are placed on the outer and the latter on the 
inner side of the lamelliform fold, which lies beside the cerebral ganglia ; 
the former are, moreover, very long, hollow, and contractile, and have a 
subepithelial muscular layer, which extends through the whole length 
of the tentacle; internally there is a nerve which swells out at the 
widened end of the tentacle into a ganglion. Nerves, muscles, and cilia 
are absent from the short solid rudimentary tentacles. There are some 
intermediate stages between these two kinds of tentacles. Special 
sensory organs are found in the end-bulbs of the true tentacles, in the 
form of about a score of long richly granular cells of a nervous character. 
They are continued into a filament which swells out into an elongated 
club just in front of the elongated pit which is found on the ventral 
surface of the terminal bulb. The thick end of this passes through the 
cuticle and carries a number of small sensory rods. This is a form of 
tactile organ which does not seem to have been before observed in the 
Mollusca. 

The otocysts have a low epithelium which carries a number of 
isolated tufts of cilia; the auditory nerve spreads out on the outer side 
of the epithelium, and, on the other side, soon fuses with the commissure 
which extends from the pedal ganglion to the nervous centres above the 
cesophagus. 

The epithelium of the two lateral pouches in the oral cone differs 
from that of the true buccal tube only in the want of cilia; these diver- 
ticula must consequently be regarded as labial pouches and not as 
salivary glands. No suggestion can be offered as to the function of the 
glandular swelling on the rectum, which contains on its better developed 
side a multiramified cecal process of the rectum, which is lined by a 
ciliated epithelium. 

The renal tube of one side has a much wider lumen than that of the 
other ; neither has an internal orifice. The walls consist of a simple non- 
ciliated epithelium, and their secretion is granular. Fol is correct in 
saying that there is no special efferent duct for the gonads, the products 
of which make their way to the exterior through the kidneys. The head 
of the spermatozoon is divided into a long median piece and two short 
terminal pieces. The tail is long and extends through the whole length 
of the head in the median line. 

There are no vessels, sinuses, or lacune from a histological point of 
view, blood-spaces with true walls being completely wanting. The 
structure of the ‘‘ water-opening” on either side of the anus does not 
scem to have been correctly apprehended by previous workers. The 
epithelium of the body-wall is, at these points, arranged in several 
layers, and forms on either side a slight elevation, the cells of which 
have a remarkably clear protoplasm ; a few muscles are connected with 
the orifice. In the living animal these orifices are ordinarily kept 
closed, and are only suddenly opened and as suddenly closed. There is 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 935 


no certain evidence that these pores allow of the direct entrance of water 
into the blood. The blood-corpuscles may be large or small, and the 
two kinds differ somewhat in the structure of their nuclei. 

There can be no doubt that a genus of Mollusca which has no heart, 
no internal renal orifices, and no gills, must occupy an isolated place in 
the system. Dr. Plate believes that Lacaze-Duthiers was wrong in 
ascribing to it a greater affinity with the Lamellibranchs than with the 
Gastropods. The single shell, the possession of jaws and a radula, and 
the whole arrangement of the nervous system, especially the existence 
of two pleural ganglia, are signs of Gastropod affinities. The so-called 
oral cone ought to be regarded as a head, the eyes and appendages of 
which have been lost, as in Chiton and some other forms. On the other 
hand, the hypothesis that Dentalium is the ancestor of the Cephalopoda 
cannot be supported; there is no greater resemblance than there is 
between a Cephalopod and any Gastropod which has retained its bilateral 
symmetry. ‘There are great difficulties in homologizing the tentacles of 
Dentalium with the arms of the Cephalopoda, for, inter alia, the former 
are at the base and the latter at the tip of the head, and there are con- 
siderable differences in the supply of their nerves. 


6. Lamellibranchiata. 


Structure of Muscles of Lamellibranchiata.*—M. R. Blanchard 
has studied the structure of muscular tissue in various lamellibranch 
molluses. He finds that the constituent element is a fibre-cell 1 to 2 mm. 
long, and 4 to 38 » wide; the nucleus is superficial and marginal, and 
has no enveloping membrane. This fibre is fundamentally structureless 
or, at most, is infiltrated with fine granulations, but it often presents a 
longitudinal striation. This last varies much in distinctness, for at first 
it is only feebly differentiated. In this case the surface of the cell often 
presents various ornamentations; this structure is inconstant, and the 
author is unable to suggest an explanation of it; all that can be certainly 
said is that it would be a great mistake to compare it to true transverse 
striation, or, as M. Fol has done, to regard it as due to the spiral rolling 
of the fibrils. In some further points M. Blanchard is in disagreement 
with M. Fol, with whose observations he deals more fully in another 
communication. 


Formation of Byssus.{—Dr. L. Reichel communicates the results of 
his investigations on the formation of the byssus in Lamellibranchs. 
These results are based chiefly on the observation of living specimens of 
Dreyssena polymorpha, and on microscopic examination of sections of the 
foot, the byssus-cavity, and the byssus of the same animal, Preparations 
of Mytilus edulis and Pinna were used for comparison. The bulk of the 
memoir is occupied with a discussion of the attaching function of the 
byssus, and with the details of its development. Dr. Reichel affirms. 
that the byssus arises as a cuticular formation, and that it is not a per- 
manent structure which lasts the animal its lifetime, but that, like the 
skin of Arthropods, it can be thrown off, and gradually replaced. The 
throwing off of the byssus is accompanied by a degeneration of the byssus 
cavity. The walls of partition are reduced, and the cavity becomes a 
simple groove, but they are formed anew when a new byssus arises. 


* Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xiii. (1888) pp. 74-81. + Tom. cit., pp. 49-58. 
t Zool. Beitr. (Schneider), ii, (1888) pp. 107-32 (1 pl.). 


936 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Molluscoida. 
B. Bryozoa. 


Movements of Polypides in Zocecia of Bryozoa.*—Dr. J. Jullien 
has a note on the protrusion and return of the polypide in the zowcia of 
monoderm cheilostomatous Bryozoa. He points out that, when a poly- 
pide wishes to emerge from its cell it must yield its place to a quantity 
of water of equivalent volume. But the zocecium is rigid. The opera- 
tion is effected, as the author has seen in a specimen of Catenicella 
ventricosa, by the posterior edge of the operculum. This operculum is 
articulated laterally, and while it closes the tentacular sheath anteriorly 
it closes posteriorly a second cavity, which is the pouch into which the 
sea water penetrates when the polypide emerges. In Schizoporella the 
operculum has a small tooth on its lower lip; this is lowered when the 
polypide is being protruded, and keeps the orifice of the water-chamber 
widely open. When the polypide returns to its cell the water is driven 
out, and the operculum is closed over the whole orifice, which, therefore, 
is not only the opening of the tentacular sheath, but also that of the 
compensatory water-chamber. 


Ontogeny of Marine Bryozoa.j—Dr. W. J. Vigelius finds that his 
observations corroborate in many important particulars the work of 
M. J. Barrois. The form of the young sessile primary animal is at 
first more or less rounded, but later becomes elongated, and has some- 
what the form of the sole of the foot. Longitudinal sections show that 
the development of the nutrient apparatus commences with an invagina- 
tion of the aborally placed disc-organ. The cells which form this 
invagination are considerably elongated, and lie in a single layer which, 
later on, forms the epithelium of the enteric canal. Around this invagina- 
tion there arises later a second cell-layer which is made up of much smaller 
flattened cells. The author believes that this layer arises, in Bugula 
calathus, from the mesodermal larval tissue. He has never, like 
Ostroumoff, found any rudiment of hypoblast taking part in the forma- 
tion of the bud. The number of spines is inconstant in the primary 
animal, and the buds always arise terminally. 


Cristatella mucedo.t—Dr. J. Jullien finds that the male organs of 
this Bryozoon are formed of seminiferous vesicles, or male ovules or 
mother-vesicles, in which the spermatozoa are developed; they are 
suspended to the intracolonial trabecule. He declares that the colonial 
disc is not a true foot, and that the direction taken by it may be in its 
long or in its broad axis. On twenty-five regular lophophores he 
counted from 71 to 80 tentacles, and on nine irregular lophophores from 
3 to 70. 


Delagia Chetopteri.§ —Prof. J. Joyeux-Laffuie gives a full account 
of this interesting new Bryozoon, the preliminary notice of which we 
have already recorded. || Part of the colony may be fixed on the inner 
wall of the tube, and the rest placed more deeply, though aways near 
the inner wall. The zocecia are oval, flattened along the plane of the 


* Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xiii. (1888) pp. 67-8. 

+ MY. Zool. Stat. Neapel, viii. (1888) pp. 374-6 (1 pl.). 

t Bull. Soe. Zool. France, xiii. (1888) pp. 165-6. 

§ Arch. Zool. Expér. et Gén., vi. (1888) pp. 135-54 (i pl.). 
|| See this Journal, 1888, p. 403. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 937 


lamella of the tube which carries them, and have the general form of an 
urn. The walls are formed of two layers, the outer of which is delicate, 
chitinous and structureless; this is the ectocyst ; the endocyst is cellular, 
and thickest in the median region. The term spherules is applied to 
two rounded masses which are placed symmetrically on the sides of the 
zocecia; they consist of a central cavity, which is filled with liquid, and 
occupies the greater part of the spherule, and of a resisting wall formed 
by the ectocyst and endocyst. Their function appears to be that of pro- 
tective organs, acting passively by preventing the compression of the 
zocecium by the Chetopierus. Morphologically, these bodies appear to 
be modified individuals, The colony may be considered as formed of 
a series of differentiated segments placed one behind the other; the 
polypide has from 12 to 14 tentacles, and a gizzard.’ 


Fresh-water Bryozoa.*—Herr F'. Braem has been led to disbelieve 
in the theory that a new polypide may arise at any point of the body- 
wall by the invagination of its two layers, for he has always found that 
the formation of young buds is connected with the pre-existence of older 
ones. He thinks he can show that no bud arises in the colony which 
cannot be referred to the embryonic cell-material of an older bud- 
rudiment. If we take a bud a@ at an early stage, when it merely 
represents a two-layered sac, we find it to give rise to a daughter-bud b; 
as these become separated from one another a second bud b’ appears 
between them; and this may be repeated as long as the primary 
bud is provided with material which is capable of division. Similarly 
the daughter-buds may give rise to other buds, until at last the youngest 
individuals are no longer capable of germination. 

The inner layer of the bud becomes fashioned into the ectoderm, 
while the outer forms the inner epithelium of the wall of the cystid ; 
the cells of the latter are partly differentiated into the muscular tissue 
of the integument and of the gut, and partly give rise to the retractor 
and folding muscles, and to long unicellular filaments which connect 
the polypid and cystid. The difference in the rapidity with which the 
bud-generations follow one another is the cause of the delicate branched 
colonies like those of Fredericella and Plumatella fruticosa on the one 
hand, and the more compact colonies of Alcyonella on the other. Further 
differences may, at last, result in the formation of a Cristatella. This 
last is to be regarded as a colony of Phylactolemata with creeping 
individuals which have become so approximated to one another that 
their cystids have fused laterally; the sum of the basal parts of the 
cystids becomes the foot, and that of the dorsal pieces, with the orifices, 
the upper covering of the apparently unjointed colony. The metamor- 
phosed lateral parts appear to be septa in the interior of the common 
body-space, and there are consequently only radial septa, for those 
which have been described as being perpendicular to these do not exist. 
The manner in which the buds follow one another in Cristatella is 
essentially the same as in other Lophopoda. ; 

In all the Phylactoloemata observed by the author the statoblast 
gives rise to a single primary individual, which forms the stock by 
budding in the same way as the younger branches are developed later 
on. The funiculus of Cristatella arises at the time when the gastric 
space is cut off in the lower part of the saccular primary knob by the 


* Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 503-9, 533-9. 


938 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


infolding of its two lamella. In the median line the cells of the outer 
layer become raised up in the form of a longitudinal ridge, which is 
bounded laterally by the continuation of the gastric folds. This ridge 
becomes separated from the mother-tissue and forms a connection 
between the body-wall and the base of the bud-sac. The funiculus is 
bilaminate at its point of origin; the ingrowth of ectodermal cells gives 
rise to the material from which the future statoblasts are built up. In 
the course of growth the origin of the funiculus becomes more and more 
separated from the polypide to which it belongs, and we find it at last 
at the peripheral boundary of the colony just above the foot. The 
author denies the secondary division of the cell-aggregates which form 
the statoblast into a cystogenous half and a formative mass, for the two 
arise quite separately from one another. In Cristatella the former 
arises as a blastula-like sphere, and is probably derived from a single 
cell. 

The cells of the formative mass gradually take on the form of 
spindles, and at the same time their contents wander round the yolk- 
spheres until at last the nucleus alone remains visible. The inner 
layer of the cystogenous half forms the ectoderm; the inner epithelium 
of the body-cavity and the muscles of the embryo arise from the cells of 
the formative mass. All the buds are richly nourished by the yolk, 
which remains in the closest connection with the cells of the inner 
epithelium, and consequently also with the cavities of the lophophore 
which are lined by it. 

The spermatozoa of Cristatella do not develope on the funiculus, but 
on the septa, and generally near the upper surface. The ova, as in 
Plumatella, are developed on the oral side of the cystid. In most points 
which he notes the author is found to differ from Verworn, but he 
confirms that observer’s statement as to the presence of an excretory 
organ in Cristatella. 


Arthropoda. 


Eyes of Arthropods.*—Dr. W. Patten continues his account of the 
structure of the eye of Arthropods by a history of the development of 
those of Acilius. He finds that the larval optic ganglion is composed of 
three segments, each of which is united with a segment of the brain on 
the one hand, and with a segment of the optic plate on the other. Each 
segment of the optic plate bears a pair of eyes. The ocelli are composed 
of four or more sensory spots or pits, each of which is supplied with a 
separate cuticular thickening and a nerve ; in the centre of each group 
of four sensory pits there is a single large nucleus, the significance of 
which is not yet understood. The pits of each eye finally unite to form 
a thickened patch of ectoderm, with a median double row of gigantic 
cells and a common cuticular thickening. The thickened ectoderm is 
invaginated to form an optic vesicle, the inner walls of which form the 
retina, while the surrounding indifferent ectoderm forms a third layer of 
cells over each vesicle; in this way a typical three-layered eye is 
produced. 

In the embryonic stages of eyes I.-IV., the retine of which are 
invaginated without the formation of a cavity in the optic vesicle - 
(unless, indeed, the space between the median row of gigantic cells be 


* Journal of Morphology, ii. (1888) pp. 97-190 (7 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 939 


such), all the rods are horizontal; in the full-grown larvee the smaller 
outermost rods become upright, but those that are larger and deeper 
retain their horizontal position. In eye V. there is at first a strong 
tendency to form horizontal rods, but the laterally flattened optic vesicle 
expands and forms a spacious cavity in the vesicle; all the rods, except 
those of the median row of gigantic cells, become upright. In eye VI., 
which has no median row of gigantic cells, no horizontal rods are 
formed. 

The outer wall of the optic vesicle in eyes I-IV. seems to be absent, 

its presence in the embryo being only indicated by a few characteristic 
nuclei between the retina and the corneagen. In eye V. the outer wall of 
the optic vesicle is represented by two great masses of inverted, rod- 
bearing cells, which are probably derived from two corresponding sensory 
spots. In eye VI. the outer wall is composed of a thin nucleated 
membrane, and a cluster of inverted retinal cells derived from a sense 
organ. 
Hye I. is composed of at least nine sensory spots, four of which, with 
their central nucleus and median row of giant cells, give rise to the hori- 
zontal retina; four more, exactly like the first, give rise to the vertical 
retina, and the ninth spot to the appendage. All these sense spots unite 
to form a simple homogeneous organ; but, during the later stages, the 
three groups of sensory spots become greatly modified, so that in the 
adult eye the parts to which they give rise are very different in structure. 
All the retinz are composed of retinophore, formed by the union of two 
cells; they contain two nuclei and two rods, and are supplied with axial 
and external nerve-fibres. Ganglionic cells are rarely found in the retina 
of Acilius. The rods are arranged in pairs, which form a mosaic of 
hexagonal figures when upright, and straight vertical lines when hori- 
zontal. In both sets the retinidial fibrille are set at right angles to the 
rays of light. 

All the larval ocelli of Acilius and of Dytiscus contain more or less 
distinct dimorphic retinal cells. The giant cells always form a double 
row along the bottom of the furrow; their free ends are bent at right 
angles, and bear short, but broad, horizontal rods. The ends of the 
smaller retinal cells, and, consequently their rods, may be horizontal, up- 
right or inverted. Between the two rows of giant rods are two sheets 
of coarse, vertical nerve-fibres and a layer of medulla-like substance. 
The pigment granules are deposited on the surface of the retinophore 
and around the external nerve-fibres. 

All the eyes are developed from the optic plate—the thickened distal 
edge of the cephalic lobes. On the proximal edge of this optic plate is 
a semicircular furrow, which gives rise to the optic ganglion. The furrow 
is deepened to form two distinct pockets which give rise to the first and 
second segments of the optic ganglion. The third segment is formed by _ 
an inward proliferation on the proximal side of the third segment of the 
optic plate. The innermost walls of the ganglionic segments are, from 
the earliest stages, connected with the inner face of the optic plate. 
Numerous ganglionic cells arise from the optic thickening, and wander 
along the optic nerves into the optic ganglion. Towards the close of 
this process, at about the time when the invagination of the sensory 
areas begins, enormous tripolar cells are formed in each eye, which pass 
along the optic nerve from the eye to the optic ganglion, dividing rapidly 
on the way, and producing small tripolar ganglion-cells. Only one of 


940 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


the proliferating cells retains its great sizo throughout life, and this 
finally takes up its position on one side of the medulla belonging to the 
eye from which it arose. 

The author thinks that the history of these cells affords excellent 
evidence in proof of the theory which explains the presence of inter- 
cellular nerve-fibres, by supposing them to be the outer ends of sensory 
cells, now converted into ganglionic cells. 

The optic ganglion of the convex eye of Arthropods is composed of 
three lobes; the first always, and the third sometimes, disappear; the 
second gives rise to the optic ganglion proper. The retinal ganglion is 
asecondary product, and is not formed by invagination. The three-lobed 
optic ganglion of the convex eye of Arthropods is derived from a three- 
segmented larval ganglion, every segment of which belongs to a pair of 
larval ocelli. The first, second, and third segments of the optic ganglion 
of Acilius-larve are respectively homologous with the second, first, and 
third lobes of the optic ganglion of the compound eye, and so it follows 
that the optic ganglion proper of the compound eye is derived from the 
first segment of the larval ganglion, or that one which is united with the 
large, posterior, dorsal ocellus. The optic ganglion contains six medulle, 
every one of which corresponds in structure to that of the ganglion to 
which it belongs, and this indicates that the arrangement of the medullary 
fibrilla is as nearly like that of the retinidial fibrille as existing con- 
ditions will allow. 

The structure of the retina in the larval ocelli of Insects is much like 
that of Myriopods, and the whole eye is composed on the same plan as 
that of Peripatus and of most Molluscs. Mr. Patten believes that the 
primitive ganglion-cells were tripolar, and were derived from tripolar 
neuro-epithelial cells. The outer extremities of these cells were re- 
duced to intercellular nerve-ends, the bases of which, in Acilius, became 
the protoplasmic prolongations of the ganglion-cells, and are, probably, 
homologous with the axis-cylinders of Vertebrates. 


Spermatogenesis of Arthropods.*—Prof. G. Gilson concludes his 
series of comparative researches on the spermatogenesis of Arthropods. 
The first part of his memoir contains an account of the spermatogenesis 
of Gamaside and Ixodide. (1) The mother sperm-cells multiply solely 
by binary segmentation. (2) Each resulting sperm-cell contains a large 
nucleus, rich in karyoplasma, lodging a nucleolus. The cell elongates, 
the nucleus likewise, the nucleolus retains its form. (3) The adult 
spermatozoa are free and immobile, but exhibit movements in the female. 

The greater part of Gilson’s memoir is devoted to a synthetic survey 
of his previous results. Throughout Arthropods, he discusses the struc- 
ture of the spermatozoa as regards form, nucleus, and protoplasm, and 
then notes the condition of the adult sperms when free or contained in 
the manifold spermatophores. His general conclusions are disappointing. 
He first notices the generalizations of Kélliker, Schweigger-Seidel, and 
de la Valette St. George, but does not admit that they are general or 
complete. Nor is he satisfied with the theory proposed by Sabatier, nor 
with the homologies pointed out by P. Geddes and J. A. Thomson. 
Gilson himself distinguishes three stages of cell-multiplication and 
differentiation, but maintains the impossibility of formulating any law of 
spermatogenesis. 


* La Cellule, iv. (1888) pp. 851-446 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 941 


Striped Muscle of Arthropods.*—Herr A. v. Gehuchten has re- 
investigated the much studied structure of the striated muscles of 
Arthropods. He distinguishes the yellow muscles of the appendages 
from the white muscles of the wings. 

(1) The muscles of the appendages. After describing the weli- 
known phenomena, the author notes the differences observed when the 
reagent is coagulatory in its action and when it is dissolvent. In the- 
fibre there are two portions, oue soluble in dissolvent reagent, the other 
persistent. The latter has a structure and takes the form of a network 
—it is the protoplasmic reticulum. 'The former is more or less fluid, 
rich in albumen and especially in myosin, it is the “‘ enchyléme myosique.” 
These two portions exist in the living fibre; the transverse strive of the 
clear zone and the longitudinal filaments of the darker band belong to 
the reticulum; the dull and homogeneous basis of the dark band is the 
enchylema. With a coagulating reagent the reticulum is rendered stiff 
and brittle; in the enchylema the albuminoid substances are céagulated 
around the longitudinal trabecule of the reticulum. The phenomena of 
discs, fibrils, &c., are explained in terms of these observations, and the 
structural identity of muscle-cell with any ordinary cell maintained. 

(2) In the muscles of the wings, the structure is quite different. 
There one finds the fibrils of Krause. ach fibril is inclosed in a 
cylindrical tube divided into cases by complete transverse membranes. 
The divisions are filled with enchylema. The fibrils are usually united 
into bundles (without sarcolemma) by interfibrillar granular substance. 
The striated muscles of Vertebrates agree in structure with what has 
been described in regard to the muscles of Arthropod appendages. 
Finally the complicated structure of the nuclei of the muscles in the 
frog is described. 


a. Lusecta. 


Primary Segmentation of the Germ-stripe of Insects.;—Prof. v. 
Graber has been investigating the early stages of development in Insects. 
He finds that the germ-band is at first either discoid (as in Stenobothrus 
and CHcanthus) or more elongated (as in Hydrophilus, Lina, &c.). The 
discoid portion corresponds chiefly to the antennary segment, while the 
primitive trunk has at first a comparatively slight extension. In a few 
cases two transverse grooves arise simultaneously, thus giving rise to 
three primitive segments, which appear to correspond to the three 
primary divisions of the adult body (head, thorax, and abdomen). The 
primitive trunk of the germ-band of Stenobothrus and Cicanthus is not 
segmented, as has been hitherto supposed for Insects, into the permanent 
segments (metameres or microsomites), but three larger sections (macro- 
somites) are formed. Of these three segments of the primitive trunk 
the first correspond to the sum of jaw-bearing metameres, the second to 
the sum of leg-bearing metameres, and the third to the abdomen. In 
the primary or macrosomitic segments of the primitive trunk of Steno- 
bothrus there is not merely an external jointing, but a complete division 
of the hypoblast. 

The secondary or microsomitic segmentation of the primitive trunk 
does not in Stenobothrus and Lina (any more than in Spiders—Morin) 


* Arch. Anat. u. Physiol. (Physiol. Abth.), 1888, pp. 560-4. 
t Morphol. Jahrb., xiv. (1888) pp. 345-68 (2 pls.). 
1888. 3.8 


942 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


progress, as is ordinarily supposed, from before backward, but first 
affects the median or thoracic primitive segment. 

It is clearly difficult to explain the tetramerism of the segmented 
primitive stage by the trimerism of the terminal stage, but it is clear 
that it must have some relation to certain stages of segmentation in the 
ancestor of the Insect, though none to any such few-jointed Arthropod 
form as, for example, the Nauplius. 


Germinal Layers of Meloe.*—Dr. J. Nusbaum gives a preliminary 
account of part of his researches on the embryology of the Meloide. 
He discusses the establishment of the germinal layers in Meloe pro- 
scarabeeus, which appears to be exceedingly well suited for such 
investigations. 

The segmentation nucleus divides into two, these into many 
vacuolated cells, which are scattered in the yolk and connected by fine 
anastomosing processes. Some of the cells remain in the yolk to form 
the so-called yolk-cells, others approach the surface and form a layer of 
blastoderm. On the third day the ventral plate and rudiment of the 
amnion are apparent; the former becomes segmented and the appendages 
become marked out; along with the development of the amnion the 
ventral groove becomes distinct, progressing from behind forwards, 
representing as in other insects the gastrula invagination. . 

From the disguised invagination a solid strand of primary endo- 
derym or endo-mesoderm results. This exhibits by the 7th-8th day 
a special posterior mass of cells, which on the 9th-10th day mingle 
with the yolk-cells, but have nothing to do with the mesenteron. The 
primary endoderm is differentiated into two large, paired, lateral, solid 
portions, and a smaller median part. In the lateral rudiments a narrow 
lumen appears in segmental fashion. The outer wall represents somato- 
pleure, but the inner forms not only the muscular, but the epithelial 
layer of the mid-gut. The central, unpaired, and inconspicuous portion 
serves merely to unite the paired endodermic rudiments of the mid-gut, 
except at the anterior end where it forms by broadening the greater 
part of the epithelial wall. In the yolk, which exhibits a sort of 
segmentation, the “ yolk-cells” long persist, but are finally absorbed. 

Nutrient Food-Material of Bees.t—Herr A. von Planta has made 
an examination of the food provided by the “nurses” for the larve of 
bees; he finds that for queens 69°38 per cent., for drones 72°75 per 
cent., and for workers 71°63 per cent. is water. The chemical com- 
position of the remaining solids is shown in the accompanying table :— 


Drones Drones 
Queens: (1-4 days). (after 4 days). Workers. 
Nitrogenous materials.. 45°14 55°91 S167 51°21 
Fatty os ae Reo 11:90 4°74 6°84 
Gincose 5 2 eS ae 0a 9°57 38°49 27°65 
[Ashes Uli 2 ee eee eeUe ae 2°02 ; 


As the food varies in composition the author is inclined to reject the 
theory that we have here to do with a secretion analogous to that of 
milk, and to support the theory of Schénfeld that the food comes from 


* Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 449-52. 


+ Notice by E. Bourquelot in Arch. Zool, Expér. et Gén., vi. (1888) pp. xiii,-xvi 
See Zeitschr. f. Phys. Chemie, xii. p. 327. : 7 CN) ae 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 943 


the stomach, and that its composition and degree of digestion are varied 
by the bee according to the age and sex of the larva. 


Odoriferous Glands of Blaps.*—Prof. G. Gilson thus sums up the 
principal results of his researches on the odoriferous glands of Blaps 
mortisaga and several other species: There exists in Blaps mortisaga a 
well-developed odoriferous apparatus formed by cells, the so-called uni- 
cellular cutaneous glands. These cells are grouped so as to form lobes 
resembling glandular tubes, but they are specialized in having an excretory 
tube connecting each cell with the exterior. Hach cell possesses a 
secreting apparatus consisting of four parts—a radial vesicle, a central 
ampulla, a thin excretory tube, and a tube-sheath analogous in structure 
to the radial vesicle. The solid portions of these parts are continuous 
with the reticulum of the protoplasm. The inner rays of the vesicle 
and of the sheath are regular, strengthened, radial trabecule of proto- 
plasm. The membrane of the vesicle, and those of the sheath, tube, and 
ampulla are similar in structure to the cellular and nuclear membranes ; 
they are productions of the protoplasm. The reticulum does not 
necessarily radiate from the nucleus of the cell; many of the trabeculae 
radiate from other protoplasmic structures such as the radial vesicle, the 
sheath, and the excretory tube itself. 


Alimentary Canal in Metamorphosis.j;—Dr. D. Casagrande reports 
the results of his researches on the transformation exhibited by the 
alimentary canal of Lepidoptera in the metamorphosis from the larval 
to the adult state. His research was based on the silkworm. The 
general conclusion of his investigation of this important point is as 
follows :—The epithelium of the cesophagus and of the hind-gut of the 
perfect insect is derived from the epithelium of the mid-gut ; in such a 
case the cesophageal and hind-gut epithelium in the adult insect cannot 
be regarded as ectodermic in origin as théy are in the larva, but must be 
endodermic, arising as they do from the mid-gut. 


Nerve-terminations in Lepidoptera.t—M. J. Chatin has studied the 
nerve-terminations in Lepidoptera. In the proboscis below the skin 
they form a rich network of fine filaments and cells. From multipolar 
cells fine prolongations proceed outwards and are lost between the 
elements of the hypodermis. In many cases (Sphinw, &c.) the nerve- 
filaments were observed to dilate into a fusiform cell and then to enter 
into relations with a tactile cell of the hypodermis. Soft cones with 
similar innervation were observed on various parts of the proboscis, on 
the labial palps, &c. 

In a further paper the author describes the nerve-terminations on the 
antenne of Tinea tapezella. Two types occur—tactile hairs and long 
soft cones. With these, nerve-filaments are associated as above described. 


Basal Spot on Palps of Butterflies.s—Herr E. Reuter states that in 
all the species of Butterflies (between two and three hundred) which 
he has examined there is at the base of the inner surface of the palps a 
naked spot which can always be easily seen. He consequently regards 
it as typical of the order Lepidoptera. It is generally well defined and 
ordinarily occupies the basal half of the first joint of the palp. The 


* La Cellule, v. (1888) pp. 1-21 (1 pl.). 

+ Bull. Soc. Entom. Ital., xix. (1887, pub. 1888) pp. 323-33 (8 pls.). 

t Boll. Soc. Entom. Ital., xix. (1887) pp. 188 and 367. Bull. Soc. Philom. 
Paris, x. and x1. (1887) p. 145. § Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 500-3. 


Ss 


944 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


rings or furrows discovered by Landois are always present, though often 
indistinct or incomplete. When present they ordinarily occupy the 
greater part of the basal spot, and are more or less parallel. They are 
best developed on the part of the surface which, in the natural position 
of the palps, is directed upwards and inwards; it is this part which is 
most commonly pressed against the basal part of the proboscis, which is 
provided with a raised ridge. 

In addition to these rings there are peculiar forms of hairs which do 
not seem to have ever yet been described. They are conical in form, 
chitinous, and surrounded at their base by a circular membrane ; they are 
all connected with nerve-fibres, on which, just before they enter the cone, 
a ganglionic swelling can be seen. There are several hundreds of these 
cones, and, in addition to them, there are immense numbers of similar, 
but much smaller, conical bodies. In the Microlepidoptera there are 
sometimes also pits or pores, and sometimes these pits are alone present. 

There can be no doubt that we have here to do with specific sensory 
organs, but what is the special sense we do not yet know. The author 
is inclined to think that it is of an olfactory nature. The cones exhibit 
the greatest variability and highest grade of development in the Rhopa- 
locera, and their variations may be of use in the definition of families 
and genera. In the Butterflies proper the organ in question is always 
much larger and better developed in the male than in the female. 


Development of Musca.*—Prof. O. Biitschli gives an account of some 
observations by two of his pupils, Herren C. Maurice and H. Debus, on 
the development of the fly; it is, unfortunately, so written as to be 
unintelligible without reference to the figures by which it is illustrated. 
It would appear that Musca differs from other Metazoa with a similar 
mode of development of the mesoderm in that the extended gastrula- 
invagination is only differentiated into endoderm and mesoderm at its 
hinder end, and that the greater part corresponds only to the part of the 
endoderm which forms the ccelomie diverticula. 


Larva of Sarcophila Wohlfartii in Gum of Man.t—Prof. E. Brandt 
relates a case of the presence of the larva of Sarcophila Wohlfartit in 
the gums of human patients. This viviparous creature is very active in 
the hot part of the day (from 1 p.m. to 4 p.m.), and attacks men sleeping 
in the open, and ungulates, but does not go into rooms or stalls. The 
gum of the patient was inflamed and swollen, but all troubles ceased as 
soon as the larva were pressed out. The larve found in this case were 
in the second stage of development, that marked by the possession of 
only two oral hooks, two stigmatic clefts on the hinder stigma-plates, 
and by the peculiar arrangement of the spines which has been figured by 
Portschinsky in his monograph. 


Brain of Smomya.t—Dr. G. Cuccati has investigated the minute 
structure of the brain of Somomya erythrocephala. 

The otic-ophthalmic bundle, the “corpo forcato” in the brain, the 
antennary lobes, the “ olfactory glomeruli,” the otic ganglia, the cerebral 
peduncles, &c., are referred to with appalling exactness, and the results 
are compared with the author’s previous investigation of the supra- 
cesophageal ganglia of Orthoptera. 


* Morphol. Jahrb., xiv. (1888) pp. 170-4 (2 figs). 
t Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 560-1. 
¢ Boll. Soc. Entom. Ital., xix. (1887, pub. 1888) pp. 286-8. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 945 


8B. Myriopoda. 


Phosphorescence in Myriopoda.—M. J. Gazagnaire,* in face of the 
discussion between Professors Dubois and Macé on phosphorescence in 
Myriopods, relates some observations which he has made himself. He 
found that, in Oryx barbarica, the whole of the ventral surface of the 
body was luminous; pressure alone was sufficient to give rise to the 
luminosity ; it was either total or localized in one or more rings. The 
light is seen on the sternal plates, and on the anterior and posterior 
plates of the episternum ; with the aid of a good hand-glass it is possible 
to detect the presence of a number of cutaneous pores on these plates. 
On contact these pores secrete a yellowish viscous substance of a peculiar 
odour ; in contact with air it dries rapidly ; it is insoluble in alcohol, and 
of an acid reaction. This substance is very phosphorescent, and the 
light which it emits is intense, persistent, and bluish-green. Owing to 
its viscosity it attaches itself to objects in contact with it, and makes 
them luminous for.a short time. In fact, this photogenic material 
behaves like the phosphorus of a match on moist fingers. The author 
thinks that we have here to do with a cutaneous secretion which eontains 
the photogenic matter, and he believes that in other species the facts are 
the same, and that the photogenic body is always secreted by glandular 
organs ventral in position. 

M. R. Blanchard f states that he collected a specimen of this luminous 
Myriopod; he found the phosphorescent matter attach itself to his 
fingers, and there show brightly for four or five minutes. He rubbed 
his fingers on his clothes, and he found that the rubbed parts also became 
luminous, and presented luminous waves absolutely identical with those 
of match-phosphorus; they disappeared gradually. It seems to him 
evident that the luminous substance is distributed over the whole length 
of the body, or at least over its greater part, and that it is a liquid or 
mucilaginous substance which is easily spread by rubbing. 


6. Arachnida. 


Relations of Structure and Function to Colour Changes in 
Spiders.j—The Rev. H. C. M‘Cook has some suggestive notes on the 
relations of structure and function to colour changes in spiders. He 
points out that as young spiders advance in age their colour deepens ; 
this must be explained by gradual hardening of the tissues making them 
more opaque, since, up to this period, no food has been taken. It is not 
until sedentary spiderlings have established themselves upon their own 
webs that the characteristic colours of the species begin to appear with 
any positive degree of distinctness. “Moulting seems to produce changes 
in colour-patterns of a very decided kind in some species; some organic 
change is probably the cause of this phenomenon. Advanced age, as a 
rule, makes the colours darker. In gravid females the changes of colour 
are often very decided; the lighter coloration is probably due to the 
skin being disturbed and more transparent. The action of the muscles 
on the skin and chitinous shell or walls, serves to compel certain 
aggregations of pigment along the lines of use. 

With regard to the relation of environment and habit to colour 


* Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xiii. (1888) pp. 182-6. 
+ Tom. cit., p. 186. ¢ Proc, Acad. Sci. Philad., 1888, pp. 172-6. 


946 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


changes, Dr. M‘Cook observed that spiders that live on plants as a rule 
have colours that are harmonious with the prevailing greens and yellows. 
Spiders that nest in stables, houses, on fences, &c., ordinarily have 
dusky colours, harmonious with the environment. Ground spiders 
generally have colours of neutral greys that blend well with the soil, 
rocks, or stalks of grass, especially when the last are somewhat dry. 

On the whole, we may conclude that many spiders that appear to be 
more exposed to enemies by reason of bright colours or greater size have 
developed, or at least possess special variations in industry and habits 
that in some degree are protective. But there are a number of apparent 
exceptions which require more careful study before any general deduction 
can be warranted. 

Development of Generative Organs in Arachnida.* — Herr V. 
Faussek makes a welcome contribution to our scanty knowledge of the 
development of the generative organs in Arachnida, in an investigation 
based upon Phalangium (cornutum?). When the segmentation of the 
ventral plate begins, the rudiments of the reproductive organs lie as a 
group of cells at the abdominal end of the embryo, protruding somewhat 
into the segmentation cavity. The boundaries of the closely packed 
cells are hardly distinguishable, the nuclei are large, the chromatin 
granules isolated. 

When nerve-cord, &c., are differentiated, the rudiment still lies as 
before, inclosed in the mesoderm at the hind end of the nerve-cord. It 
lies between the two mesoderm plates, in the future celom. In the 
liberated young, the rudiment is still an unpaired mass of cells, and soon 
it becomes a differentiated organ. Only the female organ was traced. 

As to the origin of the germinal cells no quite certain answer can yet 
be given. It seems very probable, however, that they arise directly from 
the yolk-cells, contemporaneously with the appearance of the germinal 
streak, and quite independent of the somatic cells of the blastoderm, If 
this is so, it is interesting as another illustration of the very early 
differentiation of the reproductive elements. 


Blood of Spiders.j—--M. V. Wagner has investigated the blood of 
spiders. It consists of a colourless liquid plasma in which float cor- 
puscles or blood-cells. Blood freshly drawn from an adult spider 
contains four kinds of cells, of which only two, the ameeboid and the 
coloured, are constant. These two forms have some properties in 
common, and have certain affinities of structure, but they differ widely in 
regard to other properties, and in their mode of multiplication. They 
also differ in origin, the former being mesodermic, the latter, endodermie. 
The other two kinds of cells are only provisional stages of the constant 
forms, and may be considered as the results of multiplication. The size 
of the blood-cells increases with the age of the animal. In an adult the 
proportion of the different forms of corpuscles, in the various regions of 
the body, is strictly defined. During growth the proportion varies con- 
stantly (in different stages), and periodically (in connection with the 
skin-casting). The proportion is altered periodically by the sudden 
appearance of the spherical forms whose number increases to excess 
after the casting of the skin. As these spheres represent the stage of 
multiplication in the constant forms, they indicate the intensity of the 


* Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 359-63. 
t Arch. Slav. Biol., iv. (1888) pp. 297-336. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 947 


processes in these cells at that time. This intensity may be explained, 
to some extent, by the slowness of the circulation during and immediately 
after the moulting. As only two forms are constant, it must obviously 
be those two which, from this point of view, are of most importance. 
The difference of reaction between the amceboid and the coloured cells, 
and the affinity between the amceboid cells and the leucocytes of higher 
animals, enable us to determine the réle of these elements, up to a certain 
point, with much probability, if not certainty. 


€. Crustacea. 


Castration of the Cray-fish.*—M. G. Stamati remarks that no one 
has yet attempted to castrate any animals except Mammals and Birds. 
He failed when he tried to inject by the male deferent ducts an aqueous 
solution of acetic acid, or to directly extirpate the gonad and duct; the 
best way is to remove the deferent duct by an incision in the membrane 
which separates the cephalothorax from the abdomen, by the insertion of 
very fine forceps. The animal must then be put into a very small 
amount of water, sufficient for breathing purposes, but not sufficient to 
enter the wound, which, after a time, heals. He promises to communi- 
cate what the results of this experiment are, but time is necessary for the 
observation of them. 


Digestion in Cray-fishes.t—M. G. Stamati has made some observa- 
tions on digestion in cray-fishes by the aid of gastric fistule. The fluid 
of the stomach produces almost instantaneously a permanent emulsion 
and saponification of a neutral oil; it converts cane-sugar into inverted 
sugar, changes uncooked starch into glucose, and forms peptones from 
proteid foods. The gastric juice, which is secreted continuously, was 
found to be formed by the so-called liver, which is a gland of double 
function, for, in addition to giving rise to the changes just enumerated, 
the gland contains glycogen, the quantity present of which varies with 
the food. Lecithin and cholesterin can be obtained from this gland. 
There is a colouring matter in the organ, but it cannot be said to be 
analogous to the biliary secretions of Mammals. Like some preceding 
writers, M. Stamati proposes to call this organ of double function a 
hepatopancreas. 


Innervation of Crabs’ Claws.t—Prof. W. Biedermann, in his 
twenty-first communication on the physiology of nerve and muscle, 
reports the results of his investigation of the innervation of crabs’ claws. 
In the first place he discusses the changes in form observed in the two 
antagonistic muscles under the influence of electrical stimulation of the 
nerves supplying the claws. In the second place, he describes the 
electromotor activities in the closing muscles on tetanic stimulation of 
the associated nerves. “All the observed consequences of indirect 
stimulation of the claw muscles of the crab seem to find their simplest 
explanation in the supposition that each of the two muscles is provided 
with two functionally distinct, inhibiting and stimulating nerves.” 
“These nerves, which, on the theory maintained by Lowit and Gaskell, 
may be described as ‘ Assimilirungs- and Dissimilirungsnerven,’ induce 
by their excitation opposite conditions in the muscle substance, which 


* Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xiii. (1888) pp. 188-9. t+ Ibid., pp. 146-51. 
{ SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, xevii. (1888) pp. 49-82 (4 pls.). 


948 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


find expression on the one hand in opposed changes of form, and on the 
other in contrary electromotor activities.” ‘ The mutual relation of the 
two processes simultaneously set up in the muscle, may have a different 
import in relation to the mechanical effect of stimulation, from that 
exhibited in relation to the electromotor activities.” The author points 
out that Fano’s experiments on the cardiac muscle of the tortoise also 
showed an imperfect agreement between the changes of form and the 
simultaneous electric phenomena. Finally, it is to be noted, as Gaskell’s 
researches have shown, that in several respects there are analogies 
between the innervation conditions of the cardiac muscle of Vertebrates 
and those of the claw muscles of crabs, as especially exhibited in the 
galvanic consequences of stimulation. 


‘Challenger’ Crustacea Macrura.*—Mr. C. Spence Bate has com- 
pleted his investigations into the 2000 specimens of macrurous Crustacea 
which were collected during the voyage of H.M.S. ‘Challenger.’ In 
addition to the detailed descriptions of this vast quantity of material, the 
author gives an interesting introduction in which he treats of the 
morphology of the group. With slight modifications, the classification 
proposed in 1883 by Prof. Huxley is accepted, the group being divided 
into the Trichobranchiata, Dendrobranchiata (= Penwidea, Dana), 
Phyllobranchiata, and Ammobranchiata, 


Structure of Asellus.t—Herr B. Rosenstadt has investigated the 
structure of Asellus aquaticus and related Isopods, and notes the points 
in which his results differ from those of Sars. 

(1) Vascular system. The heart begins at the boundary of the fourth 
and fifth segment, and extends into the reduced abdominal segments, 
The two pairs of venous ostia are symmetrically disposed. The aorta 
becomes smaller till it reaches the cardiac portion of the fore-gut, where 
it expands into a vesicular enlargement, and gives off two ophthalmics, 
a peri-cesophageal ring, and branches to antenne and brain. From the 
heart there also rise two lateral arteries, three pairs of thoracics, and a 
fourth pair to the reduced abdomen. The peri-cesophageal ring is 
continued into a ventral artery, connected by seven pairs of vessels with 
the thoracics. There are no branchio-pericardial vessels. On the dorsal 
surface of the heart of Asellus embryos are two delicate strands, also 
seen in Idotea and Jaera, and regarded by Claus as sympathetic nerves. 
The peculiarities of Jaera are discussed. 

(2) The Nervous system of Asellus and other Isopods is then de- 
seribed, but the results are chiefly corroboratory of Brandt and other 
previous investigators. (3) In regard to the alimentary system, two 
pear-shaped glandular sacs on the posterior end of the upper lip of 
Asellus, and similar glands are described. The structure of the gut is 
briefly discussed. In the mid-gut gland only epithelial cells of different 
sizes were to be seen. Weber’s hepatic cells and ferment-cells are large 
and small stages of the same kind of cells. 

(4) Excretory system. At the base of the outer antenne lies a rudi- 
mentary antennary gland. Coiled canals by the side of the stomach 
contained urates, and were seen to open by a duct on the base of the 
second maxille. This gland, seen in six genera, seems to be really a 
shell-gland, such as Claus has observed in Apseudes. (5) Reproductive 


* ‘Challenger’ Reports, lii. (1888) xe. and 942 pp. (157 pls.). 
+ Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 452-62. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 949 


system. Schobl’s observations in regard to the changes in the females 
after impregnation are confirmed. After the moulting the female 
aperture is lost, and a brood-chamber developes. After young have been . 
‘borne twice, the female moults and regains its apertures. 


Sexual Dimorphism in Amphipoda.*—Prof. T. Barrois finds that 
Mera integrimana Hiller is the female of M. scissimana Costa, and that 
M. Donatoi of Hiller is, similarly, not a good species, but the female of 
M. grossimana Montagu. 


Development of Gammarus.t—Dr. Sophie Pereyaslawzewa com- 
municates the first of a series of researches on the development of 
Amphipods. The present memoir deals with Gammarus pecilurus Rthk. 

The living egg is first described in its initial and subsequent stages. 
The author then briefly discusses the modifications exhibited previous to 
segmentation. The segmentation itself and the establishment of the 
layers are described. The derivation of the organs of the three layers 
is followed in detail. Amceboid movements were observed in the 
embryonic cells, especially in those of the endoderm, and this not only 
in Gammarus, but also in Caprella and Orchestia. The author reserves 
general deductions until a larger number of forms have been investigated 
by herself and her students. An appreciation of the results will then 
be more readily made. 


European Daphnide.{—Dr. E. Eylmann gives a valuable systematic 
account of Kuropean Daphnide. After giving a diagnosis of the family, 
he distinguishes the five genera—Daphnia, Simocephalus, Scapholeberis, 
Ceriodaphnia, and Moina. ‘The (forty-seven) species are then diagnosed 
in detail. Daphnia curvirostris is noted as a new species. Tables for 
specific identification, and one showing the distribution, increase the 
value of this systematic monograph. 


Orchestia.s—M. E. Chevreux has a note on the presence of Orchestia 
Chevreuxi at Teneriffe, and a description of the male of this species. 
With regard to the locomotor activity of this genus, he observed that, 
in O. littorea, the posterior part of the abdomen was always folded under 
the body when the creature was moving on a horizontal plane, and that 
the last five pairs of thoracic limbs were alone used. It was evident 
that the longer they were the more easily could the creature move, so 
that we may ascribe the difficulty of capturing O. Chevreuai to the great 
length of its appendages. In an earlier essay || the author has some 
remarks on the adaptation of Amphipods to a terrestrial mode of life. 


Ameebocytes of Crustacea./—Dr. G. Cattaneo has a preliminary 
notice of the amcebocytes of Crustacea, in which he discusses the struc- 
ture and spontaneous modifications of the amceboid cells of Carcinus, 
their histological phenomena, and their variations in different surround- 
ings and under the influence of various reagents. Prof. F. Leydig ** 
calls attention to his description of similar bodies in his ‘ Natur- 
geschichte der Daphniden,’ published in 1860. There, too, are to be 
found some observations on the corpuscles found in the blood and other 
tissues of sick caterpillars. 


* Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xiii. pp. 57-9. 

+ Bull. Soc. Nat. Moscou, 1888, pp. 183-219 (4 pls.). 

t Ber. Nat. Gesell. Freiburg, ii. (1887) pp. 61-148 (5 pls.). 

§ Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xiii. (1888) pp. 92-6, || Tom. cit., pp. 59-66. 
{ Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 452-5. ** Tom. cit., pp. 515-6. 


950 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Vermes. 
a, Annelida. 


External Morphology of Hirudinea.*—Dr. 8. Apithy has made a 
close study of the external body-form of Leeches. The typical somites 
are found in the mid-body, and consist of a number of rings, constant 
within the limits of the genus, and having, either in part or all, special 
distinguishing marks. Among the Rhynchobdellide Branchellion and 
Clepsine have three rings, Calliobdella, Ichthyobdella, and Pontobdella 
six, Piscicola twelve ; the Gnathobdellide have five rings. All the rings 
have tactile goblets, of which Piscicola has eighteen in a transverse row; 
there are also one internal and one external paramedian, one external 
and one internal paramarginal, and one marginal goblet on the boundary 
of the rings. These goblets contain a group of specific epithelial cells, 
which always carry a tactile seta each. Further distinguishing marks 
are afforded by the plexiform superficial pigment which forms dark 
transverse bands, and by the position of the nephridiopores. The 
special marks of the several rings are regularly repeated in each somite 
in which the ring is present, and the absence of these marks indicates 
the absence of certain rings. 

All the somites of the other parts of the body are only modifications 
of the typical somites of the mid-body. These modifications are seen 
in the more or less well-marked character of the rings, in the appearance 
of certain superficial foldings of the skin, and in the smoothing out of 
foldings which are found in the somites of the mid-body ; but the most 
marked character is the shortening and reduction of the somite, due to 
change in or loss of function. 

The first form of shortening is the simple reduction in length of the 
somite, without any fusion of the ring. In the mid-body the somites 
are all of much the same length, except where secondary extension of 
certain parts of the enteron combined with a thickening of the body has 
produced a certain increase in length of the somite. It is to be noted, 
however, that, in all genera, there is a regular increase in length of the 
somite from the clitellum to the end of the body, and from the hinder 
boundary of the mid-body to the sucking disc. 

The second form of shortening is the fusion of certain rings, ordi- 
narily belonging to the same third of a somite, with one another, so that 
in some genera where the typical somite consists of six rings, there are 
only three independent rings. It is rare for rings of different thirds to 
become fused by the secondary adaptation of tegumentary folds. When 
a somite of the Rhynchobdellide is reduced the reduction is first seen in 
the hinder ring; if the reduction goes further the second ring is affected, 
and beyond this reduction never goes. 

This law of reduction is due to the relation of the general function 
of the typical somite to the three thirds of the internal somite. As soon 
as a change of function of a given part of the body causes certain organs 
to become superfluous, that third of the internal somite with which that 
function or group of functions was connected disappears also; the 
remaining third or thirds are developed at the cost of what has dis- 
appeared. The hinder third contains no organs which are necessary for 
absolute existence, and so it is the first to disappear; on the other hand, 


* Mittheil. Zool. Stat. Neapel, viii. (1888) pp. 153-232 (2 pls.), 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 951 


the first third contains the most important, and so it is always retained. 
Although this disappearance must have been quite gradual phyloge- 
netically, yet in ontogeny the result alone is seen, the reduced somite 
being reduced in the embryo. On the other hand, all the shortenings, 
reductions, and fusions of the rings, and the appearance characteristic 
of the species or bearing on their sexual life, are put off to a late 
embryonic stage, or, more frequently, till post-embryonie life. The 
Gnathobdellide follow the same laws as the Rhynchobdellide. 

The author makes some critical remarks on Mr, Whitman’s explana- 
tion of the external morphology of the Hirudinea. 

If we sum up what is known as to the external morphology of these 
forms, we may say that the Hirudinea have an elongated body which, as 
a rule, tapers at both ends; it is smooth externally and is provided with 
regularly distributed folds of the integument; it is always distinctly 
ringed, and is, in cross section, rounded or horizontally oval; it only 
becomes flattened secondarily, and its length is, proximately, due to the 
number of rings found in each somite. The body is always made up of 
thirty-three distinct somites, each of which possesses u ganglion consist- 
ing of six ganglionic capsules, which become more closely approximated 
to one another at either end than elsewhere, without undergoing any 
greater modifications. The somites shorten regularly towards either 
end of the body, and at the same time become more or less reduced. 
The number of non-reduced somites is characteristic of the genus, but 
the extent and mode of reduction are generally specific characters only ; 
they have no direct connection with the phylogeny of the whole order. 

The whole body may be divided into six functionally different 
regions, all of which, with the exception of the anal, consist of six 
somites each; they are the cephalic or suctorial region, the clitellar 

region, the region of the fore- and that of the hind-gut, the anal region, 
and that of the attaching disc. 'The cephalic region has, in the interest 
of a semi-parasitic mode of life, been more or less converted into a 
sucker; this is a thickening of the end of the body; the apparently 
secondary anus is in the form of a transverse cleft which, at a late period, 
breaks through the skin in the middle line of the back. The final 
region hag a disc, the size and form of which is in direct connection 
with the grade of parasitism, and which, in non-parasitic forms, is chiefly 
used as a locomotor organ. The clitellum occupies somites 10-12, 
and is more or less secondarily modified, its form varying in different 
families ; the male generative orifice is on the eleventh and the female 
on the twelfth somite. The relative size of the mid-body is an adapta- 
tion to the quantity of food which the genus has to obtain; its median 
segments, or somites 14-23, are typical of genus and species. 

In all Hirudinea there is a highly developed tactile sense, and 
eighteen longitudinal rows of tactile goblets; in some genera the 
marginal line is distinguished by larger goblets, and so presents a 
distinct homology to the lateral lines of the Capitellide. Eyes, which 
in the more highly developed genera perceive light, colour, and probably 
even form, are best developed in the fresh-water forms. 

Specific glands are present in the form of special chitin-glands which 
are used to form the cocoon, and, when no cocoon is made, as in some 
species of Clepsine, they form an embryonic attaching gland. 

The author believes that the Hirudinea form an order of Annulata 
parallel to the Chetopoda. In later times there appears to be a tendency 


952 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


to revert to a free, carnivorous life, which, starting from Pontobdella 
and Branchellion, culminates in Aulostoma and Hemadipsa. The most 
parasitic forms are all marine, emancipation from the parasitic mode of 
life having gone on in fresh water; the most parasitic are by far the 
richest in individuals, but very poor in species. Ichthyobdella appears 
to be the link between the free Annulate ancestor and the Selachian 
parasites Pontobdella and Branchellion. Cylicobdella leads through 
Lumbricobdella to Nephelis, and by another line to Hirudo, and Heema- 
dipsa, and to Aulostoma. Piscicola leads to Clepsine. The author 
appears to have examined a large number of species of Leeches, some of 
which seem to be new, but are not here diagnosed. 


Nerve-endings in the Leech.*— Herr J. F. Heymann has in- 
vestigated the nerve-endings in the unstriped muscle-fibres of the leech. 
His results differ from those of previous investigators. Thus, besides 
the ventral visceral nerve there are two quite similar in a dorsal position. 
The main nerve-plexus lies between the circular and longitudinal sheath 
of muscles. This is known to be connected with a peripheral or inter- 
muscular, but what the exact endings were has been doubtful. According 
to the author distinct terminal plates may occur on the terminal fibrils, 
or these may be absent. Sometimes one muscle-fibre was seen to have 
four associated terminal plates. In the lateral contractile vessels the 
author maintains the existence of two muscle-layers, circular and longi- 
tudinal, but formed from the same fibres. Their innervation and the 
termination of the fibrils in ovoid knots are described. Finally, Herr 
Heymann describes how the lateral nerves from the ventral chain are 
associated with the voluntary muscles. Each twig ends in a granular 
plate in and not on the contractile sheath of the muscle-fibre. 


Creeping Movements of Earthworm.{—In the course of experiments 
on earthworms Herr B. Friedlinder was led to make some interesting 
observations in regard to their creeping movements. If some of the 
posterior segments of an earthworm be cut off, the animal acts quite 
normally ; it bores at once into the earth. But if some of the anterior 
segments be cut off, the worm begins at once to move and twist violently, 
and creeps about for a time. It soon becomes quiet, however, and may 
lie on damp earth for weeks without moving. On the slightest irritation 
it awakes out of its passivity, moves or creeps about for a little, but 
soon relapses into its former lethargy. Still more interesting is the 
following experiment, A ventral lateral incision was made about the 
middle of a worm, and a small portion of the nerve-cord removed. Herr 
Friedliinder found, to his astonishment, that worms which had been 
so treated crept exactly like normal animals. In explanation, he dis- 
cusses the possibility of the stimulus being transmitted directly from 
muscle to muscle, but gives reasons against the probability of this. He 
is inclined to believe that the pull is transmitted in a purely mechanical 
way through the enervated region, and that the rest is reflex. He 
supposes that “a longitudinal extension sets up a longitudinal contraction 
as a reflex movement, and thus the locomotion of the normal and of the 
injured worm are explicable in one and the same way.” His facts, he 
submits, at least remain. 


* Arch. Anat. Physiol. (Physiol. Abth.), 1888, pp. 556-60. 
+ Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 363-6. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 953 


Excretory Organs of Criodrilus.*—Dr. R. 8. Bergh describes the 
ontogeny of the excretory organs in Criodrilus. They arise entirely in 
the somatic muscle-plate, without any relation to or connection with the 
rudiments of the adjacent segments. Funnel, coil, and terminal portions 
are differentiated from a common rudiment. The funnel is formed 
chiefly from a cellular material, derived from the divisions of the funnel 
cell, and its cavity arises from the subsequent separation of the cells. 
The lumen of the coiled portion arises from fusion by vacuoles appearing 
within the cells. The terminal portion bores in between the epidermic 
cells, and breaking through forms an external aperture. 

After a chapter devoted to a critical review of the results reached by 
Kowalewsky, Kleinenberg, Whitman, Hatschek, Vejdovsky, and Wilson, 
the author passes to describe the pair of provisional excretory organs 
which are present in Criodrilus embryos before the segmental organs 
are established. The pair of primitive kidneys consist of perforated 
cells, and form white strands, very readily seen, though hitherto over- 
looked. They have their blind beginning beside the cesophagus, and in 
the head-cavity lie close to the epithelium of the gut. From their origin 
they extend backwards, arching towards the back, but bend again 
ventrally, and open to the exterior on the side of the body about the 

middle of its length. 


8. Nemathelminthes. 


Abnormal Ova of Ascaris megalocephala.j—M. A. Lameere has 
found two female specimens of Ascaris megalocephala, in which the ova 
have retained the club-shaped form which they ordinarily have only in 
the upper part of the oviduct. Most of these eggs were non-fecundated. 

The external hyaline layer becomes thickened at the slender end of the 
cell; in the neighbouring region the protoplasm is clearer than in the 
rest of the egg; on each side of the handle of the club there is a con- 
striction which corresponds to a circumference which bounds a surface 
that is distinctly folded. This region clearly corresponds to the part 
which constitutes the primitive form of the oviducal eggs. It is in 
that part that, in the first period of maturation, when the eggs begin to 
be gradually ellipsoidal in form, there is a groove in which the polar 
dise is differentiated. The author believes that the germinal vesicle 
tends to advance in a direction opposite to the pole of impregnation. 


Heterodera Schachtii.t—M. Willot points out that, like Dr. Steubell, 
he has recommended the use of sea-salt as a means of killing this nema- 
tode. Curiously enough their objects were different, for M. Willot was 
seeking what he calls a nematocide, while the German naturalist was 
trying to keep the worms alive, and did not see the bearings of his 
observations on economic husbandry. 


y. Platyhelminthes. 


General Sketch of the Trematoda.§—Under this title Mr. W. E. 
Hoyle has reprinted, with additions, his article on the Trematoda from the 
ninth edition of the ‘ Encyclopedia Britannica.’ The ordinary historical 


* Arbeit. Zool.-Zoot. Inst. Wiirzburg, viii. (1888) pp. 223-48 (2 pls.). 
+ Bull. Acad. R. Sci. Belg., lvii. (1888) pp. 980-4 (1 pl.). 

t Comptes Rendus, evii. (1888) pp. 507-9. 

§ 8vo, Edinburgh, 1888, 19 pp., 4 pls. of woodcuts. 


954 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


introduction is followed by an account of the anatomy and life-history 
of the common liver-fluke, and that by a few words on pathological 
and economic relations. A sketch is given of the generally received 
systematic arrangement of the group; in discussing the phylogenetic 
relations of the Trematoda attention is called to Fewkes’s description of 
a marine cercaria which had a tail distinctly annelid in character, 
with bundles of bristles disposed at intervals along it. 


Aspidogaster conchicola.*—Herr A. Voeltzkow has investigated the 
structure and life-history of the Trematode Aspidogaster conchicola dis- 
covered by Von Baer in the fresh-water mussel. His general results 
are as follows:—The parasite occurs in the pericardium, the kidney, 
and the red-brown organ of Anodonta and Unio. It lived four to five 
weeks in a weak salt solution. The alimentary system consists of a 
protrusible pharynx with salivary glands, and a sac-shaped gut with 
amoeboid epithelial cells. The nervous system is well developed. The 
sucker includes tasting organs and mucus-glands. The water-vascular 
system consists of an expelling tube with a terminal bladder and foramen 
and of the ciliated vessels throughout the body. The male side of the 
reproductive system consists of testis, vas deferens, seminal vesicle, 
prostate, penis sheath, and penis. The female system exhibits an ovary, 
a “fallopian tube,” oviduct and vulva, and also a triangular “ ootyp ” or 
junction of fallopian tube, oviduct, and duct of the “ yolk-receptacle.” 
There are two pairs of yolk-glands, two yolk-ducts ending in a yolk- 
vesicle, which opens into the oviduct. Hitherto undescribed is a special 
receptaculum vitelli opening into the ootyp. There is no internal fer- 
tilization. 

The differentiation of the perfect sucker from the embryonic structure 
is accomplished by the development of transverse, median longitudinal, 
and two external ridges. The ovum undergoes total segmentation. 
As in other Trematodes an insheathing membrane is formed from cap- 
shaped cells. The water-vascular system arises from the primitive 
secreting organ. The essential reproductive organs are mesodermic ; 
penis, vulva, receptaculum vitelli, and the associated ducts are ecto- 
dermic in origin. The young animals enter the gut, pass their early 
stages there, and pass through the gut, where it traverses the red- 
brown organ and pericardium. In an appended paper, Herr Voeltzkow 
discusses A. limacoides, a new species described by Diesing. 


Holostomum.}—Herr G. Brandes has a preliminary notice of his re- 
searches on the genus Holostomum. A comprehension of its anatomy and 
gencral form is not easy, as it has been reported to exhibit very different 
arrangements from those generally seen in Trematodes.. Linstow, for 
example, has spoken of the dorsal as the ventral side. The author 
explains the morphology of Holostomum by reference to the simpler 
characters presented by Hemistomum. The former may be shown to 
exhibit the following characters :—The ovary lies in the anterior third 
of the hind-body, and the paired testes are a little way behindit. The 
oviduct, after some coils above the first testis, gives off the canal of 
Laurer to the dorsal surface, then passes between the two testes, becomes 
united with the unpaired yolk-duct, passes into the shell-gland, and 
becomes a uterus. ‘This extends as far as the anterior pole of the hind- 


* Arbeit. Zool.-Zoot. Inst. Wiirzburg, viii. (1888) pp. 249-292 (6 pls.). 
t Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 424-6, 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 955 


body, then bends round and extends along the ventral surface of the 
animal as far as the hinder pole of the body, where it ends in the 
generative cone. At the base of this cone the efferent duct of the 
vesicula seminalis opens into the uterus; the yolk-glands, which extend 
over the whole ventral surface of the worm, pass the yolk into an un- 
paired duct by transverse ducts which arise at the level of the shell- 
gland. The excretory pore is found on the dorsal surface, and almost 
at the extreme end of the animal. 


Tenia cucumerina in Man.*—Prof. H. Brandt gives an account of 
two cases of Tenia cucumerina in Man. From one patient forty-eight 
specimens, which varied in length from ten to thirty-five centimetres, 
were expelled ; this large number had set up enteric irritation and dis- 
turbances of the nervous system. The patient, a peasant boy of fourteen, 
used to play with and caress a mastiff, which had lately become offensive 
from the “lice” with which it was affected. Prof. Brandt has no doubt 
that the “louse” was Trichodectes. In the second case thirty examples 
were expelled after treatment, all with heads; the patient was in the 
habit of playing with a King Charles’s spaniel which was troubled with 
Trichodectes. 


Tenia saginata.j—Dr. F. Tuckerman has a supplementary note { 
on this tape-worm, based on a second, even more remarkable, specimen. 
The worm appears to have had a total length of 8:253 metres, but the 
number of joints (727) is considerably below the number allowed by 
most authorities to a much smaller worm.. The smallest segment was 
1 mm. broad and 2 mm. long; the largest 4:5 mm. across, with a length 
of 31 mm. Several of the joints were 2 mm. thick. Supernumerary 
joints were not infrequent. One sexually mature segment is so bent as 
to form a right angle. 


5. Incertze Sedis. 


Contractile Vesicle of Rotifers.§$—M. L. C. Cosmovici thinks that 
the characters of the contractile vesicle of Rotifers have hitherto been 
misunderstood. He considers that, anatomically, it is nothing but a 
cloaca. He thinks its function is to drive out the water which has 
passed into a digestive tube, and not to expel the perivisceral fluid. 


Haplodiscus piger.||—Mr. W. F. R. Weldon gives an account of the 
remarkable new pelagic organism discovered by himself in the Bahamas. 
In its mode of progression and superficial likeness to a protozoon it has 
a strong resemblance to Leptodiscus medusoides of R. Hertwig. 

The body-wall is formed dorsally of two, and ventrally of three 
layers; dorsally, the cuticle is an apparently structureless or very finely 
granular layer, while ventrally there is, beneath the layer which is like 
the dorsal cuticle, an inner layer which appears in section as a very 
narrow transversely striated band. A muscular layer seems to be 
present on the ventral surface only; in the region of the ductus ejacula- 
torius some of the fibres pass inwards to form part of the sheath of that 
organ. Beneath the layer of transverse fibres there is a longitudinal 


* Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 481-4. + Ibid., pp. 473-5. 

t See this Journal, 1888, p. 427, where by an error the account, which is by 
Dr. Tuckerman, is ascribed to Dr. J. G. Stanton, from whom the specimen was 
received. § Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xiii, (1888) pp. 167-9. 

|| Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., xxix. (1888) pp. 1-8 (1 pl.). 


956 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEAROHES RELATING TO 


layer which appears to be much less important. A protoplasmic tunic, 
perforated only by the ductus ejaculatorius, forms the innermost layer 
of the body-wall; it consists of an irregular layer of granular proto- 
plasm, in which nuclei are imbedded at frequent intervals, but which 
does not show any trace of division into distinct cells. From its inner 
wall numerous processes are given off which anastomose with one 
another in the cavity of the body, and so form a reticulum which is 
continuous with or forms an investment for the remaining organs of the 
animal. A number of mucous glands which open to the exterior are 
imbedded in the tunic. 

The brain is transversely elongated, and is imbedded in the tissue at 
the anterior end of the body; it is composed of a mass of fibres, below 
which is a layer of nerve-cells; a nerve of precisely the structure of the 
brain goes on each side for a short distance round the edge of the 
creature, 

The mouth is merely a small perforation of the ventral cuticle, round 
which the muscles and other tissues do not seem to have undergone any 
special modification; the alimentary tract consists of a large mass of 
protoplasm, continuous at the sides of the mouth with the general tunic; 
nuclei seem to be absent, except occasionally at the edge of the mass. 
Vacuoles are frequently found, containing generally small crustaceans 
in various stages of decomposition. It is possible that prey are captured 
by the protrusion of pseudopodia from the mouth. 

There is a single testis and a pair of ovaries ; the former is a mass 
of large, deeply staining cells, not separated by any definite investing 
membrane from surrounding structures; the spermatozoa do not appear 
to have vibratile tails; the seminal vesicle is simply a space in the 
general somatic reticulum, which is a little larger than usual. The 
ductus ejaculatorius appears to be lined by a thick continuation of the 
ventral cuticle. The ovaries each contained less than twenty ova; each 
ovum is granular in young and spongy in older specimens; the large 
vesicular nucleus has a reticulum, which generally breaks up during the 
preparation of sections; the nucleolus is a remarkable rounded structure 
of considerable size; the ova are, for a time at any rate, surrounded by 
a delicate follicular epithelium ; no oviduct could be made out, and it is 
suggested that the ova escape by the mouth. The author was unable to 
form any opinion as to the presence or absence of an excretory system. 
Neglecting it, the other characters of Haptodiscus seem to be exactly 
such as might be looked for in a free-living Cestode which had either 
retained or acquired a mouth. On the other hand, it may be conceived 
to be a Cestode or Trematode larva which had acquired reproductive 
organs. 


Echinodermata. 


Anatomy of Echinothurida and Phylogeny of Echinodermata.* 
Drs. P. and F, Sarasin have issued another part of their beautifully 
illustrated account of their researches in Ceylon; the description of the 
anatomy of the Echinothurida is chiefly based on their new species 
Asthenosoma urens. The skeleton is first dealt with; the ambulacral 
primary plates do not fuse to form secondary plates. The oral area is 
just like that of the Cidarida, being covered by five double rows of 
imbricating plates, each of which is perforated by an ambulacral pedicle. 


* Ergebnisse Naturw. Forschungen auf Ceylon, i. (1888) pp. 83-154 (8 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 957 


The interambulacral area of the buccal membrane, in the outer margin 
of which the gills are placed, is not completely covered by the lateral 
processes of the ambulacral plates; it is proposed to call the narrow 
intermediate band the branchial area. ‘This is covered by delicate 
calcareous plates, and not, as in the Cidaride, by plates which are as 
thick as those of the ambulacral rows. The central anal orifice is sur- 
rounded by concentric circles of small calcareous plates; the genital 
and ocular plates are arranged in a single circle. The former are not 
perforated by the genital pores, nor is the so-called ocular tentacle 
always surrounded by the ocular plate. 

The remarkable vermiform movements observed by Wyville Thomson 
in living specimens of Asthenosoma hystrix have never been explained. 
The authors have d:scovered five pairs of powerful longitudinal muscles 
running between the ambulacra and interambulacra; these have the 
form of broad semilunar lamelle, which consist of a number of separate 
bundles, one or more of which take their origin from the ambulacral 
plates. The separate cords take a radial direction, and are collected at 
a centrum tendineum; they may be called the musculi motores corone ; 
others are inserted into the buccal membrane, and may be called the 
motores membrane buccalis. The fibres are smooth. These muscles 
serve also as suspenders of the enteric canal. After discussing the 
resemblance of these muscles to the longitudinal muscles of Holothurians, 
the authors point out the bearing of the facts on the homology of the 
calcareous ring of Holothurians, which Johannes Miiller compared with 
certain parts of the “lantern” of Echinoids, but which later authors 
have rather regarded as homologous with the auricles. Their account 
serves to support the correctness of Miiller’s view. 

The organs of Stewart are well developed in Asthenosoma urens, and 
probably also in all other Echinothurids; as this group is regarded by 
the authors as the oldest of Echinoids, their presence in the Cidarida 
must be due to inheritance, and the separation of the latter as 
Entobranchiata (Bell) from all other Echinoids must be given up. 
Rudiments of these organs were long since found by Ludwig in the 
Diadematide, and the authors state that they have discovered rudiments 
in Toxopneustes pileolus. : 

The function of a renal organ is ascribed to the well-known brown 
body which accompanies the stone-canal, and which has already had so 
many names given to it, and so many functions ascribed to it. This 
organ has a central cavity throughout the whole of its length, which 
ends blindly in the immediate neighbourhood of the pericesophageal 
ring, while it narrows towards the madreporite and becomes a fine canal, 
which may be called the ureter. This ureter unites with the stone-canal 
into a common collecting vesicle, which lies just beneath the madreporic 
plate, with the canaliculi of which it is connected. These observations 
are confirmatory of the descriptions of some recent French anatomists. ~ 
The walls of the central cavity are surrounded by branched glandular 
lobes, which are themselves hollow; all these lateral ducts open into 
the central space. The glandular tubes themselves are imbedded in a 
ground-substance of connective tissue; they contain large vesicular 
elements, which are generally arranged in several layers; these vesicles 
contain a nucleus surrounded by a rather fine protoplasm, which gives 
off delicate processes in various directions; these elements call to mind 
the renal cells of Helicide. Connected with the glandular lobes are 

1888. avr 


958 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


funnels which open freely into the ecelom. Blood circulates in the stroma 
of connective tissue, and chemical investigations are alone now wanting 
to complete the proof of the renal nature of this much discussed organ. 
This kidney must be regarded as an annex of the water-vascular system. 

After a short notice of the poison-glands the authors pass to a con- 
sideration of the affinities of the Echinothuride, and the phylogeny of 
the Echinodermata. The former may be regarded as an independent 
sub-group of the Echinoidea, distinguished by the flexibility of the test, 
the imbrication of its plates, the presence of longitudinal motor muscles, 
small spines invested in tegumentary sheaths, and the great development 
of the organs of Stewart. They are most nearly allied to the Cidaride 
on the one hand and the Diadematide on the other, but of the three they 
are the oldest. They share the imbrication of all the plates of the body 
with the Paleechinide, which is only an early condition in the Cidaride ; 
in the great majority of the Perischoechinide the test is flexible. In 
some Asthenosomas the genital orifices are not yet connected with the 
genital plates, as in most other Echinids. The apical area of A. urens is 
very like that of Palaechinus elegans, and appears to be of an older type 
than that of the Cidaride. As to the absence of external gills in the 
Cidarids, it is possible that they are present in the young and are lost 
later on, and the possession of buccal clefts would support this view. 
The investiture of the spines in tegumentary sheaths is an eminently 
embryonic arrangement, for, as is well known, it is seen in the ontogeny 
of all the Euechinoidea. The organs of Stewart in the Cidaride are as 
rudimentary as those of the Diadematide, and they arise from a common 
source which is to be found in the Echinothuride. 

The authors bring forward a number of considerations which induce 
them to support the view, not now suggested for the first time, that the 
Echinoids are derived from the Holothurians; they think that Perrier’s 
observations on the development of Comatula advance the proof that the 
Crinoids may be referred to the same source. They have less to say 
with regard to the Asteroids and Ophiuroids, but Agassiz has shown 
that Asteroids pass through a Holothuria-stage. As to the derivation of 
these two groups from the Crinoids, the authors are content with a jest, 
with so little seriousness do they regard it. 

Of the Holothurians the apodal forms are, in the judgment of the 
Drs. Sarasin, the most ancient; these may be derived from an unseg- 
mented worm, while Balanoglossus stands quite close to them. The 
apodal Holothurian is to the beautiful Actinometra as the bud is to the 
rose or the caterpillar to the butterfly. 


Renal Organs of Star-fishes.*—Dr. A. B. Griffiths has been able to 
isolate uric acid from the clear liquid found in the five gastric sacs of 
the common star-fish; no urea, guanin, or calcium phosphate could be 
detected. 


Anatomy of Ophiuridsj—M. L. Cuénot has some notes on the 
anatomy of Ophiurids. The epithelium of the body is distributed 
irregularly in all except the Euryalida. The colours of Ophiurids are 
due to very fine refractive granules which appear black with transmitted 
light. In the forms which live, like Ophiothriz and Astrophyton, in 
stony places, there are small hooks on the sides of the arms, and the 


* Proc. Roy. Soc., xliv. (1888) pp. 325-7. 
t+ Arch. Zool. Expér. et Gén., vi. (1888) pp. 33-82 (3 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 959 


Spines are longer than in those which live on sand; this difference 
points to the locomotor function of these appendages. 

The form of the large sac which constitutes the chief part of the diges- 
tive tract varies in different species; in Ophioglypha albida it has fiye 
large interradial and five small radial lobes, while in Ophiothria rosula it 
has only the interradial lobes. In form the digestive tube of Ophiurids is 
absolutely comparable to that of a young Luidia before the development 
of the radial ceca. There is no muscular layer, or it is reduced to a few 
scattered and unimportant fibres; the tube is firmly attached to the test 
by a number of mesenteric bands. The glandular cells which give the 
tube its dark coloration are similar to the granular cells already 
described by the author in Asterids, but there is no nervous layer among 
the digestive cells as there are in them. In the Ophiurids proper the 
prolongation which connects the nerve-ring with the digestive tube is 
solely composed of connective fibrils and epithelial nuclei, without any 
trace of nerve-fibrils, while in the Huryalids it is altogether nervous. 
Ophiuroids feed on dead or inert material which they gnaw with their 
peristomial teeth ; the digestive tube takes no part in the prehension of 
food. 

M. Cuénot differs from preceding describérs of the nervous system, 
who, he finds, have taken epithelial nuclei for nervous cells. As in the 
Asteroids there is a nervous ring with radial cords, but while, in the 
former, the central parts are continuous with the digestive tube and the 
external epithelial investment, and are as much epithelial as nervous, in 
the latter the peripheral nerves and their branches to the spines cor- 
respond to the superficial nerve-plexus; the digestive nervous band is 
found in Euryalids only; the Ophiurids appear to be peculiar in the 
nerves which supply the muscles of the arm and the disc. The only 
sensory organs are those of touch, represented by the spines, the ambu- 
lacral and the terminal tentacles; the olfactory sense which informs 
Ophiurids of their prey can only be exercised by the tentacles, the 
nerves of which are sufficiently near to the external medium. 

The fluid of the blood is sea-water with an exceedingly small quantity 
of albumen dissolved in it; the corpuscles are exactly similar to those 
of Asterids. ‘The colouring matter is not, as has been stated, hemo- 
globin, but a ferment which converts peptones into non-dialysable 
albuminoids. The amcebocytes and their albuminogenous granules are 
produced by lymphatic glands, and appear to be formed in just the same 
way as in Star-fishes. . 

In Ophiothrix rosula the respiratory sac is not a mere involution, 
but sends out a prolongation which passes into the interradial muscle, 
in such a way as to carry oxygenated fluid to it, and to bring away its 
products of excretion. The uric salts, guanin, xanthin, &e., pass by 
osmosis through the walls of the respiratory sacs. 

In his account of the ambulacral system the author differs consider- 
ably from M. Koehler. He regards the sand-canal as “un simple 
souvenir morphologique” which may have some function in the embryo, 
but has almost no importance in the adult. 

A somewhat detailed account is given of the vascular system, in which 
views different from those of preceding observers are expressed. 

With the exception of Amphiwra squamata, all Ophiurids have the 
sexes separate. The genital organs are of two different types: in 
Ophiocoma, Ophioglypha, and Ophiomyxa, there are a series of cca on 


A iw oo 


960 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


the genital vessel, but in Ophiopholis and Ophicthrix there is a single 
large organ. It is exccedingly probable that the genital orifices are 
only patent at the moment of sexual maturity. Spermatogenesis has 
much the same history as in Asterids, but while in the latter there is a 
nucleus quite similar to the lymphatic nuclei, in the Ophiurids the initial 
nucleus undergoes a special mode of development which causes it to 
increase considerably in size. The primordial ova of Asterids are 
lymphatic cells, but in Ophiurids the lymphatic cell of the genital cord 
undergoes first a special development. 

M. Cuénot disapproves of the union of Asterids and Ophiurids. He 
believes that Ophiothrix rosula is the most differentiated type of the 
latter, as is Asterias glacialis of the former. The Ophiurid presents certain 
characters of very young Asterids, chiefly in the digestive tube and the 
ambulacral and vascular systems. They differ in the calcareous plate 
which covers the ambulacral groove, and in the greater perfection and 
specialization of the nervous system. 

The Asterid, the Ophiurid, and the Sea-Urchin, taken when quite 
young, are absolutely similar; the first have followed most directly the 
common phylum whence all are derived. The Urchins have become 
more specialized than the Ophiurids, from the stock of which the Euryalids 
broke off to become more specialized than the rest. The want of 
personal study of Holothurians and Crinoids, and the insufficiency of our 
knowledge concerning these, have caused the author to omit them from 
his comparisons. 


Development of Comatula.*—Dr. J. Barrois has investigated the 
development of Comatula mediterranea. The process lasts a week; the 
first day includes segmentation and blastosphere formation ; the second 
witnesses the establishment of gastrula and blastopore; the third is 
marked by the formation of enteroccele and intestine ; the fourth finishes 
the development of the visceral mass; the fifth takes effect in the dis- 
placement of this mass ; the sixth reveals the formation of the skeleton ; 
and the seventh is the day of hatching. 

The segmentation results, at the 32 stage, in a mass with eight sides, 
including four blastomeres each. It exhibits eight large blastomeres 
(endodermic) at the inferior pole, and a cavity opening to the exterior, by 
a slit between the blastomeres at each pole. The resulting blastula loses 
these two distinctive features of the dividing mass. The gastrula is a 
typically invaginated archigastrula. With the closure of the blastopore at 
the end of the second day, the cells of the endoderm become disposed in 
several rows, of which the most exterior form the mesenchyme. The 
endodermic sac becomes completely detached from the ectoderm, and is 
divided by a constriction into two superposed vesicles. ‘I'he cells of 
the mesenchyme continue to accumulate on the lower portion of the 
embryo, which becomes distinguishable into two parts:—the upper part 
(future calyx) contains the endodermic sac, the lower part (future calyx) 
contains the mesenchyme. ‘The enterocele is formed at the beginning of 
the third day. The superior vesicle, just alluded to, elongates; the 
inferior vesicle gives off two horns, which surround it—a small transitory 
one on the ventral side and a larger dorsal one which will form the 
intestine. ‘he endoderm is now more delicate than the ectoderm. The 
latter exhibits on its ventral surface a thickening, which is the first 


* Rec. Zool. Suisse, iy. (1888) pp. 543-65], 6 pls. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 961 


trace of the ventral dimple (fossette) of the larva. Indications of the 
ciliary rings also appear. The superior vesicle divides into two peri- 
toneal sacs, while the inferior vesicle is continued upwards with the gut, 
still quite closed. Thereafter the inferior vesicle divides into two parts, 
the water-vascular vesicle on the left, the stone-canal on the right. Com- 
pared with other Echinoderms, the peduncular end is anterior, the 
calycine or blastopore end is really posterior. The gut separates from 
the water-vascular vesicle, the latter becomes situated on the top of the 
visceral mass with the stone-canal on the side. The visceral mass then 
acquires the typical form seen in other Echinoderm larve, with the gut 
surrounded by the two peritoneal sacs, and surmounted by the water- 
vascular vesicle. It alters its position from being parallel with the main 
axis to being oblique, and eventually becomes parallel with the lesser 
axis. The accurate details of the displacement can hardly be compressed. 
With the appearance of the skeleton various changes have to be noticed. 
The horseshoe-shaped water-vascular vessel is divided into five lobes; 
the stone-canal is separated from the latter, and comes to lie transversely 
below the water-vascular horseshoe. The two peritoneal sacs become 
unequal and lie obliquely to one another. In the middle of the compact 
mass of mesenchyme the cells begin to be stratified in horizontal strands. 
At the same time appear the peduncular cord and the fixing depression. 

The free larva of the seventh day has a solid stalk cord, formed from 
concentrically disposed cells, and originating from mesenchyme. The 
fixing dimple (fossette), situated just at the side of the terminal cap, 
forms, like the latter, an extremity of the larva, viz. the extremity of the 
calcareous axis of the stalk, while the cap forms the true extremity of 
the larva. There is here a coincidence of the two longitudinal axes of 
the Pentacrine and of the larva. In the free larva, the cap has given 
origin on its margins to a fifth circle, the visceral mass is slightly 
turned towards the superior pole, and the hollow (échancrure) of the 
water-vascular horseshoe, at first directed upwards, is turned downwards. 

(2) Metamorphosis——The ectoderm loses its divisions and becomes a 
rounded delicate sac; the ventral dimple is transformed into a thick 
mass, which invaginates to give origin to the tentacular chamber; the 
visceral mass continues to become more oblique until it has changed its 
transverse position for one in which it is directed towards the superior 
pole of the embryo. The intestine expands into a spherical mass full of 
nutritive vitellus. The stone-canal opens by a narrow duct to the left. 
The two peritoneal sacs are decidedly superposed; the original left 
becomes the peri-cesophageal horseshoe, the original right forms the 
peritoneal cap. The ventral curvature becomes accentuated, and the 
stratified portion of the solid mass of the stalk extends from the centre 
through the entire mass. 

(3) Post-embryonic Development— The young Pentacrines at all 
stages appear in profile to be incurved on one side. This is really a 
continuation of the ventral curvature of the embryo. Stalk and calyx 
are gradually defined by a thinning off of the entire posterior region. 
After becoming a simple sac, the ectoderm passes through four stages :— 
(a) the cells are small and closely apposed; (b) they are slightly 
elongated and separated ; (c) they are reduced to delicate fibres, with 
the slight residue of the cell-body proper at their internal extremity, 
and surrounded by the preponderant structureless substance filling up 
the interspaces ; (d) the cells become like true connective cells, while 


962 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


the structureless layer unites with the internal gelatinous layer of the 
stalk, and the whole looks like mesenchyme without epidermis. Impor- 
tant changes occur in the general disposition of the embryo; thus the 
mesenchyme is turned out of the general cavity to form with the modified 
epidermis the thick cortical layer of the calyx. The water-vascular ring 
with five lobes has these trifurcated, and elongated in the are of a circle. 
The modification of the tentacular lobes and the evolution of the vestibule, 
the changes on the stone-canal and peritoneal sacs are then described. 
Tho gut arises (1) from the endodermic mass of which the intestinal 
portion opens (without ectodermic invagination) on the ventral surface 
to the right, and (2) from the cesophageal invagination which meets the 
stomach. 

(4) Critical portion—Dr. Barrois then proceeds to a critical review of 
the results of previous investigators. He afterwards devotes special 
chapters to the development of the ciliary bands, of the ten primitive 
limy pieces, of the buccal and anal apertures. Some account is given 
of aberrant metamorphoses. 

One of the most important results of this valuable investigation is 
the establishment of the homology between the peduncle of the larvae of 
Comatula and the preoral lobe of other Echinoderms, between the calyx 
of the former and the proper body of other larve. In masking a com- 
parison between the different larve, the author emphasizes, among 
others, the following four points. (1) The vestibular invagination of 
the Comatula larve, instead of being superposed to the buccal pad, 
occupies on the left a position exactly congruent with that oceupied by 
the amniotic cavity described by Metschnikoff in sea-urchins—a cavity 
namely, which incloses the five primitive tentacles of the young 
Echinoid, and is situated in the left half of the sub-umbrella. (2) The 
water-pore, situated at first on the left surface of the embryo, comes to 
lie on the dorsal surface, in a position, that is to say, corresponding to 
that in all other Echinoderm larve. (8) The dorsal limy plates really 
oecupy a similar position in Comatula larve and in other Echinoderms. 
(4) The same is true of the stomachie and intestinal branches of the 
endodermie gut. The displacement marked by the difference of position 
of blastopore and anus, may also take place in other Echinoderms. Two 
differences are to be noted: (a) in the displacement of the body proper or 
calyx, and (b) in the fact that the ventral and dorsal surfaces of the larva 
correspond to the ventral and dorsal surfaces of the adult, a condition 
associated with the change of position exhibited by the two peritoneal 
sacs. But the unity of development among Echinoderms is nevertheless 
emphatie. 


‘Challenger’ Comatule.*—Dr. P. H. Carpenter completes his work 
on the Crinoids of the ‘ Challenger’ by this volume, which deals with 
the unstalked forms. One hundred and twenty species of Antedon and 
forty-eight of Actinometra are now known, and of these seventy-nine 
were discovered by the ‘ Challenger.’ The other genera of this family 
are Eudiocrinus, Atelecrinus, Promachocrinus, and Thaumatocrinus; of 
these Promachocrinus differs from all other Crinoids in having ten 
primary radials to its calyx, in place of five only. 

The author deals with the morphology of the centrodorsal and calyx, 
and the geographical, bathymetrical, and geological distribution of the 


* ‘Challenger’ Reports, Ix. (1888) ix. and 401 pp. (70 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 963 


eroup; he adopts the method of formulation, on which he has already 
written, and discusses in great detail the species found in this large 
collection. 

Ccelenterata. 


Development of Hydride.*—Prof. A. de Korotneff has made a study 
of the ova of Myriothela. He finds that the egg arises from a primordial 
cell of ectodermic origin; this cell gives rise to secondary germinal 
elements, of which there are more than twenty; of these one alone 
produces the true germinal vesicle, while the nuclei of the other 
elements disappear without leaving any trace behind them; the nuclei 
of the vitelline cells are converted into fatty or vitelline globules, and 
all this mass of cells collects and forms a common mass which possesses 
one germinal vesicle. From this point of view the egg itself ought to 
be considered as an agglomeration of elements, the functions of which 
are very different; one of the secondary germinal cells gives up its 
nucleus to the egg, and this serves as the germinal vesicle, the other 
germinal elements produce the formative plasma of the egg, while the 
rest gives rise to its vitelline parts. At the same time, each of these 
three kinds of elements takes part in forming the plasma of the egg. 

The mode of origin of the male sexual products is altogether similar 
to that of the females. Fecundation appears to be effected by the 
penetration of spermatozoa into the peduncle of the egg. 

Metschnikoff has thrown doubt on the author’s earlier account of the 
remarkable mode of development of Myriothela, but later observations have 
convinced Prof. Korotneff that he was quite correct. The free ovum, 
fixed by its peduncle, has no envelope whatever ; after a short time, 
however, one appears, which may be regarded as a vitelline membrane ; 
it is delicate, yellowish, and fairly resistent. As Prof. Allman discovered, 
the median part of Myriothela produces long delicate filaments with 
small tentaculiform heads at their free extremities. When the vitelline 
membrane is formed, three or four of these heads attach themselves and 
hold the egg in a certain position. At the same time the connection 
between the egg and its stalk diminishes, the egg separates from the stalk 
and remains fixed to the animal by the filaments. Analogous phenomena 
may be observed in fresh-water Hydre. 

In the egg itself there may be distinguished a central, finely granular 
mass, a cortical layer altogether devoid of ectoplasmic vesicles, and 
vitelline globules or modified nuclei, which are found in the endoplasm 
only. Of the succeeding stages, some only were seen. ‘There is an 
active multiplication of the embryonic cells of the ovum, and a morula 
results. The internal mass forms the endoderm, and this primitive 
endoderm is not, as in most Arthropods, replaced by a secondary 
endoderm. 


Flabellum.}—Dr. G. v. Koch has made a close examination of the 
arrangement of the septa in Flabellum Michelini and F. pavoninum. Both 
species afford, in his opinion, ideal examples of a law previously 
enunciated by him, viz.—In the Hexacoralla every new septum arises in 
the space between two that are older, and the septa of every cycle are 
nearly of the same size. There may be occasional exceptions, and these 
are due to changes in the general growth. 


* Arch. Zool. Expér. et Gén., vi. (1888) pp. 21-31 (2 pls.). 
+ Morphol. Jabrb., xiv. (1888) pp. 329-44 (1 pl.). 


964 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


The author refers to the observations of some recent workers on 
corals. He urges that he has made sufficient observations on the epitheca 
of Astroides, and that Mr. G. C. Bourne’s lament is unnecessiry. He 
does not remain silent under Mr. Bourne’s treatment of bis diagram of 
the epitheca. There are also replies to other criticisms by Mr. Bourne 
and Dr. G. H. Fowler, all of which are, to use the author’s own expres- 
sion, ‘* polemisch.” 


Sexual Cells and Early Stages in Development of Millepora 
plicata.*—Dr. 8. J. Hickson, who has already noted that a species of 
Millepora is hermaphrodite, has been continuing his investigations. 
Both male and female cells arise in the ectoderm of the ccenosareal 
canals which anastomose between the dactylozooids and gastrozooids ; 
the young ova become spindle-shaped and penetrate the mesoglea to 
enter the endoderm earlier than the spermatospores. As soon as the 
latter have taken up their position in the endoderm their nucleus 
increases considerably in size, the protoplasmic meshwork splits up into 
a number of hook or rod-shaped pieces, and then divides again into a 
large number of very small particles. The male spores now migrate 
along the canals to the zooids, in most cases choosing the dactylozooids, 
but occasionally the gastrozooids; and they pass into their cavity, which, 
by the disappearance of the surrounding membrane of the spermatospore, 
is occupied by a swarm of young spermatoblasts. Again entering the 
endoderm, they push out the mesoglea into a number of diverticula 
between the tentacles, in which they remain till they are mature; these 
diverticula, or sporosacs, vary considerably in number. As the author 
was unable to find any trace of the formation of the sporosac before the 
advent of the spermatoblasts he thinks that these must be the active 
agents in the formation of the sporosacs; or that, in other words, they 
do not migrate to any locality or structure already prepared for them, 
but choose for themselves localities which can readily be pushed out in 
the form of sporosacs. 

As the ova increase in size they become stalked, the stalk remaining 
attached to the mesoglea; this stalk is not a separate structure, but 
merely a pseudopodium modified for the purpose of retaining the ovum 
in position. Two polar globules are successively given off. During 
the formation of the second spindle, and subsequently, the substance of 
the ovum becomes clouded and heterogeneous, as if some considerable 
disturbance of the protoplasm was going on. After impregnation the 
ovum again becomes clear and homogeneous; the nucleus, soon after its 
reappearance, is seen to be filled with a number of small spherical bodies 
like nucleoli; the wall of the nucleus next disappears, and then spherical 
bodies, together with a number of very small fragments, are seen 
scattered about in that region of the ovum which was formerly occupied 
by the nucleus; later on, they migrate and form an equatorial zone of 
two or three rows; this zone divides into two clusters of fragments, 
which are eventually scattered over the whole ovum. Favourably 
stained specimens show that each fragment is surrounded by its own 
proper protoplasm ; this is the morula stage, which is succeeded by a 
solid blastosphere. The embryos are then, probably, set free into the 
sea as ciliated larve. 


The migration of the sexual cells into the endoderm may be ex- 


* Phil. Trans., elxxix. B. (1888) pp. 193-204 (2 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC: 965 


plaincd by the presence of a hard, inflexible, calcareous exoskeleton, 
while the possibility of better nourishment in the endoderm should be 
taken into consideration. 

There is no good reason for associating Millepora with Hydractinia in 
the zoological system; the Milleporide and Stylasteride probably 
belong to a separate stock altogether from the Hydromeduse, and to one 
which never possessed medusee or medusiform gonophores. 


Larval Actinie parasitic on Hydromeduse.*—Prof. A. C. Haddon 
has a note on some parasitic larval Actinize found at St. Andrews by 
Prof. M‘Intosh. At first sight, these larvae appear to be young of 
Halcampa chrysanthellum, but they differ in the much less conspicuous 
longitudinal retractor muscle of the larger tentacles; it may be that 
Prof. M‘Intosh was right in regarding them as young specimens of 
Peachia hastata. 


Scyphistomata of Acraspedote Meduse.t—Dr. P. Fischer gives a 
short account of some Scyphistoma-forms which he examined at Roscoff, 
and which, though kept under observation for ten days, exhibited no 
signs of strobilization. A number of explanations, more or less satis- 
factory, suggested themselves to him. 

(1) They were primitive, and ought consequently soon to produce 
Ephyrez ; against this we have the observation that they did not do so. 

(2) They constituted the remnants of primitive Scyphistomata after 
the departure of the Ephyre. On these residual forms a new colony 
would be developed, which might strobilate in the succeeding spring. 
As to this it can only be said that we have as yet no information as 
to the fate of the remains of the Scyphistoma-larve after the formation 
and departure of the Ephyre. 

(8) They were primitive, but bern late, and so had to retain their 
actiniiform stage until the succeeding spring. Here, again, we know 
little as to the influence of the date of birth on the further development 
of Scyphistoma. 

(4) They arose from an acraspedote Medusa which does not strobilate, 
but passes at once into the Ephyra-stage; but the irregularity of the 
numbers of their tentacles is against this view. 


Supplementary Report on ‘Challenger’ Actiniaria.t—Prof. R. 
Hertwig has a second report on the Actinzaria collected by the ‘ Chal- 
lenger, which affords him an opportunity for making some critical 
observations on Andrés’ monograph of the group. A good deal of the 
more interesting part of this report is contained in the extracts from 
Dr. Erdmann’s investigations into the anatomy of the Zoanthex, which 
we have already noticed.§ 


Porifera. 


Boring Clionids.|—_M. Nassonoff has investigated several species of 
. Clionids, and especially a new species, C. stationis Nass., which lives on 


* Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ii. (1888) pp. 256-9. 

+ Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xiii. (1888) pp. 96-9. 

t ‘Challenger’ Reports, Ixxiii. (1888) 56 pp. (4 pls.). 

§ See this Journal, 1886, p. 454. 

|| Arch. Slav. Biol., iv. (1888) pp. 362-6. Bull. Soc. Nat. Moscou, 1. (1888) p. 236. 


966 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


the shells of Ostrea and Mytilus. He arrives at the following con- 
clusions :— 

The boring of the canals and galleries is performed solely by the soft 
parts of the sponge. The penetration of the prolongation of the body 
of the sponge into the limy substance of the support appears to be 
accomplished by the secretion of a corroding liquid, probably an acid. 
The perforation has only been observed in young specimens, but it is 
probable that the same thing takes place in the adult. The secondary 
canals formed by the prolongations are only the rudiments of the larger 
canals or galleries; the smooth canals crossing the shell may be for 
orientation. In species which are very small compared with the mass 
in which they are buried, the limy substance is simply protective. 
In other species the sponge encircles the shell as well as penetrates it, 
and in such cases the support has the same role as any other skeleton, 
siliceous or calcareous. The destructive action of the sponge is con- 
siderable. 


Formation of Ova and Spermatozoa in Spongilla fluviatilis.*— 
Dr. K. Fiedler has made an examination of the developmental history 
of the generative products of the fresh-water Sponge. A necessary 
preliminary study is the investigation of the various cell-forms which 
are found in the mesoderm—or, to use a more indifferent expression — 
in the layer of connective substance or the internal parenchyma. These 
cells fall into two groups, for some are cells with regularly, and others 
with irregularly granular protoplasm. 

The former were long unobserved; in S. fluviatilis they were first 
seen by Weltner, and later on, independently, by the author. The 
granules of the protoplasm are spherical, and all of much the same size ; 
a clear marginal zone of quite transparent protoplasm often remains 
quite free from granules. The chromatin of the nuclei of these cells 
has always the form of a more or less fine framework, and as a rule there 
are no nucleoli in it. There can be no doubt that these cells are capable 
of amceboid movement. They are scattered through the whole of 
the body, but are most abundant near the free surfaces. It is very 
probable that they have a nutritive function. The author enters with 
some detail into the vexed question of the method of nutrition in Sponges. 

The greater part of the parenchyma of the sponge is made up of cells 
of the second kind, or those in which the granulation of the protoplasm 
is irregular. In some of these the nucleus has a filamentar framework 
of chromatin, in which there are no nucleoli, while others have a rather 
large, highly refractive nucleolus and very little chromatin; in the first 
category are included the slightly specialized ordinary connective-tissue- 
cells, which, at the time of formation of the generative products, take an 
important part in the formation of the follicle and Schulze’s contractile 
fibre-cells ; in the second category are the ovarian cells, the silicoblasts, 
and some forms of ameeboid migratory cells. 

The young ova are distinguished not only by their size and, generally, 
rounded forms, but by their very clear, because very finely granular, pro- 
toplasm, and their sharply limited vesicular nucleus, which is large, not 
only in comparison with other cell-nuclei, but with that of the egg-cell 
itself. In some cases there is a zone free of granules around the nucleus, 
and the protoplasm has a rather faint radial striation. The centre of 


* Zeitschr. f, Wiss. Zool., xlvii. (1888) pp. 85-128 (2 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 967 


the nucleus is occupied by a nucleolus which stains very easily ; the rest 
of the nuclear cavity is clear, and is often, especially in the later stages 
of development, traversed by a few chromatin filaments, while small 
spherules of chromatin are deposited at the periphery. The ova exhibit 
great variability in their position relatively to the other cells of the 
parenchyma; the follicle first arises owing to the continuous growth of 
the egg-cell, the pressure thus caused producing an approximation of 
adjacent celle. The older follicles are more like one another than the 
younger. Those of the young egg consist of cells varying in number 
and form. The history of the follicle is described at some length. 

When the egg-cell has attained its full size the changes begin in it 
which have been associated with the “maturation of the ovum”; the 
nucleus wanders towards the surface to eliminate the directive corpuscles ; 
it is to be noted, however, that the characteristic spindle-figures have 
not yet been observed. The whole process of segmentation is never the 
so-called indirect, but always a modified form of direct nuclear division. 

The cells of Spongilla which give rise to the spermatozoa have a 
rather finely granular protoplasm and a proportionately large nucleus ; 
the latter consists of a thick network of chromatin with numerous 
nucleoli which appear to lie at the nodal points of the network. Two 
nuclei next appear, one of which is as rich in chromatin as the first 
nucleus, while the second, which is more superficial in position, is very 
much poorer in chromatin and somewhat smaller. Its protoplasm was 
sometimes found to be separated by a fine line from that of the inner 
nucleus. Later on this separation becomes more distinct, and it is seen 
that a delicate layer of protoplasm with a double contour incloses a 
number of cells which are to be regarded as the products of division of 
the internal nucleus and of its protoplasmic investment. The ripe 
spermatozoa have a spherical head and a small tail which is set in the 
direction of the long axis of the head. 

The male elements of Spongilla are so small as to come almost to 
the limits of vision possible with our Microscopes. The author compares 
and discusses his results with those of observers of the spermatogenesis 
of other species of Sponges. 


Remarkable Spicules from the Oamaru Deposit.*—Mr. B. W. 
Priest has found in some material from the deposit from Oamaru, New 
Zealand, two spicules, one an acerate, the other a trifid, in which the 
enlarged axial cavities have a spiral, vermiform body lying within them, 
and perfectly siliceous. The author cannot “ quite grasp the idea” of a 
vegetable organism penetrating a siliceous substance, ‘‘ excepting that 
some chemical caustic action is set up.” 


Protozoa. 


Phylogeny of Protozoa.{—Prof. O. Biitschli has published an in- 
teresting introduction to his first volume on the Protozoa. After an 
important historical account, he gives a phylogenetic table (see next 
page), which exhibits his own views on the classification of the group. 

The root of all the unicellular forms must be sought for not in 
amoeboid organisms, but in those which stand between the Sarcodina 
and the Mastigophora; they are, perhaps, best retained by the Rhizo- 


* Journ. Quek. Micr. Club, iii. (1888) pp. 254-6. 
+ Bronn’s Klassen u. Ordnungen, i. Protozoa (1888) pp. i—xviii. 


968 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


mastigoda. With regard to Haeckel’s suggestion that the simplest forms 
are the Monera, or organisms without a nucleus, it must be borne in 
mind that this was made when the methods of nucleus-investigation 
were much less complete than they are now, and before it was recog- 
nized that the place of a single large nucleus is often taken by a number 


Animals Higher 
(Metazoa) Plants 


| 
! Multicellular 


Spongiae 
gh SE wee, OO Speeds Coenen Re la ee 


: Sporozoa Protococcoidea 


" Cystaflagellate, Bacillariacea 


Eu. glensidina 


\Monad. \ | Dinoflag. 
\ \ 
SS i 
Infusoria Choanoflag.\\ \, 
\ 
‘ \ 
Ai 
3 \ 
8 \ 
S Radwlaria i 
= \\i Rhrzo- 
S ‘\| mastigoda 
nN eZ ‘ i 
= Fehiozva a astil O op yt 
= Zs ee 
8 Rhizepoda <a Chylriduncup p 
= Schizopityeea 
s RBaclcriacea 
i 
9 
AS) 
o 
i) 


of small and scarcely distinguishable bodies. Both botanists and 
zoologists now allow that nuclei are often not really absent from 
organisms which were supposed to be without them. In fact it is 
generally agreed that, with the exception of the Schizophycee and 
Bacteriacee, nuclei are generally present. The author himself has 
never met with a Protomeba or a Protomonas, and other observers have 
said the same. Much has been written on Bacteria, but very little from 
a morphological point of view; Schmitz has shown that in the proto- 
plasm of the Schizophycee there is a varying number of granules of 
different sizes, which are sometimes collected into one group. It is 
possible that these are nuclein-grains; De Bary found colourable granules 
in the protoplasm of certain Bacteria, and it must not be positively 
asserted that these forms have no nuclei. On these grounds Prof. 
Biitschli refuses to regard the Monera as the starting-point of the - 
higher unicellular organisms. 

The origin of the group of Infusoria is uncertain, owing to the want 
of connecting forms; but it seems to be clear that it is not either a 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 969 


differentiated branch of the Mastigophora nor derived from any more 
ancient lateral branch of the main trunk. Some branches of the Masti- 
gophore-trunk lead no doubt to new and very significant developments. 
The Bacillaracee form an isolated branch which may have had close 
relations to the Dinoflagellata. The origin of the Sporozoa is involved 
in great obscurity ; it is possible that they branched off from the main 
trunk much earlier than is here represented, and somewhere near the 
Chytridacee; this remark applies only to the Gregarinida, as the 
relations of the other so-called divisions of the Sporozoa to them are 
still very doubtful. 

There can be no doubt as to the connection between the Protococ- 
coidea and the Phytomastigoda, and it is almost certain that the higher 
multicellular plants were derived from them. 

Prof. Biitschli doubts whether the Sponges have any relation to 
the Choanoflagellata on the one hand, or the rest of the Metazoa on the 
other. We have as yet no intermediate forms between the Metazoa and 
the Mastigophora. He is inclined to accept with modifications Haeckel’s 
conception of a kingdom of Protista; he extends it, indeed, for he 
regards the morphological agreement of a unicellular nature as the 
fundamental character; but this does not prevent his seeing that in 
practice the groups will fall into the kingdoms of Plants and Animals. 
The divisions which in his work on Protozoa he treats of have no right 
to be regarded as forming a natural group; they are those which, on 
account of their physiological characters, have been hitherto conven- 
tionally regarded and described as animals. They are the Sarcodina, 
Mastigophora, Sporozoa, and Infusoria. 

Three further parts of the general treatise * have been issued, in 
which, inter alia, the ciliation of the peristome and mouth, the endo- 
plasm, the nutrient vacuoles and ingestion of nutriment, the contractile 
vacuoles, the trichocysts, and the pigments of the Ciliata are discussed. 


Notes on Protozoa.t—Prof. A. Gruber communicates some de- 
tached observations on Protozoa. 

(1) The encystation of Euglypha alveclata.—The small plates, ori- 
ginally intended for a process of division, are utilized when encystation 
sets in for the construction of the so-called internal shell. When the 
encysted state is abandoned and the sheath bursts, the inner shell is 
resolved into its component parts. In the subsequent division these are 
utilized for their original purpose, and form the shell of the daughter- 
EKuglypha. 

(2) The division of Difflugia.—The point emphasized is the puzzling 
way in which the Difflugia seems to take in as many particles as are 
necessary for the formation of a new shell, and the fact that we seem 
bound at this low level to speak of “an artistic impulse and of 
instincts.” 

(3) Nervous system of Infusorians.—In support of his conclusion that 
the nervous functions of Infusorians are diffuse, Gruber describes the 
interesting habit of a Stentor which he cut in longitudinal halves, and 
which reunited with the ends of the halves reversed, but still remained 
as good a unity as before. A similar experiment with a Volvox colony 
is described. 

* Tom. cit., parts 47-99 (1888) pp. 1377-1488. Title-pages and tables of 


contents for Abth. i. (Sarcodina and Sporozoa), and Abth. ii. (Mastigophora) are 
also published. + Ber. Nat. Gesell. Freiburg, ii. (1887) pp. 149-62 (1 pl.). 


970 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


(4) The specific distinctions of Amebe are finally discussed. The 
apparently simple protoplasmic body is in reality very heterogeneous. 
The fine differences between the species are far from passing phases, 
but express constant protoplasmic qualities, 


Various Cyst-formations and Developmental History of Colpoda.* 
—Herr L. Rhumbler has investigated the life-history of this holotrichous 
Infusorian. In discussing the granular deposits on the endoplasm and 
the metabolism of the Infusoria, he points out that the corpuscles are of 
service in assimilation, as they convert the useful stuffs of the ingested 
food into protoplasm. Assimilation is only effected with the aid of 
water containing oxygen, and taken in from outside the body. This 
traverses the clear zones of the assimilation-corpuscles, and after giving 
up its oxygen, is driven to the exterior by the vacuole. These assimila- 
tion-corpuscles give off their assimilated protoplasm for the purpose of 
forming new parts, and for the further growth of the rest of the endo- 
plasm. As the final product of metabolism, they excrete uric acid in 
their interior, where they are gradually collected. The corpuscles are 
finally destroyed. When this happens the outer protoplasmic zone of 
the corpuscles is again given up to the endoplasm, while the particles of 
uric acid are passed to the exterior by the contractile vacuole. This 
last is, therefore, both an excretory and a respiratory organ. In this 
Infusorian, further, assimilation and respiration are united in one process. 

The cysts of Colpoda are of three kinds: dividing cysts, lasting cysts, 
and sporocysts. The first of these is characterized by an orifice in its 
wall, by the presence of nutrient spheres in the endoplasm, by the undis- 
turbed pulsation of the vacuole, and by the process of division. The 
lasting cyst has none of these characters. The sporocyst is distinguished 
by being protected by two (sometimes three) envelopes ; the contents are 
such that the primitive organization of the Colpoda can no longer be 
recognized; the assimilation-corpuscles are broken up and their uric 
acid excreted ; the sarcode, by the loss of the water, is condensed to an 
eighth; the nucleus is no longer apparent ; and the body-wall itself is to 
all appearance lost. 

‘These various cysts may, under certain circumstances, be converted 
into one another, the dividing cyst becoming a lasting cyst or a sporocyst, 
and the lasting cyst a sporocyst. The latter may be effected either by 
the particles of uric acid from the assimilation-corpuscles and the watery 
fluid being slowly expelled by the vacuole, or by both gradually passing 
from all parts of the periphery of the body into the velar space. It is 
clear that the sporocyst cannot be converted into any other kind of cyst, 
if we reflect that the complete degeneration of the organization shows 
that the animal has come to an end of its individual life. 

On the first appearance of the dividing cyst, its movement in more or 
less straight lines is often broken by rotatory movement. The lasting 
cyst moves rapidly across the field of vision, and the sporocyst still more 
rapidly. The first has nutrient spheres within, the other two have ex- 
pelled them. While the gelatinous envelope is being excreted and hardens, 
the dividing cyst rotates around the long axis of the body or remains at 
rest, and the contractile vacuole is always at the same place, so that there 
is an orifice in the wall of the cyst; the other two forms rotate around 
various axes, the vacuole appears at different points, and there is no 
orifice in the cyst-wall. During and after the hardening of the cyst-wall 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvi. (1888) pp. 549-601 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 971 


the cilia of the sporocyst alone remain. The number of beats of the 
vacuole of the dividing cyst remain normal, since fresh water can be 
constantly forced into the body by the orifice ; in the lasting-cyst the 
number rapidly decreases and becomes zero, as the cyst-wall hardens and 
no more can enter. In the sporocyst the number of beats remains un- 
altered, but as there is no orifice in the cyst-wall by which fresh water 
can enter, the volume of the body of the animal diminishes, and an inter- 
mediate space appears between the cyst (velum) and the animal, and into 
this the vacuole-water is driven. The further changes which appear in 
the dividing cyst are the formation of walls and nuclei for the divided 
parts, and new formation of vacuoles in the parts of the dividing-cysts. 
In the sporocyst the volume of the body diminishes to one-eighth of its 
original extent, while the nucleus and the pellicula disappear. New cilia 
next become formed in the dividing cyst, and two or four parts swarm 
out by the orifice; the thickened protoplasm of the sporocyst becomes 
completely homogeneous, and a second cyst-wall (the true sporocyst- 
wall) becomes excreted. The characters of a complete dividing cyst are 
a simple wall with an orifice at one pole, several parts (two to four) 
in the cyst, nutrient spheres, assimilation-corpuscles, and a normally 
pulsating vacuole ; those of the lasting-cyst are a simple (generally thick) 
wall without any orifice, one animal in the cyst, assimilation-corpuscles, 
but no nutrient spheres, the vacuole does not pulsate, and is either dilated 
or compressed and invisible. The sporocyst has double walls and no 
orifice ; its contents are completely homogeneous and opalescent; there 
are no nutrient spheres, assimilation-corpuscles, or pulsating vacuole. 

The object of the dividing cyst is protection during the formation of 
two or four parts, and its duration is from two to twelve hours; that of 
the lasting-sphere is protection from drying, and its duration one to four 
hours. The sporocyst is for the formation of spores, and lasts from 
a half to one hour. 

The development of Colpoda shows that the “ biogenetic fundamental 
law” applies to the Monoplastida, for we have (1) a non-nucleated 
spore-stage, (2) a multinuclear, and then (3) a uninuclear amceba- 
flagellate stage, and (4), finally, the young Colpoda. This form is a 
very primitive Ciliate; the structure of the nucleus ‘of Colpoda steinii is 
throughout life vesicular, and has just the appearance of the nucleus of 
a Flagellate, while the division in cysts is perhaps also a sign of affinity 
with the Flagellata. In the mode of formation of its spores Colpoda 
exhibits many signs of relation to the Gregarinida and Coccidia, as in 
the disappearance of the nucleus and the formation of a double wall of 
encystation. 


Ciliary Movement.*—Dr. J. Clark in investigating the effect of 
reduced oxygen pressures on the streaming movements of protoplasm, 
has also made some interesting experiments in regard to the influence of. 
the same condition upon cilia. Removal or reduction of the oxygen 
caused Chlamydomonas, Euglena, &c., to pass into the resting stage. 
Return of oxygen recalled them to activity. Pleurotricha, Stylonychia, 
Paramecium required less than 1 mm. oxygen pressure to revive them; 
others even less. He describes an interesting experiment with a Stylo- 
nyclia, which, at a temperature of 17-2° C., was brought under a 
pressure of 2°5 mm. In four minutes it became quiescent, and rapidly 


* Ber. Deutsch. Bot, Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 273-80. 


972 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


began to break up. After it had lost a third of its substance, the 
pressure was raised to 6mm. The disruption ceased, and the animal, in 
spite of diminished body, was soon moving actively as before. With a 
Pleurotricha the experiment was repeated thrice in succession, with 
repeated diminution of the substance, but to the last with power of 
recovery on restoration of the original conditions. 


New Parasitic Ciliated Infusorian.*—Dr. G. Cattaneo describes a 
new species of ciliated Infusorian which was found parasitic in the blood 
of Carcinus mznas. It appears to belong to the holotrichous family 
Enchelyide, and to Coln’s genus Anophrys ; it may be called A. Maggit. 
Tke body is oval and elongated, 35-45 » by 10-12 p, rounded posteriorly, 
while the anterior part is recurved like a beak, beneath which is the 
oral opening. It may be noted that the two species already described, 
A. carnium and A. sarcophaga, live in sea-water in which there is decom- 
posing flesh. 

Fresh-water Infusoria of Wellington District, New Zealand.t— 
Mr. W. M. Maskell observes that there is often no absolute stability, 
even in the same individuals, among Infusoria, The members of the 
Wellington Microscopical Section have, therefore, thought it best to 
avoid describing as new any species about which there might be doubt. 
He contrasts this with the method adopted by Prof. A. C. Stokes in 
dealing with American Infusoria. 


Euglena.t—M. A. G. Garcin states that this note is brought forward 
in order to throw some light on the vegetable nature of the genus 
Euglena. Euglena either divides by bipartition, or else becomes rounded 
off and forms a cyst. The cyst at a given moment bursts, and by the 
opening thus made a crowd of small Euglenz escape, being formed by 
the division of the encysted protoplasm; they enlarge and become 
rapidly similar to their parents. The author then describes the develop- 
ment of Euglenz in a humid atmosphere, in which alone it takes place. 
It commences by rounding off and forming a cyst with a thin wall; then, 
after resting a certain time, this cyst divides into two. The bipartition 
continues by a process which might be compared to the segmentation in 
the egg of Mammifers. The author then compares Euglena with 
Protococcus viridis. The cell of Protococcus is compared with the cyst 
of Euglena; both are green and globular, and both possess a membrane 
of cellulose. In a humid atmosphere the cells of both produce, by 
repeated bipartition of the protoplasm, a mass of immobile spores. 

The author concludes by stating that Euglena is an alga of the family 
Siphonez (tribe Sciadiew). The thallus is a globular cell (cyst) which, 
after having vegetated, gives rise to a crowd of zoospores, which enlarge 
and round off and reproduce the thallus. 

New Monad, Endobiella Bambekii.s—Dr. C. de Bruyne has found 
in the cells of Chara a monad which he has called after Prof. E. Bambeke. 
The cultivation method consists in placing sume of the pale cells of 
Chara vulgaris in a moist chamber wherein the parasites could be 
examined during several days. The development of bacteria was pre- 
vented by means of some green alge. ‘The parasite has three stages of 

* Zool. Anzeig., xi. (1888) pp. 456-9. 

+ Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ii. (1888) pp. 275-6. 

~ Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 241-6. 

§ Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasiteik., iv. (1888) pp. 1-5 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 973 


development, being found as a zoospore, an amoeba, and also in a resting 
state. 

The zoospore is a spherical body, and possesses a cilium 13 to 25 
times its length. It contains 1 to 2 contractile vacuoles, numerous drops 
of oil, and a nucleus which is only demonstrable after fixation with 
picric acid, washing with spirit and water, and staining, say, with gentian 
violet. The transition stage to the amceboid form is shown by the 
gradual diminution and finally the cessation of movement of the 
flagellum. 

Ameeboid stage. In this condition the animal is less spherical. 
There are no true pseudopodia, but merely coarse projections. The 
nucleus is only visible after staining with gentian-violet and previous 
fixation. The amceba measures 6 to 9 uw in length, and 6 to 8 yw in 
breadth, is inclosed bya delicate investing membrane, and contains, like 
the zoospore, numerous small drops of oil. These last gradually coalesce 
to a single large drop situated excentrically. This forms the transition 
stage to the resting condition. 

In the resting stage the investing membrane thickens, and shows a 
double contour, while in its general appearance its surface seems covered 
with curved facets. This membrane does not stain blue with the 
chlor-zine iodine solution, thus showing the absence of cellulose. It is 
coloured red with congo. The spores contain, besides the oil-globules, 
small slightly refracting spherules. These are not stained by osmic 
acid, but are by congo red. The author has called his organism Endo- 
biella, and regards it as a new genus. 


Monas Dunali.*—Dr. R. Blanchard has a preliminary notice on 
Monas Dunali, a flagellate which he regards as the cause of the red 
colour of salt marshes. This red colour appears in summer, but only in 
the rectangular compartments at the bottom of which salt is deposited, 
and the surface of which is covered by a more or less thick crust of salt ; 
in other words, the water of these spaces is saturated with salt. 


Asellicola digitata.;—Dr. L. Plate has given the name of Asellicola 
digitata to the “gefingerte Acinete” of Stein ; it lives on the branchial 
plates of Asellus aquaticus. It is non-pedunculate and hemispherical, and 
adheres closely to the surface of the gill-plate by its flattened but gently 
rounded under surface. The thin cuticle is continued over the numerous 
tentacles which radiate from the dorsal surface. The protoplasm is not 
divisible into a central or a cortical layer, but is homogeneous throughout. 
The contractile vacuole, as in Dendrocometes paradoxus, opens directly 
outwards by a small duct, and contracts in such a way that the fluid 
which has collected in it must be pressed out through this tubule. The 
striated appearance presented by the protoplasm is not in any way 
connected with the sucking organs, but has probably only the function - 
of giving the cell-body an increased degree of firmness at its point of 
fixation, by the development of rigid rods. 

The tentacles are remarkably broad, end acutely, vary in number in 
different individuals, and may arise from any part of the dorsal surface ; 
the plasma is quite free from coarse granules, and in the middle there is 
a longitudinal canal filled with a limpid fluid, which opens at the 


* Bull. Soc. Zool. France, xiii. (1888) pp. 153-4. 
+ Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ii. (1888) pp. 208-19 (7 figs.). Translated from 
Zocl. Jahrb, (Spengel), iii. (1888) pp. 143-55. 


1888. 3 U 


974 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


anterior end. This canal is so fine as to be often invisible in the living 
animal, but it can be demonstrated with certainty by the aid of osmic 
acid. Unlike the sucking tubes of most Acinets, this canal is not 
continued into the interior of the cell. If one of the tubes of a lively 
specimen is fixed for a few minutes, the extreme tip raises itself from 
the tentacle as a distinct tentaculet, which is pushed out and retracted 
several times a minute. The object of this movement is not clear. The 
tentaculets very probably secrete a viscid substance, for very small 
flagellates were often observed adherent to them; in the case of 
such small organisms the nutriment is simply pumped into the tentacular 
canal by means of the tentaculet. 

The reproduction of Asellicola is exactly similar to that of Dendro- 
cometes paradoxus, but the process of conjugation exhibits an essential 
difference. As the Asellicole do not, as a rule, stand so close as to 
touch each other, those individuals which are about to conjugate are 
almost always compelled to unite themselves by a process of the body. 
For this purpose a tentacle at one end of the body grows enormously 
beyond its ordinary size; sometimes one only, sometimes both develope 
a conjugation-tentacle. This tentacle is slowly moved to and fro until 
the object is attained. When the two animals are united the conjugation 
canal becomes thicker and thicker, as more of the body-substance from 
both sides passes into it. Although the cytoplasm of the two animals is 
very intimately mixed in the canal, the distinctness of the two individuals 
is not effaced, for, on the least disturbance, the cell-bodies separate from 
each other in the middle of the canal and lie near each other, covered by 
a thin membrane. When the canal is completed it swells up, and the 
nuclei of both individuals migrate into the canal of union and towards 
one another. They do not, however, seem to come into contact, and 
they at this time undergo no change of structure, but the author believes 
that they reciprocally influence one another. After this is effected, the 
nuclei return to their original position; the plasma returns from the 
canal of union into the cell-body, and rupture is effected. The nuclei 
then begin to divide, and finally break up into a number of larger and 
smaller pieces, which are scattered through the whole of the cell-body. 
In general it is medium-sized individuals that conjugate, while those 
that are full-grown form buds. 


Acinetoides.*—Dr. L. Plate gives an account of a new genus—which 
he calls Acinetoides—intermediate between the ciliated Infusoria and the 
Acinetw. His examples were found on colonies of Zoothamnium from 
the Bay of Naples. The larger species is called A. Graff, and the 
smaller A. zoothamnii. The anterior end projects beyond the ventral 
margin of the body in the form of a low cone, bearing in its middle the 
organ for the inception of nourishment, a sucking thread clubbed at its 
extremity ; this may be traced far into the interior of the cell-body, and 
is distinguished only by its remarkable shortness and rigidity from the 
similar organs of most other Acinetw. The ventral surface has an 
elliptical inner area ciliated; the cilia are arranged in longitudinal rows, 
and appear to be placed in special grooves. The ventral surface is 
highly contractile. A. zoothamnii was obscrved to undergo transverse 


* Ann, and Mag. Nat. Hist., ii. (1888) pp. 201-8. Translated from Zool. 
Jahrb., iii. (1888) pp. 135-43 (3 figs.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 975 


fission ; this is a rare mode of increase among the Suctoria, but common 
among the Ciliata. 

The author is of opinion that the existence of this intermediate form 
furnishes a fresh argument in support of the opinion already maintained 
by some naturalists that the Acinetz are modified Ciliata. 


Parasitic Protozoa.*—Prof. B. Grassi communicates a number of 
morphological and systematic notes on parasitic Protozoa which he has 
studied. (1) What he had described as “ Monere” (?), Fisch has rein- 
vestigated and established as Grassia ranarum. (2) Against Danilewsky 
and Bitschli, Grassi maintains the integrity of his genus Paramecioides. 
(8) He proceeds to consider the morphological features of Monocerco- 
monas, Cimznomonas (Trichomonas), Trichomonas Grassi, Plagiomonas, 
and Ameba coli. (4) After criticizing Biitschli’s classification and 
nomenclature, the author submits his own :— 


Fam. CERCOMONADINEA Kent emend. 


Gen. 1. Herpetomonas Kent emend. (Syn. Monomita Grassi.) 

. Trypanosoma Gruby. 

. Paramecioides Grassi. (Syn. Paramecium Wedl, 1850.) 

Plagiomonas Grassi, 1882. (Syn. Cystomonas R. Blanchard, 
1886. 

. Bodo ie (Syn. Heteromita Duj.). 

. Monocercomonas Grassi. (Syn. Trichomastix Bloch.) 

. Cimznomonas Grassi. (Syn. Trichomonas Donné.) 

. Costifera Grassi, 1887. (Syn. Polymastix ? Biitschli.) 

. Dicercomonas Grassi. (Syn. Hexamita Duj., Giardia Kiinst.) 


Oo ONS COD 


Fam. Mzeastomipza Grassi, 1882. (Syn. Potymasticina Biitschli, 1883). 


Gen. 10. Megastoma Grassi. (Syn. Cercomonas Lambl, 1859 ; Lamblia 
R. Blanch., 1886.) 


Fam. LopHomonaDIDEA Grassi. 


Gen. 11. Lophomonas Stein. 
» 12. Joenia Grassi. 


The author then gives a useful short summary of the diagnostic 
characters of the above twelve genera; and concludes his memoir with 
some special observations on Megastoma, Trichomonas hominis Dav., and 
Ameba colt. 


Protozoa found in the Stomach of Ruminants.t—Herr A. Schuberg 
obtaims fiuid from the rumen of freshly slaughtered oxen and sheep 
without taking any more precautions than collecting the juice in a test- 
tube and keeping it warm in the breast pocket. On reaching home the 
tubes are placed in an incubator at 35°-36° whereby the Protozoa were 
kept alive for about a day, their death probably being due to the decom- 
position of the gastric juice. The animals may be obtained still more 
simply from particles of food taken from the mouths of ruminants. 
Living parasites must be examined on a hot stage, and their movements 
last longest at temperatures between 30° and 35° in filtered gastric juice. 


* Atti R. Accad. Lincei—Rend., iv. (1888) pp. 5-12. 
t Zool. Jahrb. (Spengel), iii. (1888) pp. 365-418 (2 pls.). 


oe 


976 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


The effect of certain reagents (osmic acid 1 per cent.) and dyes (alum- 
carmine) should also be ascertained. In his present communication the 
author describes the following Protozoa :— 

1. Buetschlia with two new species parva and neglecta. (a) B. parva 
is 0°03-0°53 mm. long, 0°26-0°038 mm. broad, oval, occasion- 
ally spherical. The oral aperture is at the anterior extremity and 
leads into a narrow conical gullet. Ciliation is confined to this extremity, 
but there is no special arrangement of the cilia. Highly refracting con- 
eretions are always to be seen in a vacuole situated somewhere in the 
anterior extremity. A special contractile vacuole appears to be wanting. 
Nucleus spherical. Multiplication by division was observed. 

(b) B. neglecta, 0-057 mm. long and 0:012 mm. broad, resembles in 
general the last variety, but has in its posterior half four deep pits, so 
that a transverse section thereof would present the appearance of a cross. 
Other differences are that this variety presents a tuft of cilia at the 
posterior and also cilia at the deepest part of the four pits. Vacuoles 
are always present. The nucleus is large, pale, and spherical. 

2. (a) Isotricha prostoma Stein, 0:08-0:16 mm. long by 0-053 to 
0-12 mm. broad; very frequent; body elastic, not contractile, eylin- 
drical, anterior and posterior extremities pointed, sides somewhat 
flattened. The whole body is beset with cilia arranged in rows, and 
beneath the cilia lies a thick refracting membrane, which an addition of 
water lifts up, preserving its continuity with the body only at the anterior 
and posterior extremities. Numerous contractile vacuoles in the proto- 
plasm. The nucleus resembles in shape that of the body, and on its 
dorsal side is a small bright nucleolus. It is especially noteworthy that 
the nucleus is attached to both the inner and external membranes by 
fibres, the significance of which is enigmatical. Propagation by fission 
was observed. 

(b) I. intestinalis Stein, 0-097—-0:131 mm. long by 0° 068-0-087 mm. 
broad, is very closely allied to I. prostoma, the most important difference 
being that the position of the mouth is almost in the middle of the body 
and also the somewhat more compact form of the nucleolus. 

3. (a) Dasytricha ruminantium nov. gen. noy. sp., 0°05-0°1 mm. 
long, 0:025-0-066 mm. broad ; very frequently confounded with Isotricha, 
Viewed from the ventral or dorsal aspect the body is oval, from the sides 
it seems somewhat compressed and bent inwards ventrally. The whole 
body is ciliated and invested in a double membrane. The mouth and 
pharynx are situated anteriorly. There is only one contractile vacuole. 
The nucleus is granular, oval, and possesses a nucleolus lying external 
to it. There are no nuclear prolongations, Propagation appears to take 
place by budding. 

4, (a) Entodinium bursa Stein, 0:055-0°114 mm. long, 0:037-0:078 
mm. broad, not very frequent. Body dorsoventrally flattened, somewhat 
oval, but more obtuse anteriorly. About the centre of the posterior 
extremity is a somewhat tortuous pit which receives the anal cleft. The 
cilia are confined to the anterior extremity where the oral aperture 
leading into a deep conical pharynx is situated. There is a contractile 
vacuole. The elongated sausage-shaped nucleus has a shining nucleolus. 
Propagation by fission. : 

(b) Entodinium caudatum Stein, 0-053 mm. long, 0:026 mm. broad, 
distinguished from E. bursa chiefly by its shape, the dorsal surface being 
less incurved than the ventral which on the left side is hollowed out, and 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 977 


at the same time elongated into a sort of flat tail-like appendix. On the 
right side, dorsally and ventral, a pointed lobe projects posteriorly. 

(c) Eniodinium minimum nov. sp., 0°038 mm. long, 0°023 mm. 
broad, resembles the first species in form, it is, however, smaller. The 
anus is a fissure. 


New Gregarine.*—Mr. F. E. Beddard gives a description of a new 
Gregarine found by him in the vesicule seminales and body-cavity of a 
Perichzta from New Zealand. It is from 13-2 mm. in length. The 
smallest examples had a globular body furnished with one or two slender 
processes, which are usually of greater length than it, so that the creature 
may have the appearance of a bead strung upon a thread. Older forms 
have the body limited by a clear membrane, and there are superficial 
fibrillar markings. Up to this stage multiplication ig by transverse 
fission. In a third stage the body is covered by a remarkable cyst; this 
is of great thickness on the processes of the body, though much thinner 
on the spherical region. In this cyst there are nuclei, and it is probable, 
therefore, that it is not entirely formed by the parasite; this cyst is 
quite unlike anything that hag been recorded in a Gregarine, but in the 
Myxosporidia cysts are met with which are nucleated, and, therefore, 
probably formed pathologically by the tissues in which the parasite 
lives. The author had not been able to obtain evidence of sporulation, 
but hopes to be able to do so. 


* Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1888, pp. 355-8. 


978 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


BOTANY. 


A. GENERAL, including the Anatomy and Physiology 
of the Phanerogamia. 


a Anatomy.* 
(1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm. 


Division of the Nucleus and of the Cell.—Prof. E. Strasburgert 
follows out his previous important observations on this subject with 
additional ones, among which the following are the more important 

oints :— 
: (1) Division of the nucleus and of the cell in Spirogyra polyteniata n.sp. 
As respects the development of the spindle-fibres, this occupies an inter- 
mediate position between species already described. 

(2) The resting nucleus. In that of Fritillaria, there are no bridges 
which are less receptive to pigments between the thicker strings of the 
framework of the nucleus, as Flemming and others have described in the 
case of Salamandra. 

(3) Construction of the nuclear threads in the knot-condition. The 
relatively large chromatin-dises of the nuclear thread during karyokinesis 
are the result of gradual fusion of the usually much smaller chromatin- 
balls in the framework of the resting nucleus. 

(4) Number of the nuclear threads. Contrary to his previous view, 
Strasburger has now, in preparations fixed in alcohol, and stained by 
methyl-blue, and afterwards treated with eau de Javelle, demonstrated 
the segmentation of the nuclear thread in the resting nucleus. In the 
vegetative organs he found sometimes slight variations in the number 
of segments during karyokinesis, while in the nuclei of generative cells 
the number appears to be very constant. It seems probable that the 
number of segments in the threads of the two nuclei which unite in the 
process of impregnation is always the same in the higher plants. 

(5) The loose knot-condition of the polar field. Strasburger shows 
that the formation of the segments of the nuclear filaments in the direc- 
tion of the so-called polar field, first observed by Rabl in animal cells, 
occurs also in various vegetable cells. He now agrees with Guignard 
and Zacharias in regarding the structures which he had previously 
described under the name paranucleoli as identical with the nucleoli 
of the nucleus. 

(6) Transformation of the nuclear filaments in the formation of the 
nuclear plate. The author shows that in various vegetable cells the polar 
field formed at the commencement of the knot-stage lies in the equatorial 
plane of the figure in the subsequent division of the nucleus. 

(7) Origin of the nuclear spindle and formation of the nuclear plate. 
The polar corpuscles found in animal cells have not been detected in 
those of plants. Radial structures in the cytoplasm are, however, not 
altogether wanting during karyokinesis. The processes which take place 


* This subdivision contains (1) Cell-structure and Protoplasm; (2) Other Cell- 
ee (including Secretions); (3) Structure of Tissues; and (4) Structure of 
rgans. 
“t ‘Ueb. Kern- u, Zell-theilung im Pflanzenreiche, uebst einem Anhang ib. 
Befruchtung,’ 258 pp., Jena, 1888. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxv. (1888) p. 192. See 
also Nature xxxix. (1888) p. 4. Cf. this Journal, 1883, p. 227. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 979 


in the parietal layer of the embryo-sac of Leucojum eestivum are described 
in detail. The nuclei are first of all enveloped in denser protoplasm ; 
but before the absorption of the cellular membrane a spindle-like dif- 
ferentiation of this mass of protoplasm may be perceived. Strasburger 
shows that the microchemical reactions of the nuclear spindle by no 
means oppose the theory of its origin from the cytoplasm. 

(8) The separation of the secondary segments. In opposition to his 
previous views, the author now agrees with Heuser and Guignard that 
the separation of the halves of the segments within the cells of higher 
plants always takes place so that the end of each half-segment which is 
directed outwards points immediately after the separation towards the 
equatorial plane. 

(9) Absorption of the nucleoli. The differences in the capacity of 
the nuclear filaments for absorbing pigments observed by Went do not 
always coincide in time with the disappearance or reappearance of the 
nuclei; and it is improbable that the nucleoli contribute to the nutrition 
of the nuclear filaments. 

(10) Uniting-threads and cell-plate. In opposition to the recent 
views of Berthold and Zacharias, but in agreement with those of Gui- 
guard, Strasburger shows that, in the higher plants, the spindle-fibres 
always go from pole to pole, and pass over afterwards into the so-called 
uniting-threads, the number of which can, however, gradually increase 
considerably at the expense of the cytoplasm. In their chemical re- 
actions these threads agree altogether with the spindle-fibres. In cells 
which contain but little protoplasm, these threads form a more or less 
thick continuous tube extending from one of the two daughter-nuclei to 
the other, which becomes gradually more and more stretched by the 
growth outwards of the membrane. 

(11) Origin of the membrane. The new membrane arises by the 
fusion and chemical metamorphosis of the dermatosomes, which are at 
first simply thickenings of the uniting-threads. 

(12) Formation of the nucleoliin the daughter-nuclei. With the new- 
formation of the nucleoli the nuclear sap loses its capacity for absorbing 
pigments. 

(18) Part played by the nuclear sap and nucleoli. From the facts 
that the nuclear sap becomes receptive for pigments on the disappearance 
of the nucleoli during karyokinesis, and that strongly receptive sub- 
stances accumulate in the neighbourhood of the cell-plate before the 
formation of the new membrane, Strasburger concludes that the substance 
of the nucleoli takes part in the formation of the new membrane. 

Herr EH. Zacharias * discusses in detail Strasburger’s observations, 
controverting some of his conclusions. He regards Strasburger’s expla- 
nation of the changes in the nuclear threads, viz. that they result from 
the opposition of forces in different directions operating within and 
without the nucleus, as being but imperfectly founded on facts. He dis- 
putes the accuracy of conclusions drawn from preparations of nuclei in 
the knot-condition treated with alcohol or chromacetic acid and stained 
by safranin or hematoxylin, since all parts of the nucleus are not brought 
out clearly and definitely. Nor can Strasburger’s negative results of 
treatment with methyl-blue and eau de Javelle be set against Zacharias’s 
previous results obtained by other means. Zacharias repeats his previous 


* Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) pp. 437-50, 453-60 (4 figs.). 


980 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


statement that the mass of the spindle-fibres differs chemically from the 
cytoplasm—not containing any substance incapable of digestion—and 
therefore cannot result entirely from the entrance of the cytoplasm into 
the nucleus. Pollen-mother-cells of Hemerocallis freshly observed in 
white of egg show clearly that the nuclear cavity is, by its homogeneous 
character, sharply distinguished from the non-homogeneous cytoplasm. 
Zacharias dissents also in some points from Strasburger’s conclusions 
respecting the constitution of the uniting-threads and the function of the 
nucleoli. 

Strasburger explains the act of impregnation as depending on a union 
of similar nuclear threads, the further development of which is excited 
by the mixing of the nuclear sap. Zacharias considers the part assigned 
to the nuclear sap to be unsupported by direct observation ; and that the 
former portion of this statement is rather a description of the last stage 
in the process of fertilization. 


Properties and Changes of the Membrane, Protoplasm, and Nucleus 
of Plant-cells.*—Prof. C. Frommann has a series of essays in which he 
deals with pcints connected with plant-cells. The first is devoted to 
some structural relations observed in the membranes of the epidermis of 
the leaves of Draceena draco and Euphorbia cyparissias. He comes to 
the conclusion that the filamentar structures or networks which belong 
to the membrane and are sometimes connected with the intracellular 
protoplasm, sometimes resemble those of the latter, and are sometimes 
much firmer and more refractive; the intermediate substance is some- 
times feebly, and sometimes highly refractive; in the latter case it may 
be the cause of the protoplasmic parts becoming indistinct or disap- 
pearing ; in homogeneous membranes the protoplasmic structures which 
belong to the foundations of the membrane may be made visible again 
by the use of reagents which cause considerable swelling. It must not, 
however, be supposed that all homogeneous membranes inclose networks 
or fibrillar structures which belong to the protoplasm. The appearance 
of large rounded spindle-shaped or irregularly formed and partly ana- 
stomosing structures, such as the author has detected in the side-walls of 
Draczna, lead to the belief that, within circumscribed areas, networks 
of protoplasm first fuse with one another to form homogeneous bodies; it 
is only after this that cellulose is formed in them. That membranes 
are really formed in this way from homogeneous protoplasmic layers is 
shown in the essay which treats of the formation of cellulose-membranes 
within the intercellular spaces and the cells of the parenchyma of the 
knobs of Cyclamen and Phajus. 

The appearance of chlorophyll in cell-membranes has been studied ; 
sections and surface-views show that the cuticle in a number of places 
either becomes thickened, and beset with knot-like or wart-like growths, 
or it becomes considerably swollen and softened. In the latter case fine 
granules and filaments become differentiated and often connected together 
by plexuses of delicate meshwork. Vacuoles appear at the same time. 
The layers thus formed extend into the adjoining unaltered or only 
slightly thickened cuticle. In addition, we find prominent aggregations 
of granular filamentar substance; from these, newly-formed parts may 
be differentiated which fuse with those already present. But, when this 
occurs, several of the green layers arc found to have their boundaries 


* Jenaisch. Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., xxii. (1888) pp. 47-174 (5 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 981 


formed not by filaments or granules, but by a delicate layer of freely 
projecting homogeneous green substance; sections of uncoloured layers 
are often observed to have round clear homogeneous drop-like bodies 
along their periphery. An account is given of the chemical and physical 
characters of the green-coloured portions of the unaltered cuticle, from 
which it seems to follow certainly that the green colour is identical with 
chlorophyll. 

The formation and growth of starch-granules in chlorophyll-granules, 
nucleus, and protoplasm, are next discussed. In all cases starch is 
formed by the plexuses, or by these and the ground-substance in which 
the plexuses are imbedded. The plexuses appear in the form of rounded 
granules ; the quantity of starch formed generally increases rapidly, so 
that the filamentar structure of even the small granules becomes obscured. 
The growth of the granules is due to apposition, and to either the forma- 
tion of starch-containing processes or to that of a shell-like covering. 
Starch-granules which are inclosed by a special thick protoplasmic capsule 
grow at the expense of the latter. The formation of chlorophyll from 
starch-grains is treated of at some length. 


Increase of normal Vacuoles by Division.*—Pursuing his re- 
searches on the structure and formation of vacuoles, M. F. A. T. C. Went 
restates his previous conclusions, viz. :—That all living vegetable cells, 
with the possible exception of antherozoids, Cyanophycez, and bacteria, 
inclose vacuoles, each of which is surrounded by a membrane of its 
own, the tonoplast.t In all young cells a division and a fusion of vacuoles 
may be observed. All the normal vacuoles in a plant result from the 
successive division of that of the oosphere. The tonoplasts are as much 
entitled to be regarded as organs of the protoplasm as the nuclei or 
the chromatophores. The protoplasm is always in movement from the 
youngest state of the cell. Normal vacuoles are never formed at the 
expense of the protoplasm, but only pathological vacuoles in the case 
of the disorganization of the tissues. 

In certain cases the necessity for the tonoplast is evident, as when 
the cell-sap contained in the vacuoles is sufficiently acid to kill the 
protoplasm, as in Rhewm and Begonia. The tonoplast offers much 
greater resistance to reagents than the rest of the protoplasm. Thus, a 
10 per cent. solution of nitre, sufficient to plasmolyse the cell-contents, 
kills the protoplasm, while the vacuoles remain alive in the form of 
colourless vesicles. The contents of the vacuoles are an aqueous 
solution of various substances, some of them crystallizable; the reaction 
is usually feebly acid, sometimes, as in aleurone-grains, alkaline. At 
first these substances are chiefly organic and inorganic salts, afterwards 
glucose, tannin, and albumin. Calcium oxalate occurs in the crystalline 
state in the cell-sap, but never in the cytoplasm. Albumin may occur 
in the soluble state, as in the case of albumin tannate or alkaline albu- 
minates, but it may also exist in the crystalline state, as in the crystal- 
loids of Ricinus and other plants. When these crystalloids are formed 
in the endosperm in a state of repose, and surrounded by their tonoplast, 
they are known as aleurone-grains. On germination, the albumin dis- 
solves and the vacuoles again become clear. Tannin is found only in 
the cell-sap, and the so-called vesicles of tannin are probably nothing 


* Pringsheim’s Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot., xix. (1888) pp. 295-356 (3 pls.). Of. this 
Journal, ante, p. 243. t Sec this Journal, 1886, p. 637. 


982 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


but vacuoles; at least this is the case in the leaves of Mimosa pudica. 
Many vacuoles may also contain a pigment, red in acid, blue in alkaline 
cells, occasionally yellow. These pigments appear to be always con- 
nected with the presence of tannin. 

When there are several vacuoles in a cell, their contents often differ ; 
thus in many petals each cell has one large coloured vacuole and several 
small colourless ‘‘ adventitious vacuoles”; the former contains tannin, 
while the others do not. This selection of different substances contained 
in the cell-sap is not due to the granular protoplasm, which is always in 
movement, but to the tonoplast. The phenomenon is not dissimilar to that 
displayed by chromatophores ; the coloured vacuoles may be compared 
to chromoplasts, the uncoloured adventitious vacuoles to leucoplasts. 

The vacuoles always increase in number by division. The process 
may be observed in living cells, by allowing the preparations to remain 
for a time in a 3°5 per cent. solution of sugar. The best materials to 
employ are the hyphe of fungi, pollen-grains, and epidermal hairs. In 
the endosperm a large vacuole divides into a certain number of smaller 
ones, which become the aleurone-grains ; on germination, the albumin dis- 
solves, and the small vacuoles fuse again into a large one. The pheno- 
menon of aggregation in the tentacles of Drosera is due to the large 
vacuoles dividing, as they do under the influence of any excitation, into 
a large number of small vacuoles, while the volume of the cell-sap 
diminishes. When the excitation has ceased, the vacuoles fuse again 
into one large central vacuole. 

The principal function of the vacuoles is to incite, by their osmotic 
force, the turgidity of the cells, thus contributing to the growth of the 
plant. Another important function consists in storing up substances of 
all kinds, whether reserve-materials, such as cane-sugar, glucose, and 
inulin, or tannin, which occurs nowhere else but in the vacuoles, and 
which appears to serve as a protection against the attacks of animals. It 
is probable that in the vacuoles are also localized the greater part of 
vegetable poisons, such as the alkaloids, and that the tonoplast prevents 
these exercising an injurious influence on the protoplasm. Another 
class of substances stored up in vacuoles is the pigments, which are 
chiefly connected with the visits of insects. Finally they contain 
substances the use of which is at present unknown, such as calcium 
oxalate. In some cases the function of the vacuoles is still obscure, as 
in that of the aggregation of protoplasm in insectivorous plants, where 
they may contribute to the secretion of a ferment, or to the absorption 
of nutriment. 

Albumen in the Cell-wall.*—Herr J. Wiesner replies further to 
Fischer’s arguments f against the validity of his demonstration of the 
presence of albumen in the walls of living cells. He points out that 
Fischer must be in error in suggesting that the substance supposed by 
Wiesner to be albumen is in reality tyrosin, since the possibility of the 
presence of tyrosin is excluded by the process employed. 


(2) Other Cell-contents (including Secretions). 


Development of Aleurone-grains in the Lupin.t—Mr. A. B. Rendle 
describes the formation of aleurone-grains in Lupinus digitatus. Until 


* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 187-95. 
t See this Journal, ante, p. 602. t Ann. of Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 161-6 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 983 


the cotyledons completely fill the seed-coat, there is no trace of the 
aleurone-grains, the cells contain a conspicuous nucleus slung in the 
centre by thick protoplasmic bridles, or sometimes lying in the parietal 
protoplasm. If sections of the cotyledons be examined when the seeds 
begin to swell, the cells are seen to contain small spherical or oval 
bodies, partly or wholly projecting from the granular protoplasm, 
whether the parietal layer or that surrounding the nucleus, or forming 
the connecting strands. These bodies are the rudimentary aleurone- 
grains ; they increase in size and number and soon fill up the vacuole. 
The grains, therefore, are evidently actually secreted by and in the 
protoplasm itself. Solid organic constituents were repeatedly sought 
for, but without success. 


Occurrence of Starch in the Onion.*—Mr. A. B. Rendle states that 
the leaves of the onion are known to be somewhat exceptional in that 
they do not form starch in the process of assimilation; glucose, 
which is present in large quantities in the mesophyll-cells, apparently 
taking its place. From the papers of Bohm, Schimper, A. Meyer, and 
others, it would appear that the green leaf of the onion does not form 
starch at all. From the author’s experiments, however, it is evident 
that the onion is rather to be considered as an extreme instance of a 
plant like Euphorbia Lathyris, where the starch is present almost 
exclusively near the vascular bundle and at the base of the leaves; since, 
at any rate in seedlings, starch occurs nuder natural conditions in the 
same position as in this plant. 


Formation of Starch in the Chlorophyll-grains.j—Sig. G. Bellucci 
finds, by experiment on a number of plants, that, during the day starch 
and glucose accumulate in the plant, especially the latter. By night 
the starch disappears almost entirely from the leaves, while the quantity 
of glucose remains nearly unchanged, the loss from metabolism being 
compensated by constant transformation of starch into sugar. In the 
grape-vine, if the fruit is cut off, the amount of glucose in the leaves 
increases, not being used up in other parts. Experiments with cut 
portions of plants afford no guide for what takes place in the living 
plant. 


Reserve-substances in Evergreen Leaves.{—Herr E. Schulz has 
investigated the mode of formation and distribution of the reserve- 
substances, especially tannin, in the leaves of a number of evergreen 
trees and shrubs, both Angiosperms and Gymnosperms. The following 
are the more important results :— 

Sachs’s view that evergreen leaves serve during the period of rest as 
receptacles for reserve-materials, and Haberlandt’s, that the assimilating 
tissue of evergreen leaves performs this function, are true for Gymno- 
sperms and most Dicotyledons. This accumulation of reserve-substances 
cannot, however, be demonstrated in the case of Monocotyledons and 
some Dicotyledons. The author was unable to confirm Zimmermann’s 
statement that the parenchymatous cells which accompany the transfusion- 
tissue in Conifers, and the sheath which surrounds them, contain starch 
in the dormant period. Haberlandt’s assertion that the starch disappears 
from evergreen leaves in October, and makes its appearance again in 


* Ann. of Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 225-7. 
+ Staz. sperim. agyrarie ital., xiv. (1888) pp. 77-85. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxv. 
(1888) p. 231. { Flora, lxxi, (1888) pp. 223-41, 248-58 (1 pl.). 


984 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


March, is only true to a limited extent for Gymnosperms, with the excep- 
tion of the Gnetacen. 

The reserve-materials in evergreen leaves consist of starch, fatty oil, 
and tannin; the latter may be alone or may be accompanied by either of 
the others. Starch and tannin, however, are seldom found in the same 
cell; there appears to be a certain alternative relationship between them. 
Details are given with respect to the special tissue in the leaf in which 
the tannin is mostly found. 

Under the head of both Gymnosperms and Dicotyledones the details 
of the observations on a number of species are given. 


Glucose as a Reserve-material in Woody Plants.*—Very few obser- 
vations have hitherto been made on the occurrence of glucose as a reserve- 
material. Dr. A. Fischer states that it is of very common occurrence 
in woody Angiosperms. He finds it especially in the cells of dead 
tissues from which the protoplasm has disappeared. He never met with 
it in the living elements of the wood, the medullary rays, or the 
parenchyma of the wood, in which other non-nitrogenous reserve- 
substances (oil, starch, and tannin) are stored up. The distribution in 
the dead elements of the bark, the pith, and the wood, varies very greatly 
in different trees. The test used for the presence of glucose was the 
ordinary one of the reduction of oxide of copper. 


Colourless Oil-plastids in Potamogeton.t—Herr A. N. Lundstrém 
observes that the young leaves and stipules of many species of Potamo- 
geton exhibit a shining surface, which renders them completely dry even 
when immersed in water. This is due to large drops of oil in the 
epidermal cells. The author states that the formation of these oil-drops 
is connected with certain definite minute bodies contained in them, which 
he compares with Schimper’s starch-generators or leucoplastids, and 
terms “ oil-plastids.” They are rod-shaped, from 2-9 p» in length, and 
0:5 » in breadth ; there is sometimes only one, sometimes two or three 
are associated with each drop of oil. In living cells they are in a constant 
oscillating motion. They are not situated in the vacuoles, but in the 
parietal protoplasm, and are independent of the nucleus. They often 
disappear very rapidly out of the cells, and are certainly not the direct 
result of assimilation, being formed long before the chlorophyll-grains. 


Substance of which Gum-arabic is formed.{—Herr F. v. Héhnel 
has determined, by examination of a branch of Acacia Verek to which 
was attached a large lump of gum, that it cannot have been formed, as 
is the case with tragacanth and some other gums, by disorganization 
of the substance of the cell-walls, but that it belongs to the class of gums 
formed by modification of the cell-contents. 


Tannin and its connection with Metastasis.s—Herr H. Moeller 
maintains that tannin arises in the plant as an oxidation product in the 
transformation of starch; that starch unites with tannin to form a 
glucoside, possibly grape-sugar or amylodextrin ; and that this glucoside 
splits up easily into tannin and sugar, starch, or cellulose. Tannin is 


* Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) pp. 405-17. 

+ SB. Naturv. Studentsaillsk Upsala, Oct. 20, 1887. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxv. 
(1888) p. 177. t Ber. Deutsch, Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 156-9. 

§ ‘Ueb. d. Vorkommen d. Gerbsaiure u. ihre Bedeutung f. d. Stoffwechsel,’ 
Berlin, 1888. See Bot. Ceutralbl., xxxv. (1888) p. 266, 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 985 


therefore excreted especially where starch is being displaced or trans- 
formed into cellulose, or where metastasis is carried forward uninter- 
ruptedly. It is formed in large quantities where respiration is active, as 
in the assimilating organs, germinating seeds, &c. 


(8) Structure of Tissues. 


Importance of the Foliar Fibrovascular System in Vegetable 
Anatomy.*—M. O. Lignier states that, in order to find new taxonomic 
characters or materials for comparative vegetable anatomy, numerous 
botanists have studied the course of the fibrovascular bundles. An 
examination of the facts shows that the fibrovascular system of each leaf 
is ordinarily independent of that of the neighbouring leaves, and that in 
each of the bundles that compose the leaf-trace, the differentiation of 
primary tissues is made from above downwards. The arrangement of the 
fibrovascular bundles of a stem depends (1) on the symmetry of the stem 
at the moment of differentiation ;-(2) on the form of the foliar system. 
Finally, it is necessary to compare, first, not the course of the bundles in 
the stem, but that of the bundles in the foliar fibrovascular system of 
two branches. The study of the contacts which are established between 
the different leaf-traces ought only to take the second place. 


Wall of Suberous Cells.;—M. C. van Wisselingh gives the following 
as a summary of the results of his work :— 

(1) The suberous layer does not contain cellulose. (2) After macera- 
tion in chromic acid or in potash, or after being heated with solution of 
potash, the suberous layer is coloured violet by iodine or by chloriodide 
of zinc. (8) In opposition to the cuticularized layer, the suberous layer 
does not leave the cellulose base when warmed in glycerin. (4) Different 
chemical combinations, comprised under the common name of suberin, 
constitute the essential element of the suberous layer. (5) Heated in 
glycerin at the temperature when fats decompose, the suberous layer 
undergoes decomposition, which is not preceded by fusion. (6) The 
temperature at which this decomposition takes place is different for 
different plants, and often even for different parts of the same suberous 
layer. (7) The ability to resist the action of potash and other energetic 
reagents is very different for different elements of the suberous layer. 
(8) After prolonged treatment by these reagents at ordinary temperature, 
one is able by pressure to divide the suberous layer into small globular 
bodies or dermatosomes, which consist of suberin, and in consequence 
differ from those separated by M. Wiesner from many other tissues. (9) In 
this treatment the suberin which is found between the dermatosomes 
undergoes a decomposition, a saponification when potash is employed. 
(10) When potash is employed, it is found that the connections between 
the dermatosomes are more easily destroyed in a tangential than in a 
radial direction. (11) The substances included under the name of 
cutin resemble those which are united under the name of suberin. 
(12) ‘The presence of wax is rarer than has been formerly supposed. 
(13) Undulations may be formed in the suberous layer. (14) In many 
cases it is not necessary to suppose that a suberification of the middle 
lamella in the radial walls takes place. 


* Comptes Rendus, evii. (1888) pp. 402-5. 
t Arch. Néerland., xxii. (1888) pp. 253-96. 


986 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Reticulations in Vessels.*—Dr. O. G. Petersen calls attention to the 
occasional occurrence of a network with angular, or less often rounded 
meshes, and very delicate, almost colourless and transparent cell-walls, 
clothing the cavity of individual cells. This occurs in Cordia Myaa, 
Bougainvillea glabra, and Testudinaria elephantipes. It presents the 
appearance of an intermediate structure between trachee with bordered 
pits and sieve-tubes. 


Secretory Canals of Araucaria.t—M. P. A. Dangeard finds Arau- 
caria imbricata to differ from all other Conifers at present observed in the 
presence of secretory canals in the primary cortex of the root. While in 
Pinus sylvestris each cotyledon receives only one fibrovascular bundle, 
in Araucaria imbricata seven or eight pass into the cotyledons, accompanied 
by the secretory canals of the pericycle. The number of cotyledons is 
either two or three. ‘The secretory canals of the stem are independent 
of the two systems which may be detected in the embryo, the one lying 
a few layers below the epidermis of the cotyledons, the other more 
towards the interior. 


Super-endodermal Network of the Root of Leguminoseew and 
Ericacee.t—M. P. van Tieghem points out that many of the Conifers, 
Rosacex, Caprifoliacez, and Cruciferz have the super-endodermal layer 
of their root provided with a sustaining network. The author has found 
a similar network in the roots of certain Leguminosee, notably Cassia, 
and in certain Ericacex, more particularly Clethra. 


Sub-epidermal Network of the Root of Geraniacee.s—MM. P. 
van Tieghem and Monal state that the root of Geranium (G. molle, 
Robertianum, pyrenaicum, sanguineum, rotundifolium, striatum, carallianum, 
&e.) has below the piliferous layer a layer of large cells, constituting 
what is usually called the suberous layer or exoderm. Each cell of this 
layer has on its lateral and transverse face a band strongly thickened 
towards the interior. This constitutes the sustaining network. The 
same character is found in Pelargonium and in Erodium. In E. arabicum 
and chium the sub-epidermal network is often interrupted, and sometimes 
but feebly developed. 


Supporting Network in the Cortex of the Root.||—According to 
M. P. van Tieghem, a great number of Dicotyledons and Gymnosperms 
develope a supporting network in the cortex of their root; this has not 
been observed up to the present time either in Monocotyledons or Cryp- 
togams. It is formed by a layer of cells being strongly thickened on 
their radial and transverse septa. This network may be either simple 
or compound, and may occupy three different positions. Most frequently 
it belongs to the last cortical layer but one, and is in contact with the 
endoderm. This may be observed in many Crucifere, Rosacew, Capri- 
foliacee, &c. Sometimes, on the contrary, it is the external cortical 
layer, as in Geraniacee; while sometimes it may occupy « position 
intermediate between the two preceding, as in Rhizophora Mangle. In 
fact it will be thus seen that the network may occupy almost any - 
position between the epidermis and the endoderm. 


* Bot. Centralb]., xxxv. (1888) pp. 27-8. 

t Bull. Soc. Linn. Normandie, i., 1886-7 (1888) pp. 174-7. 

¢ Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) p. 273. § Ibid., p. 274. 
|| Ann. Sei. Nat., vii. (1888) pp. 375-8. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 987 


Exoderm of the Root of Restiacee.*—M. P. van Tieghem states 
that the cortex of the root of Restiacee includes, as usual, two zones, 
the thick internal layer surrounding the central cylinder, and the ex- 
ternal layer. It is in the external cortical zone that the peculiar 
cortical character which is the subject of this paper resides. 

All the Restiacez have this common character, that the exoderm is 
folded; but either this endoderm constitutes by itself the external 
cortical zone and is derived directly from the differentiation of the 
initial layer of the zone (as in Elegia, &c.); or it is only the outer-. 
most layer of a more or less thickened and lignified mass produced by 
the centrifugal tangential division of the initial layer, and derived by the 
differentiation of the merismatic layer of this zone (as in Restio, &c.). 


Periderm of Rosacee.}—M. H. Douliot states that it is well known 
that in the Pomez the periderm originates in the epidermis, while in 
the Amygdalee and Prunez it originates in the first layer of the cortex 
situated immediately beneath the epidermis; in the Rubi this same 
formation originates in the endoderm; and finally, as in the case of 
Spirza opulifolia, it may originate in a layer of cells situated beneath 
the endoderm. It is thus seen that the periderm may be formed in four 
different places in the stem of Rosacezx, but the last case of all, where 
it originates beneath the endoderm, that is, in the pericycle, is by far 
the most common, and examples are met with in the Spirwez, Fragariex, 
Poteries, and Rosee. The author concludes by describing in detail 
the formation of the periderm in Alchemilla valgaris. 


Plants which form their Rootlets without a Pocket.t—MM. P. 
van Tieghem and H. Douliot have already shown that rootlets and 
lateral roots are formed in the pericycle by two successive tangential 
divisions. ‘There are, however, certain secondary differences which are 
of interest, and which vary in the different families, as, for example, 
that the root or rootlet is sometimes naked, sometimes enveloped in an 
endodermal “ pocket.” Among Dicotyledons the authors have observed 
the formation of rootlets without a pocket in fifteen families :—Crucifere, 
Capparides, Fumariacee, Papaveracee, Resedacee, Caryophyllacee, 
Portulacacez, Hlecebracex, Crassulacere, Chenopodiaces, Amaranthacer, 
Basellez, Aizoacez, Cactacez, and Begoniaceze. In Monocotyledons the 
absence of a pocket is very rare, and the only instance cited by the 
authors is Pandanus. In Gymnosperms the Abietinez are destitute of 
a pocket, also Taxus, Podocarpus, and Sequoia. 


Observations on Pinguicula.§—M. P. A. Dangeard continues his 
observations on Pinguicula. An endoderm exists in the stem of all the 
species the author has examined, the cells of this layer being often rect- 
angular. ‘The bundle which passes into the leaf proceeds from two 
different sympodia. These sympodia follow in the stem a course 
analogous-to that found in Primula spectabilis or Androsace septentrionalis ; 
they, however, may be found arranged in two different ways. The 
sympodia either form a normal annual ring, or they are the same as in 
the lower part of the stem. From this anatomical point of view, then, 
the genus Pinguicula can be divided into two sections. 


* Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxiy. (1888) pp. 448-50. + Ibid., pp. 425-7. 
¢ Ibid., xxxv. pp. 278-81. § Ibid., xxxv. pp. 260-3. Cf. this Journal, ante, p- 74. 


Y88 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Anatomy of the Salsolee.*—M. P. A. Dangeard states that the 
Salsolew present several interesting structural peculiarities. In Nowa 
spinosissima Moq. three fibrovascular bundles detach themselves from 
those which form the central cylinder of the axillary branch; the 
median bundle is destined for the leaf, the two lateral ones bifurcate 
when near the cortex, one ramification approaches the median bundle, 
while the other furnishes the bundles which are met with in the cortex 
of the stem. ‘The cortical parenchyma includes (1) the epidermis; 
(2) a single layer of palisade tissue, interrupted in several places; (3) a 
layer of cubical cells; (4) a large number of small bundles with the 
xylem on the outside; (5) a colourless parenchyma. In certain of the 
Salsolew, for example Anabasis aphylla L., the structure of the cortical 
parenchyma is slightly different. 


Thylle.}—Dr. H. Molisch has investigated the phenomena connected 
with the formation of thylle in various tissues. They may occur in 
spiral, annular, or pitted vessels. In the first two cases the extremely 
thin wall of the vessel coalesces completely with the wall of the 
adjoining parenchymatous cell to form a homogeneous membrane which 
grows out into a thylla. In pitted vessels it is the closing membrane 
of the pit which grows out into the thylla, The remarkable growth of 
the membrane in all these cases appears to confirm the view of Wiesner 
that the growing cell-wall is permeated by protoplasm, and owes to it 
its power of growth. The thylla does not, as a rule, become shut off 
from the parenchymatous cell by a septum; they are therefore not them- 
selves correctly described as cells. In a few cases they become 
sclerotized. 

The number of genera in which thylle have at present been observed 
amounts to about 100. The greater number occur in the natural orders 
Marantacee, Musacew, Juglander, Urticacer, Moree, Artocarper, 
Ulmacee, Anacardiacez, Vitacew, Cucurbitacer, and Aristolochiacee. 

The most important function of thylle appears to be to serve as 
stoppers, and secondly as organs for the storing up of starch. The 
stomata become in some cases stopped by protrusions from the meso- 
phyll-cells which project into the pore. 


(4) Structure of Organs. 


Rooting of the Albumen of Cycas.t—M. P. Duchartre states that of 
the two parts which constitute the kernel of an adult albuminous seed, the 
one, the embryo, is essentially living and active, and susceptible of vege- 
tating, while the other portion, the albumen, has been regarded until the 
present time as inactive and inert, and not susceptible of ulterior 
development. The author, however, has found that the seeds of Cycas 
Thouarsii R. Br., a great number of which often contain no embryo, can 
not only rupture the three zones of seminal integument, but can even 
form adventitious roots. , 


Subterranean Shoots of Oxalis.s—Mr. W. Trelease describes the 
underground shoots of Oxalis violacea. The watery tap-root is very 
strongly developed. From the withered bulb just above this protruded 


* Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) pp. 197-8. 

+ SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, June 14, 1888. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxv. (1888) 
p. 222. ¢ Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) pp. 243-51. 

§ Bot. Gazette, xiii. (1888) p. 191 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 989 


from three to seven fleshy white runners, 1-2 mm. in diameter, and in 
some cases considerably over 2 in. long, with a few scales in the lower 
part, the rather acute apex somewhat enlarged, and crowded with scales, 
the inner ones very thick and yellow, forming the young bulb of next 
year. The runners appear to curve downwards at first, afterwards 
bending upwards at the apex. 

Torsion of Stems.*—Herr R. Goethe gives particulars with regard 
_to the twisting of the trunk of a number of trees. Many trees, as Popu- 
lus canadensis and alba, appear never to exhibit torsion, while others, like 
the horse-chestnut, do so almost invariably. In the same species, or 
sometimes only in the same variety, the direction of the torsion is 
always constant; thus in the horse-chestnut it is always to the right, in 
the hornbeam to the left. Sometimes it does not manifest itself till the 
tree is 20 or 30 years old. 

Spines of certain Plants. |—M. A. Lothelier states that numerous 
botanists have studied the spines of plants; but they have either exclu- 
sively noted the external morphology of the organs, or they have studied 
them from the point of view of their development. The anatomical 
study has been completely neglected. The author, in this paper, gives 
the results of some observations on this head. 

If a section be made of the spine of Ulex europzxus, from the middle 
to the apex, the pith appears thick and already sclerotized; round the 
pith are numerous fibrovascular bundles. A sclerenchymatous bundle 
alternates regularly with each of the fibrovascular bundles, usually 
corresponding to the number of ribs in the branch. In addition, radial 
collenchymatous bands situated opposite the fibrovascular bundles cor- 
respond to each of the ribs, and assist in sustaining the organ. ‘The 
spines of Cratzgus oxyacantha, as also those of Genista hispanica, 
Lycium barbarum, Citrus triptera, &e., have the morphological value of 
branches arrested in their development. 

The author concludes with the following remarks:—(1) That in 
Spines there is a reduction of the vessels from the base to the apex, with 
a gain in the sclerenchymatous elements; (2) The sustaining elements 
are furnished by the central cylinder, and especially by the strongly 
sclerotized pith. (8) All the tissues are differentiated. (4) In spinous 
branches the growth does not take place at the base, but at the apex. 


Protection of Buds.t{—Herr A. Feist has investigated the various 
arrangements for the protection of the leaf-buds of dicotyledonous trees. 

I. The protection of buds may consist of modified leaf-structures— 
(a) The great majority of dicotyledonous trees have buds protected by 
special leaf-like structures of variable morphological nature, but in 
function exclusively protective. This is the case in Quercus, Fagus, 
Populus, Ulmus, Carya alba and tomentosa, Tilia, Maakia, Laburnum, 
Actinidia, Cephalanthus, Ailanthus. (b) Naked buds surrounded by leaves ~ 
only are exhibited by Pierocarya caucasica, Carya amara, Juglans nigra, 
Viburnum Lantana, V. Lentago, V. dentatum, Virgilia lutea, Khus 
glabra, Ptelea mollis and trifoliata, Sophora japonica, Robinia viscosa. 
In this case the buds not unfrequently require protection during 
development, and this is always afforded by various forms of hairs. 


* Gartenflora, xxxviii. (1888). See Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) p. 450. 
+ Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) pp. 313-8. 
It Nova Acta K. Leop.-Carol. Akad. Naturf., li. (1887) pp. 303-44 (2 pls.). 


1888, ax 


990 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


(c) In species of Salix, in Viburnum Opulus and V. opulifolium, the first 
pair of leaves grow together to form a completely inclosed protective 
sheath. (d) A similar sheath, morphologically referable however to the 
stipules, is exhibited by the buds of Platanus and Magnuoliacew. This 
ochrea arises by true fusion of the stipules of aborted main leaves in 
Platanus, by apparent fusion in Magnolia and Liriodendron. (e) In 
stipulate plants the stipules usually share in the equipment of the 
buds. Exceptions are found in trees with very much reduced stipules, 
as Euonymus, Ailanthus, and Viburnum Lantana. In the species of 
Alnus, the protection is essentially restricted to the stipules of a 
developed main leaf of the daughter-bud. Petteria ramentacea exhibits 
another modification of stipular protection. 

II. As a summer protection, some plants have utilized the leaf-base, 
which either incloses the axial bud like a cap, or covers it like a 
cushion. The first mode is seen in Virgilia lutea, Rhus glabra, Robinia 
viscosa, R. hispida, R. Pseudacacia, Platanus, and some of the Philadel- 
phacew. ~The latter is exhibited in the species of Gleditschia, Sophora . 
japonica, Ptelea mollis and trifoliata, Menispermum canadense, Aristo- 
lochia sipho, Negundo aceroides, Calycanthus floridus and occidentalis. 

The separation of the subtending leaf takes place in Robinia, Meni- 
spermum, most Philadelphacew, and in Gleditschia, in such a way that 
the many-layered leaf-base covers the bud in winter. 

An effective winter and summer protection is afforded in Kalmia 
latifolia and Spartianthus junceus, by a leaf-stalk which completely 
conceals the resting buds. In many plants (Papilionacee, Amygdalacee, 
Rosacez), the leaf when it falls leaves an articulation behind. 

Ill. The bark may also function in preserving the buds. This pro- 
tection may be a summer one, produced by the leaf-base, as in 
Xanthoxylon Bungei, Sophora, Skimmia, Gleditschia, Phellodendron 
amurense. When the cortical tissue protects the buds also during 
development, the modification occurs in very young stages when the 
subtending leaf is still in the hyponastic state. This is seen in Actinidia 
colomicta and A. polygama, Cephalanthus occidentalis, and Gymnocladus 
canadensis. 

IV. Finally, the hairs furnish effective protection. They serve 
either to augment protective modifications of another nature, or they 
may by themselves discharge the greater part of this function. Hairy 
protections may be well seen in Virgilia lutea, Gymnocladus, Viburnum 
Lentago, Pterocarya, &e. 


Development of the Flowers of the Mistletoe.*—Herr L. Jost has 
minutely followed out the development of both male and female flowers 
in Viscum album, comparing it with what is known in other species be- 
longing to the Loranthacez. The general results arrived at are that the 
organs of reproduction of both kinds are greatly reduced in structure. 
The ovules are reduced to single macrospores or embryo-sacs which are 
formed at the end of the axis of the flower; the anthers or microspor- 
angia are not placed on special staminal leaves, but on the perianth, In 
their structure they bear a closer resemblance to those of some Vascular 
Cryptogams than to the andreecium of most Angiosperms. 

In the development of the female flowers, the mother-cells of the 
embryo-sacs are produced in considerable numbers, a common number 


* Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) pp. 357-68, 373-87 (1 pl.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 991 


being seven; they do not appear to be formed in any regular order, and 
have no relationship to the two carpels. Only a small proportion of 
them develope into embryo-sacs capable of impregnation; in the speci- 
mens examined which were parasitic on Populus laurifolia and Aisculus 
Pawia, the number of embryos and embryo-sacs was always two or 
three, but it is stated to vary according to the species of the host. 

The embryo-sac always consists in its early stage of two cells result- 
ing from the transverse septation of a mother-cell ; and, as in most other 
Phanerogams, the lower of these two cells alone developes into the 
embryo-sac, putting out a lateral protrusion which penetrates into the 
parenchyma of the ovary, and developes into the broad lower end of the 
sac. The upper of the two sister-cells does not, however, entirely dis- 
appear, aS in most other flowering plants, and may possibly also 
sometimes develope into a fertile embryo-sac. This confirms Goebel’s 
view that every daughter-cell of an archespore may potentially develope 
into an embryo-sac. In the mature embryo-sac are seen three antipodals 
with thick membranes, three bodies belonging to the egg-apparatus, and 
two central nuclei which afterwards unite into one. 

The above description closely corresponds to that of Treub respecting 
Viscum articulatum, excepting that in the latter case the upper of the 
two sister-cells disappears altogether. In both species the embryo- 
sacs are developed from the hypodermal layer of cells of the end of the 
floral axis. 

The male flowers of the mistletoe are much less common than the 
female. Here also it is the hypodermal layer of the anther from which 
the pollen-cells originate. In the course of their formation the epi- 
dermis undergoes irregular periclinal divisions, and ceases to exist as a 
special layer. The outermost layer of the archespore-cells developes 
into the tapetal cells, the inner layers undergo further increase of size, 
and become the mother-cells of the pollen, The mode of formation of 
the pollen in the mother-cells presents nothing special. 

The great peculiarity of the male flowers of Viscum, viz. the direct 
formation of the anther on the perianth, and not in connection with a 
special staminal leaf or stamen, appears to belong exclusively to the 
Loranthacee ; but, within this order, occurs also in Arceuthobium, and 
apparently also in the very rare Castrea falcata. 


Arceuthobium.*—Mr. T. Johnson has carefully followed out the 
embryogeny of this genus of Loranthacez, especially of A. Oxycedri. 
The following is a summary of the results. 

There is formed in the ovary, at the time of pollination, a conical 
papilla projecting free from its base, containing two embryo-sacs im- 
bedded at the side of the apex, in which the contents are arranged as in 
a normal angiosperm. The embryo-sacs arise in each case from a single 
hypodermal archespore-cel!. The morphological value of the contents 
of the ovary is the same as in Loranthus sphxrocarpus, as described by 
Treub,f the papilla consisting of the modified apex of the floral axis, and 
constituting a placenta bearing two buried ovules reduced to embryo- 
sacs. At no time does the papilla fuse with the wall of the ovary ; its 
apical region becomes a pseudo-calyptra to the solitary embryo, which is 
straight, and has an exserted radicle without a root-cap. The dehiscence 
of the fruit is finally due to the rupture of a basal horizontal merismatic 


* Ann. of Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 137-60 (1 pl.). t See this Journal, 1882, p. 363. 
9 
o x2 


992 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


zone. The seed is covered by the endocarp, the most external layer of 
which consists of viscid cells, which are severed at their peripheral 
(distal) ends when the seed is ejected. Neither the sessile anthers nor 
the carpels are vascular ; the latter are opposite to the segments of the 
perianth. The author found no adventitious purely vegetative shoots ; 
he detected a constant connection of the xylem-vessels of the parasite 
with the tracheides of the host (Pinus or Juniperus), and a cleavage of 
the radial wall of the tracheide of the host by the finest haustoria of the 
parasite, 


Seeds with Two Integuments.* —M. H. Jumelle states that the 
integuments of seeds do not generally coincide with those of the ovule. 
When the seed has two integuments, these integuments are formed from 
the external envelope of the ovule, the internal one disappearing. This 
rule, to which up to the present time the Euphorbiacee have been con- 
sidered an exception, is not however absolute; the author pointing out 
two other groups which form exceptions. These groups are Rosacez 
and Rutacez, in both of which, as in Euphorbiacesw, the two integu- 
ments of the ovule persist. In this case these two integuments are 
separated by the formation of a layer of cork in the region of the 
chalaza, where they were previously in contact. 


Overlooked Function of many Fruits.;—Prof. C. E. Bessey points 
out that the green colour of the rind of many fruits is not an original 
condition, but that the colour makes its appearance during their increase 
in size. He suggests that this very general development of chlorophyl- 
lous tissue is for the nutrition of the embryo in the seed. A striking 
instance is afforded by many species of elm in which, at the time of 
flowering, there are no leaves upon the tree, nor do any appear until the 
fruits are fully grown. 


Trapella, Oliv., a new Genus of Pedalinew.t—Dr. F. W. Oliver 
describes the structure, development, and affinities of Trape/la Oliv., a 
new genus of Pedalinew, the single known species, T. sinensis, growing 
in China. 

Trapella is an aquatic plant with long straggling and simple or 
sparingly branched stems, which ascend obliquely through, and float on 
the surface of the water. In the axils of the floating leaves, and of the 
submerged ones for some distance below the surface, flowers are formed, 
which in the former case open just above the surface, but in the latter 
are cleistogamic. The ovary is bilocular, but tle anterior loculus is 
quite rudimentary. The placentation is axile, and the two ovules are 
inserted high up in the fore-part of the ovary. Both are pendulous, and 
apparently anatropous, with superior micropyle. They are attached 
right and left of the median line to the top of the partition separating 
the reduced and fully developed loculi. The upper ovule, attached on 
the right side of the median line, is sessile, but the lower one is suspended 
by a longish funicle. 

In the youngest buds the author was able to investigate, all the 
organs were already formed. Up to a certain point the developmental 
history of both upper and lower ovules is identical ; since, however, in 


* Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) pp. 302-4. 
+ Amer. Natural., xxii. (1888) p. 531. 
} Ann. of Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 75-112 (5 pls. and 1 fig.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 993 


all cases it is the upper one only which becomes a seed, this only is 
described. 

The author then describes in detail the development of ovule and 
embryo-sac both before and after fertilization. The cell which is cut off 
from the archesporial cell does not lie, as is usual, at the micropylar, 
but at the opposite end of the embryo-sac mother-cell; and another most 
anomalous appearance is to be seen at the base of the embryo-sac after 
fertilization. The lowest cap-cell elongates until it has considerably 
outstripped the embryo-sac in length; further, it becomes divided by a 
longitudinal median wall into symmetrical halves. The “appendage,” as 
the author denotes this structure, consists therefore of two very long 
tapering cells, applied side by side, and ensheathed in the down-growing 
ovular tissue. 

In the earlier stages after fertilization no formation of endosperm 
takes place in the micropylar region of the embryo-sac. This region is 
occupied by the synergide, which, instead of dwindling after fertilization 
in the usual manner, go on increasing in bulk. By the time the seed is 
ripe, they have become so large as to constitute a conspicuous tubercle at 
the top of the seed. They have a granular protoplasm, often highly 
vacuolated, and each has a large nucleus. Dr. Oliver suggests that these 
enlarged synergide assist in the absorption of the food-material for the 
placenta. 

In Trapella the cap-cells normally all lie below, i.e. at the chalazal 
end of the embryo-sac, and not at its micropylar end. It is the upper- 
most cell of the row which becomes the embryo-sac; a structure almost 
unique among known plants. The author points out analogies in some 
respects in the development of the embryo-sac in Loranthus, Asarum, and 
Crocus, but in no other case do we meet with a persistent enlarged cap- 
cell, as in Trapella. 

As to the affinities of Trapella: though coming in touch with 
Myoporinez in the form and arrangement of the seeds, it is separated 
therefrom by its eminently pedalinaceous fruit and opposite leaves. None 
the less Trapella forms a connecting link between the two somewhat 
artificially separated cohorts of the “Genera Plantarum,” namely the 
Personales and Lamiales; Pedalinee being placed with the former, 
Myoporinee with the latter. Trapella must, however, rest in Pedalinee, 
forming the only genus in a new tribe Trapellez. 


B. Physiology.* 
(1) Reproduction and Germination. 


Cross-fertilization.t—_Mr. A. G. Foerste describes the structure of 
the flowers of the following American species in connection with their 
adaptation for cross-fertilization by insects :—Silene pennsylvanica and 
regia, Sabbatia angularis, Psoralea Onobrychis, Desmodium canescens, 
Lespedeza violacea, Tecoma radicans, Mimulus alatus and _ ringens, 
Scrophularia nodosa, Ruellia strepens, Pycnanthemum lanceolatum, 
Monarda fistulosa, Brunella vulgaris, aud Stachys cordata. 


* This subdivision contains (1) Reproduction and Germination; (2) Nutrition 
and Growth (including Movements of Fluids); (8) lritability; and (4) Chemical 
Changes (including Respiration and Fermentation). 

+ Bot. Gazette, xiii. (1888) pp. 151-6 C1 pl.). 


994 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Self-fertilization and Cleistogamy in Orchids.*—Mr. H. N. Ridley 
points out four common methods of self-fertilization among orchids :— 
(1) By breaking up of the pollen-mass and the falling of the pollen, 
either directly upon the stigma or into the labellum, whence it comes 
into contact with the stigma. This, of course, can only happen in the 
case of orchids with pulverulent pollen. (2) By the falling of the 
pollen-masses as a whole from the clinandrium into the stigma. This is 
probably not rare, but the author has met with records of but few 
examples. (3) By the falling forward of the pollinia from the clinan- 
drium or the anther-cap, the caudicle and gland remaining attached to 
the column. (4) By flooding of the stigma. The pollen-masses remain 
in the anther-cap or on the clinandrium, while the stigma exudes so 
great a quantity of stigmatic fluid that it eventually reaches the edge of 
the pollinia, which immediately emit pollen-tubes. This seems to be 
the commonest method of self-fertilization. 


Self-pollination of Spergularia salina.j—While this species from 
Egypt and the oases of the Libyan desert is described as having open 
flowers with pink petals, Herr P. Magnus finds it at Kissingen cleisto- 
gamous and usually with only three stamens. The apetalous condition 
and reduction in the number of stamens he believes to be a hereditary 
peculiarity in certain localities due to the continued absence of any 
means of pollination. 


Fertilization of Cattleya labiata.t—Mr. H. J. Veitch deduces the 
following general statements from a series of observations he has made 
on the fertilization of Cattleya labiata :—The impregnation of the ovules 
of Cattleya labiata var. Mossiz, under glass in the climate of London, 
takes place from 75-90 days after the pollination of the flower, the 
length of time being doubtless influenced by the state of the weather 
during the interval, and especially by the amount of direct sunlight the 
plants receive ; the more direct sunlight, the shorter the interval, and 
vice versa. A proportion of the ovules only are fertilized; but how 
great that proportion is it is not possible to determine with certainty ; it 
is never probably much less than one-half; it probably varies from a 
little lees to a little more than one-half. It is certain also that of the 
seeds which are mature and good, a greater or less proportion of them 
failed to germinate under artificial conditions. It takes about twelve 
months, under the same conditions, to effect the maturation of the 
capsules ; it being highly probable that during the winter months, when 
the temperature in which the plants are kept is comparatively low, and 
the amount of direct sunlight and sunheat is at the minimum, there is 
a cessation of growth which is renewed as the summer months are 
approached, 


(2) Nutrition and Growth (including Movements of Fluids). 


Daily Assimilation of Carbohydrates.$—From the results of a 
number of experiments on the chemical composition of leaves in the 


* Journ. Linn. Soc. (Bot.), xxiv. (1888) pp. 389-94 (1 pl.). 

+ SB. ee Naturf. Freunde Berlin, Feb. 28, 1888. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxv. 
(1888) p. 5. 

t Journ. Linn. Soe. (Bot.), xxiv. (1888) pp. 395-406 (14 figs.). 

§ ‘Zur Kenntniss d. tag]. Assimilation der Kohlehydrate, Halle, 1887. See Bot. 
Ztg., xlvi. (1888) p. 465. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 995 


ordinary air and in an atmosphere devoid of carbon dioxide, Herr O. 
Menze draws the following conclusions:—The dry weight of leaves 
increases by day when assimilation is unchecked; and this increase in 
dry weight is due to the increase in the amount of assimilated starch. In 
cut leaves the amount of sugar increases in the light, in consequence of 
the absorption of starch. When leaves are exposed in light to an 
atmosphere containing no carbon dioxide, they decrease in dry weight 
from loss of starch, which is indicated by an increase in the amount of 
soluble carbohydrates. 


Action of Light on Roots grown in Water.*—M. Devaux gives the 
results of some experiments he has made on the action of light on roots 
grown in water. When exposed to light the growth of roots in water is 
far less than when left in darkness ; hairs, however, are more abundant. 
The ramification of roots exposed to light is feeble, while if left in dark- 
ness branches are quickly and abundantly formed. The pigmentation, 
however, of roots exposed to light is strong, while in darkness it is 
weak. 


Influence of Radiant Heat on the Development of the Flower.tj— 
Herr H. Véchting has shown, by placing between the source of light 
and an opening bud of Magnolia conspicua a solution of iodine in carbon 
bisulphide, which has the power of completely absorbing the illumina- 
ting rays of the spectrum, while allowing the dark heat-rays to pass, 
that the curvature attendant on growth takes place just as in normal 
sunlight. It must therefore be the non-illuminating rays to which 
the growth is due. 


(3) Irritability. 


Electromotive Properties of the Leaf of Dionzea.t—Prof. J. Burdon 
Sanderson has continued his investigations into the electromotive pro- 
perties of the leaf of Dionza in the excited and unexcited states. They 
confirm his previous conclusion, that the property by virtue of which 
the excitable structures of the leaf respond to stimulation is of the same 
nature as that possessed by the similarly endowed structures of animals. 
He finds the two sets of phenomena termed those of the resting-current 
and those of the action-current of the leaf—i.e. the electrical properties 
possessed. by the leaf when stimulated and those which it displays when 
at rest—so linked together that every change in the state of leaf when at 
rest conditionates a corresponding change in the way in which it reacts 
to stimulation ; the correspondence consisting in this, that the direction 
of the response is opposed to that of the previous difference of potential 
between the opposite surfaces, so that as the latter changes from 
ascending to descending, the former changes from descending to 
ascending. 

The author considers that this can only be understood to mean that 
the constantly operative electromotive forces which find their expression 
in the persistent difference of potential between the opposite surfaces, 
and those more transitory ones which are called into momentary exist- 
ence by touching the sensitive filaments or by other modes of stimula- 
tion, have the same seat, and that the opposition between them is in 


* Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) pp. 305-8. 
t+ Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 167-78 (1 pl.). 
t Proc. Roy. Soc., xliv. (1888) pp. 202-4. Cf. this Journal, 1882, p. 633. 


996 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


accordance with a principle applicable in common to the excitable 
structures of plants and animals, viz. that the property which renders 
a structure capable of undergoing excitatory change is expressed by 
relative positivity, the condition of discharge by relative negativity. 

All these changes depend, in the author’s opinion, on a difference of 
physiological activity between adjacent excitable cells or strata of cells 
of which the protoplasmic linings are in continuity. 


Case of Abolition of Geotropism.*—M. P. Duchartre observed that, 
out of a dozen seeds of Phaseolus multiflorus sown at the same time, the 
germination of one was very abnormal. At the end of several days a 
small body was seen to project from this seed above the soil. This 
body elongated vertically; then, upon four equidistant longitudinal 
lines, small protuberanees were formed. 'The author then recognized it 
to be the radicle of the embryo. He allowed it to grow for about two 
months, and then examined it anatomically, an account of which is 
included in the paper. 


Studies in Vegetable Biology.t—Mr. S. Le M. Moore continues his 
observations on the influence of light upon protoplasmic movement. 
After making various experiments with Selaginella Martensii and other 
plants, the author states that we are justified in concluding that intense 
light and prolonged darkness act in precisely the same manner upon 
chlorophyll-bodies ; and it appears also that, paradoxical though it may 
sound, fragmentation and condensation are really the same phenomenon, 
the only difference between them being that in the former condensation 
is more violent along certain lines than along others, thus entailing 
disruption, whereas in the latter it proceeds equally all round. 

The author then makes sume further observations on photolysis. In 
those epidermal cells which are well provided with apparently healthy 
chlorophyll without starchy contents, the deficient factor is proto- 
plasmic energy; and if this be correct, the failure of photolysis to come 
off in epidermal issues is easily understood. At any rate, it is submitted 
that, in view of its inability to stand the crucial test here applied to it, 
the “activity” doctrine should henceforth be dismissed from vegetable 
physiology. 

The author then makes some observations on the behaviour of the 
chlorophyll-plate of Mesocarpus with regard to light. (1) In diffused 
light the chlorophyll-plate of Mesocarpus sets itself so as to cut the 
greatest number of light-rays of the highest intensity. (2) In weak 
sunlight the plate turns edge up. (3) The plate can be negatively 
apostrophized. (4) When the turning movement is in progress, it will 
not be stopped in the dark if light have imparted sufficient impetus to 
the plate. (5) In darkness the plate may turn so as to remain either 
face up or on its edge. 

He then goes on to discuss the lateral position of the chlorophyll of 
palisade-cells, The capacity of light to modify the form of palisade- 
cells is admitted on all hands. This granted, what difficulty is there in 
conceiving that the form of all cells in direct relation with light is 
so ordained by this agency, as to insure, upon simple mechanical prin- 
ciples, the maximum exposure of the protoplasm to favourable, and its 
minimum exposure to unfavourable (positive) grades of illumination ? 


* Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) pp. 266-71. 
+ Journ. Linn. Soe. (Bot.), xxiv. (1888) pp. 351-86 (3 pls.). , 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 997 


(4) Chemical Changes (including Respiration and Fermentation). 


Function of the Colouring Matter of Chlorophyll.*— Prof. A. 
Hansen states, that like the colouring matter of blood, the absorption- 
bands of chlorophyll have no connection with the assimilative power of 
the same. The colouring matter absorbs carbonic anhydride, and forms 
with it an unstable compound, which passes on the carbonic anhydride 
to the plasma of the chlorophyll-grains. Chlorophyllous cells absorb 
more and more gas as the temperature rises, consequently the law of 
diffusion and absorption of gases is not followed in this case; but the 
absorption is dependent on atmospheric pressure. 


Diastase.|—Herr J. Fankhauser states that during the germination 
of barley, the development of the plumule is accompanied by the 
destruction and solution of the cell-walls in the grain. This solution 
may be due either to a substance formed by the embryo, namely diastase, 
or to micro-organisms. A microscopical examination, however, failed 
to show the presence of the latter. 

Experiments showed that during the germination both of potatoes 
and of barley, the evolution of carbonic anhydride is accompanied by 
the secretion of one or of several powerful acids. Malt treated with 
5 per cent. solution of potash yielded an extract, which, after suitable 
treatment, gave a distillate, in which formic acid was the chief con- 
stituent. It was found that both this distillate, and also commercial 
formic acid, had the power of changing a carbohydrate into sugar. 

The author believes that the cell-walls of the starch-granules which 
are in direct contact with the plumule are attacked by the formic acid it 
secretes, and that in the course of brewing, the formic acid acts on the 
starch just as dilute sulphuric acid would. He also attributes the 
sweetness that potatoes acquire to a similar cause; formic and probably 
other allied acids, are formed during the respiratory process that ac- 
companies sprouting, and these acids attack the cell-walls and also 
change the starch into sugar. Many other phenomena of plant growth 
can be explained by this secretion of strong acids by organs containing 
e chlorophyll, for instance, the piercing of wood by the mycelia of 
ungi. 


Substance containing Sulphur in Cruciferous Plants.t—Mr. J. 
Smith states that in the animal body the substances which contain 
sulphur are, with one exception, exclusively proteid or derived from 
proteids. In plants, on the other hand, numerous sulphur-containing 
substances are found. The amount of uncombined and of combined 
sulphuric acid was estimated in the seeds of nineteen varieties of 
Crucifers; the former occurs either not at all, or in mere traces, except 
in Isatis tinctoria, and here it is probably in the shell of the seed. The 
ethereal hydrogen sulphates were found abundantly in all, but especially 
in the seeds of Stnapis nigra. In this form of mustard seed, about one- 
third of the total sulphur is combined as proteid, the remaining two- 
thirds as myronic acid. 


* Bied. Centr., 1888, pp. 357-8. See Journ. Chem. Soc., 1888, Abstr., p. 867. 

+ Bied. Centr., 1888, pp. 205-7. See Journ. Chem. Soc., 1888, Abstr., p. 867. 

{ Zeitschr. Physiol. Chem., xii. pp. 419-33. See Journ. Chem. Soc., 1888, Abstr., 
p. 869. 


998 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


y. General. 


Myrmecophilous Plants.*—M. M. Treub adduces fresh evidence in 
favour of his theory that the passages inhabited by ants in the stem of 
Myrmecodia tuberosa (previously described as M. echinata) have for their 
primary function to serve as reservoirs of water to prevent desiccation, 
and only secondarily become the abode of ants, which may possibly then 
be of some service to the plant; though he finds them to flourish equally 
when not visited by ants. The passages are developed in the hypocotyl 
of the seedling at the very earliest period, before it can possibly be 
visited by insects. The author adduces a number of examples of a 
similar protection against desiccation, where there is no question of the 
water-receptacles being due to the attacks of ants. 


Myrmecophilous Plants.t—Prof. F. Delpino continues his observa- 
tions on those plants which attract the visits of ants by extra-floral 
nectaries. In the order Bignoniaces they are especially numerous, 
amounting to about 66 per cent. of the total number of species in the 
order. ‘Tey occur chiefly on the upper or under side of the leaf. 

In the Pedalinez 13 out of 28 species have extra-floral nectaries. In 
the Convolvulacez a few species only are named. In the Verbenacew 
there are all grades, from the entire absence of such organs to their very 
elaborate development in Clerodendron. In this genus there are 24 
myrmecophilous species ; in Citharoxylum 12. In Scrophularinee, Melam- 
pyrum is a myrmecophilons genus. In Polygonez only very few species 
are named. In the Euphorbiacew there are 56 myrmecophilous species 
in the Crotoner, 20 each in the Acalypheze and Hippomanes, 2 in the 
Kuphorbiew, none in the remaining tribes. In the Salicineew and 
Orchide a few species are enumerated. In the Liliaceee many species 
of Lilium have extra-floral nectaries ; in the Smilacez there are about 
95 species; a few in the Dioscoreaces, Hemodorace, and Iridew ; about 
80 in the Musacee, and a few among Palme. 

Among Filices Pteris aquilina has nectaries at the base of the frond. 
Among Fungi the honey-secreting spermogonia of the Uredinem appear 
to attract flies rather than ants. Ustilaginew also protect the leaves of 
the host-plant by attracting ants, and thus preventing their being browsed 
by animals. 

New Myrmecophilous Plants.t—Herr K. Schumann describes in 
great detail the structure of several hitherto undescribed myrmeco- 
philous plants, mostly from tropical South America, belonging to the 
Melastomacee. 

Duroia hirsuta (Amajona hirsuta P. and E.) is a small tree in which 
the provision for the inhabiting ants is in the form of a chamber in the 
main stem, contained in a large swelling, of very complicated and 
perfect structure. Other species described are Cuviera physinodes, 
belonging to the Rubiacce, Pleurothyrium macranthum (Lauracee), 
Calophysca tococoidea, Maiaca Guianensis and flexuosa, and Tococa 
lancifolia and macrophysca. 

Duroia saccifera, as well as D. hirsuta, possesses also another con- 


* Ann. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg, vii. (1888) pp. 191-213 (3 pls.). See Bot. 
Centralbl., xxxv. (1888) p. 295. Cf. this Journal, 1884, p. 81. 

+ Mem. R. Accad. Sci. Istit. Bologna, viii. (1888) pp. 601-50. See Bot. Centralbl., 
xxxy. (1888) p. 233. Cf. this Journal, 1887, p. 620. 

} Pringsheim’s Jahrb. f. Wiss. Bot., xix. (1888) pp. 357-421 (2 pls.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 999 


trivance for the lodging of ants, in the form of bladders on the leaf-stalk 
or upper surface of the leaf. 

The author concludes with a classification of the various contrivances 
for the accommodation of ants, which he divides in the first place into 
axial cavities, and chambers connected with the leaves. 


Comparative Cultures of the same species at different altitudes.*— 
M. G. Bonnier has undertaken the culture of a certain number of species 
at different altitudes in the Alps and Pyrenees. In all cases certain 
plants were sown, while others were planted. When a sowing was to be 
made, the packet of seeds was divided into three lots, one was sown at 
a high altitude, another at a medium altitude, and the third at Paris. 
The author found that the plants he experimented with were very 
unequally affected by this change in their external physical conditions. 
Thus Thymus Serpyllum, for instance, changed much less in aspect than 
Lotus corniculatus or Leontodon autumnalis. It may be laid down as a 
general rule that annuals or biennials are much less modified than 
perennials. The author then compares Teucrium Scorodonia grown at 
high altitudes in the Pyrenees with that grown in Paris. In the former 
case the plants produced very short aerial stems, with deep green hairy 
leaves, while in the latter case the stems were much longer, the green 
of the leaf much lighter, and hairs less numerous. 


B. CRYPTOGAMIA. 
Cryptogamia Vascularia. 


Antherozoids of Cheilanthes hirta.j—M. Leclerc du Sablon has 
carefully followed out the mode of formation of the antherozoids in this 
fern. In the way in which the mother-cells of the antherozoids are 
formed, there is no essential difference from that described by Stras- 
burger in the case of Polystichum aculeatum. When the antherozoid is 
about to be formed, the nucleus of the mother-cell becomes first eccentric ; 
then a portion of the protoplasm forms a hyaline ring round the cell in 
contact with the nucleus ; the nucleus then elongates itself to the length 
of this ring, and forms the body of the antherozoid ; the greater part of 
the hyaline ring is employed in the formation of the cilia; the rest forms 
the thin protoplasmic envelope of the antherozoid. This vesicle plays no 
essential part in the process of impregnation. 


Apogamy in Notochlena.{—Prof. S. Berggren records an additional 
instance of apogamy among ferns, in the case of Notochlena distans from 
New Zealand, which differs in some respects from the well-known example 
of Péeris cretica. From the anterior incision in the prothallium there 
proceeds a ligulate lobe, usually unilamellar, but sometimes composed of 
several layers of cells. ‘his may again produce a similar lobe at its - 
apex. As the central lobe possesses a fibrovascular bundle, it may be 
regarded as an intermediate structure between an ordinary prothallium 
and the first leaf of a young fern. Near the apex of the central lobe a 
papilla-like swelling is formed by cell-division, which developes into the 
rudiment of the first leaf of the young shoot. Between it and the margin 
of the central lobe is the apex of the young stem; the second leaf is 
formed at the opposite side of the apex, and at a later period the first root. 


* Bull, Soc. Bot. France, xxxiv. (1888) pp. 467-9. + Ibid., xxxv. 238-42 
t Bot. Notiser, 1888, pp. 14-6 (I fig.). See Bot. Centralbl., sxxv. (1888) p. 183. 


1000 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Dissemination of the Spores of Equisetum.*—According to Mr. 
F. C. Neweombe, there are three factors in the mechanism for the dis- 
semination of the spores of Equisetum (arvense):—(1) The somewhat 
sudden lengthening of the axis of the spike immediately before ripening, 
due to the elongation of the cells of which it is composed, by which the 
sporangia are pushed apart. (2) The unequal contraction in length and 
width of the strong external layer of cells of the sporangium-wall. In 
this layer are both annular and spiral cells. (8) The action of the elaters, 
which is twofold; first, the ejection of the spores from the sporangium, 
which is brought about by the unequal hygroscopic properties of the two 
layers of cells of which the elaters are composed; and secondly, the 
facility for carriage by the wind afforded by their broad spathulate 
extremities. 


Muscinee. 


Peristome.t—M. Philibert in this paper concludes his observations 
on the internal peristome of mosses and its variations. The Fontina- 
lacew, including Dichelyma, ought to be included among the Hypno- 
bryacee, while the genera Cinclidotus and Scouleria belong, on the 
contrary, to the Aplolepidez. In Scouleria aquatica the peristome is 
remarkable ; it is composed of thirty-two large linear obtuse teeth, and 
approaches the structure of that of Grimmia, while the peristome of 
Cinclidotus has more analogy with that of Barbula. 

After describing the Timmiacex in some detail, the author states that 
this type may be considered as belonging to the Hypnobryaces, as the 
basilar membrane and teeth preserve exactly the same structure. The 
difference, however, becomes much more marked in the Funariacezx, the 
primitive plan of the peristome in this family being much the same asin 
the Bryacex. The plates and lamell of the teeth are disposed in exactly 
the same manner. The dorsal network of the internal peristome is made 
up of a series of rectangles which are opposed to the ventral plates of 
the teeth, and the ventral network is made up of two rows of trapezes 
placed opposite to each tooth. 

The author, in conclusion, states that the simple peristome of the 
Aplolepidex has more analogy in its structure with the internal peristome 
of the Diplolepidez than with their external peristome. In order to ex- 
plain the origin of the Aplolepidez, it is only necessary to suppose that, 
in an analogous structure to that of Funaria, the exterior teeth being 
wanting, the internal peristome then remained, and this latter in course 
of time took upon itself a much more varied and larger development. 


Development of the Sporogonium of Andrea and Sphagnum.}—Dr. 
M. Waldner has carefully followed the development of the sporogonium 
in these two genera of mosses. In Andreza he finds that, as is the case 
in the typical forms of mosses, the spore-forming layer originates in the 
layers of cells at the base of the sporogonium. The wedge-shaped 
apical cell forms, by apical growth, from eleven to thirteen segments, and 
the formation of the sporogenous layer begins in the third oldest seg- 
ment. In Sphagnum, on the other hand, the first rudiment of the 


* Bot. Gazette, xiii. (1888) pp. 173-8 (1 pl.). 

+ Rev. Bryol., xv. (1888) pp. 50-60, 65-9. Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 620. 

¢{ ‘Die Entwick. d. Sporogone v. Andrewa u. Sphagnum,’ Leipzig, 1887. See 
Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr., xxxviii. (1888) p. 281. Cf, this Journal, 1880, p, 122. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1001 


sporogonium, formed by apical growth, consists of only from six to eight 
segments, and the sporogenous layer does not spring from the basal 
but from the parietal layer, the uppermost three layers and the apical 
cell take part in its formation. 


Hygroscopic Movements of the Thallus of Marchantiee.*—Dr. O. 
Mattirolo finds the thallus of certain Marchantiee to be remarkably 
sensitive to hygroscopic influences. The observations were made 
chiefly on species belonging to the genera Plagiochasma, Reboulia, 
Grimaldia, Fimbriaria, and Targionia. 

Taking Grimaldia dichotoma as an example, the flat thallus consists 
of three distinct layers of tissue, viz. (1) the epidermal layer, perforated 
with stomata; (2) the assimilating layer, consisting of rows of chloro- 
phyllous cells at right angles to the surface, between which are large 
air-chambers ; and (3) the mechanical layer, composed of closely-packed 
spherical or poiyhedral cells without intercellular spaces, containing a 
certain amount of chlorophyll, starch-grains, and oily substances. The 
whole is attached to the soil by rhizoids, and its under surface covered 
with brown or dark violet scales. 

The seat of the movements is in the mechanical layer, the cells of 
which are remarkably hygroscopic, more than doubling in size on 
absorption of water. ‘To such an extent does the thallus shrink up on 
desiccation that it seems almost to disappear; but it has the power of 
retaining its vitality in this condition for a very long period (certainly 
as much as thirteen months), swelling and resuming its normal appear- 
ance when again moistened. The movements are entirely independent 
of light or darkness, and are produced solely by changes in the moisture 
of the air. When the air is dry, the thallus folds itself up, the free 
margins rising and bending over, so that the ventral scaly surface com- 
pletely covers the whole thallus, concealing the stomata, and protecting 
it from further desiccation and from injury from changes of temperature. 

The cells of the mechanical layer were very frequently found to be 
occupied by Nostoc colonies. 


Characesze. 


New Chara.j—Dr. O. Nordstedt describes a new species of Chara 
from Australia, belonging to the section Kuchara. Its diagnosis he gives 
thus :—Ch. haplostephana, bistipulata, haplostiche, corticata, gymnophylla, 
dioica. ‘The leaves are in whorls of from 7 to 10, with 2 to 4 antheridia 
in the secondary whorls of the male plant; the diameter of the stem is 
from 0:2 to 0°4 mm.; the leaves 0-15, the secondary leaves 0:12 mm.; 
the antheridia 0:45 to 0-60 mm.; the nucleus of the sporangium black, 
with seven spirals, from 0°42 to 0°52 mm. long and 0°30 to 0:35 mm. 
broad. 


New Nitella.t—Dr. O. Nordstedt describes a remarkable new species 
of Mitella, which he calls N. dualis, obtained from Liberia among the 
results of the “Gazelle” Expedition. It has unusually long slender 
internodes, and the secondary and tertiary branches are densely clustered, 
so as to give it a very beautiful appearance. 


* Malpighia, ii. (1888) pp. 181-223 (2 pls.). 
+ Hedwigia, xxvii. (1888) p. 189 (1 pl.). 
} Forschungsreise 8.M.S8, Gazelle, part iv. [Bot.], Characez, 2 pp. and 1 pl. 


1002 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Alge. 


New Genera of Floridee.*—Herr P. F. Reinsch describes a number 
of new species of Floridex from the island of 8. Georgia, together with 
the following three new genera :—Chroa, a genus of Chordariaces, with 
an entire vesicular frond without dissepiments, near to Chordaria; 
Merenia, a genus of Rhodomelacesw, with filamentous monosiphonous 
frond, and transversely septate stichidia, intermediate between Poly- 
siphonia and Dasya; and Straggaria, an epiphytic genus, of which the 
fructification is unknown, forming subconvex tubercles on Alnfeltia 
plicata, the exact position of which is at present undetermined. 


Zygospores of Conjugate.t—Herr H. Klebahn has followed out 
closely the history of the nuclei of the two cells which unite to form the 
zygote of the Conjugate ; he finds it to differ in some cases from the 
process as described by Schmitz and Strasburger. In several species of 
Spirogyra there are in the young zygospore still two distinct nuclei, 
each with its own nucleolus. In this state it may remain some days 
before the complete fusion of the nuclei. In the species of Zygnema 
examined the complete coalescence of the nuclei appeared to take place 
much more rapidly. Among the Desmidiex, he obtained in Closterium 
(lunula) the remarkable result that even in the ripe zygote the two nuclei 
still remained perfectly distinct. In another genus of desmids, Cylin- 
drocystis (Brebissonii), the process more closely resembled that in 
Zyynema. In the young zygospore was found a single nucleus, but 
usually with two nucleoli. 


Spongocladia.t— Messrs. G. Murray and L. A. Boodle discuss the sys- 
tematic position of this genus of Areschoug’s, referred by him to the 
Siphonere, with which they identify Spongodendron Zanard. They 
regard these alge as probably more nearly allied to Cladophora than to 
the Siphonez, though closcly resembling some genera of that family, 
especially Codiwm, in external appearance. The thallus of S. vaucherizx- 
formis Aresch. consists of long filiform tubes so interwoven as to form a 
number of irregularly dichotomous branches, the whole recalling the 
appearance of a digitate sponge. The tubes of which the branches are 
composed are septate below, and short lateral branches are given off at 
about a right angle from the cells. These serve to bind more closely 
together the interwoven filaments. A probable formation of zouspores 
was observed, which appear to germinate within the mother-cell. 

A remarkable feature of these alge is the groups of siliceous spicules 
which plentifully strew the course of the tubes. They are obviously 
sponge-spicules, and are far more abundant than is consistent with a 
merely accidental presence. Those found in connection with the different 
species belong to the different sponges; and the authors suggest that 
there may possibly be some biological relationship of a symbiotic 
character between the sponge and the alga. 


Aerophytic Species of Ulotrichacee.$ — Dr. A. Hansgirg gives a 
synopsis of the known species of the genera Hormidiwm, Hormiscia, and 
Schizogonium, which he treats as belonging to the Ulotrichacer. He 


* Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Gesell., vi. (1888) pp. 144-56. Tt Ibid, pp. 160-6 (1 pl). 
t~ Ann. of Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 169-75 (4 figs.). 
§ Flora, lxxi. (1888) pp. 259-66. Cf. this Journal, unte, pp. 465 and 775. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. ~— 1003 


restates his previous view that the so-called genera Schizogonium, Hor- 
midium, and Prasiola, are but stages in the development of the same 
organism, there being an unbroken chain of intermediate forms between 
them. The species of Hormidium are to be distinguished from those of 
Hormiscia or Ulothriz proper by. the form of their chromatophores. 
Those of Schizogonium and Prasiola resemble those of Hormidiwm. 


Structure of Ulothrix.*—Herr G. Istvanffi describes several points 
in the structure and details of Ulothrix zonata. The rhizoids, for which 
he prefers the term haptera, he finds, after a time, lose their contents, 
and then serve the purpose simply of mechanical cells. They exhibit 
peculiar phenomena of prolification, and almost invariably branch 
dichotomously. 

Some of the cells are subject to a peculiar hypertrophy, swelling up 
to fifteen or even twenty-five times the length of the ordinary vegetative 
cells; they are endowed with life, and are frequently divided up into 
smaller cells; they contain a number of nuclei. 

The cells of Ulothrix always contain a nucleus which is visible with- 
out special treatment. The chlorophores are stretched and ruptured by 
the rapid growth of the vegetative cells; they can, within a short period, 
assume various forms and display a variety of movements. 


Bulbotrichia.—M. E. de Wildeman { proposes the suppression of the 
genus Bulbotrichia Ktz., which he regards not as an independent genus 
of alge, but as being of a lichenoid nature, consisting of gonidia allied 

_to Protococcus, which are beginning to be invaded by filaments of a 
parasitic fungus, in fact, as a lichen in process of construction. In this 
opinion Dr. J. B. de Toni { agrees. 


Hansgirgia, a new genus of aerial Alge.§—Dr. J. B. de Toni 
describes an epiphytic alga found on the leaves of Anthurium Scherzianum 
in the botanic garden at Padua, which he establishes as the type of a 
new genus Hansgirgia ( flabelligera), belonging to the Trentepohliacez, 
but distinguished from the other known genera of the family by the 
green colour being masked by the presence of chlororufin or hemato- 
chrome in the cells. The vegetative structure consists of a mass of 
chroolepidiform branched and anastomosing filaments; these are in 
parts distinct, forming a network, in parts more or less united laterally 
into imperfect discs having the form of a fan. The chlorophores are 
parietal, concealed by the orange-yellow pigment, which occurs in the 
form of globules, and is turned violet or nearly black by zinc chior- 
iodide. The reticulate filaments produce ovoid zoosporanges containing 
biciliated zoospores; their germination has not been observed, nor any 
conjugation between them. He proposes from it the establishment of a 
‘sub-family, Hansgirgiez, connecting the two other sub-families of Trente- 
pohliacez, viz. Chroolepidez and Mycoidee. 


Chlorogonium. ||—Chlorogonium euchlorum Ehrb., placed by Ehren- 
berg and Stein among the Flagellate Infusoria, has been carefully 
examined by M. P. A. Dangeard, who considers it to belong to the 
Volvocinez, and to come very near to Chlamydomonas. It has both a 


* MT. Med.-Naturw. Classe Siebenbiirg. Mus,-Vereins, xiii. (1888) pp. 53-66 
C1 pl.). See Bot. Centralbl., xxxv. (1888) p. 122. 

+ CR. Soe. RK. Bot. Belg., 1888, pp. 157-9. I Loe. cit., p. 157. 

§ Ibid., pp. 154-7, and Notarisia, iii. (1888) pp. 581-4. 

|| Bull. Soc. Linn. Nurmandie, i. 1886-7 (1888) pp. 160-4. 


1004 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


sexual and a non-sexual mode of reproduction ; the latter by zoospores, 
the former by zoogametes, which resemble the zoospores but are smaller. 
The process is exceedingly similar to that in Chlamydomonas Reinhardti 
Dang. 

Chlamydomonas.*—M. P. A. Dangeard gives a review of the species 
belonging to this genus, which amount to four, two of them being new, 
viz. C. Reinhardti and C. Morierit. He divides the genus into two 
sections, according as the membranes of the zoogametes serve to form 
the membrane of the zygospore, or the oospore surrounds itself with a 
membrane of its own, the former section, including C. Reinhardti and 
multifilis, the latter C. pulvisculus and Moriert. 

In C. Reinhardti the biciliated zoogametes are indistinguishable 
before conjugation ; the zygospore contains corpuscles which have often 
been mistaken for nuclei. In C. multifilis Fres., the zoogametes have 
four cilia; the zygospore breaks up into a colony resembling that of 
Pleurococcus. In C. pulvisculus Miill., the female zoogametes are dis- 
tinctly larger than the male. C. Morieri displays a peculiar kind of 
conjugation. When the zoogametes come together, a perforation takes 
place in their cell-walls ; their cilia disappear ; and the protoplasts of 
the two cells fuse together through the perforation. This species also 
developes non-sexual zoospores, which become resting-spores in the 
winter. 

Considerable doubt rests upon other species which have been included 
in the genus. 


Chlamydococcus pluvialis.;—M. P. A. Dangeard reviews the pre- 
vious observations on this organism (Protococcus pluvialis A. Br., 
Hematococcus lacustris Gir.). He confirms the observations of Rosta- 
finski as to the formation of two kinds of zoospore, microzoospore and 
macrozoospore, and compares the structure to that of Gonium pectorale ; 
the only difference being that while in that genus the macrospores and 
microspores remain united in one plane, in Chlamydomonas and Chlamy- 
dococcus they separate from one another. The zoospores of C. pluvialis 
become encysted in the winter, and then constitute resting-spores of a 
red colour, in which condition they may remain dormant for a very long 
period. Before germinating the external red layer again becomes green, 
and divides into zoospores which escape by the rupture of the membrane 
of the resting-spore. ‘The statement of some observers that conjugation 
takes place between the macrozoospores the author believes to rest on 
an error of observation ; as is also the case with the so-called amceboid 
phase. 


Cell-membrane and Gelatinous Envelope of Desmidiexw.{—Herr P. 
Hauptfleisch has mede a series of very carcful observations on the 
investing cell-wall and gelatinous sheath of the desmids. The two 
halves of the cell are not exactly symmetrical, the plane of symmetry of 
one half lying at an acute angle to that of the other half. Hence the 
two cells which remain connected after division, or the filament where 
a number are united together, always exhibits an evident torsion. 

The wall of a desmid-cell always consists of two separate pieces, 


* Bull. Soc. Linn. Normandie, i. 1886-7 (1888) pp. 151-8. + Ibid., pp. 43-9. 
t ‘Zellmembran u. Hiillgallerte d. Desmidiaceen,’ 78 pp. and 3 pls., Greifswald, 
1888. See Hedwigia, xxvii. (1888) p. 199. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1005 


which firmly embrace one another by their sharp edges; and these two 
shells can be more or less easily separated by pressure. An exception 
is presented in Spirotenia, where the whole cell-membrane consists of a 
single connected piece, and the author proposes to unite this genus with 
Mesotznium and Cylindrocystis into a distinct group intermediate between 
the Desmidiese and Zygnemacee. In some species of Peniwm and 
Closterium the cell-wall consists of more than two pieces, and each of 
the two shells is also provided with a girdle-band formed subsequently. 
The author considers this structure of the cell-membrane to indicate an 
evident affinity between the Desmidiex and the Diatomacez. 

When the cell is about to divide, a short cylindrical piece of cell- 
wall is first of all intercalated on the inside of each cell on the line of 
contact, and this becomes set free by the separation of the two shells. It 
is only in some species of Closteriwm that the wall of the two shells opens 
by a transverse fissure. A. cylindrical cushion is then formed on its inner 
side, which gradually developes into a complete septum. A fresh haltf- 
cell is gradually formed on the inner side of the newly-formed septum. 

Independently of the well-known warts, spines, &c., the cell-wall of 
desmids is, in almost all cases, perforated by regularly arranged pore- 
canals, through which pass fine threads of protoplasm from the interior 
of the cell, ending on the outside in smaller or larger knobs. The warts, 
spines, and ribs of the cell-wall are hollow, and are usually destitute of 
these pore canals. 

The majority of desmids are invested in a narrow or broader gela- 
tinous envelope, which is sometimes easily visible, in other cases only 
by the use of staining reagents. This envelope is always composed of 
caps or prisms, placed separately on the pores of the cell-wall, and 
usually closely connected into a continuous layer. These prisms are in 
many cases (Didymoprium, &c.) penetrated by tufts of finer threads pro- 
ceeding from the knobs which terminate the threads which perforate the 
pores, ending in very fine cilia at the surface of the envelope. The 
gelatinous envelope of the individual cells is at times thrown off, and a 
fresh envelope then excreted by the cell. In those species in which no 
evident pores were detected in the cell-wall there was also no enveloping 
gelatinous sheath. The author believes that the substance of the gela- 
tinous envelope is excreted from the protoplasm of the cell through the 
pores, and that its chief purpose is to protect the knobs of the threads 
and especially the tufts of delicate cilia. Whether these serve for the 
conduction of irritation, or for absorption or excretion, he was unable to 
determine. 

In those species where the cells are united into filaments, the end- 
surfaces are also perforated, but exhibit no visible jelly; except that in 
Sphzrozosma the individual cells are surrounded by jelly, and in Des- 
midium jelly is also formed in cavities of the septa. The end-surfaces 
of the cells of these filamentous desmids are either altogether in contact 
(Ayalotheca mucosa) or only at certain points (Desmidium, Didymoprium) ; 
and although threads of protoplasm could not with certainty be detected 
passing through the pores, it is most probable that the protoplasm of 
the filament is in this way connected through its whole length. 

In young shells formed as the result of cell-division, the gelatinous 
envelope is usually not formed until after the shell is fully developed. 
Up to this time, in the filamentous forms, the growing shells are covered 
and protected by the envelopes of the old shells. The pores are also 

1888. 3 x 


1006 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


usually not to be seen until the cell-membrane is fully developed. When 
first formed they are exceedingly minute; they then gradually increase 
in size, and it is only when they have attained a considerable size that 
prisms of jelly are excreted through them. In some species the newly- 
formed shells of the mature individuals which result from division are 
partially or entirely thrown off and replaced by new shells; and these 
temporary shells are then destitute of pores. 


Fungi. 


““Spermatia” of the Ascomycetes.*—Herr A. Miller adduces fur- 
ther arguments against the hypothesis that these organs have sexual 
functions. The “spermatia” of Collema microphyllum, after lying for 
one month in a nutrient solution, begin to show signs of germination ; 
in the course of the second or third month they put out protuberances 
in two or three directions; and in the fourth month a branched tube 
has made its appearance. In no single case has the union of a “ sperma- 
tium ” with a trichogyne been demonstrated ; in addition to the impro- 
bability that so minute a body could transmit its fertilizing power 
through a row of twenty-four cells. The argument drawn from the 
swarm-cells of the Ectocarpeee—that bodies which have sexual functions 
ean still germinate directly when the opportunity of exercising that 
function is wanting—he dismisses on the ground of the very distant 
relationship between the Ectocarpez and the Ascomycetes. 


Basidiomycetes.t—The last published part of Cohn’s ‘ Cryptogamic 
Flora of Silesia,’ compiled by Dr. J. Schréter, treats of Tremellinei, 
comprising the genera Sebacina, Exidia, Ulocolla, Craterocolla, Tremella, 
Tremellodon, and the new genus Tulasnella, with the following diagnosis : 
—On globular basidia, similar to those of Tremella, but undivided, are 
formed thick ovate sterigmata resembling large spores or the partial 
basidia of the Tremellinei, which lengthen, and bear spores at their 
sharp-pointed ends. It is intermediate between Sebacina and Thelephora, 
but its position among the Tremellinei is doubtful. 

Then follows an account of the Dacryomyces, comprising the genera 
Dacryomyces, Guepinia, Calocera, Dacryomitra, and doubtfully Ditiola, 
with insufficiently known basidia, and the Hymenomycetes, which are 
arranged under eight families :—Hxobasidiacei, Hypochnacei, Thelepho- 
racci, Clavariacei, Hydnacei, Polyporacei, Cantharellacei, and Agaricacei. 
The following new genera belonging to the Hymenomycetes are de- 
scribed :—Hypnochella, Aleurodiscus, Clavulina, Phzodon, Amaurodon, 


Ochroporus, Pheoporus, and Dedaleopsis, as well as a number of new 
species. 


Heterobasidial Basidiomycetes.t—M. J. Costantin criticizes the 
publication of MM. Brefeld, Istvanffi, and Johan-Olsen § on the Proto- 
basidiomycetes, especially on some. points of classification and nomen- 
clature ; and gives himself a review of the conidial filamentous forms 


described in Brefeld’s work, comparing them with the known genera of 
Mucedinee. 


* Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) pp. 421-5. Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 466. 

+ ‘Kryptogamen-Flora vy. Schlesien,’ Bd. iii. Lief. 4, Breslau, 1888. See Hedwigia, 
XXvii. (1888) p. 213. Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 79. 

¢~ Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 229-34. 

§ Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 778. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1007 


Polyporex.*—M. J. de Seynes traces the complete life-history of 
two species belonging to this family :—Polyporus sulfureus and beens. 

In P. sulfureus the thickenings in the cell-walls are often coloured 
blue by iodine. The reproductive bodies are of two types, spores and 
conidia. The spores are usually developed on basidia. The conidia 
may be formed either on the mycelium, or in the interior of the sporiferous 
receptacle, or in the receptacles which produce nothing but conidia, 
which resemble a Myxomycete, and have been described under the name 
Piychogaster aurantiacus. The mycelial conidia are produced in the 
interior of the woody tissue of the tree on which the Polyporus grows. 

P. biennis may occur in the condition of Fibrillaria or of Ceriomyces ; 
the former being a kind of rhizomorph ; the latter consisting of rounded 
tubercles or stalked cones. The basidia are replaced by branching 
conidiophores which may produce larger or smaller conidia. 


Prototremella.t—M. N. Patouillard characterizes this new genus of 
heterobasidious Hymenomycetes as follows :—Prototremella nov. gen. 
A heterobasidious Hymenomycete with an exposed, sub-gelatinous 
receptacle, the simple basidia carrying four large sterigmata; spores and 
conidia globular. 

This fungus is met with on the sallow and poplar, and has been 
named Prototremella Tulasnei by the author; two other species are 
indicated, which possibly belong to this genus: Corticiwm widum Fr., 
and Hxidiopsis effusa Brefeld. 


Ascospora Beijerinckii{—M. P. Vuillemin describes Ascospora 
Beijerinckii, a parasite which attacks cherry trees. On the black spots 
which may be seen on the surface of the fruit, various adaptations of the 
mycelium for its latent life will be found. The violet-brown filaments 
with thick walls frequently take a moniliform aspect. Stylospores and 
pycnidia are also formed. The perithecia are black, depressed, spherical 
in shape, and with either a very small opening or none at all. At first 
the ripe asci are ovoid, being attached by the larger extremity ; they 
inclose eight spores. 


Uredines and their Hosts.§ —Herr P. Dictel has here classified all 
the known species of Uredinez, 980 in number, according to their host 
plants, which belong to 122 different families. The greatest amount of 
heterecism is displayed by the parasites of the Composite and the 
Graminee. Among Rosacez, true species of Phragmidium occur only on 
the Rosez, Potentillez, Rubez, and Poteries, while the Gymnosporangia 
are confined to the Pomezw. The 12 species of the exotic genus 
Fiavenelia are confined to the Leguminosae, the species of Hemileia to the 
Rubiacez, and Pileolaria to the Anacardiacee. On 120 species of 
Composit there are known, as parasites, 25 ecidia, 9 Uromyces, about 
20 Puccinizx, 1 Cronartium, 1 Melampsora, and 3 Coleosporie. ; 


Structure and Life-history of Puccinia Graminis.||—Prof. H. 
Marshall Ward describes in this paper a portion of a series of illustra- 
tions of life-histories of parasitic fungi, which he has made for the 


* “Rech. pour servir & hist. nat. des végétaux inférieurs,’ pt. ii. Polypores, 66 pp. 
and 6 pls. See Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) Rev. Bibl., p. 114. 

t+ Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 267-70. t Ibid., pp. 255-9. 

§ ‘Verzeichn. sammtlicher Uredineen, nach Familien ihrer Nahrpflanzen 
geordnet,’ 58 pp., 1888. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxv. (1888) p. 187. Cf. this Journal, 
ante, p. 97. || Ann. of Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 217-22 (2 pls.). 

3X 2 


1008 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Science and Art Department, South Kensington. Fig. 1 is drawn from 
a longitudinal section through a still green leaf of the wheat, attacked by 
the fungus in what is termed the Uredo-form. In fig. 2 are seen the 
details of development of the uredospores under a higher power. 
Fig. 8 shows a series of four successive stages in the germination of 
the same uredospore, sown in water on glass. Fig. 4 is a longitudinal 
section through the leaf of a young wheat plant, on which uredospores 
had been allowed to germinate for 48 hours. In fig. 5 is a group of 
teleutospores. Fig. 8 shows three of the sporidia germinating in water 
on glass. Fig. 10 is a transverse section of a leaf of barberry infested 
with the Avcidium form. Fig. 11 is a portion of a very thin section 
through a spermogonium, 


Peronospora viticola.*—According to Sig. G. Cuboni, this parasite 
of the vine occurs in two forms:—(1) “forma palese,’ on the flower- 
stalks either before or after flowering, numerous conidiophores appearing 
through the stomata, and causing the flower or young fruit to perish ; 
and (2) “forma larvata,” on the fruit when nearly ripe, bringing about 
its discoloration and decay ; in this form no conidia appear, but the pulp 
is permeated by the characteristic unicellular mycelium with its globular 
haustoria and chamber-like prolongations. Infection takes place on the 
flower-stalks by the conidia formed on the leaves; the fungus spreads 
from them to the berries, and not from the berries backwards on to the 
ax's. Sexual orgaus are never found on the fruit. The mycelinm 
appears to retain its vitality for a long time in the dead fruits. The 
remedy recommended is copper sulphate, which prevents the germination 
of the conidia on the flower-stalks. 


Peronospora of the Rose.t—Sig. G. Cuboni describes Peronospora 
sparsa, a parasite of the rose, hitherto very rarely seen in Europe. The 
mycelium has long branched haustoria; the conidiophores project 
through the stomata on the under side of the leaf, the leaf-stalk, and 
the flower-stalk. The hitherto unknown oospores were found in the 
sepals. 


Ascophorous form of Penicillium candidum.j—To the species of 
Penicillium of which the ascophorous form is known, viz. P. glaucum 
and aureum, Dr. F. Morini now adds P. candidum, growing on an 
acorn of Quercus pubescens. The ascophorous hyphs were only obtained 
with great difficulty, and Dr. Morini describes in detail several points in 
which this phase differs from that in the two species named above. 


New Aspergillus.s—Dr. F. Eichelbaum describes a peculiar form of 
Aspergillus, possibly a new species, from eczema-scales from the human 
skin. It possesses the peculiarity of presenting all stages of transition 
between the ordinary mode of formation of the pencils of spores in 
Aspergillus to the simple abstriction of single conidia from the extre- 
mities of hyphe. 


Ombrophila and Guepinia.||—_M. L. Quélet states that the genus 
Ombrophila was founded by Fries in 1849, and included two species, 


* Atti Congr. Naz. d. Bot. Critt. Parma, 1887, 20 pp. and 2 pls. See Hedwigia, 
xxvii. (1888) p. 117. 

+ Le staz. sperim. agr. ital., xiv. pp. 295-308 (1 pl.). See Hedwigia, xxvii. 
(1888) p. 210. } Malpighia, ii. (1888) pp. 224-34. 

§ SB. Gesell. Bot. Hamburg, Jan. 9, 1888 (1 fig,). See Bot. Centralbl., xxxv. 
(1888) p. 113. || Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 322-4. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1009 


O. rubella P. and O. lilacina Wulf. Karsten, however, in 1871, 
nnited with it certain species belonging to the genera Bulgaria and 
Cudonia (Helotium of some authors), while the Ombrophila of Boudier 
(1885) contained one species, O. clavus A.S The genus Ombrophila 
of Phillips (1887) contained three species taken from three different 
genera, Bulgaria sarcoides Jacq., Cudonia clavus A. 8., and Calloria atro- 
virens Pers. It appears, however, rational and necessary to the author 
to preserve for the generic name of this group the sense in which it was 
first given. The genus Guepinia Fries has been divided by M. Brefeld 
into Gyrocephalus Pers. and Dacrymyces Rees, which division appears 
quite justifiable. 


Peridermium Pini.*—Herr H. Klebahn identifies this parasite of 
the Weymouth pine with Coleosporium Senecionis parasitic on Senecio. 
He distinguishes three forms of Peridermium, viz. :—(a) P. Pini acicolum, 
with the spore-membrane warty throughout, on leaves of Pinus sylvestris ; 
(6) P. Pini corticolum, spore-membrane warty, but with a spot that is 
only areolated, on the bark of P. sylvestris; and (c) P. Strobi n. sp. or 
var., spore-membrane warty, with a larger quite smooth space, on the 
bark of P. Strobus. 


Pilacre. t—According to M. E. Boudier, Pilacre is a good genus; 
although it was not sufficiently characterized at first by its author, this 
is not a reason for suppressing it and substituting another. Pulacre 
faginea, Petersii, and several others of Berkeley’s species are not true 
Pilacres, but belong to the genus Ecchyma, and it is also necessary to 
substitute this latter name for that of Pilacre in the important works of 
Brefeld. Pilacre remains a true discomycetous fungus. 


Fusoma.{ —On a species of Fusoma which he grew equally well on 
solid and on fluid substrata, M. E. Wasserzug finds three kinds of 
spore :—septate fusiform conidia, which vary greatly in size and number 
according to the medium; unseptate conidia, formed either at the ex- 
tremity of slender mycelial filaments or springing directly from the 
septate conidia; and a third kind, spherical eysts with thick walls 
formed within mycelial filaments, and analogous 1o the so-called 
chlamydospores of the Mucorini. 


Diplocladium.§—M. J. Costantin finds a Diplocladium parasitic on a 
morel, and occurring in two forms—a Diplocladium-form, and that of a 
bulbiform sclerotium. He discusses the question whether this latter 
form is identical with Hypomyces aurantius or ochraceus, or with an 
undescribed species of Hypomyces, but without coming to any definite 
decision. 


‘‘ Edelfaule” of Grapes.||—Dr. H. Miller (Thurgau) has determined 
this disease to be caused by the attacks of a Botrytis, the B. acinorum of 
Pers., but identical with B. cinerea. Attacking the unripe berries in 
wet, but only the ripe berries in dry weather, it kills the epidermal 
cells, increases evaporation, and hence raises the concentration of the 
juice. It takes up sugar and acids, which it decomposes in the process 


* Abhandl. Naturw. Ver. Bremen, x. pp. 145-55 (1 pl.). See Hedwigia, xxvii. 
(1888) p. 118. + Morot’s Journ. de Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 261-4. 

{ Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxy. (1888) pp. 199-204. § Ibid., pp. 291-6. 

|| Landwirth. Jahrb., 1888, pp. 83-160 (1 pl.). See Bot. Zeit., xlvi. (1888) p. 429. 


1010 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


of respiration, and hence diminishes the quantity of these substances in 
the berry. The percentage of sugar in proportion to other substances 
is, however, increased. 


Stysanus and Hormodendron.*—MM. J. Costantin and Rolland 
describe the various stages in the development of Stysanus, a genus of 
Mucedine not uncommon on excrement cultures. Also a new species of 
the allied genus Hormodendron, which they call H. nigro-album, found 
on the excrements of a fowl, springing up only after a long period of 
rest. 


New Mould.t—Herr E. Eidam finds a new hyphomycetous fungus, to 
which he gives the name Coemansia spiralis, forming white spots on a 
damp horse-cloth, characterized by the septate unbranched conidiophores 
being coiled spirally in their upper portion. 

Entomophthoree of the United States.{|—Mr. R. Thaxter has com- 
menced the publication of a monograph of the Entomophthoree of the 
United States. There are three genera, Empusa (including Entomo- 
phthora and Triplosporium), Massospora, and Basidiobolus. The publica- 
tion commences with Empusa, ot which twenty-six species are recognized, 
sixteen of them new. 


Gonidia of Gymnosporangium.§—Herr F. Kienitz-Gerloff has de- 
tected two kinds of gonidia on Gymnosporangium clavarizeforme growing 
on the juniper, one chiefly in the interior, the other near the periphery 
of the fructification. Both are double spores, and about 0:09 mm. in 
length. In the former the pedicel has usually disappeared as mucilage ; 
they are equally pointed at the two ends, and strongly constricted in the 
middle, and have a thin and colourless membrane, and finely granular 
yellow-brown contents; the latter are always stalked, more pointed at 
one end than the other; they have a scarcely perceptible constriction, 
their membrane is dark brown and much thicker, and their contents are 
not granular, resembling those of ordinary teleutospores. These latter 
form, on germination, at most four, usually only one or two germinating 
tubes, as is usually the case with teleutospores; the former, on the 
contrary, always form more than one, usually about five. He suggests 
that the thin-walled spores may possibly be the hitherto unknown 
uredospores of Gymnosporangium. 


Recent Researches on the Saprolegniez. || — Prof. M. Hartog dis- 
cusses recent researches on the Saprolegniew, and more particularly 
those of Rothert published in the ‘ Proceedings of the Cracow Academy,’ 
xvii., 1887. 

Rothert’s paper affords the first full and complete account of the 
double segregation and homogeneous stage, worked out independently, 
but confirming the author’s views as far as they go. His paper, how- 
ever, does more than this; it affords the first complete account of the 
formation of the zoosporangium, its septum, and the tubular process 
through which the spores escape. 

The author then gives an abstract of Rothert’s paper, and supple- 


* Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) pp. 296-302. 

+ JB. Schles. Gesell. Vaterl. Cultur, 1887, pp. 262-5. See Bot. Centralbl., xxxy. 
(1888) p. 304. 

t Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., iv. (1888) pp. 131-201 (8 pls.). See Bot. Gazette, 
xiii. (1888) p. 194. § Lot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) pp. 389-93 (1 pl.). 

| Ann. of Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 201-16. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1011 


ments this abstract by the criticism of all points on which his own work 
has led him to take a different view. Rothert’s work was principally 
conducted on three forms of Saprolegnia belonging to the ferax group ; 
and he has shown that these species are far more favourable than 


Dictyuchus or Achlya. 


Chytridium elegans, n. sp.,a Parasite of the Rotatoria. * — 
Prof. E. Perroncito found that Philodina roseola Ehrenberg, the charac- 
teristics of which are “ Philodina roseola aut carnea, levis, ocellis 
ovatis, pedis corniculis” was very common in the hot-springs of 
Vinadio and Valdieri. These Rotatoria often die from disease produced 
by vegetable parasites, of which the author has observed two instances. 
One of these is characterized by the slowing down of the movement of 
the rotifer, the body of which contracts to form a spherical mass. With 
a magnification of 350-500 there can be observed in the body of the 
animal cell elements with thick nucleus and sharply-defined nucleoli. 
These cells are spherical, oval, or pyriform with well-defined outline and 
with a diameter of 20-30 p. 

With these cells the cuticula of the animal becomes completely filled, 
and they are the cause of gradual death. The skin of the rotifer is finally 
perforated by processes of the parasite. These processes are tubular 
masses of protoplasm, and finally give exit to zoospores. When treated 
with iodine water, the parasite turns yellow, and if sulphuric acid be 
added, the nuclei of the cells become a deep red-violet. The spores 
which at maturity form the contents of the parasitic cells are 2 p, 
rarely 3-4 yw broad, and reflect a pale yellow light. When quite ripe 
the spores are reddish, oval, and mobile. In one cell there may be 30-50 
or more 4—5 p» long, 2-3 » broad, and each of them is provided with two 
long delicate flagella. When free their movements are very lively. 

In form, structure, and development, this parasite shows great re- 
semblance to some Chytridinex, their zoospores are identical, and they 
have the same kind of development. The filamentous processes are, 
however, simple, while in the best known forms of Chytridinex they are 
complex. This characteristic the author thinks is insufficient to make a 
new genus, and he therefore calls his parasite Chytridium elegans n. sp. 


New Chytridium.;—Under the name Chytridiwm luaurians Herr A. 
Tomaschek describes a new species distinguished by its rapid growth and 
the great abundance of the zoosporangia. It made its appearance in the 
method of pollen-grain cultivation of the lower fungi described by Zopf 
(for the proposal of which method Tomaschek claims priority), modified 
in the following way. The pollen of conifers is scattered over several 
layers of filter-paper and laid on an ordinary flower-pot filled with sand, 
which is placed in a vessel of water and covered by a bell-glass. On the 
pollen-grains are rapidly developed a number of forms belonging to the 
lower fungi. 


Parasites of the Higher Fungi.{— M. J. Costantin describes and 
discusses the correct position of several fungus-parasites found on Aga- 
ricini and Pezize:—1. Asterothecium strigosum Wall., found on Peziza 
hemisphzrica, appears to be quite distinct from <A. Pezize Cord. 


* Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iv. (1888) pp. 295-9. 
+ Bot. Centralbl., xxxv. (1888) p. 221. 
{ Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) pp. 251-6. 


1012 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


2. Mycogyne cervina on species of Peziza, is the Hypomyces cervinus 
of Tulasne. 3. Spheronema Leotiarum on Leotia lubrica, This is 
probably the pyenidial form of Hypomyces Leotiarum Fayod. 


Protophyta. 


Cellular Envelope of the Filamentous Nostocacee.*— M. M. 
Gomont publishes further details of his investigations on this subject. 
The true cell-membrane he finds to be always present at all times of the 
life of the plant, though it is always very thin. The enveloping sheath, 
on the other hand, is gelatinous or membranous, and is composed of 
parallel lamellz or of covts inclosed one within another. 

As regards the development of these structures in the different 
families of Filamentous Nostocaces :—in the Oscillariacee the cellular 
membrane frequently takes the form of a cap, varying in form in the 
different species, but constant in each. ‘That this cap does not belong to 
the mucilaginous sheath, as was supposed by Borzi,f is shown by the 
fact that it is frequently formed within the prolonged tube of the latter 
when the filament is broken. This cap was observed in many species 
belonging to different genera, fresh-water, saline, and terrestrial; it is 
especially well developed in Oscillaria antliaria. 

In the Nostoces the presence of the cellular membrane can only be 
demonstrated by the use of reagents. This is also the case in the 
Scytonemee and Stigonemez. In all cases the heterocysts appear also 
to be provided with this membrane. 

In the Rivulariacew the terminal hyaline bristle is in perfect con- 
tinuity with the rest of the cellular membrane; it is distinguished 
only by having fewer transverse septa, and by the entire absence of 
granular protoplasm. 

The spores of the Nostocaceze always possess two coats, an exospore 
and an endospore, the former of which is again composed of two distinct 
layers, the outer one being very frequently warty or otherwise marked. 
These spores are always the result of the encysting of ordinary vegetative 
cells. 


Chlorothecium.{—Sig. A. Borzi describes several points not hitherto 
known in the life-history of Chlorothecium Pirotte, belonging to the 
Sciadiacew. The nearest approach to its structure is presented by Mis- 
chococcus. It was found especially growing on Marsilea and Cheetomorpha, 
in palmelliform colonies of cells with a length of 14-40, and a breadth 
of 10-18 », with an ultimately thick and firm cell-wall. These cells 
develope into zoosporangia without any alteration of their primitive 
form; from each cell there usually escape two or four, rarely only a 
single zoospore, from 3-5 p» in length, and provided with a single cilium 
and a conspicuous eye-spot. Conjugation takes place between these 
zoospores or zoogametes by gradual fusion. The mature zygospore has 
a diameter of 7-10 p, and a moderately thick but transparent membrane. 
After hibernating the contents of the zygospore breaks up into two 
masses, each of which escapes in the form of a zoospore, so that the 
zygospore is itself a zoosporangium. From these zoospores are again 


* Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xxxv. (1888) pp. 204-36 (2 pls.). Cf. this Journal, 
ante, p. 632, ~ See this Journal, 1887, p. 448. 
~ Malpighia, ii. (1888) pp. 250-9. Cf. this Journal, ante, p. 632. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. TOUS: 


formed the palmelloid colonies, in which condition Chlorothectum may 
multiply itself non-sexually without producing zoogametes. 


Reproduction of Nephrocytium.*—M. P. A. Dangeard has observed 
the hitherto unknown mode of propagation of Nephrocytium Agardhianum, 
by the formation of four or eight colonies within the membrane of the 
mother-colony, which they finally rupture. They are entirely unprovided 
with cilia. ; 

Trochiscia and Tetraedron.t—Prof. A. Hansgirg proposes to restore 
Kiitzing’s generic name Trochiscia for the Acanthocladus of Lagerheim 
(Glochiococcus De Toni), dividing it into the three sections Acanthococcus, 
Dictyscoccus, and Kymatococcus ; as also Kiitzing’s Tetraédron ( Astericium 
Corda, Polyedrium Nig., Cerasterias Reinsch), this again consisting of 
two sections Polyedrium and Pseudostaurastrum, the latter including 
Ralfs’s Stauwrastrum enorme. 


Polyedriaceew.t{—Herr P. F. Reinsch proposes to establish under 
this name a new family of Palmellacez, distinguished by consisting of 
single cells, with periphery either regularly geometrical or varying 
between all degrees of lobing; the number of nuclei is often consider- 
able, and the cell-wall thick. The family is divided into two sub- 
divisions: Polyedrieze with simple, Cerasterieze with compound colonies, 
Each is composed of two genera, the former of Polyedrium Nag. (ex 
part.) and Closteridium n. gen., the latter of Cerasterias Reinsch and 
Thamniastrum n. gen.; and the total number of species is 27. 

Closteridium is distinguished by its solitary free-swimming sub- 
cylindrical or semilunar cells, each pole armed with a single spine. 
The membrane is thin, but thicker towards the poles, and prolonged 
into the spine. The cytoplasm is coarsely granular, and contains large 
chlorophyllous granules. The species have the appearance of a 
Closterium. 

In Thamniastrum the cells are solitary, free-swimming, and usually 
composed of six branches arranged in the form of an octohedron. The 
branches spring from a common centre, and themselves branch re- 
peatedly dichotomously or trichotomously, these secondary branches are 
ultimately bifureate; the total number of secondary branches may 
amount to from 100 to 180. 


Bacillus living at a temperature exceeding 70° C.§—This microbe 
(B. thermophilus) which has been cultivated by Dr. P. Miquel, is 
characterized by being viable at a temperature above 70° C. The 
author’s method of obtaining it was as follows :— 

In an oil-bath kept at a temperature of 69° are placed several vessels 
containing sterilized slightly alkaline pepton-bouillon. When the 
temperature of the bouillon reaches 69°, a drop of sewer (or other dirty 
water) is allowed to fall into each of the tubes. In twenty-four hours 
all the vessels have become cloudy from the presence of B. thermophilus. 
The bath is then raised to a temperature of 71° and fresh bouillon tubes 
placed init. These new tubes are inoculated with a small drop of the 
cultivation, and so on to the fourth generation. Then in order to be 


* Bull Soe. Linn. Normandie, i., 1886-7 (1888) pp. 196-8. 
+ Hedwigia, xxvii. (1888) pp. 126-32. 

t Notarisia, iii. (1888) pp. 493-516 (5 pls.). 

§ Ann. de Micrographie, i. (1888) pp. 1-10. 


1014 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


certain that the cultivations contain nothing but B. thermophilus, fresh 
tubes are inoculated from the last and are kept at 40°. These tubes 
remain unaltered. 

The author then isolates his bacillus either by the fractional method 
or on plates: on the latter it thrives well at a temperature of 60°. 

The microbe is aerobic, and is formed of motionless filaments 
variable in length and about 1 » thick. It varies in appearance accord- 
ing to the temperature at which it is cultivated. At 50° it appears 
usually as short rods, at one extremity of which is a simple oval highly 
refracting spore. At 60° the filaments are longer and the spores less 
frequent. At 70° the protoplasm of the filaments assumes a granular 
look, which in cultivations several days old is almost oily. At 71-72° 
the bacillus has an almost moniliform appearance, and spores are alto- 
gether absent. It cannot be cultivated at a temperature below 42°, but 
between 45° and 70° it thrives very well in a 2 per cent. agar-agar, but 
the most favourable heat, according to the author, is from 65-70°. 
Above 70° it grows with considerable difficulty. It is chiefly found in 
waters containing sewage, it occurs also on the soil, but rarely in the 
air. It has been found in the alimentary canal of men and animals, a 
fact which seems to show that it is capable of reproduction at from 
37-40°. It is not pathogenic. 

Bacterial Growth at 0° C.*—The discovery that certain micro- 
organisms exist at 0° C. by Dr. Fischer led him to investigate the 
subject further, and from the earth and sea-water in the neighbourhood 
of Kiel harbour fourteen different organisms were found, all growing at 
0° C. Of these, besides the Bacterium phosphorescens and the “ endemic” 
light bacillus, three were non-illuminant bacilli, and only one of these 
fluidified gelatin. Of the remaining nine, one was a fungus of undeter- 
mined species. Of the eight bacterial forms found in the earth, seven 
were decidedly rod-like, and four of these caused the gelatin to fluoresce 
(one with and three without fluidifying). All the foregoing were found 
to grow at ordinary temperatures also. Their pathogenic properties 
were not ascertained. 

Cellar Bacteria.t—Prof. A. Hansgirg, as the result of an examina- 
tion of subterranean bacteria found in cellars, &c., in Prague, arrives at 
the conclusion that the subterranean forms differ little, if at all, from 
bacteria which develope in the light. He further surmises that the cellar 
bacteria collected by him have been deposited by chance by drain water, 
&c., which has percolated through. In consequence, however, of the 
changed conditions of the environment, it is advisable to regard certain 
forms as new species and varieties, of which the following are examples: 
—Leptothriz cellaris n. sp.; Bacillus subtilis n. var. cellaris ; Leuconostoc 
Lagerheimii n. var. subterraneum ; Mycothece cellaris n. gen. et sp. ; Hyalo- 
coccus cellaris n.sp.; Bacterium termo n. var. subterraneum ; Micrococcus 
subterraneus 0. Sp. 

Endosporous Bacteria.{}—Dr. A. Koch describes three new species 
of endosporous bacteria, and also discusses Bacillus twmescens Zopf, 
B. alvei Cheshire and Cheyne, and B. Brassicze Pommer. 


* Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iv. (1888) pp. 89-92. 

+ Oesterreich. Bot. Zeitschr., xxxviii. (1888) pp. 227-30, 263-7. 

t Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) pp. 277-87, 293-99, 309-18, 325-32, 341-350 (1 pl. and 
31 figs.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1015 


The first of the new species, B. carotarum, was found on the root of 
a carrot which had been boiled and left under a bell-jar for two 
or three days. It forms long threads, which become more or less 
twisted, especially if grown on beet-root, when they bear great resem- 
blance to Spirillum. Tt bears endogenous spores, and when in this 
condition is very similar in appearance to B. tumescens ; indeed, both 
these bacilli were found in an approximately pure state on the boiled 
carrot. 

The spores of B. carotarum are invested in a membrane which on 
germination is burst about its equator by the young rod. These, in 
drop-cultivations, grow rapidly to long filaments, which are always quite 
motionless. The filaments, which are, while young, straight, afterwards 
become curved or angularly crooked. They are composed of a number 
of segments separated by transverse septa only visible by the aid of 
reagents. The next step after the full development of these filaments is 
the production of spores, and these are oval bodies 1°31—2-38 yu long 
and 1-03 p» broad, placed at regular intervals along the filament. 

In addition to drop-cultivations colonies were grown on gelatin, 
meat infusion, potato, &c. With regard to the rate of growth, the 
author found that B. carotarum doubled its length at 30°-33° C. in 
forty-three minutes, at 40° C. in eighteen minutes, and 45° in twenty- 
two minutes. 

Heating the spores in the dry state was unable to weaken, much less 
to destroy, their germinating power, although they were exposed for 
eight hours to 100°, and in some cases four hours to 120° C., and it was 
also determined that air was necessary to start their development. 

B. tumescens Zopf.—Besides B. carotarum another endosporous Bac- 
terium forms white colonies upon the boiled root of carrot. The oval 
bright-looking spores soon swell up in a nutrient medium, and, bursting 
through the spore membrane equatorially, develope into rods which 
eventually become irregularly bent. When young the individuals show 
a certain amount of movement. One of the peculiarities of B. twmescens 
is that in the adult condition the individual elements measure more in 
breadth than they do in height, that is, measured on the long axis of the 
filament (breadth = 2:1 p, height = 0°8-1:5 »); and another is that 
frequently amidst a chain of cells one will be seen without a spore. 
B. twmescens grows luxuriantly on solid media, potato, carrot, gelatin 
plates, &c. It rapidly liquefies the gelatin. 

B. inflatus nov. sp., found by chance as an impurity in a drop- 
cultivation, is distinguished by swelling up, so as to assume a lozenge 
shape, when about to sporulate. The spores are fusiform or bean- 
shaped, have no definite disposition as regards the cell-axis, and may be 
two in number. When germinating they escape through an aperture 
about the middle of the cell. It is only grown with certainty in drop- 
cultivations in a 1-2 per cent. meat infusion. In large quantities of 
nutrient medium it grows well, and also on potato. Cultivated on gelatin 
the colonies are spheroidal; the gelatin is slowly liquefied. 

B. ventriculus nov. sp., like B. inflatus, was discovered as an 
impurity, and resembles that bacillus in every respect except the ar- 
rangement of the individuals in drop-cultivations and in its manner of 
growth on potato. These differences are considered sufficient by the 
author to form a basis of distinction between the two species. 

The Bacillus alvei Cheyne and Cheshire, which forms spores in an 


1016 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


analogous manner to the foregoing, is referred to chiefly to show that 
the author’s own measurements differ from those of Cheyne and Cheshire ; 
the former gives 1-77 » length of spore and 0-90 breadth, while the latter 
for the same give 2'12,and 1:07». The breadth of cell in Canada 
balsam as given by Cheyne and Cheshire = 0°83 » and by Koch as 
0°73. Notwithstanding these discrepancies, the author cousiders that 
the bacillus he investigated was undoubtedly the same as that described 
by Cheshire and Cheyne as Bacillus alvei, the cause of foulbrood in hive 
bees. 

B. Brassice Pommer resembles B. carotarwm in appearance, but it is 
distinguished therefrom by the greater thickness of the spore-membrane, 
by the closer growth of the filaments, and by the appearance of granules 
and ill-defined dark spots about the period of spore-formation. 


Supposed Spores of the Typhoid Bacillus.*—When Gaffky found 
certain spheroidal bodies, highly refracting, situated at the extremities 
of the typhoid bacillus, and characterized also by their resistance to 
anilin dyes, he came to the conclusion that these polar bodies were 
spores. This conclusion is erroneous, says Dr. H. Buchner, for these 
polar bodies are wanting in three characteristics of the true endogenous 
spores, namely, the resistance to dyes, resistance to drying, and their 
power of germination. In one respect, however, they do resemble spores ; 
that is, in being composed of thickened plasma. 

The conditions under which the polar bodies appear in the typhoid 
bacillus are limited apparently to the acidity of the nutrient medium 
and the withdrawal of oxygen during cultivation. These the author 
regards as producing a condition of degeneration, of which the polar 
bodies are the result. Gaffky had said that these polar bodies were insus- 
ceptible to anilin dyes. Quite the contrary, says the autbor, for these 
bodies not only take up the dye most strongly, but also retain it longer 
than the rest of the cell after the action of decolorants. This, he says, 
is easily shown if a watery solution of gentian-violet be gradually added 
to a fresh preparation. But if stained on a cover-glass in the usual 
manner they are not to be seen. Hence, says the author, these polar 
bodies are due to a retraction of the plasma. 

This retraction is produced either as the result of the drying of the 
cover-glass or by the dye (gentian-violet) acting as a poison. For with 
other non-poisonous or less poisonous dyes (as phloxin-red), no retraction 
or staining is observable. 

On the whole, the author thinks these polar bodies consist of cell- 
plasma in a somewhat thicker condition than the rest of the cell-contents 
because of their affinity for dyes, and also on account of their refraction 
in the fresh condition. 


Spore-formation in the Bacilli of Xerosis conjunctive, Strepto- 
cocci, and Cholera spirilla.j—Dr. Neisser thinks that the xerosis 
bacilli are probably not the specific contagion of xerosis conjunctive, as 
was maintained by Ernst, because he has come across other micro- 
organisms which are morphologically identical with this bacillus. 

The organism in question is a small thin mobile rod divided into two 
parts by a clear space, and it propagates by division through the clear 


* Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iv. (1888) pp. 353-8, 385-90 (1 pl.). 
+ Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, iv. (1888) pp. 268-97. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. — 1017 


space, and also by spore-formation. As the young bacilli grow up, they 
may show at both ends prominent spherules, or they may develope into 
long thick threads, at the extremities of which may appear dark granules. 
These granules develope into new bacilli, and form a filament placed 
vertically to the original cell. From the appearances produced by these 
formations, Neisser supposed them to be gonidia, and in his first work so 
called them. 

The foregoing organisms thrive in various media, especially in agar 
to which glycerin is added at incubation heat. They do not liquefy 
gelatin. ‘The reaction of the nutrient is of slight importance, provided 
it be not too acid. The most suitable method of staining was as follows: 
—(1) Stain in warm carbolic fuchsin, wash in 1 per cent. sulphuric acid, 
and then contrast stain with a watery or Loeffler’s methylen-blue solution ; 
or (2) stain in anilin-methyl-violet solution, wash in 1 per cent. H,SO,, 
and contrast stain with an acid brown. By this method the ground-sub- 
stance and certain granules and spherules of a round or oval shape are 
distinguishable. 

From the microscopical appearances as shown by staining, and from 
the fact that cultivation experiments always showed spores, it was deduced 
that the spherules were to be regarded as endogenous spores, and not as 
resting-spores merely. 

In Streptococci nothing analogous to spore-formation was observed. 
Although a difference in the intensity of staining, and a fission in 
the direction parallel to that of the chain, were noticed with cholera 
spirilla, the author’s results were negative, and he regards the gaps and 
spherules found in old agar cultivations as having nothing to do with 
Spores. 


Pathogenic chromo-aromatic Microbe.*—Prof. V. Galtier has found 
a new bacillus in a pig which died with well-marked lesions in the 
respiratory and digestive organs. 

This bacillus, which is pathogenic to rabbits and guinea-pigs, is 
culiivable in various media which have been inoculated with the blood 
of animals dead after intravenous injection. The chief characteristic of 
this microbe is its property of secreting a coloured and aromatic 
substance. In bouillon these microbes form whitish masses, while at the 
same time the liquid begins to assume a light yellow-green colour, which 
goes on deepening until it dies away into a slaty-brown. The same 
hue is observed on agar-agar, on gelatin (which is rapidly liquefied), and 
on potato. The cultures, especially those made in bouillon, give off a 
well-marked agreeable and persistent aroma. 


Vibrios.,—Dr. E. Weibel has continued to investigate the character- 
istics of these micro-organisms,t and the following are the main facts of 
his communication. ; 

Further examination of the vibrio from nasal mucus, left it an open 
- question whether this microbe could become pathogenic ; in some experi- 
ments the mice died, in others they did not. 

Vibrios from tongue-fur.—Bent rodlets which are about the same size 
as those of cholera. Some elements are swollen at the ends, and the 


* Journ. de Méd. Vétérinaire ct de Zootechnie, xxxix. (1888) June. 
+ Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iv. (1888) pp. 225-22 (6 figs.), 257-64 
(4 figs.), 289-95. t See this Journal, ante, p. 99. 


1018 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


swellings pick up colour readily, consequently they are not spores. 
Unlike most vibrios, this one is well stained by Gram’s method. It does 
not liquefy gelatin, but on plates forms characteristic colonies of a dirty 
white colour, which, in a few days, attain a diameter of 0°3-0°5 mm. 
It is apparently not pathogenic. 

Vibrios from canal mud.—The primary fact connected with these 
organisms appears to be that certain of them are antagonistic to others ; 
that is, an examination of the canal mud showed various microbes, some 
of which, when the original material was sown on gelatin plates, were 
found to disappear. One kind which is very constant is “hay vibrio,” 
and as it would seem to have some connection with rotting substances, 
the author proposes to alter its cognomen to Vibrio saprophiles a. Hay 
vibrio 8 might then be renamed Vibrio saprophiles 8. A third form 
of this class of vibrio, V. saprophiles y, morphologically resembles 
V. saprophiles a, but it is of larger dimensions, and has rounded ends, 
One peculiarity is its tendency to produce abnormal forms, especially in 
old cultures, and another is the possession of round or oval spaces which 
are unstainable. 

On gelatin-plates the deeper colonies, macroscopically white, attain 
the diameter of 1/2 mm. in a week. Under a low power the centre of 
the colony is orange, and the sharply defined margin yellow. The more 
superficial colonies are less regular. On potato they show a striking 
inconstancy, although the cultivations are quite pure. 

Vibrios which grow with a yellow colour.—On gelatin plates it is 
noticeable that from canal mud vibrio-colonies frequently appear with 
a yellow colour. These are morphologically identical, and one descrip- 
tion serves for all. They exhibit an extraordinary variety in their 
growth and form in the same and in different cultivations. ‘Their only 
constant is their thickness, which is about half that of the cholera 
vibrio. Degeneration-forms are also found in artificial media. These 
are characterized by the irregularity of their shape, that is, irregular as to 
the recognized form of a vibrio. Although morphologically alike, the 
author finds it necessary to make three varieties of these yellow vibrios, 
namely Vibrio aureus, flavus, and flavescens, between which the differ- 
ences seem comparatively trivial. 

The author then proceeds to impart some general considerations on 
the morphology and biology of vibrios. A vibrio is defined to be a bent 
rod twisted about its long axis. The degree of bending and torsion, and 
the relation between the two, determine the shape of the screw, and to 
all bacteria which, either singly or collectively, are developed with 
this torsion, the author would give the name of Vibrio. 

With regard to spore-formation in vibrios, the author is of opinion 
that true spore-formation has never been hitherto demonstrated. It is, 
however, probable, that in the saprophilous vibrios, the formation of 
resting forms does occur. 

Many vibrios show in liquid media characteristic movements, and 
this is associated with the necessity for oxygen, in which the yellow 
varieties thrive best. 

The part which the author assigns to decomposition vibrios—is, not 
that of exciting the process, but rather of destroying its results, namely 
those matters which act harmfully on animal organisms. 

Many vibrios possess the power of developing in very dilute nutrient 
media and of successfully competing therein with other bacteria. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 1019 


Physiological Experiments on Organisms of Glairine and 
Baregine.*—M. L. Olivier has investigated the question of under what 
form the sulphur-containing organisms of glairine and baregine lose this 
metalloid. He finds that they consume their intracellular sulphur 
without oxidizing it. They produce HS and CNS(NH,) which is a 
sulphosubstituted derivate of an isomer of urea. This fact, which is 
absolutely new, seems to assign to sulphur a function of which no 
example is as yet known. It is possible that this body is capable of 
replacing oxygen in the transformation of albuminoids into amides, and 
in a general way, in the combustion of living matter. Ina further com- 
munication the author gives an account of some further experiments, 
which show, tinier alia, that during life the formation of SO, follows, and 
does not precede that of H,S. After the death of the organisms the 
intracellular sulphur may be oxidized, and the reaction is quite different 
from that which obtains during life. 


* Comptes Rendus, evi. (1888) pp. 1744-6. + Tom. cit., pp. 1806-9. 


1020 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


MICROSCOPY. 
a. Instruments, Accessories, &c.* 
(1) Stands. 


Ahrens’ New Erecting Microscope.*—In this instrument (fig. 161) 
the erection of the image is obtained by two right-angled prisms 
crossed in the way used in some 
Fie. 161. of the binocular field-glasses. 
The form of the prisms will be 
gathered from the woodcut, 
which shows the boxes in which 
they are placed. The following 
is Mr. C. D. Ahrens’ description 
of the instrument. 

“The advantages of this over 
the one I made some years ago 
are that the rays are parallel 
with the stage, and better defini- 
tion of the object is given. The 
prisms are not so troublesome 
to make, and by making them 
of quartz more light is obtained. 
The surfaces are also more per- 
fect, and they are less liable to 
sweat or get injured. If pro- 
perly cut they only show one 
image. As the rays travel 
across the prisms to the extent 
of about 3 in., only a short 
body is required. I believe 
such an erecting Microscope 
is the only way to see the 
objects in their right form, as I 
have found that lenses when 
used for inverting make some 
objects appear as in a pseudo- 
scope with prisms.” 

Klein's Excursion Micro- 
scope.t—Dr. L. Klein writes 
that botanists and zoologists 
who are accustomed to make 
excursions to collect microscopical specimens only too often feel the 
want at the collecting place of a useful Microscope which would enable 
them to determine approximately what they have collected, and to 
recognize whether a locality offers them any advantage or not. By 
practice a rough separation of the larger specimens can be made with 
the naked eye, but of the smaller ones many a rare specimen is over- 


* This subdivision contains (1) Stands; (2) Eye-pieces and Objectives; (3) Illu- 
minating and other Apparatus; (4) Photomicrography; (5) Microscopical Opties 
and Manipulation; (6) Miscellaneous. 

+ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., y. (1888) pp. 196-9 (3 figs.) 


‘ 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1021 


looked which with the Microscope would have been easily recognized 
as such. MHspecially annoying is it when, with collecting-glasses full, 
fresh finds are made, and the question as to what has to be thrown aside 
has to be answered by macroscopical examination alone. 

For excursion purposes the ordinary instruments are too heavy. The 
cheap school or “Salon” Microscopes are easy of transport, but not 
sufficiently good for the purpose. The only useful instrument, the so- 
called Algensucher of Zeiss, has the 
disadvantage that it only gives a Fic. 162. 
very small field of view, so that 
small interesting objects may be 
easily overlooked, and much time is 
consumed in setting up the object. 

These considerations induced the 
author to attempt to combine the 
advantage of easy portability with 
the use of a good instrument. The 
instrument devised by him, and 
shown in fig. 162, was constructed 
by Herr R. Winkel of Gottingen, 
and has been proved by use to be 
admirably suitable for the purpose 
intended. The weight of an ordinary 
Microscope is centered chiefly in the 
stage, the pillar, and the foot. In 
the present instrument the stage is 
made as small as possible (52 mm. 
by 52 mm.) and the pillar and foot 
dispensed with altogether and re- 
placed by an ordinary stout walking 
stick provided with a sharp ferule. 
The stick is fixed upright in the ground, and thus affords to the Micro- 
scope attached to it a most convenient position for observation. The 


Fig. 163. Fig. 164. 


instrument, for convenience of transport, is made up of three parts :—the 
stick, near the handle of which is firmly screwed a metal plate (fig. 163) 
1888. 3 Z 


1022 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


for the reception of the two principal parts, the socket with the 
Microscope-tube and the stage with the mirror. These parts, with the 
objective and eye-piece, are contained in a box 12 em. long and 6 cm. 
wide and deep (fig. 164), which can be carried in the pocket or slung 
across the shoulder by a strap. 

The body-tube (115 mm. long) slides by hand in the socket for 
focusing, but,the author suggests replacing this by the ordinary rack-and- 
pinion arrangement. ‘lhe socket (46 mm. long) is attached by means of a 
short arm to a brass piece 19 mm. broad and 60 mm. long, which reaches 
down to the top of the stage. Through this piece passes a broad-headed 
screw, by which the socket is firmly screwed to the metal plate on the 
stick. A pin above and below the screw fitting into corresponding holes 
in the metal plate helps to keep the socket firmly in position. The stage 
with the mirror is fastened to the metal plate in a similar way. The 
mirror is only arranged for direct illumination, but is movable in all 
directions, so that the handle of the stick can never interfere with 
the observation. In the figure the stage-opening is represented by 
mistake as rather too large, so that a diaphragm would be necessary if it 
were desired to use somewhat high powers. A stage-opening of only 
2 to 3 mm. is found to be most suitable for all purposes, and renders 
diaphragms unnecessary unless a specially low power is used. 


Pritchard’s Microscope with “ Continental” Fine-adjustment.—An 
early form of achromatic Microscope is shown in fig, 165, which, from 
several points of its construction, we have ventured to assign to the late 
Andrew Pritchard, and which is interesting from the peculiarity of the 
fine-adjustment. 

The spiral spring encircling the stem, in combination with the 
arrangement of the fine-adjustment screw below, would seem to indicate 
that what is generally known as one of the earliest forms of the “ Con- 
tinental”’ fine-adjustment was very soon adopted in England, if, indeed, 
its construction here did not precede G. Oberhiuser’s, to whom the 
origination has been generally attributed. It is obvious that, if the 
spiral spring were sheathed by a tube, the fine-adjustment would be the 
‘** Continental” pure and simple. 

The rectangular motions of the stage, actuated in diagonal directions 
on either side of the stem, are similar in design to those shown in one of 
A. Ross’s earliest Microscopes figured in the 7th edition of the ‘ Ency- 
clopedia Britannica,’ and shown in fig. 166 from an extant example, a 
form which was also issued under Pritchard’s name. 

The condenser beneath the stage, with its long tube mounting, in 
the continuation of which the mirror is placed, reminds one of the tube 
with sliding condenser and mirror below, which formed an accessory to 
many of the earlier Pritchard and Ross Microscopes, and which was 
in fact a modification of Wollaston’s doublet Microscope. 


Griffith's Fine-adjustment.—Mr. E. H. Griffith sends us the fol- 
lowing description of his new fine-adjustment. In fig. 167, 1, 2, 3 repre- 
sent the milled head, pinion-axis, and pinion of the ordinary method of 
coarse-adjustment. The milled-head (1) is countersunk on its inner side, 
and the small wheel (4) is made to exactly fit the countersunk space, 
the inner surface of (1) and of the wheel (4) being perfectly smooth 
and flat. Attached to (4) is the socket and pinion (7), all of which are 
perfectly fitted over the pinion-axis (2) between the pinion (7) and milled 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO 


Fig. 165. 
| 
| 
| | 
| 
Mm 
ie 


a ‘i 


| 


i 


Tn a 


uh 


(\ 


i 


1024 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


head (1). A leather washer (5) is made to rest closely against the inner 
surfaces of (1) and (4). It is held in position by another washer of 
metal (6) which, by means of two screws passing through it and (5), is 
made fast to the milled head. A small tension-wheel (10) has a screw 
passing through both washers, also binding them to (1), and when desired, 
locking the coarse-adjustment by making the whole combination prac- 


Fia. 167. Fia. 168, 


tically one wheel. When the coarse-adjustment is used the spindle (8) 
holds (7), (6), (5), (4), so that they cannot revolve with the pinion. 

When the fine-adjustment is required the friction of the leather 
washer makes the whole combination practically one wheel, which is 
turned by means of the milled head (8), giving the entire range of the 
coarse-adjustment. Both adjustments are always ready for use except 
when the coarse one is purposely locked to prevent accidents. All wear 
is taken up by the spring as shown in the fig. 

Fig. 168 shows the entire combination in proper position. 


Necessity for a Sub-stage.*—Mr. J. Mayall, junr., in the second series 
of his Cantor Lectures on the Microscope at the Society of Arts, says 
that, in his opinion, every Microscope with which it is intended to do 
serious work should have a racking and centering sub-stage ; and if the 
opticians would supply an adapter fitted with a pivoting diaphragm- 
carrier, or even a disc of apertures, so that objectives could be conveni- 
ently used as condensers, they would add much to the interest of popular 
microscopy. 

As it is, it is to be feared that the great majority of possessors of 
Microscopes are not aware of the immense advantages attendant upon 
the use of condensers—achromatic condensers being, of course, far prefer- 
able, for it is with them alone that it is really practicable to observe 


* Journ, Soe. Arts, xxxvi. (1888) p. 1169, 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1025 


objects projected, as it were, in the image of the source of light focused 
by the condenser. It is, without doubt, highly desirable to have a series 
of achromatic condensers of different foci, to suit the field of view of 
objectives of different power. It appears not to be generally known that 
distancing the lamp from the Microscope will give a considerable range 
of size of luminous field, with one and the same condenser. 


Stricker, §8.—/[Electric Microscope. | 
[“By the use of his electric Microscope and of silver bromide plates, Prof. 
Stricker is enabled to get very fine photographs of living bacteria and other 
moving cells. He has taken photographs of living white blood-corpuscles 
with high-power lenses, which showed clearly and distinctly the network- 


like structure of those bodies.” ] 
Engl. Mech., XLVI. (1888) p. 475. - 


(2) Eye-pieces and Objectives. 


Defective Objectives and the Binocular Microscope.—It has been 
observed that badly corrected objectives appear worse with the Binocular 
Microscope than with the single tube. The reason of this is that with a 
badly corrected lens the different parts of the aperture will not work 
together exactly, the images formed by different parts disagreeing. In 
using the binocular different parts of the aperture are always made 
effective in forming the two images, so that the binocular is to this 
extent a test for good correction. 


Hevrcx, H. van.—Les nouveaux objectifs apochromatiques de M. Reichert. (The 
new apochromatic objectives of Herr Reichert.) 
Bull, Soc, Belg. Micr., XTV. (1888) pp. 156-9. 
Scuuutze, A.—The new Apochromatic Micro-objectives and Compensating Oculars 
of Dr. Carl Zeiss. 
Proc. and Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow, Il. (1888) pp. 154-62. 
ScuuutTze, F. H.—XKine von Herrn Westien in Rostock angefertigte Doppelloupe. 
(A double lens made by Herr Westien of Rostock.) 
SB. Gesell. Nat. Freunde Berlin, 1887, pp. 146-7. 
% 55 Veber eine binoculare Praparirloupe. (On a binocular dissect- 
ing lens. ) Tagebl. 60. Versamml. Deutsch. Naturf., 1887, p. 112 


(3) Illuminating and other Apparatus. 


Koch’s and Max Wolz’s Reflector.—Mr. T. Christy has recently 
exhibited a novel form of lamp. The lamp is shaded by a metal cover, 
near the bottom of which is inserted a solid curved rod of glass with a 
plane end. The light from the lamp passes into the rod, and after 
various internal total reflections, arrives at the end of the rod, where it 
may be directed upon the object. 

The apparatus has been patented in Germany by Dr. W. Koch and 
Herr Max Wolz of Bonn, of whose specification the following is a trans- 
lation :—* 

“As is well known, rays proceeding from a source of light in a glass 
body on emergence are deflected from the normal. The more oblique 
the rays, the more are they deflected, the consequence of which is that 
finally they can no longer emerge, but are reflected back. This happens 
if the angle of incidence (for glass) amounts to 402° and over. Use is 


* Patentschrift No. 42,818, Klasse 4, 29th July, 1887. 


1026 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


made of this physical law in order to totally reflect all light-rays and 
cause them to pour out on any particular spot. The glass bodies used 
for this purpose are bent into the form of a parabola, and may consist of 
solid glass or of a glass bell, in which the source of light is at the vertex 
of the descending branch of the parabola. 

“Tn the drawings different forms of the instrument are represented : 
thus fig. 169 shows in elevation and plan a glass bell, which can 
be used as a lamp-glass. The outer as well as the inner surfaces of this 
bell are bent on both sides into a parabolic form. The rays from the 
source of light J, situated in an opening o in the middle of the bell, are 
on both sides thrown from one parabolic surface to the other until they 


Fia. 169. Fic. 170. Fig. 172. 


emerge and are dispersed from the lower end. All rays which enter the 
glass body are totally reflected with the greatest intensity, since each 
angle of incidence at least amounts to 40°. In the example chosen for 
the drawing, the side surfaces are not parallel but converge towards a 
point, in consequence of which the rays are rendered convergent before 
they emerge from the lower end, and thus the intensity of the emergent 
beam is heightened. 

“'This is also the case in the apparatus represented in fig. 170, which 
may replace the laryngeal, ophthalmoscopic, &c., mirrors hitherto used. 
By the use of this apparatus the light-rays are directed upon any desired 
spot and there uniformly distributed, so that no shadows can occur. 
The glass body in this case consists of a piece of solid glass bent into 
a parabolic form, to which a small prism can be attached in order 
better to see through the beam of light. 

“ By fitting into each other several of such parabolic glasses with 
sides running both parallel and also towards each other, it is possible to 
direct the light upon any particular spot which cannot be directly 
illuminated. Various examples of this are shown in figs. 171 and 172.” 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1027 


Nuttall’s Warm Chamber.*—For experiments on Bacteria at the 
temperature of the blood Dr. G. Nuttall devised the apparatus shown in 


EELS 


— 
= 


HA 


il 


Fie. 173. 


fil 


fig. 173, which isa modification of the warm chamber of Sachs, the figure 


on the left being a front view (open), and that on the right a side view 
(closed). 


* Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, iv. (1888) pp. 353-94 (1 pl. and 1 fig.). 


1028 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


The whole of the lower part of the Microscope, with the object, is 
inclosed in a metal box, the four walls and bottom of which are double. 
The two sides are hinged on the bottom so that they can be turned down 
to facilitate the arrangement of the object in the first instance. These 
are filled with asbestos ; the other two and the bottom being filled with 
water. The walls and top are covered with felt. A lamp beneath heats 
the water, which warms the air in the box. A thermometer passing into 
one of the walls shows the temperature of the water, and a second one 
passing through the top into the interior shows that of the inclosed air 
and the object. If it is desired to move the object during observation, 
an oval opening in one of the sides (closed by the cover shown on the 
ground between the two figs.) enables the hand to be introduced, and 
so saves the lowering of temperature which would be likely to arise if 
the whole side were let down. The inner surfaces of the walls are, in 
use, lined with several layers of wet blotting-paper. 

Dr. Nuttall considers that the apparatus has great advantages over 
an ordinary warm stage, as the temperature can be maintained to fractions 
of a degree for a long time, and the thermometer shows accurately the 
temperature of the object. 


Modification of Pagan’s “Growing Slide.”*—Mr. Selmar Schén- 
land, referring to the arrangement designed by the Rey. A. Pagan for 
growing on microscopical slides small organisms, such as rotifers, alga, 
&e., which live in water and require a frequent change of the medium, 
says that the results obtained with it were very remarkable. In the 
original design, however, the slide had always to be removed from the 
Microscope and kept on a specially constructed stage; and although in 
many cases this is of no importance, yet occasionally it is a very great 
drawback. The author has, therefore, devised an arrangement which 


Fia. 174. 


allows of the slide being kept constantly on the stage of the Microscope, 
and thus of the continuous observation of the same individual for weeks, 
and eyen, under certain conditions, for an indefinite period. The 
arrangement is represented in fig. 174. 

The slide A has the ordinary form, but is made slightly longer than 


* Ann. of Bot., ii. (1888) pp. 227-31 (2 figs.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1029 


the stage of the Microscope so as to project a little at both ends. On 
it is placed a piece of ordinary blotting-paper which just leaves the 
margins of the slide free; a hole is cut out in the centre of this paper BC, 
and at one end is a triangular prolongation B’, which is bent downwards 
close to the slide. Water is drawn from a tumbler E by means of a 
capillary tube D, and drops on to the blotting-paper. The author usually 
makes the tube just wide enough to allow a small drop of water to escape 
about every 20 seconds. The water is drained off by the triangular 
prolongation of the blotting-paper already mentioned. An inverted 
flask F, filled with water, has its mouth just touching the surface of the 
water in the tumbler E, and keeps the level of the water in the tumbler 
constant, thus ensuring the regular escape of drops from the capillary 
tube D. The capillary tube has a thickened portion in the middle, 
which is convenient to keep the tube steady. ‘To be quite sure that the 
tube will work properly, it is well to empty and refill it every 24 or 48 
hours. On the right of the fig. the apparatus is represented in use. 


Dixon, H. G.—Sub-stage Condensers. Engl, Mech., XLVIILI. (1888) p. 199. 
Grossz, W.—Ueber Polarisationsprismen. (On polarizing prisms.) 
72 pp., 2 pls., Kiel, 1888. 
Kriss, A.—Prismenkombination aus Kalkspath zwecks Mischung und Ver- 
gleichung von Lichtbiindeln. (Prism-combinations of cale-spar for mixing and 
comparing light-pencils.) 
[German Patent, No. 43,569, 27th September, 1887. Could be used as a 
comparator such as Inostransefi’s. | 
Leitschr. f. Instrumentenk., VIII. (1888) p. 371 C1 fig.). 
[Manton, W. P., and others.|—Sub-stage Condensers. 
[Principally a description of the Abbe Condenser. | 


The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 312-3. 
Weiss, D.—Ueber die Hamatoskopie des Dr. A. Henocque. 
Prag. Med. Wochenschr., XIII. (1888) p. 117. 


(4) Photomicrography. 


Jeserich’s Photomicrographic Apparatus.*—Dr. P. Jeserich de- 
scribes the apparatus shown in fig. 175, which can be used either with 
sunlight or artificial illumination and either vertical or horizontal, and 
an ordinary Microscope can be used, provided it has a horse-shoe base 
with sufficiently wide space to admit the light from the illuminating 
apparatus. 

The instrument consists of a rectangular iron base, to which are 
screwed four vertical iron uprights of L shaped section, forming guides 
for the camera to slide in. The camera can be fixed at any height to a 
plate between two of the uprights by means of a nut and bolt passing 
through a slot in the plate. These two uprights are accurately graduated, 
so that an index on the camera gives the distance of the objective from 
the focusing plate. ‘The index lies at a point a little below the focusing 
plate; consequently the zero point of the scale is placed at the same 
distance below the objective, and the true distance between the plate and 
the objective is then given by a direct reading. At the height of the 
body-tube is a very shallow box, or kind of camera, fixed in the 
same way by bolt and nut in the vertical slot, and united by a bellows 
connection to the first camera. The lower face of the smaller camera has 
in its centre a small opening provided with a screw-thread to receive a 


* Jeserich, P., ‘Die Mikrophotographie,’ 8vo, Berlin, 1888, pp. 99-105 (2 figs.). 


1030 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


photographic objective. The objective may be replaced by an adapter, 
which acts as a light-proof connection with the Microscope when the 
latter is used. The light from the illuminating apparatus is transmitted 
through a circular opening in the base-plate; and the Microscope is 
screwed to the base by three adjustment-screws, so that the tube is 
vertically above this opening and vertically below the centre of the 
camera. The whole apparatus is placed on a strong wooden table. The 
illuminating apparatus is attached to the upright shown in the figure, 


Fic. 175. 


and can be adjusted as required. The mechanism for moving the fine- 
adjustment is described in the next note but one. The camera can be easily 
used in a horizontal position. For this purpose the base-plate is hinged 
to the table on the right-hand side, so that it can be inclined along a 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1031 


semicircular guide until it finally rests in a horizontal position upon the 
support at the end of the table. In this position the apparatus is at a 
height of about 70 cm. 

Griffith's Photomicrographic Camera.—Mr. E. H. Griffith suggests 
the use of a camera made of a wire spring cone in the place of the ordi- 
nary bellows (fig. 176). 

The wire is properly tempered Fie. 176. 
and of sufficient diameter to keep 
it in position. It is covered with 
black tape to prevent reflection, 
and a closely fitting piece of 
black cloth or other suitable 
material is placed over the entire 
frame. For transportation the 
camera may be put in a very small 
space, and it is less liable to accident than those with bellows made of 
leather. 

Jeserich’s Focusing Arrangement.*—Figs. 177 and 178 represent 
Dr. P. Jeserich’s contrivance for working the micrometer screw from a 
distance where the upper part of the 
Microscope with the stage is made to Fic. 177. 
revolve, a8 in the Hartnack model, the 
mechanism following all the changes 
of position and the micrometer screw 
not being loaded. S is a horizontal 
endless screw working in bearings at 
X X attached to the cross-piece of the 
Microscope; at one end this screw 
carries a grooved wheel R ci about 
5-6 cm. diameter, which serves as a 
pulley, any motion of which is com- 
municated by means of S to the toothed 
wheel Z, which is attached to the 
micrometer screw. The endless cord 
passes from R over two freely-moving 
pulleys upon one axle attached by a 
clamp to the face of the camera, and from these over two similar 
pulleys at the other end of the camera; beyond these a weighted pulley G 
(5-10 grams) is suspended on the cord so as to keep it always taut. The 


Fic. 178. 


least movement of the string is thus communicated to the micrometer 
screw, while the whole apparatus is able to follow any movement of the 


* Jeserich, P., ‘ Die Mikrophotographie,’ 8vo, Berlin, 1888, pp. 132-4 (8 figs.). 


10382 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Microscope. The most convenient arrangement for the cord is shown 
in fig. 178, in which position it can be used with a vertical, inclined, or 
horizontal camera. : 


Stenglein's Coarse and Fine Focusing Arrangements.*—After de- 
scribing a form of horizontal camera which does not present any novel 
features, Herr M. Stenglein describes the method he adopts for moving 
the coarse-adjustment. C (fig. 179) is the milled head of the Microscope 


Fic. 179. 


round which is a cord; C! C! are holes in the base-board for the cord to 
pass through,and CO? C* weights attached to the cord at the focusing end 
of the camera. Each half of the cord passes over a couple of fixed 
pulleys. 
The device employed for moving the fine-adjustment is shown in fig. 
180, and is claimed to be bétter than 
Fic. 180. any arrangement with toothed wheels. 
It consists of a brass ring, the circum- 
ference of which is a little larger than 
the head of the micrometer screw; on 
io—7, «Cits_inner side are two fixed points, 
a while a third is supplied by a screw 
which serves to secure the ring to the 
milled head. To the outside of the 
ring is fixed a light and thin brass 
plate 45 mm. long, from the extremity 
of which the cords pass over two pulleys 
fixed to the board on each side of the camera. At the opposite end of 
the camera the cords again pass over a pair of pulleys, and are kept 
taut by a weight of 25-30 gr. By pulling one or other of the cords 
motion is imparted to the micrometer screw. 


Adaptation of the ordinary Eye-piece for Photomicrography.t—Dr. 
R. Neuhauss has found that if the lenses in the eye-piece be separated for 
a little distance and an additional diaphragm fitted on, an image just as 
sharp as can be obtained with the expensive projection-ocular is thrown 
on the focusing screen. 

The arrangement is extremely simple ; a paper case or tube, 24 em. 
long, is fitted on to the brass tube of the eye-piece. The internal 
diaphragm remains in its original place, while the new one is fixed over 
the eye-piece by means of a short movable tube. 


* Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 442-5, 471-5 (3 figs.). 
+ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 328-9., 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MIOROSOOPY, ETO. 1033 


The nearer the objects to be photographed are to the focusing disc, 
the greater distance must the lenses of the eye-piece be removed from 
one another. On the whole the lengthening varies from 1 to 2 cm. 


Illumination of Objects in Photomicrography.*—Dr. M. Stenglein 
gives the results of his experiments on this subject. In photographing 
a microscopical preparation, the light is passed through a condensing 
lens on to the object, the image of which is thrown on some white screen. 
If now the object be removed, the image of the light will appear in its 
place. And the examination of this picture shows that its surface is not 
illuminated with perfect regularity, but that all the irregularities of the 
zirconium and calcium plates are reproduced in the zirconium and 
calcium lights. If a petroleum lamp with circular wick be used, the 
dark streak in the centre of the flame appears. 

If now the image of the light be made to approach the objective, it 
will be noticed that the above-mentioned image gradually disappears and 
in its place there appears upon the white disc a circle which is more or 
less bright, according as the position of the image is in the objective or 
in front of it. 

Now if the illuminating lens be covered with a screen behind which 
in a properly darkened room the cone of light can be observed, it will 
be rendered evident that when the greatest possible brightness of the 
light-circle is observed on the white screen, the cone of light is inter- 
rupted at the aperture of the objective. 

Tf the cone be smaller than the objective’s aperture, the image of the 
light shows more or less sharply on the white screen, and therefore all 
the shadow-lines of the source of light. If the cone be larger than the 
aperture, then the light and dark circles appear. If, having in the above 
described way obtained the greatest brightness and a regular illumina- 
tion, the object to be photographed is inserted, it will be found that the 
sharpness of the image towards the margin is much increased. 

The author’s experiments were made with Klénne and Miiller’s 
1, 2, 3, 4 objectives, and an apochromatic of Zeiss with 0°30 aperture 
and 30°0 mm. focal distance. , 


Zirconium Light for Photomicrography.{—Herren Schmidt and 
Haensch have recently brought out a new burner for photomicrographic 
purposes ; in this zirconium replaces the calcium cylinder, which is found 
in practice to become partially consumed, and hence a rapid deteriora- 
tion of the light. Zirconium is found to be very resistant, even in the 
hottest part of the flame, and a small plate thereof fixed in platinum and 
placed in the hottest part of the flame gives a splendid white light, the 
spectrum of which extends from A to H, and is perfectly continuous, 
being unbroken by any lines. The advantages of the light are that it 
gives a regular flame in any position, and when focused for the optical 


axis of an apparatus the illuminating point remains steady at the same 
spot. 


ARSONVAL, — D’.—Nouvelle lumiére par incandescence du gaz d’éclairage. Appli- 
cation a examen microscopique, a l’analyse spectrale et la photographie. (New 
incandescent gas-light; its application to microscopical examination, spectral 
analysis and photography.) Ch, Soc. Biol., V. (1888) No. 8. 


* Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iii. (1888) pp. 511-2. 
+ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) p, 225. 


1034 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Eacsert, S.—An Appliance for making Photo-micrographs with the Microscope in 
the upright position. 
(Simply a right-angled prism.] 
The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 310-2 (2 figs.), 
Photomicrographic Apparatus, Some. 
Scientific News, II. (1888) pp. 361-2 (1 fig.), 378-9 (2 figs.), 402-3 (2 figs.). 


Schmidt & Haensch, Die neue verbesserte Vergrésserungscamera von. (The new 
improved enlarging camera of Schmidt and Haensch.) 
Phot. Mittheil. v. Vogel, I. (1888) February, 4 pp. 


Zeiss, C.—Special-Katalog iiber Apparate fiir Mikrophotographie. 4to, Jena, 1888. 


(5) Microscopical Optics and Manipulation. 


Microscopical Optics and the Quekett Club Journal—oOur remarks 
on this subject at p. 817 have produced letters from Mr. H. Morland 
and Mr. T. F. Smith,* the two authors whose papers were referred to, 
and also from ‘“‘ A Member of both Societies.f These letters illustrate 
in so marked a manner what we desired to enforce, that we deal with 
them further here. 

One of Mr. Morland’s original blunders was expressed in the following 
words :—“ The only objection to my mind against this medium is that 
“its refractive index is not sufficiently high for the new immersion 
“Tenses”! It is almost incomprehensible that notwithstanding the time 
that has elapsed he should not have appreciated the absurdity of what 
he thus propounded; but in the letter now published not the faintest 
glimmer is shown of any recognition on his part that his statement was 
as absurd as an assertion that the power of a telescope depends upon 
whether it is encased in wood or brass. 

But if Mr. Morland’s want of appreciation of the principles of the 
subject with which he was dealing is surprising, what are we to say to 
Mr. Smith’s letter, which contains the most astounding microscopical 
mare’s nest propounded since the days of the old aperture controversy. 

It is hardly credible, but it is the fact, that Mr. Smith now justifies 
his original criticisms on the diffraction theory, and which we ventured to 
describe as “terrible nonsense,” by the statement that that theory rested 
on objectives of low apertures, and that subsequently “the aperture of 
objectives has been increased by nearly one-half,” so that adherence to 
the theory in the present day is “ nothing better than superstition.” 

The first remark on this statement is that when the diffraction theory 
was propounded, we had not merely dry objectives with a theoretical 
maximum aperture of 1:0 N.A., but water-immersion objectives with 
1:33 N.A., so that in the advance to 1:52 N.A. there is an increase not 
of nearly one-half or 50 per cent., but of 15 per cent. only. The second 
remark is that Mr. Smith is by his own admission wholly unaware that 
the theory was restated by Prof. Abbe after homogeneous-immersion 
objectives had come into use, and that in 1882 it was again developed 
by him in the fullest detail.f 

The letter of ““A Member of both Societies” points the moral to 


* Eng. Mech., xlviii. (1888) p. 178. + Ibid., p. 159. 

¢ Mr. Smith’s idea as to Prof. Abbe in 1875 “never having dreamt of the possi- 
bilities of the present objectives” is still more comical when it is considered what 
has been published in this Journal by Prof. Abbe on that very point, and the same 
remark applies to his views on “ doubling the illuminating power,” and “ observing 
by direct light.” 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MIOROSOOPY, ETC. 1035 


what at the best is a very humiliating chapter so far as microscopical 
optics is concerned. “A Member ” insists that when Societies print 
rubbish in their Proceedings such comments as we made are beside the 
mark. Let us look at the matter by means of a parallel case. 

Suppose a Fellow read a paper at the Astronomical Society refuting 
Newton’s theory of gravitation on the ground that the premiss with 
which he started was wrong—that the apple fell to the ground simply 
because it got loose from the stalk, without which it would not have 
fallen. Can it be seriously suggested that the Society, as a Society, 
would not very properly incur serious discredit for printing such a 
paper in their Transactions? Is it conceivable that any astronomer 
would venture to write as “ A Member” does, that “If no paper is to 
‘appear in any journal because some one or other, and perhaps very 
“rightly, may consider it rubbish, most] Societies had better give up 
“ printing their proceedings altogether ; and if the opinions of an author, 
“under his own signature, and controverted at the time of reading, are to 
“be fathered upon a whole Society, either some animus exists or editorial 
“craft must be in a poor way!” 

It is especially to the Society who print nonsense that the complaint 
must be addressed, because it is they who are in reality the offenders. 
To the end of time there will be authors who will write with an air of 
transcendent knowledge on subjects of which they know nothing, and 
who will make similarly absurd mistakes to those of Mr. Morland and 
and Mr. Smith. If the matter rested there it would be of small conse- 
quence—an affair of only passing amusement. But when it comes to pub- 
lication it is a very different question. Not only are the readers of the 
papers misled, but microscopical science itself is degraded and disgraced, 
and made a laughing-stock in other scientific circles. 

There is no possible reason why a Microscopical Society should be 
less jealous of its good name and credit than any other learned Society ; 
and so long as we have any share in the conduct of this Journal we 
shall spare no effort to prevent the publication by any recognized micro- 
scopical authority of views which whether by ignorance or only wrong- 
headedness, are what we have described as terrible nonsense. We are 
glad to note that the tone in which the authors write in their recent 
letters sufficiently shows that when they next write a microscopical 
paper they will take much more care than they did with the last, in 
order to avoid the comments it has been our duty to make, so that even 
in that quarter some good will have been accomplished; the similar 
feeling displayed in another direction by “ A Member” leads us also to 
the hopeful conclusion that even if similar authors should hereafter be 
found, yet that we have seen the last of any reproduction in print of such 
lamentable papers as those on which we have commented. 


Amphipleura pellucida. : 
[Criticism, by Delta, of Mr. Nelson’s note, ante, p. 809, and remarks by T. F. S., 
EH. M. Nelson, Delta, and Jack.] 

Engl. Mech., XLVI. (1888) pp. 117, 138, 159, 178, 199 (1 fig.), 
219 and 260 ( figs.). 

D’ Agen, E.—Initial Magnifying Power of Microscope Objectives. 
: Engl. Mech., XLVIII. (1888) pp. 178-9. 
HASSELBERG, B.—Uber eine Methode die Brennweite eines Linsensystems fiir 
verschiedene Strahlen mit grosser Genauigkeit zu bestimmen. (On the method of 
determining with great accuracy the focal length of a system of lenses for different 
rays.) Bull. Acad. Imp. Sci. St. Pétersbourg, XXXII. (1888) pp. 412-34. 


1036 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Kerper, A.—Bestimmung der Hauptbildebene und Priifung der Korrektion- 
zustandes optischer Systeme. (Determination of the principal image-plane and 
testing of the correction-condition of optical systems.) 

Central-Ztg. f. Optik u. Mech., TX. (1888) pp. 205-8 (4 figs.). 

Newson, E. M.—A simple Correction for Curvature of Image. 

Engl. Mech., XLVIII. (1888) pp. 259 (2 figs.). 


(6) Miscellaneous. 


B., J. E.—Review of Tripp’s ‘ British Mosses.’ 
(“The author wisely advises her readers to avoid as much as possible the use 
of lenses.” (?)] 
Journ. of Bot., XX VI. (1888) p. 351. 
Dousear, A. E.—The Art of Projecting; a Manual of Experimentation in Physics, 
Chemistry, and Natural History, with the Porte-Lumiére and Magic-Lantern. 
New ed., vi. and 178 pp., 119 figs., 8yo, Boston, 1888. 
FaBRE-DOMERGUE.—Premiers principes du Microscope et de la Technique Micro- 
scopique. (First principles of the Microscope and microscopical technique.) 
250 pp. and figs., 12mo, Paris, 1888. 
FLeson, M.—Uber den Einfluss der neueren Verbesserungen auf die Anschaffung 
eines Mikroskopes seitens des Arztes. (On the influence of modern improye- 
ments on Microscopes for medical men.) 
Correspbl. f. Schweizer, Aerzte, XVII. (1888) p. 458. 
LEHMANN, O.—Molekularphysik mit besonderer Beriicksichtigung mikroskopischer 
Untersuchungen und Anleitung zu solchen, sowie einem Anhang tiber mikro- 
skopische Analyse. (Molecular physics, with special reference to microscopical 
investigations, and a guide thereto, as well as an appendix on microscopical 
analysis.) 
Vol. L., x. and 852 pp., 5 pls. and 375 figs., 8vo, Leipzig, 1888. 
MayAuLtL, J., Jun.—The Modern Microscope. [., II. 
(Cantor Lectures at the Society of Arts, 1888.] 
Journ. Soc. Arts, XXXVI. (1888) pp. 1149-59 (19 figs.), 1164-72 (7 figs.). 


RoystTon-Picort, G. W.—WMicroscopical Advances. XXXIX., XL. 
[Attenuated lines, circles, and dots. 
Engl. Mech.. XLVIII. (1888) pp. 209 and 249 (1 fig.). 


B. Technique.* 
(1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Processes. 


Agar-agar for Cultivation.j—Dr. Richter gives a method for 
making agar which avoids to a great extent the difficulty of dissolving 
this medium in water. While the meat (250 grm.) for the infusion is 
macerating in water, into a flask holding about 250 ccm. are poured 
10 grm. of agar finely chopped up and 150 ccm. of Moselle wine. 
Having been allowed to soak for a couple of hours, they are heated up 
to boiling-point in a water-bath. When the pieces are dissolved the 
agar-wine is set aside to cool. Next morning it is again liquefied in a 
water-bath and neutralized with carbonate of soda. The gelatin-meat- 
infusion, 2 per cent. gelatin, is then prepared in the usual way. When 
ready the agar wine is added to it, the mixture boiled for a quarter of 
an hour, and the whole filtered while hot. 

The fluid (20-30 cem.) which flows through at first is somewhat 
cloudy, but afterwards becomes quite clear. If cloudy the filtrate must 


* This subdivision contains (1) Collecting Objects, including Culture Pro- 
cesses; (2) Preparing Objects; (3) Cutting, including Imbedding and Microtomes; 
(4) Staining and Injecting; (5) Mounting, including slides, preservative fluids, &e. ; 
(6) Miscellaneous. + Berlin Klin. Wochenschr., 1887, p. 600. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1037 


be re-filtered. In order that the mass may have the proper degree of 
consistence it is necessary to use only 350 c.cm. of water in making the 
meat infusion instead of 500, in view of the addition of the 150 ccm. 
wine. 

All kinds of microbes thrive excellently on this medium. 

Albumen of Plovers’ Eggs as Nutrient Medium for Micro- 
organisms.*—Dr. D. Dal Pozzo prepares the albumen of plovers’ eggs 
in the following way. The egg is first carefully cleaned externally, 
and then, having been opened, the thin albumen which runs out is 
received into a sterilized vessel. To this one-fourth of water is added, 
and then the medium is poured into test-tubes, &c., where it is discon- 
tinuously sterilized, and allowed to set obliquely. From oneegg four or 
five tubes may be filled. If necessary the medium may be modified with 
glycerin, dextrin, paste, &c. The thicker portion of the albumen sur- 
rounding the yolk may also be made use of by diluting it with water, 
and even with glycerin; it is then filtered and treated as 
before. Discontinuous sterilization is not absolutely neces- Fic. 181. 
sary, as the albumen is always free from micro-organisms. COS 

The albumen mass may also be used for the production 
of plates. The inoculating matter is finely disseminated 
throughout the albumen, and the plate is then dried over 
sulphuric acid, and the micro-organisms developed in a moist 
chamber at ordinary temperatures. 


New Method for Cultivating Anaerobic Micro-organ- 
isms.|—Dr. H. Buchner’s method consists in absorbing the 
oxygen by means of pyrogallic acid. There results an 
atmosphere of nitrogen and a little carbonic acid mixed 
with a trace of carbonic oxide. 

The apparatus is shown on a reduced scale in fig. 181. 
The outer tube is usually made 22-24 cm. long and 8 cm. 
wide, the inner tube having corresponding proportions. In 
the bottom of the outer tube is placed 1 grm. of dry com- 
mercial pyrogallic acid, and on this by means of a pipette 
are poured 10 cem. of a 10 per cent. solution of caustic 
potash. The smaller tube containing the previously inocu- 
lated gelatin, &c., is then placed within the larger one, and 
prevented from reaching the bottom by means of a wire 
stand. The smaller tube is plugged with cotton wool, and 
the outer one with a caoutchouc bung. 

If the air space in the outer tube amount to 100 cem., the 
quantity of pyrogallic acid to 1 grm., and that of the potash 
solution to 10 ccm., then the absorption of oxygen is com- 
pleted in an incubator at a temperature of 37° in 24 hours. 
If the temperature be only 20° C., then it takes about two : 
de to remove the oxygen entirely, while at 0° C. the absorption is very 
slow. 

Frequent shaking of the pyrogallic acid produces of course a quicker 
absorption, and the addition of the alkali boiling hot accelerates the 
action. ‘This method is said to save much time and labour in the 
laboratory. 


* Med. Jahrb., 1887, pp. 523-9. 
+ Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iv. (1888) pp. 149-51 (1 fig.). 


1888. as 


1088 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Milk as a Medium.* — Frl. M. Raskin has made an elaborate series 
of experiments on the culture of pathogenic micro-organisms on a firm 
and transparent basis prepared from milk. From milk three kinds of 
culture-media may be obtained, (1) where casein is retained, (2) where 
it is replaced by peptone, or (3) by sodium albuminate. The investi- 
gator describes the preparation of milk-peptone-gelatin, milk-peptone- 
agar, milk-casein-gelatin, milk-casein-agar, milk-albumen-gelatin, and 
milk-albumen-agar. The media proved to be very suitable. Hight 
species of Bacteria were found to flourish, Bacillus mallei, B. typh. 
abdominalis, Komma bacillus cholere asiaticz, B. tussis convuls., Staphylo- 
coccus pyogenes albus, Steph. pyog. aureus, Bacillus anthracis, Pnewmo- 
coccus friedlinderi. 


Cultivation of Bacillus Tuberculosis on Potato.t—Dr. A. D. 
Pawlowsky cultivates the bacillus of tubercle on potato as follows. 
Into narrow test-tubes, of the shape devised by Roux, are placed slips of 
potato. These are then sterilized for half an hour at 115°. When 
withdrawn from the steamer, the tubes are placed at an angle of 30°, in 
order to get cool, and also to drain. The potato is then inoculated, the 
tubes plugged and kept at a temperature of 39°. 

After a dozen days’ incubation the culture appears. It is whitish 
and glossy, and shows up distinctly against the yellow colour of the 
potato. In 5 to 6 weeks the surface is covered with greyish-white 
granulations. If glycerinated potato be used, the bacillus seems to 
develope with greater rapidity. The pathogenic properties of the 
bacillus are quite maintained, rabbits inoculated therewith die in 
18 days. 

The author is of opinion that the reason why other experimenters 
have failed to propagate the bacillus on potato, is that they have failed 
to recognize that humidity is an essential condition of the life of this 
microbe. 

Cultivation of Anaerobic Microbes.{—M. E. Roux describes some 
apparatus for cultivating anaerobic microbes. For cultivating in liquid 
media, in carbonic acid, or other gases the author uses Pasteur’s 
double tubes, the open ends of which unite in a common narrow glass 
tube, besides which there is an additional tube at the side for filling 
purposes. The apparatus having been sterilized, the one test-tube is 
filled through the side tube with the inoculated nutrient solution, the 
other with sterile solution, after which the side tubes are melted up. 
Through the common exit tube the flask is evacuated with an air-pump 
and then filled with the gas desired. The connecting tube is now 
melted up. The nutrient tube is for control purposes, but afterwards 
may be used for another inoculation. 

The simple plan for cultivating anaerobic microbes in solid media is 
to fill completely pipette-like vessels with gelatin nearly boiling, and 
then to melt up the ends. The gelatin is freed from air by the boiling. 
The tubes are inoculated by breaking off an end and then inserting the 
platinum needle, after which the end is melted up again. Another 
method employed is to have test-tubes with a narrow neck and then 
introduce the gas by means of a capillary tube passing through the 
cotton-wool plug into the gelatin. This done, the neck is melted up. 


* Biol. Centralbl., viii. (1888) pp. 462-70. 
+ Ann. Instit. Pasteur, ii. (1888) p. 315. ¢ Ibid., 1887, No. 2. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1039 


The author also uses test-tubes 25 cm. long and 3 em. broad, ending 
in a narrow tube 10-15 em. long, which serves to connect with the air- 
pump and gasometer. When the tubes are filled with a small quantity 
of agar or gelatin they are inoculated, evacuated of air, and then filled 
with the selected gas. This done, the tube is melted up and the tube 
laid in the horizontal position. 

An original experiment of the author’s in anaerobic cultivation was 
to use Bacillus subtilis as an agent to use up the oxygen. The gelatin 
was boiled up in a tube with a narrow neck, then set by immersing in 
ice-water, and at once inoculated. The inoculated gelatin was then 
covered with a layer of agar inoculated with the B. subtilis, whereupon 
the tube was melted up. When the aerobic B. subtilis began to develope 
it absorbed the free oxygen present in the tube, and thereby created, for 
the germs of the anaerobic microbes lying below, the proper condition for 
their development. 


Cultivation of the ‘‘Typhus” Bacillus in coloured nutrient 
media.*—Herr Birch-Hirschfeld has applied the method of staining 
Bacteria in the living condition to the study of the morphology and 
development of the typhoid Bacillus. The staining of the living Bacteria 
was effected partly in drop-cultivations and partly in test-tubes. For 
making the bouillon drop-cultures the author used the ordinary hollow- 
ground slides. The cover-glass was fixed on a rim made out of 5 parts 
vaselin and 1 part paraffin. This rim was run on the slide with a turn- 
table while the mixture was hot. This kind of rim allows the cover- 
glass to be easily lifted up, and an incubation does not run into the 
drop. Instead of the dyes usually adopted the author employed 
phloxin-red, a pigment which does not cause, like fuchsin, methyl-violet, 
&c., a granular precipitate to be deposited in the bouillon. Of a 
sterilized watery 1 per cent. solution of phloxin-red 1 ccm. is added to 
6 ccm. of sterilized slightly alkaline bouillon. Of this the drops are 
made, and in it the typhoid Bacillus grows up coloured a bright red. 
The spores, too, which remain unstained in cover-glass preparations, are 
here (typhus and anthrax) brightly stained, and often more strongly 
than the rest of the protoplasm. If the bouillon solution be less stained 
than in the foregoing the spores only are stained. 

Benzo-purpurin in similar quantities is still more suitable for the 
purpose than phloxin-red. This dye stains the spores brown. 

One of the positive results, according to the author, of this method 
is to set at rest the disputed question of endogenous spores in typhoid 
Bacillus. 

The author furthermore showed from the example of anthrax Bacillus 
that Bacteria bred in this way are unaffected both in development and 
virulence. 

New Method of cultivating Bacteria in Coloured Media for Dia- 
gnostic Purposes.j—Dr. Noeggerath constructed a mixture of anilin dyes 
to correspond as nearly as possible with the spectrum colours. Of these 
dyes strong watery solutions were made, and then mixed in the following 
proportions :—Methylen-blue, 2 cem.; gentian-violet, 4 ccm.; methyi- 
green, | cem.; chrysoidin, 4 cem.; fuchsin, 3 cem. This mixture was 
then diluted with 200 ccm. water and added unfiltered to the gelatin in 

_the proportion of 7-10 drops to about 10 cem. of the latter. The whole 


* Arch. f. Hygiene, vii. (1887) p. 341. + Fortschr. d. Med., vi. (1888) p. 1. 
AE 


1040 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


having been boiled twice or thrice in a test-tube was poured out on a 
plate, and when it had set, inoculated with the microbes to be examined. 
With the development of the microbes certain colours may appear; for 
example, Streptococcus pyogenes forms an orange-red streak in the midst 
of the dark-grey gelatinous mass. As this colour was not in the original 
mixture, the author regards it as a product of the vital activity of the 
Bacteria. 


Improvement in Plaut’s Flasks for sterilizing water.*—Dr. H. 
Plaut finds that his sterilizing bottles are subject to the inconvenience 
of an escape of the water when the closure of the stopper and neck is 
quite air-tight. This is obviated by using a cork stopper, and by 
drawing out the glass tube as far as the level of the water. When 
sterilization is completed the glass tube is pushed back again. 


Fire-proof Cotton-wool Plug for Test-tubes.j—Dr. 8. Bartosche- 
witsch has invented a modification of the cotton-wool stopper which 
consists in moistening it, before sterilization, with silicate of potash. 
Any shape can then be given to the plug with the fingers. The mass 
dries during sterilization, and in this way is produced a fire-proof casing 
which is difficult to remove from the plug, and can be used again a 
thousand times. This modification has the further advantage of pre- 
venting the nutrient medium from drying, and is much more convenient 
than the caoutchouc capsule in vogue. 


BorpDONI-UFFREDUZzI, G.—La Coltivazione del bacillo della lebbra. (The 
culture of the leprosy bacillus.) Arch. Sci. Med., XII. (1888) p. 53. 


MawnGeri, C.—Sulla preparazione della gelatine all’ agar-agar. (On the prepara- 
tion of gelatin from agar-agar.) Gazz. degli Ospitali, 1888, pp. 179-80. 
RovssELetT, C—On some methods of Collecting and Keeping Pond-life for the 
Microscope. Trans. Middlesex Nat. Hist. and Sci. Soc., 1888, pp. 64-71. 


ScHIMMELBUSCH, O.—Eine Modification des Koch’schen Plattenverfahrens. (A 
modification of Koch’s plate process.) Fortschr. der Medizin, 1888, pp. 616-9. 


SoyKa, J.—Bakteriologische Untersuchungs-methoden mit besonderer Beriick- 
sichtigung quantitativer bakteriologischer Untersuchungen. (Bacteriological 
investigation methods, with special reference to quantitative bacteriological 
investigations.) Prag. Med. Wochenschr., 1888, pp. 429-30. 


(2) Preparing Objects. 


Methods of Examining Blood-corpuscles.t—According to Prof. A. 
Mosso there are three principal reagents suitable for the examination of 
blood. The first of these is sodium chloride 0-75 per cent. solution, and 
this is unsatisfactory, as it alters and decolorizes many corpuscles. 
This negatives the advantages which this salt possesses in allowing the 
examination of blood in the fresh condition. Against the use of serum 
and iodized serum there are also weighty objections. 

The other two reagents are perchloride of mercury, and osmic acid. 
These fix and solidify the blood, but the former suffers from the 
inconvenience of coagulating the serum. Perchloride of mercury is 
used chiefly according to the formule of Pacini and Hayem. The 
solution of the former is mercury perchloride 1 gr.; sodium chloride 
4 gr.; distilled water 200 gr. 

Hayem modified Pacini’s formula as follows :—Distilled water 


* Centralbl. f. Bakteriol. u. Parasitenk., iv. (1888) pp. 152-3. + Ibid., p. 212. 
} Arch. Ital, Biol., x. (1888) pp. 40-8. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1041 


200 gr.; sodium chloride 1 gr.; sulphate of soda 5 gr.; perchloride of 
mercury 0°5 gr.; glycerin 28°. 

The chief objections to mercurial solutions are, according to the 
author, that they do not prevent all the corpuscles from becoming 
altered, and that they always produce a decoloration of the red 
corpuscles. 

Osmic acid used in 1 per cent. solution preserves blood-corpuscles 
better than any other known reagent, and does not precipitate the 
albumen like sublimate. It fixes the leucocytes in their natural condi- 
tion, and though they become granular, they remain transparent, and 
preserve their proper and characteristic outlines. 


Preserving Blood-corpuscles for Microscopical Examination.*— 
The following method of preparing permanent microscopical specimens 
of blood-corpuscles is extremely simple, and in Mr. R. Leigh’s hands 
has yielded very satisfactory results. 

A thin film of blood on a cover-glass is gently dried, and inverted, 
for half an hour or more, into a covered capsule containing a half- 
saturated solution of safranin in absolute alcohol. The loosely adhering 
stain is then washed off by a stream of distilled water, after which the 
specimen is again thoroughly dried, and mounted either in Canada 
balsam, liquefied by heat, or thinned by turpentine. 

With human blood the corpuscles are stained a beautiful clear pink 
colour, and in non-mammalian blood the nuclei are stained dark pink, 
while the rest of the red corpuscles are lightly tinged. The specimens 
which were made three months before have retained their colour 
perfectly. 


Methods for Investigating the Structure of the Central Nervous 
Organs in health and disease.t—In his ‘ Introduction to the Study of 
the Structure of the Central Nervous Organs in health and disease, Dr. H. 
Oberstein recommends the dissociation method of Stilling. Harden in 
Miiller’s fluid, and then place in absolute alcohol. Then immerse in 
artificial wood vinegar for several weeks (glacial acetic acid 200 gr., 
water 800 gr., kreosote 29 drops). The preparations can, after being 
treated with oil of cloves, be mounted in balsam. If continuous series 
of sections be required, the tissue should be hardened in bichromate of 
potash. Begin with a 1 per cent. solution, change very often, gradually 
strengthening to 2 or 3 per cent. (time 6-8 weeks). In an incubator at 
from 35°-45° hardening is effected in 8-14 days. Special care is 
necessary for hardening spinal cord. If the preparations are to be kept in 
the bichromate solution after having been hardened, the strength should 
be 0-1 per cent. Hardening may be hastened by the addition of 20 to 
30 drops of a1 per cent. solution of chromic acid to the solution of 
the salt. When hardened the preparations are to be washed and then 
transferred to 50 per cent., and finally to 95 per cent. spirit. Miiller’s 
and Hrlitzki’s fluids and bichromate of ammonia are condemned. The 
best fixative for the delicate structures is a modification of Flemming’s 
solution (Fol) :—osmic acid 1 per cent., 2 vols.; chromic acid 1 per 
cent., 25 vols.; acetic acid 2 per cent., 8 vols.; water 68 vols. After 
being in this fluid for 24 hours, the pieces are thoroughly washed and 
then placed in 80 per cent. spirit. 


* Journ. Anat. and Physiol., xxii. (1888) p. 497. 


t 8vo, Leipzig u. Wien, 1888, 406 pp. 178 figs. Cf. Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., 
v. (1888) pp. 203-7. 


1042 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


For staining, Gerlach’s ammonia-carmine is most recommended. 
The sections may be stained in 3 to 5 minutes, if placed over a water- 
bath filled with boiling water. Lowenthal’s picrocarmine, Czokor’s 
cochineal-alum solution, Bismarck brown, nigrosin, and Grenacher’s alum- 
carmine are also mentioned favourably. For staining the nerve-sheaths, 
osmic acid (osmic acid 1 per cent. + glycerin + ammonia), and Golgi’s 
sublimate and silver methods are also alluded to. Palladium and gold 
and Weigert’s method are mentioned. 


Methods for Examining the Structure of the Cerebrospinal Nerves.” 
—_M. L. Petrone found that the two following methods were the 
best for investigating the structure of the intracranial and spinal 
nerves :— 

(1) Bichromate of potash, or Miiller’s fluid, and nitrate of silver. The 
pieces of nerve were kept in a 2 per cent. solution of the bichromate, or in 
Miiller’s fluid, frequently changed, for at least two months. The harden- 
ing was accelerated by keeping the fluids at a temperature of about 25°C. 
After this the pieces are placed for 24 to 48 hours in 0°75 per cent. 
solution of nitrate of silver and kept in a warm place. The sections are 
washed several times, to free them of excess of nitrate of silver, with 
ordinary spirit, and finally with absolute alcohol. They are then passed 
through creosote and turpentine oil successively, and having been placed 
on a slide, are covered over with dammar merely (no cover-glass). The 
disadvantages of this method are the copious precipitate on the surface 
of the sections and the inconstancy of the staining. 

(2) Bichromate of potash, or Miiller’s fluid, and sublimate. The 
pieces are first hardened as before, and then are placed by degrees in 
0-35-0°5 per cent. sublimate solutions, which must for the first 10 
days be renewed daily, and afterwards every third or fifth day. In this 
solution the pieces must remain for at least two months. The further 
treatment is as before, except that the copious use of water is required 
before the sections are placed in spirit in order to prevent the precipitate 
on their surface. 

The foregoing methods may also be used for isolation of the 
elements :—(1) The pieces hardened in bichromate are thoroughly 
stained with ammonia-carmine, picrocarmine, chinolein, or methylen- 
blue, and then dissociated in glycerin or some other suitable medium, 
(2) The preparations are macerated in Ranvier’s one-third spirit. Small 
pieces are then shaken up in a test-tube with a little water, to which 
picrocarmine and afterwards osmic acid are added. 


Making Preparations of Bone and Teeth and retaining their 
soft parts.j—Dr. L. A. Weil takes only fresh, or nearly fresh, teeth, 
and in order to allow reagents and stains to penetrate into the pulp 
cavity, divides the tooth immediately after extraction with a sharp 
fret-saw, below the neck, into two or three pieces, “ allowing water to 
trickle over it the while.” The pieces are then laid in concentrated 
sublimate solution for some hours to fix the soft parts. After this they 
are washed in running water for about one hour, then placed in 80 per 
cent. spirit, which in 12 hours is changed to 50 per cent., and again 
after a similar period for 70 per cent. Then, in order to remove the . 
black sublimate precipitate, the teeth are laid for twelve hours in 90 per 


* Internat. Monatschr. f. Anat. u. Physiol., v. (1888) Heft. i. 
+ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 200-2. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1048 


cent. spirit, to which 1-5-2-0 per cent. tincture of iodine has been 
added. The iodine is afterwards removed by immersion in absolute 
alcohol, until the teeth become white. 

For staining, alcohol or aqueous solutions of borax-carmine gave the 
“best results. From the absolute alcohol the teeth are removed to 
running water from 15 to 30 minutes, and then placed in the stain. 
In the watery solution of borax-carmine they remain one or two, in the 
spirituous two or three, days. They are then transferred to acidulated 
70 per cent. spirit (70 per cent. spirit 100 cem., acid. muriat. 1-0) in which 
they remain, the watery ones stained at least 12, the alcohol-stained ones 
94 to 36 hours. This done, they are immersed for about 15 minutes in 
90 per cent. spirit, and then for half an hour in absolute alcohol, after 
which they are transferred to some ethereal oil for twelve or more hours. 

The ethereal oil is then quickly washed off the objects' with pure 
xylol, and then they are placed for at least 24 hours in pure chloroform. 
After this they are passed into a solution of balsam in chloroform. The 
balsam is prepared by drying, in a water-bath heated gradually up to 
90°, for eight hours or more, until when cold the mass will crack like 
glass on being punctured. Of this balsam so much is added to the 
chloroform as to make a thin solution, in which, as before mentioned, the 
teeth lie for 24 hours. After this time as much balsam is added to the 
solution as will dissolve. When no more balsam will dissolve, the teeth 
and a sufficiency of the balsam are poured into a vessel and heated up to 
90° in a water-bath until the mass when cold shall be hard as glass. 
When the balsam is sufficiently set the teeth are carefully picked 
out, placed in a vice, and thin discs are cut from them with a fret-saw, 
water being allowed to trickle over them the while, and then they are 
ground in the usual way. The preparations are mounted in chloroform- 
balsam. 


Preparing large Sections of Lung.*—Dr. G. 8. Woodhead makes 
large sections of lung for demonstrating morbid appearances as 
follows :—Make the first incision through the lung in the direction in 
which you wish to have your sections. The second incision is made 
parallel to the first and not more than half an inch from the first. 
The section should then be placed in a flat dish on a layer of lint, and 
covered with several layers of lint, and over this a piece of plate-glass 
to keep the section flat and submerged. After being five or six weeks 
in the Miiller, the sections are washed for about 24 hours in water. 
The slice is then placed in a mixture of 5 parts mucilage (B.P.) and 4 
parts of syrup made by boiling 20 oz. of sugar in a pint of water. In 
winter 3 parts of syrup will suffice. Two drops of carbolic acid to the 
ounce prevent formation of fungi. After soaking in this for 48 hours 
or more, the slice is taken out for sectioning, dried with a soft cloth, 
then placed in B.P. mucilage for a few minutes, and then transferred to 
the freezing plate of the microtome. The microtome used is a modifica- 
tion by Dr. A. Bruce of the best features of the Hamilton and Williams 
microtomes. From time to time the slice must be banked up with 
gum, and when nearly frozen pare down the tissue to the level of the 
rails with a long thin knife. In front of the microtome place a flat 
white dish filled with warm distilled water, and in which is also placed 
a flat glass, larger than the slice, and which will eventually serve as 


* The Microscope, vill. (1888) pp. 272-5. 


1044 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEAROHES RELATING TO 


cover-glass. The first complete section which finds its way into the 
white pan placed at a level of about one inch below that of the sections, 
is removed on the cover-glass to a dish of distilled water, wherein it 
remains for some hours. The sections are then stained with alum-car- 
mine, picrocarmine, or ammonia-carmine. With picrocarmine rapid stain- 
ing on the slide is best. In alum-carmine the section on the cover-glass 
may be left all night. Then transfer to distilled water to remove alum 
crystals. 

; Some of the unstained sections may be cleared up by Hamilton’s 
liquor potassee method. Having been thoroughly washed, pour over 
the surface of the sections with a pipette a solution of liquor potasse 
1:4 water. To imbed and mount take a quantity of gelatin, wash and 
cover with a saturated solution of salicylic acid. Soak all night, then 
pour off superfluous water and heat over a water-bath until the whole is 
thoroughly melted. To every one part of this add two parts of glycerin. 
Heat over water-bath, keeping it stirred until the whole is thoroughly 
mixed, strain through a piece of close flannel into a flask in which it 
may be reheated as required. Having allowed most of the water to 
drain away, the slide is placed on a level stand, and a thin layer of warm 
glycerin jelly run slowly and gently over the surface by means of a 
pipette ; then set aside to cool. ‘To finish off the preparation, the slide 
on which the section is to be mounted is placed on three or four pieces of 
cork over a water-bath until it is warmed through. It is then transferred 
to the tripod, and a quantity of jelly is passed on to the centre and 
gradually on to the end nearer the manipulator. The cover-glass is 
then gently lowered down, the near end first. The jelly on the cover- 
glass keeps the section in position long enough to allow of the cover- 
glass coming into its place. The slide usually retains sufficient heat 
to melt away all superfluous jelly. Should this not be the case, the 
whole slide may be again heated and the extra mounting medium gently 
squeezed out. If there be any surplus at the margin of the cover the 
slide may be left for some time without further treatment. To preserve 
the specimen, remove the extra jelly with a knife, wipe carefully first 
with a moist, and afterwards with a dry cloth. Then paint round the 
margin several layers of benzol balsam. This must be done at once 
after the superfluous jelly has been scraped away, otherwise air-bubbles 


get in owing to the jelly becoming dry. It is convenient to mount these 
slides in common wooden frames. 


Cleansing the Intestine of many animals of sand.*—Dr. Kikenthal 
remarks that the grit present in the gut of many animals, and which is 
due to their way of life, prevents the preparation of thin sections. 
Such is the case with the earthworm. The author advises that the 
animal be first washed clean and then be placed for some time in a tall 
glass vessel which has been filled up with bits of moistened blotting- 


paper. The worm gradually evacuates the earthy particles from the gut 
and fills it instead with paper. 


Killing contractile Animals in a state of extension.t—M. L. 
Roule divides the contractile animals into those which contract 
rapidly, like Actiniw, Hydroids, Bryozoa, and Ascidians, and those 
which contract more slowly, like Aleyonium and Veretillum. The latter 


* Tagebl. 60. Versamml. Deutscher Naturf. u. Aerzte: Wiesbaden, 1887, p- 259. 
+ Arch. Zool. Expér. et Gén., vi. (1888) pp. v.-vii. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1045 


may be best killed by being plunged in a quantity of E. van Beneden’s 
fluid, which consists of a saturated solution of corrosive sublimate in 
distilled water 3 parts, and crystallizable acetic acid 1 part. Specimens 
should be left in this fluid for from five to twenty-five minutes according 
to their size, and then washed in pure water. They should then be 
placed in alcohol of 45°, then 60°, 70°, and finally 80°. For histological 
purposes 90° and absolute alcohol should also be used. If necessary the 
quantity of acetic acid may be diminished. 

For animals which contract rapidly it is best to use ordinary alum. 
Specimens are put in glass dishes with sufficient water to enable them to 
expand; when expanded some crystals of alum are quietly put near 
them ; as these dissolve slowly the animals are killed gradually. Several 
hours are necessary for this reagent. They are then washed clean of 
alum, fixed with dilute solutions of Van Beneden’s fluid; then washed 
with water and treated with a series of various strengths of alcohol. 


Preparation of Embryos of Asterias.*—Mr. J. W. Fewkes, in his 
investigations into the development of Asterias, killed the young forms 
in 35 per cent. alcohol; they were then rapidly passed through various 
grades (50, 70, 90 per cent.) to absolute alcohol. They were then 
clarified in clove-oil, and mounted in balsam. Those which were 
stained were carried from 70 per cent. alcohol into Grenacher’s alcoholic 
borax-carmine, washed, afterwards placed in from 90 per cent. to 
100 per cent. alcohol, then removed to clove-oil or balsam. The pre- 
parations mounted without staining show very well the relation of the 
plates to each other, but it is necessary to use a staining fluid to bring out 
the tissues of the organs in the immediate vicinity of the calcareous 
skeleton. Mr. Fewkes, who used chloroform for clarifying purposes in 
his study of Amphiura, finds that clove-oil is to be preferred. 


Investigation of Generative Products of Spongilla.j—Herr K. 
Fiedler has fixed and preserved the pieces of Spongilla, which he ex- 
amined, with absolute alcohol and a mixture of alcohol and sublimate ; 
the latter consisted of one part of cold saturated sublimate solution, one 
part of 70 per cent. alcohol, and one part of distilled water. Kleinen- 
berg’s picric sulphuric acid and Flemming’s chrom-osmium-acetic acid 
mixture were also used with satisfactory results. Pieces were stained 
with Grenacher’s borax-carmine and Schweigger-Seidel’s hydrochloric 
acid and carmine. Smaller pieces were well stained with Béhmer’s 
hematoxylin and with picrocarmine. Imbedding was generally effected 
in paraffin, rarely in celloidin. The thickness of the sections varied 
between 1/50 and 1/160 mm. Lyons blue was found to be especially 
useful in staining sections, for on being washed with ammoniacal alcohol 
the blue coloration was limited to the yolk-granules of the egg, and this 
showed up the red-stained nuclear structures. Sections of tissues pre- 
served in picro-sulphuric acid showed, when stained with hematoxylin 
a double coloration, the nuclei being of a bluish-violet and the vitelline 
constituents of a yellowish or feebly red tone. 


New Method for Marking Root-hairs and for Hardening and 
Staining Plant-cells.{—In his work on ‘ The Relations between Func- 


* Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Camb. U.S.A., xvii. (1888) pp. 3-4. 

+ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Zool., xlvii. (1888) pp. 86-8 

ft ‘Ueber die Beziehungen zwischen Function und Lage des Zellk i 
Pflanzen,’ 8vo, Jena, 1887, 135 pp. (2 pls.). 2 Cee ben dem 


1046 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


tion and Position of the Cell-nucleus in Plants’ Dr. G. Haberlandt gives 
the following new methods. 

In order to control the growth of the root-hairs and to be able to 
measure their increase (it not being possible to mark these forms arti- 
ficially), the germling was placed in the moist chamber on a slide, and 
then fine dry rice-starch was blown against the root-hairs and thereupon 
the cover-glass imposed. The starch-granules adhere to the sticky 
surface of the hairs and form marks placed at irregular intervals. The 
measurements were made under a low power by means of an ocular 
micrometer. The experiments frequently fail because the tender sensi- 
tive hairs very frequently stop growing after they have been marked. 
Successes, however, were scored with Cucurbita Pepo, Pisum sativum, 
Polygonum Fagopyrum, Helianthus annuus. 

For studying the cell-nucleus, Vaucheria filaments were cut in two, 
and 20-30 minutes afterwards placed in a 1 per cent. chromic acid solu- 
tion and the nuclei eventually stained with picrocarmine. For examining 
the plasma-balls ejected by the wounded Vaucheria the plants were not 
cut up in water, but in a 5-10 per cent. sugar solution, and cultivated 
for three to seven days either in porcelain capsules or in hanging 
drops. 

Tt may also be mentioned that the author repeatedly obtained good 
results with picrocarmine, dilute methyl-green and acetic acid, and with 
borax-carmine. Excellent preparations showing the lacteal vessels were 
obtained by laying pieces of the epidermis in borax-carmine for several 
to twenty-four hours, and after treating with hydrochloric acid-alcohol 
examining in glycerin. The nuclei of Saprolegnia were brought out by 
hardening in 1 per cent. chromic acid, carefully washing, and staining 
with hematoxylin. Spores of Pertusaria were first treated with alcohol 
and ether to remove the oil in the nuclei, then stained with picrocarmine 
or logwood. 


Preparation of Fresh-water Algez.*—Dr. L. Klein proposes a 
modification of the ordinary method of preparing fresh-water alge for 
microscopic examination. The use of any fluids, such as glycerin or 
potassium acetate, he has almost entirely abandoned, because of the time 
required in their preparation to secure their permanency, and the danger 
of injury to the cover-glasses in cleaning them. In those cases where a 
fluid is necessary, as when a single minute object lies in water beneath 
the cover-glass, he places a drop of 1 per cent. superosmic acid on the 
margin of the cover-glasses, and, after ten or twelve minutes, potassium 
acetate; this is blown under the cover-glass by means of a very fine 
glass tube. The hardening is effected by superosmic acid, and the 
closing by Canada balsam. 

The solid substance preferred by Dr. Klein is Kaiser’s glycerin-jelly,f 
viz. 1 part of very fine gelatin diluted with six parts of distilled water for 
two hours, and 7 parts by weight of chemically pure glycerin then added. 
To 100 gr. of this mixture 1 gr. of concentrated carbolic acid is added, 
and the whole warmed for ten minutes. In order to prevent shrivelling 
up the alge must be hardened in superosmic acid before placing in the 
glycerin-gelatin. 

For minute, and especially for unicellular alge, Dr. Klein uses not 


* Hedwigia, xxvii. (1888) pp. 121-6, + See this Journal, 1887, p. 694. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1047 


the fluid but vapour of superosmic acid, the alga to be hardened being 
placed in a hanging drop on a glass slide over the mouth of the flask 
containing the osmic acid. But this plan answers only when the object 
to be preserved occurs in the drop in considerable quantities. When it 
is solitary, or present only in very small numbers, the water in which it 
is contained must be partially evaporated in a watch-glass, a watch-glass 
containing from 5-10 drops of osmic acid being also placed in the 
evaporating-chamber ; after the drops of the fluid have been partially 
evaporated dilute glycerin is added. 

Glycerin-jelly is especially valuable as an imbedding material for 
such objects as are difficult to inclose in glycerin in consequence of their 
slipperiness. 

Simple Method for Fixing Cover-glass Preparations.*—Dr. M. 
Nikiforow fixes fluids, e.g. blood, on cover-glasses by immersing them 
for one or two hours in a mixture of ether and absolute aleohol. The 
cover~glass is then taken out, and having been dried in the air, is 
stained by Ehrlich’s method. 

The process may also be used when micro-organisms are to be 
stained. 


Kuen, L.—BSeitrage zur Technik der Mikroskopischen Dauerpraparate. (Contri- 
butions to the technique of microscopical permanent preparations.) 
MT. Bot. Vereins Freiburg, 1888, Nos. 49 and 50, 7 pp. 
Lame, D. 8.—Notes on the Technique of Frozen Anatomical Sections. 
Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., 1X. (1888) p. 205. 


(3) Cutting, including Imbedding. 


Cathcart Improved Microtome.—This instrument (fig. 182) differs 
from the original Cathcart Microtome in the following points :—(1) The 
principal screw is of larger diameter than in the old form, and has a head 
of considerably greater size; (2) The wooden frame is made with a pro- 
jecting part, by means of which the instrument may be clamped on both 
sides, and two clamps are supplied; (3) The freezing-plate is made of 
circular shape, is supported on three pillars, and is provided with a 
ledge to prevent the ether getting to the upper side of the plate; (4) 
The construction of the instrument has been so modified that it may 
be used both for specimens frozen in gum and those imbedded in 
parafiin or celloidin. 

The increased size of the screw gives a more steady movement than 
was possessed by the older and smaller microtome, while the greater 
circumference of the screw-head enables the operator to impart a finer 
movement to the screw. The relation between the pitch of the screw 
and the circumference of its head is such, that if the edge be moved 
forward a quarter of an inch, an object will be raised one-thousandth 
of an inch; and if it be moved an eighth of an inch, the object will be 
raised the two-thousandth of an inch. - 

It is found that, when the instrument is clamped at both Sides, less 
pressure need be applied at either side; and the tendency which the 
instrument had to turn upon the point of clamping, as on a Pivot, is quite 
done away with. 

In the original instrument, the plate was supported on two pillars 
in order that as little heat as possible might be conveyed to the freezing- 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss, Mikr., v. (1888) p. 340. 


1048 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


plate from the body of the instrument. In the new instrument, the 
size of the three supporting pillars and screws is so much reduced that 


Fig. 182. 


the conducting surface is not greater than in the old microtome. The 
arrangement for cutting imbedded sections consists of a tube (fig. 183) 
which fits the principal well of the microtome, and within which fits a 


Fic. 183. 


hinged part similar to an ordinary vice. With 
the instrument are provided the means of pre- 
paring paraffin blocks for imbedding sections. 

When it is intended to use the micro- 
tome for imbedding, the ether-spray, spray- 
bellows, and ether-bottle should be re- 
moved, and the freezing-tube, having been 
raised as far as possible by means of the 
principal screw, should then be withdrawn 
from the well. The imbedding-tube is now 
placed in the well, and, having been pushed 
down until it rests upon the point of the 


large screw, it may be lowered to a convenient height by working the 


large screw backwards. 


The instrument is made by Mr. A. Frazer, of Edinburgh. 


Thin Sections.—In opposition to the note of the Editors of the 
‘ Microscope’ (ante, p. 671), Dr. J. E. Reeves contends* that “ the proper 


* The Microscope, viii. (1888) pp. 252-5. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1049 


thickness of the section is a matter to be wholly determined by the 
particular character of the tissue or object to be examined and studied. 
Of course, no one having any correct knowledge of tissue structure 
would think of attempting to cut a section of bone, or of the skin of the 
heel, to the same measure of thinness that would be necessary to demon- 
strate bacilli in a section of tuberculous lung.” 

“Tf coarse details only are required, then a thick section properly 
cleared, and a low-power objective, will answer the purpose in view; but 
when the finest possible details of a histological or pathological specimen 
are sought by the aid of a high-power objective, a section just thin enough 
to hold the tissue elements together will not be too thin—the thinner the 
better—provided the section has been handled from beginning to end in 
the highest style of the beautiful art. In other words, a very thin, 
evenly-cut section—the 1/3000 in.—is of no more use or value than a 
section the 1/50 in. thick, if it—the thinner section—has not been 
perfectly cleared up and well mounted.” 

In reply * to Dr. Reeves’s criticism, the editors “ still insist that our 
sections must have a thickness that will include as many layers as can 
be clearly studied; for the details of a specimen cannot be observed 
unless it is thick enough to show the arrangement of its parts. As for 
studying the finest possible details, such as the structure of or changes 
in individual cells, no section, however thin, will serve the purpose. 
Other methods must then be employed.” 


Baurzar, G., and E. ZIMMERMANN.—Mikrotom mit festem Messer und selbst- 
thatigen Vorschub des Objekts. (Microtome with fixed knife and automatic 
movement of the object.) 

German Patent, 12th March, 1888, No. 45,504. 

CampsBetu, D. H.—Paraffin-Hinbettungmethode fiir pflanzliche Objecte. (Paraf- 
fin imbedding methods for vegetable objects.) 

Naturwiss. Wochenschr., II. (1888) p. 61. 


(4) Staining and Injecting. 


Methyl-green for observing the Chemical Reaction and Death 
of Cells.t—Prof. A. Mosso used for his researches on the reaction between 
methyl-green and blood- or pus-corpuscles, a watery 1 per cent. solution 
of sodium chloride in which 0-2 per cent of methyl-green was dissolved. 
To observe the action of this solution on the red corpuscles it is only 
necessary to prick the finger, and touch a drop of the solution placed on a 
slide with the blood. This preliminary examination, made with an 
apochromatic 20 mm., aperture 1°30, oculars 4 and 12, was supple- 
mented by observations in the moist chamber at periods of 6 and 24 
hours. The result of these experiments showed that if cells were 
quite healthy or in their proper working condition they did not become 
stained, but if this condition became weakened they stained violet, 
then bluish-green, and finally green. Dead cells became coloured 
green at once. 

The solution was also noted to have a toxic action indicated by 
the death of the cells, and their consequent staining, as their enfeeblement 
began and death took place. The cells used for the examination 
were red and white corpuscles of the blood of fishes, frogs, &c., cilia 


* The Microscope, viii. (1888) p. 248. 
+ Arch. Ital. Biol., x. (1888) pp. 29-39. 


1050 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


from the branchiw of Unio and Anodonta, and spermatozoa. To the 
contractile protoplasm of vegetable cells methyl-green is also toxic 
(hairs from Tradescantia virginica, and spores of Ulva lactuca, a 
marine alga). 

The author further found that methyl-green prevents the coagulation 
of blood. A solution of 0-5 per cent. methyl-green in 0:75 per cent. 
sodium chloride retards coagulation even in the proportion of 2 ccm. to 
40 cem. of blood, and if the amount be increased to 8 or 4 ccm. to 40 ccm. 
coagulation does not take place. 

With regard to the chemical explanation of some of the foregoing 
facts, it was found that if the alkalinity of the cells be considerable, the 
methyl-green is destroyed, and consequently the violet staining of the 
cells is an index of diminished alkalinity. 


Nuclear Carmine Stain.*—Dr. M. Nikiforow recommends the follow- 
ing method for making a carmine solution, which he says will keep for 
years, and while giving excellent results with nuclei in sections, may also 
be used for staining tissue en masse. Three parts of carmine, five parts 
of borax, and 100 parts of water are boiled together ina porcelain vessel. 
Ammonia is then added until the carmine has dissolved, the solution 
assuming a cherry-red colour. To this solution dilute acetic acid is 
added very carefully until the cherry-red colour has disappeared, 
Prepared in this way carmine is a thick, deeply stained (sic), odourless 
fluid, which will keep for a long time if a little carbolic acid be added 
to prevent the formation of fungi. Sections are stained in about 15 
minutes, but may be left in the solution for 24 hours without over 
staining. If required for staining en masse the pieces must be left in 
the solution for several days, and when removed carefully washed. 
This carmine solution is especially suitable for preparations fixed in 
alcohol or osmic acid, or the chromic acid salts if not used for longer 
than two weeks. 


Staining Karyokinetic Figures.;—Dr. L. Resegotti who, in conjune- 
tion with Prof. Martinotti, had previously shown that the mitoses of the 
nucleus may be demonstrated very well by means of safranin and 
chromic acid (see this Journal, 1888, p. 516), has recently extended his 
experiments to other anilin pigments and also to certain trade varieties 
of safranin. These varieties of safranin not only differ in colour and in 
specific weight, but also in solubility; for example, they are divided by 
the author into three classes, those which are soluble in spirit, those 
which are soluble in water, and those which are best dissolved by a 
mixture of spirit and water. In all 14 samples of safranin were 
examined, and all these gave positive results, but some varieties were 
better for the end in view than others. 

Another difference noted is the resistance to decoloration by the 
chromic acid. This also varied with the different samples, but there is 
no note as to relation between the decoloration and solubility in water 
or spirit. Other anilin dyes which gave positive results were the 
hydrochlorate and acetate of fuchsin, dahlia, methyl-violet, gentian- 
violet, rubin, victoria blue, magenta red. 

The author also made some experiments to see if the karyokinetic 
figures would not stain by substitution, but the only favourable results 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 337-8. + Ibid., pp. 320-4. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1051 


he seems to have had came from a combination of methyl-violet 
or dahlia, with eosin or acid fuchsin. The sections hardened in 
absolute alcohol are stained with an aqueous or weak spirituous solution 
of methyl-violet for five minutes, they are then transferred to a very 
dilute solution of eosin in spirit, wherein they remain for one or two 
minutes. After this they are again treated with spirit and mounted in 
the usual way. 


Safranin as a Stain for the Central Nervous System.*—Ii has already 
been pointed out, says Dr. M. Nikiforow, that safranin stains certain 
parts of the central nervous system in a characteristic way when the 
tissue has been hardened in chromic acid salts. Thus the medullary 
sheath of the fibre (erythrophilous substance) stains rose, while the 
nuclei of the nerves, glia cells, and blood-vessels assume a violet hue. 
This property of safranin is all the more important, because in disease, 
and even in the earlier stages thereof, the characteristic coloration is 
lost. The method of the author for manipulating the tissue in order to 
obtain a satisfactory result, as far as differentiation is concerned, is as 
follows :—The brain or cord is hardened in chromic acid salts (Miiller’s 
fluid or bichromate of ammonium). The chromic acid salts are not to 
be washed off with water, and the sections are to be transferred directly 
from spirit to the concentrated aqueous solution of safranin. The 
anilin water solution or a 5 per cent. carbolic acid solution of this dye 
may be used. It is advised to over-stain the sections or to leave them 
in the staining solution for 24 hours. After this the sections are re- 
moved to spirit, where the excess of stain is washed off. As soon asthe 
grey substance begins to appear, and can_be distinguished from the 
white matter, the section is lifted out and placed in a solution of a 
metallic salt, chloride of gold, or chloride of platinum, the strength of 
which is 1: 500 and 1:1000. When a trace of violet begins to show in 
the grey substance the section is at once placed in water and thoroughly 
washed. After this it is placed in alcohol until the rose-violet of the 
grey substance is clearly distinguishable from the red of the rest of the 
tissue. It is next cleared up in oil of cloves, and the latter replaced by 
‘xylol, and finally the specimens mounted in balsam. 


Combining Weigert’s Hematoxylin-copper Stain for Nerve-fibre 
with the use of the freezing Microtome.t—Prof. D. J. Hamilton states 
that sections of brain of any size can be cut with the freezing microtome 
and stained to perfection with the copper and hematoxylin if the 
following method be adopted. 

The brain should be hardened in Miiller’s fluid, the longer the better 
those which have lain years in the fluid being best to work on. 
Human brain requires three to four months, and that of a small animal 
three to four weeks. When thoroughly hardened it is cut into perpen- 
dicular transverse slices, about half an inch thick, and these are allowed 
to lie in Miiller’s fluid two or three weeks longer, and may be kept in 
this indefinitely. They are then cut into pieces required to fit the micro- 
tome, and these are placed in ordinary methylated or absolute alcohol 
for three days, the spirit being changed each day. From this they are 
transferred to a mixture of equal parts pure alcohol and ether, in which 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 338-40. 
+ Journ. of Anat. and Physiol., xxi. (1887) pp- 444-9. 


1052 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


they are allowed to lie for forty-eight hours. They are then transferred 
to a thin solution of celloidin in equal parts of ether and absolute 
aleohol. Collodion being cheaper than celloidin, and answering the same 
purpose, is preferable. In this solution the piece of tissue remains for 
at least three days, and is afterwards removed to a paper capsule filled 
with celloidin solution, and allowed to stand until a film forms on the 
surface. The mass is then consolidated by immersion for twenty-four hours 
in weak spirit, and the latter removed, in order that it may be sectioned 
in a freezing microtome, by immersion for 24 to 48 hours in Erlicki’s 
fluid (bichromate of potash 5; copper sulphate 1; water 200). 

The next step is to impregnate it with the last of the three following 
mixtures (C.):— 

A. Syrup (crystallized sugar 28:5 grm. to 31 ecm. water), 3 ccm.; 
mucilage (gum acacia, 57 grm. to 310 ccm. water), 5 ccm. ; water, 9 ccm. 

B. Solution A., 2 parts; syrup as above, 1 part. 

C. Cupric sulphate, 1 grm.; potassii bichrom., 5 grm.; solution B, 
200 ccm. 

Itis kept in an air-tight bottle filled with this mixture for at least 
three days at a temperature of 100°F. The microtome used by the 
author is a Rutherford’s freezer of large size, and the knife an ordinary 
planing iron, such as is used by carpenters, and set in a wooden handle. 
Before placing the piece of tissue in the well it should be wiped, in order 
to remove the liquid in which it has been soaked. A quantity of 
mucilage, only sufficient to cause the piece to adhere, is then poured into 
the well, and in this the piece of tissue itself. The ice and salt in the 
box must be frequently renewed in order to keep the temperature as low 
as possible, and if the sections should adhere to the knife the mass is not 
sufficiently frozen or the knife has become too warm. To keep the planing 
iron cool it must be plunged in the freezing mixture after every four or 
five sections. When cut, the sections are removed at once to a dish filled 
with Erlicki’s fluid, in order to dissolve any mucilage that may be 
adhering to it. No harm results if left herein for several days. The 
section is next transferred to a dish filled with weak spirit to remove the 
Erlicki’s fluid. The spirit is to be changed once. A slide is now 
covered with a thin film of collodion, in which the section is placed, in 
the position it is intended to occupy, and when it has partially dried the 
upper surface is covered with collodion. When thus fixed to the slide it 
is transferred to absolute alcohol. If absolute or very strong alcohol be 
not used the collodion may strip off the slide. After it has lain for a 
few minutes in spirit it is ready for staining with Weigert’s hematoxylin 
(hematoxylin 1, absolute alcohol 10, carbonate of lithia 1, distilled 
water 90 parts). The staining may be effected by leaving the prepara- 
tion in a warm chamber at a body temperature for twelve hours or longer, 
but a quarter of an hour suffices to stain the fibres, even without the aid 
of the warm chamber, if the brain has been hardened long enough and 
the solution of hematoxylin of proper quality. 

When the section and surrounding collodion are thoroughly blackened, 
the slide is washed in a running stream of tap water. The slide is then 
transferred to the ferridcyanide and borax decolorizer (borax 2, ferrid- 
cyanide of potassium 23, water 100 parts), wherein it remains until all 
superfluous stain has been removed from the grey matter. When 
thoroughly decolorized, the slide, with the collodion still adhering, is 
transferred to running water for twenty-four hours, in order to thoroughly 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1053 


remove all trace of the decolorizer, the incomplete removal of which 
causes the stain to fade sooner or later. } 

The edges of the collodion are next clipped off close to the preparation 
and the slide dehydrated in strong spirit. It is then immersed in oil of 
cloves, wherein it is almost instantaneously clarified. This done, the 
surface is washed with xylol, and finally mounted in a mixture of gum- 
dammar and gum mastic dissolved in xylol, and placed in a warm 
chamber for twenty-four hours. 


Staining of Elastic Fibres with Chromic Acid and Safranin.*— 
Dr. L. Ferria, who has been examining various examples of safranin, 18 
in all, found that these differed in colour, specific gravity, in their solu- 
bility in water and spirit, and in their behaviour with chromic acid. 

When an aqueous solution of chromic acid is added to an aqueous 
solution of safranin a precipitate is thrown down. This precipitate may 
vary from an abundant red, almost black, to a scanty red or yellowish 
red, and it is the samples of the latter which are least satisfactory in 
staining the elasiic fibres. These latter were certified by their makers 
to be the purer varieties, and the author notes also that those varieties 
which stained elastic tissues well were less suitable for staining nuclei 
or showing the nuclear mitosis. 

The author also found that preparations which had been hardened in 
Spirit were stained very well if the sections were left for about five hours 
in a watery solution of safranin (1:1000) at a temperature of about 387°, 
and then, having been washed, were placed in the safranin solution. If 
the specimen should be overstained so that the section is of a diffuse 
red colour, it should be treated for a short time with a very dilute 
_alcoholic solution of caustic potash and then left for 24 hours in 
absolute alcohol. Only the nuclei of the tissue are then stained red, and 
contrast well with the blackness of the elastic fibres. 

Clarifying in bergamot oil and mounting in dammar is said to aid 
the clearness of the picture. 


Congo-red as a Reagent for Cellulose.;—Dr. EH. Heinricher in 
examining the behaviour of Congo-red towards the thickenings in cell- 
walls which occur as reserve matter in the cotyledons of Impatiens Bal- 
samina and other varieties of Impatiens, found that these thickenings were 
stained red. As another series of reactions negatived the cellulose nature 
of these thickenings, the author proceeded to examine the behaviour of 
this pigment towards the mucous element of plants. The general result 
was that Congo-red stains not only cellulose -nd amyloid matter, but 
also mucus of most of the plants examined. 

Hence, the author concludes that Congo-red is not to be considered 
as a specific reagent for cellulose, and, if used for distinguishing it, 
great care must be taken to guard against errors. ; 


Simple and rapid Staining of the Tubercle Bacillus.{—Mr. H. P. 
Loomis recommends Ziehl’s solution for staining the tubercle bacillus, 
and Fraenkel’s methylen-blue solution as a contrast stain. This method 
has the merit of being simple and rapid and dispensing with the use of 
acids. 

* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 341-3. 


t Ibid., pp. 343-6. 
t Medical Record, xxxiii. (1888) p. 631. 


1888. 4B 


1054 SUMMARY OF OURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Staining the Spirochete of Relapsing Fever.*—M. N. Nikiforow 
gives the following modification of his method of staining this micro- 
organism. 

Instead of placing the drop of blood between two cover-glasses and 
then drawing them asunder, the author now takes a cover-glass between 
two fingers and touches the summit of a drop of blood with it, and then 
with the edge of a second cover-glass, held at an angle of 45° to the first, 
touches the blood, so that a thin layer becomes spread out on the first 
cover-glass. When dry the cover-glass is placed in a capsule of absolute 
alcohol, to which ether has been added. Herein the cover-glass remains 
from several hours to one day. When taken out, the preparations are 
stained with the ordinary watery anilin solution. 

If the red corpuscles are not to be stained as well, the preparation 
must, before staining, be placed in 1 per cent. acetic acid. 


Pyridin in Histological Technique.t—M. A. de Souza finds that, as 
pyridin coagulates albuminates with a neutral reaction, it can be used 
as a hardening agent. From the fact that it is miscible with oils and 
fats as with water, it possesses certain advantages where tissues are rich 
in such substances. 

Hardening is effected in an incubator in about eight days, and with 
small animals in even a shorter time. The tissues are at once hardened, 
dehydrated, and cleared up, and can be easily sectioned and stained, as 
pyridin easily dissolves anilin dyes. The sections may be mounted in 
balsam, or, after four days’ hardening, transferred to water without 
cockling. In the latter case they take up hematoxylin and picro- 
carmine very well. 

The author obtained fair results by hardening skin in pyridin; he 
was less successful with liver, but the reagent seems suitable for 
pursuing the appearances in karyokinesis. ‘The brain, however, gave the 
best results, the hardening being rapid and the cells of the grey matter 
staining deeply. 

The author also employed this reagent for staining tubercle bacilli in 
sputum. The bacilli were rapidly stained without warming in the 
following way. A saturated solution of the dye (methyl-violet, fuchsin, 
or rubin) is made in pure pyridin. With this solution the preparation 
is moistened for 40-60 seconds; it is then decolorized in 30 per cent. 
nitric acid, and after being contrast-stained with vesuvin, eosin, or 
methylen-blue, also dissolved in pyridin, mounted in balsam. The method 
is more suitable for cover-glass preparations than for sections, although 
decent preparations can be obtained from the latter by soaking them in 
dilute solution of ammonia. * 

If the advantages of pyridin are as stated by the author, there is no 
doubt it will be extensively employed. 


Modification of Garbini’s Double Stain with Anilin-blue and 
Safranin.j—-Dr. A. Garbini now uses carbonate of lithium as a de- 
colorizer and his method is now modified and improved as follows:— 
Immerse the sections in 1 per cent. solution of anilin-blue for 2 to 4 
minutes. Wash in distilled water; decolorize in a1 per cent. solution 
of lithium carbonate. Then bring back the colour in a 0°5 per cent. 


* Wratsch, 1887, p. 183 (Russian). Cf. Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) 
pp. 107-8. t+ Comptes Rendus Soe. Biol., iy. (1887) pp. 622-3. 
t Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) p. 170-1. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1055 


hydrochloric acid. Wash carefully ; immerse in safranin for 10 to 20 
minutes, and if possible in the warm. Dehydrate in methylated spirit, and 
then decolorize in a mixture of oil of cloves (2 parts) and cedar oil 
1 part. Then immerse in xylol until the right hue is attained. (See this 
Journal, 1886, p. 899.) 

Congo-red as a Reagent for Free Acid:*—Herr C. Wurster has 
shown by experiment that Congo-red, when used for organic substances, is 
not a certain test of freeacid. In the presence of ammonia it forms with 
this a compound which is not decomposed by organic acids at all and not 
readily by inorganic acids (carbonic, acetic, hydrochloric, sulphuric, &e.). 
The blue-violet colour which shows the presence of free acids, does not 
occur in the presence of ammonia, when organic acids are added, or on 
addition of inorganic acids when all the ammonia has been combined 
with the free organic acid. 

Since in animal chemistry, ammonia in many cases can scarcely be 
excluded, the yellow-red coloration of Congo-red may remain persistent 
in spite of the presence of relatively large quantities of acid. 

Absorption of Anilin Pigments by living Animal Cells.;—The 
results of the experiments made by Dr. G. Martinotti on the absorption 
of anilin dyes by animal cells differ in some particulars from those of 
Pfeffer, &c., who experimented in the same direction. It is found that 
living animal or vegetable cells, if made to live in a medium coloured 
with these pigments, are variously affected ; that is, that certain of these 
dyes are more poisonous than others, a result which is reckoned by the 
more or less rapid staining of the nucleus ; for when the nucleus becomes 
visible by being stained, this indicates that the cell isdying or dead. If, 
however, a quantity of pigment short of being poisonous be used, the 
protoplasm of the cell becomes stained. But according to the author, 
this quantity is, certainly for certain dyes such as methyl-violet, methyl- 
green, é&c., infinitesimal, and he only found two, Bismarck-brown and 
methylen-blue, to give satisfactory results. 

If tadpoles be placed in a very dilute solution of Bismarck-brown they 
take on a brownish-yellow colour in 24 hours, while the water has lost all 
its colour. And if the solution be renewed from day to day, they may 
finally be made to assume a yellowish-black hue characteristic of the dye. 
Again, if they be placed in pure water, all the absorbed dye may be 
gradually removed. 

Microscopical examination showed that certain kinds of cells only 
possessed the power of selecting the pigment. These were the pigmented 
cells of the skin within which the dye collected in such a way as to com- 
pletely conceal their shape. Other cells which were red stained were the 
branched connective tissue cells lying in the subcutaneous stratum. 
Certain other polygonal epithelioid cells were found to contain large - 
well-stained granules in their protoplasm. In muscular fibre cells, in the 
walls of blood-vessels, its coloured granules were occasionally seen. 

The action of methylen-blue was similar, but less active and less 
pronounced. While the animal was alive the author did not find that 
the axis-cylinder was stained, as Ehrlich did. With methylen-blue 
certain granules normally found in the red corpuscles assumed a 
deep blue colour. 

With regard to the absorption of these dyes during cell-prolifera- 

* Centralbl. f. Physiol., 1887, p. 240. 
¥ Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 305-13. 
4Bp2 


1056 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


tion and its bearing on karyokinesis, the author found that it did 
not seem to have any direct relation to the nuclear mitosis. In order 
to fix the methylen-blue in the tissues an iodized solution of iodide 
of potash, or picrocarmine, or picrocarminate of ammonia, was used, 
the preparations being afterwards mounted in glycerin. This method 
was found to be inconvenient. 

If Bismarck-brown be used, the tadpoles were immersed alive in a 
0-2 per cent. solution of chromic acid. This fixed the tissues without 
affecting the Bismarck-brown. The tissues were then washed, and 
afterwards stained with safranin. In using spirit it is necessary to 
be cautious, as it rapidly absorbs the dye. 


Theory of Microscopical Staining.*—Dr. H. Griesbach says that the 
more he considers the subject of microscopical staining the more he is 
convinced that it is based on chemical combinations taking place between 
the tissues and the pigments, both of which must, for various reasons, 
have very different chemical compositions at different times. This is 
easily obvious from certain examples, say, the composition of the infantile 
and adult brain. This difference in chemical composition is further 
augmented by the various reagents used for fixing the tissues, and also 
complicated by the reaction and composition of the dye itself. And so on. 


Starch Injection-mass.}—Prof. 8. H. Gage prepares a cold-flowing 
coarse injection-mass, the principle of which was first introduced by 
Ad. Pansch, from starch. This mass may be forced up nearly to the 
capillaries, rapidly hardens after injection, leaves the vessels flexible, 
and is suitable for permanent dry or alcoholic preparations, 

Mass for ordinary injection : dry (laundry) starch, 100 ccm. ; water or 
21 per cent. aqueous solution of chloral hydrate, 100 cem. ; 95 per cent, 
alcohol, 25 ccm. ; colour mixture, 25cem. When thoroughly mixed filter 
through two or three thicknesses of cambric. To prevent the starch 
from settling, the cloth should be tilted from side to side or the mass 
stirred during filtration. 

The colour mixture : dry colour (e.g. Berlin blue), 100 cem. ; glycerin, 
100 cem.; 95 per cent. alcohol, 100 cem, Mix wellina mortar and keep 
in stoppered bottle. If permanent preparations are not desired, anilin 
dyes may be used. 

Special injection-mass for brains, &c.: corn starch, 100 cem.; 5 per 
cent, aqueous solution of chloral hydrate, 50 cem.; 95 per cent. alcohol, 
75 cem. ; colour mixture, 25 cem. Lither of the masses may be kept in 
large quantities in wide-mouthed bottles, but must be well stirred before 
using. If it be desired to inject very fine vessels, a preliminary injection 
should be made by using the stock mass diluted with an equal volume 
of water or of chloral solution. In any case it is advisable to make the 
injection as quickly as is possible. 


AcHARD, C.—Sur l’emploi de la teinture d’orcanette dans la technique histologique. 
(On the employment of a tincture of orcanet in histological technique.) 

Arch. de Physiol., 1X. (1887) pp. 164-8. 

Erp6s, J.—Eine Methode zur Injection der Blutgefasse mit kaltfliissiger Masse. 
(A method for the injection of the blood-vessels with a cold fluid mass.) 

Anat. Anzeig., III. (1888) p. 261. 

Kertesz, A.—Die Anilinfarbstoffe. Eigenschaften, Anwendung, Reactionen. 

(The Anilin stains. Properties, use, reactions.) 8vo, Braunschweig, 1888. 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 314-19. 
+ Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., ix. (1888) pp. 195-6. 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETO. 1057 


KowALEwsky, N.—Ueber die Wirkung von Methylenblau auf die Saugethiere. 
(On the action of methyl-blue on mammals.) Centralbl. Med. Wiss., 1888, p. 209. 
LETULLE.—Note sur un procédé de coloration stable de la matiére amyloide au 
moyen de l’éosine et de la potasse caustique. (Note on a process of stable 


staining of the amyloid matter by means of eosin and caustic potasb.) 
Bull. Soc. Anat. Paris, 11. (1888) p. 85. 


REDFERN, J. J.—The Pal-Exner Method of Staining Sections of the Central 
Nervous System. Brit. Med. Journ., 1888, p. 642. 


(5) Mounting, including Slides, Preservative Fluids, &c. 


Mounting of specimens to be examined with homogeneous-immersion 
lenses.*—Dr. A. Garbini adopts the following device for preventing any 
damage to the specimen from the resin or balsam being acted on by 
cedar oil or other solvents after the examination under homogeneous 
immersion or during the clearing of the cover-glass. The slide when 
mounted is baked for some hours at a temperature of 30° C., until the 
solvent of the resinous medium has been, as far as possible, evaporated. 
When cool the edge of the cover-glass is ringed round with a thinnish 
coating of gum. The material best suited for this purpose is sold under 
the name of Senegaline (Adrien Maurin, Paris). It may be made to 
take any colour if desired. By this device a cover-glass can be cleaned 
with xylol or benzol with the greatest ease. 

Preparing Styrax Balsam.j—Dr. Th. Marsson, who recommends 
styrax for mounting microscopical specimens, prepares it in the following 
way :—The grey commercial styrax is shaken up every day several times 
for eight days with an equal quantity of chloroform until two layers 
have separated out, the lower one of which contains the styrax. The 
contents of the bottle are then filtered, the filter being moistened with 
chloroform, and the clear brown styrax solution evaporated to the con- 
sistence of a thin syrup. This syrupy mass is then placed in a bottle, 
of which it occupies not more than 1/6 of the space, and petroleum- 
ether is added little by little. A first a clear brown fluid is formed, but 
after a time a milky clouding shows that the styrax is beginning to 
separate out. The petroleum-ether may now be added in larger 
quantity in order to hasten the precipitation of the balsam, When all 
the balsam is thrown down the clear fluid is poured away, and then the 
styrax balsam is purified from all trace of chloroform or petroleum- 
ether by evaporation in a water-bath, after which the residue forms a 
thick, clear brown, stringy mass, and after exposure to the air dries quite 
hard and can be scratched with a needle. As the styrax balsam in this 
condition is too stiff for manipulation, it is thinned down with asolvent. 
The solvent used by the author is monobromnaphthalin, which has a 
higher refractive index than styrax, and diluted with this a perfectly 
clear solution is formed. It flows very easily under the cover-glass, but 
dries somewhat slowly. 


Herstellung von fliissigem Kitt oder Gummi. (Preparation of fluid Cement or Gum.) 
[For every 500 ce. of the cement or gum dissolve 150 gr. of glue or gelatin, 
12:5 gr. borax, and 6°25 gr. soda, in 750 ce. of water, and keep it for some 
hours below the boiling-point. Let it stand, deecant and concentrate the fluid 
by evaporation. The solution is fluid at ordinary temperatures. ] 
Chem. Zig., 1888, p. 287; Engl. Patent, 1886, Nr. 13,168. 
Smitey, C. W.—Rinnbock’s Slide of Arranged Diatoms, Chirodota wheels, Synapta 
plates, Synapta anchors, &c. 
Amer. Mon. Micr. Journ., IX. (1888) pp. 199-200 Ci pl.). 


* Zeitschr f. Wiss. Mikr., vy. (1888) pp. 171-2. + Ibid., pp. 346-50. 


1058 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


(6) Miscellaneous. 


Garbini’s Closed Water-bath.*—Dr. A. Garbini uses a modification 
of the water-bath described in his ‘Manuale per la tecnica del micro- 
scopio, for the purpose of heating slides on which sections are to be 
stuck by Giesbrecht’s or Mayer’s methods, 

The apparatus (fig. 184) consists of a rectangular box 20 em. long, 
15 em. broad, and 4 em. high, closed hermetically. From the middle of 
the bottom projects the copper bulb a, having a diameter of 8 cm. On 
one side is a small tube 6, with a stop-cock. It connects with a wider tube 
c, into which may be fitted a cork bung, and a glass funnel, for the purpose 
of filling the box. Upon the top of the box, by means of four fluted pillars 


Fie. 184, 


(the two front ones 0:5 cm. high, the two hind ones 4 em. high) and 
three plates of glass fitting into the flutings a compartment is formed. 
This is closed above by a glass lid moving on hinges fixed to the posterior 
columns. From the figure it will be evident that this compartment is not 
quite closed when the lid is down, as there is a narrow aperture in front, 
and a wider one behind. 

Behind the box are two glass tubes 3 em. high, and with a diameter of 
1:5 cm. Into one of these d fits a thermometer, and into the other a 
bent glass tube e, to carry off the steam. 

Loss of water may be prevented by using, instead of the tube e, a 


* Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., v. (1888) pp. 166-8 (1 fig.). 


ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1059 


glass tube 60 cm. high, with a diameter of 2 cm., in which the steam can 
condense, and flow back into the water-bath. 

The quantity of water in the bath is shown by the gauge f. Two of 
the special advantages of this form of water-bath are the prevention of dust, 
and the current of air which carries off the various vapours so that the 
lid always remains bright, and the progress of the preparation may be 
watched. 


New Application of the Plasmolytic Method.*—Herr H. de Vries 
suggests an application of the method of plasmolysis for the determina- 
tion of the molecular weight of a given substance. The calculation of the 
isotonic coefficient of any compound soluble in water, by means of the 
law implied in De Vries’s | method for the analysis of the force of tur- 
gidity, presupposes a knowledge of the molecular weight or equivalent 
of the substance in question. If, therefore, the isotonic coefficient is 
known, it follows from the law that the molecular weight can be ascertained. 
If two substances have the same isotonic coefficients, this must result from 
their solutions containing the same number of molecules in a given quantity 
of water. Application of this law was made in the case of raffinose, a 
sugar of considerable importance in the manufacture of beet-root sugar, 
with a much higher power of rotation than cane-sugar, and affecting 
the estimation of the latter in molasses. 

Three formule have been proposed for raffinose, agreeing in their 
percentage composition, viz. C,,H,.0,, + 3H,0, C,,H»0,, + 5H,0, 
and C,,H,,03. + 10H,O. By the application of the proposed method, 
De Vries found the degree of concentration of raffinose isotonic with 0-1 
molecule of cane-sugar to be 5-957 percent. It follows that the mole- 
cular equivalent of raffinose must be approximately 595-7, which agrees 
very nearly with the second of the above formule. 


New Method for Demonstrating and Counting Bacteria and Fungi 
Spores in the air.{—Dr. R. J. Petri’s method consists in drawing air by 
means of an air-pump through a sand filter. The sand consists of 
particles 0°25-0°5 mm. and must be thoroughly heated. It is then 
made up into the shape of corks with wire gauze. ‘T'wo of these filters, 
each 3 em. long and 1:5-1°8 cm. broad, are inserted in a glass tube 
8-9 cm. long. The two filters touch in the middle of the tube. The 
second filter serves to control the efficiency of the first, and should 
remain quite free from germs, all of which should have been picked up 
by the first. After the filters are fitted in, the ends of the tube are 
plugged with cotton-wool. During an experiment the plugs are removed 
and one end of the tube connected with an aspirator. The air should 
be removed at the rate of about 10 litres in 1 to 2 minutes. The 
rapidity of the air stream in the filter should never exceed 0-7 m. a 
second, The germ-laden sand is then strewn in flat double capsules 
about 9 cm. broad, and then liquid gelatin poured over it so as to form 
a layer, care being taken that the sand is uniformly distributed. As 
the colonies grow they can be counted and examined microscopically. 
For the purposes of examination the author has constructed a special 
enumerator, for information about which the original must be consulted. 
For the purposes for which it is intended, namely, the examination of 


* Bot. Ztg., xlvi. (1888) pp. 393-7. + See this Journal, 1885, p. 84. 
I Zeitscbr. f. Hygiene, iii. (1887) p. 1. 


1060 SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES, ETC. 


bacteria, &c., contained in air, both as to kind and number, the author 
maintains that his method gives better results than any other. 


Investigating the Effect of Remedies by the Microscope.*—A new 
method of research, says Dr. Schneidemiihl, has been proposed by 
Prof. Ellenberger and Dr. Baum, who by means of the Microscope study 
the effect of drugs on organs. The remedies or drugs were administered 
to animals, and these having been killed, their livers were sectioned in 
order to find out if the liver cells showed the regular dark granulation 
of rest, or if on account of increased activity, they showed only faint 
granulation at their periphery. The hepatic activity was found to be 
stimulated by pilocarpin, muscarin, aloes, salicylate of soda, benzoate 
of soda, while atropin, sulphate of magnesia, acetate of lead, hydro- 
chlorate of ammonia, and calomel were inhibitory. 


‘Annales de Micrographie.’—This new monthly journal seems likely 
to prove a useful addition to microscopical literature. It is edited by 
Dr. Miquel, Chief of the Micrographical Service of the Municipal Obser- 
vatory of Montsouris, Paris, assisted by Dr. Fabre-Domergue and M. E. 
de Freudenreich. It is intended to be devoted to Bacteriology, Proto- 
phyta, and Protozoa, and it will contain both original articles and 
abstracts of French and foreign papers. 


BoweERr, F. O.—A Course of Practical Instruction in Botany. Part I. 
(Chap. I. deals with the making of preparations and the adjustment of the Micro- 
scope; Chap. II., practical exercises; Chap. III., Micro-chemical reactions, 
&e. | 2nd ed., 8vo, London, 1888. 
Jaxscu. R. V.—Manuel de diagnostic des maladies internes par les methodes 
bactériologiques, chimiques et microscopiques. ‘Trad. par L. Moulé. (Manual of 
the diagnosis of internal diseases by bacteriological, chemical, and microscopical 
methods. Translated by L. Moule.) 
xix. and 355 pp., 108 figs., 8vo, Paris, 1888. 
Kexuuicort, D. S.—Presidential Address to the American Society of Micro- 
scopists, Columbus, O., 1888. 
(The nature of Protozoa and lessons of these simplest auimals.] 
The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 289-309. 
Kituner, H.—Praktische Anleitung zum mikroskopischen Nachweis der Bakterien 
im thierischen Gewebe. (Practical Guide to the microscopical demonstration of 
Bacteria in animal tissues.) vi. and 44 pp., Svo, Leipzig, 1888. 
Latuam, V. A.—The Microscope and how to use it. 
(XV. Practical hints on histology. Special methods for examination of the 
spinal cord, brain, &e. Continued.) 
Journ. of Microscopy, I. (1888) pp. 249-54. 
Manton, W. P.—Rudiments of Practical Embryology. Continued. 
The Microscope, VIII. (1888) pp. 278-9. 
Microscopic Manipulation. Scientific News, IL. (1888) pp. 512-3. 
MiqveEL, P.—Des procédés usités pour le dosage des bacteries atmosphériques. 
(The methods used for determining the percentage of atmospheric bacteria.) 
Ann, Instit. Pasteur, 1888, pp. 364-73. 
WueELPLEY, H. M.—Microscopical Examination of Drugs. 
Amer, Mon, Mier. Journ., TX. (1888) pp. 203-5. 
WorTHSscHALL, E.—Ueber die mikrochemischen Reactionen des Solanin. (On the 
micro-chemical reactions of Solanin.) 
Zeitschr. f. Wiss. Mikr., V. (1888) pp. 19-38, 182-95. 


* Zeitschr. f. Naturwiss., ]xi. (1888) pp. 212-3. 


( 1061 ) 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 


Meetine or 10TH Octoper, 1888, at Kine’s Cottzar, Stranp, W.C. 
Dr. C. T. Hupson, M.A., LL.D., Prestpent, in tar Cua. 


The Minutes of the meeting of 13th June last were read and con- 
firmed, and were signed by the President. 


The List of Donations (exclusive of exchanges and reprints) received 
since the last meeting was submitted, and the thanks of the Society were 
given to the donors. 


From 
Sherborn, C. D., A Bibliography of the Foraminifera, Recent and 
Fossil, from 1565-1888. vi. and 152 pp. (8vo, London, 1888) Lhe Author. 
Packard, A. S8., Entomology for Beginners. xvi. and 367 pp., 273 
figs. (8vo, New York, 1888) Sg icdberae, peck Ws: 


23 


The President said he had the melancholy duty to perform of 
announcing to the Society the death of one of their distinguished 
Honorary Fellows, which had taken place since they last met: they 
would know that he referred to the late Mr. Philip Henry Gosse. To 
himself the loss had been a very sad one, associated as he had been so 
intimately with that gentleman during their joint production of the work 
on the ‘ Rotifera.’ He felt that it was unnecessary to say anything 
there as to his scientific attainments, or the value of the work which he 
had aceomplished ; his books and his drawings were familiar to micro- 
scopists wherever such were found. Those who had the advantage of his 
personal acquaintance could speak of him as a man who was absolutely 
free from the slightest spice of scientific jealousy, and who was always 
ready to place his stores of knowledge at the disposal of others. He was 
quite a stranger to him when they first met, and yet he placed the whole 
of his beautiful drawings in his hands with the freest permission to make 
full use of them. Fortunately, as they were aware, he was able to induce 
Mr. Gosse to join with him in the work of publication. He continued 
as vigorously at work up to the last as he had been at the time when 
he first met him, and a series of 60 to 70 large coloured drawings of new 
species which had recently been sent by his son, showed that up to 
within six months of his death, his hand and eye were as perfect as they 
were previously. It was proposed by the Council to fill up the vacancy 
thus occurring in their list of Honorary Fellows by the election of Prof. 
G. J. Allman, F.R.5., so well known by his work on the Polyzoa and 
Hydroids. 


Lord Edward Churchill exhibited and described a form of photo- 
micrographic apparatus, which had been made for him by Mr. Swift, and 
which he thought possessed some advantages. The objective was screwed 
into the end of the camera itself, and a movable stage with condenser 
&e., worked in front of it, instead of working with these parts fitted to 
the body of a Microscope, with which he had found a difficulty both in 
focusing and in getting the image straight. A means was provided for 
chromatic adjustment, and for fine-adjustment, which could be easily 


1062 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 


worked from the opposite end, an ordinary eye-piece being used for the 
purpose of focusing. 

Mr. Pringle said that the camera upon the table was exceedingly 
similar to the one which he had first used for the purpose of photo- 
micrography, resembling it in the most remarkable manner because of 
the objective being fixed to the body. The arrangement was one which 
he soon gave up, because he found it to be inconvenient, doubtful, and 
uncertain as to getting the object in the centre, and although the inten- 
tion was to save trouble, he really found it gave a great deal more. Now 
he used a Microscope and light fixed upon a moving table, which turned 
upon a pivot, and had a stop by which it could be clamped if required; 
this was never out of centre to any great extent. He found the best 
plan for getting the object arranged was to use first a piece of ground 
glass and then plain glass with ruled lines. 

Mr. J. Mayall, jun., said that in his opinion, when photography was 
to be used in connection with the Microscope, it was best to combine a 
really good Microscope with a substantial and well-made camera. It 
was only courting difficulty to build up such a photomicrographic appa- 
ratus as that under discussion, in which, however good the arrangements 
might be for the photography, those for the microscopy were wholly 
defective. No provision had been made to enable the worker to adjust 
the object at all conveniently, for the stage would ordinarily be out of 
reach when the image was being viewed. Microscopes were in general 
use to suit every class of work, and therefore it was sheer waste of 
ingenuity to construct photomicrographic apparatus with the intention 
of supplanting the use of a Microscope. If low-power work only were 
required, then a Microscope of moderate pretensions could be easily 
combined with a camera; but where high-power work was to be done, 
the highest class of Microscope must be employed, and special means 
were necessary to facilitate the centering of the image on the screen, 
and, above all, to enable the worker to control all the adjustments 
readily, and to assure himself, by direct inspection in the Microscope, 
that the image was such as he desired to photograph. ‘These were 
the points sought to be embodied in the photomicrographic appa- 
ratus of Dr. Zeiss, Mr. Nelson, and others. The apparatus recently 
exhibited at the Society by Mr. C. L. Curties—in the designing of which 
he (Mr. Mayall) understood Mr. Nelson had assisted—was a praiseworthy 
attempt to construct a good and serviceable arrangement for combining 
a Microscope with a camera at avery moderate cost. The aim was 
distinctly practical, and based on a full knowledge of what had been 
done previously in that direction by other designers; but the apparatus 
designed by Lord Edward Churchill presented no points that he (Mr. 
Mayall) could commend, and was clearly a step in the wrong direction. 


Mr. J. Mayall, jun., said that it would be remembered that some 
time ago Mr. EH. H. Griffith, of the United States, sent a very pretty 
Microscope with a lamp attached to it; he had now sent another some- 
what similar in appearance, but in which the chief novelty was the fine- 
adjustment. Mr. Ladd had devised one on somewhat the same general 
principle, that is, with the lever attached to the coarse-adjustment; but 
the action was here produced by a worm-wheel and a tangent screw that 
could be readily clamped to act on the coarse-adjustment. He thought, 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 1063 


however, this system was open to some objection, because the person 
using it would be apt to strain the mechanism if he inadvertently tried 
to move the coarse-adjustment when it was clamped to the fine-adjust- 
ment. The Microscope before them was very elegantly made, and he 
thought that Mr. Griffith was much to be congratulated upon its 
appearance (supra, p. 1022). 

Mr. Crisp read to the meeting Mr. Griffith’s description of the fine- 
adjustment, and showed how the base of the stand being unscrewed from 
the pillar and inverted upon a pin fixed in the case, formed an effective 
turntable. 

The President thought the contrivance was very ingenious, 

Mr. Crisp said they had had a great many criticisms in that room as 
to what constituted ingenuity in this respect, and there were some of 
the objectors who would consider it open to doubt whether a Microscope 
was not better if it could not be used as a turntable. 


Mr. Crisp exhibited Cutter’s Cam Microscope, with a tilting stage 
to act as a fine-adjustment, the tilting being effected by eccentric cams 
turned by a lever. Also, Fasoldt’s “ Patent’ Microscope, by the use of 
which Mr. Fasoldt claimed that his test-plates could be resolved. It 
had an arrangement which prevented the body-tube rnnning down on the 
object, an adapter for rapidly changing objectives, and an elaborated 
form of Beck’s vertical illuminator. 

Mr. Ingpen inquired if anything was said as to any peculiarity io 
the objectives ? 

Mr. Crisp said the objectives were not mentioned; the result was 
said to be due to the method of illumination, which was the vertical 
illuminator. 


Mr. Crisp exhibited and described Zeiss’s “ micron” eye-piece micro- 
meter, which obviates the necessity for constructing tables giving the 
value of an interval for each eye-piece and objective (ante, p. 797). 


Mr. Rowland’s reversible compressorium was exhibited and described 
by Mr. Crisp (ante, p. 803). 

The President said this was practically the same as one which was 
made for him by Mr. Swift. This he gave up as useless, because, in conse= 
quence of the two surfaces of glass not being absolutely parallel to one 
another, the water was all carried off to one side. Unless the apparatus 
was made with a perfectly parallel motion it would be entirely useless. 

Mr. C. Beck also remarked on its resemblance to Wenham’s compres- 
sorium. 


Mr. Crisp exhibited a form of safety stage (sent from America), 
which was fitted with two screws and nuts, by which the tension of the 
springs could be regulated as desired. 


Mr. T. F. Smith exhibited some photomicrographs of portions of 
valves of Pleurosigma formosum, in illustration of what he imagined, from 
recent observations with high powers, to be the real structure. He had, 
he considered, discovered at least three layers, and thought there were 
possibly more. He had found the examination to be a matter of some 


1064 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOOIETY. 


difficulty, because, if mounted in balsam, the finer details were obliterated, 
and if dry only such portions of the valve could be seen as adhered to 
the cover-glass. By means of drawings on the blackboard, he explained 
that the peculiarity consisted of a grating, each alternate hole of which 
threw an image in a different focal plane, giving the effect when seen by 
an achromatic condenser of a series of red beads with white spaces 
between them. In the photographs these beads came out square, and by 
deeper focusing they appeared blue, and the valve itself was seen to be 
somewhat hollow in section. Taken from that side, the valve showed 
two distinct layers of structure, and from the other side he found that 
there was a very delicate membrane and a series of lines with a number 
of fine rings stuck upon them; this structure was very indistinct owing 
to the interference of light in passing through the very fine membrane. 
On focusing deeper a grating was seen; but whether, in addition to 
these three layers, there was any other structure, he was at present unable 
to say. Referring to Dr. Carpenter’s figures—which he reproduced on 
the board—he inferred that the appearance there shown must have been 
obtained by using oblique light: he had seen an appearance something 
like it, but could not say that this showed the real structure. He had 
examined other species of this genus, and had found at least a double 
structure in five other species—angulatum, decorum, balticum, and two 
species from Virginia. The photographs were all taken with central 
light, and with as large an aperture as could be used without spoiling 
the contrast. 

Mr. Ingpen inquired if Mr. Smith had used any mounting media 
of a much higher refractive index, such as sulphide of arsenic, which 
would produce contrasts in opposite directions, and in which, if he got 
a happy fracture, he might see what would cause him to modify his 
opinions on some points. 

Mr. Smith said he had not tried them: he was not a good hand at 
mounting, but he had tried them in Canada balsam without good results. 

Mr. Ingpen said that Canada balsam would be useless; the diatoms 
should be mounted in something of a higher refractive index than them- 
selves to get as strong a contrast as possible. 

Mr. Karop said that one point which seemed to be overlooked was 
that diatoms in their fresh state were composed of silica in a colloid con- 
dition, and the treatment of this by acids in the course of preparation 
might account for a good deal of variation in the appearance of the 
structure. 

Mr. Ingpen thought this was very probable, as it was impossible to 
get a perfect resolution of beadings or skeleton structure upon fresh 
specimens, the only exception being perhaps in the case of Amphipleura, 
which was so extremely delicate that, unless fresh specimens were 
procured, the structure would be found greatly destroyed. In the case 
of the stronger diatoms, it was necessary to submit them to acid or other 
treatment to remove surface or internal substances, which otherwise 
prevented what was supposed to be the complete skeleton from being 
seen. 

Mr. J. Mayall, jun., said that one point had been touched upon 
which he thought needed a little clearing up. It had become somewhat 
fashionable for people to say that,in making their observations, they 
were most careful to exclude all oblique light, and that their improved 
ideas were due to the use of central light. Assuming that a condenser 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 1065 


were employed either within or without the focus, a circular diaphragm 
would cut off more or less of the oblique light: but the central portion 
used, unless reduced to a very small pencil, would still consist of sensibly 
oblique rays, because it was part of a solid cone of light. If strictly 
central parallel rays were to be employed, only a very small pencil 
would have to be utilised by means of a system of collimating dia- 
phragms. He was not aware that any important results in microscopy 
had been obtained by the employment of such a pencil of light. A great 
deal too much was claimed on behalf of what was termed central light, 
regardless of the fact that some images could not even be glimpsed with 
the finest objectives in existence unless the illumination was limited 
to an intense beam of light of the highest obliquity the objective would 
transmit. 


The President said they had received two exquisite photomicro- 
graphs of Amphipleura pellucida from Mr. EH. M. Nelson, which would be 
found well worthy of inspection. 


Mr. H. B. Brady’s paper “ On the Reproductive Condition of Orbi- 
tolites complanata, var. laciniata” (ante, p. 693) was communicated to 
the meeting by Prof. Bell, who said that the interest of the subject 
attached to the information given on a vexed point connected with these 
organisms. Two French naturalists had pointed out that there were 
what they called two forms, one of which had a small number of large 
chambers, and the other had a large number of small chambers. These 
they called form A and form B, and though there was nothing to show 
that there was any distinction of sex, it had been said that A and B were 
the males and females of the species. Mr. Brady came to the conclusion 
that the young forms were the result not of sexual intercourse of any 
kind, but of a process of gemmation. 


Mr. Dowdeswell’s letter was read, accompanying some photomicro- 
graphs of spermatozoa from the Triton :— 

“T have the pleasure herewith to hand to the Society photographs 
of the spermatozoa of the Triton, showing with perfect distinctness the 
minute barb on the extremity of the head, the existence of which, I 
believe, has been doubted, but is here unmistakably evident. The 
photographs are admirable, and reflect great credit upon Mr. Andrew 
Pringle, of Cromwell House, Bexley Heath, Kent, who took them. If 
the barbs are not shown with absolute sharpness, I can testify that they 
are at least as distinct as in the preparation from which they are taken, 
which is five years old, and has become materially altered. 

“T must beg to be allowed a few words of ‘ personal explanation,’ and 
a reclamation, though not for myself. In my first mention of the 
existence of this process (Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., 1882, p. 73), I stated 
that it had been first observed and pointed out to me, in a preparation I 
had given him, by Mr. E. M. Nelson; but in the fuller notice, with 
drawing of it (ib. 1883, p. 836), which, being sent in late, was printed 
without a proof being sent to me for revision, I omitted to state this, 
and overlooked the omission till I saw the barb referred to asa discovery 
of my own. At the time, intending to publish some further observations 
on the subject, I omitted to correct this, and take this opportunity of 


1066 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 


doing justice to Mr. Nelson, who deserves the more credit for his obser- 
vation, as in the preparation he examined the point had escaped my own 
notice, which was directed to another feature—viz. the filament and 
membrane, both of which are clearly shown in one of the accompanying 
photographs. I hope the Society will be good enough to promulgate 
this note, as though it may be a matter of indifference to Mr. Nelson, it 
is not so to me—viz. that I should appear to allow to be attributed to 
me an observation first made by another.” 


The following Instruments, Objects, &c., were exhibited :— 

Lord Edward 8. Churchill :—Photomicrographic Apparatus. 

Mr. Crisp :—(1) Cutter’s Cam Microscope; (2) Fasoldt’s Patent 
Microscope ; (3) Zeiss’s “ Micron ” Eye-piece Micrometer ; (4) Rowland’s 
Reversible Compressorium ; (5) Safety Stage with Adjusting Screws. 

Mr. Dowdeswell :—Photomicrographs of Spermatozoa of Triton. 

Mr. E. H. Griffith:—Griffiith Club Microscope with new Fine- 
adjustment. 

Mr. E. M. Nelson :—Photomicrographs of Amphipleura pellucida. 

Mr. T. F. Smith :—Photomicrographs of Pleurosigma formosum. 


New Fellow :—The following was elected an Ordinary Fellow :— 
C. H. Jolliffe. 


Meetine oF 14TH Novemser, 1888, at Kine’s Cortzar, Srranp, W.O. 
THE Rey. Dr. Dauuterr, F.R.S., Vicr-PresipEent, iN THE CHAIR. 


The Minutes of the meeting of 10th October last were read and 
confirmed. and were signed by the Chairman. 


The List of Donations (exclusive of exchanges and reprints) received 
since the last meeting was submitted, and the thanks of the Society given 
to the donors. 


From 
Mawer, W., Primer of Micro-petrology, 68 pp., 26 figs. (Svo, Lon- 
don sAS8S) ese) acne hangs e bras: es) p. aiteWietec45 Wass) aba 
Slide of Navicula venustissima n. sp. Pe ee eee emer er 


Mr. Crisp exhibited a portable Microscope in a very heavy brass box 
which came from Vienna, the design being good, and closely resembling 
one brought out some years ago by Mr. Collins, but having a wood case. 
The disadvantage of a case made of such stout brass was apparent, 
seeing that it added so greatly to the weight of the whole that it could 
hardly be regarded as portable. 


Mr. C. D. Ahrens’ gigantic Microscope was exhibited. Mr. Mayall 
explained that Mr. Ahrens having invented a polarizer with a large field, 
had designed this Microscope for use in connection with it. The very 
large eye-piece gave a field of considerable diameter, but unfortunately 
it was only achromatized for the centre of the field, the outer portions 
showing colour in a very marked degree. The correction was also very 
imperfect for flatness of field, so that if a slide of fine writing were 
examined it could only be read across the centre of the field, the outer 


PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 1067 


portions being entirely out of focus; or if the outer portion was focused 
the centre was entirely indistinct. Of course the advantages of a large 
field were obvious in a Microscope of that kind, but with only a partial 
achromatism the eye-piece was neither one thing nor another. 


Mr. Ahrens’ erecting Microscope for dissecting was also exhibited, 
the chief improvement consisting of the incurved form of the hand-rests. 

Mr. Michael did not think there was anything particularly new 
about this: practically he had been using the same thing for some time 
past. 


Dr. Bate exhibited and described a small case for holding a number of 
cover-glasses, intended especially for the use of persons engaged in 
bacteriological studies. The interior was arranged as a series of racks 
to take 3/4 in. covers, each one sufficiently separated from the others to 
prevent them from touching, and every tenth groove being indicated by 
an engraved number to facilitate reference. Being made entirely of 
metal, screwed together and without solder, it could be readily taken to 
pieces for sterilization by heat or for cleaning. There were places for 
forceps, and a card for memoranda was fitted inside the cover. He 
thought it would be found extremely useful by medical men, who could, 
in the course of their professional visits, transfer small portions of sputa 
or pus to glass covers and carry them home in this way for examination. 

A Fellow asked if any provision had been made for preventing 
the mixing of yarious germs, as he thought that in the event of the covers 
becoming dry, portions of what had been placed upon them might get 
detached ; also it seemed likely that the places where the glasses fitted 
in might get coated with the matter, and cause it to get mixed. 

Dr. Bate said he had made no provision against the possibility of the 
germs falling about, but there would be no difficulty whatever as to 
cleaning. The box might, he thought, be found useful in drying sputum, 
&c., in a sulphuric acid chamber. 


Mr. Crisp called attention to a new foreign publication, ‘ Annales de 
Micrographie, an extract from the prospectus of which was read to the 
meeting (supra, p. 1062). 


Prof. Bell read a paper “On the Large Size of the Spicules of Acis 
orientalis” (supra, p. 921). 


Mr. William West’s paper “On a List of Desmids from Massachusetts” 
(post) was explained by Mr. Bennett. Mr. Bennett said he had looked over 
the paper, and was somewhat doubtful if one of the species described as 
new was really a Xanthidium. The paper would be a useful addition to 
their knowledge of the Desmids, and was interesting as showing what a 
large number of them were cosmopolitan. 


Mr. Crisp read a paper by Prof. Govi, the object of which wag to show 
that Galileo invented the Compound Microscope in 1610. 


1068 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 


Mr. J. Mayall, jun., said it would, of course, be very difficult to discuss 
so many points as those mentioned by Prof. Govi off-hand, because his 
paper was evidently the result of very considerable research and would 
require careful consideration. Many of his quotations were, of course, 
well known to those who had made investigations into the history of the 
Microscope, but there was one which seemed of rather more importance, 
in which Galileo excused himself in 1620 for not sending the instrument 
on account of its not being completed at that time. Another point was 
with regard to its being called a compound Microscope, when it had a 
convex lens at one end and a concave lens at the other. The modern 
definition of a compound Microscope was that the image projected by the 
objective should be examined by an eye-lens. In the so-called Briicke 
lens the object itself was seen, and not the aerial image. He thought, 
therefore, that Prof. Govi should more strictly define what he meant by 
a Compound Microscope. As to Galileo making lenses with the magni- 
fying power assigned, he could only say that he was not impressed with 
the idea that any such power as 36 was obtained with the instruments in 
the Museum at Florence. He hoped to be able to submit to Prof. Govi 
some considerations as to the possibility of getting 36 diameters with 
such an arrangement, and if it was as he imagined, it might lead the 
Professor to modify his opinions. 


The Chairman announced that the Society’s next Conversazione would 
be held on Wednesday, the 28th inst. 


The following Instruments, Objects, &c., were exhibited :— 

Mr. Ahrens :—Erecting Dissecting Microscope. 

Dr. Bate :—Case for Cover-glasses. 

Mr. Crisp :—(1) Portable Microscope in heavy brass box ; (2) Ahrens’ 
large Microscope for polarizer, with large field. 

Mr. F. Kitton ;—Navicula venustissima n. sp. 


New Fellows:—The following were elected Ordinary Fellows :— 
Messrs. Alfred D. Bell, Frank Inskipp, C. A. Macallum, M.A., R. Macer, 
E. W. A. A. Mayhew, Charles Rousselet, and George H. Wright; and Prof. 
George James Allman, F.R.S., was elected an Honorary Fellow. 


( 1069 ) 


INDEX. 


A. 


Abbe Camera Lucida, Large form of, 113. 

——, Screen for, 809. 

Abbott, A. C., Improvement in the method 
of preparing Blood-serum for use in 
Bacteriology, 142. 

—, H.C. de S., Plant Analysis as an 
Applied Science, 89. 

Absorption of Water by Gastropoda, 563. 

Acanthus spinosus, Tannin in, 72. 

Acarida on Trees, 34. 

Acetabularia, Incrustation of the Cell-wall 
of, 463. 

Achard, C., Employment of a tincture of 
orcanet in histological technique, 1056. 

Acid, Free, Congo-red as a Reagent for, 
1055 

Logwood Stain, 517. 

Acids, Formation of Organic, in the grow- 
ing parts of Plants, 247. 

Acineta, New Species of, 438. 

Acinetoides, 974. 

Acis orientalis, Note on the Large Size of 
the Spicules of, 921. 

Actinie, Larval, parasitic on Hydro- 
meduse, 965. 

of Coasts of France, 593. 

Actiniaria, ‘Challenger, Supplementary 
Report on, 965. 

Actinomyces, On Staining, 849. 

Acton, E. H., Formation of Sugars in the 
Septal Glands of Narcissus, 759. 

Adan, H. P., The Invisible World re- 
vealed, 523. - 

Address, The President’s 177. 

AXcidium, Sexual Organs in, 782. 

Aerial Stems, 451. 

Aerophytic Species of Ulotrichacez, 1002. 

Africa, Fresh-water Crabs of, 415. 

Agar and Gelatin, Preparation of Nutrient, 
825. 

Agar-agar for Cultivation, 656, 1036. 

Agaricinez, Classification of, 467. 

Agaricus procerus, Abnormal Fructifica- 
tion of, 269. 

Ahrens’ (C. D.) New Erecting Microscope, 
1020. 

Aievoli, E., Phenol in Microscopical Tech- 
nique, 847. 


1888, 


Air, Improved method for the Bacterio- 
logical Examination of, 854. 

Air-canals of the Root, Diaphragms in, 
447. 

Albumen in the Cell-wall, 69, 982 

of Cycas, Rooting of, 988. 

of Plovers’ Eggs : as Nutrient Medium 
for Micro-organisms, 1037. 

Albumin, Active, in the Cell-sap, 246. 

, Separat: ion of Silver by, 244. 

ipeec Constituents of White of Egg, 
551. 

Albuminoids, New Reagent for, 165. 

——,, Synthesis of, 455. 

Albuminous reaction of Cell-wall, 602. 

Alcoholic Alum-carmine Stain, 517. 

Aleyonaria, Classification of, 237. 

, Norse, 239. 

Aleyonella, Spermatogenesis in, 566. 

Alecyonidium gelatinosum, Reproductive 
Organs of, 208. 

Alcyonids, Nervous Tracts in, 61. 

Aleurone-grains, Development of, in the 
Lupin, 982. 

, Formation of, 443. 

in the Seed of Myristica suri- 
namensis, 72. 

Alge, Application of Lactic Acid to the 
Examination of, 666. 

, Lsolating Lower, 511. 

See Contents, xxvili. 

Alimentary Canal in Metamorphosis, 943. 

Alkali-albuminate as a Nutrient Medium, 
825. 

Alkaline Ege-albumen as a Medium for 
Bacteria Cultivation; 503. 

Alkaloid and Sugar in Cyclamen, 759. 

Allen, T. F., American Characez, 461. 

— , Collecting and Preparing Characez, 
828 


=e 


, New Species of Characez, 90. 

Alligator lucius, Eggs of, 925. 

Allurus tetraedrus, Anatomy of, 421. 

Almonds, Localization of Emulsin in, 247. 

Alpheus, Abbreviated Metamorphosis of, 
414. 

—, Development of, 577. 

Alpine Flowers, Size and Colour of, 452. 

Plants, Pollination of, 454, 

Alstreemeria, Explosive Fruits of, 255. 


4 ¢ 


1070 


Alternation of Generations in Green 
Plants, 459. 

Altmann, R., Demonstrating Cell-granules, 
146. 

Alum-carmine Stain, Alcoholic, 517. 

Amans, —., Aquatic Locomotion, 19. 

Ambronn, H., Pleochromism of Coloured 
Cell-walls, 602. 

Ambrosiaces and Senecioides, Compara- 
tive Anatomy of, 449. 

America, North, Two new Aquatic Worms 
from, 582. 

American and Foreign Microscopes, 797. 

— Characex, 461. 

— Fresh Waters, Notices of new Infu- 
soria Flagellata from, 698. 

—— Microscopes, 652. 

, A Complaint, 285, 482. 

Postal Microscopical Club, 304, 654. 

Society of Microscopists. Columbus, 

Ohio, Meeting (1888), 503. 

Tarantula, Age and Habits of, 215. 

Ameebocytes of Crustacea, 949. 

Ameeboid Corpuscles in the Star-fish, 
Emigration of, 431. 

Amphibia, Preparing Ova of, 146. 

Amphibians, Fate of the Blastopore in, 
189. 

, Gastrula of, 549. 

Amphioxus, Nervous System of, 390, 929. 

Amphipleura pellucida, Curious Inter- 
ference Phenomena with, 302, 1035. 

Amphipod, New Commensal, 416. 

Amphipoda, Sexual Dimorphism in, 949. 

Amphiura squamata, Development of 
Apical Plates in, 58. 

Ampullaria, Anatomy and Affinities of, 204. 

Amygdalesz, Disease attacking, 781. 

Anaerobic Microbes, Cultivation of, 1038. 

— Micro-organisms, Cultivation of, 824. 

, New Method for Culti- 


vating, 1037. 

Ancestry of Man, 193. 

Anderson, H. H., New Parasitic Infusoria, 
436. 

André, G., and Berthelot, —., Phosphorus 
and Phosphoric Acid in Plants, 760. 

Andrexa and Sphagnum, Sporogonium of, 
91, 1000. 

Anemone apennina, Germination of, 613. 

Angiolella, G.,and C. Cianci, Structure of 
Red Blood-corpuscles, 928. 

Anguillidw of the Onion, 585. 

Anilin Pigments, Absorption of, by living 
Animal Cells, 1055, 

Stains, 1056. 

Anilin-blue and Safranin, Modification of 
Garbini’s Double Stain with, 1054. 

-oi! Safranin Solution, 676. 

Animals and Vegetables, Distinction 
between, 257. 

Ankylostomum duodenale, 739. 

Annales de Micrographie, 1060. 

Annelida, Prepairing and Staining, 662. 

—. See Contents, xiv. 


INDEX. 


Anolis, Embryology of, 387. 

Antedon rosacea, Development of, 232. 

Antennary Sensory Organs of Insects, 723. 

Antherozoids of Cheilanthes hirta, 999. 

Antherozooids of Hepatice, 461. 

Anthozoa, New Type of, 745. 

Ants and Plants in the Tropics, Relation- 
ship between, 772. 

, Senses of, 571. 

, So-called Digestive Stomach, 570. 

Aorta of Bombyx mori, 212. 

Apathy, L., Histology of Najads, 205. 

——, Preparing Long Series of Sections 
with Celloidin, 670. 

—, Further Notes on Celloidin Tech- 
nique, 836. 

—, SS. External 
Hirudinea, 950. 

Aphides, 727. 

, Development of, 573. 

Apical Growth of Leaf, Duration of, 455, 

— meristem of the Roots of Pontede- 
riacese, 248. 

— Plates in Amphiura squamata, De- 
velopment of, 58. 

Aplysia, Nervous System of, 20. 

, Spermatogenesis in, 397. 

Apochromatic Objectives, 285, 287. 

Apogamy and Viviparous Plants, 768, 

—— in Notochlena, 999. 

Apples, Potato, and Water for cultivation 
purposes, Sterilization of, 310. 

Apseudes and the Tanaide, 416. 

Aquarium Microscope, Collins’s, 103. 

Aquatic Locomotion, 19, 

Aracezx, Roots of, 607, 

Arachnactis and Cerianthus, 743. 

Arachnida. See Contents, xiii, 

Arachnoidiscus as a New Test for High- 
power Objectives, 815. 

Aralia, Thickening of the Cell-walls in the 
Leaf-stalk of, 70. 

Araliacese and Umbellifere, Secreting 
Canals contained in the Phloém, 605. 

Araucaria, Secretory Canals of, 986. 

Arcangeli, G., Flowering of Euryale ferox, 
83. 

-——,, Influence of Light on the Growth of 
Leayes, 614. 

——, Saccharomyces minor, 633. 

Arceuthobium, 991. 

Arloing, §., Modification in a Bacterio- 
logical Analyser, 311. 

—, Presence of a Phlogogenous matter 
in the Cultures of certain Microbes, 634. 

Armillaria mellea, Rhizomorpha subcorti- 
calis of, 97. 

Arnold, J., Cell-division, 712. 

—, Division and Metamorphosis of 
Wandering Cells, 393. 

Arnstein, C., Staining Nerve-endings with 
Methylen-blue, 515. 

Arsonval, D’, New Incandescent Gas-light, 
1033. 

Arthropoda. 


Morphology of 


See Contents, xii, 


INDEX. 


Arthur’s (—.) Report on Minnesota, 89. 

Artichoke, Jerusalem, Germination of the 
Tuber of, 613. 

Articulata, Nerve-centres and Sensory 
Organs of, 403. 

Ascaris, Fertilization of, 583, 736. 

——,, Intestinal Epithelium of, 583. 

, Larval Stage of Species of, 45. 
lumbricoides and Tzenia elliptica, 
Life-history of, 426. 

Ascaris megalocephala, Abnormal Ova of, 
953. 


, Boveri’s Method of Preparing 
the Eggs of, 664. 

— —., Fertilization and Segmentation 
in, 43, 423. 

—— ——,, Preparation of, 148. 

—— —— , Preparing Ova of, 508. 

, Zacharias’ Method of Preparing 
the Eggs of, 663. 

— Ova, Maturation and Division of, 42. 

——, Polar Bodies i in, 43, 425. 

Asci, Formation of, in Physalospora Bid- 
wellii, 629. 

of Penicillium crustaceum, 271. 

Asclepiadex, Insect relations of, 82. 

Ascomycetes, Cultivation of Lichen-form- 
ing, without Alo, 466, 829. 

, Oleina and Podocapsa, New Genera 

of, 271. 

, ‘“ Spermatia”’ of, 1006. 

Ascophorous form of Penicillium candi- 
dum, 1008. 

Ascospora Beijerinckii, 1007. 

Asellicola digitata, 973. 

Asellus, Structure of, 948. 

Askenasy, E., Development of Pediastrum, 
624. 

Aspergillus, New, 1008. 

Aspidium Filix-mas, Aspidol from, 619. 

Aspidogaster conchicola, 954. 

Aspidol from Aspidium Filix-mas, 619. 

Asplanchnide, 740. 

Assimilation and Expiration of Plants, 
768, 

—— and Respiration of Plants, 258. 

Daily, of Carbohydrates, 994. 

—— in Plants destitute of Chlorophyll, 
455. 

Asterias, Preparation of Embryos of, 1045. 

Atmospheric Movement, Influence of, on 
Transpiration, 259. 

Attachment-organ of Algee, 461. 

Auditory Hairs, So-called, 411. 

Auer incandescent gas-burner, 495. 

Aulacodiscus, A Monograph of the Genus, 
335, 337. 

, Varieties of, 627. 

Auliscus, Ehrb., A Revision of, and of some 
allied Genera, 861. 

Aurantiaces, Anatomy and Diseases of, 
453. 

Aurivillius, C. W.8., Acarida on Trees, 34. 

Australian Earthworms, New, 420. 

Auxanograph, Hilgendorf’s, 646, 


1071 


Auxospores, Formation of, in Diatoms, 268. 

Avetta, C., Anomalies in the Structure of 
the Roots of Dicotyledons, 606. 

Axis, Embryonic, 923. 

of Frog Ovum, 15. 

— of the Inflorescence, 79. 

Axis-cylinder and Nerve-eells, 556. 

——,, Segmentation in, 392. 

Axolotl, Development of, 707. 


B. 


B., J. E., Review of Tripp’s ‘ British 
Mosses,’ 1036. 

Babes, V., Anilin-oil Safranin Solution, 
676. 

—— Hot Stage, 800. 

, Methods for Pathological Investiga- 

tions, 154. 

Modified Cultivation Vessel, 828. 

Babuchin’s (A.) Microscope, 637, 794. 

Baccarini, P., Spheerocrystals, 603. 

Bacilli of Xeresis conjunctive, and Spore- 
formation in, 1016. 

-—, Phosphorescent, Photographing by 
means of their own light, 813. 

——, Staining Lepra and Tubercle, 157, 
846. 

Bacillus cceruleus, 472. 

——, Dissemination of, by Flies, (35. 

living at a temperature exceeding 
70° C., 1013. 

— muralis, 276, 786. 

—, New Chromogenic, 472. 

— of Glanders, Spore-formation in, 473. 

——, Phosphorescent, 277. 

, Scheurlen’s Cancer, 472, 785. 

——, Supposed Spores of the Typhoid, 
1016. 


ing of, 1053. 

Stain, Specificness of, 157. 

—— Tuberculosis, Cultivation of, on 
Potato, 1038 

. “Typhus,” Cultivation of, in 
coloured nutrient media, 1039. 

Bacteria and Fungi Spores, Demonstrating 
and Counting of, in the Air, 1059. 

and Root-tubers, 82. 

—, Cellar, 1014. 

——, &e., Chemotactic movements of, 770. 

Cultivation, Alkaline Egg-albumen 
as a Medium for, 503. 

—, Endosporous, 1014. 

"for laboratory purposes, Methods of 

examination of, 686. 

in animal ‘tissues, On a combined 

universal process for demonstrating, 315. 

in Hailstones, 277. 

——, Ivon-, 786. 

—,, Lectures on, 102. 

, New Method of cultivating in 
Coloured Media for Diagnostic Pur- 
poses, 1039. 

——, Phosphorescent, from Sea-water, 101. 


4c2 


1072 


Bacteria, Spore-formation in, 787. 

—, Symbiosis of, with Gloeocapsa poly- 
" idermatica, 634. 

, Technique of, 151. 

Bacteria-like Bodies in Tissues and Ova, 
ils 

Bacterial Cultures, Method of preparing 
Potatoes for, 143. 

Growth at 0° C., 1014. 

between 50° and 70° C., 824, 

— Increase, Method of Calculating the 
Rapidity of, 682. 

Bacterio-purpurin, 473. 

Bacteriological Analyser, Modification in, 
311 

Examination of 
Method for, 854. 

Bacteriology, Improvement in the Method 
of Preparing Blood-serum for use in, 142. 

Bacterium Laminarie, Life-history and 
Morphological Variations of, 275. 

, New Marine, 789. 

Badhamia and Brefeldia, Plasmodium of, 
783. 

Bahamas, New Pennatula from, 593. 

Bailey, G., H. W. Burrows, and C. D. 
Sherborn, The Foraminifera of the Red 
Chalk, 383. 

Baillon, H., Ovules of Grasses, 611. 

of Plantago, 452. 

Baker, J. G., Enterosora, 262. 

Balanoglossus Mereschkovskii, 588. 

Baldini, T. A., Emergences on the Roots 
of Podocarpus, 252. 

Balfour, J. B., Replum in Crucifers, 611. 

Balland, —., Development of Wheat, 769. 

Balsam Bottle, Doty’s, 163. 

Baltimore Microscopical Society, 304. 

Baltzar, G., and E. Zimmermann, Micro- 
tome with fixed knife and automatic 
movement of the object, 842, 1049. 

Bambeke, C. Van, Artificial Deformations 
of the Nucleus, 196. 

Bamberg’s Spherometer Microscope, 280. 

Baranski, A., On Staining Actinomyces, 
849. 

Barbaglia, G. A., Chemical Substances 
contained in the Box, 72. 

Barbe, —., and P. A. Dangeard, Arrange- 
ment of the Fibro-vascular Bundles i in 
Pinguicula, 74. 

Bare -gine and Glairine, Physiological 
Experiments on Organisms of, 1019. 

Barley, Saccharomyces ellipsoideus and 
its Use in the Preparation of Wine from, 
785. 

Barrois, J., Development of Comatula, 960. 

-——,T., Sexual Dimorphism in Amphi- 
poda, 949. 

Bartet, —., and Vuillemin, — 
of the Scotch Fir, 781. 
Bartoschewitsch, §., Fire-proof Cotton- 

wool Plug for Test-tubes, 1040. 
Bary’s (A. De) Lectures on ’ Bacteria, 102. 
—, Obituary Notice, 140. 


Air, Improved 


—., “ Rouge” 


INDEX. 


Basal Spot on Palps of Butterflies, 943. 

Basidiomycetes, 1006. 

, Classification of, 778. 

—., Heterobasidial, 1006. 

Bastin-Bullock Microscope, 285. 

Bat, Attachment of the Blastocyst to the 
Uterine Wall in, 387. 

Bataillon, —., and F. Houssay, Develop- 
ment of the Axolotl, 707. 

Bate, C. 8., ‘Challenger’ Crustacea Mac- 
rura, 948. 

, G. P., Case for Cover-glasses, 1067. 

Bateson, A., Effect of Cross-fertilization on 
Inconspicuous Flowers, 612. 

, and F. Darwin, Method of Studying 
Geotropism, 770. 

Bather, F. A., Growth of Cephalopod 
Shells, 200. 

——,, Shell-growth in Cephalopoda, 397, 
559. 

Batrachospermum, Chantransia, and Le- 
manea, 464. 

Baum, —., Investigating the Effect of 
Remedies by the Microscope, 1060. 

Baumgarten’s (P.) Method of Triple- 
staining, 676. 

— Pathological Mycology, 791. 

Scheurlen’s Cancer Bacillus, 472. 

Spore-formation in the Bacillus of 
Glanders, 473. 

Bausch, E., Society Screw, 486. 

Bausch and Lomb Optical Co.’s Pctro- 
graphical Microscope, 279. 

“ Watchmaker Glass,” 795. 

Bdellostoma, Ova of, 192. 

Beaumont’s (C. R.) Reservoir Life-slide, 
804. 


Beauregard, H., and V. Galippe, Practi- 
cal Guide to Microscopy, &e., 323. 

Beauvisage, —., Bracts of Cruciferse, 609. 

Beck, R. and J., Adjusting an Objective 
for the Thickness of the Cover-glass, 
497. 

Beck’s Microsyringe, 849. 

Beddard, F. E.. Anatomy of Allurus 
tetraedrus, 421. 

—., of Pericheta, 422. 

—, Eyes of Cymothoide, 730. 

—, Mucous Gland of Urocheta, 422 

—, Nephridia of Earthworms, 421. 

—, New Gregarine, 976. 

——,, Reproductive Organs of Moniligas- 
ter, 221. 


—, —— of Phreoryctes, 579. 

— , So-called Prostate Glands of Oligo- 
chieta, 221. 

, Structural Characters of Earth- 
worms, 420. 

Beecher, C. E., Preparing Radule of 
small species of Gastropoda, 507. 

Beeke, F., Measuring Corrosion Surfaces 
in Iron Pyrites, 803. 

Beer-ferment, Organic nourishment of, 
785. 

Bees, Nutrient Food-Material of, 942. 


INDEX. 


Bell, F. J., Note on the Large Size of the 
Spicules of Acis orientalis, 921. 

—., Remarkable Ophiurid from Brazil, 
aoe 

Bellucci, G., Formation of Starch in the 
Chlorophyll-grains, 71, 983. 

Bellonci, G., Polar Globule of Mammalian 
Ovum, 186. 

Belzung, E., Starch- and Chlorophyll- 
grains, 70. 

Benda, C., A new hardening method 
especially for the central nervous system, 
834. 

Benda’s Modified Copper-hematoxylin, 
158. 

Beneden, H. v., Attachment of the Blasto- 
cyst to the Uterine Wall in the Bat, 
387. 

— , Classification of Tunicata, 206. 

, Fertilization and Segmentation in 

Ascaris megalocephala, 423. 

, Preparing Ova of Ascaris megalo- 
cephala, 508. 

Benham, W. B., New Earthworm, 222. 

Bennett, A. W., Fresh-water Alge (includ- 
ing Chlorophyllous Protophyta) of the 
English Lake District. IL. With de- 
scriptions of a new genus and five new 
species, 1, 171. 

, Rare Alga at Kew, 687. 

Benze, W., Leaves of Polypodiacex, 619. 

Berard, E., and G. Corin, Albuminoid 
Constituents of White of Egg, 551. 

Bergendal, D., Male Appendages on 
Female Crabs, 730. 

Berggren, 8., Apogamy in Notoclhiena, 
999. 

Bergh, R. 8., Excretory Organs of Crio- 
drilus, 953. 

Bern ger, G. M., Photoxylin for Imbedding, 


Berlese, A. N., Clathrospora and Pyreno- 
pLora, 631. 

——, New Genus Peltospheria, 630. 

, Pleospora, 469. 

Bernard, F., Anatomy of Valvata piscinalis, 
TAs), 

, Mantle of Gastropods and Dependent 
Organs, 399. 

Bertelli, D., Salivary Glands of Leech, 28. 

Berthelot, —., and G. André, Phosphorus 
and Phosphoric Acid in Plants, 760. 

Berthold, G., Nuclear and Cell-division, 
440, 

Bertkau, P., Scent Organs of German 
Lepidoptera, 406. 

Bertrand’s (E.) Refractometer, 291, 649. 

Bessey, C. E., Overlooked Function of 
many Fruits, 992. 

Bevan, E. J., Indian Fibres, 495. 

Beyerinck, M. W., Cecidium of Nematus 
Capree, 458. 

Bicuiba, Germination of, 613. 

Biddulphia from Fiji, New Species of, 
466. 


1078 


Bidwell, W. D., The Microscope in 
Medicine, 654. 

Biedermann, W., Innervation of Crabs’ 
Claws, 947. 

Biehringer, J., Inversion of the Germinal 
Layers in the Slirew, 706. 

Bigelow, R. P., Frond of Champia parvula, 
623. 

Bigeneric Orchid Hybrids, 257. 

Bilharzia, 588. 

Billet, A., Life-histery and Morphological 
Variations of Bacterium Laminariz, 
275. 

, New Marine Bacterium, 789. 

Biological Studies of Fungi, 628. 

Biondi, D., New Method for Investigation 
of Blood, 313, 659. 

Birch and MHornbeam, Spring-sap in, 
445. 

Birch, H., On the Cultivation of Schizo- 
mycetes in coloured Media, 145. 

Birch-Hirschfeld,—., Cultivation of Schizo- 
mycetes in Coloured Nutritive Media, 
823. 


. — of the “ Typhus” Bacil- 
lus in coloured nutrient media, 1039. 

Bird’s Feather, Methods of studying 
typical, 314. 

Birds, Distribution by, 930. 

Bizzozero, G., and G. Vassale, Staining 
Mitoses, 674. 

Blackburn, W., Diffraction Spectra, 652. 

Blake, J. F., and F. A. Bather, Shell- 
growth in Cephalopoda, 529. 

Blake. J. H., Prickle-pores of Victoria 
Yegia, 81. 

Blane, H., New Foraminifera, 598. 

Blanchard, R., Monas Dunali, 973. 

——, Phosphorescence in Myriopoda, 

~ 945, 

——,, Striated Muscles in Mollusca, 402. 

, Structure of Muscles of Lamelli- 
branchiata, 935. 

Blaps, Odoriferous Glands of, 943. 

, Intermediary host of Echino- 
thynchus, parasitic in Man, 739. 

Blastocyst, Attachment of, to the Uterine 
Wall in the Bat, 387. 

Blastopore, Fate of, in Rana temporaria, 
925. 

in Amphibians, Fate of, 189. 

Blatta germanica, Development of Endo- 
derm of, 406. 

Blochmann, F., and C, Hilger, Gonactinia 
prolifera, 593. 

, J., Bacteria-like Bodies in Tissues 
and Ova, 31. 

Blood, Colouring matter of, as a means of 
distinguishing between the gas exchange 
of plants in light and darkness, 322. 

——, decomposing, Spirillam concen- 
tricum, a new species from, 278. 

zs Hemoglobin Crystals of Rodents, 

8 


eh Teleostei, Origin of, 192. 


1074 


Blood, New Method for Investigation of, 
313, 659. 

of Invertebrata, 557. 

of Spiders, 946. 

Blood-corpuscles, Artificial Serum for 
Computation of, 162. 

, Double-staining of Nucleated, 


673, 842. 


, Improyed Method for Enu- 

merating, 854. 

, Methods of Examining, 1040. 

, Preserving, for Microscopical 

Examination, 1041. 

, Red, Development of, 395. 

, Structure of, 198, 928. 

— -serum for use in Bacteriology, Im- 
provement in method of preparing, 142. 

-stains, Medico-legal Identification 

of, 520. 

-vascular System of the Chick, De- 

velopment of, 187. 

-vessels, Injection of, with a cold 
fluid mass, 1056. 

Boceardi, G., Staining Nerve-terminations 
with Chloride of Gold, 155, 674. 

Boehm, J., Respiration of the Potato, 85. 

Bohemia, Hansgirg’s Alga-flora of, 626. 

Bokorny, §., Action of basic substances on 
living Protoplasm, 758. 

—, Formation of Stareh from various 
substances, 771. 

—, Separation of Silver by active 
Albumin, 244. 

Bokorny, T., and O. Loew, Presence of 
active Albumin in the Cell-sap, 246. 

— —, Chemico-physiological. Study 
of Algze, 463. 

Bolton, M., Method of preparing Potatoes 
for Bacterial Cultures, 143. 

Bombacex, &c., Comparative Anatomy of, 
606. 

Bombyx mori, Aorta of, 212. 

——, Parthenogenesis in, 571, 725. 

Bond, G. M., Standards of Length and 
their practical application, 503. 

Bone and Teeth, Method for making 
Preparations of, and retaining their soft 
parts, 1042. 

, Preparing Sections of, 147. 

Bone-corpuscles, Demonstrating the Canal- 
icular Prolongations of, 661. 

— -development, Staining in the Study 
of, 844. 

Bonnet, H., Parasitism of the Truffle, 
780. 

Bonnier, G., Comparative Cultures of the 
same species at different altitudes, 999. 

—, J., and A. Giard, Bopyrides, 216. 


— ——, New Species of Ceponina, 
731. 

—— —,, Two New Genera of Epicarida, 
21755 


Boodle, L. A., and A. Calvert, Laticiferous 
System of Manihot and Hevea, 72. 
—,, and G. Murray, Spongocladia, 1002. 


INDEX. 


Bopyride, 216. 

Borden, W. C,, Alcoholic Alum-carmine 
Stain, 517. 

——, Carmine Injections, 677. 

Bordered Pit Membranes &c., Staining, 
675. 

Bordoni-Uffreduzzi, G., New Pathogenic 
Microphyte in Men and Animals, 634. 

, The culture of the leprosy 
bacillus, 1040. 

Boring Clionids, 965. 

Bornet, E., and C. Flahault, Filamentous 
Heterocystous Nostochines, 472. 

, New Genera of Perforating 
Alge, 776. 

Borragines, Fruit of, 255. 

Borzi, A., Chlorothecium, 1012. 

—, Development of Mischococeus con- 
fervicola, 632. 

Formation of Lateral Roots in 

Monocotyledones, 762. 

, Microcheete, 275. 

Botany, Application of Paraffin Imbedding 
in, 315. 

Bottcher’s Gas-chamber, 288. 

Bottle, Doty’s Balsam, 163. 

Bottle-cultivation, 143. 

Boudier, E., Conidiferous 
porus biennis, 778. 

—, New Muceiines, 631. 

—, Pilaere, 1009. 

, Tremella fimetaria, 270. 

Boulger, G. §., Endosperm, 446. 

Bourne, G., Vascular System of 
Hirudinea, 219. 

, J. C., Kleinenberg on Development 
of Lopadorhynchus, 579. 

Bouvier, E. L., Anatomy and Affinities of 
Ampullaria, 204. 

, Nervous System of Prosobranchs, 21. 

Boveri, T., Cell-studies, 552. 

Method of Preparing the Eggs of 

Ascaris megalocephala, 664. 

» Polar Globules of Ascaris, 425. 

Boyista, Revision of the genus, 629. 

Bower, F. O., Formation of Gemme in 
Trichomanes, 262. 

, Humboldtia laurifolia as a myrmeco- 
philous Plant, 88. 

—, Modes of Climbing in the genus 
Calamus, 258. 

, Morphological Peculiarity of Cordy- 

line australis, 81. 

, Oophyte of Trichomanes, 617. 

——, Practical Instruction in Botany, 
1060. 

Bowman, F. H., Does Science aid Faith ? 
654. 

Box, Chemical Substances contained in,72. 

Brachyurous Crustacea, Excretion in, 216. 

Bracts of Cruciferse, 609. 

Brady, H. B., Note on the Reproductive 
Condition of Orbitolites complanata, var. 
laciniata, 693, 1065. 

Braem, F., Fresh-water Bryozoa, 937. 


Form of Poly- 


INDEX, 


Brain Markings, 822. 

of Iulus, 408. 

— of Phalangida, 576. 

— of Phylloxera, 408. 

— of Somomya, 407, 944. 

, Sublimate as a Hardening Medium 
for, 831. 

Brains and other Organs, Preparation of, 
507. 

Bramwell, B., Half-clearing method of 
preparing Nerve Sections, 680. 

Branches and Inflorescences, Anatomy of 
Annual, 451. 

Branchiomma, Structure of the Hye of, 
219. 

Brandes, G., Holostomum, 954. 

Brandt, E., Larva of Sarcophila Wobhl- 
fartii in Gum of Man, 944. 

, leenia cucumerina in Man, 955. 

, K., Preparing Spheerozoa, 665. 

Brasenia peltata, Vegetative Organs of, 
449, 

Brauns, R., Simple Method for clearing 
Methylen Iodide, 677. 

Brazil, Remarkable Ophiurid from, 591. 

Brefeld, O., Classification of Basidiomy- 
cetes, 778. 

Brefeldia and Badhamia, Plasmodium of, 
783. 

Brenstein, G., Action of Ether on Plant- 
life, 773. 

Bret, Colouring matter of the waters of 
the Lake of, 785. 

Brewing, Analysis of Water used for, as 
regards Micro-organisms, 685, 

Briggs, D. H., Beautiful Micro-polariscope 
Objects, 523. 

British Oribatide, 412. 

Brock, J., So-called Eyes of Tridacna and 
occurrence of Pseudochlorophyll Cor- 
puscles in the Vascular System of La- 
mellibranchs, 564. 

——,, Systematic Arrangement of Cranchia, 
397. 

Brook, G., Germinal Layers in Teleostei, 
189. 

, Reproduction of Lost Parts, 414. 

Brooklyn Microscopical Society, 304. 

Brooks, W. K., Life-history of Epenthesis 
McCradyi, n. sp., 743. 

——, New Method of Multiplication in 
Hydroids, 433. 

Brown, F. W., A Course in Animal His- 
logy, 324, 523, 686, 855. 

Brownian Movement, Preparing Slides to 
show, 833. 

Bruce, A. F., Embryology of Insects and 
Arachnids, 567. 

Bruce’s (A.) Microtome for cutting whole 
sections of the Brain and other organs, 
837. 

Bruck, T., Morphology of Underground 
Stems, 450. 

Brun, J., Notes on microscopical technique 
applied to natural history, 166. 


1075 


Brunchorst, J., Cabbage-Hernia, 273. 

, Fungus Parasitic on the Salt-fish, 

781. 

, New Potato-disease, 471. 

, Potato Fungus, 274. 

Brunotte, C., Structure of the Eye of 
Branchiomma, 219, 

Brunton, L., B. Sanderson, and M. Foster, 
Manual of the Physiological Laboratory, 
686. 

Bruyne, C. de, Nature of Contractile 
Vacuole, 749. 

» New Monad, Endobiella Bambekii, 
972. 

Bryan, G. H., Mounting in Canada Balsam 
by the Exposure Method, 160. 

Bryozoa. See Contents, xi. 

Buchner, H., T. Longard, and G. Riedlin, 
Method of calculating the rapidity of 
Bacterial Increase, 682. 

, New Method for Cultivating Anae- 

robic Micro-organisms, 1037, 

, Supposed Spores of the Typhoid 
Bacillus, 1016. 

Buchtien, O., Prothallium of Equisetum, 
262. 

Bud, Development of Flowers in, 610. 

Budding in Star-fishes, 233. 

Buds on Roots and Secondary Roots, 
Arrangement of, 80. 

, Preparing Sections of, 511. 

, Protection of, 989. 

Buffalo Microscopical Club, 485. 

Society of Natural Sciences, Micro- 
scopical Club of, 305. 

Butfham, T. H., Arranging Slides, 161. 

Bujwid, O., Bacteria in Hailstones, 277. 

Bulbotrichia, 1003. 

Bulbs, Mechanical Protection of, 607. 

Bumpus, H. C., Inexpensive Section- 
smoother, 670. 

Bapleurum, Leaves of, 608. 

Bureck, W., Heterostylism and Self-fertili- 
zation, 453. 

Burgerstein, A., Literature of Transpira- 
tion, 259. 

Burrows, H. W., C. D. Sherborn, and G. 
Bailey, The Foraminifera of the Red 
Chalk, 383. 

Burstert’s (H.) Photomicrographie Appa- 
ratus, 808. 

Ea H., Development of Antedon rosacea, 


Buscalioni, L., and O. Mattirolo, Root- 
tubercles of Leguminosz, 251. 

Butschli, O., Development of Musea, 944, 

, Growth by Intussusception, 557. 

——, Phylogeny of Protozoa, 967. 

—— Protozoa, 597. 

Butterflies and Moths, Villi on the Seales 
of, 498. 

——, Basal Spot on Palps of, 943. 

Butterfly Scales, Finer Structure of, 405. 

Bye Laws, Alterations in, 170, 

Byssus, Formation of, 935. 


1076 


C. 


Cabbage-hernia, 273. 

Calamus, Modes of Climbing in the genus, 
258. 

Calandruccio, §., and B. Grassi, Echino- 
rhynehus parasitic in Man, and whose 
intermediary host is a Blaps, 739. 

Calcureous Corpuscles of Holothurians, 58. 

— Inscrustations on Fresh-water Plants, 
Deposition of, 773. 

— Sponges, Skeleton of, 63. 

Calcium oxalate, Crystals of, 445. 

Caleutta Microscopical Society, 503. 

Calloni, 8., Ovules of Rumex, 764. 

Callus, Microchemical Tests for, 323. 

Calopogon parviflorus, Fertilization of, 454. 

Calostoma Desv. (Mitremyces Nees), 780. 

Calvert, A., and L. A. Boodle, Laticiferous 
System of Manihot and Hevea, 72. 

Cambridge Rocking Microtome, Accessory 
to, 669. 

Camera, 
1031. 

—., Neuhaus’s Photomicrographic, 293. 

——, Stegemann’s Photomicrographic, 
116. 

— Lucida, Dumaige’s, 487. 

, Large form of Abbe, 113. 

, Screen for the Abbe, 809. 

Camerano, L., Life-history of Gordius, 
228 


Griffith’s Photomicrographic, 


—. Structure and Position of Gordiaces, 
737. 

Cameras, Marktanner’s Photomicrographic, 
ire 

Campani’s (J.) Compound Microscopes, 
109, 


Campbell, D. H., Development of Onoclea 
Struthiopteris, Hoffm. (Struthiopteris 
germanica, Willd.), 618. 

——,, Paraffin-imbedding method for yege- 
table objects, 672, 1049 

; - Process in Botany, 834. 

Camponotus lateralis, Parasitism and 
Mimicry of, 30. 

Canada Balsam, Mounting in, by the Ex- 
posure Method, 160. 

Cancer Bacillus, Scheurlen’s, 472, 785. 

Canna, Morphology of the Flowers of, 611. 

Cannula-holder, Coljlin’s Automatic, 680. 

Capillary Slide and accessories for the 
examination of Ova, 801. 

Capitellidee, Monograph of, 418. 

Capranica, §., Instantaneous Photomicro- 
graphy, 651. 

Capritoliacese, Super-endodermal Network 
in the Root of, 73. 

Carboniferous Foraminifera, 533. 

Carbohydrates, Daily Assimilation of, 
994. 

Carcinus Meenas, Supra-cesophageal Gan- 
glia of, Effects of Lesions of, 730. 

Cardiae Body of Annelids, 418. 

Carini, A., Maturity of the Ovum, 15. 


INDEX. 


Carlet, G., Mode of Locomotion of Cater- 
pillars, 726. 

, Poison of Hymenoptera, 724. 

Carmine Injections, 677. 

Stain, Alcoholic Alum, 217. 

Carnoy, J. B., Maturation and Division of 
Ascaris Ova, 42. 

, Polar Bodies in Ascaris, 43. 

Carpenter, P. H., ‘ Challenger’ Comatule, 
962. 

—, Development of Apical Plates in 
Amphiura squamata, 58. 

Carter, H. J., Nature of Opaque Scarlet 
Spherules found in many Fossilized 
Foraminifera, 438. 

, Observations on Parkeria, 757. 

Casagrande, D., Alimentary Canal in 
Metamorphosis, 943. 

Castracane, F., Deep-sea Diatoms, 94. 

Castration of the Cray-fish, 947. 

—, Parasitic, in the Eucyphotes of 
Palzemon and Hippolyte, 414. 

Caterpillars and Adult Insects, Vision of, 
404. 

, Mode of Locomotion of, 726. 

Cathcart Improved Microtome, 1047. 

Cattaneo, G., Amcebocytes of Crustacea, 
949. 

——, Intestine and Digestive Glands of 
Decapods, 729. 

—, New Parasitic Ciliated Infusorian, 
971. 

Cattleya labiata, Fertilization of, 994. 

Caulerpa, Rejuvenescence of, 464. 

Cecidium of Nematus Capres, 458. 

Cedar-apple, Anatomy of the Common, 631. 

Cell and Nuclear Division, 243, 440. 

——, Apical of Fucus, 621. 

——,, Division of the Nucleus and, 978. 

—, Flemming, on the, 553. 

— , Morphology of, 17. 

—, and Physiology of, 442. 

—, Physiology of, 758. 

Cell-division, 18, 554 712. 

. Impregnation, and Division of 
the Nucleus, 600. 

—— - ——,, Part taken by the Nucleus in, 
69. 

—— -granules, Demonstrating, 146. 

- —— Vital, Methylen-blue Reaction 

of, 842. 

-membrane, 712 

and Gelatinous Envelope of 

Desmidiez, 1004. 

-nucleus, Pathological Structure of, 
lt 


391. 
—— -sap, Active Albumin in, 246, 
— -studies, 552. 
—— -wall, Albumen in, 69, 982. 
—— -——,, Albuminous reaction of, 602. 
in Mosses, Absorption of Water 
and its Relation to the Constitution of, 
263. 
-— of Acetabularia, Incrustation 
of, 463. 


INDEX. 


Cell-wall, Structure and Growth of, 441, 
442, 

— -walls, Pleochromism of Coloured, 602. 

- ——, Thickening of, in the Leaf- 
stalk of Aralia, 70. 

Cellar Bacteria, 1014. 

Celloidin Corrosion Mass, Modification of 
Schiefferdecker’s, 159. 

, Preparing Long Series of Sections 

with, 670. 

Technique, Further Notes on, 836. 

Celloidin-paraffin Methods of Imbedding, 
512 


Cells and Tissues, 710. 

——, Anomalous, in the Interior of the 
Tissue of Fossil Plants, 605. 

, Contractility of the Protopiasm of 

Certain, 457. 

destitute of Starch, Action of Formose 

on, 85. 

, Epidermal, Influence of the Tur- 

___ gidity of, on the Stumata, 605, 763. 
—,, Forms of, 758. 

— , Glandular, of Stomach, 393. 

, Interstitial, of the Ovary, Reticulated 

Protoplasm in, 311. 

, living Animal, Absorption of Anilin 
Pigments by, 1055. 

——, Lymphatic, Fusion of, into Plas- 
modia, 555. 

, Methyl-green for observing the 
chemical Reaction and Death of, 1040. 

—, Mucous, in Mussels, 402. 

——, Muscle, Nuclei of, 18. 

of the Aril of the Nutmeg, Contents 

of, 760. 

, plant, Properties and changes of the 

Membrane, Protoplasm, and Nucleus of, 

980. 

, Power of Contractility exhibited by 

the Protoplasm of certain, 614. 

, secreting, of Intestinal Epithelium, 

555. 

, sexual, and Early Stages in De- 

velopment of Millepora plicata, 964. 

, Solitary, Principle of Heredity and 

the Laws of Mechanics applied to the 

Morphology of, 926. 

, Spinal Ganglion, 556. 

——, Tubular, of the Fumariacee, 73. 

——,, Wall of Suberous, 989. 

——, Wandering, Division and Metamor- 
phosis of, 393. 

——, Wax, 519. 

Cellular Envelope of the Filamentous 
Nostocacex, 632. 

Statics, 555. 

Cellulose, Congo-red as a reagent for, 
1053. 

Cement, Preparation of fluid, 1057. 

, shellac, 520. 


Centering, Continuous, of a Cover-glass, | 


8950. 
Centrolepidese, Roots and Rooitlets, 251. 
Cephalopoda. See Contents, x. 


1077 


Ceponinee, New Species of, 731. 

Cerianthus and Arachnactis, 743. , 

Ceriomyces and Fibrillaria, 630. 

Cestoda, Development of Generative 
Organs of, 426. 

Cestoid Embryos, 46. 

Chabry, L., Capillary Slide and Accesso- 
ries for the Examination of Ova, 801. 

Cheetoceros, 627. 

Chetognatha, Spermatogenesis in, 227. 

Cheetopterus Valencinii, Nervous System 
of, 225. 

Chalinine, New System of, 63. 

‘Challenger’ Actiniaria, Supplementary 
Report on, 965. 

Comatule, 962. 

Crustacea Macrura, 948. 

— Cumacea, 35. 

Hexactinellida, 597, 747. 

— Myzostomida, 590. 

Nemertea, 52. 

— Phyllocarida, 36. 

—— Pteropoda (Gymnosomata), 26. 

Sponges, 597. 

Champia parvula, Frond of, 623. 

Chaney, H. J., Micromillimetre, 502. 

Chantransia, Batrachospermum and Lema- 
nea, 464, 

Chapman, E. T., Slide for Observing 
Soap-bubble Films, 647. 

Chara, New, 1001. 

Characez, Collecting and Preparing, 828. 

See Contents, xvii. u 

Characters, Inheritance of Acquired, 193. 

Chatin, J., Anguillulidee of the Onion, 
585. 

——,, Integument of Heterodera Schachtii, 
738. 

—, Myelocytes of Invertebrates, 929. 

—— Nerve-terminations in Lepidoptera, 
943. 

Cheesman, T. L., Preparation of Nutrient 
Gelatin and Agar, 825. 

Cheilanthes hirta, Antherozoids of, 999. 

Chemical Preparations, Photomicrography 
of, 293. 

Chemico-physiological Study of Algze, 463. 

Chemistry of Germination, 767. 

of the Nucleus, 390. 

Chemotactic Movements of Bacteria, 
Flagellata, and Volyocinez, 770. 

Chermes, Some Species of, 213. 

chery and Plum-trees, Disease affecting, 

74. 

Chevreux, E., and J. de Guerne, New 
Commensal Amphipod, 416. 

—, Orchestia, 949. 

Chars G., Preparing Sections of Bone, 

47. 

——, Demonstrating the Canalicular Pro- 
longations of Bone-corpuscles, 661. 

Chick, Development of Blood-vascular 
System of, 187. 

, First Branchial Cleft of, 387. 

Chitin Solvents, 833. 


1078 


Chitonide, Structure and Development of 
Egg in, 933. 

Chlamydococeus pluvialis, 1004. 

Chlamydomonas, 1004. 

Chlorogonium, 1003. 

Chlorophyces, Classification of, 775. 

. Venetian, 627. ; 

Chlorophyll, Assimilation in Plants desti- 
tute of, 455. 

—, Epidermal, 245. 

——, Fluorescence of, 245. 

——, Function of the Colouring Matter 
of, 997. 

—, Organs for the absorption of vege- 
table food-material by plants containing, 
249. 

—,, Preparation of Pure, 245. 

—., Quantitative estimation of, 71. 

ChlorophylJ-grains, Formation of Starch 
in, 983. 


and Starch-grains, 70. 

-granules, Formation of Starch in, 71. 

Chlorothecium, 1012. 

Chlorozoosporex, Uronema, A New Genus 
of, 626. 

Chodat, R., Diagram of the Flower of 
Cruciferse, 611. 

Cholera spirilla, &¢., Spore-formation in, 
1016. 

Cholodkovsky, N., Development of Endo- 
derm of Blatta germanica, 406. 

, Some Species of Chermes, 213. 

Choristocarpus tenellus, 93. 

Chrapowitzki, —., Synthesis of Albumi- 
noids, 455. 

Christy, T., Koch’s and Max Wolz’s Re- 
flector, 1025. 

Chromatology of Sponges, 595. 

Chromic Acid and Safranin, Staining of 
Elastic Fibres with, 1053. 

Chromo-aromatice Microbe, 634. 

Chrysalis, Diminution in Weight of, 31. 

Chun, C., Morphology of Siphonophora, 59. 

—, Pelagic Animals at Great Depths, 
and their Relations to the Surface 
Fauna, 558. 

Churchill, Lord E., Photomicrographic 
Apparatus, 1061. 

Chytridiacea parasitic on Diatoms, 99. 

Chytridium elegans, n. sp., a Parasite of 
the Rotatoria, 1011. 

, New, 1011. 

Ciaccio, G. V., Eyes of Diptera, 31. 

Cianci, C., and G. Angiolella, Structure 
of Red Blood-corpuscles, 928. 

Ciliary Movement, 971. 

Cirriped, New, 417. 

Cladocera, and greatest depth at which 
found, 578. 

Cladonemide, 235. 

Cladonia, 621. 

Cladothrix dichotoma, Cultures of, 784. 

Clarke, C. B., Root-pressure, 769. 

, 8. F., Eggs of Alligator lucius, 925. 

Clark, J., Ciliary Movement, $71. 


INDEX. 


Clathrospora and Pyrenophora, 631. 

Claus, C., Apseudes and the Tanaida, 416. 

, Leruzeascus and the Philichthyda, 
217. 

Clearing, Substitute for, 160. 

Cleistogamy and _ Self-fertilization in 
Orchids, 994, 

Clematis, Split Xylem in, 248. 

Clepsine, Germ-layers of, 37. 

Climate, Influence of, on the Cuticulariza- 
tion and Thickening of the Leaves of 
some Conifers, 608. 

Climbing, Modes of, in the genus Calamus, 
258. 

Clinging-Plants, 253. 

Clionze, So-called Peripheral Prolongations 
of, 239. 

Clionids, Boring, 965. 

Cockroach, Salivary Glands of, 725. 

Coelenterata. See Contents, xviii. 

Coelom and Embryonie Layers of a Limi- 
colous Oligochzete, Formation of, 735. 
— and Vascular System of Mollusca and 

Arthropoda, 395. 

Cohn’s Cryptogamic Flora of Silesia 
(Fungi), 99. 

Cole’s (A. C.) Microscopical Preparations, 
523. 

Collin, A., Criodrilus lacuum, 733. 

. Preparation of Criodrilus lacuum, 
832. 

— (C.), Aquarium Microscope, 103. 

Automatic Cannula-holder, 680. 

Collodion for Imbedding in Embryology, 
667. 

Colomb, G., Stipules, 252. 

Coloration of Fungi, Blue, by Iodine, 628. 

Colour changes in Spiders, Relations of 
Structure and Function to, 945. 

Colour-reaction; its use to the Micro- 
scopist and to the Biologist, 320. 

-relation between Pupze and Sur- 
roundings, 727. 

— -test, Roux’s, for the detection of 
Gonococeus, 517. 

Coloured Nutrient Media, new method of 
cultivating Bacteria in, 1039. 

Colouring Matter of the Waters of the 
Lake of Bret, 785. 

Colours of Corals, 60. 

of Leaves and Fruits, 254. 

Colpoda, Various Cyst-formations and De- 
velopmental History of, 969. 

Comatula, Development of, 960. 

Comatule, ‘ Challenger,’ 962. 

Comes, O., Mal nero of the Vine, 762. 

Comothyrium diplodiella, Grape-disease, 
98 


“Compensation Eye-piece 6 with 1/1 
Micron-division,”’ Zeiss’s, 797. 

Composite, Oil-passages in the Roots of, 
447. 

, Oil-receptacles in the Roots of, 760. 

“ Compressorium,” Hallstén’s, 489. 

, Rowland’s Reversible, 803. 


INDEX. 


Condenser, new Combination, 334. 

Contervoideze, Classification of, 775. 

, Development of, 266. 

Congo-red asa Reagent for Cellulose, 1053. 

for Free Acid, 1055. 

Conidiferous Form of Polyporus biennis, 
778. 

Conifersee, Demonstrating the Membrane 
of the Bordered Pits in, 155. 

——, Influence of Climate on the Cuticu- 
larization and Thickening of the Leaves 
of some, 608. 

, Lateralness in, 78. 

——,, Structure of the Leaves of certain of, 
451. 

Conjugate, Zygospores of, 1002. 

Conjugation of Paramzecium, 65. 

of Spirogyra, 625. 

of Vorticellide, 752. 

Continental Fine-adjustment, Pritchard’s 
Microscope with, 1022. 

Contractility of the Protoplasm of certain 
Cells, 457. 

, Power of, exhibited by the Proto- 
plasm of certain Cells, 614. 

Cook, A. J., Morphology of the Legs of 
Hymenoptera, 725. 

Cooke, —., Photomicrographs of the 
Odontophores of Mollusca, 333. 

Cooler for quickly setting Gelatin Plates, 
828. 

Copepod, New Parasitic, 417. 

Coplin, —., Brief Directions for Using the 
Microscopical Mounting Outfit (Jefferson 
design), 322. 

Copper-hematoxylin, 
158. 

Corals, Coleurs of, 60. 

Cordyline australis, Morphological Pecu- 
liarity of, 81. 

Corin, G., and EH. Berard, Albuminoid 
Constituents of White of Hee, 551. 

Corpuscles, Ameeboid, in the Star-fish, 
Emigration of, 431. 

, Caleareous, of Holothurians, 58. 

Corrosion Mass, Modification of Schieffer- 
decker’s Celloidin, 159. 

Surfaces, Measuring, in Iron Pyrites, 
803. 

Corsica, Protozoa of, 755. 

Cosmovici, L. C., Contractile Vesicle of 
Rotifers, 955. 

Costantin, J., Diplocladium, 1009. 

, Heterobasidial Basidiomycetes, 1006. 

— ,, New Papulaspora, 631. 

——, Parasites of the Higher Fungi, 1011. 

, and Rolland, —, Stysanus and 
Hormodendron, 1010. 

Coulter, J. M., and J. N. Rose, Develop- 
ment of the Fruit of Umbelliferze, 79. 

Council, Report of, for 1887, 330. 

Couvreur, H., The Microscope and its 
applications to the study of plants and 
animals, 654. 

Cover-correction, 496. 


Benda’s Modified, 


1079 


Cover-class, Adjusting an Objective for tle 
thickness of, 497. 

Preparations, Simple Method 

for Fixing, 1047. 

, Continuous Centering of a, 850. 

Cox, C. F., American Microscopes, 652. 

Crab, Effects of Lesions of the Supra-ceso- 
phageal Ganglia of, 730. 

Crabs’ Claws, Innervation of, 947. 

, Male appendages on Female, 730. 

of Africa, Fresh-water, 415. 

Cramer, C., Dasycladacez, 464. 

Cranchia, Systematic Arrangement of, 
397. 

Crangon, Development of the Compound 
Hye of, 34. 

—, Methods of studying Development 
of Hye of, 148. 

Crassulacez, Tannin in, 603. 

Crayfish, Castration of, 947. 

, Green Gland of, 216. 

Crayfishes, Digestion in, 947. 

, Intercoxal Lobe of certain, 577. 

Creeping Movements of Earthworm, 952. 

, in Gastropods, 718. 

Crépin, F., Polymorphism attributed te 
certain generic groups, 453. 

Cribrella ocellata, Madreporite of, 431. 

Criodrilus, Excretory Organs of, 953. 

lacuum, 733. 

, Preparation of, 832. 

Crisp, F., Ancient Microscopes, 304. 

, Micromillimetre, 652. 

Cristatella, Method of investigating, 147. 

mucedo, 936. 

Cross, C. F., Indian Fibres, 495. 

Cross-fertilization, 993. 

——, Adaptation of the Flowers of 

EKremurus altaicus to, 767. 

on Inconspicuous Flowers, Effect 


of, 612. 

Crossing, Production of Sex and Phe- 
nomena of, 256. 

Crucifere, Bracts of, 609. 

, Diagram of the Flower of, 611. 

, Replum in, 611. 

Cruciferous Plants, Substance containing 
Sulphur in, 997. 

Crustacea. See Contents, xiv. 

Cryptogamia. See Contents, xxvi. 

Cryptomonadinee, 754. 

Crystal Palace Photographic Exhibition, 
296. ; 

Crystal-plastids, 243. 

Crystalline Style, 566. 

Crystalloids in Marine Ales, 463, 

Crystals, Methemoglobin, 506. 

of Calcium oxalate, 445. 

Cuboni, G., Peronospora of the Rose, 1008. 

——,, viticola, 1008. 

Cuccati, G., Alcoholic Solution of Hesmat- 
oxylin, 846. 

—, Brain of Somomya, 944. 

——,, J., Organization of Brain of Somomya 
erythrocephala, 407. 


1980 


Cuénot, L., Anatomy of Ophiurids, 958. 

, Blood of Invertebrata, 557. 

——, Development of Red Blood-cor- 
puscles, 395. 

—, Nervous System and 
Apparatus of Ophiurids, 57. ; 

Cultures, Comparative, of the same species 
at different altitudes, 999. 

Cugini, G., Fluorescence of Chlorophyll, 
245. 

Culex, Larva of, 212. 

Culture Processes. See Contents, xxxv. 

Test for Micro-organisms of Water, 
Gelatin, 855. 

— Tubes, Geissler’s, 287. 

Cultures of certain Microbes, Presence of a 
Phlogogenous matter in, 634. 

of Cladothrix dichotoma, 784. 

Cumacea, ‘ Challenger,’ 35. 

Cunningham, J. T., Anatomy of Poly- 
cheta, 41. 

—, Eggs and Larve of Teleosteans, 
191. 

——., Nephridia of Lanice conchilega, 735. 

—— , Ova of Bdellostoma, 192. 


Vascular 


Nyctiphanes norvegica, 415. 

, K. M., Collecting and Cleaning 
Diatoms, 143. 

“ Curiosities of Microscopical Literature,” 
140. 

Curiosities of the Senses, 500. 

“ Curl” of Peach-leaves, 89. 

Curties, C. L., New Combination Con- 
denser, 334. 

Curtis, C., The Tapeworm: methods of 
preparing, 511. 
,J.8., The Quantitative Determina- 
tion of Silver by means of the Micro- 

scope, 494. 

Curvature of Plants, 769. 

Cuticularization and Thickening of the 
Leaves of some Conifers, Influence of 
Climate on, 608. 

Cuttle-fishes, Some Oigopsid, 931. 

Cycas, Auomalous Thickening in the 
Roots of, 75. 

— ., Rooting of the Albumen of, 988. 

Cyclamen, Alkaloid and Sugar in, 759, _ 

Cyclostoma elegans, Anatomy and His- 
tology of, 716. 

Cymothoide, Eyes of, 739. 

Cypride, so-called Mucous Gland of Male, 
(pik 

Cypridina, Structure of, 36. 

Cypridine, Preparation of, 508. 

Cyst-formations, Various, and Develop- 
“mental History of Colpoda, 970. 

Cystids, Function of, 96. 

Cystocarp and Procarp of Gracilaria, 622. 

Czapski, S., Bamberg’s Spherometer 
Microscope, 280. 

, Remarks on Prof. Abbe’s paper: The 

magnifying power of a lens or a lens- 

system, 500. 


, and R. Vallentin, Photospheria of | 


INDEX, 


D. 


D., M. T., Microscopical Drawings, 500. 

Daae, H., Spinal Ganglion-cells, 556. 

D’Abbadie, A., Micromillimetre, 503. 

D’Abundo, G., Staining Cultivation Media 
and its results on micro-organisms, 319. 

Daccomo, G., Aspidol from Aspidium 
Filix-mas, 619. 


| Daday, E. v., Monograph of Tintinnodez, 


436. 

D’Agen, E., Initial Magnifying Power of 
Microseope Objectives, 1035. 

Daguillon, A., Structure of the Leaves of 
certain of the Conifers, 451. 

Dal Pozzo, D., The albumen of plover’s 
egg as a culture medium for micro- 
organisms, 311, 1037. 

Dale’s (H. F.) Microtome, 317. 

Dallinger, W. H., Advantages of a Know- 
ledge of tlle Theory of the Microscope, 
296. 

» Daylight or Lamplight for Micro- 

scopical Observation, 302. 

, Least and simplest forms of Life, 

503. 


| ——, Memoir, 822. 


—., Presentation to, 822. 

——, President’s Address, 177. 

——. Retirement of, 327. 

Dammer, U., Adaptation of the Flowers 
of Eremurus altaicus to Cross-fertiliza- 
tion, 767. 

Dancer, J. B., Death of, 140. 

Dangeard, P. A., Anatomy of the Salsolez, 
988. 

-—, Chlamydococcus pluvialis, 1004. 

—., Chlamydomonas, 1004. 

— , Chlorogonium, 1003. 

——, Cryptomonadinex, 754. 

——, Foliar Sheath of the Salicorniesx, 
609. 

, Importance of the Mode of Nutrition 
as a means of Distinction between 
Animals and Vegetables, 257. 

——, Mycological Notes, 783. 

——, Observations on Pinguicula, 987. 

— , Parasites of the Peridiniex, 781. 

—, Reproduction of Nephrocytium, 
1013. 

, Secretory Canals of Araucaria, 986. 

—. and Barbé, —., Arrangement of the 
Fibro-vascular Bundles in Pinguicula, 
74. 

Daphnid, European, 949. 

Darwin, F., and A. Bateson, Method of 
studying Geotropism, 770. 

Dasycladaces, 464. 

Dawson, J. W., Eozoon Canadense, 241. 

Daylight or Lamplight for Microscopical 
Observation, 302. 

Debray, F., Development of the Thallus 
of certain Alge, 265. 

Deby, J., Dipterous Insect from Biarritz, 
687. : 


INDEX. 


Deby, J., Myrmecophilous Plants, 688. 

Decapods, Intestine and Digestive Glands 
of, 729. 

Decortication of Trees, Effects produced by 
the Annular, 447. 

Defence, Secretion of Pure Aqueous For- 
mic Acid by Lepidopterous Laryve for 
the Purposes of, 405. 

Deformations, Artificial, of the Nucleus, 
196. 

Degagny, C., Nuclear Origin of Hyalo- 
plasm, 440 

Degeneration, 194. 

Dehiscence of the Sporangium of Ferns, 


Dekhuyzen, M. C., Action of Staining, 
158 


Delagia Chetopteri, 936. 

Delpino, F., Floral Nectary of Symphori- 
carpus, 255. 

——., Myrmecophilous Plants, 998. 

Dendroccela, Embryogeny of Fresh-water, 
586. 

Dendy, A., Comparative Anatomy of 
Sponges, 594. 

——,, New System of Chalinine, 63. 

—, and 8. O. Ridley, ‘Challenger’ 
Sponges, 597. 

Dennert, E., Anatomy of Nelumbium, 765. 

Dentalium, Organization of, 933. 

Dentist’s Examining Glass, 795. 

Dermal Sensory Organs of Insects, 210, 
569. 

Desert Flora, 617. 

Desmidiez, Cell-membrane and Gelatinous 
Envelope of, 1004. 

Detmer, W., Inheritance of Acquired 
Characters, 193. 

—, laboratory Course of Vegetable 
Physiology, 617, 686. 

—, Physiological Oxidation in the Pro- 
toplasm, 454. 

Detmers, H. J., American and Foreign 
Microscopes ; the Verdict of an Impartial 
Expert, 798. 

De Toni, D., and G. B. Levi’s Venetian 
Chlorophycez, 627. 

Devaux, —, Action of Light on Roots 
grown in Water, 995. 

Development of Compound Hye of Crangon, 
34. 


— , Methods of Studying, 148. 
—— of Helix Waltoni, 24. 
— of Peripatus Nove-Zealandie, 33. 
— of Spermatozoa in Murex, 200. 
— of Vermetus, 201. 
See Embryology in Contents, vii. 
Devoletzky, R., Lateral Organs of Nemer- 
teans, 51. 
Dewitz, H., Simple Method of Warming 
and Cooling under the Microscope, 113. 
Diakonow, N. W., Apparatus for Infecting, 
$29. 
, Vessel for the Culture of Low Or- 
ganisms, 657. 


1081 


Diaphragm, Zeiss’s Iris, 111. 
Diaphragms in the Air-canals of the Root, 
447 


Diaptomus, Geographical Distribution of, 
731. 

Diastase, 997. 

Diatom-Structure, On the Formation of, 
495. 

- ——, Some points in, 94. 

Diatomaceze, 667. 

Diatoms, Arranged Slide of, 1057. 

, Chytridiacea parasitic on, 99. 

——,, Collecting and Cleaning, 143. 

— , Deep-sea, 94. 

——, Formation of Auxospores in, 268. 

——, Fossil Marine, from New Zealand, 
94. 

—, , of Hungary. 466. 

— from a Trygon, 777. 

——., Photomicrographs of, 295. 

——, Staining, 156. 

, Tempere’s Preparations of, 667. 

Dichotypy, 78. 

Dicotyledons, Anomalies in the Structure 
of the Roots of, 606. 

——, Formation of Endosperm in, 765. 

, Petiole of, 610. 

Dietel, P., Uredinex, 97. 

——, —— and their Hosts, 1007. 

Dietz, S., Flowers and Fruit of Sparganium 
and Typha, 78. 

Diez, R., Vernation of Leaves, 252. 

Differential Screw Slow Motion, 110. 

Diffraction Spectra, 652. 

Theory and Histological Structures, 


Digestion in Cray-fishes, 947. 

in Rhizopods, 240. 

Digestive and Intestine Glands of Deca- 
pods, 729. 

Dingler, H., Motion of rotating Winged 
Fruits and Seeds, 612. 

Diomidoff, A., Sublimate as a Hardening 
Medium for the Brain, 831. 

Dionza, Electromotive Properties of the 
Leaf of, 995. 

Diplocladium, 1009. 

Diploeystis Schneideri, 68. 

Diplozoon paradoxum, Generative Appa- 
ratus of, 427. 

Diptera, Eyes of, 31. 

Dipterous Larve, Comparative Biology of 
Necrophagous and Coprophagous, 407. 

Disaggregation of Rocks, 315. 

Discopus Synapte, Parasitic Rotifer, 52. 

Disease affecting Cherry and Plum-trees, 
274. 

——, New, of the Douglas Pine, 471. 

——, —— Potato, 471. 

: Vine, 471. 

Diseases and Anatomy of Aurantiaceze, 
453. 

Dissecting Dish, 161. 

Distomum, New Human, 49. 

Dixon, H. G., Substage Condensers, 1029. 


1082 


Déderlein, L., Echinoidea of Japan, 431. 

Dolbear, A. E., The Art of Projecting; 
a Manual of Experimentation, &c., 1036. 

Dolley, C. 8., Histology of Salpa, 207. 

Domatia, 87. 

Dorocidaris papillata and other Mediter- 
ranean Echinids, Researches on, 430. 

Dorsal Appendages, 570. 

Doty’s Balsam Bottle, 163. 

Double Leaves, 253. 

Staining, 847. 

Douglas-pine, New Disease of, 471. 

Douliot, H., Formation of Periderm, 761. 

, Periderm of Leguminose, 606. 

oe of Rosacese, 987. 

, and P. y. Tieghem, Plants which 
form their Rootlets without a Pocket, 
987. 

Dowdeswell, G. F., Photomicrographs of 
Spermatozoa from the Triton, 1065. 

Drago, W., Parasite of Telphusa, 40. 

Draw ing-board, Eternod’s, 798. 

Drawings, Microscopical, 500. 

——, Preserving, 822. 

v. Photographs, Sereen for the Abbe 
Camera Lucida, 809. 

Dreyfus, L., Scientific Exhibition at Wies- 
baden, 823. 

—, Reflector, Ganz’s Pinakoscope with, 
796. 

Drude, O., Staining Diatoms, 156. 

Dubief, H., Practical Manual of Micro- 
biology, 686. 

Dubois, P., Role of Symbiosis in Luminous 
Marine Animals, 929. 

, R., Photogenic Property of Pholas 
dactylus, 26. 

Duboseq’s Projection Microscope, 108. 

Duchartre, P., Case of Abolition of Geo- 
tropism, 996. 

, Rooting of the Albumen of Cycas, 


988. 
Dudley, P. H., Fasoldt’s Test Plates, 
299 


Dufet's (H.) Polarizing Microscope, 107. 

Dufour, L., Development and Fructifica- 
tion of Trichocladium, 630. 

——, Influence of Light on the Form and 
Structure of Leaves, 84. 

Dumaige’s Camera Lucida, 487. 

Se heat ae for Changing Objectives, 

— Travelling Microscope, 476. 

Dumont, A., Comparative Anatomy of 
Malvaceew, Bombacer, Tiliacew, and 
Sterculiacex, 606. 

Dunlop, J., and H. A. Ward, Fruits and 
Seeds of "Rhamnus, 78. 

Duramen and Protecting-wood, 248, 761. 

, Formation of, 446. 

Durand, WE. , Parasites of Teredo nayalis, 

Durdufi, G. N., Contribution to the 
physiological reaction of methyl-blue, 


INDEX. 


Durham, H. E., Emigration of Ameboid 
Corpuscles in the Star-fish, 431. 

, Madreporite of Cribrella ocellata, 431. 

Duval, M., Collodion for Imbedding in 
Embryology, 667. 


E. 


Earthworm, Creeping Movements of, 952. 

, New, 222. 

Earthworms, Experiments on, 580. 

, Nepbridia of, 421. 

, New Australian, 420. 

— , Structural Characters of, 420. 

Kast London Microscopical Society, 503. 

Ebner, V. v., Skeleton of Calcareous 
Sponges, 63. 

——,, Spe -mmatogenesis of Mammals, 547. 

,and E. Sertoli, Spermatogenesis of 
Mammals, 707. 

Eccles, R. G., Thallophytes in Medicinal 
Solutions, 459. 

Echiuids, Researches on Dorocidaris papil- 
lata and other Mediterranean, 430. 

Echinocactus, Irritability of the Stamens 
of, 261. 

Echinocardium cordatum, Development of 
Ege of, 590. 

Echinodermata, Preparation of, 510. 

—. See Contents, xvii. 

Echinoderms, Histology of, 53, 149. 

Echinorhynchi, Mode of Investigating, 
509. 

— , Structure of, 422. 

Echinorhychus parasitic in Man, and whose 
intermediary host is a Blaps, 739. 

Echinothurida, Anatomy of, and Phylogeny 
of Echinodermata, 956. 

Echinothurids, Longitudinal Muscles and 
Stewart’s Organ in, 429. 

Ectoproctous Bryozoa, Embryogeny of, 721. 

“ Edelfaule ” of Grapes, 1009. 

Edmonds’s (J.) Automatic Mica Stage, 
ie 

Edmunds, J., Theory of the Microseope— 
Nageli and Schwendener, 140. 

Egbert, S., An Appliance for making 
Photomicrographs with the Microscupe 
in the upright position, 1033. 

Eve, J., The value of microscopical exami- 
nation of Phithisical Sputum as a means 
of giving a correct Prognosis, 686. 

Egg, Albumincid Constituents of White 
of, 551. 

during Maturation and Fecundation, 
Kinetic Phenomena of, 546. 

—. Hen’s, Trematode in White of 
newly-laid, 51. 

— of Echinocardium cordatum, Develop- 
ment of, 590. 

of Fly, Early Stages in Development 
of, 573 

—— of Musca vyomitoria, Development in, 
572. 


INDEX. 


Egg, Structure and Development of, in 
Chitonidee, 933. 

Ege-albumen, Alkaline, as a Medium for 
Bacteria Cultivation, 503. 

-membranes of Insects, 722. 

-shell of Lepadogaster, 550. 

Eggs, Albumen of Plovers’, as Nutrient 
Medium for Micro-organisms, 1037. 

and Larvee of Teleosteans, 191, 925. 

— for Cultivation purposes, 827. 

, Influence of Movement on Deve- 
loping, 193. 

— of Alligator lucius, 925. 

of Ascaris megalocephala, Boveri's 

Method of Preparing, 664. 

, Zacharias’ Method of Pre- 


paring, 663. 

Hichelbaum, F., New Aspergillus, 1008. 

EHidam, E., New Mould, 1010. 

Hiselen, J., Position and Number of 
Raphides, 445. 

Hisen, G., New Annelid, Sutroa rostrata, 
582. 

Hisenberg, J., Potato Cultivations, 310. 

Hisig, H., Monograph of the Capitellide, 
418. 

Elaioplast, 443. 

Elaphomyces, 273. 

Elastic Fibres of the Skin, Staining of, 155. 

Electric Microscope, 285, 1025. 

Electromotive Properties of the Leaf of 
Dionza, 995. 

Eledone moschata, Spermatozoa of, 560. 

Elimination and Selection, 927. 

Ellenberger, —., Investigatine the Effect 
of Remedies by the Microscope, 1060, 

Elving, F., Curvature of Plants, 769. 

Embryo-sac of Rosacez, 610. 

Embryo-chemical Investigations, 551. 

Embryogeny of Ectoproctous Bryozoa, 721. 

of Fresh-water Dendroccela, 586. 

_ Embryology. See Contents, vii. 

Embryonic Axis, 923. 

Layers and Ceelom of a Limicolous 
Oligochete, Formation of, 735. 

Embryos of Asterias, Preparation of, 1045. 

, Insect, Polypody of, 568. 

Embryoscope, Gerlach’s, 491. 

Emergences on the Roots of Podocarpus, 
252. 

Emery, C., Love-lights of Luciola, 30. 

——,, Mimicry and Parasitism of Campo- 
notus lateralis, 30. 

——, So-called Digestive Stomach of some 
Ants, 570. 

Emigration of Amosboid Corpusceles in the 
Star-fish, 431. 

Emu, Development of, 187. 

Emulsin in Almonds, Localization of, 247. 

Enchytreide, 40, 

, New, 736. 

Encystation of Megastoma intestinale, 439. 

Endobiella Bambekii, New Monad, 972. 

Endoderm of Blatta germanica, Develop- 
ment of, 406. 


1083 


Endosperm, 446. 

——, Formation of, in Dicotyledons, 765. 

— of Gelsominez (Jusminez), 249. 

Endosporous Bacteria, 1014. 

Engelmann, T. W., Bacterio-purpurin, 473. 

——,, Colouring matter of blood as a 
means for distinguishing between the 
gas exchange of plants in light and 
darkness, 322. 

, Gas Chamber, 288. 

Enock’s (F.) Insect Slides, 5238. 

Enterosora, 262. 

Entomologists, Young, Microscopic Work 
for, 511. 

Entomophthores of the United States, 
1010. 

Environment, Action of, 927. 

Kozoon Canadense, 241. 

Epenthesis McCradyi, n. sp., Life-history 
of, 743. 

Epicarida, Two New Genera of, 217. 

Epidermal Chlororophyll, 245. 

— Glands, 81]. 

—— Reservoirs for water, 448. 

Epidermis of Leaves, Permeability of, to 
Gases, 448, 763. 

Epiphytic Jungermannies, 92. 

Epithelium, Secreting Cells of Intestinal, 
556. 

Equisetum, Development of the Root of, 
773. 

—, Dissemination of the Spores of, 
1000. 

, Prothallium of, 262. 

Erdos, J., Accessory for rapid Cutting with 
the Thoma Microtome, 840. 

—.,, Injection of the Blood-vessels with a 
cold fluid mass, 1056. 
Eremurus altaicus, Adaptation of the 
Flowers of, to Cross-fertilization, 767. 
and Leguminosex, Super-endodermal 
Network of the Root of, 986. 

Ericaceze, Root-symbiosis in, 86. 

Eriocaulez, Roots and Rootlets in, 251. 

Krmengem, EH. v., Scheurlen’s Cancer 
Bacillus, 785. 

Errera, L., Accumulation and Consump- 
tion of Glycogen by Fungi, 96. 

— , Cellular Statics, 555. 

——, Forms of Cells, 758. 

, Microscopy at the Wiesbaden Exhi- 
bition, 140. 
—, Photographing Moving Microscopic 
Objects, 812. fi 
Hssex County Microscopical Society of 
New Jersey, 304. 

Eternod’s (A.) Apparatus for Stretching 
Membranes, 163. 

Drawing-board, 798. 

Ether, Action of, on Plant-life, 773. 

Eucyphotes of Palemon and Hippolyte, 
Parasitic Castration in, 414. 

Euglena, 754, 972. 

Euglypha, Karyokinesis of, 66. 

Kuphrasia, Fertilization of, 767. 


1084 


Euplotes harpa, Direct Division of Nucleus 
in, 436. 

Eupomatus elegans, Embryology of, 578. 

European Daphnide, 949. 

Euryale ferox, Flowering of, 83. 

Ewell, M. D., A Manual of Medical Juris- 
prudence for the Use of Students at 
Law and of Medicine, 140. 

Eurich, —., A contribution to the exami- 
nation and knowledge of meat, 855. 

Examinations in Microscopy, 54. 

Excretion in Brachyurous Crustacea, 216, 

Excretory Organs of Criodrilus, 953. 

Systems, Larval and Definite, in 
Lumbricida, 220. 

Excursion Microseope, Klein’s, 1020. 

Exhalation of Oxygen by Fleshy-leaved 
Plants in Absence of Carbonie Anhy- 
dride, 85. 

Exner, 8., Histological Structures and the 
Diffraction Theory, 119. 

Exoderm of the Root of Restiaces, 987. 

Expiration and Assimilation of Plants, 
768. 

Explosive Fruits of Alstroemeria, 255. 

Exposure Method, Mounting in Canada, 
Balsam by, 160. 

External Forces, their Influence on the 
Form of Plants, 456. 

Eye, Compound, of Crangon, Development 
of, 34 

, Larval Anal, 
Gastropods, 19. 

— of Branchiomma, Structure of, 219. 

— of Crangon, Methods of Studying 
Development of, 148. 

Eye-pieces, Powers of, 501. 

See Contents, xxxiii. 

— -shades, 488. 

Eyes in Scorpions, 411. 

of Arthropods, 209, 938. 

— of Cymothoide, 730. 

of Diptera, 31. 

—,, So-called, of Tridacna, 564. 

Eylmann, E., European Daphnide, 949. 

Eyre, J., Pond Dredging and Cullecting, 
505. 


in Opisthobranch 


——— = 


F, 


Fabre-Domergue, —., First principles of 
the Microscope and microscopical tech- 
nique, 1036. 

Researches on Ciliated Infusoria, 751. 

, Structure of Urceolariz, 753. 

Fankhauser, J., Diastase, 997. 

, Euglena, 754. 

Farabceut’s, Robin’s and Lacaze-Duthiers’ 
Injecting Syringes, 678. 

Farre, A., Death of, 170. 

Fasoldt, C., Test-plates, 298, 817. 

, Variation in Micrometrie Measure- 


ments due to different illumination, 814. | 


Fat-cells, Peculiar, 928. 
Fatty Matters in Cultivation Media, 504. 


INDEX. 


Fauna of Mosses, 199. 

Faussek, V., Development of Generative 
Organs in Arachnida, 946. 

Feather, Methods of studying typical 
Birds’, 314, 

Fegatella, Production of Gemme by, 92. 

Feist, A., Protection of Buds, 989. 

Fell, G. E., Exhibition of “ Letter O oceupy- 
ing space of 1/1,000,000 in, magnified 
3200 times,” 140. 

Female Crabs, Male Appendages on, 730. 

Fermentation in Phanerogamia. See Con- 
tents, XXvi. 

Ferments, Spores of, 633. 

Ferns, Preparation and Mounting of, 665. 

See Cryptogamia Vascularia, Con- 
tents, XXvi. 

Feria, L., Staining of Elastic Fibres with 
Chromic Acid and Safranin, 1053. 

Ferry, —, Medico-legal Identification of 
Blood-stains, 520. 

Fertile, Conversion of, into Sterile Fronds, 
261. 

Fertilization and Segmentation in Ascaris 
megalocephala, 423. 

of Ascaris megalocephala, 43, 583, 
736. 

— of Calopogon parviflorus, 454. 

— of Cattleya labiata, 994. 

— of Euphrasia, 767. 

of Flowers, 82. 

, Karyokinesis in its Relation to, 928. 

Fetterolf, G., and J. A. Ryder, Vestiges of 
Zonary Decidua in Mouse, 186. 

Fever, Relapsing, Staining Spirochete of, 
1054. 

Fewkes, J. W., Are there Deep-sea 
Medusze ? 236. 

, Medusze from New England, 592. 

——, New Mode of Life among Medusa, 
591. 

——, New Physophore, 592. 

——, Preparation of Embryos of Asterias, 
1045. 

, Sucker on Fin of Pterotrachea, 205. 

Fibres, Elastic Staining of, with Chromatic 
Acid and Safranin, 1053. 

Fibrillaria and Ceriomyces, 630. 

Fibrin and Micro-organisms, New Method 
for Staining, 675. 

Fibro-vascular Bundles in Pinguicula, 
Arrangement of, 74. 

in the Petiole, Distribu- 


tion of, 74. ; 

- —— System, Foliar, importance of, 
in Vegetable Anatomy, 985. 

Fibrosin, A new cell-coutent, 246. 

Fick, R., Inosite, 72. 

Fiedler, K., Development of Generative 
Products in Spongilla, 64. 

, Formation of Ova and Spermatozoa 

in Spongilla fluviatilis, 966. : 

—, Investigation of Generative Products 
of Spongilla, 1045. 


| Fielde, A. M., Dorsal Appendages, 570. 


INDEX. 


Fiji, New Species of Biddulphia from, 466. 
Films, Measuring Thin, 501. 
Filter-capsule, Steinach’s, 850. 

Fin of Pterotrachea, Sucker on, 205. 

Fine-adjustment by tilting the Stage, 478. 

—— - —., Griffith’s, 1022. 

, Pritchard’s Microscope with 
** Continental,” 1022. 

Finland, Fungi of, 275. 

Fire-proof Cotton-wool Plug for Test-tubes, 
1040. 

Fir, Scotch, “ Rouge ” of, 781. 

‘Fisch, C., and M. Reess, Elaphomyces, 
2738. 

Fischer, A., Albuminous reaction of Cell- 
wall, 602. 

——, Bacterial Growth at 0° C., 1014. 

——, Glucose as a Reserve-material in 
Woody Plants, 984. 

——, B., Phosphorescent Bacillus, 277. 

—, E., Stretching of the Receptacle of 
the Phalloidei, 629. 

— , P., Actinie of Coasts of France, 593. 

, Photographing Phosphorescent Ba- 

cilli by means of their own light, 813. 

, scyphistomata of Acraspedote Me- 
dusze, 965. 

Fischl, R., (a) A new process for making 
Microscopic preparations from test-tube 
cultures; (6) the preparation of threads 
effectively impregnated with micro- 
organisms, 311, 833. 

Fishes, Bony, Origin and Significance of 
the so-called free Nuclei in the Nutrient 
Yolk of, 706. 

Fixation, Note on, and New Nuclear Stain, 
675. 

Fixing Sections, 159. 

Flabellum, 963. 

» Growth of, 237. 

Flagellata, &c., Chemotactic Movements 
of, 770. 

—, Method of Preparing Tegumentary 
Filaments of, 832. 

Flahault, C., and E. Bornet, Filamentous 
Heterocystous Nostochines, 472. 

— ——, New Genera of Perforating 
Algz, 776. 

Flea, To prepare Head of, 511. 

Fleischl Hemometer, 808. 

Fleishmann, A., Absorption of Water by 
Molluses, 563. 

» Development of Egg of Echino- 
cardium cordatum, 590. 

Flemming (N.) on the Cell, 553. 

——, W., Preparing Testicle for observing 
Nuclear Fission, 146. 

——,, Spermatogenesis of Salamander, 189. 

, Staining with Rosanilin Nitrate in 
watery Glycerin Solution, 518. 

Flesch, M., Beck’s Microsyringe, 849. 

, Micro-chemistry of Nerve-cells, 712. 

-——, On the influence of the modern im- 
provements on Microscopes for medical 
men, 1036, 


1888, 


1085 


Flesch, M, Preparation of Brains and 
other Organs, 507. 

, Staining Living Preparations, 515. 

Fletcher, J. J.. New Australian Earth- 
worms, 420. 

Flies, Dissemination of Bacillus by, 635. 

tongues, mounting, 511. 

Floral Axis, Anatomy of, 254. 

Nectary of Symphoricarpus, 255. 

Floridea, New Fresh-water, 93. 

, New Genera of, 1002. 

Flos-aque, Remarkable, 633. 

Floscularia annulata, 231. 

Flot, L., Aerial Stems, 451. 

Flower, Comparative Morphology of, 
451. 

— of Cruciferee, Diagram of, 611. 

Flowering of Euryale ferox, 83. 

Flowers and Fruit of Sparganium and 
Typha, 78. 

—, Comparative Anatomy of, 255. 

—.,, Development of, in the Bud, 610. 

— , Fertilization of, 82. 

, Inconspicuous, Effect of Cross- 

fertilization on, 612. 

of Canna, Morphology of, 611. 

——, Physiological Organography of, 256. 

, size and Colour of Alpine, 452. 

Fluorescence of Chlorophyll, 245. 

Fly, Early Stages in Development of Egg 
of, 573. 

Foa, F., Structure of Red Blood-corpuscles, 
198. 

Focke, W. O., Dichotypy, 78. 

Focus, Depth of, 652. 

Focusing Arrangement, Jeserich’s, 1031. 

, Neuhauss’s, 809. 

, Plossl’s, 651. 

— Screen, Nelson’s Photomicrographic, 
119. 

—— ——,, Stenglein’s Coarse and Fine, 
1032. 

Foerste, A. G., Cross-fertilization, 953. 

Foettinger, A., Anatomy of Pedicellina, 
208. 

Fol, H., Collin’s Automatic 
holder, 680. 

——. Distribution of Striped Muscle, 714. 

, Microscopie Structure of Muscles of 
Molluses, 199. 

Foliar Fibrovascular System, Importance 
of, in Vegetable Anatomy, 985. 

— Sheath of the Salicorniez, 609. 

Folliculina ampulla, 598. 
Food Constituents, Supply of, at Different 
Periods of the Growth of Plants, 614. 
Food-material, Organs for the absorption 
of vegetable, by plants containing 
chlorophyll, 249. 

, Nutrient, of Bees, 942. 

Foot, Heteropod, Morphology of, 24. 

Foraminifer, New, 437. 

Foraminifera, Carboniferous, Additions to 
the Knowledge of, 533. 

——, Isolating, 664. 


Cannula- 


4D 


1086 


Foraminifera, Nature of Opaque Scarlet 
Spherules found in many Fossilized, 438. 

— , New, 598. 

of the Red Chalk, 383. 

—, Primitive Resemblance of Ovarian 
Ova and, 706. 

——., Relationships of, 66. 

, Sherborn’s Bibliography of, 757. 

Foreign and American Microscopes, 797. 

—; the Verdict of an Impartial Expert, 
798. 

Forel, A., Lenses of Ants, 571. 

Formie Acid, Secretion of Pare Aqueous, 
by Lepidopterous Larve for the Pur- 
poses of Defence, 400, 

Formica rufa, Sense of Direction in, 212. 

Formose, Action of, on Cells Destitute of 
Starch, 85. 

Forssell, K. B. J., Gloeeolichenes, 95. 

Fossil Botany, Solms-Laubach’s Introduc- 
tion to, 620. 

Plants, Anomalous cells in the in- 
terior of the tissue of, 605. 

Foster, M., B. Sanderson, and L. Brunton, 
Manual of the Physivlogical Laboratory. 
686. 

Fowler, G. H., Anatomy of Madreporaria, 
434. 

— , New Pennatula from the Bahamas, 
593. 

—,and A. M. Marshall, ‘ Porcupine’ 
Pennatulida, 745. 

Fowls, Gape Worm of, 740. 

Fraipont, J., Polygordius, 225. 

, Preparing Polygordius, 662. 

France, Actinie of Coasts of, 593. 

Frank, B., Formation of Nitric Acid in 
Plants, 616. 

——, New Forms of Mycorhiza, 268. 

, Root-symbiosis in the Ericacea, 86. 

Frankel, C., Cultivation of Anaerobic 
Micro-organisms, 82+. 

Frankland, G. C., and P. F., New and 
Typical Micro-organisms from Water 
and Soil, 789. 

Frazer, A., Cathcart’s Improved Microtome, 
1048. 

Fréchou, —., Formation of the Asci in 
Physalospora Bidwellii, 629. 

Freeborn, G. C., Notices of New Methods 
for Staining, 320, 519, 667, 855. 

Fresh-water Alge (including Chlorophyl- 
lous Protophyta) of the English Lake 
District If. With description of a new 
genus and five new species, 1, 171. 

— of the United States, 

Wolle’s, 94. 


, Preparation of, 1046. 

—— -—— bryozoa, 27. 

, Nervous 

Phylactoleematous, 402. 

Crabs of Africa, 415. 

—— - —— Dendrocela, Embryogeny of, 
586. 

—— - —— Floridea, New, 93. 


System of 


INDEX, 


Fresh-water Infusoria, New, 65. 

of the United States, 598. 

——-—— Plants, Deposition of Cal- 
careous Incrustations on, 773. 

Polyzoa, 566. 

—— - —— Sponges, 63, 748. 

, Collecting, 
and Examining, 305. 

gi Rapes E., Preparing Agar-agar, 
656. 

— v. Respiration of Hydrophilus, 


— . ——_——. 


Growing, 


Friedlander, B., Creeping Movements of 
Earthworm, 952. 

Fritsch, G., 822. 

, Bilharzia, 588. 

Frog, Development of, 925. 

, Lrritability of Spermatozoa of, 707. 

Ovum, Axis of, 15. 

Frog-tadpole, Infection of, by Saprolegnia 
ferax, 272. 

Frommann, C., Properties and Changes of 
the Membrane, Protoplasm, and Nucleus 
of Plant-cells, 980. 

Fructitication, Abnormal, of Agaricus pro- 
cerus, 269. 

Fruit and Flowers of Sparganium and 
Typha, 78. 

— of Borragines, 255. 

— of Solanacex, 611. 

— of Umbelliferee, Development of, 79. 

— trees, Fungi of, 780. 

Fruits and Leaves, Colours of, 254. 

—and Seeds, Motion of Rotating 
Winged, 612. 

of Rhamnus, 78. 

——,, Explosive, of Alstroemeria, 255. 

——, masked, 79. 

, Overlooked Function of many, 992. 

Fucus, Apical Cell of, 621. 

Fumariacesw, Tubular Cell of, 73. 

Fungi. See Contents, xxix. 

Spores and Bacteria, Demonstrating 
and counting of, in air, 1059. 

Fiirst, C. M., Spermatogenesis of Marsu- 
pials, 386. 

Fusari, R., Segmentation of Teleostean 
Ova, 191. ; 

Fusoma, 1009. 


G. 


Gage, H., Determination of the Number of 
Trichine or other Animal Parasites in 
Meat, 164. 

——, 8. H., Starch Injection-mass, 1056. 

Galileo’s Microscopes, 639. 

Galippe, V., and H. Beauregard, Practical 
Guide to Microscopy, &e., 323. 

ee (R.) Microphotoscope, 


or V., Chromo-aromatic Microbe, 


—., Pathogenic chromo-aromatic 
Microbe, 1017. 


INDEX. 


Gamaside. Anatomy of, 729. 
- Gammarus, Development of, 949. 

Ganglia, Supra-cesophageal, in Snails, 
Eittcets of Lesions of, 717. 

—, , of Crab, Effects of Lesions of, 
730. 

Ganglion-cells of the Spinal Cord, Effect 
of Hardening Agents on, 831. 

Ganz’s (J.) Pinakoscope wiih Dreyfus’s 
Reflector, 796. 

Gape Worm of Fowls, 740. 

Garbini (A.,) Closed Water-bath, 1053. 

Double Stain with Anilin-blue and 
Safranin, Modification of, 1054. 

——, Preparation of Cypridine, 508. 

——,, Structure of Cypridina, 36. 

, G., Mounting of specimens to be 
examined with homogeneous-immersion 
lenses, 1057. 

Garcin, A. G., Euglena, 972. 

, Fruit of Solanaces, 611. 

Gardiner, W., Contractility of the Proto- 
plasm of certain Cells, 457, 614. 

Gariel, C. M., Practical Treatise on Physi- 
eal Manipulation, &e., 819. 

Garnault, P., Anatomy and Histology of 
Cyclostoma elegans, 716. 

—, Anatomy of Valvata piscinalis, 718. 

——, Reproductive Organs and Oogenesis 
of Helix, 398. 

——,, Structure and Development of Ege 
in Chitonide, 933. 

Gas and Moist Chambers, 287, 288, 289, 
290, 291. 

—— Burner, On the Auer Incandescent, 
495. 

Gases, Permeability of the Epidermis of 
Leaves to, 448, 763. 

Gasperini, G., New Disease of Lemons, 98. 

—, Polymorphism of the Hyphomycetes, 
468. 

Gasterolichenes, 95. 

Gastropoda, Preparing Radule of Small 
Species of, 507. 

See Contents, x. 

Gastropods, &c., Ingestion 
199, 

Gastrula of Amphibians, 549. 

Gazagnaire, J., Phosphorescence in Myrio- 
poda, 945. 

Grey, F., Ulothrix, 465. 

Gehrke, O., Germination of Palms, 257. 

Gehuchten, A. y., Striped Muscle of 
Arthropods, 941. 

Geissler’s Culture Tubes, 287. 

Gelatin and Agar, Preparation of Nu- 
trient, 825. 

Culture Test for Micro-organisms of 
Water, 855. 

— Plates, Cooler for quickly setting, 
828. 

Gelatinous Envelope and Cell-membrane 
of Desmidiee, 1004. 

Gelsomines (Ji asmines), Endosperm of, 
249, 


of Water, 


1087 


Gemme in Trichomanes, Formation of, 
262. 

, Production of, by Fegatella, 92. 

Gemmation in Linckia multipora, 431. 

Gemmules of Silicispongis, 596. 

Generative Apparatus of Diplozoon para- 
doxum, 427. 

Organs, Development of, in Arach- 
nida, 946. 

— — of Cestoda, Development of, 
426. 

Products in Spongilla, Development 

of, 64, 1045. 

of Spongilla, Investigation of, 


1045. 

Genital Products in Oligocheta, Homology 
of Segmental Organs and Efferent Ducts 
of, 419. 

Geotropism, 458. 

, Case of Abolition of, 996. 

, Method of Studying, 770. 

Geraniaces, Comparative Anatomy of, 
75. 

, Sub-epidermal Network of the Root 
of, 986. 

Gerlach, L., Embryoscope, 491. 

, Experimental Embryology, 16. 

Germ-bands of Lumbricus, 38. 

—— -cells, Wandering Primordial, in 
Echinoderms, 56. 

— -layers of Clepsine, 37. 

--stripe of Insects, Primary Seemen- 
tion, of, 941. 

German Lepidoptera, Scent-organs of, 406. 

--— Sphagnaceer, 621. 

Germany, Sydow’s Lichens of, 621. 

Germinal Layers in Cephalopods, 931. 

in Teleostei, 189. 

—— —— in the Shrew, Inversion of, 


706. 

— of Cephalopods, Homology of, 
396. 

—. of Meloe, 942. 

Germination of Phanerogamia. See Con- 
tents, XXiv. 


Germs in fluids, On the quantitative de- 
termination of, 686. 

Giard, A., Parasitic Castration in the 
Eucyphotes of Palemon and Hippolyte, 
414, 

——, Photodrilus phosphoreus, Type of a 
New Genus of Phosphorescent Lum- 
bricids, 39. 

, Symbiotic Fungus in Molgulide, 


782. 


and J. Bonnier, New Species of 

Ceponinee, 731, 

, The Bopyride, 216. 

— — ; Two new Genera of Epicardia, 
217. 

Giaxa, ---. de, Simple Method for repro- 
ducing Koch’s Cultivation Plates, 827. 
Gibson, ‘Ga Odoriferous Glands of Blaps, 

943. 
—— , Spermatogenesis of Arthropods, 940. 


4p2 


—_——= 


1088 


Gieson, J. v., 834. 

—, The Brain-cortex stained by Golgi’s 
method, 849. 

Gifford, J. W., Apochromatic Objectives, 
287. 

, Preparations for High Powers, 834. 

Gigantic Cephalopoda, 930. 

Gilbert, J. H., and J. B. Lawes, Sources 
of the Nitrogen of Vegetation, 261. 

Glairine and Baregine, Physiological ex- 
periments on Organisms of, 1019. 

Gland, Green, of Crayfish, 2.6. 

, Mucous, of Urocheeta, 422. 

Glanders, Spore-formation in the Bacillus 
of, 473. 

Glands, Epidermal, 81. 

, Odoriferous, of Blaps, 943. 

——,, Salivary, of Insects, 211. 

—, , of Leech, 38. 

, Salt-excreting, of Tamariscines, 249. 

Glandular Epithelium of Kidney of Pro- 
sobranch Gastropods, Comparative His- 
tology of, 715. 

Glass, “New, just made in Sweden,” 
499. 

—, The Jena Optical, 486. 

Globig, —., Bacterial Growth between 50° 
and 70° C., 824. 

Gleeocapsa polydermatica, Symbiosis of 
Bacteria with, 634. 

Glceolichenes, 95. 

Glucose as a Reserve-material in Woody 
Plants, 984. 

Glycerin, Isotonie Coefficient of, 617. 

Solution, Staining with Rosanilin 
Nitrate in watery, 518. 

Glycogen, Accumulation and Consumption 
of, by Fungi, 96. 

Goblet-cells of Intestine of Salamander, 
712. 

Godlewski, E., Irritability of Growing 
Parts of Plants, 615. 

Goebel, K., Conversion of Fertile into 
Sterile Fronds, 261. 

——, Epiphytie Jungermanniee, 92. 

— , Germination of Ferns, §9. 

, Heterophyllous Ferns, 90. 

Goethe, R , Torsion of Stems, 989. 

Goette, A., Development of Petromyzon 
fluviatilis, 549. 

Gold, Chloride of, Staining Nerve-termi- 
nations with, 155, 673, 674. 

and Osmie Acid Methods, 846. 

Goldmann, F., Critical studies on the 
methods of determining the presence of 
starch in plants, especially in grain- 
plants, 32+. 

Golfarelii’s (J.) Micrometric Microscope 
for Horologists, 103. 

Gomont, M., Cellular Envelope of the 
Filamentous No-tocaces, 632, 1012. 

, Relationship between Phormidium 
and Lyngbya, 784. 

Gonactinia prolifera, 553. 

Gonidia of Gymnosporangium, 1010. 


INDEX. 


Gonoecoccus, Ronx’s Colour-test for the 
detection of, 517. 

Gordiaces, Structure and Position of, 737. 

Gordii, Development and Specitie Deter 
mination, 228. : 

Gordiidze, Studies on, 583. 

Gordius, Life-history of, 228. 

Gorgonide of Naples, 435. 

Gosse, P. H., Obituary, 822, 1061. 

Gourret, P., and P. Roeser, Protozoa of 
Corsica, 755, 

Graber, —., v., Apparatus for determining 
Sensibility to Heat, 114. 

, Polypody of Insect Embryos, 568. 

——,, Primary Segmentation of the Germ- 
stripe of Insec s, 941. 

—, Thermie Experiments on Periplaneta 
orientalis, 31. 

Gracilaria, Procarp and Cystocarp of, 622. 

Graff, L. v., Annelid Genus Spinther, 42. 

Granel, —., Origin of the Suckers in 
Phanerogamous Parasites, 80. 

Grape-disease—Comothyrium diplodiella, 


98. 

Grapes, ‘‘ Edelfiiule” of, 1009. 

Grasses, Ovules of, 611. 

Grassi, B., Parasitic Protozoa, 974. 

-——, Primitive Insects, 29. 

—,, Protozoa Parasitic in Man, 240. 

——,, Teenia nana, 46. 

and 8. Calandruccio, Echinorhynchus 
parasitic in Man, and whose inter- 
mediary host is a Blaps, 739. 

— and W. Schewiakoff, Megastoma 
entericum, 599. 

Gray, A., Obituary, 822. 

. W. M., Double-staining of Nucleated 

Biood-corpuscles, 673, 842. 

, Photomicrography, 813. 

Greef, L. v., ‘Challenger’ Myzostomida, 
990. 

Green, J. R., Germination of the Tuber of 
the Jerusalem Artichoke, 613. 

Green Gland of Crayfish, 216. 

Greenwood, M., Digestion in Rhizopods, 
240. 

Gregarine, New, 976. 

Gregg, W. H., Anomalous Thickening in 
the Roots of Cycas, 75. 

Greinert, M. Morphology and Anatomy of 
Loasacez, 453. 

Grevillius, A. Y., Mechanical system of 
Pendent Organs, 75. 

Grieg, J. A., Norse Aleyonaria, 239. 

Griesbach, H., Metanil-yellow, 677. 

, Theory of Microscopical Staining, 
1056. 

Griffith (E .H.), Club Microscope, 1062. 

, Fine-adjustment, 1022. 

——, Photomicrographic Camera, 1031. 

Griffiths, A. B., Problematical Organs of 
the Invertebrata, 714. 

——,, Renal Organs of Star-fishes, 958. 

— Salivary Glands of Sepia officinalis 
and Patella vulgata, 932. 


INDEX. 


Griffiths, A. B., and Mrs. ——, Influence 
of certain Rays of the Solar Spectrum 
on Root-absorption and on the Giowth 
of Plants, 769. 

, G. C., Colour-relation between Pups 
and surroundings, 727. 

Grigorjew, A. W., Specificness of the 
Tubercle Bacillus Stain, 157. 

Grobben, C., Morphology of the Heteropod 
Foot, 24. 

—, Pericardial Gland in Lamellibranchs, 
720. 

Groom, T. T., New Features in Pelane- 
chinus corallinus, 233. 

Grosse, W., On polarizing prisms, 1029. 

Grove, E., and G. Sturt, Fossil Marine 
Diatoms from New Zealand, 94. 

Groves, W. B., Pimina, a new Genus of 
Hyphomycetes, 780. 

“ Growing Slide,’ Modification of Pagan’s 
1028. 

Growth of Phanerogamia. 
XXY. 

Gruber, A., Multinuclear Infusoria, 597, 
750. 

» New Rhizopods,°757. 

; Notes on Protozoa, 969. 

Guepinia and Ombrophila, 1008. 

Guerne, J. de, Asplanchnidze, 740. 

—., and H. Cheyreux, New Commensal 
Amphipod, 416. 

, and J. Richard, Geographical Dis- 
tribution of Diaptomus, 731. 

Guinea-pig, Spermatogenesis in, 707. 

Guitel, F., Egg-shell of Lepadogaster, 550. 

Gulliver, G., Note on the Minute Structure 
of Pelomyxa palustris, 11, 171. 

Gum-arabie, Substance of -which it is 
formed, 98+. 

eae E., Apochromatic Objectives, 

Giinther, —., The quickest Method for 
Staining Tubercle bacilli, 849. 

Gymnosporangium, Gonidia of, 1010. 


See Contents, 


Ist 


Haacke, W., Nature of Polyparium, 594. 

Haberlandt, G., New Method for Marking 
Root-hairs and for Hardening and 
Staining Plant-cells, 1045. 

Bae and Age of American Tarantula, 

15. 

Haddon, A. C., Larval Actiniz parasitic 
on Hydromeduse, 965. 

Haeckel, E., Radiolaria, 437. 

» System of Siphonophora, 741. 

Hematoxylin, Alcoholic Solution of, 846. 

Copper, Benda’s Modified, 158. 

Method, Weigert’s, as applied to other 
than Nervous Tissues, 674. 

Hemochromometer, Improved, 494. 

Hemoglobin Crystals of Rodents’ Blood, 
198. 

Hemometer, On the Fleischl, 808. 


1089 


Haensch, —., and Schmidt, —., The new 
improved enlarging camera of, 1034. 

Zirconium Light for 
Photomicrograplhy, 1033. 

Haensell, P., Method of Imbedding the 
Hye in Paraffin and Celloidin, 515. 

Hailstones, Bacteria in, 277. 

Hairs, Trigger-, of the Thistle-flower, 452. 

Half-clearing methed of preparing Nerve 
Sections, 680. 

Haliotis, Abnormal Growth in, 561. 

Hallez, P., Embryogeny of Fresh-water 
Dendrocela, 586. 

Halliburton, W. D., Hemoglobin Crystals 
of Rodents’ Blood, 198. ; 

, Methzemoglobin Crystals, 506. 

Hallstén’s (K.) * Compressorium,” 489. 

Halsted, B. D., Three Nuclei in Pollen- 
grains, 440. 

, Trigger-hairs of the Thistle-flower, 
452. 

Hamann, O., Histology of Echinoderms, 
ays), Ee) 

—, Morphology of Ophiurids, 452. 

——, Preparation of Echinodermata, 510. 

, Wandering Primordial Germ-cells in 
Echinoderms, 56. 

Hamilton, D. J., Method of combining 
Weigert’s Heematoxylin-copper Stain 
for Nerve-fibre with the use of the 
Freezing Microtome, 159, 1051. 

Handlirsch, A., Sand-wasps, 30. 

Hanitsch, R., Anatomy and Histology of 
Limax agrestis, 716. 

Hansen, A., Function of the Colouring 
Matter of Chlorophyll, 997. 

, E. C., Analysis of Water used for 
Brewing as regards Micro-organisms, 
685. 

— Moist Chamber, 290. 

, Pure culture of yeast, 830. 

Hanseirg, A., Aerophytic Species of 
Ulotrichacex, 1002. 

——, Alga-flora of Bohemia, 626. 

—.,, Algological ‘studies, 267. 

— , Bacillus muralis, 277, 787. 

——. Cellar Bacteria, 1014. 

——, Classification of Confervoides, 775. 

——, Trochiscia and Tetraedron, 1013. 

Hansgirgia, a genus of aerial Alge, 1003. 

Haplococcus reticulatus, 782, 

Haplodiscus piger, 955. 

Harchek, A., Optometer and apparatus. for 
measuring the foci of, and centering 
optical lenses, 819. 

Hardening Agents, Effect of, on the 
Ganglion-cells of the Spinal Cord, 831. 

Medium for the Brain, Sublimate as 

a, 831. 


| Hardy’s (J. D.) Growing Slide, 489. 


Harless’ Gas Chamber, 288. 

Harmer, 8. F., Embryogeny of Ketoproctous 
Bryozoa, 721. 

Harris and Power, Manual for the Physio- 
logical Laboratory, 166. 


1090 


Hartig, R., Trichospheria paradoxa and 
Herpotrichia nigra, 470. 

Hartlaub, C., Cladonemide, 235. 

Hartnack’s new Objective, 646. 

Hartog, M., Recent Researches on the 
Saprolegniez, 1010. 

, True Nature of the Madreporic Sys- 
tem of Echinodermata, 57. 

Harz, C. O., Oidium Fragarix, 274, 

Haseloff, B., Crystalline Style, 566. 

Hasselberg, B., On the method of deter- 
mining with great accuracy the focal 
length of a system of lenses for different 
rays, 1035. 

Haswell, W. A., Development of Emu. 187. 

, Embryology of Vermilia czspitosa 

and Eupomatus elegans, 578. 

, Temnocephala, 50. 

Hatschek, B., Significance of Sexual Re- 
production, 193. 

Hauck, F., Choristocarpus tenellus, 98. 

—— and Richter’s Phycotheca universalis, 
627. 


Hauptfleisch, P., Cell-membrane and 
Gelatinous Envelope of Desmidiez, 
1004. 


Hauser, G., Sarcina of the Lungs, 634. 

, Staining Spores, 845. 

Haushalter, —., and Spillmann, —., Dis- 
semination of Bacillus by Flies, 635. 

Haustoria of the Rhinanthese and Santa- 
lacez, 250. 

Hay Infusion, Two kinds of Vibrios found 
in decomposing, 100. 

Hayward, k. B., Micromillimetre, 503. 

Heart of Pulmonate Mollusca, Develop- 
ment of, 204. 

Heat, Apparatus for determining Sensi- 
bility to, 114. 

~——. Influence of Radiant, on the De- 
velopment of the Flower, 995. 

Heathcote, F.G., Post-embryonic Develop- 
ment of Julus terrestris, 213, 727. 

Heather’s (J. F.) “Mathematical Instru- 
ments,” 501. 

Heckel, E., Formation of two fertile hy- 
menia in Polyporus applanatus, 629. 

, and F. Schlagdenhauffen, Lati- 
ciferous product of Mimusops and 
Payena, 759. 

Heckert, G., Natural History of Leuco- 
chloridium paradoxum, 49. 

Hegelmaier, F., Formation of Endosperm 
in Dicotyledons, 765. 

HegetschweiJer, —., and Stizenberger; —., 
Lichens on unusual substrata, 96. 

Heidenhain’s Gas Chamber, 288. 

Heimerl, A., Nyctagines, 82. 

Heinricher, E., Congo-red as a Reagent 
for Cellulose, 1053. 

, Structure of Impatiens, 764. 

, Tubular Cells of the Fumariacea, 


co 


io. 
Helix, Reproductive Organs and Oogenesis 
of, 398. 


INDEX. 


Helix Waltoni, Development of, 24. 

Helriegel, —., and Willfarth, —., Absorp- 
tion of Nitrogen by Plants, 770. 

Henking, H., Early Stages in Development 
of Egg of Fly, 573. 

Henning, E. Lateralness in Coniferw, 78. 

Henrici, J. F., Recently-discovered Micro- 
scopes of historic interest, 485. 

Hen’s Egg, ‘T'rematode in white of newly- 
laid, 51. 

Henslow, G., Comparative Anatomy of 
Flowers, 255. 

——,, Transpiration as a Function of Living 
Protoplasm, 456. 

Hensoldt, H., The Microscopical Investiga- 
tion of Rocks, 855, 

(M.) Reading Microscopes, 640. 

Hepatice, Antherozooids of, 461. 

, Distribution of, 264. 

Herdman, W. A., Reproductive Organs of 
Aleyonidium gelatinosum, 208. 

Heredity, 926. 

and Karyokinesis, 554. 

——, Principle of, and the Laws of Me- 
chanics applied to the Morphology of 
Solitary Cells, 926. 

Hernia, Cabbage, 273. 

Hero, Systematic Position of, 718. 

Herouard, E., Caleareous Corpuscles of 
Holothurians, 58. 

Herpotrichia nigra and Trichosphera 
paradoxa, 470. 

Herrick, F. H., Abbreviated Metamor- 
phosis of Alpheus, and its Relation to 
the Condition of Life, 414. 

, Development of Alpheus, 577. 

Hertwig’s (O.) Human and Vertebrate 
Embryology, 710. 

Hertwig, R., Supplementary Report on 
‘ Challenger’ Actiniaria, 965. 

Herxheimer, K., Staining the Elastic 
Fibres of the Skin, 155. 

Hesse, W., On the quantitative determina- 
tion of germs in fluids, 686, 856. 

Heterobasidial Basidiomycetes, 1006. 

Heterodera Schachtii, 953. 

, Integument of, 738. 

—— ——, Structure and Development of, 
737. 

Heterophylly, 253. 

Heteropod Foot, Morphology of, 24. 

Heteropoda and Pteropoda, Musculature 
of, 560. 

Heterostylism and Self-fertilization, 453. 

Heurck, H. v., The new apochromatic 
objectives of Herr Reichert, 1025. 

, Watson and Sons’ Anglo-Continental 
or Student’s Microscope, 797. 

Hevea and Manihot, Laticiferous System 
of, 72. 

Hexactinellida, ‘ Challenger,’ 597, 747. 


Heymann, J. F., Nerve-endings in the 


Leech, 952. 
Hick, T., Physiology of Pheophycesx, 
462. 


- INDEX. 


Hickson, S. J., Sex-cells and Development 
of Millepora, 236. 

, Sexual Cells and Early Stages in 
Development of Millepora plicata, 964. 
Hildebrand, F., Germination of Oxalis 

rubella, 613. 

, Production of Vegetative from Fertile 
Shoots of Opuntia, 768. 

Hildebrandt, H., Comparative Anatomy of 
Ambrosiacese and Senecioidee, 449. 

Hilgendorf’s (F.) Auxanograph, 646. 

Hilger, C., and F. Blochmann, Gonactinia 
prolifera, 593. 

Hillhouse, W., Function of Tannin, 444. 

Hinde, G. J., New Species of Uruguaya, 
748. 

Hippolyte and Palemon, Parasitic Castra- 
tion in the Eucyphotes of, 414. 

Hirudinea, External Morphology of, 950. 

, Vascular System of, 219. 

His, W., and H. Strasser. On the Methods 
of Plastic Reconstruction and their im- 
portance for Anatomy and Embryology, 
686. 

Histology. See Contents, ix. 

Hitcheock, R., May’s Apparatus for mark- 
ing Objects, 113. 

, Reminiscences and notes on recent 

progress, 140. 

The Biological Examination of 
Water, 166. 

Hobbs, W. H., On the use of Microscope 
in Petrography, 523. 

Hochstetter, F., Modification of Schieffer- 
decker’s Celloidin Corrosion Mass, 
159. 

Hodgkinson, A., On the Diffraction of 
Microscopic Objects in Relation to the 
Resolving Power of Objectives, 501. 

Hofer, B., Salivary Glands of Cockroach, 
725. 

Hoffmann, C. K., Origin and Significance 
of the so-called free Nuclei in the Nu- 
trient Yolk of Bony Fishes, 706. 

Héhnel, F. y., Substance of which Gum- 
arabic is formed, 984. 

Holman’s Current Slide, 806. 

Holostomum, 954. 

Holothurians, Calcareous Corpuscles of, 58. 

, New and Old, 591. 

Homogeneous Paraffin, 151. 

Hood, J., Floscularia annulata, 231. 

Hormodendron and Stysanus, 1010. 

Hornbeam and Birch, Spring-sap in, 445. 

Hornberger, R., Spring-sap in the Birch 
and Hornbeam, 445. 

Horologists, Golfarelli’s Micrometrie Mi- 
eroscope for, 103. 

Horst, R., Cardiac Body of Annelids, 418. 

Hot-plate Apparatus, 681. 

-stage, Babes’, 800. 

—— -water Circulation Stage, Scliafer’s 
649. 

Houssay, F., and —., Bataillon, Develop- 
ment of he Axolotl, 707. 


1091 


Houzeau, J. C., Microscope and Telescope, 
820. 

Hovelacque, M., Development and Struc- 
tnre of Orobanche in a young stage, and 
of its suckers, 80. 

——, Propagula of Pinguicula, 764. 

How to work with the Microscope, 324. 

Howchin, W., Additions to the Knowledge 
of the Carboniferous Foraminifera, 533. 

Hoyer, H., Injection-mass for the Vessels 
of the Spleen, 848. 

Hoyle, W. E., General Sketch of the 

~Trematoda, 953. 

Hubrecht, A. A. W., ‘Challenger’ Ne- 
mertea, 52. 

Hudson (C. T.) Illustrations of Pond Life, 
855. 


Hueppe, F., Assimilation in Plants desti- 
tute of Chlorophyll, 455. 

— , Eggs for Cultivation purposes, 827. 

Huizinga’s Gas-chamber, 288. 

Human Distomum, New, 49. 

Embryos, Two Young, 16. 

Ovum, 547. 

Humboldtia laurifolia as a Myrmecophilous 
Plant, 88. 

Hungary, Fossil Diatoms of, 466. 

Hunger, HE. H., Viviparous Plants and 
Apogamy, 768. 

Huth, E., Clinging Plants, 253. 

Hvass, T., On new staining methods in 
the histological study of nerve-tissue, 519. 

Hy, —., Microcheete, 99. 

Hyaloplasm, Nuclear Origin of, 440. 

Hybrid Mosses, 264. 

Hydra, 236. 

Hydride, Development of, 963. 

Hydroids, New Method of Multiplication 
in, 433. 

Hydromeduse, Larval Actiniz parasitic 
on, 965. 

Hydrophilus, Respiration of, 212. 

Hydrurus, Development of, 623. 

Hygroscopic Movements of the Thallus of 
Marchantieee. 1001. 

pela Morphology of the Legs of, 
725. 

——, Poison of, 724. 

Hyphomycetes, Pimina, a new Genus of, 
780. 

—, Polymorphism of, 468. : 

Hyrano, K., Seeds of Pharbitis triloba, 764. 


Ii 


Ide, M., Cell-membrane, 712. 

Thering, H. v., The Orthoneura, 400. 

Ijima, J., Some European Triclades, 229. 

Illuminating. See Contents, xxxiii. 

Illumination of Objects in Photomicro- 
graphy, 1033. 

Illuminator, Vertical and Lamp, 650. 

Illustrations of Pond-life, 855. 

—— to Microscopical Publications, 521. 

Imbedding. See Coutents, xxxviii. 


1092 


Imhof, O. E., Fauna of Mosses, 199. 

Immich, E., Development of Stomata, 247. 

Impatiens, Structure of, 764. 

Impregnation, Division of the Nucleus, 
and Cell-division, 600, 

, Partial, 709. 

Incandescent Gas-burner, On the Auer, 
495. 

Incrustation of the Cell-wall of Acetabu- 
laria, 463. 

Indexing Microscopical Slides, 320. 

Indian Ink, Injection with, 848. 

Infecting, Apparatus for, 829. 

Infection of a Frog-tadpole by Saprolegnia 
ferax, 272. 

Inflorescence, Axis of, 79. 

Inflorescences and Branches, Anatomy of 
Annual, 451. 

Infusoria flagellata, New, from American 
Fresh Waters, 698. 

—, Fresh-water, of the United States, 
598. 


—, , of Wellington District, 
New Zealand, 972. 

, Further Observations on Multi- 

nuclear, 750. 

, Multinucleate, 597. 

——, New Fresh-water, 65. 

—, New Parasitic, 436. 

, Researches on Ciliated, 751. 

Infusorian, New Parasitie Ciliated, 971. 

Inheritance of Acquired Characters, 193. 

Injecting. See Contents, xxxviii. 

Innervation of Crabs’ Claws, 947. 

Inosite, 72. 

Insect relations of Asclepiadex, 82, 

Slides, Enock’s, 523. 

Insecta. See Contents, xii. 

Insects, Section-cutting applied to, 152. 

Instantaneous Photomicrography, 651, 811. 

Tntercoxal Lobe of certain Crayfishes, 577. 

Intestinal Epithelium of Ascaris, 583. 

, Secreting cells of, 555. 

Intestine and digestive Glands of Decapods, 
729. 

, Cleansing the, of many animals 
of sand, 1044. 

Intussusception, Growth by, 557. 

Iodine, Blue Coloration of Fungi by, 628. 

Tron-bacteria, 786. 

Pyrites, Measuring Corrosion Surfaces 
in, 803. 

Irpex fusco-violaceus, Fr., and Polyporus 
abietinus, Fr., Identity of, 468. 

Irritability of Growing Parts of Plants, 
615. 

—— of Spermatozoa of Frog, 707. 

of the Stamens of Echinocactus, 261. 

Irritation, Movements of, 259. 

, of Multicellular Organs, 615. 

Ischikawa, C., and A. Weismann, Forma- 
tion of Polar Globules in Animal Ova, 
705, 

—— ——,, Partial Impregnation, 709. 

Isoetes, Systematic Position of, 773. 


INDEX. 


Isotonie Coefficient of Glycerin, 617. 

Israel (O.) and M. Stenglein’s Photomicro- 
graphie Microseope, 115. 

Istvanffi, G., Structure of Ulothrix, 1003. 

Italian Microscopical Society, 655. 


J. 


Jackman, W. §., Mounting Tape-worms, 
314. 

Jackson, R. §., Catching fixed forms of 
Animal] life on transparent media for 
Study, 830. 

Jacobi, E., Hardening and Staining Plate- 
cultivations, 848. 

Preparation of Nutritive Media, 655. 

Jacquemin, G., Saccharomyces ellipsoideus 
and its Use in the Preparation of Wine 
from Barley, 785. 

Jakimovitch, J., Axis-cylinder and Nerve- 
cells, 556. 

Jaksch, R. V., Diagnosis of internal 
diseases, 1060. 

James, F. L., Apochromatie Objectives, 
286. 

Clinical Microscopical Technology, 


——,, Medico-legal Identification of Blood- 

stains, 521. 

, Nobert’s Bands, 501. — 

—. Physicians and the Microscope, 523. 

, Stain for the Morphological Ele- 

ments in Urine, 845. 

, Teasing-needle, 520. 

Janczewski, Ed., Germination of Anemone 
apennina, 613. 

Jannicke, W., Comparative Anatomy of 
Geraniace, 75. 

Janosik, J., Histology of the Ovary, 713. 

—-, Two Young Human Embryos, 16. 

Janse, J. M., Permeability of Protoplasm, 
601. 

— , Plasmolysis of Algm, 93. 

Japan, Echinoidea of, 431. 

Jatta, G., Olfactory Ganglia of Cephalo- 
pods, 931. 

Jena Optical Glass, 486. 

Jensen, O. 8., Spermatogenesis, 16. 

Jerusalem Artichoke, Germination of the 
Tuber of, 613. 

Jeserich, P., Photomicrography by the 
bromo-silver gelatin process, 296. 

Jeserich’s Focusing Arrangement, 1031. 

Photomicrographie Apparatus, 1029. 

Jickeli, C. F., Nervous System of Echino- 
dermata, 741. 

Joblot’s Microscope, 640. 

Johannsen, W., Localization of Emulsin 
in Almonds, 247. 

—, Oxidation process in Plants after 
death, 88. 

Johanson, C. J., Taphrina, 470. 

Johnson, T., Arceuthobium, 991. 

——, Procarp and Cystocarp of Gracilaria, 
622. 


INDEX. 


Jordan, K. F., Physiological Organo- 
graphy of Flowers, 256. 

Joseph, —, Histology of Nerve-fibres, 395. 

Jost, L., Development of the Flowers of 
the Mistletoe, 990. 

, Respiratory Organs, 76. 

Jourdain, 8., Machilis maritima, 408. 

Jourdan, H., Preparing and Staining 
Annelida, 662. 

Joyeux-Laffuie, J., Delagia Chzetopteri, 
936. 


, Nervous System of Cheetop- 
terus Valencinii, 225. 

—— - ——,, New Genus of Bryozoa, 403. 

Joynson, H., Indian Fibres, 495. 

Judd, J. W., Microscopy and the Study of 
Rocks, 820. 

Juel, O., Anatomy of Maregraviacee, 449. 

Julus, Brain of, 408. 

Jullien, J., Cristatella mucedo, 936. 

, Movement of Polypides in Zocecia 
of Bryozoa. 936. 

— terrestris, Post-embryonic Develop- 
ment of, 213, 727. 

Jumelle, H., Seeds with Two Integuments, 
992. 

Juncez, Roots and Rootlets in, 251. 

Jungermanniex, Epiphytic, 92. , 


K. 


Kaczander, J., Relation of Medullary 
Canal and Primitive Streak, 15. 

Kaiser’s gelatin, Adaptation of, for arrang- 
ing Microscopic preparations in rows, 680. 

Kalide, G., Musculature of Heteropoda and 
Pteropoda, 560. 

Karsten, G., Production of Gemmez by 
Fegatella, 92. 

——, H., Classification and Description of 
Fungi, 628. 

Karyolkinesis and Heredity, 554. 

in its Relation to Fertilization, 928. 

— in Lepidoptera, 571. 

of Kuglypha, 66. 

Karyokinetic Figures, Demonstrating, 516. 

, Staining, 1050. 

Kastschenko, N., A short note in reference 
to my method, 686. 

Katz, O., Improved Method for Culti- 
vating Micro-organisms on Potatoes, 142. 

, Phosphorescent Bacteria from Sea- 
water, 101. 

Keller, C. C., Isolating Foraminifera, 664. 

, Purification of Tolu Balsam for 

Microscopical Purposes, 681. 

, RK. Size and Colour of Alpine 
Flowers, 452. 

Kellicott, D. S., Pres. Amer. Soc. Micr., 
Memoir of, 305. 

, Presidential Address to the American 
Society of Microscopists, 1060. 

Kerber, A., Determination of the princi- 
pal image-plane, &e., 1036. 

Kertesz, A., The Anilin stains, 1056. 


1093 


Kessler, H. F., Aphides, 727. 

Ketel, F., Lemanea, 93. 

Khawkine, M. W., Principle of Heredity 
and the Laws of Mechanics applied to 
the Morphology of Solitary Cells, 926. 

Kibbler’s, —, Photomicrographic Micro- 
scope, 529. 

Kidney Disease and the Microscope, 138. 

of Monotocardate Prosobranch 

Gastropods, 399. 

of Prosobranch Gastropods, Compara- 
tive Histology of Glandular Epithelium 
of, 715. 

Kienitz-Gerloff, F., Gonidia of Gymno- 
sporangium, 1010. 

Killing contractile Animals in a state of 
extension, Method of, 1044. 

Kinetic Phenomena of the Egg during 
Maturation and Fecundation, 546. 

King, C. M., Indian Fibres, 495. 

, J. D., Preparation and Mounting of 
Ferns, 665. 

Kingsley, J. S., Development of the Com- 
pound Eye of Crangon, 34. 

, Methods of Studying Development 
of Eye of Crangon, 148. 

Kitasato, S., Spirillum concentricum, a 
new species from decomposing blood, 
278. 

Kitt, T., On Photomicrographs, 651. 

Kitton, F., New Species of Biddulphia 
from Fiji, 466. 

Klaatsch, H., Radial Micrometer, 293. 

——, Staining of Ossification Prepara- 
tions, 154. 

Klausch, P., Leaves of Bupleurum, 608. 

Klebahn, H., Peridermium Pini, 1009. 

, Zygospores of Conjugate, 1002. 

Klebs, G., Albumen in the Cell-wall, 69. 

, Physiology of the Cell, 758. 

Klein, L., Contributions to the technique 
of permanent microscopical preparations, 
834. 

——, Excursion Microscope, 1020. 

——., Preparation of Fresh-water Algz, 
1046. 

, Technique of microscopical perma- 

nent preparations, 1047. 

, O., Axis of the Inflorescence, 79. 

Kleinenberg on Development of Lopado- 
rhynchus, 579. 

Klemensiewicz, R., A culture-chamber for 
low temperatures, 831. 

Kndsel’s Photomicrographs, 296. 

Knowles, EH. L., “ Curl” of Peach-leaves, 
89. 

Kniippel, A., Salivary glands of Insects, 
211 


Koch A., Endosporous Bacteria, 1014. 

, G. v., Flabellum, 963. 

——, Gorgonidee of Naples, 435. 

—, L., Biology of Orobanche, 85. 

, Organs for the absorption of vege- 
table food-material by plants containing 
chlorophyll, 249. 


1094 


Koch's Cultivation Plates, Simple Method 
for reproducing, 827. 

and Max Wolz’s Reflector, 105. 

Koehler, R., Form and Development of 
Spermatozoa in Murex, 200. 

—, Mode of Investigating Echino- 
rhynchi, 509. 

, Structure of Echinorhynchi, 422. 

Kolessnikoff, —., and J. Tarchanoff, Al- 
kaline Egg-albumen as a Medium for 
Bacteria Cultivation, 503. 

Kolossow, A., Osmic Acid and Gold 
Chloride Methods, 846. 

Korotneff, A. de, Development of Hy- 
dridx, 963. 

, Spermatogenesis, 27. 

in Aleyonella, 566. 

Korschelt, E., Egg-membranes of Insects, 
722. 

, Relation between the Function and 
Position of the Nucleus, 601. 

Kossel, A., Chemistry of the Nucleus, 390. 

Kotlarewsky, A., Micro-Chemistry of 
Nerve-cells, 713. 

, Preparation of Nerve-cells and Peri- 
pheral Ganglia, 505. 

Kowalewsky, N., Action of Methyl-blue 
on Mammals, 1057. 

Krabbe, G., Formation of Annual Rings 
in Wood, 75. 

, Structure and Growth of the Cell- 
wall, 441. 

Krapelin, K., Fresh-water Polyzoa, 566. 

Krasan, F., Retrogression in Oaks, 88. 

Krasser, F., Albuminous reaction of Cell- 
wall, 602. 

, Heterophylly, 253. 

Split Xylem in Clematis, 248. 

Brcucler. U, Assimilation and Expiration 
of Plants, 768. 

;— and Respiration of Plants, 
258. 

Kronfeld, M.; Apparatus for inclosing 
microscopical preparations of botanical | 
objects mounted in glycerin, 851. 

, Biology of the Mistletoe, 86. 

——, Double Leaves, 253. 

Reagent for Albuminoids, 165. 

Krukenberg, C. F. W., Colours of Corals, 
60. 

——,, Influence of Salinity, 60. 

, Nervous Tracts in Aleyonids, 61. 

Kriiss, A., Prism-combinations of cale- | 
spar for mixing and comparing light- 
pencils, 1029. 

Krysinski, — 
834. 

Kiihne, H., Microscopical Demonstration | 
of Bacteria in Animal Tissues, 315, 856, 
1060. 

—, W., Staining Nerve-endings with 
Gold Chloride, 673. 

Kiihne’s Gas Chamber, 288. 

Kiikenthal, —., Cleansing the Intestine of | 
many animals of sand, 1044. 


., Photoxylin for Imbedding, 


INDEX. 


Kiikenthal, W., Preparing the Nervous 
System of Opheliacez, 509. 

, Experiments on Earthworms, 580. 

Kulagin, N, Russian Lumbricide, 581. 

Kultschitzky, N., Fertilization of Ascaris, 
583, 736. 

——, Methods of Fixing and Preserving 
Animal Tissues, 510. 

Kiindig, J., Development of the Sporan- 
gium of Polypodiacesw, 459. 

Kiinstler, J., Diplocystis Schneideri, 68. 

, Method of Preparing Tegumentary 

Filaments of Flagellata, 832. 


—_, New Foraminifer, 437. 


——, New Remarkable Worms, 428. 

—, Technique of Bacteria, 151. 

——, Vesicular Elements of Protoplasm 
in Protozoa, 748. 

Kupffer, C., Development of the Lamprey, 
708. 


L. 


L., A. 8.. Differential Screw Slow Motion, 
110. 

——,, Inquiry as to the best proportion of 
Eye-piece to Objective, 487. 

, Powers of Eye-pieces, 501. 

Labellum, Sensitive, of Masdevallia mus- 
cosa, 616. 

Laboulbéne, A., Larval Stage of Species 
of Ascaris, 40. 

Lacaze-Duthiers, H. de, Classification of 
Gastropods, based on the Arrangement 
of the Nervous System, 401. 

——, Nervous System of Aplysia, 20. 

Type of Anthozoa, 745. 

— , Testacella, 562. 

and G. Pruvot, Larval Anal Eye in 
Opisthobranch Gastropods, 19. 

—, Robin’s, and Farabeeut’s Injecting 
Syringes, 678. 

Lachmann, —., Pitcher-like leaflets of 
Staphylea pinnata, 253. 

Lactic Acid, Application of, to the Ex- 
amination of Algze, 666. 

Lagerheim, G., Application of Lactie Acid 
to the Examination of Algze, 666. 

, Development of Contervacee, 266. 

of Hydrurus, 623. 

——,, New Pleurocapsa, 78+. 

ia, 782. 

, Uronema, a new genus of Chloro- 

zoospores, 626. 


> 


Lahille, F., Central Nervous System of ~ 


Tunicata, 26. 


| Lake District, English, Fresh-water Alge 


of, kL 

Lamb, D. S., Technique of Frozen Ana- 
tomical Sections, 1047. 

Lameere, A., Abnormal Ova of Ascaris 
megalocephala, 953. 

| Lamellibranchiata. See Contents, xi. 

Laminariex, Sieve-tubes in, 265. 

Lamp and Vertical Illuminator, 650. 


INDEX. 


Lamplight or Daylight for Microscopical 
Observation, 302. 

Lamprey, Development of, 708. 

Lamps for Microscopical Work, 807. 

, Magnesium, 494. 

, schieck’s Microscope, 490. 

Lancaster’s Gas Chamber, 290. 

Lanice conchilega, Nephridia of, 739. 

Lankester, E. R., Coelom and Vascular 
System of Mollusca and Arthropoda, 
395. 

Lantern Microscope, The Advantages and 
Deficiencies of, 646. 

— Shdes, Making, 305. 

—, Photomicrography and _ the 
making of, 652. 

Larva of Culex, 212. 

of Sarcophila Woblfartii in Gum of 
Man, 944. 

Larve and Hges of Teleosteans, 191, 925. 

Larval Anal Eye in Opisthobranch Gastro- 
pods, 19. 

Stage of Species of Ascaris, 45. 

Lateral Organs, 587. 

of Nemerteans, 51. 

— Rootsin Monocotyledones, Formation 
of, 762 

Latham, V. A., Preparing Sections of Buds, 
oll, 

—, The Microscope and How to Use It, 
322, 523, 1060. 

, Lo prepare the Head of a Flea. 
Mounting Tongues of Flies, 511. 

Laticiferous product of Mimusops and 
Payena, 759. 

—— System of Manihot and Hevea, 72. 

Laurent, E., Organic nourishment of Beer- 
ferment, 785. 

Laurie, M., Organ of Verrill in Loligo, 
932. : 


Laux, W., Vascular Bundles 
Rhizome of Monocotyledons, 74. 

Lawes, J. B., and J. H. Gilbert, Sources 
of the Nitrogen of Vegetation, 261. 

Leach, W., The Lantern Microscope, 646. 

Leaf, Duration of the Apical Growth of, 
455. 

—— of Dionza, Electromotive Properties 
of, 995. 


in the 


Leaf-fall, Phenomenon analogous to, 88. 

-stalk, Anatomy of, 448. 

—— - ——,, Growth of, 258. 

of Aralia, Thickening of the 
Cell-walls in, 70. 

Leaflets, Pitcher-like, of Staphylea pin- 
nata, 253. 

Leaves and Fruits, Colours of, 254. 

, Double, 253. 

——, Evergreen, 
983. 

——, Formation of Oxalate of Lime in, 
444, 

, Influence of Light on the Form and 

Structure of, 84. 


Reserve-substances in, 


of Mimosa pudica, Movement of, 457. - 


1095 


Leaves, Influence of Light on the Growth 
of, 614. 

of Bupleurum, 608. 

of certain of the Conifer, Structure 

of, 451. 

of Orchidez, Anatomical Structure 

of, 608. 

of Polypodiacez, 619. 

—— of Sigillaria and Lepidodendron, 263. 

—— of some Coniferee, Influence of Climate 
on the Cuticularization and Thickening 
of, 608. 

, Peach, “ Curl” of, 89. 

, Permeability of the Epidermis of, to 

Gases, 448, 763. 

, Vernation of, 252. 

Leblois, A., Secretory Canals and Secretory 
Reservoirs, 604. 

Leclere du Sablon, —., Antherozooids of 
Cheilanthes hirta, 999. 

——, —— of Hepatice, 461. 

——, Haustoria of the Rhinantheze and 
Santalaceze, 250. 

, Root-hairs of the Rhinanthezx, 450. 

, Selaginella lepidophylla, 620. 

Lecomte, H., Effects produced by the 
Annular Decortication of Trees, 447. 

Lee, A. B., Spermatogenesis in Cheto- 
gnatha, 227. 

Leech, Nerve-endings in, 952. 

, Salivary Glands of, 38. 

Leeuwenhoek’s Discovery of Micro-organ- 
isms, 522. 

Legs of Hymenoptera, Morphology of, 725. 

Leguminosez and EHricacez, Super-endo- 
dermal Network of the Root of, 986. 

, Periderm of, 606. 

—, Root-tubercles, of, 251. 

, Tubercles on the Roots of, 608. 

Lehmann, O., Apparatus for Microphysical 
Investigations, 292. 

—, Homology of Segmental Organs and 
Efferent Ducts of Genital Products in 
Oligocheeta, 419. 

—, Molecular physics, with 
reference to microscopical 
tions, 1036. 

, Photomicrography of Chemical Pre- 
parations, 293. 

Leidy, J., Hydra, 236. 

Leigh’s, R., Preserving Blood-corpuscles 
for Microscopical Examination, 1041. 
Leitgeb, H., Incrustation of the Cell-wall 

of Acetabularia, 463. é. 

Leitz’s Demonstration Microscope, 794. 

small Photomicrographic Apparatus, 
650. 

Lemanea, 93, 464. 

Lemoine, V., Brain of Phylloxera, 408. 

Lemons, New Disease of, 98. 

Lenhossék’s (J. v.) Polymicroscope, 104. 

Lennox, —., Observations on the histology 
of the Retina by means of the Weigert 
staining method, 519. 

Lepadogaster, Egg-shell of, 550. 


special 
investiga- 


1096 


Lepas, First changes in Fecundated Ovam 
of, 218. 

Lepidodendron and Sigillaria, Leaves of, 
263. 

Lepidoptera, German, Scent-organs of, 406. 

, Karyokinesis in, 571. 

— , Nerve-terminations in, 943. 

Lepidopterous Laryve, Secretion of Pure 
Aqueous Formic Acid by, for the Pur- 
poses of Defence, 405. 

Lepra and Tubercle Bacilli, Staining, 157, 
846. 

Lerneascus and the Philichthyde, 217. 

Letalle, —, Process of stable staining of 
amyloid matter by means of eosin and 
caustic potash, 1057. 

Lettsom, —., Death of, 170. 

Leucochloridium paradoxum, Natural His- 
tory of, 49. 

Levi, G. B., Venetian Chlorophycex, 627. 

Lewin, A., Baumgarten’s Method of Triple- 
staining, 676. 

Lewin, M., Germination cf Monocoty- 
ledons, 767. 

Lewis’s (T. R.) Moist Slide, 291. 

, Collected Papers of, 522. 

Leydig, F., Amcebocytes of Crustacea, 949. 

——, Animal Ovum, 13. 

, Cells and Tissues, 710. 

Lichen-forming Ascomycetes, Culture of, 
without Alge, 466, 829. 

Lichenes. See Contents, xxix. 

Liebermann, L., Embryovhemical Investi- 
gations, 551. 

Liebscher, G., Supply of Food Con- 
stituents at Different Periods of the 
Growth of Plants, 614. 

Lierau, M., Roots of Aracesz, 607. 

Life, New Mode of, among Medusa, 591. 

Life-box, Rousselet’s, 112. 

Light, Action of, on Roots grown in Water, 
995. 

—, Influence of, on Oxidation, 714. 


—. , on the Growth of Leaves, 614. . 

—, , on the Form and Structure of 
Leaves, 84. 

——, ——, upon Protoplasmic Movement, 
242. 


Lighton, W. R., Notes on Staining Vege- 
table Tissues, 159. 

Lignier, O., Importance of the Foliar 
Fibrovascular System in Vegetable 
Anatomy, 985. 

Ligules and Stomata of Selaginella, 460. 

arg agrestis, Anatomy and Histology 
of, 716. 

Lime, Formation of Oxalate of, in Leaves, 
444. 

Limpricht, K. G., Rabenhorst’s ‘ Crypto- 
gamic Flora of Germany ” (Musci), 91. 

Linckia multipora, Gemmation in, 431. 

os C., Pollination of Alpine Plants, 

Lindner, P., Stained Yeast-preparations, 
156, 519. 


INDEX. 


Linton, E., Cestoid Embryos, 46. 

, Trematode in white of newly-laid 
Hen’s Egg, 51. 

List, J. H., Double Staining, 847. 

Lister, A., Plasmodium of Badhamia and 
Brefeldia, 783. 

Live-box and Small Portable Binocular 
Microscope, 110. 

Living Preparations, Staining, 515. 

Lizard, Embryology of, 548. 

Loasacez, Morphology and Anatomy, 453. 

Locomotion, Aquatic, 19. 

of Caterpillars, Mode of, 726. 

Loeb, J., Influence of Light on Oxidation, 
714, 

Loew, O., Action of Formose on Cells 
destitute of Starch, 85. 

,and T. Bokorny, Chemico-physio- 

logical Study of Alge, 463. 

» —, Presence of active Albumen 
in the Cell-sap, 246. 

Logwood Stain, Acid, 517. 

Lohrer, O., Comparative Anatomy of Roots, 


io. 

Loligo, Organ of Verrill in, 932. 

Longard, T., H. Buchner, and G. Riedlin, 
Method of calculating the rapidity of 
Bacterial Increase, 682. 

Loomis, H. P., Simple and Rapid Staining 
of the Tubercle Bacillus, 1053. 

Lo; ado: hynchus, Kleinenberg on Develop- 
ment of, 579. 

Loranthacex, Formation of Roots in, 450. 

Lost Parts, Reproduction of, 414. 

Lothelier, A, Spines of certain Plants, 
989. 

Louisville Microscopical Club, 304. 

Love-lights of Luciola, 30. 

Lowenthal, N., Demonstrating the Retien- 
lated Protoplasm in the Interstitial Cells 
of the Ovary, 311. 

Liibimoff, N., Staining Tubercle and 
Leprosy Bacilli, 846. 

Luciani, L., and A. Piutti, Respiration of 
Silk-worm Ova, 726. 

Luciola, Love-lights of, 30. 

Ludwig, H., New and Old Holothurians, 
991. 

Lugger, O., A New Method of Preserving 
Transparent Aquatic Insects for the 
Microscope, 667. 

Lukjanow, 8. M., Intestinal Epithelium of 
Ascaris, 583. 

—, Morphology of the Cell, 17. 

—, Nuclei of Muscle-cells, 18. 

Lumbricide, Larval and Definite Excre- 
tory Systems in, 220. 

——, Russian, 581. 

Lumbricus, Germ-bands of, 38. 

Luminosity of Fungi, 777. 

Luminous Marine Animals, Role of Sym- 
biosis in, 929. 

Lundstrém, A. N., Colourless Oil-plastids 
in Potamogeton, 984. 

——, Domatia, 87. 


INDEX. 


Lundstrom, A. N., Masked Fruits, 79. 

, Mycodomatia in the Roots of Papi- 

lionaceze, 450. 

, Myrmecophilous Plants, 87. 

Lung, Preparing large Sections of, 1048. 

Lungs, Sarcina of, 63+. 

Lupin, Development of Aleurone-grains 
in, 982. 

Lutz, A., Life-history of Ascaris lumbri- 
coides and Teenia elliptica, 426. 

Lycopodium, Life-history of, 262. 

Lymphatic Cell, Fusion of, into Plasmodia, 
555. 

Lyngbya and Phormidium, Relationship 
between, 784. 

Lyon, F. M., Dehiscence of the Sporangium 
of Ferns, 90. 


M. 


Macallum, A. B., and Wright, R. R., 
Methods of studying Sphyranura, 149. 

; » Sphyranura osleri, 47. 

M'‘Cassey, G. H., Microscopy and Histology 
for Office Students, 686. 

Macchiati, L., Preparation of Pure Chloro- 
phyll, 245. 

M‘Cook, H.C., Age and Habits of American 
Tarantula, 215. 

, New Orb-weaving Spider, 412. 

——.,, Relations of Structure and Function 
to Colour Changes in Spiders, 945. 

——, Sense of Direction in Formica rufa, 


MacDonnell, —., Exhibition of Slides, 
682. 

Macé, E., Cultures of Cladothrix dicho- 
toma, 784. 

MacGillivray, P. H., Polyzoa of Victoria, 
403. 


Machilis maritima, 408. 

McIntire, 8. J., Another Evening at the 
Royal Microscopical Society, 141. 

wane The Quekett Microscopical Club, 

Mackay, W. J., Intercoxal Lobe of certain 
Crayfishes, 577. 

MacLeod, J., Fertilization of Flowers, 82. 

MacMunn, ©. A., Chromatology of 
Sponges, 595. 

M‘Nab, W. R., Stomata and Ligules of 
Selaginella, 460. 

Maddox’s Moist Slide, 291. 

Madreporaria, Anatomy of, 43+. 

Madreporic System of Echinodermata, 
True Nature of, 57. 

Madreporite of Cribrella ocellata, 431. 

Magnesium Lamps, 494. 

Magnification in Photomicrographs, 652. 

of Microscopic Objects in the Pro- 
jected Images, Method of Representing 
and Calculating, 135. 

Magnifying Power, Highest, 819. 

ee of Objectives, Measurement of, 


LOST 


Magnus, P., Pollination of Silene inflata, 
4 


——.,, Self-pollination of Spergularia salina, 
994. 

— , Schinzia, 631. 

, Sterility of Fungi, 467. 

Mal nero of the Vine, 762. 

Malassez, L., Hot Plate Apparatus, 681. 

, Hot Stage, 488. 

——, Improved hemochromometer, 494. 

——, Tubes for Microspectroscopic Ana- 
lysis, 807. 

Male Appendages on Female Crabs, 730. 

Mall, F. P., First Branchial Cleft of 
Chick, 387. 

Mallard, E., Bertrand’s Refractometer, 
291. 

Malvacez, &c., Comparative Anatomy of, 
606. 

Mammalian Ovaries, Preparing, 662. 

— Ovum, Polar Globule of, 186. 

Testicle, Preparing and Staining, 844. 

Mammals, Action of methyl-blue on, 1057. 

——, Spermatogenesis of, 547, 707. 

Man, Ancestry of, 193. 

—, Larva of Sarecophila Wohlfartii in 
Gum of, 944. 

— , Protozoa, Parasitic in, 240. 

, Tenia cucumerina in, 955. 

Mancinia areolata, Development of, 434. 

Manfredi, L., Fatty Matters in Cultivation 
Media, 504. 

Mangeri, C., On the preparation of gelatin 
from agar-agar, 1040. 

Mangin, L., Development of Flowers in 
the Bud, 610. 

——, Permeability of the Epidermis of 
Leaves to Gases, 448, 763. 

Manihot and Hevea, Laticiferous System 
of, 72. 

Manipulation, White’s Elementary Micro- 
scopical, 165. 

Mantle of Gastropods and Dependent 
Organs, 399. 

Manton, W. P., Rudiments of Practical 
Embryology, being working notes, with 
simple methods for beginners, 315, 523, 
667, 856, 1060. 

——, and others, Photomicrography, 495. 

—, , Modern Methods of Imbedding, 
842. 

——, ——, Sub-staye Condensers, 1029 

,——, Use and Abuse of the Micro- 
scope, 822. : 

Marcacci, A., Influence of Movement on 
Developing Eggs, 193. 

Marcgraviacee, Anatomy of, 449. 

Marchal, P., Excretion in Brachyurous 
Crustacea, 216. 

Marchanties, Hygroscopic Movements of 
the Thallus of, 1001. 

Marenzeller, E. v.. Growth of Flabellum, 
237. 

Marilaun, A. K. v., Fertilization of Eu- 
phrasia, 767. ~ 


1098 


Marine Alge, Crystalloids in, 463. 

Marking Objects, May’s Apparatus for, 
113. 

Marktanner’s (T.) 
Cameras, 117. 

Marloth, R., Salt-excreting Glands of 
Tamariscinex, 249. 

M: arshall, A.M., and G. H. Fowler, ‘ Poreu- 
pine ’ Pennatulida, 745. 

, Development of the Frog, 925. 

— ., ©. F., Methods of Preparing Muscle 
for investigation, 147. 

Marsson, H., Preparing Styrax Balsam, 
1057. 

Marsupials, Spermatogenesis of, 586. 

Martinotti, C., Improvements in the Silver- 
nitrate Method for Staining Nervous 
Tissue, 84+. 

Martinotti, G., Absorption of Anilin Pig- 
ments by living Animal Cells, 1055. 

, Nitrate of Silver Method, 319. 

—, and L. Resegotti, Demonstrating 
Karyokinetic Figures, 516. 

Masdevallia muscosa, Sensitive Labellum 
of, 616. 

Maskell, W. M., Fresh-water Infusoria of 
Wellington District, New Zealand, 972. 
—, Note on Micrasterias americana, 

Ralfs, and its Varieties, 7, 169. 

Massalongo, C., Distribution of Hepatice, 
264. 

Massart, J., Chemotactic Movements of 
Bacteria, Flagellata, and Volvocine, 
(ii 

——.,, Irritability of Spermatozoa of Frog, 


Photomicrographic 


707. 

Massee, G., Calostoma, Desv. (Mitremyces 
Nees), 780. 

——, Gasterolichenes, 95. 

—,, Growth and Origin of Multicellular 
Plants, 83. 

—, On the Type cf a new Order of 
Fungi—Matuleex, 173, 335. 

—, Revision of the genus Boyista, 629. 

, Sexual Organs in Acidium, 782. 

‘Mathematical Instruments,’ Heather’s, 
501. 

Mattirolo, O., Hygroscopic Movements of 
the Thallus of Marchantiex, 1001. 

— and L. Buscalioni, Root-tubercles of 
Leguminose, 251. 


Matules, The Type of a New Order of | 


Fungi, 335. 
Maupas, E., Conjugation of Paramecium, 
65. 


of Vorticellide, 752. 
May's Apparatus for Marking Objects, 


ee Roots and Rootlets in, 251. 

Mayall, J., jun., Lectures on the Micro- 
scope, 140. 

—, Necessity for a Sub-stage, 1024. 

—, The Modern Microscope, 1036. 

——, Recent Improvements of the Micro- 
scope: a Visit to Jena, 304, 


INDEX. 


Mayer, A., Exhalation of Oxygen by 
Fleshy-leaved Plants in absence of 
Carbonie Anhydride, 85. 

, P., Fixing Sections, 159. 

, 8., Histological Pocket-book, 686. 

——,, Large Form of Abbe Camera Lucida, 
113. 

—, Microtechnique, 686. 

Mayet, —, Artificial Serum for Computa- 
tion of Blood-corpuscles, 162. 

, Improved Method for Enumerating 
Blood-corpuscles, 854. 

Measurement of Magnifying - power of 
Objectives, 135. 

Measuring Thin Films, 501. 

Meat, Determination of the Number of 
Trichin or other Animal Parasites in, 
164. 

Meat-examining Microscope, Schieck’s, 


793. 

Meates, A. E., Medium of High Refractive 
Index, 519. 

Medicine, Photomicrography in, 119. 

Media, Cultivation, Fatty Matters in, 
504. 

—. of Schizomycetes in Coloured 
Nutritive, 823. 

Medical Microscopical Society of Brooklyn, 
304. 

Medicinal Solutions, Thallophytes in, 459. 

Medicine, The Microscope in, 654. 

Medico-legal Identification of Blood-stains, 
520. 

Mediterranean Echinids, Researches on 
Dorocidaris papillata and other, 430. 

—— Synaptide, 233. 

Medium, Alkali-albuminate as a Nutrient, 
825. 

— of High Refractive Index, 519. 

, Milk as a, 1038. 

Medullary Canal and Primitive Streak, 
Relation of, 15. 

Medusz, Acraspedote, Scyphistomata of, 
965. 

—,, Are there Deep-sea? 236. 

—, New Mode of Life among, 591. 

—— from New England, 592. 

Meehan, T., Irritability of the Stamens of 
Echinocactus, 261. 

Megastoma entericum, 599. 

intestinale, Encystation of, 439. 

Mégnin, P., Fauna of the Tombs, 32. 

Meissner, M., Physiology of Nutrition in 
Protozoa, 749. 

Meloe, Germinal Layers of, 942. 

Membrane, Protoplasm, and Nucleus of 
Plant-cells, Properties and Changes of, 
980. 

Membranes, Eternod’s 
Stretching, 163. 

Men and Animals, New Pathogenic Micro- 
phyte in, 634. 

Menozzi, A., Chemistry of Germination, 
767. 

Mental Powers of Spiders, 575. 


Apparatus for 


—_——s SC 


INDEX. 


Menze, O., Daily Assimilation of Carbo- 
hydrates, 994. 

Mer, E., Causes which produce Eccen- 
tricity of the Pith in Pines, 761. 

, Formation of the Duramen, 446.” 

, Influence of Exposure on the Forma- 
tion of the Annual Rings in the Savin, 
762. 

Mergier, G. E., Practical Treatise on 
Physical Manipulations for Students in 
Medicine, 819. 

Metamorphosis, Alimentary Canal in, 943. 

Metanil-yellow, 677. 

Metastasis, Tannin and its connection with, 
984. 

Methzemoglobin Crystals, 506. 

Methyl-blue, Action of, on Mammals, 
1057. 

-——, Contribution to the Physio- 

logical Reaction of, 849. 

-green for observing the Chemical 
Reaction and Death of Cells, 1049. 

Methylen-blue Reaction, Vital, of Cell- 
granules, 842. 

, Staining Nerve-endings with, 


515. 
Iodide, Simple Method for Clearing, 
7 


677. 

Meyer, E., Organization of Annelids, 222. 

Mica Stage, Edmonds’s Automatic, 111, 
171. 

Michael, A. D., British Oribatide, 412. 

, Parasitism, 503. 

—, Rhodium Oil, 167. 

Michaelsen, W., Enchytreide, 40. 

—, New Enchytreide, 736. 

Michaud, G., Alkaloid and Sugar in 
Cyclamen, 759. 

Michel, A., Fusion of Lymphatic Cells into 
Plasmodia, 555. 

Micrasterias americana, Ralfs, and its 
Varieties, 7, 169. 

Microbe, Chromo-aromatic, 634. 

, Pathogenic chromo-aromatic, 1017. 
Microbes, Presence of a Phlogogenous 
Matter in the Cultures of certain, 634. 

Microbiology, Practical Manual of, 686. 

Microchete, 99, 275. 

Micro-chemical Tests for Callus, 323. 

-chemistry of Neryve-cells, 712. 

Micrometer, Radial, 293. 

Micrometers, Screw, of Reading-Micro- 
scopes, Testing, 814. 

Micrometric Measurements, Variation in, 
due to different Illumination, 814. 

— Microscope for Horologists, Galfa- 
relli’s, 103. 

Micromillimetre, 502, 652. 

Micro-organisms and Fibrin, New Method 
for Staining, 675. : 

- ——, Cultivation of Anzrobic, 824. 

from Water and Soil, New and 

Typical, 789. 

- ——, Improved Method for Culti- 

vating, on Potatoes, 142. 


1099 


Micro-organisms, Leeuwenhoek’s Discovery 
of, 522. 

- ——, Milk-peptone-gelatin for Culti- 
vating Pathogenic, 656. 

Microphotoscope, Galland-Masgon’s, 281. 

Microphysical Investigations, Apparatus 
for, 292. 

Microphyte, New Pathogenic, in Men and 
Animals, 634. 

Microscope, Ahrens’ New Erecting, 1020. 

» A New Method of Preserving 

Transparent Aquatic Insects for, 667. 

, Advantages of a Knowledge of the 
Theory of, 296. 

cc and Kidney Disease,” 138. 

— and Microscopical images, on the 
mode of determining and indicating 
correctly the amplification of, 304. 

and Telescope, 820. 

—— and the Museum, Preparing Tape- 
worms for, 148. 

, Apparatus. See Contents, xxxiii. 

——, Babuchin’s, 637, 794. 

—., Bamberg’s Spherometer, 280. 

——,, Bastin-Bullock, 285. 

, Bausch and Lomb Optical Co.’s 
Petrographical, 279. 

—,, Collins’s Aquarium, 103. 

——, Compound, Development of, 136. 

, Defective Objectives and the Binocu- 

lar, 1025, 

, Duboseq’s Projection, 108. 

—, Dufet’s Polarizing, 107. 

—, Dumaige’s Travelling, 476. 

—, Electric, 285, 1025. 

for Horologists, Golfarelli’s Micro- 
metric, 103. 

—— in Medicine, 654. 

in the examination of Rock Sec- 
tions by Polarized Light, The use of, 
655. 

—, Investigating the Effects of Reme- 
dies by, 1060. 

—, Joblot’s, 640. 

——, Kibbler’s Photomicrographie, 529. 

——,, Klein’s Excursion, 1020, 

——,, Lamps, Schieck’s, 490. 

——,, Lantern, The Advantages and De- 
ficiencies of, 646. 

——,, Learning to see with, 495. 

——, Leitz’s Demonstration, 794. 

—, Nachet’s Crane-arm, 475. 

——, Nageli and Schwendener, 141. 

——, Old Demonstration, 794. 

, Photomicrographiec, Israel and Steng- 

lein’s, 115. 

, Physicians and the, 523. 

——, Quantitative Determination of Silver 
by means of, 494. ; 

——, Recent Improvements of: a visit to 
Jena, 304. 

— , Schieck’s Meat-examining, 793. 

—, —— Travelling, 794. 

——, Simple Method of Warming and 
Cooling under, 113. 


1100 


Microscope, Small Portable Binocular, and 
a Live-box, 110. 
stands. See Contents, xxxii. 
. , Student’s Handbook to,’ 137. 
—, Theory of, Nigeli and Schwendener, 
140. 
——, Thury’s Five-tube, 792. 
—, Use and Abuse of, 822. 
—, Watson and Son’s Anglo-Continental 
or Student’s, 797. 
with “ Continental ” Fine-adjustment, 
Pritchard’s, 1022. 
, Zeiss’s IIa., 637, 794. 
Microscopes, American, 652. 
—, , A Complaint, 285, 482. 
——, —— and Foreign, 797. 
——, —— — ; the Verdict of an Im- 
partial Expert, 798. 
—, Ancient, 304. 
——, Campani’s Compound, 109. 
——, Galileo’s, 639. 
——, Hensoldt’s Reading, 640. 
of historic interest, Recently dis- 
covered, 485. 
——, Testing Screw-micrometers of Read- 
ing, 814. 
Microscopic Alge, Collecting, 504. 
manipulation, 1060. 
** Microscopical Advances,” 137, 141. 
Club of the Buffalo Society of Natural 
Sciences, 305. 
Optics and the Quekett Club Journal, 
817, 1034. 
Society, Medical, of Brooklyn, 304. 
of Pittsburg, 305. 
Societies, Local, 304. 
Microscopy and the Study of Rocks, 820. 
, eXaminations in, 654. 
Microspectroscopic Analysis, Tubes for, 
i. 
Microspora, 94. 
Microsyringe, Beck’s, 849. 
Microtome, Accessory for rapid Cutting 
with the Thoma, 840. 
: to the Cambridge Rocking, 669. 
ie and Technique, Pharmacognostic, 
13. 
—, Dale’s, 317. 
for cutting under alcohol, Schieffer- 
decker’s, 152. 
for cutting whole sections of the Brain 
and other organs, Bruce’s, 837. 
, Cathcart Improved, 1047. 
freezing, Combining Weigert’s Hama- 
toxylin-copper Stain for Nerve-fibre 
with the use of, 1051. 
——, Schwabe’s Sliding, 668. 
——, Thate’s New, 839. 
with fixed knife and automatic move- 
ment of the object, 842. 
eae K., Structure of Starch-grains, 


Milk as a Medium, 1038. 
, Media prepared from, for micro- 
cultivation, 145, 658. 


INDEX. 


Milk-peptone-gelatin for cultivating Pa- 
thogenic Micro-organisms, 656. 

Millar, Dr. J., Death of, 325. 

Millepora plicata, Sexual Cells and Early 
Stages in Development of, 964. 

, Sex-cells and Development of, 236. 

Miller, M. N., New Injecting Mass, 518. 

, Practical Microscopy: A course of 
Normal Histology for Students and 
Practitioners of Medicine, 166, 523. 

Milne-Edwards, A., Fresh-water Crabs of 
Africa, 415. 

Mimicry and Parasitism of Camponotus 
lateralis, 30. 

Mimosa pudica, Movement of Leaf of, 457. 

Mimusops and Payena, Laticiferous pro- 
duct of, 759. 

Minerals, Rock-forming, 823. 

Mingazzini, P., Reticulum of Muscle- 
fibre, 928. 

Minnesota, Arthur’s Report on, 89. 

Minot, C. S., ‘American Microscopes—A 
Complaint,” 285, 482. 

—, The Mounting of Serial Sections, 
682. 

Miquel, P., Bacillus living at a tempera- 
ture exceeding 70° C., 1013. 

, Determining the percentage of 
Atmospheric Bacteria, 1060. 

——, On the relative value of the pro- 
cesses employed for the microscopical 
analysis of water, 856. 

Mischococeus confervicola, Development 
of, 632. 

Mischtold, A., Preservation of Parts and 
Organs of Animals, 658. 

Mistletoe, Biology of, 86. 

, Development of the Flowers of, 990. 

Mitremyces Nees, Calostoma, Desv., 780. 

Mittmann, R., Anatomy of Spines, 763. 

Mitoses, Staining, 674. 

Mobius, K., Direct Division of Nucleus in 
Euplotes harpa, 436. 

——,, Folliculina ampulla, 598. 

——, M., Anatomical Structure of the 
Leaves of Orchidex, 608. 

——, New Fresh-water Floridea, 93. 

Models in Metal of Microscopical Prepara- 
tions, 165. 

Moeller, H., Tannin and its connection 
with Metastasis, 984. 

Moéhring, W., Branching of the Frond of 
Ferns, 619. 

Moina bathycolor, and the greatest depths 
at which Cladocera are found, 578. 

Moist and Gas Chambers, 287. 

Molgulide, Symbiotic Fungus in, 782. 

Molisch, H., Secretion from the Roots, 246. 

——, Thylle, 988. 

Moll, J. W., Application of Paraffin Im- 
bedding in Botany, 315. 

Miller, A., Cultivation of Lichen-forming 
Ascomycetes without Algz, 466, 829. 
—, “Spermatia” of the Ascomycetes, 

1006. 


INDEX. 


Mollusca. See Contents, x. 

Molluseoida, See Contents, xi. 

Monal, —., and P. v. Tieghem, Sub-epi- 
dermal Network of the Root of Gerani- 
aces, 986. 

Monas Dunali, 973. 

Moniez, R, New Parasite of the Silk 
worm, 471. 

, Tenia nana, 229. 

Moniligaster, Reproductive Organs of, 221. 

Monocotyledons, Formation of Lateral 
Roots in, 762. 

——, Germination of, 767. 

, Vascular Bundles in the Rhizome 
of, 74. 

Moore, 8S. Le M., Epidermal Chlorophyll, 
245. 

, Influence of Light upon Protoplasmic 

Movement, 242. 

, Studies in Vegetable Biology, 996. 

Morgan, C. L., Elimination and Selection, 
927. 

, T. H., Chitin Solvents, 833. 

Morini, F., Ascophorous form of Penicil- 
lium candidum, 1008. 

—, Germination of the 
Ustilago, 270. 

——., Sexuality of Ustilaginee, 269. 

Morot, L., Identity of Polyporus abietinus, 
Fr, and Irpex fusco-violaceus, Fr., 468. 

Mosso, A., Methods of Examining Blood- 
corpuscles, 1040. 

, Methyl-green for observing the 
Chemical Reaction and Death of Cells, 
1049. 

Moths and Butterflies, Villi on the Scales 
of, 498. 

Mould, New, 1010. 

Moulds, Preparing, 150. 

Mounting. See Contents, xi. 

Mounts, Making Photographic, 854. 

Mouse, Vestiges of Zonary Decidua in, 
186. 

Mucedinex, New, 631. 

Mucous Cells in Mussels, 402. 

Gland, so-called, of Male Cypride, 
731. 

—— — of Urocheta, 422. 

“‘ Mufte,” Composition of, 633. 

Miller, C., New Sphagna, 91. 

, Secreting Canals of Umbelliferss and 

Araliacese contained in the Phloem, 605. 

, F., Germination of the Bicuiba, 613. 

—., H., “ Edelfaule”’ of Grapes, 1009. 

——, J., Action of Lichers on Rocks, 95. 

——, N. J. C.,, Atlas of wood structure 
represented in photomicrographs, 651. 

—,, W., Scent-glands of Phryganide, 406. 

Multicellular Organs, Movements of Irrita- 
tion of, 615. 

Plants, Growth and Origin of, 83. 

Multinucleate Infusoria, 597. 

Munchausen still alive, 655. 

Miintz, A., Occurrence of the Elements of 
Sugar of Milk in Plants, 604. 


1888. 


Spores in 


1101 


Murex, Form and Development of Sperma- 
tozoa in, 200. 

Murray, G., and L. A. Boodle, Spongo- 
cladia, 1002. 

Musca, Development of, 944. 

— vomitoria, Development in Egg of, 
572. 

Muscines. See Contents, xxvii. 

Muscle for investigation, Methods of Pre- 
paring, 147. 

, Staining-differences of Unstriped, 
and Connective Tissue Fibres, 843. 

—, Striped, Distribution of, 714. 

—, —, of Arthropods, 941. 

Muscle-cells, Nuclei of, 18. 

fibre, Reticulum of, 928. 

Muscles of Lamellibranchiata, Structure 
of, 935. 

——, Longitudinal, and Stewart’s Organ 
in Eehinothurids, 429. 

— of Molluscs, Microscopic Structure 
of, 199. 

, Striated, in Mollusca, 402. 

Musculature of Heteropoda and Pteropoda, 
560. 

Museum and the Microscope, Preparing 
Tape-worms for, 148. 

Mussels, Mucous Cells in, 402. 

Mycodomatia in the Roots of Papilionace, 
450. 

Mycorhiza, New Forms of, 268. 

Myelocytes of Invertebrates, 929. 

Mutualism, Remarkable Case of, 557. 

Mycological Notes, 783. 


Mycology, Baumgarten’s Pathological, 
791. 
Myriopoda. See Contents, xiii. 


Myristica, surinamensis, Aleurone-grains 
in the Seed of, 72. 

Myrmecophilous Plant, Humboldtia lauri- 
folia as, 88. 

Plants, 87, 998. 

Myrtle-wax Imbedding Process, 151. 

Myzostoma, Nervous System of, 231. 

Myzostomida, ‘ Challenger,’ 590. 


N. 


Nachet’s (A.) Crane-arm Microscope, 475. 

Gas Chamber, 289. 

Nagel, W., Human Ovum, 547. 

Najade, Histology of, 205. 

Nansen, F., Histological Elements of the 
Central Nervous System, 194. 

——, Methods of investigating Structure 
of Nerve-tissues, 312. 

——, Nervous System of Myzostoma, 231. 

Naples, Gorgonide of, 435. 

Narcissus, Formation of Sugars in the 
Septal Glands of, 759. 

Nasal Mucus, Vibrio from, 99. 

Nassonoff, —., Boring Clionids, 965. 

Nebalizw, Second Species of Turbellarian 
Living on, 428. 

Nectar of Rhododendron, 603. 


4 


1102 


Nectary, Floral, of Symphoricarpus, 255. 

Needle-Teasing, James’s, 520. 

Neisser, A., Preparing Sections from Test- 
tube Cultivations, 671. 

—, Spore-formation in the Bacilli of 
Xeresis conjunctive, Streptococci, and 
Cholera spirilla, 1016. 

Nelson, E. M., Amphipleura pellucida, 819. 

—, A simple Correction for Curvature 
of Image, 1036. 

—, Curious Interference Phenomena 
with Amphipleura pellucida, 302. 

— — Optical Effect, 172. 

—, Development of the Compound 
Microscope, 136. 

—, Mechanical Stage, 477. 

——,, New form of mechanical stage, 334. 

—,, Nobert’s Bands, 305. 

—, Nomenclature of eye-pieces and ob- 
jectives, 652. 

—, On a new Eye-piece, 111. 

—, On the Formation of Diatom Struc- 
ture, 495. 

—, On the Interpretation of a Photo- 
micrographic Phenomenon by the Abbe 
Diffraction Theory, 819. 

— Photomicrographic Focusing Screen, 


—. Spectra of Pleurosigma angulatum, 
30 


3. 
—,, Tests for Modern Objectives, 816. 
“The Microscope,” Nigeli and 
Schwendener, 141. 
, True and False Images in Micro- 
scopy, 819. 

,J., Fixing Sections to the Slide, 853. 
—, 8. N., Methods of examination of 
Bacteria for laboratory purposes, 686. 
Nelson-Curties Microscope for Photomicro- 

graphy, 691. 
Nelumbium, Anatomy of, 765. 
Nemathelminthes. See Contents, xv. 
Nematus Capresx, Cecidium of, 458. 
Nemertea, ‘ Challenger,’ 52. 
Nemerteans, Lateral organs of, 51. 
Nephridia of Earthworms, 421. 
—— of Lanice conchilega, 735. 
Nephrocytium, Reproduction of, 1013. 
Nerve-cells and Axis-cylinder, 556. 
and Peripheral Ganglia, Pre- 
paration of, 506. 
- —, Micro-Chemistry of, 712. 
-——, Two new Methods for prepar- 
ing, 658. 
Nerve-centres and Sensory Organs of 
Articulata, 403. 
—— -endings in the Leech, 952. 
, Staining, with Gold Chloride, 
155, 673, 674. 
» ——, with Methylen-blue, 515. 
-fibre, Combining Weigert’s Hzma- 
toxylin-copper Stain for, with the use of 
the freezing Microtome, 1051. 
—. - — , Histology of, 395. 
— -— , Structure of, 197. 


INDEX, 


Nerve-sections, Half-clearing method of 
preparing, 680. 

-terminations in Lepidoptera, 943. 

Nerve-tissues, Methods of investigating 
Structure of, 312. 

Nerves, Methods for Examining the Strue- 
ture of the Cerebrospinal, 1041. 

Nervous Organs, Central, in health and 
disease, Methods for Investigating the 
Structure of, 1041. 

—— System and Vascular Apparatus of 
Ophiurids, 57. 

— —, Central, Histological Elements 
of, 194. ’ 


, —, of Tunicata, 26. 

— ——. , Safranin as Stain for, 1051. 

— —, Classification of Gastropods, 
based on the Arrangement of, 401. 

— — of Amphioxus, 390, 920, 

—— — of Aplysia, 20. 

—— —— of Chetopterus Valencinii, 225, 

—— —— of Echinodermata, 741. 

— — of Myzostoma, 231. 

— —— of Opheliaces, Preparing, 509. 

— — of Phylactolematous Fresh- 
water Bryozoa, 402. 

of Prosobranchs, 21. 

—— —— of Pteropods, 25. 

, Physiology of, 559. 

— Tissue, Improvements in the Silver- 
nitrate Method for Staining, 844. 

—_ Tracts in Aleyonids, 61. 

Network, Sub-epidermal, of the Root of 
Gerauiacex, 986. 

, Super-endodermal, of the Root of 

Leguminosee and Ericavez, 986. 

, Supporting, in the Cortex of the 
Root, 986. 

Neuhauss, R., Adaptation of the ordinary 
Eye-piece for Photomicrography, 1032. 

, Focusing Arrangement, 809. 

—, Guide to Photomicrography for 
Physicians, Botanists, &e., 119. 

— Photomicrographie Camera, 293. 

—, The Development of Photomicro- 
graphy in the last two years, 813. 

Neumayer, G., Guide to Scientific Obser- 
vations in Travelling, 823. 

Neumayr, M., Relationships of Foramini- 
fera, 66. 

New England, Medusa from, 592. 

Jersey, Essex County Mi-roscopical 

Society of, 304. 

York, Central, Microscopical Club, 

304. 

Zealand, Fossil Marine Diatoms from, 


94. 


——, Wellington district, Fresh-water 
Infusoria of, 972. 

Newcombe, F. C., Dissemination of the 
Spores of Equisetum, 1000. 

Ney, O., Magnesium Lamps, 494. 

Nickel, E., The Colour Reactions of Carbon 
Combinations. I. Colour Reactions of 
an Aromatic Character, 849, 


INDEX. 


Nicholson, H. A., Structures and Affinities 
of Parkeria, 237. 

Nicotra, L., Pollination of Serapias, 256. 

Nikiforow, M., Short Studies in Micro- 
scopical Technique, 856. 

Nuclear Carmine Stain, 1050. 

, safranin as a Stain for the Central 
Nervous System, 1051. 

—, Simple Method for Fixing Cover- 
glass Preparations, 1047. 

——,, Staining the Spirochete of Relapsing 
Fever, 1054. 

Nitella, New, 1001. 

Nitrate of Silver Method for Staining, 319. 

Nitric Acid in Plants, Formation of, 616. 

Nitrogen, Absorption of, by Plants, 770. 

—— ot Vegetation, Sources of, 261. 

Noack, F., Influence of Climate on the 
Cuticularization and Thickening of the 
Leaves of some Coniferze, 608. 

Nobhe, F., Production of Sex and Pheno- 
mena of Crossing, 256. 

Nobert’s Bands, 305. 

Noeggerath, E., On a new method of 
bacteria cultivation on coloured 
nutrient media for diagnostic pur- 
poses, 831, 1039. 

Noll, F., Growth of the Cell-wall, 442. 

, Influence of External Forces on the 

Form of Plants, 456. : 

, Protonema of Schistostega osmun- 

dacea, 774. 

Staining Membranes 
Siphonee, 516. 

——, F. C., Natural History of Siliceous 
Sponges, 745. 

, Silicoblasts. 596. 

Nordqvist, O., Moina bathycolor and the 
greatest depths at which Cladocera are 
found, 578. 

Nordstedt, O., New Chara, 1001. 

, New Nitella, 1001. 

Norman, A. M., New Crustacean Purasite, 
418. 

Norse Alcyonaria, 239. 

Nose-piece for Changing Objectives, 
Dumaige’s, 488. 

Nostocaceze, Cellular Envelope of the 
Filamentous, 632, 1012. 

Nostochinez, Filamentous Heterocystous, 
472. 

Notochlena, Apogamy in, 999. 

Nott, T. E., Staining of Tubercle Bacilli, 
849. 

Nuclear and Cell Division, 243, 440. 

Carmine Stain, 1050. 

Fission, Preparing Testicle for Ob- 

serving, 146. 

Origin of Hyaloplasm, 440. 

— Stain, New, and Note on Fixation,675. 

Nuclei of Muscle-cells, 18. 

, So-called Free, in the Nutrient Yolk 
of Bony Fishes, Origin and Signifi- 
cance of, 706. 

——, Three, in Pollen-grains, 440. 


in Living 


1103 


Nuclein and Plastin, Demonstrating, 505. 

Nucleus and Cell, Division of, 978. 

——, Artificial, Deformations of, 196. 

——, Changes of Position of, 390. 

—, Chemistry of, 390. 

——, Direct Division of, in Euplotes harpa, 
436. 

—, Division of, Cell-division, and Im- 
preenation, 600. 

in Cell-division, Part taken by, 69. 

— in Oscillaria and Tolypothrix, 275. 

—, Membrane, and Protoplasm of Plant- 
cells, Properties and Changes of, 980. 

——, Relation between the Function and 
Position of, 601. 

Nusbaum, J., Germinal Layers of Meloe, 
942. 

, M., First Changes in Fecundated 
Ovum of Lepas, 218. 

Nutmeg, Contents of the Cells of the Aril 
of, 760. 

Nutrient Media, Coloured, 1039. 

for microbes from milk, on the 

preparation of solid, 658. 

Medium for Micro-crganisms, Albu- 
men of Plovers’ Eggs, 1037. 

Nutrition of Phanerogamia. 
tents, XXV. 

—,, Physiology of, in Protozoa, 749. 

Nutritive Media, Preparation of, 655. 

Nuttall’s, G., Warm Cliamber, 1027. 

Nutting, C. C., New Species of Acineta, 
438. 

Nyctaginez, 82. 

Nyctiphanes norvegica, Photospheria of, 
415. 


See Con- 


O. 


Oaks, Retrogression in, 88. 

Oamaru Deposit, Remarkable 
from, 967. 

Oberstein, H., Methods for Investigating 
the Structure of the Central Nervous 
Organs in health and disease, 1041. 

Objectives. See Contents, xxxiii. 

Odontophores of Mollusca, Photomicro- 
graphs of, 333. 

Odoriferous Glands of Blaps, 943. 

Office Students, Microscopy and Histology 
for, 686. 

Ohio State Micrescopical Society, 305. 

Oidium Fragariz, 274. 

Oil-passages in the Roots of Composite, 
447. 

Ser eas Colourless, in Potamogeton, 


Spicules 


——-receptacles in the Roots of Com- 
positee, 760. 

Olbers, A., Fruit of Borragineze, 255. 

Oleina, Ascomycetes and Podocapsa, New 
Genera of, 271. 

Olfactory Ganglia of Cephalopods, 931. 

Oligocheta, Homology of Segmental 
Organs and Efferent Ducts of Genital 
Products in, 419. 

4 E 2 


1104 


Oligochswta, Limicolous, Formation of Em- 
bryonic Layers and Ccelom, 735. 

, So-called Prostate Glands of, 221. 

Oliver, F. W., Microchemical Tests for 
Callus, 323. 

, Phenomenon analogous to Leaf-fall, 


88. 

, Sensitive Labellum of Masdeyallia, 

muscosa, 616. 

, Sieve-tubes in the Laminariex, 265. 

—, Trapella, Oliv., a new Genus of 
Pedalinex, 992. 

—, L., Physiological Experiments on 
Organisms of Glairine and Baregine, 
1019. 

Ombrophila and Guepinia, 1008. 

Onion, Anguillulide of, 585. 

—, Occurrence of Starch in, 983. 

Onoclea Struthiopteris, Hoffm., Develop- 
ment of, 618. 

Ontogeny of Marine Bryozoa, 936. 

Oogenesis and Reproductive Organs of 
Helix, 398. 

Oophyte of Trichomanes, 617. 

Opheliacez, Preparing the Nervous System 
of, 509. 

Ophiurid, Remarkable, from Brazil, 591. 

Ophiurids, Anatomy of, 958. 

— , Morphology of, 432. 

—, Nervous System and Vascular Ap- 
paratus of, 57. 

Optometer and apparatus for measuring 
the foci of, and centering of optical 
lenses—North Harchek'’s System, 819. 

Opuntia, Production of Vegetative from 
Fertile Shoots of, 768. 

Orbitolites complanata, var. laciniata, Re- 
productive Condition of, 693, 1065. 

Orcanet, Employment of tincture of, in 
histological technique, 1056. 

Orchestia, 949. 

Orchid Hybrids, Bigeneric, 257. 

Orchides, Anatomical Structure of the 
Leaves of, 608. 

— .. Flower of, 764. 

Orchids, Self-fertilization and Cleistogamy 
in, 994, 

Oribatids, British, 412. 

Orobanche, Biology of, 85. 

, Development and Structure of, in a 
young stage and of its suckers, 80. 

Orr, H., Embryology of Anolis, 387. 

—, —— of Lizard, 548. 

Orthoneura, 400. 

meri H. L., Microscope in Medicine, 

——, Microscopical Societies should com- 
bine for work, 305. 

—,, Practical Courses, 324. 

——,, Studies for Beginners, 686, 856. 

oe and Tolypothrix, Nucleus in, 
279. 

ae Acid and Gold Chloride Methods, 


Ossitication Preparations, Staining of, 154. 


INDEX. 


Ostracoda,” “On the Generative Organs 
of, 168. 

Ova, Abnormal, of Ascaris megalocephala, 
953. 

and Spermatozoa, Formation of, in 

Spongilla fluviatilis, 966. 

and Tissues, Bacteria-like Bodies in, 


31. 

——. Animal, Formation of Polar Globules, 
705. 

——,, Ascaris, Maturation and Division of, 
42 


—, Capillary Slide and accessories for 
the examination of, 801. 

—— of Amphibia, Preparing, 146. 

—— of Ascaris megalocephala, Preparing, 
508. 

of Bdellostoma, 192. 

—,, Respiration of Silk-worm, 726. 

, Segmentation of Teleostean, 191. 

Ovarian Oya and the Primitive Forami- 
nifera, Resemblance of, 706. 

Ovaries, Preparing Mammalian, 662, 

Ovary, Histology of, 713. 

, Reticulated Protoplasm in the Inter- 
stitial Cells of, 311. 

Oven and Water-bath, Reeves’s, 163. 

Overton, C., Conjugation of Spirogyra, 625. 

Oviatt, B. L., Permanent Preparations of 
Tissues treated with Potassium Hydrate, 
147. 

Ovules of Grasses, 611. 

— of Plantago, 452. 

of Rumex, 764. 

Ovum, Animal, 13. 

—, Axis of Frog, 15. 

—, Human, 547. 

—, Maturity of, 15. 

of Lepas, First Changes in Fecun- 

dated, 218. 

, Polar Globule of Mammalian, 186. 

Oxalis rubella, Germination of, 613. 

—-—, Subterranean Shovts of, 988. 

Oxidation, Influence of Light on, 714. 

—, Physiological, in the Protoplasm, 

54 


-process in Plants after death, 88. 

Oxygen, Exhalation of, by fleshy-leaved 
Plants in absence of Carbonic Anhy- 
dride, 85. 


Pr 
Pachydrilus enchytrexoides, Histology of, 
22. 


Pagan’s “ Growing Slide,” Modification of, 
1028. 

Paladino, G., Preparing Mammalian 
Ovaries, 662. 

Palsemon and Hippolyte, Parasitic Castra- 
tion in the Eucyphotes of, 414. 

Pal-Exner Method of Staining Sections of 
the Central Nervous System, 1057. 

Palladin, W., Formation of organic acids 
in the growing parts of plants, 247. 


INDEX. 


Palms, Germination of, 257. 

Palpiform Organs of Crustacea, 413. 

Palps of Butterflies, Basal Spot on, 943. 

Paneth, J., Secreting Cells of Intestinal 
Epithelium, 556. 

Pantanelli, D., Mounting small Organisms 
—Disage¢regation of Rocks, 315. 

Pantocsek, J., Fossil Diatoms of Hungary, 
466. 

Paper, Microscopical Examination of, 521. 

Papilionacez, Mycodomatia in the Roots 
of, 450. 

Papulaspora, New, 631. 

Paraffin, Homogeneous, 151. 

Imbedding in Botany, Application 
of, 315, 672, 834. 

Paramecium, Conjugation of, 65. 

Parasite, New Crustacean, 418. 

5 , of the Silk-worm, 471. 

of the Rotatoria, Chytridium elegans, 

1011. 

of Telphusa, 40. 

Parasites of Teredo navalis, 199. 

of the Higher Fungi, 1011. 

— of the Peridinex, 781. 

—, Phanerogamous, Origin of the 
Suckers in, 80. 

Parasitic Algze on the Sloth, 624, 

Fungi, Character of the Injuries pro- 
duced by, upon their Host-plants, 470. 

—— Fungus on Pineapple, 780. 

on Salt-fish, 781. 

on the Plane, 631. 

— Infusoria, New, 436. 

Protozoa, 974. 

—— — in Man, 240. 

Rotifer, Discopus Synapte, 52. 

Parasitism and Mimicry of Camponotus 
lateralis, 30. 

of the Truffle, 780. 

Parker, G. H., Eyes in Scorpions, 411. 

, W. N., On the objects of the Bio- 
logical and Microscopical Section of the 
Cardiff Naturalists’ Society, 686. 

Parkeria, Observations on, 757. 

——, Structure and Affinities of, 237. 

Parthenogenesis in Bombyx mori, 571, 725. 

Patella vulgata and Sepia officinalis, 
Salivary Glands of, 932. 

Pathogenic cliromo-aromatic 
1017. 

Pathological Investigations, Methods for, 
154. 

— Mycology, Baumgarten’s, 791. 

—— Structure of the Cell-nucleus, 391. 

Patouillard, N., Classification of the Aga- 
ricinese, 467. 

—, New Tubercularia, 779. 

, Prototremella, 1007. 

Patten, W., Eyes of Arthropods, 209, 938. 

Pawlowsky, A. D., Cultivation of Bacillus 
Tuberculosis on Potato, 1038. 

Payena and Mimusops, Laticiferous pro- 
duct of, 759. 

Peach-leayes, “ Curl” of, 89. 


Microbe, 


1105 


Peal, C. N., Microscopy for Beginners, 
686. 

Peckham, G. W., Senses of Anis, 571. 

and Hi. G., Mental Powers of Spiders, 
575. 

Pedalinex, Trapella, Oliv., a new Genus 
of, 992. 

Pediastrum, Development of, 624. 

Pedicellina, Anatomy of, 208. 

Pelagic Animals at Great Depths, and 
their Relations to the Surface Fauna, 
558. 

Pelanechinus corallinus, New Features in, 
233. 

Pelletan, J., Diatomacex, 667. 

——, Objectives, 111. 

Pelomyxa palustris, Minute Structure of, 
1 7k: 

Pelseneer, P., ‘Challenger’ Pteropoda 
(Gymnosomata), 26. 

—, P. N., Classification of Gastropoda 
by the Characters of the Nervous System, 
933. 

——,, Lamellibranchiata without gills, 564. 

, Nervous System of Pteropods, 25. 

Peltospheria, New Genus, 630. 

Pendent Organs, Mechanical System of, 75. 

Penicillium candidum, Ascophorous form 
of, 1008. 

crustaceum, Asci of, 271. 

Pennatula, New, from the Bahamas, 593. 

Pennatulida, ‘ Porcupine,’ 745. 

Penny, W. G., Eye-pieces—Physical Ab- 
erration and Distortion, 646. 

Penzig, O., Anatomy and Diseases of 
Aurantiaces, 453. 

Pereyaslawzewa, S., Development of Gam- 
marus, 949. 

Perforation in the Walls of Vessels, Sys- 
tematic Value of, 447. 

Pericardial Gland in Lamellibranchs, 720. 

Pericheta, Anatomy of, 422. 

Periderm, Formation of, 761. 

of Leguminose, 606. 

of Rosaceze, 987. 

Peridermium Pini, 1009. 

Peridinex, Parasites of, 781. 

, Spore-formation in, 437. 

Peripatus capensis and P. Nove Zealandiz, 
Anatomy of, 577. 

PEF he Se of a South American, 

1 


——, —— of the Cape Species of, 409. 

——-, Monograph of the Genus, 576. 

Nove-Zealandiz, Development of, 33. 

Peripheral Ganglia and Nerve-cells, Pre- 
paration of, 506. 

Periplaneta orientalis, Thermie Experi- 
ments on, 31. 

Peristome, 1000. 

, Internal, of Mosses, 461. 

— of Mosses, 263, 620. 

Permeability of Protoplasm, 601. 

of the Epidermis of Leaves to Gases, 

448, 763. 


1106 


Peronospora of the Rose, 1008. 

viticola, 1008. 

Perrier, R., Kidney of Prosobranch Gas- 
tropods, 399, 715. 

Perroncito, E., Chytridium elegans, 0. sp., 
a Parasite of the Rotatoria, 1011. 

, Encystation of Megastoma 

testinale, 439. 

and L. Varalda, Composition of 
“ Muffe,” 633. 

Peter, A., Batrachospermum, Chantransia, 
and Lemanea, 464. 

Petersen, O, G., Reticulations in Vessels, 
986. 

Petiole, Distribution of Fibro-vascular 
Bundles in, 74. 

of Dicotyledons, 610. 

Petit, L., Distribution of Fibro-vascular 
Bundles in the Petiole, 74. 

——, Effects of Lesion of Supra-ceso- 
phageal Ganglia in Snails, 717. 

—., Effects of Lesions of the Supra- 
cesophageal Ganglia of the Crab (Car- 
cinus Meenas), 730. 

, Petiole of Dicotyledons, 610. 

Petri, R. J., New Method of Demonstra- 
ting and Counting Bacteria and Fungi 
Spores in the Air, 1059. 

Petrographical Microscope, Bausch and 
Lomb Optical Co.’s, 279. 

Petromyzon, Development of, 388, 549. 

Petrone, L., Methods for examining the 
Structure of the Cerebrospinal Nerves, 
1041. 

Pfeffer, W., Chemotactic Movements of 
Bacteria, Flagellata, and Volvocinex, 


in- 


Pfeifer, A., Cooler for quickly setting 
Gelatin Plates, 828. 

Pfitzer, E., Flower of Orchidez, 764. 

——, New Imbedding Material, 316. 

Pfitzner, W., Pathological Structure of the 
Cell-nucleus, 391. 

Phzophycex, Physiology of, 462. 

Phzeozoosporee, New Genera of, 465. 

Phalangida, Brain of, 576. 

Phalloidei, Stretching of the Receptacle 
of, 629. 

Phanerogamia, Anatomy and Physiology 
of. See Contents, xx. 

Pharbitis triloba, Seeds of, 764. 

Pharmacognostic Microtome and Tech- 
nique, 513. 

Pheuol in Microscopical Technique, 847. 

Philibert, —., Internal Peristome of 
Mosses, 461, 1000. 

Peristome of Mosses, 263, 620, 


1000. 
Philichthy¢# and Lerneasens, 217. 
Phillips, W., Luminosity of Fungi, 
LEE 


Phloem, Secreting Canals of Umbellifere 
and Araliacese contained in, 605. 

Phlogogenous matter, Presence of a, in the 
Cultures of certain Microbes, 634. 


INDEX. 


ise dactylus, Photogenic Property of, 

6. 

Phormidium and Lyngbya, Relationship 
between, 784. 

Phosphorescence in Myriopoda, 945. 

Phosphorescent Bacilli, Photographing, 
by means of their own light, 813. 

— Bacillus, 277. 

— Bacteria from Sea-water, 101. 

— Lumbricids, Type of a New Genus, 

Phosphoric Acid and Phosphorous in 
Plants, 760. 

Photodrilus phosphoreus, New Genus of 
Phosphorescent Lumbricids, 39. 

eae? Property of Pholas dactylus, 


Photographing ‘moving Microscopie Ob- 
jects, 812. 

Photographs vy. Drawings.—Screen for the 
Abbe Camera Lucida, 809. 

Photomicrographs of Diatoms, 295. 

— of the Odontophores of Molluses, 333. 

— with high amplification, 526. 

— , Zeiss’s, 525. 

Photomicrography. See Contents, xxxiv. 

Photomicroscope, “ Stein’s ” Large, 295. 

Photospheria of Nyctiphanes norvegica, 
415. 

Photoxylin for Imbedding, 834. 

Phreoryctes, Reproductive Organs of, 579. 

Phryganide, Scent-glands of, 406. 

Phthisical Sputum, The value of Micro- 
scopical examination of, as a means of 
giving a correct Prognosis, 686. 

Phycoerythrin, 622. 

Phycomycetes, Cultivation of, 469. 

Phycophein, 265. 

Phycotheca universalis, 
Richter’s, 627. 

Phyllocarida, ‘ Challenger,’ 36. 

Phylloxera, Brain of, 408. 

Phylogeny of Echinodermata, &e., 956. 

~— of Lamellibranchs, 565. 

— of Protozoa, 967. 

Physalospora Bidwellii, Formation of the 
Asci in, 629. 

Physicians and the Microscope, 523. 

Physophore, New, 592. 

Pichi, P., Thickening of the Cell-walls in 
the Leaf-stalk of Aralia, 70. 

—, Tubercles on the Roots of Legumi- 
nose, 608. 

Picrocarmine, Preparing, 518. 

Piersol, G. A., Benda’s Modified Copper- 
hematoxylin, 158. 

—, Drawings v. Photographs.—Screen 
for the Abbe Camera Lucida, 809. 

——, Homogeneous Parafiin, 151. 

—, Laboratory Jottings, 166. 

——, Substitute for Clearing, 160. 

Pilacre, 1009. 

Pilliet, A., Differential Staining of the 
Tissues of Living Animals, $42. 

——, Glandular Cells of Stomach, 393. 


Hauck and 


INDEX. 


Pimina, a new Genus of Hyphomycetes, 
780. 

Pinakoscope, Ganz’s, with Dreyfus’s Re- 
flector, 796. 

Pine-apple, Fungus Parasitic on, 780. 

Pines, Causes which produce Kccentricity 
of the Pith in, 761. 

Pinguicula, Arrangement of Fibro-vascular 
Bundles in, 74. 

——, Observations on, 987. 

, Propagula of, 764. 

Pirotta, R., Endosperm of Gelsomines 
(Jasmines), 249. 

Pitcher-like leaflets of Staphylea pinnata, 
253. 

Pith in Pines, Causes which produce 
EKecentricity of, 761. 

Pits, Bordered, Mode of rendering visible 
the closing Membrane of, 315. 

Pittsburg, Microscopical Society of, 305. 

Piutti, A., and L. Luciani, Respiration 
of Silk-worm Ova, 726. 

Plane, Fungus Parasitic on, 631. 

Plant Analysis as an Applied Science, 89. 

Planta, A. v., Nutrient Food-Material of 
Bees, 942. 

Plant-cells, Properties and Changes of the 
a ae Protoplasm and Nucleus of, 


, new method for Hardening 
and Staining, 1045. 

Plantago, Ovules of, 452. 

Plants, Preservation of, in Spirit and the 
Prevention of Browning, 852. 

— which form their Rootlets without 
a Pocket, 987. 

Plasmodia, Fusion of Lymphatic Cells 
into, 555. 

eee conan of Badhamia and Brefeldia, 

Plasmolysis in Flowering Plants, 759. 

of Algee, 93. 

moo Method, New Application of, 

ov. 

Plastic Reconstruction, Methods of, 853. 

Plastin and Nuclein, Demonstrating, 505. 

Plate, L., Acinetoides, 974. 

, Asellicola digitata, 973. 

——.,, Organization of Dentalium, 933. 

Plate-cultivations, Hardening and Stain- 
ing, 848, 

Plateau, F., Palpiform Organs of Crus- 
tacea, 413. 

, Powers of Vision, 32. 

——,, Respiration of Arachnida, 214. 

— , Vision in Arachnids, 214. 

—, of Caterpillars and Adult 
Insects, 404: 

popeeer, G., Karyokinesis in Lepidoptera, 


—, New Nuclear Stain and Note on 
Fixation, 675. 

Platyhelminthes. See Contents, xvi. 

Plaut, H., Improvement in Plaut’s Flasks 
for sterilizing water, 1040. 


1107 


Plaut, H., Sterilization of Potato, Apples, 
and Water for cultivation purposes, 310. 

Pleochromism of coloured Cell-walls, 602. 

Pleospora, 469. 

Pleurocapsa, New, 784. 

Pleurosigma angulatum, Spectra of, 303. 

formosum, Structure of, 1063. 

Plitt, C., Anatomy of the Leaf-stalk, 448. 

Plossl’s (S.) Focusing Arrangement, 
651. 

Plovers’ Eggs, Albumen of, as Nutrient 
Medium for Micro-organisms, 1037. 

Plum and Cherry-trees, Disease affecting, 


274, 

Pocket-book, Histological, 686. 

Podocapsa, Ascomycetes and Oleina, New 
Genera of, 271. 

Podocarpus, Emergences on the Roots of, 
252. 

Podura Scale, New Appearances in, 499. 

Poirier, J.. New Human Distomum, 49. 

Poison of Hymenoptera, 425, 724. 

Polar Bodies in Ascaris, 43. 

— Globule of Mammalian Ovum, 186. 

— Globules in Animal Ova, Formation 
of, 705. 

Polarized Light, The use of the Micro- 
scope in the examination of Rock Sec- 
tions by, 655. 

Polarizing Microscope, Dufet’s, 107. 

Poli, A., Adaptation of Kaiser’s gelatin 
for arranging microscopic preparations 
in rows, 680. 

— , 304. 

Pollen-grains, Three Nuclei in, 440. 

Pollination and Distribution of the Sexual 
Organs, 612. 

in Zannichellia palustris, 256. 

— of Alpine Plants, 454. 

—— of Serapias, 256. 

of Silene inflata, 454. 

Polycheta, Anatomy of, 41. 

Polyedriacez, 1013. 

Polygordius, 225. 

, Preparing, 662. 

Polymicroscope, Lenhossék’s, 104. 

Polymorphism attributed to certain generic 
groups, 453. 

— of the Hyphomycetes, 468. 

Polyparium, Nature of, 594. 

Polypides, Movements of, in Zocecia of 
Bryozoa, 936. 

Polypodiacezw, Development of the Spor 
angium of, 459. : 

, Leaves of, 619. 

Polypody of Insect Embryos, 568. 

Polyporeze, 1007. 

Polyporus abietinus, Fr., and Irpex fusco- 
violaceus, F'r., Identity of, 468. 

—— applanatus, Formation of two fertile 
hymenia in, 629. 

— biennis, Conidiferous Form of, 778. 

Polyzoa. See Bryozoa, Contents, xi. 

Pond Dredging and Collecting, 505. 

—- Life, Illustrations of, 855. 


1108 


Pontederiacem, Apical meristem of the 
roots of, 248. 

Pontia brassicw, Decrease of Weight in 
Winter Pups of, 572. 

‘Porcupine’ Pennatulida, 745. 

Porifera. See Contents, xviii. 

Portchinski, —., Comparative Biology of 
Neerophagous and Coprophagous Dip- 
terous Lary», 407. 

Post-embryonie Development of Julus, 213. 

Postal Microseopical Society, 503. 

Potamogeton, Colourless Oil-plastids in, 
984. 

Potassium Hydrate, Permanent Prepara- 
tions of Tissues treated with, 147. 

Potato, Apples, and Water for cultivation 
purposes, Sterilization of, 310. 

——, Cultivation of Bacillus Tuberculosis 
on, 1038. 

— Cultivations, 142, 143, 310, 311, 827. 

—— Fungus, 274. 

, Respiration of, 85. 

Potato-disease, New, 471. 

Potter, M. C., Alga epiphytie on a Tor- 
toise, 268. 

Potts, E., Collecting, Growing, and Ex- 
amining Fresh-water Sponges, 305. 

—., Fresh-water Sponges, 63. 

Poulton, E. B., Learning to see with the 
Microscope, 495. 

——, Sceretion of Pure Aqueous Formic 
Acid by Lepidopterous Larve for the 
Purposes of Defence, 405. 

Power and Harris, Manual for the Physio- 
logical Laboratory, 166. 

Praél, E., Protecting-wood and Duramen, 
248, 761. 

Prenant, A., Preparing and Staining 
Mammalian Testicle, 844. 

——,, Spermatogenesis of Gastropods, 932. 

—. of Reptiles, 924. 

Preservation of Parts and Organs of Ani- 
mals, 658. 

President’s Address, 177. 

Prickle-pores of Victoria regia, 81. 

Priest, B. W., Remarkable Spicules from 
Oamaru Deposit, 967. 

Prillieux, E., Grape-disease — Como- 
thyrium diplodiella, 98. 

Primitive Insects, 29. 

— Streak and Medullary Canal, Relation 
OL, LD; 

Pringsheim, N., Deposition of Caleareous 
Incrustations on Fresh-water Plants, 
773. 

Prisms, Tri-ocular, 
796. 

Pritchard’s Microscope with “ Continen- 
tal” Fine-adjustment, 1022. 

Problematical Organs of Invertebrata, 
714 


Quadri-ocular, &c., 


Procarp and Cystocarp of Gracilaria, 
622. 

Propagula of Pinguicula, 764. 

Prosobranchs, Nervous System of, 21. 


INDEX. 


a Glands, So-called, of Oligocheta, 

Protecting-wood and Duramen, 248, 761. 

Protein-granules, &c., Staining, 675. 

Prothallium of Equisetum, 262. 

Protoplasm, Membrane, and Nucleus of 
Plant-cells, Properties and Changes of, 
980. 

Protista, Biological Studies on, 755. 

ee of Schistostega osmundacea, 
774. 

Protophyta. See Contents, xxxvi. 

Protoplasm, Action of basic substances on 
living, 758. 

—, Living, Transpiration as a Function 
of, 456. 

—— of Certain Cells, Contraetility of, 457. 

— — —, Power of Contractility 
exhibited by, 614. 

——,, Permeability of, 601. 

— , Physiological Oxidation in, 454. 

—— _, Reticulated, in the Interstitial Cells 
of the Ovary, 311. 

ee Elements of, in Protozoa, 
748. 

Protoplasmic Movement, 
Light upon, 242. 

Prototracheata. See Contents, xiii. 

Prototremella, 1007. 

Protozoa. See Contents, xviii. 

Prouho, H., Researches on Dorocidaris 
papillata and other Mediterranean 
Eehinids, 430. 

Pruvot, G., and H. de Lacaze-Duthiers, 
Larval Anal Eye in Opisthobranch 
Gastropods, 19. 

Prazmowski, A., Spore-formation in Bac- 
teria, 787. 

Pseudochlorophyli corpuscles in the vas- 
cular system of Lameilibranchs, 565. 

Psorospermium Haeckeli, 240, 598. 

Pteropoda. See Contents, x. 

Pteropods, Lamellibranchs and Gastropods, 
Ingestion of Water in, 199. 

Pterotrachea, Sucker on Fin of, 205. 

Puccinia Graminis, Structure and Life- 
history of, 1007 

——,, New, 782. 

Pulfrich, C., A new refractometer, specially 
intended for the use of chemists, 495. 
Pulmonate Mollusca, Development of 

Heart of, 204. 

Pupze and Surroundings, Colour-relation 
between, 727. 

Purification of Tolu Balsam for Micro- 
scopical Purposes, 681. 

Puteren, D. v., On the preparation of solid 
ae media for microbes from milk, 

Pyrenomycetes, New Genus of Sphari- 
aceous, 630. 

Pyrenophora and Clathrospora, 631. 

Pyridin in Histological Technique, 1054. 

Pythium, New, 98. 


Influence of 


INDEX. 


Q. 


Quadri-ocular, Tri-ocular, &c., Prisms, 796. 

Quantitative estimation of Chlorophyll, 71. 

Queen, J. W., Apparent and Actual Size 
of Field, Magnifying Power, &c., 501. 

Quekett Club Journal and Microscopical 
Optics, 817, 1034. 

Quélet, L., Ombrophila and Guepinia, 
1008. 

Quimby, B. F., Widening the Scope of 
Microscopical Societies, 503. 

Quinn, E. P., Simple method of Projecting 
upon the screen Microscopie Rock Sec- 
tions, both by ordinary and by polarized 
light, 819. 

——, The Advantages and Deficiencies of 
the Lantern Microscope, 646. 

——, The use of the Microscope in the 
examination of Rock Sections by Polar- 
ized Light, 655. 


R. 


Rabenhorst’s ‘ Cryptogamic 
Germany’ (Musci), 91. 

Rabl-Riickhard, H., Peculiar Fat-cells, 
928. 

Radiolaria, 437. 

Radulz of small species of Gastropoda, 
Preparing, 507. 

Raffaele, F., Eggs and Larve of Tele- 
osteans, 925. 

Rafter, G. W., Making Mounts Photo- 
graphic, 854. 

——,, Photomicrographs, 813. 

Rana temporaria, Fate of the Blastopore 
in, 925. 

Raphides, Position and Number of, 445, 

Raschke, E. W., Larva of Culex, 212. 

Raskin, M., Milk as a Medium, 145, 656, 
1038. 

Rath, O. v., Dermal Sensory Organs of 
Insects, 210, 569. 

Rathay, E., New Vine-disease, 471. 

Rattray, J., “A Monograph of the genus 
Aulacodiscus, 335, 337. 

—, A Revision of the Genus Auliscus 
Ehrb. and of some aJlied Genera, 861. 

, Varieties of Aulacodiscus, 627. 

Rauwenhoff, N. W. P., Spheeroplea, 267. 

Rawitz, B., Green Gland of Crayfish, 216. 

, Mucous Cells in Mussels, 402. 

Reading Microscopes, Hensoldt’s, 640. 

Red Chalk, The Foraminifera of, 383. 

Redfern, J. J., Pal-Exner Method of Stain- 
ing Sections of the Central Nervous 
System, 1057. 

Reess, M., and C. Fisch, Elaphomyces,273. 

Reeves, J. E., Thin Sections, 1048. 

Reeves’s Method, 314. 

— Water-bath and Oven, 163. 

Reflector, Dreyfus’s, with Ganz’s Pinako- 
scope, 796. 

——, Koch’s and Max Wolz’s, 1025. 


Flora of. 


1109 


Refractometer, A new, specially intended 
for the use of chemists, 495. 

, Bertrand’s, 291, 649. 

Regeneration of Lost Parts, 215. 

Regulator, Swift’s, 649. 

Reiche, K., Anatomy of the Floral Axis, 
254. 

Reichel, L., Formation of Byssus, 935. 

Reichert, C., Cover-correction, 496. 

, Directions for using the Microscope, 
141. 

Reinhertz, —., Testing Screw-Micrometers 
of Reading-Microscopes, 814. 

Reinke, J., Oxidation-process in Plants 
after death, 88. 

Reinsch, P. F., New Genera of Florides, 
1002. 

, Polyedriaces, 1013. 

Rejuvenescence of Caulerpa, 464. 

Relations of Structure and Function to 
Colour Changes in Spiders, $45. 

Renal Organ of Echinoids, 590. 

—— Organs of Star-fishes, 958. 

Renault, B., Leaves of Sigillaria and 
Lepidodendron, 263. 

Rendle, A. B., Development of Aleurone- 
grains in the Lupin, 982. 

a Occurrence of Starch in the Onion, 

83. 

Repiachoff, W., Second Species of Tur- 
bellarian living on Nebaliz, 428. 

Replum in Crucifere, 611, 

Reproduction of Planerogamia. 
Contents, xxiv. 

Reproductive Organs and Oogenesis of 
Helix, 398. 

Reptiles, Spermatogenesis of, 924. 

Resegotti, L., and G. Martinotti, Demon- 
strating Karyokinetic Figures, 516. 

——, Staining Karyokinetic Figures, 1050. 

Heer re eubaleuees in Evergreen Leaves, 

Hoos and Assimilation in Plants, 


See 


—, Changes of Substance and Force 
connected with, 771. 

of Arachnida, 214. 

of Hydrophilus, 212. 

—— of Phanerogamia. See Contents, xxvi. 

— of Silk-worm Ova, 726. 

of the Potato, 85. 

Relation between the Heat and the 
porbonte Acid given off by Plants in, 

5. 

——,, Sub-aquatic, 569. 

Respiratory Organs (of Plants) 76. 

Restiaceze, Exoderm of the Root of, 987, 

Reticulations in Vessels, 986. 

Reticulum of Muscle-fibre, 928. 

Retrogression in Oaks, 88. 

Reuter, E., Basal Spot on Palps of Butter- 
flies, 943. 

Reynolds, R. N., A new Planisher, 515. 

——, Reeves’s Method, 314. 

Rhamnus, Fruits and Seeds of, 78, 


1110 


Rhinantheew and Santalacem, Haustoria, | 


of, 250. 

, Root-hairs of, 450. 

Rhizome of Monocotyledons, 
Bundles in, 7+. 

Rhizomorpha subcorticalis of Armillaria 
mellea, 97. 

Rhizopods, Digestion in, 240. 

. New, 797. 

Rhododendron, Nectar of, 603. 

Rhumbler, L., Various Cyst-formations 
and Developmental History of Colpoda, 
969. 

Richard, J., and J. de Guerne, Geo- 
graphical Distribution of Diaptomus, 
731. 

Richter, —, Agar-agar for Cultivation, 
1036. 

and Hauck’s Phycotheca universalis, 
627. 

Ridley, H. N., Self-fertilization and Cleis- 
togamy in Orchids, 994. 

, 5. O., and A. Dendy, ‘Challenger’ 
Sponges, 597. ‘ 

Riedlin, G., H. Buchner, and T. Longard, 
Method of calculating the Bacterial 
Increase, 682. 

Rings, Annual, in Wood, Formation of, 75. 

Rinnbock’s Slides of Arranged Diatoms, 
1057. 

Ritzema Bos, J., Natural 
Tylenchus, 229, 585. 

Robert, E., Spermatogenesis in Aplysia, 
397. 

Robertson, C., Fertilization of Calopogon 
parviflorus, 454. 

, Insect relations of Asclepiadex, 82. 

Robin’s, Lacaze-Duthiers’, and Farabceuf’s 
Injecting Syringes, 678. 

Robinson, B. L., Taphrina, 274. 

Rocks, Action of Lichens on, 95. 

, Disaggregation of, 315. 

——, Microscopy and the Study of, 820. 

Rodents’ Blood, Hemoglobin Crystals of, 
198. 

Rodewald, H., Changes of Substance and 
Force connected with Respiration, 771. 
—, Relation between the Heat and the 
Carbonic Acid given off by Plants in 

Respiration, 455. 

Roeser, P., and P. Gourret, Protozoa of 
Corsica, 755. 

Rohde, E., Nervous System of Amphioxus, 
390, 929. 

me R. A., Bigeneric Orchid Hybrids, 

ie 

Roll, —., Forms of Sphagnum, 775. 

Rolland, L., Blue Coloration of Fungi by 
Iodine, 628. 

—, and J. Costantin, Stysanus and 
Hormodendron, 1010. 

ai G., Exhibition of a Microtome, 

ora J. W., New Staining Fluid, 


Vascular 


History of 


INDEX. 


Root of Caprifoliacesws, Super-endodermal 
Network in, 73. 

—, Diaphragms in the Air-canals of, 
447 


— of Equisetum, Development of, 773. 

of Geraniacese, Sub-epidermal Net- 
work of, 986. 

— of Leguminosex and Ericacem, Super- 
endodermal Network of, 986. 

— of Restiacew, Exoderm of, 987. 

—, Supporting Network in the Cortex 
of, 986. 

Root-absorption and the Growth of Plants, 
Influence of certain Rays of the Solar 
Spectrum on, 769. 

-hairs, Geminate, 251. 

» New Method for Marking, 


1045. 
— — of the Rhinanthea, 450. 
— -pressure, 769. 
—— -symbiosis in the Ericacem, 86. 
—— -tubercles of Leguminosa, 251. 
—— -tubes and Bacteria, 82. 
Roots, Comparative Anatomy of, 75. 
—, Floating, of Sesbania aculeata, 607. 
— grown in Water, Action of Light on, 
95 


— in Loranthacex, Formation of, 450. 

—, Lateral, in Monocotyledons, For- 
mation of, 762. 

— of Aracesx, 607. 

— of Composite, Oil-passages in, 447. 

—— — , Oil-receptacles in, 760. 

— of Cycas, Anomalous Thickening in, 


— of Dicotyledons, Anomalies in the 
Structure of, 606. 

— of Leguminosx, Tubercles on, 608. 

— of Papilionaces, Mycodomatia in, 
450. 

— of Podocarpus, Emergences on, 252. 

— of Vicia Faba, Tubercular Swellings 
on, 251. 

—, Secretion from, 246. 

—, Structure of, and Arrangement of the 
Rootlets in Centrolepides, Eriocaulex, 
Juncee, Mayacee, and Xyridex, 251. 

Rosacexe, Embryo-sac of, 610. 

— , Periderm of, 987. 

Rosanilin Nitrate in watery Glycerin Solu- 
tion, Staining with, 518. 

Rose, J. N., and J. M. Coulter, Develop- 
ment of the Fruit of Umbelliferse, 79. 

Rose, Peronospora of, 1008. 

Rosen, F., Mycological Notes, 784. 

Rosenstadt, B., Structure of Asellus, 948. 

Rosenthal, J., and O. Schulz, Aljkali- 
Albuminate as a Nutrient Medium, 825. 

Rosseter, T. B., ‘“‘On the Generative 
Organs of Ostracoda,” 168. 

Rostrup, E., Fungi of Finland, 275. 

Rotatoria, Chytridium elegans, n. sp. & 
Parasite of, 1011. 

Rothert, W., Formation of Sporangia and 
Spores in the Saprolegniex, 271. 


INDEX. 


Rotifer, Parasitic, Discopus Synapte, 52. 

Rotifers, Contractile Vesicle of, 955. 

Rotterer, E., Staining-differences of Un- 
striped Muscle and Connective Tissue 
Fibres, 843. 

“ Rouge” of the Scotch Fir, 781. 

Roule, L., Formation of Embryonic Layers 
and Colom of a Limicolous Oligochete, 
735. : 

—, Histology of Pachydrilus enchyitre- 
oides, 222. 

, Killing contractile Animals in a 

state of extension, 104+. 

, Striated Muscles in Mollusca, 402. 

Roumeguére, C., Fungus Parasitic on the 
Plane, 631. 

Rousselet’s (C.) Life-box, 112. 

» On a small Portable Binocular 

Microscope and a Life-box, 110. 

, On some methods of Collecting and 

Keeping Pond-life for the Microscope, 

1040. 

, Pond Dredging and Collecting, 505. 

Rouvier, L., Gas Chamber, 289. 

, Preparation and Staining of the 
Spinal Cord, 660. 

—, Technical Treatise on Histology, 
686. 

Roux, E., Colour-test for the detection of 
Gonococcus, 517. 

——~, Cultivation of Anaerobic Microbes, 
1038. 

— , On Potito cultivation, 311. 

——,, W., Embryonic Axis, 923. 

Rowland’s (W.) Reversible Compressorium, 
803. 

Royston - Pigott, G. W., Microscopical 
Advances, 141, 305, 501, 652, 1036. 

, Willi on the Scales of Butterflies and 
Moths, 498. 

Roze, E., Pollination 
palustris, 256. 

Riicker, A. W., Micromillimetre, 502, 652. 

Rudanowski, —, Microscopical Nerve Pre- 
parations, 834. 

Ruland, F., Antennary Sensory Organs of 
Insects, 723. 

Rumex, Ovules of, 764. 

Ruminants, Protozoa found in the Stomach 
of, 975. 

Russian Lumbricide, 581. 

Russow, E., German Sphagnaces, 621. 

—., Physiological and Comparative 
Anatomy of Sphagnaces, 774. 

Rutley, F., Rock-forming Minerals, 823. 

Ryder, J. A., Celloidin-paraffin Methods 
of Imbedding, 512. 

——, Resemblance of Ovarian Ova and 
the Primitive Foraminifera, 706. 

——, and G. Fetterolf, Vestiges of Zonary 
Decidua in Mouse, 186. 


in Zannichellia 


TTtt 


5. 


Sabatier, A., Spermatozoa of Eledone 
moschata, 560. 

Sablon. See Leclere du Sablon. 

Saccardo, P. A., New Genus of Spheeri- 
aceous Pyrenomycetes, 630. 

Saccharomycetes, Cultivation of, 141. 

ellipsoideus and its Use in the Pre- 

paration of Wine from Barley, 785. 

minor, 633. 

Saefftigen, A., Nervous System of Phylac- 
tolematous Fresh-water Bryozoa, 402. 
Safranin and Anilin-blue, Modification of 

Garbini’s Double Stair, 1054. 

—— and Chromic Acid, Staining of Elastic 
Fibres with, 1053. 

— as a Stain for the Central Nervous 
System, 1051. 

St. Louis Club of Microseopists, 305. 

Saint-Remy, G., Brain of Iulus, 408. 

. of Phalangida, 576. 

Salamander, Goblet-cells of Intestine of, 
712. 

——, Spermatogenesis of, 189. 

Salensky, M., Development of Annelids, 
218. 

——, —— of Vermetus, 201. 

, W., Lateral Organs, 587. 

Salicorniesze, Foliar Sheath of, 609. 

Salinity, Influence of, 60. 

Salivary Glands of Cockroach, 725. 

— of Insects, 211. 

of Lecch, 38. 

of Sepia officinalis and Patella 
vulgata, 932. 

Salomons, D., Note on Depth of Focus, 
652. 

Salpa, Histology of, 207. 

Salsoleze, Anatomy of, 988. 

Salt-excreting Glands of Tamariscinee, 
249. 

—— -fish, Fungus Parasitic on, 781. 

Sand-wasps, 30. 

Sanderson, B., M. Foster, and Brunton, 
Manual of the Physiological Laboratory, 
686. 

——, J. B., Electromotive Properties of 
the Leaf of Dionza, 995. 

Sanfelice, F., Spermatogenesis in Guiuea- 
pig, 707. 

» —— of Vertebrates, $23. 

Sanford, E., Anatomy of the Common 
Cedar-apple, 631. : 

Sanio, C., Hybrid Mosses, 264. 

Santalaces and Rhinanthes, Haustoria 
of, 250. 

Sap, Conduction of, through the Secondary 
Wood, 768. 

Saposhnikoff, W., Geotropism, 458. 

Saprolegnia ferax, Infection of a Frog- 
tadpole by, 272. 

Saprolegnies, Formation of Sporangia and 
Spores in, 271. 


1312 


Saprolegniew, Recent Researches on, 1010. 

Sarasin, P. and F., Anatomy of Echino- 
thurida and Phylogeny of Echinoder- 
mata, 956, 

——, Budding in Star-fishes, 233. 

——, Development of Helix Waltoni, 24. 

——, Gemmation in Linckia multipora, 
431. 

— , Longitudinal Muscles and Stewart’s 
Organ in Echinothurids, 429. 

, Renal Organ of Echinoids, 590. 

Sarcina of the Lungs, 634. 

Sarcolemma, 928. 

Sarcophila Wohlfartii, Larva of, in Gum 
of Man, 944. 

Sars, G. O., ‘Challenger’ Cumacea, 35. 

; Phyllocarida, 36. 

Sauvageau, C., Diaphragms in the Air- 
canals of the Root, 447. 

Savin, —, Influence of Exposure on the 
Formation of the Annual Rings in, 762. 

Seales of Butterflies and Moths, Villi on, 
498. 

Scent-glands of Phryganida, 406. 

-organs of German Lepidoptera, 406. 

Schifer’s (E. A.) Hot-water Circulation 
Stage, and Swift’s Regulator, 649. 

—, R. P. C., Influence of the Turgidity 
of the Epidermal Cells on the Stomata, 
605, 763. 

Schaffer, J., Staining in the Study of Bone 
Development, 844. 

Schanz, F., Fate of the Blastopore in 
Amphibians, 189, 

Schenck, H., Anatomy of Water-plants, 77. 

Scheurlen’s Cancer Bacillus, 472, 785. 

Schewiakoff, W., Karyokinesis of Euglypha, 
66. 

—, and B. Grassi, Megastoma entericum, 


599. 

Schieck’s (F. W.) Meat-examining Micro- 
scope, 793. 

— Microscope Lamps, 490. 

— Travelling Microscope, 794. 

Schiefferdecker, P., Celloidin Corrosion 
Mass, Modification of, 159. 

—, Microtome for Cutting 
Aleohol, 152. 

— , Structure of Nerve-fibre, 197. 

—_, Weigert’s Hematoxylin Method as 
applied to other than Nervous Tissues, 
674. 

Schiemenz, P., Ingestion of Water in 
Lamellibranchs, Gastropods, and Ptero- 
pods, 199. 

Schill, J. F., Leeuwenhoek’s Discovery of 
Micro-organisms, 522. 

Schimkewitsch, W., Balanoglossus Meresch- 
koyskii, 588. 

, Development of Heart of Pulmonate 
Mollusea, 204. 

Schimmelbusch, C., A modification of 
Kochi’s plate process, 1010. 

Schimper, A. F. W., Formation of Oxalate 
of Lime in Leaves, 444. 


under 


INDEX, 


Schimper, A. F. W., Relationship between 
Ants and Plant in the Tropics, 772. 

, Starch and Chlorophyll-grains, 71. 

Schinzia, 631. 

Schistostega osmundacea, Protonema of, 
774. 

Schizomycetes in coloured media, On the 
cultivation of, 145, 823. 

Schlagdenhauffen, F., and E. Heckel, 
Laticiferous product of Mimusops and 
Payena, 759. 

Schmid, E., Sub-aquatice Respiration, 569. 

Schmidt and Haensch, The new improved 
enlarging camera of, 1034. 

—. Zirconium Light for Photomicro- 
graphy, 1033. 

; F., Development of Generative 
Organs of Cestoda, 426. 

Schneidemthl, —, Investigating the Ef- 
fects of Remedies by the Microscope, 
1060. 

Schneider, A., Sarcolemma, 928. 

Schnetzler, J. B., Colouring matter of the 
waters of the Lake of Bret, 785. 

, Infection of a Frog-tadpole by Sapro- 

legnia ferax, 272. 

, Reproduction of Thamnium alope- 

curum, 773. 

, Tannin in Acanthus spinosus, 72. 

Schonland, S., Apical meristem of the roots 
of Pontederiacex, 248. 

—, Imbedding Plant Tissues, 511. 

, Modification of Pagan’s “ Growing 
Slide,” 1028. 

Schottlander, F., Cell-division, 554. 

Schrenk, J., Vegetative Organs of Brasenia 
peltata, 449. 

Schroder, H., 503. 

Schroeter, J., Basidiomycetes, 1006. 

—, Cohn’s ‘Cryptogamic Flora of 
Silesia’? (Fungi), 99. 

Schuberg, A., Protozoa found in the 
Stomach of Ruminants, 975. 

Schultz, O., Physiological Anatomy of 
Stipules, 609. 

Schultze, F. E., A double lens made by 
Herr Westien of Rostock, 1025. 
On a binocular dissecting 

1025. 

——, O., Changes of Position of Nucleus, 
390. 

——,, Segmentation in Axolotl, 392. 

—, Vital Methylen-blue Reaction of 
Cell-granules, 842. 

Schulz, A., Pollination and Distribution of 
the Sexual Organs, 612. 

—., E., Reserve-substances in Ever- 
green Leaves, 983. 

—, O., and J. Rosenthal, Alkali-Albu- 
minate as a Nutrient Medium, 825. 

Schulze, A., The new Apochromatice Mi- 
cro-objectives and Compensating Oculars 
of Dr. Carl Zeiss, 1025. 

—,, F. E., ‘Challenger’ Hexactinellida, 
597, 747. 


lens, 


INDEX. 


Schulze, H., Vegetative reproduction of a 
Moss, 91. 

, O., Preparing Ova of Amphibia, 146. 

Schumann, K., Comparative Morphology 
of the Flower, 451. 

—, Morphology of the Flowers of Canna, 
611. 


New Myrmecophilous Plants, 998. 

Schiitt, F., Cheetoceros, 627. 

5 , Formation of Auxospores in Diatoms, 

68. 

—, Phycoerythrin, 622. 

——, Phycophein, 265. 

, Spore-formation in Peridines, 437. 

Schwabe’s Sliding Microtome, 668. 

Sehwarz, C. G, So-called Mucous Gland 
of Male Cypride, 731. 

Schwerdoff, —., Method of investigation 
for the earlier stages of the development 
of Mammalian ova, 511. 

Schwinck, —., Gastrula of Amphibians, 
549. 

Sclater, W. L., Development of a South 
American Peripatus, 410. 

Scorpions, Eyes in, 411. 

Scotch Fir, “ Rouge ” of, 781. 

Scott, D. H., Floating-roots of Lesbania 
aculeata, 607. 

, Nucleus in Oscillaria and Toly- 

pothrix, 275. 

,G. P., Exhibition of a Microscope, 

485. 

, W. B., Development of Petromyzon, 
388. 

Screen for the Abbe Camera Lucida, 809. 

Scyphistomata of Acraspedote Medusa, 
965. 

Seaman, W. H., American and Foreign 
Microscopes, 797. 

, Lamp and Vertical Illuminator, 650. 

——, Myrtle-wax Imbedding Process, 151. 

, Shellac Cement, 520. 

Sca-water, Phosphorescent Bacteria from, 
101. 

Scereting Canals of Umbellifere and 
Araliacez contained in the Phloem, 605. 

Cells of Intestinal Epithelium, 556. 

Secretion of Pure Aqueous Formic Acid 
by Lepidopterous Larve for the Pur- 
poses of Defence, 405. 

, Organs of, 77. 

Secretions, Development of some, and their 
Receptacles, 604. 

Secretory Canals and Reservoirs, 604. 

of Araucaria, 986. 

Section-cutting. See Contents, xxxviii. 

Sections, Fixing, 159, 853. 

» Nerve, Half-clearing 
preparing, 680. 

Sedgwick, A., Development of the Cape 
Species of Peripatus, 409. 

Sie Monograph of the Genus Peripatus, 

40. 

Seed of Myristica surinamensis, Aleurone- 

grains in, 72, 


method of 


1113 


Seeds and Fruits, Motion of rotating 
Winged, 612. 

———— of Rhamnus, 78. 

—. of Pharbitis triloba, 764. 

with Two Integuments, 992. 

Segmental Organs and Efferent Ducts of 
genital glands, homology of, in Oligo- 
cheeta, 419. 

Segmentation and Fertilization in Ascaris 
megalocephala, 423. 

— in Axolotl, 392. 

— of Telenstean Ova, 191. 

Primary of the Germ-stripe of 
Insecis, 941. 

Seifert, O., Ankylostomum duodenale, 
739. 

, On the Auer incandescent gas- 
burner, 495. 

Selaginella lepidophylla, 620. 

, Stomata and Ligules of, 460. 

Selection and Elimination, 927. 

Selenka, E., Models in Metal of Micro- 
scopical Preparations, 165. 

Self-fertilization and Cleistogamy in Or- 
chids, 994. 

- —— and Heterostylism, 453. 

——- pollination of Spergularia salina, - 
994. 

Selvatico, S., Aorta of Bombyx mori, 212. 

Semon, R., Mediterranean Synaptida, 
233. 

Senecioidee and Ambrosiacez, Compara- 
tive Anatomy of, 449. 

Sense of Direction in Formica rufa, 212. 

Senses, Curiosities of, 500. 

of Ants, 571. 

Sensibility to Heat, Apparatus for deter- 
mining, 114. 

Sensory Organ, Dermal, of Insects, 569. 

Organs and Nerve-centres of Articu- 

lata, 403. 

, Antennary, of Insects, 723. 

of Insects, Dermal, 210. 

Sepia officinalis and Patella vulgata, Sali- 
vary Glands of, 932 

Septal Glands of Narcissus, formation of 
Sugars in, 759. 

Serapias, Pollination of, 256. 

Serial Sections, The Mounting of, 682. 

Serpula, Structure of, 42. 

Sertoli, E., and V. v. Ebner, Spermato- 
genesis of Mammals, 707. 

Serum, Artificial, for Computation of 
Blood-corpuseles, 162. 

Sesbania aculeafai, Floating-roots of, 607. 

Sex, Production of, and phenomena of 
Crossing, 256. 

Sex-cells and Development of Millepora, 
236. 

Sexual Dimorphism in Amphipoda, 949. 

—— Organs in Atcidium, 782. 

, Pollination and Distribution of, 


? 


—— 


612. 
— Reproduction, Significance of, 193. 
Sexuality of Ustilaginesx, 269. 


1114 


Seymour, A. B., Character of the Injuries | 


produced by Parasitic Fungi upon their 
Host-plants, 470. 

Seynes, J. de, Ceriomyces and Fibrillaria, 
630. 

—, Fungus Parasitic on the Pine-apple, 
780. 

— , Polypores, 1007. 

, Rhizomorpha subcorticalis of Armil- 
laria mellea, 97. 

Sharp, B., Piylogeny of Lamellibranchs, 
965. 

Sheldon, L., Anatomy of Peripatus capensis 
and P. nove Zealandia, 577. 

——, Development of Peripatus Nove 
Zealandia, 33. 

Shellac Cement, 520. 

Shell-growth in Cephalopoda, 397, 559. 

Shells, Growth of Cephalopod, 200. 

Sherborn, C. D., H. W. Burrows, and G. 
Bailey, The Foraminifera of the Red 
Chalk, 383. 

— Bibliography of the Foraminifera, 
797 


Shrew, Inversion of the Germinal Layers 
in, 706. 

Sidebotham, H., Fate of the Blastopore in 
Rana temporaria, 925. 

Sieve-tules in the Laminaries, 265. 

Sigillaria and Lepidodendron, Leaves of, 
263. 

Silene inflata, Pollination of, 454. 

Siliceous Sponges, Natural History of, 
745. 

Silicispongi#, Gemmules of, 596. 

Silicoblasts, 596. 

Silk-worm, New Parasite of, 471. 

Ova, Respiration of, 726. 

Silver, Quantitative Determination of, by 
means of the Microscope, 494. 

—, separation of, by active Albumin, 
244. 

Silver-nitrate, Method for staining Nervous 
Tissue, Improvements in, 844. 

Simmons, W. J., Magnification in Photo- 
micrographs, 652. 

Simonelli, V., Structure of Serpula, 42. 

Siphonew, Staining Membranes in Living, 
516 


Siphonophora, Morphology of, 59. 

——,, System of, 741. 

Skeleton of Calcareous Sponges, 63. 

Skin, Staining the Elastic Fibres of, 155. 

Slide, Capillary, and accessories for the 
examination of Ova, 801. 

——,, Fixing Sections to, 159, 853. 

—— for obsrving Svap-bubble Films, 
647. 

—, Hardy’s Growing, 489. 

——,, Holman’s Current, 86. 

——, Modification of Pagan’s “ Growing, 
1028. 

——,, Preparing, to show Brownian Move- 
ment, 833. 

Slides, Life, 804, 806. 


INDEX. 


Sliding Microtome, Schwabe’s, 668. 
Sloth, Alga parasitic on, 624. 
Sluiter, C. P., Remarkable Case of 

Mutualism, 557. 

Smart, C., Gelatin Culture Test for Micro- 

organisms of Water, 855. 

Smiley, C. W., Rinnbock’s Slide of 

arranged Diatoms, 1057. 

Smith, E. A., Abnormal Growth in 

Haliotis, 561. 

» G., Nelson’s Photomicrographie 
Focusing Screen, 119. 
—, J. A., New Chromogenic Bacillus— 

Bacillus coeruleus, 472. 

—, J., Substance containing Sulphur in 

Cruciferous Plants, 997. 

—, L. H., Memoir of D. S. Kellicott, 
Pres. Amer. Soc. Micr., 305. 

—, T., The Microscope in the Study of 
Bacteriology, 324. 

—,, T. F., Arachneidiscus as a new Test 
for High-power Objectives, 815. 

—, Finer Structure of Butterfly Scales, 
405. 

——., New Appearances in Podura Scale, 
499 

—, On True versus False Images in 
Microseopy, 819. 

——,, Some points in Diatom-structure, 94. 

, Structure of Pleurosigma formosum, 

1063. 

— , Villi on the Scales of Butterflies and 
Moths, 498. 

Snails, Effects of Lesion of Supra-cesop].a- 
geal Ganglia in, 717. 

Svap-bubble Films, Slide for observing, 
647. 

Society Screw, 486. 

Soil and Water, New and Typical Micro- 
organisms from, 789. 

Solanacesx, Fruit of, 611. 

Solur Spectrum, Influence of certain Rays 
of, on Root-absorption and ou the Growth 
of Plants, 769. 

Solereder, —., Systematic Value of the 
Perforation in tle Walls of Vessels, 447. 

Sollas, W. J., Sponges, 62. 

Solms-Laubach’s (H. v.) Introduction to 
Fossil Botany, 620. 

Somomya, Brain of, 944. 

— erythrocephala, Organization of Brain 
of, 407. 

Sonntag, P., Duration of the Apical 
Growth of the Leaf, 455. 

Sorauer, P., Root-tubers and Bacteria, 82. 

Soulier, A., Formation of Tube of Annelids, 
418, 

Souza, A. de, On pyridin in histology, 
519, 1054. 

Soyka, J., Bacteriological investigation 
methods, with special reference to 
quantitative, 1040. 

Sparganium and Typha, Flowers and Fruit 
of, 78. 

| Speetia of Pleurosigma angulatum, 303. 


; 
| 
| 
: 


INDEX. 


Spergularia salina, 
99+. 

* Spermatia ” of the Ascomycetes, 1006. 

Spermatogenesis, 16, 27. 

in Aleyonella, 566. 

— in Aplysia, 397. 

—— in Chetognatha, 227. 

in Guinea-pig, 707. 

— of Arthropods, 9+40. 

—— of Gastropods, 932. 

— of Mammals, 547, 707. 

of Marsupials, 386. 

—— of Reptiles, 924. 

—— of Salamander, 189. 

of Vertebrates, 923. 

Spermatozoa and Ova, Formation of, in 
Spongilla fluviatilis, 966. 

— from Triton, 1065. 

—— in Murex, Form and Development of, 
200. 

of Hledone moschata, 560. 

of Frog, Irritability of, 707. 

Spheerocrystals, 603. 

Spheeroplea, 267. 

Spheerozoa, Preparing, 665. 

Sphagna, New, 91. 

Sphagnacez, German, 621. 

Physiological and Comparative 
Anatomy of, 774. 

Sphaguum and Andrexa, Sporogonium of, 
91, 1000. 

» Horms of, 775. 

Spherometer Microscope, Bamberg’s, 280. 

Sphyranura, Methods of studying, 149. 

osleri, 47. 

Spicules, Remarkable, from the Oamaru 
Deposit, 967. 

Spider, New Orb-weaving, 412. 

Spillmann, —., and Haushalter, —., Dis- 
semination of Bacillus by Flies, 635. 

Spinal Cord, Effect of Hardening Agents 
on the Ganglion-cells of, 831. 

—— -——,, Preparation and Staining of, 
660. 

Ganglion-cells, 556. 

Spines, Anatomy of, 763. 

of certain Plants, 989. 

Spinther, Annelid Genus, 42. 

Spirillum concentricum, a new species 
from decomposing blood, 278. 

Spirochzete of Relapsing Fever, Staining, 
1054. 

Spirogyra, Conjugation of, 625. 

Spleen, Injection Mass for the Vessels of, 
848. 

Sponges. Sce Porifera, Contents, xviii. 

Spongilla, Development of Generative 
Products in, 64. 

fluviatilis, Formation of Ova and 
Spermatazoa in, 966. 

——, Investigation of Generative Products 
of, 1045. 

Spongill, Survival of, after Development 
of Swarm-larve, 596. 

Spongocladia, 1002. 


Self-pollination of, 


1115 


Sporangia and Spores in the Saproleguiex, 
Formation of, 271. 

Sporangium of Ferns, Dehiscence of, 90. 
of Polypodiacez, Development of, 

3. 


Spore-formation in Bacteria, 787. 

in Peridines, 437. 

- —— in the Bacilli of Xeresis con- 
junctive, Streptococci, and Cholera 
some, 1016. 

in the Bacillus of Glanders, 


473. 

Spores and Sporangia in the Saprolegnies, 
Formation of, 271. 

——, Germination of, in Ustilago, 270. 

of Equisetum, Dissemination of, 1000. 

of the Ferments, 633. 

, Staining, 845. 

Sporogonium of Andreza and Sphagnum, 
Development of, 91, 1009. 

-—— of Mosses, Anatomy and Development 
of, 460. 

Sporophore of Mosses, Transpiration of, 91. 

Spring-sap in the Birch and Hornbeam, 
445. 

Stage, Babes’ Hot, 800. 


111, 


171. 

——, Fine-adjustment by Tilting, 478. 

—, Malassez’s Hot, 483. 

—, Nelson’s Mechanical, 477. 

, new form of mechanical, 334. 

—, Schafer’s Hot-water Circulation, 
649. 

Staining. See Contents, xxxviii. 

Stamati, G., Castration of the Cray-fish, 
947. 

——,, Digestion in Cray-fishes, 947. 

Stamens of Echiuocactus, Lrritability of, 
261. 

Standards of Length and their practical 
application, 503. 

Stapl O., Explosive Fruits of Alstroemeria, 


Starhylea pinnata, Pitcher-like Leaflets 
of, 253. 

Star-fish, Emigration of Amoceboid Cor- 
puscles in, 431. 

— -fishes, Budding in, 233. 

-——, Renal Organs of, 958. 

Starch, Action of Formose on Cells — 
tute of, 85. 

—— and Chlorophyll-grains, 70. 

—, Formation of, from various sub- 
stances, 771. 

: of, in the Chlorophyll-grains, 
71, 983. 

— Injection-mass, 1056. 

, Occurrence of, in the Onion, 983. 

Starch-grains, Structure of, 443. 

Stedman, J. M., Preparing Tape-worms 
for the Museum and the Microscope, 
148, 

Stegemann’s (A.) 
Camera, 116. 


Photomicrographic 


1116 


Stein’s (S. T.) “Large Photomicroscope,” 
295. 

Steinach’s (.) Filter-capsule, 850. 

Steiner, —., Physiology of Nervous 
System, 559. 

Steinhaus, J., Goblet-cells of Intestine of 
Salamander, 712. 

Stems, Aerial, 451. 

, Torsion of, 989. 

, Underground, Morphology of, 450. 

Stenglein, M., Coarse and Fine Focusing 
Arrangements, 1032. 

—, Illumination of Objects in Photo- 
micrography, 1033. 

—, Instantaneous Photomicrography, 
811. 

—., and O. Israel’s Photomicrographie 
Microscope, 115. 

Sterculiaceew, &c., Comparative Anatomy 
of, 606. 

Sterile Fronds, Conversion of Fertile into, 
261. 

Sterility of Fungi, 467. 

Sterilization of Potato, Apples, 
Water for cultivation purposes, 310. 

Sterilizing water, Improvement in Plaut’s 
Flasks for, 1040. 

Sternberg, G. M., Photomicrography in 
Medicine, 119. 

Stewart, C., Exhibition of remarkable form 
of Lamellibranch Shell ( Zhecalia), 170. 
Stewart’s Organ and Longitudinal Muscles 

in Echinothurids, 429. 

Stichococeus and Ulothrix, 777. 

bacillaris, 632. 

Stipules, 252. 

: Physiological Anatomy of, 609. 

Stizenberger, —., and Hegetschweiler, —., 
Lichens on unusual substrata, 96. 

Stohr, P., Handbook of Histology and 
Human Microscopical Anatomy, inelud- 
ing Microscopical Technique, 686. 

Stokes, A. C., Fresh-water Infusoria of the 
United States, 598. 

—, Life Slides, 806. 

——.,, New Fresh-water Infusoria, 65. 

—, Notices of New Infusoria Flagellata 
from American Fresh Waters, 698. 

—, Two new Aquatic Worms from North 
America, 582. 

Stomach, Glandular Cells of, 393. 

of Ruminants, Protozca found in, 

975. 

, So-called Digestive, of some Ants, 
570. 

Stomata and Ligules of Selaginella, 460. 

— , Development of, 247. 

——,, Influence of the Turgidity of the 
Epidermal Cells on, 605, 763. 

Stone, W. E., Cultivation of Saccharo- 
mycetes, 141. 

Stowell, C. H., Thin Sections, 842. 

Strasburger, E., Division of the Nucleus, 
Cell-division, and Impregnation, 600, 


978. 


and 


INDEX. 


Strasburger, E., Microscopic Botany. A 
Manual of the Microscope in Vegetable 
Histology, 166. 

Strasser, H., Methods of Plastic Recon- 
struction, 853. 

, New Section-stretcher, with arrange- 
ments for removing the Section, 841. 

—, and W. His, On the methods of 
Plastie Reconstruction and their import- 
ance for Anatomy and Embryology, 686. 

Straus, —., and Wurtz, —. Improved 
method for the Bacteriological Examina- 
tion of Air, 854. 

Strecker’s Gas Chamber, 288. 

Streptococci, &c., Spore-formation in, 1016. 

Streng, A., On some microchemical re- 
actions, 856. 

Stricker, 8., Electric Microscope, 1025. 

Stricker’s Gas Chamber, 288. 

Stroemfelt, H. F. G., Attachment-organ of 
Algz, 461. 

, New Genera of Pheozoospores, 465. 

Strubeil, A., Structure and Development 
of Heterodera Schachtii, 737. 

Struthiopteris germanica, Willd., Develop- 
ment of, 618. 

‘Student’s Handbook to the Microscope,’ 
137. 

Studer, T., Classification of Aleyonaria, 237. 

Studies in Vegetable Biology, 996. 

Sturt, G., and E. Grove, Fossil Marine 
Diatoms from New Zealand, 94. 

Styrax Balsam, Preparing, 1057. 

Stysanus and Hormodendron, 1010. 

Sub-aquatie Respiration, 569. 

-epidermal Network of the Root of 
Geraniacex, 986. 

—— -stage, Necessity for a, 1024. 

Suberites, Structure of, 239. 

Suberous Cells, Wall of, 985. 

Sublimate as a Hardening Medium for the 
Brain, 831. 

Subterranean Shoots of Oxalis, 988. 

Sucker on Fin of Pterotrachea, 205. 

Suckers in Phanerogamous Parasites, 
Origin of, 80. 

Sugar and Alkaloid in Cyclamen, 759. 

of Milk, Occurrence of the Elements 
of, in Plants, 604. 

Sugars in the Septal Glands of Narcissus, 
Formation of, 759. 

Sulphur in Cruciferous Plants, Substance 
containing, 997. 

Super-endodermal Network in the Root of 
the Caprifoliaces, 73. 

of the Root of Legumi- 
noseze and Ericacee, 986. 

Sutroa rostrata, New Annelid, 582. 

Swuen, A., Development of Torpedo ocel- 
lata, 389, 

Swarm-larve, Survival of Spongille after 
Development of, 596. 

Sweden,” ‘** New Glass just made in, 499. 

Swift, J., The Jena Optical Glass, 486. 

— Regulator, 649. 


INDEX. 


Sycon, Sections of, 690. 

Sydow’s (P.) Lichens of Germany, 621. 

Symbiosis of Bacteria with Glceocapsa 
polydermatica, 654. 

, Role of, in Luminous 

Animals 929. 

, Root-, in the Ericacee, 86. 

Symbiotic Fungus in Molgulide, 782. 

Symphoricarpus, Floral Nectary of, 255. 

Synaptide, Mediterranean, 233. 

Synthesis of Albuminoids, 455. 

Syringes, Robin’s, Lacaze-Duthiers’, and 
Farabceut’s Injecting, 678. 


Marine 


AK 


“1., F. S.,” “Microscopical Advances,” 
137. 

Tenia cucumerina in Man, 955. 

-— clliptica and Ascaris lumbricoides, 
Life-history of, 426. 

—— nana, 46, 229. 

saginata, 955. 

, Interesting Specimen of, 427. 

Taguchi, K., Injection with Indian Ink, 
848. 


Tamariscines, Salt-excreting Glands of, 


Tanaide and the Apseudes. 416. 

Tanakadate, A., Note on the Constants of 
a Lens, 819. 

Tange, F., Cell-division, 18. 

Tannin and its connection with Meta- 
stasis, 984. 

, Function of, 444. 

in Acanthus spinosus, 72. 

in the Crassulacee, 603. 

Tanzer, P., On Unna’s staining method 
for the elastic fibres of the skin, 850. 

Tape-worm, Methods of preparing, 511. 

-worms for the Museum and the 

Microscope, Preparing, 148. 

, Mounting, 314. 

Taphrina, 274, 470. 

Tarantula, American, Age and Habits of, 
215. 

Tarchanoff, J., and Kolessnikoff, —., 
Alkaline Egg-albumen as a Medium for 
Bacteria Cultivation, 503. 

Tassi, F., Nectar of Rhododendron, 603. 

Tate, A. W., Use of the Microscope for 
practical purposes, 324. 

Tavel, F. v., Mechanical Protection of 
Bulbs, 607. 

Taylor, T., Crystalline formations of Lard 
and other Fats, 166, 324. 

, Wax-cells, 519. 

Teasing-needle, James’s, 520. 

Teeth and Bone, Method for making Pre- 
parations of, and retaining their soft 
parts, 1042. 

Tegumentary Filaments of Flagellata, 
Method of Preparing, 832 

Teleostean Ova, Segmentation of, 191. 


1888. 


PEW, 


Teleosteans, Eggs and Larve of, 191, 920. 

Teleostei, Germinal Layers in, 189. 

, Origin of Blood in, 192. 

Telescope and Microscope, 820. 

Telphusa, Parasite of, 40. 

Temnocephala, 50. 

Tempere’s (J.) Preparations of Diatoms, 
667. 

Teredo navalis, Parasites of, 199. 

Testacella, 562. 

Test, Arachnoidiscus as a new, for High- 
power Objectives, 815. 

Test-plates, Fasoldt’s, 298, 817. 

-tube Cultivations, Preparing Sections 

from, 671, 833. 

-tubes, Fire-proof Cotton-wool Plug 
for, 1040. 

Testicle, Mammalian, Preparing and Stain- 
ing, 844. 

, Preparing, 
Fission, 146. 

Tests for Callus, Microchemical, 323. 

for Modern Objectives, 816. 

Tetraedron and 'Trochiscia, 1013. 

Thallophytes in Medicinal Solutions, 459. 

Thallus of certain Algze, Development of, 
265. 

of Marchantiez, Hygroscopic Move- 
ments of, 1001. 

Thamnium alopecurum, Reproduction of, 
113, 

Thanhoffer, L. v., Two new Methods for 
preparing Nerve-cells, 658. 

Thate’s (P.) New Microtome, 839. 

Thaxter, R., Entomophthoreze of the United 
States, 1010. 

Thecalia, Shell of, 170. 

Thermic Experiments 
orientalis, 31. 

Thickness, Proper, of Microscopical Sec- 
tions, 671. 

Thistle-flower, Trigger-hairs of, 452. 

Thoma Microtome, Accessory for rapid 
Cutting with, 840. 

eae J. C., New Parasitic Copepod, 

Whe 

Thomson, J. A., Action of the Environ- 
ment, 927. 

, Structure of Suberites, 239. 

Thiimen, F, v., Fungi of Fruit-trees, 780. 

, New Vine-disease, 471. 

Thury’s Five-tube Microscope, 792. 

Thylle, 988. 

Tichomiroff, A., Parthenogenesis in Bom- 
byx mori, 725. ? 
Tieghem, P. v., Arrangement of Secondary 

Roots and Buds on Roots, 80. : 
——, Exoderm of the Restiacez, 987. 
—, Geminate Root-hairs, 251. 

——, New Genera of Ascomycetes, Oleina, 

and Podocapsa, 271. 

, Structure of the root and arrange- 

ment of the rootlets in Centrolepides, 

Eriocauler, Junece, Mayaces, and 

Xyridex, 251. 
AR 


for observing Nuclear 


on Periplaneta 


1118 


Tieghem, P. v., Super-endodermal Net- 
work of the Root of Leguminoseze and 
Exvicace, 986. 

——, ——— «+ —— Jn the S0ob/Or ane 
Caprifoliacee, 73. 

——, Supporting Network in the Cortex 
of the Root, 986. 

, Tubereles on the Roots of Legu- 

minosx, 608. 

and H. Donliot, Plants which form 

their Rootlets without a Pocket, 987. 

and Monal, —., Sub-epidermal Net- 
work of the Root of Geraniaces, 986. 

Tiemann, F., 686. 

Tiliacew, &e., Comparative Anatomy of, 
06 


Tindall, S. J., Scales on Red Currants, 856. 

Tintinnodesw, Monograph of, 436. 

Tissue of Fossil Plants, Anomalous Cells 
in the Interior of, 605. 

Tissues and Cells, 710. 

—— and Ova, Bacteria-like Bodies in, 31. 

—--—, Imbedding Plant-, 511. 

—, Methods of Fixing and Preserving 
Animal, 510. 

of Living Animals, Differential Stain- 
ing of, 842. 

Tolu Balsam for Microscopical Purposes, 
Purification of, 681. 

Tolypothrix and Oscillaria, Nucleus in, 
275. 

Tomaschek, A., Bacillus muralis, 276, 786. 

, New Chytridium, 1011. 

—., Symbiosis of Bacteria with Glceo- 
capsa polydermatica, 634. 

Tombs, Fauna of, 32. 

Toni, J. B. de, Bulbotrichia, 1003. 

——,, Classification of Chlorophycex, 775. 

—, Diatoms from a Trygon, 777. 

—, Hansgirgia, a new genus of aerial 
Algse, 1003. 

, Remarkable Flos-aque, 633. 

Topsent, E., Gemmules ot Silicispongie, 
596. 

, So-called Peripheral Prolongations 
of Clionz, 239. 

Torpedo ocellata, Development of, 389. 

Torsion of Stems, 989. 

Tortoise, Alga epiphytic on. 268. 

Transpiration as a Function of Living 
Protoplasm, 456. 

, Influence of Atmospheric Movement 

on, 259. 

, Literature of, 259. 

of the Sporosphore of Mosses, 91. 

Trapella, Oliv., a new Genus of Pedalince, 
992. 

Trautwein, J., Anatomy of Annual 
Branches and Inflorescences, 451. 

Treasurer’s Account for 1887, 331 

Trees, Acarida on, 34. 

, Effects produced by the Annular 
Decortication of, 447. 

Trelease, W., Subterranean 
Oxalis, 988, 


Shoots of | 


INDEX. 


Trematoda, General Sketch of, 953. 

Trematode in white of newly-laid Hen's 
Evg, 51. 

Tremella fimetaria, 270. 

Trentepolhlia, 777, 

Treub, M., Life-history of Lycopodium, 
262. 

. Myrmecophilous Plants, 998. 

Trichinz or other Animal Parasites in 
Meat, Determination of the Number of, 
164. 

Trichoeladium, Development and Fruceti- 
fication of, 630. 

Trichomanes, Formation of Gemme in, 
262. 

, Oophyte of, 617. . 

Trichosphaeria paradoxa and Herpotrichia 
nigra, 470. 

Triclades, Some European, 229. 

Tridacna, So-called Eyes of, &e., 564. 

Triebel, R., Oil-passages in the Roots of 
Composite, 447, 760. 

Trigger-hairs of the Thistle-flower, 452. 

Tri-ocular, Quadri-ocular, &c., Prisms, 796. 

Triple-staining, Baumgarten’s Method of, 
676. ° 

Triton, Spermatozoa from, 1065. 

Trochiscia and Tetraedron, 1013. 

Troup, F., The Diagnosis of early Phthisis 
by the Microscope, 856. 

Truan, A., and O. Witt, Photomicrographs 
of Diatoms, 295. 

Truffle, Parasitism of, 780. 

Trygon, Diatoms from a, 777. 

Trzebinski, 8., Effect of Hardening Agents 
on the Ganglion-cells of the Spinal Cord, 
831. 

Tschirch, A., Aleurone-grains in the Seed 
of Myristica surinamensis, 72. 

, Contents of the Cells of the Aril of 

the Nutmeg, 760. 

Development of some Secretions and 
their Receptacles, 604. 

——, Organs of Secretion, 77. 

——, Quantitative estimation of Chloro- 
phyll, 71. 

Tube of Annelids, Formation of, 418. 

Tubercle and Lepra Bacilli, Staining, 157, 
846. 

— Bacillus Stain, Specificness of, 157. 

—— ——,, Simple and Rapid Staining of, 
1053. 

Tubercles on the Roots of Leguminose, 
608. 

Tubercular Swellings on the Roots of Vicia 
Faba, 251. 

Tubercularia, New, 779. 

Tubes for Microspectroscopie Analysis, 
807. 

Tubeuf, C. v.. Formation of Roots in 
Loranthaces, 450. 

, New Disease of the Douglas-pine, 
471. 

Tubular Cells of the Fumariaceex, 73. 

Tuckerman, F., Tenia saginata, 427, 955. 


INDEX. 


Tunicata. See Contents, xi. 

Turbellarian, Second Species of, Living on 
Nebaliz, 428. 

Tylenchus devastatrix, 585. 

——, Natural History of, 229. 

Typha and Sparganium, Flowers and Fruit 
ot, 78. 

Typhoid Bacillus, Supposed Spores of, 
1016. 

“Typhus” Bacillus, Cultivation of, 
coloured nutrient media, 1039. 


in 


U. 


Uhlitzsch, P. G., Growth of the Leaf-stalk, 
258. 

Ulothrix, 465. 

and Stichococcus, 777. 

crenulata, 268. 

, Structure of, 1003. 

Ulotrichacez, Aerophytic 
1002. 


Species of, 


Umbellifere and Araliacese, Secreting | 


Canals of, contained in the Phloem, 605. 
——, Development of the Fruit of, 79. 
Underground Stems, Morphology of, 450. 
Underhill, H. M. J.,Section-cutting applied 

to Insects, 152. 

Ungar, —, On staining Spermotozoa, 850. 
United States, Entomophthoreze of, 1010. 
——, Fresh-water Infusoria of, 498. 
—— —,, Wolle’s Fresh-water Alge of, 


94. 

Unna, P. G., The cultivation of Skin fungi, 
831. 

Upson, H. S., Carmine staining for nerve- 
tissue, 850. 

Ureeolariz, Structure of, 753. 

Urech, F., Decrease of Weight in Winter 
Pupze of Pontia brassice, 572. 

——, Diminution in Weight of Chrysalis, 
aie 

Uredinex, 97. 

and their Hosts, 1007. 

Urine, Stain for the Morphological Ele- 
ments in, 845. 

Urocheta, Mucous Gland of, 422. 

Uronema, a new genus of Chlorozoosporee, 
626. 

Uruguaya, New Species of, 748. 

Uskow, N., Development of Blood-vascular 
System of the Chick, 187. 

Ustilagines, Sexuality of, 269. 

Ustilago, Germination of the Spores in, 
270. 


V. 


Vacuole, Nature of Contractile, 749. 

Vacuoles, Increase of Normal, by Division, 
981. 

Vaizey, J. R., Absorption of Water and its 
Relation to the Constitution of the Cell- 
wall in Mosses, 263. 

, Alternation of Generations in Green 

Plants, 459. 


1119 


Vaizey, J. R., Anatomy and Develo, ment 
of the Sporogonium of Mosses, 460. 

Development of the Root of Equi- 
setum, 773. 

— Transpiration of the Sporophore of 
Mosses, 91 

Vallentin, R., and J. T. Cunningham, 
Photospheria of Nyctiphanes norvegica, 
415. 

Valvata piscinalis, Anatomy of, 718. 

Van Gieson, J., A résumé of recent 
Technical Methods for the Nervous 
System, 511. 

Varalda, L., and E. Perroncito, Composi- 
tion of “ Muffe,” 633. 

Vascular System and Ceelom of Mollusca 
and Arthropoda, 395. 

Apparatus and Nervous System of 
Ophiurids, 57. 

—— Bundles in the Rhizome of Mono- 
cotyledons, 74. 

System of Hirudinea, 219. 

Vassale, G., and G. Bizzozero, Staining 
Mitoses, 674. 

Vayssiere, A., Systematic Position of Hero, 
718. 

Vevetable Biology, Studies in, 996. 

Vegetative reproduction of a Moss, 91. 

Veitch, H. J., Fertilization of Cattleya 
labiata, 994, 

Vejdovsky, F., Larval and Definite Excre- 
tory Systems in Lumbricide, 220. 

, Studies on Gordiide, 583. 

Venetian Chlorophycez, 627. 

Vereker, J. G. P., Numerical Aperture, 
819. 

——, On the Choice of a Microscope, 
823. 

, Presidential Address to the Postal 
Microscopical Society, 3095. 

Vermes. See Contents, xiv. 


| Vermetus, Development of, 201. 


Vermilia cespitosa, Embryvlogy of, 578. 

Vernation of Leaves, 252. 

Verson, E., Parthenogenesis in Bombyx 
mori, 571. 

Verworn, M., Biological Studies on Pro- 
tista, 755. 

, Fresh-water Bryozoa, 27. 

——, Method of investigating Cristatella, 
147, 

Vescovi, P. de, Method of Representing 
and Calculating the Magnification of 
Microscopic Objects in the projected 
images, 135. 

Vesque, J., Epidermal Reservoirs for Water 
448 


Vessel for the Culture of Low Organisms, 
6957. 

Vessels, Systematic Value of the Perfora- 
tion in the Walls of 447. 

Viallanes, H., Nerve-centres and Sensory 
Organs of Articulata, 403. 


| Vibrio from Nasal Mucus, 99. 
' Vibrios, 1017. 


1120 


INDEX. 


Vibrios, Two kinds of, found in deeompo- | Wagner, W., So-called Auditory Hairs, 411. 


sing Hay Infusion, 100. 

Vicia Faba, Tubercular Swellings on the 
Roots of, 251. 

Victoria, Polyzoa of, 403. 

— regia, Prickle-pores of, 81. 

Vigelius, W. J., Ontogeny of Marine 
Bryozoa, 936. 

Viguier, C., New Type of Anthozoa, 745. 

Villion the Seales of Butterflies and Motlis, 
498. 

Villot, A., Development and Specific De- 
termination of Gordii, 228. 

Vinassa, E., Pharmacognostic Microtome 
and ‘Technique, 513. 

Vine, Mal nero of, 762. 

Vine-disease, New, 471. 

Vines, S. H., Movement of Leaf of Mimosa 
pudica, 457. 

, Systematic Position of Isoetes, 773. 

Virchow, H., Physics of the Yolk, 923. 

Vision in Arachnids, 214. 

of Caterpillars and Adult Insects, 
404. 

——, Powers of, 32. 

Viviparous Plants and Apogamy, 768. 

Vochting, H., Influence of Radiant Heat 
on the Development of the Flower, 995. 

Voeltzkow, A., Aspidogaster conchicola, 
954. 

, Development in Egg of Musca vomi- 
toria, 572. 

Vogt, C., Arachnactis and Cerianthus, 743. 
Voinoff, R. G., On the different Cements 
for closing microscopical sections, 853. 

Volkens, G., Desert Flora, 617. 

, Salt-excreting glands of Tamaris- 
cine, 249, 

Volvocinex, &c., Chemotactic Movements 
of, 770. 

Vorce, C. M., Making Lantern Slides, 305. 

, Tue Meeting of the American Society 
of Microscopists, 141. 

Vorticcllidae, Conjuyzation of, 752. 

Vries, H. de, Isotonie Coefficient of 
Glycerin, 617. 

, New Application of tle Plasmolytie 

Method, 1059. 

, Preservation of Plants in Spirit and 
the Prevention of Browning, 852. 

Vuillemin, P., Ascospora  LBeijerinckii, 
1007. 

—, Biological Studies of Fungi, 628. 

, Disease affecting Cherry and Plum- 

trees, 274. 

. attacking Amygdalex, 781]. 

——., Epidermal Glands, 81. 

and Bartet, —., “Rouge” of the 
Scotch Fir, 781. 

Wi 

bis E., Regeneration of Lost Parts, 
215. 

——,, Tannin in the Crassulacez, 603. 

—. V., Blood of Spiders, 946. 


Wahrlich, W., New Pythium, 98. 

Wainio, I... Cladonia, 621. 

Wakker, J. H., Crystalloids in Marine 
Alga, 463. 

——,, Crystals of Calcium oxalate, 445. 

——,, Elaioplast, 443. 

——,, Formation of Aleurone-grains, 443. 

——., Rejuvenescence of Caulerpa, 464. 

Waldeyer, W., Karyokinesis and Heredity, 
554. 

, —— in its Relation to Fertilization, 
928. 

Waldner, M., Development of the Sporo- 
gonium of Andrea and Sphagnum, 
91, 1000. 

Walker, H. D., Gape Worm of Fowls, 740. 

Wall of Suberous Cells, 985. 

Walls of Vessels, Systematic Value of the 
Perforation in, 447. 

Walmsley, W. H., Photomicrography and 
the making of Lantern Slides, 652. 

Walsingham, Lord, Gape Worm of Fowls, 
740. 

Ward, H. M., Structure and Life-history 
of Puecinia Graminis, 1007. 

——, Tubercular Swellings on the Roots of 
Vicia Faba, 251. 

—, and J. Dunlop, Fruits and Seeds of 
Rhamunus, 78. 

Ward, R. H., Fasoldt’s Test Plates, 300. 

, Indexing Microscopical Slides, 320. 

——, Instantaneous Mounting in Farrant’s 
Gum and Glycerin Medium, 520. 

Warm Chamber, Nuttall’s, 1027. 

Wasps, Sand, 30. 

Wasserzug, E., Fusoma, 1009. 

, Principal processes of staining 
Bacteria, 159. 

——.,, Spores of the Ferments, 633. 

Watase, 8., Germinal Layers in Cephalo- 
pods, 931. 

, Homology of Germinal Layers of 
Cephalopods, 396. 

“ Watchmaker Glass,” Bausch and Lomb 
Optical Co.’s, 795. 

Water, Absorption of, and its Relation to 
the Constitution of the Cell-wall iv 
Mosses, 263. 

; , by Gastropoda, 563. 

and Soil, New and Typical Micro- 

organisms from, 789. 

, Epidermal Reservoirs for, 448. 

, Gelatin Culture Test for Micro- 

organisms of, 855. 

, Ingestion of, in Lamellibranchs, 
Gastropods, and Pteropods, 199. 

——, Potato, and Apples for cultivation 
purposes, Sterilization of, 310. 

— use for Brewing, Analysis of, as 
regards Micro-organisms, 680. 


| Water-bath and Oven, Reeves’s, 163. 


- —, Garbini’s Closed, 1058. 
—— -plants, Anatomy of, 77. 


| Waterhouse, G. R., Obituary Notice, 141. 


INDEX. 


Waierman, §8., How to produce Hemo- 
globin or Hematocrystallin, 856. 

Watson and Son’s Anglo-Continental or 
sStudent’s Microscope, 797. 

Watt, G., Indian Fibres, 495. 

Wax Cells, 519. 

Webb, —., Death of, 654. 

Weber, van Bosse, —., Algz parasitic on 
the Sloth, 624. 

Wehmer, C., Action of Formose on Cells 
destitute of Starch, 85. 

Weibel, E., Two kinds of Vibrios found in 
decomposing Hay Infusion, 100. 

, Vibrio from Nasal Mucus, 99. 

——,, Vibrios, 1017. 

Weigert, C.. New Method for Staining 
Fibrin and Micro-organisms, 675. 

Weigert’s Haematoxylin-copper Stain for 
Nerve-fibre with the use of the freezing 
Microtome, Combining, 1051. 

Heematoxylin Method as applied to 
other than Nervous Tissues, 674. 

Weight, Decrease of, in Winter Pup of 
Pontia brassice, 572. 

of Chrysalis, Diminution in, 31. 

Weil, L. A., Method for making Prepara- 
tions of Bone and Teeth and retaining 
their soft parts, 1042, 

Weismann, A., Degeneration, 194. 

, Heredity, 926. 

, and C. Ischikawa, Formation of 

Polar Globules in Animal Ova, 705. 

, Partial Impregnation, 709. 

., Henocque’s Heematoscope, 


Weiss, 
1029. 

——, On the Fleisch! Hemometer, 808. 

—, F. H., Some Oigopsid Cuttle-fishes, 
Ei. 

Weldon, W. F. R., Haplodiscus piger, 
955. 

Wellington District, New Zealand, Fresh- 
water Infusoria of, 972. 

Weltner, M., Survival of Spongille after 
Development of Swarm-larve, 596. 

——, W., New Cirriped, 417.- 

Wende, E., The Microscope in the Dia- 
gnosis of Skin Diseases, 856. 

Wendt, E. C., Roux’s Colour-test for the 
detection of Gonococcus, 517. 

Wenhain, F. H., Retirement of, 305. 


D 


Went, F. A. T. C., Ewbryo-sac of Rosacez, | 


610. 

, Increase of normal Vacuoles by 

Division, 981. 

, Nuclear and Cell Division, 243. 

Wesener, F., Staining Lepra and Tubercle 
Bacilli, 157. 

Wettstein, R. v.. Abnormal Fructification 
of Agaricus procerus, 269. 

, Function of Cystids, 96. 

Wheat, Development of, 769. - 

Whelpley, H. M., Microscopical Examina- 
tion of Drugs, 1060. 


806. 


, Microscopy for Amateur Workers, | 


1121 


Whelpley, H. M., Preparing Slides to show 
Brownian Movement, 833. 

White, S. S., Dentists Examining Glass, 
795. 

— (T. C.), Elementary Microscopical 
Manipulation, 165. 

, W., Colour-relation between Pup 
and Surroundings, 727. 

Whitman, C. O., Germ-layers of Clepsine, 
37. 

——, Kinetic Phenomena of the Egg 
during Maturation and Fecundation, 
546. 

Wiedersheim, R., Ancestry of Man, 193. 

Wieler, A., Conduction of Sap through 
the Secondary Wood, 768. 

—, Plasmolysis in Flowering Plants, 
759. 

Wiener, O., Measuring Thin Films, 501. 

Wierzejski, A., Fresh-water Sponges, 748. 

, Psorospermium Haeckelii, 598. 

Wiesner, J., Albumen in the Cell-wall, 
602, 982. 

——, Influence of Atmospheric Movement 
on Transpiration of, 259. 

—, The microscopical investigation of 
paper, with special reference to the oldest 
Oriental and European papers, 324, 521. 

Wigand, A., Colours of Leaves and Fruits, 
254. 

——,, Crystal-plastids, 243. 

Wildeman, E. de, Bulbotrichia, 1003. 

——. Microspora, 94. 

——,, Trentepohlia, 777. 

——,, Ulothrix and Stichococcus, 777. 

—, crenulata, 268. ; 

Wilfarth, H., Cultivation-bottle, 143. 

Wilkinson, W. H., Colour-reaction: its use 
to the Microscopist and to the Biologist, 
320. 

Will, L., Development of Aphides, 573. 

Wille’s (N.) Contributions to Algology, 
626. 

Willem, Y., Creeping Movements 
Gastropods], 718. 

Willfarth, —., and Helriegel, —., Absorp- 
tion of Nitrogen by Plants, 770. 

Williams, G. H., Bausch and Lomb Optical 
Co.’s Petrographical Microscope, 279. 

Williamson, W. C., Anomalous Cells in the 
Interior of the Tissue of Fossil Plants, 
605. 

Willot, —., Heterodera Schachtii, 953. 


[in 


|; Wilson, E. B., Germ-bands of Lumbricus, 


38. 

, Preparing Moulds, 150. 

—, H. V., Development of Mancinia 
areolata, 434. 

Wine from Barley, Saccharomyces ellip- 
soideus and its Use in the Preparation 
of, 785. 

Winged Fruits and Seeds, motion of 
rotating, 612. 

Winkler, W., Anatomy of Gamaside, 729. 

Winogradsky, §., Iron-bacteria, 786. 


1122 


Wisselingh, C. v., Wall of Suberous Cells, 
985. 

Witt, O., and A. Truan, Photomicrographs 
of Diatoms, 295. 

Wojnoff, K., Some remarks on fixing micro- 
scopical sections to the slide, 853. 

Wolle’s (F.) Fresh-water Algae of the 
United States, 94. 

Wood, Conduction of Sap through the 
Secondary, 768. 

, Formation of Annual Rings in, 75. 

, Structure, represented in photomicro- 
graphs, Atlas of, 651. 

Wood, J. G., The Boy’s Modern Playmate, 
305. 

Woodhead, G. §., Method of preparation of 
large sections of the Lung, 834. 

, Preparing large Sections of Lung, 
1043. 

Woodworth, W. M., Apical Cell of Fucus, 
621. 

Woody Plants, Glucose as a Reserve- 
material in, 984. 

Tissue, &c., Staining, 675. 

Worms, New Remarkable, 428. 

Wortmann, J., Movements of Irritation, 
259, 615. 

Wothschall, E., Micro-chemical reactions 
of Solanin, 1060. 

Wray, R. S., Methods of studying typical 
Bird’s Feather, 314. 

Wright, R. R., and A. B. Macallum, 
Methods of studying Sphyranura, 149. 

, Sphyranura osleri, 47. 

Wurster, C., Congo-red as a Reagent for 
Free Acid, 1055. 

Wurtz, —., and Straus, —., Improved 
method for the Bacteriological Examina- 
tion of Air, 854. 


Pe 


Xeresis conjunctive, &c., Spore-formation 
in the Bacilli of, 1016. 

Xylem, Split, in Clematis, 248. 

Xyridez, Roots and Rootlets in, 251. 


x 


Yeast-preparations, Stained, 156. 
Yolk, Physics of, 923. 


Z. 


Zabriskie, J. L., Continuous Centering of | 


a Cover-glass, 850. 
Zacharias, E., Demonstrating Nuclein and 
Plastin, 505. 


Cell, 440, 979. 


cephala, 43, 148. 


; Division of the Nucleus and of the | 
| Zwaardemaker, H., Accessory to the Cam- 
Fertilization of Ascaris megalo- | 


INDEX. 


Zacharias, E., Method of Preparing the 
Eggs of Ascaris megalocephala, 663. 

. Part taken by the Nucleus in Cell- 
division, 69. 

——,, Psorospermium Haeckelii, 240. 

——, O., Distribution by Birds, 930. 

, of Arachnida, 215. 

Zagari, G., The culture of Anaerobic micro- 
organisms, 831. 

Zannichellia palustris, Pollination in, 256. 

Zecli, P., Elementary treatment of lens- 
systems, 501. 

Zeiss, C., 1034. 

, “Compensation Eye-piece 6 with 

1/1 Micron-division,” 797. 

Tris Diaphragm, 111. 

— Ila. Microscope, 637, 794. 

—, The New Apochromatie Micro- 
objectives and Compensating Oculars of, 
1025. 

(R.) Photomicrographs, 525 

Zelinka, C., Parasitic Rotifer, Discopus 
Synapte, 52. 

Zeller, E., Generative Apparatus of 
Diplozoon paradoxum, 427. 

Zentmayer, J., Obituary of, 655. 

Ziegler, H. E., Origin of Blood in Teleostei, 
192. 

, The technique of the histological 
investigation of pathologico-anatomical 
preparations, 166. 

Ziemacki, J., 320. 

Zimmerman, A., Demonstrating the Mem- 
brane of the Bordered Pits in Conifers, 
155, 315. 

, Morphology and Physiology of the 

Cell, 442. 

Staining Leucoplasts, Protein- 
granules, Bordered Pit Membranes, aud 
Woody Tissue, 675. 

— , Zeiss’ Iris Diaphragm, 111. 

, E., and G. Baltzar, Microtome with 
fixed knife and automatic movement of 
the object, 842, 1049 

Zirconium Light for Photomicrography, 
1033. 

Zonary Decidua in Mouse, Vestiges of, 186. 

Zopf, W, Chytridiacea parasitic on 
Diatoms, 99. 

—,, Cultivation of Phycomycetes, 469. 

— , Fibrosin, a new cell-content, 246. 

— , Haplococeus reticulatus, 782. 

, Isolating Lower Alge, 511. 

Zukal, H., Asci of Penicillium crustaceum, 
271. 

Zune, A., Course of medical and pharma- 
ceutical microscopy, 166, 686. 


bridge Rocking Microtome, 669. 


| Zygospores of Conjugate, 1002. 


LONDON: PRINTED BY WILLIAM CLOWES AND SONS, LIMITED, 
STAMFORD STREET AND CHARING CROs. 


Supplementary Number, containing: Index, &c. 


j Gratis with 


1888. Part Ga. | DECEMBER. No ev. 


JOURNAL 


ROYAL 
MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY: 


CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS, 


AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO 


Zoo LntoGeyY AND BOTAN DW 
(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), ; 
MICROSCOPY, &&c. 


Edited by 


FRANK CRISP, LL.B., B.A., 
One of the Secretaries of the Society 
and a Vice-President and Treasurer of the Linnean Society of London 3 


WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND 


A. W. BENNETT, MLA., BSc, F.LS., ~- — F. JEFFREY BELL, M.A, F.Z.S., 
_ Lecturer on Botany at St. Thomas's Hospital, Professor of Comparative Anatomy in King’s College. 
JOHN MAYALL, JUN, » E.ZS., R. G. HEBB, M.A., M.D. (Canzaé.), 
AND z 


J. ARTHUR. THOMSON, W.A,, 
Lecturer on Zoology tn the School of Medicine, E dinburohe 


FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY, 


WILLIAMS & NORGATE. ~~ 


= se LONDON AND EDINBURGH, Ea 


_ Owanrer — 


x 
ec 
- 
~ 


x Tirux-Paces. : 
Contents — 


Byz-Laws 


Ring oe 
eo 


1888. 


Part 


nhs a 


eae 


was 
6a. 
Oa. 


THE 


ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY. 
(Founded in 1839. Incorporated by Royal Charter in 1866.) 


The Society was established for the communication and discussion 
of observations and discoveries (1) tending to improvements in the con- 
struction and mode of application of the Microscope, or (2) relating to — 
Biological or other subjects of Microscopical Research. é 

It consists of Ordinary, Honorary, and Ex-Officio Fellows. 

Ordinary Fellows are elected on a Certificate of Recommendation 
signed by three Fellows, stating the names, residence, description, &c., of — 
the Candidate, of whom one of the proposers must have personal know- 


ledge. The Certificate is read at a Monthly Meeting, and the Candidate | | 


balloted for at the succeeding Meeting. 

The Annual Subscription is 2/. 2s., payable in advance on election, 
and subsequently on 1st January annually, with an entrance Fee of 2/, 2s, 
Future payments of the former may be compounded for at any time for 
311. 10s. Fellows elected at a meeting subsequent to that in February are 
only called upon for a proportionate part of the first year’s subscription, 
and Fellows absent from the United Kingdom for a year, or permanently re- 
siding abroad, are exempt from one-fourth of the subscription during absence. ~ 

Honorary Fellows (limited to 50), consisting of persons eminent 
in Microscopical or Biological Science, are elected on the Recommendation 
of three Fellows and the approval of the Council. . 

Ex-officio Fellows (limited to 100) consist of the Presidents for 
the time being of such Societies at home and abroad as the Council may — 
recommend and a Monthly Meeting approve. They are entitled to receive 
the Society’s Publications, and to exercise all other privileges of Fellows, 
except voting, but are not required to pay any entrance Fee or Annual 
Subscription. 

The Council, in whom the management of the affairs of the Society 
is vested, is elected annually, and is composed of the President, four Vice- ~ 
Presidents, Treasurer, two Secretaries, and twelve other Fellows. 


The Meetings are held on the Second Wednesday in each month, 
from October to June, in the Society’s Library at King’s College, Strand, — 
W.C. (commencing at 8 p.m.). Visitors are admitted by the introduction of 
Fellows. 

In each Session two additional evenings are deyoted to the exhibition 
of Instruments, Apparatus, and Objects of novelty or interest relating to 
the Microscope or the subjects of Microscopical Research. 

The Journal, containing the Transactions and Proceedings of the 
Society, with a Summary of Current Researches relating to Zoology and 
Botany (principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia), Microscopy, &c., is 
published bi-monthly, and is forwarded post-free to all Ordinary and 
Ex-officio Fellows residing in countries within the Postal Union. So eas 

The Library, with the Instruments, Apparatus, and Cabinet of — 
Objects, is open for the use of Fellows daily (except Saturdays), from 10 — 
aM. to 5 p.m., and on Wednesdays from 6 to 9 p.m. also. It is closed 
for four weeks during August and September. eee 

Forms of proposal for Fellowship, and any further information, may be obtained by — 


application to the Secretaries, or Assistant-Secretary, at the Library of the Society, King’s cf 


College, Strand, W.C. 4 


4 


& 

wr 

Oat, 
i 


Pe £5 


CTT 
3 5185 00266 77/96 


2 


= 
24 G& 4